BNBC 1993

BANG � DE§H
NATliONAJL
BillJLDliNG
CODE
All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced,
st or e d in retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without permission of the copyright holder. .
First Edition Published 1993
Pub/is/zed by
Housing and Building Research Institute
Darus-Salam, Mirpur, Dhaka 1218
an d
Bangladesh Standards and Testing Institution
116/ A Tejgaon Industrial Areil, Dhaka 1208
ISBN 984-30-0086-2
Price : Tk 750.00
US$ 25.00
Typeseriri 9 pt Palatino by Development Design Consultants Limited

®
The figures have been drafted in AutoCAD by Development Design Consultants Limited
·Printed jn.Bangladesh by City Art Press Ltd, Dhaka
Wri:tten suggestions for update/revisions may please be addressed to :

Member Secretary
Bangladesh National Building Code Cell
Dilrus-Salam, Mirpur
Dhaka 1218, Bangladesh
BANGLADESH NATIONAL
BUILDING CODE
1993
.LJr.H:ri Housing and Building Research Institute
£ Bangladesh Standards and· ·Testing Institution

PREFACE
Buildings, be it for housing, industry, document ECNEC approved the project. The
education, health care or any other use, Steering Committee prepared detail terms
constitute the major part of construction for of reference for consultancy services leading
physical infrastructure development of the to preparation of the drafts of the code and
country. A substantial portion of national selected a local c o nsulting house,
resource is invested in building construction Development Design Consultants Limited,
in both public and private sectors. In order for the job. The consultants started their
to ensure optimum return of this investment work on June 1, 1992, and organized a multi
and to achieve satisfactory performance of disciplinary team of experts including in it
the building in terms of safety, architects, engineers, planners, scientists,
serviceability, health, sanitation and research workers from university faculties
general welfare of the people, building and ·other professional practitioners.
construction needs to be controlled and
regulated. Legislative measure for such The Steering Committee took on itself the
control has been taken in the Building responsibility of the editorial board.
Construction Act of 1952 and other relevant Although initially an eleven member
acts, ordinances and regulations. In urban Steering Committee was formed, it was
and m u nicipal areas, local and later expanded to fourteen members to
development authority rules supplement ensure representation of all major
the Building Construction Act and the disciplines to be addressed in the code. To
regulations promulgated by the government assist the Steering Committee in giving its
under the provision of this Act. Some comments, observations and suggestions to
development and construction agencies of the consultant at various stages of
the government have their own rules and preparation of the code, sixteen editorial
established practices. However, these subcommittees were formed for different
regulations, ordinances, rules and practices topics of the code. The editorial
are not comprehensive and need updating, subcommittees comprised sixty experts in
rationalization and unification. It is relevant disciplines.
imperative that a uniform standard of
practice covering all aspects of planning, The preparation of the code was divided
design and construction of buildings, into five stages - inception report, interim
including electrical, mechanical, sanitary report, preliminary draft code, draft code
and other services, be followed in the and final draft code. Codes of the
country. Such a standard can be provided by neighbouring countries and those of some of
a comprehensive building code appropriate the westerh countries were thoroughly
to the needs of the country. Prompted by reviewed, and considered together with the
this necessity, an inter-ministerial meeting state-of-the-art technology. These were
was convened by the Member, Physical examined in relation to the needs and
Infrastructure, Planning Commission on June practices of the country, paying special
18, 1991, and a Steering Committee was attentio n to the uniqueness of the
formed. The Steering Committee was given prevailing social and economic conditions,
the task of preparing the code in its t e c h n o l o g i ca l capabil i t i e s , and
entirety, starting from drawing up the environmental, meteorological, geological
project proposal to the final publication of and o t her related phenomena of
the code. Bangladesh. The structure and content of
the Bangladesh National Building Code
The Steering Committee took the decision were chosen keeping in view all these
to use local expertise and internal resources aspects. Meteorological data of many years
rather than depending on foreign expertise regarding wi n d speed, r a infall,
or fund. Accordingly, a project proposal was temperature and humidity were collected
placed before the Executive Committee of and analysed to arrive at the specifications
the National Economic Council (ECNEC) by regarding these aspects affecting planning
the Steering Committee on December 14, and design of buildings. Earthquake data of
1991. Appreciating the importance of the • the region for hundreds of years were
collected and analysed in relation with the of building construction and services with
geological and geotectonic characteristics of cross references as necessary. Part 1 gives a
the country. A seismic zoning map of general introduction to the code and lists
Bangladesh together with the seismic the definitions and abbreviations of general
design provision was thus drawn up. terms used in the code. Part 2 outlines the
administrative requirements necessary for
In order to ensure wide participation by and enforcement of the code. It should be borne
interaction with the vast number of in mind that enforcement of the code is a
professionals involved in the building continuous activity and requires a standing
construction field across the country, a three administrative structure for various
day workshop was held at the Institution jurisdictions in the country. Considering the
of Engineers premises at Dhaka in May difficulty of maintai n ing adequate
1993, following submission of the technical perso nnel for enforcing and
preliminary draft code by the consultant. verifying compliance with diverse
The workshop was organized into sixteen provision of the code, a professional
sessions of related disciplines and covered practice-based certification, enforcement
some fifty-seven hours of presentation, and administration structure has been
analysis and discussion. Some 185 prescribed.
professionals representing 125 organizations
were invited to participate in the General planning and architectural
workshop. These organizations included requirements of buildings, based on
professional societies, technological and classifica tions in accordance with
general universities, all the Institutes of occupancy and fire resistance, are specified
Technology, various government agencies in Part 3. The specifications cover
and sector corporations, city development requirements within the premises of the
authorities, selected municipal building plot for all categories of buildings.
organizations, research organizations, As the area planning requirements involve
consulting firms, construction firms, parameters not within the control of
producers and suppliers of building individual building developer and· are _ _ .
materials, non-government organizations matters of interest to government planners,

involved in development projects, these are not included in the building code.
federation of chambers of commerce and The requirements have been set keeping in
industry, the legal profession, and view the tropical climate of the country
concerned government ministries. and the local architectural practices and
tradition. In setting the minimum
Another joint workshop of the Steering requirements for various types of buildings,
Committee and the editorial subcommittees the urgent need of providing accommodation
was held on June 12, 1993, to ensure that to the lower income majority of the
comments, observations and suggestions population was given due consideration. A
received. during the May workshop were separate occupancy class has been
being properly incorporated in the recommended for such housing, for which
subsequent drafts of the code. A review lower minimum standards for various
meeting was also held at the Planning parameters of planning and design have
Commission on August 24, 1993, after been specified. These lower requirements
submission of the draft code by the will, however, be applicable only for
consultant. The meeting was attended by designated mass housing projects for the
officials of the concerned departments and lower income people.
chaired by the honourable Minister for
Planning. Following submission of the final Arrangement for safety from fire in
.. draft by the consultant, a meeting of the buildings is of paramount importance,
Steering Committee was held on December particularly in built up or city areas. Part 4
28, 1993, where the building code was specifies the requirements for fire
approved for publication. prevention and protectio n measures in
buildings. The measures are divided into
This document, the l3.angladesh National three categories - precautionary measure
Building Code, has been prepared in ten to prevent or arrest propagation of fire in
distinct parts comprising different aspects buildings, provision of life saving means of
ll
escape from the building in the event of of years for the north-eastern region of the
fire, and provision of in-built fire fighting subcontinent were also collected from
arrangements within b u il d i n g s . reliable sources. These data were
Requirements for each o f these types of statistically analysed for various return
protective measures are specified in this periods and duly considered together with
part of the code. These are followed by the local natural features. The exercise
specific requirements for fire protection of resulted in the preparation of the first
various occupancy classes of buildings. The design wind speed map of Bangladesh and a
fire protection requirements of the code are revised seismic zoning map. These and the
based on the principle of providing methods of and requirements for calculation
reasonable protection within achievable of various loads acting on the building,
means. including those due to wind and
earthquake, are specified in this part of
Part 5 sets the standards of materials to be the code. The special requirements for
used in building construction. Materials earthquake resistant design and detailing
covered include all types of common of buildings made of masonry, concrete and
construction materials as well as some steel are also specified. Ferrocement has
indigenous building materials of the emerged in the recent years as a promising
country. The requirements for materials alternative to common and traditional
provided in the building code are based on materials and is a strong and durable
specifications of established standards building material for low cost construction.
issued by standards agencies. The agency The material has been given formal
responsible for issuing standards and treatment in the code and specifications for
·- ensuring compliance with these standards design of buildings tpade of ferroeement
in Bangladesh is the Bangladesh have been incorporated.�·· ::.. >..:.: : .. ··: ..
. . ..
.. . . .
· S�andards· and ._;.Testing ·Institution. bi .. -Z;,;............
• · ;_: ·general,·· the building code speciffes Construction indus.tFy in Banglfttiesh -iS'
compliance. with·· relevant Bangladesh· highly labour intensive and fhe success of a
standards. Where Bangladesh standards proj ect fies to a _great extent on proper site
are not available or are inadequate, the management and construction practiCes.
most applicable and widely used standards Ensuring safety of life during construction
of other countries for the relevant materials and minimization of construction hazards
have been specified. These will be replaced are the concern of Part 7. Constructional
as more and more Bangladesh standards are responsibilities regarding planning and
available. control of the construction as well as the
protection of public, workers and property
Requirements governing structural design are specified in this part. The minimum
that ensure safety and serviceability of requirements of on-site welfare measure for
buildings are specified in Part 6. The. health and sanitation of the workers are
specifications cover the design of buildings also speci fied. The speci fications
in various structural materials- masonry, additionally provide for the safe and
reinforced and prestressed concrete, steel, scientific demolition of buildings, where
timber and ferrocement. The requirements necessary.
for design of building foundations on various
kinds of soil are also specified. Structural A building requires various services
design is influenced by the loads that are electrical, mechanical, acoustic, sanitary,
put on the building both by the occupancy water s u p p ly, gas supp l y . Th e
and by the forces of nature. Natural forces specifications of Part 8 set standards of
are purely a local phenomenon and have minimum requirements for the various
been worked out after a thorough study of services required for proper functioning of
the pertinent conditions of meteorology, the building. It should be noted that not all
geology and other features of the country. the services provided for in the code are
Data of many years for the cyclonic wind of essential requirements of a building, but the
the coastal region as well as the extreme services when installed should satisfy the
wind data of other regions were collected requirements of Part 8. The actual
from the Meteorological Department and requirements of services for specific
· other sources. Earthquake data of hundreds occupancy types are prescribed in Part 3.
lll
It is comm on in this country to subject a authorities responsible for enforcing the
building subsequent to its commissioning to a Building Construction Act, and regulations
use different from the one for which it was framed under this Act, for development of
designed and constructed. Alterations in the buildings in various urban, municipal and
building plan and design by way of rural areas may ·adopt the code or its
renovation and modification are also portions for application to their respective
common. Part 9 specifies the requirements ju r i s d i c t i o n s . The ad min i s t r a t i v e
for alteration of, addition to and change of requirements of the code will guide these
use of existing buildings and has been authorities in enforcing the provisions of
incorporated out of a concern for continued the ·code. The government may subsequently
safety and serviceability of buildings establish a department responsible for
subjected to such changes. Special application of the provisions of the code.
requirements and waivers for alteration and
renovation of buildings of historical and Technology is a dynamic field with
architectural value have been specified in continuous advancement and innovations, so
this and other parts of the code. These is a building code. The code will require
special provisions have been incorporated continuous update and periodic revisions to
with a view to preserving the cultural keep pace with developing technology and
heritage of the country. needs of the changing time. After the
National Building Code has been used and
Signs and hoarding are often posted on tested in the field, many issues will have
buildings for advertisement, identification the opportunity to be judged in practice and
and communication purposes. Unregulated the need for rev1s10n of specific
posting of signs may hinder the aesthetics requirements will be felt. Update and
of the locality, cause concern for safety of revisions of the code will have to become a
the public, hurt religious or moral feelings routine affair eventually. However, it is
or be objectionable in many other ways. Part envisaged that for the second edition of the
10 provides minimum standards of design, code, which is expected to be issued within
location, construction and maintenance of the next five years, continuous monitoring
signs and outdoor display structures. These by a standing committee will be necessary.
standards aim at safeguarding life, health, To this aim, a cell will function within the
property and public welfare as may be Housing and Building Research Institute,
affected by the erection of signs. the organization responsible for publication
of this edition of the code. The cell will
It may be mentioned here that the Building receive observations by and suggestions from
Code is not an independent legislation or the professionals who will apply the code
act, rather it is a national level approved in practice. These observations and
document that shall form the basis for suggestions will be examined by panels of
standard of design, construction and experts for incorporation in the subsequent
maintenance of buildings. It has been edition of the code.
prepared in the light of internationally
recognized standards of safety- and It is hoped that publication of the long
serviceability achievable by application of awaited Bangladesh National Building
state-of-the-art technology within the Code will usher in a new era and will be
socio-economic context of Bangladesh. treated as a milestone in the building
Through adherence to the various construction industry of the country. The
requirements of the code, private and public success of the code will, however, lie in its
builders and individual owners will be able proper implementation and adherence to its
to ensure a minimum and uniform standard provision by builders and professionals at
of buildings in the country. The government large.
iv
Steering Committee
Convener
Shah Alam Zahiruddin

Chief Architect
Department of Architecture, Ministry of Works
Government of Bangladesh
Members
Representing Name & Address
Institution of Engineers (Bangladesh) Dr Musharrif Hossain Khan

Member
University Grants Commission, Dhaka
Kazi Aminur Rahman

Atlanta Enterprise
Kazi Bhaban (2nd Floor)
39, New Elephant Road, Dhaka
Mohammed Naseem
Executive Engineer
Electrical/Mechanical Division
Public Works Department, Dhaka
Institute of Architects, Bangladesh Sharnsul Wares (from February 1993)

Associate Professor
Department of Architecture
Bangladesh University of Engineering and Technology, Dhaka
Yeafesh Osman (from March 1992 to January 1993)

Managing Director
Prakalpa Upadeshta Limited
House 44, Road 5
Dhanmondi R/ A, Dhaka
Rabiul Hossain (till February 1992)

Director
Shahidullah and Associates Ltd
139 I A, Jahanara Garden, Green Road, Dhaka
Personal Capacity Dr Jamilur Reza Choudhury

Professor
Department of Civil Engineering
Rajdhani Unnayan Kartripakkha Mohammad Shahjahan

Chief Engineer
Rajdhani Unnayan Kartripakkha, Dhaka
Fire Service and Civil Defence Directorate M Anowar Hossain

Deputy Director (Planning & Training)
Fire Service and Civil Defence Department, Dhaka
Personal Capacity AHM Matiur Rahman

Executive Engineer, Design
v
Steering Committee (Continued)
Bangladesh Standards and Testing Institution Md Nurul Islam (from January 1993)
Deputy Director
Bangladesh Standards and Testing Institution, Dhaka
Mahedi Akhtar Rana (till December 1992)

Assistant Director (Civil)
Ministry of Works AKM Abu! Basher (from April 1992)

Assistant Chief, Planning
Ministry of Works
Government of Bangladesh, Dhaka
Md Nure Alam (till March 1992)

Superintending Engineer
Geological Survey of Bangladesh Anisur Rahman

Director
Geological Survey of Bangladesh, Dhaka
Military Engineering Services Muhammad Lutfar Rahman

S.E. SO-l (Planning), E-in-C's Branch
Army Headquarters, Dhaka
Member Secretary
AKM Khorshed Alam

Director
Housing & Building Research Institute
Darus-Salam, Mirpur, Dhaka
Associate Members
Department of Architecture, Ministry of Works ASM Ismail

Assistant Chief Architect
Housing & Building Research Institute Mainuddin Ahmed

Senior Research Engineer
Md Salim Ullah
Senior Research Architect
Ranjit Kumar Roy

Senior Research Engineer
Md Abdus Salam
Research Engineer
Md Abdul Matin Shikder (till December 1992)

Research Engineer
Kazi Nurul Alam (till January 1993)

Research Architect
vi
Editorial Subcommittees
Part 1 and 2: Scope and Definitions, Administration and Enforcement
Convener
AHNA Chowdhury Ex-Joint Secretary (Dev), Ministry of Works

Dhaka
Members
Anwarul Alam Ex-Chairman, RajdhaniUnnayan Kartripakkha

Dhaka
Md Abdul Matin Chowdhury Additional Chief Architect

Department of Architecture, Government of Bangladesh
Dhaka
Meer Mobashsher Ali Professor

BangladeshUniversity of Engineering and Technology, Dhaka
Md Shamsul Haque Law Officer, Ministry of Works

Government of Bangladesh, Dhaka
Part 3 and 10 :General Building Requirements, Control and Regulation; Signs and
Outdoor Display
Convener
Khadem Ali Architectural Consultant

Banani, Dhaka
Members
Bashirul Hoque 35 B/2, Indira Road

Dhaka 1215
Zakir Hossain Town Planner

RajdhaniUnnayan Kartripakkha, Dhaka
HaroonUr Rashid Architect Planner

House 6, Road 5
Dhanmondi R/ A, Dhaka
Part 4 : Fire Protection
Convener
SM Karim Baksh Ex-Director, Fire Service and Civil Defence

Dhaka
Members
Dr NizamUddin Ahmed Associate Professor

BangladeshUniversity of Engineering and Technology, Dhaka
vii
Editorial Subcommittees (Continued)
MMohsinAli Chief Engineer

Dhaka Sheraton Hotel
1 Minto Road, Dhaka
Md Mohiul Islam Choudhury Assistant Director

Fire Service and Civil Defence, Tangail
MamunAhmed Executive Engineer, SO-II (Technical)

Army Headquarters, E-in-C's Branch
Dhaka Cantonment, Dhaka
Part 5: (a) Building Materials (Masonry, Steel, Cement, Concrete)
Convener
Dr Sharnim Z Bosunia Professor

Meml1ers
AQM Shahidullah Senior Research Officer

Housing and Building Research Institute,
Mirpur, Dhaka
AMazid Shikder Sub-divisional Engineer

KM Akram Hossain Senior Examiner (Engg)

Part 5: (b) Building Materials (Timber, Wood Products, Flooring, Aluminium)
Convener
Dr Omar Ali Ex-Director, Forest Research Institute

Dhaka
Members
MHKhan Chief Engineer

Public Works Department
Dhaka
RafiqMujtaba Director, Engineering

Bangladesh ThaiAluminium
Dhaka
Part 6: (a) Structural Design (General Design Requirements, Loads, Masonry and
Timber Structures)
Convener
Dr K Harunar Rashid Director

Shahidullah andAssociates Ltd
Dhaka
viii
Members
Md Aminur Rahman Consulting Engineer

"Anannya", Flat 7
Dipayan Housing Complex
Banani, Dhaka
Morshed Uddin Superintending Engineer, PPC

Dhaka
Ranjit Kumar Roy Senior Research Engineer

Housing and Building Research Institute, Dhaka
Part 6: (b) Structural Design (Foundation)
Convener
NurulAmin Managing Director

Foundation Consultants Ltd
13/2 Toynbee Circular Road
Motijheel Commercial Area, Dhaka
Members
Dr Syed Fakhrul Ameen Associate Professor

Mosleh Uddin Ahmed Managing Director

Eastern Boring and Construction Co Ltd
24 Shaheed Minar Road
Kalyanpur, Dhaka
Part 6: (c) Structural Design (Concrete Material, RC Design USD/WSD, Detailing

of RC Structures, Ferrocement Structures)
Convener
Shaikh Muzibur Rahman Superintending Engineer

Design Circle 1, Dhaka
Atembers
Dr Sohrabuddin Ahmad Professor
Dr Shamim Z Bosunia Professor

Dr K Harunar Rashid Director

Shahidullah and Associates Ltd
Dhaka
ix
MdShaw katAliSiddique Superintending Engineer

Design Circle 2, Dhaka
Part 6: (d) Structural Design (Prestressed Concrete)

Convener
MA Mannan Managing Director

Allied Engineers EnterpriseLtd
371, Outer CircularRoad
Rajarbag, Dhaka
Members
Syed MatinurRashid Secretary, Council of BIT

Dhanmondi ResidentialArea, Dhaka
MainuddinAhmed Senior Research Engineer

Mirpur, Dhaka
MASobhan Managing Director

DPM ConsultantsLtd
Dhaka
Part 6: (e) Structural Design (Steel Structures)
Convener
DrRA G hani Managing Director

GANIBANGLALimited
Consulting Engineers
Dhanmondi, Dhaka
Member
Shafiqur Rahman Director

Design III
Power Development Board, Dhaka
Part 7: Construction Practices and Safety
Convener
Sk HashmatAli Ex-Chief Engineer

Members
ReazuddinAhmed Ex-Chief Engineer

Housing andSettlement Directorate, Dhaka
Delwar H Chowdhury Superintending Engineer

Dhaka PWD Circle II
Dhaka
X
Emdad ul Islam Executive Engineer

Raj dhani Unnayan Kartripakkha
Dhaka
SM Kamaluddin Chairman
Concord Construction and Engineering Ltd
Dhaka
Part 8 : (a) Building Services (Lighting and Electrical Installation)
Convener
Dr Saiful Islam Professor

Department of Electrical and Electronic Engineering
Members
AKM Kamruzzaman Technological Services Ltd

Lalmatia, Dhaka
Mesbahuddin Ahmed Superintending Engineer

Electrical/ Mechanical
Md Hamidur Rahman Assistant Professor

Department of Electrical and Electronic Engineering
Part 8 : (b) Building Services (HVAC, Lifts and Escalators)
Convener
Dr Musharrif Hossain Khan Member

University Grants Commission
Dhaka
Members
Haroon Ferdousi Bengal Development Corporation

Dhaka
AnisAhmed Consulting Engineer

Green Road, Dhaka
Manash Kumar Mitra Director

AVE Engineers & Consultants Ltd
Dhaka
Part 8 : (c) Building Services (Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control)
Convener
ASMismail Assistant ChiefArchitect

Department ofArchitecture, Government of Bangladesh
Dhaka
xi
Members
Dr M A Muktadir Professor
Khulna University, Khulna
Zahidur Rahim Joardar Managing Director

Knight Electronics
Dhaka
Part 8 (d) Building Services (Water Supply, Drainage and Sanitation, Gas
Supply)
Convener
Dr M Feroze Ahmed Professor

Members
Dr Mujibur Rahman Associate Professor

MAHannan Professor and Director

Bangladesh Institute of Technology
Khulna
ABM Fazle Elahi General Manager (Project)

Brahmaputra Basin T&D Project
Shyamoli, Dhaka
Part 9 : Alteration, Addition to and Change of Use of Existing Buildings
Convener
Mohibur Rahman Chief Engineer

Housing and Settlement Directorate, Dhaka
Members
Dr Sharnim Z Bosunia Professor

Mohiuddin Khan Managing Director

Sthapati Sangsad Ltd
Dhaka
xu
Consultants
Development Design Consultants Ltd

23 New Eskaton Road, Dhaka
Team Leader Dr M Azadur Rahman

Professor
Department of Civil Engineering .
Team Members
Dr Alamgir Mojibul Hoque Professor, Department of Civil Engineering

ASM Abdul Hamid Director, Structural Design Section

Development Design Consultants Ltd, Dhaka
Dr Jalal Uddin Khandoker Chief Structural Engineer

Dr Md Shafiul Bari Assistant Professor, Department of Civil Engineering

Dr Md Habibur Rahman Assistant Professor, Department of Civil Engineering

Belal Ahmad Associate Professor, Department of Mechanical Engineering

Dr Md Mahbubur Rahman Assistant Professor, Department of Architecture

Dr AKMA Quader Professor, Department of Chemical Engineering

Bangladesh University of Engineering and Tecnnology, Dhaka
Khairul Enam Professor, Department of Architecture

M A Mannan Mana�ing Partner

Assoctated Structural Engineers and Architects, Dhaka
Dr AMM Safiullah Professor, Department of Civil Engineering

Dr Md Hossain Ali Professor, Department of Civil Engineering

Dr Md Shahidul Ameen Associate Professor, Department of Architecture

Dr Md Mujibur Rahman Professor, Department of Electrical and Electronic Engineering

Dr Mir Shahidul Islam Professor, Department of Urban and Regional Planning

Gulam Mohammad Senior Structural Engineer

xiii
Consultants (Continued)
Moynul Huq Senior Engineer (Civil)

AJM Alamgir Senior Engineer

AHM Haider Azam Technical Director

· Mesbahuddin Ahmed Ex-Director General

Geological Survey of Bangladesh, Dhaka
Saleh Mostafa Kamal Managing Director

Plannmg and Development Services (BD) Ltd, Dhaka
Syed Ijjad Ali Technical Director

Shamsul Huq Akhand Ex-Director

Housing and Building Research Institute, Dhaka
Team Leader's Editorial Cell
Dr Mohammad Ali Senior Geotechnical Engineer

Sayeed Ahmed Senior Engineer

Chowdhury A Mayeen Director

Sarowar Hossain Structural Engineer · ·
xiv
Summary Table of Contents
XV
Preface
Steering Committee
Editorial Subcommittees
Consultants
PART I SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS
Page1-1 to1-10
Chapter1 Title, Scope and General
Chapter2 Definitions
Chapter3 Abbreviations
PART2 ADMINISTRATION AND ENFORCEMENT
Page2-1 to2-20
Chapter 1 Purpose and Scope
Chapter2 Organization and Enforcement
Chapter3 Permits and Inspections
Appendices
PART3 GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTROL AND REGULATION
Page3-1 to 3-64
Chapter1 General Building Requirements
Chapter2 Classification of Buildings Based on Occupancy
Chapter3 Classification of Building Construction Types Based on Fire Resistance
Appendices
PART4 FIRE PROTECTION
Page 4-1 to4 -66

Chapter1 General Provisions
Chapter2 Precautionary Requirements
Chapter3 Means of Escape
Chapter4 Equipment and In- built Facilities
Chapter 5 Specific Requirements for Various Occupancies
Appendices
PARTS BUILDING MATERIALS
Page 5-1 to 5-42

Chapter 1 Scope and Definitions
Chapter2 Materials
PART6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN
· Page6-1 to6-384
Chapter 1 General Design Requirements
Chapter2 Loads
Chapter3 Foundation
xvi
Summary Table of Contents (Continued)
Chapter4 Masonry Structures

ChapterS Concrete Material
Chapter6 Ultimate Strength Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures
Chapter7 Working Stress Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures
ChapterS Detailing of Reinforced Concrete Structures
Chapter9 Prestressed Concrete Structures
Chapter10 Steel Structures
Chapter11 Timber Structures
Chapter12 Ferrocement Structures
Appendices
PART7 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES AND SAFETY
Page7-1 to7-40
Chapter1 Constructional Responsibilities and Practices
Chapter2 Storage, Stacking and Handling Practices
Chapter3 Safety During Construction
Chapter4 Demolition Work
PARTS BUILDING SERVICES
PageS1
- toS2
- 20
Chapter1 Lighting
Chapter2 Electrical Installation
Chapter3 Air- conditioning, Heating and Ventilation
Chapter4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control
ChapterS Lifts, Escalators and Moving Walks
Chapter6 Water Supply
Chapter7 Drainage and Sanitation
ChapterS Fuel Gas Supply
Appendices
PART9 ALTERATION, ADDITION TO AND CHANGE OF USE OF EXISTING BUILDINGS
Page 9-1 to9-4

Chapter1 Applicability and Implementation
Chapter2 Evaluation and Compliance
PART 10 SIGNS AND OUTDOOR OISPLAY
Page101
- to10-16
Chapter1 Scope and General
Chapter2 General Requirements
Chapter3 Specific Requirements for Various Types of Sign
Appendices
LIST OF PARTICIPANTS OF THE WORKSHOP ON BNBC
Appended at the end
xvii
Part 1
SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS
ClhlrnJP1eir ll
Title, Scope and General
C�a.alJP1er Z
Definitions
Clhl�]pteJr :�
Abbreviations
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARTl SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS
Chapter 1 Title, Scope and General
1.1 TITLE 1-1
1.2 PURPOSE 1-1
1.3 SCOPE 1-1
1.4 EXISTING BUILDINGS 1-2
1.4.1 Addition and Alteration 1-2
1.4.2 Change of Use 1-2
1.5 HISTORIC AND ARCHITECTURALLY VALUABLE BUILDINGS 1-2
Chapter 2 Definitions
2.1 GENERAL 1-3
2.2 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS 1-3
Chapter 3 Abbreviations
3.1 ABBREVIATIONS OF NAMES 1-7
3.2 ABBREVIATIONS OF WORDS 1-8
1-i
r
CHAPTER l]
Title, Scope and General
1.1 TITLE
The provisions and regulations contained in this document shall constitute and be collectively known and
may be cited as the "Bangladesh National Building Code", abbreviated, where desired, as BNBC, and will
hereinafter be referred to as the "Code".
1.2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Code is to establish minimum standards for design, construction, quality of materials, use
and occupancy, location and maintenance of all buildings within Bangladesh in order to safeguard, within
achievable limits, life, limb, health, property and public welfare. The installation and use of certain
equipment, services and appurtenances re1ated, connected or attached to such buildings are also regulated
herem to achieve the same purpose.
The provisions of this Code are applicable to all persons of Bangladesh irrespective of class, creed, culture,
religiOn or sex. The Code does not many way create or otherwise establish or designate any particular class
or group of persons who will or should be specially protected or benefited by the provisions of this Code.
The expressed intent of this Code is to insure public safety, health and general welfare insofar as they are
affected by the construction, alteration, repair, removal, demolition, use or occupancy of buildings, structures
or premises, through structural strength, stability, means of egress, safety from fire and other hazards,
sanitation, light ancf ventilation.
1.3 SCOPE
The provisions of this Code shall apply to the design, construction, use or occupancy, alteration, moving,
demolition and repair of any building or structure and to any appurtenances installed therein or connected or
attached thereto, except such matters as are otherwise provided for in other ordinances and statutes
controlling and regulating buildings.
If for any case different sections of this Code provide different specifications for materials, methods of design
or construction, or other requirements, the most restrictive specification shall govern.
Part 1 1-1
Scope and Definitions
Part 1
In case of any conflict between a general requirement and a specific requirement, the specific requirement shall
be applicable.
Unless otherwise explicitl y stated in this Code, all references to part, chapter or section numbers or to
provisions not specifically Identified by number, shall be construed to refer to such part, chapter, section or
provision of this Code.
References made to a section without mentioning a part shall be construed to refer to that section of the part in
which the reference is made.
The provisions of any appendix in this Code shall not be mandatory unless they are referred to as such in any
section of the Code or tney are specifically adopted by any regulation.
Inspection conducted or permission granted for any building or plan of building, under the provisions of this
Coae, shall not be construed as a warranty of the physical condition of such building or the adequacy of such
J'lan. Neither the Authority administering the Code, nor any employee thereof shall be liab1e in tort for
damages for any defect or hazardous or illegal condition or inadequacy in such building or plan, nor for any
failure of any component of such building which may occur subsequent to such inspection or granting of
permission under tne provisions of the Code.
1.4 EXISTING BUILDINGS
Buildings which are in existence on the date of promulgation of this Code may have their use or occupancy
continued without undergoing any alteration, abandonment or removal unless m the opinion of the Authority
such continued use is hazardous to life and property and provided such use or occupancy was legal on the
date of promulgation of this Code.
1.4.1 Addition and Alteration

Additions, alterations, modifications or repair to an existing building may be made without requirin � the
existing building to comply with all the requirements of this Code, provided the additions, a]terahons,
modifications or rel'airs conform to that required for a new building. Such additions or alterations shall not
be permitted when the existing building is not in full compliance with the provisions of this Code except when
the addition or alteration will result in the existing building or structure being no more hazardous based on
life safety, fire safety and sanitation than it was before the addition or alteration was undertaken.
Any building together with the new additions shall not exceed the height, number of storeys and area
specified in this Code for new buildings having the relevant occupancy and type of construction. Non
structural alterations or repairs to an existing building or structure which do not adversely affect any
structural member, nor reduce the strength of any part of the building or structure to result man unsafe
condition shall be made with materials ana components having the required fire resistance.
·
1.4.2 Change of Use .
Change in use or occupancy in an existing building may be made when such change complies with the
requirements of this Coae for a new building and provided such change does not render any part or the whole
of the affected building or structure any more hazardous based on life safety, fire safety and sanitation than it
was before such change was effected.
1.5 HISTORIC OR ARCHITECTURALLY VALUABLE BUILDINGS
A building or structure which has been designated by official action as having special historical or
archaeological interest, or a building or structure identified by a legally constituted authority as being
. architecturally valuable, may be undertaken for repairs, alterations and additions necessary for its
preservation, restoration, rehabilitation or continued use provided:
i) the proposed rel'air, alteration or addition to buildings of historical or archaeological significance is

approved by the legally constituted authority, such as the Department of Archaeology;
ii) the proposed repair, alteration or addition to buildings of architectural value does not impair the
aesthetic quality and architectural character of such buildings; and
iii) ·the restored building or structure will be no more hazardous, if any, based on life safety, fire safety
and sanitation than the existing building.
See also Sec 3.8 of Part 2 and Sec 1.16 of Part 3.
1-2
CHAPTER�
Definitions
2.1 GENERAL
Unless otherwise expressly stated, the abbreviations, terms, phrases, words and their derivations listed
below shall, for the purpose of this Code, be construed as set forth in this chapter. Words not explicitly
defined shall have their ordinarily accepted meanings as the context implies as provided in The Concise
Oxford Dictionary of Current English, eighth edition, Allen R.E., Ed., Oxford University Press, New Delhi,
1990; and Chambers Science and Technology Dictionary, W&R Chambers Ltd and Cambridge University Press,
1988 (Allied Publishers Ltd, Bombay, Fifth Reprint 1992).
The terms defined in this part shall have a general applicability to the entire Code. Other than these, there are
other terminology and definitions provided in different parts, chapters and sections which shall be applicable
only to that particular part, chapter or section in which they are defined. In case of any conflict or
contradiction between a definition given in this part and that in any other part, chapter or section, the
meaning provided in that part, chapter or section shall govern for the interpretation of tile provisions of that
particular part, chapter or section. In general, definitions � ven in a lower level shall override the meanings of
all upper levels for the interpretation of the provisions within the scope of that lower level.
2.2 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
The terminology used in this Code are defined in this section. Irrelevance of gender, tense and number is
implicit in these definitions and throughout the Code. Words in the masculine gender include the feminine and
the feminine the masculine. Verbs used in the present include the future. Words used in the singular include the
plural and the plural the singular.
ACCESSORY USE :Any use subordinate to the major use which is normally incidental to the major use.
ALTERATION: Any change, addition or modification in construction such as structural, dimensional, or any
removal of any part of a building or any change to or closing of any required means of ingress or egress or a
change to the fixtures or equipment or any change in land use or occupancy or use.
APPROVED : Approved by the Authority.
Part 1 1-3
Part 1
AUTHORIZED OFFICER : An officer appointed by the Government by notification in the Official Gazette to
exercise in any area the functions of an Authorized Officer.
AUTHORITY : The Authority which has been created by a statute and which, for the purpose of
administering this Code or part thereof, may authorize a committee or an official to act on its beha1f. (This
definition of Authority shall apply to all appearances of the term in this Code written with a capital A).
BUILDING : Any permanent or semi-permanent structure which is constructed or erected for human
habitation or storage or for any other purpose and includes the foundation, plinth, walls, floors, roofs,
chimneys,. fixed platform, verandah, balcony, cornice, projections, extensions, annexes and any land or space
enclosed by wall adj acent to it. The term building wili als� include the sanitary, plumbing, HVAC, outdoor
display structure, signs and all other building service installations which are constructeCl or erected as an
integral part of a buifding. .
BUILDING LINE : The line up to which the plinth of a building may lawfully extend. Also known as
SETBACK LINE.
COMMITTEE : A Building Construction Committee constituted for any area in the prescribed manner, if
necessary.
CONSTRUCT, TO :See ERECT, TO.
CONVERSION : The change in occupancy or premises to any occupancy or use requiring new occupancy
permit.
COVERED AREA : The ground area above the plinth level which is covered by a building structure. The
covered area of a building shall exclude gardens, wells, uncovered water and swimming pool, fountains,
drainage structures, boundary wall, gates, single-storey open J'Orch, uncovered staircase, watchman's cabin,
detached pump house, electrical substations, garbage chutes ana other utility structures.
DEVELOPMENT: Carrying out construction of buildings, engineering, mining or other operations in, or over
or under land or water. Includes redevelopment and layout and suodivision of any land. 'To develop' and
other grammatical variations shall be interpreted accordingly.
DRAIN: A conduit or channel for conveying water, sewage, or other waste liquid for subsequent disposal.
DRAINAGE: The disposal of any liquid with a system meant for this purpose.
ERECT, TO : To erect a new building or re-erect an existing building or to convert a building from one
occupancy to another. Also known as CONSTRUCT, TO.
GOVERNMENT: The government of the People's Republic of Bangladesh.
GRADE: The lowest }'Oint of elevation of the finished surface of the �ound, pavement or footpath within the
area between the building and a line which is the' property line or a lme 1.5 m from the building, whichever is
nearer the building.
HEIGHT OF BUILDING: The vertical distance from a reference datum to the highest point of the coping or the
parapet of a flat roof or to the deck line of a mansard roof or to the average height of the highest gable of a
pitched or whipped roof. The reference datum shall be the elevation of the nearest footpath, or the elevation of
the nearest roaa or street or public way at its centre line, whichever is higher.
HIGH RISE BUILDING: Any building which is more than 6 storeys or 20 m high.
OCCUPANCY OR USE GROUP: The purpose for which a building or a part thereof is used or intended to be
used.
OCCUPANCY, MAJOR: The major or principal occupancy of a building or a part thereof which has attached
to it subsidiary occupancy or occupancies contingent upon it.
OCCUPIER : A person paying or liable to pay rent or any J'Ortion of rent of a building in respect of which the
ward is used, or compensation or premium on account of occupation of such building and also a rent-free
tenant. Does not include a lodger and the words 'occupancy' and 'occupation' do not refer to the lodger. In
such cases the owner himself or herself is living in his or her own building, he or she shall be deemed to be the
occupier thereof.
·
OWNER, OF A BUILDING : The person, organization or agency at whose expenses the building is
constructed or who has the right to transfer the same and includes his or her heirs, assignees and legal
representatives, and a mortgagee in possession.
PERMIT: A written document or certificate issued by the Authority for carrying out a specific activity under
the provisions of this Code.
1-4
Chapter 2
Definitions
PLINTH AREA:Area of a building measured at the plinth level.
PLOT: See SITE.
PUBLIC WAY:See ROAD.
RELIABLE LITERATURE: See RELIABLE REFERENCE.
RELIABLE REFERENCE: Reference materials such as published article, codes, standards or other material
judged to be reliable by the professional users and specialists in the subject concerned. This may also be
referred to as RELIABLE LITERATURE.
ROAD: A thoroughfare or public way which has been dedicated or deeded to the public for public use. Also
known as STREET.
ROAD LINE:A line defining the side limits of a road.
ROOM HEIGHT:The clear head room between the finished floor surface and the finished ceiling surface or
the underside of the joists or beams, whichever is lower.
SANCTIONED PLAN:The set of plans, design and specifications of a building submitted to the Authority as
per provision of this Code and duly approved and sanctioned by the Authority.
SERVICE ROAD: A road or lane provided at the rear or side of a plot for service purposes.
SETBACK LINE: See BUILDING LINE.
SITE : A piece or parcel of land on which a building is intended to be or has already been constructed. Also
known as PLOT.
SPECIALIST: A professional who by education, research, practice and experience specializes in a particular
branch of a broader discipline and is generally judged to be so by the professionals in the relevant drscipline.
STOREY:That portion of a building included between the upper surface of any floor and the upper surface of
the floor above, except that the topmost storey shall be that portion of a building included between the upper
surface of the topmost floor and the ceiling or roof above. Ifthe finished floor level directly above a usab1e or
unused under-ffoor space is more than 1.8 m above the grade, as defined herein, for more than 50 per cent of
the total perimeter or is more than 3.6 m above grade at any point, such usable or unused under-floor space
shall be considered as a storey.
STOREY, FIRST: The lowest storey in a building which qualifies as a storey as defined herein, except that a
floor level in a building having only one floor level shalf be classified as a first storey, provided such floor
level is not more than 1.25 m below grade, as defined herein, for more than 50 per cent of the total perimeter,
nor more than 2.5 m below grade at any point.
STREET: See ROAD.
STREET LEVEL: The elevation of the centre line of any road or street which a plot fronts.
STREET LINE: See ROAD LINE.
UNSAFE BUILDING : A building which, in the opinion of the Building Official, is structurally unsafe, or
insanitary, or lacks proper means of ingress or egress, or which constitutes a hazard to life or property.
Bangladesh National Building Code 1-5

Part 1
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-6
CHAPTER�
Abbreviations
3.1 ABBREVIATIONS OF NAMES
Names of institutions, organizations and professional societies referred to in this Code are listed below in an
alphabetical order.
ACI:American Concrete Institute; Box 19150, Redford Station, Detroit, MI 48219, USA.
AISC:American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 400 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611, USA.
AISE : Association of Iron and Steel Engineers; Suite 2350, Three Gateway Center, Pittsburgh, PA 15222,
USA.
AISI:American Iron and Steel Institute; Suite 300, 1133 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005, USA.
ANSI :American National Standards Institute; 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018, USA.
ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 345 East 47th
Street, New York, NY 10017, USA.
ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers; United Engineering Centre, 345 East 47th Street, New
York, NY 10017, USA.
ASTM:American Society for Testing and Materials; 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103, USA.
AWS:American Welding Society; 550 N.W. LeJeune Rd., P.O. Box 351040, Miami, FL 33135, USA.
BOCA : Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.; 1313 East 60th Street, Chicago,
IL 60637, USA.
BSI :British Standards Institution; 2 Park Street, London W1A 2BS, UK.
Part 1 1-7
Part I
BSTI : Bangladesh Standards and Testing Institution; 116A Tejgaon I ndustrial Area, Dhaka 1208,
BANGLADESH.
....
BWDB: Bangladesh Water Development Board; WAPDA Building, Motijheel Commercial Area, Dhaka 1000,
BANGLADESH.
CGSM: Canadian General Standards Board; Technical Information Unit, Ottawa, CANADA K1A 1G6.
FM : Factory Manual; Standards Laboratories Department, 1151 Boston Providence Turnpike, Norwood,
MA 02062, USA.
ICBO: International Conference of Building Officials; 5360 South Workman Mill Road, Whittier, CA 90601,
USA.
ISO : International Organization for Standardization; 1, Rue de Varembe, Case Postal 56, CH-1211, Geneve
20, SWITZERLAND.
ISSMFE : International Society of Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering; University Engineering
Department, Trumpington St, Cambridge CB21PZ, UK.
NFPA, NFiPA: National Fire Protection Association; Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269, USA.
PDB : Power Development Board; WAPDA Building, Motijheel Commercial Area, Dhaka 1000,
BANGLADESH.
PWD: Public Works Department; Poorta Bhaban, Segun Bagicha, Dhaka 1000, BANGLADESH.
RCSC : Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation; American Institute of
Steel Construction (AISC).
RMA: Rubber Manufacturing Association; 1400 K Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005, USA.
SBCCI: Southern Building Code Congress International; 3617 8th Ave, S. Birmingham, AL 35222, USA.
SMACNA : Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, 8224 Old Courthouse
Road, Tysons Corner, Vienna, VA 22180, USA.
SPRI: Single Ply Roofing Institute; 104 Wilmont Road, Suite 201, Deerfield, IL 600015-5195, USA.
UL : Underwriters Laboratories, Inc; 207 East Ohio Street, Chicago, IL 60611, USA.
3.2 ABBREVIATIONS OF WORDS
The abbreviations used in this Code are listed below in an alphabetical order. Abbreviations not explicitly
defined herein below shall be construed to have their usual meaning as the context implies.
BDS : Bangladesh Standards; published by the BSTJ
BS: British Standard; published by the BSI
CBF: Concentric Braced Frame
CFC: Chlorofluorocarbon
CGI: Corrugated Galvanized Iron
cps: Cycles per second
CWPC: Cold Drawn Low Carbon Wire Prestressed Concrete
DCP: Dcy Chemical Powder (fire extinguisher)
DDT: Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane
DPC: Damp-proof Course
EBF : Eccentric Braced Frame
FAR: Floor Area Ratio
FM: Fineness Modulus
1-8
Chapter 3
Abbreviations
FPA : Flood Prone Area
GI : Galvanized Iron
IMRF : Intermediate Moment Resisting Frame
IS : Indian Standard; published by the Bureau of Indian Standards
LFD : Load Factor Design
LPG : Liquefied Petroleum Gas
MCSP : Multipurpose Cyclone Shelter Programme
OMRF : Ordinary Moment Resisting Frame
RC : Reinforced Concrete
RS : Rolled Steel
RSJ : Rolled Steel Joist
SMRF : Special Moment Resisting Frame
SPA : Surge Prone Area
SRSS : Square Root of the Sum of the Squares
UBC : Uniform Building Code; published by the ICBO
WSD : Working Stress De�ign

Part I
1-10
Part I
ADMINISTRATION AND ENFORCEMENT
<ermaJPil:e�r n
·
Purpose and Scope
<Cih1aJP>Il:<eJr "
Organization and Enforcement
<Cfm:aljp>ll:<eJr �
Permits and Inspections
Appendices
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART2 ADMINISTRATION AND ENFORCEMENT
Chapter 1 Purpose and Scope
1.1 PURPOSE 2-1

1.2 SCOPE 2-1
1.3 TERMINOLOGY 2-1

1.4 APPLICABILITY 2-2
1.4.1 Construction 2-2
1.4.2 Removal 2-2
1.4.3 Demolition 2-2
1.4.4 Alteration 2-2
1.4.5 Maintenance 2-2
1.4.6 Repair 2-2
1.4.7 Land Development 2-2
1.5 ALTERNATIVE PROVISIONS 2-3
1.5.1 Approval 2-3

1.5.2 Modifications 2-3
Chapter 2 Organization and -enforcement
2.1 CODE ENFORCEMENT AGENCY 2-5
2.1.1 Building Official 2-5
2.1.2 Merging the Jurisdictions under Small Local Bodies 2-5
2.1.3 Organization 2-5
2.1.4 Qualification of the Building Official 2-5
2.1.5 Restrictions on the Building Official 2-5
2.1.6 Damage Suit 2-6
2.2 POWERS AND DUTIES OF THE BUILDING OFFICIAL 2-6
2.2.1 General 2-6
2.2.2 Deputies 2-6
2.2.3 Recognition of Professional Services 2-6
2.2.4 Application and Permits 2-6
2.2.5 Building Notices and Orders 2-6
2.2.6 Right of Entry 2-6
2.2.7 Inspection 2-6
2.2.8 Orders to Stop Work 2-7
2.2.9 Occupancy Violation 2-7
2.2.10 Maintenance of Records 2-7
2.2.11 Expert Opinion 2-7
2.3 BOARD OF APPEALS 2-7
2.4 REQUIREMENT OF CERTIFICATION OF WORK 2-7
2-i
2.5 LIMITS OF PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT 2-7
2.6 VIOLATION AND PENALTIES 2-8
2.6.1 General 2-8
2.6.2 Height Control near Aerodromes 2-8
2.6.3 Professional Violation 2-8
2.6.4 Obligation of Offender 2-8
2.6.5 Conviction No Bar to Further Prosecution · 2-8
2.7 POWER TO MAKE RULES 2-8
Chapter3 Permits and Inspections
3.1 PERMITS 2-9
3.1.1 Requirement of Permit 2-9
3.1.2 Permits Obtained Prior to Adoption of Code 2-9
3.2 APPLICATION FOR PERMIT 2-10
3.2.1 Application 2-10
3.2.2 Operation and Maintenance of Utility Services 2-10
3.2.3 Information Accompanying the Application 2-10
3.2.4 Preparation and Signing of Plans 2-12
3.2.5 Notice for Land Adjoining Government or 2-12
Corporate Bodies Formed Under the Statute
3.2.6 Fees 2-12
3.2.7 Duration of Permit 2-12
3.2.8 Deviation from Approved Plan 2-12'
3.2.9 Cancellation of Permit 2-12
3.2.10 Granting or Refusal of Permit 2-13
3.3 RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES OF THE OWNER 2-13
3.3.1 General 2-13
3.3.2 • Right of Entry 2-13
3.3.3 Permit from Other Agencies 2-13
3.3.4 Notice of Completion 2-13
3.3.5 Documents at Site 2-13
3.4 INSPECTION 2-13
3.5 UNSAFE BUILDINGS 2-13
3.5.1 General 2-13
3.5.2 Examination 2-13
3.5.3 Notification 2-14
3.5.4 Disregard of Notice 2-14
3.5.5 Cases of Emergency 2-14
3.5.6 Cost Involvement 2-14
3.6 DEMOLITION OF BUILDINGS 2-14
3.7 VALIDITY OF THE PROVISIONS OF THIS CODE 2-14
3.7.1 Partial Invalidity 2-14
3.7.2 Invalidity on Existing Buildings 2-14
3.8 ARCHITECTURAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL 2-14
2-ii
Appendices
Appendix A Form for First Application to Develop, Erect, 2-18

Demolish or to Make Alteration in any Part
of the Building
Appendix B Form for Certificate of Supervision 2-19

AppendixC Form for Sanction or Refusal of Development/ 2-20
Building Permit
Appendix D Form for Completion Certificate 2-21
2-iii
CHAPTER
Purpose and Scope
1.1 PURPOSE
The purpose of this part is to specify the provisions for administration and enforcement of the Code.
1.2 SCOPE
This part of the Code sets forth the administrative procedure for enforcement of the provisions thereof. The
applicability of the Code, provision for designating a Building Official, powers and auties of such Building
Official, obligations and liabilities of engineers, architects or planners, provisions against violation of the
Code and procedure for obtaining building permits are specified in this part.
1.3 TERMINOLOGY
This section provides an alphabetical list of the terms used in and applicable to this part of the Code. In case
of any conflict or contradiction between a definition given in this section and that in Part 1, the meaning
specified in this section shall govern for interpretation of the provisions of this part.
ALTERATION: Any change, addition or modification in construction such as structural, dimensional, or any
removal of any part of a building or any change to or closing of any required means of ingress or egress or a
change to the fixtures or equipment or any change in occupancy or use.
APPLICANT : A person, a firm, a company, a corporation, or a government, semi-government or non

government agency who intends to unaertake any work regulated by this Code and who has filed an
application to the Building Official for this purpose in a form prescribed in the Code.
APPROVED PLAN:The set of plans, designs and specification of a building submitted to the Authority as per
provision of this Code and duly approved and sanctioned by the Authority.
AUTHORIZED OFFICER : An officer appointed by the Government by notification in the Official Gazette to
exercise in any area the functions of an Authorized Officer.
Part 2 2-1
Administration and Enforcement
Part 2
BUILDER: A person, a firm, a company, a corporation or a government, semi-government or non-government

agency who undertakes construction of any work regulated by the Code. Owner of a building or structure in
connection to which the work is undertaken shall not be considered as a Builder.
CONSTRUCT, TO: To construct a new building or reconstruct an existing building or to convert a building
from one occupancy to another. .
DEVELOPMENT : Carrying out construction of buildings, engineering, mining or other operations in, or over
or under land or water. Includes redevelopment and layout and subdivision of any land. 'To develop' and
other grammatical variations shall be interpreted accordingly.
ERECT, TO: See CONSTRUCT, TO.
OWNER (OF A BUILDING) : The person, organization or agency at whose expenses the building is
constructed and who has the legal right over the 1and on which it is constructed or one who has the right to
transfer the same and includes his or her heirs, assignees and legal representatives, and a mortgagee in
possession.
PERMIT: A written document or certificate issued by the Authority for carrying out a specific activity under
the provisions of this Code.
UNSAFE BUILDING : A building which, in the opinion of the Building Official, is structurally unsafe, or
insanitary, or lacks proper means of ingress or egress, or which constitutes a hazard to life or property.
1.4 APPLICABILITY
The requirements of this Code shall be complied within any construction, addition, alteration or repair, use
and occupancy, location, maintenance, demolition and removal of a building or stru cture or any
appurtenances connected or attached to it as set forth herein below.
1.4.1 Construction
For construction of a new building, the provisions of this Code shall apply to its design and construction.
1.4.2 Removal
For removal of any portion or the whole of a building, the provisions of this Code shall apply to all parts of
the building whether removed or not. ·
1.4.3 Demolition
For dismantling or demolition of any part or the whole of a building, the provisions of this Code shall apply
to any remaining portion and to the work involved in the dismantling or demolition process.
1.4.4 Alteration
For alteration of a building, the provisions of this Code shall apply to the whole building whether existing or
new. If the portion of the building to which the alteration is made is completely self contained with respect to
the facilities and safety measures required by this Code, the provisions of this Code shall apply only to that
portion and not to the whole building.
1.4.5 Maintenance
Maintenance work shall be undertaken for all new and existing buildings and all parts thereof to continue
their compliance with the provisions of this Code. All devices, equipment and safeguards installed as per the
requirements of this Code shall be maintained in conformity with the edition of the Code under which
installed. The owner of the building or his designated agent shall at all times be responsible for the safe and
sanitary maintenance of the building or structure, its means of egress facilities and the safety devices,
equipment and services installed therein. The Building Official m�y cause reinspection of a building to
determine its continued compliance with this section.
1.4.6 Repair
Application or notice to the Authority administering the Code is not necessary for ordinary repairs to
buildings or structures, rovided such repairs do not involve the cutting away of any wall or portion thereof,
r
the removal or cutting o any structural or bearing element, the removal or alteration of any required means of
egress, or the rearrangement of any parts of a structure affecting the access and exit facilities. All works
involving addition to, alteration or change of use of any building or structure shall conform to the
requirements set forth in Part 9 of this Code.
1.4.7 Land Development

For development of a land for construction of a building, the provisions of this Code shall apply to the entire
development work.
2-2
Chapter 1
Purpose and Scope
1.5 ALTERNATIVE PROVISIONS
1.5.1 Approval
The provisions of this Code are not intended to prevent the use of any material or method of construction not
specifically prescribed herein provided such alternative material or method has been approved and its use
authorized by the Building Official.
Such alternative may be ap:proved by the Building Official provided the Building Official finds that the
proposed design is in compliance with the provisions of this Code and that the material and the method of
work and construction proposed for the intended work ensure at least the same level of suitability, strength,
effectiveness, fire resistance, durability, safety and sanitation as that required by the provisions of this Coae.
Whenever any such alternative is proposed, the Building Official shall require that sufficient evidence or
proof be submitted to substantiate any claims that may be made regarding its use. The Building Official shall
record the details of any action granting approval of any such alternative.
Whenever any new material or method of construction not specified in this Code, and for which sufficient
evidence of compliance with the provisions of this Code is not available, is proposed to be used, the Building
Official may require tests to be carried out as a proof of compliance with the provisions of this Code at the
expense of the owner of a building or structure for which such alternate is proposed.
Tests shall be carried out as specified in this Code or by other recognized test standards. If for any test there
is no provision in this Code or there is no recognized and acceptea test method, the Building Official shall
determine the test procedure.
Tests shall be performed by an approved agency and the reports thereof shall be retained by the Building
. Official for the period required for the retention of public records.
1.5.2 Modifications
Modifications may be granted for individual cases by the Building Official, with the approval of the Authority,
when there are practical difficulties in carrying out the provisions of this Code provided that:
i) There is a special individual reason found in the opinion of the Building Official that makes strict
adherence to this Code impractical;
ii) The modifications do not lessen any fire protection requirements or any degree of structural integrity;
and
iii) The modifications are in conformity with the intent and purpose of this Code.
The Building Official shall record any action regarding granting of such modifications for future reference of
the Code enforcing agency.

Part 2
2-4
CHAPTER�
2.1 CODE ENFORCEMENT AGENCY
The Government shall establish a new or designate an existing agency responsible for enforcement of this
Code with a given area of jurisdiction. For the purpose of administering and enforcing the provisions of this
Code the code enforcing agency shall have the authority of the government and shall herein be referred to as
the Authority.
2.1.1 Building Official

The administrative and operational chief of the code enforcin� agency shall be designated as the Building
Official who shall act on behalf of the Authority. The Buildmg Official may designate an employ ee or
employees who shall carry out the specified duty and exercise the specified power·of the Building Official.
2.1.2 Merging the Jurisdictions under Small Local Bodies

Smail local bodies like pourashavas and thanas located outside the larger city municipalities and having
insufficient funds for individually carrying out the task of a code enforcing agency may j ointly appoint or
designate, with the approval of the authority, a Building Official who shall nave a junsdichon over the
comoined area of jurisdiction of the concerned local bodies.
2.1.3 Organization
The Building Official shall appoint such number of officers, technical assistants, inspectors and other
employees as shall be required for proper administration of the Code and as authorized by the Authority.
2.1.4 Qualification of the Building Official

The person to be designated as the Building Official shall be at least an engineer, architect or planner in
addition to fulfilling any other requirement of the Authority. The employees of the Building Official shall be
adequately qualified to carry out the responsibilities assigned to themby the Building Official.
2.1.5 Restrictions on the Building Official

The Building Official or any of his employees shall not in any way, directly or indirectly, be engaged in
planning, design, construction, repair, maintenance, modification or alteration of a building, certification of
any worl< or materials, supply of materials, labour, equipment or appliances or any other work regulated by
the provisions of this Cocfe. The Building Official or any of his employees shall not be interested in business,
Part 2 2-5
Part 2
either directly or indirectly, as planner, engineer, architect, builder or sup J? lier or in any other private
business transaction or activity within the jurisdiction of the Authority which conflicts with his official
duties or with the interest of the code enforcing agency.
2.1.6 Damage Suit

In the process of discharging the official duties as required and permitted by the Code, the Building Official or
any of his employees shall not be personally liable for any damage that may be caused to any person or
property. Any suit filed against the Building Official or any of his employee because of an act performed by
him in the official discharge of his duties ana under the provisions of the Code shall be defended by the legal
representative of the Authority until the final decision of the proceedings. In no case shall the Building
Official or any of his employees be liable for costs in any legal action, suit, or defence proceeding that may be
filed in pursuance of the provisions of the Code.
2.2 POWERS AND DUTIES OF THE BUILDING OFFICIAL
2.2.1 General
The Building Official shall be authorized to enforce all the provisions of this Code and for such purposes the
Building Official shall have the power of a law enforcing officer.
The Building Official shall be authorized to interpret this Code and to adopt and enforce rules and
SUJ'plemental regulations in order to clarify the application of its provisions in conformity with the intent
and purpose of thls Code.
2.2.2 Deputies
The Building Official may appoint such number of technical officers and inspectors and other employees as
shall be autnorized from time to time in accordance with the prescribed procedures and with the approval of
the Authority.
The Building Official may designate such officers or inspectors as may be necessary to carry out the functions
of the code enforcement agency.
2.2.3 Recognition of Professional Services

The Building Official may recognize the professional services provided by engineers, planners, architects and
supervisors. Such recognition may be withdrawn by the Building Official under the provisions set forth in
Sec 2.6.3.
2.2.4 Application and Permits

Applications shall be made in writing to the Building Official for any erection, construction, addition,
alteration, modification, repair, improvement, removal, conversion or demolition of any building or structure
regulated by this Code. Tne Buildmg Official shall receive such applications, examine the premises, enforce
compliance with this Code and issue permits for the intended work.
2.2.5 Building Notices and Orders

All necessary notices and orders to correct illegal or unsafe conditions, to require the specified safeguards
during construction, to require adequate access and exit facilities in existmg buildmgs and to ensure
compliance with all the requirements of safety, health and general welfare of the public as included in this
Code shall be issued by the l3uilding Official.
2.2.6 Right of Entry

The Building Official may enter a building or premises at reasonable times to inspect or to perform the duties
imposed by this Code if:
i) it is necessary to make an inspection to enforce the provisions of this Code; or
ii) the Building Official has reasonable cause to believe that a condition contrary to or in violation of
this Code exists making the building or the premises unsafe, hazardous or dangerous.
If the building or premises is occupied, the Building Official shall present credentials to the occupant and
request entry. If tne building or premises is unoccuJ?ied, the Building Official shall first make a reasonable
effort to locate the owner or any other person havmg charge or control of the building or premises and
request entry. If entry into the building or premises is refused or the owner of the unoccupied building or
premises cannot be located, the Building Official shall secure entry as provided by the law.
2.2.7 Inspection
The Building Official shall inspect all construction or work for which a permit is required or he shall accept
reports of inspection by an engineer, architect or planner and may approve or disapprove the work inspected.
The work or construction to oe inspected shall remain accessible ana exposed for mspection purposes until
the approval is obtained.
All reports of inspection shall be in writing and certified by the Building Official or the engineer or the
architect making tne inspection.
2-6
Chapter 2
Approval of work or construction as a result of such inspection shall not be interpreted to be an approval of
a v10lation of the provisions of this Code or of other ordinances of the jurisdiction.
The Building Official may require survey of the site and adjoining areas to verify that the structure is located
in accordance with the approved plans.
2.2.8 Orders to Stop Work

The Building Official may issue an order for immediate discontinuation of a work and cancellation of a
previous permit for such work at any stage if:
i) any work is being done contrary to the provision of this Code or other pertinent laws or ordinances
implemented through the enforcement of this Code; or
ii) it is determined by the Building Official that the construction is not proceeding according to the
approved plan.
In such cases the Building Official shall notify the owner in writing of such an order and all further
construction shall be stayed until correction has been effected and approved.
2.2.9 Occupancy Violation

The Building Official may order the current uses of a buildin!? discontinued and the building or portion
thereof vacated by serving a notice on any person if the Buildmg Official determines that the builaing or
structure or equi ment therein regulated by this Code is being used contrary to the provisions of this Code.
f
Such person snal discontinue the use within the time prescribed by the Building Official after receipt of such
notice to make the structure, or portion thereof, comply with the requirements of this Code.
2.2.10 Maintenance of Records

The Building Official shall maintain records of all applications and drawings received, permits and orders
issued, inspections made and reports prepared ancf submitted by other recognized agencies. Copies of all
relevant papers and documents for enforcement of the Code shall be preserved by the l3uilding Official. All
such recorcfs shall be kept open to public inspection at all suitable times.
2.2.11 Expert Opinion

The Building Official may en�age, subject to the approval of the Authority, an expert or a panel of experts for
opinion on unusual technical 1ssues that may arise in administering the provisions of the Code.
2.3 BOARD OF APPEALS
There shall be a Board of Appeals to hear and decide appeals of orders, decisions or determinations made by
the Building Official relatea to the application and interpretation of this Code. The Board of A peals shall
f
provide reasonable interpretation of tne provisions of this Code and determine the suitability o alternative
materials or methods of design or construction. Such Board shall consist of members appointed by the
Authority who are noted for their education and experience in the relevant field of building construction and
whose term of office shall be at the pleasure of the Authority. The Building Official shall be the ex-officio
nonmember secretary of the Board without having any voting power before the Board.
The Board shall, with the approval of the Authority, adopt rules of procedure for conducting its business,
and shall communicate all decisions and findings in writing to the appellant with a copy to the Building
Official.
The Board of Appeals shall have no authority for interpretation of the administrative provisions contained
in Part 2 of this COde nor shall the Board be empowered to waive any requirement of this Code.
2.4 REQUIREMENT OF CERTIFICATION OF WORK
Any planning, design, supervision of construction, repair, maintenance, modification and alteration of
buildmgs, or any other work regulated by the Code shalf be certified by an engineer, architect or planner for
its compliance with the provisions of the Code.
2.5 LIMITS OF PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT
An engineer, architect or planner assisted if necessary by personnel working under his direct control, shall be
allowed to plan, design and supervise construction, repair, maintenance, alteration and modification of
buildings or structures regulated by this Code p rovicfed he certifies compliance of the work with the
provisions of the Code. Such a person may prov1de any such certificate as long as his or her services are
recognized by the Building Offic1al as specified in Sec 2.2.3 and such recognition is not withdrawn under the
provisions of Sec 2.6.3.

Part 2
2.6 VIOLATION AND PENALTIES
2.6.1 General
Any person, firm, corporation or government department or agency who as owner of the property erects,
constructs, enlarges, alters, repairs, moves, improves, removes, converts, demolishes, equips, uses, occupies or
maintains any building or structure or cause or permit the same to be done in violation of this Code shall be
guilty of an offence and the Authority shall take legal action against such offenders. The term owner shall, for
tne purpose of these provisions include any developer who by appointment, contract or lease is or has been
responsible for the actions listed above.
2.6.2 Height Control near Aerodromes

If any building or structure violates the height limitation imposed by the Civil Aviation Authority near
aerodromes, it shall be demolished at the expense of the owner and reduced to bring it to a level within the
permissible height.
2.6.3 Professional Violation

The engineer, architect or planner responsible for design, supervision or certification of any construction or
other work of a building or structure shall ensure compliance of such work with the proviswns of this Code,
any violation of which or any other professional misconduct insofar as implementation of the provisions of
this Code is concerned including making false statements or issuing false certificates or any incidence of
proven professional incapability shall make him liable to penalties as prescribed by the Authority including
withdrawal of recognition.
2.6.4 Obligation of Offender

A person shall not be relieved from the duty of carryin� out the requirements or obligations imposed on him or
her by virtue of the provisions of this Code even 1f such person is convicted Ior an offence under the
provisions of this sechon. .
.
2.6.5 Conviction No bar to Further Prosecution

If a person is convicted under the provisions of this Code for failing to comply with any of its requirements or
obligations such conviction shall not act as a bar for further prosecution for any subsequent failure on the
part of such person to comply. ·
2.7 POWER TO MAKE RULES
The Authority may make rules for carrying out the provisions and intentions of this Code. Such rules shall
not contradict nor nullify any of the provisions of this Code. The Authority may fix and refix from time to time
application fees for issuance of permits for all works under the provisions of this Code.
2-8
CHAPTER�
3.1 PERMITS
3.1.1 Requirement of Permit

No building or structure regulated by this Code shall be erected, constructed, enlarged, altered, repaired,
moved, improved, removed, converted or demolished without first obtaining a separate permit for each such
work from the Building Official.
Exceptions:
The following works are exempted from the requirement of a permit unless they do not otherwise violate any provisions
of this Code, for the said work or any other adjacent property, regarding general building requirements, structural stability
·
and fire safety requirements of this Code:
i) Opening or closing of a window or a door or a ventilator;

ii) Providing intemar doors;
iii) Providing partitions;
iv) Providing false ceiling;
v) Gardening;
vi) Painting;
vii) Retilins and reroofing;
viii) Plastermg and patch work;
ix) Refloorin&;
x) Construction of sunshades on one's own land;
xi) Re-erection of portion of buildings damaged by earthquake or cyclone or other natural calamities, to
the extent and specification as existed prior to such damage; and
xii) Solid boundary walls less than 1.5 m and open boundary wall less than 2.75 m in height.
3.1.2 Permits Obtained Prior to Adoption o{ Code

If permit for a building or structure or a work regulated by this Code is obtained before adoption of this Code
and the building or structure or work for whicfi the permit is obtained is not completed within three years
from the date of issuance of such permit, the said permit shall be deemed to have la sed and fresh permit shall
y
be necessary to proceed further with the work in accordance with the provisions o this Code.
Part 2 2-9
Part 2
3.2 APPLICATION FOR PERMIT
3.2.1 Application
Any person who intends to undertake any work on a building or structure or land regulated by this Code
shall first file an application therefor in writing on a form furnished by the Building Official for that purpose
(see Appendix A). Such applications shall be accompanied by plans and statements in seven copies as
required by the provisions of this section.
3.2.2 Operation and Maintenance of Utility Services .

The Government may undertake works for operation, maintenance, development or execution of any of the
following utility services without requiring to obtain permit from the Building Official:
i) Railways;
ii) National highways;
iii) National waterways;
iv) National gas grid;
v) National power grid;
vi) Major ports;
vii) Airways and aerodromes;
viii) Posts and telegraphs;
ix) Telecommunications;
x) Radio, TV and other similar broadcasting services; and
xi) Any other service which the Government may, by notification, declare to be a service for the purpose of
this section if the Government is of the opinion that the operation, maintenance, development or ·
execution of such service is essential to the community.
Buildings constructed in connection with these services shall conform with the specifications of this Code.
3.2.3 Information Accompanying the Application

3.2.3.1 General : Application for permit of any work under the provisions of this Code shall be
accompanied by a key plan, a site plan, a building plan, services plans, specifications and certificate of
supervision as SJ?ecified in this section. The drawings shall have any of the Sizes specified in Table 2.3.1. All
plans and drawmgs shall be signed by an architect or planner or engineer which shall be considered as
equivalent to certifying that the plan on which the signature appears conforms to all the requirements of this
COde.
Table 2.3.1
Sizes of Drawing Sheet
Notation Trimmed Size Untrimmed Size

(ISO Standard) (mm) (mm)
AO 841x1189 880x1230
A1 594x841 625x880
A2 420x594 450x625
A3 297x420 33 0x450
A4 210x297 240x330
AS 148x210 165x240
3.2.3.2 Key Plan : A key plan of the site shall be submitted along with the application which shall:
i) have a scale of 1:10,000 or larger; and

ii) show the boundaries of the site with respect to neighbouring landmarks.
3.2.3.3 Site Plan : The site plan to be submitted with the application shall have a scale of not less than
1:500 for a site of up to 1 ha and not less than 1:1000 for a site greater than 1 ha. The site plan shall contain
the following information:
i) A north arrow and a scale factor or scale bar;
ii) The boundaries of the site and the neighbouring streets along with their dimensions and names;
iii) All existing buildings, structures or service lines on, above, below or surrounding the site;
iv) The position of the proposed building and of all other buildings on the site with respect to the
boundaries of the site and of any subdivision thereof if applicable, and all adjacent buildings (with
number of storeys and height) and premises within a distance of 12 m of the site;
v) The means of access from the street to the building which the applicant intends to construct and to all
other buildings upon the site;
2-10
Chapter 3
vi) Space to be left open around the building; and
vii) Any physical features, such as wells, drains etc.
3.2.3.4 Application for Development Works: Applications for permit for a development work shall be
accompaniea by a subdivision or layout plan drawn on a scale of 1:500 or greater and containing the
followmg information:
i) A north arrow and a scale factor or scale bar;
ii) The location of all proposed and existing roads and their dimensions;
iii) Dimensions of the plots, the building lines and setbacks;
iv) The location of utility services like drains, sewers, electric lines and gas lines;
v) The identification number, size, dimensions and use of all the plots in a tabular form;
vi) Information in a summary form indicating the total area of the site, area utilized under roads, open
spaces for parks, playgrounds, recreation spaces, schools, shopping centres, community centres and
other public places; ana
vii) The means of access to each subdivision of the site.
3.2.3.5 Building Plan :The building plans accompanying the application shall have a scale of not less than
1:100 and shall contain the following iriformation:
·
i) A north arrow and a scale factor or a scale bar;
ii) Floor plans of all floors together with the covered area clearly indicating the size and spacing of all
framing members and sizes of rooms and the position of staircases, ramps and lift wells;
iii.) Use or occupancy of all parts of the buildings;
iv) Location of all utility services;
v) Sections showing clearly the sizes of the footing, thickness of basement wall, wall construction, size
and spacing of the framing members, floor slabs and roof slabs with their materials, height of the rooms
and parapets, drainage and slope of the roof and terrace (if any), and details of the staircase.
vi) Street dimensions and elevations; and
vii) All projected portions of the building.
3.2.3.6 Building Plans for Multi-storeyed and Other Special Buildings : Applications for any work
under the provisions of this Code involving buildings higher than 20 m and other buildings like educational,
assembly, institutional, industrial or hazardous and mixed occupancies with any of the aforesaid
occupancies having an area of more than 500 m2 shall be accompanied with the following information as may
be applicable in acfdition to those specified in Sec 3.2.3.5:
i) Accessibility of fire apJ'liances and vehicles with details of vehicular turning circle and clear
motorable passage arouna the build�g;
ii) Location and dimensions of alternate stairway along with any approach thereof;
iii) Location and details of lift enclosures;
iv) Location and dimensions of fire escape;
v) Smoke stop lobby or door;
vi) Refuse chutes, refuse chamber and service duct;
vii) Vehicular parking spaces and vehicle movement and parking plan;
viii) Refuse area;
ix) Details of building services like air-conditioning, mechanical ventilation system, electrical services,
boiler and gas pipes;
x) Details of exits;

Part 2
xi) Location of generator, transformer and switch gear room;
xii) Smoke exhaust system;
xiii) Fire alarm system;
xiv) Location of centralised control, connecting all fire alarm systems, built-in fire protection arrangement
and public address system etc.;
Location and dimensions of static water storage tank and pump room along with fire service inlets for
mobile pump and water storage tank;
xvi) Location and details of fixed fire protection installations such as sprinklers, wet risers, hose reels,
drenchers, C02 installations etc.; and
xvii) Location of first aid arrangements.
3.2.3.7 Plans of Services: The plans showing utilities to the buildings such as gas, water, electricity,
drainage and sewage disposal system shall include all details of such systems within the building and their
interface with the street network of the concerned agency.
3.2.3.8 Specifications: Specification of the materials to be used in the building or structure shall be
specified in sufficient detail to enable the Building Official to check conformity of sud\ specifications with the
provisions of this Code.
3.2.3.9 Supervision of Work: The application shall be accompanied by a certificate of supervision in the
form as prescribed in Appendix B by an engineer, architect, planner or supervisor of relevant field.
3.2.3.10 Requirement of Additional Information : The applicant shall provide any other information
required by the Building Official to determine conformity witfi the provisions of this Code.
3.2.4 Preparation and Signing of Plans

All plans shall be preparea under the guidance of an engineer, architect or planner as may be applicable who
shall put his or her signature with date on the title block of the lans along with his name, address and degree.
f
The plans shall also contain the signature, name and address o the owner.
3.2.5 Notice for Land Adjoining Government or Corporate Bodies Formed Under the Statute
Application and the accompanying plans for any work or development under the provision of this Code on
any site adjoinin� any Government land or propercy shall be prepared and submitted in sufficient numbers to
enable the Buildmg Official to forward one set each to the appropriate Government agency or agencies for
report before permission is granted. The concerned Government agency shall report to the Buildin� Official
whether or not they have any objection to the proposed work withiri two weeks from the date of receipt of the
application and plans. If no such report is received within two weeks by the Building Official the concerned
Government agency shall be deemed to have no objection to the execution of the proposed work. In case any
government agency have any objection to a proposed work, such objection snail be stated with definite
reasons.
3.2.6 Fees
All applications shall be accompanied by fees as specified by the Building Official from time to time without
which the application shall be deemed to be incomplete. .
3.2.7 Duration of Permit

Works for which permit has been obtained under the prqvisions of this Code shall be valid for a duration of 5
years. For projects of exceptionally large magnitude the Building Official may extend the duration of such
permit. On expiry of a permit, the owner shall obtain a fresh permit which may be granted by the Building
Official on satisfaction of the provisions of the version of the Code in force at that time.
3.2.8 Deviation from Approved Plan

Deviations from the approved plans may be permitted provided such deviation is notified to the Building
Official before undertaking the related work and approval is obtained for the deviation. The revised plan
showing the deviations shall be submitted and the procedure specified for the original plan heretofore shall
apply to all such amended plans.
Exception:
The works specified in Sec 3.1.1 as exceptions shall be exempted from the requirements of obtaining permits from the
Building Official unless they do not otherwise violate any provisions of this Code regarding general building requirements,
structural stability and fire safety requirements of this Code.
3.2.9 Cancellation of Permit

The Building Official shall have the authority to cancel any permit issued previously under the provisions of
this Code if there is any false statement or any misrepresentation of any material fact in the application on the
2-12
Chapter 3
basis of which the permit was issued, or there is any deviation from the approved plans without any prior
approval of the Bui1ding Official.
3.2.10 Granting or Refusal of Permit

3.2.10.1 General :The Building Official may either grant or refuse perDit to an applicant for carrying out
the intended work (see Appendix C).
3.2.10.2 Multi-storeyed and Other Special Buildings : In case of applications for works related to
buildings as specified in Sec 3.2.3.6, all relevant drawings and other information shall be subject to scrutiny
of the fire authority and their approval shall be necessary for approval of the plan by the Building Official.
3.2.10.3 Time Limit : The Building Official shall notify the applicant within 60 days from the date of receipt
of an application and all other information required by him of either approval or refusal of the permit for any
work. If the Building Official does not notify the applicant of such approval or refusal within this specified
period, the plans shall be deemed to have been approved provided the fact is brought to the notice of the
Building Official. Such approval shall not be interpreted to authorize any person to do anything in
contravention of or against tne terms of lease or titles of the land or against any other regulations, bylaws or
ordinance operating on the site of the work or any of the provisions of this Code.
3.2.10.4 Reason for Refusal and Remedy Thereof : Refusal of J?ermit shall be accompanied with reason
and the Building Official shall quote the relevant sections of th1s Code which the plans contravene. The
apJ?,licant may correct or remove such reasons and reapply for permit with any fee that may be required. The
Building Official shall scrutinise the resubmitted plan and if there be no further objections the plan shall be
approved and permit issued. .
3.3 RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES OF THE OWNER
3.3.1 General
The owner of a building or structure regulated by the provisions of this Code shall be responsible for
carrying out the work in conformity with the provisions of this Code. Granting of permission for any work or
approval of plans or inspection by the Building Official or any of his deputies shall not relieve the owner
from such responsibility.
3.3.2 Right of Entry

The owner shall allow the Building Official to enter the site for the purpose of enforcing the Code as required
by the provision of Sec 2.2.6 and for the purpose of inspection as provided in Sec 3.4 beIow.
3.3.3 Permit from Other Agencies

The owner shall obtain permit as may be applicable from other concerned agencies relating to building,
zoning, grades, sewers, water mains, plumbmg, signs, blasting, street occupancy, gas, electricity, highways
and all other permits required in connection with the proposed work.
3.3.4 Notice of Com letion

f
The owner shal notify the Building Official in the form prescribed in Appendix D of the completion of the
work for which permit was granted. The Building Official may or may not cause an inspection of the
completed work for verification of its conformity witn the approved plan and design and certify accordingly
. on tlie form. The work shall not be accepted as complete witfiout such certification from the Building Official.
3.3.5 Documents at Site

The owner shall preserve at the site a copy of all permits issued and all drawings ap proved by the Building
Official. Results of tests carried out for determination of conformity of the work w1th the provisions of this
Code shall also be preserved and made available for inspection during execution of the work.
3.4 INSPECTION
All works relating to a building or structure re�lated by the provisions of this Code for which permits are
required shall be subject to inspection by the Bmlding Official. An engineer, architect, planner or a supervisor
shall supervise the work and certify conformity of the work with the provisions of the Code. Such certificates
shall be preserved at the site and produced before the Building Officia1 during any inspection.
3.5 UNSAFE BUILDINGS
3.5.1 General
All buildings considered to constitute danger to public safety or property shall be declared unsafe and shall
be repaired or demolished as directed by the Building Official.
3.5.2 Examination
The Building Official shall examine or cause examination of every building reported to pose threat to safety
or be damaged by wear and tear or accident and shall make a written record of such examinations.

Part 2
3.5.3 Notification
If a building is found to be unsafe the Building Official shall notify the owner of the building and specify the
defects thereof. The notice shall require the owner within a stated time either to complete the required repair
or improvement or demolish and remove the building or portion thereof.
3.5.4 Disregard of Notice

In case the owner fails, neglects or refuses to carry out the repair or improvement of the unsafe building or
portion thereof as sp ecified in the notice, the Building Official shall cause the danger to be removed either by
aemolition or repatr of the building or portion thereof or otherwise, the cost of which shall be borne by the
owner.
3.5.5 Cases of Emergency ·
If the Building Official considers that an unsafe building or structure constitutes imminent danger to human
life or health or public property, the Building Official shall at once or with a notice as may be possible
promptly cause such buifding or structure or portion thereof to be rendered safe or removed. In such cases the
aecision of the Building Official shall be final and binding, and he or any of his assigned deputies may at once
enter such structure or land on which it stands or the abutting land or structure, with such assistance from
and at such cost to the owner as may be deemed necessary. The Building Official may also get the adjacent
structures vacated and protect the public by an appropriate fence or such other means as may be necessary.
3.5.6 Cost Involvement

The cost incurred in carrying out the activities of the Building Official under Sec 3.5.4 and 3.5.5 above shall
be realized from the owner of the building or structure or the premises concerned.
3.6 DEMOLITION OF BUILDINGS
If a building or structure is to be demolished, the owner shall notify all agencies providing utility services to
the building. Such agencies shall remove all their appurtenances and equipment and dismantle all service
connections to ensure a safe condition. The Building Official shall not grant any permit for demolition of a
building until a release is obtained from the utility services stating that all servtce connections have been
r�movea in the proper manner.
3.7 VALIDITY OF THE PROVISIONS OF THIS CODE
3.7.1 Partial Invalidity ·
In case any provision of this Code is held to be illegal or void, this shall have no effect on the validity of any
other provision of the Code nor on the same provision in different cases nor on the Code as a whole, and they
shall remain effective.
3.7.2 Invalidity on Existing Buildings

If any provision of this Code is held to be illegal or void by the Authority as applied to an existing building or
structure, validity of that provision or any other provision of the Code in its application to buildings
hereafter erected shall not be affected.
3.8 ARCHITECTURAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
3.8.1 Besides enforcing the provisions of this Code for normal buildings and structures, the Building Official shall,
for special structures such as those listed in Sec 3.8.2 below, also examine the aesthetics and environmental
issues vis-a-vis the existing structures and the characteristics of the area, and exercise architectural and
environmental control in accordance with the provisions of this section.
3.8.2 Special structures for which architectural and environmental control shall be exercised by the Building
Official shall include :
a) major public building complexes,
b) buildings in the vicinity of monuments and major sculptures,
c) buildings and structures near existing structures identified to be architecturally valuable (see Sec 1.16 of
Part 3),
d) buildings and structures near historic buildings or in an area of historical or archaeological

significance,
e) buildings near any structure that represents the special characteristics of an area,
f) any proposed building or structure that represents the special characteristics or forms part of a larger
master plan of an area, and
g) any development that may have an effect on or mar the environment or characteristics of an area.
2-14
Chapter 3
3.8.3 The Authority shall, for the purpose of exercising the architectural and environmental control and for
identifying existing structures having architectural value, appoint a standing committee comprising noted
experts from the fields of Architecture, Planning, Engineering, History, Art, Literature or any other discipline
wruch may be deemed relevant. The committee shall examine the aesthetic quality of the proposed building,
structure or development and the effect it may have on the characteristics and environment of the area in order
to ensure aesthetic continuance of the new structure with the existing ones and aesthetic blendin� of the new
structure with the surroundin�s. The committee may require additional drawings and information to those
specified in Sec 3.2.3 for a detailed study of the proposed work. The committee, for the purpose of arriving at
their decision, may at their discretion depending on the magnitude of the project and the rmpact it may have on
public life, hear the architect of the proposed work who may wish to explain the various features of the
project, note comments of other experts in the relevant disciplines, or in exceptional circumstances, institute a
public hearing to assess public reaction to the project.
3.8.4 The committee may approve the proposed work, recommend changes in the scheme, or disapprove the scheme,
for reasons of aesthetics and environmental control.
3.8.5 The Building Official shall not issue permit for undertaking the proposed work until obtaining a report from
the standing committee stating that the intended work is acceptable m respect of its effect on the environment,
landscape, architectural characteristics, historical feature or any other aesthetic quality of the locality, area
or landscape concerned.
Related Appendices
Appendix A Form of First Ap plication to Develop, Erect, Demolish or to Make Alteration in any
Part of the Buildmg
Appendix B Form for Certificate of Supervision
AppendixC Form for Sanction or Refusal of Development/Building Permit
AppendixD Form forCompletionCertificate

Part 2
2-16
Appendices
APPENDIX A Form for First Application to Develop, Erect, Demolish or to Make Alteration in any Part
of the Building
APPENDIXB Form for Certificate of Supervision
APPENDIXC Form for Sanction or Refusal of Development/Building Permit
APPENDIXD Form for Completion Certificate
Part 2 2-17
Part 2
Appendix A
(Position and Address of the Building Official)
Form for First Application to Develop, Erect, Demolish or to Make
Alteration in any Part of the Building
Type of intended work: Develop D Erect D Demolish Q Alter D

(Check one)
Name of the owner:

Contact address:
Post code:
Telephone no:
Name, address and qualification of the engineer, architect or planner involved in the proposed work:
For planning:
For architectural design:
For structural design:
For civil works design:
For other services design:
Address of the site
Plot number: ------- Holding number: --------
Dag/I<hatian number: ------ Mouza/Block/Sector:
Street name: ------- Municipal ward number: ------
Documents enclosed along with this form:
Name of document Number of sheets Number of copies
1. Key plan
2. Site plan
3. Subdivision/layout plan
4. Building plan
5. Services plan
6. Specifications
7. Ownership title
Date Signature of the owner
For use of the Building Official. Do not write anything below this line.
Reference number: -.,.,.-:---------=---: Date: ------

(To be referred to in all subsequent correspondences)
Received by: -----
2-18
Appendices
Appendix B
· Form for Certificate of Supervision
Reference number: -------
Address of the site:
Plot number: ------- Holding number: ------
Street name: -------
Municipal ward number: ------
Type of intended work (Check one) :
Develop CJ Erect CJ Demolish CJ Alter e=]
Name of the owner:
Contact address:
Post code:
Telephone no:
I hereby certify that the building for which the location, the type of work, and the name and address of owner appear
above will be supervised by me as per the provisions of the Bangladesh National Building Code.
Signatur:e of the engineer, architect, planner or supervisor
Name of the engineer, architect, planner or supervisor
Address
Date

Part 2
Appendix C
(Position and Address of the Building Official)
Form for Sanction or Refusal of Development/Building Permit
Reference number: ------
In response to your application whose reference number appears above, I hereby inform that the documents submitted
along with your application have been (check as appropnate)
0 Approved for implementation by the Authority
0 Refused by the Authority for violation of the following provisions of the Bangladesh National
Building Code:
(List of the sections violated)
Signature of the Officer Permit number
Name of the Officer Official stamp
Designation Date
2-20
Appendices
Appendix D
Form for Completion Certificate
Reference number: ------
Permit number: -------
Address of the site :
Plot number: ------ Holding number: --:------
Dag/Khatian number: -------- Mouza/Block/Sector: -------
Street name: --'--- Municipal ward number: ------
Documents enclosed along with this form:
Type of work (Check one)

Develop 0 Erect CJ Demolish 0 Alter O
Name of the owner:
Contact address:
Post code:
Telephone No:
I hereby certify that the work having the above mentioned detailed particulars has been supervised by me and
completed in accordance with the plan and design approved by the permit number cited and the provisions of the .
Bangladesh National Building Code.
Signature of the engineer, architect, planner or supervisor
Name of the engineer, architect, planner or supervisor
Qualification Signature of the owner
Date Date
This part to be completed by the Building Official.
The work identified by the reference number and permit number at the top of the form is hereby accepted as complete in
accordance with the approved plan and design.
Signature of the Officer
Name of the Officer Official stamp
Designation Date

Part 2
2-22
Part 3
GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS.
CONTROL AND REGULATION
c��c!tjp�eJr Tt
General Building Requirements
C�:\:aijp;1e;r 7.
Classification of Buildings Based on Occupancy
Chatjpt<eir ;j
Classification of Building Construction Types

Based on Fire Resistance
Appendices
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 3 GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS,

CONTROL AND REGULATION
Chapter 1 General Building Requirements
1.1 SCOPE 3-1
. 1.2 TERMINOLOGY 3-1
1.3 OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS 3-2
1.4 LAND USE CLASSIFICATION AND PERMITTED USES 3-3
1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF PLOTS 3-3
1.5.1 General Requirements 3-3
1.5.2 Clearance from Overhead Electric Lines 3-3
1.5.3 Plinth and Formation Levels 3-3
1.5.4 Boundary Wall 3-3
1.5.5 Plot Sizes 3-4
'1.6 MEANS OF ACCESS 3-5
1.7 OPEN SPACES WITHIN A PLOT 3-6
1.8 GENERAL HEIGHT AND AREA LIMITATIONS 3-10
1.9 OFF STREET PARKING SPACES 3-13
1.10 STREET ENCROACHMENT 3-15
1.11 COMMUNITY OPEN SPACE AND AMENITIES 3-15
1.11.1 Community Space for a Single Tall Building 3-15
1.11.2 Community Space for a Group of Buildings in 3-15
One Plot
1.11.3 Community Open Space for Industrial Buildings 3-15
1.11.4 Community Open Space Zones in Area Layouts 3-15
1.12 REQUIREMENTS OF PARTS OF BUILDINGS 3-16
1.12.1 Plinth and Formation Levels 3-16
1.12.2 Room Dimensions 3-16
1.12.3 Kitchen 3-16
1.12.4 Bathroom and Toilets 3-16
1.12.5 Stair Case 3-17
1.12.6 Mezzanine Floor 3-18
1.12.7 Lofts 3-18
1.12.8 Cabins or Chambers 3-18
1.12.9 Store Room 3-18
1.12.10 Private Garage 3-18
1.12.11 Basement 3-18
1.12.12 Entrance to the Building 3-18
1.12.13 Roof Drainage 3-19
1.12.14 Parapet 3-19
1.12.15 Septic Tank 3-19
3-i
1.13 LANDSCAPING 3-19
1.14 DAMP-PROOFING AND WATERPROOFING OF . 3-19
FLOORS AND WALLS
1.15 EXISTING BUILDINGS 3-19

1.16 BUILDINGS AND PLACES OF HISI'ORICAL AND 3-20
ARCHITECTURAL VALUE
1.17 VENTILATION, LIGHTING AND SANITATION 3-20

1.18 AIR-CONDITIONING AND HEATING 3-21
1.19 PROVISION OF LIFTS AND ESCALATORS 3-21
1.20 SOUND INSULATION 3-21
1.21 THERMAL INSULATION 3-21
1.22 LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS 3-21
1.23 RAT PROOFING AND TERMITE PROOFING OF BUILDINGS 3-21
1.23.1 Rat Proofing 3-21
1.23.2 Termite Proofing 3-21
1.24 REQUIREMENTS FOR BUILDINGS IN FLOOD PRONE 3-23
AND COASTAL REGIONS OF BANGLADESH
1.24.1 Flood Prone Areas 3-23

1.24.2 Surge Prone Areas 3-24
Chapter 2 Classification of Buildings Based

on Occupancy
2.1 OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION 3-25

2.1.1 Occupancy A : Residential Buildings 3-26
2.1.2 Occupancy B : Educational Buildings 3-26
2.1.3 Occupancy C : Institutional Buildings 3-26
2.1.4 Occupancy D : Health Care Buildings 3-27
2.1.5 Occupancy E : Assembly Buildings 3-27
2.1.6 Occupancy F : Business and Mercantile Buildings 3-27
2.1.7 Occupancy G : Industrial Buildings 3-28
2.1.8 Occupancy H : Storage Buildings 3-28
2.1.9 Occupancy J : Hazardous Buildings 3-28
2.1.10 Occupancy K : Miscellaneous Buildings 3-29
2.2 CHANGE OF USE 3-29
2.3 MIXED OCCUPANCY 3-29
2.3.1 Nonseparated Uses 3-29
2.3.2 Forms of Occupancy Separations 3-31
2.3.3 Types of Occupancy Separation 3-31
2.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF ALL OCCUPANCIES 3-31
2.4.1 Location on Property 3-31
2.4.2 Allowable Floor areas 3-32
2.4.3 Permitted Types of Construction 3-32
3-ii
2.5 REQUIREMENTS OF OCCUPANCY A : 3-32
RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
2.5.1 Construction, Height and Allowable Area 3-32

2.5.3 Access and Exit Facilities and Emergency Escapes 3-33
2.5.4 Lighting, Ventilation and Sanitation 3-33
2.5.5 Minimum Dimensions of habitable and 3-33
Non-habitable Rooms
2.5.6 Smoke Detectors and Sprinkler Systems 3-33

2.5.7 Shaft and Exit Enclosures 3-33
2.5.8 Fire Alarm Systems 3-33
2.6 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY B : 3-33
EDUCATIONAL BUILDINGS

.
2.6.5 Minimum Dimensions of Class Rooms, 3-34
Common Toilets and Staircases

2.6.7 Sprinkler and Standpipe System 3-34
2.7 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY C : 3-34
INSTITUTIONAL BUILDINGS

2.7.2· Location on Property 3-35
2.7.4 . Lighting, Ventilation and Sanitation 3-35
2.7.6 Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems 3-35
2.8 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY D : 3-35
HEALTH CARE BUILDINGS

2.8.5 · Shaft and Exit Enclosures 3-35
2.8.6 Sprinkler and Standpipe Systenis 3-35
2.9 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY E : 3-35

ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS

3-iii
2.9.6 Smoke Detectors 3-36
2.9.9 Stage, Platform, Proscenium Wall and Curtain 3-36
2.9.10 Motion Picture Projection Rooms 3-36

2.9.11 Sports Facilities 3-37
2.9.12 Amusement building Alarm System 3-37
2.9.13 Public Address System 3-37
2.10 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY F: 3-37

BUSINESS AND MERCANTILE BUILDINGS
2.10.6 Highrise Buildings 3-38
2.10.8 Special Hazards 3-38
2.10.9 Open Parking Garages 3-39
2.10.10 Helistops 3-39
2.11 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY G: 3-39
INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
2.12 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY H: 3-40
STORAGE BUILDINGS
3-iv
2.13 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY J : 3-41
HAZARDOUS BUILDINGS
2.13.1 General 3-41
2.13.8 Explosion Control 3-45
2.14 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY K: 3-46
MISCELLANEOUS BUILDINGS
2.14.1 General 3-46
Chapter3 Classification of Building Construction

Types Based on Fire Resistance
3.1 CLASSIFICATION AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3-47

3.1.1 Classification by Type of Construction 3-47
3.1.2 Fire Zones "3-47
3.1.3 Permissible Types of Construction for 3-49
Various Occupancies
3.1.4 Exterior Walls 3-49
3.1.5 Mixed Occupancy Separation 3-49
3.1.6 Basement Floor 3-49

3.1.7 Restricting Vertical Spread of Fire 3-49
3.1.8 Exceptions to Fire Resistance Requirements 3-49
3.1.9 Shaft Enclosures 3-51

3.1.10 Expansion and Contraction Joints 3-51
3.1.11 Weather protection 3-51
3.1.12 Members Carrying Walls 3-52

3.1.13 Parapets 3-52
3.1.14 Projections 3-52
3.1.15 Guardrails and Barriers 3-52

3.1.16 Insulation 3-52
3.1.17 Atria 3-52
3.1.18 Mezzanine Floors 3-53
3-v
3.2 REQillREMENTS OF TYPE 1 FIRE-RESISTIVE BUILDINGS 3-53
3.2.1 General 3-53
3.2.2 Exterior Wall 3-53

3.2.3 Structural Frame 3-53
3.2.4 Floor Construction 3-53
3.2.5 Stairway Construction 3-53
3.2.6 Roof Construction 3-53
3.3 REQillREMENTS FOR TYPE 2 FIRE-RESISTIVE BUILDINGS 3-54
3.3.1 General 3-54
3.3.2 Exterior Wall and Openings 3-54

3.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR TYPE 3 FIRE-RESISTIVE BUILDINGS 3-54

3.4.1 General 3-54
3.4.2 Exterior Wall 3-54

Appendices
Appendix A Guidelines for the Development of Minimum 3-58

Standard Housing (Occupancy A4)
' AppendixB Suggestive Typical Termite Proof Constructions 3-61
and Preconstructional Measures
3-vi
CHAPTER l]
General Building Requiretnents
1.1 SCOPE
This part of the Code puts forward classification of buildings based on occupancy or nature of use and deals
with the general and specific requirements of each of the occupancy groups. Fire resistance requirements are
expressed in terms of type of construction which shall conform with the specified fire-resistive properties.
1.2 TERMINOLOGY
of any conflict or contradiction between a definition given in thi s section and that in Part 1, the meaning
provided in this part shall govern for interpretation of the provisions of this part.
AREA PLANNING AUTHORITY : A government or semi-government a �ency or a local body which has
been legally designated to formulate land use or plans of the area under their jurisdiction.
BALCONY : A portion of the seatin� space in an assembly room the lowest of which is at least 1.2 m above
the level of the main floor and shall mdude the area providing access to the seating area or serving only as a
foyer.
BALUSTER : A short vertical member to support guard rails.
BALUSTRADE : A row of balusters meant for supporting handrails.
BASEMENT : A floor level below the first storey ii1 a building, except that a floor level in a building having
only one floor level shall be classified as a basement unless such floor level qualifies as a first storey as
defined in Part 1.
BUILDING LINE : The line up to which the plinth of a building may lawfully extend.
CITY DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY : A government or semi-government agency or a local body which has
been legally designated to carry out and/or control development works of the area under its jurisdiction.
Part3 3-1
General Building Requinnents, Control and Regulation
Part3
General Building Requirments, Control and Regulation
FAR : Abbreviation for Floor Area Ratio. Measured as the ratio of total covered area of all floors of a
building to the area of the plot on which the building is erected or intended to be erected.
FIRE SEPARATION DISTANCE : The minimum distance to be maintained from considerations of fire safety
between a building and any other building on the site, or from other site, or from the opposite side of a
street or other public space.
FRONT AGE : Length of the side of a plot facing the street. There may be more than one frontages
depending on the location of a plot with respect to the street. (See Fig 3.1.1 for definition of front, side and
rear of a plot). .
GALLERY : An intermediate floor or platform projecting from a wall of an auditorium or a hall providing
extra floor area or additional seating accommodation.
PLOT :· A piece or parcel of land on which a building is intended to be or has already been constructed.
STRUCTURAL FRAME : Columns, girders, beams, trusses and spandrels which have direct connections
with the columns and all other members which are essential to the stability of the building or structure as a
whole.
TERRACE :A level paved area or floor on or adjacent to a building usually open to the sky.
VERANDAH : A covered area with at least one side open to the outside.
1.3 OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS
Every building or portion thereof shall be classified according to its use or character of occupancy. A brief
description orsudi occupancy groups is presented in Table 3.1.1. Details of each Occupancy and its sub
divisions are set forth in Sec 2.1. Occupancy A4 (Minimum Standard Housing) is descrioed in Appendix A.
Types of construction based on fire resistance are specified in Table 3.1.2. Details of such types of
construction are set forth in Sec 3.1. ·
Table 3.1.1
Summary of Occupancy Classification
(Details in Sec 2.1. Details of Occupancy A4 in Appendix A)
Occupancy type Sub-division Nature of use or occupancy

A: Residential Al Detached single family dwelling
A2 Flats or apartments
A3 Mess, boarding houses, dormitories and hostels
A4 Minimum standard housing
AS Hotels and lod_ging houses
B: Educational Bl Educational facilities
82 Preschool facilities
C: Institutional Cl Institutions for care of children
C2 Custodial institutions for physically capable
C3 Custodial institutions for physically incapable or handicapped
C4 Penal and mental institutions
D: Health Care Dl Normal medical facilities
D2 Emergency medical facilities
E: Assembly El Large assembly with fixed seats
E2 Small assembly with fixed seats
E3 Large assembly without fixed seats
E4 Small assemblywithout fixed seats
ES Sports facilities
F: Business and Fl Offices
Mercantile F2 Small shops and markets
F3 Large shops and markets
F4 Garages and petrol stations
FS Essential services
G: Industrial Gl Low hazard industries
G2 Moderate hazard industries
H: Storage Hl Low fire risk storage
H2 Moderate fire risk storage
J: Hazardous J1 Explosion hazard building
J2 Chemical biological or radiation hazard building
K: Miscellaneous Kl Private garages and special structures
K2 Fences, tanks and towers
3-2
Chapter!
Table3.1.2
Classification of Buildings Based on Types of Construction
(Details in Sec 3.1)
TyJ.'e Description
1 Hi hest degree of fire resistance
�
2 Mo erate degree of fire resistance
3 Lowest degree of fire resistance
1.4 LAND USE CLASSIFICATION AND PERMITTED USES
Every city, township, municipality or other development shall be divided into zones according to the
intended land use pattern by the development and planning authorities and approved by the Government.
This land use classification may divide an area into zones such as residential, commercial, industrial,
storage, green park etc. or any combination of these. The land use zones shall be shown on the approved
master plan of the area and the permitted occupancy classes for each zone clearly stated in the planning
regulations. The Occupancy classes permitted in any zone shall be one or more of the Types of Occupancy
defined in Sec 2.1.
1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF PLOTS
1.5.1 General Requirements

1.5.1.1 No building shall be constructed on any site which is water logged, or on any part of which is
deposited refuse, excreta or other objectionable material, until such site has been effectively drained and
cleared to the satisfaction of the Authority.
1.5.1.2 Provision shall be kept for any space within the plot left vacant after the erection of the building to
be effectively drained by means of surface or undergrouna drainage system.
15
. 1
. 3
. Basic minimum sanitary waste and excreta disposal facility shall be created on the premises, unless
the plot is served by a disposal system provided by any utility serv1ce authority or agency.
15
. 1
. 4
. Written approval of the Authority or the appropriate drainage and sanitation authority shall be
obtained for connecting any soil or surface water drain to the sewer line. ·
1.5.2 Clearance from Overhead Electric Lines

No building or any part thereof shall be erected within, nor any auxiliary part of the building be allowed to
come closer than, the distances shown in Table 3.1.3 from any overhead electric line.
Table 3.1.3
Minimum Distances from Overhead Electric Lines
Line Voltage Vertically Horizontally

(m) (m)
Low to medium voltage lines and service lines 2.5 1.25
High voltage lines up to 33 kV 3.5 1.75
High voltage lines beyond 33 kV 3.5 plus 1.75 plus

0.3 for each 0.3 for each
additional 33 kV or additional 33 kV or
part thereof. part thereof.
1.5.3 Plinth and Formation Levels

The formation level of the plot shall not be lower than the adjacent road level. In areas not susceptible to
flood, the formation level shall not be higher than 450 mm from the surface level of the centre line of the
adjacent front road. For flood prone and uneven or undulated areas the permitted height of the formation
level shall be decided by the Authority considering the general characteristics of the terrain and future
development lans. The plinth or ground floor level of the building shall be at least 450 mm above the
f
surface level o the centre line of the adjacent front road.
1.5.4 Boundary Wall

Solid boundary walls surrounding a plot not higher than 1.5 m and open boundary walls made of grill, jali
(screen), balustrade etc. with a maximum height of 2.75 m shall not require the permission of the Authority.
For boundary walls made of a combination of solid wall and open gnU or jali, the solid wall portion shall
not be higher than 1.5 m. The Authority may, on specific apphcation, permit the use of higher boundary
walls.

Part3
1. 5.5 Plot Sizes

1.5.5.1 Residential Plots
a) The minimum size of the plot shall be 65 m2•
b) Corresponding to each type of residential development the sizes of the plots and the corresponding
minimum widths of road frontage of the plots shalf be as specified in Table 3.1.4, provided that:
i) plots accessible by link roads shall be considered to have a frontage equal to its width, and
ii) plots of irregular shape abutting the road shall be considered to have a frontage equal to their
average width parallel to the road.
Table31. 4
.
Plot Sizes and Corresponding Minimum Frontages for Various Types of
Residential Development .
Type of Residential Development Plot Size (m2) Minimum

Frontage (m)
Approved ro� type houses 65 (Minimum size) 4.5
Over 65 to135 7
Detached houses 65 (Minimum size) 5.5

"
Over 65 to135 7
"
Over135 to200 8
"
Over200 to265 10
"
Over265 Above10
Semi-detached houses 135 (Minimum size) 7

"
Over135 to200 8
"
Over200 to265 10
"
Over265 Above10
c) The limitations of plot sizes and frontages imposed in (a) and (b) above may be waived for approved
low income housing including site and service schemes. Guidelines governing the planning ana design
of such housing are given in Appendix A.
d) The minimum size of the plot for a group housing development scheme and other special requirements ·
for group housing developments snail oe as specified or approved by the respective city development
autfiority.
e) Common private road or family road serving not more than four plots shall be at least 2.5 m wide.
Open space requirements and height and area limitations of buildings on such plots shall be decided in
view of the nearest public road.
f) Common private road or family road serving more than four plots shall be at least 3.5 m wide.
Notwithstanding any other requirement for front open space, a residential building may be permitted
to be constructed at a minimum distance of 1.5 m from the front property line of such plots.
1.5.5.2 Plots for Educational Buildings : The minimum size of plot for educational buildings shall be
�
based on occupant capaci and shall be at the rate of 4 m2 per pupil or occupant. In no case shall the size of
the plot be less than200 m .
1.5.5.3 Plots for Assembly Halls, Thea tres, Cinema : The minimum size of plot for assembly halls,
theatres, cinema halls and other similar buildings where people gather for entertainment or other public
functions shall be based on the seating capacity of the building and shall be at the rate of 3 m2 per seat.
15
. 5
. 4
. Plots for Community Centres : The size of plot for rural or urban community centres shall be not
less than1300 m2 and commensurate with the size of the community.
·
15
. 5
. 5
. Business and Mercantile Plots : The minimum size of a business and mercantile plot shall be
200 m2 and its road frontage width shall not be less than10 m.
1.5.5.6 Industrial Plots : The minimum size of an industrial plot shall be 300 m2 and its road frontage
width shall not be less than15 m.
15
. 5
. 7
. Petrol Filling Stations:The minimum size of the plot for a petrol filling station without service bay
or repair workshop shall be 500 m2 and its road frontage width shall not be less than 30 m. The minimum
size of the plot for a petrol filling station with service bay but without repair workshop shall be 1100 m2 and
its road frontage width shall not be less than 30 m.
3-4
Chapterl
1.5.5.8 Plots for Other Uses : The minimum sizes of plots for buildinss for uses other than those
mentioned in 1.5.5.1 to 1.5.5.7 shall be as determined by the Authority for specific areas.
1.6 MEANS OF ACCESS
1.6.1 All buildings and plots shall be approachable by a public or private road or street or an approved means of
access.
1.6.2 Residential Plots

Public roads or means of access on which a residential plot abuts shall satisfy the minimum width
requirements depending on the type of development and plot size s ecified in Table 3.1.5. Minimum widths
r
of common private road or family road shall be as specified in 1.5.5. (e) and (f).
Table 3.1.5
Minimum Widths of Public Means of Access to Residential Plots
Type of Development Plot Size Minimum Width of Access Road (m)

(m2) Ex:isting1 New2
Development Development
Approve �. row Type 65 (minimum size) 3.0 4.5
Over 65 to 135 3.5 4.5
Detached 65 (minimum size) 2.5 4.75

"
Over 65 to 135 2.5 6.0
"
Over 135 to ZOO 2.5 7.5
"
Over200 to265 2.5 9.0
"
Over265 Over 3.0 Over9.0
Semi-detached 135 (minimum size) 2.5 6.0

"
Over 135 to200 2.5 7.5
"
Over200 to265 2.5 9.0
"
Over265 Over 3.0 Over9.0
Note:
1. Existing Development - Any approved residential development already in existence on the date of
promulgation of this Code, with roads and streets for which the area planning authority does not have
any scheme for future widening
2. New Development- Any new residential development implemented subsequent to the promulgation of
this Code
1.6.3 Assembly buildings

For Assembly buildings such as cinema halls, theatres, halls for wedding receptions etc. where large crowds
are likely to assemble, the width of the approach road shall not be less than 15 m.
1.6.4 Other Buildings ·
The width of the approach road for all plots other than residential and assembly shall be not less than9 m.
1.6.5 Internal Roads

1.6.5.1 The width of internal roads and drive ways in a plot shall be decided.by the number of buildings
served. For internal roads on residential plots the provisions of Sec 1.5.5.1 (e) and (f) shall apply. For plots
other than residential the width of internal roads and driveways shall be not less than 7 m. The permissible
maximum length of internal roads for non-residential plots shall depend on their widths and shall be as
specified in Taole 3.1.6.
Table3.1.6
Maximum Permissible Length of Internal Roads in Non-Residential Plots
Width Maximum Permissible

(m) Len�th (m)
7 80
8 150
9 300
10 or over Unlimited
1.6.5.2 The internal roads in all types of plots shall be set back not less than 250 mm from the boundary
wall/ property line and the building.
1.6.6 Pedestrian Walkways

1.6.6.1 The exterior pedestrian walkway that links buildings and the approach road shall not contribute to
the building area.

Part3
1.6.6.2 The walkway shall not be used for any purpose other than pedestrian movement.
1.6.6.3 The minimum width of the walkway shall be 1.0 m provided the walkway is not enclosed by
adjacent walls on both sides, otherwise the minimum width shalf be 1.25 m.
1.6.6.4 Pedestrian walkways for access to different dwelling units in one or two-storeyed low income row
or cluster housing schemes or site and service facilities shall be at least 3 m wide, subject to the condition
that the height of the building shall not exceed two times the sum of the width of the walkway abutting and
the front open space. The pedestrian walkway of 3 m width shall serve a maximum of 10 plots on each side
of the walk:way. The length of such walkway shall be limited to 60 m.
1.7 OPEN SPACES WITHIN A PLOT
1.7.1 For the purpose of applying the provisions of open space requirements, the side, rear and front of a plot
shall be i:lefin�d as shown in Fig 3.1.1 depending on the layout of roads around the plot.
1.7.2 At least one side of all habitable rooms shall be exposed to an exterior or an interior open space or to a
balcony or verandah.
1.7.3 The total open area in a plot on which a building of educational, institutional, health care or assembly
occupancy 1s constructed sball not be less than 50 per cent of the plot area.
1.7.4 The total open area in a plot on which a building of residential, industrial, storage, hazardous or
miscellaneous occupancy is constructed shall not be less than 33 per cent of the plot area.
1.7.5 For the purpose of Sec 1.7.3 and 1.7.4, the total open area shall include all exterior open spaces and interior
courtyards,out exclude the area of any lighting and ventilation shaft. .
1.7.6 For approved low income row type or cluster housing or site and service schemes, the requirement of 1.7.3
maY' be relaxed by the Authority taking into consideration the density of occupancy, widtb of the approach
road, fire safety and general lighting and ventilation (see Appendix A).
1.7.7 The total open area requirement for plots on which buildin�s of business and mercantile occupancy are
constructed shall be as decided by the Authority for specific c1ty, municipality, township or area taking into
consideration fire safety, hei�ht of the building, parking facilities, occupancy load, abuttmg road widths and
general lighting and ventilation.
1.7.8 Separation of Buildings in the Same Plot

For more than one building in the same plot, a minimum separation of 2 m between the buildings shall be
maintained if the heights of both the adjacent buildings are not more than 8 m nor two storeys. If the height
of either of the adjacent buildings in the same plot is more than 8 m or two storeys, mandatory open spaces
between the buildings as specified in Fig 3.1.2 (a) to (c) and in the following shall be maintained:
a) For grid iron layouts such as those shown in Fig 3.1.2 (a), the end to end o en space between the
r
buildings shall not be less than 2 m. The open space betweeri the longer sides o the ouildings shall not
be less than 0.5 times the height of the shielding building on the soutn or the east.
b) For staggered layouts such as those shown in Fig 3.1.2 (b), the open space between �he longer sides of
the buildings shall not be less than 0.4 times the height of the shieldmg building on the south or the
ea�t, � rovid�d that at least 0.33 times the length of the shielded builoing is left unshielded by the
.
shielding bulldmg.
·
c) For front to end layouts such as those shown in Fig 3.1.2 (c), the open space between the buildings shall
not be less than 3 m, provided that the width of the shielding buildins on the south or the east is not
more than 0.33 times the length of the shielded building. When the w1dth of the shielding building is
more than 0.33 times but less than 0.67 times the length of the shielded building, the open space
between the buildings shall be at least 0.4 times the heignt of the shielding building; otherwise the open
space between the &uildings shall be at least 0.5 times the height of tne shielding building. For the
purpose of this requirement the width of the shielding building shall be taken as that portion of its
wicfth which actually shields the other building, or the aggregate of such widths of all shielding
buildings, as the case may be.
1.7.9 Road Front Open Space for All Buildings

1.7.9.1 All buildings facing a street and having a height not more than 17 m or five storeys shall be
constructed at a distance of at least 4.5 m from the centre of the street or at least 1.5 m from the road front
property line whichever is greater.
1.7.9.2 All buildings facing a street and having a height more than 17m or 5 storeys shall be constructed at
a distance of at least 4.5 m from the centre of the street or at least 2 m from the road front property line
whichever is greater.
3-6
Chapterl
s s
s
R R
( a) (b) (c)
(d) (e)
(f) (g)
(h) (i)
Legend F Front. S Side, R Rear
Fig. 3.1.1 Definition of Front, Side and Rear of a Plot
Bangladesh National Building Code

3-7
Part3
[Y
Shielded Building
Shielding Building on the

East. Height ' H
_1
0.5H
T Ill I.______. T
Min 2m
Z:::
South. Height ' H
ng on the
DO
( a) Grid Iron Layouts
Shielded Building
� :
!E----L�
T
Shl lded Building
l
--j I- Min 0.4H
1
Min 0.33l
~...: .. ··�;, � ...

South. Height ' H
--1 1-
Shielding Building
on the East. Height ' H
Min .0.4H
(b) Staggered Layouts
Shielded Building
Shielded Building
u=J IMax
fJ
0.33l
Shielding Building
on the South
L: : S
on
Idln Buildlng
the East
Max
--1 1--
0.33l
( c) Front to End Layouts
Fig. 3.1.2 Open Space Requirements Between Adjacent

Buildings in the Same Plot in Defferent Layouts
3-8
Chapterl
1.7.9.3 In case a building abuts two or more roads, the road front open space requirement specified in
Sec 1.7.9.1 and 1.7.9.2 shallbe applicable to all the road fronts of the plot (see Fig 3.1.1).
Side and Rear Open Spaces

·
1.7.10 ·
1.7.10.1 The minimum side and rear open space requirements of a plot for buildings of various occupancy
classes shall be as specified in Table 3.1.7.
1.7.10.2 For approved row type residential, commercial or other buildings as may be permitted by the
respective city or area development authority and for approved low income row type, cluster or site and
service schemes, the requirement of side open space may be waived.
. .
1.7.10.3 For semidetached buildings approved by the city or area development authority, which are
permitted to be constructed with one side on the property hne, the minimum requirements of open space,
specified in Sec 1.7.9, 1.7.10.1 and 1.7.10.2, for the side opposite to that property line shall be increased by
0.5 m. The requirement of open space for the remaining sii:ies shall remain unchanged.
Table3.1.7
Minimum Rear and Side Open Space Requirements of a Plot
Plot Size Minimum Minimum

Occupancy (m2) Rear Open Side Open
s ace
rr s ace
rr
m) m)
Residential (Not higher than 10 Not over 135 1.25 Nil
storeys or 33 m) Over 135 to 200 1.5 1.25
Over 200 to 265 1.75 1.25
Over 265 to 330 2.5 1.25
See Note below Over 330 to 660 3.0 1.25
Over 660 4.0 1.25
Residential (Higher than 10 storeys or

33 m) Any 4.0 3.0
Business and Mercantile

(Not higher than 10 storeys or 33 m) Any 1.5 1.5
Business and Mercantile (Higher than

10 storeys or 33 m) ·Any 2.0 2.0
Educational, Institutional, Health

Care, Assembly, Industrial, Any 3.0 3.0
Storage and Hazardous
Note: For residential buildings not higher than 10 storeys or 33 m, if the rear property line of the plot is
curved or not a continuous straight line or not parallel with the building, the minimum rear open
space requirement shall apply to the average distance of the rear property line from the building, but
at no point shall the distance be less than 1.25 m.
1.7.11 Interior Courtyard ·
1.7.11.1 If any room depends entirely on an interior open space for its natural light and ventilation, such
interior ol'en space shall be in the form of an interior courtyard open to the sky over its entire cross-section.
The intenor courtyard shall have the minimum dimensions depending on the height of the building as
specified in Table 3.1.8. The shorter side dimension of such interior courtyard shall not be less than one-third
of the longer side dimension.
For buildin�s over 20 storeys high, the size of the interior courtyard shall not be less than the square of one
third the he1ght of the tallest wall abutting the courtyard.
1.7.11.2 The courtyard shall not be interrupted by any form of construction at the courtyard level, except
landscaping, sculpture etc.
1.7.11.3 If the courtyard is to serve as a component of the means of escape, it shall be accessible from all exit
points at ground level.
1.7.12 Permitted Construction in the Mandatory Open Space

1.7.12.1 No construction except landscaping, sculpture etc. shall be permitted in the interior courtyard.
1.7.12.2 A maximum of one-third of the mandatory exterior open space in a plot required by the provisions
of Sec 1.7.9 and 1.7.10 may be used for construction of garage, servants' quarter and other services auxiliary
to and required for the main occupancy of the building, provided that the building is not higher than 10
storeys or 32m, and provided furtner that conditions (a) to (g) below are satisfied:

Part3
a) No such construction permitted in the mandatory open space shall be higher than 2.75 m from the
formation level of the plot, except for the tops of inverted oeams or intermittent parapets, which may
rise up to 3.25 m.
b) No window, door or ventilator shall be placed on any wall adjacent to the abutting property or street.
c) Entrance to the garage shall not be directly from the road. A minimum distance of 1.5 m shall be kept
between the entrance to the garage and the property line adjoining the road.
_
d) Drainage from the roof or any other part of such construction shall not be allowed to discharge into the
adjacent property. Drainage from any part shall not discharge directly into the street through spouts.
e) No structure or room shall be constructed over the garage or any other permitted service structure
within the limits of the mandatory open space.
f) The roof of any construction permitted in the mandatory open space shall not be used as a balcony or a
terrace or in any such manner that would interfere with the privacy of the occupants of the adJacent
property.
g) No toilet shall be constructed adjoining the abutting property or street.
Table 3.1.8
Minimum Area of Interior Courtyard
No. of Storeys Maximum Height. Minimum Net Area of the Interior

(m) Courtyard, m2
Up to 3 11 9
4 14 16
5 17 25
6 20 36
7 23 49
8 26 64
9 29 81
10 32 100
11 36 121
12-13 42 144
14-15 48 196
16-17 54 256
18-20 63 361
1.7.12.3 Roof or cornice of the building may be extended into the mandatory open space . for a maximum
distance of 0.5 m. The construction onhe roof shall be such that rain or other water from the roof is not
drained into the neighbouring property or street.
1.7.12.4 SWlShades over exterior doors or windows of the building may extend into the mandatory open
space for a maximum distance of 0.75 m, provided that such sunshades are at least 2.5 m above the
formation level of the ground.
1.7.12.5 Cantilever canopy at a clear height of at least 2.5 m above the formation level may project into the
mandatory open space provided that a clearance of at least 1.5 m is maintained between the edge of the
canopY. and the proper !)' line. The top of such canopy shall not be used as a balcony and shall not be
access1ble from tll.e buildmg.
1.7.12.6 Balconies at levels higher than 6 m may project into the mandatory open space by not more than
0.9 m provided that a clearance of at least 1.5 m is maintained between the eage of the balcony and the
property line.
1.7.12.7 Underground constructions such as water reservoirs, septic tanks, inspection pits, sewer lines etc.
shall be permitted in the mandatory open space provided that no part of sud\ construction projects more
than 150 mm above the formation level.
1.8 GENERAL HEIGHT AND AREA LIMITATIONS
1.8.1 Not withstanding the requirements of open spaces and the height limitations specified in Sec 1.7, the
maximum permissible height and area of a building shall not be more than the provisions of Sec 1.8.2 and
1.8.3.
1.8.2 Height Limitations Based on Road Width

1.8.2.1 The maximum height of any building of Type 1 construction shall not exceed the nominal value of
two times the sum of the width of the front road and the front open space (distance between the front
3-10
Chapterl
property line and the building). For the purpose of fulfilling this requirement, the height limitations
specified in Table 3.1.9 shall apply.
1.8.2.2 For plots having front road width not less than 23 m in an approved residential or business and
mercantile area, there shall be no restriction on height for residential ana business & mercantile buildings of
Type 1 construction, provided the minimum open space requirements specified in Table 3.1.10 are satisfted.
1.8.2.3 For Type 2 construction, the maximum permissible height of the building shall be 4 storeys or 14 m
for values of two times the sum of the width of the front road and the front open space not less than 13.6 m.
1.8.2.4 For Type 3 construction, the maximum permissible height of the building shall be 3 storeys or 11 m
for values of two times the sum of the width of tfie front road and the front open space notless than 13.6 m.
1.8.2.5 For applying the provisions of Sec 1.8.2.1 through 1.8.2.4, the width of the front road for the layouts
shown in Fig 3.1.1 (b), (c), (d), (e) and (f) where the plot abuts more than one road, shall be taken as the
average of tne widths of the abutting roads.
Table 3.1.9
Height Limitations Based on Road Width and Front Open Space
Maximum Permissible Height

2 times (Front Road Width
Plus Front Open Space) Type1 Type2 Type 3 131
No. of Height No.ot Hetght No.ot Height
storeys (m) storeys (m) storeys (m)
Below 10.6 m 3 11 2 8 2 8
10.6 m to below 13.6 m 4 14 3 11 2 8
13.6 m to below 16.6 m 5 17 4 14 3 11
16.6 m to below 19.6 m 6 20 4 14 3 11
19.6 m to below 22.6 m 7 23 4 14 3 11
22.6 m to below 25.6 m 8 26 4 14 3 11
25.6 m to below 28.6 m 9 29 4 14 3 11
28.6 m to below 31.6 m 10 32 4 14 3 11
31.6 m to below 34.6 m 11 36 4 14 3 11
34.6 m to below 37.6 m 12 39 4 14 3 11
37.6 m to below 40.6 m 13 42 4 14 3 11
40.6 m to below 43.6 m 14 45 4 14 3 11
43.6 m to below 46.6 m 15 48 4 14 3 11
and so on in increments of 3 m
Note:
1. For plots with front road width (Sec 1.8.2.5) not less than 23 m, residential and business & mercantile
buildings of Type 1 construction shall have no height restriction subject to additional open space
requirements (Sec 1.8.2.2).
2. The maximum permissible height for Type 2 construction is 4 storeys or 14m (Sec 1.8.2.3)
3. The maximum permissible height for Type 3 construction is 3 storeys or 11 m (Sec 1.8.2.4)
1.8.2.6 For buildings more than six storeys or 20 m high, the following arrangements shall be provided :
a) Lifts of adequate size, capacity and number (See Chap 5, Part 8);
b) Adequate fire protection and fire fighting arrangements (See Part 4);
c) Separate emergency fire escape stair.
Table 3.1.10
Minimum Open Space Requirements for Buildings of Unlimited Height and Area
(Sec 1.8.2.2 and 1.8.3.5 )
Occupancy Minimum Open S 'ace

Front Rear Side
(m) (m) (m)
Residential 4.0 6.0 4.0
Business and Mercantile 6.0 6.0 6.0

or other
1.8.2.7 For buildings in the vicinity of airports or aerodromes, the height shall be limited by the
requirements of the civil aviation authority, city or area development authority or other concerned agencies
of the Government.

Part3
1.8.3 Area Limitations Based on FAR

1.8.3.1 The limiting total building area for different classes of Occupancy and Types of construction shall
be based on the maximum permissible floor area ratio (FAR). For the purpose ofthis section, FAR shall be
calculated as the total floor area of the building in all the storeys dividea by the area of the plot.
1.8.3.2 The maximum permissible values of FAR for different classes of Occupancy and Types of
construction shall be as specified inTable3.1.11.
1.8.3.3 TheFAR values specified inTable3.1.11 are based on the following considerations:
a) that the approach roads to the plots do not sufferfrom traffic congestion problems of a serious nature;
b) that the use of the plot as well as that of the others in the area conform with the land use classification
indicated in the master plan;
c) that adequate off street car parking facilities are created in conformity with the provisions of thisCode;
d) that adequate utility services such as gas, electricity, water supply, drainage etc. are provided in
accordance with the requirements of thisCode;
e) that fire fighting facilities are available locally so that the fire brigade is able to arrive within half an
hour of adistress call; and
Table 3.1.11
Maximum Permissible Floor Area Ratios (FAR)
Occupancy Type of Construction

Type1 Type2 Type3
Occupancy A: Residential A1 3.0 2.0 1.5
A2 UL 2.0 1.5
A3 UL 2.0 1.5
A4 4.5 3.0 1.5
AS UL 2.0 1.5
OccupancyB: Educational 81 2.5 1.5 0.5

82 2.0 1.5 0.5
OccupancyC: Institutional C1 3.0 1.5 0.5

C2 3.0 1.5 0.5
C3 3.0 1.5 0.5
C4 UL NP NP
OccupancyD: HealthCare D1 6.0 1.5 1.0

D2 4.0 NP NP
OccupancyE: Assembly E1 3.5 1.0 0.5

E2 3.5 1.0 0.5
E3 3.5 1.0 0.5
E4 3.5 1.0 0.5
ES 3.5 0.5 0.25
OccupancyF: Business and

mercantile
F1 UL 2.0 1.5
F2 4.0 1.5 1.0
F3 UL 2.0 1.5
F4 6.0 1.5 1.0
FS 3.0 NP NP
OccupancyG: Industrial Gl 7.5 1.5 1.0

G2 5.0 1.5 1.0
OccupancyH : Storage Hl 6.0 1.5 1.0

H2 4.0 1.0 0.5
OccupancyJ : Hazardous Jl 3.0 NP NP

j2 2.0 NP NP
Note: UL: Unlimited, NP: Not permitted
For occupancy classification of buildings, see Sec 2.1
For classification based on type of construction, see Sec 3.1
3-12
Chapter 1
.
f) that adequate fi re protection measures are provided in the building in accordance with the
requirements of this Code for the Occupanc y class and Type of construction of the building.
1.8.3.4 The values of FAR specified in Table 3.1.11 shall be applicable in general, unless the city or area
. development authority s pecifies different values of FAR for a particular zone or area with the approval of
the Authority. In specifymg any deviation in FAR from Table 3.1.11, the city or area development authority
shall take into consideration the following :
a) Occupancy group,
b) Type of construction,
c) Width of approach roads,
d) Traffic density in the approach roads,
e) Population density of tne area,
f) Parking facilities,
g) Utility services,
n ) Local fire fighting facilities.
1.8.3.5 For OccuP-ancy for which unlimited area is permitted by Table 3.1.11, the minimum open space
requirements specified in Table 3.1.10 shall be applicable.
1.8.3.6 For the purpose of calculating FAR, the area of any floor including basement, of which at least two
third is used exclusively for car parking and the remaining one-third is used for purposes such as
mechanical plant room, electrical substation, security cabin, reception booth, water tank, pump house, stairs
and lifts, which are accessory to the main occupancy, shall be excluded from the total floor area of the
building.
1.8.4 The height limitations imposed in Sec 1.8.2 (Table 3.1.9) can be exceeded for stepped tower structures if the
area limitations imposed by the FAR requirements of Sec 1.8.3 are not exceecfed, provided the following
conditions are satisfied :
a) the building is of Type 1 construction;
b) the front road width is at least 9 m;
c) local conditions or regulations do not restrict the height (Sec 1.8.2.7);
d) the minimum ground level open spaces of Table 3.1.10 are maintained as for buildings of unlimited
height;
e) every part of the building is contained within the envelope shown in Fig 3.1.3, which is a volume
bounded by vertical sides at required distances from the pro perty line up to the height limited by the
requirements of Sec 1.8.2, topped by a pyramid with sides mclmed at 2 vertical to 1 horizontal.
1.9 OFF STREET PARKING SPACES
1.9.1 Every building shall be provided with adequate arrangements for entrance, exit, loading, unloading and
parkmg of vehicles. The parking spaces can be either covered or open.
1.9.2 Ramps, if provided, shall have a grade not steeper than 1 vertical to 8 horizontal.
1.9.3 The parking space shall be provided either within the building or adjacent to it within the plot.
1.9.4 A 23 m2 space shall be allotted for parking of each car. The number of parking spaces required shall be
based on the total floor area of the building and shall depend on its occupancy. Parking spaces shall be
provided for various occupancies at the following minimum rates :
Occupancy Parking Requirement

A. Residential (A 1 & A2) 1 car for every 300 mL
(AS) 1 car fQr every 200 m2
"
B. Educational 1 car for every 200 m2

c. Institutional 1 car for every 300 m2
D. Health Care 1 car for every 300 m2
E. Assembly 1 car for every 20 occupants or 100 m2
F. Business and Mercantile (F 1 ) 1 car for every 200 m2
(FS) 1 car for every 100 m2
"
G. Industrial 1 car for every 300 m2

H. Storage 1 car for every 25 occupants
J. Hazardous 1 car for every 25 occupants

Part 3
Stepped tower structure shall be contained

within this pyramid formed by four faces
having a slope of 2V:1H
1\
I
;fl-.
I'\\ '
\
Height limit Imposed by
Sec 1.8.2 !Table 3.1.9)
�
__L :
J=W He1ght lim1t imposed by
Sec 1.8.2 IT able 3.1.9)
I'
.j.
Building exterior line, as may i
be selected by the architect :
f----- I
i
I I
.. ---
contained within the I I

envelope
I I
I I
I
I I Minimum rear and

s1de open space
required by
I I Table 3.1.8.
Road (Minimum Width 9m}
I I
Property line
r
-
Minimum rear and side

open space required
by Table 3.1.8.
\_ Minimum front open
required by Table
space
3.1.8.
Vertical Section Perspective View
Fig. 3.1.3 Limiting Envelope for Stepped Tower Structures
1.9.5 For storage and industrial buildings, required space for loading and unloading of at least one truck/lorry
shall be provided.
1.9.6 When administrative or sales offices are located in the industrial premises, parking space for one car for
every 300 m2 of the office area shall be provided in the premises.
1.9.7 For residential buildings with front road width not less than 9 m, the parking space requirements may be
reduced or waived provided the road is not too busy to preclude on street parking. The city or area
development authority shall earmark all such streets where gn street parking for adjacent residential
property is not permitted.
1.9.8 In planned commercial developments, where separate car parking facilities are available, the parking space
requirements of neighbouring buildings may be reduced or waived. The city or area development authority
shall have all such commercial areas and commercial plots identified in the master plan.
1.9.9 In areas other than metropolitan cities, the city or area development authority may waive or alter the
minimum parking requirements with the approval of the Authority.
·
3-14
Chapter 1
1.10 STREET ENCROACHMENT
No part of any building shall project beyond the property line or building line established by the provisions
of tnis Code into the street, except the following :
a) Below Grade : The footing of the boundary wall adjacent to the street may encroach the street land not
more than 0.3 m at least 1.5 m below grade.
b) Above Grade : Marquee, canopy or other temporary projection of cantilever type from buildings of
business and mercantife occupancy may project on the footpath of a road, provided that no part of such
projection is below a height of 3 m from the footpath level and that the outer edge of the canopy is at a
minimum clear horizontal distance of 0.25 m from the road side edge of the footpath. The canopy shall
be so constructed as to be readily removable without endangering the building structure. No canopy
shall project into a street without a footpath.
Lll COMMUNITY OPEN SPACE AND AMENITIES
1.11.1 Community Space for a Single Tall Building

For all residential or residential-cum-business buildings having ten or more storeys, community space at the
rate of 5% of the total floor area shall be provided either within the building or outside within the premises
solely for use of the occupants of the building. Roofs of such buildings shall not be considered as community
open spaces. For residential or residential-cum-business plots measuring more than 0.1 hectare, 10% of the
area of land shall be left vacant to be used as children's playground. Tli.is playground shall be contiguous
and shall have a length not exceeding 2.5 times its width. The playground may extend into the mandatory
open space of the plot.
1.11.2 Community Space for a Group of Buildings in One Plot

1.11.2.1 For all plots on which more than one residential or residential-cum-business buildings are
constructed, community space at the rate of 5% of the total floor area of all the buildings shall be provided
either within the buildings or outside within the premises. Roofs of such buildings shall not be cons1dered as
community open spaces.
1.11.2.2 A single storeyed structure such as a pavilion not exceeding 25 m 2 in area shall be permitted to be
constructed in such community spaces, which area shall be excluded from the FAR calculations. No toilet
block shall be permitted in such a structure.
1.11.2.3 Each community area or the structure built thereon shall be accessible either directly from each
building on the plot or by an independent means of access.
1.11.2.4 No building shall extend beyond 3 m of the boundary of the community space.
1.11.2.5 Such community open spaces shall cater only to the needs of the immediate community contiguous
to the open space and shall not be made available for use of outsiders.
1.11.3 Community Open Space for Industrial Buildings

A minimum of 10% of the total area but not exceeding 0.25 hectare of every industrial plot having an area of
1.0 hectare or more, shall be reserved as community open space. Such area shall be contiguous and shall
have a means of access from every unit of the industry for recreational activities of the persons working in
the industry.
1.11.4 Community Open Space Zones in Area Layouts

1.11.4.1 Residential or Business Areas : In dividing any land measuring a total of 0.4 hectares or more into
residential or business plots, community open spaces shall be reserved for recreational purposes of the
population for which the layout is planned. The rrunimum requirement of open spaces in a layout shall be as
follows:
a) 15% of the area of the planned layout, or
b) 2000 m2for every 1000 persons. For approved low income housing schemes this limit may be reduced
to 1000 m2for every 1000 persons.
The community qpen space in residential or business layouts shall as far as practicable be provided in one
place or planned out to serve the community in clusters or groups. No such community open space plot shall
be less than 400 m2in area. The shape of the plot shall be such that the length is not more than 2.5 times its
width.
1.11.4.2 Industrial Areas: In dividing any land measuring a total of 1 hectare or more into industrial plots,
5% of the total land area shall be reserved as amenity open s ace which shall be used as lawn, park or
y
garden. The minimum size of such open space shall be 600 m . When the area of the open space exceeds
1000 m2, the area of land in excess of 1000 m2can be used for the construction of buildings for banks, clinics,
welfare centres and other common facilities for use of the persons working in the industries.

Part3
1.12 REQUIREMENTS OF PARTS OF BUILDINGS
1.12.1 Plinth and Formation Levels

The plinth and formation levels of the building and the plot shall conform to the requirements of
Sec 1.5.3.
1.12.2 Room Dimensions

1.12.2.1 Ceiling Heights
a) All habitable rooms in non-air-conditioned residential and business & mercantile buildings, apart from
kitchen, store room, utility room, box room and garage, shall have a ceiling height not less than 2.75 m
measured from the finished surface of the floor to the under side of the finished ceiling, or false ceiling. A
maximum of one-third of the floor area of such habitable rooms may, however, have a minimum ceiling
height of 2.44 m. For air-conditioned rooms in such buildings, the minimum ceiling height shall be 2.44 m.
In the case of pitched roof without a horizontal ceiling the lowest point of the finished ceiling shall be at
least 2 m above the finished surface of the floor and the average height of the ceiling shall not be less than
2.44 m.
b) The minimum clear head room under the ceiling, folded plate, shell etc. and under the false ceiling or
duct in an air-conditioned room shall not be less than 2.44 m. The minimum clear distance between the
floor below and the soffit of a beam shall not be less than 2.15 m.
c) The requirements of ceiling height for buildings of occupancy other than residential and business &
mercantile shall be as follows :
Occupancy Minimum Ceiling Height

Educational, Institutional, Health 3 m for non-air-conditioned and 2.6 m for air-
Care, Assembly. conditioned buildings.
Industrial, Storage, Hazardous. 3.5 m for non-air-conditioned and 3.0 m for air-
conditioned buildings.
1.12.2.2 Room Sizes: Every dwelling unit in a residential building shall have at least one room which shall
have not less than 9.5 m2 of floor area with a minimum width of 2.5 m. Oth9r habitable rooms in the
dwelling unit shall have a minimum area of 5 m2 each with a minimum width of 2m.
1.12.3 Kitchen
1.12.3.1 The minimum clear height of kitchen measured from the finished surface of the floor to the
finished ceiling shall be 2.75 m, except for any floor trap of the upper floor which shall have a minimum
clearance of 2.15 m above the finished floor. The minimum clear height of kitchen shall be 2.15 m where
mechanical exhaust is installed.
1.12.3.2 The minimum floor area of kitchen without provision for dining shall be 4 m2 with a minimum
width of 1.5 m. The minimum floor area of a kitchen which is intended to provide dining or occasional
sleeping space shall be 7.5 m2 with a minimum width of 2.2 m.
1.12.3.3 Every kitchen shall be provided with a kitchen sink or other means for washing utensils. The waste
water shall be discharged into the waste water pipe or drain.
1.12.3.4 The floor of the kitchen shall be water tight .
1.12.3.5 Every kitchen shall be provided with window having a minimum area of 1 m2 which shall open to
the exterior or to an interior open space of adequate dimensions (see Sec 1.7.11). .
1.12.4 Bathroom and Toilets

1.12.4.1 The height of any bathroom, toilet or water closet shall not be less than 2.15 m measured from the
finished floor surface to the finished ceiling or false ceiling or to the lowest point of any trap of the upper
floor's plumbing system.
1.12.4.2 The minimum floor area of a bathroom where water closet and bathing facilities are combined shall
be 2.8 m2 with a minimum width of 1 m. For bathrooms without water closet, the minimum area shall be 1.5
m2 with a minimum width of 1 m. The minimum area of a toilet with water closet only shall be 1.2 m2 with a
minimum width of 1 m. Three fixture bathrooms containing bathing, hand washing and water closet
facilities shall have a minimum area of 3 m2 with a minimum width of 1.25 m.
1.12.4.3 No bathroom or toilet containing water closet shall open directly into any kitchen or cooking space
by a door, window, ventilator, fanlight or any other opening. Every such bathroom or toilet shall have a
door completely shutting it off from the exterior.
3-16
Chapterl
1.12.4.4 Every bathroom, toilet and water closet shall be located against an exterior wall or wall on the
interior open space (see Sec 1.7.11}, except where they are ventilated through an interior lighting and
ventilation shaft. Such interior lighting and ventilation shafts shall have the minimum dimensions specified
in Table 3.1.12 for different heights ofbuildings. In addition, shafts for buildings exceeding6 storeys or a
height of 20 m shall be mechanically ventilated. All shafts must be accessible at the ground floor level for
cleaning and servicing purposes.
Table 3.1.12
Minimum Dimensions of Lighting and Ventilation Shaft
Minimum Net Cross- Minimum Width

Building Height sectional Area of Shaft of Shaft
(m2) (m)
No. of Storeys Height (m_l
Up to 3 Up to 11 1.5 1.0
4 14 3.0 1.2
5 17 4.0 1.5
6 20 5.0 2.0
Over6• Over 20 6.5 2.5
•
Mechanical ventilation of the shaft shall be provided for buildings over 6 storeys high.
Shaft dimensions shall conform to mechanical design considerations.
1.12.4.5 Floors of bathrooms, toilets or water closets shall be treated with water repellent material and shall
be water tight. All bathroom walls or partitions shall be treated with non-absorbent water repellent smooth
impervious finish material to a height of not less than 1 m above the finished floor level. The floor shall be
sloped gently towards gratings or openings of the floor traps.
1.12.5 Stair case

1.12.5.1 Limiting Dimensions : The minimum width of the staircase for various occupancies shall be as
specified in Table 3.1.13.
.
Table 3.1.13
Limiting Dimensions of the Staircase
Minimum Width
Occupancv of Stair (m)
A. Residential Buildings .
A1 Detached Single Family Dwelling 1.0
A2 Flats or Apartments 1.15
A3 Mess, Boarding House and Hostel 1.25
A4 Minimum Standard Housirlg See Appendix A
AS Hotels and Lodging Houses 1.25
B. Educational Buildings 1.5

c. Institutional Buildings 1.5
D. Health Care Buildings 2.0
E. Assembly Buildings 2.0
F. Business and Mercantile Buildings
F1 Offices 1.5
F2 Small Shops and Markets 1.5
F3 �
Large Sho s and Markets 2.0
FS Essential rvices 1.5
All Other Buildin_gs 1.25
1.12.5.2 Combination of the riser and the tread dimensions shall be such that the sum of the riser height and
the tread depth shall be between 400 mm and 425 mm with a minimum tread depth of 215 mm and a
maximum riser height of 215 mm. The tread depth may include any nosing and any increase due to slant
riser faces. The variation between depths of adjacent treads and heights of adjacent risers shall not exceed 5
mm . The difference between the largest and the smallest riser or between the largest and the smallest tread
shall not exceed 2 per cent of the respective average dimensions in any flight of stairs .
1.12.5.3 The number of steps in a single flight shall be limited to 15.
1.12.5.4 The minimum clear head room between flights of a staircase shall be 2.15 m. The clear head room
may be reduced to 2.03 m for not more than three flights in any staircase.
1.12.5.5 The minimum clear height of any passage below a landing providing access to non-habitable and
service spaces shall be 2.03 m. Tfie minimum clear height of all other passages and spaces below a landing
shall be 2.15 m.

Part3
1.12.5.6 Handrails shall have a minimum height of 0.9 m measured from the nose of stair to the top of the
handrail. When children are likely to use the stairs, the balustrade design shall incorporate adequate child
safety measure.
1.12.6 Mezzanine Floor

1.12.6.1 The total area of mezzanine floors in a building shall not exceed one-third the plinth area of the
building. The area of the mezzanine floors shall be included in calculating the FAR.
1.12.6.2 The clear headroom both over and under the mezzanine floor shall be at least 2.2 m.
1.12.6.3 The lighting and ventilation of the space both over and under the mezzanine floor shall not be
obstructed in any way.
1.12.7 Lofts
1.12.7.1 The minimum height of a loft shall be 1.5 m and it shall not be used as a habitable space.
1.12.7.2 The minimum height requirements for various rooms specified under Sec 1.12.2, 1.12.3 and 1.12.4
shall be maintained under the loft.
1.12.7.3 A maximum of 25% of the floor area of any room may be covered by a loft, except bathrooms,
toilets, water closets, store rooms and corridors where the whole area may have an overhead loft.
1.12.7.4 The loft shall not interfere with the lighting and ventilation of any room.
1.12.8 Cabins or Chambers

1.12.8.1 Cabins or Chambers created by removable partitions on an open floor shall have a minimum area
of 3m2•
1.12.8.2 Clear passages at least 0.75 m wide shall be maintained between the cabins leading to a means of
exit which shaH in no case be further than 16 m from any cabin.
1.12.8.3 A clear gap of at least 300 mm shall be maintained between the top of the partition walls enclosing
the cabin and the ceiling, unless the cabin is exposed to the exterior deriving natura1light and ventilation or
is artificially lighted and ventilated.
1.12.9 Store Room

A store room provided in a dwelling unit of a residential building shall have a minimum area of 1.5 m2 with
a minimum width of 1 m. The clear height of the store room shall not be less than 2.2 m.
1.12.10 Private Garage

A private garage in a residential buildin� shall have a minimum clear height of 2.03 m. The length of the
garage shall not be less than 4.5 m. The width of the garage for a single car shall be at least 2.6 m and for two
cars shall be at least 5 m.
1.12.11 Basement
1.12.11.1 Any underground floor of a building wholly or partially below formation level shall be called a
basement and shall satisfy the requirements of the following sections.
1.12.11.2 Subject to the provision of Sec 1.8.3.6, the area of the basement shall be included in the calculation
of FAR.
1.12.11.3 The walls and floors of the basement shall be damp-proof and waterproof (see Chap 3, Part 6). The
basement shall be protected against surface water and drainage waste intrusion.
1.12.11.4 The basement shall have natural lighting and ventilation or shall be artificially lighted and
ventilated.
1.12.11.5 The portion of the staircase below the ground floor level shall be secluded by a fire wall or fire
separation assembly having a minimum fire resistance time of 2 hours. Independent open staircase and
open ramps for access to the basement from the ground floor or the street level snail be permitted.
1.12.11.6 The slope of any ramp provided shall not be steeper than 1 vertical in 8 horizontal.
1.12.11.7 The clear height of the basement below soffit of beams shall not be less than 2.03 m.
1.12.11.8 The floor and the walls of the basement shall be made damp-proof in accordance with the
provisions of Sec 3.13 of Part 6.
1.12.12 Entrance to the Building

All buildings shall have a covered entrance or other covered area for callers waiting at the door. The main
entrance door to the building shall not open into an uncovered exterior.
3-18
Chapterl
1.12.13 Roof Drainage

1.12.13.1 The roof of a building shall be constructed in such a manner that rain water is drained freely away
from the building without causing dampness of the roof or the walls of the building or of an adjacent
building.
1.12.13.2 Water from the roof shall not be discharged into the adjacent property or street.
1.12.13.3 For one or two storeyed buildings with flat or pitched roof, rain water may be discharged directly
to the ground, in which case the roof shall have extenaed eaves or cornices to direct the water away from
the walls.
1.12.13.4 For other buildings, gutters or parapets shall be provided t<J direct the water to the piping of an
adequate rain water drainage system.
1.12.13.5 The roof shall be impermeable or shall be treated with an impervious material to make it
effectively water tight. Flat concrete roofs shall be topped with an impervious layer of lime concrete-or other
effective means of waterproofing. All flat roofs shall be sloped gently towards gutters, gratings or mouths of
the rain water drainage pipes.
1.12.14 Parapet
All accessible flat roofs shall be enclosed by parapets or hand rails having a height of at least 1 m. All such
parapets and hand rails shall be designed to withstand the lateral forces due to wind and occupancy in
conformity with the provisions of Part 6 of this Code.
1.12.15 Septic Tank

A septic tank shall be provided within the premises for disposal of sewage, where no public sewer is
available. The location, design and construction of the septic tank shall conform with the requirements of
Chapter 7, Part 8 of this Code.
1.13 LANDSCAPING
1.13.1 Plantation of trees and shrubs within the open spaces of a plot aimed at enhancing the environmental
quality of the building shall comply with the requirements of tftis section.
1.13.2 Trees and shrubs shall be planted judiciously to meet the requirements of shade and sunshine, to control
noise and dust, to provide privacy and to improve visual quality, without jeopardizing natural ventilation
and lighting of a building.
.
1.13.3 Species of trees shall be so chosen and planted that their roots do not endanger the building foundation and
tneir branches do not interfere with the building superstructure. This shall be achieved by maintaining
sufficient distance between the trees and the buildmg depending on the species of the tree.
1.14 DAMP-PROOFING AND WATERPROOFING OF FLOORS AND WALLS
1.14.1 All floors at the ground floor level and all foundation and plinth walls shall be made damp-proof and
waterproof.
1.14.2 Protective measure shall be taken to eliminate rising damp in ground floor walls by including a RC grade
beam at the plinth level. The grade beam may be dispensed with if an approved membrane is applied at the
plinth level. If no beam or membrane is rovided a damp-proof course (DPC) shall be placed along all the
y
walls at the plinth level. Such damp-proo course shall be made of a rich cement concrete having a thickness
of 75 mm and shall be finished with two coats of bitumen.
1.14.3 Foundation, floor and walls below grade shall be damp-proofed and waterproofed in accordance with the
provisions of Sec 3.13 of Part 6.
1.15 EXISTING BUILDINGS
1.15.1 Existing buildings and structures in their present occupancy condition shall not be required to be in full
compliance with all the requirements of this Code. Additions or alterations to such ex1sting buildings or
change of use thereof shall not be permitted if such addition, alteration or change of use is likely to render
the building more hazardous with respect to fire safety, life safety and sanitation than it was before.
1.15.2 Any horizontal or vertical extension of an existing building or any change of use thereof shall subject the
altered building or occupancy to the provisions of this Code for a new building. The building together with
the additions and changes shall not exceed the height, area and open space requirements for new buildings
specified in this Code.
1.15.3 All buildings and structures, both new and existing shall be maintained in a safe and sanitary condition as
provided for in this Code. To determine compliance with this requirement, the Authority may cause the
building or structure to be periodically inspected.

3-19
Part3
1.15.4 Any proposed change in an existing building or structure shall have to satisfy the requirements set forth in
Part 9 of fhis Code.
1.16 BUILDINGS AND PLACES OF HISTORICAL OR ARCHITECTURAL VALUE
1.16.1 All historic buildings and places identified, listed and classified so by the appropriate agency of the
Government under the Act of Antiquity shall be deemed to be l'rotected. Any change of use, repair,
alteration or extension of such buildings shall be in compliance with the requirements of this section and
those of the Department of Archaeology of the Government.
Similarly, buildings and works under the jurisdiction of and identified by the Authority as having
architectural value shall be exempted from satisfying some of the provisions of this Code as specified in
Sec 1.16.2 below. The owner of any such building may also app ly to the Building Official for enlistment as a
building with architectural value. To be so identified, a buildmg shall have been in existence for at least 20
years from the date of its completion. To determine whether the building or work is architecturally
valuable, the Authority shall appoint a standing committee comprising noted experts from the fields of
Architecture, Planning, Engineermg, History, Art, Literature or any other discipline which may be deemed
relevant. The committee shall identify a building as architecturally valuable if, in their judgement, the
building possesses distinctive architectural features, has cultural or symbolic value, has become part of the
heritage, or bears testimony of some historical event. In addition to satisfying the requirements of Sec 1.16.2
below, any proposed repair, alteration or addition to such buildings must also have the approval of the
standing committee who shall have to be satisfied that the proposed changes will not impau the aesthetic
quality and architectural character of the building.
1.16.2 Repairs, alterations and additions necessary for the preservation, restoration, rehabilitation, continued use
or adaptive reuse of such historic buildings and structures, and of buildings and works of architectural
value may be exempted by the Authority from having to be in full compliance with all the requirements of
this Code, provided that the restored ouilding or structure will be no more hazardous, if any, than the
existing conditions in terms of life safety, fire protection and sanitation.
1.17 VENTILATION, LIGHTING AND SANITATION
1.17.1 All rooms and interior spaces designated for human occupancy shall be provided with means of natural or
artificial lighting and natural or mechanical ventilation.
1.17.2 All buildings shall have water and sanitation facilities as provided for in this chapter and in Chapters 6 and
7 of Part 8.
1.17.3 Every kitchen shall have facility for washing of utensils.
1.17.4 Every building or independent unit thereof shall be provided with at least one water closet.
1.17.5 All naturally ventilated and illuminated interior spaces, staircases and other areas of human occupancy in a
building shall have windows or ventilators opening directly to the exterior or an interior open space or to a
verandah. Ventilation of bathrooms may also be acrueved through ventilation shafts as provided for in Sec
1.12.4.4.
1.17.6 All habitable and non-habitable spaces within a building shall have the following minimum aggregate area
of openings in the exterior wall, excluding doors, expressed as percentage of the net floor area :
Habitable rooms such as those used

for sleeping, living, study, dining etc. 15%
Kitchens 18%
Non-habitable spaces such as bathrooms,

store, staircase and other utility 10%
1.17.6.1 Notwithstanding the provision of 1.17.6 an enclosed staircase shall have exterior windows not less
than 1m2 in area on every floor through which the stairway passes.
1.17.6.2 Toilet and bathroom windows shall open to the exterior or an approved ventilation shaft and the
openable area shall not be less than 1 m2 •
1.17.7 The required minimum average intensity of illumination in a habitable space at a height of 750 mm above
the floor level shall be 65 lux. Any point in a room more than 7 m away from an exterior window shall be
considered t� be not illuminated by daylight unless measurement of illumination gives an intensity of 65lux
or more.
3-20
Chapter 1
1.17.7.1 The required intensity of illumination for various tasks in a building shall be as specified in
Chapter 1 of Part 8. .
1.17.7.2 Whenever the illumination achieved by daylight is not sufficient or occupancy at night is necessary,
artificial lighting shall be installed to supplement daylight, or to provide the reqmred rught lighting, m
accordance with the provisions of Chapter 1 of Part 8.
·
1.17.8 The requirements of openin)? areas specified in Sec 1.17.6 shall suffice for ventilation provided that the
windows or ventilators forrrung the opening are openable. When part of the window area is made of fixed
glazing, the openable portion only shall be counted in aggregating the opening area.
1.17.8.1 The net clear opening area required for supplying oxygen for breathing shall be taken as 5% of the
floor area.
1.17.8.2 Mechanical ventilation, when provided, shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 3 of
�rt& .
1.18 AIR-CONDITIONING AND HEATING
All air-conditioning and heating equipments shall be selected and installed in accordance with the
requirements of Chapter 3 of Part 8.
1.19 PROVISION OF LIFTS AND ESCALATORS
Wherever required by this Code or desired by the owner for comfort, lifts and escalator facilities shall be
planned, designed and installed in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 5 Part 8.
1.20 SOUND INSULATION
Acoustical design of a building to attain the desired noise levels shall be performed in accordance with the
provisions of Cnapter 4 of Part 8.
1.21 THERMAL INSULATION
Thermal comfort in a building shall be achieved through adequate ventilation and thermal insulation of
walls and roof.
1.22 LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS
Lightning protection measures shall be installed on all buildings whose exposure conditions indicate the
likelihood of liS,htning strike and consequential hazard to life and property. Buildings housing explosives or
detonators, bmldings where a large number of people live or congregate and those that are of strategic or
defence importance shall always be protected against lightning strikes. The requirement of lightning
protection systems shall be assessed and they shall be designed and installed in accordance with the
provisions of Chapter 2 of Part 8.
1.23 RAT PROOFING AND TERMITE PROOFING OF BUILDINGS
Rat proofing and termite proofing measures shall be undertaken on the basis of the degree of protection -
desired from rats and termites. Any chemical used for the control of rats and termite shall be free from
environmental hazards.
1.23.1 Rat Proofing

1.23.1.1 Buildings supported directly on the ground, for which rat proofing is required, shall have
continuous foundation walls extending from at least 600 rnm below the ground level to at least 150 rnm
above the ground level. The floor of such buildings shall be of continuous masonry or reinforced concrete or
any other effective rat proof construction.
1.23.1.2 Openin�s in such buildings shall be made rat proof. Doors and windows shall be tight-fitting.
Drains, construction joints or other junctions shall be tight-fitting and shall have a protection with grillage or
screening or shall be properly closed with metal sheet or masonry or concrete cover.
1.23.1.3 Commercially available chemicals which are repellent or lethal to rats and which do not constitute
environmental hazard may be used in buildings according to the manufacturer's instructions.
1.23.2 Termite Proof ing

The provisions of this section shall apply to buildings where termite infestation may be a problem and
measure for protection against termite is considered necessary.

Part3
1.23.2.1 Constructional Measures

a) The site of any building shall be cleared of any scrap timber, wooden debris, roots, leaves, stumps or
other organic matter. Such debris shall not be buried or accumulated near the building or under the
floor or under the foundation.
b) The area underneath the building and its surroundings shall be properly drained and water shall not be
allowed to accumulate in such areas. Access of water into these areas from the surroundings shall be
effectively prevented.
c) No void or opening or cracks shall be allowed in the foundation or floor or its sub-base. All earth filling
in the sub-base and the surroundings shall be free from roots, leaves or other organic matters and
properly rammed to prevent any subsidence or formation of voids or cracks. Joints in the foundation or
floor or its sub-base shall be properly sealed. Joints in the upper layer shall be staggered from the sub
base.
d) If timber is used in a building, it shall be capable of resisting the attacks of termite or fungi.
e) All masonry works of lime mortar to be exposed to soil shall have a mix ratio of no leaner than 1:3.
f) Vertical joints between the floor and the plinth masonry shall be filled with heavy grade coal tar pitch.
g) In buildings where high de�ree of termite proofing is necessary, anti-termite construction or termite
shields, termite caps or terrrute grove may be used. (See Appendix B)
1.23.2.2 Pre-constructional Chemical Treatment

a) Termite mounds within the plinth area of a building shall be destroyed with insecticides in the form of
water suspension or emulsion. The mound shall be opened at several places onto which suspension or
emulsion of the insecticide shall be poured. The m1x ratio of the emulsion and the volume of such
emulsion to be used may be determined from manufacturer's instructions, or 4 litre for about 1 m3 of
the mound may be used with the following emulsions (expressed in concentration by weight):
5 per cent DDT

0.5 per cent BHC
0.25 per cent dieldrin
0.25 per cent aldrin
0.5 per cent heptachlor
0.5 per cent chlordane
b) Complete and continuous chemical barriers may be formed under the whole of the structure to be
protected. All foundations shall be fully surrounded by a barrier of treated soil. The barrier shall be
formed with commercially available termite repellent chemicals according to the manufacturer's
instructions or any of the following chemicals in water emulsion is effective when applied uniformly
over the area to be treated:
0.5 per cent dieldrin

0.5 per cent aldrin
0.5 per cent heptachlor
1 per cent chlordane
Treatment of the soil shall be undertaken when excavation is complete and ready for pouring of
foundation concrete or laying of form work. (See Appendix B)
Note : The use of chemicals specified in Sec 1.23.2.2 shall be permissible in applications for termite proofing of
buildings as long as any of these are not prohibited by the Government for environmental or other reasons for such
application. In such cases the relevant chemical shall be deemed to be deleted from the lists given in Sec 1.23.2.2.
1.23.2.3 Treatment for Existing Buildings

a) Termites detected in a building shall be exterminated by applying oil or kerosene based solution of
either dieldrin 0.5 per cent concentration or chlordane 1.0 per cent concentration by weight. Other
commercially available chemicals may be used as per instructions of the manufacturer.
b) Existing buildings may be protected against termites by treating the soil adjacent to or under the
building with a chemical toxicant that !<ills or repels termites. One of the emulsions specified in Sec
1.23.2.2(b) or any other environment friendly commercially available chemicals may be used for such
termite protection work.
i) The soil in contact with the outer vertical surface of the foundations shall be treated with 15
litre/m2 of the vertical surface. Such treatment shall extend up to a depth of 500 mm from the
ground level but shall not extend below the top of the footing. Emulsions may be sprayed on the
foundation surface by opening trenches or by pouring into holes.
3-22
Chapterl
ii) The soil below any opening in the floor through which termites are likely to seek entry into a
building shall be treated with emulsions. Holes of diameter 12 rnrn at an interval of 300 rnrn shall
be drilled in the floor along cracks, construction joints or any other opening and emulsions shall
be pumped in until refusal or up to a maximum of 1 litre per hole.
iii) For protection of masonry walls against termites, holes shall be made on such walls on both sides
at critical points like wall comers and where door and window frames are embedded in the floor
or wall at 300 mm interval. The holes shall have a downward slant of 45° through which
emulsions shall be applied with a manually operated pump till refusal or to a maximum of 1litre
per hole. The holes shall be sealed after the treatment.
1.23.3 Inspection
Periodic inspections shall be undertaken for effective protection against rats and termites.
1.24 REQUIREMENTS FOR BUILDINGS IN FLOOD PRONE AND COASTAL REGIONS OF BANGLADESH
The specifications of this section shall be applicable to all buildings located in the flood or surge prone areas
in addition to other requirements of this Code.
a) The plannin � and development control authority of the city, township, municipality or region where
this Code is mtended to be apf>lied shall delineate any area having a potential for bemg flooded under
at least 1 m deep water due to flooding as Flood Prone Area (FPA). Tile provisions of sec 1.24.1 shall be
applicable to areas designated as FPA. There shall be a design flood level in the FP A's which shall be
recommended by the Authority to be used in interpreting the provisions of this section.
b) Similar delineation shall be made in the coastal regions on the basis of expected occurrence of a surge or
wave run-Uf' of 1 m or higher. Such areas shall be designated as Surge Prone Area (SPA). The
provisions of Sec 1.24.2 shall be applicable to buildings located in the SPA's. There shall be a design
surge height in the SPA's which snall be recommended by the Authority to be used in interpreting the
provisions of this section.
1.24.1 Flood Prone Areas

1.24.1.1 Elevation : The lowest floor including the basement of any building located in the FPA shall not
be located below the design flood level. For builaings of height two storey or less the roof shall be accessible
with an exterior stair. For buildings three storeys or higher, the floor immediately above the design flood
level shall be accessible with an exterior stair.
Exceptions:
1. Except for Occupancy A (Residential), any occupancy may have floors below the design flood level in accordance
with the provisions of Sec 1.24.1.3.
2. A floor of Occupancy A (Residential) may be constructed below the design flood level provided the building has at
least another floor of Occupancy A above the design flood level. Such floors shall comply with the requirements of
Sec 1.24.1.2 and 1.24.1.3.
3. Floors which are used only for building access, exits, foyers, storage or parking garages may be located below the
design flood level in accordance with the provisions of Sec 1.24.1.2.
1.24.1.2 Enclosures below Design Flood Level : There shall be no enclosed space below the design flood
level except for building access, exits, foyers, storage and parking garages. There shall be vents, valves or
other openings in the walls of the enclosed spaces which shall equalize tile lateral pressure of the water. The
bottom of such openings shall not be higher than 300 mm above the finished grade. There shall be at least
one opening for each enclosure in a building but the total number of such openings shall be at least two. The
total net area of openings for an enclosure shall be at least 0.4 m2, or 7 per cent of the floor area of the
enclosure, whichever is greater.
1.24.1.3 Flood-resistant Construction : Floors constructed below the design flood level under the
provisions of Exceptions in Sec 1.24.1.1 shall comply with the following requirements:
a) Floors and exterior walls of such floors shall have a construction impermeable to the passage of wat(•r.
b) Structural components of such floors shall be capable of resisting the hydraulic and buoyant forces
resulting from the occurrence of floods at the design flood level. Design requirements in such cases are
specified in Chapter 1, Part 6. ·
c) Vents, openings and valves providt>d below the d!!sign level shall have water-tight closures capable of
resisting any structural forn•:: n:··' dtin:� from the occurrence of the design flood.
d) Penetrations made for electrical, mechanical or plumbing installations shall be made water-tight to
prevent any f'enetration of flood water. Sewerage systems having opening below the design flood level
shall have a closure device to prevent backwater flow during the occurrence of floods.

Part3
1.24.2 Surge Prone Areas

1.24.2.1 Elevation : The lowest floor including the basement of any building in a surge prone area shall not
be located below the design surge height. For buildings of height two storey or 1ess the roof shall be
accessible with an exterior stair. For buildings three storeys or nigher, the floor immediately above the
design surge level shall be accessible with an exterior stair. ·
Exception:
Footing, mat or raft foundations, piles, pile caps, columns, grade beams and bracings may be constructed below the
design surge height.
1.24.2.2 Enclosures below Design Surge Height :Sp aces of a building in the SPA's below the design surge
height shall not obstruct any flow of water during the occurrence of surge.
Exception:
Structural or non-structural members serving as entries or exits may be constructed below design surge height.
1.24.2.3 Foundations :Foundations of the buildings erected in the SPA's shall be located well below the
ground level so that they are protected from erosion or scour during the occurrence of surge. If piled
foundations are used, they shalf be designed to withstand with adequate factor of safety the loss of support
due to scour. Design of the foundations shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 3, Part 6.
Related Appendices
Appendix A Guidelines for the Development of Minimum Standard Housing (Occupancy A4)
AppendixB Suggestive Typical Termite Proof Constructions and Pre-constructional Measures
3-24
CHAPTER�
Classification of Buildings
Based on Occupancy
2.1 OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION

\
Every building shall be classified according to its use or the character of its occupancy as a building of
_
Occupancy A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J or K as defmed below :
Occupancy A Residential
Occupancy B Educational
Occupancy c Institutional
Occupancy D Health Care
Occupancy E Assembly
Occupancy F Business and Mercantile
Occupancy G Industrial
Occupancy H Storage
Occupancy J Hazardous
Occupancy K Miscellaneous
Minor occupancy incidental to operations in another type of occupancy shall be considered as part of the
main occupancy, and shall be classified under the occupancy group relevant for the main occupancy.
Any occupancy not mentioned specifically shall be classified by the Authority under the occupancy group to
which its use most closely resembles, considering the potential life and fire hazard.
Each occupancy group shall be subdivided as detailed in the following sections. The example provided for
each occupancy group are nonexhaustive and indicative only. If there is any use or character of occupancy
in a buildmg which is not mentioned here, it shall be classified by the Authority.
Part3 3-25
General Building Requirements, Control and Regulation
Part3
2.1.1 Occupancy A : Residential Buildings

Buildings classified under this Occupancy shall include all buildings that provide sleeping and living
accommodations to related or unrelated groups of people, with or without cooking or dining facilities,
except any building classified under Occupancy C or D. This Occupancy shall be subdivided as follows:
A1 DETACHED SINGLE FAMILY DWELLING :These shall include any building, detached from
neighbouring buildings by distances required by this Code, and having independent access, which is
used for private dwelfing by members oi a single family.
•
A2 FLATS OR APARTMENTS :These shall include any building or portion thereof or group of buildings
in which living quarters are provided for more than one family, living independently of each other,
with independent cooking facility for each family. Flats or apartments may be located in walk up
buildings, high rise buildings or in'housing complexes.
A3 MESS, BOARDING HOUSES, DORMITORIES AND HOSTELS :These shall include any building in
which sleeping and living accommodations are provided for groups of unrelated persons, with or
without common dining facilities, and with common cooking under management control or with
individual or group cooking facilities, for example, mess houses, dormitories, boarding houses,
hostels and students' halls of residence.
A4 MINIMUM STANDARD HOUSING :These shall include any building in which one or more families
are housed, specifically built for minimum standard accommodation of lower income families, in
which the minimum requirements for hygiene and safety are maintained, for example, multi-storeyed
complexes, cluster houses and rehabilitation housing or housing undertaken by private low income
groups approved by the Authority.
AS HOTELS AND LODGING HOUSES :These shall include any building or group of buildings under
single management, in which sleepins and living accommodation, with or without dining facilities
but without cooking facilities for individuals, is provided for hire on transient or permanent basis, for
example, hotels, motels, rest houses, lodging and rooming houses, inns, and clubs.
2.1.2 Occupancy B : Educational Buildings

Buildings classified under this Occupancy shall include all buildings in which education and care are
provided to children or adults. This Occupancy shall be subdivided as follows :
B1 EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES :These shall include any building or portion thereof used for purposes
involving assembly for instruction, education and recreation of more than six persons, and which is
not covered by occupancy E, for example school, college, university class rooms, lobbies and related
facilities, coaching centres, tutorial homes etc.
B2 PRESCHOOL FACILITIES :These shall include any building or portion of a building used for
purposes involving care and education of children more than six in number, for example, day-care
centres, nurseries, kindergartens and other preschool facilities.
2.1.3 Occupancy C : Institutional Buildings ·
Buildings classified under this Occupancy shall include those used for purposes of institutional care of the
occupants, such as medical or nursing care of persons suffering from f'hysical or mental illness or infirmity,
care of infants, orphans, convalescents or old persons, and care and detention for correctional or penal
purposes where the personal liberty of the inmates is restricted. These buildings shall ordinarily provide
sleeping accommodation for the occupants. This occupancy shall be subdivided as follows :
C1 INSTITUTIONS FOR CARE OF CHILDREN :These shall include any building or portion thereof or
�roup of buildings under single management used as an institution for the full time care of children,
mcluding orphanages, each accommodating more than six children, for example, child care
institutions and orphanages, Lillah boarding, child care homes and school hostels.
C2 CUSTODIAL INSTITUTIONS FOR THE PHYSICALLY CAPABLE :These shall include any building
or portion thereof or group of buildings under single management used for purposes of full time care
and custody of old or mentally disabled persons physically capable of responding to emergency, for
example, home for the aged, home for tne care of mentally disabled persons in which the personal
liberty of the inmates is not restricted, and convalescent home for locomotory patients.
C3 CUSTODIAL INSTITUTIONS FOR THE INCAPABLE :These shall include any building or portion
thereof or group of buildings under single management used for purposes of full time care and
custody of persons physically or mentally incapable of responding to emergency, for example, home
for the old and infirm persons not capable of self preservation in an emergency, convalescent home
for non locomotory patients, and mental institution without detention facilities.
C4 PENAL AND MENTAL INSTITUTIONS :These shall include any building or portion thereof or
group of buildings under single management used for housing persons under restraint, or who are
detained for penal and corrective purposes, in which personal liberty of the inmates is restricted, for
3-26
Chapter 2
Clas�ification of Buildings Based on Occupancy
example, jails, prisons, mental hospitals and psychiatric sanatoria with detention facilities, Borstals
and reformatones.
2.1.4 Occupancy D :Health Care Buildings

Buildings under this Occupancy group shall include those used for purposes of providin� medical care and
treatment to persons, in which sleeping accommodation may or may not be provided. Th1s Occupancy shall
be subdividea as follows:
D1 NORMAL MEDICAL FACILITIES: These shall include any building or portion thereof or group of
buildings under single management in which general and specialized medical, surgical and other
treatment is providea to persons suffering from physical lirrutations because of health, for example,
hospitals, nursing homes, clinics, dispensaries, infirmaries and sanatoria.
D2 EMERGENCY MEDICAL FACILITIES: These shall include any building or portion thereof used for
purposes of providing essential medical facilities having surgery, emergency and casualty treatment
areas, whicfi is equipped and designated to handle post aisaster emer g ency, and is required to
remain operational after disasters, for example, emergency and casualty umts of designated fiospitals,
and clinics and dispensaries built as part of a disaster preparedness programme.
2.1.5 Occupancy E :Assembly Buildings

Buildings under this Occupancy group shall include any buildins or portion thereof in which groups of people
congregate or assemble for recreation, amusement, social, rehgious, political, cultural, travel and similar
purposes, for example, cinemas, theatres, assembly halls, auditoriums, mosques and other places of worship,
prayer halls, exhibition halls, museums, art galleries, gymnasiums, stadiums, restaurants, club rooms, dance
halls, recreation piers, passenger stations and terminals of rail, bus, air and marine transportation systems,
community centres and lecture halls. This Occupancy shall be subdivided as follows:
El LARGE ASSEMBLY WITH FIXED SEATS : This occu p ancy shall include assembly buildings
provided with a stage and with fixed seats for 1000 or more persons. Assembly buildings under this
subdivision shall be primarily meant for theatrical, operatic or cinematic performances having a
raised stage, proscemum curtains, scenery loft or projection screen, lights, projection booth and
necessary theatrical and mechanical equipment. Examples of this Occupancy are, large theatres,
cinema halls, auditoriums and similar large assembly halls meant for presentation of the performing
arts.
E2 SMALL ASSEMBLY WITH FIXED SEATS : This occupancy shall include any building primarily
meant for use as described for buildings under Occupancy El, but with fixed seats for less than 1000
persons. These assembly buildings may or may not oe provided with a legitimate theatrical stage or
related accessories or equipment. Examples of this Occupancy are, small and medium sized theatres,
cinema halls, auditoriums, churches with fixed pew, seminar halls and other assembly halls.
E3 LARGE ASSEMBLY WITHOUT FIXED SEATS:This occupancy shall include any assembly building,
its lobbies, foyer, corridors and other related spaces, in which there are no fixed seats, which may or
may not be provided with a legitimate stage or theatrical accessories, and which has accommodation
for 300 or more persons, for example, mosques, prayer halls and other places of worship, lecture
halls, waiting lounges, museums, art galleries, dance halls, restaurants, mght clubs, library reading
rooms and lending counters, passenger terminals, exhibition halls and halls for incidental picture
shows or dramatic or theatrical presentations.
E4 SMALL ASSEMBLY WITHOUT FIXED SEATS : This shall include any building primarily intended
for use as described in Occupancy E3, but with accommodation for less than 300 persons.
ES SPORTS FACILITIES:This shall include any buildin� meant for assembly of people for recreational,
amusement and sporting purposes, for example, stad1ums, reviewing stands, mdoor stadiums, sports
centres, indoor facilities of amusement parl<s, and indoor swimming pools and gymnasiums with
spectator gallery.
2.1.6 Occupancy F :Business and Mercantile Buildings

Buildings under this Occupancy group shall include any building or portion thereof which is used for
transaction of business, d1splay and sale of merchandise, and keeping of accounts and records. This
Occupancy shall be subdivided as follows:
Fl OFFICES : These shall include any building or part thereof which is used as offices, banks and
professional establishments such as architect and engineer's offices, lawyer's and doctor's chambers,
hair dressing saloons and beauty parlours, research establishments and test laboratories involving
low hazard materials, computer installations.
F2 SMALL SHOPS AND MARKETS : These shall include any building or portion thereof used for
purposes of display and sale of merchandise, either wholesale or retail, w1th or without incidental
storage and service facilities, with an area not exceeding 300 m2, for example, shops, stores and
markets.

Part3
General Building Requirements, Control and Regulation =
F3 LARGE SHOPS AND MARKETS: These shall include any building or :portion thereof used for
purposes of display and sale of merchandise, either wholesale or retail, w1th or without incidental
storage and service facilities, with an area more than 300 m2, for example, large shops, markets,
departmental stores, supermarkets and hyper markets.
F4 GARAGES AND PETROL STATIONS: These shall include any building or portion thereof used for
providing services moderately hazardous in nature, for example, petrol pump stations, automobile
garages, and aircraft hangars without repair services.
FS ESSENTIAL SERVICES: These shall include any building or portion thereof used for purposes of
providing emergency services and utilities which are reqwred to remain operational after a disaster
or in otber emergency situations, for example, police stations, fire stations, TV, radio,
telecommunication and air terminal buildings, power stations and other utilities designated to
provide post disaster emergency services, and buildings having critical national defence capabilities.
2.1.7 Occupancy G :Industrial Buildings

Buildings under this Occupancy group shall include any building or portion thereof in which materials are
fabricated, assembled, or processed by physical, chemical, pharmaceutical, nuclear, mechanical and other
processes, in order to alter their characteristics or to produce or manufacture new materials. Such buildings
may also house incidental storage and handling of tne raw and the finished materials or goods. Examples of
such buildings are various mills, factories and plants, automatic laundries, power plants, :pumping stations,
smoke houses, saw mills, foundries and machine shops, pharmaceutical, nuclear and irradiation plants.
Buildings under this Occupancy shall be subdivided on the basis of hazard potential of the contents and the
}'rocesses of the industry. The potential hazard of the occupancy, for the purpose of the Code, shall be
determined by the Authority on the basis of the character of the contents and the processes or operations
conduCted in the industry. the hazard shall generally mean the relative danger of the start of fire and the
rapidity of its spread, the danger of smoke and gases generated, the danger of biological contamination,
radiation leakage and infection, and the danger of explosion and other occurrences that pose a potential
threat to the safety of the occupants of the building. Where the combustibility of the building structure, the
flame spread rate of interior finishes and fittings, or other potential hazards integral to the type of
construction of the building, constitute a greater degree of hazard than that associated with the contents or
}'rocesses of the industry, the greater degree of hazard shall dictate the classification. Unless areas with
different degrees of hazard are effectively segregated and separated in accordance with the provisions of the
Code, the most hazardous area in a building shall govern its classification. The Industrial Occupancy group
shall be subdivided as follows:
Gl LOW HAZARD INDUSTRIES: These shall include any industrial building in which the contents are
of such low combustibility and the processes conducted therein are of such low hazardous nature
that danger of self-ignition and self-propagation of fire is nonexistent, the only danger being an onset
of fire from external sources with tl:i.e resulting danger to life and property arising only from panic,
fumes or smoke.
G2 MODERATE HAZARD INDUSTRIES: These shall include any industrial building in which the
contents are moderatel combustible and the industrial processes conducted therein are liable to give
f
rise to a fire which wil spread with moderate rapidity, giving off considerable smoke, but in which
the danger of toxic fumes, biological contamination, radiation or explosions is non-existent.
2.1.8 Occupancy H : Storage Buildings

·
.
Buildings under this Occupancy group shall include any building or portion thereof used primarily for
storage or sheltering, including incidental servicing, processing or repairs, of goods, wares, merchandise,
vehicles or animals. Goods, wares and merchandise stored in ouildings of this Occupancy group shall be
nonexplosive and shall not involve highly combustible or self-igniting substances. Storage buifdings are
characterized by a relatively small numoer of human occupants in proportion to the area. Incidental storage
auxiliary to other uses shall not render a building to be classified as storage building. .
Examples of buildin�s in this Occupancy are, warehouses, godowns, cold storage, frei� ht depots, transit
sheds, truck and marme terminals, silos, barns and stables. This Occupancy shall oe subdivided as follows:
Hl LOW FIRE RISK STORAGE: These shall include any building or portion thereof which is used for
storage of materials or other contents which do not constitute the danger of self-ignition, and which
in the event of fire will burn with low to moderate rapidity, for example, cold storage, freight depots,
warehouses or godowns containing low fire risk materials, grain silos, terminals, stables and oarns
etc.
H2 MODERATE FIRE RISK STORAGE: These shall include any building or portion thereof which is
used for storage of materials which do not constitute the danger of self-ignition but which in the
event of fire will burn with moderate rapidity, for example, warehouses, godowns or depots
containing high fire risk materials, such as paper, textiles, cotton, jute etc., library stack rooms.
3-28
Chapter 2
Items which shall be deemed to render a building hazardous are specified in Sec 2.13.13 along with the
exempted amount for each item.
2.1.9 Occupancy J :Hazardous Buildings

Buildings under this Occupancy group shall include any buildin� or portion thereof which is used. for the
storage, handling, processing or manufacture of hazardous materials or products. The hazards may arise out
of handling, processing, manufacture or storage of materials which are highly combustible or explosive that
burn with extreme rapidity emitting poisonous fumes or smokes, which may produce exp1osive dust
capable of self-ignition, or which are highly corrosive, toxic or noxious producing flame, fumes, and
explosive, poisonous, irritant or corrosive gases, and materials which pose biological contamination or
radiation danger. This Occupancy shall be subdivided as follows:
J1 EXPLOSION HAZARD BUILDINGS : These shall include any building or portion thereof which is
used for storage, handling, processing or manufacture of materials and products that present high
explosion hazard or that are highly ffammable or combustible, capable of self-ignition and/or se1f
propagation of fire. Such materials include explosives, blasting agents, fireworks, black powder,
natura1 gases, other explosive and combustible gases, rocket propelfants, petroleum, kerosene, other
fuel oils and highly flammable liquids.
J2 CHEMICAL HAZARD BUILDINGS : These shall include any building or portion thereof which is
used for storage, handling, processing or manufacture of materials and products that are highly
corrosive, toxic, poisonous and biologically harmful including corrosive and toxic alkalis, acid or
other liquids or chemicals, producing flame, fumes, radiation, and explosive, poisonous, irritant and
corrosive gases.
Definition of hazard and the amount of such materials which shall be deemed to render a building
hazardous are set forth in Sec 2.13.13.
2.1.10 Occupancy K: Miscellaneous Buildings

Buildings under this Occupancy group shall include special buildings and ancillary structures not covered in
other Occupancy groups. The Occupancy shall be subdivided as follows:
K1 PRIVATE GARAGES AND SPECIAL STRUCTURES: These shall include private garages, carports,
garden sheds and tools sheds, zoo, park and botanical garden structures, bus stops etc.
K2 FENCES, TANKS AND TOWERS : These shall include fences and boundary walls over 1.5 m high,
water tanks and towers.
2.2 CHANGE OF USE
No change shall be made in the character of occupancy or use of any building that would place it in a
different group or in a different subdivision of the same group. Such changes may be made on1y when the
building is made to comply with the provisions of this Code for such group of Occupancy.
Exceptions:
a) Change in character of occupancy or use of any building may be made and approved by the Authority without
complying to all the requirements of the new group provided the building is less hazardous, based on life and fire
risk, than the existing occupancy.
b) Changes and extensions in existing buildings may be allowed provided such changes and extensions comply with
Sec 1.15 (Existing Buildings).
2.3 MIXED OCCUPANCY
When a building is utilized for more than one occupancy or purpose, each part having a distinct occul?ancy
as defined in Sec 2.1 shall be separated from any other occupancy as specified in Table 3.2.1. Each portion of
the building shall comply with the requirements of this Code for the occupancy it accommodates. If
separations are not provided as specified in Table 3.2.1, the building shall conform to the requirements of
the most hazardous of the occupancies.
·
2.3.1 Nonseparated Uses

The following occupancies are not required to be separated from uses to which they are accessory:
a) Assembly rooms having a floor area not more than 75m2•
b) The administrative and clerical offices and similar offices not exceeding 25 per cent of the floor area of
the major occupancy and not related to Occupancy J (Hazardous Buildings).
c) Administrative offices, gift shops and other similar uses in Occul?ancy A (Residential Buildings)
provided the uses do not exceed 10 per cent of the floor area of the maJor occupancy.
d) Kitchens associated with a dining area.

I,J C)'"C
I � Ill
I,J ::s -
'"1
0 �
Table3.2.1
�YJ
Fire Resistance Rating Requirements for Separating Walls and Floor/Ceiling Assemblies between Mixed Occupancies (hours) t:a
(See Section 3.1.8 for exceptions) =·
0::
s·
M!�!M!M!M!ru!�!a!c!a!a!m!m!m!m!m!�!e!n!n!m!H!B!m!Q!m!m!n!n!�!�
:::0
� �1§P:: ;;1 I t 1111111111 1 I i I I 'II I i= i IIIII

�
.Q
=
�-
=
3
�IJ�!llltti i : ;+r: : J : r : r � � =LJ

=1 :: r � !�:=:=:::�:::::;= 1�11
� 1 �� l ::
� � [l�I�:
�
a
�
(j
� -r: : : :r: : : :r: : : :r: : : :r:: : : r: : :r: : :r: : : l· · · · �· · · · r· · · r· · · -r · · ·-r· · ·-r· · ·+: : : :r: : : r: : : r: : : r: : :r: : :r: : :
0
B2 � � � � � �
NA 2�· · · � 2 2 2 2 2 i i i i :j: NP = Not Permitted i i i a
�
:• :•��:• • •:• •:t• •±TTTTr: r r: : � : :r : r r: : � : :f · } · �
• •(o o o o o•)• • • • •)• • • • •)• • • • •(* •'Oo o (o o o o o(o•o • • •<'-• • • • o o oOo o)o o o o o(o o o•. •(o o o o o(o oOo o o�o o o o o)o o o o •)o•o o o•ofo o o o o(o o o o o(o o o o o(o o o o o >• • • • • )•• • • • )o o o Oo fo o o o o(o o o o o(o o o o •<• •o o o o)o o o o o)o o o o
II>
::s
Q..
::::l
�t��j7:1�::17t7:!1":H":!7:!7:i t: ; 1 t t t= t::t I· t t t I L II t:t· l·· t· l

'D
s
II>
.....
0
i· ·�· · -��tTlT! TIT t l " : tT!itTt�f:iTI : l � li . : ; I: II. : J J: t t II: 1 : I L :t : l I t

::s
· ·
�1·t· }·t· }· l··+· l· ·}·l· ·}·l· ·}·t· }·t· }·f· }·l· }· l· · j· ·l· ·}·l· ·}·t· }·f· ·j· · �--· · · ·1·· ·······1· · · · +· · ·+· · · +· · ·+· · ·+· · · · 1· · · · ·1· · · ·+· · · +· · ·+· · ·+· · · ·
.. .. · r:: : : r: : : :r: : : : r: : : : r: : : :c: : : c: : : r: : : :r: : : :r: : : : r:: : : r: : :
i
2
::::��::: :N�:r::�:::rxT:::?.::r::�::r::?.:::r::?.:I):::r:x:r:LL::�::r::�::r�:r::�:::r:::�:::r::�::::c::�:::t. �
· · · · · · · · · ·�· · · · · )' · · · · )·•· · ·• J• · · · ·t· · · · ·(· · · · ·<· · · · ·1': · ·•··• ·::-•·•· •·• )•· •· •· l:· · ·• • t· · · · ·( · · · · <'· · · ·• 1-: · ·•·• • ')• •·•·• •')• • • •·•f' ·. · · ·•C'· ·•· · ·' · · · · -t· · · · ·::O•·• · •·•l• • • • •!• • • • •('•. • • • (• • • • •"<-: · • • • ·'1'• • • • •)' • • • ·
· · ii· · -�1-t· }·f· +· !··+· !· ·t· i· ·}·l· ·}+·}·f· ++· i· ·I·J�d· · j· ·l· ·}+· i·+·}·f· +·t· +· f· +··f· · �---� i· · · · +· · +· · · +· · · ·f· · · · ·l· · · · ·l· · · ·+· · · +· · +· · · +· · · · 2
�: �Hflfl�tEI �li!f!IllJ��!It�t:l�!��tfl��tiliB!�;;1 =t:!: i:J:L:l··l

F3 NA ' 2 ' 2 ' 2 ' 2 : 2 : 2 ' 3 2 3 : NA 3 ' 3 : 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 : ' ' :
Gl NA i 2 i 2 i 2 i 2 i 2 i 2 i 3 i 2 i 3 i 3 i 3 i NP i NP i NP i NP i 2 i NP i 2 i 2 i 2 i 2 i 2 i 2 i l i i i i
· ·"ii· · ·NA"t·Nr"t'Nr·t· Nr;·t· Nrt·N:r·j· N·r·t·t:ir·t·Nr·t· Nr;·t· Nr;·(Nr·J. Nr·(t:ir·t·Nr·t·t:ir·t·Nr·j· Nr·j· Nrt·N?·j· N·r·h::ir·t·Nr·t· ·4· ·j· · 4·. j· · 4. .j· . 4· ·� '· · · · t· · · · ·t· · · ·
H2 NA : 3 : 3 : 3 : 3 : 3 : 3 : 4 : 3 : 4 : 3 : 4 : 3 : 3 : 3 : 3 : 3 : 3 : 2 : 3 : 3 : 3 : 2 : 2 : 2 : 2 : 2 : : :
· · · ·- · · · · NP
::J�::: :N�TNf.I�f.L�f.:[::��I:��T�:f.T�TNf.I�f.I:�f.I:��I:��TNf.:I:�:f.TNf.T�f.:L��I:�T�f.I�:f.TNf.T�f.T:i:::L:TI:::�::T::�::I�f.:L�.�- r
· i<2
Kl · · 1 · · 1 · i · · 1 · l ··· 1 · i · 1 · i · · 1 · · i· · 1 · · l · 1 · l · · 1 · i · · 1 · ·i · · 1 · i · · 1 · ·l · · 1 · · l · 1 · · l 1 . l 1 l 1 l 1 i 1 i
". T t i t T j T : ·"i" : i j i r- r t i t i j r : i j i t 1 t· ·i tT·t· ·T· j· ·i"··j· · i· ·j· · i· ·ji· · 1l"· t! · ·i1 · ti ·1i· ·ti · ·i1 · ·!j· ··2· ·lj· · 1i· ·�i·-. 2· ·ti 4· ·tl 4· ·tl · ·T1 · 1
l 1 2 2 4 4
1
Chapter 2
e) Carports having at least two sides entirely open associated with Occupancy A.
f) Parking or storage of motor vehicles associated with Occupancy F4 (Garages and Petrol Stations).
g) Fuel dispensin g_ pumps covered with a canopy with opening on at least three sides associated with
Occupancy F2 (Small Shops and Markets) provided the following conditions exist:
i) The Occupancy F2 is provided with two exits separated by a distance of at least one-half the
maximum diagonal dimension of the building or area to be served and not located in the same
exterior wall.
ii) The pump islands are located more than 6 meter away from the Occupancy F2.
2.3.2 Forms of Occupancy Separations

Portions of a building having different occupancies shall be separated with horizontal or vertical or of any
other form of separation as may be required to achieve a complete separation.
2.3.3 Types of Occupancy Separation

The occupancy separations shall be classified as follows:
a) Four Hour Fire Resistive : The four hour fire resistive separation shall have no openings therein and
shall provide a fire resistance of at least four hours.
b) Three Hour Fire Resistive : The three hour fire resistive separation shall provide a fire resistance of not
less than three hours. The total width of all openings in any one storey shall not exceed 25 per cent of
the length of the wall in that storey and no single opening shall have an area greater than 12 m2• The
openings shall be protected with a fire resistance assembly providing a fire resistance of at least three
hours.
In case of a floor having a three hour fire resistance rating, the openings shall be protected by vertical
enclosures extending above and below such openings. The walls of sud\ vertical enclosures shall be of a
construction offering at least two hours of fire resistance. All openings in the walls of these vertical
enclosures shall be protected with fire assembly having a fire resistance rating of at least one and one
half hour.
c) Two Hour Fire Resistive : The two hour fire resistive separation shall be of a construction having a fire
resistance rating of not less than two hours. All openings in such separations shall be protected with a
fire assembly of a fire protection rating of at least one and one-half hour.
d) One Hour Fire Resistive : The one hour fire resistive separation shall be of at least one hour fire
protection construction. All openings in such separations shall be protected with a fire protection
assembly of at least one-half hour fire resistance.
2.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF ALL OCCUPANCIES
2.4.1 Location on Property

2.4.1.1 All buildings shall have access to a public road or yard on at least one side of the property.
2.4.1.2 Fire separation distance of the exterior wall of a building shall be measured from the building face
to the adjacent property line. For the purpose of this section, the centre line of an adjoining public way shall
be considered an adjacent property lme. For two buildings on the same plot an imaginary line equidistant
from both buildings shall be considered as the relevant property line.
2.4.1.3 The exterior walls shall have a fire resistance and opening protection as specified in
Tables 3.2.2 and 3.2.3 and in accordance with such additional provisions as are set forth in Part 4.
2.4.1.4 Projection beyond exterior building line shall be limited to the sunshade line as specified in
Sec 1.7.12.4.
2.4.1.5 When openings in exterior walls are required to be protected due to distance from the property
line, the aggregate area of such openings shall not exceed 50 per cent of the total area of the wall in each
storey.
2.4.2 Allowable Floor Areas

2.4.2.1 The total area of the building shall comply with Sec 1.8.3.
2.4.2.2 The area of the mezzanines shall be included in the area of the floor where the mezzanines are
located, unless they are considered as separate floors.

Part 3
General Building Requirements,Control and Regulation
2.4.2.3 A basement floor area need not be included in the total available area of the building provided it is
used for car parking, electrical or mechanical plant or service room. F or other uses or occupancies in the
basement, the floor area shall be included in the total area of the building.
Table 3.2.2
Fire Resistance Ratings of Exterior Walls (in hours) for Various Occupancy Groups
(See Sec31. 8 for exceptions)
Fire Separation Occupancy
Distance Al, A2,A4 A3, AS, F3, F4, FS, H2,J

Kl,K2 B,C, D, E, G2,H1
F1, F2, G1
Up to 1.5 m 1 1 2 3 4
Greater than 1.5 m N 1 1 2 3

and up to3 m
Greater than 3 m N N N 1 2
and up to4.5 m
Greater than 4.5 m N N N N 1

and up to9 m
Greater than 9 m N N N N N
N No requirements
=
Table 3.2.3
Requirements for Opening Protection Assembly Based on Fire Resistance
Rating of Exterior Walls
Fire Resistance Rating of Wall Fire Resistance Required for

(in hours) Opening Assembly (in hours)
4 Not permitted
3 3
2 1.5
1 05
.
N No requirements
2.4.3 Permitted Types of Construction

The types of construction for any occupancy shall conform to the specifications set forth in Table3.2.4.
Table 3.2.4
Permitted Types of Construction and Fire Zones for Various Occupancy Groups
Occupancy Permitted Types of Fire Zone

Construction
A
B
'
c
D 1,2 or3 1
E
F1, F2, F3
H1
K
F4,F5
G 1 or2 2
H2
J 1 3
2.5 REQUIREMENTS OF OCCUPANCY A- RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy A in accordance with Sec 2.1.1.
25
. 1
. Construction, Height and Allowable Area
2.5.1.1 Buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy A shall be limited to the type of construction set
forth in Table3.2.4 and shall not exceed in area or height as specified in Sec 1. 8 and 2.4.2.
3-32
Chapter 2
2.5.1.2 Walls and floors separating dwelling units in the same building shall not be of less than one-hour
fire resistive construction.
2.5.1.3 Storage or laundry rooms in Occupancy A2, A3 or AS that are used in common by the occupants
shall be separated from the rest of the building by at least one hour fire resistive occupancy separation.
2.5.1.4 When the basement or ground floor of a building of Occupancy A2 or AS is used for parking or
storage of private cars of the occupants, the parking floor shall be of Type 1 construction and shall be
separated from the floor above with a three hour occupancy separation.
2.5.2 Location on Property .

·
Buildings of Occupancy A shall comply with the requirements for location on property and fire resistive
exterior walls and openings as specified in Sec 2.4.1.
2.S.3 Access and Exit Facilities and Emergency Escapes

2.5.3.1 Facilities for access and exit shall comply with the provisions set forth in Sec 1.6, and Chapter 3,
Part 4.
2.5.3.2 Every sleeping room in ground, first and second floors shall have at least one openable window or
door for emergency escape which shall open directly into the exterior or an interior courtyard. The units
shall be openable from tne inside without the use of any tool to provide a minimum clear opening of SOO
mm widtn by 600 mm height with a maximum sill height of 1 m aoove the floor.
2.5.4 Lighting, Ventilation and Sanitation

Daylighting and natural ventilation along with artificial lighting and mechanical ventilation required by this
Code are specified in Sec 1.17 and Chapters 1 and 3, Part 8.
2.5.S Minimum Dimensions of Habitable and Nonhabitable Rooms

The minimum dimensions of habitable and nonhabitable rooms are specified in Sec 1.12.2. The minimum
dimensions of A4 housing (Minimum Standard Housing) are specified m Appendix A.
.
2.5.6 Smoke Detectors and Sprinkler Systems

The requirements for smoke detectors and sprinkler systems are specified in Chapters 4 and S Part 4 and
those snall be installed according to manufacturer's instructions.
2.S.7 Shaft and Exit Enclosures

Elevator shafts, vent shaft, dumbwaiter shaft, garbage chute and other vertical openings shall be enclosed at
least by a four hour resistive construction. Exit requirements are specified in Chapter 3, Part 4.
·
2.S.8 Fire Alarm Systems .
Requirements for fire alarm systems in Occupancy A buildings are specified in Chapters 4 and S, Part 4. Fire
alarms shall be installed in the following residential occupancies :
a) Occupancy A2 (Flats or Apartments) havins more than 16 dwelling units in a single building or more
than 4 occupancy floors shall be provided With an approved manual or automatic fire alarm system..
b) Occupancy A3 (Mess, Boarding Houses and Hostels) buildings of five storey or more in height or
having an occupant load of 30 persons or more shall be equipped with an approved manual or
automatic fire alarm system .
c) Fire alarm systems need not be required for residential buildings of not over two storey in height
provided it has adequate exit facilities.
d) AS (Hotels and Lodging Houses) with three storey or more in height or containing 20 or more guest
rooms shall be providea with an approved manual or automatic fire alarm system.
e) Multi-storeyed blocks of Occupancy A4 (Minimum Standard Housing) with more than 4 occupancy
floors each accommodating 4 or more dwelling units shall be provided with an approved manual fire
alarm system.
2.6 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY B- EDUCATIONAL BUILDINGS
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy B in accordance with Sec 2.11.
2.6.1 Construction, Height and Allowable Area

Buildings or parts of buildings classified as Occupancy B shall be limited to type of construction set forth in
Table 3.2.4 and comply with the provisions of SeC 1.8 and 2.4.2, to meet the requirements of height and area
limitations.
2.6.1.1 For the purpose of this section, the following terminology are applicable:
a) Common Space Condition : A common space condition exists between rooms, spaces or areas within a
building or part of a building which are not separated by an approved smoke or craft barrier.

Part 3
b) Separate Space Condition : A separate space condition exists between rooms, spaces or areas when
separated by approved smoke or draft barrier.
c) Smoke and Draft Barrier : A smoke or draft barrier is a wall or floor or partition with or without
openings therein of such construction that will prevent transmission of smoke or gases through them. ·
2.6.1.2 Automatic closing fire assemblies installed in separate space conditions shall be activated by
approved smoke detectors.
2.6.1.3 The areas of common and separate space conditions served by one side open corridor or verandah
in a building having a height of not more than 14 m or 4 storeys will not require smoke detectors and
standpipes or sprinl<ler systems except hazardous laboratories, vocational shops and other similar areas
contammg hazardous materials. Such hazardous materials shall not exceed the quantities as specified in Sec
2.13.1.3.
2.6.1.4 Rooms or groups of rooms sharing a common space where flammable liquids, combustible dust or
hazardous materials are used, stored, develoyed or handled in an amount exceeding that specified in Sec
2.13.1.3 shall be classified as Occupancy J. Such rooms or groups of rooms shall comply with the
requirements of fire protection as specified in Chapters 4 and 5, Part 4.
2.6.1.5 Rooms or groups of rooms, sharing a common space or having separate spaces, served by a
common corridor or passage with less than 20 per cent outdoor opening of wall in a building of height 11 m
or less, or three storeys or less, need not be provided with smoke detectors and standpipe or sprinkler
system for fire protection provided it conforms with the access and exit requirements speofied in Sec 1.6,
and Chapters 4 and 5, Part 4.
·
2.6.1.6 Buildings of Occupancy B situated outside the jurisdiction of any municipality shall have a
construction of at least two hours fire resistance.
-
Buildings of Occupancy B shall comply with the requirements for location on property and fire resistive
2.6.3 Access and Exit Facilities and Emergency Escapes

Facilities for access and exit and emergency escape shall comply with the provisions set forth in Sec 1.6;
Chapter 3, Part 4.
2.6.4 Lighting, Ventilation and Sanitation .

2.6.4.1 Lighting, ventilation and sanitation facilities provided in all Occupancy B buildings shall conform
to Sec 1.17, and Chapters 1 and 3, Part 8.
2.6.4.2 The ratio of number of water closets to number of students shall be as follows:
Boys Girls
For primary schools 1:100 1:35
For secondary schools and above 1:100 1:45
In addition to this, urinals shall be provided for boys at the ratio of 1:30 for all schools.
There shall be at least one drinking fountain on each floor.
2.6.5 Minimum Dimensions of Class Rooms, Common Toilets and Staircases

The dimension of a class room shall be not less than 4 m on any side and shall have an area of not less than
0.75 m2 per student. Other provisions for minimum dimensions shall comply with the requirements set forth
in Sec 1.8.
2.6.6 Shaft and Exit Enclosures

Elevator shafts, vent shafts and other vertical openings shall be enclosed with a construction of at least 3
hour fire resistance. Exit requirements shall comply with Chapter 3 Part 4.
2.6.7 Sprinkler and Standpipe System

Sprinkler and standpipe systems shall be installed as specified in Chapters 4 and 5, Part 4.
2.6.8 Fire Alarm Systems

Requirements for fire alarm systems in Occupancy B buildings are specified in Chapters 4 and 5, Part 4.
2.7 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY C- INSTITUTIONAL BUILDINGS
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy C in accordance with Sec 2.1.3.
3-34
Chapter 2

The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy C shall be limited to the type of construction set forth
in Table 3.2.4 and shall comply with the provisiOns of Sec 1.8 and 2.4.2 to meet the requirements of height
and area limitations.

Buildings of Occupancy C shall comply with the requirements for location on property and fire resistive

Facilities for access and exit and emergency escape shall comply with the provisions set forth in Sec 1.6, and
Chapter 3, Part 4.

All buifdings or part of a building classified as Occupancy C shall conform with the provisions of
Sec 1.17, and Chapters 1 and 3, Part 8.

hour fire resistance. Exit requirements shall comply with Chapter 3, Part 4.
2.7.6 Sprinkler and Standpip e Systems


Requirements for fire alarm systems in Occupancy C buildings are specified in Chapters 4 and 5, Part 4.
2.8 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY D- HEALTH CARE BUILDINGS
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy Din accordance with Sec 2.1.4.

The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occul?ancy Dshall be limited to the type of construction set forth
in Table 3.2.4 ana shall comply with the provisrons of Sec 1.8 and 2.4.2 to meet the requirements of height

Buildings of Occupancy D shall comply with the requirements for location on property and fire resistive

Chapter 3 of Part 4.

All buildings or part of a building classified as Occupancy D shall conform with the provisions of
Sec 1.17, Chapters 1 and 3 of Part 8.

Elevator shafts, vent shafts and other vertical openings shall be enclosed with a construction of at least four
hour fire resistance. Exit requirements shall comply with Chapter 3 of Part 4.
2.8.6 Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems

Sprinkler and standpipe systems shall be installed as specified in Chapters 4 and 5 of Part 4.

Requirements for fire alarm systems in buildings of Occupancy A are specified in Chapters 4 and 5 of
Part 4.
2.9 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY E- ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy E in accordance with Sec 2.1.5.

The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy E shall be limited to the type of construction set forth
in Table 3.2.4 and shall comply with the provisions of Sec 1.8 and 2.4.2 to meet the requirements of height

Buildings of Occupancy E shall comply with the requirements for location on property and fire resistive

Part3

Facilities for access and exit and emergency escape shall comply with the provisions set forth in Sec 1.6,
Part 3 and Chapter 3, Part 4.

All buildings or part of a building classified as Occupancy E shall conform with the provisions of
Sec 1.17, Part 3 and Chapters 1 and 3, Part 8. ·

Elevator shafts, v..ent shafts and other vertical Of>enings shall be enclosed with a construction of at least 4
hour fire resistance. Exit requirements shall comply with Chapter 3, Part 4. .
2.9.6 Smoke Detectors

Smoke detectors of approved quality shall be installed in stage area, assembly rooms with more than 50
occupancy load, projection and control rooms, back stage storage and dressing rooms (see Chapter 5, Part 4).
·


Requirements for fire alarm systems in Occupancy E buildings are specified in Chapters 4 and 5, Part 4.
2.9.9 Stage, Platform, Proscenium Wall and Curtain

2.9.9.1 The specification of this section shall apply to all parts of buildings and structures that contain
stages or platforms and other similar appurtenances as herein defined.
a) Stages : A stage is a three side enclosed or partially enclosed portion of a building which is desi�ed or
usea for presentation of plays or lectures or other entertainment. A stage shall oe further class1fied as
legitimate stage, regular stage and thrust stage.
b) Stage, Legitimate : A sta�e wherein curtains, drops, leg drops, scenery, lighting devices or other stage
effects are adjustable honzontally or vertically or suspended over head.
c) Stage, Regular : A stage wherein curtains, fixed drops, valances, scenery and other stage effects are
suspended and are not adjustable or retractable.
d) Stage, Thrust : A stage or platform extended beyond the proscenium line and into the audience.
2.9.9.2 Stage, Legitimate: Legitimate stage shall be constructed as specified in Table 3.2.4, specifying the
type of construction but shall not be less than construction Tr.pe 2. The position of the legitimate stage
extending beyond the proscenium opening line shall be perm1tted to be constructed with two hour fire
resistive materials.
The floor of the stage may be constructed with one hour fire rating materials. Thickness of a wooden floor
shall not be less than 50 mm .
2.9.9.3 Stage, Regular and Thrust : Regular stages and thrust stages shall be constructed by not less than
two hour fire resistive materials. Wooden floor when required in a stage shall not be less than 50 mm in
thickness with one hour fire resistive rating.
2.9.9.4 All trap doors and any other opening in stage floors shall be equipped with tight fitting solid wood
trap doors with thickness not less than 50 mm .
.
2.9.9.5 Stage Rigging Loft : The grid iron frame in the loft housing lighting and audio equipment, all the
machinery for flying scenery and fly galleries along with their installations snail be constructed of approved
noncombustible materials.
2.9.9.6 Foot Lights and Stage Electrical Equipment : Foot lights and border lights shall be installed in a
protective cover constructed of noncombustible materials.
2.9.9.7 Trim, Finish and Decorative Hangings : All materials used in moulding and decoration around
the proscenium shall be noncombustible.
2.9.9.8 Proscenium Curtain : The proscenium curtain shall be of approved fire retardant material and
shall protect against passage of flame and smoke for at least 30 minutes.
2.9.10 Motion Picture Projection Rooms

Every projection room shall be constructed in conformity with the construction requirements for the type of
the building in which the projection room is located. The wall opening required for projection need not have
a fire protection assembly but shall be closed with glass or other approved materials.
3-36
. Chapter2
The floor area of a projection room shall not be less than 8 m2 for a single machine. The working space
between the machines when more than one machine are used shall not be less than 0.75 m.
The height of the projection room shall have a minimum clear space of 2.5 m.
2.9.11 Sports Facilities

2.9.11.1 Vomiters, Aisles and Exits of Seating Galleries
a) There shall be a minimum of two exits remotely located from each other immediately to the outside for
each balcony or tier. There shall be three exits when seating capacity exceeds 1000 persons and four
exits when it exceeds 4000 persons.
b) There shall be at least 0.6 m2 of space per person in the gallery. Minimum width of a seat in the gallery
shall be 0.45 m.
c) There shall be a maximum of 33 seats on each side of the aisle. Maximum width of the main aisles and
the secondary aisles shall be 1.0 m and 0.7 m respectively.
d) Entrance and exits shall be protected by safety railings.
e) Back to back space between two rows of seats shall not be less than 0.80 m.
f) The evacuation time in the galleries shall not be more than 10 minutes.
2.9.11.2 Swimming Pools

a) Any swimming pool used or constructed for the exclusive use by the Occupancy A1 and is available
only to the occupants and private guests shall be classified as a private swimming pool. Any swimming
pool other than private swimming pool shall be classified as a public swimming pool.
b) There shall be at least 1.5 m space between any side of a swimming pool and a rear or side property
lines. For street property lines, this distance shall be at least 2.0 m.
c) Swimming pools shall be provided with overflow provision to remove scum and other materials from
the surface of the water. When water skimmers are used for private pools there shall be one skimming
device for each 50 m2 of surface area or fraction thereof.
d) The overflow �tters shall not be less than 75 mm deep and shall be pitched to slope of one unit vertical
to 50 units honzontal (1:50) toward drains.
e) Public swimming pools shall be so designed that the pool water turnover is at least once every 8 hours.
f) Private swimming pools shall be designed so that there is a pool water turnover at least once every 18
hours.
g) Public swimming pools shall be equipped with filters the capacity of which shall be controlled to filter
140 litres per minute per m2 of surface area. Private swimming pool filters shall not filter more than 230
litres per minute per m2 of the surface area.
h) The acidity and alkalinity of the pool water shall be between 7.0 and 7.5.
i) All recirculating systems shall be equipped with an approved hair and lint strainer installed in the
system ahead of the pump.
j) All swimming pool and equipment shall be designed to be emptied completely of water and the
discharged water shall be disposed in an approved manner ana shall not create problems in the
neighbouring property.
k) Pumps, filters and other mechanical and electrical equipment shall be placed in enclosed spaces and
shall not be accessible to the bathers.
2.9.12 Amusement Building Alarm System

An approved smoke detection system shall be installed in an amusement building according to the fire
protection provisions specified in Chapters 4 and 5, Part 4.
2.9.13 Public Address System

A public address system may be installed when required to act as alarm system.
2.10 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY F- BUSINESS AND MERCANTILE BUILDINGS
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy F in accordance with Sec 2.1.6.

Part 3

The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy F shall be limited to the type of construction set forth
in Table 3.2.4 and shall comply with the provisions of Sec 1.8 and 2.4.2 to meet the requirements of height
and area limitations. ·
Special provisions for the buildings of Occupancy F are specified in the following sections.
2.10.1.1Ground floor or basement of a building used for car parking and separated from the building
above by at least three hour fire resistive construction shall not be included in the area calculation of the
building nor shall it be included in the calculation of number of storeys provided the floors above
accommodate one or more of the following occupancies:
i) A2,AS
ii) E2, E3, E4
iii) F1, F2, F3
Entry lobbies, mechanical and electrical rooms and other similar uses incidental to the operation of the
building may be provided in the car parking floor provided the total area of such uses remains within f of
the parking floor area.
2.10.1.2The storage area in Occupancy F2 and F3 in connection with whole sale or retail sales shall be
separated from public area by a one hour fire resistive construction.
Exceptions :
Occupancy separation need not be provided when any one or more of the following conditions prevail:
2
i) The storage area does not exceed 100 m ,
ii) The storage area is protected with approved sprinkler system and does not exceed 300m2.

Buildings of Occupancy F shall comply with the requirements for location on property and fire resistive

Chapter 3, Part 4.

All buildings or part of a building classified as Occupancy F shall conform with the provisions of
Sec 1.17; Chapters 1 and 3, Part 8. .

2.10.6 Highrise Buildings

The provision of this section shall apply to all buildings having floors used for human occupancy located
more than 20 m from ground level or fhe lowest level of fire department vehicle access.
Exceptions :
The provisions of this section may not be required for the following buildings and structures:
i) Airport traffic control towers notwithstanding other provisions of this Code,
ii) Open parking structures,
iii) Buildings used for low hazard special uses which are approved by the Authority.
2.10.6.1 Maintenance and Inspection : All fire protection systems shall be maintained and inspected on a
regular basis to keep them in operative condition. The maintenance inspection shall be performed quarterly.
All plumbing installations shall be maintained and inspected periodically to keep them in operative
conditions.
2.10.6.2 Type of Construction : All highrise buildings shall be of Type 1 construction.

When required by other provisions of this Code, sprinkler system shall be installed according to the
specifications set forth in Chapters 4 and 5, Part 4.
2.10.8 Special Hazards

Installation of chimneys, heating a p paratus, boiler, central heating or air-conditioning plant shall conform to
the provisions of this Code as specified in Chapter 3, Part 8.
3-38
Chapter 2
2.10.9 Open Parking Garages

Open parking garages used exclusively for car parking or storage of private or pleasure type motor vehicles
snail nave Type 1 or Type 2 construction.
21
. 09
. 1
. Openings: The exterior opening of a garage structure shall not be less than 20 per cent of the floor
area in any floor.
2.10.9.2 Ramps, exit stair and elevators shall be provided as specified in Sec 1.12, and Chapter 3, Part 4.
2.10.10 Helistops
2.10.10.1 General : Helistops on the roof top of a building or other locations shall be constructed in
accordance with this section.
2.10.10.2 Size : The minimum dimension of the landing area for helicopters weighing less than 1600 kg
shall be 6 m x 6 m. There shall be an average clearance of 4 m surrounding and at the fevel of the landing
area which shall not be less than 2 m at any point.
2.10.10.3 Construction : Helicopter landing areas and supports shall be constructed with non-combustible
material.
2.10.10.4 Aviation Approval: Before helistops start operating formal approval shall be obtained from the
civil aviation authority.

Smoke detectors of approved quality shall be installed in storage areas of F2 and F3 occupancies and
highrise Fl occupancies.
·

Requirements for fire alarm systems in buildings of Occupancy F are specified in Chapter 5, Part 4.
2.11 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY G- INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy G in accordance with Sec 2.1.7. An nonexhaustive and indicative
list of low hazard and moderate hazard industrial uses are listed in Tables 3.2.5 and 3.2.6 respectively.
Storage and use of hazardous materials shall not exceed the exempt amount specified in Sec 2.13.1.3.

J'
The buildings or arts thereof classified as Occupancy G shall be limited to the type of construction set forth
in Table 3.2.4 an shall comply with the provisiOns of Sec 1.8 and 2.4.2 to meet the requirements of height
·

Buildings of Occupancy G shall comply with the requirements for location on property and fire resistive
Table32
. 5
.
Examples of Low Hazard Industries
Sl.No. Description
1 Beverages, nonalcoholic
2 Brick and masonry
3 Ceramic products
4 Foundries
5 Glass products
6 Gypsum
7. Ice plants
8 Metal fabricator and assembly
9 � �
Water um ing plants
10 Agricu tura farms
11 Grain processing mills (agricultural products)
12 Silk processing and spinning

Chapter 3, Part 4.

All buifdings or part of a building classified as Occupancy G shall conform with the provisions of
Sec 1.17; Chapters 1 and 3, Part 8.

Part3
Special provisions: Industrial buildings having roof opening for daylighting and natural ventilation shall
comply with the following requirements:
·
i) The aggregate opening in roof and external windows shall not be less than 10 per cent of the floor
area.
ii) For natural ventilation by means of exterior window openings, the operable window area shall not be
less than 5 per cent of the total floor area.
Exception:
Industrial buildings wherein artificial lighting and mechanically operated ventilation systems of approved quality are
installed need not be provided with natural ventilation or natural lighting.



Chimneys, vents and ventilation ducts shall be constructed with noncombustible materials. Every bailer,
central heating plants, electrical rooms, or hot water supply bailer shall be separated from the rest of the
occupancy or use by not less than two hour fire resistive construction.

Requirements for fire alarm systems in Occupancy G buildings are specified in Chapters 4 and 5, Part 4.
2.12 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY H - STORAGE BUILDINGS
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy H in accordance with Sec 2.1.8.

The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy H shall be limited to the type of construction set forth
in Table 3.2.4 and shall comply with the provisiOns of Sec 1.8 and 2.4.2 to meef fhe requirements of height
and area limitations. ·

The location on property for Occupancy H shall conform with Sec 2.4.1.

Chapter 3, Part 4.

All buildings or part of a building classified as Occupancy H shall conform with the provisions of
Special Provision : The provisions of Sec 1.17, does not apply to nonhabitable spaces of H1 and H2
occupancies unless otherwise required by this Code. Ventilators of size not less than 0.25 m 2 shall be
provided where suitable 0.30 m above the floor level for floor level ventilators and 0.30 m below the roof
level for roQf level ventilators. There shall be one floor level ventilator and one roof level ventilator for every
0.25 m2 of the floor area. Mechanized ventilation system of approved quality shall be installed where
required.



The storage of hazardous materials shall not exceed the exempt amount as specified in Table 3.2.7. The
storage of moderate and low hazardous materials shall be separated at least by a two hour fire resistive
construction.
3-40
Chapter 2
Table 3.2.6
Moderate Hazard Industrial uses
1. Aircraft
2. ApJ:'liances
3. ·
Athletic equipment
4. Automobiles and other motor vehicles
5. Bakeries
6. Beverages (alcoholic)
7. Bicycles
8. Boat building
9. Bailer works
10. Brooms or brushes
11. Business machines
12. Cameras and photo equil'ment
13. Canneries, including food products
14. Clothing
15. Condensed and powdered milk
16. Construction ana agricultural machinery
17. Disinfectants
18. Dry Cleaning using other than flammable liquids in cleaning or dyeing operations
19. Electric light plants and power houses
20. Electrolyhc reducing works
21. Electronics
22. Engines, includin� rebuilding or reconditioning
23. Film, photograph1c
24. Food processing
25. Furniture
26. Garments industries
27. Hemp and Jute products
28. Laundries (mechanized)
29. Leather and tanneries, excluding enareding or japanning
30. Machinery
31. Mill works, and woodworking, wood distillation and particle boards
32. Motion picture and television filming
33. Musical instruments
34. Pharmaceutical
35. Paper mills or products
36. Packaging
37. Plastic products
38. Printing or publishing or dyeing and printing
39. Recreahonal vehicles
40. Refuse incinerators
41. Shoes
42. Soaps and detergents
43. Sugar production and refineries
44. Textile and jute mills including canvas, cotton cloth, bagging burlap, carpet and rags
45. Tobacco
46. Trailers
47. Upholstery and manufacturing shops

Smoke detectors of approved quality shall be installed in the Occupancy H2 having more than 100 m2 of
area. Other provisions for smoke detectors shall comply with Chapters 4 and 5, of Part 4.
·
2.12.9 Fire Alann System

Fire alarm systems of approved type shall be installed in the buildings having Occul'ancy H1 and
Occupancy H2 when required accordmg to the specification of fire protection provis10ns of Chapters 4 and
5, Part4.
2.13 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY J- HAZARDOUS BUILDINGS
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy J in accordance with Sec 2.1.9.
2.13.1 General
The plans for buildin�s and structures accommodating Occupancy J shall clearly indicate the type and
intended use of matenals and its processing or handling methods so as to reflect the nature of use of each
portion of such buildings.
2.13.1.1 Occupancy Jl : Any building or portion thereof containing the following shall be classified as
Occupancy Jl.

Part 3
a) Combustible dusts and any similar solid material sufficiently comminuted for suspension in still air
which, when so suspended, is capable of self-sustained combustion.
b) Combustible liquids - Any liquid having a flash point at or above 40°C shall be known as class II and
class III liquids. Combustible liquids shall be classified as follows:
Class II Liquids having flash point at or above 40°C and below 60°C.
Class III Liquids having flash points at or above 60°C and below 95°C.
Cryogenic liquids (flammable or oxidizing): Any liquid that has a boiling point below -130°C.
Flammable Gases : Any gas when mixed with air in a proportion of 13% (by v.olume) forms a
flammable mixture under atmospheric temperature and pressure.
Flammable Liquids : Any liquid that has a flash point below 40°C and has a net vapour pressure
exceeding 275 kPa at 40°C. Flammable liquids shall be known as Class I liquid and shall be further
classified as follows:
Class I. A Liquids having flash point below 25°C and having a boiling point below
40°C.
Class I. B Liquids having flash point below 25°C and having a boiling point at or
above 40°C.
Class I. C Liquids having flash points at or above 25°C and below 40°C.
Oxidizers class 3 As determined in accordance with NFPA 43A.
Oxidizing gases As determined in accordance with NFPA 43C.
Pyrophoric liquids, solids and gases that will ignite spontaneously in air at a temperature of 55°C or
below.
Unstable (reactive) materials class 3, nondetonatable as determined in accordance with NFPA 704.
Combustible fibres: Includes readily ignitable fibres like cotton, sisal, jute hemp, tow, cocoa fibre,
oakum, baled waste, baled waste paper, kapok, hay, straw, excelsior, Spanish moss and other similar
materials.
Flammable solid: Any solid including blasting agent or explosive that is liable to cause fire through
absorption of moisture, spontaneous chemical change or retained heat from manufacturing or
processing, or which when Ignited burns so vigorously and persistently as to create a serious hazard.
Organic peroxides, Class II and Class III as determined in accordance with NFPA 43B.
Oxidizers Class I and Class II as determined in accordance with NFPA 43A.
The bulk storage of-Unstable (reactive) materials Class 1 and Class 2 as determined in accordance with
NFPA 704, water reactive materials, Class 2 and Class 3 which react with water to release a gas that is
either flammable or present a health hazard as determined in accordance with NFPA 704.
2.13.1.2 Occupancy J2
·
a) Any building or portion thereof containing the following shall be classified as Occupancy J2:
Corrosives: Any substance that causes visible destruction of or irreversible alteration in living tissues by
chemical action at the site of contact.
Highly toxic materials: The materials falling in this category are as follows:
i) Oral Toxicity : A chemical that has a median lethal dose of 50 mg or less per kg of body weight
when administered orally to albino rats weighing between 200 and 300 gms each.
ii) Toxicity of Inhalation : A chemical that has a median lethal concentration in air of 200 ppm or
less by volume of gas or vapour, or 2 mg per litre or less of mist, fume or dust, when
administered by continuous inhalation for 1 hour (or less if death occurs within 1 hour) to albino
rats weighing between 200 and 300 grams each.
3-42
Chapter2
iii) Toxicity by Skin Absorption: A chemical that has median lethal dose of 200 mg or less per kg of
body weight when administered b)' continuous contact for 24 hours (or less if death occurs
within 24 hours) with the bare skin of albino rabbits weighing between 2 and 3 kg each.
iv) Irritants:Any noncorrosive chemical or substance which causes a reversible inflammatory effect
on living tissues by chemical action at the site of contact.
v) Radioactive Material:Any material or combination of materials that spontaneously emit ionizing

radiation.
vi) Sensitizers: A chemical or substance that causes a substantial proportion of exposed people or
animals to develop an allergic reaction in normal tissue after repeated exposure to the chemical.
b) The Occupancy ]2 shall also include among others the followings:
i) Dry cleaning establishments using flammable solvents.

ii) Explosive man u fact uring.
iii) Pamt or solvent manufacturing (flammable base).
iv) Pyrexin plastic manufacturing.
v) Sodium nitrate or ammonium nitrate.
vi) Storage of combustible film.
2.13.1.3 Special Provisions : The following shall not be included in Occupancy J but shall be classified in
the occupancy group which they most nearly resemble and such classification shall be approved by the
Authority:
i) All buildings and structures and parts thereof which contain less than the exempt quantities as
specified in Table 3.2.7, when such ouildings comply with the fire protection provisions oi this Code.
ii) Rooms containing flammable liquid in lightly closed containers of 4 litre capacity or less for retail
sales or private use on the premises and in quantities not exceeding 820 litre/m2 of room area.
iii) Retail paint sales rooms with quantities not exceeding 820 litre/m2 of room area.
iv) Closed systems housing flammable or combustible liquids or gases used for the operation of
machinery or equipment.
v) Cleaning establishments.
vi) Liquor stores and distributors without bulk storage.
vii) Tyre storage containing less than 10,000 vehicle tyres.
viii) The storage or use of materials for agricultural purposes for use on the premises.
ix) Pyrophoric solids or liquids not exceeding 3 m3 in storage cabinet located in a building that is
equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system provided in accordance with the fire
protection provisions of this Code.
x) Pyrophoric solids or liquids not exceeding 3 kg in storase cabinet located in a building that is
prov1ded with an automatic sprinkler system installed m accordance with the fire protection
xi) Class 2 water reactive materials not exceeding 100 kg in an approved storage cabinet located in a
building that is provided with automatic sprinkler installed in accordance with the fire protection

2.13.2.1 The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy J shall be limited to the type of construction
set forth in Table 3.2.4 and shall comply with the provisions of Sec 1.8 and 2.4.2 to meet tl\e requirements of
height and area limitations.
2.13.2.2 Floors : The floors and spaces containing hazardous materials and in areas where motor vehicles,
boats, helicopters or airplanes are stored, repaired or operated shall be of noncombustible, liquid-tight
construction. ·
Exception:
In floors and areas where no repair works are carried out may be surfaced or waterproofed with asphaltic paving
materials.

Part 3
Table3.2.7
Exempt Amounts of Hazardous Materials
Material Class/State Maximum

I
quantities
1. Flammable liquids Class 1-A 115 litres*

Class 1-B 230 litres*
Class 1-C 340 litres*
2. Combustible liquids Class-II 455 litres*
Class-III A 950 litres*
3. Combination of flammable liquids 455 litres*
4. Flammable gases 84,000 litres
atmospheric
pressure at 21oc
5. Liquefied flammable 230 litres
6. Combustible fibres Loose 2800 litres
7. Combustible fibres Baled 28,000 litres
8. Flammable solids 230 kg.
9. Unstable materials No exemptions
10. Corrosive liquids 210 litres
11. Oxidizing materials Gases 168,000 litres
12. Oxidizing materials Liquids 190 litres
13. Oxidizing materials Solids
Class-1 1815 kg.
Class-2 455 kg.
Class-3 90 kg.
Class-4 4.5 kg.
14. Organic peroxides Class-1 No exemptions
Class-1 & 3 4.5 kg.
15. Nitromethane Unstable materials No exemptions
16. Ammonium nitrate 455 kg.
17. Ammonium nitrate Compound
mixtures containing
more than 60% 455 kg.
nitrate by weight
18. Highly toxic material and poisonous gas No exe � tions
19. Irritants 2270 g.
20. Sensitizes 2270 kg.
21. Smokeless Powder '9 kg.
22. Black sporting powder 2.3 kg.
*
The maximum quantities may be increased by 100 per cent in areas not accessible to the public in
buildings provided with automatic sprinkler system.
2.13.2.3 Spill Control : The floors containing hazardous repair or other works shall be recessed a minimum
of 100 mm so as to prevent flow of liquids to adjoining areas.
2.13.2.4 Drainage : The buildings and areas shall be provided with approved drainage system to direct the
flow of liquids to an approved location or room or area designed to provide secondary containment of the
hazardous materials and fire protection water.
The drains shall be designed with adequate slope and section to carry the design discharge of the sprinkler
·
system. The material used in the drains shall be suitable for drainage of the storage materials.
Separate drainage system shall be designed for materials which react with each other producing undesirable
results. They may be combined when they have been provided with approved means of discharge into the
public sewer or natural stream or river.
2.13.2.5 Containment : The outflow from the drains shall be directed to a containment system or other area
that provide a secondary storage for the hazardous materials and liquids and fire protection water. The
containment capacity shall be capable of containing the outflow from the drains for a period of at least one
hour.
The overflow from secondary containment system shall be directed to a safe location away from the
building, adjoining properties and storm drain.
If the secondary containment storage area is open to rainfall it shall be designed to accommodate 24 hour
rainfall or a continuous rainfall of 100 mm per day.
3-44
Chapter 2
2.13.2.6 Smoke and Heat Vents: Smoke and heat vents shall be provided in areas or rooms containing
hazardous materials exceeding the exempt amount of Table 3.2.7.
2.13.2.7 Standby Power : Standby power shall be provided in the occupancies where Class I, II or III
organic peroxides are stored.

The location on property for Occupancy] shall conform with Sec 2.4.1.

Facilities for access and exit and emergency escape shall comply with the provisions set forth in Sec 1.6, and
Chapter 3, Part 4.

2.13.45.1 All spaces and rooms customarily occupied by human beings shall be provided with natural light
by means of exterior glazing with an area of not less than 10 per cent of the floor area. Such rooms and
spaces shall be provided with natural ventilation by means of exterior openings with an openable area not
less than 5 per cent of the total floor area or artificial light and mechanically operated ventilation system.
2.13.5.2 Ventilation in Hazardous Locations : The rooms; spaces or areas where explosive, corrosive,
combustible, flammable or highly toxic dust, mists, fumes, vapours or gases are stored or may be emitted
due to the processing, use, handling or storage of materials shall be mechanically ventilated.
The mechanical ventilation of all hazardous uses shall be segregated or separated from the ventilation of
other areas. The emissions generated at work areas shall be confined to the area in which they are generated
and shall be removed or discharged outside the building and preventive measures against back flow of such
hazardous fumes or gases inside the building shall be installed.
2.13.5.3 Ventilation of Toilets: Toilets shall be provided with fully openable exterior window of at least 0.3
m2 in area or a vertical duct not less than 62500 mm2 in cross-section for the first water closet, with 31250
additional mm2 for each additional fixture or a mechanically operated exhaust system eguipped to provide a
complete change of air in every 15 minutes. Such system shalf be connected to the outs1de air and the point
of discharge shall be at least 1.0 m away from any other opening into the building.
Other requirements of water closets are specified in Sec 1.11.4.


2.13.8 Explosion Control

Explosion control, equivalent protective devices or suppression systems or barricades shall be installed to
control or vent the gases resulting from deflagrations of dusts, gases or mists in a room or area, building or
other enclosures to minimize structural or mechanical damage.
Walls, floors and roofs separating a use from explosion exposure shall be designed according to the
provisions of Chapter 1, Part 6.
Explosion venting shall be designed in exterior walls or roof only. The venting shall be provided to prevent
serious structural damage and l'roduction of lethal projectiles. The venting design shall recognize the
natural characteristics and behav10urs of building materials in an explosion. The vents shall be designed to
relieve at a maximum internal pressure of 1 kPaout not less than Hie loads required by Chapter 2, Part 6.
One or more of the following systems shall be installed to relieve explosion, where applicable:
a) Light weight materials in walls.

b) Light fastening devices with hatch covers.
c) Light fastening with outward opening swing doors in exterior walls.
d) Nonbearing walls with light ties.
The venting devices shall discharge vertically or horizontally directly to an unoccupied yard having a width
of not less than 16 m on the same plot.
The releasing devices shall be so located that the discharge end shall not be less than 3 m vertically and 6 m
horizontally from window openings or exits in the same or adjoining buildings.

Part3

A manual fire alarm system shall be installed in Occupancy J2 and an automatic smoke detection system
shall be installed in rooms, spaces or buildings with Occupancy J1 in accordance with the provisions of
Chapters 4 and 5, Part 4.

Chimneys and vents and ventilation ducts shall be of noncombustible materials.
Every bailer, central heating plants, electrical rooms or hot water supply bailer shall be separated from the
rest of the occupancies or uses by not less than 2 hour fire resistive construction.
The devices that generate a spark, flame or glow capable of igniting gasoline shall not be installed or used
within 0.5 m of the floor.
Equipment or machinery that produces or emits combustible or explosive dust or fibres shall be provided
With an approved dust collecting and exhaust system.
The equipment or system that are used to collect, process or convey combustible dust or fibres shall be
installed with explosion venting or containment system.
2.14 REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY K- MISCELLANEOUS BUILDINGS
Buildings shall be classified as OccupancyK in accordance with Sec 2.1.10.
2.14.1 General
The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy K shall be limited to the type of construction set forth
in Table 3.2.4 and shall comply with the requirements of Sec 1.8 and 2.4.2 to meet the requirements of height
Any building or portion thereof that exceeds the limitations provided in this chapter shall be classified in the
occupancy group other thanK that it most nearly resembles.
In mixed occupancy buildings, the exterior wall and opening protection for K1 occupancy shall follow the
specification of the major occupancy of the building. For sucn mixed occupancy buildings, the allowable
floor area for OccupancyK1 shall be as permitted for the major occupanc y contained therein.

The location on property for OccupancyK shall conform with Sec 2.4.1.

Access and exit facilities for OccupancyK shall comply with the specification set forth in Sec 1.6; Chapter 3,
Part 4.

All buildings or part of a building classified as Occupancy K shall conform with the provisions of

hour fire resistance. Exit requirements shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 3, Part 4.


Requirements for fire alarm systems in OccupancyK buildings are specified in Chapters 4 and 5, Part 4.

Chimneys and exhausts shall be constructed with noncombustible materials.
The garage floor shall be constructed with not less than 4 hour fire resistance materials.
Related Appendix
Appendix A Guidelines for the Development of Minimum Standard Housing (Occupancy A4)
3-46
CHAPTER�
Classification of Building
Construction Types Based on
Fire Resistance
3.1 CLASSIFICATION AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 Classification by Type of Construction

For the purpose of this Code, there shall be three types of construction based on fire resistance which are as
follows:
Type 1 Highest degree of fire resistance

Type 2 Intermediate degree of fire resistance
Type 3 Lowest degree of fire resistance
The fire resistance ratings of various types of construction for structural and nonstructural members are
Buildings having a height of more than 20 m shall be constructed with noncombustible materials.
The fire resistance ratings of various building components shall conform to ASTM standards.
3.1.2 Fire Zones .

The planning and development authority of the city, township, municipalit}' or region where this Code is
intended to oe implemented shall divide the area under their j urisdiction mto distinct fire zones. The basis for
this zoning shall be the fire hazard inherent in the buildmgs and the degree of safety desired for the
occupancy accommodated therein. The number of zones in an area shall depend on its size and the strategies
undertaken for its development.
Part 3 3-47
Part 3
General Building Requirments, Control and Regula tion
Table 3.3.1
Required Fire Resistance Ratings of Building Elements (in hours)
for Various Types of Construction
Building Element Type of Construction

Typel I Type2 1 Type3
(1) Exterior bearing walls 4 2 1

f-- (see Note a) �
(2) Exterior non bearing walls and curtain walls 2 1.5 1

f-- (see Note a) �
(3) Interior bearing walls, bearing partitions, columns, girders,

trusses (other than roof trusses) and framing
a) Supporting more than one floor 4 2 2

b) Supporting one floor only or a roof only 3 1.5 1
(4) Structural frame and structural members supporting wall 3 1.5 1

f-- (see Note b) �
(5) Floor construction including beams 3 1.5 1
(6) Roof construction, including beams, trusses

and framing, arches and roof deck
a) 5 m or less in height to lowest member 2 1.5 1

b) More than 5 m but less than 7 m in height to lowest membe 1 1 1
c) 7 m or more in height to lowest member 0.5 0.5 0.5
(7) Fire walls and party walls 4 2 2

f-- (see Note c) �
(8) Enclosure of fire exits 2 2 2
(9) Shafts (other than exits) and elevator hoistways 2 2 2
(10) Access corridors leading to fire exits 1 1 1
(11) Vertical separation of tenant spaces 1 1 1
(12) Nonbearing partition walls 0.5 0.5 0.5
(13) False I suspended ceilings 0.5 0.5 0.5
(14) Smoke barriers 1 1 1
(15) Mixed occupancy separation f-- (see Note d) �
Note: a : Not less than the rating based on fire separation distance (see Table 3.2.2)
b : Not less than fire resistance rating of wall supported
c : Not less than the rating required in Table 3.2.1
d : Fire resistance ratings of mixed occupancy separation, where permitted, shall be as required
in Table 3.2.1.
3-48
Chapter 3
Classification of Building Construction Types Based on Fire Resistance
3.1.2.1 Fire Zone 1 : The following occupanc}' groups shall comprise this zone:
Occupancy A : Residential
Occupancy B : Educational
Occupancy C Institutional
Occupancy Fl, F2, F3 Business and Mercantile
(Offices, small shops and markets, large shops and markets)
Occupancy Hl Storage Buildings
(Low fire risk storage)
Occupancy K Miscellaneous Buildings
3.1.2.2 Fire Zone 2 : The following occupancy groups shall comprise this zone:
Occupancy F4, F5 : Business ana Mercantile
(Garages and petrol stations, essential services)
Occupancy G : Industrial Buildings
Occupancy H2 Storage Buildings
(Moderate fire risk storage)
3.1.2.3 Fire Zone 3 : The only occupancy falling in this zone shall be Occupancy J, Hazardous Buildings.
3.1.2.4 Change in Fire Zone Boundaries : The demarcations of fire zones may be changed or new
occupancies may be included in any fire zone through the same procedure as for promulgating new rules or
ordinances or both.
3.1.2.5 Buildings on Overlapping Fire Zones : Buildings falling on more than one fire zones shall be
considered to be situated on the zone in which the major portion of tne building falls. If a building is divided
equally between more than one fire zone, it shall be considered as falling in the fire zone having more
hazardous occupancy buildings.
3.1.2.6 Restrictions on Temporary Constructions: Permission may be granted by the Authority for
temporary constructions only in fire zones 1 and 2 and not in fire zone 3. Such temporacy constructions shall
adhere to the conditions of the permission and shall be demolished and removed completely after the expiry of
the duration of the permission imless it is extended by the Authority or a new permission is obtained.
3 .1. 3 Permissible Types of Construction for Various Occupancies

3.1.3.1 New Buildings: Types of constructions permitted for various buildings on the basis of fire zones
are specified in Table 3.2.4.
3.1.3.2 Existing Buildings : Existing buildings in any fire zone need not comply with the provision of this
Code for type of construction unless they are altered or in the opinion of the Authority they constitute a
hazard to the safety to the occupants of the buildings or the adjacent properties.
3.1.4 Exterior Walls

The fire resistance rating of the exterior walls shall conform with the provisions set forth in Table 3.2.2
and 3.2.3.
3.1.5 Mixed Occupancy Separation

When a building accommodates more than one occupancy, each such occupancy shall be separated from the
others according to the provisions specified in Sec 2.3.
3.1.6 Basement Floor

Basement floor of a building shall be enclosed with a one hour fire resistive construction. Doors in such
constructions shall be made of noncombustible materials.
Exception:
Occupancies F4 and K need not conform with these requirements.
3.1.7 Restricting Vertical Spread of Fire

3.1.7.1 Interior Walls: Propa�ation of fire, smoke, gas or fume through the voids of fire resistive floors and
walls shall be restricted by sealing such voids with an approved material which shall have a fire resistance
rating of at least equal to that of tne floor-wall assembly. The sealing material shall be capable of preventing
passage of flame and hot gases sufficient to ignite cotton waste when tested in accordance with ASTM
E119-8.
3.1.7.2 Exterior Walls : Openings in the exterior wall in two consecutive floors lying within 1.5 m
laterally shall be separated with a flame barrier projecting at least 75 em from the external face of the exterior
wall. The flame barrier shall have a fire resistance rating of not less than three-fourths hour.
3.1.8 Exceptions to Fire Resistance Requirements

The provisions of this section are exceptions to the occupation separation requirements of Table 3.2.1.

Part 3
3.1.8.1 Fixed Partitions

a) Stores and Offices: In such cases where offices, stores and similar places occupied by one tenant are
separated by nonload bearing walls that do not form a corridor servmg an occupant load, the partition
walls may be constructed of any one of the following :
i) Noncombustible materials;
ii) Fire retardant treated wood;
iii) One hour fire resistive construction;
iv) Wood panels or similar light construction up to three fourths the height of the room in which
placed; and
v) Wood panels or similar light construction more than three-fourths the height of the room in which
placed with not less than upper one fourth of the partition constructed of glass.
b) Hotels and Apartments : In such cases where nonload bearing walls act as interior partitions in
individual dwelling units in apartment houses and guest rooms or suites in hotels when such dwelling
units, guest rooms or suites are separated from each other and from corridors by not less than one-hour
fire-resistive construction, the partition walls may be constructed of any one of the following:
i) Noncombustible materials of fire retardant treated wood in buildings of any type of construction;
or
ii) Combustible framing with noncombustible materials applied to the framing in buildings of Type 3
construction.
c) Folding, Portable or Movable Partitions : Folding, portable or movable partitions need not have a fire
resistance rating if the following conditions are satisfied:
i) Required exits are not blocked without providing alternative conforming exits;
ii) Tracks, guides or other approved methods are used to restrict their locations; and
iii) Flammability shall be limited to materials having a flame-spread classification as set forth in
Tables 3.3.2 and 3.3.3 for rooms or areas.
Table 3.3.2
Flame Spread Classification
Class Flame Spread Index

I 0-25
II 26-75
III 76-200
Table 3.3.3
Maximum Flame Spread Class
Occupancy Enclosed Vertical Other Rooms or

Group Exit Ways Exit Ways Areas
E I II II
B I II III
C,D I I II
J I II III
F,G,H I II III
A2,A5 I II III
A1,A3,A4 III III IH
K No restrictions
d) Walls Fronting on Streets or Yards: For walls fronting on a street or yard having a width of at least 12
m, certain elements of the wall may be constructed as follows regardless of their fire-resistive
requirements:
i) Bulkheads below show windows, show window frames, aprons and show-cases may be of
combustible materials provided the height of such construction does not exceed 5 m above grade.
ii) Wood veneer of boards not less than 25 mm in nominal thickness or exterior type panels not less
than 10 mm in nominal thickness may be used in walls provided:
3-50
Chapter 3
1. the veneer does not extend beyond 5 m above grade; and
2. the veneer is placed either directly against noncombustible surface or furred out from such
surfaces not to exceed 40 mm with all concealed spaces fire blocked.
e) Trim :Wood may be used to construct trim, picture moulds, chair rails, baseboards, handrails and show
window backing. If there is no requirement for using fire protected construction, unprotected wood doors
and windows may be used.
f) Loading Platform : Noncombustible construction of heavy timber may be used for exterior loading
platforms with wood floors not less than 50 mm in nominal thickness. Such wood construction shall not
be carried through the exterior walls.
g) Insulating Boards : Combustible finished boards may be used under finished flooring.
3.1.9 Shaft Enclosures

3.1.9.1 General : Construction requirement for shafts through floors shall conform to the provisions of
Table 3.3.1.
3.1.9.2 Extent of Enclosures : Shaft enclosures shall extend from the lowest floor opening through
successive floor openings and shall be enclosed at the top and bottom.
Exceptions:
1. Shafts need not be enclosed at the top if it extends through or to the underside of the roof sheathing, deck or slab.
2. Noncombustible ducts carrying vapours, dusts or combustion products may penetrate the enclosure at the bottom.
3. Shafts need not be enclosed at the bottom when protected by fire dampers conforming to "Test Methods for Fire
Dampers and Ceiling Dampers" (U.B.C. Standard No. 43-7), installed a t the lowest floor level within the shaft
enclosure.
3.1.9.3 Special Provision : In groups other than Occupancies C and D, openings which penetrate only one
floor and are not connected with any other floor or basement and which are not concealed within building
construction assemblies need not be enclosed.
3.1.9.4 Protection of Openings : Openings in shaft enclosures shall be protected with a self-closing or an
automatic-closing fire assembly having a fire resistance rating of
i) one hour for one hour fire resistive walls

ii) one and one-half hours for two hour fire resistive walls
3.1.9.5 Rubbish and Linen Chute Termination Rooms : Rubbish and linen chute shall terminate in
rooms separate from the remaining of the building having the same fire resistance as required for shafts in
Table 3.3.1 but not less than orie hour.
3.1.10 Expansion and Contraction Joints

Expansion and contraction joints provided to accommodate expansion, contraction, wind or seismic
movement shall be protected with an approved material having the same d egree of fire resistance as that of the
wall or floor in wh1ch it is installed.
3.1.11 Weather Protection

3.1.11.1 Weather Resistive Barrier: All weather exposed surfaces shall have a weather barrier to protect
the interior wall from damping. Such weather barriers shall have a fire resistance rating of at least egual to
that of the wall or floor on which it is applied. Weather resistive barrier need not be used in the following
cases:
i) When exterior covering is of approved waterproof panels

ii) In back plastered construction
iii) When there is no human occupancy
iv) Over water repellent panel sheathing
v) Under approved paper backed metal or wire fabric lath
vi) Behind lath and portland cement plaster applied to the underside of roof and eave projections.
3.1.11.2 Flashing and Counter Flashing : Exterior openings exposed to the weather shall be flashed to
make them weather proof. There shall be copings with all parapets. Corrosion resistant metals shall be used
for flashing, counter flashing and coping.
3.1.11.3 Waterproofing Weather-exposed Areas :Waterproofing shall be applied to exposed surfaces like
balconies, external stairways and landings.
3.1.11.4 Damp-proofing Foundation Walls : Outside of foundation walls enclosing a basement floor
below finished grade shall be damp-proofed from outside.

Part 3
3.1.12 Members Carrying Walls

All members carrying masonry or concrete walls shall be fire protected as specified in Table 3.3.1.
3.1.13 Parapets
Parapets constructed on exterior wall of a building shall have the same degree of fire resistance required for
the wall upon which they are erected and there shall be noncombustible faces on the side adjacent to the roof
surface for the uppermost 405 mm including counter flashing and coping materials. The height of the parapet
shall be at least 750 mm from the upper surface of the roof.
3.1.14 Projections
Sunshades, cornices, projected balconies and overhangings beyond walls of Type 1 or 2 construction shall be
of noncombustible materials. Projections from walls of Type 3 may be of combustible or noncombustible
materials.
3.1.15 Guardrails and Barriers
3.1.15.1 Guardrails : Guardrails shall be provided to protect unenclosed floor and roof openings, open and
glazed sides of stairways, landings and ramps, balconies or porches, which are more than 750 mm aoove the
grade or floor below, and roofs accessible for purposes other than service works.
3.1.15.2 Barrier : Barriers shall be provided in parking gara�es located more than 1.5 m above the adjacent
grade. The height of the barrier shall be at least 300 mm and 1t shall. be centred at 450 mm above the parking
surface.
3.1.16 Insulation
The provisions of this section are applicable to thermal and acoustical insulations located on or within
floor-ceiling and roof ceiling assembhes, crawl spaces, walls, partitions and insulation on pipes and tubings.
Materials used for such insulation and covering shall have a flame spread rating not more than 25 and a
smoke density not more than 450.
3.1.17 Atria
3.1.17.1 General : Atria may be provided in all groups other than Occupancy J (Hazardous Buildings)
provided there are sprinkler system installed throughout the building. Such atria shall have a minimum
opening and are as specified in Table 3.3.4.
Table 3.3.4
Atrium Opening and Area
Height in Minimum Clear Minimum Area

Storeys Opening1 (m) (m2)
3-4 6 40
5-7 9 90
Bar more 12 160
1 The specified dimensions are the diameters of inscribed circles whose
centres fall on a common axis for the full height of the atrium.
3.1.17.2 Smoke Control System : A mechanically operated air-handling system shall be installed to
exhaust the smoke either entering or developed within the atrium.
a) Exhaust Openings : The location of the exhaust openings shall be in the ceiling or in a smoke trap area
immediately adjacent to the ceiling of the atrium above the top of the highest portion of door openings into
the atrium.
b) Supply Openings : Supply o enings designed for a minimum of 50 per cent of the exhaust volume shall be
r
located at the lowest fevel o the atrium. Supply air may be introduced by gravity provided the height of
the atrium is not more than 18 m and smoke control is established. For atria having height greater than 18
m, supply air shall be introduced mechanically from the floor of the atrium and directed vertically
toward the exhaust outlets. Supplemental air supply may be introduced at upper levels in atria over six
storeys in height or when tenant spaces above the second storey are open to the atrium.
c) Automatic Operation : The smoke control system for the atrium shall be activated automatically by the
automatic sprinkler system or smoke detectors installed within the atrium or areas open to the atrlUm.
d) Manual Operation : The smoke control system shall also be manually operable for use by the fire
department. The smoke control system may be separate from or integrated with other air handling
systems. Air handling systems interfering with the smoke control system shall be shut down
automatically when the smoke control system is activated.
e) Smoke Detector Location: Smoke detectors which will automatically operate the smoke control system of
the atrium shall be accessible for maintenance, testing and servicing. Their locations shall be as follows:
3-52
Chapter 3
i) At the atrium ceiling, spaced in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
ii) On the underside of projections into the atrium, in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
iii) Around the perimeter of the atrium opening on all floors open to the atrium. These detectors shall
be spaced no more than 9 m on centre and shall be located within 5 m of the atrium opening.
If projected beam type smoke detectors are used, they shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
f) Enclosure of Atria : Atria shall be separated from the adjacent spaces with fire resistive separation of at
least one hour.
Fire windows may be provided in fixed glazed openings when the window has a fire resistive rating of
at least three-fourths hour and the area of the opening cfoes not exceed 25 per cent of the wall common to
the atrium and the room into which the opening is provided.
3.1.18 Mezzanine Floors

Construction of a mezzanine floor shall conform with the requirements of the floor in which it is constructed
but the fire resistance rating need not exceed one hour for unenclosed mezzanines.
3.2 REQUIREMENTS OF TYPE 1 FIRE RESISTIVE BUILDINGS
3.2.1 General
Type 1 construction shall be of materials like steel, iron, concrete or masonry. Walls and permanent
partitions shall be of noncombustible fire resistive construction except that permanent nonbearing partitions
of one hour or two hour fire resistive construction which are not part of a shaft enclosure, may have fire
retardant treated wood within the assembly. .
3.2.2 Exterior Wall

Exterior walls and all structural members shall conform to the requirements of Tables 3.2.2 and 3.3.1 for fire
resistance rating. Openings in the exterior walls shall have a fire-resistive assembly of not less than three
fourths hour when they are located at not less than 6 m from an adjacent property line or centre line of a
public way.
For occupancy groups B, C, D, E, F, G1 and H1 located less than 1.5 m from the property line and A and M
located less than 1 m from the property line, no opening shall be permitted.
Exceptions:
i) Fire resistive protection need not be used for nonbearing walls of noncombustible construction fronting on public
ways or yards having a width of at least 12 m.
ii) In all occupancy groups other than Occupancy H, exterior nonbearing walls may be of
1. one hour fire resistive noncombustible construction where openings are permitted, and
2. two hour fire resistive noncombustible construction where fire protection of openings is required.
3.2.3 Structural Frame

Structural frame shall be of reinforced concrete, masonry or steel as per the provisions of Part 6.
3.2.4 Floor Construction

Materials of floor construction shall be noncombustible and shall have fire resistance rating in accordance
with Table 3.3.1.
·
3.2.5 Stairway Construction

Stairways shall be constructed with reinforced concrete, steel, masonry or any other hard noncombustible
materials. For finishing works, brick, marble or other noncombustible materials may be used. Stairways shall
be constructed in accordance with the exit provisions specified in Chapter 3, Part 4.
3.2.6 Roof Construction

Roofs and their members, other than the structural frame, may be constructed with unprotected
noncombustible materials in all occupancy groups other than Occupancy J when every part oi the roof
framing including the structural frame IS at least 8 m above the floor, bakony or gallery immediately below.
When every part of the structural framework of the roof of a building of Occupancy B or E or of an atrium is
not less than 8 m above any floor, balcony or gallery, fire protection of all members of the roof construction,
including those of the structural frame, may be omitted.
Where every part of the structural steel framework of the roof of a building Occupancy A or B is more than 6
m and less than 8 m above any floor, balcony or gallery, the roof construction shall be protected by a ceiling
of not less than one hour fire resistive construction.

Part 3
3.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR TYPE 2 FIRE-RESISTIVE BUILDINGS
3.3.1 General
Type 2 construction shall be of noncombustible materials like steel, iron, concrete, masonry or any other
material permitted in this Code.
3.3.2 Exterior Walls and Openings

3.3.2.1 Exterior Walls : Exterior walls shall be constructed of noncombustible materials and shall comply
with the fire resistive requirements set forth in Tables 3.2.2 and 3.3.1.
Exceptions:
1. Nonbearing walls fronting on public ways or yards having a width of at least 13 m may be unpr9tected when
entirely of noncombustible material.
2. In Occupancies other than C, D and J, exterior nonbearing walls may be noncombustible one hour fire resistive
where unprotected openings are permitted and noncombustible two hour fire resistive where protection of
openings is required.
3. In buildings of Occupancy A2, AS and F, exterior noncombustible bearing walls may be two hour fir resistive where
openings are permitted.
3.3.2.2 Openings in Exterior Walls : Openings in exterior walls shall conform to the requirements of
Table 3.2.3 and shall be protected by a fire assembly having a three-fourths hour fire resistive rating when
they are less than 6 m from an adjacent property line or the centre line of a public way.
No openings shall be permitted in exterior walls of Occupancy B, C, D, E, F1, F2 and F4 less than 1.5 m from
the property line, and no openings in Occupancy A, Gl ana K less than 1 m from the property line.

Structural frame shall be of reinforced concrete, masonry or steel as per the provisions of Part 6.

Floors of construction Type 2 shall be of noncombustible materials permitted in this Code.
For wood flooring on masonry or concrete, the gap between the floor slab and the underside of the wood
flooring shall be filled with noncombustible materials or fire blocked and there shall be no open spaces under
the flooring exceeding 10m2.
Exception:
Fire blocking need not be provided in floors at or below the grade levels.

3.3.5.1 Stairways shall comply with the exit requirements of Chapter 3, Part 4.
3.3.5.2 Interior stairways serving buildings not exceeding three storeys in height may be constructed of any
material permitted by this Code. ln buildings more than three storeys in height, interior stairways shall be
constructed as required for Type 1 buildings.
3.3.5.3 Exterior stairways shall be of noncombustible material except that on buildings not exceeding two
storeys in height, they may be of wood of not less than 50mm in nominal thickness.

In all Occupancies other than F2, F4 and J, roofs and their members other than structural frame may be of
unprotected noncombustible materials when every part of the roof framing, including the structural frame, is 8
m or more above the floor, balcony or gallery immediately below.
3.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR TYPE 3 FIRE RESISTIVE BUILDINGS
3.4.1 General
Structural and nonstructural elements of Type 3 construction may be any material permitted in this Code.
3.4.2 Exterior Wall

Exterior walls shall be constructed of in accordance with the provisions of Tables 3.2.2, 3.2.3 and 3.3.1.
Openings in exterior walls shall be protected by a fire assembly having a fire resistance rating of at least
three-fourths hour.

Structural frame shall be of concrete, masonry or steel as specified in Chapter 2, Part 5.

Floors shall have a fire resistance rating of one hour and shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 2,
�� .
3-54
Chapter 3

Interior stairway may be constructed of any materials permitted in this Code. Exterior walls shall be
constructed of noncombustible materials or of wood not less than 50 mm in nominal thickness.

Roof construction shall be of any materials permitted in this Code.

Part 3
3-56
Appendices
APPENDIX A Guidelines for the Development of Minimum Standard Housing (Occupancy A4)
APPENDIXB Suggestive Typical Termite Proof Constructions and Pre-constructional Measures
Part 3 3-57
Part 3
Appendix A
Guidelines for the Development of Minimum Standard Housing (Occupancy A4)
A1 GENERAL
A 1.1 Government bodies or public agencies may designate an area in the master plan for the development of
mass housing projects for the low income people. It may not be convenient or practicable for the dwelling
units in such projects to be in full compliance with all the requirements of this Code. All such dwelling units
in planned layouts of an approved settlement shall be classified as OccupancY. A4 : Minimum Standard
Housing. The guidelines of tnis appendix cover the planning and the general building requirements of such
minimum standard housing developments.
·
A 1.2 Only government bodies or public agencies should be responsible for planning the number and location of
the settlements in a master plan and the layout of units within the settlement. The guidelines of this
appendix regarding layout planning are applicable to government bodies or public agencies responsible for
such planning.
A 1.3 The guidelines and requirements regarding design and construction of buildings for minimum standard
housmg in approved layouts are applicable to government bodies, public agencies, private developers or
individual owners who undertake such constructions.
A2 TYPES OF DEVELOPMENT
The developments of minimum standard housing may be any one or a combination of the following types:
a) Single unit plots of row type housing, .

b) Multi-storied flats of row type housing,
c) Block development as group or cluster housing, and
d) Site and service schemes.
The guidelines for planning and general building requirements shall be applicable to all types of
development of minimum standard nousing.
A 3 PLANNING
A 3.1 Basic Master Plan Requirements

Each cluster of minimum standard housing should accommodate a maximum of 400 dwelling units with an
average of 5 persons per dwelling. The folfowing common spaces should be provided in the layout plan of a
settlement :
Community open spaces like park 1000 m2 per 1000 population

children's play area etc.
Internal roads and walkways 15 to 20 per cent of the site area
Primary school 1 school covering 1000 m2 per 1500 population
Shopping centre 4 shors per 1000 population
Clinic/dispensary 175m2 per 2000 population
Places of worship 175m2 per 2000 population
Services 175m2 per 2000 population
Community welfare centre 400 m2 per 1500 population
A 3.2 Density
The permissible density of dwelling units should be worked out in consideration of the minimum common
space requirements given above and the size of the units. The density of minimum standard housing shall
not be more than 175 units per hectare.
A 3.3 Size of Plot

A 3.3.1 Minimum standard housing with one room, cooking space, bathing facility and water closet in the
ground floor and prospect of future extension of one room and bath/WC on the first floor or ground floor
shall normally require a minimum plot size of 30 m2• In areas other than metropolitan cities, with
population less than 0.5million, the minimum size of plot for such houses should be 40 m2•
A 3.3.2 Developments having minimum standard houses with two rooms, kitchen, bathing facility and
water closet in multi-storied flats, group housing or individual ownership houses shall require a mimmum
plot size of 40 m2• In areas other than metropolitan cities, having a population less than 0.5 million, the
minimum size of the plot for such houses should be 60 m2• In dense inner city areas of metropolitan cities
with population more than 1.5 million, the Government may decide to have a minimum plot size of 25 m2
for such houses.
3-58
Appendices
A 3.4 Plot Frontage

The minimum frontage of individual plots shall be 3.5 m. Plots for group housing developments in multi
storied blocks and plots for multi-storied flats will require a larger fro.ntage.
A 3.5 Site and Service Schemes

A 3.5.1 Minimum Provisions : Site and service schemes shall delineate individual plots and provide for
the infrastructural needs for the development of a permanent housing. Interim constructions by the allottees
should also be permitted. Skeletal structures with a roof on columns and/ or developed plinths may be
provided if funds are available.
A 3.5.2 Sanitation : Sanitation and water supply must be provided in all site and service schemes. A
sanitary service core or common water supply and sanitation facilities for planned groups of plots should
normally suffice.
A 3.5.3 The developing agency shall install the services before handing over the plots.
A 3.6 Internal Roads and Walkways

Pedestrian walkways when provided as means of access, shall be at least 3 m wide. Such walkways shall not
be longer than 60 m, nor serve more than 10 plots on each side of the path. Buildings on plots abutting such
walkways shall not be higher than two times the sum of the width of tbe walkway and the front open space.
Other internal roads shaH be at least 6 m wide to allow emergency vehicles to enter. The paved portion of
such roads, if used for pedestrian movement only, should be at least 2 m wide.
A4 GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
A 4.1 Plinth Coverage

The plinth area coverage of any plot of minimum standard housing shall not exceed 75 per cent of the plot
area. There shall be a set back of minimum 1.5 m on the rear side ot a plot. There is no requirement for such
set back on the sides and front of a plot.
A 4.2 Height Limitation · . ·
The height of any building in a minimum standard housing scheme shall not exceed 6 storeys or 20 m.
Whenever feasible, the heignt should be limited to 5 storeys. For buildings on internal pedestrian walkways,
the provisions of Sec A 3.6 regarding height shall be applicable.
A 4.3 Plinth Level

The minimum height of the plinth shall be 300 mm from the surrounding ground level.
A 4.4 Habitable Room .

A 4.4.1 One roomed dwelling units shall have a multi-purpose room which may include an alcove or space
for cooking. The minimum area of the room shall be 12 m2 with a minimum width of 2.5m.
A 4.4.2 For dwelling units with two habitable rooms the minimum size of any room shall be 6 m2 with a
minimum width of 2.1 m. The total area of the two rooms shall not be less than 15m2•
A 4.4.3 One-roomed dwelling with plan for future extension into a two-roomed house in a staged
construction scheme shall satisfy the requirement of A 4.4.2 regarding room sizes. The first room to be built
in this type of development shall have a minimum area of 9 m2 with a minimum width of 2.5 m. The total
area of the two rooms after future extension shall be a minimum of 15m2•
A 4.4.4 All habitable rooms shall have a minimum clear height of 2.75 m. For sloped roofs the average
height shall not be less than 2.75m with a minimum of 2 m at the lowest side.
A 4.5 Kitchen
A 4.5.1 The size of the cooking alcove or cooking space provided in a multi-purpose room of a one-roomed
house shall not be less than 2.25 m2 with a minimum width of 1.2 m.
A 4.5.2 Separate kitchen provided in a two-roomed house shall have a minimum area of 3.25 m2 with a
minimum width of 1.6 m.
A 4.5.3 Minimum clear height of the kitchen or cooking space shall be 2.15 m.
A 4.6 Bathroom and Water Closet

A 4.6.1 Independent water closets shall have a minimum width of 0.9 m and a minimum length of 1.15 m.
The water closet shall be fitted with a door.
A 4.6.2 Independent bathroom without water closet shall have a minimum width of 1 m and a minimum
length of 1.4 m.

Part3
A 4.6.3 The minimum size of a combined bathroom and water closet shall be 1.8 m2 with a minimum width
of 1 m. The bathroom shall be fitted with a door.
A 4.6.4 The minimum clear height of bathrooms and water closets shall be 2.15 m.
A 4.7 Balcony and Corridor

The minimum width of individual balcony shall be 0.9 m. Corridors for use of more than one dwelling units
shall have a minimum width of 1.2 m.
A 4.8 Stairs
A 4.8.1 Minimum Width :The minimum widths of stairs serving not more than two dwelling units per
floor shall be as follows :
2 - storeyed buildings 0.75m

5 or 6-storeyed buildings l.OO m
A 4.8.2 Maximum Rise : The height of the riser shall not be more than 215 mm. The maximum number of
risers per flight in a straight flight stair shall be 15.
A 4.8.3 Minimum Tread Depth : The minimum depth of the tread shall be as follows :
2 or 3-storeyed buildinss 215 mm

4, 5 or 6-storeyed buildmgs 250mm
A 4.8.4 Minimum Head Room : The minimum clear head room between flights of a staircase shall be
2.15 m. The clear head room may be reduced to 2.03 m for not more than three flights in any staircase.
A 4.8.5 Landing :The depth of landing at any level shall be at least equal to the width of the stair.
A 4.9 Water Supply

One water tap or hand tubewell pump per dwelling unit should be provided, if feasible. Each unit of public
water hydrants or community hand umps, if provided in lieu of individual water supply, shall serve not
r
more than 10 dwelling units and shal not be farther than 15 m from any dwelling unit served.
A 4.10 Lighting and Ventilation

Every room, bathroom and kitchen shall have windows in an external wall opening on a courtyard, a
balcony not wider than 2.5 m, or the exterior. The aggregate area of openings in the exterior wall of a
habitable room or kitchen shall not be less than 12% of the floor area and that for a nonhabitable room such
as bath room, water closet or stair shall be at least 8% of the floor area.
3-60
Appendices
Appendix B
Suggestive Typical Termite Proof Constructions and Preconstructional Measures
B1 GENERAL
Constructions and preconstructional measures presented in the following sections may be adopted for
design and construction of termite proof buildings.
82 CONSTRUCTIONAL MEASURES
82.1 Suggested typical anti-termite constructions for brick masonry works are shown in Fig Bl.
B 2.2 Fig 82 (a), (b) and (c) present termite shield, groove at entrance and arrangement at their junctions. Ends of
termite shield shall overlap by at least 20 mm and soldered. A piece of 20x10 mm shall be cut off from the
lower end portion of one oi the pieces before soldering the two ends so that the thickness at the free edges
remain constant.
82.3 Bottom of wooden columns supported directly on basement floors shall be protected with termite caps. Such
caps shall be a metal sheet covering the whole section of the column and projecting 50 mm beyond the outer
ecfge of the column.
83 PRECONSTRUCTIONAL MEASURES
83.1 For load bearing walls, treatment of soil shall be carried out at the bottom of the trenches and at the sides u �
to 300 mm above the bottom (Fig 83 and 84). In such cases, 5 litre of the chemical shall be sprayed per m
of the surface area. The backfill material in direct contact with the foundation shall be treated with 15 litre
of chemical emulsion per m2 of the surface area of the foundation. If water is used for compaction operation,
it shall be done before applying the chemicals. Treatment shall follow the same layer wise sequence as that
of the backfilling operation.
83.2 For frame structures, if the concrete mix of the foundation is 1:2:4 or richer, treatment of soil at the bottom of
the trench is not needed. A layer of treated soil at a depth of 500 mm from the ground level shall be
prepared. Details of this treatment is shown in Fig 85. The density of chemicals in such treatment shall be
15 litre/m2•
B 3.3 The top surface of plinth in any building having a floor at the ground level shall be treated with a chemical
emulsion at the rate of 5 litre/m2•
Superstructure outer wall
115
Anti- termite groove around the
mm thick coarse periphery of the building
sand layer (See details below)
600 mm wide and 25 mm thick

cement concrete (1:2:4) topping
over 75 mm thick cement concrete
(1:3:6) bed
1
75
T�67.5-J
---j100 I-- I 100
r---- 600----1 45.
_L
Note: All dimensions In millimetres

Details of groove dimension
Fig. 81 Anti-Termite Construction in Masonry Works

(Suggestive Typical}

Part3
Anti-termite shield all around

the periphery of the building
e�tcept at entrances
{See detail below)
Apron floor
GL
"""'"""'
f-50mm+50mm--L-<.s,
��
. ...
Turnover o r � ---""'V'
bre k
{Maxi" thickness 0.6mml
Details of shield
Fig. 82 (a} Termite Shield at Plinth Level

D.P.C
Anti-termite groove at
entrances only
Fig. 82 (b) Anti- Termite Groove at Entrances

3--62
Appendices
Antl-term1te groove \
----- ---------
Door
Bearing plate
Anti-termite
shield
DO
Anti-termite
groove Anti-termite
shield
/
�
r
<:::J.; .,
s0 ;/-P
_.4---100 '
.c...
/_,-•r1----C� y
First piece of anti-termite shield __/• '1-...J Note : All dimensions in millimetres
Fig. 82 (c) Construction Arrangement at the Junction of

Termite Shield and Groove (Suggestive Typical}
T
mm
300
l
Section
Fig. 83 Treatment of Trench Bottom and Sides


Part3
.------ Floor finish
�--- Floor base concrete
Fourth treatmen 100 mm sand bed

along external r
Second treatment of .ckfill

In Immediate contact th
foundation structure
Third treatment of top

structure of plinth fHIIng
-First treatment of
trench and sides
Section
Fig. B4 Treatment for Load Bearing Walled Structure

{Suggestive Typical)
.------Floor finish
Second treatment of top
surface of plinth filling . .------ Floor base concrete
•:
100 mm sand bed

Third treatment of soil ------,
along external perimeter
..
.
.... � . :
First treatment of backfill

in immediate contact with
foundation structure
R.C.C. column
Fig. B5 Treatment for R.C. Framed Structure with Columns

and Plinth Beams {Suggestive Typical}
3-64
Peart 4
FIRE PROTECTION
Clhlapfrell" n
General Provisions
Clhlapfrell" 2
Precautionary Requirements
Clhlapfrell" 3
Means of Escape
Clhlapfrell" 41-
Equipment and In-built Facilities
Clhlapfrell" 5
Specific Requirements for Various Occupancies
Appendices
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART4 FIRE PROTECTION
Chapter 1 General Provisions
1.1 SCOPE 4-1
1.2 TERMINOLOGY 4-1
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4-3
1.3.1 Height and Area Limitation 4-3
1.3.2 Open Space Requirement 4-3
1.3.3 Access Facilities for Fire Service 4-3
1.4 FIRE DRILL 4-3
1.5 FIRE TESTS AND FIRE RESISTANCE RATING 4-3
Chapter 2 Precautionary Requirements
2.1 OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION 4-5
2.2 CLASSIFICATION OF CONSTRUCTION TYPES 4-5
2.3 FIRE ZONES 4-5
2.4 MIXED OCCUPANCY 4-6
2.5 OPENINGS IN SEPARATING :WALL 4-6
2.6 SMOKE AND HEAT VENTS 4-6
2.7 ELECTRICAL, GAS AND HVAC SERVICES 4-7
2.8 SURFACE FINISHES 4-7
2.9 GLAZING 4-7
2.10 SKYLIGHTS 4-8
2.11 FIRE LIFTS 4-9
2.12 SPECIAL HAZARDS 4-9
2.12.1 Special Hazards in Occupancy A: Residential 4-9
2.12.2 Special Hazards in Occupancy B: Educational 4-9
2.12.3 Special Hazards in Occupancy C : Institutional 4-9
2.12.4 Special Hazards in Occupancy D: Health Care 4-9
2.12.5 Special Hazards in Occupancy E: Assembly 4-9
2.12.6 Special Hazards in Occupancy F: Business and Mercantile 4-10
2.12.7 Special Hazards in Occupancy G: Industrial 4-10
2.12.8 Special Hazards in Occupancy H: Storage 4-11
2.12.9 Special Hazards in Occupancy J: Hazards 4-11
Chapter 3 Means of Escape
3.1 SCOPE 4-13
3.2 COMPONENTS OF MEANS OF ESCAPE 4-13
4-i
3.4 LOCATION AND ARRANGEMENT OF EXITS 4-14
3.5 OCCUPANT LOAD 4-14
3.5.1 Design Occupant Load 4-14

3.5.2 Fixed Seats 4-14
3.5.3 Maximum Occupant Load 4-14
3.5.4 Mezzanine Floors 4-14
3.5.5 Roofs 4-15
3.6 CAPACITY OF EXIT COMPONENTS 4-15
3.7 CORRIDORS AND PASSAGEWAYS 4-16
3.8 ASSEMBLY AISLES 4-16
3.9 DOORWAYS 4-17
3.10 STAIRWAYS 4-17
3.11 RAMPS 4-18
3.12 HORIZONTAL EXITS 4-18
3.13 SMOKE PROOF ENCLOSURES 4-18
3.14 NUMBER OF EXITS 4-19
3.15 LENGTH OF TRAVEL 4-19
3.16 MEANS OF EXIT SIGNS AND ILLUMINATION 4-20
3.17 EXIT REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY A: RESIDENTIAL 4-20
3.17.1 At Detached Single Family Dwelling 4-20
3.17.2 A2 Flats or Apartments 4-20
3.17.3 A3 Mess, Boarding Houses, Dormitories and Hostels 4-21
3.17.4 Minimum Standard Housing 4-21
3.17.5 AS Hotels and Lodging Houses 4-21
3.18 EXIT REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY B: EDUCATIONAL 4-21
3.19 EXIT REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY C: INSTITUTIONAL 4-21
3.20 EXIT REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY D: HEALTH CARE 4-22
3.21 EXIT REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY E: ASSEMBLY 4-22
3.22 EXIT REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY F: BUSINESS 4-22
AND MERCANTILE
3.23 EXIT REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY G: INDUSTRIAL 4-22
3.24 EXIT REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY H: STORAGE 4-22
3.25 EXIT REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY J: HAZARDOUS 4-23
Chapter4 Equipment and In-built Facilities
4.1 SCOPE 4-25
4.2 FIRE PROTECTION PLUMBING 4-25

4.2.1 Water Requirement for Interior Fire protection 4-25
4.2.2 Water Sources for Fire Protection 4-25

4.2.3 Design Consideration for Standpipe and Hose System 4-28
4.2.4 Design Consideration for Sprinkler System 4-32
4.2.5 Water Supply for Fire Protection in Tall Building 4-34
4.2.6 Fire Pump 4-34

4.2.7 Inspection, Testing and Maintenance 4-35
4-ii
4.3 FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALLING OR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 4-37
4.4 AUTOMATIC FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM 4-37
4.5 FOAM EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM 4-38
4.6 CARBON DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM 4-38
4.7 HALOGENATED EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM 4-38
4.8 DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM 4-38
4.9 WET CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM 4-38
4.10 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER 4-39
Chapter 5 Specific Requirements for Various

Occupancies
5.1 SCOPE 4-41
5.2 OCCUPANCY A:RESIDENTIAL 4-41
5.2.1 Occupancy A1: Detached Single Family Dwelling 4-41
5.2.2 Occupancy A2: Flats and Apartments 4-41
5.2.3 Occupancy A3:Mess, Boarding House and Hostels 4-41
5.2.4 Occupancy A4:Minimum Standard Housing 4-42
5.2.5 Occupancy AS :Hotels and Lodging Houses 4-42
5.3 OCCUPANCY B:EDUCATIONAL 4-42
5.4 OCCUPANCY C:INSTITUTIONAL 4-42
5.4.1 Occupancy C1:Institution for Care of Children 4-42
5.4.2 Occupancy C2:Custodial Institution for the 4-42
Physically Capable
5.4.3 Occupancy C3:Custodial Institution for the 4-42
Physically Incapable
5.5 OCCUPANCY D:HEALTH CARE FACILITIES 4-42
5.5.1 Occupancy D1:Normal Medical Facilities 4-42
5.5.2 Occupancy D2:Emergency Medical Facilities 4-42
5.6 OCCUPANCY E:ASSEMBLY 4-42
5.6.1 Occupancy E1:Large Assembly with Fixed Seats 4-42
5.6.2 Occupancy E2:Small Assembly with Fixed Seats 4-42
5.6.3 Occupancy E3:Large Assembly without Fixed Seats 4-42
5.6.4 Occupancy E4:Small Assembly without Fixed Seats 4-43
5.6.5 Occupancy ES :Sports Facilities 4-43
5.7 OCCUPANCY F :BUSINESS AND MERCANTILE 4-43
5.7.1 Occupancy F1:Offices 4-43
5.7.2 Occupancy F2:Small Shops and Markets 4-43
5.7.3 Occupancy F3 :Large Shops and Markets 4-43
5.7.4 Occupancy F4:Garages and Petrol Stations 4-44
5.7.5 Occupancy FS : Essential Services 4-44
5.8 OCCUPANCY G :INDUSTRIAL 4-44
5.8.1 Occupancy G1:Low Hazard Industries 4-44
5.8.2 Occupancy G2:Moderate Hazard Industries 4-44
4
5.9 OCCUPANCY H : STORAGE 4-44
5.9.1 Occupancy H1 : Low Fire Risk Storage 4-44

5.9.2 Occupancy H2 : Moderate Fire Risk Storage 4-44
5.10 OCCUPANCYJ:HAZARDOUS 4-44
5.11 OCCUPANCY K: MISCELLANEOUS 4-44
Appendices
Appendix A Guidelines for Fire Drill and Evacuation 4-46

Procedure for High Rise Buildings
AppendixB Fire Protection Considerations for Venting in 4-52

Industrial and Storage Buildings
AppendixC Detailed Guidelines for Selection and 4-57

Sitting of Fire Detection System
Appendix D . Special Requirements of Buildings More 4-60

than 20 Metre High
il
CHAPTER l]
General Provisions
1.1 SCOPE
This part of the Code prescribes regulations for safeguarding life and property in the use or occupancy of
buildings or premises from the hazards of fire and explosions. The provisions of this part include general
requirements of fire protection, precautionary requirements for resisting a fire, means of escape
requirements, equipment and in-built facilities required for fire fighting, and fire fighting arrangements
required for various occupancy groups.
1.2 TERMINOLOGY
specified in this part shall govern for interpretation of the provisions of this part.
ALARM CONTROL UNIT: It consists of a circuit, controls, relays, switches and associated system which
receive signals from alarm initiating devices and transmit to alarm signalling devices.
ALARM INITIATING DEVICE :An equipment operated manually or automatically which, when activated,
initiates an alarm through an alarm signalling device.
ALARM SIGNAL : Signals of audible or visual nature or both, indicating the existence of a fire condition.
Audible devices may be bells, horns, chimes, speaker or similar devices.
ALARM SIGNAL DEVICE:The equipment that produces the alarm signal.
ALARM SYSTEM:It is a combination of compatible devices, which when activated with necessary electrical
energy can produce an alarm in the event of fire.
ALARM ZONE: It describes a defined area of the building or buildings for alarm initiating locations.
ANNUNCIATOR :Equipment capable of indicating the zone or area of a building from which an alarm has
been initiated or the location of such devices and the operational condition of alarm circuit of the system.
Part4 4-1
Fire Protection
Part 4
Fire Protection
AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTING AND ALARM SYSTEM : These include all types of fire detecting and
alarm signalling devices which activate themselves during a fire without manual intervention. The
equipment/devices include temperature sensitive fuses, thermostat, fluid filled tubes and electronic devices
whicn can detect a fire and transmit automatic alarm signals.
:
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM :The system consists of an array of pipe works fitted with fusible
solder or glass bulb in a predetermined temperature fed from town main, elevated private reservoir, gravity
tank, pressure tank or automatic pump supply and other connecting equipment which operate
automatically by sensing the heat of fire and discnarge water to extinguish it. These devices also actuate an
audible alarm automatically.
AUTOMATIC HIGH VELOCITY WATER SPRAY :This system applies water in the form of a conical spray
consisting of droplets of water discharged at high velocity through specially designed projectors to
extinguisn fire by emulsification, cooling and smothering. High velocity system is used tor the protection of
medium and heavy oils or similar flammable liquids.
CARBON DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM : This installation consists of a group of one or more
cylinders of carbondioxide, interconnected by a manifold and feeding into a system of high pressure
distribution pipework fitted with special discharge nozzles.
COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL:Any material which bums and enhances the magnitude of fire.
DOWN COMER: See WET RISER-CUM-DOWN COMER STANDPIPE SYSTEM.
DRY-CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM:This system consists of specially designed pipe works and
discharge nozzles linked to the dry powder containers and C02 cylinders which are automatically I
manually operated in case of fire.
DRY RISER :A dry riser is a vertical pipe which is normally kept empty of water, fitted with outlets at
various floor levels in the building. It is not connected to a water supply, but is charged when required, by
means of fire pumps.
FIRE EXIT : A continuous and unobstructed means of escape to a public way, which includes doors,
corridors, stairway, aisles, gates, balconies, ramps, horizontal exits, fireproof enclosures etc.
FIRE RESISTANCE RATING : It denotes the property of a building construction material and/or
construction itself and is expressed as a period of time during which the materials/constructions are (a)
resistant to collapse due to fire, (b) resistant to flame penetration and (c) resistant to excessive temperature
·
rise on the unexposed surface.
FIRE SEPARATION :Horizontal or vertical fire resistance rated assembly of materials having protected
openings or a clear area around a building for the purpose of preventing the spread of fire.
FIRE TOWER :These are open to outer air staircases separated from any building which can be approached
from various floors of a building by connecting corricfors, landings or lobbies and are separated from the
floor area and main staircase by fire resisting doors.
FIRE WALL:A fire resistance rated wall having protective openings, which is constructed from the ground
level to at least 1m above the roof of a building to restrict the spread of a fire.
FOAM EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM :This system operates automatically/manually to extinguish special

fires. It consists of several types, of which pump operated mechanical foam type, self contained pressurised
type and pre-mixed foam types are commonly usea.
HALOGENATED EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM :This system consists of distribution of pipe works and
specially designed nozzles which are sited strategically around the fire risk zone. The chemicals are kept
under pressure and released automatically/manually in case of fire. At present only B.T.M. (HALON-1301)
is internationally recommended for fixed system.
HORIZONTAL EXIT:An escape system which connects a floor horizontally with an adjacent structure at or
near the same level.
ROOF EXIT:The exit which opens at the roof and is accessible from the ground level.
SMOKE DETECTOR : A devise capable of sensing visible or invisible particles produced during
combustion.
TRAVEL DISTANCE:The travel distance of an escape route from a location within the building.
VENTILATION :Natural or mechanical intake of fresh air from outside and removal of trapped air of an
enclosed space.
t-2
Chapter 1
General Provisions
VENT (FIRE) :A system which activates itself automatically during a fire or can be activated manually to
release the heat and smoke generated by the fire and prevents lateral spread of fire and smoke.
WET-CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM:A system where a solution of water and potassium carbonate
and/or potassium acetate based chemical forms the extinguishing agent.
WET RISER-CUM-DOWN COMER STANDPIPE SYSTEM: Wet riser consists of an array of pipes installed
vertically in a building with outlets (landing valves) at various levels throughout the buildmg containing
permanently charged water at a specified pressure for fire fighting purposes.
'Down comer' is similar in function to that of a Wet Riser which is constructed as vertical piping, but is
supplied with water from a tank on the roof or at intermediate levels.
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The provisions of this section shall specify the general requirements in respect of height and area limitations,
open space requirements and access facilities for the fire service, which are to be provided for a building to
protect it from potential fire hazards.
1.3.1 Height and Area Limitation

The height and area limitations of all buildings and structures shall be governed by the occupancy group
classification, Floor Area Ratio and type of construction, which are specified in Sec 1.8 of Part 3.
1.3.2 Open Space Requirement

For the purpose of applying the provisions of open space requirements of a building at its side, rear and
front, Sec 1.7, Part 3 of this Code shall be followed.
1.3.3 Access Facilities for Fire Service

The access facilities for fire service vehicles and engines shall meet the following requirements.
1.3.3.1 Fire apparatus access roads shall have an unobstructed width of 4.5 m and the minimum vertical
clearance shalf be Sm. The width and vertical clearance of fire apparatus access roads may be increased
when in the opinion of the fire authority, the clearances are not adequate to provide fire apparatus access,
1.3.3.2 Fire apparatus access roads having a dead end longer than 30 m from the main road shall be
provided with appropriate provisions for turning around of the fire apparatus. -
1.3.3.3 The fire apparatus access road shall be marked by an approved sign.
1.4 FIRE DRILL
Fire drills based on fire order shall be arranged to train the occupants of a building in fire fighting and
evacuation. The occupants shall be made thoroughly conversant with fire order, fire fighting and evacuation
procedures in the event of an emergency.
The guidelines of fire drill and evacuation procedure are given in Appendix A.
1.5 FIRE TESTS AND FIRE RESISTANCE RATING
The fire resistance rating of individual building construction components shall be determined by standard
materials testing procedure as detailed below. ·
1.5.1 The fire resistance ratings of building assemblies and structural elements shall be determined in accordance
with ASTM E 119.
1.5.2 The construction materials which are intended to be classified as noncombustible shall be tested in
accordance with ASTM E 136.
1.5.3 Flame resistance rating of all materials used for interior finish and trim shall be tested in accordance with
ASTME84.
1.5.4 The fire door assemblies shall conform to the test requirements of ASTM E 152.
1.5.5 The fire windows and fire shutters shall meet the test requirements of ASTM E 163.
1.5.6 The fire resistance rating of structural elements, which are widely used in Bangladesh, are provided in
Table 4.1.1 below, as a guideline. These ratings shall be used unless tests conducted in accordance with the
above indicate higher fire resistance ratings, in which case the higher values may be used.

Part 4
Fire Protection
Table 4.1.1
Fire Resistance Rating of Common Construction Elements
Structural Element Fire Resistance Rating

1. S OLID WALLS
a. 75 mm thick walls of clay bricks 0.75 hour

b. 125 mm thick walls of clay bricks 1.5 hours
c. 250 mm thick walls 5.0 hours
2. RCWALLS
a. 150 mm thick RCwall 3.0 hours

b. 200 mm thick RCwall 4.0 hours
c. 250 mm thick RCwalls 5 hours
d. 300 mm thick RCwalls 6 hours
3. RCSLABS
a. 100 mm RCslabs with 13 mm cover 1 hours

over reinforcement
b. 150 mm RCslabs with 19 mm cover 2.5 hours
over reinforcement
c. 200 mm RCslabs with 19 mm cover 3.75 hours
over reinforcement
d. 250 mm RCslabs with 25 mm cover 5.0 hours
over reinforcement
4. RCCOLUMNS (1:2:4)
a. 250 mm x 250 mm with 25 mm cover 3.0 hours

over reinforcement
b. 300 mm x 300 mm with 25 mm cover 4.0 hours
over reinforcement
c. 400 mm x 400 mm with 25 mm cover 6.0 hours
over reinforcement
d. 400 mm x 400 mm with 50 mm cover 8.0 hours
over reinforcement
Related Appendix
Appendix A Guidelines for Fire Drill and Evacuation Procedure for High Rise Buildings
4-4
CHAPTER�
2.1 OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION
All buildings shall be classified according to their use or by considering the character of their occupancy. For
the purpose of this Code, the occupancy classification groups shall be as follows:
Occupancy A Residential
Occupancy 8 Educational
Occupancy c Institutional
Occupancy F Business and Mercantile
Occupancy G Industrial
Occupancy H Storage
Occupancy J Hazardous
Occupancy K Miscellaneous
The details of occupancy classification of buildings are provided in Sec 2.1 of Part 3.
2.2 CLASSIFICATION OF CONSTRUCTION TYPES
All buildings and structures to be constructed, altered and/or extended in height or area shall be classified
in any one or in a combination of the following three construction types:
Type 1 Highest degree of fire resistance

Type 2 Intermediate degree of fire resistance
Type 3 Lowest degree of fire resistance
The types of construction are based on fire resistance of construction elements, which are detailed in Sec 3.1
of Part 3.
Part4 4-5
Fire Protection
Part 4
Fire Protection
2.3 FIRE ZONES
The fire zones shall divide the development areas of a city, township or municipality into three distinct areas
based on the inherent fire hazards of the buildings to be constructea and the degree of safety desired for the
occupancy group accommodated therein.
2.4 MIXED OCCUPANCY
Mixed Occupanqr shall be allowed only when the occupancies are separated by fire resistant walls as
specified in Sec 2.3 of Part 3. Mixing of occupancy group J (Hazardous occupancy) with other groups shall
not be allowed.
2.5 OPENINGS IN SEPARATING WALL
2.5.1 The openings in occupancy separation wall shall conform with the provisions set forth in Sec 2.3.3, Part 3.
2.5.2 Openings in fire separating walls and floors shall not exceed the approved limit and the opening shall be of
protective type and conform to the approved provisions.
2.5.3 Fire separating walls shall not have opening exceeding 11.2 m2 in area and the aggregate width of all
openings at any floor level shall not exceed 25 per cent ofthe length of the wall. When the entire first storey
floor area on both the sides of a fire separating wall are coveredoy automatic fire suppression system, the
maximum allowable opening may be doubled with a minimum distance of 0.9 m between adjacent
openings.
2.5.4 Doors and other openings in Type 1 construction (o ening in a separating wall) shall be limited to 5.6 m2 in
f
area with a maximum height of 2.75 m and width o 2.1 m. Wall openings shall be protected with approved
fire resisting means like fire doors or steel rolling shutters conforming to approved standards. All openings
in floors shall be protected by vertical enclosures extending above and below such openings. Walls of such
opening enclosure shall have at least 2 hours fire resistance rating.
2.5.5 Openings of service lines like cables, electrical wirings, telephone cables, plumbing fixture etc. shall be
protected by enclosures having a fire resistance rating of not less than 2 hours. Medium or low voltage
electrical wire running through shaft or ducts shall be either armoured or cased within metal conduits.
2.5.6 All openin�s in the separating walls and doors shall be provided with minimum 2 hours fire resistance
assemblies m Type 3 construction.
2.6 SMOKE AND HEAT VENTS
2.6.1 Smoke and heat vents shall be installed in single storeyed windowless buildings, underground structures,
factories with large floor spaces and other areas of restricted ventilation.
2.6.2 Where exit access travel distance is more than 25 m, smoke and heat vents shall be constructed in
accordance. with the provisions of this Code.
2.6.3 The vent area and spacing of the vents shall comply with Table 4.2.1.
Table4.2.1
Smoke and Heat Vent Size and Spacing
. Usegroup Hazard Condition Vent Area to Floor Max Spacing of

Area Ratio Vent Centres
Occupancy li1 Low Hazard 1:100 30m
Occupancy G2 Moderate hazard 1:75 20m
Occupancy H1 Low Hazard 1:100 30m
Occupancy H2 Moderate Hazard 1:75 20m
Occupancy J1 High Hazard 1:30 15m
Occupancy J2 High Hazard 1:30 15m
Occupancy K1 Low Hazard 1:100 30m
2.6.4 Closures of natural draft, smoke and heat vents shall be installed in such a way that fire service personnel
can open it easily during a fire.
2.6.5 Smoke and heat vents on roof or ceiling or wall shall normally be kept open. In case of closed vents,
automatic activation of the openings by heat-responsive device rated at 38°C to 104°C above ambient shall
be a requirement. The releasing mechanism shall be capable of opening the vent fully when the vent is
exposed to a time-temperature gradient that reaches an air temperature of 260° within 5 minutes. The vents
shall also be capable of being opened by manual operation.
4-6
Chapter 2
2.6.6 Venting requirements for Industrial and Storage Buildings are given in Appendix B.
2.7 ELECTRICAL, GAS AND HVAC SERVICES
2.7.1 The requirements of the electrical, HVAC and gas services shall meet the provisions of Chapters 2, 3 and 8
respectively of Part 8.
2.7.2 Air-conditioning and ventilation systems shall be installed and maintained in such a manner that the fire,
fumes or smoke do not spread from one floor or area of fire to other parts of a building through the ducts or
vents.
2.7.3 Properly designed fire dampers shall be installed within the air-conditioning and ventilation ducts, which
shall automatically close the flow of air in case of fire.
2.7.4 For large assembly areas, department stores and hotels with more than 100 rooms in a single block, effective
means for preventing circulation of smoke through the air-conditioning ducts shall be installed. Such means
shall consist of approved photo-electric or other smoke sensing control devices, as the fuses and dampers
may not function during early state of a fire due to insufficient heat.
2.8 SURFACE FINISHES
2.8.1 Plastic, wood or other flammable materials used to trim and cover the interior and exterior facade of a
building structure have the potential of generating smoke and toxic fumes during a fire and have the
potentiality of changing the nature of fire due to its ignitability as fuel.
2.8.2 The fire susceptibility of various types of surface finishes are determined in terms of the rate of spread of fire
(ASTM E 84-87). Based on the rate of spread of fire, the surface finish materials shall be classified into
3 classes:
Class I Surfaces of low flame spread: Flame does not effectively spread more than 300 mm in the first
1.5 minutes with an ultimate value of 600 mm.
Class II Surfaces of medium flame spread: Flame does not spread effectively more than·300 and 850 mm
in the first 1.5 and 10 minutes respectively.
Class III Surfaces of rapid flame spread: Flame spreads effectively more than 300 and 850 mm in the first
1.5 and 10 minutes respectively.
2.8.3 Interior finish of walls and ceilings shall have a flame spread rating not greater than those in Table 4.2.2 for
various occupancy classes.
2.9 GLAZING
2.9.1 Buildings of construction Type 1, 2 and 3 shall use any one of the following !JP.es of glazing (covered under
Sec 2.9.2 and 2.9.3) using wire glass and square formed by electro-copper. Bmlding of construction Type 3,
may use hardwood sashes or frames or both.
Table 4.2.2
Acceptable Flame Spread Rating Classes of Interior Finish
Use Group Vertical Exits Corridors Rooms or

and Passage Providing Enclosed
Ways Exit Access Areas
Al -
Detached sin le family dwelling
� III III III
A2 -
Flats or A ar ments
Jl I I I
AS -
Hotels an lodging Houses I I I
B -
Educational I I I
Cl & - Institutional, Residential & I l III*
C2 Custodial
C3 -
Institutional - Incapacitated I I I
C4 - Institutional - Restrained I I I
D -
Health Care I I I
E1 -
Lar e assembly with fixed seats
� I I I
E2 -
Sma I assembly with fixed seats I I I
E3 -
Lar e assembly without fixed seats
� I I I
E4 -
Sma I assembly without fixed seats I I I
F -
Business & Mercantile I II II
G -
Industrial I II II
Storage III II III
r
-
- Hazardous I II III
• Class II may be adopted in case the area is covered by automatic fire suppression system.

Part 4
Fire Protection
2.9.2 Wired Glass Panels

Wired glass panels shall comply with the following requirements :
a) Thickness of the glass shall not be less than 6 mm.
b) Embedded wire netting mesh in the glass shall not be more than 25mm mesh.
c) The sashes or frames or both shall be entirely made up of iron or any other approved metal. The frame
shall be securely fixed into the wall (except panels of mtemal doors).
d) Setting of the panels of glass shall be achieved by rebates or grooves of not less than 6 mm width or
depth keeping due allowance for expansion. The glass shall be secured to the frame by hard metal
fastenings. Lead, cement or putty may be used for weather proofing.
f) Where wired glass panels are labeled as protective openings, they shall conform to the size limitations
shown in the Table 4.2.3.
Table4.2.3
Size limitations of Wire Glass Panels
Fire Rating/Opening Max Height in Max Width in Max Area in

m m m2
3 hours (not permitted) -- -- --
1 t hour door in exterior walls

-- - --
(not permitted)
1 t hour fire rating 0.85 0.25 0.065
f hour fire rating 1.4 1.4 0.85

Fire windows 1.4 1.4 0.85
2.9.3 Electro-copper Glazing

Electro-copper glazing shall comply with the following requirements:
a) Thickness of the glass shall not be less than 6 mm.
b) Not more than 0.4 m2 of square glass shall be formed by electro-copper glazing in sectional lights.
c) The sashes or frames or both shall be entirely made up of iron or any other approved metal. The frame
shall be securely bolted into the wall (except panels and internal doors).
d) Setting of the panels of glass shall be achieved by rebates or grooves of not less than 6 mm width or
depth keeping due allowance for expansion. The glass shall be secured to the frame by hard metal
fastenings. Lead, cement or putty may be used for weather proofing.
2.9.4 Wall openings more than 5m2 shall not be deemed to be of effectively protected by wired glass or electro
copper glazing.
2.9.5 Wired glass or electro-copper glazing not exceeding 0.85 m2 in area shall be allowed provided it is cased in
hard metal and secured to the frames by hard meta1 hinges not exceeding 60 mm apart and by fastening at
top, centre and bottom.
2.10 SKYLIGHTS
2.10.1 Wired �lasses used in skylights shall comply with the following requirements:
a) Thrckness of the glass snail not be less than 6 mm;
b) Wire netting mesh embedded in the glass shall not be more than 25mm square;
c) The glazing shall be cased in frame of continuous metal divided by bars 750 mm apart centre to centre.
The frame and bars shall be iron or other approved metal (or of hard wood covered with sheet metal).
The glass shall be secured to the frame by hard metal fastenings. Lead, cement or putty may be used for
weather proofing.
2.10.2 Skylight openings more than 5m2 shall not be deemed to be effectively protected by wired glass.
4-8
Chapter 2
2.11 FIRE LIFfS
2.11.1 Fire lifts shall be used in buildings more than 20 metre in height. Fire lifts, where used shall be fully
automated from the ground level with approved wiring and switches and shall have a minimum capacity
of 8 persons.
2.11.2 Fire lifts may be operated by the inmates of the buildings except during fire. During fire, only firemen shall
operate such lifts.
2.11.3 Fire lifts shall be equipped with approved intercommunication (including two way voice communication)
with the fire command station or control room on the ground floor lobby oi the building.
2.11.4 Number and location of fire lifts in a building shall be decided on the basis of total occupant load, floor area
and compartmentation.
2.12 SPECIAL HAZARDS
The various occupancy groups are exposed to fire hazard of different nature and intensity, which are
detailed below unaer different occupancy classes.
2.12.1 Special Hazards in Occupancy A:Residential ·
a) Flammable liquids used for domestic purposes shall be kept adequately sealed in approved containers
at all times.
b) Stoves and heaters using open flame or otherwise shall be so located as not to create any obstruction on
the escape route in case of fire. Such appliances shall not be located directly on or near the foot of stairs.
c) Exhaust fans used in kitchens shall be placed on a l'eripheral wall of the building or to a duct connected
directly to outside and shall be made of noncombustible material. The duct shall not pass through
combustible materials.
d) Doors leading into a room containing flammable liquids shall be provided with self closing devices.
Appropriate signs identifying the storage materials and requesting the users to keep the door closed
sna11 be marked on both sides of the door.
e) All outdoor television antenna shall be properly grounded and protected against lightning.
f) Rooms containing boiler using liquid or solid fuel shall be separated from the main building by
appropriate se aration wall wifh all its openings protected as per provisions detailed in Sec 2.3 ofPart
y
3 and Sec 2.5 o this Chapter.
g) Rooms containing high pressure boilers, refrigerating machinery, transformers or such othl;!r equipment
necessary for extending services to inmates of such: occupancies shall be so located that these do not
block the means of escape. Such rooms shall be effectively segregated from the main occupancy area
and shall be provided wtth adequate venting to outside.
h) Areas or rooms within the building identified as hazardous occupancy shall be protected or segregated
by appropriate separation wall or by other approved means as directea by the Authority.
2.12.2 Special Hazards in Occupancy B :Educational

a) Rooms or areas containing volatile flammable liquids shall be separated from the adjoining areas in
accordance with Sec 2.3 of Part 3 and Sec 2.5 of this chapter.
b) Gas pipeline entering any building shall be equipped with shutoff valves outside the building with
conspicuous marking clearly delineating the location. (See Chapter 8 of Part 8).
c) The exterior openings of boiler rooms shall be adequately protected by fixed, automatic or self closing
fire assemblies.
2.12.3 Special Hazards in Occupancy C: Institutional

Permit shall not be granted for storage or handling of any hazardous material, except for normal use in
amounts not exceeding the exempted amounts specified in Chapter 2 of Part 3, in a butlding or part thereof
classified as Occupancy C.
2.12.4 Special Hazards in Occupancy D: Health Care

Storage of volatile flammable liquids such as chloroform, ethyl alcohol, mentholated spirit etc. shall be
stored in safe storage and no unauthorized person shall be allowed to handle such liquids.
2.12.5 Special Hazards in Occupancy E:Assembly

a) All materials used for decorative purposes in buildings of Occupancy E shall be noncombustible. If
fabric and papers are used for decorative purposes those shall be treated with flame resistant
chemicals I rnaterials.

Part 4
Fire Protection
b) Assembly buildings primarily meant for theatrical, operatic or cinematic performances shall have the
seats securely fastened to the floor with exceptions as permitted in 2.12.5 (c) below. All seats in
balconies and galleries shall be securely fastened to the floor except boxes with level floor and less than
14 seats.
c) Seats not fixed to the floor shall be permitted in restaurants and such other places provided that 1.25 m2
of floor space is allotted for every seat excluding dancing floor and stage. Adequate aisles shall be
maintained at all times to reach exits without obstruction when such occupancies are in use.
i) Not more than 14 seats shall be allowed in one row oetween aisles.
ii) 50 per cent of seats in a row shall have one opening of an aisle.
iii) Capacity of seats without dividing arms shall be calcu1ated at the rate of 450 mm per person.
iv) The minimum space between rows of seats shall be 850 mm and space between the back of one
seat and the front of the seat immediately behind shall not be less than 350 mm measured
between plumb lines.
v) Rooms and parts of a building containing high pressure boilers, refrigerating machinery, large
transformer or other service equipment havmg explosion potential snail not be located on or
adjacent to the defined exit route. Such rooms shall be effectively cut off from the rest of the
building and connected to open air through approved ducts or openings.
e) Rooms or parts of a building used for storage of combustible materials such as paints or other items
shall be effectively cut off from main assembly building or protected by approved automatic sprinkler
system. Such areas shall be away from staircases. ·
f) Stages having such facilities as fly galleries, gridirons and rigging shall be covered by an automatic
spnnkler system above and below such stage areas or spaces. Auxifiary spaces such as dressing rooms,
store rooms, and workshops and the proscenium openmg shall be effectively covered by fire resistant
·curtains capable of withstanding a lateral pressure of 4 kN/m2. The curtain shall be equipped with self
closing emergency device and wnen closed shall be tight enough to prevent spread of smol<e.
g) Stage roof above every theatre using movable scenery or motion l'icture screen constructed of highly
combustible materials shall be fitted with ventilators in or above It. The ventilators shall be openable
from the stage floor manually or by fusible links or some apl'roved automatic heat actuated device to
give an opening to sky with an area of one-eighth the area oi the stage.
h) In theaters not protected by automatic fire sprinklers, the proscenium wall using movable scenery of
decorations shall be provided with maximum of two openings to enter the stage and each opening
-shall not be of more than 2m2.
i) Film projection apparatus shall be enclosed within fire resistant enclosures.
j) · Auditoriums of theaters and cinemas shall be installed with vents on roof having vent area equal to
Jh th the floor area including balconies and galleries, boxes and tiers. Larger numbers of smaller vents
·
shall be preferable over smaller number of larger vents.
2.12.6 Special Hazards in Occupancy F: Business and Mercantile

a) Exit aisles or approaches in self-service stores shall not be obstructed by placing check out stand with
associated railings or barriers on its passage.
b) All operations in open air markets, petrol filling stations, road side stands for sale of farm products etc.
shall be so conducted that unobstructed access to exits are always maintained.
2.12.7 Special Hazards in Occupancy G: Industrial

a) No apparatus �enerating flames capable of igniting flammable vapour shall be permitted within a room
or part of a building using or storing volatile flammable liquid. Rooms or parts of a building using or
storing such flammable liquid shall be covered by exhaust ventilation system.
b) Boiler rooms and areas containing heating plants shall be effectively segregated from the rest of the
occupancy.
c) Adequate protective measures shall be taken against hazards associated with distribution and use of
electricity and gas in accordance with the provisions of Chapters 2 and 8 of Part 8.
d) Automatic sprinkler or other protections like installation of vents shall be made in all buildings of
Occupancy G2 (Moderate Hazard Industries).
4-10
Chapter 2
e) The machine layout shall be congenial to safe fire practice.
2.12.8 Special Hazards in Occupancy H: Storage

a) No apparatus �enerating flames capable of igniting flammable vapour shall be permitted within a room
or part of a building using or storing volatile flammable liquid. Rooms or parts of a building using or
storing such flammable liquid shall oe covered by exhaust ventilation system.
b) Boiler rooms and areas containing heating plants shall be effectively segregated from the rest of the
occupancy.
c) Adequate protection shall be taken a�ainst hazards associated with distribution and use of electricity
and gas in accordance with the provisions of Chapters 2 and 8 of Part 8.
·
d) Automatic sprinkler or other protections like installation of vents shall be made in all buildings of
Occupancy H2 (Moderate Fire Risk Storage).
·
_ 2.12.9 Special Hazards in Occupancy J:Hazardous

a) Equipment, machinery and operations emitting combustible volatile substances shall be protected with
dry cnemical, foam or C02 fire extinguishing system.
b) Dry cleaning machines using flammable liquids shall be directly connected to a steam line.
Arrangements shall be so made that in case of explosion, steam will oe automatically released inside
each machine.
c) Except wall vents, all openings in extension walls shall be protected by fixed, automatic or self closing
fire assemblies. Wall vents shall be placed near the floor line having openings not less than 0.01 m2 each
and distance between two successive vents shall not be more than 1.8 m. Power driven exhaust fans for
ventilation in every building shall be so arranged and operated that a complete change of air is affected
every 3 minutes.
d) Gas inlet pipes shall be fitted with gas shutoff valves outside the building and marked conspiCuously
for ready recognition.
e) Rooms containing boiler or heating plant shall be effectively separated from the main building by a
separating wall.
f) Devices capable of generating spark and glow flame that can ignite gasoline vapour, shall not be
installed or permitteo in rooms where volatile flammable liquids are used or stored unless the area is
enclosed witn a flame-proof enclosure.
Related Appendix
Appendix B Fire Protection Considerations for Venting in Industrial and Storage Buildings

Part 4
Fire Protection
4-12
CHAPTER�
Means of Escape
3.1 SCOPE
The provisions of this section shall control the design, construction and arrangement of building
components to provide a reasonably safe means of escape therefrom. Buildings shal� be evacuated during
any repair or alteration works unless the existing means of escape and fire protection system are
continuously maintained or other exit and protection measures are taken to provide an equivalent degree of
safety.
3.2 COMPONENTS OF MEANS OF ESCAPE
3.2.1 A means of escape shall be a continuous and unobstructed way of exit travel from any point in a building to
a street, the roofof a building or a designated area of refuge. The path of travel along a means of escape may
consist of three parts: (a) the exit access, (b) the exit, and (c) the exit discharge. That portion of the means of
escape which leads to the entrance of an exit and is included in the measure of travel distance to reach an
exit shall be termed the exit access. The exit itself shall be considered to be that portion of the means of
escape which is protected from the area of incidence and provides a safe path to the exit discharge. The exit
discharge shall comprise any portion of the travel between the termination of exit and the exterior or the
area of refuge.
3.2.2 The parts of the means of escape may consist of any of the following exit components:
a) A doorway, corridor or passage leading to an exterior or interior staircase, smoke proof and fireproof
enclosure, ramp, balcony, fire escape or combination thereof, having direct access to the street, the roof
of a building or any designated refuge area which affords safety from fire or smoke from the area of
incidence;
b) A horizontal exit from the affected building to an adjoining building or an area of refuge at the same
level which provides safety from fire and smoke from the area of incidence and the areas
communicating therewith.
3.2.3 Lifts, escalators and moving walks shall not be regarded as components of means of escape.
Part 4 4-13
Fire Protection
Part 4
Fire Protection
3.3.1 All buildings constructed for human occupancy or storage shall be provided with adequate exit facilities to
permit safe and quick unaided escape of the occupants in the event offire or other emergency.
3.3.2 An exit shall at no time be used for any purpose that would interfere with its use as a means of escape.
3.3.3 Exits and exit access corridors shall not be used as supply or return air ducts.
3.3.4 Where changes in elevation not exceeding 300 mm exist in exits or exit access corridors, ramps shall be used.
At exterior doors not required to be used by handicapped or aged people, a maximum step down of 200
mm shall be permitted.
All exits shall be clearly visible and exit access corridors and passages leading to the exit shall be marked
and signposted to guide the occupancy traffic. Exit signs in p ubic places used during the hours of darkness
and those in areas required to have more than one exit or ex1t access shall be illuminated in accordance with
the provisions of Sec 1.5 of Part 8. ·
3.3.5 The owner or lessee of all new and existing buildings shall be responsible for the safety of all occupants. If in
any existing building, the exit facilities are deemed inadequate in view of the requirements of this Code, the
Authority may order additional provisions to be incorporated in the building in order to minimize hazard
to life of the occupants.
3.4 LOCATION AND ARRANGEMENT OF EXITS
3.4.1 All exits shall be easily discernible and accessible from the areas served by them.
3.4.2 Exit from any room or space shall not open into an adjoining or intervening room or area except where such
adjoining room or area is an accessory to the area served, is not a hazardous occupancy and provide a direct
escape to the designated exit area.
3.4.3 No portion of an exit route shall pass through a room that may be subject to locking or be intervened by a
door that may be locked when the building is occupied.
3.4.4 All assembly buildings shall front on at least one street on which the main exit discharge shall be located.
The main entrance to an assembly building shall also serve as the main exit capable of providing escape for
at least one-half of the total occupant load. For assembly buildings having more than one levels or floors
each level shall be provided with additional exits capable of providing escape for at least two-thirds of the
occupant load served by that level.
3.4.5 All exits shall be so located and arranged that they provide continuous and unobstructed means of escape to
the exterior of the building leading to a street or to other designated areas of refuge.
3.5 OCCUPANT LOAD
3.5.1 Design Occupant Load

The occupant load for which the exit facilities are to be provided shall be established by the largest number
computed by the provisions of (a}, (b) and (c) below :
.
a) The actual number of occupants for whom the area served by the exits is designed;
b) Number of occupants computed at the rate of one occupant per unit of floor area as prescribed in
Table 4.3.1.
c) The number of occupants in any area as computed by the provisions of (a) or (b) above plus the number
similarly computed for all spaces that discharge through this space in order to gain access to the exit .
3.5.2 Fixed Seats

The occupant load for an assembly or educational area having fixed seats shall be determined by the seating
capacity of the area. For fixed seats without dividing arms, the capacity shall be taken as one person for
every 500 mm of seat.
3.5.3 Maximum Occupant Load

The occupant load calculated as above need not exceed one person per 0.3 m2 of usable floor space.
3.5.4 Mezzanine Floors

The occupant load of a mezzanine floor discharging through a floor below shall be added to the receiving
floor's occupant load.
4-14
Chapter3
Means of Escape
3.5.5 Roofs
Roofs used as assembly, educational or other areas of human occupancy shall be provided with exit facilities
for the required occupant load.
3.6 CAPACITY OF EXIT COMPONENTS
The capacity of means of exit shall be adequate for the occupant load of the area served thereby. The
required width of each exit component shall be computed on the basis of the exit width per occupant
prescribed in Table 4.3.2, subject to the minimum width of each such component specified in sec 3.7, 3.8, 3.9,
3.10, 3.11 and 3.12.
Table 4.3.1
Occupant Load for Various Occupancies
Occupancy Unit of Floor Area

in m2 per Occupant
A Residential 18 gross
B Educational
class room 2 net (see also Sec 3.5)
preschool 3.5 net
c Institutional 12 gross
'
D Health Care
In patient areas 15 gross
Out-patient areas 10 gross
E Assembly
with fixed seats See Sec 3.5
without fixed seats 0.7 net
standing space only 0.3 net
with table and chairs 1.5 net
F Business and Mercantile

Office space 10 gross
Shopping/ sales area 3 gross
G Industrial 10 gross
H Storage 30 gross
J Hazardous 10 gross
Table 4.3.2
Required Exit Width per Occupant
Buildings without Sprinkler Buildin s thoroughly S rinkled

� f
Occupancy System (mm per person) mm per _Q_erson
_
Stairways Ramps& Doors Stairways Ramps& Doors

Corndors Corndors
A Residential
B Educational 8 5 4 5 4 4
F1,F2, Business&
F4 Mercantile
G Industrial .
H Storage
C1,C2, Institutional 10 5 4 5 5 4
C3
C4 Institutional 8 5 4 8 5 4
D Health Care 25 18 10 15 12 10
E Assembly
F3 Business and 10 7 5 7 5 5
Mercantile
J Hazardous 8 5 4 8 5 4

Part 4
Fire Protection
3.7 CORRIDORS AND PASSAGEWAYS
3.7.1 Direct route of access to required exits shall be provided through continuous passageways, corridors or
aisles which are maintained free of obstructions. As far as practicable, occupants commencing exit travel at
any point along the corridor or passageway shall be lead to an exit irresl'ective of their direction of travel.
The length of a dead end in which no exit door is available shall not exceea 10 m.
3.7.2 The minimum required width of corridors and passageways shall be determined on the basis of the
occupant load in accordance with the provisions of Sec 3.6, but it shall not be less than the most restrictive of
the following :
.
a) 1.1 m where serving an occupant load of more than 50.

b) 0.9m where serving an occupant load of 50 or less.
c) 2.4 m in Health Care buildings (Occupancy D) where movement of beds is necessary.
d) 1.8 m in Educational buildings (Occupancy B) where the occupant load is more than 150.
3.7.3 The width of exit corridors and passageways shall not be less than the aggregate of the required width of
doors leading from them towards the exterior.
3.7.4 The minimum clear height of the corridors and passageways shall not be less than 2.4 m.
3.7.5 All exit access corridors shall have a fire resistance rating of 1 hour or more.
3.7.6 Door assemblies opening on to the exit access corridors shall be fire doors having a fire resistance rating of
at least 20 minutes when tested in accordance with ASTM E152 without the hose stream test.
3.8 ASSEMBLY AISLES
3.8.1 Assembly buildings which contain seats, tables, equipment or displays shall be provided with aisles, free of
obstructions, leading to the exit.
3.8.2 Exit access aisles may be level or ramped with slopes not exceeding 1 in 8. The clear width of level or
ramped aisles shall be obtained at the rate of 5 mm per person, subject to the minimum specified in Sec 3.8.4.
3.8.3 When stepped aisles are provided the minimum tread depth shall be 275 mm. The reguired width per
person shall be obtained from the following expressions, suoject to the minimum specified m Sec 3.8.5.
For aisles with handrails,

width =7 + 0.04 (R-175) mm per person;
For aisles without handrails,
width= 9+ 0.04 (R-175) mm per person;
in which R=175, for rise up to 175 mm, ana R =the rise, for rise greater than 175 mm.
The rise shall not be less than 100 mm nor more than 200 mm.
3.8.4 The minimum width of level or ramped aisles shall be as specified below :
Seats on both sides of the aisle 1m

Seats on one side of the aisle 0.9m
3.8.5 The minimum width of stepped aisles shall be as specified below :
Seats on both sides of the aisle 1.2 m

Seats on one side of the aisle 1m
3.8.6 The minimum clear gap between rows, measured as the clear horizontal distance between the back of the
row ahead and the nearest projection of the row behind shall be 300 mm. For chairs having automatic or
self-rising seats, the measurement shall be made with the seats in the raised position; for non-automatic
seats the measurement shall be taken with the seats in the down position.
3.8.7 For rows of seats served by aisles or doorways at both ends, the number of seats per row shall not exceed
100. The minimum clear gap between rows shall be increased beyond 300 mm specified in Sec 3.8.6 by
7 mm for each seat in excess of 15, but the clear gap need not exceed 550 mm.
3.8.8 For rows of seating served by an aisle or doorway at only one end of the row, the path of travel shall not
exceed 10 m from any seat to the aisle or doorway. The minimum clear gap between rows shall be increased
beyond 300 mm specified in Sec 3.8.6 by 15 mm for each seat in excess of7, but the clear gap need not exceed
SSOmm.
4-16
Chapter3
Means of Escape
3.9 DOORWAYS
3.9.1 Each occupant of a room or space shall have access to at least one exit or exit access door. The occupant load
per exit door and the travel distance up to that door shall not exceed the values specified in Table 4.3.3.
.
3.9.2 Where either the occupant load or the travel distance exceeds the values specified in Table 4.3.3,at least two
exit doors shall be provided.
3.9.3 The width of a doorway shall not be less than 1 m and the height not less than 2 m.
3.9.4 No sliding or hanging door shall be used as a means of exit.
3.9.5 All exit access doors shall be of a side-swinging type. When the occupant load exceeds 50,or in a hazardous
occupancy, the doors shall swing outward from the room or in the direction of travel. Swinging of the door
shall not constrict the width of the corridor below 0.9 m measured at the most critical position.
3.9.6 Exit doorways shall not open directly on a flight of stairs. A space of width not less than the width of the
doorway shall be maintained immediately outside the doorway. The space shall be at the same level as that
of the floor the door serves.
Table 4.3.3
Maximum Occupant Load and Travel Distance for Spaces with One Exit Door
Occupancy Maximum Maximum Travel

Occupant Load Distance (m)
A Residential
c Institutional 12 23
D Health Care
B Educational
E Assembly
F Business & Mercantile 50 23
G Industrial
H Storage 30 30
J Hazardous 5 8
.
3.9.7 Revolvins doors shall not be used as a means of exit in assembly,educational or institutional buildings or in
spaces w1th an occupant load of 200 or more. In all other cases revolving doors shall not constitute more
than half of the total required exit door width. No power operated revolvin g door that cannot be operated
manually in the event of power failure shall be permitted.
3.9.8 All exit doors shall be openable from the side they serve without the use of a key.
3.10 STAIRWAYS
3.10.1 The required width of exit stairways shall be computed in accordance with the provisions of Sec 3.6,but it
shall not be less than the minimum widths specified in Table 4.3.4.
Table 4.3.4
Minimum Widths of Exit Stairways
Occupancy Minimum Width of Stairway (m)

A Residential
A1,A2 1.0
A3,A5 1.5
AS 0.75
B Educational
Occupant load up to 150 1.5
Occupant load more than 150 2.0
E Assemb �
E1, 3,ES 2.0
E2,E4 1.5
All others 1.5

Part 4
Fire Protection
3.10.2 The least dimension of landings and platforms in exit stairways shall not be less than the required width of
stairway, except that the landing between two stair flights in a straight run shall not be required to be wider
than 1.2 m in the direction of travel.
3.10.3 The rise and tread dimensions and the headroom requirements shall conform to the provisions Sec 1.12.5 of
Part 3.
3.10.4 Spiral and winding stairways shall be permitted as an element of a means of escape only within a dwelling
unit and from a mezzanine floor not more than 25 m 2 in area. The minimum width of all such stairways
shall be 650 mm with each tread havin� a minimum depth of 200 mm at a distance of 300 mm from the
narrower end. All treads shall be identical. The rise shall not be more than 225 mm with a permissible
tolerance of 5 mm between adjacent risers and 10 mm between the largest and the smallest risers. .
3.10.5 Stairways serving as means of escape shall have continuous guards and handrails on both sides. Where the
width of the stair exceeds 2.2 m, intermediate handrails shall be provided so that no point on the stair is
farther than 1 m from the handrails.
3.10.6 All exit stairways shall be constructed of materials that conform to the fire resistance requirements of the
type of construction of the building, except that solid wooden handrails shall be permitted for all types of
construction.
3.10.7 An exit stairway shall not be built around a lift shaft unless the enclosure of the lift shaft is solid and made
of a material with fire resistance rating required for the type of construction of the building.
3.1 0.8 Exterior staircases used as fire escapes shall not be considered as a means of exit, unless they lead directly to
the ground, are separated from the building interior by fire resistive assemblies or walls and are constructed
of noncombustible materials.
3.11 RAMPS
3.11.1 The minimum width of exit ramps shall not be less than that required for corridors by Sec 3.7.
3.11.2 The slope of an exit ramp shall not exceed 1 in 8, but for slopes steeper than 1 in 10 the ramp shall be
surfaced with approved non-slip material or finished such as to effectively prevent slipping.
3.11.3 Guards or handrails shall be provided on both sides of ramps having slope steeper than 1 in 15.
3.12 HORIZONTAL EXITS
3.12.1 The connection between an area of the building which the horizontal exit serves and the area of refuge or
another building shall be provided with protected openings in 2 hour fire resistance rated walls, or by open
air balcony or bridge
:
3.12.2 The horizontal exit shall be protected from the area of incidence by self closing type fire door.
3.12.3 The width of a horizontal exit shall not be less than 1 m.
3.12.4 The slope of the horizontal exit shall not exceed 1 vertical in 10 horizontal. No steps shall be used in
horizontal exits.
3.12.5 Where the horizontal exit serves as an exit from only one side, all doors shall swing in the direction of
escape travel. Where exit from both sides may be required, the doors shall have two leaves opening in
opposite directions, or there shall be adjacent doors opening in OJ'posite directions. The doors shall be
openable at all times when the building is occupied without the use of a key.
3.12.6 The discharge area of a horizontal exit shall be either public spaces or private to the occupants of the
building. The capacity of the area of refuge or building on the refuge side shall be computed as the
minimum net floor area excluding stairways, shafts etc. The required capacity of refuge shall be 0.28m 2 per
occupant. In the case of patients confined to bed in hospitals and clinics etc., the required capacity of refuge
. shall be 2.8m2 per bed.
3.13 SMOKE PROOF ENCLOSURES
3.13.1 A smoke proof enclosure shall consist of an interior stairway conforming to Sec 3.10 and an exterior balcony
or a ventilated vestibule.
3.13.2 All exit stairways serving occupants located more than 23 m above the ground shall be protected by a smoke
proof enclosure.
4-18
Chapter3
Means of Escape
3.13.3 There shall be access to the stairways from every storey by way of a vestibule or an open balcony. The
minimum width of a vestibule shall not be less than 1.1 m nor less than the width of the corridor leading to
the vestibule. The minimum length of a vestibule in the direction of escape travel shall be 1.8 m.
3.13.4 The minimum fire resistance rating of the walls separating the smoke proof enclosure from the area of
incidence shall be 4 hours with no openings other than the required fire doors for exit.
3.13.5 All doors in smoke proof enclosure shall be self closing type or they shall be fitted with automatic closing
devices triggered by the fire detection system instalfecf at the floor side entrance to the enclosure. The
·activation offire detection system at any door in any floor shall activate the automatic door closers of all the
doors at all levels of the smoke proof enclosure.
3.13.6 When access to the stairway is through a vestibule instead of an open exterior balcony, the vestibule shall
have adequate natural ventilation. Each vestibule shall have a minimum area of opening of 1.5 m2 in an
exterior wall facing a courtyard, street or public way wider than 6 m.
3.14 NUMBER OF EXITS
3.14.1 The requirements of the number of exits specified in this subsection shall apply to buildings of all occupancy
groups unless a more restrictive requirement for any occupancy is provided in Chapter 5, Part 4 or
elsewhere in this Code.
3.14.2 Only one means of exit shall suffice for the buildings specified in Table 4.3.5 provided that they do not
have more than one floor below the level of exit discharge.
3.14.3 For all other buildings the required number of exits shall depend on the occupant load as specified below
Occupant load 500 or Jess Minimum 2 exits

Occupant load 501 to 1000 Minimum 3 exits
Occupant load more than 1000 Minimum 4 exits
Table4.3.5
Buildings Served by One Means of Exit
Occupancy Maximum Other Restrictions

Number of Storeys
All 1 Maximum occupant load 100 and maximum travel
distance 25 m
A1 2 Maximum occupant load 30
A2 6 Maximum 12 dwelling units
A3 4 Maximum 50 occupants per floor and maximum travel
distance 25 m
A4 6 Maximum 50 occupants per floor and maximum travel
distance 25 m
AS 2 Maximum occupant load 50
B,C 2 Maximum occupant load 200
D 2 Maximum occupant load 50
F,G,H 2 Maximum occupant load 100 and maximum travel
distance 25 m
3.14.4 All buildings more than 6 storeys or 20 m in height and all buildings having a floor area larger than 500m2
on each floor, used as educational, institutional, assembly, industrial, storage or hazardous occupancy or a
mixed occupancy involving any of these, shall have a minimum of two staircases. The staircases shall be of
the enclosed type and shall lead directly to the exterior or the designated area of refuge.
3.15 LENGTH OF TRAVEL
3.15.1 Exits shall be arranged in such a manner that the travel distance from any point in the area served shall not
exceed the following values :
Occupancy A, B,C, D, E, J 25 m
Occupancy F, H 30 m
OccupancyG 45 m
3.15.2 Wherever more than one exit are required in a buildin� they shall be placed as remote as possible from each
other. As far as practicable, exits snail be arranged m such a manner as to provide refuge to a person
irrespective of the direction of travel from any point in the area served. .

Part 4
Fire Protection
3.16 MEANS OF EXIT SIGNS AND ILLUMINATION
3.16.1 All required means of exit or exit access in buildings or areas requiring more than one exit shall be
signposted. The signs shall be clearly visible at all times, where necessary supplemented by directional
signs. All exit doors shall be clearly marked for easy identification.
3.16.1.1 Location : Exit signs shall be installed at stair enclosure doors, horizontal exits and other required
exits from the storey. When two or more exits are required from a room or area, exit signs shall be installed
at the required exits from the room or area and where otherwise necessary to clearly indicate the direction of
escape.
Exceptions :
1. Main exterior exit doors which obviously and clearly are identifiable as exits need not be signed when approved by
the Building Official.
2. Exit signs are not required for buildings of Occupancy Al and individual units of A2.
3. No sign is needed for exits from rooms or areas with an occupant load of less than 50 when located within Cl, C2 or
C3 Occupancy.
3.16.1.2 Graphics : The colour and design of lettering, arrows and other symbols on exit signs shall be in
high contrast with their background. Words on the signs shall be at least 150 mrn high with a stroke of not
less than 20 mrn .
3.16.1.3 Illumination: Signs shall be internally or externally illuminated by two electric lamps or shall be of
an approved self-luminous type. When the luminance on the face of an exit sign is from an external source,
it shall have an intensity of not less than 5.0 foot-candles from either lamp. Internally illuminated signs shall
provide equivalent luminance.
3.16.1.4 Source of Power : Supply of power to one of the lamps for exit si�ns shall be provided by the
premises' wiring system. Power to the other lamp shall be from storage battenes or an on-site generator set
and the system shall be installed in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2, Part 8.
3.16.1.5 Floor-level Exit Signs: For floor-level exit signs additional approved low-level exit signs which
are externally or internally illuminated, or self-luminous, shall be provided in all interior exit corridors
serving guest rooms of hotels in Occupancy AS. The bottom of the sign shall be less than 150 mrn or more
than 200 mrn above the floor level. For exit doors, the sign shall be on the door or adjacent to the door with
the Closest edge of the sign within 100 mrn of the door frame.
3.16.1.6 Amusement Building Exit Marking : Approved exit direction marking and exit signs shall be
provided. Approved low-level exit signs and directional marking shall be located not more than 200 rnm
above the walking surface and at the exit path.
3.16.2 All exit signs shall be illuminated at night, or during dark periods within the area served, in accordance with
the provisions of Sec 1.5.1, Part 8
3.16.3 The means of exit and exit access in buildings requiring more than one exit shall be equipped with artificial
lighting. The lighting facilities shall satisfy the requirements of Sec 1.5.2, Part 8.
3.17 EXIT REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY A: RESIDENTIAL
In Addition to the general exit requirements specified in Sec 3.3 through 3.16 residential buildings shall
satisfy the particular exit requirements specified in this section.
3.17.1 A1 Detached Single Family Dwelling

. 3.17.1.1 Every sleeping room in a detached single family dwelling having more than two bedrooms shall
have at least one exit door directly leading to the building's means of exit or the exterior. In addition, every
sleeping room in the ground, first and second floors shall have an emergency escape route through an
openabie window or door in accordance with the requirements of Sec 2.5.3.2 of Part 3.
3.17.1.2 Rooms having access to it only by removable ladder, folding stair or trap door shall not be used as
a habitable room.
3.17.1.3 All locking devices shall be prohibited should it impede or obstruct exit, such as chain type bolts,
limited opening sliding type locks and burglar locks which do not disengage easily by quick-release catches.
All closet door latches shall be such that all occupants including children can manipulate and open it from
inside.
3.17.1.4 Basement shall not be used to accommodate habitable rooms.
3.17.2 A2 Flats or Apartments

3.17.2.1 All dwelling units of occupancy A2 shall comply with the exit requirements specified for
occupancy Al.
4-20
Chapter3
Means of Escape
3.17.2.2 Basement of such buildings with floor level not more than 2.5 m below the formation level may
house a heating plant, incinerator room or such other hazardous occupancy, provided that the access to the
basement is only from the exterior of the building.
3.17.2.3 At least half of the required exits shall discharge directly to the outside of the building.
3.17.3 A3 Mess, Boarding Houses, Dormitories and Hostels

The dwelling units of occupancy class A3 shall comply with the exit requirements specified under Sec 3.17.1
and 3.17.2 above.
3.17.4 Minimum Standard Housing

Provisions specified for occupancy A1 and A2, as detailed in Sec 3.17.1 and 3.17.2 above shall be complied
with.
3.17.5 AS Hotels and Lodging Houses

3.17.5.1 All floors including the basement shall have access to at least two exit points located as remote as
possible.
3.17.5.2 The exits shall be linked with a common lobby or open area, so that the occupants may choose any
of the two travel paths in case of emergency.
3.17.5.3 Single exit shall be permitted where the rooms open directly to the street or a grade level and the
travel distance from any point of the building to the exit is not more than 15 m.
3.17.5.4 Habitable rooms in basements shall have at least two independent exits.
3.17.5.5 Basements, which are not open to public and used for storage or as electro-mechanical room or for
other service operation shall have exit appropriate for that particular use in accordance with the provisions
of this Code.
3.18 EXIT REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY B: EDUCATIONAL
In addition to the general exit requirements specified in Sec 3.3 through 3.16, educational buildings shall
satisfy the following exit requirements.
3.18.1 There shall be at least two separate exits on every floor of the building and the exits shall be as far apart as
possible.
3.18.2 There shall not be any dead end pockets in the circulation corridors and on the exit route.
3.18.3 Rooms having capacity of accommodating 100 persons shall have two doorway and such doorways shall
provide access to separate exits or shall open to a passageway leading to separate exits in opposite direction.
3.18.4 The door locks of classroom shall be of simple type so that the occupants can operate the locks easily during
emergency.
3.19 EXIT REQUIREMENT FOR OCCUPANCY C: INSTITUTIONAL
In addition to the provisions set forth in Sec 3.3 through 3.16, institutional buildings shall satisfy the
following exit requirements.
3.19.1 At least two exits shall be provided for every floor. The exits may be of one or more of the following types.
a) Doors leading directly outside the building
b) Stairways
c) Ramps
d) Horizontal exits
3.19.2 Revolving doors shall not be considered as an exit.
3.19.3 The exits of custodial and penal and mental institutions shall have a minimum clear width of 1.5 m and the
corridors serving the inmates shall have a minimum width of 2.4 m.
3.19.4 The elevators and lifts shall not be counted as exits.
3.19.5 The fire doors and smoke barriers shall be kept open during normal operation but shall close automatically
during emergency. Provisions of manual closing of fire or smoke door during emergency shall be provided.
3.19.6 Reliable means shall be provided to permit prompt release of inmates from an locked section in case of fire
r
or other emergency. Adequate number of guards and other personnel shal be continuously on duly to
evacuate the inmates from penal and mental institutions during emergency.

Part 4
Fire Protection
3.20 EXIT REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY D:HEALTH CARE
In addition to the provisions set forth in Sec 3.3 through 3.16, health care facilities shall satisfy the
requirements as detailed in Sec 3.19 above. .
3.21 EXIT REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY E:ASSEMBLY
In addition to the general requirements specified in Sec 3.3 through 3.16, assembly buildings shall satisfy the
particular exit requirements specified in this section.
3.21.1 Large assembly buildings with fixed seats (Occupancy E1) shall have at least four separate exits located as
remote from each other as possible.
3.21.2 Small assembly buildings with fixed seats (Occupancy E2) shall have at least two separate exits located as
remote as possible from each other. If the capacity of assembly exceeds 600 persons, at least three exits shall
be provided.
3.21.3 Assemblies of Occupancy E3, E4 and E5 shall have at least two means of exits leading directly to the street or
leading to a corridor or open space having access to exits in two independent and different direction.
3.21.4 For fixed seat assemblies, clear width of aisles shall not be less than 1.2 m and no seats shall be seven seats
away from the aisles. Cross-aisles for every 10 rows of seating shall be provided to facilitate direct access to
the exit. Steps shall not be provided in aisles, unless the gradient exceeds 1 in 10.
3.21.5 Balconies, galleries, fascia of boxes shall be provided with railings not less than 650 mm high above the
floor.
3.21.6 No turnstile or other devices to restrict the movements of persons shall be installed in assembly areas.
3.21.7 In theatres and similar places, the waiting lobby shall be designed in such a way that it does not encroach
the required width of exit. The exits of theatres, auditorium etc. shall be desi�ed in such a way that these
may serve the people inside the theatre or auditorium and the people waiting m the lobby simultaneously at
the time of emergency.
3.21.8 Display of exit signs shall be placed in such a way that it does not interfere with the access of any exit. No
mirror shall be placed adjacent to exit way as it may confuse the direction of exits.
3.21.9 . The interior finish of lobby, exit corridor and exit shall be of a noncombustible material.
3.22 EXIT REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY F:BUSINESS AND MERCANTILE
In addition to the general requirements as specified in Sec 3.3 through 3.16, business and mercantile
buildings shall meet the requirements of this section.
3.22.1 At least two exits shall be provided for every floor including the basement of a business and mercantile
building.
.
3.22.2 The occupancy of mezzanine floor, balconies, open floor space etc., which are linked with the main business
or mercantile building shall be taken into consideration for determining the exit requirements.
3.23 EXIT REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY G:INDUSTRIAL
In addition to the provisions specified in Sec 3.3 through 3.16, industrial buildings shall meet the
requirements specified in this section.
3.23.1 At least two exits shall be provided for each floor including basement of an industrial building.
3.23.2 For very large industrial buildings like aircraft assembly hanger, jute and textile mills etc., additional means
of exit shall be provided so that the travel distance from any work area to exit point does not exceed 30 m.
3.24 EXIT REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY H :STORAGE
In addition to the general requirements as specified in Sec 3.3 through 3.16, storage facilities shall satisfy the
requirements detailed in this section.
3.24.1 All structures which are used as storage and have more than 1400 m2 of floor area or where more than 10
persons are normally present shall have at least two separate means of exit.
3.24.2 During operational hours, the door locks of a storage building shall be kept in such a way that these can be
unlocked easily during a fire or emergency.
4-22
Chapter3
Means of Escape
3.24.3 The parking garages shall have at least two separate means of exit.
3.24.4 Exits from aircraft hangers shall be provided at intervals of not more than 45 m on all exterior walls and
there shall be a minimum of two exits for each aircraft storage or servicing area.
3.24.5 For grain or other silos, there shall be at least one dust proof, noncombustible tower connecting all the floors.
Self closing noncombustible door shall have to be provided at each floor landing.
3.24.6 An exterior basket type ladder shall be provided form the roof of workllouse to ground level.
3.25 EXIT REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPANCY J : HAZARDOUS
The exit requirements for hazardous occupancy shall be those specified in Sec 3.3 through 3.16. Exits in such
occupancy shall also meet the requirements of Sec 3.23.

4-23
Part 4
Fire Protection
4-24
CHAJYfER �
Equip tnent and In-built Facilities
4.1 SCOPE
The provisions of this chapter shall control the design, installation and management of equipment and in
built facilities required for fire fighting within a bui1ding and its premises. Tfie regulations of this chapter
shall be applicabfe for all buildings (wfiether the system will be required by the Code or by owner's request)
and the provisions stated herein Shall not cover the fire fighting requirements outside the building premises.
4.2 FIRE PROTECTION PLUMBING
4.2.1 Water Requirement for Interior Fire Protection

The minimum quantity of water for sprinkler and hose use within the building according to their occupancy
classification shall be in accordance with Table 4.4.1 or on the basis of the hydraulic design of the system.
4.2.2 Water Sources for Fire Protection

Water required for interior fire protection of a building shall be supplied from one or a combination of the
following sources.
4.2.2.1 Direct Connection to Water Main: For continuous water supply (public water supply system or
independent system only for fire protection) with sufficient quantity and pressure to feed fire fighting
equipments during peak demand period, direct connection of fire fighting system to the water main may be
adopted (Fig 4.4.1).
4.2.2.2 Roof Gravity Tanks: For water supply system with inadeguate quantity or pressure during peak
demand period but with sufficient pressure to feed roof tank, a roof gravity tank shall be provided to feed
fire fightmg equipments (Fig 4.4.2).
4.2.2.3 Storage Tank: For water supply system with inadequate pressure to feed fire fighting equipments
or roof gravity tank, the building prerruses shall have a ground (or underground) tank to store water for fire
fighting and one of the combinations shown in Fig 4.4.3, 4.4.4 and 4.4.5 shall be adopted.
Part4 4-25
Fire Protection
Part 4
Fire Protection
Roof manifold
Stair Tower
Roof
Valve
Hose station with 38 mm

Standpipe 75 mm -+----_/
(1.5nominal) hose
minimum
connection
Siamese connection
Basement
Water main with
sufficient pressure
and flow
Fig. 4.4.1 Typical Diagram for Standpipe and Hose System

Connected Directly to the Water Main
Table44. .1
Fire Protection Flow Requirements
Building Type Sprinkler System Standpipe and hose Duration**

(Umin.)* S stem� (minute, min.)
(1 min.)*
Light hazard- I 1000 1000 30
Light hazard- II 1900 1900 50
Ordinary hazard- I 2650 1900 75
Ordinary hazard - II 3200 1900 75
Ordinary hazard - III 4800 1900 75
Notes:
•
Values will be for one riser serving floor area of 1000 m2 •
• •
These durations shall be for a building up to the height of 51 m. For greater height of 51-102m and above
102m, the duration will be 1.25 times and 1. 5 times of the specified values respectively.
Light hazard - I : Occupancy groups, AI, A2, A4
Light hazard - II : Occupancy groups, A3, A6, A7, AB, B, C, D, E2, E4, E7, Fl & F2
Ordinary hazard - I : Occupancy groups, El, E3, ES, F3, F4, FS, F6, F7, GI & G4
Ordinary hazard- II : Occupancy groups, G2& HI
Ordinary hazard- III : Occupancy groups, G3 & H2
Extra hazard : Occupancy group, j - pressure and flow requirement for this group shall be determined
by Fire Department but shall not be less than required value for Ordina!'Y_hazard-III
4-26
Chapter 4
r---- Domestic water supply
Fire header
Siamese connection
Fig. 4.4.2 Typical Diagram of G ra vity Roof Tank With

Adequate Domestic and Fire Reserve
The system only for fire fighting purpose may be designed with automatic fire pump as shown in Fig 4.4.3.
The water s:upply system for domestic use and fire protection may be designed with roof gravity tank and
manually controlled pump as shown in Fig 4.4.4. The pressure tank with automatic fire pump and
compressor may be used for supplying water to the fire fignting equipments as shown in Fig 4.4.5 and 4.4.6.
The 1ocation of pressure tank snail be such that it will provide the required pressure at the highest fire
fighting equipment.
The water stored in storage tank for fire fighting operation shall not be used for other purposes (see
Fig4.4.7).
The ground storage tank shall be easily accessible to fire engine of Fire Department. In absence of space
available for fire en�ine, the cover slab of ground storage tarik shall be designed to withstand a vehicular
load of local fire engme.
4.2.2.4 Individual Water Sources: In absence of public water suJ?ply system, the building premises shall
have individual water sources specified in Sec 6.19 of Part 8. The mdividual water sources with adequate
yield during peak demand period will serve as a fire service ground tank as shown in Fig 4.4.3, 4.4.4 and ·
. . Otherwise, the water shall the individual sources shall have to be stored in a storage tank specified in
4.45
Sec4.2.2.3.

Part 4
Fire Protection
Siamese connection --+----,

acessible to fire engine
Water main
Fig. 4.4.3 Typical Diagram for Fire Protection with Ground

Tank and Automatic Fire Pump
4.2.3 Design Considerations for Standpipe and Hose System

4.2.3.1 The fire protection system shall be designed for their effective use either by amateur or trained fire
·
fighting personnel or both. .
4.2.3.2 All standpipes in standpipe system shall be sized so that they will provide a minimum flow
specified in Table 4.4.1. In standpip e system with more than one standpipe, the supply piping shall be sized
for the minimum flow specified m Table 4.4.1 for the first standpipe plus.lOOO 1rtre per minute for each
additional standpipe. The total number of such additional standJ'ipes shall not be more than 8. All
standpipe risers shall be connected through a gate valve with a main of size equal to that of the largest riser.
4.2.3.3 The minimum pressure for standpipes supplying a 50 mm or larger hose shall be at least 300 kPa.
For standpipe supplying first aid hose (38 mm nommal) may have a minimum pressure of 200 kPa.
4.2.3.4 The size (diameter) of standpipes for various building height may be as shown in Table 4.4.2 or
hydraulically designed to provide the required flow (Sec 4.2.3.2) and pressure (Sec 4.2.3.3) at the topmost
outlet.
4.2.3.5 The water sup ly required for combined system (for partial automatic sprinkler and Fire
f
Department hose) shal be calculated in accordance with Sec 4.2.3.2 plus an amount equal to the
hydraulically calculated sprinkler demand or 550 litre per minute for light hazard occupancy groups or 1900
litre per minute for ordinary hazard occupancy groups.
4-28
Chapter 4
r--- Fire header

Domestic water supply
Domestic reser e
Fire reser�:...r--+.....o'---,
Siamese connection
accessible to fire
engine
Water main or
lndvidual water
supply
Manually controlled pump
Fig. 4.4.4 Typical Diagram of Ground and Gravity Roof

Tank with Adequate Domestic and Fire Reserve
4.2.3.6 The size of combined system shall be at least 150 mm or hydraulically designed to provide the
required flow (Sec4.2.3.5) and pressure.
4.2.3.7 The standpipe shall be located innoncombustible enclosure such that it will be able to provide hose
stream to the most remote area of the floor served.
Table4.4.2
Standpipe Sizes
No. of Storeys Building Height Size ot Standpipe

(m) (mm)
Up to5 Up to 17 75*
u to10
g �u to33 100
1 to20 3 to63 150
20 to54 63 to 165 200
,. This size may be used only for occupancy groups Al, A2 and A4
4.2.3.8 The hose shall be connected to the standpipe within 1.5 m from the floor. Hose stations shall be
easily accessible for inspection and testing.

Part 4
Fire Protection
Water main or--+.

indvidual water supply H-+-----1--1
Siamese connection
accessible to fire engine
'----Automatic fire pump
Fig. 4.4.5 Typical Diagram with Pressure Tank and

Automatic Fire Pump
4.2.3.9 The hose connection to a standpipe for large stream shall be at least 100 mm nominal and that of
small stream may be 63 mm or 50 mm on each floor. The size of first aid hose shall be 38 mm nominal. The
hose length shall not be more than 30 m.
4.2.3.10 The static pressure in standpipe shall not exceed 650 kPa at hose outlet. Where pressure reducing
valves are used, the design of pressure reducing valve shall be so that the pressure with the following
stream shall not exceed 650 kPa .
4.2.3.11 Different piping materials and fittings for standpipe system presented in Tables 4.4.3 and 4.4.4 shall
conform to the standard or one of the standards cited against them. The standard requirements for other
materials not provided in these tables shall be subject to the approval of the Authority.
4.2.3.12 The standpipe riser shall be supported at the top and at the lowest level. The riser shall also be
provided with su port at the alternate fevel in between top and bottom level of the standpipe riser. The
f
support shall be o adequate strength to support the water-fnled pipe load and an additional1oad of 110 kg.
The horizontal standpipe shall have hangers with a spacing not more than Sm. The hanger shall be able to
carry a load of five times the weight of the water-filled pipe and an additional load of 110 kg.
4-30
Chapter 4
Praassura relief valva
Supply to water
distribution system
Inflow
Gate valva
r 1
'-----Compressor
Fig. 4.4.6 Details of a Pressure Tank System
Table4.4.3
Piping for Standpipe System
Material Standard
Copper Tube ASTM87S, ASTM 888
Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube ASTM82S1
Steel Pipe ASTM ASS, ASTM A120, ASTM A13S
Wrought Steel or Iron ANSI 836.10
Table4.4.4
Standpipe Fittings
Material Standard
Cast Iron ANSI 616.1, ANSI816.4
Copper ANSI 816.18, ANSI816.22
Malleable Iron ANSI 816.3
Steel ANSI816.S, ANSI816.9, ANSI 816.11,

ANSI 816.2S, ASTM A234
42
. 3 . 3 There shall be Siamese connection to the standpipe or to the delivery pipe of the gravity roof
. 1
storage tank. The Siamese connection shall be easily accessibfe to fire engine.
42
. 3 . 4 The system shall be provided with adequate drainage piping to discharge under pressure. The
. 1
drain pipe shall not discharge mto sanitary sewer.
4.2.3.15 All control valves shall be designed to withstand the pressure specified in Sec 4.2.7.2a.

Part 4
Fire Protection
Vent pipe
From water main
or Individual water
supply source or Manhole cover
ground storage tank
(in case of roof tank)
Over flow pipe

Domestic reserve
- - - _______ _ -11-�--+-+---- To domestic water·

supply pipe
Fire reserve
'-------'7"++....;;;;- To fire fighting

equipment
Fig. 4.4.7 Typical Diagram of Storage Tank (Ground or Overhead)

with Domestic and Fire Reserve (construction shall be in
accordance with section 6.7.2 in Part 8)
4.2.4 Design Consideration for Sprinkler System

4.2.4.1 The pipe schedule sizing to supply different number of sprinklers for their different uses may be
in accordance with Tables 4.4.5 and 4.4.6.
4.2.4.2 Each sp rinkler shall serve a maximum ceiling area specified in Table 4.4.7 for different types of
building accordmg to their uses.
4.2.4.3 The recommended pressure for sprinkler system will be 100 kPa. The location of gravity storage
tank to serve sprinkler system shall be at least 10m above the top most line of sprinklers.
4.2.4.4 Water supply pipings and fittings for S}'rinkler system shall conform to the standard or one of the
standards cited agamst tnem in accordance with Tables 4.4.4 and 4.4.8. The standard requirements for other
pipe materials not provided in these tables shall be subject to the approval of the Authonty.
4.2.4.5 The sprinkler system shall be provided with adequate support or made flexible to prevent pipe
breakage during earthquake.
4.2.4.6 The hanger in sprinkler system shall be designed to carry a load equal to five times the weight of
the wate�-filled pipe plus an addition load of 110kg.
The support shall be designed to support a load equal to the weight-filled pipe plus and additional load of
llOkg.
4-32
Chapter 4
Table4.4.5
Size of Water Supply Steel Pipe to Sprinklers
Pipe Size No. of Sprinkler No. of Sprinkler No. of Sprinkler

mm (inch) nominal Connection
·
for Light Connection Ordinary Connection Ordinary
Hazard"' Hazard • Extra Hazard •
25 (I) 2 2 I
32 (It) 3 3 2
38 (It) 5 5 5
..
50 (2) IO .10 8
63 ( 2 t) 30 20 I5
75 (3) 60 40 27
88 (3t) IOO 65 40
IOO (4) NL** IOO 55
I25 (5) - I60 90
I50 (6) - 275 I50
200 (8) - 400*** 225***
•
Definition of these terms are given in Table 4.4.1.
••
No limit .
2
•••
One sprinkler system riser or combined system riser shall serve the floor area not more than 4850 m f � r
2
light and ordinary hazardous occu_]Janc:y and 2325 m for extra hazardous occupancy
Table4.4.6
Size of Water Supply Copper Pipe to Sprinklers
Pipe Size No. of Sprinkler No. of Sprinkler No. of Sprinkler

mm (inch) nominal Connection for Light Connection Ordinary Connection Ordinary
Hazard"' Hazard • Extra Hazard •
25(I) 2 2 I
32 (It) 3 3 2
38 (It) 5 5 5
50 (2) I2 I2 8
63 (It) 40 25 20
75 (3) 65 45 30
88 (3t) 115 75 45
IOO (4) NL"'* li5 65

.
I25 (5) - I80 IOO

I50 (6) - 300 I70
200 (8) - ...... ......
•
Definition of these terms are given in Table 4.4.1.
••
No limit.
2
•••
One sprinkler system riser or combined system riser shall serve the floor area not more than 4850 m for
2
light and ordinary hazard occupancy and 2325 m for extra hazard occupancy

·Part 4
Fire Protection
Table4.4.7
Ceiling Area for a Sprinkler
Building Type Light Hazard ,.. Ordinary Hazard •• Extra Hazard ....
Area,m2 Area,m2 Area,m2
Roo� or Floor on Trusses, 20(4.5*) 12(4.5*) 8.4(3.5*)
Girders or Beam
With High Piling ,.,.,. 9.3(3.5*) 8.4(3.5*)
�
-
en Wood Joists 12(4.5*) 12(4.5*) 8.4(3.5*)

ith High Piling *** -
9.3(3.5*) 8.4(3.5*)
�
Other Ty e of Construction 15.6(4.5*) 12(4.5*) 8.4(3.5*)
With Hig Piling ,...,. -
9.3(3.5*) 8.4(3.5*)
Notes:
.. Maximum distance in m between sprinklers and between line of piping .
.. .. The definitions of these terms are given in Table 4.4.1.
.... .. Storage facilities which permit closely piled materials over 4.5 m or materials on rack over 3.6 m.
Table44. 8
.
Piping for Sprinkler System
Material Standard
Copper and Copper-Alloy ASTM 832, ASTM 875
ASTM 888, ASTM 825
Steel ANSI 836.10, ASTM A53

ASTM A120, ASTM A 135, ASTM A795
4.2.4.7 There shall be Siamese connection to the sprinkler system located outside the building and
accessible to the Fire Department connection.
42
. 4
. 8
. All risers shall be connected through a gate valve with a main of size equal to that largest riser.
42
. 4
. 9
. The sprinkler system shall be provided with adequate drainage arrangement. The drain pipe shall
not discharge mto sanitary sewer.
.
42
. 4
. 1
. 0 All control valves and fittings shall be able to withstand the pressure specified in 4.2.7.2b.
4.2.5 Water Supply for Fire Protection in Tall Building

The quantity, sources and mode of water supply in tall building shall be in accordance with Sec 4.2.1 and
4.2.2.ln tall buildings fittings and equipments for fire fighting may be subject to excessive pressure. Pressure
on fire fighting eguipments (Sec 4.2.3.10) in tall building shall be reduced by one or a combination of the
following metnods:
a) Water Supply Zones with Automatic Fire Pump : The building shall be divided into different water
supply zones so that the fire fightin� e9uipment will serve within their maximum allowable limit of
pressure (Fig 4.4.8). Separate automatic fire pump or combination of l'ressure tank and automatic pump
shall be installed for supplying water to the fire fighting equipments m each zone.
b) Water Supply Zones with Intermediate Gravity Tank : The building shall be divided into different
water supply zones in accordance with 4.2.5a. Each water supply zones shall be provided with separate
gravity overhead tank and manually operated pump (Fig 4.4.9). The fire fighting equipments in each
water supply zone shall be supplied wHh water from their respective overhead gravity tanks.
c) Using Pressure Reducing Device :The water reguired by fire fighting equipments shall be supplied
from roof gravity tank (Fig 4.4.10). Pressure on different fire fighting equipments shall be reduced by
using pressure reducing valves (Fig 4.4.10).
·
4.2.6 Fire Pump

The fire pump shall be so designed that it shall satisfy the required l'ressures and flow for fire fighting
equipments at the highest and most remote part of the protected premises durin� their peak demand hour
or for pressure tank or for roof storage tank. The pump shall be housed in a readily accessible position in a
building of non combustible construction. The pump shall be adequately protected against mechanical
damage.
A manually controlled pump may be used to feed water into gravity overhead tank with fire reserve. There
shall be provision for standby fire pump driven by a compression Ignition (diesel) engine or electric pump
with own generator.
4-34
Chapter 4
o
Zone 2
o
o
b
-"'
.1'-..., -"',,---
"J
o �
i6
IE Zone 1
high!
ro �67m
Siamese connection
accessibleto the
fire engine 1 IE
Water main or
l
individual water
supply
l
I�
..
; t
� *
I Gr und ta
I �L
-
t:J
I
I I
L.
I - Siamese connection
accessible to fire englne
Automatic fire pump
Fig. 4.4.8 Typical Diagram for Fire Protection in Different

Water Supply Zones of a Tall Building
The fire fighting equipments directly fed by fire pump shall be designed with automatic fire pump. Once the
pump starts it snail run continuously until stopped manually. The pump shall be fully operational within 30
seconds after starting. There shall be provision for manual starting. The pump shall be compression i�ition
y
type or electricity driven with own generator. Where riming is necessary, automatic priming eqmpment
snail be provided to ensure priming with water at al times. The fire pump shall not be used for other
purpose.
4.2.7 Inspection, Testing and Maintenance

4.2.7.1 Inspection: All pipings and equipments shall be inspected for satisfactory supports (in accordance
with Sec 6.13 in Part 8 of trus Code) and protection from damage and corrosion. All outlets shall be free from
obstruction.
4.2.7.2 Testing : Fire protection plumbing system or part thereof shall be tested and approved after
installation by the Authority.
a) Testing of Standpipe System: The system shall be tested for a pressure 25% in excess of the highest
working pressure for at least 2 hours. The system shall be able to maintain above test pressures. The
system shall be also be tested for the required flow at the highest outlet.

Part 4
Fire Protection
I
..,ll, ! Domestic water supply
�meslic �erve
Fire reserve
__. _L
r Fire supply
rEi
0
Zone 2
0
Domestic reserve Q
lhi�servel
10
� " ". r---
"'-.] '-.)
ro �
f-- Domestic
ro water suply
16 Zone 1
high!
0 :67m
Fire supply
Siamese connectlon
accessible to t he
lire engine I 0
Water main or
.. l
Individual water
supply
l ..
..
_l -•
tJ
I"T"fl,{�
I I I I '--- Siamese connection
accessible to fire engine
'-- '
Manually controlled pump
Fig. 4.4.9 Typical Diagram for Fire Protection in Different Water

Supply Zones with Gravity Tanks of a Tall Building
· '
b) Testing of Sprinkler System : This system shall be tested for at least 2 hours for a pressure of 1000 kPa
or at 350 kPa in excess of normal working pressure when normal working pressure will be more than
650 kPa. The system shall be able to maintain above test pressures. The system shall also be tested for
the required flow at the highest outlet.
c) Testing of Pump : The pump used for fire fighting purpose shall be tested for their performance
characteristics. The pump shall be restored or repairea to its original condition if their performance
characteristics fall below more than 10 per cent of the supplier's test characteristic curve or as specified
for the fire protection water supply system.
4.2.7.3 Maintenance : The system shall be maintained for safe operating conditions and tested at least
once a year.
4-36
Chapter 4
I I
� Domestic water supply
Domestic reserve
---
Fire reserve
I
. . Fire supply
10
ro
=67m
ro
10
10
�
"
�
ro�
�
rtE Pressure
ffi
reducing valve
rtE
Siamese connection
I
accessible to the
fire engine
Water main or
j
individual water
I
�
supply
I
Ground tank
r
I
r
I
1 lr;
_....
I I
J L,Pump
Fig. 4.4.10 Typical Diagram for Fire Protection with Pressure

Reducing Valves in Tall Building
4.3 FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALLING OR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Fire protective signalling or fire alarm system, where required by the Code, shall specify plans and clearly
delineate the locations and number of all alarm-initiating devices and alarm-indicatmg appliances. The plan
shall also provide details of all equipment to be used, proposed zonin g , list of auxiliary control functions,
location of the control panel and enunciators and a complete sequence of operation for the system.
Fire protective signalling or fire alarm system, wherever required and installed shall be maintained in full
operating condition.
4.4 AUTOMATIC FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
The installation of automatic fire and smoke detection system shall be a necessity when the size,
arrangement and occupancy of a building become such that a fire itself can not provide adequate warning to
its occupants.

Part 4
Fire Protection
The automatic fire and smoke detection system shall include, spot or line type heat sensitive detectors and
optical, ionized or chemical sensitive type of smoke detectors. A guideline for selection and siting of fire
detection system is provided in Appendix C.
4.5 FOAM EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
4.5.1 General
Foam extinguishing system shall be of an ap p roved type and shall be installed in accordance with the
provisions of this Code. The foam extinguishing system is designed to discharge fire suppressive foam
concentrates over the area to be protected.
4.5.1.1 A foam extinguishing system shall be automatically actuated during a fire with provision of
manual actuation.
4.5.1.2 Warning sign and discharge alarm system shall be provided with the foam extinguishing system,
which shall be actuated during the use of the system.
4.5.1.3 The system shall be provided for protection of boiler rooms with its ancillary storage of furnace oils
in basement and other areas where hazardous liquids are stored.
4.6 CARBON DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
4.6.1 General
Carbon dioxide extinguishing system shall be of an approved type and shall be installed as per provisions of
this Code. The system supplies C02 from a pressurized vessel i:fuough fixed pipes and nozzles.
4.6.1.1 The system is used where water or foam cannot be used for fire extinguishing because of the
special nature of the contents within the building or areas to be protected.
4.6.1.2 The system shall be automatically actuated and shall be equipped with manual actuation devices as
well.
4.6.1.3 Warning signs and discharge alarm shall be provided where persons are likely to be trapped in an
area made hazardous by carbon dioxide discharge.
4.7 HALOGENATED EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
4.7.1 General
Halogenated extinguishing system shall be of an approved type and shall be installed in accordance with
the provisions of this Code. The system comprise p1pes, nozzles and halogenated chemical container under
pressure.
4.7.1.1 When carbon dioxide extinguishing systems are not proved suitable for special fire risk zones,
halogenated extinguishing system shall be installed. The system shall be automatically actuated during a
fire and shall be equipped with manual actuation devices as well.
4.7.1.2 Warning sign and discharge alarm shall be provided where persons are likely to be trapped in an
area made hazardous by halogenated hydrocarbons.
4.8 DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
4.8.1 General
Dry chemical extinguishing system shall be of an approved type and shall be installed in accordance with
the provisions of this Code and manufacture's instruction.
4�8.1.1 The system shall be automatically actuated during a fire and shall be equipped with manual
actuation device as well.
4.8.1.2 Warning signs and discharge alarm shall be provided where persons are likely to be exposed to dry
chemical discharge.
4.8.1.3 The dry chemical agent of the system shall be nontoxic.
4.9 WET CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
4.9.1 General
A wet chemical system is a solution of water and potassium carbonate or acetate based chemical which
forms the extingmshing agent. The system shall be installed in accordance with the provisions of this Code
and manufacturer's installation instruction.
4.9.1.1 The system shall be automatically actuated during a fire and shall be equipped with manual
actuation device as well.
4-38
Chapter 4
4.9.1.2 In case of wet chemical range hood extinguishing system, label of an approved agent shall be
affixed.
4.9.1.3 Warning signs and discharge alarm shall be provided where persons are likely to be exposed to
wet chemical discharge.
4.10 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
4.10.1 General
Potable fire extinguisher shall be of an approved type and shall be installed as per manufacturer's
instruction.
4.10.1.1 Portable fire extinguisher shall be installed in private and public buildings as per specification and
requirements of BDS 825: 1991 (BDS 825: 91).
4.10.1.2 The portable extinguisher shall be placed near the path of exit travel and it shall be easily
accessible.
4.10.1.3 Fire hazard areas of a building like kitchen, public area, storage, electrical distribution point etc.
shall be installed with portable fire extinguishers.
Related Appendix
AppendixC Detailed Guidelines for Selection and Siting of Fire Detection System

Part 4
Fire Protection
4-40
CHAPTER
Specific Requirements for

·Various Occupancies
5.1 SCOPE
The provisions of this chapter shall control the installation of fire detection and fixed fire fighting
arrangement in low rise builaings of different occupancy groups. The term 'Lowrise Building' shall include
all structures which are not taller than 20 m from the fiilisbed ground level and do not have more than six
floors.
The fire detection and fire fighting arrangement required for highrise buildings are specified in Appendix D.
5.2 OCCUPANCY A: RESIDENTIAL
In addition to the general provisions covered under Chapter 4, the following requirements· for lowrise
buildings shall be complied with. .
5.2.1 Occupancy Al : Detached Single Family Dwelling

Fire detection and fixed fire fighting arrangements shall not be required.
5.2.2 Occupancy A2: Flats and Apartments

5.2.3 Occupancy A3 : Mess, Boarding House and Hostels

For buildings upto 2 storey height, fire detection and fixed fire fighting arrangements shall not be required.
Buildings hav�ng 3 floors or above and having floor area less than 300m2 shall not require fire detection and
fixed fire fi�?hting arrangements. But if the floor area of such building is more than 300m2 per floor having
central comdor with rooms on both sides, manually operated electnc fire alarm system shall be provided
along with portable fire extinguishers.
·
Part4 4-41
Fire Protection
Part 4
Fire Protection
5.2.4 Occupancy A4,: Minimum Standard Housing

5.2.5 Occupancy AS: Hotels and Lodging Houses

For building upto 2 storey height, fire detection and fixed fire fighting arrangements shall not be required.
Buildings having more than 2 floors or having an area of more than 300m2 per floor, shall be provided with
manually operated electric fire alarm system. Portable fire fighting appliances shall be kept as per
instruction of the authority.
5.3 OCCUPANCY B: EDUCATIONAL
In addition to the general provisions specified in Chapter 4, the following requirements for Occupancy B
shall be complied with.
5.3.1 Educational buildings upto 2 storey height and having less than 100m2 floor area per floor shall not require
fixed fire detection and fire fighting arrangements.
5.3.2 Educational buildings having more than 2 storey shall be provided with manually operated electric fire
alarm system.
5.3.3 Portable fire fighting appliances shall be kept as per instruction of the concerned authority.
5.4 OCCUPANCY C: INSTITUTIONAL
The following provisions shall be complied with for lowrise institutional buildings.
5.4.1 Occupancy Cl: Institution for Care of Children

Fire detection and fixed fire fighting arrangements shall not be required. Portable fire fighting appliances
shall be kept as per instruction of the concerned authority.
5.4.2 Occupancy C2: Custodial Institution for the Physically Capable

Fire detection and fixed fire fighting arrangements shall not be required. Portable fire fighting appliances
shall be kept as per instruction of the concerned authority.
5.4.3 Occupancy C3: Custodial Institution for the Physically Incapable

Manually operated electric fire alarm system shall be installed. Portable fire fighting appliances shall be kept
as per instruction of the concerned authority.
5.5 OCCUPANCY D: HEALTH CARE FACILITIES
In addition to the general provisions, as detailed under Chapter 4, the following requirements shall be
complied with.
5.5.1 Occupancy Dl: Normal Medical Facilities

Manually operated electric fire alarm system and/or automatic fire alarm system shall be installed in the
duty room, so that the duty personnel receive the fire warning well in advance. Requirements of manual or
automatic fire alarm system or both shall be decided and approved by the appropriate authority. Portable
fire fighting appliances shall be kept as per instruction of the concerned authority.
5.5.2 Occupancy 02: Emergency Medical Facilities

The requirements shall include the installation of manually operated electric fire alarm system and/or
automatic fire alarm system as per Sec 5.5.1 above. Portable fire fighting appliances shall be kept as per
instruction of the concerned authority.
5.6 OCCUPANCY E: ASSEMBLY
The special requirements for Occupancy E shall include the following.
5.6.1 Occupancy El: Large Assembly with Fixed Seats

All auditorium, corridor, green rooms and canteen attached to a·ssembly buildings shall be fitted with
automatic fire alarm system and the performing stage shall preferably be covered by an automatic sprinkler
system. Portable fire fighting appliances shall be kept as per instruction of the concerned authority.
5.6.2 Occupancy E2: Small Assembly with Fixed Seats

Shall comply with the requirements laid down in Sec 5.6.1 above.
5.6.3 Occupancy E3: Large Assembly without Fixed Seats

Automatic fire alarm system shall be provided. Portable fire fighting appliances shall be kept as per
instruction of the concerned authority.
4-42
Chapter 5
Specific Requirements for Various Occupancies
5.6.4 Occupancy E4: Small Assembly without Fixed Seats

Requirements specified in Sec 5.6.3 shall be complied with.
5.6.5 Occupancy ES : Sports Facilities

Manually operated electric fire alarm system shall be provided. Portable fire fighting appliances shall be
kept as per mstruction of the concerned authority.
5.7 OCCUPANCY F: BUSINESS AND MERCANTILE
In addition to the general provisions covered under Chapter 4� the following requirements for Occupancy F
5.7.1 Occupancy Fl: Offices

i) Office buildings less than 2 storey No prov1s1on required except portable fire
2
high and 500 m floor area extinguishers.
ii) Office buildings more than 2 storel Manually operated electric fire alarm system shall
high or floor area more than 500m be provided along with portable fire extinguishers
iii) Other mercantile buildings more Automatic fire alarm system required along with
than 2 storey high and more than portable fire extinguishers.
2
500m in floor area
iv) Laboratories with precision Automatic fire alarm system and fixed automatic
instruments C02 fire extinguishing system shall be provided in
addition to portable fire extinguishers.
v) Buildings dealing with flammable Automatic foam or C02 or dry chemical fire
liquids extinguishing system required along with portable
fire extinguisners.
vi) Solvent storage in office Automatic foam or C02 or dry chemical fire
extinguishing system required along with portable
fire extinguisners.
vii) Computer installation Automatic fire alarm system and fixed C02 or
fixed vaporising liquid fire extinguishing system
required along with portable fire extinguishers.
viii) Electrical switch board room/sub- Automatic fire alarm and/or fixed C02 or fixed
station vaporising liquid fire extinguishing system shall
be installed along with portable fire extinguishers.
ix) Space under false ceiling Automatic fire alarm system shall be installed.
5.7.2 Occupancy F2: Small Shops and Markets

i) Who l e sale establishments, Automatic sprinkler or automatic fire alarm
warehouses, transport booking system shall be provided along with portable fire
establishments extinguishers.
ii) Other premises (other than shops, Automatic fire alarm system shall be provided
stores, markets etc.) along with portable fire extinguishers.
5.7.3 Occupancy F3: Large Shops and Markets

i) Shopping arcade with central Automatic fire alarm system and portable fire
corndors open to sky extinguishers shall be provided
ii) Shopping complex under covered Automatic fire alarm and venting system, fixed
2
roof with areas more than 500m and portable COz fire extinguisher shall be
on each floor installed. Provision for portable fire pump with
relevant accessories and conservance of water shall
be provided along with trained personnel.
iii) Underground shopping complex Automatic fire alarm, sprinklers and fixed and
portable C02 fire extingmsher shall be installed.
5.7.4 Occupancy F4: Garages and Petrol Stations

i) Petrol pump station, automobile Fixed wall hung C02 or dry chemical fire
garages extinguisher shall be provided or arrangements
shall be made as directed by the authority.

Part 4
Fire Protection
ii) Aircraft hangars Foam or dry chemical or C02 Fire extinguishers

shall be installed.
5.7.5 Occupancy FS: Essential Services

Automatic fire alarm system and automatic fire sprinkler shall be provided along with portable fire
extinguishers.
5.8 OCCUPANCY G : INDUSTRIAL
In addition to the general provision covered under Chapter 4, the following requirements for Occupancy G
5.8.1 Occupancy Gl: Low Hazard Industries

Manually operated electric fire alarm system shall be installed along with portable fire extinguishers.
5.8.2 Occupancy G2: Moderate Hazard Industries

a) Area upto 750 m2 shall be installed with automatic fire alarm system along with portable fire
extingwshers.
b) Area above 750m2 shall be fitted with Automatic sprinkler and/or automatic fire alarms system along
with portable fire extinguishers.
5.9 OCCUPANCY H: STORAGE
In addition to the general provisions covered under Chapter 4, the following requirements for Occupancy H
5.9.1 Occupancy Hl: Low Fire Risk Storage

Manually operated electric fire alarm system shall be installed. Depending on the type of materials to be
stored, other detection and fire fighting system shall be provided as per direction of the Authority.
5.9.2 Occupancy H2: Moderate Fire Risk Storage

Automatic fire alarm system shall be installed. Depending on the type of stored materials other fire
detection and fire fighting arrangement shall be proviaed as per direction of the Authority.
5.10 OCCUPANCY J: HAZARDOUS
In addition to the general provisions covered under Chapter 4, the following requirements for the
occupancy group shall be complied with.
All hazardous occupancies shall be installed with Automatic Fire Alarm and Sprinkler System. C02 or foam
or dry chemical extinguishing system shall be installed as per direction of the Authority.
5.11 OCCUPANCY K: MISCELLANEOUS
Fire detection and fire fighting arrangements shall be installed as and where directed and approved by the
Authority.
Related Appendix
Appendix D Special Requirements of Buildings more than 20 Metre High
4-44 .
Appendices
APPENDIX A Guidelines for Fire Drill and Evacuation Procedure for High Rise Buildings
APPENDIXB Fire Protection Considerations for Venting in Industrial and Storage Buildings
APPENDIXC Detailed Guidelines for Selection and Siting of Fire Detection System
APPENDIXD Special Requirements of Buildings more than 20 Metre High
Part4 4-45
Fire Protection
Part 4
Fire Protection
Appendix A
Guidelines for Fire Drill and Evacuation Procedure for High Rise Buildings
A1 INTRODUCTION
The following guidelines are provided to enable safe evacuation of the occupants of a high rise building in
case of fire or any other emergency.
A2 FIRE REPORTING
Any occupant within the occupancy discovering a fire, heat or smoke, shall forthwith report the incident to
the fire brigade directly or through the ground command station, if there be any. Reporting of emergency
situation to fire brigade should not be unnecessarily delayed by any person by way of making, issuing,
posting or maintaining any regulation or order, written or verbal, to that effect.
A3 FIRE DRILLS
A3.1 Fire drill shall be conducted quarterly (4 times a year) in existing buildings as detailed under the Fire Safety
Plan (Sec A4.7 and A 4.8 below) for the first two years from the data of enforcement of this Code. For new
buildings, the period of 2 years shall be counted from the beginning of occupancy of the building. After this
initial period of 2 years, fire drill shall be conducted twice a year in all buildings.
A3.2 All occupants of the buildings shall participate in the fire drill and the building service employees including
fire warden and his/her staff shall actively help the inmates in the process of drill. However, the very olcf,
convalescent patients or otherwise incapacitated inmates are not obhged to actively take part in the exercise,
except the fire warden and his staff and family members of such person shall chalk out a clear plan as to
how to evacuate in a real emergent situation with such incapacitated persons. .
A3.3 A record of such drills shall be kept in writing for at least3 years for the inspection of fire brigade whenever
called for.
A4 SIGNS AND FLOOR PLANS
A4.1 A sign shall be posted and maintained in front of the landing area of lifts on all floors so conspicuously and
in such size and colour (sign reference may be given) that occupants may not miss the same, which shall
direct the occupants to use stairs and not lifts during emergencies/fires, if not directed otherwise and shall
also contain a floor plan with exact location of the stair and the relative position between the sign and the
stair. Such posting in front of the landing area of lifts shall be omitted only if such signs are posted on all
floors and some other area conspicuously located with the same message inscribed on it. •
The sign shall be written in Bangia, English translation of which reads "USE STAIRS IN CASE OF FIRE
UNLESS OTHERWISE INSTRUCTED". The lettering shall be at least25 mm in red on white background. the
sign should be so written as to provide good legibility. When floor plan with stair location is shown, the sign
shall be at least 250x300 mm When two signs are used, one for the notice and the other for floor plan, the
.
sizes shall at least be 60 x 300 mm and 2 00 x 300 mm respectively. The sign/signs may be posted directly
above the call button of the lift or any other conspicuous location securely attached to the surface of the wall.
The top of the sign shall not be more than2 metres above floor level.
A4.2 Signs Depicting Floor Number

A si� shall be posted and maintained on each stair enclosure preferably on the wall of the intermediate
landmg which in actual fact shall be half storey more or less than the actual indicating the floor number. The
number shall be at least 75 mm square and in Bangia. The number and background shall be in contrasting
colours, e. g. black on a white background.
A4.3 Stair and Elevator Identification

Each stair and Elevator shall be identified by an alphabet in Bangia and posted with a sign and securely
placed preferably on the wall of the stair side of the lift door from which egress is to be made. The letters
shall be75 mm square and shall be painted on a contrasting background e. g. black on a white background.
A4.4 Stair re-entry Provision

A sign shall be posted and maintained on each floor within stairway and on the occupancy side of the
stairway where required, indicating whether re-entry is provided into the building and the floor where such
re-entry is provided. The lettering and numbers of the signs shall be at least 25 mm high on a contrasting
background and shall be posted securely at least1.5 m above the floor. .
A4.5 Command Station

Command station on the ground floor shall be provided with a detailed floor plan of the entire building
including detailed locations of all first aid fire fighting equipment and otner pertinent information.
Command stations shall be adequately illuminated.
4-46
Appendices
A 4.6 Two way Communications and Fire Alarm

A two way communication system between each floor and the command station on the lobby of the
entrance floor shall be provided and maintained by the owner of the building. Similarly fire alarm on each
floor and the commancf station shall be fitted and maintained.
Fire Safety Plan

·
A 4.7
A fire safety plan shall be developed in line with the details elaborated under A 4.8 and must have the
approval of the local Fire Department regarding its adequacy.
A 4.7.1 Once the lan is accorded after a J?.proval by the Fire Department, the plan shall be distributed to all the
f
tenants o the building by the bUifding management, (be it a committee or a cooperative) including the
employees of the tenants and employees of the management.
A 4.7.2 If the building is owned by an individual or a single corporate body and the owner or right holding
member/members of the corporate body are residing in the building, shall be equally subject to fire safety
plan applicable to other tenants.
A 4.7.3 All major changes in the safety plan shall be promptly reported to Fire Department for their approval.
A 4.8 Fire Safety Plan

Fire Safety Plan elaborates the purpose and objective of the plan with details of personnel and their duties
and fire drilling and evacuation plan.
A 4.8.1 Fire Safety Plan starts with the location, address of the building with telephone number and details of any
other communication facilities available within the building.
A4.8.2 Purpose of the plan is to delineate details of systematic safe and orderly evacuation of a J>art or whole of the
buifding by its occupants in case of fire/emergency in the shortest possible time to a safe area through the
safe means of egress. It also details out the use of in-built facilities of fire warning and fire fighting like fire
alarm, first aid Jlose etc. to safeguard the lives of the inmates of the building.
A4.8.3 Objective of the plan is to provide continued education to the inmates and the fire command personnel and
keep the eople oriented to the in-built equipment in readiness to act in the event of fire. The plan shall be
d
rehearse through fire drill and the written plans containing instruction shall be updated if needed and use
of the in-built equipment along with initiating fire safety procedure to safeguard hfe in case of fire until the
fire brigade arrives. .
A 4.8.4 Fire command crew may be composed of personnel like Fire Safety Director, Deputy Fire Safety Director,
Fire Wardens and Deputy Fire Wardens. Number of these people shall be dependent on the size and
number of inmates living within the building.
A 4.8.4.1 a) Fire Safety Director: The plan shall contain the name, whether employed by a fire security firm or
directly employed by the management, assigned regular location, how to contact him at his/her regular
location, how to contact him/her if not at regular location during normal working hours.
b) Qualifications and experience: Depending on the size and complexity of the building, the Director shall
be a person of proven capability, having good training and schooling with adequate experience in
dealing with fire. Preference may be given to retired Fire Department personnel.
c) Duties of Fire Safety Director shall primarily include but not be limited to the following.
i) Shall be well conversant with the written fire safety plan for the fire drill and evacuation
procedures.
ii) Shall be in char�e of selecting qualified building service employees for the fire command and
engage in orgamzing, training and supervising the works of command crew.
iii) Shall be responsible to conduct fire and evacuation drill.
iv) Shall be responsible for the availability and state of preparedness of fire command crew during
emergencies.
v) Shall be responsible for the assignment and training of Fire Warden on floor supported by
adequate number of Deputy Fire Wardens as detailed out in the fire safety plan. .
vi) Shall be responsible for the day to day supervision of the warden and his deputies and the state
of alertness of the crew. When the number of crew of Warden and Deputy Wardens become such
that it becomes impractical for the Director to check them directly during the working hours, the
Warden or Deputy Warden shall intimate the Director for the persons not availab1e for some
length of time, so that he may provide substitute during such period of absence. Nonetheless the
Director shall spot check any number of floors as he wishes or time permits. An up to date
organization chart shall be displayed at appropriate locations.

Part 4
Fire Protection
vii) Cases of negligence to duties on the part of members of his crew shall be taken up by him and he
shall rectify the situation by appropriate measures as far as he has been empowered under the
fire safety plan, failing which lie snail notify the matter to the owner or the management of the
building. The owner or the management on their part shall take up the matter with the fire
. security firm or if employed directly shall deal witFi the matter direct!}'. If the person/persons
is/are employed by a firm, and the firm fails to correct the situation, the owner/management
shall notifY the matter to the Fire Department to take disciplinary action against the firm.
viii) In the event of fire/emergency he/she shall be in charge of fire command station and shall
supervise, guide and cooroinate activities such as ensuring that the Fire Department has been
notified of fire or fire alarm, direct the evacuation procedure as detailed in the fire safety plan,
manning the fire command station, appraise the Fire Department about the spot of fire on their
arrival, advise the Fire Department officer in charge of the operation.
A 4.8.4.2 a) Deputy Fire Safety Director: The fire safety plan shall contain the details of Deputy Fire Safety Director
similar to the details mentioned under the Director A 4.8.4.1(a).
b) Qualification and experience shall also be similar to those of the Director excepting that he may be less
experience than the Director and covered under A 4.8.4.1 (b).
c) Duties of the Deputy Fire safety Director shall be similar to those mentioned under A 4.8.4.1(c) except
that he shall receive command from the Director for execution and shall assume the role of Director m
his absence.
A 4.8.4.3 a) Fire Warden and Deputy Fire Wardens: The fire safety plan shall contain their names on the
organization chart for the floors they have been assigned against. The entire organization chart shall be
kept updated in the command station for fire drill and evacuation assignment.
b) Tenant or tenants of each floor upon request by the owner or in-charge of the building shall assign and
make available dependable and trustworthY' person/persons under their emplo}'ee at the disposal of
the Director to act as Wardens, Deputy Wardens. They shall undergo basic fire fighting and evacuation
training by the Director or his deputy.
c) Each floor of a building shall be under the command of a Fire Warden and each tenant under a Deputy
Fire Warden for the safe evacuation of inmates in the case of fire. When the floor area of a tenant
exceeds 700 m2 a Deputy Fire Warden shall be assigned for each 700 m2 or part thereof.
i) Each Fire Warden and DeJ?uty Fire Warden shall be conversant with the fire safety plan. They
must be well acquainted with fire exits and location and operation of fire alarms.
ii) In case of fire or fire alarm, the Fire Warden and Deputies shall ascertain location of fire and
unfold evacuation procedure as directed from the command station and to the following general
guides.
1. The most critical area for immediate evacuation would be the fire floor and the floors above.
Evacuation from other floors shall be initiated if so commanded by the ground command
station or the situation indicates to be so. Evacuation should be carried out via stairs not
influenced by fire and fire warden shall try to carry out the operation using stair other then
the ones used by the Fire Department personnel. If this become impossible, the wardens
before opening door to the fire floor shall sought advice from the Fire Department
personnel .
2. Evacuation to two or more floors below the fire floor should be adequate. He/She shall
continuously keep the ground command station informed of his/her location.
3. Ensure that fire alarm has been transmitted.
4. Fire Wardens and their deputies shall ensure that all the inmates are intimated of the
excegency and shall immediately proceed with the evacuation exercise detailed under Fire
Safety Plan.
5. Fire Warden shall keep the ground station informed of the step being taken by him/her.
6. Similarly Fire Warden above fire floor shall notify the command station of the means being
taken by him/her or any other special feature after unfolding Fire Safety Plan.
7. If and when stairways serving fire floor/floors above become useless by the J>resence of fire,
smoke, fumes, in several floors above and when fire engulfs a considerable number of
inmates then use of elevators shall be considered in accordance with the followings:
4-48
Appendices
If the elevator serving the floor to be evacuated also serves the fire floor, the lifts shall
not be used. If there are more than one lift bank, however, the lift/lifts in the other bank
may be used if notified by the ground command station that one may use such lift/lifts.
If the lifts do not serve the fire floor or lift shaft has no opening on the fire floor, they
may be used if not otherwise instructed by the command station.
Elevators taken over by trained in-house person or Fire Department personnel may be
used.
In absence of unaffected available lift/lifts, Fire Warden shall decide to use the safest
stairway for evacuation based on considerations/information available on the floor and
any other instruction received from ground command. Before entering the stairway
with the evacuees, the Fire Warden shall be sure about the environment within the
stairway by personal inspection and in case of adverse environment consider using an
alternate stairway and shall notify the ground command accordingly.
The Fire Warden shall keep the ground command informed of the means adopted by
him during the evacuation process.
A48
. 4
. 4
. a) Building Evacuation Supervisors: A Building Evacuation Supervisor shall be available at all times other
than normal working hours when the Fire Safety Director or his Deputy are not available within the
building.
b) Building Evacuation Supervisor shall be a person capable of directing the evacuation procedure of
occupants within the buildings as detailed in the Fire Safety Plan.
c) During fire/emergencies, his primary function shall be to take over command of the ground station and
to direct and execute the evacuation process as laid down in the plan. ·
Buildins Evacuation Supervisor shall be trained by the Director and shall be under his command for all
evacuation purposes. His activities shall be controlled and governed by the clauses in Fire Safety Plan and
shall be subject to scrutiny of the Fire Department.
A 4.8.4.5 Fire Party: If, in the opinion of the Fire Safety Director and endorsed by the Fire Department that the
number of Wardens and Deputy Wardens are inadequate, a Fire Party shall be raised from among the
employees of the tenants ancf the management who shall be acting as help to regular in-house fire fighting
force m the event of fire and follow the same work schedule and function in the same manner as
Wardens/Deputy Warden.
A4.8.5 Organization Chart for Fire Drill and Evacuation Assignment

a) An organization chart clearly delineating assignment attributed to designated employees shall be
prepared as per Fire Safety Plan and posted to alf tenants and in very conspicuous location/locations on
each floor. A copy of the chart shall be in possession of the Fire Safety Director.
b) An updated list shall be continuously made available with the Director, his Deputy and Fire Wardens
and their deputies for all the disabled occupants unable to move witnout aid in the stairs.
Arrangement shall be made in detail in the Fire Safety Plan to have these inmates assigned in moving
down the stairs two or more floors below fire floor. If it becomes necessary to move them still further
down the stair, help may be sou&ht of the elevator bank unaffected by fire and evacuated safely to
ground floor. In case any extra assistance is needed, the Director shall be notified.
c) During fire or fire drill exercise, Fire Wardens shall be using arm band or such other identification.
d) During fire on the fire floor it is to be ensured that all inmates are notified and are evacuated to safe
area. A rush search shall be carried out including lavatories that all the inmates have been covered and
the person in charge of this operation shall be trained in accomplishing this task fast and flawless.
e) Persons not available on duty as per organization chart shall be promptly replaced as per contingency
plan detailed in the Fire Safety Plan.
f) On completion of evacuation operation, a head count shall be carried out of all the regular occupants
known to have occupied the floor evacuated.
g) Immediately on receipt of the alarm, the Fire Wardens shall take position near the two way
communication station on the floor, so that he/she can maintain continuous contact with the ground
command and receive instructions.
A4.8.6 Instruction to Inmates of the Building: Once the Fire Safety Plan has been approved by the Fire Department,
the applicable portion of the plan shall be distributed to all the tenants and the management of the building
who m tum shall pass it on the their respective employees. All the occupants shall actively participate ana
cooperate in carrymg out the provisions of Fire Safety Plan.

Part 4
Fire Protection
A 4.8.7 Fire Prevention and Protection Program:. A Plan for periodic formal inspection of each· floor shall be
developed in respect of exit facilities, fire extinguishers and good house keeping. Reports of such inspection
shall be carefully maintained for inspection ofFire Department. The Plan shall have provision for monthly
testing of two way communication and fire alarm system.
A 4.8.8 Detailed Building Information: A form shall be maintained for the benefit of all concerned with fire hazard
of the building and shall contain the following basic information.
a) Building address in adequate details about its location.
b) Name, Address and telephone number of the owner (corporate body or individual) and the person in
charge of the building.
c) Name address and telephone number if any, of the Fire Safety Director and his Deputy.
d) Certificate of occupancy.
e) Height, area, construction class (details of various load and non-load bearing elements).
f) Number, type and location of fire stairs and/or fire towers.
g) Number, type and location of horizontal exits or other refuge areas.
h) Number, type location and operation of elevators and escalators (if any).
i) Locations of fire alarm- floorwise and central.
j) Communication System (telephone, walkie talkie).
k) Size and location of stand pipe system, gravity or pressure tank, fire pump and the name and
qualifications of the person or persons in charge of the facilities.
I) Automatic fire sprinkler system, primary and secondary water supply system and the area or areas
being protected a1ong with the name and qualification of the person or persons in charge.
m) Any other fire extinguishing systertl, their location, efficacy and other pertinent details.
n) Average number of employed persons by day and night.
o) Average number of disabled persons visiting the building by day and night.
p) Average number of outsiders visiting the building by day and night.
q) Locations, types and capacities of other service facilities like rimary and standby electric power,
f
normal and emergency lighting arrangement, heating with fuel (i any), ventilation with fixed windows,
other means of emergency exhaust facilities of smoke and heat, air-conditioning system including floor
coverage and ducting, refuse disposal facilities, any other fire fighting equipment, any other service
facilities available.
r) Measures taken or to be taken for addition, alteration and repair of any aspect within the buildings.
s) Information on flammable solids, liquids and gases if used and stored within the building premises.
t) In mixed occupancy, complete details of such occupancies and their special needs to be covered during
fire or emergencies. .
A 4.8.9 Floor plan of entire building with floors having different configuration showing locations of fire fighting
facilities shall be kept under the command of Fire Safety Director with a copy to Fire Department.
A 4.8.10 In developing Fire Safety Plan, evaluation of all the individual floor layout, total occupancy load on each
floor, number and kinds of exits available, zoning of the floor by area and occupancy shall be taken into
consideration, careful evaluation of occupant movements and the most expeditions routes to exit and
alternate routes shall be identified and taken into consideration.
A 4.8.11 Personal Fire Instruction Card: All the occupants of the building shall be supplied with a personal Fire
Instruction Card containing details of the floor plan and exit routes as well as instruction to be followed
during fire. Instructions may contain the following either in Bangia or both in Bangia and English.
4-50
Appendices
A4.8.11.1 English Text of Instruction

a) Safety First
Push button fire alarm boxes (number is mentioned here) are provided on your floor. Please read
the operating instruction posted on them.
Please read the operating instructions on the body of the fire extinguisher provided in your floor.
Nearest exit from your flat is shown in this plan (plan to be provided here).
Assemble on the ground floor at the location indicated on the following plan. For clarification,
contact the Warden or Deputy Warden. (plan of assembly point in ground floor to be provided
here)
b) For personal and collective safety, notify the Warden/Deputy Warden in case.
Exit route and/or door are obstructed by dumping of boxes or such other loose materials.
Staircase door, lift lobby doors do not close automatically or completely.
Push button fire alarm or fire extinguisher are obstructed or damaged or seem to be out of order.
c) If you Discover a Fire
Break the glass and push the button of the nearest fire alarm and call the fire service.
With assistance from the floor Warden if needed, fight fire with the in-built facilities on your floor.
Evacuate, if so instructed by the Warden
d) When you hear Evacuation Instructions
Immediately leave the floor taking the nearest staircase.

Report to your Warden on reaching the predetermined assembly point outside the building.
Try not to use lifts.
Avoid going to cloak room.
Refrain from running or shouting, do not get panicked.
Do not waste a moment collecting personal belongings.
Keep the lift lobby and staircase doors shut.
A4.8.11.2 Bangia Text of Instruction
��'I�� 'lll;;n'illr-!1 � lllllil � 1fC:J1il iS9ft111 � � 9fti¥!Ui'R f.l;{ I

��'lll��r'l��m��
�9f'm!IDJ'G� � �"lm!llll��f.f.!l (Ill��) I
�'!;;n��"(R'' ��l�"f''1� 1ii ��lii'I!N
'tll1'5llrll1'5f<liJiliill
") � '8'Rnf�11fi!J��00 � �/�'811IC\('It"''�
� � ��'llfi! � 9ft'll �'<liii �I

AA��'Ilfi!� �'11�1
'1'¢'1�-a �'ll"! 1lfi! � sms, �'IIRI �� lffif � �'f.!l1il� �'5"C'i"'IIRII
'lf) �0{111$5�
'l'¢'1��1t<>J:IIll��1ffllrn��fi!'ll
�9f'ml��9f'mll!l�;;n'illr-!1�'1��'!�'!r6'!�1
-a� \li1Wi"111\5 llll'fm �'If <liJiliill
'<1) llli!f'l�
l1 ��
��AA�<ml'�'5"C'i"'llf.ll
��'lfrn�>S�'I!N'tll1'5llrll1'5f<liJiliill
��'Ill
111"19WJllil �'ifi( ��'Ill
��'11��'111
� 111"1� '!IN �r5'!1 �'Ill
�-a�� 1il1'f' I

Part 4
Fire Protection
AppendixB
Fire Protection Considerations for Venting in Industrial and Storage Buildings
B1
. SCOPE
B l.l This appendix covers venting requirements in industrial buildings. Provisions contained herein shall be
applicaole to single storey factory and storage facilities requiring large floor areas without dividing walls
ana enclosures.
This annex does not cover fire and smoke venting requirements for tall buildings.
B1.2 Venting requirements in industrial buildings are specified in this appendix under two heads as follows:
a) Smoke and fire venting
b) Explosion venting
B2 SMOKE AND FIRE VENTING
B21
. The following provisions shall be complied with for fire and smoke venting.
B 2.1.1 The combustion product of fire including smoke, being lighter than surrounding air tend to accumulate
near the high oint of a structure and tend to spread out in all directions to form a Iloating layer on top of a
r
relatively coo air below. In absence of vent, the hot floating layer progressively become deeper and the
whole occupancy is engulfed with smoking hot gases. Time needed to reach this stage may be only a few
minutes dependmg on the type of materials on fire, storage conditions of the materials involved etc.
B21
. 2
. Convection current of air always help lateral spread of fire once the hot gases reach the roof.
B21
. .3 Adequate number of vents, properly designed and judiciously placed, can disperse the smoke and hot gases
to atmosphere, thereby prevents spread of fire, as well as reduces risk of explosion from unbumt gases.
B21
. .4 Time needed for accumulation of hot gases and smoke within the structure being very short, it is imperative
that the venting devices are to be so aesigned and installed that they operate automatically at the earliest
sign of fire, sensed through smoke and heat detectors.
B 2.1. 5 The smoke and fire venting system shall be so designed and installed as to keep the temperature of the
combustion product as low as possible, preferably below1500C.
B 2.1.6 Venting systems are complement any of the to fire extinguishing system. Where automatic sprinklers are
installed as fire extinguishing system, the sprinklers snail operate before the vent system comes into
operation.
B21
. 7
. It is obvious that the smoke venting is easier than cleaning smoke once the structure has been filled with it.
B 21
. 8
. Apart from large area factory and storage, venting may be considered essential for windowless buildinss,
underground structures and nazardous occupancies. Automatic fire vents shall be provided in all industnal
and storase buildings classified as medium hazard or above, with floor areas in excess of 750m2• This
provision 1s mandatory irrespective of whether a large area is compartmentalized or not.
B 2.1.9 Determination of precise venting requirements is difficult, as variables like rate of combustion vis-a-vis
nature, shape, size and packaging of the combustible materials as well the size, height and disposition of the
stacks of materials are involved with it.
B21
. 1
. 0 Industrial buildin�s having floor area less than 750m2 and which is rated as low hazard industry, may use
conventional ventilators fitted high above near the eaves of the external walls as vents for smoke and hot
�ases, provided opening of the ventilators can be ensured at all times or are designed to open automatically
m case of fire.
B 2.1.11 Because of the large volume of air present in the large industrial buildings, it is most unlikely that the
closure of doors and windows shall eventually extinct fhe fire.
B 2.1.12 It is usually the vertical and not horizontal ventilation that is adopted in the single storey industrial
buildings.
B 2.1.13 Heat produced in fire being 70 to 80 per cent connective in nature, suitable arrangements shall be
incorporated in the vent system for early outflow of heat to atmosphere to contain fire spread.
B21
. 1
. 4 To minimize venting problems use of combustible roof linings shall be avoided.
B 2.1.15 Wind produces a negative pressure when blowing across a flat roof or a roof with a pitch under 40°.
Negative pressure tend to draw gases out of the structure, thereby aids venting of hot gases and smoke.
4-52
Appendices
Conversely when the pitch is more than 40°, gases will be drawn inside and will oppose outward flow on
the windward side of the roof.
. 6 To achieve full efficiency in vents total area of cold air inlets into the buildings should be at least equal to
B 2.11
total areas of all vents. Ideally the inlets should be as close to the ground as possible.
B 2.1.17 When vents are installed, the size, design, number and disposition and associated roof screen or curtain
boards shall be carefully assessed.
B 2.2 Venting area requirements for ventilation are estimated largely on the basis of assumed time needed
between the build up of fire from the initial outbreak to the time of effective taking over by the fire brigade.
B 2.21
. Because the entrained air forms the bulk of the vent gases, it is natural that the vent area required to be
provided shall be proportional to the perimeter of the fire area.
B 2.2.2 The effective area shall be the minimum cross-sectional area through which the hot gases must flow out to
atmosphere.
B 2.2.3 Increased air movement generated by power operated fans shall be disregarded in deciding venting area
because it is assumed that in the event of fire power will be disrupted and/ or fan damaged.
B2.2.4 Effective vent opening shall be different for different occupancies but shall be proportional to the floor area.
The ratios of total vent areas to be provided to the floor area are as shown below: .
a) Low hazard industry 11: 50

b) Moderate hazard industry 1:100
c) Hazardous occupancy 1:30 to 1:50
B 2.3 Venting shall be accomplished by any of the types, such as monitors, continuous gravity type, unit type or
sawtooth roof skylights.
B 2.3.1 Wire glass or metal panels shall be used in monitor type vents only if arrangements can be made for its
automatic opening.
B 2.3.2 Use of plain thin glass shall be avoided because of its doubtful behaviour during fire. However, if glass or
other early disi-ntegrating suitable plastic materials are used, they should be designed for automatic
operation.
B2.33
. In monitor or unit type vents, the panels shall be hinged at the bottom and designed to open automatically.
Both leaf of the vent shall be designed to vent simultaneously disregarding wina direction and ensure their
effectiveness during fire.
·
B2.34
. Moveable shutters in continuous gravity vents shall be designed to open automatically in case of fire.
B2.35
. Unit type vents shall be relatively small ranging between1 and 9 m2 in area, have light weight metal frames
and housed with hinged dampers. They shall be designed for both automatic and manual operation.
B2.3. 6 Roof skylight shall be satisfactory for venting only if designed for automatic operation.
B 2.3. 7 Exterior wall windows alone in industrial buildings shall·not be accepted as satisfactory means of venting,
but may be reckoned as additional means of venting when located close to the eaves ana are provided with
ordinary glass or movable section arranged for both manual and automatic operation.
B2.38
. Because of substantial reduction in the effective venting area, baffles shall not be installed inside vents.
B 2.4 Vents shall be automatic in operation unless where designed specifically for both manual and automatic
operation.
B 2.4.1 The release mechanism shall be simple in operation and shall not be dependent on electric power for
operation, as power operation may be disrupted during fire.
·
B 2.4.2 The automatic operation of vents can be achieved by actuation of fusible links or other heat or smoke
detectors or by interlacing with the operation of sprinkler system or any other automatic fire extinguishing
system covering the area. The vents can be so designed as to open by counterweights utilizing the force or
gravity or spring loaded level following its release.
B2.4.3 For simultaneous operation automatic fire alarm and automatic vent system shall be coupled.
B2.4.4 Vents and automatic sprinklers where installed together, sprinkler shall go into operation first before vents
open, in order to avoid delay in sprinkler operation. Heat actuated devices, if usea for vent release, shall be
properly covered from water spray or sprinkler which might delay their action.

Part 4
Fire Protection
B 2.4.5 To ensure vent opening, release mechanism shall not only be joined to fusible links but also with smoke
actuated automatic fire detectors, where the height of roof apex of the occupancy is 10 m or more or the
materials handled or stored have high smoke producing characteristics.
B 2.4.6 Materials used in hinges, hatches and other related parts in vents shall be noncorrosive in nature for long
trouble free operation.
B 2.5 Vents shall be properly sited, always as far as possible at the highest point in each area to be covered.
B 2.5.1 As far possible vents shall be sited right on top of the probable risk area to be protected to ensure free and
speedy removal of smoke and other combustion product.
B 2.5.2 Minimum vent opening shall not be less than 1250 mm in any direction.
B 2.5.3 Vent spacing shall be designed considering the fact that higher number of smaller vents are better than
smaller number of large vents.
B 2.5.4 Maximum spacing of vents shall be as follows:

a) Low hazard occupancy 45 m between centres
b) Moderate hazard occupancy 36m between centres .
c) Hazardous occupancy 22.5 to 30 m between centres
B 2.5.5 In deciding location of the vents on roof Sec B 2.1.15 shall be adhered to as far as possible.
B 2.6 Industrial buildings having large floor area without separating or subdivision walls shall be
compartmentalized with the aid of roof screen or curtain boari:ls. The curtains are extended from the roof
downward at specific intervals preventing lateral spread of heat and smoke in the event of fire.
B 2.6.1 Curtain board materials shall be heavy sheet metal or any other noncombustible material capable of
withstanding damage by heat or impact.
B 2.6.2 The curtain boards shall be reasonably gas-tight, although small openings for passage of pipes conduits etc.
may be permitted.
B 2.6.3 They shall extend at least up to 2200 mm from the downside of roof. Sites of special hazard shall be
encfosed by roof curtains extending down to 400 mm. They shall extend down to a height of 300 mm from
the floor where the roof/ceiling exceeds 15m or more.
· ·
B 2.6.4 In moderate hazard occupancies the distance between the screens shall not exceed 75m and enclosed areas
(compartmentalized) shall not exceed 4500 m2.
B 2.6.5 In high hazard occupancies the distance between the screen shall not exceed 30m and enclosed area shall be
limited to 750 m2.
B 2.6.6 The enclosed roof area shall be so spaced and disposed as to create an effective area for disposing off smoke
and hot gases of combustion.
B 2.6.7 In buildings provided with sprinklers, the screens shall preferably be so located as to coincide with unit
areas of sprinKler system. .
B3 EXPLOSION RELIEF VENTS
B 3.1 Explosion relief vents shall be l'rovided in industrial premises where combustible dusts, flammable gases,
vapours or mists in concentrations capable of initiating an explosion are present and constantly keep the
premises under the threat of explosion hazards. Magnitude of pressure developed may range around 7x10S
N I m 2 and ordinary buildings will not be able to withstand shock that will be produced from such
explosion. Such buildings shalf be fitted with explosion relief vents to prevent structural damage.
B 3.1.1 Most ordinary buildings will not be able to stand under a sustained internal pressure of 7x10s N/m2.
Consequently the vents snail be so designed as to operate at a pressure much below the pressure at which
the walls shall crumble down.
B 3.1.2 Pressures rises with an explosion within an enclosure, even when vents are open and unobstructed. As a
result any delay in opening venting devices further increase the pressure.
B 3.1.3 It is possible to isolate hazardous operations and equipment outside of buildings with a pressure resisting
wall which will reduce risk of structural damage. Such operations and equipment may be housed in a single
storey building having appropriate venting facilities ana a device to absorb explosion shock from blowing
through the duct back to tile building.
4-54
Appendices
B 3.1.4 Sometimes it may not be possible to house hazardous operations and equipment outside of the building, in
which case the separation from other parts and equipment shall be achieved by pressure resisting walls and
such units shall oe ventilated outdoors. If suitaole vents are integrated, external walls may be of heavy
construction or of heavy panel which may be blown off easily.
B 3.1.5 No hazardous equipment or operations shall be permitted to be located in the basement or partially
underground structure.
B 3.1.6 Explosion hazards usually are accompanied by fire. Fixed fire fighting equipment like automatic sprinklers,
if installed, shall be such that minimum damage is caused to it.
B 3.1.7 Maximum pressure in a vent structure decreases with increase in the size of vent but is independent of
rupture pressure of the diaphragm.
B 3.1.8 Unobstructed vent opening is the most effective pressure release vent structures.
B 3.1.9 Pressure reguired to rupture diaphragms of the vent areas and material varies directly with the thickness of
the material.
B 3.1.10 The extent of venting required directly varies with the degree of explosion hazard.
B 3.1.11 It has been established from experience that explosion from dusts, vapours and gases do not involve the
entire column of the enclosures, rather concentrates in the upper and lower part of fhe explosion range. As a
result such explosions are relatively weak compared to an optimum situation where tl\e concentration of
such matters spread all over the explosion range.
B 3.1.12 Unrestricted rectangular vents are equally effective as square vents of the same area.
B 3.1.13 The finer the dust particle size the more violent is the explosion for a given material. Due to very fast rise in
pressure it is difficult to effectively vent such materials as aluminium powder, hydrogen and acetylene.
Slow burning dust in confined space may cause much damage because oflong er duration of pressure. Some
dusts may even react with some inert gases such as nitrogen and carbon dioXIde and ignite.
B 3.2 Explosion relief vents may be provided with open or unobstructed vents, louvers, open roof vents, hanger
type doors, building doors, wmdows, roof or wall panels or marble/fixed sash. Any or more than one of
these may be adopted depending on individual situations and requirements as decided by the Authority.
B 3.2.1 Suction of external wind pressure shall be taken into consideration while designing and type of vents since
wind pressure may reach up to 2 x lOS N I m2 in severe wind storms.
B 3.2.2 Selection of exl'losion relief vent for any occupancy shall be based on two considerations, safety to lives of
inmates and rmnimum damage to property.
B 3.2.3 When large hanger type doors or metal curtain doors in sidewalls are used as vents it has to be ensured that
they are open during operation of the related machinery or equipment.
B 3.2.4 Roof vents covered with weather hoods shall be as light as possible and attached lightly, so that it is easily
blown off as and when an explosion occurs.
B3.2.5 Doors and windows used as explosion vents shall be so fixed as to open outward. Doors shall be fitted with
friction, spring or magnetic, latcbes that function automatically at the slight increase in internal pressure.
B 3.2.6 Placed at the top or bottom, the hinged or projected movable sash shall be equipped with latch or friction
device to prevent accidental opening due to wind action or intrusion. Such latches or locks shall be well
maintained. ·
·
.
B 3.2.7 Fixed sash shall be set with light anchorage in the wall or when the anchorage is tight shall be fitted with
plastic glazing in plastic putty. ··
B3.2.8 In worst scenario or case where a whole building or an entire room is involved, it may be desirable to have
the entire structure constructed with light wall and roof to collapse and thus prevent the worst effect of
explosion.
B3.4 Area requirement depend ordinarily on the expected maximum intensity or an explosion, the strength of the
structure, the type ofvent closure and other factors.
83.4.1 Venting shall be so planned as to prevent injury to inmates and damage to enclosure. In populated locations,
substantial ducts or diverts shall oe provided to channelize the blast towards a pre-determined direction.
B 3.4.2 When ducts are used, they shall be of such strength as to withstand the maximum expected explosion
pressure.

Part 4
Fire Protection
B 3.4.3 If explosion are probable within the duct, they shall be equipped with diaphragm to rupture at
predetermined locations. The duct system shall not be physically connected to more than one collector.
B 3.4.4 In large structures the location of vents shall be relative to the point of explosion as it may be very difficult
to pinpoint location of explosion.
B 3.4.5 Light, hinged scrounge type panels shall be preferred over diaphragm type in slow explosion involving coal
dust, chlorinated solvents etc.
B 3.4.6 Particularly in case of rapid explosion hazard, vent blocking or obstruction shall be meticulously avoided.
B 3.4.7 Counter weights inducing inertia to vents shall be avoided.
B 3.4.8 Venting devices actuated by detonators shall open at as low pressure as possible and shall be of light
construction, so that full opening can be quickly achieved.
83.4.9 Vents shall be so sized and designed as to prevent rupture of the protected device.
83.4.10 Skylight with moveable sash that opens outward or fixed sash having panes of glass or plastic that blow out
readily under pressure from withm can be used to supplement wall vents or windows, provided their
resistance to opening or displacement may be kept as low as possible consistent with structural requirement
of the building.
B 3.4.11 Flexible plastic sheets in slotted frames may be used for vent closure in such manner as to budge and be
relieved off the frame when subject pressure from within.
B 3.4.12 This transparent or translucent plastic sheets that crack or rupture under less pressure than single strength
glass are preferred materials for vent closure or window sash.
·
B 3.4.13 For equivalent explosion pressure release, larger closed vents will be required compared to open vents.
B 3.4.14 More generous venting shall be provided for small enclosures like that of a machine or equipment room
based on the following considerations:
Vent opening per unit Types of volumes of Examples Remarks

Volume of enclosure enclosures
a) 100 cml/0.3 to 0.9m� Small enclosures of less Machines and ovens of
than 30m3 light construction
b) 100 cmlf0.9m� Small enclosures More sturdy construe-
tion having reasonably
high bursting pressure
c) lOOm:.?./0.9 to 1.5m� Fairl;y: large enclosure 30 to Bi n s , Sil o s , Rooms Im ortant to try
g
700m3 Storage tanks an predict point
of ongin of explo-
sion in relation to
vent location.
d) i) 100 cmL/2.25 m" Large rooms or buildings Small traction ot s ace ot
t
over 700m3 Enclosure with the lar e enc osure
\
heavy reinforce concrete, occupied y hazardous
walls equipment/ machinery
ii) 1000 cm2/1.65 to Light reinforced concrete
2.25 m3 bnck or wood construction
iii) 1000 cm2/1.5 to Light weight construction,
1.65 m3 pre fabricated panels
B 3.4.15 As far as possible hazardous areas shall be segregated be means of fire walls or party walls to prevent
spread of fire.
B 3.4.16 Use of tile or such other light construction materials shall not be permitted in hazardous locations because of
its potential to cause injunes to inmates in case of explosion.
4-56
Appendices
AppendixC
Detailed Guidelines for Selection and Siting of Fire Detection System
Cl GENERAL
This appendix provides a guideline for selection and siting �f equipment for fire detection in buildings.
C2 CHOICE OF FIRE DETECTORS
Fire detectors may respond to any one manifestations of combustions such as heat generation, smoke and
flames. No single detector is able to meet the need of all types of fires and all types of occupancies. As such,
based on needs arising out of various situations and occupancies, judicious selection is extremely important
for the reduction of fire hazards.
C 2.1 Heat Detectors

"Point" or "Spot" type detectors are actuated by heat at layer adjacent to it over a limited area. "Line" type
detectors are sens1bve to the effect l'roduced by heated gas along any portion of the detector line. Both'the
types operate on two broad principles: one, the heat sensitive elements is actuated by temperature rising
beyond a predetermined level; while the second system is actuated by predetermined rate of rise of
temperature.
C 2.2 Smoke Detectors

Three types of smoke detectors are commonly used. First type is actuated by absorrtion or scattering of
visible or near-visible light by combustion product and known as "optical detector . The second type is
actuated by the production on ionization current within the detector and referred to as "ionization detector".
The third type is sensitive to carbon monoxide or other products of combustion and is known as "chemically
sensitive detector".
C 2.3 Flame Detectors

Flame detectors are sensitive to radiation emitted by flames.
C3 APPLICATION
Since both heat, smoke and flame are produced during a fire, detectors responding to all these are accepted
as general purpose detectors.
C 3.1 Fixed temperature heat detectors are suitable for use where ambient temperatures are high and or may rise
and fall rapidly over a short period.
C 3.2 Rate of Rise Heat Detectors

These are suitable for use where ambient temperatures are low and/or may rise over a wide range slowly.
Abnormally sharp rise in temperature during a fire actuates this alarm. As such it cannot be used with
confidence where ambient temperatures reaches in the neighborhood of 40°C, but are best used where
ambient temperatures are in the range of about 40°C.
C 3.3 Smoke Detectors

In general, these should be used at places where ambient temperature varies between 0° to 35°C.
C 3.4 · Optical Smoke Detectors

Invisible smoke from a clear burning shall not actuate the such detectors. But they respond quickly where
smoke is optically dense and as such suitable for use in dust free clean atmosphere. Over a period of time,
due to dust and dirt, the sensitive surface of photo sensitive element and/or executor lamp of optical
detectors may loose its efficiency and as such optical detectors should be cleaned and maintained regularly.
C 3.5 Ionization Chamber Smoke Detector

These respond: quickly to invisible smoke of clear burning, but may not respond to fire producing dense
smoke. These can be used in dust free, humidity controlled area. Smoke and other fumes, dust including
slow accumulated and disturbed aerial dust, fibre, steam and condensation produced by normal processes
and vehicle engines may: cause false alarm. Warehouses exposed to fast air flows can also cause false alarm.
Burning of pofyvinyl chloride will not sensitize the detector in time and may provide late warning or no
warning at all.
C 3.6 Chemically Sensitive Smoke Detectors

Chemically coated sensitive elements react to carbon monoxide or other products of combustion present in
smoke. Dust or moisture adversely affects the sensitive elements and are not very suitable for residential
use.
C 3.7 Smoke detectors are not naturally suitable in places where the production process produces smokes. Other
suitable types need to be used.

Part 4
Fire Protection
c3 8
. Application of flame detectors are restricted due to the fact that all combustions do not necessarily
accompany flame and that clear line of sight is desirable as radiation from flames travel in straight lines for
actuation of sensitive element. As supplement to heat and smoke detectors, flame detectors may be used.
C4 SITING OF DETECTORS
c 4.1 Every portion of building should be covered and all effectively enclosed spaces should be considered
separately based on the limits of spacing for types of detectors concerned.
C4.2 Rooms divided into sections by walls, partitions or storage racks, as in libraries and archives, arching up to
300 rnrn to the ceiling or goods stacked in defined areas shall have detectors for each section of passageway.
c4.3 Hoist, elevators and similar openings, windows, doors, ventilators and inlet ducts of an air-conditioning
system shall be covered by detector within1.5 m at the top for every2 m of their width or part thereof.
c 4.4 Detectors shall be installed at the centre of each inlet to the return duct of an air-conditioning system.
Detectors shall be installed 2m apart if the inlet is continuous or oblong.
C4.5 Staircases shall be covered by detectors on each floor, and all lantern lights shall be covered by detectors.
c4.6 Spacing of detectors shall be reduced up to 75 per cent from the standard spacing in case of ceilings with
waffle having depth between 200 and 500 mm and up to 50 per cent with depths above 500 rnrn Where .
detectors are installed in the ridges of the waffle, each waffle shall be treated as an independent
compartment.
c 4.7 Ceiling intersected by beams more than 250 mm in depth, each bay shall be considered as separate
compartment and detectors shall be installed considering each bay an independent compartment.
cs HEIGHT CONSIDERATION
Coverage rovided by the sensitive detectors fall sharply as the height above floor level increases, generally,
y
where roo height exceeds 9 m, heat sensitive detectors become ineffective.
C6 SITING OF THE SENSITIVE DETECTORS (POINT OR SPOT TYPE)
C6.1 Distance from Ceiling

When positioned, heat sensitive elements shall be placed between 25 and 150 mm from the ceiling or
underside of roof.
C6.2 Spacing of Detectors

Depends on probable hazards in relation to occupancy and shall have to be approved by the fire authority.
C6.3 When ceiling are crossed by beams, girders or other structural elements of250 rnrn or more in depth to form
compartments, detectors shall be placed in each compartment.
C6.4 Single Truss and North Light Roofs

One row of detectors shall be sited along the apex of each roof or bay. Sf>ace of this row of detectors and
other detectors headed to cover the area shall be determined from the designed requirement and approved
by the authority.
c6.5 Floor Opening

At least one detector shall be suitably positioned within1 5
. m of hoists, elevators, stairways, wall holes and
similar openings to the floor above.
C6.6 Lantern Lights

Fixed temperature type detectors shall be used in lantern which shall be protected from direct sun light as
the combination of solar and internal heating cause rapid temperature variation.
C6.7 Heated Areas within Building

Only fixed temperature type detectors shall be used in areas like kitchen, boiler room, furnace, room etc.
where sudden temperature rise may take place. If ambient temperature is likely to exceed 40°C, detector's
nominal operating temperature may need to be increased. However the maximum operating temperature
setting should not exceed117°C.
C6.8 Vibration and Rapid Temperature Change

Detectors covering hoist apertures may be subject to vibration and may experience rapid temperature
change and thus shall be fitted with fixed temperature fusible alloy fuses.
4-58
Appendices
C7 SITING OF HEAT SENSITIVE DETECTORS (LINE TYPE)
The same principle as those applicable for point detectors may be followed for line type heat sensitive
detectors.
C8 SITING OF SMOKE SENSITIVE DETECTORS
C 8.1 Once on fire, a building accumulates the greatest concentration of visible and invisible smoke at the highest
points of enclosed areas. Smoke detectors are usually sited here. The detectors shall be as mounted as to
place the sensing elements between 25 and 100 mm from the underside of roof.
C 8.2 Area coverage by individual detectors are same as that of heat detectors but the maximum distance between
two detectors may be 20 per cent more than that recommended for heat detectors. Actual spacing depends
on airflow pattern in protected area.
C 8.3 Area coverage of smoke detectors is dependent on many factors. The following aspects shall be taken into
considerations in the design of detectors.
a) When a big room or space to be protected is divided into section by walls, partition or storage racks
including book stacks in libranes and archives, each section or passageway shall be protected
separately. Additional rows of detectors shall be provided at the rate of one per 2 metre or part thereof.
Tne detectors being not more than 3m apart in each row, shall be staggered.
b) Any area of a building provided with mechanical ventilation system results in more than 10 air changes
per hours, which causes dilution of smoke and a definite air flow }'attern is established. In such cases
ventilation inlet and exhaust openings shall be covered by additional detectors.
c) Additional detectors may become necessary to cover smaller extract ducts, windows, ventilations and
other openings. In rooms with high rate of air change, additional detectors may be necessary to cope
with air flow pattern and dilution of combustion product.
d) Detectors shall be installed within 1.5 m of duct to monitor inlet duct.
e) Detector shall be installed in the centre of inlet of return air duct. Where place above the false ceiling is
used as return air duct, the opening to return air shall have a detector every 2 m or part thereof of its
length within 250 mm of the opening.
f) In most buildin�s mechanical ventilation do not run continuously. The detectors shall, thus, be so sited
as to detect fire Irrespective of mechanical ventilators are in operation or not.
g) Warm air naturally concentrates under ceiling and in the apex of pitched roofs. Sometimes this warm
air creates what is known as heat barrier acting as an effective barrier to the products of combustion.
This results in small fire producing little or no appreciable change in ambulant environment. The
combustion products from such a fire will spread out below the heat barrier in the same way as they do
beneath the ceiling or an apex of a pitched roof. Siting of detectors should be arranged to take this into
account.
h) Factors capable of establishing temporary or permanent effects on detector's siting shall be borne in
mind while designing the system ana include the following:
i) Various forms of overhead heating

ii) Exhaust air from air cooling equipment blowing out into the room or factory area
iii) Deep beams
iv) Roofs and ceiling of unusual shape
v) Building with ground areas above 10 m and up to 30 rn in height
vi) Staircases
vii) Canteen and Restaurants
viii) Plant Rooms
ix) Ambulant air currents

Part 4
Fire Protection
Appendix D
Special Requirements of Buildings more than 20 Metre High
01 GENERAL
This appendix specifies the special requirements for the fire protection in buildings more than 20 m in
height.
02 CONSTRUCTION
D 2.1 Construction of all load bearing components like stairways, corridors and facades shall be of
noncombustible materials.
Internal staircase walls shall be made of bricks or reinforced concrete with a minimum of 2 hour fire rating.
The crown and landings of a staircase shall be ventilated to atmosphere with 0.5 m2 openings in the external
walls and crown. Because of difficult location or other compelling reasons, if it oecomes impossible to
ventilate the staircase, a positive pressure of 50 pa shall be maintained inside the staircase by any approved
means. Pressure sensitive Automatic Fire Alarm System shall be installed in the staircase. Stair roof snail be
1 m above the surrounding roof level. Use of glazmg or fire bricks in the stair shall not be permitted.
02.4 Materials used for inner finish shall be restricted to Class I rating of flame spreadability.
03 LIFTS
Lifts installed in tall buildings shall comply with the following requirements over and above those listed
under Chapter 5, Part 8.
03.1 Walls enclosing the lift core shall have a fire resistance rating of 2 hours. Lift shaft shall have a top vent area
of not less than 0.2 m2.
03.2 The room containing the motor o erating the lift shall preferably be placed at the roof of the lift core and
r
shall be separated from the rest o the lift core by a floor wall having same fire rating as that of the lift core
walls.
03.3 ·Landing doors in lift core shall have at least half an hour fire resistance rating.
0 3.4 Not more than 4 independent lifts can be assembled together in one liftbank core and the core walls of
individual lifts shall have a fire resistance rating of at least 2 hour.
03.5 Lift car doors shall have a fire resistance rating of at least 1 hour.
03.6 For lift in tall buildings above 20m in height, collapsible gates shall not be permitted. Instead solid doors of
fire resistance rating equal to that of Sec A 3.5 shall be installed.
03.7 When lifts are located in a central core location of building, exits from lift lobby shall be through a self
closing smoke door of half an hour fire resistance.
03.8 Lifts shall not normally serve the basement.
03.9 Grounding switch of the lifts hall be provided at ground floor level so that fire personnel can bring the lifts
to ground level at the time of emergency.
03.10 Telephone or other voice communications facilities may be provided in lifts installed in buildings of 26m or
more in height. The communication system, in such cases shall be connected to ground command station.
03.11 Appropriate slope in floor shall be provided to avoid water entering the lift shaft during fire fighting.
0 3.12 Suitable signs shall be erected and maintained at appropriate positions on all floors of a highrise building
showing the floor plan and exit stairways. Cautions regarding use of lifts during a fire shall be inscribed in
the signs.
04 FIRE LIFTS
04.1 One or more lifts shall be exclusively designed and maintained for the use of firemen is case of emergency.
The lifts shall be so designed and maintained as to be able to reach upper floors and are directly accessible to
every dwelling or lettable floor space on each floor by fire personnel.
04.2 The lift or lifts shall have a load carrying capacity of 545 kg (8 persons) with a minimum floor area of 1.4 m2
and auto close doors.
4-60
Appendices
D4.3 Power supply of the fire lift shall be separated from the main source supplying the building.
D 4.4 In case of power failure from normal supply, it shall be so designed as to trip automatically to alternate
supply of power. In tall apartment complexes such tripover coulo be accomphshed by manually operated
changeover switch. Other alternative could be an electric wiring which shall be so designed as to bring the
lift car to ground level with door open in case of power failure.
D4.5 Fire lifts shall be operated on a two-button switch system. Two button switch is laced adjacent to the lift at
f
floor level and kept in a glass covered box. When the switch is on landing cal points become inoperative
and the lift is controlled from the car. When the switch is off the lift returns back to normal operation and
can be used by occupants at normal times.
D4.6 On landing doors at each floor, the sign "FIRE LIFT" shall be painted conspicuously in such sizes as to be
easily noticeable by occupants or users of the lift.
D4.7 Irrespective of height lift speed shall be such as to reach the top floor from ground level in 1 minute.
DS SERVICE DUCTS
If there is any service duct, they shall comply with the following provisions.
D5.1 Services ducts, if any, shall be enclosed by a 2 hour rated fire walls and doors. Ducts having area more than
1 m2 shall be closed at each floor level except the passage of pipes etc. across the floors. The passage gaps of
pipes, cables etc. shall be suitably sealed.
D 5.2 A vent opening at the crown of the service shaft shall be provided with an opening, the size of which shall
be between 25 and 50 per cent of the duct area.
D 5.3 Air-conditioning or other service shafts shall be located as far away as possible from the exits of a building.
D6 REFUSE CHUTES
Refuse chutes shall be enclosed by wall of fire resistance rating of at least2 hours and shall extend at least 1
m above roof level and shall be open to atmosphere. Chutes in no case shall be located within the staircase
enclosure. Inspection panels and doors to refuse chutes shall be at least1 hours fire resistance rating.
D7 REFUSE AREA
Except multi-family dwelling, all other buildings shall incorporate provision of refuge area on the external
walls as cantilever projection or any other suitable manner. Refuge area shall not be less than 15 m2 at the
heights mentioned below:
a) Floors between 20 and 26m One refuge area on the floor immediately above 20 m.
b) Floors above 26m One refuge area on the floor immediately above 26m and then
one refuge area per five floor above26m.
D8 BASEMENTS
D8.1 Each basement shall be independently ventilated. Venting shall be achieved by grills, breakable stall board
lights or pavement lights or by way of shafts of aggregates having cross-sectional area of not less than 2 .5
per cent of floor area spread evenly around the perimeter of the basement. Alternatively air flow inlet at
floor level and smoke outlet at ceiling level may be provided. Inlets and extracts may be terminated at
ground level with stall boards and pavement light, but ducts for conveyance of fresh air to floor shall have
to be laid. Stall boards and pavement lights shall be so positioned as to be easily accessible by fire brigade
personnel.
D 8.2 Basement staircase shall be encased and placed near the outer edge of the basement with materials of
2 hours fire resistance. The stair shall be entered at the ground level from open air so that the smoke from a
fire in the basement shall not obstruct any exit serving the ground and upper floors. Communication with
the basement in case of emergency shall be maintained through a lobby provided with a fire resisting self
closing door of 1 hour fire resistance. Additional staircases shall be provided at appropriate locations if
travel distance exceeds 20 m.
D8.3 Single intake duct may serve all the floors of a multi-storey basement, but separate smoke outlet duct or
ducts shall be provided for each basement or basement compartment.
D 8.4 For lower basement floors, mechanical extractors for smoke venting shall be provided. The system shall
operate automatically by heat sensitive elements or sprinklers. Devices with manual operation may also be
installed. The following features shall also be considered.

Part 4
Fire Protection
a) Ventilating ducts shall be constructed with the brick masonry or cement concrete work as far as
possible. Fire dampers shall be provided when these ducts cross the transformer or electrical switch
board areas.
b) Kitchen using gas, departmental stores and shops shall not be allowed to operate in basement or sub
basement.
c) Openable windows on external walls shall be fitted with such locks which can be opened by fire man
axe.
d) Floor area exceeding 750 m2 shall be compartmented by fire separation walls having 2 hours fire rating.
Floor areas provided with sprinklers may be increased by 50 per cent. In long buildings distance
between fire walls shall not exceed 40 m.
D9 BUILDING SERVICES
Building services in tall buildings shall comply with the following provisions.
D 9.1 Air-conditioning shall conform to the following:

a) Escape passageways like staircases, common corridors, lift lobbies shall not be used as return air
passage.
b) Gauge metal of thickness and quality approved by the authority shall only be used inducting.
c) Openings exerted by the passage of ducts across fire walls or floors shall be properly sealed with fire
resisting materials like vermicufite concrete or asbestos fibre materials.
d) Duct insulation (inside and outside) materials shall be of noncombustible nature (such as glasswool)
which shall not be wrapped or secured around the duct by any material of combustible nature.
e) Metallic ducts shall be used as far as possible instead of using the space above false ceiling as return air
passage.
f) Individual floor areas more than 750m2 shall be partitioned for isolation by fire walls and automatic fire
dampers.
g) Air ducts serving main floor areas and corridors shall not pass through the staircase enclosure.
h) Air handling units and ducts shall be independent for each floor and there shall be no interconnection
of ducts between floors.
i) In case of air handling units serving more than one floor, the system shall comply with the following
provisions, in addition to the conditions m�ntioned above. .
1. Individual floors shall be isolated from the main riser by incorporating automatic fire dampers
working on fusible link.
2. Respective air handling units of air-conditioning system shall automatically be switched off as soon
as the automatic fire alarm become active.
j) Treated fresh air conveyance through the vertical shaft shall be of masonry construction.
k) Ceiling and its fixtures shall be of noncombustible materials when these will be used as return air
passage.
I) The air filters of the air handling units shall be of noncombustible materials.
m) Air handling equipment room shall not store any combustible material.
n) To have access to main fire dampers and for cleaning the duct of accumulated dusts, the main air duct
trunk shall be fitted with appropriate inspection panels of tight fitting nature.
D 9.2 Fire Dampers
Fire dampers shall be located in the line of air-condition ducts and return air ducts or passage in the
following places:
a) At the fire separation wall,

b) Where ducts or passages entre the central vertical shaft,
c) Where the ducts pass through floors, and
d) At the inlet of supply air ducts and the return air duct of each compartment in every floor.
4-62
Appendices
D 9.2.1 Auto-o eration dampers shall come into operation when air handling fans shall switch off. Devices with
F
manua operations shall also be made available. Blowers using extraction and dust accumulation system
shall be provided with dampers.
D 9.2.2 For smoke extraction, smoke dampers shall be installed in building of 26 m or more in height. In aeartment
houses, non-ventilated lobbies and corridors shall be covered by smoke dampers operated by fusible link
and also manual control. In other buildings operation of dampers shall be manual in nature.
D 9.2.3 Operated by fusible link, automatic fire dampers shall be so arranged as to be closed by gravity in the
direction of air movement and shall remain tigntly closed.
D 10 GAS SUPPLY
D 10.1 Gas sup (> lY in tall buildings shall be from city gas main or L.P gas and shall conform to the provisions
detailed m Chapter 8, Part 8.
D10.2 Gas pipe lines shall run in exclusive shafts on external walls and shall be away from staircase. These shafts,
shalf be exclusive for each floor. L.P. gas distribution pipes in shortest possible run shall always be below
false ceiling. Entire cooking range area in the kitchen shall be covered by an exhaust system of 50 mm2 I
per m2 of hood projected area. The hood shall be fitted with metallic grease filter to trap oil vapour of the
fume.
D 10.3 Power line wirins in the fume hood shall be in fibre glass insulation. Kitchens for hotels, hospitals or such
other places in high rise buildings shall have heat detectors fixed in fume hood which will automatically
cutoff LP gas and trip off exhaust fan in case of fire. Actuation of the devices shall be by 24v or lOOv DC
with external rectifier.
D11 BOILER LOCATION AND BOILER ROOMS
The following provisions shall be complied with for location and housing of boilers.
D 11.1 Boilers shall be allowed to be installed in basement away from escape route but shall not be allowed in sub
basement.
D 11.2 Boiler room shall be situated on the periphery of the basement and shall have a 4 hour fire resistance wall.
Floor shall be sloped to a catch pit.
D 11.3 For fresh air supply to the boiler room, it shall be fitted with air inlets and smoke exhaust system directly
open to the atmosphere.
D 11.4 Entry to boiler room shall be through a 2 hour fire resistance composite door.
D 11.5 Furnace oil for boiler, if stored in oil tank in an adjacent room, shall be separated by a 4 hour fire resistance
wall. Entrance to this room shall be controlled by double composite doors. To prevent spread of accidental
spillage of furnace oil, a suitable curb shall be erected at the entrance door openmg.
D 11.6 For the convenience of Fire Department personnel to work with foam from outside the building, suitable
foam inlet facilities shall be in built on the external wall.
D 12 STAIRCASE AND CORRIDOR LIGHTS
Staircase and corridor lights shall comply with the following provisions.
D 12.1 The staircase and corridor lighting shall be connected to a separate independent circuit so that at times of
emergency the fire fighting personnel can operate the same from an easily accessible location on the ground
floor disregarding indivicfual control of light points. The circuit shall be equipped .with a miniature circuit
breaker type of switch.
D 12.2 To avoid connection to two sources of supply at the same time, lighting installed in the staircase and
corridor shall be suitably mounted on a double throw switch. To terminate standby supply, double throw
switch shall be installed in the service room.
D12.3 Staircase and corridor lighting shall also be connected with an alternate supply.
D 12.4 Staircase and corridors shall be provided with emergency lights.

Part 4
Fire Protection
D13 ELECTRICAL SERVICES
Electrical Serv ices shall confirm to the following provisions.

D 13.1 The electric distribution cables and wiring shall run through separate ducts. The duct shall be sealed with
noncombustible materials at ev ery floor lev el hav ing the same fire resistance rating of that of the duct. Low
and medium v oltage wiring runru ng in shafts and false ceiling shall run in separate conduits.
D 13.2 The duct carrying the electric cable shall not contain any other serv ices like water mains, telephone lines,
intercom lines, gas pipes etc.
D 13.3 Electric power supply to water pumps, lifts, staircases, corridor lighting and blowers to keep pressure
system running snail directly be prov ided through main switch gear panel. Power lines shalf be laid in
separate conduit pipes, so that fire in one circuit will not affect the others. Master switch circuit elements
shall be clearly laoeied.
D13.4 Openings and inspection panel doors in the shaft shall be fitted with air-tight fire doors hav ing fire rating of
at least 2 hours.
D 13.5 Medium and low v oltage power lines in the shaft and within false ceiling shall run within metal conduits.
220 v wiring for lighting and other serv ices abov e false ceiling shall hav e a 66 0 v grade insulation. The false
ceiling and all the materials and fixtures used its suspension shall be of noncombustible materials.
D 136
. Electricity supply from the public authority and alternate supply cables shall lead to an independent well
v entilated room on the ground floor for the purpose of termmation for ev entual distribution into the
building. The door fitted in the serv ice room shall be at least 2 hours fire resistance rated.
D13.7 If the power authority agrees to install meters on upper floors, the authority and consumer cable lines shall
be segregated by a partition in the duct. Meter rooms on upper floors shall not open on staircase and shall be
directly v entilated to open air outside.
D14 STANDBY GENERATOR
The standby generator shall comply with the following.
D 14.1 A standby electric generator shall be installed to supply power for staircase and corridor lighting, fire lifts,
standby fire pumr, pressurization fans and blowers, smoke extraction and damper systems in case of failure
of normal electricity supply.
D 14. 2 The generator shall be capable of taking starting currents of all the machines and circuits stated abov e
simultaneously.
D 14.3 When the standby pump is connected to diesel engine for supply of power, the pump may be withdrawn
from standby generator supply.
D 144
. For emergency, if supply is av ailable from a separate sub-station with appropriate transformer, the
prov ision of generator may be waiv ed with the approv al of power authority.
D15 TRANSFORMER
Transformers shall conform to the following prov isions.
D 15.1 Without proper oil drainage arrangement, a sub-station or a switch station along with accompanying
machines hav ing more than 2000 litres oil shall not be located in the basement of the building in normal
circumstances. Transformers, when housed below ground lev el, shall be housed in the first basement in a
separate 4 hour rated room located on the periphery of the basement floor. The entrance to this room shall
hav e a fire resisting door of 2 hour fire rating. To prevent spread of accidental spillage of oil, a suitable curb
shall be erected at the door opening. Direct access preferably from outside shall be prov ided to the
transformer room. Switch gears and transformer bays shall be separately housed with a 4 hour fire rated
wall in between.
D 152
. When housed in basement, transformer rooms shall be equipped with automatic high v elocity water spray
system.
D15.3 When a transformer is housed in complete segregation by a 4 hour fire rated wall all around and has direct
access from outside, the transformer room may be protected by C02 (carbon dioxide), BCF (Bromo-
chlorodifuoromethane) or BTM (Bromo-triflouromethane) fixed system.
D 15.4 When the transformer is on the ground level, the room shall be completely segregated from rest of the
premises by 4 hour fire rated walls all around. ·
4-64
Appendices
D15.5 Oil filled transformers shall not be housed above ground level.
D 15.6 Where aggregate oil capacities of all machines do not exceed 200 litre, they shall be provided with a catch
pit. When the aggregate capacity exceeds 200 litre, an RCC tank capable of holding tne entire need shall be
provided at lower level to collect the oil from catch pit in case of emergency. The connection between catch
pit and tank shall be of noncombustible construction and provided witli a flame arrester.
D16 FIRST AID FIRE FIGHTING APPLIANCES
First aid fire fighting appliances shall be provided on all floors, basements, lift room etc. as required by the
authority. Location and distributions of fire fighting appliances shall also be as required by the authority.
D17 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Fire alarm system shall comply with the following provisions.
D17.1 All buildings with a height of more than 20 m shall be equipped with manually operated electrical fire alarm
system ana automatic fire alarm system. Offices and apartment buildings between 20 and 26 m in height,
however, may be exempted from mstalling automatic fire alarm system, if they do not pose threat towards
safety of adjacent buildmgs and inmates ofthe buildings itself are safe in the opinion of the authority.
D17.2 Manually operated electrical alarm system shall be installed in a building with single or multiple call boxes
located on each floor and shall conform to:
a) location of call boxes shall be decided after careful review of the floor plan so that all the occupant can
approach to any one of the call box without having traveled more than 22.5 m
b) Usually call boxes shall be of the type having no moving parts, but in case they have, they are to be
approved by the authority to ensure timely function. Usual boxes shall be "break glass" type and the act
oF breaking the glass shall constitute fire alarm transmission to the command station.
c) All call boxes shall be wired in a closed circuit to a control panel in the command station which clearly
indicates the origin or location of the alarm. The circuit shall be eguipped with a rechargeable battery
with capacity for full normal working load fnr 2 days. The circuit may be connected to an alternate
source of supply.
d) The call boxes shall be installed 1 m above the floor on the corridor or passage so that they are easily
visible, yet do not obstruct the safe means of egress at times of emergency.
e) The call boxes are installed to actuate single or multiple sounders so that all inmates can hear the alarm.
D18 COMMAND STATION
All buildings above 26m in height shall have a command station on the entrance lobby with suitable public
address system having communication to all floors as well as facilities to receive messages from all floors.
The command station shall be equipped with detailed floor plans along with clearly demarcated locations
of fire detection and fighting devices and through the panel board able to detect fire alarm from anY. floor.
The command station shall be manned with properly trained personnel having responsibility of
maintenance and operating fire fighting facilities Within the building.
D19 CARETAKER/FIRE OFFICER
All residential, business, hotels, and other buildings having height more than 53 m shall keep standby one
trained fire officer round the clock. He shall be responsible for:
a) Maintaining fire fighting equipment in good working condition all the time.
b) Layout fire orders and operational plans.
c) Impart training to inmates of the building in handling available equipment and keep them informed of
fire crisis and evacuation plan.
d) Keep contact with local fire authority.
D 20 HOUSE KEEPING
To reduce or minimize fire hazard, good house keeping within and outside shall be strictly ma.ntained by
the occupants and owner of the building.

Part 4
Fire Protection
D 21 FIRE DRILLS
Fire notices or orders shall be prepared in fulfilment of the requirements for fire fighting and evacuation in
case of fire or other emergency. Such notices and orders shall tie so displayed as to make the occupants well
conversant with needed action in the event of emergency. Details of fire drill are specified � Appendix A.
4-66
Part 5
BUILDING MATERIALS
Clhla!JP>ter. n
Clhia!Jp>ierr 2
Materials
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARTS BUILDING MATERIALS
Chapter 1 Scope and Definitions
1.1 SCOPE 5-1

1.2 TERMINOLOGY 5-1
Chapter 2 Materials
2.1 GENERAL 5-3
2.1.1 New or Alternative Materials 5-3
2.1.2 Used Materials 5-3
2.1.3 Storage of Materials 5-3
2.1.4 Methods of Test 5-3
2.2 MASONRY 5-4
2.2.1 Aggregates 5-4
2.2.2 Cement 5-4
2.2.3 Lime 5-4
2.2.4 Masonry Units 5-4
2.2.5 Mortar 5-5
2.2.6 Grout 5-5
2.2.7 Mortar for Ceramic Wall and Floor Tile 5-5
2.2.8 Metal Ties and Anchors 5-5
2.2.9 Reinforcement 5-5
2.2.10 Water 5-5
2.2.11 Applicable Standards for Masonry 5-5
2.3 STEEL 5-6
2.3.1 Reinforcing Steel 5-6
2.3.2 Structural Steel 5-7
2.3.3 Steel Plate, Sheet and Strips 5-8
2.3.4 Steel Pipe, Tube and Fittings 5-10
2.3.5 Steel Bars, Wire and Wire Rods 5-11
2.3.6 Steel Fasteners 5-12
2.3.7 Welding Electrodes and Wires 5-13
2.4 CEMENT AND CONCRETE 5-14
2.4.1 General 5-14
2.4.3 Cement 5-14
2.4.4 Water 5-14
2.4.5 Admixtures 5-14
2.4.6 Metal Reinforcement 5-15
2.4.7 Applicable Standards 5-16
5-i
2.4.8 Concrete Pipe and Precast Sections 5-17
2.4.9 Asbestos Cement Products 5-17
2.5 BUILDING LIMES 5-18
2.6 GYPSUM BUILDING MATERIALS AND PLASTER 5-18
2.7 FLOORING MATERIALS 5-19
2.7.1 General 5-19
2.7.2 Concrete/Terrazo Tiles 5-19
2.7.3 Asphalt Tiles/Flooring 5-19
2.7.4 Mosaic Tiles 5-19
2.7.5 Clay Tiles 5-19
2.7.6 Vinyl Tiles 5-19
2.7.7 Rubber Tiles 5-19
2.7.8 Cast in Situ Floor Coverings 5-19
2.7.9 Other Flooring Materials 5-19
2.8 TIMBER 5-20
2.9 WOOD PRODUCTS 5-20
2.9.1 Plywood 5-20
2.9.2 Particle Boards and Fibre Boards 5-20
2.9.3 Wood based Laminates 5-21
2.9.4 Adhesives and Glue 5-21
2.10 DOORS AND WINDOWS 5-21
2.10.1 Wooden Doors and Window Frames, and Shutters 5-21
2.10.2 Metal Door and Window Frames and Shutters 5-22
2.11 ALUMINIUM AND ALUMINIUM ALLOYS 5-22
2.12 BUILDERS HARDWARE 5-23
2.13 ROOF COVERING 5-24
2.13.1 Scope 5-24
2.13.2 Compatibility of Materials 5-25
2.13.3 Material Specifications and Physical Characteristics 5-25
2.13.4 Weather Protection 5-25
2.13.5 Wind Resistance 5-25
2.13.6 Structural and Construction Loads 5-25
2.13.7 Impact Resistance 5-25
2.13.8 Metal-sheet Roof Coverings 5-25
2.13.9 Asbestos Sheet Roof Covering 5-25
2.13.10 Interlocking Clay or Cement Tile 5-25
2.13.11 Non-interlocking Clay or Cement Tile 5-25
2.13.12 Roof Insulation 5-25
2.13.13 Recovering and Replacement of Roof Coverings 5-25
2.13.14 Reuse of Materials 5-25
2.13.15 Applicable Standards 5-26
2.14 PAINTS AND VARNISHES 5-27
2.14.1 Water Based Paints 5-27
2.14.2 Ready Mixed Paint and Enamels 5-28
2.14.3 Thinners and Solvents 5-28
2.14.4 Varnishes and Lacquers 5-29
5-ii
2.15 SANITARY APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS 5-29
2.15.1 Sanitary Appliances 5-29
2.15.2 Pipes and Pipe Fittings for Water 5-29
Supply and Sanitation
2.15.3 Joints and Connections Between Pipes and Fittings 5-32
2.15.4 Taps and Valves 5-33
2.16 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 5-33
2.16.1 Ferrocement 5-33
2.16.2 Plastics 5-33
2.16.3 Ballies and Wood Poles 5-35
2.16.4 Bamboos 5-35
2.16.5 Fillers, Stoppers and Putties 5-35
2.16.6 Wire Ropes and Wire Products 5-36
2.16.7 Water-proofing and Damp-proofing Materials 5-36
2.16.8 Glazed Tiles and Tile-setting Mortars 5-37
2.16.9 Refractories 5-39
2.16.10 Thermal Insulating Materials 5-40
2.16.11 Screw Threads and Rivets 5-42
2.16.12 Sealants 5-42
2.16.13 Joints and Jointing Products 5-43
2.16.14 Glass and Glazing 5-44
2.17 CGI SHEET ROOFING AND WALLING 5-44
5-iii
·CHAPTER l]
1.1 SCOPE
This part specifies the minimum requirements of materials to be complied with in buildings and works under
the provisions of the Code.
For each of the building materials the applicable standard specifications and test methods are listed. All
materials shall conform to these standards.
The list of standards given in this part of the Code would be augmented from time to time by amendments,
revisions and additions of which the Authority shall take cogni zance. The latest version of a specification
shall, as far as practicable, be applied in order to fulfil the requuements of this part.
In view of the limited number of Bangladesh Standards for buildin� materials available at the present time, a
number of standards of other countries have been referenced in this Code as applicable standards. As more
Bangladesh Standards regarding building materials become available, these after adoption by amendment of
the Code, shall supplement and/or replace the relevant standards listed in this part.
1.2 TERMINOLOGY
provided in this part shall govern for interpretation of the provisions of this part.
ACTUAL DIMENSIONS: Measured dimensions of a designated item.
ADMIXTURE: Material other than water, aggregate, or hydraulic cement used as an ingredient of concrete
and added to concrete before or during its mixmg to modifY its properties.
AGGREGATE, LIGHTWEIGHT: Aggregate with a dry, loose weight of 11.25 kN/m3.
Part 5 5-1
Building Materials
>art 5
Juilding Materials
AGGREGATE: Granular material, such as sand, gravel, crushed stone, crushed brick and iron blast-furnace
slag, when used with a cementing medium forms a hydraulic cement concrete or mortar.
CONCRETE: A mixture of Portland cement or any other hydraulic cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate
and water, with or without admixtures.
DEFORMED REINFORCEMENT: Deformed reinforcing bars, bar and rod mats, deformed wire, welded
smooth wire fabric and welded deformed wire fabric.
FIBREBOARD: A fibre-felted, homogenous panel made from lignocellulosic fibres (usually wood or cane) and
having a unit weight of less than 5 kN I m3 but more than 1.6 kN I m3. .
GROUTED HOLLOW-UNIT MASONRY: Form of grouted masonry construction in which certain designated
cells of hollow units are continuously filled with grout. .
HARDBOARD: A fibre-felted homogenous panel made from lignocellulosic fibres consolidated under heat and
pressure in a hot press to a density not less than 4.9 kNim3. :.
HOLLOW MASONRY UNIT: A masonry unit whose net cross-sectional area in every plane parallel to the
bearing surface is less than 75 per cent of the gross cross-sectional area in the same plane.
MASONRY UNIT: Brick, tile, stone, glass-block or concrete-block used in masonry constructions.
NOMINAL DIMENSIONS: Nominal dimensions of masonry units are equal to their specified dimensions plus
the thickness of the joint with which the unit is laid.
PARTICLE BOARD: A manufactured panel product consisting of particles of wood or combinations of wood
particles and wood fibres cemented together with synthetic resins or other suitable bonding system by an
appropriate bonding process.
PLAIN CONCRETE: Concrete that does not conform to the definition of reinforced concrete.
PLAIN REINFORCEMENT: Reinforcement that does not conform to definition of deformed reinforcement.
PLYWOOD: A built-up panel of laminated veneers
PRECAST CONCRETE: Plain or reinforced concrete element cast separately before they are fixed in position.
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE: Reinforced concrete in which internal stresses have been introduced to reduce
potential tensile stresses in concrete resulting from loads.
REINFORCED CONCRETE: Concrete containing adequate reinforcement, prestressed or non-prestressed, and

designed on the assumption that the two materials act together in resisting forces.
REINFORCED MASONRY: Form of masonry construction in which reinforcement acting in conjunction with
the masonry is used to resist designed forces.
REINFORCEMENT: Reinforcing bars, plain or deformed, excluding prestressing tendons, bar and rod mats,
welded smooth wire fabric and welded deformed wire fabric used in concrete.
SOLID MASONRY UNIT: A masonry unit whose net cross-sectional area in every plane parallel to the
bearing surface is 75 per cent or more of the gross cross-sectional area in the same plane.
SPIRAL REINFORCEMENT: Continuously wound reinforcement in the form of a cylindrical helix.
STIRRUP: Reinforcement used to resist shear and torsion stresses in structural member; typically bars, wires,
or welded wire fabric (smooth or deformed) bent into L, U or rectangular shapes and located perpendicular to
or at an angle to longitudinal reinforcement. (The term "Stirrup" is usually applied to lateral reinforcement in
flexural members and the term "ties" to those in compression members).
STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMINATED TIMBER: Any member comprising an assembly of laminations of

lumber in which the grain of all laminations is approximately paralfel longitudinally in which the
laminations are bonded with adhesives.
TENDON: Steel element such as wire, cable, bar, rod or strand, or a bundle of such elements, used to impart
prestress to concrete.
TIE: A loop of reinforcing bar or wire enclosing longitudinal reinforcement.
YIELD STRENGTH: The stress at which plastic deformation takes place under constant or reduced load.
5-2
CHAPTER�
Materials
2.1 GENERAL
Materials used for the construction of buildings shall conform to standard specifications listed in this part of
the Code. Any deviation from the type design or architectural detail from those specified in these standards
m � y be accepted by the Building Official as long as the materials standards specified therein are conformed
With.
2.1.1 New or Alternative Materials

The provisions of this part are not intended to prevent the use of any new and alternative materials. Any
such material may be approved provided it is shown to be satisfactory for the purpose intended and at least
the equivalent of that required m this part in quality, strength, effectiveness, fire resistiveness, durability,
safety, maintenance and compatibility.
Approval in writing shall be obtained by the owner or his agent before any new, alternative or equivalent
materials are used. The Building Official shall base such approval on the principle set forth in the previous
paragraph and shall require tnat specified tests be made (Sec 2.1.4) or sufficient evidence or proof be
submitted, at the expense of the owner or his agent, to substantiate any claim for the proposed material. (See
Part 2, Administration and Enforcement).
2.1.2 Used Materials

The provisions of this part do not preclude the use of used or reclaimed materials provided such materials
meet the applicable requirements as Ior new materials for their intended use.
2.1.3 Storage of Materials

All building materials shall be stored at the building site(s) in such a way as to prevent deterioration or the
loss or impairment of their structural and other essential properties (See Part 7, Construction Practices and
Safety).
2.1.4 Methods of Test

Every test of material required in this part, or by the Building Official, for the control of quality and for the
fulfilment of design and specification requirements, shall be carried out in accordance with a standard method
of test issued by the Bangladesh Standards and Testing Institution. In the absence of Bangladesh Standards,
Part 5 5-3
Building Materials
Part 5
Building Materials
the Building Official shall determine the test procedures. Laboratory tests shall be conducted by recognized
laboratories acceptable to the Building Official.
If, in the opinion of the Building Official, there is insufficient evidence of compliance with any of the
provisions of the Code or there is evidence that any material or construction does not conform to the
requirements of this Code, the Building Official may require tests to be performed as proof of compliance. The
cost of any such test shall be borne by the owner.
The manufacturer or supplier shall satisfy himself that the materials conform to the relevant standards and if
requested shall furnish a certificate or guarantee to this effect.
2.2 MASONRY
2.2.1 Aggregates
Aggregates for masonry shall conform to the standards listed as follows: ASTM C144, Aggregates for
Masonry Mortar; ASTM C404, Aggregates for Masonry Grout; ASTM C331, Lightweight Aggregates for
Concrete Masonry Units (the applicable standards for masonry are listed at the end of this section).
2.2.2 Cement
Cement for masonry shall conform to the standards listed as follows: BDS 232: 1974, Portland Cement
(Ordinary and Rapid Hardening) or ASTM C150, Portland Cement; ASTM C91, Masonry Cement; ASTM
C595, Blended Hydraulic Cements.
2.2.3 Lime
Limes for masonry shall conform to the standards listed as follows: ASTM C5, Quicklime for Structural
Purposes; ASTM C207, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
2.2.4 Masonry Units

a) Clay : Masonry units of clay (or shale) shall conform to the standards listed as follows: BDS 208: 1980,
Common Building Clay Bricks (First Revision); BDS 1249:1989, Acid Resistant Bricks; BDS 1250: 1989,
Burnt Clay Facing Bricks; BDS 1263: 1990, Burnt Clay Hollow Bricks for Walls and Partitions; ASTM
C34, Structural Clay Load-Bearing Wall Tile; ASTM C212, Structural Clay Facing Tile; ASTM C56
Structural Clay Non-Load-Bearing Tile; and IS 7556-1975 Burnt Clay ]allies.
b) Concrete : Concrete masonry·units shall conform to the standards listed as follows: ASTM C90, Hollow
Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units; ASTM C129, Non-Load Bearing Units; ASTM C145, Solid
Load-Bearing Units; ASTM C55, Concrete Building Bricks.
c) Others
i) Calcium Silicate: Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand-Lime Brick) shall conform to ASTM standard
specification C73-75.
ii) Glazed Masonry Units: Glazed Masonry building units shall conform to the standards listed as
follows: ASTM C126, Ceramic-Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid
Masonry Units; or ASTM C744, Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units. .
iii) Glass Block: Glass block may be solid or hollow and contain inserts; all mortar contact surfaces
shall be treated to ensure adhesion between mortar and glass.
iv) Unburnt Clay Masonry Units: Masonry of unburnt clay units including cement stabilized and
lime stabilized blocks shall not be used, in any building more than one storey in height.
v) Architectural Terra Cotta: All architectural terra cotta units shall be formed with a strong
homogeneous body of hard-burnt weather-resistant clay which gives off a sharp metallic ring
when struck. All units shall be formed to engage securely with and anchor to the structural frame
or masonry wall.
vi) Natural Stone: Natural stone for masonry shall be sound and free from loose friable inclusions.
Natural stone shall have the strength and fire resistance required for the intended use.
vii) Cast Stone: All cast stone shall be fabricated of concrete or other approved materials of required
strength, durability and fire resistance for the intended use and shall be reinforced where
necessary.
viii) Second Hand Units: Second hand masonry units shall not be used unless the units conform to the
requirements for new units. The units shall be of whole, sound material and be free form cracks
ana other defects that would interfere with proper laying or use. All old mortar shall be cleaned
from the units before reuse.
5-4
Chapter 2
Materials
2.2.5 Mortar
Mortar shall consist of a mixture of cementitious material and aggregates to which sufficient water and
approved additives, if any, have been added to achieve a workable, plastic consistency. Cementitious
materials for mortar shall be one or more of the following: lime, masonry cement, Portland cement and mortar
cement. Mortar for masonry construction other than tlie installation of ceramic tile shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C270, Mortar for Unit Masonry .
2.2.6 Grout
Grout shall consist of a mixture of cementitious materials and aggregates to which water has been added such
that the mixture will flow without segregation of the constituents. Cementitious materials for grout shall be
one or both of the following: Lime and Portland cement. Grout shall have a minimum compressive strength of
13 MPa. Grout used in reiriforced and nonreinforced masonry construction shall conform to the requirements
of ASTM C476, Grout for Masonry.
2.2.7 Mortar for Ceramic Wall and Floor Tile

Portland cement mortars for installing ceramic wall and floor tile shall comply with ANSI A 108.1 listed in
Sec 2.2.11 and be of the composition specified in Table 5.2.1.
Table 5.2.1
Ceramic Tile Mortar Compositions
Scratchcoat
Walls
1 cement; ! hydrated lime; ..
4 dry or 5 damp sand
Setting bed and levelling coat
1 cement; ! hydrated lime;
5 damp sand to 1 cement;
1 hydrated lime; 7 damp sand
Floors Setting bed
1 cement; To hydrated lime;
5 dry or 6 damp sand; or 1
cement; 5 dry or 6 damp sand
Ceilings Scratch coat and sand bed
1 cement; f hydrated lime;
2 f dry sand or 3 damp sand

Note: .. Lime may be excluded from the mortar if trial mixes indicate that the desired
workability and performance are achieved without lime.
2.2.8 Metal Ties and Anchors

Metal ties and anchors shall conform to the standards listed as follows: ASTM A82, Wire Anchor and Ties;
and ASTM A366 M, Sheet Metal Anchors and Ties.
2.2.9 Reinforcement
Reinforcement in masonry shall conform to the standards listed as follows: ASTM A82, Cold Drawn Steel
Wire for Concrete Reinforcement; ASTM A615M, Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars; ASTM A616M, Rail
Steel Deformed and Plain Bars; ASTM A617M, Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars; ASTM A706M, Low
Alloy Steel Deformed Bars; ASTM A767M, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars; and ASTM A775M, Epoxy
- Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars.
2.2.10 Water
Water used in mortar or grout shall be clean and free of deleterious amounts of acid, alkalis or organic
material or other harmful substances.
2.2.11 Applicable Standards for Masonry

The applicable standards for Masonry are listed below:
BDS 208 : 1980 Specification for Common Building Clay Bricks (First Revision);
BDS 232: 1974 Specification for Portland Cement (Ordinary and Rapid Hardening) (First
Revision);
BDS 1249 : 1989 Specification for Acid Resistant Bricks;
BDS 1250 : 1989 Specification for Burnt Clay Facing Bricks;
BDS 1263 : 1990 Specification for Burnt Clay Hollow Bricks for Walls and Partitions;
ANSI A108-1 Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile with Portland Cement
Mortar;

Part 5
Building Materials
ASTM A82-90a Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement;
ASTM A366M-91 Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality;
ASTM A615-90 Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet�steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement;
ASTM A615M-90 Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement ;
ASTM A616M-90 Specification for Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement;
ASTM A617M-90 Specification for Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement;
ASTM A706M-90 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement;
ASTM A76M-90 Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement;
ASTM A775M-91b Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars;
ASTM CS-79(1988) Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes;
ASTM C34-84 (1990) Specification for Structural Clay Load Bearing Wall Tile;
ASTM CSS-85 Specification for Concrete Building Brick;
ASTM C56-71 (1986) Specification for Structural Clay Non-Load -Bearing Tile;
ASTM C73-85 (1989) Specification for Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand-Lime Brick);
ASTM C90-90 Specification for Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units;
ASTM C90-91 Specification for Masonry Cement;
ASTM C126-86 Specification {or Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick,
and Solid Masonry Units;
ASTM C129-85(1990) Specification for Non-Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units;
ASTM C144-89 Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar;
ASTM C145-85 Specification for Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Unit;
ASTM C150-89 Specification for Portland Cement;
ASTM C207-79(1988) Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes;
ASTM C212-60 (1986) Specification for Structural Clay Facing Tile;
ASTM C270-89 Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry;
ASTM C331-89 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units;
ASTM C404-87 Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout;
ASTM C476-83 Specification for Grout for Masonry;
ASTM C595-89 Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements;
ASTM C744-73(1985) Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units;
2.3 STEEL
2.3.1 Reinforcing Steel

Reinforcing steel shall comply with the requirements specified in Sec 2.4.6 in this Part.
5-6
Chapter 2
Materials
2.3.2 Structural Steel

Structural steel shall conform to Bangladesh Standards BDS 878 : 1978, Specification for Weldable
Structural Steels; BDS 1355 : 1992, Dimensions and Properties of Hot Rolled Steel Beam, Column, Channel
and Angle Sections. Where Bangladesh standards are not available, the relevant standards listed below shall
be applicable.
ASTM A27M-91 Specifications for Steel, Castings, Carbon, for General Application;
ASTM A36 M-91 Specification for Structural Steel;
ASTM A48-88(1990) Specification for Grey Iron Castings;
ASTM AS3-90 Specifications for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded
and Seamless;
ASTM A148 M-90 Specifications for Steel Castings, High Strength, for Structural Purposes;
ASTM A242 M-91 Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel;
ASTM A252-90 Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles;
ASTM A283 M-91 Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel
Plates;
ASTM A307-91 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and studs, 413.7 MPa, (60000 psi)
Tensile Strength;
ASTM A325-91 Specification for Structural Bolts, Heat Treated, 827.4/861.9 MPa
(120/125 ksi) Minimum Tensile Strength;
ASTM A325 M-91 Specification for High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints;
ASTM A336 M-89 Specification for Steel Forgings, Alloy; for Pressure and High-Temperature
Parts;
ASTM A446 M-91 Specification for Steel, Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip
Process, Structural (Physical) Quality;
ASTM A449-91 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs;
ASTM A490 M-91 Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints;
ASTM AS00-90 Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes;
ASTM AS01-89 Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
Tubing;
ASTM AS14 M-91 Specification for High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel
Plate, Suitable for Welding;
ASTM AS29 M-89 Specification for Structural Steel with 290 MPa (42 ksi) Minimum Yield
Point (13 mm or f in Maximum Thickness);
ASTM A563 M-91 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts;
ASTM AS69 M-91 Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, per cent), Hot-Rolled Sheet
and Strip Commercial Quality;
ASTM AS70 M-91 �ecification for Steel Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural
Quality;
ASTM AS72 M-91 Specification for High Strength, Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of
Structural Quality;
ASTM A588 M-91 Specification for High Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 345 MPa
(SO ksi) Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm (4 in.) Thick;
ASTM A606-91 Specification for Steel; Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot
Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance;

Part 5
Building Materials
ASTM A607-91 Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy
Columbium or Vanadium, or Both, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled;
ASTM A611-91 Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Structural Quality;
ASTM A618-90 Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength Low
Alloy Structural Tubing;
ASTM A666-91 Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar;
ASTM A668-90 Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial
Use;
ASTM A690 M-90 Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel H Piles and Sheet Piling
for Use in Marine Environments;
ASTM A715-91 Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip, High Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot
Rolled and Steel, Sheet Cold-Rolled, High-Strength, Low-Alloy with
Improved Formability;
ASTM A852 M-91 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate
with 485 MPa (70 ksi) Minimum Yield Strength to 100 mm (4 in.) Thick.
2.3.3 Steel Plate, Sheet and Strips

These shall conform to the following standards.
BDS 681: 1968 Specification for Hot-Rolled Steel Strips (under revision);
BDS 868: 1978 Code of Practice for Galvanized Corrugated Sheet Roof and Wall
Coverings;
BDS 1122: 1985 Specification for Hot-dip Galvanized Steel Sheet and Coil;
IS 412: 1975 Specification for Expanded Metal Steel Sheets for General Purposes
(Second Revision);
IS 1079: 1973 Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip (Third Revision);
IS 4030: 1973 Specification for Cold-Rolled Carbon Steel Strip for General Engineering
Purposes (First Revision);
IS 7226: 1974 Specification for Cold-Rolled Medium, High Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel
Strip for General Engineering Purposes;
IS 3502: 1966 Specification for Steel Chequered Plates.
For steel plate, sheet and strip, where Bangladesh Standards are not available, the relevant ASTM standards
(listed below) shall be applicable.
ASTM A109M-91 Specifications for Steel, Strip, Carbon, Cold-Rolled;
ASTM A123�89 Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products;
ASTM A167-91 Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip;
ASTM A176-90 Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip;
·
ASTM A240-91 Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels;
ASTM A263-91 Specification for Corrosion-Resisting chromium Steel-Clad Plate, Sheet, and
Strip;
ASTM A264-91 Specification for Stainless Chromium-Nickel Steel-Clad Steel Plate, and
Strip;
ASTM A285/ A285 M-90 Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low and
Iritermediate-Tensile Strength;
5-8
Chapter 2
Materials
ASTM A328/A328 M-90 Specification for Steel Sheet Piling;
ASTM A366/ A366M-91 Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality;
ASTM 414/A414 M-91 Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, for Pressure Vessels;
ASTM A424-91 Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porecelain Enameling;
ASTM A444/ A444M-89 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip
Process for Storm Sewer and Drainage Pipe;
ASTM A463-88 Specification for Steel Sheet Cold-Rolled, Aluminum-Coated, Type 1 and
Type 2;
ASTM A480/A480 M-91 Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat
Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip;
ASTM ASOS-87 Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled,
General Requirements for;
ASTM A506-91 Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled,
Regular Quality and Structural Quahty;
ASTM A506-91 Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled,
Drawing Quality;
ASTM A527 I A527M-90 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip
Process, Lock-forming Quality;
ASTM A568/A568 M-91 Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot
Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for;
ASTM A569A569 M-91 Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Per cent), Hot-Rolled Sheet
and Strip Commercial Quality;
ASTM A570/A570 M-91 � ecification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural
Quality;
ASTM A577 /A577 M-90 Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination of Steel Plates;
ASTM A578/A578 M-90 Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Plain and Clad
Steel Plates for Special Applications;
ASTM A591/A591 M-89 Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light Coating
Mass Applications;
ASTM A599-84 Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, T in-Coated by Electro

deposition;
ASTM A606-91 Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot
Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Res1stance;
ASTM A607-91 Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy,
Columbium or Vanadium, or Both, Hot-Rolled ana Cold-Rolled;
ASTM A611-91 Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Structural Quality;
ASTM A635/A635 M-91 Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Carbon,
Hot-Rolled;
ASTM A642/A642 M-90 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-dip
Process, Drawing Quality, Special Killed;
ASTM A666-91 Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar;
ASTM 690/A690 M-90 Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel H-Piles and Sheet Piling
for Use in Marine Environments;
ASTM A715-91 Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot
Rolled, and Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Higb-Strength, Low-Alloy, with
Improved Formability;

Part 5
Building Materials
ASTM A775I A775 M-91 Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars;
ASTM A792 M-85 Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip
Process. General Requirements (Metric);
ASTM A857-90 Specification for Steel Sheet Piling, Cold Formed, Light Gage;
ASTM A875I A875 M-88 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-S %Aluminum Alloy Metallic-Coated by
tile Hot-Dip Process; .
2.3.4 Steel Pipe, Tube and Fittings

These items shall conform to the following standards ;
ASTM A53-90 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zine Coated Welded
and Seamless; .
ASTM A1051 A105M-90 Specification for Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components;
ASTM A106-91 Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service;
ASTM A134-90 Specification for Pipe Steel Electric - Fusion (Arc) - Welded (sizes NPS 16
andOver);
ASTM A139-90 Specification for Electric-Fusion (Arc) -Welded Steel Pipe (NP5-4 and
Over);
ASTM A181l A181M-90 Specification for Forgings, Carbon Steel, for General-Purpose Piping;
ASTM A182l A182M-91 Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged
F1ttings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature 5ervice;
ASTM A211-75 (1985) Specification for Spiral-Welded Steel or Iron Pipe;
ASTM A234l A234M-90 Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel
for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures;
ASTM A252-90 Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles;
ASTM A254-91 Specification for Copper-Brazed Steel Tubing;
ASTM A268l A268M-91 Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic and Martenistic Stainless
Steel Tubing for General Service;
ASTM A269-90 Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing
for General Service;
ASTM A270-90 Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Sanitary
Tubing;
ASTM A3121 A312m-91 Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes;
ASTM A333l A333m-91 Specification for Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-Temperature
Service;
ASTM A334l A334M-91 Specification for Seamless and Welded Carbon and Alloy-Steel Tubes for
Low-Temperature Service;
ASTM A403l A403M-91 Specification Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings;
ASTM A420I A420M-91 Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel
for Low-Temperature Service;
ASTM A423l A423M-90 Specification for Seamless and Electric-Welded Low-Alloy-Steel Tubes;
ASTM A450I A450M-91 Specification for General Requirements for Carbon, Ferritic Alloy, and
Austenitic Alloy steel Tubes;
ASTM AS00-90 Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes;
ASTM A501-89 Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
tubing;
5-10
Chapter 2
Materials
ASTM A522/ A522M-90 Specification for Forged or Rolled 8 and 9% Nickel Alloy Steel Flanges,
Fittings, Valves, and Parts for Low Temperature Service;
ASTM A524-89 Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower
Temperatures;
ASTM A530/ A530M-91 Specification for Genera i Requirements for Specialized Carbon and Alloy
Steel Pipe;
ASTM A589-89 Specification for Seamless and Welded Carbon Steel Water-Well Pipe;
ASTM A618-90 Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength Low
Alloy Structural Tubing;
ASTM A632-90 Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing
(Small-Diameter) for General Service;
ASTM A707 I A707M-90 Specification for Flanges, Forged, Carbon and Alloy-Steel for Low
Temperature Service;
ASTM A733-89 Specification for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic
Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples;
ASTM A778-90 Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular
Products;
ASTM A807-88 Practice for Installing Factory-Made Corrugated Steel Pipe for Sewers and
Other Applications;
ASTM A865-89 Specification for Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black or Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) Welded or Seamless, for Use in Steel Pipe Joints.
2.3.5 Steel Bars, Wire and Wire Rods

These shall conform to the following standards.
ASTM A29 M-91 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought and Cold
Finished, General Requirements for;
ASTM A49-87 Specification for Heat-Treated Carbon Steel Joint Bars;
ASTM A108-90 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon Cold Finished, Standard Quality;
ASTM All6-88 Specification for Zinc Coated (galvanized) Steel Woven Wire Fence Fabric;
ASTM A185-90a Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain for Concrete
Reinforcement;
ASTM A227 M-9i Specification for Steel Wire, Cold-Drawn for Mechanical Springs;
ASTM A228 M-91 Specification for Steel Wire, Music Spring Quality;
ASTM A229 M-91 Specification for Steel Wire, Oil-Tempered for Mechanical Springs;
ASTM A276-91 Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes;
ASTM A311 M-90 Specification for Stress-Relieved Cold-Drawn Carbon Steel Bars Subject to
Mechanical Property Requirements;
ASTM A321-90 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Quenched and Tempered;
ASTM A322-91 Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Standard Grades;
ASTM A331-90 Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Cold-Finished;
ASTM A368-82 Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Wire Stand;
ASTM A434-90 Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought or Cold-finished,

Quenched and Tempered;
ASTM A475-89 Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Strand;

Part 5
Building Materials
ASTM A478-91 Specification for Chromium-Nickel Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel

Weaving and Knitting Wire;
ASTM A479 M-91 Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes for
Use in Boilers and other Pressure Vessels;
ASTM A492-82(1987) Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Rope Wire;
ASTM A499-89 Specification for Steel Bars and Shapes, Carbon Rolled for "T" Rails;
ASTM A510-91 Specification for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel;
ASTM A575-89 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M Grades;
ASTM A576-90 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought Special Quality;
ASTM A580-91 Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Wire;
ASTM A586-86(1991) Specification for Zinc-Coated Parallel and Helical Steel Wire Structural
Strand;
ASTM A603-88 Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Structural Wire Rope;
ASTM A627-88 Specification for Homogeneous Tool-Resisting Steel Bars for Security
Applications;
ASTM A629-88 Specification for Tool-Resisting Steel Flat Bars and Shapes for Security
Applications;
ASTM A641 M-91 Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire,
ASTM A663 M-89 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, Mechanical
Properties; ·
ASTM A666-91 Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar;
ASTM A706 M-90 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement;
ASTM A764-90 Specification for Steel Wire, Carbon, Drawn Galvanized and Galvanized
at Size for Mechanical Springs;
ASTM C933-80(1990) Specification for Welded Wire Lath.
2.3.6 Steel Fasteners

Steel fasteners shall conform to the following standards :
ASTM A31-89 Specification for Steel Rivets and Bars for Rivets, Pressure Vessels;
ASTM A183-83(1990) Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts;
ASTM A193 M-91 Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for
High-Temperature Service;
ASTM A194 M-91 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure
and High�Temperature Service;
ASTM A307-91 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Steeds, 413.7 MPa (60,000 psi)
Tensile Strength;
ASTM A320 M-91 Specification for Alloy-Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature
Service;
ASTM A325 M-91 Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints;
ASTM A354-91 S}'ecification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy-Steel Bolts, Studs and
other Externally Threaded Fasteners;
ASTM A437M-90 Specification for Alloy-Steel Turbine-Type Bolting Material Specially

Heat Treated for High-Temperature Service;
ASTM A449-91 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Steeds;
5-12
Chapter 2
Materials
ASTM A489-90 Specification for Carbon Steel Eyebolts;
ASTM A490 M-91 Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
(Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3) ;
ASTM A502-91 Specification for Steel Structural Rivets;
ASTM A540 M-88 Specification for Alloy-Steel Bolting Materials for Special Applications;
ASTM A563 M-91 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts;
ASTM C954-86 Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board
. 4 mm
or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.84 mm (0.033 in.) to 2.8
(0.112 in.) in Thickness;
ASTM C955-88 Specification for Load-Bearin� (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runner
(Track), and Bracing or Bridgmg, for Screw Application of Gypsum Board
and Metal Plaster Bases;
ASTM F959-90 Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for

Use with Structural Fasteners;
ASTM C1002-88 Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum J3pard
·
or Metal Plaster Bases.
ASTM F436 M-91 Specification for Hardened Steel Washers;
ASTM F593-91 Specification Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs;
ASTM F594-91 Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts;
ASTM F844-90 Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for G�neral Use;
ASTM A574 M-90 Specification for Alloy-Steel Socket-Head Cap Screws;
ASTM A687-89 Specification for High-Strength Non headed Steel Bolts and Steeds;
ASTM C514-86 Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board;
2.3.7 Welding Electrodes and Wires

Welding electrodes and wires shall conform to the following standards :
IS 814- 1974 Specification for Covered Electrodes for Arc Welding of Structural Steels:
Part I for Welding Products Other Than Sheets (Fourth Revision);
Part II for Welding Sheets (Fourth Revision);
IS 815-1974 Classification and Coding of Covered Electrodes for Metal Arc Welding of
Structural Steels (Second Revision);
IS 1278-1972 Specification for Filler Rods and Wires for Gas Welding (Second Revision);
IS 1395-1982 Specification for Low and Medium Alloy Steel Covered Electrodes for
Manual Metal Arc Welding (Third Revision);
IS 3613-1974 Acceptance Tests for Wire Flux Combinations for Submerged-Arc Welding
of Structural Steel (First Revision);
IS 4972-1968 Specification for Resistance Spot-Welding Electrodes;
IS 6419-1971 Specification for Welding Rods and Base Electroes for Gas Shielded Arc
Welding of Structural Steel;
IS 6560-1972 Specification for Molybdenum and Chromium-Moly-bdenum Low Alloy

Steel Welding Rods and Base Electrodes for Gas Shielded Arc Welding;
IS 7280-1974 Specification for Base Wire Electrodes for Submerged-Arc Welding of

Structural Steels;
IS 8363-1976 Specification for Bare Wire Electrodes for Electroslag Welding of Streels;
BDS 239: 1963 Specification for Soft Solder (under revision);

Part 5
Building Materials
ISO 9453:1990 Soft Solder Alloys-Chemical Compositions and Forms;
ISO 9454:1990 Soft Soldering Fluxes-Classification and Req_uirements

Part 1 : Classification, Labelling and Packagmg;
ISO 9455-1: 1990 Soft Soldering Fluxes- Test Methods

Part 1 : Determination of Non-volatile Matter, Gravimetric Method;
ISO 9455-8:1991 Soft Soldering Fluxes-Test Methods

Part 8 : Determination of Zinc Content;

Part 11 : Solubility of Flux Residues;

Part 14 : Assessment of Tacriness of Flux Residues.
2.4 CEMENT AND CONCRETE
2.4.1 General
Materials used to produce concrete and admixtures for concrete shall comply with the requirements of this
section and those of Chapter 5, Part 6 of this Code.
2.4.2 Aggregates .
Concrete aggregates shall conform to the following standards:
BDS 243 : 1963, Coarse and Fine Aggregates from Natural Sources for Concrete; ASTM C33, Concrete
Aggre g ates; ASTM C330, Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete; ASTM C637, Aggregates for
Radiation-Shielding Concrete; ASTM C332 , Lightweight Aggregate for I nsulating Concrete; IS: 9142
Artificial Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units.
2.4.2.1 Special Tests : Aggregates failing to meet the specifications listed in Sec 2.4.2 shall not be used
unless it is shown by special test or actual service experience to produce concrete of adequate strength and
durability and approved by the Building Official.
2.4.2.2 Nominal Size : Nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not be larger than:
i) One-fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms; or
ii) One-third the depth of slabs; or
iii) Three fourths the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars· or wires, bundles of bars,
or prestressing tendons or ducts.
Exception:
The above limitations regarding size of coarse aggregate may be waived if, in the judgment of the Engineer,
workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids.
2.4.3 Cement
Cement shall conform to the following standards: BDS 232, Portland Cement (Ordinary and Rapid
Hardening); BDS 612, Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement-Type A; ASTM C150, Portland Cement; ASTM C
595, Blended Hydraulic Cements; and to other such cements listed in ACI 318.
2.4.4 Water
Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, alkalies salts, organic
materials or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or reinforcement.
2.4.4.1 Chloride Ions : Mixing water for prestressed concrete, or for concrete that will contain aluminium
embededments, including the portion of mixing water contributed in the form of free moisture on aggregates
shall not contain deleterious amounts of chloride ion. The maximum water-soluble chloride ion concentration
in concrete shall not exceed the limitations specified in Sec 5.5.3 of Part 6.
2.4.4.2 Potability: Nonpotable water shall not be used in concrete unless the following are satisfied:
a) Selection of concrete proportions shall be based on concrete mixes using water from the such source.
b) Mortar test cubes made with non potable mixing water shall have 7-day and 28-day strengths equal to at
least 90 per cent of strengths of similar specimens made with potable water.
2.4.5 Admixtures
Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to prior approval by the Building Official and shall comply
with Sec. 2.4.5.1 through 2.4.5.5.
5-14
Chapter 2
Materials
2.4.5.1 Chlor.ide: Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride from admixture ingredients shall not
be used in prestressed concrete, concrete containing embedded aluminium in concrete cast against permanent
galvanized metal forms, or in concrete exposed to severe or very severe sulphate-containing solutions (see Sec
5.5.2.1 of Part 6).
2.4.5.2 Standards: Air-entraining admixtures shall conform to ASTM C260. Water-reducing admixtures,
. retarding admixtures, accelerating admixtures, water-reducing and retarding admixtures, and water-reducing
and accelerating admixtures shall conform to ASTM C494, Chemical Admixtures for Concrete, or ASTM
C1017, Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete.
2.4.5.3 Pozzolanas : Fly ash (Pulverized Fuel Ash) or other pozzolans used as admixtures shall conform to
ASTM C618.
2.4.5.4 Blast Furnace Slag: Ground granulated blast-furnace slag used as an admixture shall conform to
ASTM C989.
2.4.5.5 Pigment for Coloured Concrete : Pigment for integrally coloured concrete shall conform to ASTM
C979.
2.4.6 Metal Reinforcement

Reinforcement and welding of reinforcement to be placed in concrete shall conform to the requirements of this
· ·
section.
a) Deformed Reinforcement : Deformed reinforcing bars shall conform to the following standards; BDS
1313, Steel Bars and Wires for Reinforcement of Concrete; BDS 580, Rolled Deformed Steel Bars
(intermediate grade) for Concrete Reinforcement; Reinforcement conforming to the ASTM, Standards:
A615M, Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars; A616M, Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars; A617M,
Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars; A706M, Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars; A767M, Zinc Coated
(Galvanized) Steel Bars; and A775M, Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel.
Deformed reinforcing bars with a specified yield strength (!Y ) exceeding 410 MPa may be used, provided
fY shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 per cent and the bars otherwise conform to
ASTM standards noted above. Fabricated deformed steel bar mats conforming to ASTM A184M and
deformed steel wire complying with ASTM A496 may be used. Deformed wire for concrete reinforcement
shall not be smaller than size D4 (Nominal diameter : 5.72 mm), and for wire with a specified yield
·
strength fy, exceeding 410 MPa /y shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 per cent.
Welded deformed steel wire fabric conforming to ASTM A497 may be used; for a wire with a specified
yield strength (!y) exceeding 410 MPa, /y shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 per cent.
Welded intersections shall not be spaced farther apart than 400 mm in direction of calculated stress,
except for wire fabric used as stirrups.
b) Plain Reinforcement : Plain reinforcement shall conform to the following BDS and ASTM standards. BDS
1313; ASTM A615M; A616M and A617M. Steel welded wire, fabric plain reinforcement conforming to
ASTM A185 may be used, except that for wire with a specified yield strength /y exceeding 410 MPa, /y
shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 per cent. Welded intersections shall not be spaced
farther apart than 300 mm in direction of calculated stress, except for wire fabric used as stirrups.
Smooth steel wire conforming to ASTM A82 may be used in concrete; except that for a wire with a
specified yield strength /y exceeding 410 MPa, /y shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35
per cent.
c) Cold-worked Steel Reinforcement: Cold-worked steel high strength bars shall conform to IS 1786: 1985
or BS 4461 : 1978.
d) Prestressing Tendons :Wire, strands and bars for tendons in prestressed concrete shall conform to BDS:
240, Plain Cold Drawn Steel Wire; ASTM A416, Steel Strand Uncoated Seven-Wire Stress Relieved;
ASTM A421, Uncoated Stress Relieved Steel Wire; and ASTM A722, Uncoated High-Strength Steel Bar.
Wires, strands and bars not specifically listed in the above standards may be used, provided they
conform to minimum requirements of these specifications and do not have properties that make them less
satisfactory than those listed.
e) Structural Steel, Steel Pipe or Tubing : Structural steel used with reinforcing bars in composite
compression members meeting the requirements of the Code shall conform to ASTM A36M, Structural
Steel; ASTM A242M, High Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel; ASTM A572M, High-Strength Low
Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steel; and ASTM A588M, High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel.

Part 5
Building Materials
Steel pipe or tubing for composite compression members composed of a steel-encased concrete core meeting
the requirements of this Coae shall conform to ASTM A53, P1pe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped Zinc Coated
Weldea and Seamless; ASTM ASOO Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Rounds and Shapes; and ASTM A501, Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
2.4.7 Applicable Standards

Materials used in concrete shall comply with the applicable standards listed below.
BDS 279:1963 Specification for Abrasion of Coarse Aggregates by Use of Los Angeles
Machine (under revision);
BDS 281:1963 Specification for Organic Impurities in Sands for Concrete (under revision);
BDS 282:1963 Specification for Method of Test for A mount of Materials Finer than
No. 200 BDS Sieve in Aggregates;
BDS 283:1963 Specification for Method of Test for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of
SOdium Sulphate or Magnesium Sulphate (under revision);
BDS 284:1963 Specification for Sampling Aggregates for Concrete (under revision);
BDS 285:1963 Specification for Method of Test for Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and
Coarse Aggregates (under revision);
BDS 921:1980 Specification for Standard Sand for Testing of Cement;
BDS 1044:1983 Methods of Testing Concrete,

Part-1, Methods ofSampling Fresh Concrete;
Part-2, Method of Testing Fresh Concrete;
BDS 240:1963 Specification for Plain Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Prestressed Concrete;
BDS 242:1963 Specification for Tensile Testing of Steel Wire (under revision);
BDS 243:1963 Specification for Coarse and Fine Aggregates from Natural Sources for
Concrete;
BDS 244: 1964 Bend Test for Steel (under revision);
ASTM C31-89 Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field;
ASTM C39-86 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens;
ASTM C42-90 Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of
Concrete;
ASTM C78-84 Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with
Third-Point Loading);
ASTM C94-90 Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete;
ASTM C172-90 Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete;
ASTM C192-90 Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Laboratory.
ASTM C317-91 Specification for Gypsum Concrete;
ASTM C496-90 Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens;
ASTM C617-87 Practice for Capping Cylindrical Concrete Specimens;
ASTM C685-90 Spe

. �ification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Hatching and Continuous
Mixmg;
ASTM C989-89 Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in
Concrete and Mortars.
5-16
Chapter 2
Materials
2.4.8 Concrete Pipe and Precast Sections

Concrete pipes and precast sections shall conform to the standards listed below :
ASTM C14M-90 Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe;
ASTM C76M-90 Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culverts, Storm Drain, and Sewer
P1pe;
ASTM C361M-90 Specification for Reinforced Concrete Low-Head Pressure Pipe;
ASTM C444 M-90 Specification for Perforated Concrete Pipe;
ASTM C478M-90 Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections;
ASTM C507 M-90 Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain and
sewer Pipe;
ASTM C654 M-90 Specification for Porous Concrete Pipe;

.
ASTM C655 M-90 Specification for Reinforced Concrete D-Load Culvert, Storm Drain and
sewer Pipe;
ASTM C789 M-90 Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box; Sections for Culverts,
Storm Drains, and Sewers;
ASTM C858-83 (1990) Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures; and
ASTM C891-90 Practice for Installation of Underground Precast Concrete Utility

Structures and Testing Concrete Pipe sewer Lines by Low-Pressure;
ASTM C913-89 Specification for Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures;
ASTM C924 M-89 Practice for Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by Low-Pressure Air Test;
IS 458-1971 Specification for Concrete Pipes (with or without reinforcement) (Second

Revision);
IS 784-1978 Specification for Prestressed Concrete Pipes (including fittings) (First

Revision);
IS 1916-1963 Specification for Steel Cylinder Reinforced Concrete Pipes;
IS 3 597-1966 Methods of Test for Concrete Pipes;
IS 4350-1969 Specifications for Porous Pipes for Underdrainage;
IS 7319-1974 Specification for Perforated Concrete Pipes;
IS 7322-1974 Specification for Specials for Steel Cylinder Reinforced Concrete Pipes.
2.4.9 Asbestos Cement Products

Asbestos cement products shall conform to the following standards:
BDS 428:1964 Specification for Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes (under revision);
BDS 429:1964 Specification for Asbestos Cement Building and Sanitary Pipes (under
revision);
BDS 430:1964 Specification for Asbestos Cement Corrugated Sheets for Roofing and
Gadding (under revision);
BDS 431:1964 Specification for Asymmetrical Section Corru g ated Sheets in Asbestos
Cement for Roofing and Cladding (under revision);
BDS 579:1966 Specification for Asbestos Cement Flat Sheets (under revision);
BDS 1046:1983 Specification for Asbestos Cement Products-Corrugated Sheets and Fittings
for Roofing and Cladding;
ASTM C222-88 Specification for Asbestos Cement Roofing Shingles;
ASTM C223-88 Specification for Asbestos Cement Siding;

Part 5
Building Materials
ASTM C500-88 Test Methods for Asbestos Cement Pipe;
ASTM C508-90 Specification for Asbestos Cement Underdrain Pipe;
ASTM C663-88 Specification for Asbestos Cement Storm Drain Pipe;
ASTM C875-90 Specification for Asbestos Cement Conduit;
ASTM C966-85 Guide for Installing Asbestos Cement Nonpressure Sewer Pipe Lines.
2.5 BUILDING LIMES
Building limes shall comply with the following ASTM standard specifications: ASTM C206, Finishing
Hydrated Lime; ASTM C207, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; ASTM C141, Hydraulic Hydrated Lime
for Structural Purposes; ASTM C977, Quicklime and Hydrated Lime for Soil Stabilization; and ASTM C5,
Quicklime for Structural Purposes.
The following Indian Standards may be accepted for lime concrete and testing of building limes:
IS 2686-1977 Specification for Cinder Aggregates for Use in Lime Concrete (First
Revision);
IS 3068-1975 Specification for Broken Brick (burnt clay) Coarse Aggregates for Use in
Llme Concrete (First Revision);
IS 3182-1975 Specification for Broken Brick (burnt clay) Fine Aggregates for Use in Lime
Mortar;
IS 1624-1974 Method of Field Testing of Building Lime (First Revision);
IS 3115-1978 Specification for Lime-based Blocks (First Revision);
IS 4139-1976 Specification for Sand-lime Bricks (First Revision);
IS 4098-1983 Specification for Lime-Pozzolana Mixture (First Revision);
IS 10360-1982 Specification for Lime-Pozzolana Concrete Blocks for Paving;
IS 6932 (Parts 1 to X - 1973; Part XI-1983) Method of Tests for Building Limes.
2.6 GYPSUM BUILDING MATERIALS AND PLASTER
Gypsum building materials shall conform to the standards listed below.
ASTM C22-91 Specification for Gypsum;
ASTM C28-91 Specification for Gypsum Plasters;
ASTM C35-89 Specification for Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Gypsum Plaster;
ASTM C36-91 Specification for Gypsum Wallboard;
ASTM C59-91 Specification for Gypsum Casting and Molding Plaster;
ASTM C79-91 Specification for Gypsum Sheathing Board;
ASTM C317-91 Specification for Gypsum Concrete;
ASTM C442-91 Specification for Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard;
ASTM C471-91 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Gypsum and Gypsum Products;
ASTM C472-90 Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum
Concrete;
ASTM C473-87 Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Board Products and Gypsum
Lath;
ASTM C474-89 Test Methods for Testing Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Board
Construction;
ASTM C587-91 Specification for Gypsum Veneer Plaster;
5-18
Chapter 2
Materials
ASTM C 5 8 8-91 Specification for Gypsum Base for Veneer Plasters;
ASTM C630-91 Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board;
ASTM C931-91 Specification for Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board;
ASTM C960-91 Specification for Predecorated Gypsum Board;
.IS 2849-1983 Specification for Non-Load Bearing Gypsum Partition Blocks (Solid and
Hollow Types) (First Revision).
2.7 FLOORING MATERIALS
2.7.1 General
Flooring materials are generally of two types; precast systems like tiles, bricks and cast insitu.
2.7.2 Concrete/Terrazzo Tiles

Concrete/Terrazzo tiles shall have good abrasion and impact resistance properties. Factors such as the ty})e
of cement and the type and grading of aggregate used mfluence the resistance of such tiles to chemicals
including cleaning agents. Terrazzo tiles shall have a wear layer after grinding at least 6 mm composed of
graded marble chipping in white, tinted or grey Portland cement on a layer of fine concrete. They may be
ground after manufacture to expose the marble aggregate and subsequently grouted. Slip resisting grits may be
mcorporated. These tiles shall conform to BDS: 531-1965, Cement Concrete Flooring Tile (under revision) or
IS : 1237-1980, Specification for Cement Concrete Flooring Tile.
2.7.3 Asphalt Tiles/Flooring

Asphalt tiles/floorings are suitable for industrial flooring in areas where they will not be exposed to
solvents, grease, oil, corrosive chemicals and excessive heat. Bitumen mastic for flooring shall conform to IS:
1195-1978; IS : 8374-1977, Bitumen Mastic, Anti-static and Electrically Conducting Grade and IS : 9510-
1980, Bitumen Mastic Acid Resisting Grade.
2.7.4 Mosaic Tiles

Mosaic tiles of a variety of shapes and sizes may be used. Thickness of the wear layer is dependent on the
sizes of marble chips but shall not be less than 6 mm thick. The tiles shall be wet cured for sufficient time
before laying so that their surfaces are not damaged during grinding and polishing.
2.7.5 Clay Tile

·
Clay floor tiles shall have sufficient strength and abrasion resistant characteristics to withstand the impact
and abrasion they are likely to be subject to. When glazed earthenware tiles are used in flooring they sball
conform to IS: 777:1970, Glazed Earthenware Tiles.
2.7.6 Vinyl Tiles

The vinyl tiles shall consist of a thorou�hly blended composition of thermoplastic binder, asbestos fibre,
fillers and pigments. The thermoplastic bmder shall consist substantially of either or both of the following:
a) vinyl chloride polymer

b) vinyl chloride copolymers.
The polymeric material shall be compounded with suitable plasticizers and stabilizers. The tiles may be
plain, patterned or mottled. The thickness shall not be less than 1.5 mm.
2.7.7 Rubber Tiles

These tiles are composed of natural, synthetic or reclaimed rubber, or a combination of these, with
reinforcing fibres, pigments, and fillers, vulcanized and moulded under pressure. The tiles shall have excellent
resilience and resistance to indentation, and good resistance to grease, alkali and abrasion� The thickness
shall not be less than 2 mm.
. , . .
2.7.8 Cast Insitu Floor Coverings .

a) Terrazzo : Terrazzo is a marble mosaic with Portland cement matrix and is generally composed of two
parts marble chips to one part Portland cement. Colour pigments may be added. The thickness of terrazzo
topping may vary from 13 mm to 19 mm and may be appfied to green concrete of the floor or bonded with
neat Portland cement, or over a sand cushion placed on the concrete floor.
b) Concrete : A concrete topping may be applied to a concrete structural slab before or after the base slab
has hardened. Integral toppings may generally be 25 mm to 40 mm thick; independent toppings about 25
mm to 50 mm thick. Aggregate sizes shcill not exceed 6 mm.
2.7.9 Other Flooring Materials

Other flooring materials i.e. bricks, natural stone, etc. sh<?wing satisfactory performance in similar situations
may be allowed. Plastic flooring tile and ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resistant tiles, if used, shall conform
to IS: 3464 and IS: 4357 respectively.

Part 5
Building Materials
Flooring compositions complying with IS : 657, Materials for Use in the Manufacture of Magnesium
Oxychloride Flooring Composition; and IS: 9197, Epoxy Resin Composition for Floor Topping may be
allowed. Linoleum sheets and tiles shall conform to IS : 653.
2.8 TIMBER
Details of the uses of timber in structures or elements of structures including terminology, material
requirements, moisture content preferred cut sizes of sawn timbers, grading, permissible defects, suitability in
respect of durability and treatability, design criteria, and details of joints are given in Chapter 11 of Part 6.
Timber and timber constructions shall satisfy the requirements of that chapter and conform to the following
standards :
BDS 142: 1961 Specification for Wood Doors (under revision);
BDS 173: 1962 Specification for Wood Windows (under revision);
BDS 230: 1962 Glossary of Terms Applicable to Timber, Plywood and Joinery (under
revision);
BDS 803:1973 Trade Names and Abbreviated Symbols for Timber Species;
BDS 819:1975 Code of Practice for Preservation of Timber;
BDS 820:1978 Recommendation for Maximum Permissible Moisture Content of Timber

used for Different Purposes in Bangladesh;
BDS 857:1977 Specification for Grading Rules for Logs and Sawn Timbers;
BDS 1090:1984 Methods of Test for Plywood;
BDS 1256:1990 Classification of Commercial Timber;
BDS 1311:1990 Key for Identification of Commercial Timber.
2.9 WOOD PRODUCTS
2.9.1 Plywood
Plywood shall conform to the following standards:
BDS 799:1983 Specification for Plywood for General Purposes (First Revision);
BDS 1158:1986 Specification for Veneered Decorative Plywood;
For sampling and testing of Plywood, the following Bangladesh Standards are applicable :
BDS 1087:1984 Specification for Method of Sampling of Plywood :
BDS 1090 : 1984 Methods of Test of Plywood.
IS 4990-1981 Specifications for Plywood for Concrete Shuttering Work (First Revision);
IS 5509-1980 Specification for Fire Retardant Plywood (First Revision);
IS · 5539-1969 Specification for Preservative Treated Plywood.
2.9.2 Particle Boards and Fibre Boards

These materials shall conform to the following standards:
BDS 619:1967 Specification for Particle Board (medium density) (under revision);
BDS 620:1967 Specification for Hardboard (under revision);
ISO 820:1975 Particle Boards-Definition and Classification
ISO 821-1975 Particle Boards-Determination of Dimensions of Test Pieces;
ISO 822:1975 Particle Boards-Determination of Density;
ISO 823:1975 Particle Boards-Determination of Moisture Content;
ISO 766: 1972 Fibre Building Boards-Determination of Dimensions of Test Pieces;
5-20
Chapter 2
Materials
ISO 767:1975 Fibre Building Boards-Determination of Moisture Content;
ISO 768:1972 Fibre Building Boards-Determination of Bending Strength;
ISO 769:1972 Fibre Building Boards-Hard and Medium Boards-Determination of Water

Absorption and of Swelling in Thicknes� after Immersion in Water;
ISO 818:1975 Fibre Building Boards-Definition-Classification;
ISO 819:1975 Fibre Building Boards Determination of Density;
ISO 2695:1976 Fibre Building Boards-Hard and Medium Boards for General Purposes
Quality Specifications-Appearance, Shape and Dimensional Tolerances;
ISO 2696:1976 Fibre Building Boards-Hard and Medium Boards-Quality Specifications

Water Absorption and Swelling in Thickness;
ISO 3340:1976 Fibre Building Boards-Determination of Sand Content;
ISO 3346:1976 Fibre Building Boards-Determination of Surface Finish (roughness);
ISO 3729:1976 Fibre Building Boards-Determination of Surface Stability;
ISO/TR 7469:1981 Dimensional Stability of Hardboards.
2.9.3 Wood based Laminates

Wood based laminates shall conform to the following standards :
IS 3513-1966 Specification for High and Medium Density Wood-based Laminates

(compress);
Part III General Purposes
Part IV Sampling and Tests
IS 9307-1979 (Parts I to VIII) Methods of Tests for Wood-based Structural Sandwich

Construction.
Part I Flexure Test
Part II Edgewise Compression Test
Part III Flatwise Compression Test
Part IV Shear Test
Part V Flatwise Tension Test
Part VI Flexure Creep Test
Part VII Cantilever Vibration Test
Part VIII Weathering Test
2.9.4 Adhesives and Glues

Adhesives shall conform to the following standards :
IS 848-1974 Specification for Synthetic Resign Adhesives for Plywood (Phenolic and
aminoplastic) (First Revision);
IS 849-1957 Specification for Cold Setting Casein Glue for Wood
IS 851-1978 Specification for Synthetic Resin Adhesives for Construction Work (non
structural) in Wood (First Revision);
IS 852-1969 Specification for Animal Glue for General Wood-Working Purposes (First
Revision);
IS 4835-1979 Specification for Polyvinyl Acetate Dispersion-based Adhesives for Wood

(First Revision);
IS 9188-1979 Specification for Adhesive for Structural Laminated Wood Products for
Use Under Exterior Exposure Condition.
2.10 DOORS AND WINDOWS
2.10.1 Wooden Door and Window Frames, and Shutters

These shall conform to the following standards:
BDS 142:1961 Specification for Wood Door (under revision);
BDS 173:1962 Specification for Wood Windows (under revision);

Part 5
Building Materials
BDS 820:1978 Recommendation-for Maximum Permissible Moisture Content of Timber

Used for Different Purposes in Bangladesh;
IS 1003-1977/83 Specification for Timber Panelled and Glazed Shutters;

Part I-1977 Door Shutters (Second Revision); .
Part II-1983 Window and Ventilator Shutters (Second Revision);
IS 1826-1961 Specification for Venetian Blinds for Windows;
IS 2191-1983 Specification for Wooden Flush Door Shutters (cellular and hollow core
type)·
Part f Plywood Face Panels (Fourth Revision);
Part II Particle Board Face Panels and Hardboard Face Panels (Third
Revision);
IS 2202-1983 Specification for Wooden Flush Door Shutters (solid core type);
Part I Plywood Face Panels (Fourth Revision);
Part II Particle Board Face Panels and Hardboard Face Panels (Third
Revision);
IS 4020-1967 Methods of Tests for Wooden Flush Doors : Type Tests;
IS 4121-1983 Specification for Timber Door, Window and Ventilator Frarnes (Second
Revision);
IS 4962-1968 Specification for Wooden Side Sliding Doors;
IS 6198-1983 Specification for Ledged, Braced and Battened Timber Door Shutters (First
Revision);
2.10.2 Metal Door and Window Frames and Shutters

These shall conform to the following standards :
BDS 1270: 1990 Specification for Strong Room Door;
BDS 1273: 1990 Specification for Vault Doors;
IS 1038-1983 Specification for Steel Doors, Windows and Ventilators (Third Revision);
IS 1361-1978 Specification for Steel Windows for Industrial Buildings (First Revision);
IS 1948-1961 Specification for Aluminium Doors, Windows and Ventilators;
IS 1949-1961 Specification for Aluminium Windows for Industrial Buildings;
IS 4351-1976 Specification for Steel Door Frames (First Revision);
IS 6248-1979 Specification for Metal Rolling Shutters and Rolling Grills (First
Revision);
IS 7452-1982 Specification for Hot Rolled Steel Sections for Doors, Windows and
Ventilators (First Revision);
IS 10451-1983 Specification for Steel Sliding Shutters (top hung type);
IS 10521-1983 Specification for Collapsible Gates;
2.11 ALUMINIUM AND ALUMINIUM ALLOYS
Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys shall conform to the following standards:
ASTM B26 M-91 Specification for Aluminium-Alloy Sand Castings;
ASTM B85-90 Specification for Aluminium-Alloy Die Castings;
ASTM B108-91 Specification for Aluminium-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings;
ASTM B209 M-90 Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Sheet and Plate;
ASTM B210M-90 Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes;
ASTM B211 M-90 Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Bar, Rod and Wire;
5-22
Chapter 2
Materials
ASTM B221 M-90 Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rods,
Wire, Shapes and Tubes;
ASTM B241 M-90 Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Seamless Pipe and
Seamless Extruded Tube;
ASTM B308 M-90 Specification for Aluminium-Alloy p061-T6 Standard Structural Shapes,
Rolled or Extruded;
ASTM B313 M-90 Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Round Welded Tubes;
ASTM B316 M-90 Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Rivet and Cold Heading
Wire and Rods;
ASTM B429-90 Specification for Aluminium-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube;
ASTM B483 M-90 Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Drawn tubes for
General Purpose Applications;
ASTM B547-90 Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Formed and Arc-Welded
Round Tube;
ASTM B632 M-90 Specification for Aluminium Alloy Rolled Tread Plate;
ASTM B745 M-90 Specification for Corrugated Aluminium Pipe for Sewers and Drains;
ASTM E 34-88 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Aluminium and Aluminium Base
Alloys.
2.12 BUILDERS HARDWARE
The applicable standards are listed below :
BDS 113:1986 Specification for Latches and Locks for Doors in Buildings;
IS 204-78 Specification for Tower Bolts;

Part I Ferrous Metals (Fourth Revision);
Part II Nonferrous metals (Fourth Revision);
IS 205-1978 Specification for Nonferrous Metal Butt Hinges (Third Revision);
IS 206-1981 Specification for Tee and Strap Hinges (Third Revision);
IS 208-1979 Specification for Door Handles (Third Revision);
IS 281-1973 Specification for Mild Steel Sliding Door Bolts for Use with Padlock
(Second Revision);
IS 362-1982 Specification for Parliament Hinges (Fourth Revision);
IS 363-1976 Specification for Hasps and Staples (Third Revision);
IS 364-1970 Specification for Fanlight Catch (Second Revision);
IS 452-1973 Specification for Door Springs, Rat-tail Type (Second Revision);
IS 453-1973 Specification for Double Acting Spring Hinges (Second Revision);
IS 729-1979 Specification for Drawer Locks, Cupboard Locks and Box Locks (Third
Revision);
IS 1019-1974 Specification for Rim Latches (Second Revision);
IS 1341-1981 Specification for Steel Butt Hinges (Fourth Revision);
IS 1823-1980 Specification for Floor Door Stoppers (Third Revision);
IS 1837-1966 Specification for Fanlight Pivots (First Revision);
IS 2209-1976 Specification for Mortice Locks (vertical type) (Third Revision);

Part 5
Building Materials
IS 2681-1979 Specification for Nonferrous Metal Sliding Door Bolts for Use with
Padlocks (Second Revision);
IS 3564-1975 Specification for Door Closers (hydraulically regulated) (Second

Revision);
IS 3818-1971 Specification for Continuous (piano) Hinges (First Revision);
IS 3828-1966 Specification for Ventilator Chains;
IS 3843-1966 Specification for Steel Backflap Hinges;
IS 3847-1966 Specification for Mortice Night Latches;
IS 4621-1975 Specification for Indicating Bolts for use in Public Baths and Lavatories
(First Revision);
IS 4948-1974 Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for General Use (First
Revision); .
IS 4992-1975 Specification for Door Handles for Mortice Locks (vertical type) (First
Revision);
IS 5187-1972 Specification for Flush Bolts (First Revision);
IS 5899-1970 Specification for Bathroom Latches;
IS 5930-1970 Specification for Mortice Latch (vertical type);
IS 6315-1971 Specification for Floor Springs (hydraulically regulated) for Heavy Doors;
IS. 6318-1971 Specification for Plastic Window Stays and Fasteners;
IS 6343-1982 Specification for Door Closers (pneumatically regulated) for Light Doors
Weighing up to 40 kg (First Revision);
IS 6602-1972 Specification for Ventilator Poles;
IS 6607-1972 Specification for Rebated Mortice Locks (vertical type);
IS 7196-1974 Specification for Hold Fast;
IS 7197-1974 Specification for Double Action Floor Springs (without oil check) for
Heavy Doors;
IS 7534-1974 Specification for Mild Steel Locking Bolts with Holes for Padlocks;
IS 7540-1974 Specification for Mortice Dead Locks;
IS 8756-1978 Specification for Ball Catches for use in Wooden Almirah;
IS 8760-1978 Specification for Mortice Sliding Door Locks, with Lever Mechanism;
IS 9106-1979 Specification for Rising Butt Hinges;
IS 9131-1979 Specification for Rim Locks;
IS 9460-1980 Specification Flush Drop Handle for Drawer;
IS 9899-1981 Specification for Hat, Coat and Wardrobe Hooks;
IS 10019-1981 Specification for Steel Window Stays and Fasteners;
IS 10090-1982 Specification for Numericals;
IS 10342-1982 Specification for Curtain Rail System
2.13 ROOF COVERINGS
2.13.1 Scope .
The provisions of this section shall govern the materials used for roof coverings.
5-24
Chapter 2
Materials
2.13.2 Compatibility of Materials ·
All roofs and roof coverings shall be of materials that are compatible with each other and with the building
or structure to which the materials are applied.
2.13.3 Material Specifications and Physical Characteristics

All materials to be used in the construction of roofs and roof coverings shall conform to the applicable
standards listed in this section. In the absence of applicable standards or when materials are of questionable
suitability, testing by an approved testing agency may be required by the building official to determine the
character, quality and linutations of use of the materials.
2.13.4 Weather Protection

All roofs shall be covered with approved roof coverings properly secured to the building or structure to
resist wind and rain. Roof coverings shall be designed, installed and maintained in accordance with
approved manufacturer's recommendations such that the roof covering shall serve to protect the building or
structure.
2.13.5 Wind Resistance

All roofs and roof coverings shall be secured in place to the building or structure to withstand the wind
loads.
2.13.6 Structural and Construction Loads

The structural roof components shall be capable of supporting the roof covering system and the material and
equipment loads that will be encountered during instaUation of the roof covering system.
2.13.7 Impact Resistance

Roof coverings shall resist impact damage based on the results of tests conducted in accordance with ASTM
04272 or 03746.
2.13.8 Metal-Sheet Roof Coverings

Metal-sheet roof coverings installed over structural framing and decking shall comply with BDS 868,
Galvanized Corrugated Sheet Roof and Wall Coverings; BDS 1122, Hot·dip Galvainzed Steel Sheet and Coil;
ASTM A361, A755 or B 101. Metal-sheet roof coverings shall be instalied in accordance with approved
manufacturer's installation instructions.
2.13.9 Asbestos Sheet Roof Covering

Asbestos sheets used for roof coverings shall comply with BDS 430, Asbestos Cement Corrugated Sheets for
Roofing and Cladding; BDS 431, Asymmetrical Section Corrugated Sheets in Asbestos Cement Roofing and
Cladding; BDS 579, Abestos Cement Flat Sheets; BDS 1046, Asbestos Cement Products-Corrugated Sheets and
Fittings for Roofing and Cladding.
2.13.10 Interlocking Clay or Cement Tile

Interlocking clay or cement tile shall be installed only over solid sheathing or spaced structural sheathing
boards. Interlocking clay or cement tile shall not be installed on roof slopes oelow one unit vertical in 3 units
horizontal (1:3). Horizontal battens shall be required on roof slopes over one unit vertical in 2 units
horizontal (1:2). Single layer underlayment is required over solid sheathing on all roof slopes. Reinforced
underlayment shall be required when spaced sheathing is used. Regardless of roof slope, the first three tile
courses and all tiles within 900 mm of roof edges, tiles at changes in roof slope or changes in slope direction,
shall be fastened to the roof. For the field of the roof, fastening is not required on roof slopes below one unit
vertical in 2 units horizontal (1:2). Every other tile course shall be fastened on roof slopes 1:2 to less than
1:1; and every tile shall be fastened on roof slopes 1:1 and over. Tile overlap shall be m accordance with
approved manufacturer's installation instructions.
2.13.11 Non-interlocking Clay or Cement Tile

Non-interlocking clay or cement tile shall not be installed on roof slopes below one unit vertical in 5 units
horizontal (1:5). Double layer underlayment is required on roof slopes below one unit vertical in 4 units
horizontal (1:4). Single layer underlayment is required on all other roof slopes. Non-interlocking clay or
cement tile shall be secured to the roof with two fasteners per tile. The minimum tile overlap shall be 75 mm.
2.13.12 Roof Insulation

Rigid combustible roof insulation shall be permitted, provided the insulation is covered with approved roof
coverings directly applied thereto. Insitu 1ime concrete may be used on flat roofs of buildings. Minimum
compacted thickness of such a layer shall be 75 mm and have adequate slope for drainage. The materials used
in lime concrete shall conform to the standards specified in Sec 2.5 of this Part.
2.13.13 Recovering and Replacement of Roof Coverings

New roof coverings shall not be installed without first removing existing roof coverings when the existing
roof or roof covering is water soaked or has deteriorated to the point that the existing roof or roof covering
is not acceptable as a base for additional roofing.
2.13.14 Reuse of Materials

Existing slate, clay or cement tile shall be permitted for reuse, except that damaged, cracked or broken slate or
tile shall not be reused. Existing vent flashings, metal edgings, drain outlets, collars and metal counter

Part 5
Building Materials
flashings shall not be reused where rusted, damaged or deteriorated. Aggregate surfacing materials shall not
be reused.
2.13.15 Applicable Standards

The applicable standards for materials used in roofs and roof coverings are listed below:
BDS 430:1964 Specification for Asbestos Cement Corrugated Sheets for Roofing and
Gadding (under revision);
BDS 431:1964 Specification for Asymmetrical Section Corrugated Sheets in Asbestos

Cement for Roofing and Cladding (under revision);
BDS 579:1966 Specification for Asbestos Cement Flat Sheets (under revision);
BDS 868:1978 Code of Practice for Galvanized Corrugated Sheet Roof and Wall
Coverings;
BDS 1046:1983 Specification for Asbestos Cement Products - Corrugated Sheets and
Fittings for Roofing and Cladding;
BDS 1122:1985 Specification for Hot-dip Galvanized Steel and Coil.
ASTM A361/A Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by

361M - 85 (1990) the Hot-dip Process for Roofing and Siding;
ASTM A755/ A755M-89 Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-dip Process and
Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building
Products;
ASTM 8101-83 (1988) Specification for Lead-Coated Copper Sheets;
ASTM C222-88 Specification for Asbestos-Cement Roofing Shingles;
ASTM C406-89 Specification for Roofing Slate;
ASTM C836-89 Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric
Waterproofing Membrane for Use With Separate Wearing Course;
ASTM c 95 -87 Specification for High-Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric

Waterproofing Membrane With Integral Wearing Surface;
ASTM C1029-90 Specification for Spray-Applied Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Thermal

Insulation;
ASTM D224-89 Specification for Smooth-Surfaced Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic Felt);
ASTM D225-86 Specification for Asphalt Shingles (Organic Felt) Surfaced with Mineral
Granules;
ASTM D226-89 Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing;
ASTM D227-89 Specification for Coal-Tar-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing;
ASTM D249-89 Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic Felt) Surfaced with
Mineral Granules;
ASTM D312-89 Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing;
ASTM D371-89 Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic Felt) Surfaced with
Mineral Granules; Wide Selvage;
ASTM D450-78 (1984) Specification for Coal - Tar Pitch Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and
Waterproofing;
ASTM D1227-87 Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for
Roofing;
ASTM D1863-86 Specification for Mineral Aggregate Used on Built-Up Roofs;
ASTM D2178 -89 Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing;
5-26
Chapter 2
Materials
ASTM D2626-86 Specification for Asphalt-Saturated and Coated Organic Felt Base Sheet
Used in Roofing;
ASTM D2898-81 (1986) Methods for Accelerated Weathering on Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for
Fire Testing;
ASTM D3161-81 (1986} Test Method for Wind-Resistance of Asphalt Shingles;
ASTM D3672-86 Specification for Venting Asphalt-Saturated and Coated Inorganic Felt
Base Sheet Used in Roofin:g;
ASTM D3747-85 Test Method for Impact Resistance of Bituminous Roofing Systems;
ASTM D3909-86 Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Glass Felt) Surfaced with Mineral
Granules;
ASTM D4272-90 Test Method for Total Energy Impact of Plastic Films by Dart Drop;
ASTM D4434-87 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing;
ASTM D4601-86 Specification for Asphalt-Coated Glass Fibre Base Sheet Used in Roofing;
ASTM D4637-87 Specification for Vulcanized Rubber Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof
Membrane; .
ASTM E 108-90 Test Method for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings;
ASTM E838-81 Practice for Perfor ming Accelerated Outdoor Weathering Using
Concentrated Natural Sunlight;
ASTM G23-90 Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) With
and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials;
ASTM G26-90 Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Xenon-Arc Type) With
and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials;
ASTM G53-88 Practice for Operating Light- and Water-Exposure Apparatus (Fluorescent
UV-Condensation Type) for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials;
RMA (Rubber Manufacturer Association, USA) RP- 4 - 88

Wind Design Guide for Ballasted Single-Ply Roofing Systems;
SPRI (Single Ply Roofing Institute, USA) 86

-
Wind Design Guide for Ballasted Single-Ply Roofing Systems;
FM ( Factory Manual) 4450 - 89

Standard Laboratories Department Approved Standard for Class I
Insulated Steel Deck Roofs;
FM 447 -86 . Approval Standard for Class I Roof Coverings;
CGSB (Canadian General Standards Board) 37 - GP - 56M - 80

Membrane, Modified Bituminous, Prefabricated, and Reinforced for
Roofing;
2.14 PAINTS AND VARNISHES
2.14.1 Water Based Paints

Water based paints shall conform to the following standards:
BDS 500:19 65 Specification for Distemper Dry (under revision);
BDS 109 7:1984 Specification for Plastic Emulsion Paint.

Part I for Interior Use;
Part 2 for Exterior Use;
IS 54 10- 19 69 Specification for Cement Paint, Colour as Required;
IS 428- 19 69 Specification for Distemper, Oil Emulsion, Colour as Required

Part 5
Building Materials
2.14.2 Ready Mixed Paint and Enamels

Ready mixed paints and enamels shall conform to the following standards:
BDS 13:1960 Specification for Ready Mixed Paints, Varnish, Lacquers and Related
Products (under revision);
BDS 14:1960 Specification for Black Bituminous Paint, Brushing for General Purposes
(under revision);
BDS 397:1964 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Red Oxide Zinc Chrome,
Priming (under revision);
BDS 398:1964 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Spraying, Red Oxide Zinc Chrome,
Priming (under revision);
BDS 399:1964 Specification for Aluminum Paint, Spraying for General Purposes, in Dual
Container (under revision);
BDS 400:1964 Specification for Aluminium Paint, Brushing, for General Purposes in Dual
Container (under revision); · ·
BDS 401:1964 Specification for Varnish, F inishing, Exterior, Type-!, (Synthetic)

(Tentative) (under revision);
BDS 402:1989 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Finishing, Semigloss, for
General Purposes (First Revision);
BDS 499:1965 Specification for Ready Mixed Paints, Brushing, for Road Marking (white,
yellow and black) (under revision);
BDS 616:1966 Specification for Enamel, Brushing, Exterior (i) Undercoating, (ii)
Finishing, Colour as Required (under revision);
BDS 617:1966 Specification for Enamel, Brushing, Interior (i) Undercoating, (ii) Finishing,
Colour as Required (under revision);
BDS 926:1980 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Petrol Resisting, Air
Drying, for Exterior Painting of Containers, Colour as Required;
BDS 927:1980 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Petrol Resisting, Air
Drying, for Interior Painting of Tanks and Contamers, Red Oxide (colour
unspecified);
BDS 928:1980 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Acid Resisting, for
Protection Against Acid Fumes, Colour as Required;
BDS 973:1981 Specification for Specification and Methods of Test for Linseed Stand Oil
for Paints and Varnishes;
BDS 974:1981 Specification and Methods of Test for Raw Tung Oils for Paints and
Varnishes;
BDS 1005:1981 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Finishing, Staving, Enamel,
Colour as Required;
BDS 1141:1986 Specification for Ready Mixed Aluminium Priming Paints for Woodwork;
BDS 1151:1986 Specification for Pavement Marking Paints.
2.14.3 Thinners and Solvents

IS 324-1959 Specification for Ordinary Denatured Spirit (revised);
IS 533-1973 Specification for Gum Spirit of Turpentine (Oil of Turpentine) (First

Revision);
IS 82-1973 Methods of Sampling and Test for Thinners and Solvents for Paints (First
Revision).
5-28
Chapter 2
Materials
2.14.4 Varnishes and Lacquers

BDS 401:1964 Specification for Varnish, Finishing, Exterior, Type-I, (synthetic) (under
revision);
BDS 1064:1983 Specification for Varnish, Stoving;
BDS 1065:1983 Specification for Varnish, Acid Resisting;
BDS 1066:1983 Specification for Varnish, Finishing, Interior;
IS 197-1969 Methods of sampling and Test for Varnishes and Lacquers (First Revision);
IS 340-1978 Specification for Varnish, Mixing (First Revision);
IS 346-1952 Specification for Varnish, Spirit, Clear, Hard;
IS 347-1975 Specification for Varnish, Shellac for general purposes (First Revision);
IS 348-1968 Specification for French Polish (First Revision);
2.15 SANITARY APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS
2.15.1 Sanitary Appliances

Sanitary appliances shall conform to the following standards:
BDS 1162: 1987 Specification for Ceramic Wash Basins and Pedestals;
BDS 1163 : 1987 Specification for Vitreous Sanitary Appliances,

Part-1, General Requirements;
Part-2, Specific Requirements for Water Closets;
Part-3, Specification Requirements for Urinal (Bowl type);
Part-4, Specific Requirements for Foot Rest;
Part-S, Specific Requirements for Integrated Squatting Pans.
ASHRA E90A-80 Energy Conservation in New Building Design;
ASHRA E 90B-75 Energy Conservation in New Building Design;
AWWA C700-77 Cold Water Meter Displacement Type;
AWWA C701-78 Cold Water Meter Turbine Type Class-];
AWWA C702-78 Cold Water Meter Turbine Type Class-II;
AWWA C702-78 Cold Water Meter Compound Type,
BS 1125: 1987 Specification for WC Flushing Cisterns (Including Dual Flash Cisterns and
Flush Pipes);
BS 1 244 Metal Sink for Domestic Purposes;
BS 1254:1981 Specification for C Seats (Plastics);
BS 1329:1974 Specification for Metal Hand Rinse Basins;
BS 1876: 1992 (1977) Specification for Automatic Flushing Cistern for Urinals .
2.15.2 Pipes and Pipe Fittings for Water Supply and Sanitation
Pipes and pipe fittings for water supply and sanitation shall comply with the following standards.
BDS 428:1964 Specification for Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipe;
BDS 429:1964 Specification for Asbestos Cement Building and Sanitary Pipes (under
revision);
BDS 1111:1984 Centrifugally Cast (spun) Iron Pressure Pipes for Water, Gas and Sewage;
BDS 1356:1972 Specification for Ferrules for Water Services;
BDS 1357: 1972 Specification for Washers with Fittings for Water Service;

Part 5
Building Materials
ASTM A53-90 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded
and Seamless; ·
ASTM A74-87 Specification (or Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
ASTM A377-89 Index of Specification for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe;
ASTM B42-89 Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes;
ASTM B43-91 Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe, Standard Sizes;
ASTM B75M-90 Specification for Seamless Copper Tube;
ASTM B88M-89 Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube;
ASTM B251M-88 Specification for General Requirements for Wrought Seamless Copper and
Copper-Alloy Tube;
ASTM B302-1988 Specification for Threadless Copper Pipe;
ASTM B306-1988 Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV);
ASTM B429-1990 Specification for Aluminium-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube;
ASTM B447-1989 Specification for Welded Copper Tube;
ASTM B745/B745M-1990 Specification for Corrugated Aluminium Pipe for Sewers and Drains;
ASTM C4-62 (1986) Specification for Clay Drain Tile;
ASTM C14M-90 Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe;
ASTM C76M-90 Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer
P1pe;
ASTM C508-90 Specification for Asbestos-Cement Underdrain Pipe;
ASTM C654M-90 Specification for Porous Concrete Pipe;
ASTM C700-89 Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength,
and Perforated;
ASTM D1527-89 Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadience-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe,

SChedules 40 and 80;
ASTM D1785-91 Specification for Poly (Vinyl chloride) (PVC) Plastic pipe, Schedules 40, 80
and 120;
ASTM D1861-88 Specification for Homogeneous Bituminized Fibre Drain and Sewer Pipe;
ASTM D1862-88 Specification for Laminated-Wall Bituminized Fibre Drain and Sewer Pipe;
ASTM D2239-89 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter;
ASTM D2241-89 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR
Series); ·
ASTM D2282-89 Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe (SDR

PR);
ASTM D2311-88 Specification for Perforated, Homogeneous Bituminized Fibre Pipe for
General Drainage;
ASTM D2321-89 Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers
and Other Gravity-Bow Applications;
ASTM D2464-91 Specification for Threaded Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
SChedule 80;
ASTM D2466-90 Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
schedule 40;
5-30
Chapter 2
Materials
ASTM D2467-90 Specification for Socket-Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
·
F1ttings, Schedule 80;
ASTM D2609-90 Specification of Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe;
ASTM D2661-91 Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40

Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe;
ASTM D262-89 Specification for Polybutylene (PB) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter;
ASTM D2665-91 Speci.fication for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste and
Vent Pipe and Fittings;
ASTM D2666-89 Specification for Polybutylene (PB) Plastic Tubing;
ASTM D2672-89 Specification for Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using Solvent cement;
ASTM D2729-89 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings;
ASTM D2737-89 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing;
ASTM D2751-91 Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and

F1ttings;
ASTM D2846-90 Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot
and Cold-Water Distribution system;
ASTM D2949-89 Specification for 82 mm (3.25-in) Outside Diameter Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings;
ASTM D3034-89 Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and
F1ttings;
ASTM D3309-89 Specification for Polybutylene (PB) Plastic Hot and Cold-Water
Distribution Systems;
ASTM F405-89 Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Tubing and Fittings;
ASTM F409-91 Specification for Thermoplastic Accessible and Replaceable Tube and
Tubular Fittings;
ASTM F437-89 Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80;
ASTM F438-90 Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; .
ASTM F439-90 Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80;
ASTM F441-89 Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe
SChedule 40 and 80;
ASTM F442-89 Specification for Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Plastic Pipe
(SDR-PR);
ASTM F628-91 Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40

Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe With a Cellular Core;
ASTM F891-1991 Specification for Coextruded Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe with
a Cellular Core;
IS 404 (Part-I)-1977 Specification for Lead Pipes Part I for other than Chemical Purpose (Second
Revision);
ISO 160: 1980 Asbestos-Cement Pressure Pipes and Joints;
ISO 392:1986 Asbestos-Cement Pipe Fittings for Building and Sanitary Purposes;
ISO 881:1980 Asbestos-Cement Pipes, Joints and Fittings for Sewerage and Drainage;

Part 5
Building Materials
ISO 2531-1991 Ductile Iron Pipes, Fittings and Accessories for Pressure Pipelines;
ASME/ANSI B16.3-85 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings;
ASME/ANSI B16.485 Cast Iron Threaded Fittings;
ASME/ANSI B16.9-86 Factory Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings;
ASME/ANSI B16.11-80 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded;
ASME/ABSI B16.12-83 Cast-Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings;
ASME/ANSI B16.15-85 Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings;
ASME/ANSI B16.18-84 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings;
ASME/ANSI B16.22-89 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings;
ASME/ANSI B16.23-84 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings (DWV);
ASME/ANSI B16.28-86 Wrought Steel Buttwelding Short radius Elbows and Returns;
ASME/ANSI B16.29-86 Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Fittings for
sovent Drainage Systems;
ASME/ANSI B16.32-84 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Fittings for Sovent Drainage Systems;
AWWA Cll0-87 Standard for Grey Iron and Ductile Iron Fittings, 76 mrn to 1220 mrn (3 in.
through 48 inches), for Water and Other Liquids.
2.15.3 Joints and Connections Between Pipes and Fittings

Applicable standards for joints and connections between pipes and fittings are listed bel9w:
ASTM B42-89 Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes;
ASTM C425-90 Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings;
ASTM C443M-85(1990) Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe,
Using Rubber Gaskets;
ASTM C564-88 Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings;
ASTM D1869-78 (1984) Specification for Rubber Rings for Asbestos Cement Pipe;
ASTM D2235-88 Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene

(ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings;
ASTM D2564-91 Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic
P1pe and Fittings;
ASTM D2657-90 Practice for Heat-Joining Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings;
ASTM D2661-91 Specification for acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40

Plastic Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe;
ASTM D2846-90 Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot
and Cold-Water Distribution systems;
ASTM D2855-90 Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Pipe and Fittings;
ASTM D3139-89 Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using F lexible
Elastometric Seals;
ASTM D3140-90 Practice for Flaring Polyolefin Pipe and Tubing;
ASTM D3212-89 Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible
Elastomeric Seals;
ASTM D3309-89 Specification for Polybutylene (PB) Plastic Hot and Cold-Water
Distribution Systems;
5-32
Chapter 2
Materials
ASTM F402-88 Practice for Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners Used
for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings;
ASTM . F493-89 Specification for Solvent cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings;
ASTM F6 28-91 Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40

Plastic Drain, Waste, and vent Pipe with a Cellular Core;
ASTM F656-89 Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings;
ASME/ ANSI B1.20.1 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
2.15.4 Taps and Valves

Taps and valves shall conform to the following standards :
BS 1212 3 (Parts) Specification for Float Operated Valves (excluding floats);
BS 10 10 Specification for Draw-Off Taps and Stopvalves for Water Services;
BS 1968 Specification for Floats for Ball Valves (copper);

':. -�66 c f • .
BS 5433: 1976 Specification for Underground Stopvalves for Water Services (copper);
BS 2456: 1973 Specification for Floats for Ball Valves (plastic) for Col? and Hot Water
BS 1415 ( 2 parts) Mixing Valves (Manullay Operated);
BS 5163: 1986 Specification for Predominantly Key-Operated Cast Iron Wedge Gate
Valve for Water Works;
B S 3377:1985 Specification for Boilers for Use with Domestic Solid Mineral Fuel
Appliances;
BS 843: 1976 Specification for Thermal Storage Electric Water Heaters;
BS 855:1976 Specification for Welded Steel Boilers for Central Heating and Indirect Hot
Water Supply.
2.16 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
2.16.1 Ferrocement
Details including material requirements are given in Chapter 12 of Part 6.
2.16.2 Plastics
Plastics may be used in buildings or structures as light transmitting materials such as glazing, skylights,
lighting lenses, luminous ceilings, roof panels, signs and similar purposes. Foam plastics are also used in
buildings.
Applicants for approval of a plastic material shall furnish all necessary technical data required by the
Buildin g Official. The data shall include chemical composition; applicable physical, mechanical and thermal
properties such as fire resistance, flammability and flame spread; weather resistance; electrical properties;
products of combustion; and coefficient of expansion.
The requirements for light transmitting plastics, including roof panels and foam plastics are given below.
2.16.2.1 Light Transmitting Plastics : An approved light transmitting plastic shall be any thermoplastic,
thermosetting or reinforced thermosetting plastic material which has a self-ignition temperature of 343°C or
greater when tested in accordance with ASTM D1929, Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics; a
smoke density rating not greater than 450 when tested in the manner intended for use in accordance with
ASTM E84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; or not greater than 75
when tested in the thickness intended for. use in accordance with ASTM D2843, Test Method for Density of
Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition of Plastics; and which conforms to one of the following
combustibility classifications:
Class C1 : Plastic materials which have a burning extent of 25 mm or less when tested at a nominal thickness
of 1.5 mm, or in the thickness intended for use, in accordance with ASTM D635, Test Method for Rate of
Burning and/ or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in Horizontal Position; or

Part 5
Building Materials
Class C2: Plastic materials which have a burning rate of 63 mm/min or less when tested at a nominal
thickness of 1.5 mm, or in the thickness intended for use, in accordance with ASTM D635.
2.16.2.2 Foam Plastics : All foam plastics and foam plastic cores of manufactured assemblies shall have a
flame spread rating of not more than 75 and shall have a smoke developed rating of not more than 450 when
tested in the maximum thickness intended for use in accordance with ASTM E84.
All foam plastics, unless otherwise indicated in this section, shall be separated from the interior of a building
by an approved thermal barrier of 13 mm gypsum wall board or equivalent thermal barrier material which
will limit the average temperature rise of the unexposed surface to not more than 121 oc after 15 minutes of
fire exposure complying with the standard time-temperature curve of ASTM E119, Test l\1ethods for Fire
Tests of Building Construction and Materials. The thermal barrier shall be installed in such a manner that it
will stay in place for a minimum of 15 minutes under the same testing conditions. The thermal barrier is not
required when the foam plastic is protected by a 25 mm minimum thickness of masonry or concrete.
2.16.2.3 Applicable Standards ·

A list of applicable standards for plastics is given below:
BDS 885:1979 Method for Measuring Viscosity Number and K-Value of PVC Resins;
BDS 886:1978 Method for Direct Measuring the Specific Gravity of Plastics;
BDS 887:1978 Method for Measuring Deformation under Heat of Flexible Rigid PVC
;·.:! �· : Compounds;
BDS 888:1978 Method for Measuring Temperature of Deflection under Load;
BDS 889:1978 Method for Measuring the Vicat Softening Temperature (VST) of
Thermoplastics;
BDS 890:1978 Method for Measuring the Water Absorption at Room Temperature and
Bolling Water Absorption of Plastics; .
BDS 891:1978 Method for Measuring the Flexural Modulus of Plastics;
BDS 892:1978 Method for Measuring the Resistance to Tear Propagation of Flexible
Plastics, Film or Sheeting;
ASTM D543-87 Test Method for Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents;
ASTM D568-77(1985) Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of
Flexible Plastics in a Vertical Position;
ASTM D635-88 Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent of Time of Burning of Self
Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position;
ASTM D638-90 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics;
ASTM D695M-90 Test Method for Compression Properties of Rigid Plastics;
ASTM D882-90 Test Methods for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting;
ASTM D1003-61(1988) Test Method for Haze and Luminous Transmittance of Transparent
Plastics;
ASTM D1044-90 Test Method for Resistance of Transparent Plastics to Surface Abrasion;
ASTM D1204-84 Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of Nonrigid Thermoplastic
Sheeting or Film at Elevated Temperature;
ASTM D1242-87 Test Methods for Resistance of Plastic Materials to Abrasion;
ASTM D1593-89 Specification for Non rigid Vinyl Chloride Plastic Sheeting;
ASTM D1925-70(1988) Test Method for Yellowness Index of Plastics;
ASTM D1927-81(1988) Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Plastic Sheet;
ASTM D1929-91 Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics;
ASTM D2103-86 Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting;
5-34
Chapter 2
Materials
ASTM D2126-87 Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid
Aging;
ASTM D2842-69(1988) Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics;
ASTM D2843-77(1988) Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition of
Plastics;
ASTM D3293-90 Specification for PTFE Resin Molded Sheet;
ASTM D3678-88 Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Interior-Profile
Extusions;
ASTM D3679-91 Specifir'\tion for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Siding;
ASTM D3841-88 Specification for Glass-Fibre-Reinforced Polyester Plastic Panels;
ASTM D4802-88 Specification for Poly (Methyl Methacrylate)Acrylic Plastic Sheet;
ASTM E84-91 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
ASTM El19-88 Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
2.16.3 Ballies and Wood Poles

Ballies of Sal/Gazari, Sundari and Garjan are used in building construction. These shall be free from rots,
knots and sap, and straight and uniform in size. These should conform to the following standards:
BDS 809:1973 Specification for Wood Poles for Overhead Power and Telecommunication
Lmes;
ASTM D25-91 Specification for Round Timber Piles;
IS 3337:1978 Specification for Ballies for General Purposes (First Revision);
IS 1900:1974 Method of Testing Wood Poles;
IS 6711:1972 Code of Practice for Maintenance of Wood Poles for Overhead Power and
Telecommunications Lines.
2.16.4 Bamboos
The following standards shall be applicable for bamboos used for structural and nonstructural purposes:
IS 1902:1961 Code of Practice for Preservation of Bamboo and Cane for Non-structural
Purposes;
IS 6874:1973 Method of Tests for Round Bamboos;
IS 8242:1976 Methods of Tests for Split Bamboo;
IS 8295:1976 Specification for Bamboo Chicks, Part I Fine;
IS 9096:1979 Code of Practice for Preservation of Bamboos for Structural Purposes.
2.16.5 Fillers, Stoppers and Putties

IS 110:1968 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Grey Filler, for Enamels,
for Use Over Primers (First Revision); .
IS 345:1952 Specification for Wood Filler, Transparent, Liquid;
IS 419:1967 Specification for Putty for Use on Window Frames (First Revision);
IS 421:1953 Specification for Jointing Paste, for Bedding Moldings on Coaching Stock;
IS 423:1961 Specification for Plastic Wood, for Joiners' Filler (revised);
IS 424:1965 Specification for Plastic Asphalt (revised);
IS 3709:1966 Specification for Mastic Cement for Bedding of Metal Windows;
IS 7164:1973 Specification for Stopper.

Part 5
Building Materials
2.16.6 Wire Ropes and Wire Products

ASTM A116-88 Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Woven Wire Fence
Fabric;
ASTM A121-86 Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Barbed Wire;
ASTM A368-82(1987) Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Wire Strand;
ASTM A392-91 Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric;
ASTM A475-89 Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Strand;
ASTM A492-82(1987) Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Steel Rope Wire;
ASTM A510-91 Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round
Wire, Carbon Steel;
ASTM A585-86 Specification for Aluminium Coated Steel Barbed Wire;
ASTM A586-86(1991) Specification for Zinc-Coated Parallel and Helical Steel Wire Structural
Strand;
ASTM A603-88 Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Structural Wire Rope;
ASTM A817-91 Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Wire for Chain Link Fence Fabric;
ASTM A824-91 Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension Wire for Use
with Chain Link Fence.
ASTM F1183-88 Specification for Aluminium-Alloy Chain Link Fence Fabric;
IS 2365:1977 Specification for Steel Wire Suspension Ropes for Lifts, Elevators and
Hoists (First Revision).
2.16.7 Waterproofing and Damp-proofing Materials

Waterproofing and damp-proofing materials shall conform to the following standards:
ASTM D41-85 Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Damp-proofing and
Waterproofing;
ASTM D43-73(1988) Specification for Creosote Primer Used in Roofing, Damp-proofing and
Waterproofing; .
ASTM D146-90 Test methods of Sampling and Testing Bitumen Saturated Felts and Woven
Fabrics for Roofing and Waterproofing;
ASTM D173-73 Specification for Bitumen-Saturated Cotton Fabrics Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing;
ASTM D 224-89 Specification for Smooth-Surfaced Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic Felt);
ASTM D226-89 Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing;
ASTM D227-89 Specification for Coal-Tar-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing;
ASTM D 249-89 Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic Felt) Surfaced with
Mineral Granules;
ASTM D250-88 Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Asbestos Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing;
ASTM D312-89 Specification of Asphalt Used in Roofing;
ASTM D 449-89 Specification for Asphalt Used in Damp-proofing and Waterproofing;
ASTM 0450-78 Specificatio n for Coal-Tar Pitch Used in Roofing, Damp-proofing and
_
Waterproofmg;
.
5-36
Chapter 2
Materials
ASTM D1327-86 Specification for Bitumen-Saturated Woven Burlap Fabrics Used in

Roofing and Waterproofing;
ASTM D1668-86 Specification for Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for Roofing and
Waterproofing;
ASTM D2178-89 Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing;
ASTM D2626-86 Specification for Asphalt-Saturated and Coated Organic Felt Base Sheet
Used in Roofing;
ASTM D3468-90 Specification for Liquid-Applied Neoprene and Chlorosulfonated

Polyethylene Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
2.16.8 Glazed Tiles and Tile-setting Mortars

Glazed tiles shall conform to the following standards:
BDS 1301:1990 Specification for Glazed Earthenware Wall Tiles;
ASTM Cl26 - 86 Specification for Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick
ANSI A137.1 Specification for Ceramic Tile;
BS 6431 Part 1 to Part 23 Ceramic Floor and Wall Tiles.
2.16.8.1 Mortars for Ceramic Wall and Floor Tile

a) Portland Cement Mortars: Portland cement mortars for installing ceramic wall and floor tile shall
comply with ANSI A108.1 and be of the compositions indicated in Table 5.2.1.
b) Dry-set Portland Cement Mortars: Premixed prepared Portland cement mortars, which require only the
addition of water and which are used in the installation of ceramic tile, shall comply with ANSI A 118.1.
The shear bond strength for tile set in such mortar shall be as required in accordance with that standard.
Tile set in dry-set Portland cement mortar shall be installed in accordance with ANSI A 108.5.
c) Electrically Conductive Dry-Set Mortars: Premixed prepared Portland cement mortars, which require
only the addition of water and which comply with ANSI A118.2, shall be used in the installation of
electrically conductive ceramic tile. Tile set in electrically conductive dry-set mortar shall be installed in
accordance with ANSI A 108.7.
d) Latex-modified Portland Cement Mortars: Latex-modified Portland cement thin set mortars in which
Lalex is added to dry-set mortar as a replacement for all or part of the gauging water which are used for
the installation of ceramic tile shall comply with ANSI A 118.4. Tile set in latex-modified Portland
cement mortar shall be installed in accordance with ANSI A 108.5.
·
e) Epoxy Mortar: Chemical-resistant epoxy for setting and grouting ceramic tile shall comply with ANSI A
118.3. Tile set and grouted with epoxy shall be installed in accordance with ANSI A 108.6.
f) Furan Mortar and Grout: Chemical resistant furan mortar and grout which are used to install ceramic
tile shall comply with ANSI A 118.5. Tile set and grouted with furan shall be installed in accordance
with ANSI A 108.8.
Modified Epoxy-Emulsion Mortar and Grout: Modified epoxy-emulsion mortar and grout which are
used to install ceramic tile shall comply with ANSI A 118.8. Tile set and grouted with modified epoxy
emulsion mortar and grout shall be installed in accordance with ANSI A 108.9.
h) Organic Adhesives: Water-resistant organic adhesives used for the installation of ceramic tile shall
comply with ANSI A 136.1. The shear bond strength after water immersion shall not be less than 0.25
kN/mm2 for Type I adhesive, and not less than 0.13 kN/mm2 for Type II adhesive when tested in
accordance with ANSI A 136.1. Tile set in organic adhesive shall be installed in accordance with ANSI
A 108.4.
i) Portland Cement Grouts: Portland cement grouts used for the installation of ceramic tile shall com ly f
with ANSI A 118.6. Portland cement grouts for tilework shall be installed in accordance with ANS A
108.10.
2.16.8.2 Applicable Standards : A list of applicable standards for tiles, mortars and adhesives is given
below.
BDS 1301 : 1990 Specification for Glazed Earthenware Wall Tiles;

Part 5
Building Materials
ASTM C126 - 86 Specification for Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick
ANSI A108.1-85 Specification for the Installation of Ceramic Tile with Portland Cement
Mortar;
ANSI A108.4-85 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable
Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive;
ANSI A108.5-85 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar;
ANSI A108.6-85 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile
Setting and Grouting Epoxy;
ANSI A108.7-85 Specification for Electrically Conductive Ceramic Tile Installed with
Conductive Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar;
ANSI A108.8-85 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Mortar and
Grout;
ANSI A108.9-85 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified E poxy Emulsion

Mortar /Grout;
ANSI A108.10-85 Installation of Grout in Tilework;
ANSI A118.1-85 Specification for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar;
ANSI A118.2-85 Specifications for Conductive Dry-set Portland Cement Mortar;
ANSI A118.3-85 Specifications for Chemical Resistant Water Cleanable Tile Setting and
Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive;
ANSI A118.4-85 Specifications Furan Latex - Portland Cement Mortar;
ANSI A118.5-85 Specifications for Chemical Resistant Furan;
ANSI A118.6-85 Specifications for Ceramic Tile Grouts;
ANSI A118.8-85 Specifications for Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar /Grout;
ANSI A136.1-85 Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile;
ANSI A137.1-88 Specifications for Ceramic Tile;
BS 6431 Floor and Wall Tiles;
BS 6431 Part 1 1983 Specificat � o� for Classification and Making, Including Definitions and
Charactenshcs;
BS 6431 Part 2 1984 Specification for Struded Ceramic Tiles with Low Water Absorption (E.::;.
3%) Group A1;
BS 6431 Part 3 Extruded Ceramic Tiles with a Water Absorption of 3%.::;. 6%. Group A
lla;
BS 6431 Part 3
Section 3.1 1986 Specification for General Products;
BS 6431 Part 3
Section 3.2 1986 Specification for Products Terre Cuite, Cotto, Baldosion Catalan;
BS 6431 Part 4 Extruded Ceramic Tiles with a Water Absorption of 6% <E< 10%. Group
A11b;
BS 6431 Part 4 1986 Specification for General Products;
BS 6431 Part 4
Section 4.2 1986 Specification for Specific Products (Terre Cuite, Cotto, Baldosion Catalan);
5-38
Chapter 2
Materials
BS 6431 Part 5 1986 Specification for Extruded Ceramic Tiles with a Water Absorption of
E>10%, Group A111;
BS 6431 Part 6 1984 Specification for Dust-prestressed Ceramic Tiles with a Low-Water
Absorption (E<3%)Group B1;
BS 6431 Part 7 1986 Specification for Dust-prestressed Ceramic Tiles with a Water Absorption
of 3% <E s; 6%. Group Blla;
BS 6431 Part 8 1986 Specification for Dust-prestressed Ceramic Tiles with Water Absorption of
6% < E s; 10%. Group Bllb;
BS 6431 Part 9 1984 Specification for Dust-Prestressed Ceramic Tiles with a Water Absorption
of E >10%. Group 8111;
BS 6431 Part 10 1984 Method for Determination of Dimensions and Surface Quality;
BS 6431 Part 11 1983 Method for Determination of Water Absorption;
BS 6431 Part 12 1983 Method for Determination of Modulus of;
BS 6431 Part 13 1986 Method for Determination of Scratch Hardness of Surface According to
Mhos;
BS 6431 Part 14 1983 Method for Determination of Resistance to Abrasion of Unglazed Tiles;
BS 6431 Part 15 1983 Method for Determination of Linear Thermal Expansion;
BS 6431 Part 16 1983 Method for Determination of Resistance to Thermal Shock;
'BS 6431 Part 17 1983 Method for Determination of Crazing Resistance-Glazed Tiles;
BS 6431 Part 18 1983 Method for Determination of Chemical Resistance-Unglazed Tiles;
BS 6431 Part 19 1984 Method for Determination of Chemical Resistance-Unglazed Tiles;
BS 6431 Part 20 1984 Method for Determination of Resistance to Surface Abrasion-Glazed

Tiles;
BS 6431 Part 23 1986 Specification for Sampling and Basis for Acceptance;
2.16.9 Refractories
Refractories shall conform to the following standards:
ISO 528:1983 Refractory Products-Determination of Pyrometric Cone Equivalent

(refractonness);
ISO 1 1 09:1975 Refractory Products-Classification of Dense Shaped Refractory Products;
ISO 1146:1988 Pyrometric Reference Cones for Laboratory Use-Specification;
ISO 1893:1989 Refractory Products-Determination of Refractoriness-Under-Load

(differential with rising temperature);
ISO 1927:1984 Prepared Unshaped Refractory Materials (Dense a n d Insulating)

Classification;
ISO 2245:1990 Shaped Insulating Refractory Products-Classification;
ISO 2477:1987 Shaped Insulating Refractory Products-Determination of Permanent Change

in Dimensions on Heating;
ISO 2478:1987 Dense Shaped Refractory Products-Determination of Permanent Change in

Dimensions on Heating;
ISO 3187:1989 Refractory Products-Determination of Creep in Compression;
ISO 5013:1985 Refractory Products-Determination of Modulus of Rupture at Elevated

Temperatures;

5-39
Part 5
Building Materials
ISO 5014:19'86 Refractory Products-Determination of Modulus of Rupture at Ambient

Temperature;
ISO 5016:1986 Shaped Insulating Refractory Products-Determination of Bulk Density and

True Porosity;
ISO 5017:1988 Dense Shaped Refractory Products-Determination of Bulk Density,

Apparent Porosity and True Porosity;
ISO 5018:1983 Refractory Materials-Determination of True Density;
ISO 5019-1:1984 Refractory Bricks-Dimensions-Part I: Rectangular Bricks;
ISO 5019-2:1984 Refractory Bricks-Dimensions-Part 2: Arch Bricks;
ISO 5019-3:1984 Refractory Bricks-Dimensions-Part 3: Rectangular Checker Bricks for

Regenerative Furnace;
ISO 5419-4:1988 Refractory Bricks-Dimensions-Part 4: Dome Bricks for Electric arc Furnace
Roofs;
ISO 5015-6:1984 Refractory Bricks-Dimensions-Part 6: Basic Bricks for Oxygen Steel

Making Converters;
ISO 5022:1979 Shaped Refractory Products-Sampling and Acceptance Testing;
ISO 5417-1986 Refractory Bricks for Use in Rotary Kilns-Dimensions;
ISO 8656:1988 Refractory Products-Sampling of Raw Materials and Unshaped Products;

Part 1; Sampling Scheme;
ISO 8840:1987 Refractory Materials-Determination of Bulk Density of Granular

Materials (Grain Density);
ISO 8890:1988 Dense Shaped, Refractory Products-Determination of Resistance to Sulfuric.._.

Acid;
ISO 8894-1:1987 Refractory Materials-Determination of Thermal Conductivity

Part 1: Hot-Wire Method (Cross-Array);
ISO 8894-2:1990 Refractory Materials-Determination of Thermal Conductivity

Part 2: Hot-Wire Method (Parallel);
ISO 8895:1986 Shaped Insulating Refractory Products-Determination of Cold Crushing

Strength;
ISO 9205:1988 Refractory Bricks for Use in Rotary Kilns-Hot-face Identification

Marking;
ISO 10080:1990 Refractory Products-Classification of Dense, Shaped Add-Resisting

Products;
ISO 10081:1991 Basic Refractory Products-Classification-Part I: Products Containing Less

Than 7% Residual Carbon.
2.16.10 Thermal Insulating Materials

Thermal insulation may be in the following physical forms:
Loose fill dry granules or nodules poured or below in place;

Flexible or semi rigid blankets ancfbolts of wool like material;
Rigid boards and blocks;
Membrane reflective insulation;
Spray applied mineral fibre or insulating concrete;
Poured in plain-insulating concrete;
Foamed in place-polyurethane;
Gypsum plaster.
Thermal insulating materials shall conform to the standards listed below.
ASTM C167-90 Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Blanket or Batt Thermal
Insulations;
5-40
Chapter 2
Materials
ASTM C177-85 Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot plate Apparatus;
ASTM C195-90 Specification for Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulating Cement;
ASTM C196-87 Specification for Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Thermal Insulating

Cement;
ASTM C208-72 (1982) Specification for Insulating Board (Cellulose Fibre), Structural and
Decorative;
ASTM C209-84 Methods of Testing Insulating Board (Cellulose Fibre), Structural and
Decorative;
ASTM C236-89 Test Method of Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies

by Means of a Guarded Hot Box;
ASTM C240-91 Test Methods of Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block;
ASTM C335-89 Test Method for Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe
Insulation;
ASTM C411-82 (1987) Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal
Insulation;
ASTM C449 /C449M-88S Specification for Mineral Fibre Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and
Finishing Cement; ·
ASTM C516-80 (1990) Specification for Vermiculite Loose Fill Thermal Insulation;
ASTM C518-91 Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus;
ASTM C520-81 (1985) Test Methods for Density of Granular Loose Fill Insulations;
ASTM C532-88 Specification for Structural Insulating Formboard (Cellulosic Fibre);
ASTM C533-85 (1990) Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation;
ASTM C534-88 Specification for Preformed Flexible E lastomeric Cellular Thermal

Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form;
ASTM C547-77 Specification for Mineral Fibre Preformed Pipe Insulation;
ASTM C549-81 (1986) Specification of Perlite Loose Fill Insulation;
ASTM C552-91 Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation;
ASTM C553-70 (1977) Specification for Mineral Fibre Blanket and Felt Insulation (Industrial
Type); .
ASTM C578-87 Specification for Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation;
ASTM C591-85 Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Thermal
Insulation;
ASTM C592-80 Specification for Mineral Fibre Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type
Insulation (Metal Mesh Covered);
ASTM C610-85 Specification for Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation;
ASTM C612-85 Specification for Mineral Fibre Block and Board Thermal Insulation;
ASTM C665-88 Specification for Mineral-Fibre Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing;
ASTM C726-88 Specification for Mineral Fibre Roof Insulation Board;
ASTM C728-91 Specification for Perlite Thermal Insulation Board;
ASTM C739-91 Specification for Cellulosic Fibre (Wood-Base) Loose Fill Thermal
Insulation;

5-41
Part 5
Building Materials
ASTM C764-91 Specification for Mineral Fibre Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation;
ASTM C916-85 (1990) Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation;
ASTM C984-83 Specification for Perlite Board and Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Composite
Roof Insulation;
ASTM C991-90 Specification for Flexible Glass Fibre Insulation for Pre-Engineered Metal
Buildings;
ASTM C1013-85 Specification for Membrane-Faced Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Roof

Insulation;
ASTM C1014-88 Specification for Spray-Applied Mineral Fibre Thermal or Acoustical

Insulation;
ASTM C1029-90 Specification for Spray-Applied Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Thermal

Insulation;
ASTM C1050-91 Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene-Cellulosic Fibre Composite

Roof Insulation;
ASTM C1071-86 Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Mineral Fibre Duct
Lming Material).
2.16.11 Screw Threads and Rivets

These shall conform to the following standards :
IS 554:1975 Dimensions for Pipe Threads where Pressure Tight Joints are Required on
the Threads (Second Revision);
IS 1929:1982 Specification for Hot Forged Steel Rivets for Hot Closing (12 to 36 mm
dtameter) (First Revision);
I
IS 2155:1982 Specification for Cold-Forged Solid Steel Rivets for Hot Closing (6 to 16 mm
IS 2643:1975 Dimensions for Pipe Threads for Fastening Purposes;

Part I - Basic Prohle and Dimensions (First Revtsion);
Part II - Tolerances (First Revision);
Part III - Limits of Sizes;
IS 2907:1964 Specification for Non-ferrous Rivets (1.6 mm to 10 mm)
IS 2998:1981 Specification for Cold Forged Steel Rivets for Cold Closing (1 to 16 mm
IS 10102:1982 Technical supply conditions for Rivets.
2.16.12 Sealants
Sealants shall conform to the following standards:
ASTM c 509-90 Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing
Material;
·
ASTM C542-90 Specification for Lock-Strip Gaskets;
ASTM C564-88 Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings;
ASTM C570-72(1989) Specification for Oil-and-Resin-Base Caulking Compound for Building

Construction;
ASTM C716-87 Specification for Installing Lock-Strip Gaskets and Infill Glazing
Materials;
ASTM C719-86 Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants
Under Cyclic Movement (Hockman Cycle);
ASTM C790-90 Guide for Use of Latex Sealants;
ASTM C794-80 (1986) Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants;
5-42
Chapter 2
Materials
ASTM C804-83 (1988) Practices for Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants;
ASTM C834-76 (1986) Specification for Latex Sealing Compounds;
ASTM C864-90 Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting
Blocks, and Spacers;
ASTM C919-84 (1988) Practice of Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications;
ASTM C920-87 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealant�;
ASTM C962-86 Guide for Use of Elastameric Joint Sealants;
ASTM D2628-91 Specification for Preformed Polycholoroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for
Concrete Pavements;
ASTM D3405-78 Specification for Joint Sealants, Hot-Poured, for Concrete and Asphalt
Pavements;
ASTM D3406-85 Specification for Joint-Sealant, Hot-Applied, Elastomeric-Type, for

Portland Cement Concrete pavement ;
ASTM D3667-85 (1990) Specification for Rubber Seals Used in Flat-Plate Solar Collectors;
ASTM D3771-85 (1990) Specification for Rubber Seals Used in Concentrating Solar Collectors;
ASTM D3832-79 (1987) Specification for Rubber Seals Contacting Liquids in Solar Energy Systems;
ISO 3934:1978 Rubber Building Gaskets-Materials in Preformed Solid Vulcanizates Used

for Sealing Glazing and Panels-Specification;
ISO 4633:1983 Rubber Seals-Joint Rings for Water Supply, Drainage and Sewerage
Pipelines-Specifications for Materials;
ISO 4635:1982 Rubber, Vulcanized-Preformed Compression Seals for Use Between

Concrete Motorway Paving Sections-Specifications for Material;
ISO 5892:1981 · Rubber Building Gaskets-Materials for Preformed Solid Vulcanized

Structural Gaskets-Specification; .
ISO 6447:1991 Rubber Seals-Joint Rings Used for Gas Supply Pipes and Fittings
Specification for Material;
ISO 9331:1991 Rubber Seals Joint Rings for Hot Water Supply Pipelines up to 110°C
Specifications for the Material.
2.16.13 Joints and Jointing Products

Joints and jointing products shall conform to the following standards :
ISO 2444 : 1988 Joints in Buildings-Vocabulary;
ISO 3867:1982 Agglomerated Cork-Material of Expansion Joints for Construction and

Building Test-Methods;
ISO 3869:1981 Agglomerated Cork-Filler Material of Expansion Joints for Construction

and Buildings -Characteristics, Sampling and Packing;
ISO 3934:1978 Rubber Building Gaskets-Materials in Preformed Solid Vulcanizates Used

for Sealing Glazing and Panels-Specification;
ISO 4633:1983 Rubber Seals-Joint Rings for Water Supply, Drainage and Sewerage
Pipelines-Specification for Materials;
ISO 4635:1982 Rubber, Vulcanized-Preformed Compression Seals for Use Between

Concrete Motorway Paving Sections-Specification for Material;
ISO 5892:1981 Rubber Building Gaskets-Materials for Preformed Solid Vulcanized

Structural Gaskets-Specification; ·
ISO 6447:1983 Rubber Seals-Joint Rings Used for Gas Supply Pipes and Fittings
Specification for Material;

Part 5
Building Materials
ISO 6589:1983 Joints in Building-Laboratory Method of Test for Air Permeability of

Joints;
ISO 7389:1987 Building Construction-Jointing P roducts-Determination of Elastic

Recovery;
ISO 7390:1987 Building Construction-Jointing Products-Determination of Resistance to

Flow;
ISO 7727:1984 Joints in Building-Princi p les for Jointing of Building Components

Accommodation of DimensiOnal Deviations During Construction;
ISO 8339:1984 Buildin� Construction-Jointing Products-Sealants-Determination of Tensile

Properties;
ISO 8340:1984 Buildin� Construction-Jointing Products-Sealants-Determination of Tensile

Properties at Maintained Extension;
ISO 8394:1988 Building Construction-Jointing Products-Determination of Extrudability of

One-Component Sealants;
ISO 9046:1987 Building Construction-Sealants-Determination of Adhesion/ Cohesion

Properties at Constant Temperature;
ISO 9047:1989 Building Construction-Sealants-Determination of Adhesion/ Cohesion

·
Properties at Variable Temperatures;
ISO 9631:1991 Rubber Seals-Joint Rings for Hot Water Supply Pipelines up to ll0°C
Specifications for the Material;
ISO 10563:1991 Building Construction-Sealants for Joints-Determination of Change in

Mass and Volume; ·
ISO 10590:1991 Building Construction-Sealants-Determination of Adhesion/Cohesion

Properties at Maintained Extension after Immersion in Water;
ISO 10591 : 1991 Building Construction-Sealants-Determination of Adhesion/Cohesion

Properties after Immersion in Water. .
2.16.14 Glass and Glazing

The applicable standards for glass and glazing are listed below :
ASTM C1036-90 Specification for Flat Glass;
ASTM C1044-90 Specification of Heat-Treated Flast Glass Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass;
ANSI Z 97.1 Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Tests for Transport
Safety Glazing Materia1s Used in Building;
CPSC 16 CFR Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.

Part 1201A
2.17 CGI SHEET ROOFING AND WALLING
Galvanized corrugated steel sheets conforming to BDS 868, Galvanized Corrugated Sheet Roof and Wall
Coverings, may be used over structural framing for construction of roofs and walls. Requirements for various
roofing materials including CGI sheet have been specified in Sec 2.13 above.
5-44
Part 6
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
<ClhlalJP>�e�r n
General Design Requirements
CCihlat]pQ:eJr 2
Loads
Clhl<a!jpQ:er 3
Foundation
CClhl<a!]pQ:eir 4\.
Masonry Structures
CCihl<a!jpQ:er 5
Concrete Material
CClhl<a!JP>Q:eJr 6
Ultimate Strength Design of RC Structures
CClhl<al]pQ:eir 7
Working Stress Design of RC Structures
CC l'm<a!ptl:eir 8
Detailing of RC Structures
CCihl<a!pil:eir 9
Prestressed Concrete Structures
CCihl<alptteir n (())
Steel Structures
CCI'ma1p!l:eir nn
Timber Structures
Clhla1p�eir n2
f'errocement Structures
Appendices
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN
Chapter 1 General Design Requirements
1.1 INTRODUCTION 6-1
1.1.1 Scope 6-1
1.1.2 Definitions 6-1
1.1.3 Symbols and Notation 6-3
1.2 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS 6-3
1.2.1 General 6-3
1.2.2 Buildings and Structures 6-3
1.2.3 Structure Importance Category 6-3
1.2.4 Safety 6-3
1.2.5 Serviceability 6-3
1.2.6 Rationality 6-3
1.2.7 Proportioning of Structural Elements 6-5
1.2.8 Walls and Framing 6-5
1.2.9 Additions to Existing Structures 6-5
1.2.10 Phased Construction 6-5
1.2.11 Load Combinations and Stress Increase 6-5
1.3 STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS 6-5
1.3.1 General 6-5
1.3.2 Basic Structural Systems 6-5
1.3.3 Combination of Structural Systems 6-7
1.3.4 Structural Configurations 6-7
1.3.5 Structural System Limitations 6-7
1.4 DESIGN FOR GRAVITY LOADS 6-8
1.4.1 General 6-8
1.4.2 Floor Design 6-8
1.4.3 Roof Design 6-9
1.4.4 Reduction of Live Loads 6-9
1.4.5 Posting of Live Loads 6-9
1.4.6 Restrictions on Loading 6-9
1.4.7 Special Considerations 6-9
1.4.8 Deflection and Camber 6-10
1.5 DESIGN FOR LATERAL LOADS 6-10
1.5.1 General 6-10
1.5.2 Selection of Lateral Force for Design 6-10
1.5.3 Design for Wind Load 6-10
1.5.4 Design for Earthquake Forces 6-11
1.5.5 Overturning Requirements 6-12
1.5.6 Drift and Building Separation 6-13
6-i
1.5.7 P-Delta Effects 6-14
1.5.8 Uplift Effects 6-14
1.6 DESIGN FOR MISCELLANEOUS LOADS 6-14
1.6.1 General 6-14
1.6.2 Self-Straining Forces 6-14
1.6.3 Stress Reversal and Fatigue 6-14
1.6.4 Flood and Surge Resistant Design 6-14
1.7 DETAILED DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 6-14
1.7.1 General 6-14
1.7.2 Structural Framing Systems 6-14
1.8 FOUNDATION DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 6-16
1.8.1 General 6-16
1.8.2 Soil Capacities 6-16
1.8.3 Superstructure-to-foundation Connection 6-16
1.8.4 Foundation-soil Interface 6-17
1.8.5 Special Requirements for Footings, Piles and 6-17
Caissons in seismic Zones 2 and 3
1.8.6 Retaining Wall Design 6-17
1.9 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REVIEW 6-17
1.9.1 Design Document 6-17
1.9.2 Design Review 6-18
1.9.3 Construction Observation 6-18
Chapter 2 Loads
2.1.1 Scope 6-19
2.1.2 Limitations 6-19
2.2 DEAD LOADS 6-19
2.2.1 General 6-19
2.2.2 Definition 6-19
2.2.3 Assessment of Dead Load 6-19
2.2.4 Weight of Materials and Constructions 6-20
2.2.5 Weight of Permanent Partitions 6-20
2.2.6 Weight of Fixed Service Equipments 6-20
2.2.7 Additional Loads 6-20
2.3 LIVE LOADS 6-20
2.3.1 General 6-20
2.3.2 Definition 6-20
2.3.3 Minimum Floor Live Loads 6-20
2.3.4 Minimum Roof Live Loads 6-23
2.3.5 Loads Not Specified 6-24
2.3.6 Partial Loading and Other Loading Arrangements 6-24
2.3.7 Other Live Loads 6-24
2.3.8 Impact and Dynamic Loads 6-24
2.3.9 Reduction of Live Loads 6-25
6-ii
2.4 WIND LOADS 6-27
2.4.1 General 6-27
2.4.4 Terrain Exposure 6-30
2.4.5 Basic Wind Speed 6-30
2.4.6 Determination of Design Wind Loads 6-30
2.5 EARTHQUAKE LOADS 6-49
2.5.1 General 6-49
2.5.4 Seismic Zoning 6-51
2.5.5 Design Earthquake Forces for Primary 6-51
Framing Systems
2.5.6 Equivalent Static Force Method 6-53
2.5.7 Dynamic Response Method 6-57
2.5.8 Seismic Lateral Forces on Components and 6-58
Equipments Supported by Structures
2.5.9 Seismic Lateral Forces on Non-Building Structures 6-59
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LOADS 6-62
2.6.1 General 6-62
2.6.3 Rain Loads 6-62
2.6.4 Loads Due to Flood and Surge 6-62
2.6.5 Temperature Effects 6-63
2.6.6 Soil and Hydrostatic Pressure 6-64
2.6.7 Loads Due to Explosions 6-65
2.6.8 Vertical Forces on Air Raid Shelters 6-66
2.6.9 Loads on Helicopter Landing Areas 6-66
2.6.10 Erection and Construction Loads 6-67
2.7 COMBINATIONS OF LOADS 6-67
2.7.1 General 6-67
2.7.4 Combinations of Loads and Stress Increase 6-68
for Allowable Stress Design Method
2.7.5 Combinations of Loads for Strength 6-68
Design Method
Chapter 3 Foundation
3.1 SCOPE 6-71
3.2 TERMINOLOGY 6-71
3.3 SITE INVESTIGATION 6-73
3.3.1 Purpose 6-73
3.3.2 Methods of Exploration 6-73
. 6-iii
- - - �--- -- --- - ---
3.3.3 Number and Disposition of Trial Pits and Borings 6-73

3.3.4 Depth of Exploration 6-73
3.4 CLASSIFICATION AND IDENTIFICATION OF SOILS 6-74
3.5 MATERIALS 6-76
3.5.1 Concrete 6-76
3.5.2 Timber 6-76
3.6 TYPES OF FOUNDATION 6-76
3.6.1 Footings 6-76
3.6.2 Raft Foundation 6-76
3.6.3 Pier Foundation 6-76
3.6.4 Pile Foundations 6-76
3.7 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 6-77
3.7.1 Design Load and Load Combinations 6-77
3.7.2 Bearing Pressure 6-77
3.7.3 Settlement 6-79
3.8 REQUIREMENTS FOR FOOTINGS 6-79
3.8.1 Dimension of Footings 6-80
3.8.2 Thickness of Footing 6-80
3.8.3 Footings on Filled up Ground 6-80
3.9 REQUIREMENTS FOR RAFT FOUNDATIONS 6-80

3.9.1 Types of Raft Foundations 6-81
3.9.2 Design Considerations 6-81
3.10 REQUIREMENTS FOR PIER FOUNDATIONS 6-81
3.11 REQUIREMENTS FOR PILE FOUNDATIONS 6-82
3.11.2 Design of Pile Caps 6-85
3.11.3 Installation Procedure 6-85
3.11.4 Pile Concreting 6-86
3.11.5 Load Test Arrangement and Instrumentation 6-86

3.12 EXCAVATION AND FILLS 6-87
3.12.1 Support to Adjoining Buildings and Structures 6-87
3.12.2 Safety Regulations 6-88
3.12.3 Slope Stability and Protection 6-88
3.12.4 Dewatering and Ground Water Control 6-88
3.12.5 Quality o.f Fill 6-88
3.13 WATERPROOFING AND DAMP-PROOFING 6-89
3.13.1 Waterproofing where Hydrostatic Pressure Occurs 6-89
3.13.2 Damp-proofing with no Hydrostatic Pressure 6-90
3.13.3 Other Damp-proofing and Waterproofing 6-90
Requirements
Chapter 4 Masonry Structures

4.1.1 Scope 6-91
6-iv
4.2 MATERIALS 6-94
4.2.1 General 6-94
4.2.2 Masonry Units 6-95
4.2.3 Mortar and Grout 6-95
4.3 ALLOWABLE STRESSES 6-95
4.3.1 General 6-95

4.3.2 Specified Compressive Strength of Masonry, [;, 6-95
4.3.3 Compliance with j;, 6-95
4.3.4 Quality Control 6-95
4.3.5 Allowable Stresses in Masonry 6-96
4.3.6 Allowable Stresses in Reinforcement 6-97
4.3.7 Combined Compressive Stress 6-97
4.3.8 Modulus of Elasticity 6-98
4.3.9 Shear and Tension on Embedded Anchor Bolts 6-98
4.3.10 Load Test 6-99
4.3.11 Reuse of Masonry Units 6-100
4.4 BASIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 6-100
4.4.1 General 6-100
4.4.3 Supports 6-102
4.4.4 Stability 6-102
4.4.5 Structural Continuity 6-103
4.4.6 Joint Reinforcement and Protection of Ties 6-104
4.4.7 Pipes and Conduits 6-104
4.4.8 Loads and Load Combination 6-105
4.4.9 Minimum Design Dimensions 6-105
4.5 DESIGN OF UNREINFORCED MASONRY 6-105
4.5.1 General 6-105
4.5.2 Design of Members Subjected to Axial Compression 6-105
4.5.3 Design of Members Subjected to Combined 6-105
Bending and Axial Compression
4.5.4 Design of Members Subjected to Flexure 6-106
4.5.5 Design of Members Subjected to Shear 6-106
4.5.6 Design of Arches 6-106
4.5.7 Footings and Corbels 6-106
4.6 DESIGN OF REINFORCED MASONRY 6-106
4.6.1 General 6-106
4.6.2 Design of members Subjected to Axial Compression 6-106
4.6.3 Design of Members Subjected to Combined 6-106
Bending and Axial Compression
4.6.4 Design of Members Subjected to Shear Force 6-107
4.6.5 Design of Members Subjected to Flexural Stress 6-107
4.6.6 Reinforcement Requirements and Details 6-108
6-v
4.7 STRENGTH DESIGN OF SLENDER WALLS 6-110
AND SHEAR WALLS
4.7.1 Design of Slender Walis 6-110
4.7.2 Design of Shear Walis 6-112
4.8 EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DESIGN 6-114
4.8.1 General 6-114
4.8.2 Loads 6-114
4.8.3 Materials 6-114
4.8.4 Provisions for Seismic Zone 2 6-114
4.8.5 Provision for Seismic Zone 3 6-114
4.8.6 Additional Requirements 6-115
4.9 PROVISIONS FOR HIGH WIND REGIONS 6-117
4.9.1 General 6-117
4.9.3 Construction Requirements 6-120
4.9.4 Foundation 6-120
4.9.5 Drainage 6-120
4.9.6 Wall Construction 6-120
4.9.7 Floor and Roof Systems 6-120
4.9.8 Lateral Force Resistance 6-120
4.10 CONSTRUCTION 6-121
4.10.1 General 6-121
4.10.2 Storage and Preparation of Construction Materials 6-121
4.10.3 Placing Masonry Units 6-122
4.10.4 Verticality and Alignment 6-122
4.10.5 Reinforcement Placing 6-123
4.10.6 Grouted Masonry 6-123
4.10.7 Chases, Recesses and Holes 6-123
Chapter 5 Concrete Material
5.1 GENERAL 6-125
5.1.1 Scope 6-125
5.1.2 Notation 6-125
5.2 CONSTITUENTS OF CONCRETE 6-125
5.2.1 Cement 6-125
5.2.3 Water 6-126
5.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 6-127
5.3.1 �eneral 6-127

5.3.2 Deformed Reinforcement 6-127
5.3.3 Plain Reinforcement 6-127

5.3.4 Structural Steel, Steel Pipe or Tubing 6-127
5.4 WORKABILITY OF CONCRETE 6-128
6-vi
5.5 DURABILITY OF CONCRETE 6-128
5.5.1 Special Exposures 6-128
5.5.2 Sulphate Exposures 6-128
5.5.3 Corrosion of Reinforcement 6-128
5.5.4 Minimum Concrete Strength 6-128
5.6 CONCRETE MIX PROPORTION 6-129
5.6.1 General 6-129
5.6.2 Proportioning Concrete Mix on the Basis of 6-129
Field Experience and/or Trial Mixtures
. 5.6.3 · Proportioning by Water Cement Ratio 6-131
5.6.4 Average Strength Reduction 6-131
5.7 PREPARATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PLACE OF DEPOSIT 6-132
5.8 MIXING 6-132
5.9 CONVEYING 6-132
5.10 DEPOSITING 6-132
5.11 CURING 6-133
5.12 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF CONCRETE 6-133
5.12.1 General 6-133
5.12.2 Frequency of Testing 6-133
5.12.3 Laboratory Cured Specimens 6-133
5.12.4 Field Cured Specimens 6-134
5.12.5 Investigation of Low Strength Test Results 6-134
5.13 PROPERTIES OF CONCRETE 6-134
5.13.1 Strength 6-134
5.13.2 Modulus of Elasticity 6-134
5.13.3 Creep 6-135
5.13.4 Shrinkage 6-135
5.13.5 Thermal Strains 6-136
5.14 CONCRETING IN ADVERSE WEATHER 6-137
5.15 SURFACE FINISH 6-138
5.15.1 Type of Finish 6-138
5.15.2 Quality of Finish 6-138
5.15.3 Type of Surface Finish 6-138
5.15.4 Production 6-138
5.15.5 Inspection and Making Good 6-139
5.15.6 Protection 6-139
5.16 FORMWORK 6-139
5.16.1 Design of Formwork 6-139
5.16.2 Removal of Forms and Shores 6-139
5.16.3 Conduits and Pipes Embedded in Concrete 6-139
5.16.4 Construction Joints 6-140
5.17 SHOTCRETE 6-140

5.17.1 General 6-140
5.17.2 Proportions and Materials 6-140
5.17.3 Aggregate 6-140
6-vii
5.17.5 Preconstruction Tests 6-141
5.17.6 Rebound 6-141
5.17.7 Joints 6-141
5.17.8 Damage 6-141
5.17.9 Curing 6-141
5.17.10 Strength Test 6-141
5.17.11 Inspections 6-141
5.17.12 Equipment 6-142
Chapter 6 Ultimate Strength Design of Reinforced

Concrete Structures
6.1 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN- GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 6-143
6.1.1 Convention and Notation 6-143
6.1.2 General 6-143
6.1.3 Loading 6-144
6.1.4 Design Strength 6-144
6.2 BEAMS AND ONE-WAY SLABS 6-144
6.2.3 Design Assumptions 6-146
6.2.4 General Principles and Requirements 6-146
6.2.5 Continuous Beams 6-147
6.2.6 Design for Flexure 6-148
6.2.7 Shear and Torsion 6-149
6.2.9 Crack Control 6-154
6.2.10 Deflection 6-155
6.3 COLUMNS 6-156

.
6.3.5 Design 6-158
6.3.7 Slenderness Effects 6-160
6.3.8 Approximate Evaluation of Slenderness Effects 6-160
6.3.9 Transmission of Column Loads through 6-162
Floor System
6.3.10 Composite Column . 6-162
6.4 FLAT PLATES, FLAT SLABS AND EDGE-SUPPORTED SLABS 6-164
6.4.1 Scope 6-164
6.4.2 Notation and Definitions 6-164
6.4.3 Proportioning 6-165
6.4.4 Design Procedures 6-166
6.4.5 Direct Design Method 6-167
6-viii
6.4.6 Equivalent Frame Method 6-170
6.4.7 Shear 6-171
6.4.9 Openings 6-175
6.5 ALTERNATIVE DESIGN OF TWO-WAY 6-175
EDGE-SUPPORTED SLABS
6.5.2 Scope and Limitations 6-177
6.5.3 Analysis by the Coefficient Method 6-177
6.5.4 Shear on Supporting Beam 6-177
6.6 RIBBED AND HOLLOW SLABS 6-181
6.6.1 General 6-181
6.6.2 Analysis and Design 6-181
6.6.3 Shear 6-181
6.6.5 Size and Position of Ribs 6-181
6.7 FRAMED STRUCTURES 6-182
6.7.1 Scope 6-182
6.7.2 Continuity 6-182
6.7.3 Placement .of Loads 6-182
6.7.4 Idealization 6-182
6.7.5 Method of Analysis 6-182
6.7.6 Design 6-183
6.8 DEEP BEAMS 6-183
6.8.2 General 6-183
6.8.3 Flexure 6-183
6.8.4 Shear 6-184
6.9 REINFORCED CONCRETE WALLS 6-185
6.9.2 General 6-185
6.9.3 Empirical Design Method 6-185
6.9.4 Walls Designed as Compression Members 6-186
6.9.5 Walls as Grade Beams 6-186
6.9.6 Shear 6-186
6.9.7 Minimum Reinforcement 6-187
6.10 FOOTINGS 6-187

6.10.1 Notation 6-187
6.10.2 General 6-188
6.10.3 Moment 6-188
6.10.4 Shear 6-189
6.10.5 Development of Reinforcement 6-189
6.10.6 Transfer of Force at Base 6-189
6-ix
6.10.7 Sloped or Stepped Footings 6-190
6.10.8 Combined Footings and Mats 6-190
6.10.9 Pile Caps 6-190
6.11 STAIRS 6-190
6.11.1 Effective Span 6-190
6.11.2 Loading 6-191
6..11.3 Distribution of Loading 6-191
6.11.4 Depth of Section 6-191
6.11.5 Design 6-191
6.12 SHELLS AND FOLDED PLATES 6-192
6.12.1 Notation 6-192
6.12.2 Scope 6-193
6.12.4 Design 6-194
6.12.5 Strength of Material 6-194
6.12.6 Shell Reinforcement 6-194
6.12.7 Construction 6-195
6.13 PRECAST AND COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION 6-195
6.13.1 Notation 6-195
6.13.2 General 6-195
6.13.3 Design 6-196
6.13.4 Detailing 6-198
6.13.5 Identification and Marking 6-198
6.13.6 Transportation, Storage and Erection 6-198
6.13.7 Composite Construction 6-198
Chapter 7 Working Stress Design of Reinforced

Concrete Structures
7.1 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN- GENERAL CONSIDERATION 6-199
7.1.2 Design Methods 6-199
7.1.4 Loading 6-200
7.1.5 Stiffness 6-200
7.1.6 Span Length 6-200
7.1.7 Arrangement of Live Loads 6-201
7.1.8 Floor Finish 6-201
7.1.9 Allowable Stresses in Concrete 6-201
7.1.10 Allowable Stresses in Reinforcement 6-201
7.1.11 Allowable Stresses for Wind and Earthquake Forces 6-202
7.1.12 Development and Splices of Reinforcement 6-202
7.2 BEAMS AND ONE-WAY SLABS 6-202
7.2.2 Span Length 6-202
6-x
7.2.5 Continuous Beams 6-203
7.2.6 Design for Flexure 6-203
7.2.7 Shear and Torsion 6-204
7.2.9 Crack Control 6-208
7.3 COLUMNS 6-209
7.3.1 Definitions and Notation 6-209
7.3.4 Slenderness Effects 6-210
7.4 FLAT PLATES, FLAT SLABS AND EDGE-SUPPORTED SLABS 6-210
7.5 ALTERNATIVE DESIGN OF TWO-WAY 6-211
EDGE-SUPPORTED SLABS
7.6 RIBBED AND HOLLOW SLABS 6-211
7.7 FRAMED STRUCTURES 6-212
7.8 DEEP BEAMS 6-212
7.8.2 General 6-212
7.8.3 Flexure 6-212
7.8.4 Shear 6-212
7.9 REINFORCED CONCRETE WALLS 6-213
7.10 FOOTINGS 6-214
7.11 STAIRS 6-215
7.12 SHELLS AND FOLDED PLATES 6-215
7.13 PRECAST AND COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION 6-215
ChapterS Detailing of Reinforced Concrete

Structures
8.1 DETAILS OF REINFORCEMENT 6-217
8.1.2 Standard Hooks 6-217
8.1.3 Minimum Bend Diameters 6-218
8.1.4 Bending 6-218
8.1.5 Surface Conditions of Reinforcement 6-218
8.1.6 Placing of Reinforcement 6-218
8.1.7 Spacing of Reinforcement 6-219
8.1.8 Exposure Condition and Cover to Reinforcement 6-219
8.1.9 Reinforcement Details for Columns 6-220
8.1.10 Lateral Reinforcement for Columns 6-221

8.1.11 Lateral Reinforcement for Beams 6-221
8.1.12 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement 6-222
8.1.13 Requirements for Structural Integrity 6-222
6-xi
8.2 DEVELOPMENT AND SPLICES OF REINFORCEMENT 6-222
8.2.2 Development of Reinforcement- General 6-223
8.2.3 Development of Deformed Bars in Tension 6-223
8.2.4 Development of Deformed Bars in Compression 6-224
8.2.5 Development of Bundled Bars 6-224
8.2.6 Development of Standard Hooks in Tension 6-224
8.2.7 Development of Flexural Reinforcement - General 6-225
8.2.8 Development of Positive Moment Reinforcement 6-225
8.2.9 Development of Negative Moment Reinforcement 6-226

.
8.2.10 Development of Shear Reinforcement 6-226
8.2.11 Development of Plain Bars 6-226
8.2.12 Splices of Reinforcement - General 6-226
8.2.13 Splices of Deformed Bars in Tension 6-227
8.2.14 Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression 6-227
8.2.15 Special Splice Requirements for Columns 6-228
8.2.16 Splices of Plain Bars 6-228
8.2.17 Mechanical Anchorage 6-228
8.3 SPECIAL PROVISION FOR SEISMIC DESIGN 6-228
8.3.4 Flexural Members of Frames 6-230
8.3.5 Frame Members Subjected to Bending 6-231
and Axial Load
8.3.6 Structural Walls and Diaphragms 6-233
8.3.7 Joints of Frames 6-234
8.3.8 Shear Strength Requirements 6-234
8.3.9 Frame Members not Proportioned to Resist 6-235
Forces Induced by Earthquake Motion
8.3.10 Requirements for Frames in Regions of 6-236
Moderate Seismic Risk, Zone 2
Chapter9 Prestressed Concrete Structures
9.1 NOTATION 6-239
9.2 SCOPE 6-240
9.3 DEFINITIONS 6-241
9.5 DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS 6-242
9.6 CONTROL OF DEFLECTIONS 6-242
9.7 CLASSIFICATION OF PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBERS 6-243
9.8 ALLOWABLE TENSILE STRESSES IN CONCRETE FOR 6-243
FLEXURAL MEMBERS
9.9 ALLOWABLE COMPRESSIVE STRESSES IN CONCRETE 6-244
FOR FLEXURAL MEMBERS
6-xii
9.10 STEEL 6-244
9.11 ALLOWABLE STRESSES IN PRESTRESSING STEEL 6-244
9.12 LOSSES OF PRESTRESS 6-245
9.13 FLEXURAL STRENGTH 6-247
9.14 LIMITS FOR REINFORCEMENT OF FLEXURAL MEMBERS 6-248
9.15 MINIMUM BONDED REINFORCEMENT 6-249
9.16 TRANSMISSION LENGTHS IN PRETENSIONED MEMBERS 6-249
9.17 SPACING LIMITS OF PRESTRESSING STEEL AND DUCTS 6-250
9.18 CONCRETE PROTECTION FOR REINFORCEMENT 6-250
9.19 SHEAR STRENGTH 6-250
9.20 COMPRESSION MEMBERS - COMBINED FLEXURE 6-252

AND AXIAL LOADS
9.21 FRAMES AND CONTINUOUS STRUCTURES 6-253
9.22 SLAB SYSTEM 6-253
9.23 TENDON ANCHORAGE ZONES 6-254
9.24 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR UNBONDED 6-254
PRESTRESSING TENDONS
9.25 POST-TENSIONING DUCTS 6-254
9.26 GROUT FOR BONDED PRESTRESSING TENDONS 6-255
9.27 PROTECTION OF PRESTRESSING TENDONS 6-255
9.28 APPLICATION AND MEASUREMENT OF 6-255
PRESTRESSING FORCE
9.29 POST-TENSIONING ANCHORAGE AND COUPLERS 6-256
9.30 DEMOUNTABLE PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONSTRUCTION 6-256
9.31 COLD ORAWN LOW CARBON WIRE PRESTRESSED 6-256
CONCRETE (CWPC)
Chapter 10 Steel Structures
10.1 SCOPE 6-257
10.2 DEFINITIONS AND NOTATION 6-257
10.2.2 Notation 6-258
10.3 MATERIAL 6-263
10.3.1 Structural Steel 6-263
10.3.2 Rivets, Bolts , Washers and Nuts 6-264
10.3.3 Anchor Bolts and Threaded Rods 6-264
10.3.4 Welds 6-264

/
10.3.5 Stud Shear Connectors 6-264
10.4 TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION 6-264
10.5 ,FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES 6-265
10.5.1 General 6-265
10.5.2 Frame Stabili ty 6-265
10.6 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 6-265
10.6.1 Gross Area 6-265
10.6.2 Net Area 6-266
6-xiii
10.6.3 Effective Net Area 6-266
10.6.4 Rotational Resistance at Points of Support 6-267
10.6.5 Limiting Slenderness Ratios 6-267
10.6.6 Simple Spans 6-267
10.6.7 End Restraint 6-267
10.7 WORKING STRESS DESIGN METHOD 6-267
10.7.1 General 6-267
10.7.2 Basis of Design 6-267
10.7.3 Local Buckling 6-267
10.7.4 Design of Tension Members 6-269
10.7.5 Design of Columns and Other Compression Members 6-270
10.7.6 Design of Beams and Other Flexural Members 6-274
10.7.7 Design of Plate Girders 6-281
10.7.8 Combined Stresses 6-283
10.7.9 Design of Trusses 6-284
10.7.10 Composite Construction 6-284
10.7.11 Special Design Considerations 6-288
10.8 LOAD FACTOR DESIGN METHOD 6-290
10.8.1 General 6-290
10.8.2 Basis of Design 6-290
10.8.3 Local Buckling 6-291
10.8.4 Design of Tension Members 6-291
10.8.5 Design of Columns and Other Compression Members 6-294
10.8.6 Design of Beams and Other Flexural Members 6-299
10.8.7 Design of Plate Girders 6-306
10.8.8 Members Under Torsion and Combined Forces 6-309
10.8.9 Design of Trusses 6-312
10.8.10 Design of Composite Members 6-312
10.8.11 Special Design Considerations 6-316
10.8.12 Seismic Design Provisions 6-319
10.9 CONNECTIONS, JOINTS AND FASTENERS 6-326
10.9.1 Design Provisions 6-326
10.9.2 Welds 6-328
10.9.3 Bolts, Rivets and Threaded Parts 6-331
10.9.4 Shear Rupture 6-339
10.9.5 Connecting Elements 6-339
10.9.6 Fillers 6-340
10.9.7 Splices 6-340
10.9.8 Bearings 6-340
10.9.9 Column Bases and Bearing on Supports 6-341
10.9.10 Anchor Bolts 6-341
10.10 SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS 6-341
10.10.1 Camber 6-341
10.10.2 Expansion and Contraction 6-341
10.10.3 Deflection and Vibration 6-341
10.10.4 Corrosion 6-342
6-xiv
10.11 FABRICATION, ERECTION AND QUALITY CONTROL 6-342
10.11.1 Shop Drawings 6-342
10.11.2 Fabrication 6-342
10.11.3 Erection 6-343
10.11.4 Quality Control 6-343
10.12 SURFACE TREATMENT 6-344
10.12.1 General 6-344
10.12.2 Weather Condition 6-344
10.12.3 Cleaning of Surfaces 6-344
10.12.5 Protection against Damage 6-345
10.12.6 Painting Galvanized Surfaces 6-345
10.13 DESIGN DOCUMENTS 6-346
10.13.1 General 6-346
10.13.2 Drawings 6-346
10.13.3 Standard Symbols and Nomenclature 6-346
10.13.4 Notation for Welding 6-346
Chapter 11 Timber Structures
11.1 SCOPE 6-347

11.2 NOTATION 6-347
11.3 TERMINOLOGY 6-348 .
11.3.1 Structural Purpose Definitions 6-348
11.3.2 Definitions of Defects in Timber 6-348
11.4 MATERIALS 6-349
11.5 PERMISSIBLE STRESSES 6-354
11.5.1 Basic Permissible Stress 6-354
11.5.2 Modification Factors for Permissible Stresses 6-354
11.6 BEAMS 6-355
11.6.1 Design Consideration 6-355
:11.6.2 Loads 6-355
11.6.3 Solid Beams 6-355
11.6.4 Nail Laminated Beams 6-356
11.7 COLUMNS 6-359
11.7.2 Solid Columns 6-360
11.7.3 Built-up Col umns- Box Column 6-360
11.7.4 Built-up Columns- Spaced Columns 6-361
11.7.5 Structural Member Subjected to Bending and 6-361
Axial Stress
11.8 JOINTS 6-362

11.8.1 Common Steel Wire Nail Joints 6-362
11.8.2 Bolted Joints 6-363
6-xv
Chapter 12 Ferrocement Structures
12.1 SCOPE 6-371
12.2.1 Reinforcement Parameters 6-371
12.2.2 Notation 6-372
12.3 MATERIALS 6-373
12.3.1 Cement 6-373'
12.3.3 Water 6-374
12.3.5 Mix Proportioning 6-374
12.4 DESIGN 6-375
12.4.2 Strength Requirements 6-375
12.4.3 Service Load Design 6-377
12.4.4 Serviceability Requirements 6-378
12.4.5 Particular Design Parameters 6-378
12.4.6 Design Aids 6-378
12.5 FABRICATION 6-379
12.5.2 Construction Methods 6-380
12.6 MAINTENANCE 6-380
12.6.1 General 6-380
12.6.2 Blemish and Stain Removal 6-380
12.6.3 Protective Surface Treatments 6-383
12.7 DAMAGE REPAIR 6-383
12.7.1 Common Types of Damage 6-383
12.7.2 Evaluation of Damage 6-384
12.7.3 Surface Preparation for Repair of Damage 6-384

. .
12.7.4 Repair Materials 6-385
12.7.5 Repair Procedure 6-385
12.8 TESTING 6-386
12.8.1 Test Requirement 6-386
12.8.2 Test Methods 6-386
Appendices
Appendix A Conversion of Expressions from SI to FPS Units 6-390
AppendixB Methods of Soil Exploration and Sampling 6-407
AppendixC Guidelines for Computing the Column 6-410
Interaction Diagrams
AppendixD Calculation of Volume Fraction of Reinforcement 6-415
AppendixE Common Types and Sizes of Steel Meshes 6-416
Used in Ferrocement
6-xvi
CHAPTER l]
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 Scope
"The general requirements for the structural design of buildings, structures, and components thereof are
specified in this chapter. These requirements shall apply to all buildings and structures regulated by this
code. All applied loads required for structural design shall be determined in accordance with the provisions
of Chapter 2. Design parameters required for the structural design of foundation elements shall conform to
the provisions of Chapter 3. Design of structural members using various construction materials shall comply
with the relevant provisions of Chapters 4 through 12. The FPS equivalents of the empirical expressions
used throughout Part 6 are listed in Appendix A.
1.1.2 Definitions
The following definitions shall provide the meaning of certain terms used in this chapter.
BASE SHEAR: Total design lateral force or shear at the base of a structure.
BASIC WIND SPEED : The fastest mile wind speed in km/h, at 10 metres above the mean ground level
under terrain Exposure-B defined in Sec 2.4.4 and associated with an annual probability oi occurrence
of0.02.
BEARING WALL SYSTEM: A structural system without a complete vertical load carrying space frame.
BRACED FRAME: An essentially vertical truss system of the concentric or eccentric type which is provided
to resist lateral forces.
BUILDING FRAME SYSTEM : An essentially complete space frame which provides support for gravity
loads.
CONCENTRIC BRACED FRAME (CBF) : A steel braced frame designed in conformance with
Sec 10.5.17.8.
Part6 6-1
Structural Design
Part6
Structural Design
COLLECTOR : A member or element used to transfer lateral forces from a portion of a structure to the
vertical elements of the lateral force resisting elements. . .
BUILDINGS :Structures that enclose a space and are used for various occupancies.
DEAD LOAD : The load due to the weight of all permanent structural and nonstructural components of a
building or a structure, such as walls, floors, roofs and fixed service equipment.
DIAPHRAGM : A horizontal or nearly horizontal system acting to transmit lateral forces to the vertical
resisting elements. The term "diaphragm" includes horizontal bracmg systems.
DUAL SYSTEM : A combination of Moment Resisting Frames and Shear Walls or Braced Frames to resist
lateral loads designed in accordance with the criteria of Sec 1.3.2.
ECCENTRIC BRACED FRAME (EBF) : A steel braced frame designed in conformance with
Sec 10.5.17.9.
FASTEST-MILE WIND SPEED : The highest sustained mean wind speed in km/h based on the time
required for a one-mile (1.61 km) long sample of air to pass a fixed point.
HORIZONTAL BRACING SYSTEM : A horizontal truss system that serves the same function as a floor or
roof diaphragm.
INTERMEDIATE MOMENT RESISTING FRAME (IMRF) : A concrete moment resisting frame designed in
accordance with Sec 8.3.10.
·
LIVE LOAD:The load superimposed by the use and occupancy of a building.
MOMENT RESISTING FRAME : A frame in which members and joints are capable of resisting forces
primarily by flexure.
ORDINARY MOMENT RESISTING FRAME (OMRF) : A moment resisting frame not meeting special
detailing requirements for ductile behaviour.
·
PRIMARY FRAMING SYSTEM:That part of the structural system assigned to resist lateral forces.
SHEARWALL: A wall designed to resist lateral forces parallel to the plane of the wall (sometimes referred
to as a vertical diaphragm or a structural wall).
SLENDER BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES :Buildings and structures having a height exceeding five times
the least horizontal dimension, or having a fundamental natural frequency less than 1 Hz. For those cases
where the horizontal dimensions vary with height, the least horizontal dimension at mid height shall be
used.
SOFT STOREY : Storey in which the lateral stiffness is less than 70 per cent of the stiffness of the storey
above.
SPACE FRAME : A three-dimensional structural system without bearing walls composed of members
interconnected so as to function as a complete self contained unit with or without the aiJ of horizontal
diaphragms or floor bracing systems.
SPECIAL MOMENT RESISTING FRAME (SMRF) : A moment resisting frame specially detailed to provide
ductile behaviour complying with the requirements of Chapter 8 or 10 for concrete or steel frames
respectively.
SPECIAL STRUCTURAL SYSTEM : A structural system not listed in Table 6.1.2 and specially designed to
carry the lateral loads. See Sec 1.3.2 (e).
STOREY: The space between any two floor levels including the roof of a building. Storey-x'is the storey
below level x.
STOREY SHEAR, Vx :The summation of design lateral forces above the storey under consideration.
STRENGTH : The usable capacity of an element or a member to resist the load as prescribed in these
provisions.
TERRAIN : The ground surface roughness condition when considering the size and arrangement of
obstructions to the wind.
TOWER : A tall, slim vertical structure.
6-2
Chapterl
VERTICAL LOAD-CARRYING FRAME : A space frame designed to carry all vertical gravity loads.
WEAK STOREY : Storey in which the lateral strength is less than 80 per cent of that of the storey above.
1.1.3 Symbols and Notation

The following symbols and notation shall apply to the provisions of this chapter :
c numerical coefficient specified in Sec 2.5.6.1

D = dead load on a member including self weight and weight of components, materials and
permanent equipments supported by the member
E earthquake Ioacf
E' amplified earthquake load equal to (0.375R)E
f. == lateral force applied at Ievel-I of a building
I
Ft a portion of the seismic base shear, V, considered concentrated at the top of the building in
addition to the force Fn
h height of a building or a structure above ground level in metres
hi,hn,hx = height in metres above ground level to level-i, -n or -x respectively
Ievel-i i-th level of a structure above the base; i=1 designates the first level above the base
Ievel-n = upper most level of a structure
level-x x-th level of a structure above the base; x=1 designates the first level above the base.
L live load due to intended use or occupancy
Mx overturning moment at level-x
v the total design lateral force or shear at the base
Vx = the storey shear at storey Ievel-x
R = response modification coefficient for structural system given in Table 6.2.26 for seismic design.
T fundamental period of vibration in seconds
W' = the weight of an element or component
z seismic zone coefficient given in Table 6.2.22
Ll = storey lateral drift.
1.2 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS
1.2.1 General
All buildings and structures shall be designed and constructed in conformance with the provisions of this
section. The buildings and portions thereof shall support all loads including dead Ioacf specified in this
chapter and elsewhere in this Code. Impact, fatigue and self-straining forces shall be considered where these
forces occur.
1.2.2 Buildings and Structures

A structure shall ordinarily be described as an assemblage of framing members and components arranged
to support both gravity and lateral forces. Structures may be classified as building and non-building
structures. Structures that enclose a space and are used for various occupancies shall be called buildings or
building structures. Structures other than buildings, such as water tanks, bridges, communication towers,
chimneys etc., shall be called non-building structures. When used in conjunction with the word building(s),
the word structure(s) shall mean non-building structures, e.g. 'buildings and structures' or 'buildings or
structures'. Otherwise the word 'structures' shall include both buildings and non-building structures.
1.2.3 Structure Importance Category

For the purpose of these provisions, buildings, structures and related equipments shall be classified into five
structure importance categories as listed in Table 6.1.1, based on the level of necessity of remaining safe and
functional during any post disaster period e.g. after a cyclone, or an earthquake. Each building or structure
shall be placed in one of the structure importance categories and provided with a structure importance
coefficient for design against wind and earthquake induced forces.
1.2.4 Safety
Buildings, structures and components thereof, shall be designed and constructed to support all loads,
including dead loads, without exceeding the allowable stresses or specified strengths (under applicable
factored loads) for the materials of construction in the structural members and connections.
1.2.5 Serviceability ·
Structural framing systems and components shall be designed with adequate stiffness to have deflections,
vibration, or any other deformations within the serviceability limit of building or structure specified in this
chapter.
1.2.6 Rationality
Structural systems and components thereof shall be designed and constructed based on rational methods
which shall include, but not be limited to, the following provisions.
1.2.6.1 Analysis : Analysis of the structural systems shall be made for determining the load effects on the
resisting elements and connections, based on well established principles of mechanics taking equilibrium,

Part6
Structural Design
geometric comp atibility and both short and long term properties of the construction materials into account
and incorporatmg the following:
a) Mathematical Model : A mathematical model of the physical structure shall represent the spatial
distribution of stiffness and other properties of the structure which is adequate to provide a complete
load path capable of transferring all loads and forces from their points of origin to the load-resisting
elements for obtaining various load effects. For dynamic analysis, mathematical model shall also
incorporate the appropriately distributed mass and damping properties of the structure adequate for
the determination of the significant features of its dynamic response. A three dimensional model shall
be used to represent a structure having highly irregular plan configuration such as those listed in
Table 6.1.4 and having rigid or semirigid floor and roof diaphragms.
. b) Loads and Forces : All prescribed loads and forces to be supported by the structural systems shall be
determined in accordance with the applicable provisions of this chapter and Cha ter 2. Loads shall be
r
applied on the mathematical model specified in (a) above at appropriate spatia locations and along
aesired directions.
Table 6.1.1
Structure Importance Categories
Structure Occupancy Type or Functions of Structure

Importance
Category General Particular
I Essential 1. Hospital and other medical facilities having surgery and

Facilities emergency treatment area.
2. Fire and police stations.
3. Tanks or other structures containing, housing or supporting
water or other fire-suppression materials or equipment
required for the protection of essential or hazardous facilities,
or special occupancy structures.
4. Emergency vehicle shelters and garages.
5. Structures and equipment in emergency-preparedness centres,
including cyclone and flood shelters.
6. Standby power-generating equipment for essential facilities.
7. �
Structures and equ ment in government communication
centres and other fad 1ties required for emergency response.
II Hazardous Structures housing, supporting or containing sufficient quanti-

Facilities ties of toxic or explosive substances to be dangerous to the
safety of the general public if released.
III �ecial 1. Covered structures whose primary occupancy is public

ccupancy assembly with capacit k 300 persons.
Structures 2. Buildings for schools t ough secondary or day-care centres
with capacity> 250 students.
3. Buildings for colleges or adult education schools with capacity
> 500 students.
4. Medical facilities with 50 or more resident incapacitated
y.atients, not included above.
5. ails and detention facilities.
6. All structures with occupancy> 5,000 persons.
7. �
Structures and equ ment in power- enerating stations and
�
other public utility acilities not inclu ed above, and required
for continued operation.
N Standard All structures having occupancies or functions not listed above.

Occupancy '
Structures
v Low Risk Buildings and Structures that exhibit a low risk to human life
Structures and roperty in the event of failure, such as agricultural
ct
buil ings, minor stor '1 e facilities, temporary facilities,
construction facilities, an boundary walls.
c) Soil-Structure Interaction : Soil-structure interaction effects, where requiredr shall be included in the
analysis by appropriately including the properly substantiated properties of soil into the mathematical
model specifiea in (a) above.
6-4
Chapter!
1.2.6.2 Distribution of Horizontal Shear : The total lateral force shall be distributed to the various
elements of the lateral force-resisting system in proportion to their rigidities considering the rigidity of the
horizontal bracing systems or diaphragms.
1.2.6.3 Horizontal Torsional Moments: Structural systems and components shall be designed to sustain
additional forces resulting from torsion due to eccentricity between the centre of application of the lateral
forces and the centre of ngidity of the lateral force resistmg system. Forces shall not be decreased due to
torsional effects. For accidental torsion, requirements for seismic forces shall conform to Sec 2.5.6.5.
1.2.6.4 Stability Against Overturning and Sliding : Every building or structure shall be designed to resist
the overturning and sliding effects caused by the lateral forces specified in this chapter.
1.2.6.5 Anchorage : Anchorage of the roof to wall and columns, and of walls and columns to foundations,
shall be provided to resist the uplift and sliding forces resulting from the application of the prescribed loads.
Additional requirements for masonry or concrete walls shall be those given m Sec 1.7.2.7.
1.2.6.6 General Structural Integrity : Buildings and structural systems shall possess general structural
integrity, that is the ability to sustain local damage caused due to misuse or accidental overloading, with the
structure as a whole remaining stable and not being damaged to an extent disproportionate to the original
local damage.
1.2.7 Proportioning of Structural Elements

Structural elements, components and connections shall be proportioned and detailed based on the design
methods provided in the subsequent chapters for various materials of construction, such as reinforced
concrete, masonry, steel etc. to resist various load effects obtained from a rational analysis of the structural
system.
1.2.8 Wails and Framing .

Walls and structural framing shall be erected true and plumb in accordance with the design. Interior walls,
permanent partitions and temporary partitions exceeding 1.8 m of height shall be designed to resist all
loads to which they are subject. If not otherwise specified e1sewhere in this Code, walls shall be designed for
a minimum load of 0.25 kN/m2 applied perpendicular to the wall surfaces. The deflection of such walls
under a load of 0.25 kN/m2 shall not exceed 2l0 of the span for walls with brittle finishes and 1�0 of the
span for walls with flexible finishes. However, flexible, folding or portable partitions shall not be required to
meet the above load and deflection criteria, but shall be anchored to the supporting structure.
1.2.9 Additions to Existing Structures

When an existing building or structure is extended or otherwise altered, all portions thereof affected by
such cause shall be strengthened, if necessary, to comply with the safety and serviceability requirements
provided in Sec 1.2.4 and 1.2.5 respectively.
1.2.10 Phased Construction

When a buildin� or structure is planned or anticipated to undergo phased construction, structural members
therein shall be mvestigated ancf designed for any additional stresses arising due to such effect.
1.2.11 Load Combinations and Stress Increase

Every building, structure, foundation or components thereof shall be designed to sustain, within the
allowable stress or specified strength (under factored load}, the most unfavourable effects resulting from
various combinations of loads specified in Sec 1.5.5 and 2.7. Except otherwise ermitted by Sec 1.5.5 or any
other section of this Code, maximum increase in the allowable stress shalr be 33% when allowable or
working stress method of design is followed.
For soil stresses due to foundation loads, load combinations and stress increase specified in Sec 2.7.4 for
allowable stress design method shall be used.
1.3 STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS
1.3.1 General
Every structure shall have one of the basic structural systems specified in Sec 1.3.2 or a combination thereof.
The structural configuration shall be as specified in Sec 1.3.4 with the limitations imposed in Sec 1.3.5.
1.3.2 Basic Structural Systems

Structural systems for buildings and other structures shall be designated as one of the types listed in
Table 6.1.2 and are defined as follows:
a) Bearing Wall System : A structural system having bearing walls or bracing systems without a complete
vertica1 load carrying frame to support gravity loads. Resistance to lateral loads is provided by sbear
walls or braced frames.
·

Part6
Structural Design
Table 6.1.2
Basic Structural Systems and Height Limits for Seismic Zone 3 •
Basic Structural Lateral Force Resisting System- Description H'2l

System <tl (metres)
a. Bearing Wall 1. �
Li ht framed walls with shear panels
System i Pl �
ood walls for structures, 3 - storeys or less ---
ii) A I other light framed walls 20

2. Shear walls
i) Concrete 50
ii) Masonry 40
3. Light steel-framed bearing walls with tension only 20
bracin s cf
4. Brace frames where bracing carries gravity loads 50
i) Steel ---
ii) Concrete (3) 20

iii) Heavy timber
b. Building Frame 1. Steel eccentric braced frame (EBF) 75
System 2. �
Li ht framed walls with shear panels
i Pl �
ood walls for structures 3-storeys or less 20
ii) A I other light framed walls 20
3. Shear walls
i) Concrete 75
ii) Masonry 50
4. Concentric braced frames (CBF)
i) Steel 50
- --
ii) Concrete (3)
iii) Heavy timber 20
c. Moment 1. Special moment resisting frames (SMRF)
Resisting i) Steel N.L.
Frame System ii) Concrete N.L.
2. Intermediate moment resisting frames (IMRF), - --
concrete<4>
3. Ordinary moment resisting frames (OMRF) 50
i) Steel
ii) Concrete <5> ---
d. Dual System 1. Shear walls

i) Concrete with SMRF N.L.
ii) Concrete with steel OMRF 50
iii) Concrete with concrete IMRF <4l 50
iv) Masonry with SMRF 50
v) Masonry with steel OMRF 50
Masonry with concrete IMRF <3l
---
vi)
2. Steel Eccentric Braced Frame (EBF) N.L.
i) With Steel SMRF
ii) With Steel OMRF N.L.
3. Concentric braced frame BF) � 50
i) Steel with steel SM F
ii) Steel with steel OMRF N.L
50
iii) Concrete with concrete SMRF <3> ---
iv) Concrete with concrete IMRF <3l ---
e. Special
Structural Structural systems not listed above - --
Systems
Notes: (1) Basic structural systems are defined in Sec 1.3.2.
(2) H=Height limit applicable to structures in Seismic Zone 3, except as p ermitted by Sec 1.5.4.8.
(3) Prohibited in Seismic Zone 3
(4) Prohibited in Seismic Zone 3, except as permitted in Sec 2.5.9.3
(5) Prohibited in Seis m i c Zones 2 and 3, See Sec 1.7.2.6
N.L. No Limit
--- Not applicable
..
For Seismic Zones see Sec 2.5.4.
b) Building Frame System : A structural system with an essentially complete space frame providing
support for gravity loads. Resistance to lateral loads is provided by shear walls or braced frames
separately.
6-6
Chapterl
c) Moment Resisting Frame System : A structural system with an essentially complete space frame
providing support for gravity loads. Moment resisting frames also provide resistance to lateral load
primarily by flexural action of members, and may be classified as one of the following types:
i) Special Moment Resisting Frames (SMRF)

ii) Intermediate Moment Resisting Frames (IMRF)
iii) Ordinary Moment Resisting Frames (OMRF).
The framing system, IMRF and SMRF shall have special detailings to provide ductile behaviour
conforming to the provisions of Sec 8.3 and 10.5.17 for concrete and steel structures respectively. OMRF
need not conform to the ductility requirements of Chapter 8 or 10.
d) Dual System : A structural system having a combination of the following framing systems :
i) Moment resisting frames (SMRF, IMRF or steel OMRF), and

ii) Shearwalls or braced frames.
The two systems specified in d(i) and d(ii) above shall be designed to resist the total lateral force in
proportion to their relative rigidities considering the interaction of the dual system at all levels.
However, the moment resisting frames shall be capable of resisting at least 25% of the applicable total
seismic lateral force, even when wind or any other lateral force governs the design.
e) Special Structural System : A structural system not defined above nor listed in Table 6.1.2 and specially
designed to carry the lateral loads, such as tube-in-tube, bundled tube, etc.
f) Non-building Structural System: A structural 8ystem used for purposes other than in buildings and
conforming to Sec 1.5.4.8, 1.5.4.9, 2.4.6.4 and 2.5.9.
1.3.3 Combination of Structural Systems

When structural systems of Sec 1.3.2 above are combined for incorporation into the same structure, design
of the combined system shall conform to the provisions of Sec 2.5.6.6.
1.3.4 Structural Configurations

Based on the structural configuration, each structure shall be designated as a regular, or irregular structure
as defined below :
1.3.4.1 Regular Structures : Regular structures have no significant physical discontinuities in plan or
vertical configuration or in their lateral force resisting systems such as the irregular features described in
Sec 1.3.4.2 below.
1.3.4.2 Irregular Structures : Irregular structures have significant physical discontinuities in configuration
or in their lateral force resisting systems. Irregular structures have either vertical irregularity or plan
irregularity or both in their structural configurations.
a) Vertical Irregularity : Structures having one or more of the irregular features listed in Table 6.1.3 shall
be designated as having a vertical irregularity.
Exception:
Where no storey drift ratio under design lateral force is greater than 1.3 times the storey drift ratio of the storey
above, the structure may be deemed not to have irregularities of Type I or II in Table 6.1.3. For this case, the storey
drifts may be calculated neglecting torsional effect and the storey drift ratio for the top two storeys need not be
considered.
b) Plan Irregularity: Structures having one or more of the irregular features listed in Table 6.1.4 shall be
designated as having a plan irregularity.
1.3.5 Structural System Limitations ·
The following limitations shall be imposed on the use of some structural systems and configurations:
a) Structural Irregularities: Structures with vertical irregularity Type Vas defined in Table 6.1.3 shall not
be over 9.0 metres in height where the weak storey has a calculated strength of less than 65% of the
storey above. However for structures, where a weak storey is capable of resisting a total seismic force of
0.375R times the design force prescribed in Sec 2.5.6, the above [imitation shall not be applied.
Structures having irregular features described in Table 6.1.3 or 6.1.4 shall be designed in compliance
with the additional requirements of the sections referenced in these Tables.
b) Special Structural Systems : Structural systems defined in Sec 1.3.2(e) shall be demonstrated by technical
and test data to be equivalent, with regard to dynamic characteristics, lateral force resistance and energy
absoll'tion, to one ofthe structural systems listed in Table 6.2.24, for obtaining an equivalent R value for
seismic design.

Part6
Structural Design
Table 6.1.3
Vertical Irregularities of Structures
Vertical Irregularity Reference

Type Definition Section
I Stiffness Irregularity (SoU Storey) :

A soft storey is one in which the lateral stiffness is less than 70 per cent of that in 2.5.5.1
l
the store above or less than 80 per cent of the average stiffness of the three
storeys a ove.
II Mass Irregularity :
Mass irregularity shall be considered to exist where the effective mass of an 2.5.5.1
storey is more than 150 per cent of the effective mass of an adjacent storey. A
roof which is lighter than the floor below need not be considered.
III Vertical Geometric Irregularity :
f
Vertical geometric irre ularity shall be considered to exist where horizontal 2.5.5.1
dimension of the latera force-resisting system in any storey is more than 130 per
cent of that in an adjacent storey, one-storey penthouses need not be considered.
IV In-Plane Discontinuity in Vertical Lateral Force-Resisting Element:
An in-plane offset of the lateral load-resisting elements greater than the length of 1.5.5
those elements.
v Discontinuity in Capacity (Weak Storey) :
� weak storey is one in which the storey st�en�h is less than 80 per cent C?f t� at 1.5.4.3,
m the storey above. The storey strength IS t e total strength of all seismic- 1.3.5
resisting elements sharing the storey shear for the direction under consideration.
See Sec 1.3.5 (a)
Table 6.1.4
Plan Irregularities of Structures
Plan Irregularity Reference

Type Definition Section
I Torsional Irregularity (to be considered when diaphragms are not flexible) : 1.5.4.2,
�
Torsional irregularit shall be considered to exist when the maximum storey 2.5.6.5,
drift, computed inc uding accidental torsion, at one end of the structure 1.5.4.3,
transverse to an axis is more than 1.2 times the average of the storey drifts of 1.7.2.9(d)
the two ends of the structure.
II Reentrant Corners:
Plan configurations of a structure and its lateral force-resisting system contain 1.7.2.9(d)
reentrant corners, where both projections of the structure beyond a reentrant
corner are greater than 1.5 per cent of the plan dimension of the structure in the
given direction.
III Diaphragm Discontinuity :
Diaphragms with abrupt discontinuities or variations in stiffness, includin � 1.7.2.9(d)
�
those havin cutout or open areas �reater than 50 per cent of the gross enclose
area of the iaphragm, or changes m effective diaphragm stiffness of more than
50 per cent from one storey to the next.
IV Out-of-plane Offsets : 1.5.5
Discontinuities in a lateral force path, such as out-of-plane offsets of the vertical 1.7.2.9 (d)
elements.
v Nonparallel Systems :
The vertical lateral load-resisting elements are not parallel to or symmetric 1.5.4.2
about the major orthogonal axes of the lateral force-resisting system.
See Sec 1.3.5(a)
1.4 DESIGN FOR GRAVITY LOADS
1.4.1 General
Design of buildings and components thereof for gravity loads shall conform to the requirements of this
section. Gravity loads, such as dead load and live loads applied at the floors or roof of a building shall be
determined in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2.
1.4.2 Floor Design

Floor slabs and decks shall be designed for the full dead and Jive loads as specified in Sec 2.2 and 2.3
respectively. Floor supporting elements such as beams, joists, columns etc. shall be designed for the full
dead load and the appropriately reduced live loads set forth by the provisions of Sec 2.3. Design of floor
elements shall also conform to the following provisions :
6-8
Chapter 1
a) Uniformly Distributed Loads: Where uniform floor loads are involved, consideration may be limited to
full dead load on all spans in combination with full live load on adjacent spans and on alternate spans
to determine the most unfavourable effect of stresses in the member concerned.
b) Concentrated Loads : Provision shall be made in designing floors for a concentrated load as set forth in
Sec 2.3.3.2 applied at a location wherever this load acting upon an otherwise unloaded floor would
produce stresses greater than those caused by the uniform foad required therefor.
c) Partition Loads : Loads due to permanent partitions shall be treated as a dead load applied over the
floor as a uniform line load having an intensity equal to the weight per metre run of the partitions.
Loads for light movable partitions shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of
Sec 2.3.3.3.
d) Design of Members : Floor members, such as slabs or decks, beams, ·oists etc. shall be desi�ned to
d
sustain the worst effect of the dead plus live loads or any other loa combinations as specified in
Sec 2.7. Where floors are used as diaphragms to transmit lateral loads between various resisting
elements, those loads shall be determined folfowing the provisions of Sec 1.7.2.9. Detailed design of the
floor elements shall be performed using the procedures provided in Chapters 4 through 12 for various
construction materials.
1.4.3 Roof Design

Roofs and their su porting elements shall be designed to sustain, within their allowable stresses or specified
r
strength limits, a! dead loads and live loads as set out by the provisions of Sec 2.2 and 2.3 respectively.
Design of roof members shall also conform to the following requirements :
a) Application of Loads : When uniformly distributed loads are considered for the design of continuous
structural members, load including full dead loads on all spans in combination with full live loads on
adjacent spans and on alternate span, shall be investigated to determine the worst effects of loading.
Concentrated roof live loads and special roof live loads, where applicable, shall also be considered in
design.
b) Unbalanced Loading :Effects due to unbalanced loads shall be considered in the design of roof
members and connections where such loading will result in more critical stresses. Trusses and arches
shall be designed to resist the stresses causea by uniform live loads on one half of the span if such
loading results in reverse stresses, or stresses greater in any portion than the stresses produced by this
unit live load when applied upon the entire span.
c) Rain Loads: Roofs, where ponding of rain water is anticipated due to blockage of roof drains, excessive
deflection or insufficient sfopes, shall be designed to support such loads. Loads on roofs due to rain
shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Sec 2.6.3. In addition to the dead load of the
roof, either the roof live load or the rain load, whichever is of higher intensity, shall be considered in
design.
1.4.4 Reduction of Live Loads

The design live loads specified in Sec 2.3, may be reduced to appropriate values as permitted by the
1.4.5 Posting of Live Loads

In every building, of which the floors or parts thereof have a design live load of 3.5 kN/m2 or more, and
which are used as library stack room, file room, parking garage, machine or plant room, or used for
industrial or storage purposes, the owner of the building shall ensure that the live loads for which such
space has been designed, are posted on durable metal plates as shown in Fig 6.1.1, securely affixed in a
conspicuous place in each space to which they relate. If such plates are lost, removed, or defaced, the owner
shall be responsible to have them replaced.
1.4.6 Restrictions on Loading

The building owner shall ensure that the live load for which a floor or roof is or has been designed, will not
be exceeded during its use.
1.4.7 Special Considerations

In the absence of actual dead and live load data, the minimum values of these loads shall be those specified
in Sec 2.2 and 2.3. In addition, special consideration shall be given to the following aspects of loading and
due allowances shall be made in design if occurrence of such loading is anticipated after construction of a
building:
a) Increase in Dead Load: Actual thickness of the concrete slabs or other members may become larger than
the designed thickness due to movements or deflections of the formwork during construction.
b) Future Installations: Changes in the numbers, types and positions of partitions and other installations
may increase actual load on the floors of a buildmg.

Part6
Structural Design
Metal plate
DESIGN FLOOR LIVE LOADING

e
Distributed load . ... . .... kN/m2
.. .
Concentrated Load . . .... .. kN
x>y
.., ,
Top of floor
Notes: (1) Minimum dimension of metal sign plate shall be 0.25 m

(2) Minimum size of lettering shall be 25 mm
(3) Minimum distance of the bottom of plate from the top of floor shall be 1.5 m
(4) Letterings shall be of metal embossed or cast on a metal plate
(5) Plate shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place in each space to which it relates.
Fig 6.1.1 Sample Live Load Sign
c) Occupancy Changes:Increase in live loads due to changes of occupancy involving loads heavier than
that oeing designed for.
1.4.8 Deflection and Camber

The deflection and camber requirements shall be those specified in the relevant sections of Chapters 4
through 12 for structural design using various materials.
1.5 DESIGN FOR LATERAL LOADS
1.5.1 General
Every building, structure or portions thereof shall be designed to resist the lateral load effects, such as those
due to wind or earthquake forces, in compliance with the requirements prescribed in this section.
1.5.2 Selection of Lateral Force for Design

Any of the lateral loads prescribed in Chapter 2, considered either alone or in combination with other
forces, whichever produces the most critical effect, shall govern the design. However, the structural
detailing requirements shall comply with those prescribed in Sec 1.7. When a dual structural system is used
to resistlateral loads, design shall also conform to Sec 1.3.2 (d).
1.5.3 Design for Wind Load

Desi� of buildings and their components to resist wind induced forces shall comply with the following
reqmrements:
1.5.3.1 Direction of Wind : Structural design for wind forces shall be based on the assumption that wind
may blow from any horizontal direction.
1.5.3.2 Design Considerations :Design wind load on the primary framing systems and components of a
building or structure shall be determined on the basis of the procedures provided in Sec 2.4 considering the
basic wmd speed, shape and size of the building, and the terrain exposure condition of the site. For slender
buildings and structures, dynamic response characteristics, such as fundamental natural frequency, shall be
determined for calculating the gust response coefficient. Load effects, such as forces, moments, deflections
etc. on various components of the building due to wind shall be determined from a static analysis of the
structure as specified in Sec 1.2.6.1.
1.5.3.3 Shielding Effect: Reductions in wind pressure on buildings and structures due to apparent direct
shielding effects of the up wind obstructions, such as man made constructions or natural terrain features,
shall not be permitted.
1.5.3.4 Dynamic Effects :Dynamic wind forces such as that from along-wind vibrations caused by the
dynamic wind-structure interaction effects, as set forth by the provisions of Sec 2.4.6.6, shall be considered
6-10
Chapterl
in the design of regular shaped slender buildings. For other dynamic effects such as cross-wind or torsional
responses as may oe experienced by buildings or structures having unusual �eometrical shapes (i.e. vertical
or plan irregularities hsted in Tables 6.1.3 and 6.1.4), response characteristics, or site locations, structural
design shall be made based on the information obtained either from other reliable references or from wind
tunnel test specified in Sec 1.5.3.5 below, complying with the other requirements of this section.
1.5.3.5 Wind Tunnel Test : Properly conducted wind-tunnel tests shall be required for those buildings or
structures having unusual geometric shapes, response characteristics, or site locations for which cross-wind.
response such as vortex shedding, galloping etc. warrant special consideration, and for which no reliable
literature for the determination of sucb effects is available. This test is also recommended for those
buildings or structures for which more accurate wind-loading information is desired than those given in this
section and in Sec 2.4. .
Tests for the determination of mean and fluctuating components of forces and pressures shall be considered
to be properly conducted only if the following requirements are satisfied:
a) The natural wind has been modelled to account for the variation of wind speed with height,
b) The intensity of the longitudinal components of turbulence has been taken into consideration in the
model,
c) The geometric scale of the structural model is not more than three times the geometric scale of the
longitudinal component of turbulence,
d) The response characteristics of the wind ttinnel instrumentation are consistent with the measurements
to be made, and
e) The Reynolds number is taken into consideration when determining forces and pressures on the
structural elements.
Tests for the purr.ose of determining the dynamic response of a structure shall be considered to be properly
conducted only If requirements (a) throu gh (e) above are fulfilled and, in addition, the structural moael is
scaled with due consideration to length, distribution of mass, stiffness and damping of the structure.
1.5.3.6 Wind Loads During Construction : Buildin�s, structures and portions thereof under construction,
and construction structures such as formwork, stagmg etc. shall be provided with adequate temporary
bracings or other lateral supports to resist the wind load on them during the erection and construction
phase.
1.5.3.7 Masonry Construction in High-Wind Regions : Design and construction of masonry structures
in high-wind regions shall conform to the requirements of Sec 4.9.
1.5.3.8 Height Limits : Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this Code, no height limits shall be
imposed, in general, on the design and construction of buildings or structures to resist wind induced forces.
1.5.4 Design for Earthquake Forces·

Design of structures and components thereof to resist the effects of earthquake forces shall comply with the
requirements of this section. One- and two-family dwellings in Seismic Zone 1 need not conform to the
provisions of this section.
1.5.4.1 Basic Design Consideration : For the purpose of earthquake resistant design, each structure shall
be placed in one of the seismic zones as given in Fig 6.2.8 and assigned with a structure importance category
as set forth in Sec 1.2.3. The seismic forces on structures shall be determined considering seismic zoning, site
soil characteristics, structural systems and configurations, height and dynamic properties of the structure as
]:>rovided in Sec 2.5. The structural system ancf configuration types for a building or a structure shall be
aetermined in accordance with the provisions of Sec 1.3. Other seismic design requirements shall be those
specified in this section.
1.5.4.2 Requirements for Directional Effects : For the purpose of these provisions, the seismic forces on
any building or structure shall be assumed to act non-concurrently in the direction of each principal axis of
the building or structure. The structural design shall also conform to the following requirements:
a) In Seismic Zones 2 and 3, provision shall be made for the effects of seismic forces acting in directions
other than the principal axes under each of the following circumstances:
i) The structure has plan irregularity Type Vas given in Table 6.1.4.
ii) The structure has plan irregularity Type I as given in Table 6.1.4 for both major axes.
iii) A column of a structure forms part of two or more intersecting lateral force resisting systems
except if the axial load in the column due to seismic forces acting in either direction is less than
20 per cent of the allowable column axial load.

Part6
Structural Design
b) The requirement that orthogonal effects be considered may be satisfied by designing such elements for
100 per cent of the prescribed seismic forces in one direction plus 30 per cent of the prescribed forces in
the perpendicular direction. The combination requiring the greater component strength shall be used
for design. Alternatively, the effects of the two orthogonal directions may be combined on a square
root-of-the-sum-of-the-squares (SRSS) basis. When the SRSS method of combining directional effects is
used, each term computed shall be assigned with the sign that will result in tne most conservative
result.
Also when amplified earthquake load, E' is used in the load combinations stipulated in Sec 2.7.5.2 for
design of steel structures using LFD method, orthogonal effects need not be considered.
1.5.4.3 Structural Configuration Requirements :Structures shall be designated as being regular or

irregular based on their structural configurations defined in Sec 1.3.4.
For structures in Seismic Zone 1 and for those in Seismic Zone 2 with Structure Importance Categories IV
and V, only cases with vertical irregularity Type V (Table 6.1.3) and plan irregularity Type I
(Table 6.1.4) need to be evaluated for seismic resistant design. All other structures having irregularities
listed in Tables 6.1.3 and 6.1.4 shall be designed to meet the additional requirements of the Code sections
referred to in those tables.
1.5.4.4 Methods of Analysis : Earthquake forces and their effects on various structural elements shall be
determined by using either a static anafysis method or a dynamic analysis method whichever is applicable
based on the limitations set forth in Sec 2.5.5.1 and conforming to Sec 1.2.6.1.
1.5.4.5 Minimum Design Seismic Force : The minimum design seismic forces shall be those determined
in accordance with the Sec 2.5.6 except as modified by Sec 2.5.7.2(c) when dynamic response method of
analysis is used.
1.5.4.6 Distribution of Seismic Forces : The total lateral seismic forces and moments shall be distributed
among various resisting elements at any level and along the vertical direction of a building or structure in
accordance with the provisions of Sec 2.5.6 unless otherwise determined by dynamic analysis or modified by
Sec 2.5.7.2.
1.5.4.7 Vertical Components of Seismic Forces : The effects of the vertical component of the seismic
ground motion on structural components shall be determined in accordance with the following provisions:
a) Requirements for Seismic Zone 3 : In Seismic Zone 3, effects of vertical ground motion on horizontal
cantilevers and prestressed concrete elements shall be considered as follows:
i) Horizontal cantilevers shall be designed for an upward seismic force of 0.20W'.
ii) In addition to all o.ther load combinations, horizontal prestressed concrete elements shall be
designed using a maximum of 50% of dead load as gravity load alone or in combination with
other lateral load effects.
b) Dynamic Analysis : The vertical seismic response of structures or structural elements may also be
determined using the dynamic response methods r.
rovided in Sec 2.5.7 based on the vertical
components of ground motion as specified in 2.5.7.1(d . However, the response used in design shall
not oe less than that obtained by the static procedure specified in (a) above.
1.5.4.8 Height Limits: Limits shall be placed on the heights of various structural systems in Seismic Zone
3 as set forth in Table 6.1.2 with the exceptions given below. Other requirements on height limits shall be
those provided in Sec 2.5.6.6.
Exception:
Regular structures may exceed the height limits specified in Table 6.1.2 by not more than 50 per cent under the following
conditions:
a) Unoccupied structures which are not accessible to the general public
b) Other structures when technical data is submitted in accordance with Sec 1.3.5(b).
1.5.4.9 .Non-building Structures: Seismic lateral force on non-building structures shall be determined in
accordance with the provisions of Sec 2.5.9. Other aesign requirements shall be those provided in this
chapter.
1.5.5 Overturning Requirements

Every structure shall be designed to resist the overturning effects caused by wind or earthquake forces
specified in Sec 2.4 and 2.5 respectively. The overturning moment Mx at any storey level-x of a building
shall be determined as :
6-12
Chapterl
(1.5.1)
where,
Height in metres at level- i, -x or -n respectively.

= Lateral force applied at level-i, i=1 ton.
Concentrated lateral force applied at level-n in addition to F n applicable for
earthquake only as defined in Sec 2.5.6. For all other lateral load cases, F1 = 0.
At any level, the increment of overturning moment shall be distributed to the various resisting elements in
the same manner as the distribution of horizontal shear prescribed in Sec 2.5.6.4. Overturning effects on
every element shall be carried down to the foundation Ievel. Also, the following requirements shall be
fulfiiled:
a) Redistribution of overturning effects may be made to other vertical members if framing members of
sufficient strength and stiffness are provided to transmit the required loads.
b) In Seismic Zones 2 and 3 , where a lateral force resistin � element is discontinuous, such as for vertical
irregularity Type IV in Table 6.1.3 or for plan irregulanty Type IV in Table 6.1.4 , columns supporting
such elements, when designed using strength design method, shall have the strength to resist tne axial
force resulting from the following load combinations, (i) and (ii) in addition to all other applicable load
combinations specified in Sec 2.7.5.
i) 1.0 D + 0.8 L + (0.375 R )E

ii) 0.85 D ± (0.375 R )E
When working stress design method is used, strength of such columns may be determined by using an
allowable stress increase oi 70% .
In addition, the design shall conform to the following provisions:
i) The axial forces in such columns need not exceed the designed capacity of other elements of the
structure transferring these loads to the column.
ii) For construction in Seismic Zones 2 and 3, such columns shall meet the detailing requirements
or member limitations given in Sec 8.3 and 10.5.17 for reinforced concrete and steel respectively.
Such columns shall also meet the requirements of Sec 1.8.4 for overturning moments to be
resisted at the foundation-soil interface.
c) At foundation level, the base overturning moment for the entire structure or for any one of its lateral
load-resisting elements, shall not exceed two-thirds of the dead load resisting moment. The weight of
the earth superimposed over footings may be used to calculate the dead load resisting moment.
1.5.6 Drift and Building Separation

1.5.6.1 Storey Drift Limitation : Storey drift is the displacement of one level relative to the level above or
below due to the design lateral forces. Excel't otherwise permitted in Sec 1.3.4.2(a) calculated storey drift
shall include both translational and torsional aeflections and conform to the following requirements:
a) Storey drift, ..1, shall be limited as follows:
i) L1 � 0.04h/R � 0.0051t for T < 0.7 second.

ii) L1 � 0.03h/R � 0.004h for T � 0.7 second.
iii) L1 � 0.0025h for unreinforced masonry structures.
where, h = height of the building or structure.
The period T used in this calculation shall be the same as that used for determining the base shear in
Sec 2.5.6. The limits involving R in (i) and (ii) above shall be applicable only when earthquake forces
are present.
b) The drift limits set out in (a) above may be exceeded where it can be demonstrated that greater drift
can be tolerated by both structural and nonstructural elements without affecting life safety.
1.5.6.2 Building Separation : All components of a structure shall be designed and constructed to act as an
integral unit unless they are separated structurally by a distance sufficient to avoid contact under the most
unfavourable condition of deflections due to lateral loads. For seismic loads, the separation shall be at least
0.375 R times the maximum drift due to design seismic forces.
·

Part 6
Structural Design
1.5.7 P-Delta Effects

The resulting member forces and moments and the storey drifts induced by P-Delta effects need not be
considered when the ratio of secondary moment to primary moment remains within 0.10. The ratio may be
evaluated for any storey as the product of the total dead and live loads above the storey and the lateral
drift in that storey divided by the product of the storey shear in that storey and the height of that storey.
In Seismic Zone 3, P-Delta effects need not be considered where the storey drift ratio does not exceed 0.02/R.
1.5.8 Uplift Effects

Uplift effects caused due to lateral loads shall be considered in design. When allowable (working) stress
method is used for design, dead loads used to reduce uplift shall be multiplied by a factor of 0.85.
1.6 DESIGN FOR MISCELLANEOUS LOADS
1.6.1 General
Buildings, structures and components thereof, when subject to loads other than dead, live, wind and
earthquake loads, shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of this section. Miscellaneous loads,
such as those due to temperature, rain, flood and surge etc. on buildings or structures, shall be determined
in accordance with Sec 2.6. Structural members subject to miscellaneous loads, not specified in Sec 2.6
shall be designed using well established methods given in any reliable references, and complying with the
other requirements of this Code.
1.6.2 Self-Straining Forces

Self-straining forces such as those arising due to assumed differential settlements of foundations and from
restrained dimensional changes due to temperature, moisture, shrinkage, creep, and similar effects, shall be
taken into consideration in the design of structural members.
1.6.3 Stress Reversal and Fatigue

Structural members and joints shall be investigated and designed against possible stress reversals caused
due to various construction loads. Where required, allowance shall be made in the design to account for the
effects of fatigue. The allowable stress may be appropriately reduced to account for such effects in the
structural members.
1.6.4 Flood and Surge Resistant Design

Buildings, structures and components thereof shall be designed, constructed and anchored to resist flotation,
collapse or any permanent movement due to loads including flood or surge. Structural members shall be
designed to resist both hydrostatic and significant hydrodynamic loads and effects of buoyancy resulting
fn;>m flood or surge. Flood and sur�e loa � s on buildings and structures shall be determined in accordance
_ _ _
With Sec 2.6.4. Load combmahon mcludmg· flood and surge loads shall conform to Sec 2.7. Design of
foundations to sustain these load effects shall conform to the provisions of Sec 1.8.
Stability against overturning and sliding caused due to wind and flood or surge loads simultaneously shall
be investigated, and such effects shall be resisted with a minimum factor of safety of 1.5, considering dead
load only.
1.7 DETAILED DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1.7.1 General
All structural framing systems shall comply with the requirements of this section. Only the elements of the
designated lateral force resisting systems can be used to resist design lateral forces specified in ChaJ?ter 2.
The individual components shall be designed to resist the prescribed forces acting on them. Design of
components shall also comply with the specific requirements for the materials confained in Chapters 4
through 12. In addition, such framing systems and components shall comply with the design requirements
provided in this section.
1.7.2 Structural Framing Systems

The basic structural systems are defined in Sec 1.3.2 and shown in Table 6.1.2, and each type is subdivided
by the types of framing elements used to resist the lateral forces. Special framing requirements are given in
the following sections in addition to those provided in Chapters 4 through 12.
1.7.2.1 Detailing Requirements for Combinations of Structural Systems: For components common to
different structural systems, a more restrictive detailing shall be provided.
1.7.2.2 Connections to Resist Seismic Forces : Connections which resist prescribed seismic forces shall be
designed in accordance with the seismic design requirements provided in Chapters 4 through 12. Detailed
sketches for these connections shall be given in the structural drawings.
1.7.2.3 Deformation Compatibility : All framing elements not required by design to be part of the lateral
force resisting system, shall be investigated and shown to be adequate for vertical load carrying capacity
when displaced 0.375R times the dispfacements resulting from the seismic lateral forces. For designs using
working stress methods, this capacity may be determined using an allowable stress increase of 70 per cent.
P-Delta effects on such elements shall be accounted for.
6-14
Chapter 1
a) Adjoining Rigid Elements : Moment resisting frames may be enclosed or adjoined by more rigid
elements which would tend to prevent a space frame from resisting lateral forces where it can be
shown that the action or failure of the more rigid elements will not impair the vertical and lateral load
resisting ability of the space frame.
b) Exterior Elements : Exterior nonbearing, non-shearwall panels or elements which are attached to or
enclose the exterior of a structure, shall be designed to resist the forces according to Eq (2.5.10) of
Chapter 2 if seismic forces are present, and shall accommodate movements of the structure resulting
from lateral forces or temperature changes. Such elements shall be supported by structural members or
by mechanical connections and fasteners joining them to structural members in accordance with the
following provisions:
i) Connections and panel joints shall allow for a relative movement between storeys of not less than
two times the storey drift caused by wind forces, 0.375R times the storey drift caused by design
seismic forces, or 12 rnm, whichever is greater.
ii) Connections to permit movement in the plane of the panel for storey drift shall be either sliding
connections using slotted or oversized holes, connections which r.ermit movement by bending of
steel, or other connections providing equivalent sliding and ductility capacity.
iii) Bodies of connections shall have sufficient ductility and rotation capability to preclude any
fracture of the anchoring elements or brittle failures at or near weldings.
iv) Bodies of the connection shall be designed for 1.33 times the seismic force determined by
Eq (2.5.10) of Chapter 2, or equivalent.
v) All fasteners in the connection system, such as bolts, inserts, welds, dowels etc. shall be designed
for 4 times the forces determined by Eq (2.5.10) of Chapter 2, or equivalent.
vi) Fasteners embedded in concrete shall be attached to, or hooked around reinforcing steel, or
otherwise terminated so as to transfer forces to the reinforcing steel effectively. .
1.7.2.4 Ties and Continuity

a) All parts of a structure shall be interconnected. These connections shall be capable of transmitting the
prescribed lateral force to the lateral force resisting system. As a minimum, any smaller l?ortions of a
·building or structure shall be tied to the remainder of the building or the structure w1th elements
having the strength to transfer at least Z/3 times the weight of the smaller portion.
b) A positive connection for resisting a horizontal force acting parallel to the member shall be provided for
each beam, girder, or truss. This force shall be not less than Z/5 times the sum of the dead and live load
tributary to the member.
1.7.2.5 Collector Elements : Collector elements shall be provided which are capable of transferring the
lateral forces originating in other portions of the structure to the element providing the resistance to those
forces.
1.7.2.6 Concrete Frames : When concrete frames are provided by design to be part of the lateral force
resisting system, they shall conform to the following provisions:
a) In Seismic Zone 3 these frames shall be designed as special moment resisting frames (SMRF).
b) In Seismic Zone 2 they shall, as a minimum, be intermediate moment resisting frames (IMRF).
1.7.2.7 Anchorage of Concrete and Masonry Walls: Concrete and masonry walls shall be anchored to all
floors and roofs which provide lateral support for the wall. The anchorage shall provide a positive direct
connection between the wall and floor or roof and shall be capable of resisting the horizontal forces
specified in Sec 2.5.8, or a minimum force of 3.0 kN per linear metre of wall, whichever is greater. Walls shall
be designed to resist bending between anchors where the anchor spacing exceeds 1.2 m. In masonry walls
of hollow units or cavity walls, anchors shall be embedded in a reinforced grouted structural element of the
wall. Deformations of the floor and roof diaphragms shall be considered in the design of the supported
walls and the anchorage forces in the diaphragms snail be determined in accordance with Sec 1.7.2.g oelow.
1.7.2.8 Boundary Members : Specially detailed boundary members shall be considered for shearwalls and
shearwall elements whenever their design is governed by flexure.
1.7.2.9 Floor and Roof Diaphragms : Deflection in the plane of the diaphragm shall not exceed the
permissible deflection of the attached elements. Permissible deflection shall be tnat deflection which will
permit the attached element to maintain its structural integrity under the individual loading and continue to
support the prescribed loads. Design of diaphragms shall also comply with the following requirements.
a) Diar.hragm Forces : Diaphragms shall be designed to resist the seismic forces given in Sec 2.5.8.3 or for
similar non-seismic lateral forces, whichever is greater.

Part 6
Structural Design
b) Diaphragm Ties :Diaphragms supportin g concrete or masonry walls shall have continuous ties, or
struts between the diaphragm chords to d1stribute the anchorage forces specified in Sec 1.7.2.7 above.
Added chords may be provided to form sub-diaphragms to transmit the anchorage forces to the main
cross ties.
c) WoodDiaphragms : Where wood diaphragms are used to laterally support concrete or masonry walls,
the anchorage shall conform to Sec 1.7.2.7 above. In seismic Zones 2 and 3 the following requirements
shall also apply:
i) Anchorage shall not be accomplished by use of toe nails or nails subject to withdrawal, nor shall
wood ledgers or framing be used in cross-grain bending or cross-grain tension.
ii) The continuous ties required by paragraph (b) above, shall be in addition to the diaphragm
sheathing.
d) Structures in Seismic Zone 3

i) For structures in Seismic Zone 3 having a plan irregularity of Types I, II, III or IV in
Table 6.1.4 connections of diaphragms to the vertical elements and to collector elements and
connections of collector elements to the vertical elements shall be designed without any increase
in allowable stresses for elements resisting the lateral forces.
ii) For structures having a plan irregularity of Type II in Table 6.1.4, diaphragm chords and
collectors shall be designed considering independent movement of any projecting wings of the
structure. Each of these diaphragm elements shall be designed for the more severe of the
following cases:
1) Motion of the projecting wings in the same direction.

2) Motion of the projecting wings in opposing directions.
Exception:
This requirement may be deemed to be satisfied if the procedures of Sec 2.5.7 when seismic forces are
present, in conjunction with a three dimensional model, have been used to determine the lateral seismic
forces for design.
1.7.2.10 Framing Below the Base : When structural framings continue below the base, the following
requirements shall be satisfied.
a) Framing between the Base and the Foundation: The strength and stiffness of the framing between the
base and the foundation shall not be less than that of the superstructure . The special detailing
requirements of Sec 8.3 or 10.4, as appropriate for reinforced concrete or steel, shall apply to columns
supporting discontinuous lateral force resisting elements and to SMRF, IMRF, and EBF system
elements below the base which are required to transmit the forces resulting from lateral loads to the
foundation.
b) Foundations :The foundation shall be capable of transmitting the design base shear and the overturning
forces from the superstructure into the supporting soil, but the short term dynamic nature of the loads
may be taken into account in establishing the soil properties. Se� 1.8 below, prescribes the additional
requirements for specific types of foundahon construction.
1.8 FOUNDATION DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1.8.1 General
The design and construction of foundation, foundation components and connection between the foundation
and superstructure shall conform to the requirements of this section and applicable provisions of Chapter 3
and other portions of this Code .
1.8.2 Soil Capacities

The bearing capacity of the soil, or the capacity of the soil-foundation system including footing, pile, pier or
caisson and the soil, shall be sufficient to support the structure with all prescribed loads, considering the
settlement of the structure. For piles, this refers to pile capacity as determined by pile-soil friction and
bearing which may be determined in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 3. For the load combination
includmg earthquake, the soil capacity shall be sufficient to resist loads at acceptable strains considering
both the short time loading and the dynamic properties of the soil. The stress and settlement of soil under
applied loads shall be determined based on estabhshed methods of Soil Mechanics.
1.8.3 Superstructure-to-Foundation Connection

The connection of superstructure elements to the foundation shall be adequate to transmit to the foundation
the forces for which the elements are required to be designed.
6-16
Chapterl
1.8.4 Foundation-Soil Interface

For regular buildings, the lateral force F1 considered for earthquake, may be omitted when determining the
overturning moment developed at the foundation-soil interface. The base overturning moments for the
entire structure or for any one of its lateral force-resisting elements, shall not exceed two-thirds of the dead
load resisting moment. The weight of the earth superimposed over footings may be used to calculate the
dead load resisting moment.
1.8.5 Special Requirements for Footings, Piles and Caissons in Seismic Zones 2 and 3
1.8.5.1 Piles and Caissons : Piles and caissons shall be designed for flexure whenever the top of such
members is anticipated to be laterally displaced by earthquake motions. The criteria and detailing
requirements of Sec 8.3 for concrete and Sec 10.5.17 for steel shall apply for a length of such members equa1
to 120 per cent of the flexural length.
1.8.5.2 Footing Interconnection

a) Footings and pile caps shall be completely interconnected by strut ties or other equivalent ·means to
restrain their lateral movements in any orthogonal direction.
b) The strut ties or other equivalent means as specified in (a) above, shall be capable of resisting in tension
or compression a force not less than 10% of the larger footing or column load unless it can be
demonstrated that equivalent restraint can be provided by frictional and passive soil resistance or by
other established means.
1.8.6 Retaining Wall Design

Retaining walls shall be designed to resist the lateral pressure of the retained material, under drained or
undrained conditions and including surcharge, in accordance with established engineering practice. For
such walls, the minimum factor of safety against base overturning and sliding due to applied earth pressure
shall be 1.5.
1.9 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REVIEW
Every building or structure designed shall have its design documents prepared in accordance with the
provisions of Sec 1.9.1. The minimum requirements for design review and construction observation shall be
those set forth under Sec 1.9.2 and 1.9.3 respectively.
1.9.1 Design Document

The design documents shall be prepared and signed by the engineer responsible for the structural design of
any building or structure intended for construction. The design documents shall include a design report,
and a set of structural drawings, which shall be prepared in compliance with Sec 1.9.1.1 and 1.9.1.2 below for
submittal to the concerned authority. For the purpose of this provision, the concerned authority shall be
either persons from the government approval agency for the construction, or the owner of the building or
the structure, or one of his representatives.
1.9.1.1 Design Report : The design report shall contain the description of the structural design with basic
design information as provided below, so that any other structural design engineer will be able to
independently verify the design parameters and the member sizes using these basic information. The design
report shall include, but not be hmited to, the following :
a) Name and governing edition of this Code and other referenced standards, and the specific portions,
stating chapter, section, clause etc. of these Code and standards including any specialist report used for
the structural design.
b) Methods used for the calculation of all applied loads along with basic load coefficients and other basic
information including any assumption or judgement made under special circumstances.
c) A drawing of the complete mathematical model prepared in accordance with Sec 1.2.6.1(a) to represent
the structure and showing on it the values, locations and directions of all applied loads, and location of
the lateral load resisting systems such as shearwalls, braced frames etc.
d) Methods of structural analysis, and results of the analysis such as shear, moment, axial force etc., used
for proportioning various structural members and joints including foundation members.
e) Methods of structural design including types and strength of the materials of construction used for
proportioning the structuraf members.
·
f) Reference of the soil report or any other documents used in the design of the structure, foundation or
components thereof.
g) Statement supporting the validity of the above design documents with date and signature of the
engineer responsible for the structural design.

Part6
Structural Design
h) When computer programs are used, to any extent, to aid in the analysis or design of the structure, the
following items, in addition to items (a) through (g) above, shall be requirea to be included in the
design report:
i) A sketch of the mathematical model used to represent the structure in the computer geqerated
analysis.
·
ii) The computer output containing the date of processing, program identification, identification of
structures being analysed, all input data, units and final resufts. The computer input data shall be
clearly distinguished from those computed in the program.
iii) A program description containing the information necessary to verify the input data and
interpret the results to determine tli.e nature and extent of the analysis and to check whether the
computations comply with the provisions of this Code.
iv) The first sheet of each computer run shall be signed by the engineer responsible for the structural
design.
1.9.1.2 Structural Drawings : The structural drawins.s shall include, but not be limited to, the following :
a) The first drawing sheet shall contain : (1) identification of the project to which the building or the
structure, or portion thereof belon gs, (2) reference to the design report specified in Sec 1.9.1.1 above, (3)
date of completion of design, and (4) identification and signature with date of the engineer responsible
for the structural design.
b) Drawing sheets, other than the first, shall include structural details of the elements of the structure
clearly showing all sizes, cross-sections and relative locations, connections, reinforcements, laps,
stiffeners, welding types, lengths and locations etc. whichever is applicable for a articular construction.
r
Floor levels, column centres and offset etc., shall be dimensioned. Camber o trusses and beams, if
required, shall be shown on drawings. For bolt connected members, connection types such as slip,
critical, tension or bearing type, shall be indicated on the drawing.
c) Drawings shall be prepared to a scale large enough to show the information clearly and the scales shall
be marked on the drawing sheets. Each drawing sheet shall be provided with the design specifications
including material types and strength, clear cover and development lengths of reinforcements, or any
other design parameter relevant to the member or connection details provided in that drawing sheet.
Each drawin� sheet shall also contain the signature with date of the engineer responsible for the
structural design.
1.9.2 Design Review

The design documents specified in Sec 1.9.1 shall be available for review when required by the concerned
authority. Review shall oe accomplished by an independent structural engineer qualified for this task and
appointed by the concerned authority. Design review shall be performed tli.rough mdependent calculations,
based on the information provided in the design documents prepared and signed by the original structural
design engineer, to verify the design parameters including ap hed loads, methods of analysis and design,
f
and final design dimensions and other details of the structura elements. The reviewing engineer shall also
check the sufficiency and appropriateness of the supplied structural drawings for construction.
1.9.3 Construction Observation

Construction observation shall be performed by a responsible person who will be a competent professional.
appointed by the owner of the bui1ding or the structure. Construction observation shall mclude, but not be
limited to, the following : '
a) Specification of an appropriate testing and inspection schedule prepared and signed with date by the
responsible person;
b) Review of testing and inspection reports; and
c) Regular site visit to verify the general compliance of the construction work with the structural drawings
and specifications provided in Sec 1.9.1.2(1:5) above.
6-18
CHAPTER�
Loads
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.1 Scope
·
This chapter specifies the minimum design forces including dead load, live load, wind and earthguake
loads, miscellaneous loads and their various combinations. Tnese loads shall be applicable for the des1gn of
buildings and structures in conformance with the general design requirements provided in Chapter 1.
2.1.2 Limitations
Provisions of this chapter shall generally be applied to majority of buildings and other structures subject to
normally expected loading conditions. For those buildings and structures having unusual geometrical
shapes, response characteristics or site locations, or for those subject to special loading including tornadoes,
special dynamic or hydrodynamic loads etc., site-specific or case-specific data or analysis may be required to
determine the design loads on them. In such cases, and all other cases for which loads are not specified in
this chapter, loading information may be obtained from reliable references or specialist advice may be
sought. However, such loads shall be applied in compliance with the provisions of other sections of this
Code.
2.2 DEAD LOADS
2.2.1 General
The minimum design dead load for buildings and portions thereof shall be determined in accordance with
the provisions of tnis section. In addition, desi�n of the overall structure and its primary load-resisting
systems shall conform to the general design provisions given in Chapter 1.
2.2.2 Definition
Dead Load is the vertical load due to the weight of permanent structural and non-structural components of
a building such as walls, floors, ceilings, permanent partitions and fixed service equipment etc.
2.2.3 Assessment of Dead Load

Dead load for a structural member shall be assessed based on the forces due to :
i) weight of the member itself,
Part6 6-19
Structural Design
Part 6
Structural Design
ii) weight of all materials of construction incorporated into the building to be supported permanently by
the member,
iii) weight of permanent partitions,
iv) weight of fixed service equipment, and
v) net effect of prestressing.
2.2.4 Weight of Materials and Constructions •
In estimating dead loads, the actual weights of materials and constructions shall be used, provided that in
the absence of definite information, the weights given in Tables 6.2.1 and 6.2.2 shall be assumed for the
purposes of design.
Table 6.2.1
Unit Weight of Basic Materials
Unit Unit
Material Weight Material Weight
(kN/m3) (kN/m3)
Aluminium 27.0 Granite, Basalt 26.4
Asphalt 21.2 Iron - cast 70.7
Brass 83.6 - wrought 75.4
Bronze 87.7 Lead 111.0
Brick 18.9 Limestone 24.5
Cement 14.7 Marble 26.4
Coal, loose 8.8 Sand, dry 15.7
Concrete - stone aggregate (unreinforced) 22.8* Sandstone 22.6
- brick aggregate (unreinforced) 20.4* Slate 28.3
Copper 86.4 Steel 77.0
•
Cork, normal 1.7 Timber 5.9-11.0

Jc
Cork, com ressed 3.7 Zinc 70.0
Glass, win ow (soda-lime) 25.5
,. for reinforced concrete, add 0.63 kN/m3 for each 1% by volume of main reinforcement
2.2.5 Weight of Permanent Partitions

When partition walls are indicated on the plans, their weight shall be considered as dead load acting as
concentrated line loads in their actual positions on the floor. The loads due to anticipated partition walls,
which are not indicated on the plans, shall be treated as live loads and deterrninea in accordance with
Sec 2.3.3.3.
2.2.6 Weight of Fixed Service Equipment

Weights of fixed service equipment and other permanent machinery, such as electrical feeders and other
machinery, heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems, lifts and escalators, plumbing stacks and risers
etc. shall be inclucfed as dead foad whenever such equipment are supported by structural members.
2.2.7 Additional Loads

In evaluating the final dead loads on a structural member for design purposes, allowances shall be made for
additional loads resulting from the (i) difference between the prescribed and the actual weights of the
members and construction materials; (ii) inclusion of future insta1lations; (iii) changes in occupancy or use
of buildings; and (iv) inclusion of structural and non-structural members not coverea in Sec 2.2.2 and 2.2.3.
2.3 LIVE LOADS
2.3.1 General
The live loads used for the structural design of floors, roof and the supporting members shall be the greatest
applied loads arising from the intended use or occupancy of the builamg, or from the stacking of materials
ana the use of equipment and f> ropping during construction, but shall not be less than the rnimmum design
live loads set out by the provis1ons of this section. For the design of structural members for forces including
live loads, requirements of the relevant sections of Chapter 1 snail also be fulfilled.
2.3.2 Definition
Live load is the load superimposed by the use or occupancy of the building not including the environmental
loads such as wind load, rain load, earthquake load or dead load.
2.3.3 Minimum Floor Live Loads .

The minimum floor live loads shall be the greatest actual imposed loads resulting from the intended use or
occupancy of the floor, and shall not be less than the uniformly distributed Toad patterns specified in
Sec 2.3.3.1 or the concentrated loads specified in Sec 2.3.3.2 whichever produces the most critical effect. The
live loads shall be assumed to act vertically upon the area projected on a horizontal plane.
6-20
Chapter 2
Loads
Table 6.2.2
Weight of Construction Materials
Weight per Weight per

Material Unit Area Material Unit Area
(kN/m2) (kN/m2 )
Floor Roof (contd.)

Asphalt, 25 mm thick 0.526 Tiles---
Clay tiling, 13 mm thick 0.268 terra-cotta (French pattern) 0.575
Concrete slab (stone aggregate)*--- concrete , 25 mm thick 0.527
solid, 100 mm thick 2.360 clay tiles 0.6- 0.9
solid, !50 mm thick 3.540
Galvanized steel floor deck (excl. topping) 0.147- 0.383 Wails and Partitions
Magnesium oxychloride- Acrylic resin sheet, flat, per mm thickf\ess 0.012
normal (sawdust filler), 25 mm thick 0.345 Asbestos cement sheeting----
heavy duty (mineral filler), 25 mm thick 0.527 4.5 mm thick 0.072
Terrazzo paving 16 mm thick 0.431 6.0 mm thick 0.106
Brick masonry work, excl. plaster -- -
Roof burnt clay, per 100 mm thickness 1.910
Acrylic resin sheet, corrugated ---- sand-lime, per 100 mm thickness 1.980
3 mm thick, standard corrugations 0.043 Concrete (stone aggregate)*---
3 mm thick, deep corrugations 0.062 100 mm thick 2.360
Asbestos cement, corrugated sheeting--- 150 mm thick 3.540
(incl. lap and fastenings) 250 mm thick 5.900
6 mm thick (standard corrugations) 0.134 Fibre insulation board, per I 0 mm thickness 0.034
6 mm thick(deep corrugations) 0.158 Fibrous plaster board, per 10 mm thickness 0.092
Aluminium, corrugated sheeting--- Glass, per I 0 mm thickness 0.269
(incl. lap and fastenings) Hardboard, per 10 mm thickness 0.961
1.2 mm thick 0.048 Particle or flake board, per I 0 mm thickness 0.075
0.8 mm thick O.Q28 Plaster board, per I 0 mm thickness 0.092
0.6 mm thick 0.024 Plywood, per 10 mm thickness 0.061
Aluminium sheet(plain) ---
1.2 mm thick 0.033 Ceiling
1.0 mrri thick 0.024 Fibrous plaster, 10 mm thick 0.081
0.8 mm thick 0.019 Cement plaster, 13 mm thick 0.287
Bituminous felt(5 ply) and gravel 0.431 Suspended metal lath and plaster 0.480
Slates --- (two faced incl. studding)
4.7 mm thick 0.335
9.5 mm thick 0.671 Miscellaneous
Steel sheet, flat galvanized--- Felt (insulating), per 10 mm thickness 0.019
1.00 mm thick 0.082 Plaster ---
0.80 mm thick 0.067 cement, per 10 mm thickness 0.230
0.60 mm thick 0.053 lime, per 10 mm thickness 0.191
Steel, galvanized std. corrugated sheeting--- PVC sheet, per 10 mm thickness 0.153
(incl. lap and fastenings) Rubber paving, per I 0 mm thickness 0.151
1.0 mm thick 0.120 Terra-cotta Hollow Block Masonry ---
0.8 mm thick 0.096 75 mm thick 0.671
0.6 mm thick 0.077 100 mm thick 0.995
150 mm thick 1.388
* tor brick aggregate, 90% o! the listed values may be used.
2.3.3.1 Uniformly Distributed Loads : The uniformly distributed load shall not be less than the values
listed in Table 6.2.3, reduced as may be specified in Sec 2.3.9, applied uniformly over the entire area of the
floor, or any portion thereof to produce the most adverse effects in the member concerned.
2.3.3.2 Concentrated Loads : The concentrated load to be applied non-concurrently with the uniformly
distributed load given in Sec 2.3.3.1, shall not be less than tfi.at listed in Table 6.2.3. Unless otherwise
specified in Table 6.2.3 or in the following paragraph, the concentrated load shall be applied over an area of
300 mm x 300 mm and shall be located so as to produce the maximum stress conditions in the structural
members.
In areas where vehicles are used or stored, such as car parking garages, ramps, repair shops etc., provision
shall be made for concentrated loads consisting of two or more loads spaced nonunally 1.5 m on centres in
absence of the uniform live loads. Each load shall be 40 per cent of the gross weight of the maximum size

Part 6
Structural Design
Table 6.2.3
Live Loads for Various Occupancies
(I) (l) Ill Ill

BUILDING BUILDING
w p 1�--------�--------�----------�w P
Occupancy Use of floor kN/rJ kN Occupancy Use of floor kN/ni kN
� w
I Room, internal corridor, private 2.0 1.8 I General office room, banking hall 3.0 9.0
stair L1.l � 2 Laboratory, kitchen 3.0
d _g 4.5
t
2 External stair and corridor 3.0 2.7
� :� 3 Computer, bussiness machine room 3.5 9./
4 File room, filing and storage space
I Bed room, living room, bath room,
2.0 1.8 � r:;:: .:g 6.0 4.5
5 Vaults in office and bank
toilet, dressing room
� 1:'> �& 5.0 4.5
2 Office room 2.5 2.7 e � 1--o � ::e�ephone exc�ange 6.0 ��
�--4- - - �� -- ��----------4-� �
4.5 ��
< =
I Retail store 4.0 3.6
_
3 4.5
Cafeteria, restaurant, kitchen,
laundry, lobby, lounge, game room,
3.0
� � � 'l'i
Ul- .... c 5>
dining hall, balcony.
� e E � 2 Wholesale store 6.0 13. d
(/:) � Vl
en �
0 c. 3 Storage : light 6.0 4.5
4 Corridor, retail store, staircase 4.0 4·5 ii5 65 .g 5>
heavy 12.0 14. d
5 Store room 5.0 4.5 11---+---lf-------....- .:. --'----+-�-+=-.::.-l.:..
I Light workroom without storage 3.0 2.7
6 Garage, car parking floor, ramp
(See Occupancy - K) 2 Machinery hall & circulation area 4.0 4.5
3 Factory, workshop etc. 5.0 4.5

I Bed room, dressing room, toilet, 2.0 1.8
4 Manufacturing : light 6.0 4.5
hospital ward and cabin, cell (5)
blocks of jail heavy 12.0 9.0
(5)
ice 15.0 9.0
2 Office room, staff room. 2.5 2.7
5 Printing plant : (5)
3 X-ray room, operating room, utility 2.5 4.5 Press room 7.0 11.0
room, reading room without book 15)
Composing and linotype room 5.0 9.0
storage. 15)
Paper storage room 12.0 9.0
4 Class room, lecture room, lounge, 3.0 2.7
cafeteria, restaurant. 6 Motor room, fan room etc. includin 7.5 4.5
the weight of machinery
5 Laboratory, kitchen, laundry 3.0 4.5
15)
7 Cold storage, grain storage 15.0 9.0
6 Balcony, corridor, lobby, reading 4.0 4.5
(5)
room with book storage, staircase 8 Storage warehouses : light 6.0 4.5
7 Assembly area, fire escape, store 5.0 4.5 heavy 12.0 9.0
room, projection room. 9 Foundries 2o.o· 12.0
13)
8 Stack room for book 6.5 7.0
I Repair workshop for all types of 5.0 9.0

vehicles.
2 Driveway, ramp and parking fo 5.0 )
4
��-
o2;2i
I Assembly room:
3.0 2.7
vehicles with mass> 2500 kg. (
with fixed seat
.S
u .:
� I 3 Car (4)
without fixed seat 5.0 4.5 parking and ramp for 2.5
·E l!=�
E .c: 2 Stages and projection room 5.0 4.5
passenger car and light vehicles
having mass :5 2500 kg
B � � 3 Library :
'g ::::: -5,; Reading room - I Bed room, toilet, dressing room 2.0 1.8
� 1! without book storage 2.5 4.5
>- iil
� 1:!
e B
�
o
with book storage 4.0 4.5 2 Office room, staff room 2.5 2.7
o>
3 Kitchen, laundry, lounge, game 3.0 4.5
....l • 8 :J Jl
Stack room for book 6.5 7.0
� 1:'>�----�--�1 room, cafeteria, restaurant
�a
<I) I With fixed seats 3.0 2.7 4 Balcony, corridor, passage way, 4.0 4.5
<I) u = retail store, staircase
2 Without fixed seats 5.0 4.5
<� 5 Assembly area, store room, fire 5.0 4.5
3 Corridor, stair and passage way 5.0 4.5 escape, projection room
6 Drill room, drill hall 5.0 9.0
7 Armories, boiler room and 7.5 4.5

machine room including weight
of machinery
(5)
8 Airport hangars 7.0 12.0
Note: (I) w Unifonnly distributed load in kN/m� This load shall not he applied simultaneously with the concentrated load, P.
(2) P : A single concentrated load, in kN, assumed to act over an area of 300 mm x 300 mm unless otherwise specified in Note (5) below. Except
as indicated by Note (5), these concentrated loads need not he considered for the floors capable of laterally distributing the load, e.g.
reinforced concrete slabs
(3) Use a distributed load of2.4 kN/� for each metre of stack height but not less than 6.5 kN/,.,.2
(4) See Sec 2.3.3.2 for values, numbers, and spacing of these concentrated loads.
(5) These loads shall he applied over an area of 750 mm x 750 mrn on all types of floors including reinforced concrete slab.
6-22
Chapter 2
Loads
vehicle to be accommodated and applied over an area· of 750 mm x 750 mm. For the storage of private or
pleasure-type vehicles without repair (J)r fuelling, floors shall be investigated in the absence of the uniform
live load, for a minimum concentrated wheel load of 9 kN spaced 1.5 m on centres, applied over an area of
750 mm x 750 mm. The uniform live loads for these cases are provided in Table 6.2.3. The condition of
concentrated or uniform live load producing the greater stresses shall govern.
2.3.3.3 Provision for Partition Walls: When partitions, not indicated on the plans, are anticipated to be
placed on the floors, their weight shall be included as an additional live load acting as concentrated line
loads in an arrangement producing the most severe effect on the floor, unless it can be shown that a more
favourable arrangement of the partitions shall prevail during the future use of the floor.
In the case of light partitions, wherein the total weight per metre run is not greater than 5.5kN, a uniformly
distributed live load may be applied on the floor in lieu of the concentrated fine loads specified above. Such
uniform live load per square metre shall be at least 33% of the weight per metre run of the partitions,
subject to a minimum of 1.2 kN/m2.
2.3.3.4 More than One Occupancy: Where an area of a floor is intended for two or more occupancies at
different times, the value to be used from Table 6.2.3 shall be the greatest value for any of the occupancies
concerned.
2.3.4 Minimum Roof Live Loads

Roof live loads shall be assumed to act vertically over the area projected by the roof or any portion of it upon
a horizontal plane, and shall be determined as specified in the following sections :
2.3.4.1 Regular Purpose - Flat, Pitched and Curved Roofs : Live loads on regular purpose roofs shall be
the greatest applied loads produced during use by movable objects such as planters and people, and those
induced during maintenance by workers, equipment and materials but shall not be less than those given in
Table 6.2.4.
Table 6.2.4
(l)
Minimum Roof Live Loads
Type and Slope of Roof Distributed Concentrated

2 Load, kN
Load, kNfm
I Flat roof (slope = 0) 1.5 1.8
II 1. Pitched or sloped roof (0<slope< 1/3) 1.0 0.9

2 Arched roof or dome (rise< 1/8 span)
III 1. Pitched or sloped roof (1/3 �slope<1.0) 0.8 0.9

2. Arched roof or dome (1/8 � rise<3/8 span)
IV 1. Pitched or sloped roof (slope ;o: 1.0) 0.6 0.9

2. Arched roof or dome (rise ;o: 3/8 span)
v Greenhouse, and agriculture buildings 0.5 0.9
VI Canopies and awnings, except those with cloth same as given in I through IV above
covers based on the type and slope.
Note: (1) Greater of this load and rain load as specified in Sec 2.6.3 shall be taken as the design live load for roof.
The distributed load shall be applied over the area of the roof projected upon a horizontal plane and
shall not be applied simultaneously with the concentrated load. The concentrated load shall be
assumed to act upon a 300 mm x 300 mm area and need not be considered for roofs capable of laterally
distributing the load, e.g. reinforced concrete slabs.
2.3.4.2 Special Purpose Roofs : For special purpose roofs, live loads shall be estimated based on the
actual weight depending on the type of use, but shall not be less than the following values :
a) roofs used for promenade purposes 3.0kN/m2

b) roofs used for assembly purposes 5.0kN/m2
c) roofs used for gardens 5.0kN/m2
d) roofs used for other special purposes to be determined as per Sec 2.3.5
2.3.4.3 Accessible Roof Supporting Members :Roof trusses or any other primary roof supporting
member beneath which a full ceiling is not provided, shall be capable of supporting safely, in addition to
other roof loads, a concentrated load at the locations as specified below :

Part 6
Structural Design
a) Industrial, Storage and Garage Buildings - Any single panel point of the lower
chord of a roof truss, or any point of other primary roof supporting member - 9.0 kN
b) Building with Other Occupancies - Any single panel point of the lower
chord of a roof truss, or any point of other primary roof supporting member - 1.3 kN
2.3.5 Loads Not Specified

Live loads, not specified for uses or occupancies in Sec 2.3.3.1 and 2.3.3.2, shall be determined from loads
resulting from:
a) weight of the probable assembly of persons;

b) weight of the probable accumulation of equipment and furniture, and
c) weight of the probable storage of materials.
2.3.6 Partial Loading and Other Loading Arrangements

The full intensity of the a propriately reduced live load applied only to a portion of the length or area of a
f
structure or member shal be considered, if it pr o d uces a more unfavouraole effect than the same intensity
applied over the full length or area of the structure or member.
Where uniformly distributed live loads are used in the design of continuous members and their supports,
consideration shall be given to full dead load on all spans in combination with full live loads on adJacent
spans and on alternate spans whichever produces a more unfavourable effect.
2.3.7 Other Live Loads

Live loads on miscellaneous structures and components, such as handrails and supporting members,
parapets and balustrades, ceilings, skylights and supports, and the like, shall be determined from the
analysis of the actual loads on them, but shall not be less than those given in Table 6.2.5.
Table6.2.5
Miscellaneous Live Loads
Structural Member or Component Live LoadO)

(kN/m)
1. Handrails, parapets and supports:
a) Light access stairs, gangways etc.
i) width� 0.6 m 0.25
ii) width>0.6 m 0.35
b) Staircases other than in (a) above, ramps, balconies:

i) Single dwelling and private 0.35
ii) Staircases in residential buildings 0.35
iii) Balconies or J?Ortion thereof, stands etc. having 1.5
fixed seats Within 0.55 m of the barrier
vi) Public assembly buildings including theatres, 3.0
cinemas, assembly halls, stadiums, mosques,
churches, schools etc.
vi) Buildings and occupancies other than (i) through (iv) above 0.75
2. Vehicle barriers for car parks and ramps:

a) For vehicles having gross mass� 2500 kg 100<2>
b) For vehicles having gross mass>2500 kg
165<2>
c) For ramps of car parks etc.
see note (3)
Note: (1) These loads shall be applied non-concurrently along horizontal and vertical directions, except as
specified in note (2) below.
(2) These loads shall be applied only in the horizontal direction, uniformly distributed over any
length of 1.5 m of a barrier and shall be considered to act at bumper height. For case 2(a) bumper
height may be taken as 375 mm above floor level.
(3) Barriers to access ramps of car parks shall be designed for horizontal forces equal to 50% of those
given in 2(a) and 2(b) applied at a level of 610 mm above the ramp. Barriers to straight exit ramps
exceeding 20 m in length shall be designed for horizontal forces equal to twice the values given
in 2(a) and 2(b).
2.3.8 Impact and Dynamic Loads

The live loads specified in Sec 2.3.3 shall be assumed to include allowances for impacts arising from normal
uses only. However, forces imposed by unusual vibrations and .impacts resultmg from the operation of
installed machinery and eq_uipment shall be determined separately and treated as additional live loads. Live
loads due to vibration or Impact shall be determined by dynamic analysis of the supporting member or
structure including foundations, or from the recommended values supplied by the manufacture of the
6-24
Chapter 2
Loads
particular equipment or machinery. In absence of a definite information, values listed in Table 6.2.6 for some
common equipment, shall be used for design purposes. .
Table 6.2.6
Minimum Live Loads on Supports and Connections of Equipment due to Impact (1)
Equipment or Machinery Additional load due to impact as percentage

of static load including self weight
Vertical Horizontal
1. Lifts, hoists and related operating machinery 100%

2. Light machinery (shaft or motor driven) 20%
3. Reciprocating machinery, or power driven 50%
units.
4. Hangers supporting floors and balconies 33%
5. Cranes:
a) Electric overhead cranes 25% of i) Transverse to the rail :
maximum 20% of the weight of trolley
wheel load and lifted loacf only, applied
one-half at the top of each rail
ii) Along the rail :

10% of maximum wheel load
applied at the top of each rail
b) Manually operated cranes 50% of the 50% of the

values in values in (a)
(a) above above
c) Cab-operated travellinJ; cranes 25%

-
Not applicable
.
Note: (1) All these loads shall be increased if so recommended by the manufacturer. For machinery and equipment
not listed, impact loads shall be those recommended by the manufacturers, or determined by dynamic
analysis.
2.3.9 Reduction of Live Loads

·Reduction of live load is permitted for primary structural members supporting floor or roof, including
beam, girder, truss, flat slab, flat plate, column, pier, footing and the like. Where applicable, the reduced live
load on a primary structural member shall be obtainecf by multiplying the corresponding unreduced
uniformly distributed live load with an appropriate live load reduction factor, R as listed in Table 6.2.7 and
set forth m Sec 2.3.9.1.
2.3.9.1 Load Groups : All possible live loads applied on floors and roof of a building due to various
occupancies and uses, shall oe divided into three road groups as described below for aetermining the
appropriate live load reduction factors. ·
a) Load Group 1 : Uniformly distributed live loads arising from the occupancies and uses of
(i) assembly occupancies or areas with uniformly distributed live load of 5.0 kN/m2 or less,
(ii) machinery and equipment for which specific live load allowances have been made, (iii) special
roof live load as described in Sec 2.3.4.2, and (iv) printing plants, vaults, strong rooms and
armouries, shall be classified under Load Group 1. Reduction of live load shall not be allowed for
members or portions thereof under this load group and a reduction factor, R =1.0 shall be applied for
such cases.
b) Load Group 2 : Uniformly distributed live loads resulting from occupancies or uses of
(i) assembly areas with uniformly distributed live load greater than 5.0 kN/m2, and (ii) storage,
mercantile, industrial and retail stores, shall be classified under Load Group 2. Live load reduction
factor, 1.0 .s. R 5,_0.7 shall be applied to this load group depending on the tributary area of the floors
or roof supported by the member as specified in Sec 2.3.9.3.
c) Load Group 3 : Uniformly distributed live loads arising due to all other occupancies and uses except
those of Load Group 1 and Load Group 2, shall be grouped into Load Group 3. Live load reduction
factor, 1.0 :5; R :5; 0.5 as specified in the Sec 2.3.9.3, shall be applied to tributary areas under this load
group.

Part 6
Structural Design
2.3.9.2 Tributary Area : The tributary area of a structural member supporting floors or roof shall be
determined as follows :
a) Tributary Area for Wall, Column, Pier, Footing and the like: Tributary areas of these members shall
consist of portions of the areas of all floors, roof or combination thereof that contribute live loads to
the member concerned.
b) Tributary Area for Beam, Girder, Flat plate and Flat slab : Tributary area for such a member shall
consist of the portion of the roof or a floor at any single level that contributes loads to the member
concerned.
Table 6.2.7
Live Load Reduction Factors for Various Occupancies and Uses
. Tributary 11) Live Load l2,3>

Load Area (floor, or Reduction
Group Occupancy or Use roof, or Factor,
combination) R
2
At(m )
1 a) Assembly areas with uniformly distributed live

load of 5.0 kN I m2 or less. .
b) Live loads from machinery and eguipment for

which specific load allowance has oeen made all 1.0
c) Special roof live loads as specified in Sec 2.3.4.2
d) Printing plants, vaults, strong room and armouries
2 a) Assembly areas with uniformly distributed �.50 '1.00

live load -greater than 5.0 kN I m2 . 60 0.97
80 0.92
b) Storage,. mercantile, industrial, parking garage, 100 0.88
retail stores 120 0.86
140 0.84
280 0.81
220 0.79
300 0.76
400 0.74
:2:800 0.70
3 a) Uniformly distributed live loads from all < 25 1.00

occupancies and uses except those listed 25-30 0.90
in load groups 1 and 2 above. 40 0.84
50 0.78
60 0.73
80 0.67
100 0.62
120 0.59
140 0.57
180 0.53
;;:: 220 0.50
Note : (1) At = sum of all tributary areas with loads from any one load group (i.e. Load Group 1, 2 or 3)
(2) Linear interpolation may be made to obtain values of R lying between the listed values.
(3) Live load reduction factor, R is based on the relations: R=0.6+ �8/A1 for Load Group 2 and
R =0.25+ �14/At for Load Group 3
2.3.9.3 Determination of Reduced Live Load : The value of the live load reduction factor, R shall depend
on the load group specified in Sec 2.3.9.1 and on the tributary area of the floor or the roof and combination
thereof supportea by a primary structural member. The reduced live load on a structural member shall be
determined using the following steps:
6-26
Chapter 2
Loads
a) Portions of the tributary area pertaining to each of the three load groups specified in Sec 2.3.9.1 shall
be identified and summed up, and a value of the reduction factor R shall be obtained from
Table 6.2.7 corresponding to each portion of the tributary area,
b) The reduced live loads or load intensities shall then be obtained for each load group by multiplying
the unreduced live loads or load intensities by the corresponding reduction factors, and finally,
c) The total reduced live load on a structural member shall be determined by summing up the reduced
live loads from each load group.
2.4 WIND LOADS
2.4.1 General
The minimum design wind load on buildings and components thereof, shall be determined based on the
velocity of the wind, the shape and size of the building and the terrain exposure condition of the site as set
forth by the provisions of th1s section. For the overall design of structures, the general design requirements
as specified in Chapter 1 shall also be fulfilled.
2.4.1.1 Scope : Provisions of this section shall apply to the calculation of design wind loads for the
primary framing systems and for the individual structural components and cladaing of buildings. The
aesign wind load shall include the effects of the sustained wind velocity component and the fluctuating
component due to gusts. For slender buildings, the design wind load shall also include additional loading
effects due to wind mduced vibrations of the building.
2.4.1.2 Limitations : Provisions of this section shall include forces due to along-wind response of regular
shaped buildings, caused by the common wind-storms including cyclones, thunder-storms and norwesters.
However, the following cases shall remain beyond the scope of tftese provisions :
a) forces due to cross-wind response of buildings and structures,

b) forces, such as torsion etc. generated due to unusual or unsymmetrical geometry of the building, and
c) forces generated due to special types of winds, such as tornadoes.
For calculation of wind loads arising due to the above special cases and for buildings requiring more
accurate loading information, reference shall be made to reliable literature pertaining to these loads, or
specialist advice shall be sought.
2.4.2 Definitions
The following definitions shall apply only to the provisions of Sec 2.4.
AWNINGS (e.g. PORCH COVER) : A roof-like structure, usually of limited extent, projecting from a wall of
a building.
BASIC WIND SPEED, Vb : Fastest-mile wind speed in km/h corresponding to the level of 10 metres above
the ground of terrain Exposure-B defined in Sec 2.4.4 and associated with an annual probability of
occurrence of 0.02.
BUILDINGS : Structures that enclose a space and are used for various occupancies.
CANOPY : A roof adjacent to or attached to a building, generally not enclosed by walls.
COMPONENTS AND CLADDING : Structural elements that are either directly loaded by the wind or
receive wind loads originating at relatively close locations and transfer those loads to the primary framing
system. Examples include curtain walls, exterior glass windows and panels, roof sheeting, purlins, grits,
studs, and roof trusses.
CYCLONE : An intense low-pressure centre accompanied by heavy rain and gale-force winds. It forms over
warm tropical oceans and decays rapidly over land.
DESIGN WIND PRESSURES, p :Equivalent static pressure due to wind including gusts to be used in the
determination of wind loads for buildings. The pressure shall be assumed to act in a direction normal to the
surface considered and is denoted as:
pressure that varies with height in accordance with the sustained wind pressure q evaluated at
z
height z, or
� pressure that is uniform with respect to height as determined by the sustained wind pressure q
ph h
evaluated at mean roof height h.
ENCLOSED BUILDING : Buildings which have full perimeter wall (nominally sealed) from floor to roof
level.

Part. 6
Structural Design
ESSENTIAL FACILITIES: Buildings and structures which are necessary to remain functional during an
emergency or a post disaster period.
FASTEST-MILE WIND SPEED: The highest sustained average wind speed in km/h based on the time
required for a mile-long sample of air to pass a fixed point.
FREE STANDING ROOF : A roof (of any type) with no enclosing walls underneath, e.g. freestanding
carport.
FREESTANDING WALLS: Walls which are exposed to the wind on both sides, with no roof attached, e.g.
fences.
GABLED FRAME: A rigid frame having vertical side members and a sloped top with a ridge.
.
GRADIENT HEIGHT: Height from the mean ground level above which the variation of wind speed with
height need not be considered.
HOARDING: Free standing (rectangular) signboards, etc., supported clear of the ground.
!SOTACH : A line on a map joining points of equal wind speed.
MOONSCAPE ROOF : A planar roof with no ridge, which has a constant slope.
OPENINGS: Apertures or holes in the exterior walls of a building or structure. Doors or other openings in
exterior walls shall be considered as openin g s unless such openings and their frames are specifically
detailed and designed to resist the wind loads m accordance witn the provisions of this section.
PITCHED ROOF: A bi-fold, hi-planar roof with a ridge at its highest point.
PRESSURE : Air pressure in excess of ambient. Negative values are less than ambient and positive values
exceed ambient. Net pressures act normal to a surface in the specified direction.
PRIMARY FRAMING SYSTEM : An assemblage of major structural elements assigned to provide support
for secondary members and cladding. The system primarily receives wind loading from relatively remote
locations. Examples include rigid and braced frames, space trusses, roof and floor diaphragms, shear walls,
and rod-braced frames.
SLENDER BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES : Buildings and structures having a height exceeding five
times the least horizontal dimension, or a fundamental natural frequency less than 1.0 Hz. For those cases in
which the horizontal dimensions vary with height, the least honzontal dimension at midheight shall be
used.
STRUCTURES: See Sec 1.2.2.
STRUCTURE IMPORTANCE COEFFICIENT, C1: A factor that accounts for the degree of hazard to human
life and damage to property.
SUSTAINED WIND PRESSURE, q : The theoretically computed incident pressure of a uniform air stream
(fastest-mile speed) of known density, evaluated at a given height above ground level, for a specific terrain
exposure condition and for a known occupancy of a building.
TERRAIN : The surface roughness condition when considering the size and arrangement of obstructions to
wind.
TOPOGRAPHY : Major land surface features comprising hills, valleys and plains which strongly influence
wind flow patterns.
TORNADO : A violently rotating column of air, pendant from the base of a connective cloud, and often
observable as a funnel cloud attacned to the cloud oase.
TRIBUTARY AREA: That portion of the surface area receiving wind loads assigned to be supported by the
structural element considered.
TROUGH ROOF: A bi-fold, hi-planar roof with a valley at its lowest point.
UNENCLOSED BUILDING OR STOREY : A building or storey which has 85% or more openings on all
sides.
6-28
Chapter 2
Loads

The following symbols and notation shall apply to the provisions of Sec 2.4 only :
A tributary area, square metres.

A area of other structures or components and cladding thereof projected on a plane normal to
wind direction, square metres.
a width of pressure coefficient zone used in Fig 6.2.7 and 6.2.8, metres
B = horizontal dimension of buildings and structures measured normal to wind direction, metres.
c average horizontal dimension of the building or structure in a direction normal to the wind,
metres.
c, velocity-to-pressure conversion coefficient= 47.2x1o-6
CG gust coefficient
c, structure importance coefficient
cP pressure coefficient to be used for determination of wind loads on buildings and structures.
Cpe external pressure coefficients for surfaces of buildings and structures to be used for wind
loads on primary framing systems using Method 1 in Sec 2.4.6.4 (a).
cp' overall pressure coefficient for buildings and structures to be used for
wind loads on primary framing systems using Method 2 in Sec 2.4.6.4 (b).
Cpe external peak pressure coefficients to be used for wind loads on building components and
cladding.
cp; internal peak pressure coefficient to be used for wind loads on buildings and components.
ct = local topographic coefficient given in Sec 2.4.6.8.
Cz combined height and exposure coefficient for a building at height z above ground
D diameter of a circular structure or member, metres
d diameter of a circular structure or member, metres
D' depth of protruding elements (ribs or spoilers), metres
Do surface drag coefficient given in Table 6.2.12.
f fundamental frequency of buildings or structures in a direction parallel to the wind, Hz
fl, f2 design wind forces on primary framing system, kN
F' design wind forces on components and cladding, kN
c gust response factor for primary framing systems of flexible buildings and structures
Gh gust response factor for primary framing systems evaluated at height z h =
Gz gust response factor for components and cladding evaluated at height z above ground
h mean roof height or height to top of parapet whichever is greater of a building or structure,
except that eaves height may be used for roof slope of less than 10 degrees, metres.
pressure profile factor as a function of ratio y
horizontal dimension of a building or structure measured parallel to wind direction, metres
= larger dimension of a sign, metres
= smaller dimension of a sign, metres
design pressure to be used in determination of wind loads for buildings, kN I m2
design pressure evaluated at height z =h, kN/m2
internal pressure, kN/m2

= design wind pressure evaluated at height z above ground, kN I m2
sustained wind pressure, kN/m2
sustained wind pressure evaluated at height z=h, kNim2
sustained wind pressure evaluated at height z above ground, in kNim2

rise-to-span ratio for arched roofs
surface friction factor given in Table 6.2.12
structure size factor given in Fig 6.2.4 ·
turbulence intensity factor evafuated at two-thirds of the mean roof height or parapet height
of the structure (see Eq 2.4.11)
v = basic wind speed, km/h
X distance to centre of pressure from windward edge, metres
y response factor as a function of the ratio y and the ratio c/h given in Fig 6.2.3
z height above ground level, metres
gradient height given in Table 6.2.12, metres
a power-law coefficient given in Table 6.2.12
f3 structural damping coefficient (fraction of critical damping)
y ratio obtained from Table 6.2.12

------------- - -----· ---- ------ ·- · ··------------------- - ---�
Part 6
Structural Design
.
e ratio of solid area to gross area for open sign face of a trussed tower, or lattice structure
e angle of the plane of roof from horizontal, degrees
height-to-width ratio for sign or hoarding
= angle between wind direction and chord of tower guy, degrees.
2.4.4 Terrain Exposure

A terrain exposure category that adequately reflects the surface roughness characteristics of the ground shall
be determined for the ouilding site, taking into account the variations in ground roughness arising from
existing natural topography, vegetation ana manmade constructions.
2.4.4.1 Exposure Category : The terrain exposure in which a building or structure is to be sited shall be
assessed as being one of the following categories:
a) Exposure A : Urban and sub-urban areas, industrial areas, wooded areas, hilly or other terrain
covering at least 20 per cent of the area with obstructions of 6 metres or more in height and
extending from the s1te at least 500 metres or 10 times the height of the structure, whicfiever is
greater.
b) Exposure B : Open terrain with scattered obstructions having heights generally less than lOrn
extending 800 m or more from the site in any full quadrant. This category includes air fields, open
park lands, sparsely built-up outskirts of towns, flat open country and grasslands.
c) Exposure C : Flat and unobstructed open terrain, coastal areas and riversides facing large bodies of
water, over 1.5 km or more in width. Exposure C extends inland from the shoreline 400 m or 10 times
the height of structure, whichever is greater.
2.4.4.2 Selection of Exposure Category for Primary Framing System : Design wind load for primary
framinf$ systems for all buildings and structures shall be determined basecf on the terrain exposure
categones defined in Sec 2.4.4.1.
2.4.4.3 Selection of Exposure Category for Components and Cladding : Design wind load on the
components and cladding of all buildings and structures shall be determined on the basis of the exposure
category defined in Sec 2.4.4.1, except that Exposure B shall be assumed for buildings or structures having h
� 2a m and sited in a terrain with Exposure A.
2.4.5 Basic Wind Speed

2.4.5.1 Basic Wind Speed Map : The Basic Wind Speed Map as shown in Fig 6.2.1 is the map showing the
basic wind speeds in km/h for any location in Bangladesh, having isotachs representing the fastest-mile
wind speeds at 10 metres above the ground with terrain Exposure B for a 50-year recurrence interval. The
minimum value of the basic wind speed set in the map is 130 km/h. Basic wind speeds for selected locations
are also provided in Table 6.2.8.
2.4.5.2 Selection of Basic Wind Speed :Value of the basic wind speed required for any specific location
where a building or structure is sited, shall be obtained as follows:
i) When the location is listed in Table 6.2.8, value of the basic wind speed shall be taken from that table.
ii) If the location lies within any wind region (shown shaded in the map of Fig 6.2.1), the value marked
for that wind region shall be used.
iii) For a location lying on any isotach in the map, the value of that isotach shall be taken.
iv) For a location lying outside the positions (i) through (iii) above, linear interpolation shall be made
between the adjacent isotachs to obtain the basic wind speed.
.
For areas where local records or terrain conditions indicate higher values of basic wind speeds
(substantiated by site-specific analysis) than those reflected in Fig 6.2.1 and Table 6.2.8, the site-specific
values shall be adopted as the minimum basic wind speeds.
2.4.6 Determination of Design Wind Loads

2.4.6.1 Basis of Wind Load Calculation : The minimum design wind load on buildings, structures and
components thereof shall be calculated, within the scope and limitations given in Sec 2.4.1 taking into
account the following effects which shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of this section :
a) equivalent static pressure or suction on building surfaces arising due to the sustained or mean wind
velocity, i.e. the fastest-mile wind speed,
b) variation of the mean wind velocity, and hence the pressure, along the height above the ground,
c) terrain exposure of the building site,
6-30
Chapter 2
Loads
89' 90' 91' 92'
FIG. 6.2.1 BASIC WIND SPEED MAP

(Wind Speeds sre in km/h)
WEB
Location of City or Toon
26' 26'
.•. •. .•
lntomotionol Boundary ••• ••• • ••
River .t Lake •.. ... ••. .•. .••
�
--200--
50 Year lsotochs ... ... .••
Wind Regions [":"] � E=.t

� t!:!:t t3
nTII �
lJ..LW �
25' 25'
IN D I A
24' 24'
23' 23'
IN D I A
BAY 0 F
NOTE : a) lsotoch at a region boundary has the some value as that of the region
b) Basic wind opeed for a particular location shall be obtained as follows :
i) When a location Is listed in Table 6.2.8, value of the basic wind speed shall be token
from that table.
21' ii) When the location lies within any region (shown coloured in the mop), the value marked
for that region shall be token.
iii) For a location lying on any isotoch in this mop, the value of that isotoch shall be token.
lv) For a location lying outside the positions (i) through (Iii) above, linear Interpolation shall
be mode between the adjacent lsotochs to obtain the basic wind opeed.
89' 90' 91' 92'

Part 6
Structural Design
Table 6.2.8
Basic Wind Speeds for Selected Locations in Bangladesh
Basic Wind Basic Wind

Location Speed (km/h) Location Speed (km/h)
Angarpota 150 Lalmonirhat 204

Bagerfiat 252 Madaripur 220
Bandarban 200 Magura 208
Bar�una 260 Manikganj 185
Bansal 256 Meherpur 185
.
Bhola 225 Moheshkhali 260

Bogra 198 Moulvibazar 168
Brahmanbaria 180 Munshiganj 184
Chandpur 160 Mymensingh 217
Chapa1 Nawabganj 130 Naogaon 175
Chitt ong
� 260 Narail 222
Chua anga 198 Narayanganj 195
Comilia 196 Narsinghdi 190
Cox's Bazar 260 Natore 198
Dahagram 150 Netrokona 210
'
Dhaka 210 Nilphamari 140

�
Din pur 130 Noakhali 184
Fari pur 202 Pabna 202
Feni 205 Panchagarh 130
Gaibandha 210 Patuakhali 260
Gazipur 215 Pirojpur 260

Go alganj
b 242 Rajbari 188
Ha iganj 172 Rajshahi 155
Hatiya 260 Rangamati 180
Ishurdi 225 Rangpur 209
Joypurhat 180 Satkhira 183

Jamalpur 180 Shariatpur 198
Jessore 205 Sherpur 200
Jhalakati 260 Sirajganj 160
Jhenaidah 208 Srimangal 160
Kha rachhari
� 180 St. Martin's Island 260
Khu na 238 Sunamganj 195
Kutubdia 260 Sylhet 195
Kishoreganj 207 Sandwip 260
Kurigram 210 Tangail ,.
-- � -160
Kushtia 215 Teknaf 260

Lakshmipur 162 Thakurgaon 130
d) configuration and dynamic response characteristics of the building or structure,
e) occupancy importance of the building,
f) magnification of the mean wind pressure due to the effect of the fluctuating component of wind
speed, i.e. gusts, and
g) additional load amr.lification resulting from the dynamic wind-structure interaction effects due to
gusts on slender bUildings and structures.
2.4.6.2 Sustained Wind Pressure: The sustained wind pressure, qz on a building surface at any height z
above ground shall be calculated from the following relation:
(2.4.1)
sustained wind pressure at heightz, kN/m2

structure importance coefficient as given in Table 6.2.9
6-32
Chapter 2
Loads
C velocity-to-pressure conversion coefficient= 47.2x1o-6

C� = combin�d height and exposure coefficient as given in Table ,.2.1Q
Vb - in km/h obtl\lned from Sec 2.4.5
pa!>ic wH}q speed
If a structure is located within a local topographic zone, qz shall be modified in accordance with Sec 2.4.6.8.
Table6.2.9
Structu.re ImportanceCoefficients, C1 for Wind Loads
Structure Importance Category Structure Importance

(see Table6.1.1 for Occupancy) Coefficient, C1
I Essential facilities 1.25

II Hazardous facilities 1.25
III Special occupancy structures 1.00
IV Standard occupancy structures 1.00
v Low-risk structures 0.80
Table 6.2.10
Combined Height and ExposureCoefficient, Cz
Height above Coefficient, Cz (1)

ground level, z
Exposure A Exposure B ExposureC
(metres) ;
0-4.5 0.368 0.801 :

1.196
6.0 0.415 0.866 1.263
9.0 0.497 0.972 1.370
12.0 0.565 1.055 1.451
;
15.0 0.624 1.125 1.517

18.0 0.677 1.185 1.573
21.0 0.725 1.238 1.623
24.0 0.769 1.286 1.667
27.0 0.810 1.330 1.706

30.0 0.849 1.371 1.743
35.0 0.909 1.433 1.797
40.0 0.965 1.488 1.846
45.0 1.017 1.539 1.890

50.0 1.065 1.586 1.930
60.0 1.155 1.671 2.002
70.0 1.237 1.746 2.065
80.0 1.313 1.814 2.120

90.0 1.383 1.876 2.171
100.0 1.450 1.934 2.217
110.0 1.513 1.987 2.260
120.0 1.572 2.037 2.299

130.0 1.629 2.084 2.337 ..
140.0 1.684 2.129 2.371

150.0 1.736 2.171 2.404
160.0 1.787 2.212 2.436

170.0 1.835 2.250 2.465
180.0 1.883 2.287 2.494
190.0 1.928 2.323 2.521
200.0 1.973 2.357 2.547

220.0 2.058 2.422 2.596
240.0 2.139 2.483 2.641
260.0 2.217 • 2.541 2.684
280.0 2.910 2.595 2.724

300.0 2.362 2.647 2.762
Note: (I) Linear interpolation is acceptable for intermediate values of :z.
Bangladesh National Building C()�e 6-33

Part 6
Structural Design
·2.4.6.3 Design Wind Pressure : The design wind pressure, Pz for a structure or an element of a structure
at any height, z above mean ground level shall be determined from the relation :
(2.4.2)
where, design wind pressure at height z , kN/m2
gust coefficient which shall be Gz, Gh, oi: G as set forth in Sec 2.4.6.6
pressure coefficient for structures or components as set forth Sec 2.4.6.7
sustained wind pressure obtain from Eq (2.4.1).
2.4.6.4 Design Wind Load for Buildings and Structures : Design wind load on the main wind force
resisting systems of buildings and structures shall be determined by using one of the following two
methods:
a) Method 1 (Surface Area Method) : The surface area method shall be used for gabled rigid frames
and single storey rigid frames and may be used of other framing systems. In this method the design
wind pressures shall be assumed to act simultaneously normal to all exterior surfaces including roof
of buildings or structures. The forces F1, acting normal to the building surfaces or the roof, shall be
calculated as follows :
i) For all framing systems:
(2.4.3)
where, F1 wind force on primary framing systems acting normal to a surface, or roof, or a
part thereof.
p design wind pressure on building surfaces, kN/m2
Pz for windward surfaces as used in Eq (2.4.2)
ph for non-windward surfaces as used in Eq (2.4.2)
area of the building surface or roof tributary to the framing system at height z
upon which the design pressure p operates, in square metres.
ii) For gabled frames and single-storey rigid frames:

In order to obtain the most critical loading condition, gabled frames and other single-storey
rigid frames shall be investigated for both the force F1 obtained from Eq (2.4.8) and that given
by the relation :
(2.4.4)
where, pi = internal pressure = c;,i qh

c;,i internal peak pressure coefficient as given in Sec 2.4.6.7, and
qh sustained wind pressure evaluated at mean roof height, given by Eq (2.4.1).
The resultant force of the complete framing system of the building shall be taken to be the s ummation
of forces F1 due to the effects of the pressures on all surfaces of the building. For the maximum force
on the building, forces along all critical directions shall be investigated.
b) Method 2 (Projected Area Method) : This method may be used for any building or structure as a
whole except those specified in a(ii) above. In the projected area method, the horizontal pressure shall
be assumed to act upon the full vertical projected area of the structure and the vertical pressure shall
be assumed to act simultaneously upon the full horizontal projected area, except where the pressure
coefficients are �iven for the surface area, e.g. Table 6.2.17. According to Method 2, the total wind
force on the pnmary framing system of a building or a structure shall be calculated using the
formula :
(2.4.5)
total wind force on the framed system of the building in a specified direction, kN
de'sign wind pressure, in kN/m2, for use with the overall pressure coefficient Cp for
the cross-sectional shapes provided in Tables 6.2.15 to 6.2.21
= Projected frontal area normal to wind tributary to the framing system at height z, in
square metres.
6-34
Chapter 2
Loads
In the projected area method, the overall pressure coefficients C provided in Tables 6.2.15 to 6.2.21
P
for various cross-sectional shapes, shall be used for the total height of the building or the structure
having a particular cross-sectional shape. In order to determine tile most critical loads, the total wind
force F 2 shall be calculated for each wind direction for which the overall pressure coefficient CP is
provided.
2.4.6.5 Design Wind Loads for Components and Cladding: Design wind load on individual structur�l
components such as roofs, walls, and individual cladding units and their immediate supporting members ·
and fixings etc., of enclosed buildings and structures shall be determined in accordance with the following
relation:
(2.4.6)
where, F' total wind force on a building component perpendicular to the surface, kN
C' external peak pressure coefficient for components, see Fig 6.2.Z and 6.2.8 for rectangular
pe
building
internal peak pressure coefficient as given in Table 6.2.14
sustained wind pressure acting on external surfaces of a building
wind pressure developed at the interior of the building.
The pressures q and q. shall be determined as follows :

I
For h �18m: q
For h > 18m: q for ( + ve)values of Cpe and

q z ,
q q for(-ve)values ofCpe'
h
qi q for all values of Cpe.
z
If the peak pressure coefficients C pe and C p i are not provided in Fig 6.2.7 and 6.2.8 and in Table 6.2.14, the
following equation may be used for determining the wind forces on structural components :
(2.4.7)
where, pz design wind pressure for components as given in Eq (2.4.2), kN/m2

Az = Projected area of the component normal to wind at level, z above ground, in square metres.
2.4.6.6 Wind Gust Effects : Wind gusts cause additional loading effects due to turbulence over the
sustained wind speed. For slender bui1dings and structures, this additional loading gets further amplified
due to dynamic wind structure interaction effects. A slender or wind-sensitive building shall be one having
(i) a height exceeding five times the least horizontal dimension, or (ii)a fundamental natural frequency less
than 1.0 Hz. Gust coefficient, C as included in Eq (2.4.2) shall account for such additional gust loading
c
effects on non-slender and slender buildings and shall be set equal to the Gust Response Factors, G ' Gz
h
or Gas set forth below :
a) Gust Response Factor, G for Non-slender Buildings and Structures : For the main wind force
h
resisting systems of non-slender buildings and structures, the value of the gust response factor, Gh
shall be determined from Table 6.2.11 evaluated at height h above mean ground level of the building
or structure. Height h shall be defined as the mean roof level or the top of the parapet, whichever is
greater.
b) . Gust Response Factor, Gz for Building Components: For components and cladding of all buildings
and structures, the value of the gust response factor Gz shall be determined from Table 6.2.11
evaluated at the height above the ground, z at which the component or cladding under consideration
is located on the structure.

----- � �----- .� -� �-· - �--�-- � �- ---
Part 6
Structural Design
Table 6.2.11
Gust Response Factors, Gh and G/1)
Height above Gh (2) and Gz

ground level Exposure A Exposure B Exposure C
(metres)
0-4.5 1.654 1.321 1.154
6.0 1.592 1.294 1.140
9.0 1.511 1.258 1.121
12.0 1.457 1.233 1.107
15.0 1.418 1.215 1.097

18.0 1.388 1.201 1.089
211.0 1.363 1.189 1.082
24.0 1.342 -- - 1.178 1.077
27.0 1.324 1.170 1.072

30.0 1.309 1.162 1.067
35.0 1.287 1.151 1.061
40.0 1.268 1.141 1.055
45.0 1.252 1.133 1.051

50.0 1.238 1.126 1.046
60.0 1.215 1.114 1.039
70.0 1.196 1.103 1.033
80.0 1.180 1.095 1.028

90.0 1.166 1.087 1.024
100.0 1.154 1.081 1.020
110.0 1.114 1.075 1.016
120.0 1.134 1.070 1.013

130.0 1.126 1.065 1.010
140.0 1.118 1.061 1.008
150.0 1.111 1.057 1.005
160.0 1.104 1.053 1.003

170.0 1.098 1.049 1.001
180.0 1.092 1.046 1.000
190.0 1.087 1.043 1.000
200.0 1.082 1.040 1.000

220.0 1.073 1.035 1.000
240.0 1.065 1.030 1.000
260.0 1.058 1.026 1.000

280.0 1.051 1.022 1.000
300.0 1.045 1.018 1.000
Note: (1) For main wind-force resisting systems, use building or structure
height h for z.
(2) Linear interpolation is acceptable for intermediate values of z.
c) Gust Response Factor, G for Slender Buildings and Structures : Gust response factor, G for the
primary framing systems of slender buildings and structures shall be calculated by a rational
analysis incorporating the dynamic properties of the primary framing system as given by the
following relations.
!:.. ll.OT y S
0 65+ (. +
G =
. f3 1+kc
J (2.4.8)
where, p = {.IY (2.4.9)
55. 44
r= fh (2.4.10)
sVb
6-36
Chapter 2
Loads
2.35fo;
and (2.4.11)
(h/13.nt
f fundamental natural frequency of the building or structure, Hz
fJ structural damping coefficient (fraction of critical damping)

h mean roof height or height to parapet, metre
average horizontal dimension of the building or structure normal to wind, metre
basic wind speed, km/h
0.00656 for building or structure
0.00328 for open framework (lattice) structure
J pressure profile factor given in Fig 6.2.2
y resonance factor given in Fig 6.2.3
s structure size factor provided in Fig 6.2.4
Other parameters of Eq (2.4.8) through (2.4.11) are defined in Sec 2.4.2. Values of the parameters a,
Do Is and r shall be those given in Table 6.2.12.
The gust response factor G as determined by this provision shall account for the load magnification effect
caused by the wind gusts in resonance with along-wind oscillations of the structure, but shall not provide
allowances for any cross-wind response such as tnat due to vortex shedding, galloping, flutter and ovalling
nor for any torsional loading effect resulting from such response. Cases wbere cross-wind or torsiona1
loading is possible, specialist advice shall be sought for further analysis, or wind tunnel tests specified in
Sec 1.5.3.5
shall be made for determining such effects.
·
0.1
0.05 /
/
/
'/
!-',....
..., 0.01
,.....
/
£u
"'
u.. 0.005 /
/
�0 v
0::
Q) ,.. �,....
:s
(/) ,.....,....
(/)
Q) /
0::
0.001 /
,..,.
0.0005 ..... r---

_......
-
..
0.0001 -5
10
Fig. 6.2.2 Pressure Profile Factor, J, as a Function of 7

-------- - ---� ---- ------ ------- ------ -- -- - -- - - - --- ------- ------ ------- -- --- --- - --
Part 6
Structural Design
10.0 10.0
5 5
2 2
·" ' c
-=0 1'1.._'\ c
- =0.17
1.0
.\.'\ h 1.0
[\" ,'-, h
:.... 5 :.... 5
,..; ,..;
0 0
...., ...., ' .........
CJ 2 CJ 2
«S " ' ....... ....... «S \. 1'\. ' '\.
""' ""'
Cl) 0.1
\ '\.. ' � ....... .......
� � ....... r-Z .. 0. �1 0.1
1\ "" ' ....... �....... ......
0.�
Cl)
0 CJ }' ..
d - O(!(j r:: 0.��
l
«S 5 «S 5 0.
0. �.. " ' -...... ......
d r:: ....._ o-...uoo
..;;. •
0
Ul �
0
rn
o."":':--
0001
Cl) o. oo1 - - Cl)
� 2 � �<
I'. ....... ....... ·Oo., - ....... ...... 2
"' ...... -..... ......
....... �0.�
0.01
1"""- r-... � o.l}ps
...... - ""'-.... ...... 0.01
'\.. " - ti'.. ...... .......�.,t"'.. � -
O.o o.eo.?
1
5 5 �
O.o., O.o_,
Q
-....
2
....... ...... 2
...... ....... ....... -.....
...... r---- I" ' .......
0.001 0.001
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
I I
10.0 10.0
5 5
2
" 2
c
-=0.40 � c
1.00
1.0
1\\. \. h 1.0
:\\ h
=
:.... 5 :.... 5
,..; ,..;
.s 0
....,
0
2
" ·' , ..... CJ 2
«S
""' " ' ..... ...... «S \ \. " '
""'
Cl) 0.1
.\ \. � ,.......l"""- ......
Cl) 0.1
\r\.\. .\ ' '
0
d CJ
d
:;
«S }' ..
d 5 0.� «S 5 "'o
0
rn 1 r::
0
rn 0
·o.-;�
;i ..
�
Cl)
0.!/e.Oii Cl)
-......
2
" "' I'- !"".. 'o ...... o.��:s
� r--..
--
-..... � 2
\1\. ' �� .......
0.01
\ ....... " I'.. � �QQ.,�"' ,....., --
0.01
' \. \. '\.. -...... �Oq,.� ....... .......
eo
�
0 O.g;_, "92
5 -� 5
Q� 0
""$
'!
2
�.. ...... ....... 2
·o.
.._.., ..... ......
.....
'\.O.o " I'. ....... ...... 1\. ...... ....... ...... r-......
'{ I'. ...... -..... \. ...... ....... I""' 'I' !""-
0.001 0.001
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
I I
Fig. 6.2.3 Resonance Factor, Y, as a Function of 'Y and Ratio c/h
6-38
Chapter 2
Loads
1.4 I I I
-
1.3
� ' I-
I
I- �� I
1.2 ��
�� j
i"'
I-
F::: -
1.1
Vr Exposure-A
��
Cl) � Exposure-S
f£-_
0 E�osure-C
0 1.0
co
lL I':r-:::: :::: ....... �v
Q)
0.9 "" ...... r--....l/, '/
� ��
N
u; """"' r--.... i'
!"-
....:::>.
Q) " I"-
0.8
0
s
en
0.7 ��
t0 �
""'
0.6
"" "
0.5 �� " i'-..
�"' � 1\. �j
�
_I _l _l
4 5 6 7 8 910 20 30· 40 50 60 80 100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000
Height, h (m)
Fig. 6.2.4 Structure Size Factor, S
Table 6.2.12
Building Exposure Parameters
Building Exposure Do s
a r
A 0.222 0.010 1.33 1.0/h
B 0.143 0.005 1.00 0.07/h 0
c 0.100 0.003 0.85 0.0061/h
2.4.6.7 Pressure Coefficients for Buildings, Structures and Components : The pressure coefficients CP. to
be used in Eq (2.4.2) for the determination of design wind pressure shall be equal to the values descnbed
below:
a) external pressure coefficient as given in Fig 6.2.5 and Fig 6.2.6 and in Table 6.2.13 for
external surfaces of buildings or structures. This coefficient shall be used with Method 1
given in Sec 2.4.6.4a(i).
b) internal peak pressure coefficients as given in Table 6.2.14 for internal surfaces of
buildings. These coefficients shall be used along with the coefficients for design wind Cpe
load on components, or with Cpe for design wind load on buildings as per provisions of
Sec 2.4.6.4a (ii)

Part 6
Structural Design
Notation:
B Horizontal dimension of building, in metres measured
normal to wind direction
CG Gust response coefficient
h Mean roof height, in metres except that eave height may be

used for 9 S 10 degrees
Horizontal dimension of building, in metres measured
parallel to wind direction
Design wind pressure
Sustained wind pressure, in kN/m2 evaluated at respective

heights
z Height above ground in metres
(} Roof slope from horizontal, degrees
External Pressure Coeffi�ient Cpe for Walls •
Surface LIB Cne For use with
Windward wall all values 0.8 Pz = CcCveqz
S0.10 - 0.5
Leeward wall 0.65 - 0.6
1.00 - 0.5 Pz= Cc Cve%
2.00 - 0.3
�-----L--------� > 4.00 - 0.2
Side wall all values -0.7 Pz CG CTJeqz
Elevation =
..
These coefficients rna be used when Fi71 S5.0.
·Rectangular Buildin�
b
Alternatively, use Ta le 6.2.15 a nd Method 2, Sec 2.4.6.4(b)
External Pressure Coefficients, Cpe for Roof t
Windward Side
Wind (} (degrees) Leeward
Direction h/L 0 10-15 20 30 40 50 >60 Side

Normal $0.3 -0.7 0.2 .. 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.016 -0.7
to ridge -0.9 .. for all
0.5 -0.7 -0.9 -0.75 -0.2 0.3 0.5 0.016 values of
1.0 -0.7 -0.9 -0.75 -0.2 0.3 0.5 0.016 h/L
� 1.5 -0.7 -0.9 -0.9 -0.9 -0.35 0.2 0.016 and(}
Parallel h!B orh/L
to ridge S2.5 -0.7 -0.7
h/B orh/L
>2.5 -0.8 -0.8
t Coefficients are to be used with ph= CG c e qh' see Sec 2.4.6.6(a)

p
•
Both values of Cpe shall be used for load calculations.
Note: (1) These coefficients shall be used with Method 1, Sec 2.4.6.4.(a).
(2) Refer to Table 6.2.13 for arched roofs.
(3) For flexible buildings and structures, use appropriate G as determined by Sec 2.4.6.6 (c).
(4) Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
(5) Linear interpolation may be made for values of6, h/L, and LIB ratios other than listed.
Fig 6.2.5 External Pressure Coefficients, C e for Primary Framing

p
Systems of Rectangular Buildings
6-40
Chapter 2
Loads
IE-IE--L--�)j
Wind direction External pressure coefficient. ICpsl

(a)
degrees a b
I c m z
Use Fig.6.2.5 for same I h/8 I and -0.3 and 0.2 for a <10"
0 •0.7 -0.2
a. as appropriate -0.5 and 0.3 for a �10"
111
{a) Pitched Roof
9
a:O"
' ' �
a=180"
IE L�
External pressure coefficient, Cpe

Wind direction
lntermedia Ia
(a) First span Second span
span
End span
degrees
a b c d e m m X y z
0 •0.7 .o.6 -0.7 -0.7 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.1 -0.3 -0.2
180 -0.2 -0.5 -0.3 -0.3 -0.3 -0.4 -0.6 -0.6 -0.1 •0.7
111
{b) North-Light Roof
�
a=180"
"'
External pressure coefficient, Cpe
Wind direction
Intermediate
(a) First span Second span
span
End span
degrees
a b c d m m X y z
0 0.7 -0.9 -0.9 -0.5,0.2 -0.5,0.5 -0.5.0.3 -0.3.0.5 -0.4 -0.2

180 -0.2 -0.2,0.2 -0.3 -0.2,0.2 -0.4 -0.4 -0.7 -0.3 0.7
11)
(c) Saw-Tooth Roof
Notes • Ill For components and cladding use Fig 6.2.6 for a :90" and 270",
Cpe =(Values given in Fig 2.6.51 - I0.05(N-tll. where, N:No. of spans: N:4 if N>4
(21 When two values of Cpe are listed, roofs shall be designed for both values
Fig. 6.2.6 External Pressure Coefficients, Cpe for Multi-span Buildings

Part 6
Structural Design
c) external peak pressure coefficient as given in Fig 6.2.7 and 6.2.8 to be applied on external
surfaces of buildings to obtain design wind load on individual components and cladding
in accordance with Sec 2.4.6.5.
d) overall pressure coefficient as given in Tables 6.2.15 through 6.2.21 for various cross
sectional shapes to be used with the projected area of buildings or structures when
Method 2 in Sec 2.4.6.4(b) is used.
If pressure coefficients cpe' c;,;' c;,e or c p are not provided herein for certain buildings, structures or
components, reliable references shall be followed or specialist advice shall be sought.
Table 6.2.13
External Pressure Coefficients, Cpe for Arched Roofs
Cve
Condition Rise-to-span Windward Centre Leeward
Ratio, r Quarter half Quarter
Roofs on elevated 0< r .$. 0.2 -0.9 -0.7 -r -0.5

structures 0.2< r .$. 0.3* 1.5 r-0.3 -0.7 -r -0.5
0.3< r .$. 0.6 2.75 r- 0.7 -0.7 -r -0.5
Roofs s ringing from

re 0 < r .$. 0.6 1.4 r - 0. 7 - r -0.5
ground eve!
* When the rise-to-span ratio is 0.2 � r � 0.3 alternate coefficients given by (6r -2.1) shall also be used for the
windward quarter.
Notes: (1) Values listed are for the determination of average loads on primary framing system.
(3) For components and cladding :
a) At roof perimeter, use the external pressure coefficients in Fig 6.2.7 with e based on spring-
line slope and qh based on Exposure B.
For remaining roof area, use external pressure coefficients of this table multiplied by 1.2
b) and qh based on Exposure B.
Table 6.2.14
Internal Peak Pressure Coefficients for Buildings, C'pi
Condition C'pi
Percenta of total wall area occupied by openings in one wall

� + 0.75 and 0.25 -
exceeds t at of all other walls by 10% or more and openings

in all other walls do not exceed 20% of respective wall area.
All other cases ±0.25
Notes: (1) Values are to be used with q or qh as specified in Sec 2.4.6.4 a(ii) and 2.4.6.5.
z
. (2) Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
(3) Appropriate positive and negative values of C'pi shall be considered when determining the
controlling load requirement.
(4) Percentage of openings is based on gross area of wall.
6-42
Chapter 2
Loads
-2.0
o-f+ a ffi a t+a
-1.5
-1.0
Oil ·0.5
.Q.
(.)
Rectangular Building having h �18m

Plan 0.5
U1
1.0
1.5
10"<9 <45"
Side View (a) Wall Coefficients
-2.0
Roofs
Cb
.Q. 30"< 9<45"
(.) -1. 5 0
-1.0 0.5
1.0
0 0
50 50
(b) Roof Coefficients
Note: (1) Vertical scale denotes Cpe to be used with qh based on Exposure B.
(2) The horizontal scale denotes tributary area in square metres.

(3) External pressure coefficients for walls may be reduced by 10% when 9 � 10 degrees.
(5) Each component shall be designed for maximum positive and negative pressures.
(6) Roof overhangs shall have Cpe given in Fig (b) to be applied at the top surface plus a Cpe = + 0.8 applied at the
bottom surface.
Fig 6.2.7 External Peak Pressure Coefficients c;,e for Loads on Building
Components and Cladding for Buildings with Mean Roof Height, h of
18 metres or Less

Part 6
Structural Design
Plan
-1.5
r--
"' I -1.0
q,
_Q.
I 1' (.)
a a
0
f--a
--7
-17 fE- a
� 0.5 -1.5
'I
1.0 -1.0
®
1.5 -0.5
2 5 10 20
A (m21 A (m21
z
(j)-
(a) Wall Coefficients (b) Roof Coefficients
Wall
Elevation
Note: (1) Vertical scale d�notes Cpe to be used with appropriate qz or qh
(2) Horizontal scale denotes tributary area A in square metres

(3) Use qh with negative values of Cpe
(4) Each component shall be designed for maximum positive and negative pressures
(5) If a parapet is provided around the robf perimeter, zones (3) and (4) may be treated as zone (2)
(6) For roofs with a slope of more than 10 degrees, use Cpe from Fig 6.2.7 and qh based on Exposure B
(8) Roof overhangs shall have Cpe given in Fig (b) to be applied at the top surface plus a Cpe = + 0.8 applied at the
bottom surface.
(9) For parapet use Cpe = ± 1.3
Notation:
a : 5% of minimum width or O.Sh, whichever is smaller
h: Mean roof height in metres
z: Height above ground in metres.
Fig 6.2.8 External Peak Pressure Coefficients Cpe for Loads on Building
Components and Cladding for Buildings with Mean Roof Height, h
Greater Than 18 metres
6-44
Chapter 2
Loads
1--L---1 Table 6.2.15 (1)
ll-?F,
Overall Pressure Coefficients, Cp(2) for Rectangular Buildings with Flat Roofs
9 h/B LIB
0.1 0.5 0.65 1.0 2.0 >3.0
.$.5 1.40 1.45 1.55 1.40 1.15 1.10
(b) Elevation
10.0 1.55 1.85 2.00 1.70 1.30 1.15
ID
20.0 1.80 2.25 2.55 2.00 1.40 1.20
9 --7F2
�40.0 1.95 2.50 2.80 2.20 1.60 1.25
1--L---1 Note:(1) These coefficients a� to be used with Method-2 given in

Sec 2.4.6.6a(ii). Use Cp ± 0.7 for roof in all cases.
=
(a) Plan (2) Lin�r interpolation may be made for intermediate values
of h(B and LIB.
Rectangular Building
Table 6.2.16
Overall Pressure Coefficient, Cp for Buildings and Structures such as Chimneys, Tanks, etc.
Shape Type of surface C12_for hiD values of

1 7 25
�
Square wind normal to a face) All 1.3 1.4 2.0
Sguare wind along dia onal) All 1.0 1.1 1.5
Hexagonal or octagona f:
(D..{q; >0.167 ) All 1.0 1.2 1.4
Round (D..fq; > 0.167): Moderately smooth 0.5 0.6 0.7
Rough (D'/D"' 0.02) 0.7 0.8 0.9

Very rough(D'/D"' 0.08) 0.8 1.0 1.2
Round (D ..{q; � 0.167): All 0.7 0.8 \ · ,_ 1.2
Notes: 1) The design wind force shall be calculated based on the area of the structure projected on a plane
normal to the wind direction. The force shall be assumed to act parallel to the wind direction.
2) Linear interpolation may be used for hiD values other than those shown.
3) Notation:
D: diameter or least horizontal dimension, metres.
D': depth of protruding elements such as ribs and spoilers, metres.
h: height of structure, metres.
Table 6.2.17
Overall Pressure Coefficients Cp for Monoslope Roofs Over Unenclosed Buildings and Structures
LIB
(}
(degrees) 5 3 2 1 1/2 1 !3 1/5
10 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.45 0.55 0.7 0.75
15 0.35 0.45 0.5 0.7 O.S5 0.9 0.85
20 0.5 0.6 0.75 0.9 1.0 0.95 0.9
25 0.7 0.8 0.95 1.15 1.1 1.05 0.95
30 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.0
Location o centre .of pressure,
X/L, for L/B values of:
2 to5 1 1/5 to 1/2
10 to 20 0.35 0.3 0.3
25 0.35 0.35 0.4
30 0.35 0.4 0.45
Note: 1) Wind forces act normal to the surface and shall be directed inward or outward.
2) Wind shall be assumed to deviate by± 10 degrees from horizontal.
3) Notation:
B: dimension of roof measured normal to wind direction, metres
L: dimension of roof measured parallel to wind direction, metres
X: distance to centre of pressure from windward edge of roof, metres
Q: angle of plane of roof from horizontal, degrees.

Part 6
Structural Design
Table 6.2.18
Overall Pressure Coefficients, C for Solid Signs
p
At Ground Level Above Ground Level
v Cv MIN Cv
:::; 3 1.2 :::;6 1.2
5 1.3 10 1.3
8 1.4 16 1.4
10 1.5 20 1.5
20 1.75 40 1.75
30 1.85 60 1.85
�40 2.00 �80 2.00
Note :1) Signs with openings comprising less than 30% of the gross area
shall be considered as solid signs. ..
2) Signs for which the dislance from the ground to the bottom edge
is less than 0.25 times the vertical dimension shall be considered
to be at ground level.
3) To allow for both normal and oblique wind directions, two cases
shall be considered :
a) Resultant force acts normal to sign at geometric centre, and
b) Resultant force acts normal to sign at level of geometric
centre and at a distance from windward edge of 0.3 times the
horizontal dimension.
4) Notation:
v Ratio of height to width
M: Larger dimension of sign, metres
N Smaller dimension of sign, metres.
Table 6.2.19
Overall Pressure Coefficients Cp for Open Signs and Lattice Frameworks
C .
p
Flat-sided Round Members

e
Members
D{q z :=:; 0.167 D{q z > 0.167
<0.1 2.0 1.2 0.8

0.1 to 0.29 1.8 1.3 0.9
0.3 to 0.7 1.6 1.5 1.1
Notes: 1) Signs with openings comprising 30% or more of the gross area are classified
as open signs.
2) The calculation of the design wind forces shall be based on the area of all
exposed members and elements projected on a plane normal to the wind
direction. Forces shall be assumed to act parallel to the wind direction.
3) Notation:
e : Ratio of solid area to gross area
D : Diameter of a typical round member, in metres.
6-46
Chapter 2
Loads
Table 6.2.20
Overall Pressure Coefficients, C for Trussed Towers
p
Square Towers Triangular Towers
< 0.025 4.0 3.6

0.025 to 0.44 4.1-5.2£ 3.7-4.5£
0.45 to 0.69
1.8 1.7
0.7 to 1.0
1.3 + 0.7£ 1.0 + E
Note: 1) Force coefficients are given for towers with structural angles or similar flat
sided members.
2) For towers with rounded members, the design wind force shall be determined
using the values in the above table multiplied by the following factors:
For e .s; 0.29: factor 0.67 =
For 0.3 .s; e .s; 0.79: factor = 0.67 E + 0.47

For 0.8 .s; e .s; 1.0: factor = 1.0
3) For triangular section towers, the design wind forces shall be assumed to act
normal to a tower face.
4) For square section towers, the design wind forces shall be assumed to act
normal to a tower face. To allow for the maximum horizontal wind load, which
occurs when the wind is oblique to the faces, the wind load acting normal to a
tower face shall be multiplied by the factor 1.0 + 0.75 e for£< 0.5 and shall be
assumed to act along a diagonal.
5) Wind forces on tower appurtenances, such as ladders, conduits, lights,
elevators, and the like, shall be calculated using appropriate force coefficients
·.
for these elements.

6) For guyed towers, the cantilever portion of the tower shall be designed for 125%
of the design force.
-7)- A reduction of 25% of the design force in any span between guys shall be made
for determination of controlling moments and shears.
8) Notation:
e : Ratio of solid area to gross area of tower face.
D : Typical member diameter, in metres.
Table 6.2.21
Overall Pressure. Coefficients, Cp,D and Cp,L for Tower Guys
rp Cv,D Cv,L
(de!(rees)
10 0.05 0.05
20 0.10 0.15
30 0.20 0.30
40 0.35 0.35
50 0.60 0.45
60 0.80 0.45
70 1.05 0.35
80 1.15 0.20
90 1.20 0.00
Notes: 1) The force coefficients shall be used in conjunction with
exposed area of the tower guy in square metre, calculated
as chord length multiplied by guy diameter.
2) Notation:
Cp,D: Force coefficient for the component of force

acting in direction of the wind.
Cp,L: Force coefficient for the component of force
acting normal to direction of the wind and in the
plane containing the angle ¢.
¢: Angle between wind direction and chord of the
guy, in degrees.

Part 6
Structural Design
2.4.6.8 Effect of Local Topography : If a structure or any portion thereof is located within a local
topographic zone, such as regions around hills and ridges as shown in Fig 6.2.9, the sustained wind pressure
obtained from Sec 2.4.6.2 shall be modified by multiplying by a local topographic coefficient, Ct. Value of
the coefficient, Ct shall be obtained from Fig 6.2.9.
To ground
at 5H from
c res t
t5Lu or 2.5H 1.5Lu or 2.5H

whichever is greater (whichever is greater)
* Lu or 1.67 H (whichever is greater)
� Local topographic zone
Local Topographic Coefficient, Ct at Crest
Upwind slope Coefficient, Ct

(tan¢)
0.05 1.19
0.1 1.39
0.2 1.85
;;:>: 0.3 2.37
Legend:
tan� the upwind slope, ....!:!..._

2Lu
tan�d the average downwind slope, measured from the crest of a hill or ridge or to the
ground level at a distance of SH.
·
H the height of the hill or ridge in meters

Lu = the honzontal distance upwind from the crest to a level half the height below the crest
in meters.
Notes: (1) For intermediate values of upwind slope, linear interpolation is permitted.
(2) Ct = 1.0 for a point at or out side the boundary of the local topographic zones as shown in the figure .
For any point within the local topographic zone, value of the coefficient, Ct shall be obtained by
·
interpolation from the value at crest given in the table and the value of Ct=l at the boundary of the
zone. The interpolation shall be linear with horizontal distance from the crest, and with height above the
local ground level.
Fig 6.2.9 Local Topographic Coefficient, Ct for Hills and Ridges.
6-48
Chapter 2
Loads
2.5 EARTHQUAKE LOADS
2.5.1 General
Minimum design earthquake forces for buildings, structures or components thereof shall be determined in
accordance with the J>rovisions of this section. For primary framing systems of buildings or structures, the
design seismic lateral forces shall be calculated e1ther by the Equivalent Static Force Method or by the
Dynamic Response Method based on the criteria set forth in Sec 2.5.5.1. Overall design of buildings and
structures to resist seismic ground motion and other forces shall comply with the applicable aesign
requirements given in Chapter 1.
2.5.2 Definitions
The following definitions of terms shall be applicable only to the provisions of Sec 2.5:
BASE: The level at which the earthquake motions are considered to be imparted to the structures or the
level at which the structure as a dynamic vibrator is supported.
BASE SHEAR: Total design lateral force or shear at the base of a structure.
BEARING WALL SYSTEM: A structural system without a complete vertical load carrying space frame, see
Sec 1.3.2.
BRACED FRAME : An essentially vertical truss system of the concentric or eccentric type which is provided .
to resist lateral forces.
BUILDING FRAME SYSTEM : An essentially complete space frame which provides support for gravity
loads, see Sec 1.3.2.
DIAPHRAGM: A horizontal or nearly horizontal system of structures acting to transmit lateral forces to the
vertical resisting elements. The term "diaphragm" includes horizontal bracing systems.
DUAL SYSTEM: A combination of a Special or Intermediate Moment Resisting Frame and Shear Walls or
Braced Frames designed in accordance with the criteria of Sec 1.3.2.
ECCENTRIC BRACED FRAME (EBF): A steel braced frame designed in conformance with Sec 1.8.
emergency or a post disaster period. .
FLEXIBLE DIAPHRAGM : A floor or roof diaphragm shall be considered flexible, for purposes of this
provision, when the maximum lateral deformation of the diaphragm is more than two times the average
storey drift of the associated storey. This may be determined by comparing the computed midpoint in-plane
deflection of the diaphragm under lateral load with the storey drift of adJoining vertical resisting elements
under equivalent tributary lateral load.
FLEXIBLE ELEMENT OR SYSTEM : An element or system whose deformation under lateral load is
significantly larger than adjoining parts of the system.
·
FLEXIBLY SUPPORTED EQUIPMENT: Non-rigid or flexibly supported equipment is a system having a

fundamental period, including the equipment, greater than 0.06 second.
HORIZONTAL BRACING SYSTEM: A horizontal truss system that serves the same function as a floor or
roof diaphragm.
INTERMEDIATE MOMENT RESISTING FRAME (IMRF): A concrete or steel frame designed in accordance
with Sec 8.3 or 10.5.17 respectively.
MOMENT RESISTING FRAME: A frame in which members and joints are capable of resisting forces
primarily by flexure.
ORDINARY MOMENT RESISTING FRAME (OMRF) : A moment resisting frame not meeting special
detailing requirements for ductile behaviour.
PRIMARY FRAMING SYSTEM: That p�rt of the structural system assigned to resist lateral forces.
RIGIDLY SUPPORTED EQUIPMENT : A rigid or rigidly supported equipment is a system having a

fundamental period less than or equal to 0.06 second.
SHEAR WALL: A wall designed to resist lateral forces parallel to the plane of the wall (sometimes referred
to as a vertical diaphragm or a structural wall).

Part 6
Structural Design
SOFT STOREY : Storey in which the lateral stiffness is less than 70 per cent of the stiffness of the storey
above.
SPACE FRAME : A three-dimensional structural system without bearing walls composed of members
interconnected so as to function as a complete self contained unit with or without the aid of horizontal
diaphragms or floor bracing systems..
SPECIAL MOMENT RESISTING FRAME (SMRF) :A moment resisting frame specially detailed to provide
ductile behaviour complying with the seismic requirements provided in Chapters 8 and 10 for concrete and
steel frames respectively.
SPECIAL STRUCTURAL SYSTEM:A structural system not listed in Table 6.2.24.
STOREY: The space between floor levels. Storey-x is the storey below level-x.
STOREY SHEAR, Vx :The summation of design lateral forces above the storey under consideration.
STRENGTH : The usable capacity of an element or a member to resist the load as prescribed in these
provisions.
STRUCTURE: An assemblage of framing members designed to support gravity loads and resist lateral
forces. Structures may be categorized as building and non-building structures as defined in Sec 1.2.2.
TOWER:A tall, slim vertical structure.
VERTICAL LOAD-CARRYING FRAME:A space frame designed to carry all vertical gravity loads.
WEAK STOREY: Storey in which the lateral strength is less than 80 per cent of that of the storey above.

The following symbols and notation shall apply to the provisions of this section:
A the combined effective area, in square metres of the shear walls in the first storey of the
c
structure.
A the effective horizontal cross-sectional area, in square metres of a shear wall in the first
e
storey of the structure.
A the torsion amplification factor at level-x.
X
c numerical coefficient specified in Sec 2.5.6.1.
c numerical coefficient specified in Sec 2.5.8 and given in Table 6.2.26.
Ct numerical coefficient given in Sec 2.5.6.2.
the length in metres of a shear wall element in the first storey in the direction parallel to the
De
applied forces.
!t lateral force at level -i for use in Eq (2.5.5).
F/n,Fx lateral force applied to level-i, -n, or -x respectively:
F' lateral forces on an element or component or on equipment supports.

Ft that portion of the base shear V, considered concentrated at the top of the structure in
addition to F ·
n
F'X force on floor- or roof-diaphragm.
acceleration due to gravity.
h height in metres above the base to level i, n or
�i' hn,
-x respectively.
x
-
I structure importance coefficient given in Table 6.2.23.

[' structure importance coefficient specified in Sec 2.5.8 for structural and non-structural
components and equipment.
Level-i level of the structure referred to by the subscript i, e.g., i =1 designates the first level above
the base.
Level-n the uppermost level in the main portion of the structure.
Level-x the level under consideration e.g., x 1 designates the first level above the base.
=
R response modification coefficient for structural systems given in Table 6.2.24.

s =
site coefficient for soil characteristics given in Table 6.2.25.
T =
fundamental period of vibration, in seconds, of the structure in the direction under
consideration.
v the total design lateral force or shear at the base
v the design storey shear in storey x
x
w the total seismic dead load defined in Sec 2.5.5.2
Wj,Wx that portion of W which is located at or assigned to level -i or -x respectively
·
w'
X the weight of the diaphragm and the elements tributary thereto at level-x, including
·
applicable portions of other loads defined in Sec 2.5.5.2.
6-50
Part 6
Structural Design
eg· go· gr g2·
FIG. 6.2.10 SEISMIC ZONING MAP OF BANGLADESH
26" 26"
INDIA
25"
24" 24 "
23" 23"
INDIA
22" 22"
BAY OF BENGAL
International Boundary ... ... ...

River lk Lake ... ... ... ... ... �
21" Seismic Zone• ... ... ... ... ... Q::J E 3 f;:,c;:.:]
Location of City/Town ... ... ... ...
SCALE
sg· go· g1· g2·
6-52
Chapter 2
Loads
W' the weight of an element or component

z seismic zone coefficient given in Table 6.2.22.
8. horizontal displacement at level-i relative to the base due to applied lateral forces, in metre,
I
for use in Eq (2.5.5).
2.5.4 Seismic Zoning

2.5.4.1 Seismic Zoning Map : The seismic zoning map of Bangladesh is provided in Fig 6.2.10. Based on
the severity of the probable intensity of seismic ground motion and damages, Bangladesh has been divided
into three seismic zones, i.e. Zone 1, Zone 2 and Zone 3 as shown in Fig 6.2.10 with Zone 3 being the most
severe.
2.5.4.2 Selection of Seismic Zone and Zone Coefficient : Seismic zone for a building site shall be
determined based on the location of the site on the Seismic Zoning Map provided in Fig 6.2.10. Each
building or structure shall be assigned a Seismic Zone Coefficient, Z corresponding to the seismic zone of
the site as set forth in Table 6.2.22.
2.5.5 Design Earthquake Forces for Primary Framing Systems

The design earthquake lateral forces on the primary framing systems of every building or structure shall be
calculated based on the provisions set forth m this section. The design seismic forces shall be assumed to act
/
nonconcurrently in the direction of each rincipal axis of the building or the structure, except otherwise
required by the provisions of Sec 1.5.4 an 1.7.
2.5.5.1 Selection of Lateral Force Method : Seismic lateral forces on primary framing systems shall be
determined by using either the Equivalent Static Force Method provided in Sec 2.5.6, or the Dynamic
Response Method given in Sec 2.5.7 complying with the restrictions given below :
a) The Equivalent Static Force Method of Sec 2.5.6 may be used for the following structures :
i) All structures, regular or irregular, in Seismic Zone 1 and in Structure Importance Category IV
in Seismic Zone 2, except case b(iv) below.
ii) Regular structures under 75 metres in height with lateral force resistance provided by
structural systems listed in Table 6.2.24. except case b(iv) below.
iii) Irregular structures not more than 20 metres in height.
iv) A tower like building or structure having a flexible upper portion supported on a rigid lower
portion where:
1) both portions of the structure considered separately can be classified as regular structures,
2) the average storey stiffness of the lower portion is at least ten times the average storey
stiffness of the upper portion, and ·
3) the period of the entire structure is not greater than 1.1 times the period of the upper
porhon considered as a separate structure fixed at the base.
b) The Dynamic Response Method as given in Sec 2.5.7 may be used for all classes of structure, but shall
be used for structures of the following types.
i) Structures 75 metres or more in height except as permitted by case a(i) above.

ii) Structures having a stiffness, weight or geometric vertical irregularity of Type I, II, or III as
defined in Table 6.1.3. or structures having irregular features not described in either Table 6.1.3
or 6.1.4.
iii) Structures over 20 metres in height in Seismic Zone 3 not having the same structural system
throughout their height except as permitted by Sec 1.6.4.
iv) Structures, regular or irregular, located on Soil Profile Type S4 as given in Table 6.2.25, which
have a period greater than 0.7 second. The analysis shall include the effects of the soils at the
site and shall conform to Sec 2.5.7.1 (c).
2.5.5.2 Seismic Dead Load : Seismic dead load, W, is the total dead load of a building or a structure,
including permanent partitions, and applicable portions of other loads listed below :
a) In storage and warehouse occupancies, a minimum of 25 per cent of the floor live load shall be
applicab1e.
b) Where an allowance for partition load is included in the floor design in accordance with Sec 2.3.3.3,
all such loads but not less than 0.6 kN /m2 shall be applicable.
c) Total weight of permanent equipment shall be included.

6-51
Chapter 2
Loads
2.5.6 Equivalent Static Force Method

This method may be used for calculation of seismic lateral forces for all structures specified in Sec 2.5.5.1(a)
2.5.6.1 Design Base Shear : The total design base shear in a given direction shall be determined from the
following relation:
(2.5.1)
..
where, Z = Seismic zone coefficient given in Table 6.2.22
I = Structure importance coefficient given in Table 6.2.23
R = Response modification coefficient for structural systems given in Table 6.2.24
W = The total seismic dead load defined in Sec 2.5.5.2
C = Numerical coefficient given by the relation :
(2.5.2)
S = Site coefficient for soil characteristics as provided inTable 6.2.25

T Fundamental period of vibration in seconds, of the structure for the direction under
consideration as determined by the provisions of Sec 2.5.6.2.
The value of C need not exceed 2.75 and this value may be used for any structure without regard to soil type
or structure period. Except for those requirements where Code prescribed forces are scaled up by 0.375R; the
minimum value of the ratio C/R shall be 0.075.
Table 6.2.22 Table 6.2.23

Seismic Zone Coefficients, Z Structure Importance Coefficients I, I'
Seismic Zone Zone Structure Importance Category Structure

(see Fig 6.2.10) Coefficient (see Table 6.1.1 for occupancy) Importance
Coefficient
I I'
I Essential facilities 1. 25 1.50
I 0.075 II Hazardous facilities 1. 25 1.50
2 0.15 III Special occupancy structures 1.00 1 .00
3 0.25 IV Standard occupancy structures 1.00 1.00
v Low-risk Structures 1.00 1.00
2.5.6.2 Structure Period : The value of the fundamental period, T of the structure shall be determined
from one of the following methods : .
·
a) Method A : For all buildings the value ofT may be approximated by the following formula :
T = Ct (h n ) 314 (2.5.3)
where, 0.083 for steel moment resisting frames

0.073 for reinforced concrete moment resisting frames, and eccentric braced
steel frames
0.049 for all other structural systems
Height in metres above the base to level n.
Alternatively, the value of Ct for· buildings with concrete or masonry shear walls may be taken as
0.031/..[A;. The value of Ac shall be obtained from the relation:
Ac =
[
LAe 0.2+(De/hn)
2
] (2.5.4)
where, The combined effective area, in square metres, of the shear walls in the first
storey of the structure.
The effective horizontal cross-sectional area, in square metres of a shear wall in
the first storey of the structure.
The length, in metre of a shear wall element in the first storey in the direction
parallel to the applied forces.
The value of De !hn for use in Eq ( 2.5.4) shall not exceed 0.9.

----- ---------·------ ---
Part 6
Structural D esign
Table 6.2.24
Response Modification Coefficient for Structural Systems, R
Basic Structural Systemt1J Description of Lateral Force Resisting System t�J

R
a. Bearing Wall 1. Light framed walls with shear panels
System i) Plywood walls for structures, 3 storeys or less 8
ii) All other light framed walls -t)
2. Shear walls
i) Concrete 6
ii) Masonry 6
3. Light steel framed bearing walls with tension only bracing 4
4. Braced frames where bracing carries gravity loads
i) Steel 6
ii) Concrete <3> 4
iii) Heavy_ timber 4
b. Building Frame 1. Steel eccentric braced frame (EBF) 10
System 2. Light framed walls with shear panels
i) Plywood walls for structures 3-storeys or less 9
ii) All other light framed walls 7
3. Shear walls
i) Concrete 8
ii) Masonry 8
4. Concentric braced frames (CBF)
i) Steel 8
ii) Concrete <3> 8
iii) Heavy timber 8
c. Moment Resisting 1. Special moment resisting frames (SMRF)
Frame System i) Steel 12
ii) Concrete 12
2. Intermediate moment resisting frames (IMRF), concrete<4> 8
3. Ordinary moment resisting frames (OMRF)
i) Steel 6
ii) Concrete (S) 5
d. Dual System l. Shear walls
. i) Concrete with steel or concrete SMRF 12
ii) Concrete with steel OMRF 6
. iii) Concrete with concrete IMRF <4> 9
iv) Masonry with steel or concrete SMRF 8
v) Masonry with steel OMRF 6
vi) Masonry with concrete IMRF (3) 7
2. Steel EBF
i) With steel SMRF 12
ii) With steel OMRF 6
. .
3. Concentric braced frame (CBF)

i) Steel with steel SMRF 10
ii) Steel with steel OMRF 6
iii) Concrete with concrete SMRF <3> 9
iv) Concrete with concrete IMRF <3> 6
e. Special Structural See Sec 1.3.2, 1.3.3, 1.3.5

Systems
Notes: (1) Basic Structural Systems are defined in Sec 1.3.2, Chapter 1.
(2) See Sec 2.5.6.6 for combination of structural systems, and Sec 1.3.5 for system limitations.
(3) Prohibited in Seismic Zone 3.
(4) Prohibited in Seismic Zone 3. except as permitted in Sec 2.5.9.3.
(5) Prohibited in Seismic Zones 2 and 3. Sec 1.7.2.6.
6-54
Chapter 2
Loads
Table 6.2.25
Site Coefficient, S for Seismic Lateral Forces (1)
Site Soil Characteristics Coefficient,

s
Ty�e Description
s1 A soil profile with either:

a) A rock-like material characterized by a shear-wave velocity greater than 1.0
762 m/s or by other suitable means of classification, or
b) Stiff or dense soil condition where the soil depth is less than 61 metres
5z A soil profile with dense or stiff soil conditions, where the soil depth exceeds 1.2
61 metres .
53 �
A soil profile 21 metres or more in depth and containin more than 6 metres of 1.5
soft to medium stiff clay but not more than 12 metres o soft clay
54 A soil profile containing more than 12 metres of soft clay characterized by a 2.0
shear wave velocity less than 152 m/s
Note: (1) The site coefficient shall be established from properly substantiated geotechnical data. In locations
where the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail to determine the soil profile type, soil
profile 53 shall be used. Soil profile 54 need not be assumed unless the building official determines
that soil profile 54 may be present at the site, or in the event that soil profile 54 is established by
geotechnical data.
b) /'
Method B : The fundamental eriod T may be calculated using the structural / roperties and
deformational characteristics o the resisting elements in a properly substantiate analysis. This
requirement may be satisfied by using the following formula:
·
(2.5.5)
The values of fi represent any lateral force distributed approximately in accordance with the
principles of Eq (2.5.6), (2.5.7) and (2.5.8) or any other rational distribution. The elastic deflections, S;
shall be calculated using the applied lateral forces, fi. The value of T determined from Eq (2.5.5) shall
not exceed that calculated using Eq (2.5.3) by more than 40%.
2.5.6.3 Vertical Distribution of Lateral Forces: In the absence of a more rigorous procedure, the total
lateral force, which is the base shear V, shall be distributed along the height.of the structure in accordance
with Eq (2.5.6), (2.5.7) and (2.5.8):
V=Ft+ L /i (2.5.6}
i=1
where, Fj Lateral force applied at storey level -i and

F Concentrated lateral force considered at the top of the
t
building in addition to the force Fn.
The concentrated force, Ft acting at the top of the building shall be determined as follows:
F 0.07 TV S 0.25 V when T > 0.7 second (2.5.7a)

t
=
F = 0.0 when rs 0.7 second (2.5.7b)

t
The remaining portion of the base shear (V-Ft}, shall be distributed over the height of the building,
including level-n, according to the relation :
(V-Ft)Wxhx
Fx = n
(2.5.8)
L Wjhj
i=1

Part 6
Structural Design
At each storey level-x, the force Fx shall be applied over the area of the building in proportion to the mass
distribution at that level.
2.5.6.4 Horizontal Distribution of Shear: The design storey shear Vx, in any storey x is the sum of the
forces Fx and ft above that storey. Vx shall be distributed to the various elements of the vertical lateral
force resisting system in proportion to their rigidities, considering the rigidity of the floor or roof
diaphragm. Allowance shall also be made for the increased shear arising due to any horizontal torsional
moments as specified in Sec 2.5.6.5.
2.5.6.5 Horizontal Torsional Moments : Provision shall be made for the increased shears resulting from
horizontal torsion where floor diaphragms are not flexible.
The torsional design moment at a given storey shall be the moment resulting from eccentricities between
applied design lateral forces at levels above that storey and the vertical resisting elements in that storey plus
an accidental torsional moment. .
The accidental torsional moment in any storey shall be determined assuming the storey mass to be displaced
from the calculated centre of mass in each direction a distance e'l.ual to 5% of the building dimension at that
level perpendicular to the direction of the force under consideration.
Where torsional irregularity exists (Plan Irregularity Type I as defined in Table 6.1.4) the effects shall be
accounted for by increasing the accidental torsion at each level by an amplification factor, Ax determined
from the formula:
(2.5.9)
where, Omax The maximum displacement at level-x.
Oavg The average of the displacements at extreme positions of the

building at level-x.
The more severe loading for each element shall be considered for design.
2.5.6.6 Combination of Structural Systems: When structural systems defined in Sec 1.3.2 are combined to
be incorporated into the same structure, the following requirements shall be satisfied:
a) Vertical Combinations: The value of the response modification coefficient, R used in the design of
any storey for a given direction shall not be greater than that used for the storey above. However,
this reguirement need not apply to a storey wfi.ere the dead load above that storey is less than 10 per
cent of the total dead weight of the structure.
Structures may be designed using the procedures of Sec 2.5.6 under the following conditions:
i) The entire structure is designed using the lowest value of R for the lateral force resisting systems
used, or
ii) The following procedure is used for structures conforming to Sec 2.5.5.1a(iv).
1. The flexible upper portion, shall be designed as a separate structure, supported laterally by
the rigid lower portions using the appropriate value of R.
2. The rigid lower portimishall be designed as a se arate structure using the appropriate value
r
of R. The reactions from the upper portion shal be increased by the ratio of the R values of
the two portions. These factored reactions shall be applied at the top of the rigid lower
portion in addition to the forces determined for the lower portion itself.
b) Combinations Along Different Axes:
i) In Seismic Zone 3, where a structure has a Bearing Wall System in only one direction, the value
of R used for the orthogonal direction shall not oe greater than that used for the Bearing Wall
System defined in Sec 1.3.2. .
ii) Any combination of Building Frame Systems, Dual Systems, or Moment Resisting Frame
Systems defined in Sec 1.3.2 may be used to resist design seismic forces in structures less than 50
m in height. Only combinations of Dual Systems and Special Moment Resisting Frames (SMRF)
can be used to resist the design seismic forces in structures exceeding 50 m in height in Seismic
Zone 3.
6-56
Chapter 2
Loads
2.5.7 Dynamic Response Method

The Dynamic Response Method, where used, shall conform to the criteria established in this section. The
analysis of the structure shall be based on an established principle of mechanics, using a mathematical
model specified in Sec 1.2.6.l{a) and one of the dynamic analysis procedures given in Sec 2.5.7.2 and 2.5.7.3.
The mass and mass moments of inertia of various components of a structure, required for the dynamic
analysis, shall be calculated based on the seismic dead load specified in Sec 2.5.5.2.
2.5.7.1 Ground Motion : The ground motion representation as set out in this section shall, as a minimum,
be one having 20% probability of being exceeded m 50 years and may be one of the following:
a) Response Spectrum : The response spectrum to be used in the dynamic analysis shall be any one of
·
the following:
i) Site Specific Design Spectra : A site specific response spectra shall be developed based on the
geologic, tectonic, seismologic, and soil characteristics associated with the specific site. The
spectra shall be developed for a damping ratio of 0.05 unless a different value is found to be
consistent with the expected structural behaviour at the intensity of vibration established for the
site.
ii) Normalized Response Spectra : In absence of a site-specific response spectrum, the normalized
response spectra given m Fig 6.2.11 shall be used in the dynamic analysis procedure given in
Sec 2.5.7.2.
b) Time History : Ground motion time history developed for the specific site shall be representative of
actual earthquake motions for the directions unaer consideration. Response spectra from time
history, either individually or in combination, shall approximate the site-specific design spectra
conforming to paragraph a (i) above.
3.0
121
Deep Cohesionless or Stiff Clay .Soiis
/
(Soil Type S )
2
121
Rock and Stiff Soils
(Soil Type S )
1
=(/)!)1� 2.0 1-----¥--�----tL--f-*---1---+--1
1.0
-
--
-
--
--------
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Period, T (s)
Note: (1) S0: Spectral acceleration

g: Acceleration due to gravity
Z: Seismic zone coefficient.
(2) For structures on Soil Type S4, refer to Sec 2.5.7.1(c) .
Fig. 6.2.11 Normalized Response Spectra for 5% Damping Ratio

Part 6
Structural Design
c) Structures on Soil Profile Type S4: The following provisions shall apply when required by
Sec 2.5.5.1 b (iv):
i) The ground motion representation shall be develqped in accordance with paragraphs a (i) and b
above.
ii) Possible amplification of buildin� response due to soil-structure interaction and lengthening of
building period caused by inelashc behaviour shall be considered.
iii) The base shear determined by these procedures may be reduced to a design base shear, V, by
dividing by a factor not greater than the appropriate R value for the structure but shall not be
less than that required by Sec 2.5.7.2c(i).
d) Vertical Component: The vertical component of ground motion may be defined by scaling the
corresponding horizontal ground accelerations by a factor of two-thirds. Alternative factors may be
used when substantiated by site-specific data.
2.5.7.2 Response Spectrum Analysis : Where this procedure is used, an elastic dynamic analysis of a
structure shall be performed based on the criteria set forth in this section with a mathematical model
conforming to Sec 1.2.6.1(a) and using a res onse spectrum as specified in Sec 2.5.7.1(a ). The analysis shall
r
include the peak dynamic response of al modes having a significant contribution to total structural
response. Peak modal response shall be calculated usin� the ordinates of the appropriate response spectrum
curve which correspond to the modal periods. Maximum modal contributions shall be combined in a
statistical manner to obtain an approximate total structural response.
a) Number of Modes : The requirement that all significant modes be included may be satisfied by
demonstrating that, for the modes considered, at least 90 per cent of the participating mass of the
structure is included in the calculation of response for each principal horizontal direction.
b) Combination of Modes : The peak member forces, displacements, storey forces, storey shears, and
base reactions for each mode shall be combined using established procedures in order to estimate
resultant maximum values of these response parameters. When three dimensional models are used
for analysis, modal interaction effects snail be considered when combining modal maximum.
c) Scaling of Results : Where the base shear for a given direction, determined by this procedure, is
different from the base shear obtained by using the procedure of Sec 2.5.6.1, it shall be adjusted as
follows :
i) When the base shear is less than that determined from Sec 2.5.6.1, the following values shall be
taken:
1. The value of the base shear as obtained from Sec 2.5.6.1, for irregular structures.
2. 90 per cent of the value from Sec 2.5.6.1 for regular structures except that the base shear shall
not be less than 80 per cent of that determined using T from Sec 2.5.6.2(a).
ii) When the base shear is greater than that determined from Sec 2.5.6.1, the value need not exceed
that required by c(i) above, except for structures required to conform to Sec 2.5.7.1(c)
All corresponding response parameters, including deflections, member forces and moments,
shall be adjusted in proportion to the adjusted base shear.
. d) Torsion : The analysis shall account for torsional effects, including accidental torsional effects as
prescribed in Sec 2.5.6.5. Where three-dimensional models are used for analysis, effects of accidental
torsion shall be accounted for by appropriate adjustments in the model such as adjustment of mass
locations, or by the equivalent static procedure provided in Sec 2.5.6.5.
2.5.7.3 Time History Analysis : When this procedure is followed, an elastic or inelastic dynamic analysis
of a structure shall be made using a mathematical model of the structure specified in Sec 1.2.6.1(a) and
applying at its base or any other appropriate level, a ground motion time history as specified in Sec
2.5.7.1(b). The time-dep endent dynamic response of the structure shall be obtained through numerical
integration of its equations of motion.
2.5.8 Seismic Lateral Forces on Components and Equipment Supported by Structures

2.5.8.1 Lateral Forces on Structural and Non-structural Components, and Equipment: The minimum
design seismic lateral forces on elements of structures, non-structural components, equipment and their
attacnments including anchorage and bracing to the main structural system shall be determined in
accordance with the formula :
F'=Zl'C'W' (2.5.10)
6-58
Chapter 2
Loads
where, F' = Total lateral seismic force

z Seismic zone coefficient as given in Table 6.2.22
I' = Structure Importance Coefficient for components as given in Table 6.2.23
C' Horizontal force Coefficient as specified in Sec 2.5.8.2.
W' = Weight of an element, component or piece of equipment.
The total lateral seismic force, F' obtained from Eq (2.5.10) shall be distributed in proportion to the mass
distribution of the element, coml?onent or piece of equipment. These forces shall be applied in the horizontal
direction to cause the most critical loading for design. Friction resulting from gravity forces shall not be
considered to provide resistance to seismic forces.
Seismic lateral forces on attachments for floor- or roof-mounted equipment weighing less than 1.8 kN and
for furniture need not be determined for design purposes. ·
2.5.8.2 Horizontal Force Coefficient C' :The value of the coefficient C' shall be determined as follows :
a) For elements of structure and non-structural components, and for rigid or rigidly supported
equipment supported by structures above grade, C' snail be taken as those given in Table 6.2.26.
b) For non-rigid or flexibly supported equipment, supported by a structure and located above grade on
a structure, the seismic lateral force shall be determined considering the dynamic properties of both
the equipment and those of the structure which supports it, but the value of C' shall not be less than
that listed in Table 6.2.26. In the absence of an analysis or empirical data, the value of C' shall be
taken as twice the value listed in Table 6.2.26 but it need not exceed 2.0.
For piping, ducting and conduit systems which are constructed of ductile materials and connections,
the values of C' may be taken as those given in Table 6.2.26.
c) The value of C' for elements, or components and equipment laterally self-supported and located at
or below ground level may be two-thirds of the value set forth in Table 6.2.26. However, the design
lateral forces obtained from Eq (2.5.10) for these elements shall not be less than that as would be
obtained using the provision of Sec 2.5.9.
2.5.8.3 Seismic Lateral Forces on Floor or Roof Diaphragms : Seismic lateral forces on floor and roof
diaphragms and collector elements shall be determined in accordance with the following formula :
(F1 + I,Fi)
i=x ,
Fx' =
__
....
n
...::
"'- -W
x (2.5.11)
I,wi
i=x
a) The force F� determined from Eq (2.5.11) need not exceed 0.75 Zlw� but it shall not be less than
0.35 ZI.
b) When the diaphragm is required to transfer lateral forces from the vertical resisting elements above
the diaphragm to other vertical resisting elements below the diaphragm due to offset in the
placement of the elements or to changes in stiffness in the vertical elements, these forces shall be
added to those determined from Eq (2.5.11).
·
2.5.9 Seismic Lateral Forces on Non-Building Structures

Non-building structures shall include all self-supporting structures other than buildings that carry gravity
loads and resist the effects of earthquake and other lateral forces. Determination of seismic lateral forces for
such structures shall be based on the following provisions:
2.5.9.1 Seismic Dead Load : For non-building s!fuctures, the seismic dead load, W shall include all loads
defined for buildings in Sec 2.5.5.2. In addition, W shall include all normal operating contents for structures
such as tanks, vessels, bins and piping.
2.5.9.2 Fundamental Period : For structures with primary framing systems similar to buildings, the
fundamental period T, shall be determined in accordance with Sec 2.5.6.2. For other structures, T shall be
obtained by using a rational method such as Method B of Sec 2.5.6.2.
2.5.9.3 Structures Similar to Buildings : The seismic lateral forces on structures with primary framing
systems similar to buildings (i.e. structural systems listed in Table 6.2.24) shall be determined in accordance
with the provisions of Sec 2.5.5 through 2.5.8 with following modifications:

Part 6
Structural Design
a) Intermediate moment resisting frames (IMRF) may be used in structures within Seismic Zone 3 and
in structure importance categories III through V, if, (i) the structure is less than 15 m in height, and
(ii) R 4.0 is used in load calculations.
=
b) Seismic dead load and structure period shall be calculated in accordance with Sec 2.5.5.2 and 2.5.9.2
respectively.
Table 6.2.26
Horizontal Force Coefficient, C' for Elements, Components and Equipment
Elements of Structures and Non-structural Components and Equipment<l) Value of C'
Elements of Structures
1. Walls including the following:
a. Unbraced (cantilevered) parapets 2.00
b. Other exterior walls above the ground floor(2,3) 0.75
All interior bearing and nonbearing walls and partitions(3 ) 0.75
d Masonry or concrete fences over 1.8 m high
· 0.75
2. Penthouse (except when framed by an extension of the structural frame) 0.75
3. Connections for prefabricated structural elements other than walls, with force 0.75
applied at centre of gravity (4)
4. Diaphragms<3,S)
II. Non-structural Components

1. Exterior and interior ornamentation and appendages 2.00
2. Chimneys, stacks, trussed towers and tanks on legs:
a. Supported on or projecting as an unbraced cantilever above the roof more 2.00
than one-half their total height
b. All others, including those supported below the roof with unbraced 0.75
projection above the roof less ilian one-half their height, or braced or guyed
to the structural frame at or above their centres of mass
3. Signs and billboards 2.00
4. Storage racks (including contents) 0.75
5. Anchorage for permanent floor-supported cabinets and book stacks more than 0.75
1.5 m in height (including contents)
6. Anchorage for suspended ceilings and light fixtures(4, 6) 0.75
7. Access floor systems(4,
7) 0.75
III. Equipment
1. Tanks and vessels (including contents), together with support systems and 0.75
anchorage
2. Electrical, mechanical and plumbing equipment and associated conduit, 0.75
ductwork and pipin�, and machinery (8)
Notes: (1) See Sec 2.5.8.2 for items supported at or below grade.
See Sec 1.7.2.3 and 2.5.8.2
(2)
(3) Where flexible diaphragms provide lateral support for walls and partitions, the value of C' for anchorage shall be
increased 50 per cent for the centre one-half of the diaphragm span.
(4) Applies to Seismic Zones 2 and 3 only.
(5) See Sec 1.7.2.9 and 2.5.8.3.
(6) Ceiling weight shall include all light fixtures and other equipment or partitions which are laterally supported by
the ceiling. For the purpose of determining the seismic force, a ceiling weight of not less than 0.2 kN /m2 shall be
used. Ceilings constructed of lath and plaster or gypsum board, screw or nail attached to suspended members
that support a ceiling at one level extending from wall to wall need not be analysed provided the walls are not
over 15 m apart.
(7) W' for access floor systems shall be the dead load of the access floor systems plus 25 per cent of the floor live
load plus a 0.5 kN/m2 partition load allowance.
(8) Equipment includes, but is not limited to , boilers, chillers, heat exchangers, pumps, air-handing units, cooling
towers, control panels, motors, switchgear, transformers and life-safety equipment. It also includes major
conduit, ducting and piping serving such equipment and fire sprinkler systems. See Sec 2.5.8.2 for additional
requirements for determining C' for non-rigid or flexibly mounted equipment.
6-60
Chapter 2
Loads
2.5.9.4 Rigid Structures : For rigid structures (i.e. those with period, T � 0.06 second) including their
anchorage, the total lateral force, V shall be determined in accordance with the relation :
V = 0.5ZIW (2.5.12)
2.5.9.5 Flat-bottom Tanks at or Below Grade : Seismic forces for flat-bottom tanks or other tanks with
supported bottoms, founded at or below grade, shall be calculated using the procedure of Sec 2.5.9.4
considering the entire weight of the tank and its contents. Alternatively, such forces may be determined
using one of the following methods.
a) A response spectrum analysis, which includes consideration of the actual ground motion anticipated
at the site and the inertial effects of the contained fluid.
b) A substantiated analysis prescribed for the particular type of tank provided that the seismic Zones
and Structure I mp ort a nce Categories are in conformance with Fig 6.2.10 and Sec 1.2.3 respectively.
2.5.9.6 Other Structures : For structures (other than buildings), which are not covered by Sec 2.5.9.3
through 2.5.9.5, the minimum seismic lateral forces shall be determined in accordance with the following
provisions :
a) The total lateral seismic force, V shall be determined using the provisions of Sec 2.5.6 with the
coefficient R taken from Table 6.2.27. However, the ratio C/R shall not be less than 0.5. ·
Table 6.2.27
Coefficient, R for Non-Building Structures
Structure Type Coefficient

R
1. Tanks, vessels or pressurized spheres on braced or unbraced legs 3

2. Cast-in-place concrete silos and chimneys having walls continuous to the 5
foundation
3. Distributed mass cantilever structures such as stacks, chimneys, silos and skirt- 4
supported vertical vessels
4. Trussed towers (free standing or guyed), guyed stacks and chimneys 4

5. Inverted pendulum-type structures 3
6. Cooling towers 5
7. Bins and hoppers on braced or unbraced legs 4

8. Storage racks 5
9. Signs and billboards 5
10. Amusement structures and monuments 3
11. All other self-suooortin!! structures not otherwise covered 4
b) The vertical distribution of the total lateral seismic force, V, may be determined by one of the
following procedures:
1. Using provisions of Sec 2.5.6.3.

2. Using procedures of Sec 2.5.7.
Exception:
For irregular structures assigned to Structure Importance Categories I and IT, which cannot be modeled
as a single mass, the procedures of Sec 2.5.7 shall be used.
c) When any other established standard or method is used as a basis for obtaining the seismic lateral
forces for a particular type of non-building structure covered by this section, such a standard may be
used subject to the following limitations:
i) The Seismic Zones and Structure Importance Categories shall be in conformance with the
requirements of Sec 2.5.4 and 1.2.3 respectively.
ii) The values for total lateral force and total base overturning moment used in design shall not be
less than 80% of the values which would be obtained using these provisions.

Part 6
Structural Design
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LOADS
2.6.1 General
The procedures and limitations for the determination of selected miscellaneous loads are provided in this
section. Loads that are not specified in this section or elsewhere in this chapter, may be determined based on
information from reliable references or specialist advice may be sought.
2.6.2 Definitions
The following definitions and notation shall apply to the provisions of this section only.
emergency or a post disaster period.
RATIONAL ANALYSIS : An analysis based on established methods or theories using mathematical

formulae and actual or appropriately assumed data. .
SITE-SPECIFIC DATA: Data obtained either from measurements taken at a site or from substantiated field
information required specifically for the structure concerned.
2.6.3 Rain Loads

Rain loads shall be determined in accordance with the following provisions.
2.6.3.1 Blocked Drains : Each portion of a roof shall be designed to sustain the load from all rainwater
that could be accumulated on it if the primary drainage system for that portion is undersized or blocked.
Ponding instability shall be considered m this situation.
2.6.3.2 Controlled Drainage : Roofs equipped with controlled drainage provisions shall be designed to
sustain all rainwater loads on them to the elevation of the secondary drainage system plus 0.25 kN/m2.
Ponding instability shall be considered in this situation.
2.6.4 Loads Due to Flood and Surge ·
For the determination of flood and surge loads on a structural member, consideration shall be given to both
hydrostatic and hydrodynamic effects. Required loading shall be determined in accordance with the
established principles of mechanics based on site specific criteria and in compliance with the following
provisions of this section. For essential facilities like cyclone and flood shelters and for hazardous facilities
specified in Table 6.1.1, values of maximum flood elevation, surge height, wind velocities etc., required for
the determination of flood and surge load, shall be taken corresponding to 100-year return period. For
structures other than essential and hazardous facilities, these values, shall be based on 50-year return
period.
2.6.4.1 Flood Loads on Structures at Inland Areas : For structures sited at inland areas subject to flood,
loads due to flood shall be determined considering hydrostatic effects which shall be calculated based on the
flood elevation of 50-year return period. For river-side structures such as that under Exposure C specified in
Sec 2.4.4.1, hydrodynamic forces, arising due to approaching wind-generated waves shall also be
determined in addition to the hydrostatic load on them. In this case, the amplitude of such wind-induced
water waves shall be obtained from site-specific data.
2.6.4.2 Flood and Surge Loads on Structures at Coastal Areas : For structures sited at coastal areas, the
hydrostatic and hydrodynamic loads shall be determined as follows:
a) Hydrostatic Loads : The hydrostatic loads on structural elements and foundations shall be
determined based on the maximum static height of water, Hm produced by floods or surges as given
by the relation:
Hm = max (lz5, hf) (2.6.1)
where, hJ =
Yr-y8 and (2.6.2)
Maximum surge height as specified in a(i) below.

Elevation of the extreme surface water level corresponding to a T-year return period
specified in (ii) below, metres
Yg Elevation of ground level at site, metres.
i) Maximum Surge Height, h5: The maximum surge height, h5, associated with cyclones, shall be
that corresponding to a 50-year or a 100-year return period as may be applicable, based on site
specific analysis. In the absence of a more rigorous site specific analysis, the following relation
maybe used:
h5 = hr- (x-1)k (2.6.3)
6-62
Chapter 2
Loads
where, hy design surge height corresponding to a return period ofT-years at sea

coast, in metres, given in Table 6.2.28.
X distance of the structure site measured from the spring tide high-water
limit on the sea coast, in km; x 1, if x<1.
=
k rate of decrease in surge height in m/km; the value of k may be taken as

1/2 for Chittagong-Cox's Bazar-Teknaf coast and as 1/3 for other coastal
areas.
ii) Extreme Surface Water Level , Yr: The elevatio� of the extreme surface water level, Yr for a
site, which may not be associated with a cyclonic storm surge, shall be that obtained from a
site specific analysis corresponding to a 50-year or a 100-year return period. Values of are Yr
given in Table 6.2.29 for selected coastal locations which may be used in the absence of any site
specific data.
b) Hydrodynamic Loads: The hydrodynamic load applied on a structural element due to wind-induced
local waves of water, shall be determined by a rational analysis using an established method and
based on site specific data.. In the absence of a site-specific data the amp� itu? e of the local wave, to be
_ _ Sec 2.6.4.2(a). Such
· used m the rational analysis, shall be taken as hw h5/4 �1m, where, h5 1s given m
=
forces shall be calculated based on 50-year or 100-year return period of flood or surge. The
corresponding wind velocities shall be 260 km/h or 289 km/h respectively.
2.6.4.3 Breakaway Walls: When non-structural walls, partitions or other non-structural elements located
below the maximum flood or surge elevation, are required to break away under high tides or wave action,
such non-structural elements shall be designed to sustain a maximum uniformly distributed load of 1.0
2 2
'kN/m but not less than 0.5 kN/m applied on a vertical projection of the area.
2.6.5 Temperature Effects

Temperature effects, if si�ificant, shall be considered in the design of structures or components thereof in
accordance with the provision of this section.
In determining the temperature effects on a structure, the following provisions shall be considered:
a) The temperatures indicated, shall be the air temperature in the shade. The range of the variation in
temperature for a building site shall be taken into consideration.
b) Effects of the variation of temperature within the material of a structural element shall be accounted
for by one of the following methods.
i) relieve the stresses by providing adequate numbers of expansion or contraction joints,

ii) design the structural element to sustam additional stresses due to temperature effects.
. Table 6.2.28
Design Surge Heights at the Sea Coast, h/
Coastal Region Surge Height at the Sea Coast, hy (m)
T 50-year(l) <2>
= T = 100-year
Teknaf to Cox's Bazar 4.5 5.8
Chakaria to Anwara, and Maheshkhali-Kutubdia 7.1 8.6

Islands
Chittagong to Noakhali 7.9 9.6
Sandwip, Hatiya and all islands in this region 7.9 9.6
Bhola to Barguna 6.2 7.7
Sarankhola to Shyarnnagar 5.3 6.4

• Values prepared from information obtained from Annex-D3, MCSP.
Note: (1) These values may be used in the absence of site specific data for structures other than essential
facilities listed in Table 6.1.1.
(2) These values may be used in the absence of site specific data for essential facilities listed in
Table 6.1.1.

Part 6
Structural Design
Table 6.2.29
Extreme Surface Water Levels During Monsoon at Selected Locations of the
..
Coastal Area above PWD Datum, yT
Coastal Area y
T (m )
Location Thana (l) <2>

T=SO years T=lOO years
Teknaf Teknaf 2.33 2.44

Cox's Bazar Cox's Bazar 3.84 3.88
Shafla ur k Moheshkhali 4.67 4.87
Lemsi hali Kutubdia 4.95 5.19
Banigram Patiya 5.05 5.24
Chittagong Bandar 4.72 4.88

Patenga Bandar 4.08 4.16
Sonapur Sonagazi 7.02 7.11
Sandwip Sandwip 6.09 6.2
Companyganj Companyganj 7.53 7.94
fa
Hati a fa
Hati a 5.55 5.76
Dau atkhan Dau atkhan 4.62 4.72
Dashmina Dashmina 3.60 3.73
Galachipa Galachipa 3.79 3.92
Patuakllali Patuakllali 2.87 3.03
Khepupara Kalapara 2.93 3.02

Bamna Bamna 3.32 3.37
Patharghata Path :li
hata 3.65 3.84
Raenda Sara ola 3.66 3.75
Chardouni Patharghata 4.41 4.66
Mongla Monglaport 3.23 3.36

Kobodak Shyamnagar 3.51 3.87
(river estuary)
Kaikhali Shyamnagar 3.94 4.12
• Values prepared from information obtained from Annex -03, MCSP
Note : (1) These values may be used in the absence of site specific data for structures in
Structure Importance Categories III, IV and V listed in Table 6.1.1.
(2) These values may be used in the absence of site specific data for structures in
Structure Importance Categories I and II listed in Table 6.1.1.
c) when the method b(ii) above is considered to be applicable, the structural analysis shall take into
account the following :
i) the variation in temperature within the material of the structural element, exposure condition
of the element and the rate at which the material absorb or radiate heat.
ii) the warping or any other distortion caused due to temperature changes and temperature
gradient in fhe structural element.
d) When it can be demonstrated by established principle of mechanics or by any other means that
neglecting some or all of the effects of temperature, does not affect the safety and serviceability of the
structure, the temperature effect can be considered insignificant and need not be considered in
design. ·
2.6.6 Soil and Hydrostatic Pressure

For structures or portions thereof, lying below ground level, loads due to soil and h drostatic pressure shall
y
be determined in accordance with tfie provisions of this section and applied m addition to all other
applicable loads.
2.6.6.1 Pressure on Basement Wall :In the design of basement walls and similar vertical or nearly vertical
structures below grade, provision shall be made for the lateral pressure of adjacent soil. Allowance shall be
made for possible surcharge due to fixed or moving loads. When a ortion or the whole of the adjacent soil
J
is below the surrounding water table, computations shall be base on the submerged unit weight of
soil,
plus full hydrostatic pressure.
6-64
Chapter 2
Loads
2.6.6.2 Uplift on Floors : In the design of basement floors and similar horizontal or nearly horizontal construction
below grade, the upward pressure of water, if any, shall be taken as the full hydrostatic pressure applied
over the entire area. The hydrostatic head shall be measured from the underside of the construction.
2.6.7 Loads Due to Explosions

Loads on buildings or portions thereof, shall be assessed in accordance with the provisions of this section.
2.6.7.1 Explosion Effects in Closed Rooms : .
a) Determination of Loads and Response : Internal overpressure developed from an internal explosion
such as that due to leaks in gas pipes, evaporation of volatile liquids, internal dust explosion etc., in
rooms of sizes comparable to residential rooms and with ventilation areas consisting of window
glass breaking at a pressure of 4 kN / m2 (3-4 mm machine made glass) may be calculated from the
following metnod :
i) The overpressure, q0 provided in Fig 6.2.12(a) shall be assumed to depend on a factor A0/v,
where, A0 is the total window area in m2 and v is the volume in m3 of the room considered,
ii) The internal pressure shall be assumed to act simultaneously upon all walls and floors in one
closed room, and
iii) The action q0 obtained from Fig 6.2.12(a) may be taken as static action.
When a time dependent response is required, an impulsive force function similar to that shown in
Fig 6.2.12(b) shall be used in a dynamic analysis, where t1 is the time from the start of combustion
until maximum pressure is reached and t 2 is the time from maximum pressure to the end of
combustion. For t1 and t2 the most unfavourable values shall be chosen in relation to the dynamic
p �operties of the structures. However, the values shall be chosen within the intervals as given in
Fig 6.2.12(b).
·
The pressure may be applied solely in one room or in more than one room at the same time. In the
latter case, all rooms are incorporated in the volume v. Only windows or other similarly weak and
light weight structural elements may be taken as ventilation areas even though certain limited
structural parts break at pressures less than q0 .
...
E
'
z
� 90
� 80
Q) 70 0.1s :s: t1 :s: tOs
::; 60
......
tOs :s: t2 :s: 10.0s
rn
rn 50
"-....
Q)
......
a: 40
30
�
til
c 20
Q; 10
.:5 0
.!. 1 1 1 1 1
30 25 20 15 16 5
Ac/v(m"1) Time, tIs)
(a) Internal Pressure as a (b) Variation of Pressure, q as a

Function of A01v Function of Time, t
Fig. 6.2.12 Magnitude and Distribution of Internal Pressure in a
Building Due to Internal Gas Explosion

6-65
Part 6
Structural Design
b) Limitations : Procedure for determining explosion loads given in (a) above shall have the following
limitations:
i) Values of q0 given in Fig 6.2.12(a) are based on tests with gas explosions in room corresponding
to ordinary residential flats, and may be applied to considerably different conditions with
caution after appropriate adjustment of the va1ues based on more accurate information.
ii) Fig 6.2.12 shall be taken as a guide only, and probability of occurrence of an explosion shall be
c�ecked in each case using appropriate values.
2.6.7.2 Minimum Design Pressure :Walls, floors and roofs and their supporting members separating a
use from an explosion exposure, shall be designed to sustain the anticipated maximum load effects resulting
from such use including any dynamic effects, but for a minimum internal pressure or suction of 5 kN/m2, in
addition to all other loads specified in this chapter.
2.6.7.3 Design Pressure on Relief Vents : When pressure-relief vents are used, such vents shall be
designed to relieve at a maximum internal pressure of 1.0 kN/m2.
2.6.7.4 Loads Due to Other Explosions: Loads arising from other types of explosions, such as those from
external gas cloud explosions, external explosions due to high explosives (TNT) etc. shall be determined, for
specific cases, by rational analyses based on information from reliable references or specialist advice shall be
sought.
2.6.8 Vertical Forces on Air Raid Shelters

For the design of air raid shelters located in a building e.g. in the basement below ground level, the
characteristic vertical load shall be determined in accordance with provisions of Sec 2.6.8.1 below.
2.6.8.1 Characteristic Vertical Loads: Buildings in which the individual floors are acted upon by a total
distributed live load of up to 5.0 kN/m2, vertical forces on air raid shelters generally located below ground
level, such as a basement, shall be considered to have the characteristic values provided in Table 6.2.30. In
the case of buildings having floors that are acted upon by a live load larger than 5.0 kN/m2, above values
shall be increased by the difference between the average live loads on all storeys above the one used as the
shelter and 5.0 kN/m2.
Table 6.2.30
Characteristic Vertical Loads for an Air Raid Shelter in a Building
No. of Storeys (1) Vertical Load

2
Above the Air Raid Shelter kNJm
.$. 2 28
3-4 34
� 4 41
Buildings of particularl stable construction
b 28 (Z)
irrespective of the num er of storeys
Note : (1) Storeys shall mean every usable storey above the shelter floor
(2) Buildings of particularly stable construction shall mean buildings having
bearing structural elements made from reinforced in-situ concrete.
2.6.9 Loads on Helicopter Landing Areas

In addition to all other ap plicable loads provided in this chapter, including the dead load, the minimum live
_
load on helicopter landing or touch down areas shall be one of the loads L1, L2 or L3 as given below
producing the most unfavourable effect :
i) (2.6.4a)
ii) (2.6.4b)
iii) (2.6.4c)
Actual weight of the helicopter in kN,

Fully loaded weight of the helicopter in kN,
2
w A distributed load of 5.0 kN/m ,
k 0.75 for helicopters equipped with hydraulic-type shock absorbers, and
1.5 for helicopters with rigid or skid-type landing gear.
The live load, L1 shall be applied over the a:ctual areas of contact of landing. The load, L2 shall be a single
concentrated load including impact applied over. a 300 mm x 300 mm area. The loads L1 and L2 may be
applied anywhere within the landing area to produce the most unfavourable effects of load.
6-66
- --- ----�-�------- ---
Chapter 2
Loads
2.6.1 0 Erection and Construction Loads

All loads required to be sustained by a structure or any portion thereof due to placing or storage of
construction materials and erection equipment including those due to operation of such equipment shall be
considered as erection loads. Provisions shall be made in design to account for all stresses due to such loads.
2.7 COMBINATIONS OF LOADS
2.7.1 General
Buildings, foundations and structural members shall be investigated for adequate strength to resist the most
unfavourable effect resulting from the various combinations of loads provided in this section. The
combination of loads may be selected using the provisions of either Sec 2.7.4 or 2.7.5 whichever is applicable.
However, once Sec 2.7.4 or 2.7.5 is selected for a particular construction material, it must be used exclusively
for proportioning elements of that mater � al throughou� th� structu�e. In addition to th� load combinations
. .
given in Sec 2.7.4 and 2.7.5 any other specific load combmatlon provided elsewhere m this Code shall also be
investigated to determine the most unfavourable effect.
The most unfavourable effect of loads may also occur when one or more of the contributing loads are absent,
or act in the reverse direction. Loads such as F, H or S shall be considered in design when their effects are
significant. Floor live loads shall not be considered where their inclusion result in lower stresses in the
member under consideration. The most unfavourable effects from both wind and earthquake loads shall be
considered where appropripte, but they need not be assumed to act simultaneously.
2.7.2 Definitions
ALLOW ABLE STRESS DESIGN METHOD (ASD) : A method for proportioning structural members such
that the maximum stresses due to service loads obtained from an elastic analysis does not exceed a specified
allowable value. This is also called Working Stress Design Method (WSD).
DESIGN STRENGTH: The product of the nominal strength and a resistance factor.
FACTORED LOAD: The product of the nominal load and a load factor.
LIMIT STATE: A condition in which a structure or component becomes unfit for service and is judged
either to be no longer useful for its intended function (serviceability limit state) or to be unsafe (strength
limit state).
LOAD EFFECTS: Forces, moments, deformations and other effects produced in structural members and
components by the applied loads.
LOAD FACTOR: A factor that accounts for unavoidable deviations of the actual load from the nominal
value and for uncertainties in the analysis that transforms the load into a load effect.
LOADS : Forces or other actions that arise on structural systems from the weight of all permanent
constructions, occupants and their possessions, environmental effects, differential settlement, and restrained
dimensional changes. Permanent loads are those loads in which variations in time are rare or of small
magnitude. All other loads are variable loads.
NOMINAL LOADS: The magnitudes of the loads such as dead, live, wind, earthquake etc. specified in Sec
2.2 through 2.6 of this chapter.
NOMINAL STRENGTH : The capacity of a structure or component to resist the effects of loads, as
determined by computations using specified material strengths and dimensions and formulas derived from
accepted principles of structural mechanics or by field tests or laboratory tests of scaled models, allowing for
mocfelling effects and differences between laboratory and field conditions.
RESISTANCE FACTOR: A factor that accounts for unavoidable deviations of the actual strength from the
nominal value and the manner and consequences of failure. This is also known as strength reduction factor.
STRENGTH DESIGN METHOD : A method of proportioning structural members using load factors and
resistance factors satisfying both the applicable limit state conditions. This is also known as Load Factor
Design Method (LFD) or Ultimate Strength Design Method (USD).
WORKING STRESS DESIGN METHOD (WSD):See ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN METHOD.

D ?ead load con� isting of : a) weight of the member itself, b) weight of all materials of construction
mcorporated mto the bmldmg . .
to be permanently supported by the member, including built-in
partitions, c) weight of permanent equipment.
E earthquake load
E' amplified earthquake load equal to (0.375R)E
F loads due to fluids with well-defined pressures and maximum heights, including loads due to
water pressure during flood and surge.

6-67
- · -------- --------- --�------------
Part 6
Structural Design
H loads due to weight and lateral pressure of soil and water in soil
L Lj+ (Lror P)
LJ hve loads due to intended use and occupancy, including loads due to movable objects and movable
partitions and loads temporarily supported by the structure during maintenance. LJ includes any
permissible reduction. If resistance to impact loads is taken into account in design, such effects shall
be included with the live loads LJ.
Lr roof live loads
p loads due to initial rainwater ponding
R seismic coefficient defined in Sec 2.5.3
5 self-strainins forces and effects arising from contraction or expansion resulting from temperature
changes, shrmkage, moisture changes, creep in component materials, movement due to differential
settlement, or combinations thereof.
w = wind load
2.7.4 Combinations of Loads and Stress Increase for Allowable Stress Design Method
2.7.4.1 Combination of Loads : Provisions of this section shall apply to all construction materials permitting
their use in proportioning structural members by allowable stress design method. When this method is
used in designing structural members, all loads listed herein shall be considered to act in the following
combinations. The combination that produces the most unfavourable effect shall be used in design.
1. D
2. D+L
3. D+ 5
4. D+(WorE)
5. 0.9D+(WorE)
6. D+ (H or F)
7. D+ L + (H or F)
8. D+ 5 +L
9. D+ 5 + (WorE)
10. D+ L + (WorE)
11. D+L + (H or F) +(WorE)
12. D+ 5 + L + (H or F)+(WorE)
2.7.4.2 Stress Increase : Except as specified in Sec 1.5.5.(b) and elsewhere in this Code, the maximum
permissible increase in the allowable stresses of all materials and soil bearing capacities specified in this
Code for working (or allowable) stress design method, when load combinations (7) through (11) in
Sec 2.7.4.1 above is used, shall be 33%.
2.7.5 Combinations of Loads for Strength Design Method

When strength design method is used, structural members and foundations shall be designed to have
strength not less than that required to resist the most unfavorable effect of the combinations of factored
loads listed in the following sections :
2.7.5.1 Load Combinations for Reinforced Concrete and Masonry Structures

1. 1.4D
2. 1.4D+ 1.7L
3. 1.4 D+ 1.4 5
4. 0.9D+ 1.3(W or 1.1E)
5. 0.9D+ 1.7 ( H or F)
6. 1.4D+ 1.7L + 1.7 (H or F)
7. 0.75 [ 1.4D+ 1.45 + 1.7L 1
8. 0.75 [ 1.4D+ 1.45+ 1.7(Wor l.lE) 1
9. 0.75 [ 1.4D+ 1.7L+ 1.7W 1
10. 0.75 [ 1.4D+ 1.7L + 1.7 (H or F)+ 1.7(W or l.lE) 1
11. 0.75 [ 1.4D+ 1.45 + 1.7L + 1.7( H or F)+ 1.7(Wor l.lE) 1
12. 1.4(D+L+E)
2.7.5.2 Load Combinations for Steel Structures

1. 1.4D
2. 1.2D+ 1.6Lt + 0.5(Lror P)
3. 1.2D+ 1.6 (Lr or P) +(O.SLr or 0.8W)
4. 1.2D+ 1.3W+ O.S Lj + 0.5(Lror P)
5. 1.2D+ 1.5E + (0.5Lf)
6. 0.9D +(1.3Wor l.SE)
Exception:
The load factor on LJin combinations (3), (4) and (5) shall be equal to 1.0 for garages, areas occupied as places of
2
public assembly, and all areas where the live load exceeds 5.0 kN/m .
6-68
. .. ··---· ·-···· . ----- ---
Chapter 2
Loads
When the structural effects ofF, H, or S are significant, their factored values shall be considered as 1.3F,
1.6H, and 1.25 and included with the above combinations to obtain the most unfavourable effect.
Also for buildings in Seismic Zone 3 and in Seismic Zone 2 having an Structural Importance Coefficient, I
greater than 1.0, the following additional load combinations shall be considered :
7. 1.2D + O.SL + E'

8. 0.90+ E'
2.7.5.3 Load Combinations for Design using Other Materials : When structural members are designed
using the strength design method and using a construction material not covered in Sec 2.7.5.1 and 2.7.5.2,
any other code or standard having load combinations applicable for that construction material may be used
provided that other requirements of Sec 2.7 are satisfied.
Related Appendix
Appendix A Conversion of Expressions from SI to FPS Units

Part 6
Structural Design
6-70
CHAPTER�
Foundation
3.1 SCOPE
'The provisions of this chapter shall be applicable to the design and construction of foundations of buildings
and structures for the safe support of aead and superimposed loads without exceeding �he allowab1e
stresses or design capabilities.
3.2 TERMINOLOGY
For terms used in this chapter, the following definitions shall apply.
BATTER PILE: The pile which is installed at an angle to the vertical. Also known as RAKER PILE.
BEARING CAPACITY, SAFE: The maximum intensity of loading that the soil will carry without risk of
shear failure irrespective of any settlement that may occur.
BEARING CAPACITY, ULTIMATE: The intensity of loading at the base of a foundation which initiates
shear failure of the supporting soil.
BEARING PRESSURE, ALLOWABLE: The maximum pressure that may be safely applied to a soil or rock.
by the foundation unit considered in design under expected loading and subsurface conditions.
BEARING PRESSURE, DESIGN: The pressure applied to a soil or rock by a foundation unit. It is equal to or
smaller than the allowable bearing pressure. . .
BEARING SURFACE: The contact surface between a foundation unit and the soil or rock upon which it
bears..
BOULDER : Cohesionless aggregates of angular, rounded or subrounded fragments of more or less

unaltered rock or minerals, 50 per cent or more of which is larger than 200 mm in size.
CAISSON: A large, deep foundation unit other than a driven or bored pile that is sunk down to the ground
to carry a structural unit, such as bridge abutment or pier.
Part6 6-71
Structural Design
Part6
Structural Design
CLAY :A natural aggregate of microscopic and submicroscopic mineral grains that are product of chemical
decomposition and disintegration of rock constituents. It is plastic in moderate to w1de range of water
contents and the particle sizes are less than 2 J.lm.
COBBLES: Cohesionless aggregates of angular, rounded or subrounded fragments of more or less unaltered
rock or minerals, 50 per cent or more of which is larger than 60 mm and sma1ler than 200 mm in size.
DEEP FOUNDATION: A foundation unit that provides support for a structure transferring loads either by
end bearing to soil or rock at considerable depth below ilie structure, or by shaft resistance in the soil or
rock in which it is placed; such as piles.
DOWNDRAG : The transfer of load (drag load) to a deep foundation unit by means of negative skin
friction, when soil settles in relation to the unit.
EXCAVATION:The space created by the removal of soil or rock for the purpose of construction.
FACTOR OF SAFETY: The ratio of maximum available resistance to the resistance mobilized under the
applied load.
FILL:Man made deposits of natural earth materials (soil, rock) and/ or waste materials.
FOOTING: A shallow foundation constructed of masonry, concrete or other material under the base of a
wall or one or more columns for the purpose of spreading the load over a larger area.
FOUNDATIONS: A system or arrangement of structural members through which the loads are transferred
to supporting soil or rock. .
GRAVEL : Cohesionless ag�regates of angular, rounded or subrounded fragments of more or less

unaltered rock or minerals, havmg 50 per cent or more of the particles larger than 4:75 mm and smaller than
60 mm in size.
GROUND WATER : That p(!rt of the subsurface water that is in the zone of saturation.
GROUND WATER LEVEL:The top surface of a free body of water in the ground. Also known as GROUND
WATER TABLE.
GROUND WATER TABLE:See GROUND WATER LEVEL.
LOAD, ALLOWABLE :The maximum load that may be safely applied to a foundation unit under expected
loading and soil conditions.
LOAD, SERVICE : The load actually applied to a foundation unit which is not greater than the allowable
load.
MAT FOUNDATION:See RAFT.
NEGATIVE SKIN FRICTION: Soil resistance acting downward along the side of a deep foundation unit as
a result of downdrag.
OVERCONSOLIDATION RATIO (OCR): The ratio between the preconsolidation pressure and the effective
overburden stress.
PIER :A deep foundation unit with a large diameter to length ratio.
PILE : A slender deep foundation unit, made of materials such as steel, concrete, wood, or combination
thereof, which is either premanufactured and placed by driving, jacking, jetting or screwing; or cast-in-place
in a hole formed by driving, excavating or bonng.
PILE HEAD:The upper part of a pile.
PILE SHOE:A separate reinforcement attached to the bottom end (pile toe) of a pile to facilitate driving, to
protect the pile toe, and/ or to improve the toe resistance of the pile.
PILE TOE:The bottom end of a pile.
RAFT:A spread foundations su porting an arrangement of column or walls in a regular or irregular layout
r
transmitting the loads to the soi by means of a continuous slab, with or without depressions or openmgs.
Also known as MAT FOUNDATION.
RAKER PILE:See BATTER PILE.
6-72
Chapter3
Foundation
ROCK : A natural aggregate of one or more minerals that are connected by strong and permanent cohesive
forces.
SAND : Cohesionless aggregates of rounded, subrounded, angular, subangular or flat fragments of more or
less unaltered rock or minerals, 50 per cent or more of which is larger than 75 Jlm and smaller than 4.75 mm
in size.
SOIL : A natural aggregate of mineral grains that can be separated by such gentle mechanical means as
agitation in water.
SHAFT RESISTANCE : The resistance mobilized on the shaft (side) of a deep foundation. Upward
resistance is called positive shaft resistance. Downward resistance is called negative shaft resistance (see
negative skin friction).
SHALLOW FOUNDATION: A foundation unit that provides support for a structure by transferring loads
to soil or rock at shallow depths. Usually, the depth to width ratio is less than unity and the depth is within
3 m from the surface. The load transfer is primarily through shear resistance of the bearing strata.
SILT: A fine grained soil with little or no plasticity. The particle size ranges from 75 Jlm to 2 Jlm.
SPREAD FOUNDATION : A shallow foundation which transmits the load to the ground by spreading it
through one or more footings or a raft.
.
TOTAL SETTLEMENT: The total downward movement of the foundation unit under load.
3.3 SITE INVESTIGATION
3.3.1 Purpose
App lication for construction of a new building or structure, and for the alteration of permanent structures
which require changes in foundation loads and their distribution shall be accompanied by a statement
describing the soil in the ultimate bearing strata, including sufficient records and data to establish its
character, nature and load bearing capacity. Such records shall be certified by an engineer.
In areas which have already been developed, advantage may be taken of existing local knowledge, records
of trial pits, boreholes, etc. in the vicinity, and the benaviour of existin� structures, particularly those of a
sirrP.lar nature to those proposed. If the existing information is not sufficient or is inconclusive, the site shall
be explored in detail, so as to obtain a knowledge of the cype, uniformity, consistency, thickness, sequence
and dip of strata and of ground water condition. Geolo�ical and agricultural soil maps of the area may give
valuable information of site conditions. The local vanation of general topography will often give some
indication of the soil conditions and their variations. Records of earlier uses of soil in the vicinity shall be
considered for assessing the foundation needs of the proposed new structure.
3.3.2 Methods of Exploration

Subsoil exploration process may be grouped into three types of activities such as: reconnaissance,
exploration and detailed investigation. The reconnaissance method includes �eophysical measurements,
soundin� or probing, while exr.loratory methods involve various drilling techniques. Some of the common
exploration methods are descnbed in Appendix B. The engineer shall approve an ap propriate method of
subsoil exploration and or field test so as to reveal type, uniformity, consistency, thickness, sequence and
dip of strata and ground water condition.
3.3.3 Number and Disposition of Trial Pits and Borings

The locations and spacing of sounding, pits and boreholes shall be such that the soil profiles obtained will
permit a reasonably accurate estimate ofthe extent and character of the intervening soil or rock masses and
will disclose important irregularities in subsurface conditions. For building structures, the following
guidelines shall oe followed:
a) For large areas covering industrial and residential colonies, the geological nature of the terrain will help
in deciaing the number of boreholes or trial pits. The whole area may be divided into grid pattern with
Cone Penetration Tests (see Appendix B) performed at every 100 m grid points. The number of
boreholes or trial pits shall be decided by examining the variation in penetration curves. At least 67% of
the required number of borings or trial pits shall be located within the area under the building.
b) In compact building sites covering an area of 0.4 hectare (43,000 square feet), one borehole or trial pit in
each comer and one in centre shall be adequate.
c) For widely spaced buildings covering an area of less than 90 m2 (1 000 square feet) and a height less than
four storeys, one borehole or trial pit in the centre will suffice.
3.3.4 Depth of Exploration

The depth of exploration shall depend to some extent on the site and type of the proposed structure, and on
certain design considerations such as safety against foundation failure, excessive settlement, seepage and

Part6
Structural Design
earth l'ressure. Cognizance shall be taken of the character and sequence of the subsurface strata. The
followmg guidelines shall be followed in determining the depth of exploration:
a) Normally the depth of exploration shall be one and a half times the estimated width or the least
dimension of the footing below the foundation level . If the pressure bulbs for a number of loaded areas
overlap, the whole area may be considered as loaded and exploration shall be carried down to one and
a half times the least dimension. In weak soils, the exploration shall be continued to a depth at which
the loads can be carried by the stratum in question without undesirable settlement or shear failure.
b) In case of pile foundation, the depth of exploration shall be equal to the width of the structure, subject
to a maximum of 10m beyond the tip of tne pile.
c) Where rock is"encountered in borings within the depth specified above, the rock is to be cored a
minimum of 1.5 m, or further where necessary, to ensure a recovery of at least 35% from any 1.5 m
penetration.
d) The depth, to which weathering process affects the del'osit, shall be regarded as the minimum depth of
exploration for a site. However, in no case shall thts depth be less than 2 m, but where industrial
processes affect the soil characteristics, this depth may be more.
3.4 CLASSIFICATION AND IDENTIFICATION OF SOILS
Soils shall be classified in accordance with Fig 6.3.1 and Table 6.3.1. The basic soil types are boulders,
cobbles, gravel, sand, silt and clay, defined in terms of the particle size ranges shown in Table 6.3.2. Soils are
divided into three major groups, coarse grained, fine grained and highly organic. The fine grained soils shall
be classified using the plasticity chart shown in Fig. 6.3.1. In addition to the classification given in
Table 6.3.1, a soi[ shall be described by its colour, particle angularity (for coarse grained soils) and
consistency. In addition to the above classification soils exhibiting swelling or collapsing characteristic shall
be recorded. For swelling soils, the swelling pressure shall be established from oedometer test or linear
shrinkage condition following available geotecfmical correlation.
For undisturbed soils information on stratification, degree of compactness, cementation, moisture conditions
and drainage characteristics shall be included.
Plasticity Range
Inter-
Low High
mediate
70
......
s::
u
0
60
...
u
c..
"'""' 50
j:l.,
e.
><
u
"0
s::
.....
0
·u 30
CI
·.::::
<Jl
CIS
5:
0 10 20 35 40 50 60 80 100
Liquid Limit (WL), per cent
Fig 6.3.1 Plasticity Classification Chart (based on Materials Passing a 425 J..Lm Sieve)
6-74
•
Chapter3
Foundation
Table 6.3.1
Classification of Soils
Classilication (For Particles Smaller than Sym- Laboratory Classification

75 mm and Based bol Description
on Estimated Weights) %finer Other Criteria
than
.075mm
Well graded gravels, sandy
GW gravels, sand gravel C0�4
mixture, little or no fines. <5
I:!>Cc�3
Clean
gravels Poorly graded gravels,
Gravels (over GP sandy gravels, Sand gravel Cu < 4'
mixture, little or no fines I>Cc>J
} of coarse
fraction larger
than4.75mm) Silty gravels, S1lty sandy lp< 4 or the limit For4> l p> 7
GM gravels values below 'A' and limit .
Gravel line of plasticity values above
with >12 chart f'
Coarse grained fines Clayey gravels, silty clayey lp>7 and the limit 'A' line. dual '
GC gravels values above 'A' symbol
soils (over } of line of Plasticity required*
the material Chart
larger than
O.Q75 mm) Well graded sand, gravelly C 0�6
Clean sw sand, little or no fines <5
I< Cc:< 3
Sands Poorly graded sands, Cu<6
Sands (over � of SP gravelly sand, little or no l>Cc>3
coarse fraction fines
smaller than lp <4 or the limit For4> lp>7
4.75mm) SM Silty sand, poorly graded values below 'A' and limit
Sands with sand silt mixtures line of plasticity values above
fines >12 chmt 'A' line, dual
Clayey sand, sand clay lp>7 and the lim1t symbols
sc mixtures. values above 'A' required*
line of plasticity
chart
Low plastic silt, very tine Limit values below 'A' line of plasticity chart
ML sands, rock flour, silt with & lp<4
sand
Silts &Clays Clays of low plasticity, Limit values above 'A' line of plasticity chart
W < 35 CL gravelly clay, sandy clay, and/or lp > 7
L
silty clay, lean clay
Orgamc silt and clay ot low L1gU1d limit (oven dned)

< 0 75
OL plasticity Liquid limit (undried) ·
Inorganic silt, silty or Limit values below 'A' line ot Plasticity chart
Fine grained MI clayey fine sand, clayey
soils (Over silts of medium plasticity
� of the
material Inorganic clay, gravelly Limit values above 'A' line of Plasticity chart
smaller than Silts &Clays Cl clay, sandy clay, silty clay,
0.0 75mm) 35< W <50 lean clay of medium
L
plasticity
Organic silts, organic silty Liguid limit (oven dried)

< 0 75
01 clay of medium plasticity. Liquid limit (undried) ·
High plastic silt, micaceons Limit values on or below 'A' line or ptasucny
MH fine sandy or silty soil, chart
elastic silt
Silts &Clays High plastic clay, fat clay Limit values above 'A' line of
W >SO CH plasticity chart
L
Organic clay of high Liguid limit (oven dried)
< 0.75
OH plasticity Liquid limit (undried)
Peat and highly orgamc Identified by colour, odour, fibrous texture and
Soils of high organic origin Pt soils spongy characteristics
Note: * For example, GC-GM, Silty, clayey gravel with sand
Cu= D6()1'Dw =Uniformity Coefficient, Cc = D�o I( D6o x DJO) = Coefficient of Curvature

Part 6
Structural Design
Table 6.3.2
Particle Size Ranges
Soil Type Particle Size Range

mm
Boulders >200
Cobbles 60-200
Gravel: Coarse 20-60
Medium 10-20
Fine 4.75-10
Sand: Coarse 0.6-4.75

Medium 0.2-0.6
Fine O.Q75-0.2
Silt 0.002-0.075
Clay <0.002
3.5 MATERIALS
All materials for the construction of foundations shall conform to the requirements of Part 5.
3.5.1 Concrete
All concrete materials and steel reinforcement used in foundations shall conform to the requirements
specified in Chapters 5 and 8 unless otherwise specified in this section.
Concrete to be used in bored or driven cast-in-situ piles shall have a strength greater than 20 MPa and a
minimum cement content of 400 kg/m3. For such J?iles not exceeding a depth of 6 m, where underwater
concreting is not involved and where soil condihons are favourab1e and nonaggressive, the concrete
strength may be 15 MPa with a minimum cement content of 350 kg/m3, provided that a higher ·strength
concrete is not needed from structural considerations.
3.5.2 .Timber
Timber used in foundation shall conform to the standards specified in Sec 2.8 of Part 5. Where timber is
exposed to soil or used as load bearing pile above ground water level, it shall be treated in accordance with
BDS 819:1975.
3.6 TYPES OF FOUNDATION
3.6.1 Footings
Footings are foundations that spread the load to the ground at shallow depths. These include individual
column footings, continuous wall footings, and combined footings. Footings shall be provided under walls,
pilasters, columns, piers, chimneys etc. bearing on soil or rock, except.that footings may be omitted under
pier or monolithic concrete walls if safe bearing capacity of the soil or rock is not exceeded.
3.6.2 Raft Foundation

A foundation consisting of continuous slab that covers the entire area beneath the structure and supports all
walls and columns is considered as a raft foundation.
3.6.3 Pier Foundation

A cylindrical or prismatic shaft foundation having a ratio of depth to base width greater than 4 is considered
a p1er foundation. The base of a pier may rest directly on a firm stratum, or on piles. Caisson foundations
also fall under the category of pier foundations. A caisson is a hollow shaft or box that is sunk into position
and becomes the outer part of finished pier.
3.6.4 Pile Foundations

a) Driven Cast-in-situ Concrete Piles : A pile formed by driving a steel casing or concrete shell in one or
more pieces, which may remain in place after driving or withdrawn, with the inside filled with
concrete, falls in this category of piles. Sometimes an enlarged base may be formed by driving out a
concrete plug.
b) Bored Cast-in-situ Concrete Piles : These are piles formed by concreting bore holes formed by jetting,
auguring, rotary drilling or percussion drilling with or without using bentonite mud circulation. Pre
excavation shall be carried out in a manner that will not impair the carrying capacity of the piles
already in place or damage adjacent structures. These piles snail be tested for integrity by a suitable
method such as dynamic response method and/or load test.
c) Driven Precast Concrete Piles : Pile structure capable of being driven into the ground and able to resist
handling stresses shall be used for this category of piles.
6-76
Chapter3
Foundation
d) Under-reamed Concrete Piles:These are bored cast-in-situ piles having one or more bulbs formed by
enlarging the bore hole or pile shaft. Under-reaming should not be done in cohesionless soil both above
and below the ground water table.
e) Timber Piles : Only structural timber (see Sec 2.8 of Part 5) shall be used as piles for directly
transmitting the imposed load to soil. When driven timber poles are used to compact and improve the
deposit, this requirement of timber quality may be relaxed.
f) Other Piles:Piles such as pipe piles, steel H-piles, bamboo piles, compacted concrete piles (concrete
piles with enlarged base in which concrete in the base is placed in small batches that are compacted
prior to attaining an initial set), composite piles etc. may be used provided due consideration is given to
their installation procedure, durability and load carrying capacity.
3.7 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
3.7.1 Design Load and Load Combinations

Foundation design shall consider the following combination of loads.
a) Dead load+ normal live load, and

b) Dead load+ normal live load+ wind load or seismic load whichever is critical.
3.7.2 Bearing Pressure

3.7.2.1 Methods for Calculating Bearing Capacity:When physical characteristics such as cohesion, angle
of internal friction, density etc. are available, the bearing capacity shall be calculated from stabihty
. considerations and shear failure. Established bearing capacity equations shall be used for calculating bearing
capacity. The effect of interference of different foundations snail be taken into consideration. A factor of
safety of 2.5 shall be adopted to obtain allowable bearing pressure when dead load and normal live load is
used. Allowable load shall also limit settlement between supporting elements to a tolerable limit in
accordance with Table 6.3.3 and 6.3.4.
Table 6.3.3
Allowable Displacement Criteria
Material Maximum Deflection between

Supports (L =span length)
Mason , glass or other frangible material
z L/360
Metal c adaing or similar norurangible finish L/240
Steel or concrete frames L/150-L/180
Wooden frames L/100
Steel or concrete shear walls As per design
Structure Maximum Slope of Continuous
Structure
High continuous brick walls 0.0050-0.0010
Brick dwellings 0.0030
Brick cladding between columns 0.0010
Reinforced concrete building frame 0.0025-0.0040
Reinforced concrete curtain wall 0.0030
Continuous steel frame 0.0020
Simply supported steel frame 0.0050
3.7.2.2 Safe Bearing Capacity: For lightly loaded structures (two storeyed or less in occupancy category
A, B, C & D) and for preliminary design of any structure, the safe bearing capacities (presumptive bearing
values) as given in Table 6.3.5 may be assumed for uniform soil in the absence of test results. Where the
bearing material directly under foundation overlie a stratum having smaller presumptive safe bearing
capacity, these smaller values shall not be exceeded at the level of such stratum.
3.7.2.3 Field Method of Determining Bearing Capacity:Soil load bearing test such as "Standard Test
Method for Bearing Capacity of Soil for Static Load on Spread Footing",(ASTM D1194), shall be performed
in lieu of bearing capacity determination by (a) above.
Soil load bearing test shall not be apl'licable where the proposed bearing stratum is underlain by a stratum
of lower strength, unless analysis mdicates that the presence of such lower stratum shall not create
excessive settlements of the builaing.
The test shall be made at the levels contemplated for the proposed building footing and at least at two
locations within the building premises. The test surface shall be revelled at the elevation of the proposed test
for a clear distance of at least 1.5 m all around the test plate. The loaded area shall be square and at least
600 mm x 600 mm. Suitable methods shall be applied to prevent d ryi ng of the test surface. In the event
ground water is present immediately below, at or above t� e level requuecf to be tested, dewatering facilities

Part 6
Structural Design
shall be installed to maintain ground water at a minimum of 1.2 m below the level of the test plate during
the preparation and duration of the test or tests.
Table 6.3.4
Rotation Limits for Structures
Relative Type of Limit and Structure

Rotation
1/100 Danger limit for statically determinate structures.
1/150 Safe limit for statically determinate structures.

Dan er limit for open steel and reinforced concrete frames, steel storage tanks, and
�
tilt o high, rigid structures.
1/250 Safe limit for open steel and reinforced concrete frames, steel storage tanks, tilt of
high rigid structures.
Danger limit for panel walls of framed buildings.
Tilting of high buildings may become visible.
1/300 Limit when difficulties with overhead cranes are to be expected.
1/500 Safe limit for anel walls of framed buildings.

h
Danger limit or sagging of unreinforced load bearing walls.
1/750 Limit when difficulties with machinery sensitive to settlement are expected.
1/1000 Safe limit for sag ing of unreinforced load bearing walls.
�
Danger limit for ogging of unreinforced load bearing walls.
1/2000 Safe limit for hogging of unreinforced load bearing walls.
Table6.3.5
•
Presumptive Values of Bearing Capacity for Lightly Loa�ed Structures
Type of Material Safe Bearing Capacity, kPa
1. Soft Rock or Shale 440
2. Gravel, sandy gravel, silty sandy gravel; very dense and offer ··
4oo
high resistance to penetration during excavation (soil shall
include the groups GW, GP, GM, GC)
3. Sand (other than fine sand}, ravelly sand, silty sand; dry ··
§ zoo
(soil shall include the groups W, SP, SM, SC)
4. Fine sand; loose & dry (soil shall include the groups SW, SP) ··
wo
5. Silt, cldey silt, cla(sey sand; dd; lumhs which can be easi2: 150
crushe by finger soil shall inc ude t e groups ML, MI, S ,
MH)
6. Clay,. sandy da ; can be indented with strong thumb

r; 150
pressure (soil sha I include the groups CL, CI, CH)
7. Soft clay; can be indented with modest thumb pressure (soil 100
shall include the groups CL, CI, CH)
8. Very soft clay; can be penetrated several centimeters with 50

thumb pressure (soil shall include the groups CL, CI, CH)
9. Organic clay & Peat (soil shall include the groups 01, OH, To be determined after
OL, Pt) investigation.
10. Fills To be determined after

investigation.
•
two storeys or less (Occupancy category A, B, C and D)
•• 50% of these values shall be used where water table is above the base, or below it within a distance equal to
the least dimension of foundation.
6-78
Chapter3
Foundation
Load platform providing the support for the test load shall be supported on adequate timber cribbing,
which shall not be closer than 1.5 m from the edge of the test plate. Settlement observation shall be made at
four corners of test plate by means of dial extension meters. fu addition, settlement measurements shall be
taken using an engineer's level reading to properly referenced, well-established benchmark.
A referenced test procedure such as "Standard Test Method for Bearing Capacity of Soil for Static Load on
Spread Footing", (ASTM D1194 ), shall be followed for loading and other details of the test.
Estimation of bearing capacity parameters may also be obtained from inhole soil tests such as "Field Vane
Shear Test in Cohesive Soil", (ASTM D2573), and "Pressuremeter Testing in Soils", (ASTM D4719).
3.7.2.4 Allowable Increase :The allowable bearing ressure of the soil determined in accordance with this
f
section may be increased by 33 per cent when latera forces due to wind or earthquake act simultaneously
with gravity loads. No increase in allowable bearing pressure shall be permitted for gravity loads acting
alone. In a zone where seismic forces exist, possibility of liquefaction in loose sand, silt and sandy soils shall
be investigated. ·
3.7.2.5 Effect of Dynamic Forces : Where machinery operations or other vibrations are transmitted
throu�h foundation, consideration shall be given in the footing design to prevent detrimental disturbance of
the sod.
Impact forces shall be neglected in foundation design except for foundations bearing on loose �anular soils;
foundation's supporting cranes, heavy machinery and moving equipment, or where the raho of live load
causing the impact to the total live plus dead load exceeds 30%.
3.7.3 Settlement
3.7.3.1 Estimation of Total Settlement: Total settlement of foundation due to net imposed load shall be
estimated in accordance with established engineering principle. An estimate of settlement with respect to
the following shall be made where applicable :
·
i) Elastic compression of the underlying soil below the foundation and of the foundation.
ii) Consolidation including secondary compression of the underlying soil.
iii) Compression and volume change due to change in effective stress or soil migration associated with
lowering or movement of ground water.
iv) Seasonal swelling and shrinkage of expansive clays.
v) Ground movement on earth slopes, such as surface erosion, creep or landslide.
vi) Settlement due to adjacent excavation, mining subsidence and underground erosion.
3.7.3.2 Estimation of Differential Settlement : Due consideration shall be given to estimate the
differential settlement under the building structure that may arise under the following circumstances :
i) Nonuniformity in subsoil formation within the area covered by the building due to geologic or man
made causes, or anomalies in type, structure, thickness and density of the formation.
ii) Nonuniform pressure distribution due to nonuniform and incomplete loading.
iii) Ground water condition during and after construction.
iv) Loading influence of adjacent structures.
v) Unequal expansion and contraction of soil due to moisture migration, unequal drying, wetting or
softening.
3.7.3.3 Allowable Settlement : Allowable or limiting settlement of a building structure will depend on
the nature of the structure, the foundation and the soi[ As a general rule, a total settlement of 25 mm and a
differential settlement of 20 mm between columns in most buildings shall be considered safe for buildings
on isolated pad footings. Buildings on raft can usually tolerate greater total settlements. Limiting tolerance
for distortion and deflections introduced in a structure is necessarilY. a subjective process, depending on the
status of the building and any specific requirements for serviceability. Where aesthetic criteria dominate,
limiting values given in Tables 6.3.3 and 6.3.4 shall be followed as a guide.
3.8 REQUIREMENTS FOR FOOTINGS
Design considerations specified in Sec 3.7 shall generally apply for footings. The structural design of
reinforced concrete elements shall conform to Chapters 6 and 7 of this Part.

Part 6
Structural Design
3.8.1 Dimension of Footings

Footings shall generally be proportioned from the allowable bearing pressure and stress limitations imposed
by limiting settlement.
The angle of spread of the load from the wall base to outer edge of the ground bearing shall not exceed th<'
following:
Brick or stone masonry ! horizontal to 1 vertical

Lime concrete ! horizontal to 1 vertical
Cement concrete 1 horizontal to 1 vertical
A footing shall be placed to depth so that:
a) adequate bearing capacity is achieved,

b) in case of clayey soif, shrinkage and swelling due to seasonal weather change is not significant,
c) it is below possible excavation close by, and
d) it is at least 500 mm below natural ground level unless rock or other weather resistant material is at the
surface.
Where footings are to be founded on a slope, the distance of the sloping surface at the base level of the
footing measured from the centre of the footmg shall not be less than twice the width of the footing.
When adjacent footings are to be placed at different levels, the distance betyveen the edges of footings shall
be such as to prevent undesirable overlapping of structures in soil and disturbance of the soil under the
higher footing due to excavation of the lower footing.
On a sloping site, footing shall be on a horizontal bearing and stepped. At all changes of levels, footings
shall be lapped for a distance of at least equal to the thickness of foundation or three times the height of
ste , whichever is greater. Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent tendency for the upper layers of
f
soi to move downhill.
3.8.2 Thickness of Footing

The minimum thickness for different types of footing for light structures, shall be as shown in
Table 6.3.6.
Table 6.3.6
Thickness of Footings for Lightly Loaded Structures*
Type of Footing Minimum Thickness Remark

Masonry 250 mm; twice the maximum Greater of the two
projection from the face of the wall values shall be selected
Plain concrete 200 mm, or twice the maximum

offset in a stepped footing
Reinforced concrete (depth above 150mm Resting on soil

bottom reinforcement) 300mm Resting on pile
• Two storeys or less in Occupancy category A, B, C and D.
3.8.3 Footings on Filled up Ground

Footings shall not be constructed on loosely filled up ground with nonuniform density or consistency,
unless adequate strengthening of the soil is made by applying ground improvement techniques.
Where foundations can be separated into two independent units, a slip joint shall be provided to
accommodate unequal settlements.
3.9 REQUIREMENTS FOR RAFT FOUNDATIONS
Mat or raft and floating foundations shall only be used when the applied load of building or structure is so
arranged as to result in practically uniformly balanced loading, ancf the soil immediately below the mat is of
uniform bearin� capacity. The characteristics of the soil under the mat or raft shall be considered in the
analysis of loadmg on mats and due allowance shall be made for possible concentrated soil pressures under
heavily loaded columns. The structural design of reinforced concrete shall conform to Chapters 6 and 7. The
external cover shall conform to Sec 8.1.8 depending on exposure condition.
6-80
Chapter 3
Foundation
3.9.1 Types of Raft Foundations

A raft foundation may be one of the following types:
a) Flat plate or concrete slab of uniform thickness usually supporting columns spaced uniformly and
resting an soils of low compressibility.
b) Flat plates as in (a) but thickened under columns to provide adequate shear and moment resistance.
c) Two way slab and beam system supporting largely spaced columns on compressible soil.
d) Cellular raft or rigid frames consisting of slabs and basement walls, usually used for heavy structures.
3.9.2 Design Considerations

·
Design provisions given in Sec 3.7 shall generally apply. In case the raft supports structure consisting of
several parts with varying loads and height, it is advisable to F'rovide sel'arate joints between these parts.
Joints shall also be provided wherever there is a change in the airection of the raft. The minimum depth of
foundation shall generally be not less than 1.5 m in cohesive soil and 2 m in cohesionless soils. Foundations
subject to heavy vibratory loads shall preferably be isolated.
3.9.2.1 Dimensioning : The size and shape of the foundation shall be decided taking into consideration
the magnitude of subgrade modulus, the long term deformation of the supporting soil and the distribution
of contact pressure.
Distribution of contact pr�ssure underneath a raft is affected by the physical characteristics of the supporting
soil. Consideration shall be given to the increased contact pressure aeveloped along the edges of foundation
on cohesive soils and the decrease in pressure on granular soils. Both long term ana short term deformation
and settlement effects shall be considered in the design.
3.9.2.2 Eccentricity : Since raft foundation usually occupies the entire area of a building, it may not be
feasible to proportion the raft so that the centroid of the raft coincides with the line of action of the resultant
force due to building. In such cases, the effect of eccentricity on the contact pressure distribution shall be
considered in the design. .
3.9.2.3 Rigidity of Foundation : The rigidity of foundation affects soil pressure distribution which in turn
produces aaditional stresses in the raft due to moments etc. A rigid foundation also generates high
secondary stresses. The effects of such rigidity shall be taken into consideration in designing rafts. .
3.9.2.4 Methods of Analysis : The essential part of analysis of a raft foundation is the determination of
distribution of contact pressure below the mat which is a complex function of the rigidity of raft, and the
rigidity of the superstructure and the supporting soil. Any analytical method shall therefore use
simplifying assumptions which are reasonably valid for the condition analysed. Choice of a particular
method shall therefore be governed by the validity of the assumptions in the particular case.
3.10 REQUIREMENTS FOR PIER FOUNDATIONS
Concrete piers shall conform to the requirements for columns. If the bottom of the pier is to be belled for
increasing its carrying capacity, such bell shall have at least 300 mm thickness at the edge. The sides shall
slope at an angle of not less then 45° with the horizontal. The least permissible dimension shall be 600 mm,
irrespective ofthe pier being circular, square or rectangular.
Plain concrete piers shall not have a height to least lateral dimension ratio more than 6. If this ratio is
exceeded , buckling effect shall be taken into consideration. In no case shall the height exceed 12 times the
least lateral dimension. The following reduction in allowable concrete stress shall be made when the height
exceed 6 times the least lateral dimension unless the least lateral dimension is 1.8 m or greater.
(3.10.1)
where
fr = reduced allowable stress
f, = allowable stress
H = height of pier, and
D = least lateral dimension of pier
For reinforced concrete piers, the permissible load calculated on the assumption of axially loaded short
columns, shall be reducea when the height exceeds 18 times its least lateral dimension by the formula:
P
a
= P(1.5-_!!_) (3.10.2)
36D

Part 6
Structural Design
where
Pa permissible load,
H height of pier,
D least lateral dimension,
p = permissible load as short column.
3.11 REQUIREMENTS FOR PILE FOUNDATIONS
A plan showing clearly the designation of all piles by an identifying system shall be filed prior to installation
of such piles. All det11iled records for individual piles shall bear an identification corresponding to that
shown on the plan. A copy of such plan shall be available at the site for inspection at all hmes during the
construction.
The design and installation of pile foundations shall be under the direct supervision of a competent engineer
who shall certify that the piles as installed satisfy the design criteria.
Pile foundation shall be designed and installed on the basis of a site investigation report that will include
boring or test pits or other subsurface exploration at locations and deptl1s sufficient to determine the
position and adequacy of the bearing soil unless adequate data is available upon which the design and
Installation of the piles can be based. The report shall include but not be limited to:
a) Recommended pile type and capacities,

b) Driving and installation procedure,
c) Field inspection procedure,
d) Pile load test, integrity test requirements,
e) Durability and quality of pile material ,
f) Designation of oearing stratum or strata.
All piles shall be braced to provide lateral stability in all directions. Three or more piles connected by a rigid
cap shall be considered as being braced, provided that the piles are located in a radial direction from the
centroid of the group, not less than 60 degrees apart circumferentially. A two pile 19"oup in a rigid caR shall
be considered to be braced along the axis connecting the two piles. Piles supporting walls shall be a riven
alternately in lines at least 300 mm apart and located symmetncally under tile centre of gravity of the wall
load, unless effective measures are taken to cater for eccentricity and lateral forces, or the wall piles are
adequately braced to provide lateral stability.
Piles left in place where a structure has been demolished shall not be used to support new construction
unless satisfactory evidence indicates that the piles are sound and meet the requirements of the Code. Such
. piles shall be load tested or redriven to verify their capacities.
Pile cross-section shall be of sufficient size and strength to withstand driving stresses. Pile diameter/cross
section of a pile shaft at any level shall not be less than the designated nominal diameter I cross-section.
Bored cast-in-situ piles formed by tremie concreting shall have a diameter not less than 400 mm.
3.11.1 Design Considerations .

3.11.1.1 Bearing Capacity/Allowable Load /Safe Load: The allowable axial load and lateral loads on piles
shall be determined by an established method of analysis or load test.
The allowable axial load on a pile shall be the least value permitted by consideration of the following factors:
i) The capacity of the pile as a structural member.
ii) The allowable bearing pressure on soil strata underlying the pile tip.
iii) The resistance to penetration of the pile, including resistance to driving, resistance to jacking, the rate
of penetration, or other equivalent criteria.
iv) The capacity as indicated by load test, where load tests are required.
3.11.1.2 Use of Static Formula :The ultimate load carrying capacity of a pile may be calculated from soil
properties. The soil properties needed are shear strength parameters (cohesion, angle of internal friction),
ancf soil density.
Any static formula used shall consider appropriate value of adhesion factor (a.) for cohesive soil or
coefficient of horizontal soil stress (k5) that is consistent with soil condition and pile installation procedure
for estimating frictional resistance of an individual pile. In estimating tip resistance, account shall be taken
of the change in soil condition at pile tip due to installation process.
The minimum factor of safety on capacity calculated on the basis of static formula shall be 2.5. The factor of
safety shall actually depend on the reliability of the formula, depending on a particular site and locality and
6-82
Chapter 3
Foundation
the reliability of the subsoil parameters employed in the calculations. The assumption of a factor of safety
shall also consider the load settlement characteristics of the structure as a whole on a given site.
3.11.1.3 Dynamic Fonnula : Dynamic formula may be used for driven piles in cohesionless soils such as
gravels, coarse sand and such deposits where pore pressure developed due to driving is quickly dissipated.
The allowable compressive load on any pile when determined by the aJ'plication of an established empirical
formula shall not exceed 400 kN. The formula load shall be determineCI for �ravity drop or power actuated
hammers, and hammer energy used shall be the maximum consistent with size, stren�th and weight of the
driven piles. The use of a follower shall be permitted only when approved. The mtroduction of fresh
hammer cushion or pile cushion material prior to final penetration shall not be permitted. Wave equation
analysis method may be used for estimating pile capacity of driven piles.
·
3.11.1.4 Load Test Results : Where more accurate estimate of load carrying capacity of a pile is required
tests in accordance with "Standard Test Method for Piles Under Static Compressive Load", (A.STM D1143) or
equivalent shall be performed on individual piles. At least one ile shall oe tested in each area of uniform
J'
subsoil condition. Where necessary, additional piles shall be loa tested to establish the safe design capacity.
The resulting allowable loads shall not be more than one-half of that test load which produces a permanent
net settlement of not more than 0.00028 mm/kg of test load nor 20 mm.
3.11.1.5 Negative Skin Friction: Piles installed in compressible fill or soft soil subject to compression shall
be designed against additional downward load due to downdrag, generally known as negative skin friction
of the compressible soil.
In estimating negative skin friction the following factors shall be considered :
i) Relative movement between soil and pile shaft.

ii) Relative movement between any underlying compressible soil and pile shaft.
iii) Elastic compression of the ile under the working load.
f
vi) The rate of consolidation o the compressible layer.
Negative skin friction is mobilized only when tendency for relative movement between pile shaft and
surrounding soil exists. .
3.11.1.6 Structural Capacity: Piles shall have the necessary structural strength to resist all handling stresses
during driving or installation and the necessary strength to transmit the load imposed on them to soil.
3.11.1.7 Axial Capacity: The axial carrying capacity of a pile fully embedded in soil with undrained shear
strength greater than 10 kN/m2 shall not be limited by its strength as long column. If the soil is weak
(undrained shear strength less·than 10 kN/m2), consideration shall be given to determine whether the shaft
would behave as a long column. If necessary, suitable reductions shall be made in its structural strength
considering buckling. The effective length of a pile not secured against buckling by adequate bracing shall
be governed by fixity conditions imposed on it by the structure it supports and by the nature of the soil in
which it is installed.
3.11.1.8 Lateral Capacity : Lateral capacity of vertical single piles shall be the least of the values calculated
on the basis of soil failure, structural capacity of the pile and deflection of the pile head.
Deflection calculations require horizontal subgrade modulus of the surrounding soil. When considering
lateral load on piles, the effect of other coexistent loads, including axial load on tl1e pile, shall be taken into
consideration for checking structural capacity of the shaft.
For estimating the depth of fixity, established method of analysis shall be used, or lateral load test to at least
twice the proposed design working load shall be made. The resulting allowable load shall not be more than
one-half of that test load which produces a gross lateral movement of 25 mm at the ground surface.
All piles standing unbraced in air, water or soils not capable of providing lateral support shall be designed
as columns in accordance with the provisions of this Code.
3.11.1.9 Spacing of Piles : The centre to centre spacing of piles shall be considered from practical aspects of
installing the piles and from the nature of load transfer to the soil and possible reduction m bearing caeacity
of a group of piles. The spacing of piles shall be such that the average load on the supporting strata will not
exceed the safe bearing value of those strata as determined by test boring or other established methods. .
Where piles are founded on a very hard stratum and their capacity is mainly derived from end bearing, the
spacing shall be governed by the capacity of the end bearing strata. The minimum spacing in such cases
shall be 2.5 times the diameter of the pile shaft.
Piles deriving their capacity from frictional resistance shall be sufficiently apart to ensure that the zones of
soil from which the p iles derive their support do not overlap to such an extent that their bearing values are
reduced. Generally, m such cases, the spacing shall not be less than 3.0 times the diameter of the shaft.

Part6
Structural Design
In cases of loose sand filling, where displacement during piling may be absorbed by vertical and horizontal
compaction of the strata, tne minimum spacing may be 2.0 times the diameter of the shaft. For noncircular
pile sections, the diameter of the circumscribing circle shall be considered as diameter of the pile shaft.
3.11.1.10 Batter Piles: Batter piles shall be used to transfer inclined load and horizontal forces. In the
preliminary design, the load on a batter pile is generally considered to be axial. The distribution of load
between batter and vertical piles in a group may be determined graphically or by analytical methods. Due
consideration shall be given to secondary bending as a result of pile cap movement, particularly when the
cap is rigid.
Free standing batter piles are subject to bending moments due to their own weight, or external forces from
. other sources. Batter piles in loose fill or consolidating deposits may become laterally loaded due to
settlement of the surrounding soil. In consolidating clay, special precautions, like provision of permanent
casing, shall be taken. .
3.11.1.11 Factor of Safety : A factor of safety shall be applied to all estimates of failure load after
considering:
i) the reliability of the value of the ultimate bearing capacity,

ii) the type of superstructure and type of loading, and
iii) allowable total and differential settlement of fhe structure.
When ultimate bearing capacity is calculated from either static formula or dynamic formula, the above
factors shall be considered. The minimum factor of safety on static formula shall be 2.5.
When safe load on a pile is assessed by applying a factor of safety to load test data, the safety factor shall be
increased in unfavourable conditions where :
i) settlement is to be limited or differential settlement avoided (i.e. for accurately aligned machinery or
a fragile finish of superstructure), .
ii) large impact or vibrating loads are expected,
iii) soil strength or modulus may be expected to deteriorate with time,
iv) live load on a structure carried by friction piles is a considerable portion of the total load and
approximate the dead load in duration.
3.11.1.12 Transient Loading/Overloading : The maximum permissible increase over the safe load of a pile
due to wind load is 25 per cent. In the case of loads and moments arising due to earthquakes, an increase of
25 to 50 per cent may be allowed depending on soil type except for poorly graded sanas with N values less
than 10. In case of submerged loose sands, vibration causea by earthquake may cause liquefaction or
excessive total and differential settlements. This aspect of the problem shall be investigated and
appropriate methods of improvements adopted to adiieve suitable values of N. Alternatively, pile
foundation shall be provided and taken to depths well into the layers which are not likely to liquefy.
Where a pile in a group, designed for a certain safe load, is found during or after installation, to fall just
short of the load required to be carried by it, an overload of up to 10% of the pile capacity may be allowed
on each pile. The total overloading on the group shall not be more than 10 per cent of the capacity of the
group nor more than 40 per cent ofthe allowable load on a single pile.
3.11.1.13 Reinforcement : Depending on the driving and installation conditions and the loading condition,
the amount of reinforcement and its arrangement shall vary. Reinforcements shall be placed to provide at
least 75 mm of clear cover, measured to tne surface of the pile cap that is in contact with the ground. All
reinforcements adjacent to timber or concrete piling shall have a minimum of 25 mm of concrete protection.
Reinforcements snail extend to within 100 mm of tne edge of the pile cap.
For precast concrete piles, for a length equal to at least three times the minimum lateral dimension at each
end of the pile, lateral tie reinforcement consisting of 6 mm diameter bar or larger shall be placed at a
spacing not more than 75 mm centre to centre, or an equivalent spiral shall be provided. Elsewhere, the
spacing of the ties or the pitch of the spiral may be mcreased to 300 mm. The minimum amount of
longitudinal reinforcement shall be one and a half per cent of the concrete section, placed in a symmetrical
pattern of at least 4 bars. If prestressed piles are usea, the minimum residual compression in the pile section
shall be 4800 kN/m2• The cover of concrete over all the reinforcements, including ties, shall not be less than
50 mm. However, where piles are exposed to sea water or water having other corrosive content, the cover
shall nowhere be less than 70 mm. Cover shall be measured clear from the main or longitudinal
reinforcement.
In cast-in-situ piles, except for steel dowels embedded 1500 mm or less in pile, reinforcement, where
required, shall be assembled and tied together and shall be placed in the pile as a unit before the reinforced
portion of the pile is filled with concrete. Minimum vertical reinforcement in bored cast-in-situ piles shall be
four 13 mm cp bars and embedded at least half the length of the pile.
6-84
Chapter3
Foundation
For piles installed with a hollow stem auger, where longitudinal steel reinforcement is placed without lateral
ties, the reinforcement shall be placed through ducts in the auger prior to filling the pile with concrete. All
pile reinforcements shall have a concrete cover of not less than 65 mm.
In under-reamed bored cast-in-situ piles, the minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement in stem shall be
0.4 per cent. Reinforcement is to be provided in the full length, and a minimum of 3 bars of 10 mm of
diameter mild steel or 3 bars of 8 mm diameter high strength steel shall be used. Transverse reinforcement
shall be provided with bars not less than 6 mm in diameter and at a spacin� not more than the stem
diameter or 300 mm, whichever is less. Under-reaming shall not be done in cohes10nless soil both above and
below ground water table. The minimum depth of under-reaming bulb shall be either 2.75 m or below the
level of stabilized moisture content, whichever is �eeper.
In under-reamed compaction piles, a minimum of four 12 mm fjl bars shall be provided. For piles of length
exceeding 5 m and diameter exceeding 375 mm, a minimum of six 12 mm fjl bars shall be provided. The
circular stirrups of such piles shall be provided with a minimum of 8 mm ell bars. For piles exceeding 400
mm in diameter, a minimum of six 12 mm ell bars shall be provided.
3.1.11.14 Integrity : Piles shall be installed in such a manner and sequence as to prevent distortion or
damage to piles being installed or already in place, to the extent that such distortion or damage affects the
structural integrity ofthe piles.
3.11.2 Design of Pile Caps

Pile caps shall be of reinforced concrete. The soil immediately below the pile cap shall not be considered as
carrying any vertical load. The tops of all piles shall be embedded not less than 75 mm into pile caps and the
cap shall extend at least 100 mm oeyond the edge of all piles. The tops of all piles shall be cut back: to sound
material before capping.
The pile cap shall be rigid enough, so that the imposed load can be distributed on the piles in a group
equitably.
The cap shall generally be cast over a 75 mm thick levelling course of concrete. The clear cover for the main
reinforcement in the cap slab under such condition shall not be less than 60 mm.
3.11.3 Installation Procedure

In cast-in-situ bored piles, c6ncrete shall be placed only after excavation has been completed, inspected and
accepted, and steel reinforcement accurately placed and adequately supported. Concrete shall be placed in
one continuous operation in such a manner as to ensure the exclusiOn of any foreign matter and to secure a
full sized shaft. Concrete shall not be placed through water exce t where tremie methods are approved.
r
When depositing concrete from the top of pile, the concrete shal not be chuted directly into the pile but
shall be poured in a rapid and continuous operation through a funnel hopper centred at the top of tli.e pile.
In tremie concreting, toe of the tremie shall be set at a maximum of 150 mm above the bottom of the
borehole. Maximum permissible siltation in bore hole prior to start of concrete operation shall be
75 mm.
For drilled or augered uncased concrete piles, if pile shafts are formed through unstable soil and concrete is
placed in an open drill hole, a steel liner shall be inserted in the hole prior to placing concrete. If the steel
liner is withdrawn during concreting, the level of concrete shall be maintained above fhe bottom of the liner
to a sufficient height to offset any hyi:lrostatic or lateral earth pressure.
If concrete is placed by pum ing through a hollow stem auger, the auger shall not be permitted to rotate
f
during withdrawal and shal be withdrawn in a steady continuous motion. Concrete pumping pressures
shall oe measured and shall be maintained high enough at all times to offset hydrostatic and lateral earth
pressure. Concrete volumes shall be measured to ensure that the volume of concrete placed in each pile is
equal to or greater than the theoretical volume of the hole created by the auger. If the installation process of
any pile is interrupted or a loss of concreting pressure occurs, the hole shall be redrilled to origmal depth
ana reformed. .
Augured cast-in-situ pile shall not be installed within 6 pile diameters centre to centre of a pile filled with
concrete less than 24 hours old. If concrete level in any completed pile drops, the pile shall oe rejected and
replaced. Bored cast-in-situ concrete piles shall not be drillea/borea withiri a clear distance of 3 m from an
adjacent pile with concrete less than 48 hours old.
Precast concrete piles shall not be driven within 6 pile diameters centre to centre in granular soil or within
one-half the pile length in cohesive soils of a pile filled with concrete less than 48 hours old unless approved
by the designer. If fhe concrete surface in a completed pile rises or drops, the pile shall be rejected and
replaced. Piles shall not be installed in soils which could cause pile heave.
In enlarged base piles, enlarged bases are formed in or driven into granular soils either by compacting
concrete or driving a precast base. All piles shall be constructed in the same manner as successful prototype
test piles were driven for the project. Pile shafts extending through peat or other organic soil shall be
encased in a permanent steel casing. If a case shaft is used, it shall be adequately reinforced to resist column

Part6
Structural Design
action or the annular space around the pile shaft shall be filled sufficiently to re-establish the lateral support
of the soil. If pile heave occurs, the pile shall be rejected unless it can be demonstrated that the pile IS not
damaged and capable of carrying twice its design load.
Steel cased piles shall have the steel shell mandrel driven their full length in contact with surrounding soil,
left permanently in place and filled with concrete. No pile shall be driven within 4.5 times the average pile
diameter of a pile filled with concrete less than 24 hours old. Concrete shall not be placed in steel shells
within the heave range of driving.
A precast concrete pile shall not be driven before the concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least
0.75/� except that in all cases the concrete strength shall be sufficient to withstand handling and driving
forces. All piles shall be handled and driven so as not to cause injury or overstressing which may affect their
durability or strength.
A prestressed pile shall not be driven before the concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least 28
kN/m2, but not less than such strength sufficient to withstand handling and driving forces.
3.11.4 Pile Concreting

3.11.4.1 For bored or driven cast-in-situ piles, concrete shall be deposited in such a way as to preclude
segregation. Concrete shall be de osited continuously until it is brought to the required level. The top
f
surface shall be maintained as leve as possible and the formation of seams shall be avmded.
3.11.4.2 For under-reamed piles, the slump of concrete shall range between 100 mm and 150 mm for
concreting in water free holes.
3.11.4.3 For large diameter holes concrete may be placed by tremie or by drop bottom bucket; for small
diameter boreho1es a trernie shall be utilized.
3.11.4.3 A slume of 125 mm to 150 mm shall be maintained for concreting by tremie. In case of tremie
concreting for piles of smaller diameter and length up to 10 m, the minimum cement content shall be
350 kg/m3 of concrete. For larger diameter and/or deeper piles, the minimum cement content shall be
400 kg/m3 of concrete (see also Sec 3.5.1).
3.11.4.4 For concreting under water, the concrete shall contain at least 10 per cent more cement than that
required for the same mix placed in the dry. The amount of coarse aggregate shall be not less than one and
a half times, nor more than two times, that of the fine aggregate. The materials shall be so proportioned as
to produce a concrete having a slump of not less than 100 mm, nor more than 150 mm, except where
plasticizing admixtures is used in which case, the slump may be 175 mm .
3.11.5 Load Test Arrangement and Instrumentation

The ultimate load carrying capacity of a single pile may be determined with reasonable accuracy from load
testing. The load test on a pile shall not be carried out earlier than four weeks from the date of casting the
pile. A minimum of one pile at each project shall be load tested for bored cast-in-situ piles.
Two principal types of test may be used for compression loading on piles - the constant rate of penetration
(CRP) and the maintained load (ML) test. The CRP method is essentially a test to determine the ultimate
load on a pile and is therefore applied only to preliminary test piles or research type investigations. In this
test the compressive force is progressively increased to cause the pile to penetrate the soil at constant rate
until failure occurs. In the ML test the load is increased in stages to 1.5 times or twice the working load
with time settlement curve recorded at each stage of loading and unloading. The ML test may also be taken
to failure by progressively increasing the load in stages.
In CRP test the recommended rates of penetration are 0.75 mm/min for friction pile� in clay and
1.55 mm/min for piles end bearing in granUlar soil. The CRP test shall not be used for checking compliance
with specification requirements for the maximum settlement at given stages of loading.
In the ML test, the load test arrangements as specified. in "Standard Test Method for Piles Under Static Axial
Compressive Load", (ASTM 01143 ), shall be followed.
Uplift or tension test on piles subject to tension/uplift shall be performed by a continuous rate of uplift
(CRU) or an incremental loading (i.e. ML) test. Where uplift loads are intermittent or cyclic in character, as
in wave loading on a marine structure, it is recommended to adopt repetitive loading on the test pile. The
tests shall be performed in accordance with "Standard Test Method for Individual Pifes Under Static Axial
Tensile Load", (ASTM 03689).
Lateral load tests shall be performed in accordance with "Standard Test Method for Piles Under Lateral
Loads", (ASTM 03966). .
6-86
Chapter3
Foundation
3.12 EXCAVATION AND FILLS
Excavation for building foundation or for other purpose shall be done in a safe manner so that no danger to
life and property prevails at any stage of the work or after com letion. The requirements of this section
y
shall be satisfied for all such works in addition to those of Sec 3.2 o Part 7.
Permanent excavations shall have retaining walls of sufficient strength made of steel, masonry, or reinforced
concrete to retain the embankment, together with any surcharge load.
Excavations for any purpose shall not extend within 300 mm under any footing or foundation, unless such
footing or foundation is first properly underpinned or protected against settlement.
3.12.1 Support to Adjoining Buildings and Structures

3.12.1.1 Notice to Adjoining Property: Prior to any excavation close to an adjoining building in another
J>roperty, a written notice shall be given to the owner of the adjoining property at least 10 days ahead of the
aate of excavation. The person undertaking the excavation shall, where necessary, incorporate adequate
J>rovisions and precautionary measures to ensure safety of the adjoining propert and shall supply the
l
details of such measures in the notice to the owner of the adjoining property. Be shal obtain approval of the
Authority regarding the protective provisions, and permission of the owner of the adjoining property
regarding the proposed excavation in writing.
The protective measures shall incorporate the following:
a) Where the level of the foundations of the adjoining structure is at or above the level of the bottom of the
proposed excavation, the vertical load of the adjoining structllre shall be supported by proper
foundations, underpinning, or other equivalent means.
b) Where the level of the foundations of the adjoining structure is below the level of the bottom of the
proposed excavation, provision shall be made to support any increased vertical or lateral load on the
existing adjoining structure caused by the new construction.
If on giving the required notice, incorporating or proposing to incorporate the protective provisions which
have duly been approved by the Authority, the owner of the adjoining property refuses to permit the
proposed excavation or to allow necessary access and other facilities to the person undertaking the
excavation for providing the necessary and approved protection to the adjoining property, the responsibility
for any damage to the adjoining property due to the excavation shall be that of the owner of the adjoining
property.
3.12.1.2 Excavation Work :Every excavation shall be provided with safe means of ingress and exit kept
available at all times. When an excavation has been completed, or partly com leted and discontinued,
t
abandoned or interrupted, or the required permits have expired, the lot shal be filled and graded to
eliminate all steep slopes, holes, obstructions or similar sources of hazard. Fill material shall consist of clean,
noncombustible substances. The final surface shall be graded in such a manner as to drain the lot, eliminate
pockets, prevent accumulation of water, and preclude any threat of damage to the foundations on the
premises or on the adjoining property.
3.12.1.3 Methods of Protection

a) Shoring, Bracing and Sheeting : With the exception of rock cuts, the sides of all excavations, including
related or resulting embankments, 1.5 m or greater in depth or height measured from the level of the
adjacent ground surface to the deepest point of excavation, shalf be protected and maintained by
shoring, bracing and sheeting, sheet piling, or other retaining structures. Alternatively, excavated slopes
may be inclined not steeper than 1:1, or steJ>ped so that the average slope is not steeper than forty five
degrees with no step more than 1.5 m high., provided such slope does not endanger any structure,
induding subsurface structures. All sides or sfopes of excavations or embankments shall be inspected
after rainstorms, or any other hazard increasing event, and safe conditions shall be restored. Sheet
piling and bracing needed in trench excavations shall have adequate strength to resist the possible
forces resulting from earth or surcharge pressure.
b) Guard Rail : A guard rail or a solid enclosure at least 1 m high shall be provided along the open sides of
excavations, except that such guard rail or solid enclosure may be omitted from a side or sides when
access to the adjoining area is precluded, or where side slopes are one vertical to three horizontal or
flatter.
c) Placing of Construction Material : Excavated materials and supedmposed loads such as equipment,
trucks, etc. shall not be placed closer to the edge of the excavation than a distance equal to one and one
half times the depth of such excavation, unless the excavation is in rock or the sides have been sloped or
sheet piled (or sneeted) and shored to withstand the lateral force imposed by such superimposed load.
When sheet piling is used, it shall extend at least 150 mm above the natural level of the ground. In the
case of open excavations with side slopes, the edge of excavation shall be taken as the toe of the slope.

Part 6
Structural Design
3.12.2 Safety Regulations

Whenever subsurface operations are conducted that may impose loads or movement on adj oining property,
such as driving of piles, com action of soils, or soil densification, the effects of such operations on adjoi�ing
y .
property and structures shal be cons1dered. The owner of the property that may be affected shall be g1ven
48 nours written notice of the intention to perform such operations. Where construction operations will
cause changes in the ground water level under adjacent buildings, the effects of such changes on the stability
and settlement of the adjacent foundation shall be investigated and provision made to prevent damage to
such buildings. When a potential hazard exists, elevations of the adjacent buildings snail be recorded at
intervals of twenty four hours or less to ascertain if movement has occurred. If so, necessary remedial action
shall be undertaken immediately.
Whenever an excavation or fill is to be made that will affect safety, stability, or usability of adjoining
properties or buildings, the adjoining properties or buildings shall be protected as required by the
On excavation, the soil material directly underlying footings, piers, and walls shall be inspected by an
engineer I architect prior to construction of the footing. If such inspection indicates that the soil conditions do
not conform to those assumed for the purposes of design and described on the plans, or are unsatisfactory
due to disturbance, then additional excavation, reduction in allowable bearing pressure, or other remedial
measures shall be adopted.
Except in cases where a proposed excavation will extend less than 1.5 m below grade, all underpinning
operations and the construction and excavation of temporary or permanent cofferdams, caissons, braced
excavation surfaces, or other constructions or excavations required for or affecting the support of adjacent
properties or buildings shall be subject to controlled inspection. The detaifs of underpinning, and
construction of cofferdams, caissons, bracing or other constructions required for the support of adjacent
properties or buildings shall be shown on the plans or prepared in the form of shop or detail'drawings and
shall be approved by the engineer who prepared the plans.
.
3.12.3 Slope Stability and Protection

The possibility of overturning and sliding of the building shall be considered. The minimum factor of safety
against overturning of the structure as a whole shall be 1.5. Stability against overturning shall be provided
by the dead load of the building, the allowable uplift capacity of piling, anchors, weight of the soil directly
overlying footings provided that such soil cannot be excavated without recourse to major modification of
the builcfing, oroy any combination of these factors.
The minimum factor of safety against sliding of the structure under lateral load shall be 1.5. Resistance to
lateral loads shall be provided 6y friction between the foundation and the underlying soil, passive earth
pressure, batter piles or by plumb piles, subject to the following :
i) The resistance to lateral loads due to passive earth pressure shall not be taken into consideration
where the abutting soil could be removed inadvertently by excavation.
ii) In case of pile supported structures, frictional resistance between the foundation and the underlying
soil shalloe discounted.
iii) The available resistance to friction between the foundation and the underlying soil shall be predicted
on an assumed friction factor of 0.5. A greater value of the coefficient of friction may be used subject
to verification by analysis and test.
The faces of cut and fill slopes shall be prepared and maintained to control erosion. The control may consist
of effective planting. The protection for slopes shall be installed as soon as practicable. Where cut slopes are
not subject to erosion due to erosion resistant character of the materials, such protection may be omitted.
Where necessary, check dams, cribbing, riprap or other devices or methods shall be employed to control
'
erosion.
3.12.4 Dewatering and Ground Water Control

All excavations shall be drained and the drainage maintained as long as the excavation continues or
remains. Where necessary, pumping shall be used. No condition shall be created as a result of construction
operations that will interfere with natural surface drainage. Water courses, drainage ditches, etc. shall not be
obstructed by refuse, waste building materials, earth, stones, tree stumps, branches, or other debris that may
interfere with surface drainage or cause the impoundment of surface water.
3.12.5 Quality of Fill ·
The excavation outside the foundation shall be backfilled with soil that is free of organic material,
construction debris and large rocks. The backfill shall be placed in lifts and compacted in a manner which
does not damage foundation, the waterproofing or damp-proofing material.
3.12.5.1 Placement of Fill to Support Building : Fills to be used to support the foundation of any building
or structure shall be placed in accordance witn established engineering principle. Before placement of the
fill, the existing ground surface shall be stripped off all organic growth, timber, rubbish and debris. After
6-88
Chapter3
Foundation
stripping, the ground surface shall be compacted. Materials for fill shall consist of sand, gravel, crushed
stone, crushed earth, or a mixture of these. The fill material shall contain no particles exceeding 100 mm in
the largest dimension. A soil investigation report and a report of satisfactory placement of fill, both
acceptable to the Buildin� Official shall b� submitted. In an uncontrolled fill, the soil within the building
area shall be explored usmg test pits. At least one test pit penetrating at least 2 m below the level of the
bottom of the proposed foundation shall be provided for every 200 m2 CJf building area. Wherever such test
pits consistently mdicate that the fill is composed of material that is free of voids and free of extensive
mclusion of mud, organic materials such as paper, garbage, cans, metallic objects, or debris, the fill material
shall be acceptable. Where the fill shows voias or inclusions as described above, either the fill shall be
treated as having no presumptive bearing capacity, or the building shall incorporate adequate strength and
stiffness to bridge such voids or inclusions or shall be articulated to prevent damage due to differential or
localized settlement of the fill.
3.12.5.2 Specification of Density and Water Content: Where foundatiCJns are to be placed on controlled fill
materials, the fill must be compacted in layers not exceeding 300 mm. Clear specification shall be provided
for the range of water content, the degree of compaction to oe achieved and the method of compaction that
shall be fol1owed. Such specification shall be based on the shear strength requirement for the fill soil and
allowable settlement estimate. The minimum density of controlled fill snail be 95% of the optimum density
obtained from "Standard Test Method for Moisture-Density Relation of Soil and Soil-Aggregate Mixture
using 10-lb (4.54 kg) Rammer and 18 in (457 mm) Drop", (ASTM D1557).
-
The degree of compaction achieved in a fill shall be obtained from insitu density measurements. No new
layer shall be placed unless a satisfactory density is attained in each layer.
3.13 WATERPROOFING AND DAMP-PROOFING
Walls or portions thereof that retain earth and enclose interior spaces, and floors below grade shall be
waterproofed and damp-proofed, with the exception of those spaces w:here such omission is not detrimental
to the building or occupancy. The roof is also reguired to be waterproofed. The owner shall perform a
subsurface investigation to determine the possibility of the ground water table rising above the proposed
elevation of the floor or floors below grade unless satisfactory data from adjacent areas demonstrate that
ground water has not been a problem.
There may arise two situations: (i) where no hydrostatic pressure occurs and (ii) where hydrostatic pressure
occurs. Where hydrostatic pressure conditions exist, floors and walls below finished ground lever shall be
waterproofed in accordance with Sec 3.13.1 below. Where hydrostatic pressure conaitions do not exist,
damp-proofing and perimeter drainage shall be provided in accordance with Sec 3.13.2 below. In addition,
the damp-proofing and waterproofing shall also meet the requirements.of Sec 3.13.3. All damp-proofing
and waterproofing materials shall conform to the requirements of Sec 2.16.7 of Part 5.
3.13.1 Waterproofing where Hydrostatic Pressure Occurs

Where ground water investigation indicates that a hydrostatic pressure condition exists, or is likely to occur,
walls and floors shall be waterproofed in accordance with this section.
3.13.1.1Floor Waterproofing : Floors required to be waterproofed shall be of concrete and shall be

designed and constructed to withstand the anticipated hydrostatic pressure. ·
Waterproofing of the floor shall be accomplished by placing under the slab a membrane of rubberized
asphaft, or butyl rubber, or polymer modified asphalt, or neoprene, or not less than 0.15 mm p olyvinyl
ch1oride or polyethylene, or other approved materia1s, capable ofbridging nonstructural cracks. Jomts in the
membrane shall be 1apped not less llian 150 mm and seaTed in an approved manner.
3.13.1.2 Wall Waterproofing : Walls required to be waterproofed shall be of concrete or masonry designed
to withstand the anticipated hydrostatic pressure and other lateral loads. Prior to the a p1ication of
f
waterproofing materials on concrete walls, all holes and recesses resulting from the remova of form ties
shall oe sealed with a bituminous material or other approved methods or materials. Unit masonry walls
shall be pargeted on the exterior surface below ground 1evel with not less than 10 mm of Portland cement
mortar. The pargeting shall be continued to the foundation. Pargetingof unit masonry walls is not required
where a material is approved for direct application to the masonry.
Waterproofing shall be applied from a point 300 mm above the maximum elevation of the ground water
table down to the top of the spread portion of the foundation. The remainder of the wall up to a level not
less than 150 mm above finished grade shall be damp-proofed in accordance with Sec 3.13.2.2.
Wall waterproofing materials shall consist of two-ply hot-mopped felts, not less than 0.15 mm polyvinyl
chloride, 1.0 mm polymer modified asphalt, 0.15 mm polyethylene or other approved methods or materials
capable of bridging nonstructural cracks. Joints in the membrane shall be lapped not less than 150 mm and
sealed in an approved manner.
Joints in walls and floors, joints between the wall and the floor, and penetrations of the wall and floor shall
be made watertight utilizing established methods and materials.

Part6
Structural Design
3.13.2 Damp-proofing with no Hydrostatic Pressure

Where hydrostatic pressure will not occur, floors and walls shall be damp-proofed and a subsoil drainage
system shall be installed as described below:
3.13.2.1 Floor Damp-proofing: For floors, damp-proofing materials shall be installed between-the floor and
base materials. The base material shall not be less than 100 mm in thickness consisting of gravel or crushed
stone containing not more than 10 per cent material that passes a 4.76 mm sieve. Where a site is located in
welldrained gravel or sand/gravel mixture, a floor base is not required . When the finished ground level is
below the floor level for more than 25 per cent of the perimeter of the building, the base material need not
be provided. Where a separate floor is provided above a concrete slab the damp-proofing may be installed
on top of the slab.
Damp-proofing materials, where installed beneath the slab, shall consist of not less than 0.15 mm
polyethylene with joints lapped not less than 150 mm, or other approved methods or materials. Where
l'ermitted to be installed on top of the slab, damp-proofing shall consist of mopped on bitumen, not less
than 0.1 mm polyethylene, or other approved metfiods or materials. Joints in membranes shall be lapped
not less than 150 mm and sealed in an approved manner.
3.13.2.2 Wall Damp-proofing: For walls, damp-proofing materials shall be installed on the exterior surface
and shall extend from a point 150 mm above grade, down to the top of the spread portion of the
foundation.
Wall damp-proofing material shall consist of a bituminous material, acrylic modified cement base coating,
rubberized asphalt, polymer-modified asphalt, butyl rubber, or other approved materials capable of
bridging nonstructural cracks. .
3.13.2.3 Perimeter Drain : A drain shall be placed around the perimeter of a foundation that consists of
gravel or crushed stone containing not more than 10 per cent material that passes through a 4.76 mm sieve.
The drain shall extend a minimum of 300 mm beyond the outside edge of the foundation. The thickness
shall be such that the bottom of the drain is not higher than the bottom of the base under the floor, and that
the top of the drain is not less than 150 mm above the top of the foundation. The top of the drain shall be
covered with an approved filter membrane material. Where a drain tile or perforated pipe is used, the
invert of the pipe or tile shall not be higher than the floor elevation. The top of joints or the top of
perforations snail be protected with an approved filter membrane material. The pipe or tile shall be placed
on not less than 50 mm of gravel or crusfied stone complying with this section, and shall be covered with
not less than 150 mm of the same material.
The floor base and foundation perimeter drain shall discharge by gravity or mechanical means into an
approved drainage system. Where a site is located in well drained gravel or sand/gravel mixture, a
dedicated drainage system is not required. When the finished ground level is below the floor level for more
than 25 per cent of the perimeter of the building, the foundation drain need be provided only around that
portion of the building where the ground level is above the floor level.
3.13.3 Other Damp-proofing and Waterproofing Requirements

3.13.3.1 Placement of Backfill : The excavation outside the foundation shall be backfilled with soil that is
free of organic material, construction debris and large rocks. The backfill shall be placed in lifts and
compacted in a manner which does not damage tfie waterproofing or damp-proofing material or
structurally damage the wall.
3.13.3.2 Site Grading: The ground immediately adjacent to the foundation shall be sloped away from the
building at a slope not less than 1 unit vertical in 12 units horizontal (1:12) for a minimum distance of 2.5 m
measured perpendicular to the face of the wall or an alternative method of diverting water away from the
foundation shall be used. Consideration shall be given to possible additional settlement of the backfill when
establishing the final ground level adjacent to the foundation.
3.13.3.3 Erosion Protection : Where water impacts the ground from the edge of the roof, down spout,
scupper, valley or other rainwater collection or diversion device, provisions snail be used to prevent soil
erosion and direct the water away from the foundation.
Related Appendix
Appendix B Methods of Soil Exploration and Sampling
6-90
CHAPTER�
Masonry Structures
4.1 INTRODUCTION
4.1.1 Scope
This chapter of the C ode covers the design, construction and quality control of masonry structures.
·
4.1.2 Symbols and Notation .
The following units shall be generally implicit in this chapter for the corresponding quantities :
Lengths mm
Areas �
Moment of inertia mm4
Force N
Moment, torsion Nmm
Stress, strength N/�
depth of equivalent rectangular stress block for strength design

cross-sectional area of anchor bolt
effective area of masonry
gross area of wall
net area of masonry section bounded by wall thickness and length of section in the direction of
shear force considered
Ap area of tension (pullout) cone of an embedded anchor bolt projected into the surface of masonry
As = effective cross-sectional area of reinforcement in a flexural member
Av area of steel required for shear reinforcement perpendicular to the longitudinal reinforcement
A; effective cross-sectional area of compression reinforcement in a flexural member
b effective width of rectangular member or width of flange forT and I section
bt = computed tension force on anchor bolt
bv = allowable shear force on anchor bolt
bw width of web inT and I member ·
Bt = allowable tension force on anchor bolt
Part 6 6-91
Structural Design
Part 6
Structural Design
Bv computed shear force on anchor bolt

c distance from the neutral axis to extreme fibre
cd masonry shear strength coefficient
d distance from the compression face of a flexural member to the centroid of longitudinal tensile
reinforcement
db diameter of the reinforcing bar, diameter of bolt
e eccentricity of Pu
emu maximum usable compressive strain of masonry
Em modulus of elasticity of masonry
Es modulus of elasticity of steel
fn computed axial compressive stress due to design axial load
!b computed flexural stress in the extreme fibre due to design bending load only
fmd computed compressive stress in masonry due to dead load only
fr modulus of rupture
fs computed stress in reinforcement due to design load
tensile yield stress of reinforcement
k computed shear stress due to design load
!� specified compressive strength of masonry at the age of 28 days

F loads due to weight and pressure of fluids or related moments and forces
Fa allowable average axial compressive stress for centroidally applied axial load only
Fb allowable flexural compressive stress if members were carrying bending load only
Fbr allowable bearing stress
Fs allowable stress in reinforcement
Fsc allowable compressive stress in column reinforcement
Ft allowable flexural tensile stress in masonry
Fv allowable shear stress in masonry
G shear modulus of masonry
h height of wall between points of support
h' effective height of a wall or column
H actual height between lateral supports
H' height of o ening
r
I moment o inertia about the neutral axis of the cross-sectional area
�g,lcr= gross, cracked moment of inertia of the wall cross-section
1
= ratio or distance between centroid of flexural compressive force and centroid of tensile forces to
depth,d .
k ratio of depth of the compression zone in flexural member to depth, d; stiffening coefficient
t length of a wall or segment
tb embedment depth of anchor bolt
�� anchor bolt edge distance, the least length measured from the edge of masonry to the surface of the
anchor bolt
td required development length of reinforcement
L actual length of wall
M design moment
Me moment capacity of the compression steel in a flexural member about the centroid of the tensile force
Mer cracking moment strength of the masonry wall
Mm the moment of the compressive force in the masonry about the centroid of the tensile force in the
reinforcement
Mn nominal moment strength of the masonry wall
Ms = the moment of the tensile force in the reinforcement about the centroid of the compressive force in the
masonry
Mser service moment at the mid-height of the panel, including P-Delta effects
Mu factored moment
n modular ratio = E/E111
p design axial load
Pa allowable centroidal axial load for reinforced masonry columns
pb nominal balanced design axial strength
load from tributary floor or roof area
� 0
nominal axial load strength with bending
Pu factored axial load
Puf factored load from tributary floor or roof loads
Puw factored weight of the wall tributary to the section under consideration
Pw weight of the wall tributary to the section under consideration
rb ratio of the area of bars cut off to the total area of bars at the section
s spacing of stirrups or bent bars in a direction parallel to that of the main reinforcement
s section modulus
6-92
Chapter 4
Masonry Structures
effective thickness of a wythe, wall or column

bond stress per unit of surface area of bar
total design shear force
nominal shear strength .
nominal shear strength provided by masonry
nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement
horizontal deflection at mid-height under factored load; P-Delta effects shall be included in
deflection calculation
p steel ratio = Asfbd

ratio of distributed shear reinforcement on a plane perpendicular to the plane of Amv
sum of the perimeters of all the longitudinal reinforcement
strength reduction factor.
4.1.3 Definitions
For the purpose of this chapter, the following definitions shall be applicable.
BED BLOCK : A block bedded on a wall, column or pier to disperse a concentrated load on a masonry
element.
BED JOINT: A horizontal mortar joint upon which masonry units are placed.
BOND: Arrangement of masonry units in successive courses to tie the masonry together both longitudinally
and transversely; the arrangement is usually worked out to ensure that no vertical joint of one course is
exactly over the one in the next course above or below it and there is maximum possible amount of lap.
BOND BEAM: A horizontal grouted element within masonry in which reinforcement is embedded.
BUTTRESS : A pier of masonry built as an integral part of wall and projecting from either or both surfaces,
decreasing in cross-sectional area from base to top and conforming to the requirement of Sec 4.3.3(c) (ii).
CAVITY WALL: A wall comprising two limbs each built-up as single or multi-wythe units and separated by
a 50-115 mm wide cavity. The limbs are tied together by metal ties or bonding units for structural integrity.
CELL: A void space having a gross cross-sectional area greater than 1000 mm2.
COLUMN : An isolated vertical load bearing member the width of which does not exceed three times the
thickness.
CROSS JOINT: A vertical joint normal to the face of the wall.
CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA OF MASONRY UNIT : Net cross-sectional area of masonry unit is the gross
cross-sectional area minus the area of cellular space. .
CURTAIN WALL : A nonload bearing self supporting wall subject to transverse lateral loads, and laterally
supported by vertical or horizontal structural member where necessary.
DIMENSIONS:
Actual dimensions- the measured dimensions of a designated item; such as a designated masonry unit or
wall used in the structures. The actual dimension shalf not vary from the specified dimension by more
than the amount allowed in the appropriate standard mentioned in Sec 2.2.4 of Part 5.
Nominal dimensions - specified dimensions plus the thickness of the joint with which the unit is laid.
Specified dimensions - the dimensions specified for the manufacture or construction of masonry,
masonry units, joints or any other components of a structure. Unless otherwise stated, all calculations
shall be made using or based on specified dimensions.
FACED WALL: A wall in which facing and backing of two different materials are bonded together to ensure
common action under load. .
GROUT: A mixture of cementitious materials and aggregate to which water is added such that the mixture
will flow without segregation of the constituents.
GROUTED MASONRY :
Grouted hollow-unit masonry- that form of grouted masonry construction in which certain designated
cells of hollow units are continuously filled wtth grout.
Grouted multi-wythe masonry - that form of grouted masonry construction in which the space
between the wythes is solidly or periodically filled with grout.

Part 6
Structural Design
HOLLOW UNIT : A masonry unit of which net cross-sectional area in any plane parallel to the bearing
surface is less than 75 per cent of its gross cross-sectional area measured in the same pfane.
JAMB:Side of an opening in wall.
JOINTS:
Bed joints- the mortar joint that is horizontal at the time the masonry units are placed.
Collar joint- the vertical, longitudinal, mortar or grouted joints.
Head joint- the mortar joint having a vertical transverse plane.
LATERAL SUPPORT: A support which enables a masonry element to resist lateral load and/or restrains
lateral deflection of a masonry element at the point of support.
LIMB :Inner or outer portion of a cavity wall.
LOAD BEARING WALL : A wall designed to carry an imposed vertical load in addition to its own weight,
together with any lateral load.
.
MASONRY : An assemblage of masonry units properly bonded together with mortar.
MASONRY UNIT : Individual units, such as brick, tile, stone or concrete block, which are bonded together
with mortar to form a masonry element such as walls, columns, piers, buttress, etc.
PANEL WALL:An exterior noriload bearing wall in framed structure, supported at each storey but subject
to lateral loads.
PARTITION WALL:An interior nonload bearing wall, one storey or part storey in height.
PIER: A projection from either or both sides of a wall forming an integral part of the wall and conforming to
the requirement of Sec 4.4.3.3.c(ii).
PILASTER: A thickened section forrning integral part of a wall placed at intervals along the wall, to increase
the stiffness of the wall or to carry a vertical concentrated load. Thickness of a ier is the overall thickness
f.
including the thickness of the wall or, when bounded into a limb of cavity wal , the thickness obtained by
treating that limb as an independent wall.
PRISM :An assemblage of masonry units bonded by mortar with or without grout used as a test specimen for
determining properties of masonry.
REINFORCED MASONRY:The masonry construction, in which reinforcement acting in conjunction with the
masonry is used to resist forces and is designed in accordance with Sec 4.6.
SHEAR WALL : A load bearing wall designed to carry horizontal forces acting in its own plane with or
without vertical imposed loads. .
SOLID UNIT: A masonry unit whose net cross-sectional area in any plane parallel to the bearing surface is
75 per cent or more of the gross cross-sectional area in the same plane.
STACK BOND : A bond in bearing and nonbearing walls, except veneered walls, in which less than 75 per
cent of the units in any transverse vertical plane lap the ends of the units below a distance less than one-half
the height of the unit, or less than one-fourtfi the length of the unit.
VENEERED WALL:A wall in which the facing is attached to the backing but not so bonded as to result in a
common action under load.
·
WALL JOINT: A vertical joint parallel to the face of the wall.
WALL TIE:A metal fastener which connects wythes of masonry to each other or to other materials.
WYTHE: Portion of a wall which is· one masonry unit in thickness.
4.2 MATERIALS
4.2.1 General
All materials used in masonry construction shall conform to the requirements specified in Part 5 of this Code.
If no requirements are s ecified for a material, quality shall be based on generally accepted good practice,
y
subject to the approval o the building official.
6-94
Chapter 4
Masonry Structures
4.2.2 Masonry Units

The following types of masonry units which conform to the standards mentioned in Sec 2.2.4 of Part 5 may be
used in masonry construction :
a) Common building clay bricks

b) Burnt clay hollow bricks
c) Burnt clay facing bricks
d) Hollow concrete blocks
Other types of masonry units conforming to Sec 2.2.4 of Part 5 may also be used.
4.2.3 Mortar and Grout

Mortar and grout for masonry construction shall conform to the requirements specified in Part 5. Mix
proportions and compressive strength of some commonly used mortars are given in Table 6.4.1.
4.3 ALLOW ABLE STRESSES
4.3.1 General
Stresses i n masonry shall not exceed the values given in this section. All allowable stresses for working
stress design may be increased one third when considering wind or earthquake forces either acting alone or
combined with vertical loads. No increase shall be allowed for vertical loads acting alone.
4.3.2 Specified Compressive Strength of Masonry, J:n

The allowable stresses for masonry construction shall be based on the value of J:n as determined by
Sec 4.3.3 below.
Table 6.4.1
Mix Proportion and Strength of Commonly used Mortars
Grade of Mix Proportion by Volume 1•2 Minimum Compressive Strength

Mortar at 28 days, N/mm2
Cement Sand
Mt 3 10
M2 4 7.5
M3 1 5 5
M4 6 3
Ms 7 2
M6 8 1
l
Sand and cement shall be measured in loose volume and sand shall be well graded with a minimum
F.M. of1.2.
2 Lime to a maximum of t th part by volume of cement may be used to increase workability.
4.3.3 Compliance with J:n

Compliance with the requirements for the specified compressive strength of masonry, J:n shall be in
accordance with the following:
4.3.3.1 Mason� Prism Testing : The compressive strength of masonry based on tests at 28 days in
accordance with 'Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms", (ASTM E447) for
each set of prisms shall equal or exceed J:n. Verification by masonry prism testing shall meet the following:
a) Testing Prior to Construction: A set of five masonry prisms shall be built and tested in accordance with
ASTM E447 prior to the start of construction. Materials used for prisms shall be same as used in the
project. Prisms shall be constructed under the observation of the engineer or an approved agency and
tested by an approved agency.
b) Testing During Construction : When full allowable stresses are used in design, a set of three prisms shall
be built and tested during construction in accordance with (ASTM E447) for each 500 square metres of
wall area, but not less than one set of three masonry prisms for any project. No testing during
construction shall be required when 50% of the allowable stresses are used in design.
4.3.4 Quality Control

Quality control shall include, but not be limited to assure that:
a) Masonry units, reinforcement, cement, lime, aggregate and all other materials meet the requirements of the
applicable standard of quality and that they are properly stored and prepared for use.

Part 6
Structural Design
b) Mortar and grout are properly mixed using specified proportions of ingredients. The method of
measuring materials for mortar and grout shall be such that proportions of materials are controlled.
c) Construction details, procedures and workmanship are in accordance with the plans and specification.
d) Placement , splices and bar diameters are in accordance with the provisions of this chapter and the plans
and specifications.
4.3.5 Allowable Stresses in Masonry

When the quality control provisions specified in Sec 4.3.4 above do not include requirements for special
inspection, the allowable design stresses in this section shall be reduced by 50
per cent.
a) Compressive Stress, Axial
i) Unreinforced masonry walls, columns and reinforced masonry wall
Fa -- -1--
J5:n [ ( )3]
h'
42t
(4.3.1)
ii) Reinforced masonry columns
F
a
=(J;n 1.5Ae )[1-(.!i._)3]
5
+�F
sc 42t
(4.3.2)
b) Compressive Stress, Flexural
(4.3.3)
c) Tensile Stress for Walls, Flexure
The allowable tensile stress for walls in flexure of masonry structures without tensile reinforcement
using mortar Type M1 or M shall not exceed the values specified in Tables 6.4.2 and 6.4.3. For Type M3
2
and M4 mortar, the value shall be reduced by 25 per cent.
No tension is allowed across head joints in stack bond masonry. Values for tension normal to head
joints are for running bond. These values shall not be used for horizontal flexural members such as
beams, girders or lintels.
Table 6.4.2
Flexural Tension, F t
Masonry Normal to Bed Joints Normal to Head Joints

N/rnm2 N/m m2
Solid Units 0.20 0.40
Hollow Units 0.12 0.25
Table 6.4.3
Tension Normal to Head Joints, Ft
Masonry Clay Units Concrete Units

N/mm2 N/mm2
Solid Units 0.35 0.40
Hollow Units 0.22 0.25
d) Reinforcing Bond Stress, u
Plain Bars 0.30N/mm2

Deformed Bars 1.0N/mm2
6-96
Chapter 4
Masonry Structures
e) Shear Stress for Flexural Members, Fv
i) When no shear reinforcement is used
Fv =0.083 .Jl;: S0.25 N/� (4.3.4)
ii) When shear reinforcement is designed to take entire shear force
Fv = 0. 25 .Jl;: s 0.75N/� (4.3.5)
f) Shear Stress for Shear Walls, Fv
i) Unreinforced masonry
For clay units Fv = 0.025 K, S0.40 N/mm2 (4.3.6)
For concrete units :

M 1 or M Mortar 0.20N/rnm2
2
M3 Mortar 0.12N/rnm2
\
ii) The allowable shear stress for reinforced masonry shear walls shall be according to
Table 6.4.4.
4.3.6 Allowable Stresses in Reinforcement

a) Tensile Stress
i) Deformed bars, F5 = 0.5fy ,S165 N/mm2 (4.3.7)
ii) Ties, anchors and plain bars, F5 = 0.4fy,S135 N/mrn2 (4.3.8)
Table 6.4.4
Allowable Shear Stress for Reinforced Masonry Shear Walls, Fv
M/Vd Fv, N/mm<: Maximum Allowable

N/mm2
Masonry taking all shear <1

3�( t! )K,
4-
( 0.4-0.2 t!)
2:1 0.17
0.083 .[l;;
Reinforcement taking all
shear <1
2� ( t! )-n;;
4-
( 0.6-0.2 t!)
2:1 0.37
0.125 .[l;;
b) Compressive Stress
i) Deformed bars in columns and shear walls,
F5, = 0.4/y S165 N/mm2 (4.3.9)
ii) Deformed bars in flexural members

F5, =0.5/y S165 N/mm2 (4.3.10)
4.3.7 Combined Compressive Stress

Members subject to combined axial and flexural stresses shall be designed in accordance with accepted
principles of mechanics or in accordance with the following formula:
(4.3.11)

Part 6
Structural Design
4.3.8 Modulus of Elasticity

The modulus of elasticity of masonry shall be determined by the secant method. The slope of the line
connecting the points 0.05 f� and 0.33 f� on the stress-strain curve shall be taken as the modulus of
elasticity of masonry. If required, actual values shall be established by tests. These values are not to be
reducecf by 50 per cent as specified in Sec 4.3.5(a).
a) Modulus of Elasticity for Masonry
Em =750/� :<;;15,000N/mm2 (4.3.12)
b) Modulus of Elasticity for Steel
E5 = 200,000 N/mm2 (4.3.13)
c) Shear Modulus of Masonry
G =0.4Em (4.3.14)
4.3.9 Shear and Tension on Embedded Anchor Bolts

4.3.9.1 Allowable loads and placement requirements for anchor bolts shall be in accordance with the
following:
i) Bent bar anchor bolts shall have a hook with a 90 degree bend with an inside diameter of 3db plus an
extension of l.5db at the free end.
ii) Headed anchor bolts shall have a standard bolt head.
iii) Plate anchor bolts shall have a plate welded to the shank to provide anchorage equivalent to headed
anchor bolts.
4.3.9.2 The effective embedment length, lb for bent bar anchors shall be the length of embedment measured
perpendicular from the surface of the masonry to the bearing surface of the bent end minus one anchor bolt
diameter. For plate or headed anchor bolts lb shall be the length of embedment measured perpendicular from
the surface of the masonry to the bearing surface of the plate or head of the anchorage. All bolts shall be
grouted in place with at least 25 mm of grout between the bolt and the masonry except that 6 mm diameter bolts
may be placed in bed joints which are at least twice as thick as the diameter of the bolt.
4.3.9.3 Allowable Shear Force : Allowable loads in shear shall be according to Table 6.4.5 or lesser of
the value obtained from the following formulae :
-1070(/'m A b
)114
Bv- (4.3.15)
(4.3.16)
When the distance lbe is less than 12 db, the value of Bv in Eq (4.3.15) shall be reduced to zero at a distance
lbe equal to 40 mm . Where adjacent anchors are spaced closer than 8db, the allowable shear of the adjacent
anchors determined by Eq (4.3.15) shall be reduced by interpolation to 0.75 times the allowable shear value
at a centre to centre spacing of 4 db.
Table 6.4.5
Allowable Shear, Bv for Embedded Anchor Bolts for Masonry, kN*
Bent Bar Anchor Bolt Diameter, mm
�� 10 12 16 20 22 25 28
N/mm2
10 2.0 3.7 5.9 7.9 8.5 9.1 9.6
12 2.0 3.7 5.9 8.2 8.3 9.5 10.1
13 2.0 3.7 5.9 8.5 9.2 9.8 10.4
17 2.0 3.7 5.9 8.5 9.7 10.3 11.0
20 2.0 3.7 5.9 8.5 10.1 10.8 11.5
27 2.0 3.7 5.9 8.5 10.9 11.6 12.3
• Values are for bolts of at least ASTM A307 quality. Bolts shall be those specified in Sec 4.3.9.1.
6-98
Chapter 4
Masonry Structures
4.3.9.4 Allowable Tension : Allowable tension shall be the lesser value selected from Table 6.4.6 and
Table 6.4.7 or shall be determined from lesser of the values obtained from the following formulae:
(4.3.18)
(4.3.19)
The area A shall be the lesser of the area obtained from Eq (4.3.20) and (4.3.21) and where the projected
p
areas of adjacent anchor bolts overlap, A of each anchor b olt shall be reduced by 50 per cent of the
p
overlapping area.
(4.3.20)
(4.3.21)
Table 6.4.6
1• 2
Allowable Tension, Bt for Embedded Anchor Bolts for Masonry, kN
Embedment Length, fb, or Edge Distance, fbe, mm
J:n 50 75 100 125 150 200 250

N/mm2
10 1.0 2.4 4.3 6.7 9.7 17.3 27.0
12 1.2 2.6 4.7 7.4 10.6 18.9 29.6
13 1.2 2.8 5.0 7.8 11.2 20.0 31.2
17 1.3 3.1 5.6 8.7 12.6 22.4 35.0
20 1.5 3.4 6.7 9.5 13.8 24.5 38.2
27 1.7 3.9 7.0 11.0 15.9 28.3 44.1
l
The allowable tension values are based on compressive strength of masonry assemblages.
Where yield strength of anchor bolt steel governs, the allowable tension is given in Table 6.4.7.
2 Values are for bolts of at least ASTM A307 quality. Bolts shall be those specified in Sec 4.3.9.1.
Table 6.4.7
1
Allowable Tension, Bt for Embedded Anchor Bolts for Masonry, kN
Bent Bar Anchor Bolt Diameter, mm

6 I 10 I 12 I 16 I 20 I 22 I 25 I 28
1.5 I 3.5 I 6.2 I 9.8 L 14.1 l 19.2 I 25.1 I 31.8
1 Values are for bolts of at least ASTM A307 quality. Bolts shall be those specified in Sec 4.3.9.
4.3.9.5 Combined Shear and Tension :Anchor bolts subjected to combined shear and tension shall be
designed in accordance with the formula given below:
(4.3.22)
4.3.9.6 Minimum Edge Distance, f be :The minimum value of e be measured from the edge of the masonry
parallel to the anchor bolt to the surface of the anchor bolt shall be 40 mm.
4.3.9.7 Minimum Embedment Depth, f b :The minimum embedment depth e b shall be 4db but not less
than50mm.
4.3.9.8 Minimum Spacing Between Bolts :The minimum centre to centre spacing between anchors shall
be 4db.
4.3.10 Load Test

For load test, the member shall be subject to a superimposed load equal to twice the design live load plus one
half of the dead load. This load shall be maintained for a period of 24 hours. If, during the test or upon
removal of the load, the member shows evidence of failure, such changes or modifications as are necessary to
make the structure adequate for the rated capacity shall be made; or where possible, a lower rating shall be
established. A flexural member shall be considered to have passed th� test if the maximum deflection at the end

Part 6
Structural Design
of the 24 hour period neither exceeds 0.005 f. nor 0.00025 f.2 /t and the beam and slabs show a recovery of at
least 75 per cent of the observed deflection within 24 hours after removal of the load.
4.3.11 Reuse of Masonry Units

Masonry units may be reused when clean, unbroken and conforms to the requirements of Part 5. All
structural properties of masonry of reclaimed units, especially adhesion bond, shall be determined by
approved test. The allowable working stress shall not exceed 50 per cent of that permitted for new masonry
uruts of the same properties.
4.4 BASIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
4.4.1 General
Masonry structures shall be designed according to the provisions of this section. The required design
strengths of masonry materials and any special requirements shall be specified in the plan submitted for
approval.
4.4.2 Design Considerations

4.4.2.1 Masonry structures shall be designed based on working stress and linear stress-strain distribution.
Requirements for working stress design oi unreinforced and reinforced masonry structures are provided in
Sec 4.5 and 4.6 respectively. In lieu of the workin� stress design method, slender walls and shear walls may be
designed by the strength design method specified m Sec 4.7.
The structure shall be prof>ortioned such that eccentricity of loading on the members is as small as possible.
Eccentric loading shall preferably be avoided by providing:
i) adequate bearing of floor /roof on the walls

ii) adequate stiffness in slabs, and
iii) fixity at the supports.
4.4.2.2 Effective Height

a) Wall:The effective height of a wall shall be taken as the clear height between the lateral supports at top
and bottom in a direction normal to the axis considered. For memoers not supported at the top normal to
the axis considered, the effective height is twice the height of the member above the support. Effective
height less than the clear height may be used if justified.
b) Column: Effective height of the column shall be taken as actual height for the direction it is laterally
supported and twice the actual height for the direction it is not laterally supported at the top normal to
the axis considered.
c) Opening in Wall : When Oflenings occur in a wall such that masonry between the openings is by
definition a column, effective height of masonry between the openings shall be obtained as follows:
i) When wall has full restraint at the top, effective height for the direction perpendicular to the plane
of wall equals 0.75H plus 0.25H', where His the distance between supports and H' is the height of
the taller opening; and effective height for the direction parallel to the wall equals H.
ii) When wall has partial restraint at the top and bottom, effective height for the direction
perpendicular to the plane of wall equals H when height of neither opening exceeds O.SH and it is
equal to 2H when height of any opening ·exceeds O.SH; and effective height for the direction
parallel to the plane of the wall equals 21-f.
4.4.2.3 Effective Length: Effective length of a wall for different support conditions shall be as given in
·
Table 6.4.8.
4.4.2.4 Effective Thickness : The effective thickness of walls and columns for use in the calculation of
slenderness ratio, shall be defined as follows:
a) Solid Walls: The effective thickness of solid walls, faced walls or grouted walls shall be the specified
thickness of the wall. ·
b) Solid Walls with Raked Mortar Joints: The effective thickness of solid walls with raked mortar joints
shall be the minimum thickness measured at the joint.
c) Cavity Walls : When both limbs of a cavity wall are axially loaded, each limb shall be considered
independently and the effective thickness of each limb shall be determined as in (a) or (b) above. If one of
the limbs is axially loaded, the effective thickness of the cavity wall shall be taken as the square root of
the sum of the squares of the effective thicknesses of the limbs.
d) Walls Stiffened by Pilasters : When solid or cavitX walls are stiffened by pilasters at intervals, the
effective thickness to be used for the calculation of II ratio, shall be determined as follows:
It
6-100
Chapter 4
Masonry Structures
i) Solid Walls : For stiffened solid walls the effective thickness shall be the specified thickness
multiplied by the stiffening coefficient, k, values of which are given below:
Stiffening Coefficient, k *
lpjwp tpjtTIJ
1 2 3
6 1.0 1.4 2.0
8 1.0 1.3 1.7
10 1.0 1.2 1.4
15 1.0 1.1 1.2
20 or more 1.0 1.0 1.0
..
* Lmear mterpolatlon ts permttted for obtammg mtermedtate values of k
where, lp centre to centre spacing of pilasters

tp thickness of pilaster including the wall
ttv =
specified thickness of main wall
Wp width of pilaster in the direction of wall
ii) Cavity Walls : When one or both limbs of a cavity wall are adequately bonded into pilasters at
intervals, the effective thickness of each limb shall be determined separately as in (a), (b) or d(i)
above and the effective thickness of the stiffened cavity wall shall be determined in accordance
with (c) above.
Where slenderness ratio of the wall is based on the effective length, the effective thickness shall be
the same as that without pilasters. .
e) Columns : The effective thickness for rectan�ular columns in the direction considered is the actual
thickness provided in that direction. The effechve thickness for nonrectangular columns is the thickness
of a square column with the same moment of inertia about its axis as that about the axis considered in the
actual column.
Table 6.4.8
Effective Length of Walls
Support Condition Effective Leng_th

Where a wall is continuous and is su ported by cross wall and there is
&
no opening within a distance of H/8 om the face of cross wall, 0.8L
Or
Where a wall is continuous and is supported by pier /buttresses
conforming to Sec 4.4.3.3 (c) (ii).
Where a wall is supported b y cross wall at one end and continuous

with cross wall at other end, 0.9L
Or
Where a wall is s ported by
fb ier /buttresses at one end and
b
continuous with ier uttresses at ot er end conforming to
f.
Sec 4.4.3.3 (c) (ii .
Where a wall is supported at each end by cross wall,

Or l.OL
Where a wall is su ported at each end by pier /buttresses conforming
�
to Sec 4.4.3.3 (c) (ii .
Where a wall is free at one end and continuous with a cross wall at the
other end, l.SL
Or
Where a wall is free at one end and continuous with a pier /buttresses
at the other end conforming to Sec 4.4.3.3 (c) (ii).
Where a wall is free at one end and supported at the other end by a
cross wall, 2.0L
Or
Where a wall is free at one end and supported at the other end by a
'
pier/buttresses conforming to Sec 4.4.3.3 (c) (ii).

Part 6
Structural Design
4.4.2.5 Slen derness Ratio

a) Walls : For a wall, slenderness ratio shall be the ratio of effective height to effective thickness or
effective length to effective thickness whichever is less. In case of a load bearing wall, slenderness ratio
shall not exceed 20.
b) Column: For a column, slenderness ratio shall be taken to be the greater of the ratio of effective heights to
the respective effective thickness in the two principal directions. Slenderness ratio for a load bearing
column shall not exceed 12.
4.4.2.6 Effective Area : The effective cross-sectional area shall be based on the minimum bedded area of the
hollow units, or the gross area of solid units plus any grouted area. If hollow units are used perpendicular to
the direction of stress, the effective area shall be lesser of the minimum bedded area or the minimum cross
sectional area. If bed joints are raked, the effective area shall be correspondingly reduced. Effective areas for
cavity walls shall be that of the loaded wythes.
4.4.2.7 Flexural Resistance of Cavity Walls : For computing the flexural resistance, lateral loads
perpendicular to the plane of the wall shall be distributed to the wythes according to their respective flexural
rigiaities.
4.4.2.8 Effective Width of Intersecting Walls :Where a shear wall is anchored to an intersecting wall or
walls, the width of the overhanging flange formed by the intersected walls on either side of the shear wall
shall not exceed 6 times the thickness of the intersected wall. Limits of the effective flange may be waived if
justified. Only the effective area of the wall parallel to the shear forces may be assumed to carry horizontal
shear.
4.4.3 Supports
4.4.3.1 Vertical Support : Structural members providing vertical support of masonry shall I'rovide a
bearing surface on which the initial bed joint shall not be less than 6 mm or more than 25 mm and shall be of
noncombustible materials, except where masonry is a nonstructural decorative feature or wearing surface.
4.4.3.2 Vertical Deflection : Elements supporting masonry shall be designed so that their vertical
deflection do not exceed 1/600 of the dear span under total loads. Lintels shall be supported on each end
such that allowable stresses in the supporting masonry are not exceeded. The minimum bearing length shall be
100mm.
4.4.3.3 Lateral Support

a) Lateral support of masonry may be provided by cross walls, columns, piers, counterforts or buttresses
when spanning horizontally or by floors, beams or roofs when spanning vertically.
b) Lateral supports for a masonry element such as load bearing wall or column shall be provided to
i) limit slenderness of a masonry element so as to prevent or reduce possibility of buckling of the

member due to vertical loads; and
ii) resist horizontal components of forces so as to ensure stability of a structure against overturning.
c) From consideration of slenderness (i.e. requirement b(i) above), masonry elements may be considered to be
laterally supported if
i) in case of a wall, where slenderness ratio is based on effective height, floor/roof slab (or beams
and slab) irrespective of the direction of span, bears on the supported wall as well as cross walls,
to the extent ofat least 100 mm;
ii) in case of a wall, when slenderness ratio is based on its effective length, a cross
wall/pier/buttress of thickness equal to or more than half the thickness of the supported wall or
125 mm, whichever is more and average length equal to or more than one-fifth of the height of the
wall, is built at right angle to the wall and properfy bonded;
iii) in case of a column, an RC or timber beam/R S joist/roof truss, is supported on the column. In this
case, the column will not be considered to be laterally supported in the direction at right angle to
it; and
iv) in case of a column, an RC beam forming a part of beam and slab construction, is supported on the
column, and the slab adequately bears on stiffening walls. This construction will provide lateral
support to the column, in the direction of both horizontal axes.
4.4.4 Stability
A wall or column subject to vertical and lateral loads may be considered to provide adeqyate lateral support
from consideration of stability, if the construction providing the support is capable of resisting the following
forces:
i) Simple static reactions at the point of lateral support to all the lateral loads; plus
6-102
Chapter 4
Masonry Structures
ii) A lateral load equal to 2.5% of the total vertical load that the wall or column is designated to carry at
the point of lateral support.
4.4.4.1 In case of load bearing buildings up to five storeys, stability requirements may be considered to have
been satisfied if the following conditions are met.
a) Height to width ratio of building does not exceed 2.
b) Cross walls acting as stiffening walls continuous from outer wall to outer wall or outer wall to a load
bearing inner wall, and of thickness and spacing as given in Table 6.4.9 are provided.
Note : If stiffening wall or walls that are in a line, are interrupted by openings, lerigth of solid wall or walls in the
zone of the wall that is to be stiffened shall be at least one-fifth of the height of the opening.
Table 6.4.9
Thickness and Spacing of Stiffening Wails
Stiffening Wall *
Thickness of Load Storey Height not Thickness not less than Max im um
Bearing Wall to be to Exceed spacing
Stiffened 1 to 3 storeys 4 and 5 storeys
(mm) (m) (mm) (mm) (m)
100 3.2 100 -
4.5
200 3.2 100 200 6 .0
300 3. 4 100 200 8 .0
above 300 5.0 100 200 8.0
* Storey height and maximum spacing as given are centre to centre dimensions.
c) Floors and roof either bear on cross walls or are properly anchored to those walls such that all lateral
loads are safely transmitted to those walls and through them to the foundation.
d) Cross walls are built jointly with the bearing walls and jointly mortared, or interconnected by toothing.
Note: Cross walls may be anchored to walls to be supported by ties of noncorrosive metal of minimum section 6 x 35
mm and length 60 mm with ends bent at least 50 mm, maximum vertical spacing of ties being 1.2 m.
4.4.4.2 In case of walls exceeding 8.0 rn in length, safety and adequacy of lateral supports shall always be
checked by structural analysis.
4.4.4.3 A trussed roofing may not provide lateral support unless special measures are adopted to brace and
anchor the roofing. However, in case of residential and similar buildings of conventional design with trussed
roofing having cross walls, it may be assumed that stability requirements are met by the cross walls and
structural anafysis for stability may be dispensed with.
4.4.4.4 In case of external walls of basement and plinth, stability requirements of Sec 4.4.4 may be
considered to be satisfied if: ·
.
a) Bricks used in basement and plinth have a minimum crushing strength of 5 N/mm2and mortar used in
masonry is of Type M3 or better,
b) Clear height of ceiling in basement does not exceed 2.6 m,
c) In the zone of action of soil pressure on basement walls, traffic load excluding any surcharge due to
adjoining buildings does not exceed 5 kN I m2,
d) Minimum thickness of basement walls is in accordance with Table 6.4.10 .
I n case there i s surcharge on basement walls from adjoining buildings, thickness of basement walls shall be
based on structural analysis.
4.4.4.5 Free Standing Wall : Free standing walls, subject to wind pressure or seismic forces shall be
designed on the basis of permissible tensile stress in masonry or stability consideration. However in Seismic
Zones 1 and 2, free standmg walls may be proportioned without making any design calculations with the help
of Table 6.4.11 provided the mortar used is oftype not leaner than M3. ror parapet wall see Sec 4.4.9.4.
4.4.5 Structural Continuity

Intersecting structural elements intended to act as a unit shall be anchored together to resist the design forces.
Walls shalf be anchored together to all floors, roofs or other elements which provide lateral support for the

Part 6
Structural Design
wall. Where floors or roofs are designed to transmit horizontal forces to walls, the anchorages to the walls
shall be designed to resist the horizontal forces.
·
Table 6.4.10
Minimum Thickness of Basement Wall
Minimum Thickness of Height of the Ground above Basement

Basement Wall Floor Level with Wall Loading
(Nominal), mm (Permanent Load), m
Less than 50 kN/m More than 50 kN/m
375 2.0 2.5
250 1.4 1.8
Table 6.4.11
Height to Thickness Ratio of Free Standing Wall
Design Wind Pressure, N/m2 Height to Thickness Ratio

Up to 300 10
600 7
900 5
1100 4
Note: Height is to be taken from 150 mm below ground level or top of footing/foundation block,
whichever is higher, and up to the top edge of the wall.
4.4.5.1 Multi-wythe Walls :All wythes shall be bonded by grout or tied together by corrosion resistant
wall ties or joint reinforcement as follows :
·
a) Wall Ties i n Cavity Wall Construction :Wall ties shall b e o f sufficient length t o engage all wythes. The
portion of the wall ties within the wythe shall be completely embedded in mortar or grout. The ends of the
wall ties shall be bent to 90 degree angles with an extension not less than 50 mm long. Wall ties not
completely embedded in mortar or grout between wythes shall be a single piece with each end engaged in
each wythe.
There shall be at least one 6 mm diameter wall tie for each 0.45 m2 of wall area. For cavity walls in
which the width of the cavity is greater than 75 mm, but not more than 115 mm, at least one 6 mm diameter
wall tie for each 0.3 m2 of wall area shall be provided ..
Ties in alternate courses shall be staggered. The vertical distance between ties shall not exceed 600 mm .
The horizontal distance between ties shall not exceed 900 mm.
Additional ties spaced not more than 900 mm apart shall be provided around and within 300 mm of the
opening.
Wall ties of different size and spacing may be used if they provide equivalent strength between wythes.
b) · Wall Ties for Grouted Multi-wythe Construction :The two wythes shall be bonded together with at
least 6 mm diameter steel wall ties for each 0.20 m2 of area. Wall ties of different size and spacing may be
used if they provide equivalent strength between wythes.
c) Joint Reinforcement : Prefabricated joint reinforcement for masonry walls shall have a minimum of one
cross wire of at least 3 mm diameter steel for each 0.2 m2 of wall area. The vertical spacing of the joint
reinforcement shall not exceed 400 mm The longitudinal wires shall be thoroughly emoedded in the bed
.
joint mortar.The joint reinforcement shall engage all wythes.
Where the space between tied wythes is filled with grout or mortar, the allowable stresses and other
provisions for masonry bonded walls shall apply. Where the space is not filled, tied walls shall conform
to the allowable stress, lateral support, thicl<ness (excluding cavity), height and tie requirements of
cavity walls.
4.4.6 Joint Reinforcement and Protection of Ties

The minimum mortar cover between ties or joint reinforcement and any exposed face shall be 15 mm. The
thickness of grout or mortar between masonry units and joint reinforcement snail not be less than 6 mm, except
that smaller diameter reinforcement or bolts may be placed in bed joints which are at least twice as thick as
the diameter of the reinforcement.
4.4.7 Pipes and Conduits

Pipe or conduit shall not be embedded in any masonry so as to reduce the capacity to less than that necessary
for required stability or required fire protection, except the following :
6-104
Chapter 4
Masonry Structures
a) Rigid electrical conduit may be embedded in structural masonry when their location has been detailed on
the approved plan.
b) Any pipe or conduit may pass vertically or horizontally through any masonry by means of a sleeve at
least 1arge enough to pass any hub or coupling on the pipeline. Such sleeves shall not be placed closer
than three diameters, centre to centre, nor snail they unduly impair the strength of construction.
c) Placement of pipes or conduits in unfilled cores of hollow unit masonry shall not be considered as
embedment
4. 4.8 Loads and Load Combination

4.4.8.1 Design Loads : All design loads and other forces to be taken for the design of masonry structures
shall conform to Chapter 2, Loads.
4.4.8.2 Load Dispersion : The angle of dispersion of vertical load on walls shall be taken as not more than
30° from the vertical.
4.4.8.3 Distribution of Concentrated Vertical Loads in Walls : The length of wall, laid up in running
bond, which may be considered capable of working at the maximum allowable compressive stresses to resist
vertical concentrated loads, shall not exceed the centre to centre distance between such loads, nor the width
of bearing area plus four times the wall thickness. Concentrated vertical loads shall not be assumed
distributed across continuous vertical mortar or control joints unless elements designed to distribute the
concentrated vertical loads are employed.
4.4.8.4 Loads on Nonbearing Wall : Masonry walls used as interior partition or as exterior surfaces of
building which do not carry vertical loads imposed by other elements of the building shall be designed to
carry their own weight plus any superimposed finish and lateral forces. Bonding or anchorage of nonbearing
walls shall be adequate to support the walls and to transfer lateral forces to the supporting structures.
4.4.8.5 Load Combinations : Load combination for design of masonry structures shall conform to the
requirements of Sec2 .7.5.1.
4. 4.9 Minimum Design Dimensions

4.4.9.1 Minimum Thickness of Load Bearing Walls: The nominal thickness of masonry bearing walls in
building shall not be less than250 mm.
Exception:
Stiffened solid masonry bearing walls in one-storey buildings may have a minimum effective thickness of 165 mm
when not over 3 m in height, provided that when gable construction is used an additional 1.5 m height may be
permitted at the peak of the gable.
4.4.9.2 Variation in Thickness: When a change in thickness due to minimum thickness requirements occurs
between floor levels, the greater thickness shall be carried up to the higher floor level.
4.4.9.3 Decrease in Thickness : When walls of masonry of hollow units or masonry bonded hollow walls
are decreased in thickness, a course or courses of solid masonry shall be constructed between the walls
below and the thinner wall above, or special units or construction shall be used to transmit the loads from
wythes to the walls below.
4.4.9.4 Parapet Wall :Parapet walls shall be at least 200 mm thick and height shall not exceed 4 times the
thickness. The parapet wall snail not be thinner than the wall below.
4.5 DESIGN OF UNREINFORCED MASONRY
4.5.1 General
The requirements of this section are applicable to unreinforced masonry in addition to the requirements of
Sec 4.4.
4.5.2 Design of Members Subjected to Axial Compression

The stresses due to compressive forces applied at the centroid of any load bearing wall, column and pilaster
may be computed by Eq ( 4.5 .1) below assuming uniform distribution over the effective area.
p
fa=A (4.5 1)
.
4.5.3 Design of Members Subjected to Combined Bending and Axial Compression

a) Compressive stresses due to combined bending and axial load shall satisfy the requirements of
Sec 4.3 .5.

Part 6
Structural Design
b) Resultant tensile stress due to combined bending and axial load shall not exceed the allowable flexural
tensile stress, F1 as specified in Sec 4.3.
4.5.4 Design of Members Subjected to Flexure

Stresses due to flexure calculated by Eq (4.5.2) below shall not exceed the values given in Sec 4.3.5.
(4.5.2)
4.5.5 Design of Members Subjected to Shear

Shear calculations in flexural members and shear walls shall be based on Eq (4.5.3) below.
(4.5.3)
4.5.6 Design of Arches .
Geometrical form and the cross-sectional dimensions of masonry arch shall be selected such that the line of
thrust at any section of the arch is kept within the middle third of the section of the arch rib. The elastic
theory of arches shall be permitted for the analysis of unreinforced masonry arches. All supports of arches
shall be capable of developing the required horizontal thrust without suffering unacceptable aisplacements.
Every arch must be designed to resist the stresses due to the following loads:
a) Gravity Loads :
i) Dead loads shall be placed in conformity with their actual distribution.
ii) Live loads shall be positioned to cover entire span or part of the span as necessary to produce the
·
maximum stresses at the crown, springing and all other sections of tne arch rib.
b) Loads due to temperature change.
c) Shrinkage load due to setting and hardening.
d) Shortening of arch rib under thrust caused by loads.
4.5.7 Footings and Corbels

The slope of footing and corbelling (measured from the horizontal to the face of the corbelled surface) shall
not be less than 60 degrees. .
The maximum horizontal projection of corbelling from the plane of the wall shall be such that stress at any
section does not exceed the allowable value.
4.6 DESIGN OF REINFORCED MASONRY
4.6.1 General
The requirements of this section are in addition to those specified in Sec 4.4 and are applicable to reinforced
masonry. Plain bars larger than 6 mm in diameter shall not be used.
4.6.1.1 Assumptions : The following assumptions shall be applicable for this section.
a) Masonry carries no tensile stress.
b) Reinforcement is completely surrounded by and bonded to masonry material so that they work together
as a homogeneous material within the range of working stresses.
4.6.2 Design of Members Subjected to Axial Compression

Stresses due to compressive forces apJ?.lied at the centroid of load bearing wall, column and pilaster may be
computed assuming uniform distnbution over the effective area. Stress shall be calculated from
Eq (4.6.1) below :
p
Ja=A
(4.6.1)
e
4.6.3 Design of Members Subjected to Combined Bending and Axial Compression

Stress due to combined bendin� and axial loads shall satisfy the requirements of Sec 4.3.5. Columns and walls
S\,lbjected to bending with or without axial loads shall meet all appficable requirements for flexural design.
The design of walls with an (h'/t) ratio larger than 30 shall be based on forces and moments determined from
analysis of structure. Such analysis shall take into account influence of axial loads and variable moment of
inertia on member stiffness and fixed end moments, effect of deflections on moments and forces, and the effects
of duration of loads.
6-106
Chapter 4
Masonry Structures
4.6.4 Design of Members Subjected to Shear Force

Shearing stresses in flexural members and shear walls shall be computed by
(4.6.2)
When the computed shear stress exceeds the allowable value, web reinforcement shall be provided and
designed to carry the total shear force. Both vertical and horizontal shear stresses shall be considered. The
area required for shear reinforcement placed perpendicular to the longitudinal reinforcement shall be
computed byEq (4.6.3)
below:
A =sV (4.6.3)
v Fsd
Spacing of vertical shear reinforcement shall not exceed d /2, nor 600 mm. Inclined shear reinforcement shall
have a maximum spacing of 0.375 1
d ( + cot a), but not greater than 600 mm, where a is the acute angle
between inclined bar and the horizontal.
4.6.5 Design of Members Subjected to Flexural Stress

4.6.5.1 Rectangular Elements : Rectangular flexural elements shall be designed in accordance with the
following equations or other methods based on the simplified assumptions.
a) Compressive stress in the masonry:
(4.6.4)
b) Tensile stress in the longitudinal reinforcement:
(4.6.5)
c) Design coefficients:
[ 2
k= ( np} + 2np
]112 - np (4.6.6)
or
k=-1- (4.6.7)
1+.b_
nfh
. 1 k (4.6.8)
J= --
3
4.6.5.2 Nonrectangular Sections :Flexural elements of nonrectangular cross-section shall be designed in
accordance with the assumptions given in Sec and 4.4.2.1 4.6.1.1.
4.6.5.3 Lateral Support : The clear distance between lateral supports of a beam shall not exceed 32 times
the least depth of compression area.
4.6.5.4 Effective Width: In computing flexural stresses in walls where reinforcement occurs, the effective
6
width assumed for running bond masonryshall not exceed times the nominal wall thickness or the centre to
centre distance between reinforcement. Where stack bond is used, the effective width shall not exceed times 3
the nominal wall thickness or the centre to centre distance between reinforcement or the length of one unit,
unless grouted solid using open-ended joints.
4.6.5.5 Bond : In flexural members in which tensile reinforcement is parallel to the compressive face, the
bond stress shall be computed bythe formula:
(4.6.9)

Part 6
Structural Design
4.6.6 Reinforcement Requirements and Details

4.6.6.1 Column Reinforcement
a) Vertical Reinforcement : The area of vertical reinforcement shall not be less than 0.005 Ae and not more
than 0.04Ae. At least four 10 mm $bars shall be provided.
b) Lateral Ties : All longitudinal bars for columns shall be enclosed by lateral ties. Lateral support shall be
provided to the longitudinal bars by the corner of a complete tie having an included angfe of not more
than 135 degrees or oy a hook at the end of a tie. The corner bars shall have such support provided by a
complete tie enclosing the longitudinal bars. Alternate longitudinal bars shall have such lateral support
provided by ties and no bar shall be farther than 150 mm from such a laterally supported bar.
Lateral ties and longitudinal bars shall be placed not less than 40 mm and not more than 125 mm, from the
surface of the column. Lateral ties may be against the longitudinal bars or placed in the horizontal bed
joint if the requirements of Sec 4.4.6 are met. Spacing of ties shall not be more than 16 times longitudinal
bar diameter, 48 times tie bar diameter or the least dimension of the column but not more than 450 mm.
Ties shall be at least 6 mm in diameter for 22 mm diameter or smaller longitudinal bars and 10 mm in
diameter for larger longitudinal bars. Ties less than 10 mm in diameter may be used for longitudinal bars
larger than 22 mm in diameter, provided the total cross-sectional area of such smaller ties crossing a
longitudinal plane is equal to that of the larger ties at their required spacing.
c) Anchor Bolt Ties : Additional ties shall be provided around anchor bolts which are set in the top of the
column. Such ties shall engage at least four bolts or, alternatively at least four vertical column bars or a
combination of bolts and bars totaling four in number. Such ties shall be located within the top 125 mm
of the column and shall provide a total of 250 square millimeters or more in cross-sectional area. The
upper most ties shall be Within 50 mm of the top of the column.
4.6.6.2 Maximum Reinforcement Size : The maximum size of reinforcing bars shall be 35 mm. Maximum
steel area in cell shall be 6 per cent of the cell area without splices and 12 per cent of cell area with splices.
4.6.6.3 Spacing of Longitudinal Reinforcement : The clear distance between parallel bars, except in
columns, shall not be less than the nominal diameter of the bars or 25 mm, except that bars in a splice may be
in contact. This clear distance requirement applies to the clear distance between a contact splice and adjacent
splices or bars. The minimum clear distance between parallel bars in columns shall be two and one-half times
the bar diameter.
The clear distance between the surface of a bar and any surface of a masonry unit shall not be less than 6 mm
for fine grout and 12 mm for coarse grout. Cross webs of hollow units may be used as support for horizontal
reinforcement.
All reinforcing bars, except joint reinforcing, shall be completely embedded in mortar or grout and have a
minimum cover, including the masonry unit, as specified below :
i) 20 mm when not exposed to weather

ii) 40 mm when exposed to weather
iii) 50 mm when exposed to soil
4.6.6.4 Anchorage of Flexural Reinforcement

a) The tension or compression in any bar at any section must be developed on each side of that section by
the required development length. The development length of the bar may be achieved by a combination of
an embedment length, anchorage or, for tension only, hooks.
The required development length for deformed bars or deformed wires shall be calculated by:
ed = 0.29dbfs for bars in tension (4.6.10)
ed = 0.22dbfs for bars in compression (4.6.11)
Development length for plain bars shall be 2.0 times the length calculated by Eq (4.6.10).
b) Except at supports, or at the free end of cantilevers, every reinforcing bar shall be extended beyond the
point at which it is no longer needed to resist tensile stress for a distance equal to 12 bar diameters or the
d.epth of the flexural member, whichever is greater. No flexural bars shall be terminated in a tensile zone
unless one of the following conditions is satisfied:
i) The shear is not over one-half of that permitted, including allowance for shear reinforcement, if any.
ii) Additional shear reinforcement in excess of that required is provided each way from the cutoff a
distance equal to the depth of the beam. The shear reinforcement spacing shall not exceed d/Brb,
where rb is the ratio of the area of bars cutoff to the total area of bars at the section.
6-108
Chapter 4
Masonry Structures
iii) The continuing bars provide double the area required for flexure at that point or double the
perimeter required for reinforcing bond.
c) At least one third of the total reinforcement provided for negative moment at the support shall be
extended beyond the extreme position of the point of inflection a distance sufficient to develop one half
the allowable stress in the bar, one sixteenth of the clear span, or the depth d of the member, whichever is
greater.
d) Tensile reinforcement of negative moment in any span of a continuous restrained or cantilever beam, or
in any member of a rigid frame, shall be adequately anchored by reinforcing bond, hooks or mechanical
anchors in or through the supporting member.
e) At least one third of the required positive moment reinforcement in simple beams or at the freely
supported end of continuous beams shall extend along the same face of the beam into the support at least
.150 rnm: At least one fourth of the required positive moment reinforcement at the continuous end of
continuous beams shall extend along the same face of the beam into the support at least 150 mm.
f) Compression reinforcement in flexural members shall be anchored by ties or stirrups not less than 6 mm
in diameter, spaced not farther apart than 16 bar diameters or 48 tie diameters whichever is smaller. Such
ties or stirrups shall be used throughout the distance where compression steel is required.
g) In regions of moment where the design tensile stresses in the steel are greater than 80 per cent of the
allowable steel tensile stress (F5), the lap length of splices shall be increased not less than 50 per cent of
the minimum required length. Other equivalent means of stress transfer to accomplish the same 50 per cent
increase may be used.
4.6.6.5 Anchorage of Shear Reinforcement

a) Single separate bars used as shear reinforcement shall be anchored at each end by one of the following
methods:
i) Hooking tightly around the longitudinal reinforcement through 180 degrees.
ii) Embedment above or below the mid-depth of the beam on the compression side a distance sufficient to
develop the stress in the bar for plane or deformed bars.
iii) By a standard hook (see Sec 4.6.6.6) considered as developing 50 N /mm2, plus embedment sufficient
to develop the remainder of the stress to which the bars are subject. The effective embedded length
shall not be assumed to exceed the distance between the mid-depth of the beam and the tangent of the
hook. ·
b) The ends of bars forming single U or multiple U stirrups shall be anchored by one of the methods specified
above or shall be bent through an angle of at least 90 degrees tightly around a longitudinal reinforcing
bar not less in diameter than the stirrup bar, and shall project beyond the bend at least 12 diameters of
the stirrup.
c) The loops or closed ends of single U or multiple U stirrups shall be anchored by bending around the
longitudinal reinforcement through an angle of at least 90 degrees and project beyond the end of the bend
at least 12 diameters of the stirrup.
4.6.6.6 Hooks
a) The term "standard hook" shall mean one of the following:
i) A 180 degree tum plus an extension of at least 4 bar diameters but not less than 65 mm at the free end
of the bar.
ii) 90 degree turn plus an extension of at least 12 bar diameters at the free end of the bar.
iii) For stirrup and tie anchorage only either a 90 degree or a 135 degree turn, plus an extension of at
least 6 bar diameters but not less than 65 mm at the free end of the bar.
b) The diameter of bend measured on the inside of the bar other than stirrups and ties, shall not be less than
that set forth in Table 6.4.12.
c) Inside diameter of bend for 12 mm diameter or smaller stirrups and ties shall not be less than 4 bar
diameters. Inside diameter of bend for 16 mm diameter or larger stirrups and ties shall not be less than
that given in Table 6.4.12.
d) Hooks shall not be permitted in the tension portion of any beam, except at the ends of simple or cantilever
beams or at the freely supported ends of continuous or restrained beams.

Part 6
Structural Design
Table 6.4.12
Minimum Diameter of Bend
Bar Diilmeter Minimum Diameter of Bend

6 nun cp through 25 nun cp 6 bar diameters
� 8 nun cp through 35 nun cp 8 bar diameters
e) Hooks shall not be assumed to carry a load which would produce a tensile stress in the bar greater than
SON/nun2.
f) Hooks shall not be considered effective in adding to the compressive resistance of bars.
g) Any mechanical device capable of developing the strength of the bar without damage to the masonry may
be used in lieu of a hook. Data must be presented to show the adequacy of such devices.
4.6.6.7 Splices : The amount of lap of lapped splices shall be sufficient to transfer the allowable stress of
the reinforcement as in Sec 4.6.6.4. In no case shall the length of the lapped splice be less than 30 bar
diameters for compression and 40 bar diameters for tension.
Welded or mechanical connections shall develop 125 per cent of the specified yield strength of the bar in
tension, except for connections of compression bars in columns that are not part of the seismic system and are
not subject to flexure, where the compressive strength only need be developed.
When adjacent splices in grouted masonry are separated by 75 mm or less, the lap length shall be increased by
30 per cent or the splice may be staggered at least 24 bar diameters with no increase in lap length.
4.7 STRENGTH DESIGN OF SLENDER WALLS AND SHEAR WALLS
4.7.1 Design of Slender Walls

In lieu of the procedure set forth in Sec 4.6, the procedures prescribed in this section, which consider the
slenderness of walls by representing effects of axial forces and deflection in calculation of moments, may be
used when the vertical load stress at the location of maximum moment computed by Eq (4.7.1) does not exceed
0.04j;,. The value of j;,shall not exceed 40 N/nun2.
p lll +Pt
so • 04/'m (4.7.1)
A
g
Slender masonry walls shall have a minimum nominal thickness of 150 nun.
4.7.1.1 Slender Wall Design Procedure

a) Maximum Reinforcement: The reinforcement ratio shall not exceed O.Spb, where Pb is the balanced steel
ratio.
b) Moment and Deflection Calculation : All moments and deflections of slender walls shall be calculated
based on simple support conditions at top and bottom. For other support and fixity conditions, moments
and deflections shallbe calculated using established principles of mechanics.
4.7.1.2 Strength Design

a) Loads: Factored loads shall be determined in accordance with Chapter 2, Loads.
b) Required Moment: Required moment and axial force shall be determined at the mid-height of the wall and
shall be used for design. The factored moment, Mu, at the mid-height of the wall shall be determined by
Eq (4.7.2).
( 4 .7.2)
where:
L1u = horizontal deflec�ion at mid-height under factored load;
P -Delta effects shall be included in deflection calculation.
e = eccentricity of Pu
Pu = axial load at mid-height of wall, including tributary wall weight.
=
Putu +Puf
6-110
Chapter 4
Masonry Structures
c) Design Strength: Design strength in flexure is the nominal moment strength, Mn, multiplied by the strength
reduction factor, � and shall equal or exceed the factored moment, Mu.
(4.7.3).
where:
Mn = nominal moment strength
Ase = effective area of steel
a = depth of stress block due to factored loads.
=
Pu+Asf y
0.85f;,b
The strength reduction factor � for flexure shall be 0.80.
d) Design Assumptions: The following are the design assumptions for calculation of nominal strength.
i) Nominal strength of singly reinforced maso� wall cross-sections subject to combined flexure and
axial load shalT be based on applicable conditiOns of equilibrium and compatibility of strains.
ii) Strain in reinforcement and masonry walls shall be assumed directly proportional to the distance
from the neutral axis. .
iii) Maximum usable strain at extreme masonry compression fibre shallbe assumed equal to 0.003.
iv) Stress in reinforcement below specified yield strength /y shall be taken as Es times steel strain. For
strains greater than that corresponding to fy, stress in reinforcement shall be considered
independent of strain and equal to /y·
v) Tensile strength of masonry walls shall be neglected in flexural calculations of strength, except for
deflection caTculation.
vi) Relationship between masonry compressive stress and masonry strain may be assumed to be
rectangular as defined by the following:
1. Masonry stress of 0.85 j;,shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an equivalent

compression zone bounded by edges of the cross-section and a straight line located parallel to
the neutral axis at a distance a 0.85c from the fibre of maximum compressive strain.
=
2. Distance c from fibre of maximum strain to the neutral axjs shall be measured in a direction
perpendicular to that axis.
4.7.1.3 Deflection Calculation : The mid-height deflection, Lis, under service lateral and vertical loads
(without load factors) shall be limited to:
Lis = 0.007h (4.7.4)
The mid-height deflection shall be computed by:
2
A
as
= 5Msh w hen Mser � Mcr (4.7.5)
48Emlg
(4.7.6)

Part 6
Structural Design
The cracking moment strength of the wall Mer shall be determined by :
Mer =Sfr (4.7.7)
The modulus of ruptureJr, shall be determined form Table 6.4.13.
Table 6.4.13
Values of the Modulus of Rupture, fr
Type of Masonry Fully Grouted Partially_ Grouted

Solid Masonry 0.17 {.1;;; � 0.65 N/mm2 Not allowed
Hollow Unit Masonry 0.33{.1;;; � 1.2N/� 0.21 Jj;;; � 0.65N/�
4.7.2 Design of Shear Walls

Based on ultimate strength design, the procedures described below may be used as an alternative to the
procedure specified in Sec 4.6 for the design of reinforced hollow unit masonry shear walls. Provisions for
quality control during construction of the shear wall are specified in Sec 4.3.4
4.7.2.1 Required Strength : The required strength to resist different combinations of loads shall be
determined in accordance with Sec 2.7.5.1.
4.7.2.2 Design Strength :Shear walls shall be proportioned such that the design strength exceeds the
required strength. Design strength in terms of axial force, shear force and moment provided by the shear wall
shall be computed as the nominal strength multiplied by the strength reduction factor ip .
Strength reduction factor ip shall be as follows :

a) ip = 0.65 for axial load and axial load with flexure
For members with /y less than 410 N /mm2 and with symmetrical reinforcement, ip may be increased
linearly to 0.85 as ip Pn decreases from 0.10f:n Ae or 0.25Pb to zero.
For solid grouted walls Pb may be calculated by
(4.7.8)
where
ab =0.85[emuj(emu+/y/Es)]d
b) ip = 0.60 for shear
The shear strength reduction factor may be 0.80 for any shear wall when its nominal shear strength
exceeds the shear corresponding to development of its nominal flexural strength for the factored load
combination.
4.7.2.3 Design Assumptions for Nominal Strength

a) Nominal strength of shear wall cross-sections shall be based on assumptions specified in
Sec 4.7.1.2(d).
b) The maximum usable strain emu, at the extreme masonry compression fibre shall not exceed 0.003.
c) J:n shall not be less than 7N/mm2 or greater than 20 N/mrn2.
4.7.2.4 Axial Strength: The nominal axial strength of shear walls supporting axial loads only shall be
calculated by Eq (4.7.9) .
(4.7.9)
The shear wall shall be designed for the axial strength Pw such that
(4.7.10)
6-112
Chapter 4
Masonry Structures
4.7.2.5 Shear Strength

a) The nominal shear strength shall be determined by the provisions as specified in (b) or (c) below. The
maximum nominal shear strength values are given in Tabfe 6.4.14.
Table 6.4.14
Maximum Nominal Shear Strength Values
•
M
- Vn
Vd
Ae.JK
�0.25 72.0
�1.00 48.0
,. M is the maximum bending moment that occurs simultaneously with the shear load V
at the section under consideration. Interpolation may be by straight line for M!Vd values
between 0.25 and 1.00.
b) The nominal shear strength of shear walls except for shear walls specified in (c) below shall be
determined by Eq (4.7.11).
(4.7.11)
where:
Vm =0.083CaAmv �{J:n ) (4.7.12)
The value of Cain Eq (4.7.12) is given as:
M
Ca = 2.4 for Vd � 0.25
M
=1.2 for Vd � 1.0
and
(4.7.13)
c) For a shear wall whose nominal shear strength exceeds the shear corresponding to development of its
nominal flexural strength, two shear regions exist.
i) For all cross-sections within the region defined by the base of the shear wall and a plane at a
distance Lw above the base of the snear wall, the nominal shear strength shall be determined by
Eq (4.7.14)
(4.7.14)
The required shear strength for this region shall be calculated at a distance Lrv/2 above the base
of the shear wall but not to exceed one-half storey height.
ii) For the other region, the nominal shear strength of the shear wall shall be determined by
Eq (4.7.11).
4.7.2.6 Reinforcement: Reinforcement shall be in accordance with the following:

i) Minimum reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with Sec 4.8.5.1 for all seismic areas using
this method of analysis.
ii) When the shear wall failure mode is in flexure, the nominal flexural strength of the shear wall shall be
at least 1.8 times the cracking moment strength of a fully grouted wall or 3.0 times the cracking moment
strength of a partially grouted wall as obtained from Eq (4.7.7).
iii) All continuous reinforcement shall be anchored or spliced in accordance with Sec 4.6.6.4 with
fs = 0.5/y ·
iv) Vertical reinforcement shall not be less than 50 per cent of the horizontal reinforcement.

Part 6
Structural Design
v) Spacing of horizontal reinforcement within the region defined in Sec 4.7.2.5(c) shall not exceed three
times tne nominal wall thickness or 600 mm, whichever is smaller.
4.7.2.7 Boundary Member: Boundary members shall be as follows :

a) The need for boundary members at boundaries of shear wall shall be determined using the provisions set
forth in (b) or (c) below.
b) Boundary members shall be provided when the failure mode is flexure and the maximum extreme fibre
stress exceeds 0.2J;,. The boundary members may be discontinued where the calculated compressive
stresses are less than 0.15J;,. Stresses may be calculated for the factored forces using a linearly elastic
model and gross section properties.
c) When the failure mode is flexure, boundary member shall be provided to confine all vertical
reinforcement whose corresponding masonry compressive stress exceeds 0.4 j;,.
d) The minimum length of the boundary member shall be 3 times the thickness of the wall.
e) Boundary members shall be confined with minimum of 10 mm diameter bars at a maximum of 200 mm
spacing or equivalent within the grouted core and within the region defined by the base of the shear wall
and a plane at a distance Ltv above the base of the shear wall.
4.8 EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DESIGN
4.8.1 General
All masonry structures constructed in the Seismic Zones 2 and 3 shown in Fig 6.2.10 shall be designed in
accordance with the provisions of this Section.
4.8.2 Loads
Seismic forces on masonry structures shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Sec 2.5 of this
Part.
4.8.3 Materials
a) Well burnt clay bricks and concrete hollow blocks having a crushing strength not less than
12 N /mm2 shall be used.
b) Mortar not leaner than M3 shall be used for masonry constructions.
4.8.4 Provisions for Seismic Zone 2

4.8.4.1 Wall Reinforcement: Vertical reinforcement of at least 12 mm q, shall be provided continuously
from support to support at each corner, at each side of each opening, at the ends of walls and at a maximum
spacing of 1.2 m horizontally throughout the wall. Horizontal reinforcement not less than 12 mm q, shall be
provided:
a) at the bottom and top of wall openings and shall extend at least 40 bar diameters, with a minimum of 600
mm, past the opening,
b) continuously at structurally connected roof and floor levels and at the top of walls,
c) at the bottom of the wall or in the top of the foundations when dowelled to the wall,
d) at maximum spacing of 3.0 m unless uniformly distributed joint reinforcement is provided. Reinforcement
at the top and bottom of openings when continuous in the wall may be used in determining the maximum
spacing specified in item (a) above.
4.8.4.2 Stack Bond : Where stack bond is used, the minimum horizontal reinforcement ratio shall be
0.0007bt. This ratio shall be satisfied by uniformly distributed joint reinforcement or by horizontal
reinforcement spaced not more than 1.2 m and fully embedded in grout or mortar.
4.8.4.3 Columns: Columns shall be reinforced as specified in Sec 4.6.6.1.
4.8.5 Provisions for Seismic Zone 3

All masonry structures built in Seismic Zone 3 shall be designed and constructed in accordance with
requirements for Seismic Zone 2 and with the following additiona1 requirements and limitations.
Reinforced hollow unit stack bond construction which is part of the seismic resisting system shall use open
end units so that all head joints are made solid, shall use bond beam units to facilitate the flow of grout and
shall be grouted solid.
6-114
Chapter 4
Masonry Structures
4.8.5.1 Wall Reinforcement :Reinforced masonry walls shall be reinforced with both vertical and
horizontal reinforcement. The sum of the areas of horizontal and vertical reinforcement shall be at least 0.002
times the gross cross-sectional area of the wall and the area of reinforcement in either direction shall not be
less than 0.0007 times the gross cross-sectional area of the wall. The spacing of reinforcement shall not exceed
1.20 m. The diameter of reinforcing bar shall not be less than 10 mm except that joint reinforcement may be
considered as part of all of the requirements for minimum reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be continuous
around wall corners and througn intersections. Only reinforcement which is continuous in the wall or
element shall be considered in computing the minimum area of reinforcement. Reinforcement with splices
conforming to Sec 4.6.6.7 shall be considered as continuous reinforcement.
4.8.5.2 Column Reinforcement : The spacing of column ties shall be not more than 225 mm for the full
height of columns stressed by tensile or compressive axial overturning forces due to the seismic loads, and 225
mm for the tops and bottoms of all other columns for a distance of one sixth of the clear column height, but not
less than 450 mm or maximum column dimension. Tie spacing for the remaining column height shall be not more
than 16 bar diameters, 48 tie diameters or the least column dimension, but not more than 450 mm .
4.8.5.3 Stack Bond: Where stack bond is used, the minimum horizontal reinforcement ratio shall be
0.0015bt. If open-end units are used and grouted solid, the minimum horizontal reinforcement ratio shall
be 0.0007bt.
4.8.5.4 Minimum Dimension

i) Bearing Walls : The nominal thickness of reinforced masonry bearing walls shall be not less than
150 mm except that nominal 100 mm thick load bearing reinforced hollow clay unit masonry walls may
be used, provided net area unit strength exceeds 55 N/mm2, units are laid in running bond, bar sizes do
not exceed 12 mm with no more than two bars or one splice in a cell, and joints are flush cut, concave or a
protruding V section.
ii) Columns : The least nominal dimension of a reinforced masonry column shall be 375 mm except that if the
allowable stresses are reduced to 50 per cent of the values given in Sec 4.3, the minimum nominal
dimension shall be 250 mm . .
4.8.5.5 Shear Wall

i) When calculating shear or diagonal tension stresses, shear walls which resist seismic forces shall be
designed to resist 1.5 times the forces specified in Chapter 2, Loads.
ii) The portion of the reinforcement required to resist shear shall be uniformly distributed and shall be joint
reinforcing , deformed bars, or a combination thereof. The maximum sp acing of reinforcement in each
direction sball be not less than the smaller of one-half the length or height of the element or more than
1.20 m.
Joint reinforcement used in exterior walls and considered in the determination of the shear strength of the
member shall conform to the requirement "Joint Reinforcement for Masonry" (UBC Standard No. 24-15) or
"Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement", (ASTM, A82).
Reinforcement required to resist in-J>lane shear shall be terminated with a standard hook or with an
extension of proper embedment length beyond the reinforcing at the end of the wall section. The hook or
extension may lie turned up, down or horizontally. Provisions shall be made not to obstruct grout
placement. Wall reinforcement terminating in columns or beams shall be fully anchored into these
elements.
·
iii) Multi-wythe grouted masonry shear walls shall be designed with consideration of the adhesion bond
strength between the grout and masonry units. When bond strengths are not known from previous tests,
the bond strength shall be determined by test.
4:8.5.6 Hook : The standard hook for tie anchorage shall have a minimum turn of 135 degrees plus an
extension of at least 6 bar diameters, but not less than 100 mm at the free end of the bar. Where the ties are
placed in the horizontal bed joints, the hook shall consist of a 90 degree bend having a radius of not less than
4 tie diameters plus an extension .of 32 tie diameters.
4.8.5.7 Mortar Joints Between Masonry and Concrete : Concrete abutting structural masonry such as at
starter courses or at wall intersections not designed as true separation joints shall be roughened to a full
amplitude of 1.5 mm and shall be bonded to the masonry as per the requirements of this section as if it were
masonry.
4.8.6 Additional Requirements

4.8.6.1Opening in Bearing Walls
a) Tops of all openings in a storey shall preferably be at the same level so that a continuous band could be
provided over them, including the lintels throughout the building.
b) The total width of the openings shall not be more than half of the length of the walls between the adjacent
cross walls, except as provided in (f) below.

Part 6
Structural Design
c) The opening shall preferably be located away from the comer by a clear distance equal to at least one
eighili of the height of the opening for Seismic Zone 2 and one-fourth of the height for Seismic Zone 3.
d) The horizontal distance between two openings shall not be less than one-fourth of the height of the
shorter opening for Seismic Zone 2 and one-half of the height for Seismic Zone 3.
e) The vertical distance between openings one above the other shall be not less than 600 mm.
f) Where openings do not comply with the requirements of (b) and (c) above, they shall be strengthened in
accordance with Sec 4.8.6.5.
g) If a window or ventilator is to be projected out, the projection shall be in reinforced masonry or concrete
and well anchored.
h) If an opening is tall say, for the full height of wall, dividing the wall into two portions, these portions
shall be reinforced with horizontal reinforcement of 6 mm diameter bars at not more than 600 mm
intervals, one on inner and one on outer face, properly tied to vertical steel at jambs and comers or
junctions of walls where used.
j) The use of arches to span over the openings is a source of weakness and shall be avoided unless steel ties
are provided. ·
4.8.6.2 Strengthening Arrangements : All masonry buildings shall be strengthened by the methods
Table 6.4.15
Strengthening of Masonry Buildings for Earthquake
Seismic Zones No. ot Strengthening Arrangements to be Provided.

Storey
1 Up to4 a) Masonry mortar shall not be leaner than M3
2 Up to 2 wi�h a) Masonry mortar shall not be leaner than M3

pitched roof b) By lintel and roof band (Sec4.8.6.3)
c) By vertical reinforcement at comers and junctions of
walls (Sec 4.8.6.4)
d) Bracing in plan at tie level for pitched roof*
3 to4 a) Masonry mortar shall not be leaner than M3

b) By lintel and roof band (Sec 4.8.6.3)
c) By vertical reinforcement at comers and junctions of
walls (Sec 4.8.6.4)
d) Vertical reinforcement at jambs of openings
(Sec 4.8.6.5)
e) Bracing in plan at tie level for pitched roof*
3 Up to4 a) Masonry mortar shall not be leaner than M3

b) By lintel and roof band (Sec 4.8.6.3)
c) Bt vertical reinforcement at corners and junctions
o walls (Sec 4.8.6.4)
d) Vertical reinforcement at jambs of openings
(Sec 4.8.6.5)
e) Bracing in plan at tie level for pitched roof*
..
At tie level all the trusses· and the gable end shall be provided with diagonal bracing in plan so as to
transmit the lateral shear due to earthquake force to the gable walls acting as shear walls at the ends.
4.8.6.3 Bands : Roof band need not be provided underneath reinforced concrete or brickwork slabs resting
on bearing walls, provided the slabs are continuous over parts between crumple sections, if any, and cover
the width of end walls fully.
The band shall be made of reinforced concrete with j; not less than 20 N/mm2 or reinforced brickwork in
cement mortar not leaner than 1: 4. The bands shall be to the full width of the wall and not less than 75 mm in
depth and shall be reinforced as indicated in Table 6.4.16. In case of reinforced brickwork, the thickness of
joints containing steel bars shall be increased so as to have a minimum mortar cover of 6 mm around the bar.
In bands of reinforced brickwork, the area of steel provided shall be equal to that specified above for
reinforced concrete bands.
6-116
·chapter 4
Masonry Structures
Table 6.4.16
Band Reinforcement
Reinforcement
Seismic Zones Plain Mild Steel Bars stren h
Hilt ra Links
De armed ars
2 2 - 12 rnrn cj>, one on each 2 -10 rnrn cj>, one on each face of 6 rnrn dia, 150
rnm c/c
face of the wall with the wall with suitable cover
suitable cover
3 2 -16 oun cj>, one on each 2 - 12 mm <j>, one on each face 6 rnrn dia, 150
rnm c/c
face of the wall with of the wall with suitable cover
suitable cover
4.8.6.4 Strengthening of Comer and Junctions :Vertical steel at corners and junctions of walls which
are Ufl to one and a half bricks thick shall be provided either with mild steel or high strength deformed bars as
specified in Table 6.4.17. For thicker walls, reinforcement shall be increased proportionately. The
reinforcement shall be properly embedded in the plinth masonry of foundations and roof slab or roof band so
as to develop its tensile strength in bond and passing through the lintel bands in all storeys. Bars in different
storeys may be welded or suitably lapped.
a) Typical details of vertical steel in brickwork and hollow block at comers, T-junctions and jambs of
opening are shown in Fig 6.4.1 and Fig 6.4.2.
b) Details of vertical reinforcement given in Table 6.4.17 are applicable to brick masonry and hollow block
masonry.
Table 6.4.17
Vertical Reinforcement for Brick and Hollow Block Masonry
Diameter of Single Bar Diameter of Single Bar

No. of Storeys or Equivalent Area of Plain or Equivalent Area of High
Storeys Mild Steel Bar to be Provided Strength Deformed Bar to be
Provided
Zone2 Zone3 Zone2 Z �3
(mm) (rrm) (rrm)
1 - nil 12 nil 10
2 Top nil 12 nil 10

Bottom nil 16 nil 12
3 Top 12 12 10 10
Middle 12 16 10 12
Bottom 16 16 12 12
4 Top 12 12 10 10
Third 12 16 10 12
Second 16 20 12 16
Bottom 16 25 12 20
4.8.6.5 Strengthening of Jambs of Openings: Openin�s in bearing walls shall be strengthened, where
necessary, by providing reinforced concrete members or reinforcing the brickwork aro1,111d them as shown in
Fig 6.4.3.
4.8.6.6 Walls Adjoining Structural Framing : Where walls a re dependent on the structural frame for
lateral support they shall be anchored to the structural members with metal ties or keyed to the structural
members. Horizontal ties shall consist of 6 rnrn diameter U-bars spaced at a maximum of 450 rnrn on centre and
embedded at least 250 rnm into the masonry and properly tied to the vertical steel of the same member.
4.9 PROVISIONS FOR HIGH WIND REGIONS
4.9.1 General
The provisions of this section shall apply to masonry structures located at regions where the basic wind
speea is greater than 200 km/h.
4.92 Materials
Materials for masonry structures shall generally comply with the provisions of Part 5; however, there are
some special requirements for masonry construction in high wind regions, which are given below :

Part 6
Structural Design
1.5
P--1
I I
11=12
_______
11::j2
_______
11'-12 -------
112
Reinforcement +-------
J I I I I t.q, I I � 1 I I I I
111ZI11ZI11ZI11ZI112pj11211121112pj11ZI112111ZI11ZI11ZI
First Layer
1.5
P--1
I I
�
f---
112
112
- 1---
112
Reinforcement 112 - f---
/ Reinforcement
11�---
112
!��I I I r¥ I I I
11 :._
"'
1/
11
f-- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
111ZI112111ZI1/ZI112111ZI11ZI11ZI11211121112111ZI11ZI11�1
Second Layer Second Layer
Corner Junction Details for One Brick Wall Junction Details for One and a Half Brick Wall
1.5
f 11 1
First Layer
I I I I I I I I I I I
111�1112111�1112111�j1;21112111�111�111ZI Second Layer
Jamb Details ior One Brick Wall
First Layer
1.5
I I �,._..., I I I I I I I
111z111z1;;rfP12111211121112111z111�111�1
Second Layer Second Layer

Corner Junction Details for One and a Half Brick Wall Jamb Details for One and a Half Brick Wall
Fig. 6.4.1 Typical Details of Vertical Reinforcement in Brick Masonry
6-118
Chapter 4
Masonry Structures
0
0
Cement Concrete Vertical Steel

Vertical Steel Cement Concrete
Jamb Details for 200 mm Thick Wall Corner Details for 200 mm Thick Wall
Fig. 6.4.2 Typical Details of Vertical Reinforcement in Hollow Block Masonry.
Parapet -
�
One 1 2 mm t1 min.
Roof-
�� I -� at Bond Beam
Horizo ntal Reinforcement:
/ / One 1 2 mm 01. min. or Equiv.

at 3.00 m c/c max. for Seismic
Zone 2 (at 1.2 m c/c max. for
Seismi c Zone 3)
Lintel Band- -
------::-1_ 40d Typ.
"'x
X
E
B><
E
Opening - -
�
I-- - - Jamb R einforcement:
One 12 mm t1 or Equiv., min.
F Iocr - - � - - 40d or 600 mm min., Typ.
-----,
.
L - - One 12 mm t1 min., at Bond Beam
Vertica I Reinforcement:
Min. 0 ne 12 mm t1 or Equiv. at
1.2 m c/c max., Typ.
Lintel Band-
-
"'x
E l -
Lintel Reinforcement:
(may be used as part of required
E
X
horizontal reinforcement)
>
It)
...;
P.L.
� G.L.
/.«\Y.«\' .v
- .. ... .. .
� .. J
Foolin,
g __/ ""--- One 12 mm Ill honzontal bar m
footing, Minimum
Fig. 6.4.3 Minimum Reinforcements in Walls and arround Openings for Seismic Zones 2 and 3.

Part 6
Structural Design
a) Burnt clay bricks shall have a compressive strength not less that 15 N/mm2,
b) Grout shall have a minimum compressive strength of 12.5 N/mm2,
c) Mortar for exterior walls and interior shear walls shall be type M1 or M2,
d) Unbumt clay masonry units shall not be used.
4.9.3 Construction Requirements · . .
Masonry construction shall comply with the provisions of Sec 4.10.
4.9.4 Foundation
Footings shall have a thickness of not less than 375 mm and shall be extended 450 mm below the undisturbed
ground surface. Foundation stem wall shall have the same width and reinforcement as the wall it supports.
4.9.5 Drainage
Walls retaining more than 1 m of earth and enclosing interior spaces or floors below grade shall have
minimum 100 mm diameter footing drain. A slope of 1:50 away from the building shall be provided around the
building.
4.9.6 Wall Construction

4.9.6.1 Minimum thickness of different types of wall shall be as given in Table 6.4.18.
Table 6.4.18
Minimum thickness of Walls in High Wind Region
Type of Wall Minimum Thickness

(mm)
Unreinforced grouted brick wall 2 50
Reinforced exterior bearing wall 200
Unreinforced hollow and solid masonry wall 200
Interior nonbearing_ wall 150
4.9.6.2 All walls shall be laterally supported at the top and bottom. The maximum unsupported height of
bearing walls or other masonry walls shall be 3.5 m. Gable end walls may be 4.5 m high at their peak.
4.9.6.3 The span of lintels over openings shall not exceed 3.5 m. All lintels shall be reinforced and the
reinforcement bars shall extend not less than 600 mm beyond the edge of opening and into lintel supports.
4.9.6.4 Walls shall be adequately reinforced.
4.9.6.5 Anchors between walls and floors or roofs shall be embedded in grouted cells or cavities and shall
conform to Sec 4.9.7 below.
4.9.7 Floor and Roof Systems

Floors and roofs of all masonry structures shall be adequately anchored with the wall it supports to resist
lateral and uplift forces due to wind specified in Sec 2.4 of this Part.
4.9.8 Lateral Force Resistance

4.9.8.1 Strapping, approved framin� anchors and mechanical fasteners, bond beams and vertical
reinforcement shall be installed to provxde a continuous tie from the roof to foundation system as shown in
Fig 6.4.4. In addition, roof and floor systems, masonry shear walls, or masonry or wood cross walls shall be
provided for lateral stability.
4.9.8.2 Floor and roof diaphragms shall be properly connected to masonry walls. Gable and sloped roof
members not supported at the ridge shall be tied by the ceiling joist or equivalent lateral ties located as close
to where the roof members bear on the wall as practically possible and not at more than 1.2 m on centres.
Collar ties shall not be used for these lateral ties.
4.9.8.3 Masonry walls shall be provided around all sides of floor and roof systems in accordance with
Fig 6.4.5. The cumulative length of exterior masonry walls along each side of the floor or roof systems shall be
at least 20 per cent of the parallel dimension. Required elements shall be without openings and shall not be
less that 1.25 m in width.
Interior cross walls at right angles to bearing walls shall be provided when the length of the building
perpendicular to the span of the floor of roof framing exceeds twxce the distance between shear walls or 10 m,
whxchever is greater.
4.9.8.4 When required interior cross wall shall be at least 1.8 m long and reinforced with 2 mm wire joint
reinforcement spaced not more than 400 mm on centre.
6-120
Chapter 4
Masonry Stru c tu r e s
Sheet Metal Anchor Straps
Typical Hollow-Masonary Unit or Brick Wall Reinforcing

or
Minimum 2-12 mm II Bar
at Support Location for Unrelnforced Masonry
R.C.C. Floor
. .
12 mm II Bar Continuous
Fig. 6.4.4 Continuous Tie from Roof to Foundation of Masonry Structure
4.10 CONSTRUCTION
4.10.1 General
Masonry shall be constructed according to the provisions of this section.
4.10.2 Storage and Preparation of Construction Materials

Storage, handling and preparation at the site shall conform to the following:
a) Masonry materials shall be stored in such a way that at the time of use the materials are clean and
structurally suitable for the intended use.
b) All metal reinforcement shall be free from loose rust and other coatings that would inhibit reinforcing
bond.
c) Burnt clay units shall have a rate of absorption per minute not exceeding one litre per square metre at (,le
time of laying. In the absorption test the surface of the unit shall be held 3 mm below the surface of the
water.
d) Burnt clay units shall be thoroughly wetted before placing. Concrete masonry units shall not be wetted
unless otherwise approved.

Part 6
Structural Design
Add Cross Walls in This

Direction When L Exceeds
b Distance Between
=
20 m. No Module Shall
Bearing Walls (10 m maximum)
Exceed 10X20 m
V.i"J�-------+- Minimum Cross Shear

Wall Length 40% "L"
---- In All Cases the Minimum

Wall Segment for Resisting
Lateral Loads is 1.25 m
L = Length Between Shear Walls
Fig. 6.4.5 Masonry Walls Required in High Wind Regions
e) Materials shall be stored in such a manner that deterioration or intrusion of foreign materials is
prevented and at the time of mixing the material conforms to the applicable requirements.
f) The method of measuring materials for mortar and grout shall be such that proportions of the m.1terials
can be easily controlled.
g) Mortar or �rout mixed at the job site shall be mixed for a period of time not less than 3 minutes or more
than 10 mmutes in a mechanical mixer with the amount of water required to provide the desired
workability. Hand mixing of small amounts of mortar is �ermitted. Mortar may be retempered. Mortar or
grout which has hardened or stiffened due to hydration of the cement shall not be used, but under no case
shall mortar be used two and one-half hours, nor grout used one and one-half hours, after the initial ·
mixing water has been added to the dry ingredients at the job site.
4.10.3 Placing Masonry Units

a) The mortar shall be sufficiently plastic and units shall be placed with sufficient pressure to extrude
mortar from the joint and produce a tight joint. Deep furrowing which produces voids shall not be used.
The initial bed joint thickness shall not be less than 5 mm or more than 25 mm; subsequent bed joints shall
be not less than 5 mm or more than 15 mm in thickness.
b) All surfaces in contact with mortar or grout shall be clean and free of deleterious materials.
c) Solid masonry units shall have full head and bed joints.
d) All head and bed joints shall be filled solidly with mortar for a distance from the face of the unit not less
than the thickness of the shell.
Head joints of open-end units with beveled ends need not be mortared. The beveled ends shall form a
grout key which permits grout within 16 mm of the face of the unit. The units shall be tightly butted to
prevent Ieakage oi grout.
4.10.4 Verticality and Alignment

All masonry shall be built true and plumb within the tolerances prescribed below. Care shall be taken to
keep the perpends properly aligned.
a) Deviation from vertical within a storey shall not exceed 6 mm per 3m height.
b) Deviation in verticality in total height of any wall of a building more than one storey in height shall not
exceed 12 nun.
c) Deviation from position shown on plan of any brickwork shall not exceed 12 mm .
d) Relative displacement between load bearing walls in adjacent storeys intended to be in vertical alignment
shall not exceed 6 mm .
6-122
Chapter 4
Masonry Structures
e) Deviation of bed joint from horizontal in a length of 12 m shall not exceed 6 mm subject to a maximum
deviation of 12 mm .
f) Deviation from the specified thickness of bed joints, cross joints and perpends shall not exceed one-fifth
of the specified thickness. .
4.10 .5 Reinforcement Placing

Reinforcing details shall conform to the requirements of Sec 4.6.6. Metal reinforcement shall be located in
accordance with the plans �nd specifications. Reinforcement shall be secured against displacement prior to
grouting by wire pos1tioners or other suitable devices at intervals not exceeding 20 bar diameters.
Tolerances for the placement of steel in walls and flexural elements shall be±12mm ford� 200 mm, ± 25 mm
for 200 mm �d� 600 mm and± 30 mm ford> 600 mm. Tolerance for longitudinal location of reinforcement
shall be± 50 mm .
4.10.6 Grouted Masonry ·
Grouted masonry shall be constructed in such a manner that all elements act together as a structural element.
Space to be filled with grout shall be clean and shall not contain any f<>reign materials. Grout materials and
water content shall be controlled to provide adequate workability and shall be mixed thoroughly. The
grouting of any section of wall shall be completed in one day with no interruptions greater than one hour.
Size and height limitations of the grout space or cell shall not be less than those shown in Table 6 .4.19.
Higher grout pours or smaller cavity widths or cell size than shown in Table 6.4.19 may be used when
approved, if it can be demonstrated that grout spaces are properly filled. ·
Cleanouts are required for all grout pours over 1.5 m in height. When required, cleanouts shall be provided
in the bottom course at every vertical bar but shall not be spaced more than 800 mm on centre for solidly
grouted masonry. When cleanouts are required, they shall be sealed after inspection and before grouting.
When cleanouts are not provided, special provisions must be made to keep the bottom and sides of the grout
spaces, as well as the minimum total clear area as required by Table 6.4.19, clean and clear prior to grouting.
Table 6.4.19
Grouting Limitations
Grout pour Minimum Dimensions of the Total Clear Areas

Grout Type Maximum within Grout Spaces and Cells
Height (m)
Multi-wythe Masonry Hollow Unit Masonry
tom) (mm)
Fine 0 .30 20 40 x50
Fine 1 .50 40 40 x50
Fine 2 .40 40 40 x75
Fine 3 .65 40 45x75
Fine 7.30 50 75x75
Coarse 0 .30 40 40 x75

Coarse 1.50 50 60 x75
Coarse 2 .40 50 75x75
Coarse 3.65 60 75x75
Coarse 7.30 75 75x10 0
4.10.7 Chases, Recesses and Holes

a) Chases, recesses and holes may b e permitted i n masonry provided either they are considered in the
structural desigx:t or they are not cut into walls made of hollow or perforated units, or vertical chases
are planned instead of horizontal chases.
b) Depth of vertical and horizontal chases in load bearing walls shall not exceed one-third and one-sixth
of tbe wall thickness respectively.
c) Vertical chases shall not be closer than 2m in any stretch of wall and shall not be located within 350
mm of an opening or within 230 mm of a cross wall that serves as stiffening wall for stability. Width of
a vertical di.ase shall not exceed the thickness of wall in which it occurs.
d) Horizontal chases shall be located in the upper or lower middle third height of wall at a distance not
less than 600 mm from lateral support. No norizontal chase shall exceed one metre in length and there
shall not be more than 2 chases in any one wall. Horizontal chases shall have minimum mutual
separation distance of 500 mm Sum of lengths of all chases and recesses in any horizontal plane shall not
.
exceed one-fourth the length of the wall.
·Bangladesh National Building Code 6-123

Part 6
Structural Design
e) Lintel shall not be used to support masonry directly above a recess or a hole wider than 300 mm. No
lintel however, is necessary m case of a circular recess or hole exceeding 300 mm in diameter provided
upper half of the recess or hole is built as a semi-circular arch of adequate thickness and there is
adequate length of masonry on the sides of openings to resist the horizontal thrust.
t) Recesses and holes in masonry shall be kept at the time of construction so as to avoid subsequent cutting.
If cutting is necessary, it shall be done using sharp tools without causing heavy impact and damage to the
surrounding areas.
.
No chase, recess or hole shall be provided in half-brick load bearing wall, excepting the minimum number
of holes needed for scaffolding.
Related Appendix
6-124
CHAPTER�
Concrete Material
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Scope .
• .
The r,rovisions of this chapter shall apply to the design of reinforced and prestressed concrete structures
spec1fied in chapters 6, 7, 8 and 9 and snail be applicable for normal weight aggregate only unless otherwise
specified.
5.1.2 Notation
=
creep coefficient
modulus of elasticity of concrete
modulus of elasticity of reinforcement
= modulus of elasticity of concrete at the age of loading t
specified compressive strength of concrete
required average compressive strength of concrete used as the basis for selection of concrete
proportions
= speCified yield strength of reinforcement
=
coefficient of shrinkage
5 standard deviation
unit weight of concrete
creep strain in concrete
=
shrinkage of plain concrete
area of steel relative to that of the concrete.
5.2 CONSTITUENTS OF CONCRETE
5.2.1 Cement
5.2.1.1 Cement shall conform to one of the following specifications :
a) "Portland Cement (Ordinary and Rapid Hardening)" (BDS 232)
Part 6 6-125
Structural Design
Part 6
Structural Design
b) "Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement- Type A" (BDS 612)
c) "Specification for Portland Cement" (ASTM C150)
d) "Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cement" (ASTM C595), excluding Types S and SA
5.2.1.2 Cement used in the construction shall be the same as that used in the concrete mix design.
5.2.2 Aggregates
5.2.2.1 Concrete ag p regates shall conform to the standards "Coarse and Fine Aggregates from Natural
Sources for Concrete' (BDS 243 : 1963); "Specification for Concrete Aggregates" (ASTM C33).
5.2.2.2 Maximwn nominal size of coarse aggregate shall be the minimwn of the following :
a) ! the narrowest dimension between sides of forms,

b) i the depth of slabs,
c) t the minimwn clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars, or bundles of bars, or prestressing
tendons or ducts.
The above limitations may be relaxed if, in the judgment of the engineer, workability and methods of
consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids.
·
5.2.2.3 Coarse aggregate made from Grade A bricks as specified in BDS 208 "Specification for Common
Building Clay Bricks" may be used, except in applications where the ambient environmental conditions may
impair the performance of concrete made of such aggregates.
5.2.3 Water
5.2.3.1 Water used in mixing cm'lcrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis,
salts, organic materials, or other substances that may be harmful to concrete or reinforcement.
5.2.3.2 For concrete wherein aluminiwn members will be embedded, mixing water shall not contain harmful
amounts of chloride ion as indicated in Sec 5.5.3.
5.2.3.3 Nonpotable water shall not be used in concrete except the following conditions:
a) Selection of concrete proportions shall be based on concrete mixes using water from the same source.
b) r
Nonpotable water is permitted onl if specified comparative mortar test cubes made with nonpotable
water produce at least 90 per cent o the strength achieved with potable water.
5.2.4 Admixtures
5.2.4.1 Prior approval of the engineer shall be required for the use of admixtures in concrete. All admixtures
shall conform to the requirements of this section and Sec 2.4.5 of Part 5.
5.2.4.2 Admixture used in the work shall be the same as that used in the concrete mix design.
5.2.4.3 Admixtures containing chloride other than impurities from admixture ingredients shall not be used in
concrete containing embedded aluminiwn, or in concrete cast against permanent galvanized metal forms (see
Sec 5.5.1.2 and 5.5.2.1).
5.2.4.4 Air entraining admixtures, if used in concrete, shall conform to "Specification for Air entraining
Admixtures for Concrete" (ASTM C260).
5.2.4.5 Water reducing admixtures, retarding admixtures, accelerating admixtures, water reducing and
retarding admixtures, and water reducing and acceleratinp admixtures, if used in concrete, shall conform to
"Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete' (ASTM C494) or "Specification for Chemical
Admixtures for use in Producing Flowing Concrete" (ASTM C1017).
5.2.4.6 Fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures shall conform to "Specification for Fly Ash and Raw
or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete " (ASTM C618).
5.2.4.7 Ground granulated blast-furnace slag used as an admixture shall conform to "Specification for
Ground Iron Blast Furnace Slag for use in Concrete and Mortar" (ASTM C989). .
6-126
Chapter 5
Concrete Material
5.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
5.3.1 General
5.3.1.1 Steel reinforcement for concrete shall conform to the provisions of this section and those of
Sec 2.4.6 of Part 5.
5.3.1.2 Modulus of elasticity E5 for reinforcement shall be taken as 200 kN/mm2•
5.3.1.3 Reinforcing bars to be welded shall be indicated on the drawings and welding procedure to be used
shall be specified. Reinforcing bars otherwise conforming to ASTM standards, except ASTM A706, shall also
J'OSsess material properties necessary to conform to welding procedures specified in "Structural Welding
Code - Reinforcing Steel" (AWS Dl.4) of the American Welding Society.
5.3.2 Deformed Reinforcement

5.3.2.1 Deformed reinforcing bars shall conform to one of the following specifications:
a ) "Specification for Steel Bars and Wires for the Reinforcement o f Concrete" (BDS 1313),
b) "Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM A615),
c) "Specification for Rail Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" Including
Supplementary Requirements S1 (ASTM A616 including S1),
d) "Specification for Axle Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM A617),
e) "Specification for Low Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM A706),
f) "Specification for Cold Worked Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete" (BS 4461).
5.3.2.2 Deformed reinforcing bars with a specified yield strength f exceeding 410 N/mm2 shall be
permitted, provided f y shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of o.3s
percent and the bars otherwise
conform to one of the ASTM specifications listed in Sec 5.3.2.1 (Also see Sec 6.1.2.5).
5.3.2.3 Galvanized reinforcing bars shall comply with "Specification for Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement " (ASTM A767). Epoxy coated reinforcing bars shall comply with
"Specifications for Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars (ASTM A775). Galvanized or epoxy coated
reinforcement shall also conform to one of the standards listed in Sec 5.3.2.1 above.
5.3.3 Plain Reinforcement

5.3.3.1 Plain bars shall conform to one of the specifications listed in Section 5.3.2.1 (a), (b), (c) or (d).
5.3.3.2 Plain wire shall conform to "Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM
A82) except that for wire with a specified yield strength /yexceeding 410 N/mm2, / y shall be the stress
corresponding to a strain of 0.0035.
5.3.3.3 Plain bars and wire may be used as ties, stirrups and spirals for all structural members and for all
reinforcement in structures up to 4-storey high.
5.3.4 Structural Steel, Steel Pipe or Tubing

5.3.4.1 Structural steel used with reinforcing bars in composite compression members meeting the
requirements of Sec 6.3.10.8 or 6.3.10.9 shall conform to one of tne following specifications:
a) "Specification for Structural Steel" (ASTM A36),
b) "Specification for High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel"(ASTM A242),
c) "Specification for High Strength Low Alloy Structural Manganese Vanadium Steel" (ASTM A441),
d) "Specification for High Strength Low Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality" (ASTM
A572),
e) "Specification of High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi (345 Mpa) Minimum Yield Point
to 4 in (100 mm) Thick" (ASTM A588).
5.3.4.2 Steel piJ?e or tubing for composite compression members composed of a steel encased concrete core
meeting the reqwrements of Sec 6.3.10.7 shall coriform to one of the following specifications:
a) Grade B of "Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless"
(ASTM A53).
b) "Specification for Cold Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and
Sl:iapes" (ASTM ASOO).

Part 6
Structural Design
c) "Specification for Hot Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing " (ASTM A501).
5.4 WORKABILITY OF CONCRETE
Concrete mix proportions shall be such that the concrete is of adequate workability and can properly be
compacted. Suggested ranges of values of workability of concrete for some placing conditions, are given in
Table 6.5.1.
Table 6.5.1
Suggested Workability of Concrete for Various Placing Conditions
Placin� Conditions De�ree of Workability Values of Workability
Concreting of thin sections with Very low 20-10 seconds Vee-Bee time
vibration or
0.75-0.80 compacting factor
�
Concreting of li htly reinforced Low 10-5 seconds Vee-Bee time
sections with vi ration or
0.80-0.85 compacting factor
Concreting of lightly reinforced Medium 5-2 seconds Vee-Bee time

sections without vibration or or
heavily reinforced section with 0.85-0.92 compacting factor
vibration or
25-75 mm slump for 20• m m aggregate
Concreting of heavily rein- High Above 0.92 compacting factor

forced sections w i t hout or
vibration 75-125 mm slump for 20• mm aggregate
• For smaller aggregates the values will be lower
5.5 DURABILITY OF CONCRETE
5.5.1 Special Exposures

5.5.1.1 For concrete intended to have low permeability when exposed to water, the water cement ratio shall
not exceed 0.50.
5.5.1.2 For corrosion protection of reinforced concrete exposed to brackish water, sea water or spray from
these sources, the water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.4.
If minimum concrete cover required by Sec 8.1.8 is increased by 12 mm, water cement ratio may be increased
to 0.45.
5.5.1.3 The water cement ratio required in Sec 5.5.1.1 and 5.5.1.2 above and Table 6.5.2 shall be calculated
using the weight of cement meeting the requirements of ASTM C150 or C595, plus the weight of fly ash or
pozzolan satisfying ASTM C618 and/or slag satisfying ASTM C989, if any.
5.5.2 Sulphate Exposures

5.5.2.1 Concrete to be exposed to sulphate containing solutions or soils shall conform to the requirements of
Table 6.5.2 or be made witn a cement tnat provides sulphate resistance with the maximum water cement ratio
provided in Table 6.5.2.
5.5.2.2 Calcium chloride shall not be used as an admixture in concrete exposed to severe or very severe
sulphate containing solutions, as defined in Table 6.5.2.
5.5.3 Corrosion of Reinforcement

5.5.3.1 For corrosion protection, maximum water soluble chloride ion concentrations in hardened concrete
at ages from 28 to 42 days contributed from the ingredients including water, aggregates, 'cementitious
materials, and admixtures, shall not exceed the limits of Table 6.5.3. When testing is performed to determine
water soluble chloride ion content, test procedure shall conform to AASHTO T260, "Methods of Sampling
and Testing for Total Chloride Ion in Concrete and Concrete Raw Materials".
5.5.3.2 When reinforced concrete will be exposed to brackish water, sea water, or spray from these
sources, requirements of Sec 5.5.1.1 and 5.5.1.2 for water cement ratio, or concrete strength and minimum
cover requirements of Sec 8.1.8 shall be satisfied.
5.5.4 Minimum Concrete Strength

Minimum concrete strength for structural use of reinforced concrete shall be 20 N/mm2• However, for
buildings up to 4 storey, the minimum concrete strength may be relaxed to 17 N/mm2•
6-128
Chapter 5
Concrete Material
Table 6.5.2
Requirements for Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete Exposed to
Sulphate Containing Solutions
Sulphate Water Soluble Sulphate Maximum

Exposure Sulphate (S04) (S04) Cement Type1 Water Cement
in Soil, per cent in Water, Ratio, by Weight
by Weight (ppm)
Negligible 0.00-0.10 0-150
Moderate2 0.10-0.20 150 -1500 II, IP(MS), IS (MS), 0.5 0

P (MS), I(PM)(MS)
I(SM)(MS)
Severe 0.20-2.00 1500 -10,000 v 0.45
Very Over 2.00 Over 10,000 Vplus 0.45

severe pozzolan3
Note: 1 For types of cement see ASlM C150 and C595.

2 Sea water
3 Pozzolan that has been determined by test or service record to improve sulphate resistance when
used in concrete containing Type V cement.
Table 6.5.3
Maximum Chloride Ion Content for Corrosion Protection
Maximum Water Soluble Chloride Ion (Cl-) in

Type of Member Concrete, Per Cent by Weight of Cement
Prestressed concrete 0.06

Reinforced concrete exposed to chloride in 0.15
service
Reinforced concrete that will be dry or protected 1.00
from moisture in service
Other reinforced concrete construction 0.30
5.6 CONCRETE MIX PROPORTION
5.6.1 General
5.6.1.1 ProP.ortions of materials for concrete shall be such that:
a) Workability and consistency are achieved for proper placement into forms and around reinforcement,
without segregation or excessive bleeding;
b) Resistance to special exposures to meet the durability requirements of Sec 5.5 are provided; and
c) Conformance with strength test requirements of Sec 5.12 is ensured.
5.6.1.2 Where different materials are to be used for different portions of the proposed work, each
combination shall be evaluated.
5.6.1.3 Concrete pro ortions, including water cement ratio, shall be established on the basis of field
r
experience and/or tria mixtures with materials to be employed (Sec 5.6.2) except as permitted in Sec 5.6.3 or
required by Sec 5.5.
5.6.2 Proportioning Concrete Mix on the Basis of Field Experience and/or Trial Mixtures
5.6.2.1 Standard Deviation
a) A standard deviation shall be established where test records are available in a concrete production
facility. Test records from which a standard deviation is calculated shall meet the following
requirements :
i) These shall represent materials, quality control procedures, and conditions similar to those
expected for tile proposed work. Deviations in materials and proportions for the proposed work
shall be more restricted than those within the test records.

Part 6
Structural Design
ii) Test records shall represent concrete produced to meet a specified strength f� within 7 N/mm2of
that specified for the proposed work.
iii) The record shall consist of at least 30 consecutive tests or two groups of consecutive tests totaling
at least 30 tests as defined in Sec 5.12.2.4 except as provided in (b) oelow.
b) Where a concrete production facility does not have test records meeting the requirements of (a) above but
does have a record based on 15 to 29 consecutive tests, a standard deviation shall be established as the
product of the calculated standard deviation and the modification factor specified in Table 6.5.4.
However, the test records shall meet the requirements (i) and (ii) of (a) above and represent only a single
record of consecutive tests that span a period of not less than 45 calendar days.
Table 6.5.4
Modification Factor for Standard Deviation when Less Than 30 Tests are Available
No. of Tests* Modification Factor for Standard Deviation **
Less than 15 see Sec 5.6.2.2(b)

15 1.16
20 1.08
25 1.03
30 or more 1.00
*
Interpolate for intermediate numbers of tests
**
Modified standard deviation to be used to determine the required average strength /�,from 5.6.2.2(a).
5.6.2.2 Required Average Strength

a) Required average compressive strength f� used as the basis for selection of concrete proportions shall
be the larger of the values given by Eq (5.6.1) and (5.6.2) using a standard deviation calculated in
accordance with Sec 5.6.2.1(a) or 5.6.2.1(b) above.
f�r = �� + 1.34s (5.6.1)
f�r =
f� + 2.33s-3.5 (5.6.2)
b) When a concrete production facility does not have field strength test records for calculation of standard
deviation meeting the requirements of Sec 5.6.2.1(a) or 5.6.2.1(b), the required average strength f�r shall
be determined from Table 6.5.5 and documentation of the average strength shall be in accordance with the
requirements of Sec 5.6.2.3 below.
Table 6.5.5
Required Average Compressive Strength when Data are not Available
to Establish a Standard Deviation
Specified Compressive Strength!� Required Average Compressive
N/mm2 Strength, f�r

N/mm2
Less than 20 !�+ 7.0
20 to 35 !� + 8.5
Over 35 !�+ 10.0
5.6.2.3 Documentation of Average Strength: Documentation shall be prepared to demonstrate that the
proposed concrete proportions will produce an average compressive strength equal to or greater than the
required average compressive strength (Sec 5.6.2.2). Such documentation shall consist of one or more field
strength test records or trial mixtures.
a) When test records are used to demonstrate that proposed concrete proportions will produce the required
average strength f�r (Sec 5.6.2.2) such records shall represent materials and conditions similar to those
expected. Deviations in materials, conditions and proportions within the test records shall not have been
more restricted than those for proposed work. For the purpose of documenting average strength potential,
test records consisting of less than 30 but not less than 10 consecutive tests are acceptable provided the
test records encompass a period of time not less than 45 days. Required concrete proportions shall be
permitted to be established by interpolation between the strengths and proportions of two or more test
records each of which meets other requirements of this section.
·
6-130
Chapter 5
Concrete Material
b) When an acceptable record of field test results is not available, concrete proportions may be established
based on trial mixtures meeting the following restrictions :
i) Combination of materials shall be those for the proposed work.
ii) Trial mixtures having proportions and consistencies required for the proposed work shall be
made using at least three different water cement ratios or cement contents that will produce a
range of strengths encompassing the required average strength f�r.
iii) Trial mixtures shall be designed to produce a slump within:± 20 rnrn of the maximum permitted, and
for air entrained concrete the air content shall be within± 0.5 per cent of the maximum allowable.
iv) For each water cement ratio or cement content, at least three test cylinders for each test age shall
be made and cured in accordance with "Method of Making and Curmg Concrete Test Specimens in
the Laboratory" (ASTM C192). Cylinders shall be tested at 28 days or at test a g e d e s ignat e d for
the determination of f�.
v) From the results of cylinder tests, a curve shall be plotted showing the relationship between the
water cement ratio or cement content and the compressive strength at designated test age.
vi) Maximum water cement ratio or minimum cement content for concrete to be used in the proposed
work shall be that shown by the above curve to produce the average strength required by
Sec 5.6.2.2 unless a lower water cement ratio or higher strength is required by Sec 5.5.
5.6.3 Proportioning by Water Cement Ratio

5.6.3.1 If the data required in Sec 5.6.2 are not available, concrete proportions shall be based on water
cement ratio limits specified in Table 6.5.6 when approved by the engineer.
Table 6.5.6
Maximum Permissible Water Cement Ratios for Concrete when Strength Data
from Field Experience or Trial Mixtures are not Available
Specified Compressive
Strength*, f� Absolute Water Cement Ratio by Weight
N/mm2 Concrete other than air- Air-entrained

entrained . concrete
17 0.66 0.54
20 0.60 0.49
25 0.50 0.39
....
30 0.40
.... ....
35
•
28 day strength . With most materials, water cement ratios shown will provide average
strengths greater than that required in Sec 5.6.2.2.
2 2
••
For strengths above 30 N/mm (25 N/mm for air entrained concrete) concrete proportions
shall be established by methods of Sec 5.6.2.
5.6.3.2 Table 6.5.6 shall be used only for concrete to be made with cements meeting strength requirements for
Types I, lA, II, IIA, III, IliA, or V of "Specification for Portland Cement" (ASTM C150), or Types IS, IS-A, IS
(MS), IS-A(MS), I(SM), I(SM)-A, IP, IP-A, I(PM), I(PM)-A, IP(MS), lP-A(MS), or P of "Specification for
Blended Hydraulic Cements" (ASTM C595), and shall not be applied to concrete containmg lightweight
aggregates or admixtures other than those for entraining air.
5.6.3.3 Concrete proportioned by water cement ratio limits prescribed in Table 6.5.6 shall also conform to
special exposure requirements of Sec 5.5 and to compressive strength test criteria of Sec 5.12.
5.6.4 Average Strength Reduction

As data become available during construction, amount by which value of f� must exceed specified value of f�
may be reduced, provided:
a) 30 or more test results are available and the average of test results exceeds that required by Sec 5.6.2.2(a)
using a standard deviation calculated in accordance with Sec 5.6.2.l(a), or .

Part 6
Structural Design
b) 15 to 29 test results are available and the average of test results exceeds that required by Sec 5.6.2.2(a)
using a standard deviation calculated in accordance with Sec 5.6.2.1(b), and provided further that
special exposure requirements of Sec 5.5 are met.
5.7 PREPARATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PLACE OF DEPOSIT
Preparation before concrete placement shall include the following:
a) All equipment for mixing and transporting concrete shall be clean.
b) All debris shall be removed from spaces to be occupied by concrete.
c) Forms shall be properly cleaned and coated.
d) Masonry filler units that will be in contact with concrete shall be soaked thoroughly.
e) Reinforcement shall be thoroughly clean of deleterious coatings.
f) Water shall be removed from place of deposit before concrete is placed unless a tremie is used or unless
otherwise permitted by the engineer.
All laitance and other unsound material shall be removed before additional concrete is placed against
hardened concrete.
5.8 MIXING
5.8.1 All concrete shall be mixed thoroughly until there is a uniform distribution of materials and shall be
discharged completely before the mixer is recharged. .
5.8.2 Ready mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with the requirements of "Specification for
Ready Mixed Concrete" (ASTM C94) or "Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and
Continuous Mixing" (ASTM C685). •
5.8.3 Job mixed concrete shall be mixed in accordance with the following:
a) Mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type.
b) Mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the manufacturer.
c) Mixing shall be continued for at least 90 seconds after all materials are in the drum, unless a shorter time
is shown to be satisfactory by the mixing uniformity tests of "Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete"
(ASTM C94).
d) Materials handling, hatching, and mixing shall conform to the applicable provisions of "Specification for
Ready Mixed Concrete" (ASTM C94).
e) A detailed record shall be kept to identify:
i) number of batches produced;

ii) proportions of materials used;
iii) approximate location of final deposit in structure;
iv) time and date of mixing and placmg.
5.9 CONVEYING
5.9.1 Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods that will prevent
segregation or loss of materials.
5.9.2 Conveying equipment shall be capable of providing a supply of concrete to the place of deposit without
segregation of ingredients and without interruptions suffictent to permit loss of plasticity between successive
increments.
5.10 DEPOSITING
5.10.1 Concrete shall be deposited as near its final position as practical to avoid segregation due to rehandling or
flowing.
5.10.2 Concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily into spaces
between and around the reinforcement.
5.10.3 Concrete that has partially hardened or been contaminated by foreign materials shall not be deposited in the
structure.
6-132
Chapter 5
Concrete Material
5.10.4 Retempered concrete or concrete that has been remixed after initial set shall not be used.
5.10.5 After concreting is started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until placing of a panel or section,
as defined by its boundaries or predetermined joints, is completed ex:cept as permitted or prohibited by
Sec 5.16.4.
5.10.6 Top surfaces of vertically formed lifts shall be generally level.
5.10.7 When construction joints are required, joints shall be made in accordance with Sec 5.16.4.
5.10.8 All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means during placement and shall be thoroughly
worked around reinforcement and embedded fix:tures and into corners offorms.
5.11 CURING
5.11.1 Concrete (other than high early strength) shall be maintained above 10°C and in a moist condition for at least
the first 7 days after placement, except when cured in accordance with Sec 5.11.3.
5.11.2 High early strength concrete shall be maintained above 10°C and in a moist condition for at least the first 3
days, except when cured in accordance with Sec 5.11.3.
5.11.3 Accelerated Curi ng

5.11.3.1 Curing by high pressure steam, steam at atmospheric pressure, heat and moisture or other accepted
processes, shall be permitted to accelerate strength gain and reduce time of curing.
5.11.3.2 Accelerated curing shall provide a compressive strength of the concrete at the load stage considered,
at least equal to the required design strength at that load stage.
5.11.3.3 Curing process shall be such as to produce concrete with a durability at least equivalent to that
.(obtained for concrete cured by the method of Sec 5.11.1 or 5.11.2.
5.11.4 When required by the engineer, supplementary strength tests in accordance with Sec 5.12.4 shall be performed
to assure that curing is satisfactory.
5.12 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF CONCRETE
5.12.1 General
5.12.1.1 Concrete shall be proportioned to provide an average compressive strength as prescribed in Sec
5.6.2.2 as well as to satisfy the durability criteria of Sec 5.5. Concrete shall be produced to limit frequency of
strengths below f� to that prescribed in Sec 5.12.3.3.
5.12 1.2 Requirements off� shall be based on tests of cylinders made and tested as prescribed in Sec 5.12.3.
:
5.12.1.3 Unless otherwise specified, f� shall be based on 28 day tests. Test age for f� shall be indicated in
design drawings or specifications, if it is different from 28 days.
5.12.1.4 Splitting tensile strength tests shall not be used as a basis for field acceptance of concrete.
5.12.2 Frequency of Testing

5.12.2.1 Samples for strength tests of each class of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once
a day, nor less than once for each 60 m3 of concrete, nor less than once for each 250 m2 surface area for slabs
or walls.·
J'
5.12.2.2 On a given roject, if the total volume of concrete is such that frequency of testing required by Sec
5.12.2.1 above woul provide less than three strength tests for a given class of concrete, tests shall be made
from at least three randomly selected batches or from each batch if three or fewer batches are used.
5.12.2.3 When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 20m3, strength tests are not required
when evidence of satisfactory strength is submitted to and approved by the engineer.
5.12.2.4 A strength test result shall be the average of the strengths of two cylinders made from the same
sample of concrete and tested at 28 days or at the test age designated in accordance with Sec 5.12.1.3.
5.12.3 Laboratory Cured Specimens ·
5.12.3.1 Samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with "Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed
Concrete" (ASTM C172).

Part 6
Structural Des ign
5.12.3.2 Cylinders for strength tests shall be moulded and laboratory cured in accordance with "Practice for
Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" (ASTM C31) and tested in accordance with "Test
Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens" (ASTM C39).
5.12.3.3 Strength level of an individual class of concrete shall be considered satisfactory if both of the
following requirements are met :
a) Average of three consecutive strength tests (see Sec 5.12.2.4) equals or exceeds f�
b) No individual strength test (average of two cylinders) falls below f� by more than3.5 N/mm2•
5.12.3.4 If either of the requirements of Sec 5.12.3.3 are not met, steps shall be taken to increase the average of
the subsequent strength test results. Requirements of Sec 5.12.5 shall be satisfied if the requirement of
Sec 5.12.3.3(b) is not met.
5.1 2.4 Field Cured Specimens .

5.12.4.1 The engineer may require strength tests of cylinders cured under field conditions to check adequacy
of curing and protection of concrete in the structure.
5.12.4.2 Field cured cylinders shall be cured under field conditions in accordance with "Practice for Making
and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" (ASTM C31).
5.12.4.3 Field cured test cylinders shall be moulded at the same time and from the same samples as laboratory
cured test cylinders.
5.12.4.4 Procedures for protecting and curing concrete shall be improved when the strength of field cured
cylinders at the test age designated for determination of f� is less than 85 per cent of that of companion
laboratory cured cylinders. The 85 per cent limitation shall not apply if field cured strength exceeds f� by
more than 3.5 N/mm2•
5.12.5 Investigation of Low Strength Test Results

5.12.5.1 If the result of any strength test (Sec 5.12.2.4) of laboratory cured cylinders falls below the specified
value off� by more than 3.5 N/mm2 (Sec 5.12.3.3(b)) or if tests of field cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in
protection and curing (Sec 5.12.4.4), steps shall be taken to assure that.the load carrying capacity of the
structure is not jeoparaized.
5.12.5.2· If the likelihood of low strength concrete is confirmed and coml'utations indicate that load carrying
capacity may have been significantly reduced, tests of cores drilled from the area in question may be required
in accordance with "Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete" (ASTM
C42). In such cases, three cores shall be taken for each strength test more than 3.5 N/mm2 below the specified
value off�.
5.12.5.3 If concrete in the structure is expected to be dry under service conditions, cores shall be air dried for
7 days before test and shall be tested dry. If concrete in the structure is expected to be more than superficially
wet under service conditions, cores shall be immersed in water for at least 40 hours and be tested wet.
5.12.5.4 Concrete in an area represented by core tests shall be considered structurally adequate if the
average of three cores is equal to at least 85 per cent of f� and if no single core is less than 75 per cent of f�.
Additional testing of cores extracted from locations represented by erratic core strength results shall be
permitted.
5.12.5.5 If the criteria of Sec 5.12.5.4 above are not met, and if structural adequacy remains in doubt, the
responsible authority may order load tests for the questionable portion of the structure, or take other
appropriate action.
5.13 PROPERTIES OF CONCRETE
5.13.1 Strength
Strength of concrete shall be based on f� determined in accordance with the provisions of Sec 5.12.1.
5.13.2 Modulus of Elasticity
5.13.2.1 Modulus of elasticity E, for stone aggregate concrete may be taken as 44 wc1·5 {1'; (N/mm2) for
values of w, between 15 and 25 kN/m3 andf� in N/mm2• For normal density concrete, E, may be taken as
4700 .Jl{ .
5.13.2.2 Modulus of elasticity E, for brick aggregate concrete may he taken as 3750 .Jl'c.
6-134
Chapter 5
Concrete Material
5.13.3 Creep
The final (30 year) creep strain in concrete e,, shall be predicted from
stress
e ,, =--c, (5.13.1)
Et
where
E1 is the modulus of elasticity of the concrete at the age of loading I,
c, is the creep coefficient.
The creep coefficient may be estimated from Fig 6.5.1. In this figure, for uniform sections, the effective section
thickness is defined as twice the cross-sectional area divided by the exposed perimeter. If drying is prevented
by immersion in water or by sealing, the effective section thickness shall be taken as 600 mm.
It can be assumed that about 40%, 60% and 80% of the final creep develops during the first month, 6 months
and 30 months under load respectively, when concrete is exposed to conditions of constant relative humidity.
Indoor Outdoor
30 year creep coefficient for exposure
exposure
an effective section thickness
lmml of
150 300 600
4.0
3.0
2.5
3.5
2.5
3.0 2.D
2.5 2.0
1.5
2.0 1.5
1.5 1.0
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Ambient Relative Humidity, Per Cent
Fig. 6.5.1 Effects of Relative Humidity, Age of Loading and Section Thickness
Upon Creep Factor
5.13.4 Shrinkage
An estimate of the drying shrinkage of plain concrete may be obtained from Fig 6.5.2. Recommendations for
effective section thickness and relative humidity are given in Sec 5.13.3.
Fig 6.5.2 relates to concrete of normal workability made without water reducing admixtures; such concretes
shall have an original water content of about 190 l/m3. Where concrete is known to have a different water
content, shrinkage shall be regarded as proportional to water content within the range 150 l/m3 to 230 11m3.
The shrinkage of plain concrete is primarily dependent on the relative humidity of the air surrounding the
concrete, the surface area from which moisture can be lost relative to the volume of concrete and on the mix
proportion. It is increased slightly by carbonation and self desiccation and reduced by prolonged curing.

Part 6
Structural Design
30 year 6 month 6
X
6
shrinkage X 10 shrinkage 10
for an effective for a n effective
section thickness section thickness
Indoor Outdoor (mm) of
(mml of
exposure exposure
150 300 600 150 300 600
I I
- -- I
200
400- 350
1--300
�I
I
I 175
100
I- 45
I
""' I
40
350-
300 250 � �87.5-
'\ 150 35
I I
300-
250
I 1\ I
l--75.5-
30
I I
\
�200 I- 125
250- I I �62.5-
I I 25
200
� 100
150 I 1--50.0-
\:
200-
I 20
150
I 75
\
150 1--37.5-
1--100 I 15
100
I
50
�
:\
25 -
100 I 10
I- 50 - I
50 25
50 - I I i--12.5- 5
I I I
0 - 0 0
I Shrinkage
I 1\ 0 - 0 0
I I
\
Swelling
I I I
I I
20 0- 200 200- I I 100 - 100 � 100
I
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Fig. 6.5.2 Drying Shrinkage of f�ormal- Weight Concrete
An estimate of the shrinkage of symmetrically reinforced concrete sections may be obtained from :
�
1+Kp
where
E5h is the shrinkage of the plain concrete;

p is the area of steel relative to that of the concrete;
K is a coefficient,, taken as 25 for internal exposure and as 15 for external exposure.
5.13.5 Thermal Strains

Thermal strains shall be calculated from the product of a suitable coefficient of thermal expansion and a
temperature change. The temperature change can be determined from the expected service conditions and
climatic data. Externally eJqJosed concrete does not respond immediately to air temperature change, and
climatic temperature ranges may require adjustment before use in movement calculations.
The coefficient of thermal expansion of concrete is dependent mainly on the expansion coefficients for the
aggregate and the cement paste, and the degree of saturation of the concrete. The thermal expansion of
aggregate is related to mineralogical composition (See Table 6.5.7)
6-136
Chapter 5
Concrete Material
Table 6.5.7
Thermal Expansion of Rock Group and Related Concrete
Aggregate Type Tvpical Coefficient of Expansion (1 x 10'6/°C)

Aggregate Concrete
Flint, quartzite 11 12
Granite, basalt 7 10
Limestone 6 8
Cement paste has a coefficient of thermal expansion that is a function of moisture content, and this affects the
concrete expansion as shown in Fig 6.5.3. 1t may be seen that partially dry concrete has a coefficient of
thermal expansion that is approximately 2 x 10·6 /°C greater than the coefficient for saturated concrete.
Very Partially
dry dry Saturated
20
Normally cured
Cement
paste
.o
Q;
a. 15
"'c>
�
X
c:
0
'iii
c:
"'
a.
X
w
10
-;;;
E
Q; Concrete
..c:
f- Limestone aggregate
0
c
Q)
·u
::: 5
Q)
0
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
Fig. 6.5.3 Effect of Dryness upon the Coefficient of Thermal

Expasion of Hardened Cement and Concrete
5.14 CONCRETING IN ADVERSE WEATHER
5.14.1 Concreting shall be avoided during periods of near freezing weather.
5.14.2 During hot weather, proper attention shall be given to ingredients, production methods, handling, placin g ,
protection, and curing to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water evaporation that could imparr
required strength or serviceability of the member or structure.
5.14.3 During rainy weather, proper protection shall be given to ingredients, production methods, handling and
placing of concrete. If required in the opinion of the engineer, tl:l.e concreting operation shall be postponea and

Part 6
Structural Design
newly placed concrete shall be protected from rain after forming proper construction joint for future
continuation.
5.15 SURFACE FINISH
5.15.1 Type of Finish

A wide variety of finishes can be produced. Surface cast against forms may be left as cast, e.g. plain or
profiled, the initial surface may be removed, e.g. by tooling or sandblasting, or the concrete may be covered,
e.g. by paint or tiles; combinations of these techniques may also be adopted, e.g. a ribbed / rofile with bush
hammered ribs. Upper surfaces not cast against forms may be trowelled smooth or profile , e.g. by tamping;
the initial surface may be removed, e.g. by spraying , or 1t may be covered, e.g. by a screed or plastic floor
finish. When selecting the type of finish, cons1deration shall be given to the ease of producing a .finish of the
required standard, the viewing distance and the change of appearance with time. In the case of external
surfaces, account shall be taken of the weather pattern at the particular location, any impurities in the air
and the effect of the shape of the structure upon the flow of water across its surface. Such considerations will
often preclude the specification of surfaces of uniform colour as these are very difficult to produce and
deteriorate with time, particularly if exposed to the weather.
5.15.2 Quality of Finish

A high quality finish is one that is visually pleasing; it may include colour variations and physical
discontinuities but these are likely to be distributed systematically or randomly over the whole surface rather
than being concentrated in particular areas. When deciding on the quality of finish to be specified,
consideration should be given to the viewing distance and the exposure conditions.
There is no method whereby the quality of finish that will be accepted can unequivocally be defined. To
achieve the quality required calls for good communication between experienced personnel conversant with
the production of finisnes and close collaboration with the site. The quality of finish can be identified in the
following very broad terms:
a) Class 2 applies to surfaces that are to be exposed to view but where appearance is not critical; such
surfaces rrught be the walls of fire escape stairs or plant roo ms and columns and beams of structures that
are normally viewed in the shade, e.g. car parks ana warehouses;
b) Class 1 is appropriate to most surfaces exposed to view including the external walls of industrial,
commercial and domestic buildings;
c) Special class is appropriate to the highest standards of appearance, such as might be found in prestigious
buildings, where 1t is possible to justify the high cost of their production.
These broad descriptions may be amplified by written descriptions of the method of finish, by photographs, by
samples or by reference to existing structures.
5.15.3 Type of Surface Finish

Smooth off-the-form and board marked finishes are not recommended for external use, but where they are
specified for interior use the following types may be quoted for the guidance of both designers and contractor.
Designers should appreciate that it is virtually impossible to acnieve dense, flat, smooth, even coloured
blemish free concrete surfaces directly from the form work. Some degree of making good is inevitable, even
with precast work.
a) Type A finish: This finish is obtained by the use of properly designed formwork or moulds of timber,
plywood, plastics, concrete or steel. Small blemishes caused by entrapped air or water may be expected,
but the surface should be free from voids, honeycombing or other blerrushes.
b) Type B finish: This finish can only be obtained by the use of high quality concrete and formwork. The
concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and all surfaces shall be true, with clean arises. Only very minor
surface blemishes shall occur, with no staining or discoloration from the release agent.
c) Type C finish: This finish is obtained by first producing a type B finish. The surface is then improved by
carefully removing all fins and other projechons, thoroughly washing down, and then filling the most
noticeable surface blemishes with a cement and fine aggregate paste to match the colour of tne original
concrete. The release agent should be carefully chosen to ensure that the concrete surface will not be
stained or discoloured. After the concrete has been properly cured, the face shall be rubbed down,
where necessary, to produce a smooth and even surface.
5.15.4 Production
The quality of a surface depends on the constituents and proportions of the concrete mix, the efficiency of
mixing, the handling and compaction of the concrete and its curing. The characteristics of the formwork and
the release agent may also be of critical importance. Requirements may be stated for any aspect of production
that might contribute towards the achievement of the required type of quality of finish.
6-138
Chapter 5
Concrete Material
5.15.5 Inspection and Making Good

The surface of the concrete shall be inspected for defects and for conformity with the specification and, where
appropriate, for comparison with approved sample finishes. Subject to the strength and durability of the
concrete being unimpaired, the making good of surface defects may be permitted but the standard of
acceptance shall be ap p ropriate to the type and quality of the finish specified and ensure satisfactory
performance and durability. On permanently exposed surfaces great care is essential in selecting the materiafs
and the mix proportions to ensure that the final colour of the faced area blends with the parent concrete in
the finished structure.
Voids can be filled with fine mortar, r.referably incorporating styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) or polyvinyl
acetate (PVA), while the concrete is still green or when it has hardened. Fine cracks can be filled by wiping a
cement grout, an SBR, PVA or latex emulsion, a cement/SBR or a cement/PVA slurry across them. Fins and
other projections shall be rubbed down.
5.15.6 Protection
High quality surface finishes are susceptible to damage during subsequent construction operations and
temporary protection may have to be provided in vulnerable areas. Examples of such protective measures
include the strapping of laths to arrises and the prevention of rust being carried from exposed starter bars to
finished surfaces.
5.16 FORMWORK
5.16.1 Design of Formwork

5.16.1.1 Forms shall result in a final structure that conforms to shapes, lines, and dimensions of the members
as required by the design drawings and specifications.
5.16.1.2 Forms shall be substantial and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar.
5.16.1.3 Forms shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain position and shape.
5.16.1.4 Forms and their supports shall be designed so as not to damage previously placed structure.
5.16.1.5 Design of formwork shall include consideration of the following factors:

a) Rate and method of placing concrete;
b) Construction loads, including vertical, horizontal and impact loads;
c) Special form requirements for construction of shells, folded plates, domes, architectural concrete, or
sunilar types of elements.
5.16.1.6 Forms for prestressed concrete members shall be designed and constructed to perrnit movement of the
member without damage during application of prestressing force.
5.16.2 Removal of Forms and Shores

5.16.2.1 No construction loads shall be supported on, nor any shoring removed from, any part of the
structure under construction except when that portion of the structure in combination with remaining forrning
and shoring system has sufficient strength to support safely its weight and loads placed thereon.
5.16.2.2 Sufficient strength shall be demonstrated by structural analysis considering proposed loads,
strength of forrning and shoring system, and concrete strength data. Structural analysis and concrete strength
test data shall be furnished to the engineer when so required. .
5.16.2.3 No construction loads exceeding the combinations of superimposed dead load plus specified live
load shall be supported on any unshored portion of the structure under construction, unless analysis
indicates adequate strength to support such additional loads.
5.16.2.4 Forms shall be removed in such a manner as not to impair safety and serviceability of the structure.
All concrete to be exposed by form removal shall have sufficient strength not to be damaged thereby.
5.16.2.5 Forms supporting prestressed concrete members shall not be removed until sufficient prestressing has
been applied to enable prestressed members to carry their dead load and anticipated constructiOn loads.
5.16.3 Conduits and Pipes Embedded in Concrete

5.16.3.1 Conduits, pipes and sleeves of any materials not harmful to concrete and within the limitations
specified herein sha11 be permitted to be embedded in concrete with the approval of the engineer, provided
they are not considered to replace structurally the displaced concrete.
5.16.3.2 Conduits and pipes of aluminium shall not be embedded in structural concrete unless effectively
coated or covered to prevent aluminium concrete reaction or electrolytic action between aluminium and steel.
5.16.3.3 Conduits, pipes, and sleeves passing through a slab, wall, or beam shall not impair significantly the
strength of the construction.

Part 6
Structural Design
5.16.3.4 Conduits and pipes, with their fittings, embedded within a column shall not displace more than 4
per cent of the area of cross-section on which strength is calculated or which is required for fire protection.
5.16.3.5 Except when drawings for conduits and pipes are approved by the engineer, conduits and pipes
embedded within a slab, wall or beam (other than iliose merely passing through) snail satisfy the following:
a) They shall not be larger in outside dimension than f the overall thickness of slab, wall, or beam in which
they are embedded.
b) They shall not be spaced closer than 3 diameters or widths on centre.
c) They shall not impair significantly the strength of the construction.
5.16.3.6 Conduits, pipes and sleeves shall be permitted to be considered as replacing structurally in
compression the displaced concrete provided :
a) They are not exposed to rusting or other deterioration.
b) They have nominal inside diameter not over 50 mm and are spaced not less than 3 diameters on centres.
5.16.3.7 Pipes and fittings shall be designed to resist effects of the material, pressure, and temperature to
which they will be subjected.
5.16.3.8 No liquid, gas, or vapour, except water not exceeding 30°C nor 0.3 N I mm2 pressure, shall be placed
in the pipes until the concrete has attained its design strength.
5.16.3.9 In solid slabs, piping, unless it is for radiant heating, shall be placed between the top and bottom
reinforcements.
5.16.3.10 Concrete cover for pipes, conduits, and fittings shall be not less than 40 mm for concrete exposed to
earth or weather, nor 20 mm Ior concrete not exposed to weather or in contact with ground.
5.16.3.11 Reinforcement with an area not less than 0.002 times the area of concrete section shall be provided
normal to piping.
5.16.3.12 Piping and conduit shall be so fabricated and installed that cutting, bending, or displacement of
reinforcement will not be required.
5.16.4 Construction Joints

5.16.4.1 Surface of concrete construction joints shall be cleaned and laitance removed.
5.15.4.2 Immediately before new concrete is placed, all construction joints shall be wetted and standing
water removed.
5.16.4.3 Construction joints shall be so made and located as not to impair the strength of the structure.
Provision shall be made for transfer of shear and other forces through construction joints.
See Sec 6.13.3.15Q).
5.16.4.4 Construction joints in floors shall be located within the middle third of spans of slabs, beams and
girders. Joints in girders shall be offset a minimum distance of two times the width ofintersecting beams.
5.16.4.5 Beams, girders, or slabs supported by columns or walls shall not be cast or erected until concrete in
the columns or walls is no longer pfastic.
5.16.4.6 Beams, girders, haunches, drop panels and capitals shall be placed monolithically as part of a slab
system unless otherwise shown in the destgn drawings or specifications.
5.17 SHOTCRETE
5.17.1 General
f
Shotcrete shall be defined as mortar or concrete neumatically projected at high velocity onto a surface.
Except as specified in this section, shotcrete shal conform to the provisions ofthis Code regarding plain
concrete or reinforced concrete.
5.17.2 Proportions and Materials

Shotcrete proportions shall be such that suitable placement is ensured using the delivery eguipment selected,
and shall result in finished in place hardened shotcrete meeting the strength requirements of Chapter 6.
5.17.3 Aggregate
Coarse aggregate, if used, shall not exceed 20 mm in size.
6-140
Chapter 5
Concrete Material
. 5.17.4 Reinforcement
The maximum size of reinforcement shall �e 16 mm q, bars unless it can be demonstrated by preconstruction
tests that adequate embedment of larger bars can be achieved. When 16 mm q, or smaller bars are used, there
shall be a minimum clearance of 60 ffim between parallel reinforcing bars. When bars larger than 16 mm q,
are permitted, there shall be a minimum clearance between parallel bars equal to six diameters of the bars
used. When two curtains of steel are provided, the curtain nearest the nozzle shall have a spacing equal to 12
bar diameters and the remaining curtam shall have a minimum spacing of 6 bar diameters.
Lap splices in reinforcing bars shall be by the noncontact lap splice method with at least 50 mm clearance
between bars. The engineer may permit the use of contact lap splices when necessary for the support of the
reinforcement, provided it can be demonstrated by means of preconstruction testing that adequate embedment
of the bars at the splice can be achieved and provided further that the splices are placed so that the plane
containing the centres of the two spliced bars is perpendicular to the surface of the shotcrete work. Shotcrete
shall not oe applied to spirally tied columns.
5.17.5 Preconstruction Tests

When required by the engineer a test panel shall be shot, cured, cored or sawn, examined and tested prior to
commencement of the project. The sample panel shall be representative of the project and simulate job
conditions as closely as possible. The panel thickness and reinforcing shall reproduce the thickest and the
most congested area specified in the structural design. It shall be sfi.ot at the same angle, from a similar
distance, using the same nozzleman and with the same concrete mix design that will be used-on the project.
5.17.6 Rebound
Any rebound or accumulated loose aggregate shall be removed from the surfaces to be covered prior to
placing the initial or any succeeding layers of shotcrete. Rebound shall not be reused as aggregate.
5.17.7 Joints
Except where permitted, unfinished work shall not be allowed to stand for more than 30 minutes unless all
edges are sloped to a thin edge. Before placing additional material adjacent to previously applied work,
sloping and square edges shall be cleaned and wetted.
5.17.8 Damage
An in-place shotcrete which exhibits sags or sloughs, segregation, honeycombing, sand pockets or other
obvious defects shall be removed and replaced.
5.17.9 Curing
During the curing periods, shotcrete shall be maintained above 5°C and in moist condition. In initial curing,
shotcrete shall be l<ept continuously moist for 24 hours after placement is complete. Final curing shall
continue for seven days after shotcretin�, for three days if high early strength cement is used, or until the
specified strength is obtained. Final curmg shall consist of a fog spray or an approved moisture retaining
cover or membrane. In sections of a depth in excess of 300 mm, final curing shall be the same as that for initial
curing.
5.17.10 Strength Test

Strength test for shotcrete shall be made by an approved agency on specimens which are representative of the
work and which have been water soaked for at least 24 hours prior to testing. When the maximum size
aggregate is larger than 10 mm, specimens shall consist of not less than three 75 mm diameter cores or 75 mm
cubes. When the maximum size aggregate is 10 mm or smaller, specimens shall consist of not less than three 50
mm diameter cores or 50 mm cubes. Specimens shall be taken in accordance with one of the following:
a) From the work: taken at least one from each shift but not less than one for each 20m3 of shotcrete;
b) From test panels: taken not less than once each shift nor less than one for each 20m3 of shotcrete placed.
. When the maximum size aggregate is larger than 10 mm, the test panels shall have a minimum dimension of
450 mm by 450 mm. When the maximum size aggregate is 10 mm or smaller, the test panels shall have a
minimum dimension of 300 mm by 300 mm. Panels shall be gunned in the same position as the work, during
the course of the work and by the same nozzlemen doing the work. The condition under which the panels
are cured shall be the same as the work.
The average strength of three cores from a single panel shall be equal to or exceed 0.85 f� with no single core
less than 0.75f�. The average strength of three cubes taken from a single panel must equal or exceed f� with
no individual cube less than 0.88/�· To check testing accuracy, locations represented by erratic core
strengths may be retested.
5.17.11 Inspections
5.17.11.1 Inspection During Placement :When shotcrete is used for columns and beams, a special
inspector is required. The special inspector shall provide continuous inspection to the placement of the
reinforcement and shotcreting and shall submit a statement indicating compliance with the plans and
specifications.

Part 6
Structural Design
5.17.11.2 Visual Examination for Structural Soundness of In-place Shotcrete : Completed shotcrete
work shall be checked visually for reinforcing bar embedment, voids, rock pocket, sand streaks and similar
deficiencies by examining a minimum of three 75 mm cores taken from three areas chosen by the engineer which
represent the worst congestion of reinforcing bars occllrring in the project. Extra reinforcing bars may be
added to noncongested areas and cores may be taken from these areas. The cores shall be examined by the
special inspector and a report submitted to the engineer prior to final approval of the shotcrete.
5.17.12 Equipment
The equipment used in construction testing shall be the same equipment used in the work requiring such testing
unless substitute equipment is approved by the engineer.
Related Appendix
Appendix A Conversion of Expressions from 51 to FPS Units
6-142
CHAPTER®
Ultiinate Strength Design of
Reinforced Concrete Structures
6.1 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN- GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
6.1.1 Convention and Notation .

Unless otherwise explicitly stated, the following units shall be implicit for the corresponding quantities in the
design and other expressions provided in this chapter:
Lengths mm
Areas rran2
Second moments of area mm4
Force (axial, shear) N
Moment, torsion Nmm
Stress, strength N/rnnt
6.1.1.1 Notation
Ag = gross area of section
f� specified compressive strength of concrete
fy specified yield strength of steel
U required strength to resist factored loads or related internal moments and forces
ip strength reduction factor.
6.1.2 General
6.1.2.1 Members shall be designed for adequate strength in accordance with the provisions of this chapter,
using load factors specified in Sec 2.7.5.1 and strength reduction factors ip in Sec 6.1.4.
Part 6 6-143
Structural Design
Part 6
Structural Design
6.1.2.2 Design of reinforced concrete members using Working Stress Design method (Chapter 7) is also
permitted.
6.1.2.3 Structures and structural members shall be designed to have design strength at all sections at least
equal to the required strength (U) calculated for the factored loads and forces in such combinations as are
stipulated in Chapter 2, Loads. The nominal strength provided for the section multiplied by the strength
reduction factor 1/J shall be equal to or greater than the calculated required strength U.
6.1.2.4 Members shall also meet all the other requirements of this Code to ensure adequate performance at
service loads.
6.1.2.5 Yield strength of reinforcementfy shall not be taken more than 550 N/mm2•
6.1.3 Loading
Loads and their combinations shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Chapter 2, Loads.
6.1.4 Design Strength

6.1.4.1 Design strength provided by a member, and its connections to other members, in terms of flexure,
axial load, shear, and torsion, shall be taken as the nominal strength calculated in accordance with the
requirements and assumptions of this chapter, multiplied by a strength reduction factor 1/J.
6.1.4.2 Strength reduction factor 1/J for different kinds of strength shall be as specified inTable 6.6.1.
Table 6.6.1
Values of Strength Reduction Factor, 1/J
Kind of Strength
I 1/J
Flexure, without axial load 0.90
Axial tension with or without flexure 0.90
Axial compression with or without flexure1
Members with spiral reinforcement 0 .75
Other members 0 .70
Shear and torsion 0.85
Bearing on concrete 0 .7 0
1
For low values of axial compression, the strength reduction factor shall be increased in accordance with
the provisions of Sec 6.3.5.
6.1.4.3 Calculation of development length specified in Sec 8.2 does not require a strength reduction factor.
6.1.4.4 In regions of high seismic risk, strength reduction factors shall be as given above except for the
following:
i) Except for determining the shear strength of joints, the factor shall be 0.6 for members whose nominal
shear strength is less than the shear corresponding to the development of the nominal flexural strength.
The nominal flexural strength shall be determined considering the most critical factored axial loads
including earthquake effects. Shear strength reduction factor for joints shall be 0.85.
ii) If the transverse reinforcement does not conform to Sec 8.3.5, the strength reduction factor for axial
compression and flexure shall be 0.5 for all frame members with factored axial compressive forces
exceeding 0.1A f�.
g
6.2 BEAMS AND ONE-WAY SLABS
6.2.1 Notation
a depth of equivalent rectangular stress block as defined in Sec 6.2.3.7
A effective tension area of concrete surrounding the flexural tension reinforcement and having the
same centroid as that of the reinforcement, divided by the number of bars. When the flexural
reinforcement consists of different bar sizes the number of bars or wires shall be computed as the
total area of reinforcement divided by the area of the largest bar used
gross area of section
total area of longitudinal reinforcement to resist torsion
area of tension reinforcement
area of compression reinforcement
area of tension reinforcement corresponding to moment of resistance M1
area of additional tension steel
area of reinforcement required to balance the longitudinal compressive force in the overhanging
portion of the flange of aT-beam
6-144
Chapter 6
Ultimate Strength Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures
= area of skin reinforcement per unit height in a side face

area of one leg of a closed stirrup resisting torsion within a distance 5
area of shear reinforcement within a distance 5

= width of compression face of member
width of that part of cross-section containing the closed stirrups resisting torsion
web width, or diameter of circular section
= distance from extreme compression fibre to neutral axis
factor relating shear and torsional stress properties = :w�

.t... X Y
d distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of tension reinforcement
d' distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of compression reinforcement
de thickness of concrete cover measured from extreme tension fibre to centre of bar or wire located
closest thereto
= modulus of elasticity of reinforcement
Es
!� specified compressive strength of concrete
= calculated stress in reinforcement at service loads
fs
= modulus of rupture of concrete
fr
specified yield strength of reinforcement
/y
Jj overall thickness of member
ler moment of inertia of cracked section transformed to concrete
Ie effective moment of inertia for computation of deflection
lg moment of inertia of gross concrete section about centroidal axis, neglecting reinforcement
= clear span for positive moment or shear and average of adjacent clear spans for negative moment
ln
Mt moment of resistance of a section without compression steel
M2 additional moment of resistance due to added compression steel A; and additional tension steel
As2
Mnl moment of resistance developed by compression in the overhanging portion of theT-flange
Mn2 moment of resistance developed by the web of aT-beam
Ma maximum moment in member at stage deflection is computed
M r e cracking moment
Mm = modified moment
Mmax = maximum moment at section due to externally applied loads
Mn = nominal flexural strength
Mu = factored moment at section
Nu axial load normal to cross-section occurring simultaneously with Vu; to be taken as positive for
COmJ?ression, negative for tension and to include effects of tension due to Cree and shrinkage
r
5 spacmg of shear or torsion reinforcement in direction parallel to longitudina reinforcement
Te torsional moment strength provided by concrete
Tn torsional moment strengttr
Ts. = torsional moment strength provided by torsion reinforcement
Tu = torsional moment at section
Vu shear at section
Ve = shear strength provided by concrete
Vn shear strength
Vs = nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement
Wu = factored load per unit length of beam or per unit area o f slab
X = shorter overall dimension of rectangular part of cross-section
Xt shorter centre to centre dimension oi closed rectangular stirrup
y longer overall dimension of rectangular part of cross-section
Yt longer centre to centre dimension of closea rectangular stirrup
z . quantity limiting distribution of flexural reinforcement, see Eq
(6.2.35)
at coefficient equal to (2 y1jxt)j3 but not more than 1.5
+
= factor defined in Sec 6.2.3.7

f3t
E time-dependent factor for sustained load
p ratio of tension reinforcement = Asfbd
p' ratio of compression reinforcement = A�jbd
Pb reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain condition in a section, see Sec 6.2.4.1
Pmin minimum ratio of tension reinforcement
Pw A5/bwd
qJ strength reduction factor.

Part 6
Structural Design
6.2.2 Definitions
6.2.2.1 Effective Span of Simply Supported Beams : The effective span of a simply supported beam
shall be taken as the smaller of the distance between the centres of bearings, or the clear distance between
supports plus the effective depth.
6.2.2.2 Effective Span of Continuous Beams : If the width of the support is less than -f2 of the clear
span, the effective span shall be as in Sec 6.2.2.1 above. If the supports are wider than n- of the clear span
or 600 mm, whichever is less, the effective span shall be as follows:
a) For end span with one end fixed and the other continuous or for intermediate spans, the effective span
shall be the clear span between supports, and
b) For end span with one end free and the other continuous, the effective span shall be equal to the clear
span plus half tlie effective depth of the beam or the clear span plus half the width of the discontinuous
support, whichever is less.
In case of monolithic frames, the effective span shall be equal to the distance between intersections of the
centre lines of the connecting members.
6.2.2.3 Effective Length of Cantilever : The effective length of a cantilever shall be taken as its length to
the face of the support plus half its effective depth except where it forms the end of a continuous beam where
the length to the centre of the support shall be used.
6.2.2.4 One-way Slab : Slabs in which the deflected surface is predominantly cylindrical shall be termed
one-way slabs spanning in the direction of curvature. Such slabs shall included cantilever slabs, slabs
supported on two opposite sides, and those supported on all four sides with the longer span greater than
tw1ce the shorter span. Curvatures, and consequently bending moments, in such slabs shall oe assumed to be
the same for all stnps spanning in the shorter direction or in the direction of predominant curvature, the slab
being designed to resist flexural stresses in that direction only.
6.2.3 Design Assumptions

6.2.3.1 Strength design of members for flexure and axial loads shall be based on assumptions given in
Sec 6.2.3.2
through 6.2.3.7
shall satisfy compatibility and equilibrium requirements.
6.2.3.2 Strains in the steel and the concrete shall be assumed directly proportional to the distance from the
neutral axis.
6.2.3.3 Maximum compressive strain in the extreme compression fibre of concrete shall be assumed equal
to 0.003.
6.2.3.4 The stress in steel shall be the product of its strain and its modulus of elasticity, E5, until the steel
reaches its yield strength, whereafter the stress in steel shall be taken as equal to/y·
6.2.3.5 Tensile strength of concrete shall be neglected in calculations of axial and flexural strengths of
reinforced concrete. ·
6.2.3.6 The concrete stress block may be taken as any shape that can be justified by tests.
6.2.3.7 Requirements of Sec 6.2.3.6

above' may be considered satisfied by an equivalent rectangular concrete
stress distribution defined by the following.
a) Concrete stress of 0.85/� shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an equivalent compression zone
bounded by edges of the cross-section and a straight line located parallel to the neutral axis at a distance
a= f31c from the fibre of maximum compressive strain.
b) c
Distance from fibre of maximum compressive strain to the neutral axis shall be measured in a direction
perpendicular to that axis
c) Factor /31 shall be calculated as follows:
/31 =0.85-0.008{!� -30) and 0.65�P1 �0.85.

6.2.4 General Principles and Requirements
6.2.4.1 Balanced strain conditions exist at a cross-section when tension reinforcement reaches the strain
corresponding to its specified yield strength/y just as concrete in compression reaches its assumed ultimate
strain of 0.003.
6-146
Chapter 6
6.2.4.2 For flexural members and for members subject to combined flexure and axial load, the ratio of
reinforcement p provided shall not exceed 0.75 of the ratio Pb that would produce balanced strain condition
for the section. For members with compression reinforcement, the portion of Pb equalized by compression
reinforcement need not be reduced by the 0.75 factor.
6.2.4.3 Compression reinforcement in conjunction with additional tension reinforcement may be used to
increase the strength of flexural members.
6.2.4.4 Spacing of lateral supports for a beam shall not exceed 50 times the least width b of compression
flange or face. Effect of latera[ eccentricity of load shall be taken into account in determining spacing of the
lateral supports.
6.2.5 Continuous Beams

Continuous beams shall be analysed in accordance with Sec 6.2.5.2 and designed and detailed to resist the
moments and shear forces according to Sec 6.2.6 and 6.2.7.
6.2.5.1 Arrangement of Loads : The arrangement and combination of loads shall be in accordance with
the provisions of Sec 1.4.2(a), 1.4.3(a), 2.3.3.1 and 2.7.5.1.
6.2.5.2 Methods of Analysis

a ) All members o f continuous construction shall b e designed f o r the maximum effects o f factored loads as
determined by the theory of elastic analysis, except as modified according to Sec 6.2.5.3.
b) In lieu of exact analysis, the approximate expressions given in Table 6.6.2 for moments and shears are
permitted to be used for design of continuous beams and one-way slabs, provided that:
i) there are two or more spans,
ii) spans are approximately equal, with the larger of two adjacent spans not greater than the shorter
by more than 20 per cent,
.
iii) loads are uniformly distributed,
iv) unit live load does not exceed 3 times the unit dead load, and
v) members are prismatic.
Table 6.6.2
Approximate Moments and Shears in Continuous Beams
Positive moment
End spans:
Discontinuous end unrestrained Wufn2/11
Discontinuous end integral with support Wufn2/14
Interior span Wufn2/16
Negative moment at exterior face of first interior support

Two spans
More than two spans
Negative moment at other faces of interior supports
Negative moment at face of all supports for slabs with sp�ns not
exceeding 3 m and beams where ratio of sum of column stiffness
to beam stiffness exceeds eight at each end of the span
Negative moment at interior face of exterior support for members

built integrally with supports
Where support is spandrel beam Wu ln2/24
Where support is a column Wufn2/16
Shear in end members at face of first interior support
Shear at face of all other supports

Part 6
Structural Design
6.2.5.3 Redistribution of Negative Moments

a) Except where approximate values for moments are used, negative moments calculated by elastic theory
at the supports of continuous flexural members for any assumed loading arrangement may be increased or
decreasea by not more than
·
20 ( 1- �
p p' ) per cent.
b) The modified negative moments shall be used for calculation of the moments at sections within the spans.
c) Redistribution of negative moments shall be made only when the section at which moment is reduced is so
designed that P or P- p' is equal to or less than 0.50pb, where
0.85/hf� 600
Pb =
/y 600+ /y
(6.2.1)
6.2.6 Design for Flexure

6.2.6.1 Design of Rectangular Beams
a) Formula for singly reinforced beams : The following equations which are based on the simplified stress
block of Sec 6.2.3.7, are applicable to singly reinforced rectangular beams along with T-beams where
the neutral axis lies within the flange.
Mn
A=
5 (6.2.2)
/y(d-a/2)
where
As/y
a= ---"--' - (6.2.3)
0.85/�b
By estimating an initial value of a, Eq (6.2.2) can be used to determine an approximate value of A5• That
value can be substituted in Eq (6.2.3) to get a better estimate of a and hence a new (d- a/2) can be
determined for substitution in Eq (6.2.2).
b) Design formulae for doubly reinforced beams : Compression steel (A�) for a given beam is required when
concrete alone cannot develop the required compression force.
The following formulae shall apply to doubly reinforced beams:
(6.2.4)
As-Jy
where a= and A51= 0.75pbbd
0.85f�b
(6.2.5)
(6.2.6)
(6.2.7)
provided both tension and compression steel are stressed to /y at failure.
6.2.6.2 Design ofT-Beams

a) General
i) Effective width ofT-beams : Width of slab effective as T-beam flange shall not exceed one-quarter
of the span length of the beam, and the effective overhanging flange width on each side of tne web
shall not exceea eight times the slab thickness nor one-half the clear distance to the next web. ·
6-148
Chapter 6
ii) (
Effective width of L-beams : For beams with a slab on one side onl , the effective overhanging
flange width shall be the minimum of one-twelfth the span length o the beam, six times the slab
thicl<ness, and one-half the clear distance to the next web.
iii) Isolated beams, in which the T-shape is used to provide a flange for additional compression area,
shall have a flange thickness not less than one-half the width of web and an effective flange width
not more than four times the width of web.
b) Formulae for T-beams : A T -beam shall be treated as a rectangular beam if a � h where a is obtained from
1
Eq (6.2.3). In using Eq (6.2.3}, if As is not known, it may be initially assumed as :
(6.2.8)
If a, thus obtained, is greater than ht the beam shall be considered as a T-beam, in which case the
following formulae shall be applicable :
0.85/� (b-bw hf )
Asf _....:...:.... ...:.. ---=-._ (6.2.9)
/y
=
Mnl =AsJfy d-htJ2 ( ) (6.2.10)
(6.2.11)
(6.2.12)
(6.2.13)
By estimating an initial value of a, Eq ( )

(6.2.12) can be us�d to obtain an approximate value of As -Asf . That
value of (As -Asf ) can be substituted in Eq (6.2.13) to get a better estimate of a.
6.2.7 Shear and Torsion

6.2.7.1 Design for shear shall be based on
Vu � tf>Vn (6.2.14)
where Vu is the factored shear force at section considered and Vn is the nominal shear strength computed by
(6.2.15)
where V, is nominal shear strength provided by concrete in accordance with Sec 6.2.7.3 and Vs is nominal
shear strength provided by shear reinforcement in accordance with Sec 6.2.7.4(f).
In determining the nominal shear strength V n, effect of any openings in members shall be considered.
In determining V, , effects of axial tension due to creep and shrinkage shall be considered and effects of
inclined flexural compression in variable depth members may be included.
6.2.7.2 Sections located less than distanced from the face of support may be designed for maximum factored
shear force Vu computed at distanced, if the following conditions are satisfied:
i) support reaction introduces compression into the end regions of the member in the direction of applied
shear, and
ii) there is no concentrated load between the face of support and the location of critical section.
6.2.7.3 Shear Strength Provided by Concrete, V,

a) V, shall be computed by the provision of (i) through (iii) below unless a more detailed calculation is
made in accordance with Sec 6.2.7.3 (b) below.

Part 6
Structural Design
i) For members subject to shear and flexure only,
(6.2.16)
ii) For members subject to axial compression, in addition to flexure and shear
(6.2.17)
iii) . For members subject to significant axial tension, V, =0.

b) V, may be computed by the more detailed calculation as follows :
i) For members subject to shear and flexure only
(
V, = 0.16..J.ff +17.2Pw �: }wd but not greater than 0.3..Jlfbwd (6.2.18)
Quantity (VudfMu' shall not be taken greater than 1.0 in computing V, by Eq (6.2.18), where Mu
is the factored moment occurring simultaneously with Vu at the section considered.
ii) For members subject to axia l compression, Eq (6.2.18) may be used to compute V, with Mm
substituted for Mu and VudfMu shall not then b e limited t o 1.0, where
(4h-d)
M m-M
- u -N u 8 (6.2.19)
However, V, shall not be taken greater than
� N
V, =0.3..Jlfbwd 1+0.3 u
Ag
(6.2.20)
When Mm as computed by Eq (6.2.19) is negative, V, shall be computed by Eq (6.2.20).

iii) For members subject to significant axial tension
(6.2.21)
where Nu is negative for tension.

6.2.7.4 Shear Strength Provided by Shear Reinforcement
a) Shear reinforcement may consist of
i) stirrups placed perpendicular to axis of member,
ii) bent up longitudinal reinforcement with bent portion making an angle of 30 degree or more with
longitudinaf tension reinforcement,
iii) combinations of stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement.
b) Design yield strength of shear reinforcement shall not exceed 410 N/mm2•
c) Stirrups shall extend a distance d from extreme compression fibre and shall be anchored at both ends in
accordance with Sec 8.2.
d) Spacing limits for shear reinforcement
i) Spacing of reinforcement perpendicular to axis of member shall not exceed d/2, nor 600 mm.
6-150
Chapter 6
Ultimate Strength Des ign of Reinforced Concrete Structures
ii) Bent longitudinal reinforcement shall have a maximum spacing of 0.375d (1 + cot a), but not
greater than 600 mm, where a is the acute angle between the bent bar and the horizontal.
iii) When V5 exceeds 0.33 ..Jl{bwd, maximum spacings given ill (i) and (ii) above shall be reduced by
one-half.
e) Minimum shear reinforcement
i) When factored shear force Vu exceeds one-half the shear strength provided by concrete t/JVc, a
minimum area of shear reinforcement shall be provided in all reinforced concrete flexural members,
except slabs and footings, ribbed construction, and beams with total depth not greater than 2.5
times thickness of flange, one-half the width of web and 250 :mm .
ii) Where shear reinforcement is required by (i) above or by analysis, and where factored torsional
moment [(
Tu does not exceed lfl o.04 K) -r.x2y ], minimum area of shear reinforcement shall be
computed by
bw5
Av =0.35 (6.2.22)
/y
iii) Where factored torsional moment [( ..J{;}:Lx2y]
Tu exceeds lfl o.04 and where shear reinforcement
is required by (i) above or by analysis, minimum area of closed stirrups shall be computed by
Av +2At =0.35 �
5
(6.2.23)
where At is the area of one leg of closed stirrup.
f) Design of shear reinforcement
i) Where factored shear force Vu exceeds shear strength t/1 Vc, shear reinforcement shall be provided
to satisfy Eq (6.2.14) and (6.2.15), where shear strength V5 shall be computed in accordance with
(ii) through (vii) below.
ii) When shear reinforcement perpendicular to the axis of member is used,
(6.2.24) .
iii) When bent-up bars inclined at an angle a with the horizontal, are used as shear reinforcement,
Avf ( sin a +cos a )d

v 5 = --"--
y ----- (6.2.25)
5
iv) When shear reinforcement consists of a single bar or a single group of parallel bars, all bent up at
the same distance from the support,
·
(6.2.26)
but not greater than 0.25 ..Jl{bwd

v) When shear reinforcement consists of a series of parallel bent-up bars or groups of parallel bent
up bars at different distances from the support, shear strength V5 shall be computed oy Eq (6.2.25)
vi) Only the centre three-fourths of the inclined portion of any longitudinal bent bar shall be
considered effective for shear reinforcement.
vii) Shear strength V5 shall not be taken greater than 0.67 ..Jl[bwd.

Part 6
Structural Design
6.2.7.5 Combined Shear and Torsion

a) At sections where factored torsional moment Tu exceeds q, [ { 0.04�)r,x2y J V, shall be calculated by
(6.2.27)
b) Torsion effects shall be included with shear and flexure where factored torsional moment Tu exceeds
q, [{0.04-JH}I,x2y]. Otherwise, torsion effect may be neglected.
For the calculation of I,x2y the following conditions shall apply:
i) For members with rectangular or flanged sections, the sum I,x2y shall be taken for the component
rectangles of the section, but the overhanging flange-width used in design shall not exceed three
times the flange thickness.
ii) A rectangular box section shall be taken as solid section provided the wall thickness is at least
x/4. A box section with wall thickness less than x/4
but greater than x/10
shall be taken as
h
solid section except that L,x2y shall be multiplied by 4h/x. When h is less than x/10, the
stiffness of the wall shall be considered. Fillets shall be provided at interior corners of box
sections.
c) When the equilibrium of the structure would be violated if the resisting torsional moment cannot be fully
developed oy the section and when the analysis takes such torsional resistance into consideration, the
member shall be designed to carry that torsional moment in accordance with (d) through (k) below.
.
d) In a statically indeterminate structure where reduction of torsional moment in a member can occur due to
redistribution of internal forces, maximum factored torsional moment may be reduced to
i) In such a case the correspondingly adjusted moments and shears in adjoining members shall be used
·
in design.
ii) In lieu of a more exact analysis, torsional loading from a slab shall he taken as uniformly
distributed along the member.
e) Sections located less than a distance d from the face of support may be designed for the same torsional
moment Tu as that computed at a distance d.
f) Torsional moment strength
Design of cross-sections for torsion shall be based on
(6.2.28)
where T u is the factored torsional moment at the section considered and Tn is the nominal torsional
moment strength computed by
(6.2.29)
where T, is the nominal torsional moment strength provided by concrete in accordance with (g) below
and T5 is the nominal torsional moment strength provided by torsion reinforcement in accordance with Q)
below.
6-152
Chapter 6
g) Torsional moment strength provided by concrete (T,)
i) T, shall be computed by
(6.2.30)
ii) For members subject to significant axial tension, torsion reinforcement shall be desigrted to carry
the total torsional moment, unless a more detailed calculation is made in which T, given by
Eq (6.2.30) and V, given by Eq (6.2.27) are mu i tiplied by (t+0.3N11fAg ) , where Nu is negative

for tension.
h) Torsion reinforcement requirements
i) Torsion reinforcement, where required, shall be provided in addition to reinforcement required to

resist shear, flexure and axial forces.
ii) Reinforcement required for torsion shall be combined with that required for other forces, provided
the area furnished is the sum of individually required areas and the most restrictive requirements
for spacing and placement are met.
iii) Torsion reinforcement shall consist of closed stirrups, closed ties or spirals, combined with
longitudinal bars.
iv) Design yield strength for torsion reinforcement shall not exceed 410N /mm2•
v) Stirrups used as torsion reinforcement shall extend a distance d from the extreme compression
fibre and shall be anchored in accordance with Sec 8.2.
vi) Torsion reinforcement shall be provided at least a distance (b1 +d) beyond the point theoretically
required.
j) Design of torsion reinforcement
i) Where factored torsional moment T exceeds torsional moment st'rength ,P T ,, t o r s i o n

u
reinforcement shall b e provided t o satisfy E q (6.2.28) and (6.2.29), where torsional moment
strength T5 shall be computed by
A a tf
Ts = ___;.t__;.t XtY y.;,:_,
....:.:...� (6.2.31)
5
where A1 is the area of one leg of closed stirrup resisting torsion within a distance 5 and
a = (2+ytfxt)j3, but not more than 1.5. Longitudinal steel Ae distributed around the perimeter
1
of the closed stirrup shall be provided in accordance with (iii) below.
ii) A minimum area of closed stirrup shall be provided in accordance with Sec 6.2.7.4(e).
iii) Required area of longitudinal bar At distributed around the perimeter of the closed stirrup shall
be computed by
At =2A, Xt :Yl ( ) (6.2.32)
or
2
At = .8x5[ [ ] j(
fy
Tu
Tu + Vu
3C1
-2A1 xl +Yt
5
) (6.2.33)

- -------- -- - - - --- - ---- ---
Part 6
Structural Design
whichever is greater. Value of At computed by Eq (6.2.33) need not exceed that obtained by
substituting 0.35bwsffy for 2A1 in the same expression.
iv) Torsional moment strengthT5 shall not exceed 4T,.
k) Spacing limit for torsion reinforcement
i) Spacing of closed stirrups shall not exceed the smaller of { x1 + y1 )/4, or 300 mm
ii) Spacing of longitudinal bars, not less than 10 mm q,, distributed around the perimeter of the closed
stirrup s�all not exceed 300 mm At least one longitudinal bar shall be placed in each comer of the
.
closed stirrups. .
6.2.8 Reinforcement
6.2.8.1 At any section of a beam or one-way slab, except as provided in Sec 6.2.8.2 and 6.2.8.3, where
positive reinforcement is required by analysis, the ratio p provided shall not be less than that given by
Eq (6.2.34) for normal weight aggregate concrete.
1.38
Pmm =7; (6.2.34)
For brick aggregate concrete, p min shall be increased by 50 per cent.
In flanged beams where the web is in tension, the ratio p shall be computed for this purpose using the width
of the web.
6.2.8.2 Alternatively, area of reinforcement :provided at every section, positive or negative, shall be at least
on�third greater than that required by analysis.
6.2.8.3 Reinforcement in the direction of the span shall be at least equal to that required for shrinkage and
temperature according to Sec 8.1.12
6.2.8.4 Where primary flexural reinforcement in a slab that is considered as aT-beam flange (excluding
ribbed constru�tion) is parallel �o the beam, r�inforcement perpendicular to the beam shall be provided in the
top of the slab m accordance with the followmg:
·
_
a) Transverse reinforcement shall be designed to carry the factored load on the overhanging slab width
assumed to act as a cantilever. For isolated beams, the full width of overhangin� flange shall be
considered. For otherT-beams only the effective overhanging slab width need be considered. However,
this reinforcement need not be additive to any other reinforcements required.
b) Transverse reinforcement shall be spaced not farther apart than five times the slab thickness, nor
450mm.
6.2.9 Crack Control

6.2.9.1 This section prescribes rules for distribution of flexural reinforcement to control flexural cracking
in beams and in one-way slabs.
6.2.9.2 Flexural tension reinforcement shall be well distributed within the maximum flexural tension zone
of a member cross-section as required by Sec 6.2.9.3 below.
6.2.9.3 When design yield strength /y for tension reinforcement exceeds 275 N /mm2, cross-section of
maximum positive and negative moment shall be so proportioned that the quantity z given by
(6.2.35)
does not exceed 30 kN/mm for interior exposure and 25 kN/mm for exterior exposure. Calculated stress in
reinforcement at service load shall be computed as the moment divided by the product of steel area and
internal moment arm. In lieu of such computations, it is permitted to take /5 as 60% of specified yield
strength /y.
6.2.9.4 Provisions of Sec 6.2.9.3 are not sufficient for structures subject to very aggressive exposure or
designed to be watertight. For such structures, special investigation and precautions are required.
6-154
Chapter 6
Ultimate Strength Design of Reinforced Concrete St ructure s
6.2.9.5 When flanges ofT-beam construction are in tension, part of the flexural tension reinforcement shall
be distributed over an effective flange width as defined in Sec 6.2.6.2(a) or a width equal to fo- of the span,
whichever is smaller. If the effective flange width exceeds -rlJ of the span, some longitudinal reinforcement
shall be provided in the outer portion of the flange.
6.2.9.6 If the depth of the web exceeds 900 mm, longitudinal skin reinforcement shall be uniformly
distributed along both side faces of the member for a distance d/2 from the nearest flexural tension
2
reinforcement.The area of skin reinforcement Ask on each side face shall be at least (d-750) mm per metre
height.The maximum spacing of the skin reinforcement shall not exceed the lesser of d/6 and 300 mm. Such
reiriforcement may be included in strength computation if a strain compatibility analysis is made to determine
stresses in the individual bars.The totaf area of1ongitudinal skin reinforcement in both faces need not exceed
one-half of the required flexural tensile reinforcement.
6.2.10 Deflection
6.2.10.1 Beams and one-way slabs shall be designed to have adequate stiffness to limit deflections or any
deformations that affect strength or serviceability of a structure adversely.
6.2.10.2 Minimum thickness stipulated in Table 6.6.3 shall apply for beams and one-way slabs not
supporting or attached to partitions or other construction likely to be damaged by large deflections, unless
computation of deflection indicates that a lesser thickness can be used without adverse effects.
Table 6.6.3
Minimum Thickness of RC Beams or One-way Slabs Unless Deflections are Computed
Minimum Thickness, h
I
Member Simply One End Both Ends
Solid one-way
Supported Continuous I Continuous I Cantilever
slabs f/20 f/24 l/28 f/10
Beams or ribbed
one-way slabs l/16 f. /18.5 f/21 f/8
L
Note: Values given shall be used for reinforcement withf = 410 N/mrn .
2 y
For fw other than 410 N/tnm , the values shall be multiplied by (0.4+!11 /685).
6.2.10.3 Deflections, when computed, shall be those which occur immediately on application of the load
evaluated by the usual methods or formulas for elastic deflections, considering the effects of cracking and
reinforcement on member stiffness.
6.2.10.4 Unless stiffness values are obtained by a more comprehensive analysis, immediate deflection shall be
computed with the modulus of elasticity E0 for concrete as specified in Sec 5.13.2 and with the effective
moment of inertia Ie as follows, but not greater than 18.
(6.2.36)
where
frlg
Mer= -- and (6.2.37)
Yt
fr =
0.62 ..[f; (6.2.38)
6.2.10.5 For continuous members, effective moment of inertia may be taken as the average of values obtained
from Eq (6.2.36) for the critical positive and ne�ative moment sections. For prismatic members, effective
moment of inertia may be taken as the value obtamed from Eq (6.2.36) at midspan for simple and continuous
spans, and at support for cantilevers.
6.2.10.6 Unless values are obtained by a more comprehensive analysis, additional long-term deflection
resulting from creep and shrinkage of flexural members shall be determined by multiplying the immediate
deflection caused by the sustained load considered, by the factor

Part 6
Structural Design
A=--E __ (6.2.39)
1+50p'
where p' is be the value at mid span for simple and continuous spans, and at support for cantilevers. Time
dependent factor e for sustained load shall be equal to
5 years or more 2.0

12 months 1.4
6 months 1.2
3 months 1.0
6.2.10.7 Deflections computed in accordance with Sec 6.2.10.3 through 6.2.10.6 shall not exceed the limits
stipulated in Table 6.6.4.
Table 6.6.4
Maximum Permissible Computed Deflections
Type. of Member Deflection to be Considered Deflection

Limitation
Flat roofs not supporting or attached Immediate detlection due to live load
to non-structural element likely to be
damaged by large deflections
Floors not supporting or attached to Immediate deflection due to live load

non-structural elements likely to be
damaged by large deflections
Roof or floor construction supporting That part of the total deflection occurring
or attached to nonstructural efements after attachment of non-structural elements
likely to be damaged by large (sum of the long-time deflection due to all
deflections sustained loads and the immediate deflection
due to any additional live load)++
Roof or floor construction supporting

or attached to nonstructural efements (_f. )+++
240
not likely to be damaged by large
deflections
Limit not intended to safeguard against ponding. Ponding should be checked by suitable calculations of
deflection, including added deflections due to ponded water and considering long-term effects of all
+ sustained loads, camber, construction tolerances, and reliability of provisions for drainage.
Limit may be exceeded if adequate measures are taken to prevent damage to supported or attached
++ elements.
Long-time deflection shall be determined in accordance with Sec 6.2.10.6 but may be reduced by the
amount of deflection calculated to occur before attachment of non-structural elements. This amount shall
be determined on the basis of accepted engineering data relating to time-deflection characteristics of
+++ members similar to those being considered.

But not greater than tolerance provided for non-structural elements. Limit may be exceeded if camber is
provided so that total deflection minus camber does not exceed the limit.
6.3 COLUMNS
6.3.1 Notation
a depth of equivalent rectangular stress block as defined in Sec 6.2.3.7
Ac area of core of spirally reinforced compression member measured to outside diameter of spiral
Ag gross area of section
As area of tension reinforcement
Ast total area of longitudinal reinforcement, (bars or steel shapes)
At area of structural steel shape, pipe, or tubing in a composite section
b width of compression face of member
c = distance from extreme compression fibre to neutral axis
Cm a factor relating actual moment diagram to an equivalent uniform moment diagram
distance from extreme tension fibre to centroid of compression reinforcement
= distance from extreme tension fibre to centroid of tension reinforcement
modulus of elasticity of concrete
modulus of elasticity of reinforcement
flexural stiffness of compression member
6-156
Chapter 6
Ultimate Strength Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures ·

/y
li = overall thickness of member
hs storey height, centre to centre of floors or roofs
Hu · total factored lateral force acting within the storey
I moment of inertia of gross concrete section about centroidal axis, neglecting reinforcement
�e moment of inertia of reinforcement about centroidal axis of member cross-section
It moment of inertia of structural steel shape, pipe or tubing about centroidal axis of composite
member cross-section
k effective length factor for compression members
f, height of column, centre to centre of floors or roof
fu unsupported length of compression member
M e magnified factored moment to be used for design of compression member
M u factored moment at section
M1b value of smaller factored end moment on a compression member due to the loads that result in no
appreciable side sway, calculated by conventional elastic frame analysis, positive if member is
bent in single curvature, negative if bent in double curvature
Mzb value of larger factored end moment on compression member due to loads that result in no
appreciable side sway, calculated by conventional elastic frame analysis
·
Mzs value of larger factored end moment on compression member due to loads that result in appreciable
side sway, calculated by conventional elastic frame analysis
pb nominal axial load carrying capacity at balanced strain conditions
Per critical load
Pn nominal axial load carrying capaCity at given eccentricity
Po nominal axial load carrying capacity at zero eccentricity·
Pu factored axial load at given eccentricity
Q stability index
r radius of gyration of cross-section of a compression member
/31 factor defined in Sec 6.2.3.7(c)
!3d ratio of maximum factored axial dead load to maximum total factored axial load, where the load is
due to gravity effects only or ratio of the maximum factored sustained lateral load to the maximum
total factored lateral load in that storey
L1u Hu
elastically-computed first order lateral deflection due to
·
neglecting sway effect at the top of the
storey relative to the bottom of the storey
8b moment magnification factor for frames braced against side sway, to reflect effects of member
curvature between ends of compression member
85 moment magnification factor for frames not braced against side sway, to reflect lateral drift
resulting from lateral and gravity loads
p ratio of tension reinforcement= AJbd
Pb reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain conditions
Ps ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to total volume of core (out to out of spirals) of a spirally
reinforced compression member
¢ strength reduction factor.
6.3.2 Definitions
6.3.2.1 Column : A primarily compression member, which may or may not be designed to carry
simultaneous flexural forces, shall be termed a colurnil..
6.3.2.2 Braced and Unbraced Column : A column shall be termed braced against side sway when the
horizontal displacement does not significantly affect the moment in the structure. When the stability index
Q = {L.PuL1ufHuhs) for a storey is not greater than 0.04, the column shall be considered as braced against
side sway.
6.3.3 Design Assumptions .

6.3.3.1 The assumptions specified in Sec 6.2.3.1 through 6.2.3.7 shall apply to this section.
6.3.3.2 Equivalent Circular Compression Member :In lieu of using full gross area for design, a
compression member with a square, octagonal, or other shaped cross-section may be considered as a circular
section with a diameter equal to the least lateral dimension of the actual shape. Gross area considered,
required percentage of reinforcement and design strength shall be based on that circular section.
6.3.3.3 Compression Member Built Monolithically with Wall : Outer limits of the effective cross
section of a spirally reinforced or tied compression member built monolithically with a concrete wall or pier
shall be taken not greater than 40 mm outside the spiral or tie reinforcement.

Part 6
Structl,lral Design

6.3.4.1 The principles and requirements specified in Sec 6.2.4.1 through 6.2.4.3 are applicable to this ·
section.
6.3.4.2 Design axial load strength �Pn, of compression members shall n ot be taken greater than the
following:
a) For members with spiral reinforcement conforming to Sec 8.1.10.3 o r composite members conforming to
Sec 6.3.10
�Pn{max) = [ (
0.8s� o.85J; Ag -A5t ) + /yAst ] (6.3.1)
b) For members with tie reinforcement conforming to Sec 8.1.10.4
�Pn{max) = [ (
0.8o� o.85f� Ag -A5t ) + /yA51 ] (6.3.2)
6.3.4.3 Members subject to compressive axial load shall be designed for the maximum moment that can
accompany the axial load. The factored axial load P u at given eccentricity shall not exceed �pn (max) given
by Eq (6.3.1) and (6.3.2). The maximum factored moment Mu shall be magnified for slenderness effects in
6.3.5 Design
The factored axial compressive load Pu and the simultaneous factored moment Mu shall not exceed the limits
of an area bounded by the lines �Pn = O,�Mn 0 , = and the interaction diagram characterized by the
following set of five points (as depicted in Fig 6.6.1):
Inter action Diagram
Fig. 6.6.1 Typical Column Interaction Diagram
Point A Point of pure axial compression.

Maximum allowable axial load =
�Pm
Associated moment = 0
Point B Maximum allowable axial load =

�Pm
Associated moment = � Mm
Pointe Point of balanced conditions, i.e. when the

compressive strain in concrete reaches
0.003 and the tensile stress in steel
reaches /y simultaneously.
Axial load
Associated moment
6-158
Chapter 6
PointD Point of transition from a compression

zrember (�=0.7 for tied column, �= 0.75 for .
spiral column) to a flexural member ( �=0.9) .
Axial load �Pt
Associated moment = �Mt
PointE Point of pure flexure.

Axial load = 0
Associated moment = �Mo
The value of strength reduction factor �to be used between point A and point Dis
� =0.7 for tied columns, and

� =0.75 for spiral column s.
The value of � at point E, the point of pure flexure, shall be taken as � = 0.9 for all members. For points
betweenD andE, the value of � shall be determined as follows:
a) For members with spiral reinforcement
P
�=0.9-0.15 n
P,
where P1 is to be determined from the following:
i) For members with symmetrical main reinforcement,
h-d'-d
5 >0.7, and /y�410N/mm2
h
P1 = 0.133/�Ag
ii) For other members, P1 is the smaller of Pb and 0.1 33f�A8•
b) For members with tie reinforcement
P
�=0.9-0.2 n
P,
where P1 is to be determined from the following :
i) For members with symmetrical main reinforcement,
h-d'-d
5 >0.7,and/y� 410N/mm2
h
P1 =0.143/�Ag
ii) For other members, P1 is the smaller of Pb and 0.143f�Ag.
The various points on the interaction diagram shall be computed and the diagram plotted by using a strain
compatibility analysis. Guidelines for plotting an interaction diagram for a given column section are provided
in Appendix C.
6. 3.6 Reinforcement
6.3.6.1 The area of longitudinal reinforcement for non-composite compression members shall be not less than
0.01 nor more than 0.08 times gross area A of section.
g
6.3.6.2 A reduced effective area but not less than one-half the total area (A ) may be used to determine the
g
minimum reinforcement and design strength for a compression member witn a larger cross-section than that
required by analysis.

Part 6
Structural Design
6.3.6.3 Minimum number of longitudinal bars in compression members shall be 3 for bars within triangular
ties, 4 for bars within rectangufar or circular ties, and 6 for bars enclosed by spirals conforming to
Sec 6.3.6.4.
6.3.6.4 Ratio of spiral reinforcement p5 shall be not less than the value given by
(6.3.3)
wherefy is the specified yield strength of spiral reinforcement but not more tha� 410 N/mm2•
6.3.6.5 All spiral and tie reinforcement shall conform to the provisions of Sec 8.1.10.3 and 8.1.10.4.
6.3.7 Slenderness Effects

6.3.7.1 Compression members shall be designed on the basis of forces and moments determined from the
analysis of the structure. Such analysis shall take into account influence of axial loads and variable moment
of inertia on member stiffness and fixed-end moments, effect of deflections on moments and forces, and the
effects of duration of loads.
6.3.7.2 In lieu of the exact procedure prescribed in Sec 6.3.7.1 slenderness effects in compression members
may be evaluated in accordance with ilie approximate procedure presented in Sec 6.3.8.
6.3.8 Approximate Evaluation of Slenderness Effects
6.3.8.1 Unsupported Length of Compression Members

a) Unsupported length f. u of a compression member shall be taken as the clear distance between floor slabs,
beams, or other members capable of providing lateral support for that compression member.
b) Where column capitals or haunches are present, unsupported length shall be measured to the lower
extremity of capital or haunch in the plane considered.
6.3.8.2 Effective Length of Compression Members .

a) For compression members braced against side sway, effective length factor k shall be taken as 1.0, unless
analysis shows that a lower value is justified.
b) For compression members not braced against side sway, effective length factor k shall be determined from
Fig6.6.2. ·
.
6.3.8.3 Radius of Gyration : The radius of gyration r for rectangular compression members may be taken
as 0.30h, where h is overall cross-sectional dimension in the direction in wh1ch stability is being considered.
For circular compression members, r may be taken as 0.25 times the diameter. For others shapes, r may be
computed for the gross concrete section.
6.3.8.4 Consideration of Slenderness Effects

a) The effects of slenderness may be neglected when
for compression members braced against side sway, and
klu/r<22 for compression members not braced against side sway.
b) For all compression members with klu/r greater than 100, an analysis as defined in Sec 6.3.7.1 shall be
made.
6.3.8.5 Moment Magnification .

a) Compression members shall be designed using the factored axial load Pu from a conventional frame
analysis and a magnified factored moment Me defined by
(6.3.4)
where
(6.3.5)
6-160
Ch.apter 6
'IrA k 'Irs k 'Irs

oc
1.0
/ex: oc
-2o.g
oc
50 0 50.0 100.0 10.
100.0
10·0 10. 0 50. 0
so.o
5.0 5.0 30.0 5.0 30.0
0.9 2 0.0
3.0 3. 0 20.0 4·0
2.0
1 0.0 3.0 100
9.0 9.0
0.8 a.o 8. 0
1.0 1.0 7.0 7.0
0.9 -0.9 6.0 6.0
o.s 0.8 5.0
0. 7 2.0
0 .7
0.6 4·0
0 ·6 ---
0.7 4.0 2.0
0.5
0.5
3.0 3.0
0.4 0.4
2.0 2.0
0.3 0.3
1.5
0.6 0. 2
0.2
10 1.0
0.1
i
�
0.1
0 0.5 0 _ '·0
(a) (b)
Braced Unbraced
'I' = Ratio of I:(EI/Icl of compression members to L(EI/1 J of flexural members in a plane at

one end of a compression member
'I'A = Value of 'I' at end A
'Irs = Value of 'I' at end B
k = Effective length factor
Fig. 6.6.2 Effective Length Factors
and
05 = �P
�1.0 (6.3.6)
1 ---u-
rp I Per
in which
(6.3.7)
IP u and I Pcr are the summations for all columns in a storey.

Part 6
Structural Design
For frames not braced against side sway, both 8b and 85 shall be computed.
For frames braced against side sway, 85 shall be taken as 1.0. In the calculation of P cr' k shall be
computed according to Sec 6.3.8.2(a) for 8b and according to Sec 6.3.8.2(b) for 85•
b) In lieu of a more accurate calculation, EI in Eq (6.3.7) may be determined by either
0.2E,Ig +E515e
EI =
(6.3.8)
1+f3d
or by the more conservative expression
o. 4 E,I g
EI = _ _ _ _ "- (6.3.9)
1+f3d
c) For members braced against side sway and without transverse loads between supports, Cm in Eq (6.3.5)
may be taken as
(6.3.10)
For all other cases, Cm shall be taken as 1.0.
d) If computations show that there is no moment at both ends of a braced compression member or that
computed end eccentricities are less than (15 + 0.03h) mm, M2b in Eq (6.3.4) shall be based on a minimum
eccentricity of (15 + 0.03h) mm about each principal axis separately. The ratio Mu/M2b for calculating
Cm in Eq (6.3.10) shall be determined by either of the following:
i) When computed end eccentricities are present but less than (15 +0.03h) mm, computed end
moments snail be used to evaluate Mu/M2b for calculating Cm.
ii) If computations show that there is essentially no moment at both ends of the member, the ratio
M11IM2b shall be taken equal to one.
e) If computations show that there is no moment at both ends of a compression member not braced against
side sway or that computed end eccentricities are less than (15 + 0.03h) mm, M25 in Eq (6.3.4) shall be
based on a minimum eccentricity of (15 + 0.03h) mm, about each principal axis separately.
6.3.8.6 Moment Magnification for Flexural Members : Flexural members shall be designed for the total
magnified end moments of the compression members at the joint, for frames not braced against side sway.
6.3.8.7 Moment Magnifier 8 for Biaxial Bending : For compression members subject to bending about
both principal axes, moment about each axis shall be magnified by 8, computed from corresponding
conditions of restraint about that axis.
6.3.9 Transmission of Column Loads through Floor System

When the specified compressive strength of concrete in a column is greater than 1.4 times that specified for a
floor system, transmission of column loads through the floor system shall be provided by one of the
following : . . ··•
6.3.9.1 The concrete having strength specified for the column shall be placed in the floor system over the
column area and in the slab around the column for a distance of 600 mm from the face of the column measured
at the top surface of the slab. Column concrete shall be well integrated with floor concrete, and shall be
placed in accordance with Sec 5.16.4.5 and 5.16.4.6.
6.3.9.2 Strength of a column through a floor system shall be based on the lower value of concrete strength
with vertical dowels and spirals as required.
6.3.9.3 For columns laterally supported on four sides by beams of approximately equal depth or by slabs,
strength of the column may be based on a composite value of concrete strength equal to 75 per cent of colurrm
concrete strength plus 35 percent of floor concrete strength.
6.3.10 Composite Columns

6.3.10.1 Composite columns shall include all such members reinforced longitudinally with structural steel
shapes, pipe, or tubing with or without longitudinal bars.
6.3.10.2 Strength of columns shall be computed for the same limiting conditions applicable to ordinary
reinforced concrete members.
6-162
Chapter 6
6.3.10.3 Any axial load assigned to concrete of a composite member shall be transferred to the concrete by
members or brackets in directbearing on the concrete of the composite member.
6.3.10.4 All axial load not assigned to concrete of a composite member shall be devel0ped by direct
connection to the structural steel sbape, pipe, or tube.
6.3.10.5 For evaluation of slenderness effects, radius of gyration of a composite section shall be not greater
than the value given by:
(o.2Ecig)+E5It
r= (6.3.11)
( 0.2EcAg) +E5At
6.3.10.6 In lieu of a more accurate calculation, the parameter EI in Eq (6.3.7) may be taken either from
Eq (6.3.9) or by
(6.3.12)
6.3.10.7 Structural Steel Encased Concrete Core

a) For a composite member with concrete core encased by structural steel, thickness of the steel encasement
shall be not less than
b l ::5) for each face of width b
nor
h �( ::5 ) for circular sections of diameter h
b) �
Long tudinal bars located within the encased concrete core may be considered in computing At and It.
6.3.10.8 Spiral Reinforcement around Structural Steel Core : A composite member with spiral
reinforced concrete around a structural steel core shall conform to the following:
a) Compressive strength of concrete f� shall be at least 20 Nlmm2.
b)
structural steel used but not to exceed 350 Nlmm2 ·
Design yield strength of structural steel core shall be the specified minimum yield strength for grade of
c) Longitudinal bars located within the spiral shall be not less than 0.01 nor more than 0.08 times net area
of concrete section, and may be considered in computing At and It·
6.3.10.9 Tie Reinforcement around Structural Steel Core : A composite member with laterally tied
concrete around a structural steel core shall conform to the following :
a) Compressive strength of concrete f� shall be not less than 20 N I mm2•
b) Design yield strength of structural steel core shall be the specified minimum yield strength for grade of
structural steel used but not to exceed 350 N I mm2•
c) Lateral ties shall extend completely around the structural steel core.
d) Lateral ties shall have a diameter not less than fo times the greatest side dimension of composite member,
except that ties shall be not smaller than 10 mm (j> and not larger than 16 mm �.
e) Vertical spacing of lateral ties shall not exceed 16 longitudinal bar diameters, 48 tie bar diameters, or t
times the least side dimension of the composite member.

Part 6
Structural Design
f) Longitudinal bars located within the ties shall be not less than 0.01 nor more than 0.08 times net area of
concrete section, and may be considered in computing At for strength but not in computing It for
evaluation of slenderness effects.
g) A longitudinal bar shall be located ctt every comer of a rectan�ular cross-section, with other
longitudinal bars spaced not farther apart than one-half the least s1de dimension of the composite
me.rilber.
6.4 FLAT PLATES, FLAT SLABS AND EDGE-SUPPORTED SLABS
6.4.1 Scope
The provisions of this section shall apply to all slabs, solid, ribbed or hollow, spanning in more than one
direction, with or without beams between the supports. Flat plate is a term normally attributed to slabs
without beams and without drop panels, column capitals, or brackets. On the other hand, slabs without
beams, but with drop panels, column capital or brackets are commonly known as flat slabs. While this
section covers the requirements for all types of slabs, the provisions of Sec 6.5, Alternative Design of Two
way Edge-Supportea slabs, may be used as an alternative for slabs supported on all four edges by walls,
steel beams or monolithic concrete beams having a total depth not less than 3 times the slab thickness.
6.4.2 Notation and Definitions

6.4.2.1 Notation
Av area of shear reinforcement within a distances
b0 = perimeter of the critical section defined in Sec 6.4.7.1(b)
b1 width of the critical section measured in the direction of the span for which moments are
determined .
width of the critical section measured in the direction perpendicular to b1
size of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital or bracket measured in the direction
of the span for which moments are being determined
size of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital, or bracket measured transverse to
the direction of the span for which moments are bein� determined
c cross-sectional constant to define torsional properties
d distance from extreme compression fibre to the centroid of longitudinal tension reinforcement, (For
circular sections, d need not be less than the distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of
tension reinforcement in opposite half of member)
overall thickness of member
total depth of shearhead cross-section
moment of inertia about centroidal axis of gross section of slab
h3/12 times width of slab defined in notations a and f3t
flexural stiffness of beam, moment per unit rotation
= flexural stiffness of column, moment per unit rotation
flexural stiffness of slab, moment per unit rotation
torsional stiffness of torsional member, moment per unit rotation
= length of span in direction that moments are being determined, measured centre to centre of
supports
= length of span transverse to £1, measured centre to centre of supports
length of clear span in direction that moments are being determined, measured face to face of
supports
length of shearhead arm from centroid of concentrated load or reaction
total factored static moment
required plastic moment strength of shearhead cross-section
factored moment at section
moment resistance contributed by shearhead reinforcement
nominal shear strength provided by concrete
factored shear force at section
= factored dead load per unit area
= factored live load per unit area
Wu factored load per unit area
X shorter overall dimension of rectangular part of cross-section
y longer overall dimension of rectangular part of cross-section
a ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural stiffness of a width of slab bounded laterally
by centre lines of adjacent panels (if any) on each side of the beam
Ecblb
6-164
Chapter 6
ac ratio of flexural stiffness of columns above and below the slab to combined flexural stiffness of
the slabs and beams at a joint taken in the direction of the span for which moments are being
determined
L,Kc
L, +Kb)
(K5
am average value of a for all beams on edges of a panel
amm minirntnn ac to satisfy .Sec 6.4.5.9(a)
a5 constant used to compute Vc in slabs and footings
a1 a in direction of £1
a2 a in direction of £2
av ratio of stiffness of shearhead arm to surrounding composite slab section
f3 ratio of clear spans in long to short direction of two-way slabs
f3a ratio of dead load per unit area to live load per unit area (in each case without load factors)
f3c ratio of long side to short side of column, concentrated load or reaction area
/31 .
ratio of torsional stiffness of edge beam section to flexural stiffness of width of slab equal to span
length of beam, centre to centre of supports
Ecbc
2Ecsls
Yj fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by flexure at slab-column connections
yv fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by eccentricity of shear at slab-column connections

o5 factor defined by Eq (6.4.7)
TJ number of identical arms of shearhead
6.4.2.2 Definitions : For the purpose of this section the following definitions shall apply.
COLUMN STRIP : Column strip is a design strip with a width on each side on a column centre line equal to
0.25£2 or 0.25£1, whichever is less.
MIDDLE STRIP: Middle strip is a design strip bounded by two column strips.
PANEL : A panel is bounded by column or wall centre lines on all sides.
6.4.3 Proportioning
6.4.3.1 Thickness of slabs shall satisfy the most restrictive of the requirements of (a), (b), and (c) below.
a) This provision shall apply to flat slabs and flat plates only. Minimum thickness of such slabs shall be in
accordance with the provisions of Table 6.6.5 and shall not be less than the following values :
i) Slabs with drop panel satisfying the

requirements of Sec 6.4.3.2. 100 rnrn
ii) Slabs without drop panel 125 rnrn
Table 6.6.5
Minimum Thickness of Slab without Interior Beams
Without Drop Panels (Note 2) With Drop Panels (Note 2)

Yield
Stress Exterior panels Interior Exterior panels Interior
panels panels
!y,N/rnrn2 Without With edge Without With edge
(Note 1) edge beams beams edge beams beams
(Note 3) (Note�
2 50 fn fn t._ fn fn t._
33 36 36 36 40 40
410 t._ t._ t._ .!..n. t._ t._
30 33 33 33 36 36
Note:
For values of reinforcement yield stress between 250 N/mm and 410 N/mm minimum thickness shall be
2 2
1)
obtained by linear interpolation.
2) Drop panels shall satis fy the requirements of Sec 6.4.3.2.
3) For slabs with beams between columns along exterior edges, the value of a for the edge beam shall not be
less than 0.8.

Part 6
Structural Design
b) Minimwn thickness of all types of slabs having a ratio of long to short span not exceeding 2.0 shall be
(6.4.1)
but not less than
(6.4.2)
and need not be more than
h
ln(O.B+ fy /1400 )
= __..::._
..._ ;;...__..:.. (6.4.3)
36
The values obtained from Eq (6.4.1), (6.4.2) or (6.4.3) shall be modified as required by (d) and (e) below
but in no case shall the thickness be less than .
i) for am < 2.0 125mm

ii) for am � 2.0 90mm
c) Slab thickness less than the minimum thickness required by (a) and _(b) above may be used if shown by
computation that deflection will not exceed the fimits stipulated in. Table 6.6.4. Deflections shall be
computed taking into account size and shape of panels, coni:iitions of support, and nature of restraint at
panel edges. Effective moment of inertia shall be that given by Eq (6.2.36). Additional long-term deflection
shall be computed in accordance with Sec 6.2.10.6.
d) For flat slabs with drop panels extending in each direction from centre line of support a distance not less
than one sixth the span length in that direction measured centre to centre of supports and having a
projection below the slab aUeast one-quarter the slab thickness, the thickness required by Eq (6.4.1),
(6.4.2) or (6.4.3) may be reduced by �0 percent.
e) At discontinuous edges, an edge beam shall be provided with a stiffness ratio a not less than 0.8, or the
minimum thickness required by Eq (6.4.1), (6.4.2) or (6.4.3) shall be increased by at least 10 per cent in the
panel with a discontinuous edge.
6.4.3.2 Size of drop panel when provided shall be in accordance with the following:
a) Drop panel shall extend in each direction from centre line of support a distance not less than one-sixth
the span length measured from centre to centre of supports in that direction.
b) Projection of drop panel below the slab shall be at least one-quarter the slab thickness.
c) In computing the required slab reinforcement, thickness of drop panel below the slab shall not be
assumei:i greater than one quarter the distance from edge of drop panel to edge of column or column
capital.
6.4.3.3 When column capitals are provided, that portion of the column head which lies within the largest
circular cone or a pyramid that has a vertex angle of 90° and can be included entirely within the outlines of
the column and the column head, shall be considered for design purposes.
6.4.4 Design Procedures

6.4.4.1 Slab system may be designed by any procedure satisfying conditions of equilibriwn and geometric
compatibility provided that the d�ign strengtli at every section is at least equal to tne required strength and
that all serviceability conditions, including specified limit on deflections are met.
6.4.4.2 For gravity loads, the slab S}'Stem may be designed by either the Direct Design Method of
Sec 6.4.5 or the Equivalent Frame Methoi:i of Sec 6.4.6.
6.4.4.3 For lateral loads, analysis of unbraced frame shall take into account the effects of cracking and
reinforcement on the stiffness of frame members.
6.4.4.4 Results of the gravity load analysis may be combined with results of the lateral load analysis.
6.4.4.5 When gravity load, wind, earthquake or other lateral forces cause transfer of moment between slab
and column, a fraction of the unbalanced moment shall be transferred by flexure in accordance with (b) and
(c) below.
6-166
Chapter 6
a) Fraction of unbalanced moment not transferred by flexure shall be transferred by eccentricity of shear in
b) A fraction of the unbalanced moment given by r Mu shall be considered to be transferred by flexure

J
within an effective slab width between lines that are one and one-half slab or drop panel thickness
(1.5h) outside opposite faces of the column or capital where Mu is the moment to be transferred and
(6.4.4)
c) Concentration of reinforcement over the column by closer spacing or additional reinforcement shall be
used to resist moment on the effective slab width defined in (b) above.
6.4.4.6 Desi�n for transfer of load from slab to supporting columns or walls through shear shall be in
accordance w1th Sec 6.4.7.
6.4.4.7 For monolithic or fully com osite construction, a beam includes that portion of slab on each side of
r
the beam extending a distance equa to the projection of the beam above or below the slab, whichever is
greater, but not greater than four trmes the slab thickness.
6.4.5 Direct Design Method

6.4.5.1 Limitations : Slab systems within the following limitations may be designed by the Direct Design
Method.
a) There shall be a minimum of three continuous spans in each direction.
b) Panels shall be rectangular with a ratio of longer to shorter span centre to centre of supports not greater
than2.
c) Successive span lengths centre to centre of supports in each direction shall not differ by more than one
third the longer span.
d) Columns may be offset a maximum of 10 percent of the span (in the direction of offset) from either axis
between centre lines of successive columns.
e) All loads shall be due to gravity only and uniformly distributed over an entire panel. Live load shall not
exceed three times dead load.
f) Moment redistribution as permitted by Sec 6.2.5.3 shall not be applied for slab systems designed by the
Direct Design Method. Factored moments may, however, be modified in accordance with Sec 6.4.5.7.
6.4.5.2 Total Factored Static Moment for a Span

a) Total factored static moment for a span shall be determined in a strip bounded laterally by centre lines of
panel on each side of the supports.
b) Absolute sum of positive and average negative factored moments in each direction shall not be less than
.
2
ul2ln
M -W (6 . 4 . 5)
o- 8
c) Where the transverse span of panels on either side of the centre line of supports varies, £2 in Eq (6 .4. 5 )
shall be taken as the average of adjacent transverse spans.
d) When the span adjacent and parallel to an edge is being considered, the distance from edge to panel
centre-line shall be substituted for £2 in Eq (6.4.5).
e) Clear span l n shall extend from face to face of columns, capitals, brackets or walls. Value of l11 used in
Eq (6.4.5) shall not be less than 0.65£1. Circular or regular polygon shaped supports shall be treated as
square supports with the same area.
6.4.5.3 Negative and Positive Factored Moments

a) Negative factored moments shall be located at the face of rectangular supports. Circular or regular
polygon shaped supports shall be treated as square supports with the same area.
b) In an interior span, total static moment M0 shall be distributed as follows:
Negative factored moment 0.65 M0

Positive factored moment 0.35 M0

Part 6
Structural Design
c) In an end span, the total factored static moment M0 shall be distributed as specified in Table 6.6.6.
Table 6.6.6
Distribution of Factored Moment in End Span
Exterior Edge Slab with Slab Without Exterior

Position of Moment Unrestrained Beams Beams between Edge Fully
between all Interior Supports Restrained
Supports
Without With
Ed g e Edge
Beam Bea m
Interior negative
factored moment 0.75 0.7 0.70 0.70 0.65
Positive factored
II"OIIH1t 0.63 0.57 0.52 0.50 0.35
Exterior negative 0 0.16 0.26 0.30 0.65
factored moment
d) Negative moment sections shall be designed to resist the larger of the two interior negative factored
moments determined for span framing into a common support Unless an analysis is made to distribute the
unbalanced moment in accordance with stiffness of adjoining elements.
e) Edge beams or edges of slabs shall be proportioned to resist in torsion their share of exterior negative
factored moments.
f) For moment transfer between slab and edge column in accordance with Sec 6.4.4.5(a), column strip
nominal moment strength provided shall be used as the transfer moment for gravity load.
6.4.5.4 Factored Moments in Column Strips

a) Column strips shall b e proportioned t o resist the following portions i n percent o f interior negative
factored moments specified in Table 6.6.7.
Table 6.6.7
Portions of Interior Negative Moments to be Resisted by Column Strip
f.2/f.t 0.5 1.0 2.0

75 75 75
(at f.2/f.I)=O
(a1f.2/f.I}�1 90 75 45
Note: Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown.
b) Column strips shall be proportioned to resist the portions in percent of exterior negative factored
moments specified in Table 6.6.8.
Table 6.6.8
Portions of Exterior Negative Moments to be Resisted by Column Strip
II 0.5 1.0 2.0

II
(al f.2/f.I)=O f3 1 =
0 100 100 100
{3 f � 2.5 75 75 75
f3 f =
0 100 100 100
(a1f.2/f.I)�1 {3 1 � 2.5 90 75 45
Note : Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown.
c) Where supports consist of columns or walls extending for a distance equal to or greater than three
quarters the span length f.2 used to compute M0, negative moments shall be considered to be uniformly
distributed across f.2.
6-168
Chapter 6
d) Column strips shall be proportioned to resist the portions in percent of positive factored moments
Table 6.6.9
Portions of Positive Moment to be Resisted by Column Strip
l2/lt 0.5 1.0 2.0
(a1l2/lt}=O 60 60 60
(a1l2/lt) � 1 90 75 45
Note : Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown.
6.4.5.5 Factored Moments in Beams

a) Beams between supports shall be proportioned to resist 85 per cent of column strip moments if
(a1l2/lt) is equal to or greater than 1.0
b) For values of {a1l2/lt) between 1.0 and zero, proportion of column strip moments resisted by beams
shall be obtained by linear interpolation between 85 and zero percent.
c) In addition to moments calculated for uniform loads according to Sec 6.4.5.2 and 6.4.5.5 (a) and (b)
above, beams shall be proportioned to resist all moments causedby concentrated or linear loads applied
directly to beams, including weight of projecting beam stem above or below the slab.
6.4.5.6 Factored Moments in Middle Strip

a) That portion of negative and positive factored moments not resisted by column strips shall be
proportionately assigned to corresponding half middle strips.
b) Each middle strip shall be proportioned to resist the sum of the moments assigned to its two half middle
strips.
c) A middle strip adjacent to and parallel with an edge supported by a wall shall be proportioned to resist
twice the moment assigned to the half middle strip corresponding to the first row ofinterior sup1-.->rts.
6.4.5.7 Modification of Factored Moments : Negative and positive factored moments may be modified by
10percent provided the total static moment for a panel in the direction considered is not less than that
required by Eq (6.4.5).
6.4.5.8 Factored Moments in Columns and Walls

a) Columns and walls built integrally with a slab system shall resist moments caused by factored loads on
the slab system.
b) At an interior support, supporting elements above and below the slab shall resist the moment specified by
Eq (6.4.6) in direct proportion to the stiffness unless general analysis is made.
(6.4.6)
where wd 'l2 and l� refer to shorter span.

6.4.5.9 Provisions for Effects of Pattern Loadings : Where ratio /Ja of dead load to live load is less than
2.0,
one of the following conditions shall be satisfied.
a) Sum of flexural stiffness of the columns above and below the slab shall be such that ac is not less than
a min specified in Table 6.6.10.
b) If a c for the columns above and below the slab is less than amm, specified in Table 6.6.10, positive
factored moments in panels supported by such column shall be multiplied by the coefficient o 5 determined
from Eq (6.4.7).
2 f3a
os =1+ - (1-a c /a rrun )
·
(6.4.7�
4+f3a
where f3a is the ratio of service dead load to service live load, per unit area.

Part 6
Structural Design
Table 6.6.10
Values of a min
Aspect Ratio Relative Beam Stiffness, a

f3a
f2/ft 0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0
2.0 0.5-2.0 0 0 0 0 0
0.5 0.6 0 0 0 0
0.8 0.7 0 0 0 0
1.0 1.0 0.7 0.1 0 0 0
1.25 0.8 0.4 0 0 0
2.0 1.2 0.5 0.2 0 0
0.5 1.3 0.3 0 0 0

0.8 1.5 0.5 0.2 0 0
0.5 1.0 1.6 0.6 0.2 0 0
1.25 1.9 1.0 0.5 0 0
2.0 4.9 1.6 0.8 0.3 0
0.5 1.8 0.5 0.1 0 0

0.8 2.0 0.9 0.3 0 0
0.33 1.0 2.3 0.9 0.4 0 0
1.25 2.8 1.5 0.8 0.2 0
2.0 13.0 2.6 1.2 0.5 0.3
6.4.6 Equivalent Frame Method

6.4.6.1 Design of slab systems by the Equivalent Frame Method shall be based on assumptions given in (a)
through (f) below, and all sections of slabs and supporting members shall be designed for moments and shears
thus obtained.
a) The structure shall be considered to be made up of equivalent frames on column lines taken longitudinally
and transversely through the building.
b) Each frame shall consist of a row of columns or supports and slab strips, bounded laterally by the centre
line of panel on each side of the centre line of colunms or supports.
c) Columns or supports shall be assumed to be attached to slab strips by torsional members, (Sec 6.4.6.4),
transverse to the direction of the span for which moments are being determined and extending to bounding
lateral panel centrelines on each side of a column.
d) Frames adjacent and parallel to an edge shall be bounded by that edge and the centre line of adjacent
panel.
e) Each equivalent frame may be analyzed in its entirety, or for �avity loading, each floor and the roof may
be analyzed separately with far ends of columns considered fixed. .
f) Where slabs are analyzed separately, it may be assumed in determining moment at a � ven support that
the slab is fixed at any support two panel distance therefrom, provided the slab contmues beyond that
point.
6.4.6.2 Slab-beams
a) Moment o f inertia o f slab-beams a t any cross-section outside o f joints o r column capitals may b e based on
the gross area of concrete.
b) Variation in moment of inertia along axis of slab-beams shall be taken into account.
c) Moment of inertia of slab-beams from centre of column to face of column, bracket or capital shall be
assumed to be equal to the moment of inertia of the slab beams at face of column, bracket or capital
divided by the quantity (1- c2/f 2 ) 2 , where c2 and f2 are measured transverse to the direction of the
span for which moments are being determined.
6.4.6.3 Columns
a) Moment o f inertia o f columns at any cross-section outside o f joints o r column capitals m a y b e based o n
the gross area o f concrete.
• b) Variation in moment of inertia along axis of column shall be taken into account.
c) Moment of inertia of colunms from top to bottom of the slab-beam at a joint shall be assumed infinite.
6-170
Chapter 6
6.4.6.4 Torsional Members

a) Torsional members (Sec 6.4.6.1(c)) shall be assumed to have a constant cross-section throughout their
length consisting of the larger of
i) A portion of slab having a width equal to that of the column, bracket or capital in the direction of
the span for which moments are being determined.
ii) For monolithic or fully comJ>Osite construction, the portion of slab specified in (i) above plus that
part of the transverse beam above and below the slao.
iii) Transverse beam as defined in Sec 6.4.4.7.
b) Stiffness K1 of the torsional members shall be calculated by the following expression:
(6.4.8)
where c2 and /2 relate to the transverse span on each side of column.
c) The constant C in Eq (6.4.8) may be evaluated for the cross-section by dividing it into separate
rectangular parts and carrying out the following summation:
(6.4.9)
6.4.6.5 Arrangement of Live Load

a) When loading pattern is known, the equivalent frame shall be analyzed for that load.
b) When live load is variable, but does not exceed three-quarters of the dead load, or the nature of live load
is such that all panels will be loaded simultaneously, maximum factored moments may be assumed to
occur at all sectiOns with full factored live loads on the entire slab system.
c) For loading conditions other than those defined in {b) above, maximum positive factored moment near
midspan of a panel may be assumed to occur with three quarters of the full factored live load on the panel
and on alternate panels. The maximum negative factored moment in the slab at a support may be assumed
to occur with three quarters of the full live load on adjacent panels only.
d) Factored moments shall be taken not less than those occurring with full factored live load on all panels.
,
6.4.6.6 Factored Moments .
a) At interior supports, critical sections for negative factored moments (in both column and middle strips)
shall be taken at face of rectilinear supports, but not greater than 0.175!1 from centre of a column.
b) At exterior supports provided with brackets or capitals, critical sections for negative factored moment in
the span perpendicular to an edge shall be taken at a distance from face of supporting element not greater
than one-balf the projection of bracket or capital beyond face of supporting efement.
c) Circular or re�lar polygon shaped supports shall be treated as square support with the same area for
location of critical section for negative design moment.
d) Slab systems within limitations of Sec 6.4.5.1, when analyzed by the Equivalent Frame Method, may have
resultmg computed moments reduced in such proJ>ortion that the absolute sum of the positive and average
negative moments used in design need not exceed the value obtained from Eq (6.4.5).
e) Moment at critical sections across the slab-beam strip of each frame may be distributed to column strips,
beams and middle strips as provided in Sec 6.4.5.4, 6.4.5.5 and 6.4.5.6.
6.4.7 S hear
6.4.7.1 The shear strength of slabs in the vicinity of columns, concentrated loads or reactions is governed by
the more severe of two conditions:
a) Beam action where each critical section t o b e investigated extends i n a plane across the entire width. For
beam action, the slab shall be designed in accordance with Sec 6.2.7.1 tfirough 6.2.7.4.
b) Two-way action where each of the critical sections to be investigated shall be located so that its
perimeter b0 is a minimum but need not approach closer than d/2 to:
i) Edges or comers of columns, concentrated loads or reaction areas, or

Part 6
Structural Design
ii) Changes in slab thickness such as edges of capitals or drop panels.
For two-way action the slab shall be designed in accordance with Sec 6.4.7.2 through 6.4.7.5 and 6.4.9.
6.4.7.2 Design of slabs for two-way action shall be based on Eq {6.2.14) and (6.2.15). Unless shear
reinforcement is provided V, shall be the smallest of :
a) (
V, =0.17 1+2/f3, )-Jflb0d (6.4.10a)
b) V, =0.1 < �:d )-Jfl

1+ b0d (6.4.10b)
where as = 20 for interior columns

15 for edge columns, and
= 10 for comer columns
and
c) V, =0.33 -Jflb0d (6.4.10c)
where /3, is the ratio of long side to short side of concentrated load or reaction area and b0 is perimeter of
critical section.
6.4.7.3 Shear reinforcement consisting of bars or wires may be used in slabs in accordance with the
following:
a) Shear strength Vn shall be computed by Eq (6.2.15), where shear strength V, shall be in accordance with
(d) below, and shear strength V5 shall be in accordance with (e below. )
b) Shear strength Vn shall not be taken greater than 0. 5 -Jflb0d.
c) Shear strength shall be investigated at the critical section defined in Sec 6.4.7.1{b) and at successive
sections more distant from the support.
d) Shear strength V, at any section shall not be taken greater than 0.17 -Jflb0d.
e) Where factored shear force Vu exceeds shear strength 1/J V, as given in (d) above, required area Av and
shear strength V5 of shear reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with Sec 6.2.7.4 and anchored
in accordance with Sec 8.2.10.
6.4.7.4 Shear reinforcement consisting of steel I- or channel-shaped sections (shearheads) is permitted in

slabs. The provisions of (a) through (j) below shall apply where shear due to gravity load is transferred at
interior column supports. Where moment is transferred to column, Sec 6.4.7.5 shall apply.
a) Each shearhead shall consist of steel shapes fabricated by welding with a full penetration weld into
identical arms at right angles. Shearhead arms shall not be interruptea within the column section.
b) A shearhead shall not be deeper than 70 times the web thickness of the steel shape.
c) The ends of each shearhead arm may be cut at angles not less than 30 degree with the horizontal,
provided the plastic moment strength of the remaining tapered section is adequate to resist the shear force
attributed to that arm of the shearnead.
d) All compression flanges of steel shapes shall be located within 0.3d of compression surface of slab.
e) The ratio av between the stiffness of each shearhead arm and that of the surrounding composite cracked
slab section of width ( c2 )
+d shall not be less than 0.15.
f) The plastic moment strength Mp required for each arm of the shearhead shall be computed by.
6-172
Chapter 6
(6.4.11)
where if' is the strength reduction factor for flexure, 11 is the number of arms, and lv is the minimum
length of each shearhead arm required to comply with the requirements of (g) and (h) below.
g) The critical slab section for shear shall be perpendicular to the plane of the slab and shall cross each
shearhead arm at three-quarters the distance ( lv"'" i) from the column face to the end of the shearhead
arm. The critical section shall be located so that its perimeter b0 is a minimum, but need not be closer than
the perimeter defined in Sec 6.4.7.1(b).
h) Vn shall not be taken greater than 0.33 ..fl[b0d , on the critical section defined in (g) above. When
shearhead reinforcement is provided, Vn shall not be taken greater than 0.58 ..jf;b0d, on the critical
section defined in Sec 6.4.7.1(b).
j) A shearhead may be assumed to contribute a moment resistance Mv to each slab column strip computed by
if' v u
M v = a V l v _E!_
211 2
( ) (6.4.12)
However, Mv shall not be taken larger than the smaller of:
i) 30 per cent of the total factored moment required for each slab column strip,
ii) the change in coltimn strip moment over the length l v,
iii) the value of Mp computed by Eq (6.4.11).
k) When unbalanced moments are considered the shearhead must have adequate anchorage to transmit Mp
to column.
6.4.7;5 Transfer of Moment in Slab-Column Connections

a) When gravity load, wind, earthquake or other lateral forces cause transfer of unbalanced moment M11
between a slab and a column, an amount r1Mu of the unbalanced moment shall be transferred by flexure
in accordance with Sec 6.4.4.5. The remainder of the unbalanced moment given by rvMu shall be
considered to be transferred by eccentricity of shear about the centroid of the critical section defined in
Sec 6.4.7.1(b), where
1
(6.4.1 3)
b) The shear stress resulting from moment transfer by eccentricity of shear shall be assumed to vary linearly
about the centroid of the critical section defined m Sec 6.4.7.1(b). The maximum shear stress due to the
factored shear force and moment shall not exceed if'vn.
For members without shear reinforcement:
(6.4.14)
For members with shear reinforcement other than shearheads :
(6.4.15)
If shear reinforcement is provided, the design shall take into account the variation of shear stress around
the column.
c) When shear reinforcement consisting of steel 1- or channel shaped sections (shearheads) is provided, the
sum of the shear stress due to vertical load acting on the critical section defined by Sec 6.4.7.4 (g), and

Part 6
Structural Des ign
the shear stress resulting from moment transferred by eccentricity of shear about the centroid of the
critical section, defined in Sec 6.4.7.1{b), shall not exceed 0.33l/J .JK .
6.4.7.6 Factored Shear in Slab Systems with Beams
a) Beams with (a1 l2/tt) equal to or greater than 1.0 shall be proportioned to resist shear caused by
factored loads on tributary areas bounded by 45 deg lines drawn from the comers of the panels and the
centre lines of the adjacent panels parallel to the long sides as shown in Fig 6.6.3.
b) Beams with (a1 l2ft1) less than 1.0 may be proportioned to' resist s hear obtained by linear
interpolation, assuming beams carry no load at a = 0.
Fig. 6.6.3 Tributary Area for Shear on an Interior Beam
c) In addition to shears calculated according to (a) and (b) above, beams shall be proportioned to resist
shears caused by factored loads applied directly on beams.
d) Slab shear strength may be computed on the assumption that load is distributed to supporting beams in
accordance with (a) or (b) above. Resistance to total shear occurring on a panel shall be provided:
e) Shear strength shall satisfy requirements of Sec 6.2.7.
6.4.8 Reinforcement
6.4.8.1 Area of reinforcement in each direction for slab systems shall be determined from moments at critical
sections but shall not be less than that required by Sec 8.1.12.
6.4.8.2 Spacing of reinforcement at critical�ections shall not exceed two times the slab thickness, except for
portions of sla6 area that may be of cellular or ribbed construction. In the slab over cellular spaces,
reinforcement shall be provided as required by Sec 8.1.12.
6.4.8.3 Positive moment reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous edge shall extend to the edge of slab
and have embedment, straight or hooked, at feast 150 mm in spandrel beams, columns, or walls.
·
6.4.8.4 Negative moment reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous edge shall be bent, hooked or
otherwise anchored, in spandrel beams, columns, or walls, to be developed at face of support according to
provisions of Sec 8.2.
6.4.8.5 Where a slab is not supported by a spandrel beam or wall at a discontinuous edge, or where a slab
cantilevers beyond the support, anchorage of reinforcement may be within the slab.
6.4.8.6 In slabs with beams between supports with a value of a greater than 1.0, special top and bottom
slab reinforcement shall be provided at exterior comers in accordance with the following :
a) The special reinforcement in both top and bottom of slab shall be sufficient to resist a moment equal to the
maximum positive moment (per metre of width) in the slab.
.
6-174
Chapter 6
b) Direction of moment shall be assumed parallel to the diagonal from the corner in the top of the slab and
perpendicular to the diagonal in the bottom of the slab.
c) The special reinforcement shall be provided for a distance in each direction from the corner equal to one·
fifth the longer span.
d) In either the top or bottom of the slab, the special reinforcement may be placed in a single band in the
direction of the moment or in two bands parallel to the sides of the slab.
6.4.8.7 Details of Reinforcement in Slabs without Beams

a ) I n addition t o the other requirements o f this section, reinforcement in slabs without beams shall have
minimum extensions as shown in Fig 6.6.4.
b) Where adjacent spans are unequal, extensions of negative moment reinforcement beyond the face of
support as shown in Fig 6.6.4 shall be based on requirements of the longer span.
c) Bent bars may be used only when depth-span ratio permits use of b ends 45 degrees or less.
d) For slabs in frames not braced against side sway, lengths of reinforcement shall be determined by
analysis but shall not be less than those prescribed in Fig 6.6.4.
e) At least two of the column strip bottom bars in each direction shall be continuous or spliced ilt the
support with Class A splices or anchored within support. These bars shall pass through the column and
shall be placed within the column core.
6.4.9 Openings
6.4.9.1 Openings of any size may be provided in slab systems if shown by analysis that the design strength
is at least equal to the required strength and that specified limits on deflections are met.
6.4.9.2 In lieu of special analysis as required by Sec 6.4.9.1 above, openings may be provided in slab systems
only in accordance with the fo1lowing:
a) Openings of any size may be located in area common to intersecting middle strips, provided that the total
amount of reinforcement required for the panel without the opening is maintained.
b) In the area common to intersecting column strips, not more than one-eighth of the width of column strip in
either span shall be interrupted by openings. An amount of reinforcement equivalent to that interrupted
by an opening shall be added on the sides of the opening.
c) In the area common to one column strip and one middle strip, not more than one-quarter of the
reinforcement in either stri_p shall be interrupted by openings. An amount of reinforcement equivalent to
that interrupted by an operung shall be added on the Sides of the opening.
d) When opening in slabs are located at a distance less than 10 times the slab thickness from a conc�ntrated
load or reaction area or when openings in slabs are located within column strip, the critical sections for
shear defined in 6.4.7.1(b) and 6.4 .7.4 (g) shall be modified as follows:
i) For slabs without shearheads, that part o f the perimeter of the critical section that is enclosed by
straight lines projecting from the centroid of the column, concentrated load or reaction area and
tangent to the boundaries of the openings shall be considered ineffective.
ii) For slabs with shearheads, the ineffective portion of the perimeter shall be one-half of that defined
in (i) above.
6.5 ALTERNATIVE DESIGN OF TWO-WAY EDGE-SUPPORTED SLABS
6.5.1 Notation
Ca, Cb moment coefficients
la length of clear span in short direction
lb length of clear span in long direction

Ma moment in the short direction
Mb moment in the long direction
w uniform load
ll length of clear spao in direction that moment are being determined
lz length of clear span transverse to £1

a ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural stiffness of a width of slab bounded
laterally by centre line of adjacent panels (if any) on each side of the beam. See Sec 6.4.2.1
a in the direction of £1.

'1' (ll�
J-l
""Ill
'I .... "''
0'1 Minimum s: ....
c
Per cent of �0'1
·� .Q Without Drop Panels s:
(i) ;;; Steel at With Drop Panels ....
0
0
�
...J Section
0
.., 11)
cp· E----0.30 ln� � 0.30 ln ---?>
i:!!.
� 0.30 ln ----?>j !"'-;- 0.30 ln ______, ::s
� 50
� I I
... I I J'E- 0.20 I I
a.
0 fE- 0.20 ln _....,., j'E- 0.20 ln -? ln -'J>j !'E-0.20 ln-?
I: 1- j
s· a.
Remainder
I - I
§" ·;::
(i) t-
§ c
E �
1.. 1..
:::1 ...1 i J
� 0
(.)
- 75 mm max ---?>\
IE- �
� 50
�Max.0.125l1 24
(I) :I bar diameter or
g·
600 min all bars
J
mm
\�
E L
.E Max. 0.125�
(I) J.f_ Jt
0
00 Remainder
I j'E- I I
0' '--At least 2 bars continuous or anchored as required
...
1- Sac 6.4.8.7lcl
�\�\��150 mm---?j
�'''l
/LLL//�
In
j<E--150 mm
�\ill\�
�
r=''9
�
� ' Edge of drop
II
s·
p·��
0' I i'E---0.22 ln -----'J>j
I I
�
c:; a.
0
100
�
1-
I
�
a.
·;::
- (i)
Li ��M
s·
.,_j I
G)
'6
50 � I
Cl) :g �
:::!! E
--4:�-
i» .E
2" 0 Remainder �
r- Max. 0.15l Max.0.15 l 4
00
f--
�
f== "OM-1,=9
i i
s: I
a
'l � ====1
c:
-
i
Clear ssoan·ln Cio•
Face of support . Face of support

I I I
Centre to centre span-l Centre to centre span-l
r Exterior Support
INo slab Continuit )
y
)r Interior Support
!Continuity Provided)
Exterior Support
INo slab Continuity)
� � �
Chapter 6
6.5.2 Scope and Limitations

6.5.2.1 The provisions of this section may be used as alternative to those of Sec 6.4 for two-way slabs
supported on all four edges by walls, steel beams or monolithic concrete beams having a total depth not less
than 3 times the slab thickness.
6.5.2.2 Panels shall be rectangular with a ratio of longer to shorter span centre to centre of supports not
greater than 2. ·
.
6.5.2.3 The value of ( a11.2/l1) shall be greater than or equal to 1.
6.5.3 Analysis by the Coefficient Method

6.5.3.1 The negative moments and dead load and live load IJOSitive moments in the two directions shall be
computed from Tables 6.6.11, 6.6.12 and 6.6.13 respectively. Shear in the slab and loads on the supporting
beams shall be computed from Table 6.6.14.
6.5.4 Shear on Supporting Beam

The shear requirements provided in Sec 6.4.7.6 shall be satisfied.
6.5.5 Deflecti on
Thickness of slabs supported on walls or stiff beams on all sides shall satisfy the requirements of
Sec 6.4.3.1 (b) and (c).
Table 6.6.11
Coefficients for Negative Moments in Slabs t
Ma,neg Ca,negWl�
=
Mb,neg cb,negWl �
=
where w
=
total uniform dead plus live load per unit area
Ratio Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4 Case 5 Case 6 Case 7 Case 8 Case 9
a
D D u
I.
m=
7b
CJ 0 c=J c::::J c:J c:J
Ca,neg 0.045 0.050 0.075 0.071 0.033 0.061
1.00
cb nel!: 0.045 0.076 0.050 0.071 0.061 0.033
Ca,neg 0.050 0.055 0.079 0.075 0.038 0.065

0.95
cb nel!: 0.041 0.072 0.045 0.067 0.056 0.029
Ca,neg 0.055 0.060 0.080 0.079 0.043 0.06R

0.90
cb nel!: 0.037 0.070 0.040 0.062 0.052 0.025
Ca,neg 0.060 0.066 0.082 0.083 0.049 0.072

0.85
cb nel!: 0.031 0.065 0.034 0.057 0.046 0.021
Ca,neg 0.065 0.071 0.083 0.086 0.055 0.075

0.80
cb nel!: 0.027 0.061 0.029 0.051 0.041 0.017
Ca,neg 0.069 0.076 0.085 0.088 0.061 0.078

0.75
cb nel!: 0.022 0.056 0.024 0.044 0.036 0.014
Ca,neg 0.074 0.081 0.086 0.091 0.068 0.081

0.70
cb n� 0.017 0.050 0.019 0.038 0.029 0.011
Ca,neg 0.077 0.085 0.087 0.093 0.074 0.083

0.65
cb nel!: 0.014 0.043 O.Q15 0.031 0.024 0.008
Ca,neg 0.081 0.089 0.088 0.095 0.080 0.085

0.60
cb neg 0.010 0.035 0.011 0.024 0.018 0.006
Ca,neg 0.084 0.092 0.089 0.096 0.085 0.086

0.55
cb neg 0.007 0.028 0.008 0.019 0.014 0.005
Ca,neg 0.086 0.094 0.090 0.097 0.089 0.088

0.50
cb nel!: 0.006 0.022 0.006 0.014 0.010 0.003
t A crosshatched edge indicates that the slab continues across, or is fixed at the support; an unmarked edge
indicates a support at which torsional resistance is negligible.

Part 6
Structural Design
Table 6.6.12
Coefficients for Dead Load Positive Moments in Slabs t
Ma, pos,dl = Ca,dlwl �

Mb,pos, dl = Cb,dlwl � where w =
uniform dead load per unit area
mo::
la
t;; . .
CJ
.
0 Cl c::J. CJ r::J c=J 0 a
·Ca,dl 0.036 0.018 0.018 0.027 0.027 0.033 0.027 0.020 0.023
1.00
cb,dl 0.036 0.018 0.027 0.027 0.018 0.027 0.033 0.023 0.020
Ca,dl 0.040 0.020 0.021 0.030 0.028 0.036 0.031 0.022 0.024
0.95
cbdl 0.033 0.016 0.025 0.024 0.015 0.024 0.031 0.021 0.017
Ca,dl 0.045 0.022 0.025 0.033 0.029 0.039 0.035 0.025 0.026
0.90
cbdl 0.029 0.014 0.024 0.022 0.013 0.021 0.028 0.019 0.015
Ca,dl 0.050 0.024 0.029 0.036 0.031 0.042 0.040 0.029 0.028
0.85
cbdl 0.026 0.012 0.022 0.019 0.011 0.017 0.025 0.017 0.013
Ca,dl 0.056 0.026 0.034 0.039 0.032 0.045 0.045 0.032 0.029
0.80
cbdl 0.023 0.011 0.020 0.016 0.009 0.015 0.022 0.015 0.010
Ca,dl 0.061 0.028 0.040 0.043 0.033 0.048 0.051 0.036 0.031
0.75
cbdl 0.019 0.009 O.D18 0.013 0.007 0.012 0.020 0.013 0.007
Ca,dl 0.068 0.030 0.046 0.046 0.035 0.051 0.058 0.040 0.033
0.70
cbdl 0.016 0.007 0.016 0.011 0.005 0.009 0.017 0.011 0.006
Ca,dl 0.074 0.032 0.054 0.050 0.036 0.054 0.065 0.044 0.034
0.65
cbdl 0.013 0.006 0.014 0.009 0.004 0.007 0.014 0.009 0.005
Ca,dl 0.081 0.034 0.062 0.053 0.037 0.056 0.073 0.048 0.036
0.60
cbdl 0.010 0.004 0.011 0.007 0.003 0.006 0.012 0.007 0.004
Ca,dl 0.088 0.035 0.071 0.056 0.038 0.058 0.081 0.052 0.037
0.55
cbdl 0.008 0.003 0.009 0.005 0.002 0.004 0.009 0.005 0.003
Ca,dl 0.095 0.037 0.080 0.059 0.039 0.061 0.089 0.056 0.038
0.50
cbdl 0.006 0.002 0.007 0.004 0.001 0.003 0.007 0.004 0.002
6-178
Chapter 6
. Table 6.6.13
Coefficients for Live Load Positive Moments in Slabs t
Ma,pos,ll = Ca,uwl�
Mb,pos,ll = Cb,uwl� where w= uniform live load per unit area
la
m=
lb
Cl 0 c=l L1 CJ c::J CJ CJ 0
Ca,ll 0.036 0.027 0.027 0.032 0.032 0.035 0.032 0.028 0.030
1.00
cb,, 0.036 0.027 0.032 0.032 0.027 0.032 0.035 0.030 0.028
Ca,ll 0.040 0.030 0.031 0.035 0.034 0.038 0.036 0.031 0.032
0.95
cbu 0.033 0.025 0.029 0.029 0.024 0.029 0.032 0.027 0.025
Ca,l/ 0.045 0.034 0.035 0.039 0.037 0.042 0.040 0.035 0.036
0.90
cbu 0.029 0.022 0.027 0.026 0.021 0.025 0.029 0.024 0.022
Ca,ll 0.050 0.037 0.040 0.043 0.041 0.046 0.045 0.040 0.039
0.85
cbu 0.026 0.019 0.024 0.023 0.019 0.022 0.026 0.022 0.020
Ca,l/ 0.056 0.041 0.045 0.048 0.044 0.051 0.051 0.044 0.042
0.80
cbu 0.023 0.017 0.022 0.020 0.016 0.019 0.023 0.019 0.017
Ca,ll 0.061 0.045 0.051 0.052 0.047 0.055 0.056 0.049 0.046
0.75
cbu 0.019 0.014 0.019 0.016 0.013 0.016 0.020 0.016 0.013
Ca,/1 0.068 0.049 0.057 0.057 0.051 0.060 0.063 0.054 0.050
0.70
cbu 0.016 0.012 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.013 0.017 0.014 0.011
Ca,ll 0.074 0.053 0.064 0.062 0.055 0.064 0.070 0.059 0.054
0.65
cbu 0.013 0.010 0.014 0.011 0.009 0.010 0.014 0.011 0.009
Ca,l/ 0.081 0.058 0.071 0.067 0.059 0.068 0.077 0.065 0.059
...
0.60
cb,, 0.010 0.007 0.011 0.009 0.007 0.008 0.011 0.009 0.007
Ca,l/ 0.088 0.062 0.080 0.072 0.063 0.073 0.085 0.070 00.063
0.55
Cbu 0.008 0.006 0.009 0.007 0.005 0.006 0.009 0.007 0.006
Ca,l/ 0.095 0.066 0.088 0.077 0.067 0.078 0.092 0.076 0.067
0.50
Cbu 0.006 0.004 0.007 0.005 0.004 0.005 0.007 0.005 0.004
t A crosshatched edge indicates that the slab continues across, or is fixed at the· support; an unmarked edge

Part 6
Structural Design
Table 6.6.14
.
Ratio of Total Load Win f. a and f. b Directions (Wa and Wb) for Shear in Slab and Load on Supports t
m=
f.,
7b
c:=J C) c=t C1 CJ l::J c=l D CJ
Wa 0.50 0.50 0.17 0.50 P.83 0.71 0.29 0.33 0.67
1.00
w,, 0.50 0.50 0.83 0.50 0.17 0.29 0.71 0.67 0.33
Wa 0.55 0.55 0.20 0.55 0.86 0.75 0.33 0.38 0.71

0.95
wh 0.45 0.45 0.80 0.45 0.14 0.25 0.67 0.62 0.29
Wa 0.60 0.60 0.23 0.60 0.88 0.79 0.38 0.43 0.75

0.90
wb 0.40 0.40 0�77 0.40 0.12 0.21 0.62 0.57 0.25
Wa 0.66 0.66 0.28 0.66 0.90 0.83 0.43 0.49 0.79

0.85
wh 0.34 0.34 0.72 0.34 0.10 0.17 0.57 0.51 0.21
Wa 0.71 0.71 0.33 0.71 0.92 0.86 0.49 0.55 0.83

0.80
w,, 0.29 0.29 0.67 0.29 0.08 0.14 0.51 0.45 0.17
Wa 0.76 0.76 0.39 0.76 0.94 0.88 0.56 0.61 0.86

'0.75
w,, 0.24 0.24 0.61 0.24 0.06 0.12 0.44 0.39 0.14
Wa 0.81 0.81 0.45 0.81 0.95 0.91 0.62 0.68 0.89

0.70
wb 0.19 0.19 0.55 0.19 0.05 0.09 0.38 0.32 0.11
Wa 0.85 0.85 0.53 0.85 0.96 0.93 0.69 0.74 0.92

0.65
wb 0.15 0.15 0.47 0.15 0.04 0.07 0.31 0.26 0.08
Wa 0.89 0.89 0.61 0.89 0.97 0.95 0.76 0.80 0.94

0.60
wh 0.11 0.11 0.39 0.11 0.03 0.05 0.24 0.20 0.06
Wa 0.92 0.92 0.69 0.92 0.98 0.96 0.81 0.85 0.95

0.55
wh 0.08 0.08 0.31 0.08 0.02 0.04 0.19 0.15 0.05
Wa 0.94 0.94 0.76 0.94 0.99 0.97 0.86 0.89 0.97

0.50
w,, 0.06 0.06 0.24 0.06 0.01 0.03 0.14 0.11 0.03
6-180
Chapter 6
6.5.6 Reinforcement
6.5.6.1 Area of reinforcement in each direction shall be determined from moments at critical sections but
shall not be less than that required by Sec 8.1.12.
6.5.6.2 Spacing of reinforcement at critical sections shall not exceed two times the slab thickness, except for
portions of slab area that may be of cellular or ribbed construction. In the slab over cellular spaces,
reinforcement shall be provided as required by Sec 8.1.12.
6.5.6.3 Positive moment reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous edge shall extend to the edge of slab
and have embedment, straight or hooked, at least 150 mm in spandrel beams, columns, or walls.
6.5.6.4 Negative moment reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous edge shall be bent, hooked, or
otherwise anchored, in spandrel beams, columns, or walls, and shall be developed at face of support
according to provisions of Sec 8.2.
6.5.6.5 Comer Reinforcement

a) Special reinforcement shall be provided at exterior corners in both bottom and top of the slab, for a
distance in each direction from the comer equal to one-fifth the longer span of the corner panel.
b) Comer reinforcement at the top of the slab shall be parallel to a line bisecting the angle at the relevant
corner.
c) The corner reinforcement at the bottom of the slab shall be perpendicular to a line bisecting the angle at
the relevant comer.
d) The top and bottom corner reinforcement shall be of size and spacing equivalent to that required for the
maximum positive moment in the panel.
6.6 RIBBED AND HOLLOW SLABS
6.6.1 General
The provisions of this section shall apply to slabs constructed in one of the ways described below:
a) As a series of concrete ribs with topping cast on forms which may be removed after the concrete has set;
b) As a series of concrete ribs between precast blocks which remain part of the completed structure; the top
of the ribs may be connected by a topping of concrete of the same strength as that used in the ribs; and
c) Slabs with a continuous top and bottom face but containing voids of rectangular, oval or other shape.
6.6.2 Analysis and Design

Any method of analysis which satisfies equilibrium and compatibility requirements may be used for ribbed
and hollow slabs. Approximate moments and shears in contmuous one-way ribbed or hollow slabs may be
obtained from Table 6.6.2 in Sec 6.2.5.2. For two-way slabs, the unified design approach specified in Sec 6.4
Flat Plates, Flat Slabs and Edge-supported Slabs, shall be used.
6.6.3 Shear
6.6.3.1 When burnt tile or concrete tile fillers of material having the same strength as the specified strength
of concrete in the ribbed and hollow slabs are used permanently, it is permitted to include the vertical shells
of fillers in contact with the ribs for shear and negative-moment strength computations, provided adequate
bond between the two can be ensured.
6.6.3.2 Adequate shear strength of slabs shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of
Sec 6.4.7. For one-way ribbed and hollow slab construction, contribution of concrete to shear strength V, is
permitted to be 10 percent more than that specified in Sec 6.2.7. It is permitted to increase shear strength using
shear reinforcement or by widening the ends of ribs.
6.6.4 Deflection
The recomme.ndations for deflection with respect to solid slabs may be applied to ribbed and hollow slab.
Total depth of one-way ribbed and hollow slabs shall not be less than those required by Table 6.6.3 in
Sec 6.2.10.2. For other slabs the provisions of Sec 6.4.3.1 shall apply. ·
6.6.5 Size and Position of Ribs

In-situ-ribs shall be not less than 100 mm wide. They shall be spaced at centres not greater than 750 mm apart
and their depth, excluding any topping, shall be not more than three and half times their width. Ribs shall be
formed along each edge parallel to the span of one-way slabs.
6.6.6 Reinforcement
The recommendations given in Sec 8.1.7 regarding maximum distance between bars apply to areas of solid
concrete in this form of construction. The curtailment, anchorage and cover to reinforcement shall be as
specified below:

Part 6
Structural Design
a) At least 50 per cent of the total main reinforcement shall be carried through the bottom on to the bearing
and anchored in accordance with Sec 8.2.8.
b) Where a slab, which is continuous over supports, has been desi�ed as simply supported, reinforcement
shall be provided over the support to control cracking. This reinforcement shall1iave a cross-sectional
area of not less than one quarter of that required in the middle of the adjoining spans and shall extend at
least one-tenth of the clear span into adjoining spans.
c) In slabs with permanent blocks, the side cover to the reinforcement shall not be less than 10 mm. In all
other cases, cover shall be provided according to Sec 8.1.8.
6.7 FRAMED STRUCTURES
6.7.1 Scope
The provisions of this section shall apply to rigidly jointed RC framed structures subject to lateral loads in
addition to gravity loads.
6.7.2 Continuity
All intersections of members in a framed structure shall be continuous, with the steel reinforcements
continued through the joints into the adjacent members to provide adequate development length. At
construction joints, special care shall be taken to bond the new concrete to tfie old by carefully cleaning the
latter, by extending the reinforcement through the joint and by other means.
6.7.3 Placement of Loads

All individual members and joints of the framed structure shall be designed for the worst combination of
factored loads as provided in Sec 1.4. Gravity live loads in different bays and in different storeys of a framed
structure shall be so arranged as to produce the maximum moment and shear at all critical sections.
6.7.4 Idealization
6.7.4.1 F·or the purpose of analysis, the members of the frame shall be represented by straight lines
coincident with their centroidal axes. When the centroidal axes of the members meeting at a joint do not
coincide at a single point, the effect of offset from the point representing the joint shall be taken into
consideration.
6.7.4.2 Use of any set of reasonable assumptions is permitted for computing relative flexural and torsional
stiffness of columns, walls, floors, and roof systems. The assumptions adopted shall be consistent throughout
the analysis.
6.7.4.3 The moment of inertia of the frame members shall be based on the gross concrete cross section.
6.7.4.4 Effect of haunches shall be considered both in determining moments and in the design of members.
6.7.4.5 Columns having their bases monolithically cast in a substantial foundation, which may be anchored
to a solid rock mass or supported on piles with their tops encased in pile cap, or which is a continuous raft
or mat, may be assumed to be fixed at their bases. Otherwise, the column bases shall be assumed to permit
rotation. In either case, the foundation shall be designed to resist any moment that may be transferred to it
from the structure in view of the assumptions made and the detailing used at the base.
6.7.5 Method of Analysis

6.7.5.1 Gravity Loads : For building frames with reasonably regular outline, not involving unusual
asymmetry of loading or shape, moments due to gravity loads may be determined by dividing the entire frame
into simpler sub-frames. Each sub-frame shall consist of one continuous beam, plus the top and bottom
columns framing into that particular beam. The far ends of the columns, built integrally with the structure,
shall be considered fixed. For the sub-frame at the bottom of the structure, the column end conditions at the
base shall be dictated by the soil and foundation considerations in accordance with Sec 6.7.4.5 above.
The arrangement of live load on the sub-frame may be limited to the combinations, (a) factored dead load on
all spans with full factored live load on two adjacent spans, and (b) factored dead load on all spans with full
factored live load on alternate spans.
For building frames not satisfying the requirements above, a full frame analysis using elastic method shall be
carried out for gravity loads. ·
6.7.5.2 Lateral Loads : Any method of elastic analysis that satisfies equilibrium and compatibility
requirements may be used for framed structures. Approximate methods that reduce the frame to a statically
determinate structure by making simplifying assumptions shall not be used except for preliminary
proportioning of sections for subsequent more accurate analysis.
6.7.5.3 Redistribution of Negative Moments : Negative moments in continuous beams of a framed

structure may be redistributed in accordance with Sec 6.2.5.3.
6-182
Chapter 6
6.7.6 Design
The frame members shall be designed for the factored shear, moment, torsion and axial force obtained from
the elastic analysis. The critical section for design for negative moment in beams may be assumed to be at the
face of the support.
6.8 DEEP BEAMS
6.8.1 Notation
a shear span, distance between concentrated load and face of support

Au area of shear reinforcement perpendicular to flexural tension reinforcement within a distances
Auh area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural tension reinforcement within a distances1
bw web width
d distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of longitudinal tension reinforcement,
f� specified compressive strength of concrete

h overall thickness of members
fn clear span measured face to face of supports
e effective span,
Mu factored moment at section
s spacing of shear or torsion reinforcement in direction parallel to longitudinal reinforcement
s1 spacing of shear or torsion reinforcement in direction perpendicular to longitudinal reinforcement
Vc nominal shear strength provided by concrete
Vn nominal shear strength
V5 nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement
Vu factored shear force at section
z lever arm, i.e., the distance between the centroid of the compression zone and that of the
longitudinal tension reinforcement
Pw Asfbwd
tP strength reduction factor.
6.8.2 General
6.8.2.1. Flexural members with clear span to overall depth ratios not greater than 2.5 for continuous spans,
or 2.0 for simple spans, shall be designed as deep beams taking into account nonlinear distribution of strain
and lateral buckling (See also Sec 8.2.7.6).
6.8.2.2 Shear strength of deep beams shall be provided in accordance with Sec 6.8.4 below.
6.8.2.3 Minimum flexural tension reinforcement shall conform to Sec 6.2.8.
6.8.2.4 Minimum horizontal and vertical reinforcement in the side faces of deep beams shall satisfy the
requirements of Sec 6.8.4.8, 6.8.4.9 and 6.8.4.10, below but the reinforcement shall not be less than that
required for walls in Sec 6.9.7.2 and 6.9.7.3.
6.8.3 Flexure
6.8.3.1 Deep beams shall be designed for flexure using Eq (6.2.2) except that the lever arm (d-a/2) shall be
replaced by z. The lever arm, z, shall be calculated as folfows:
a) For simply supported beams:
e
z=0.2(f+2h) when 1:5-:52 (6.8.1)
h
e
or z=o.6e when -<1 (6,8.2)
h
b) For continuous beams:
(6.8.3)
e
or z=o.se when
h<1 (6.8.4)
where f is the effective span taken as centre to centre distance between supports or 1.15 times the clear span,
whichever is smaller, and his the overall thickness.
6.8.3.2 The tensile reinforcement required to resist positive bending moment in any span of deep beam shall
extend without curtailment between supports and be embedded beyond the face of each support, so that at the

Part 6
Structural Design
face of support it shall have a development length in accordance with Sec 8.2. The positive reinforcement shall
be placed within a zone of depth equal to (0.25h-0.05l) adjacent to the tension face of the beam.
6.8.3.3 The tensile reinforcement required to resist negative bending moment over a support of a deep beam
shall be allowed to terminate not more than half of the reinforcement at a distance of O.Sh from the face of the
support and remainders shall be extend over the full span.
When ratio of dear span to overall depth is in the range 1.0 to 2.5, tensile negative reinforcement over a
support shall be placed in two zones comprising:
i) a zone of depth 0.2h, adjacent to the tension face, which shall contain a proportion of the steel given by
0.5(lnfh-0.5).
ii) a zone measuring 0.3h on either side of the mid-depth of the beam, which shall contain the remainder of
the tension steel, evenly distributed.
For span to depth ratios less than unity, the steel shall be evenly distributed over a depth of 0.8h measured
from the tension face.
6.8.4 Shear
6.8.4.1 The following provisions shall apply to members with l nld less than 5 that are loaded on one face
and supported on the opposite face so that compression struts can develop between the loads and the
supports.
6.8.4.2 The shear design of simply supported deep beams shall be based on Eq (6.2.14) and (6.2.15) where
the shear strength V, shall be in accordance with Sec or 6.8.4.6 6.8.4.7
below and the shear strength V5 shall
be in accordance with Sec 6.8.4.8
below.
6.8.4.3 The shear design of continuous deep beams shall be based on Sec 6.2.7.1 through 6.2.7.5 or on any
method which satisfies equilibrium compatibility and strength requirements . In either case the design shall
also satisfy the requirements of Sec 6.8.4.4, 6.8.4.9
and 6.8.4.10.
6.8.4.4 Nominal shear strength Vn for deep beams shall be calculated by:
(6.8.5)
6.8.4.5 n
Critical section for shear shall be taken at a distance of 0.15l for uniformly loaded beams and
0.50a for beams with concentrated loads, measured from the face of support, but in either case not greater
than d.
6.8.4.6 Unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance with Sec 6.8.4.7 below, V, shall be taken
as
(6.8.6)
6.8.4.7 V, may be computed more accurately taking into account the effects of Mu and Vu from
(6.8.7)
(
except that the term 3. 5-2. 5
Mu
Vud
) shall not exceed 2.5 and V, shall not be taken greater than 0.5.../Kbwd.
6.8.4.8 Where factored shear force Vu exceeds shear strength tP V, shear reinforcement shall be provided to
satisfy Eq (6.2.14) and (6.2.15), where shear strength V5 shall be computed by
V5 =
r [ l [ - ]}
Av
S
1+
12
ln
d + Avh
St
11
ln
12
d
y
d (6.8.8)
6-184
Chapter 6
6.8.4.9 Area of shear reinforcement Av shall not be less than 0.001Sbuf', and s shall not exceed d/5, nor
4 50mm
6.8.4.10 The area of horizontal shear reinforcement Avh shall not be less than 0.0025b1qS1 and s1 shall not
exceed d/3, nor 450 mm.
6.8.4.11 Shear reinforcement required at the critical section defined in Sec 6.8.4.5 shall be used throughout
the span.
6.9 REINFORCED CONCRETE WALLS
6.9.1 Notation
Ag gross area of section
Av area of shear reinforcement
/y
1i overall thickness of member ·
k effective length factor

t, = vertical distance between supports
lw horizontal length of wall
Pnw nominal axial load carrying capacity of wall
St spacing of vertical reinforcement in wall
s2 spacing of horizontal reinforcement in wall
v, = shear strength provided by concrete
Vs = shear strength provided by shear reinforcement
ph = ratio of horizontal shear reinforcement area of gross concrete area of vertical section
Pv � ratio of vertical shear reinforcement area to gross concrete area of horizontal section
tP = strength reduction factor.
6.9.2 General
6.9.2.1 Walls shall be designed for eccentric loads and any lateral or other loads to which they may be
subjected.
6.9.2.2 Walls subjected to axial load shall be designed in accordance with Sec 6.9.2, 6.9.7 and either 6.9.3 or
6.9.4 below.
6.9.2.3 Design for shear shall be in accordance with Sec 6.9.6 below.
6.9.2.4 Unless otherwise justified by a detailed analysis, horizontal length of wall to be considered
effective for each concentrated load shall not exceed centre to centre distance between the loads, nor the
width of bearing plus four times the wall thickness.
6.9.2.5 Transfer of force to base of wall shall be in accordance with Sec 6.10.6.
6.9.3 Empirical Design Method .

6.9.3.1 .Load bearing walls of solid rectangular cross-section may be designed by the empirical method if the
resultant of all factored loads is located within the middle-third of the overall thickness of wall and all the
requirements of Sec 6.9.2, 6.9.3 and 6.9.7 are satisfied.
6.9.3.2 Unless designed in accordance with Sec 6.9.4, the design axial load carrying capacity tPPmu of a
wall may be computed by Eq (6.9.1).
tPPnw =
[
0.55ipf�Ag 1-
( :�� r l (6.9.1)
where
tP = 0.7, and
k = 0.8 for walls restrained against rotation at one or both ends ,
= 1.0 for walls unrestrained at both ends, and
= 2.0 for walls not braced against lateral translation.

Part 6
Structural Design
6.9.3.3 Minimum Thickness of Walls

a) The thickness of load bearing walls shall not be less than i of the supported height or length, whichever
is shorter, nor less than 125 nun.
b) The thickness of exterior basement walls and foundation walls shall not be less than 200 mm.
6.9.4 Walls Designed as Compression Members

Walls subject to flexure or both flexure and axial compression shall be designed as compression members in
accordance with the provisions of Sec 6.3, 6.9.2 and 6.9.7, except when designed in accordance with
Sec 6.9.3.
6.9.5 Walls as Grade Beams

6.9.5.1 Walls designed as grade beams shall have top and bottom reinforcement as required for moment in
accordance with the provisions of Sec 6.2. Design for snear shall be in accordance with Sec 6.9.6 below.
6.9.5.2 Portions of grade beam walls exposed above grade shall also meet the requirements of Sec 6.9.7.
6.9.6 Shear
6.9.6.1 Design for shear forces perpendicular to face of wall shall be in accordance with provisions for
slabs in Sec 6.4.7. Design for horizontal shear forces in plane of wall shall be in accordance with Sec 6.9.6.2
through 6.9.6.8 below.
6.9.6.2 Design of horizontal section for shear in plane of wall shall be based on Eq (6.2.14) and (6.2.15),
where shear strength Vc shall be in accordance with Sec 6.9.6.5 or 6.9.6.6 below and sfiear strength V5 shall
be in accordance with Sec 6.9.6.9 below.
6.9.6.3 Nominal shear strength Vn at any horizontal section for shear in plane of wall shall not be taken
greater than 0.83 -Jl{hd.
6.9.6.4 For the design of shear wall, d shall be taken equal to 0.8l w· A larger value of d, equal to the
distance from extreme compression fibre to centre of force of all reinforcement in tension may be used when
determined by a strain compatibility analysis. .
6.9.6.5 Unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance with Sec 6.9.6.6 below, shear strength Vc
shall not be taken greater than 0.17 -Jl{ hd for walls subjected to Nu in compression, or Vc shall not be taken
greater than the value given in Sec 6.2.7.3(b)iii for walls subjected to Nu in tension.
6.9.6.6 Shear strength Vc may be computed by Eq (6.9.2) and (6.9.3) and shall be taken as the smaller of the
two.
Nud
V c =0.27 -Jl{
c hd+ (6.9.2)
4ltv
)]
or
( �:�
[
1 lw 0.1�+0.2
(6.9.3)
vc = o.o5 � + hd
M e
_u __ __J£_
Vu 2
where Nu is negative for tension. When ( Mu/Vu-lw/2 ) is negative, Eq (6.9.3) shall not apply.
6.9.6.7 Sections located closer to wall base than a distance e tvf2 or one-half the wall height, whichever is
less, may be designed for the same Vc as that computed at a distance e wl2 or one-half the height.
6.9.6.8 When factored shear force Vu is less than 4JVcf2, reinforcement shall be provided in accordance
with Sec 6.9.6.9 or 6.9.7. When Vu exceeds 4JVc/2, wall reinforcement for resisting shear shall be provided
6.9.6.9 Design of Shear Reinforcement

a) Where factored shear force Vu exceeds shear strength 4J Vc, horizontal shear reinforcement shall be
provided to satisfy Eq (6.2.14) and (6.2.15), where shear strength V5 shall be computed by
6-186
Chapter 6
(6.9.4 )
where Avis the area o f horizontal shear reinforcement within a distance 52 and distance d i s in
accordance with Sec 6.9.6.4 . Vertical shear reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with (c)
below.
b) Ratio Pv of horizontal shear steel to gross concrete area of vertical section shall not be less than 0.0025,
and spacing Of horizontal shear reinforcement 52 shall not exceed f.w/5 1 3h Or 450 mm.
(c) Ratio Pv of vertical shear steel to gross concrete area of horizontal section shall not be less than
Pv =0.0025+0.5 2 .5-
( �=)Ph -0.0025 ) (6.9.5)
but not less than 0.0025. The vertical steel ratio need not be greater than the required horizontal steel
ratio. The spacing of vertical shear reinforcement 51 shall not exceed f. w /3, 3h or 450 mm.
6.9.7 Minimum Reinforcement

6.9.7.1 Minimum vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall be in accordance with Sec 6.9.7.2 and 6.9.7.3
below, unless a greater amount is required for shear by Sec 6.9.6.8 and 6.9.6.9 above.
6.9.7.2 Minimum ratio of vertical reinforcement area to gross concrete area shall be:
a) 0.0012 for deformed bars not larger than 16 mm cp with a specified yield strength not less than
4 10N/mm2• or
b) 0.0015 for other bars.
6.9.7.3 Minimum ratio of horizontal reinforcement area to gross concrete area shall be:
a) 0.002 0 for deformed bars n o t larger than 1 6 m m cp with a specified yield strength n o t less than
410N/mm2,or
b) 0.0025 for other bars.
6.9.7.4 Walls more than 250 mm thick shall have reinforcement for each direction placed in two layers
parallel to the faces of wall, except basement wall,in accordance with the following:
a) One layer consisting of not less than one-half and not more than two-thirds of total reinforcement
required for each direction. The reinforcement ·shall be placed not less than 50 mm nor more than one
third thickness of wall from exterior surface.
b) The other layer, consisting of the balance of required reinforcement in that direction, shall be placed not
less than 20 mm nor more than one-third the thickness of wall from interior surface. .
6.9.7.5 Vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall not be spaced farther apart than three times the wall
thickness nor 450 mm.
6.9.7.6 If vertical reinforcement area is not greater than 1 percent of the gross concrete area, or where
vertical reinforcement is not required as compression reinforcement, vertical reinforcement need not be
enclosed by lateral ties.
6.9.7.7 At least two 16 mm cp bars shall be provided around all window and door openings in addition to
the minimum reinforcement. Such bars shall be extended beyond the corners of the openings by at least
600mm.
6.1 0 FOOTINGS
6.10.1 Notation
av distance from the face of the column to the critical section for footing
At area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge contained
wholly within the footing and having for its upper base, the area actually loaded, and having side
slof>es of 1 vertical to 2 fiorizontal
loaaed area at the column base
= gross area of section
= area of shear reinforcement
width of footing at distance d from face of column

Part 6
Structural Design
perimeter of critical section for footing

effective depth of footing
diameter of pile at footing base
factored moment at section
nominal shear strength provided by concrete
nominal shear strength
factored shear force at section
ratio of long side to short side of footing
ratio of long side to short side of column cross-section
= ratio of tension reinforcement= A/b11jl.
= strength reduction factor
6.10.2 General
6.10.2.1 When a footing or pile cap is concentrically loaded, the reactions to design factored loads may be
assumed to be uniformly distributed (i.e. load per urut area or per pile).
6.10.2.2 When a footing or a pile cap is eccentrically loaded, the reactions may be assumed to vary linearly
across the footing or across the pile system.
6.10.2.3 Base area of footing shall be determined from unfactored forces and moments transmitted by footing
to soil.
6.10.2.4 Number and arrangement of piles shall be determined for unfactored forces and moments from
permissible soil pressure or permissible pile capacity selected through principles of soil mechanics.
6.10.2.5 It is permissible to treat circular or regular polygon shaped concrete columns as square members
with the same area, for location of critical sections for moment, snear and development of reinforcement in
footings.
·
6.10.2.6 Footings shall be designed to resist the factored loads and induced reactions, in accordance with the
appropriate design requirements as provided in this section.
6.10.2.7 Depth of footing above bottom reinforcement shall not be less than (i) 150 mm for footings on soil,
and (ii) 300 mm for footings on piles.
6.10.2.8 Plain concrete footings on piles are not permitted.
6.10.3 Moment
6.10.3.1 External moment on any section of a footing shall be determined by passing a vertical rlane through
the footing, and computing the moment of the forces acting over the area of footing on one side of vertical
plane.
6.10;3.2 Maximum factored moment for an isolated footing shall be computed at critical sections located as
follows:
a) For footings supporting a concrete column, pedestal or wall, at face of column, pedestal, or wall.
b) For footings supporting a masonry wall, at a quarter thickness inside the wall.
c) For footings supporting a column with steel base plate, at halfway between the face of column and the
edge of steel base plate. ·
6.10.3.3 In one-way footings and two-way square footings, reinforcement shall be distributed uniformly
across the entire footing.
6.10.3.4 In two-way rectangular footings, reinforcement shall be distributed as follows:

a) Reinforcement in long-direction shall be distributed uniformly across the entire width of footing.
b) For reinforcement in short direction, a portion of the total reinforcement given by Eq (6.10.1) shall be
distributed uniformly over a band width (centred on centre-line of column or pedestal) equal to the length
of short side of footing. Remainder of the reinforcement required in tne short direction shall oe
distributed uniformly outside the centre band width of footing.
Reinforcement in band width 2

(6.10.1)
Total reinforcement in short direction f3 +1
6-188
. Chapter 6
·
6.10.4 Shear
6.10.4.1 Shear strength of footings in the vicinity of columns or walls is governed by the more severe of the
following conditions.
a) Beam action shall be investigated at each critical section extending in a flane across the entire width.
For beam action, the footing shall be designed in accordance with Sec 6.2.7. through 6.2.7.5.
b) Location of critical section for shear in beam action shall be at a distanced measured from face of
column, pedestal or wall, for footings supportin � a column, pedestal or wall. For footings supporting a
column or pedestal with steel base plates, the critical section snail be measured from locations definecfin
Sec above.
6.10.3.2(c)
c) Two-way action shall be investigated at the critical section located so that its perimeter is a minimum
b0
but need not approach closer than d/2 to edges of columns or walls. For two-way action the footing
shall be designed in accordance with Sec and
6.10.4.2. below.
6.10.4.3
d) For square or rectangular columns, the critical sections for two-way action shall have four straight
sides.
6.10.4.2 Unless shear reinforcement is provided, the factored shear force V11 shall be equal to or less than the
shear strength, � V c , carried by the concrete. The shear strength Vc shall be determined as follows:
i) One-way shear:For one-way shear, Vc shall be computed either by using the approximate relation :
Vc = 0.17.../flbd (6.10.2a)
or by the more detailed formula:
(6.10.2b)
ii) Two-way shear :For two-way shear, Vc shall be determined in accordance with Sec 6.4.7.2.
6.10.4.3 Shear reinforcement consisting of bars or wires is permitted in footings in accordance with the
following:
a) Vn shall be computed by Eq (6.2.15) where Vc shall not be taken greate� than

(o.17.../flb0d), and the
required area of shear reinforcement Av and V5 shall be calculated in accordance with Sec 6.2.7.4 and
anchored in accordance with Sec 8.2.10.
b) Vn shall not be taken greater than 0.5.../flb0d.

6.10.5 Development of Reinforcement ·
6.10.5.1 Tension in the reinforcement shall be developed on each side of the critical section for moment.
6.10.5.2 Calculated tension or compression in reinforcement at each section shall be developed on each side of
that section by embedment lengtfi, standard hook (tension only) or mechanical device, or a combination
thereof.
6.10.6 Transfer of Force at Base

6.10.6.1 When the loaded area (area of column pier or base plate) and the supporting area (area at the top of
the footing) are equal, bearing stress on the loaded area of the footing snail be equal to or less than
0.85�/� where f� is the lower of the strengths of footing or column concrete.
6.10.6.2 When the supporting area is larger than the loaded area on all sides, the bearing stress on the
loaded area shall be equal to or less than 0.85�f��(A1 I A2) ,but not greater than 1.7�/� where
A1 = area of the lower base of the .largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge contained wholly
within the footing and having for its upper base, the area actually loaded, and having side slopes of 1
vertical to horizontal, and
2
A2 = loaded area at the column base.
6.10.6.3 Where the stress on the loaded area exceeds the permissible bearing stress reinforcement shall be
provided for the excess by extending the longitudinal bars into the footing or by dowels.

Part 6
Structural Design
6.10.6.4 Where transfer of force is accomplished by reinforcement, the development length. of the
reinforcement shall be sufficient to transfer the compression or tension to the supporting member in
accordance with Se c 8.2.
6.10.6.5 Extended longitudinal bars or dowels shall have a total area of at least 0.005 times the loaded
area of the column or pedestal, and a minimum of four bars shall be provided. Where dowels are used, their
diameter shall not exceed the diameter of the column bars by more than 3 mm.
6.10.6.6 Column bars of diameters larger than 40 mm <1> in compression only may be lap spliced with dowels
not larger than 35 mm <1> of the necessary area. The dowel shall extend into the column, a distance equal to the
development length of the column bar and into the footing a distance equal to the development length of the
dowel
6.10.7 Sloped or Stepped Footings

6.10.7.1 Angle of slope or dep th and location of steps in sloped or stepped footings, shall be such that all
design requirements are satisfied at every section (See also Se c 8.2.7.6).
6.10.7.2 Sloped or stepped footings designed as a unit shall be constructed to assure action as a unit.
6.10.8 Combined Footings and Mats

6.10.8.1 Footings supporting more than one column, pedestal or wall (combined footings or mats) shall be
designed to resist the factored loads and induced reactions, in accordance with the Sec 6.2.6 and 6.4.7.
6.10.8.2 The Direct Design Method of Sec6.4.5 shall not be used for the design of combined footings and mats.
6.10.8.3 Distribution of soil pressure under combined footings and mats shall be consistent with the
properties of soil and structure and with established principles ofsoil mechanics.
6.10.9 Pile Caps

6.10.9.1 Pile caps shall be designed either by bending theory or by truss analogy.
6.10.9.2 Truss Analogy Method

a) When truss method is used, the truss shall be of triangulated form, with a node at the centre of loaded
area. The lower nodes of the truss shall lie at the intersections of the centre lines of the piles with the
tensile reinforcement.
b) Where the truss method is used with widely spaced piles (spacing exceeding three times the pile diameter),
only the reinforcement within a band width of 1.5 times the pile aiameter from the centre of a pile shall be
considered to constitute a tension member of the truss.
6.10.9.3 Beam shear in pile cap shall be checked at critical sections extending across the full width of the cap.
Critical sections shall be assumed to be located at 20% of the diameter of the pile inside the face of the pile, as
indicated in Fig 6.6.5. The total force from all the piles with centres lying outside this line shall be considered
to constitute the shear force on this section.
The factored shear force Vu on the critical section shall not exceed t/J V,, where
(6.10.3)
in which 2dlav shall be greater than or equal to 1.0, avis the distance from the face of the column to the
critical section as shown in Fig 6.6.5, and b shall be taken as the full width of the critical section if the
spacing of the piles is less than or equal to 3 times the pile diameter dp, otherwise b shall be equal to 3 times
the pile diameter.
6.10.9.4 Punching Shear : A check shall be made to ensure that the factored shear stress calculated at the
perimeter of the column does not exceed 0.81/J {,ff or 5 N/mm2, whichever is the smaller. In addition, if the
spacing of the piles is l$l"eater than 3 times the pile diameter, punching shear shall be checked on the perimeter
indicated in Fig 6.6.5, m accordance with Sec 6.4.7.
6.10.9.5 Anchorage: The tension reinforcement shall be provided with full anchorage in accordance with
Sec8.2.
6.11 STAIRS
·
6.11.1 Effective Span

The effective span of stairs without stringer beams shall be taken as the following horizontal distances:
a) Centre to centre distance of beams, where supported at top and bottom risers by beams spanning parallel
with the risers,
6-190
Chapter 6
Lf\ _
\j_J
_
-
---------
I
I
---
- I
.I
-
·
I
1'
·
-
-
I
- -
Perimeter for Checking

-
ffi
·
-
-
1,___ Punching She�':_ _!i_!_�eces��Yl

_
I I
I j
I .
J �---�
---
"
-
-
u.
-
.
Critical Section for

S_!'l�a.r._Chec_�_
p
5
Fig. 6.6.5 Critical Section for Shear Check in a Pile Cap
b) Where supported at the edge of a landing slab, which spans parallel with the risers, (Fig 6.6.6a) a
distance equal to the going of the stairs plus at each end either half the width of the landing or l.Om
whichever IS smaller. The going shall be measured horizontally.
c) Where the landing spans in the same direction as the stairs (Fig 6.6.6b), the span shall be the distance
centre to centre of the supporting beams or walls.
d) Where the landing slab, running at right angles to the direction of the flight, is supported by walls or
beams on three sides (Fig 6.6.6c), the effective span e shall be the going of the stair measured
horizontally. Both positive and negative moments per unit width of the stair shall be calculated as "�2
where w is the intensity of the total factored dead and live load per unit area on a horizontal plane.
6.11.2 Loading
Staircases shall be designed to support the design ultimate load according to the load combinations specified
in Chapter 2, loads.
6.11.3 Distribution of Loading

6.11.3.1 Where flights or landing are embedded at least 110 mm into walls and are designed to span in the
direction of the flight, a 150 mm strip may be deducted from the loaded area and the effective breadth of the
section may be increased by 75 mm for the purpose of design (Fig 6.6.7).
6.11.3.2 In the case of stairs with open wells, where spans cross at right angles, the load on areas common to
any two such spans may be taken as one half in each direction as shown in Fig 6.6.8.
6.11.4 Depth of Section

The depth of the section shall be taken as the minimum thickness perpendicular to the soffit of the staircase.
6.11.5 Design
6.11.5.1 Strength, Deflection and Crack Control : The recommendations given in Sec 6.2 for beams and
one-way slabs shall apply, except for the span/depth ratio of staircases without stringer beam where the
provision of Sec 6.11.5.2 below shall a p ply .

Part 6
Structural Design
Span Sec 6.11.1.(b)
Going
I l1h "
I
Ia)
Span
I l1h "
I I
(b)
(c)
Fig. 6.6.6 Effective Span for Stairs Supported at Each End by Landings
6.11.5.2 Permissible span/effective depth ratio for staircase without stringer beams. Provided the stair flight
occupies at least 60% of the span, the ratio calculated in accordance witfi Sec 6.2.10 shall be increased by
15%.
6.12 SHELLS AND FOLDED PLATES
6.12.1 Notation
Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete
J� specified compressive strength of concrete

specified yield strength of steel
/y
h thickness of shell or folded plate
P. d development length
cp strength reduction factor.
6-192
Chapter 6
110 mm
150 mm
·1 t I
75 mm
� live Breadth
Fig. 6.6.7 Loading on Stairs Built in a Wall
Cl
_!;;
"0
"'
0
_,
Fig. 6.6.8 Loading on Stairs with Open Wells
6.12.2 Scope
6.12.2.1 The provisions of this section shall apply to thin shell and folded plate concrete structures,
including ribs and edge members.
6.12.2.2 Other provisions of Chapter 6 not specifically excluded, and not in conflict with the provisions of
this section shall apply to thin shell structures.
6.12.3 Definitions
ANALYSIS, APPROXIMATE : A method not satisfying compatibility of strains either within the shell or
between the shell and the auxiliary members. It may be used only where it can be shown that this method
provides a safe basis for design.

Part 6
Structural Design
ANALYSIS, ELASTIC : An analysis based on equilibrium, compatibility of strains, and assumed elastic
behaviour. The analysis shall represent to suitable approximation the three dimensional action of the shell
together with its auxiliary members. ·
�·
"'
ANALYSIS, EXPERIMENTAL: An analysis based on the measurement of deformations and/or strains of the
structure or its model. Experimental analysis is based on either elastic or inelastic behavior.
ANALYSIS, INELASTIC : An analysis based on equilibrium, nonlinear stress-strain relations for concrete
and reinforcement, consideration of cracking and hme dependent effects, and compatibility of strains. The
analysis shall represent to suitable approximation the three-dimensional action of tne shell together with its
auxiliary members. ·
AUXILIARY MEMBERS: Ribs or edge beams which strengthen, stiffen, and/or support the shell. Auxiliary
members normally act jointly with the shell. .
FOLDED PLATES: A special class of shell structures made up by joining flat, thin slabs along their edges so
as to create a three-dimensional space structure.
RIBBED SHELLS: Space structures strengthened primarily along certain preferred rib lines, with the area
between the ribs filled with thin slabs or left open.
THIN SHELLS: Three-dimensional space structures consisting of one or more curved slabs or folded plates
where thicknesses are small compared to other dimensions. Thin shells are characterized by their three
dimensional load-carrying behav10ur which depends on the geometry of their form, by the way in which
they are supported, and by the nature of the applied load.
6.12.4 Design
6.12.4.1 Elastic behaviour shall be an accepted basis for determining internal forces and displacements of
thin shells. Such an elastic analysis shall be based on the assumption of uncracked concrete section in which
the material is assumed linearly elastic, homogeneous, and isotropic. Poisson's ratio of concrete may be
assumed equal to zero.
6.12.4.2 Experimental or numerical analytical procedure and inelastic analysis may be used where it can be
shown that such methods provide a safe basis for design.
6.12.4.3 Equilibrium checks of internal resistance and external loads shall be made to ensure consistency of
results.
6.12.4.4 The thickness of a thin shell and its reinforcement, shall be determined for the required strength and
serviceability. All elements shall be proportioned by the same method using the provisions of this chapter.
6.12.4.5 Shell design shall investigate and exclude the possibility of general or local instability.
6.12.4.6 Auxiliary members shall be designed according to the applicable provisions of this chapter. The •
same design method selected for shell elements shall be used for auxiliarr. members. A portion ofthe shell
equal to tne flange width of a T-beam may be assumed to act with the auxiliary member.ln such portions of
the shell, the reinforcement perpendicular to the auxiliary member shall be at least equal to that required for
the flange of a T-beam .
6.12.5 Strength of Material

6.12.5.1 Specified compressive strength of concrete f� at 28 days shall not be less than 20 N/mm2.
6.12.5.2 Maximum yield strength of reinforcement !y shall be 410 N I mm2•

6.12.6 Shell Reinforcement
6.12.6.1 Shell reinforcement shall be provided to resist bending and twisting moments, to resist tensile
stresses from internal membrane forces, to control shrinkage and temperature cracking, and as special
reinforcement at shell boundaries, load attachments and shell openings.
6.12.6.2 Membrane reinforcement shall be provided in all parts of the shell in two or more directions.
6.12.6.3 The area of shell reinforcement provided in two orthogonal directions shall not be less than the
slab shrinkage or temperature reinforcement required by Sec 8.1.12.
6.12.6.4 Reinforcement required to resist shell membrane forces shall be provided so that the design strength
in every direction shall be at least equal to the component of the principal membrane forces in the same
direction due to factored loads.
6.12.6.5 The area of shell tension reinforcement shall be limited so that the reinforcement yields before
crushing of concrete.
6-194
Chapter 6
Ultimate Strength Desi gn of Reinforced Concrete Structures
6.12.6.6 In re�ions of high tension, membrane reinforcement shall be placed in the general directions of the
principal tensile membrane forces, if possible. Where this is not possible, it is permitted to place membrane
reinforcement in two orthogonal directions.
6.12.6.7 The amount of reinforcement shall be increased to limit the width of possible cracks at service load
levels, when direction of reinforcement varies more than 10 deg from the direction of principal tensile
membrane force.
6.12.6.8 The ratio of shell reinforcement in any portion of the tensile zone shall be not less than 0.0035 based
on the overall thickness of the shell. Reinforcement resisting the total tension shall be concentrated in the
regions of largest tensile stress, where the magnitude of the principal tensile membrane stress within the shell
varies greatly over the area of the shell surface.
.
6.12.6.9 Reinforcement required to resist shell bending moments shall be provided with due regard to the
simultaneous action of membrane axial forces at the same location. Where shell reinforcement is required in
only one face to resist bending moments, equal amounts shall be placed near both surfaces of the snell even
though a reversal of bending moments is not indicated by the analysis.
6.12.6.10 Shell reinforcement in any direction shall not be spaced farther apart than 450 mm nor five times
the shell thickness. Reinforcement shall not be spaced farther apart than three times the shell thickness, where
the principal membrane tensile stress on the gross concrete area due to factored loads exceeds 0.331/J K
6.12.6.11 The minimum development length for shell reinforcement shall be l.Ud but not less than 450 mm .
Shell reinforcement at the junction of the shell and the supporting members or edge members shall be anchored
in or extended through suCh members in accordance witn the requirements of Sec 8.2.
6.12.6.12 The minimum splice length of shell tension bars shall be 1.2 times the value required by Sec 8.2, but
not less than 450 mm. Tne number of splices in principal tensile reinforcement shall oe kept to a practical
minimum. Where splices are necessary they shall be staggered at least e d with not more than one-third of the
reinforcement spliced at any section.
6.12.7 Construction
6.12.7.1 Regarding deflection considerations, when removal of formwork is based on a specific modulus of
elasticity of concrete Ec, the value of Ec shall be determined from flexural tests of field-cured beam specimens.
The number of test specimens, the dimensions of test beam specimens, and test procedures shall be specified by ·
the engineer.
6.12.7.2 If construction results in deviations from the shape greater than the tolerances specified by the
engineer, an analysis of the effect of the deviations shall be made and any required remedial actions shall be
tak:en to ensure safe behaviour.
6.13 PRECAST AND COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION
6.13.1 Notation
Ac = area of contact surface being investigated for horizontal shear
Av = area of shear reinforcement within a distance s
Avf = area of shear-friction reinforcement
bv = width of cross section at contact surface being investigated for horizontal shear
d distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of tension reinforcement for entire composite
section
= specified compressive strength of concrete
= specified yield strength of reinforcement
nominal shear strength
nominal horizontal shear strength
= factored shear force at section
angle between shear-friction reinforcement and shear plane
= coefficient of friction
= strength reduction factor
6.13.2 General
6.13.2.1 Individual elements of a member shall be investigated for all critical stages of loading.
6.13.2.2 Properties of the individual elements or the most critical values shall be used in design when the
specified strength, unit mass, or other properties of the various elements are different.
6.13.2.3 No distinction shall be made between shored and unshored members for the strength computations of
composite members.

Part 6
Structural Design
6.13.2.4 All elements shall be designed to support all loads introduced prior to full development of design
strength of composite members.
6.13.2.5 Reinforcement shall be provided to control cracking and to prevent separation of individual
elements of composite members.
·
6.13.2.6 Deflection limitations for composite members shall be in accordance with Sec 6.13.7.
6.13.2.7 Shoring shall not be removed until supported elements have developed design properties required to
support all the loads and to limit deflections and cracking at the time of removal of shoring.
6.13.3
r.:;�f.� �
Precast me bers shall be designed considering all loading and restraint conditions from the initial
fabrication to the completion of the structure including form removal, storage, transportation, and erection.
�
6.13.3.2 Effects of all interconnected and adjoining details shall be considered to assure proper performance
of the structural system, when precast members do not behave monolithically.
6.13.3.3 Effects of initial and long-time deflections shall be considered for precast and composite members,
including effects on interconnected elements.
6.13.3.4 Design of joints and bearings shall include the effects of all forces to be transmitted, including
shrinkage, creep, temperature, elastic deformation, wind, and earthquake.
6.13.3.5 Proper detailing of members shall be done considering manufacturing and erection tolerances and
temporary erection stresses.
·
6.13.3.6 Where precast wall panels are designed to span horizontally to columns or isolated footings, the
ratio of height to thickness shall not be limited, provided the effect of deep beam action, lateral buckling, and
deflections are considered in the design.
6.13.3.7 When an entire composite member is assumed to resist vertical shear, design shall be made in
accordance with the requirements of Sec 6.2.7 as for a monolithically cast member of the same cross-sectional
shape.
6.13.3.8 For composite members, shear reinforcement shall be fully anchored into interconnected elements in
6.13.3.9 Extended and anchored shear reinforcement provided in a composite member may be included as ties
for horizontal shear.
6.13.3.10 Full transfer of horizontal shear forces shall be assured at contact surfaces of interconnected
elements in a composite member.
6.13.3.11 Unless calculated in accordance with Sec 6.13.3.12 horizontal shear design shall be based on
(6.13.1)
where V u is the factored shear force at the section considered, and V nh is the nominal horizontal shear
strength in accordance with the following:
a) Vnh shall not be taken greater than 0.6bvd, when contact surfaces are clean, free of laitance, and
intentionally roughened, or when minimum ties are provided in accordance with Sec 6.13.3.14 and
contact surfaces are clean and free of laitance, but not intentionally roughened.
b) Vnh shall not be taken greater than 2.5bvd, when minimum ties are provided in accordance with
Sec 6.13.3.14 and contact surfaces are clean, free of laitance, intentionally roughened to a full amplitude
of approximately 5 mm.
c) When the factored shear force Vu at seetion considered exceeds � (2.5bvd}, design for horizontal shear
shall be in accordance with Sec 6.13.3.15.
6.13.3.12 HoriZontal shear may be determined by computing the actual change in compressive or tensile force
in any segment, and provisions shall be made to transfer that force as horizontal shear to the supporting
element. The factored horizontal shear force shall not exceed horizontal shear strength � Vnh as given above
in Sec 6.13.3.11(a) through (c) where the area of contact surface A, shall be substituted for bvd.
6.13.3.13 When tension exists across any contact surface between interconnected elements, shear transfer by
contact may be assumed only when minimum ties are provided in accordance with Sec 6.13.3.14 .
. 6-196
Chapter 6
6.13.3.14 Ties for Horizontal Shear

a) When ties are provided to transfer horizontal shear, area of tie reinforcement shall not be less than that
required by Sec 6.2.7.4(e) and tie spacing shall not exceed four times the least dimension of the supported
element, nor 600 mm .
b) Ties for horizontal shear may consist of single bars or wire, or multiple leg stirrups.
c) All ties for horizontal shear shall be fully anchored into interconnected elements in accordance with
Sec 8.2.10.
6.13.3.15 Shear-Friction
a) The provisions of shear friction are to be applied where it is appropriate to consider shear transfer
across a plane in structural concrete, sudl. as an existing or potential crack, an interface between
dissimilar materials, or an interface between concrete cast at different times.
b) Members subject to shear transfer as described above shall be designed based on Eq (6.2.14), where Vn
is calculated in accordance with the provisions of (c) or (d) below.
c) A crack shall be assumed to occur along the shear lane considered. The required area of shear-friction
f
reinforcement Avf crossing the shear plane shal be designed using the provision of (d) below, or
alternatively, using any shear friction design methods that can predict the strength in good agreement
with results of comprehensive tests.
d) Shear-Friction· Design Method

i) When the shear-friction reinforcement is perpendicular to the shear plane, shear strength Vn shall
be computed by
(6.13.2)
where J.l is the coefficient of friction specified in (iii) below.
ii) When the shear-friction reinforcement is inclined to the shear plane, such that the shear force
produces tension in that reinforcement, the shear strength Vn shalf be computed by
(6.13.3)
�here a
1is the angle between shear-friction reinforcement and shear plane.
iii) The coefficient of friction J.l used in Eq (6.13.2) and (6.13.3) shall be
1.4 for concrete placed monolithically
1.0 for concrete placed against hardened concrete with surface intentionally roughened
0.6 for concrete placed against hardened concrete not intentionally roughened
0.7 for concrete anchored to as-rolled structural steel be headed studs or by reinforcing bars.
e) Nominal shear strength Vn shall not be taken greater than 0.2f�A, nor S.SA, in Newtons, where A, is the
area of concrete section resisting shear transfer.
f) Yield strength of shear-friction reinforcement for design purpose shall not exceed 410 N/rnm2•
f) Net tension across shear plane shall be resisted by additional reinforcement in excess to that provided
for shear transfer. Permanent net compression across shear plane may be taken as additive to the force in
the shear-friction reinforcement Avffy, when calculating the required Avf
h) Shear-friction reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed along the shear plane, if no moment acts
across the shear plane. If a moment acts, the retnforcement shall be .distributed primarily in the flexural
tension zone and shall be anchored to develop the specified yield strength on both sides by embedment,
hooks, or welding to special devices.
j) When concrete is placed against previously hardened concrete, the interface for shear transfer shall be
dean and free of laitance. If J.l is assumed equal to 1.0, interface shall be roughened to a full amplitude of
approximately 5 mm .

Part 6
Structural Design
k) When shear is transferred between as-rolled steel and concrete using headed studs or welded reinforcing
bars, steel shall be clean and free of paint.
·
6.13.4 Detailing
6.13.4.1 For the design of precast concrete members, all details of reinforcement, connections, bearing seats,
inserts, anchors, concrete cover, openings, lifting devices, fabrication, and erection tolerances shall be shown
on the shop drawings.
6.13.4.2 When approved by the engineer, embedded items (such as dowels or inserts) that either protrude
from concrete or remain exposed for inspection may be embedded while concrete is in a plastic state, provided
a) Embedded items shall not be required to be hooked or tied to reinforcement within plastic concrete,
b) Embedded items shall be maintained in correct position while concrete remains plastic, and
c) Embedded items shall be properly anchored to develop the required factored loads.
6.13.5 Identification and Marking

6.13.5.1 Each precast member or element shall be clearly marked to indicate location in the structure, top
surface, and date of fabrication.
6.13.5.2 Identification marks shall correspond to the placing plans.
6.13.6 Transportation, Storage, and Erection

6.13.6.1 Precast members shall not be over stressed, warped, or otherwise damaged or have camber adversely
affected, during curing, form removal, storage, transportation, and erection.
6.13.6.2 Precast members shall be adequately braced and supported during erection to ensure proper
alignment and structural integrity until permanent connections are completed.
6.13.6.3 All temporary erection connections, bracing and shoring shall be shown on shop drawings.
6.13.7 Composite Construction

6.13.7.1 Shored Construction: When composite flexural members are so supported durin� construction
that, after removal of temporary supports, dead load is resisted by the full composite section, it IS permitted to
consider the composite member equivalent to a monolithically cast member for computation of deflection. The
member in compression shall determine whether values in Table 6.6.3 shall apply. For the computation of
deflection, account shall also be taken of curvatures resulting from differential shrinkage of precast and cast-
in-place components. ·
6.13.7.2 Unshored Construction : If the thickness of a precast flexural member meets the requirements of
Table 6.6.3, deflection need not be computed. If the thickness of composite members meets the requirements of
Table 6.6.3, it is not required to compute deflection occurring after the member becomes composite, but the long
term deflection of the precast member should be investigated for the magnitude and duration of load acting
prior to the beginning of effective composite action.
6.13.7.3 Deflections computed by Sec 6.13.7.1 and 6.13.7.2 above shall not exceed the limits specified in
Table 6.6.4.
Related Appendices
AppendixC Guidelines forComputing the Column Interaction Diagrams
6-198
CHAPTER ry
Working Stress Design of
Reinforced Concrete Structures
7.1 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN- GENERAL CONSIDERATION
7.1.1 Notation
E, = modulus of elasticity of concrete, Nlmm2
Es = modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, Nlmm2
!� = specified compressive strength of concrete, Nlmm2
Is = permissible tensile stress in reinforcement, Nlmm2

specified yield strength of reinforcement, N I mm2
/y =
n = modular ratio EsfEc

=
= design shear stress, N I mm2

= permissible shear stress carried by concrete, Nlmm2
= ratio of long side to short side of concentrated load or reaction area.
7.1.2 Design Methods

In the design of reinforced concrete structures using working stress design method, members shall be
proportioned for adequate capacity in accordance with the provisions of this chapter using working loads
ana l'ermissible stresses. The working stress design method may be used as an alternative method with the
requtrement that provisions of Chapter 6, except Sec 6.2.5.3, shall apply to members designed by this
method.
7.1.3 Design Assumptions .

The design of reinforced concrete structures by the working stress design method is based on the following
assumptions.
Part6 6-199
Structural Design
Part 6
Structural Design
7.1.3.1 At any cross section, plane sections before bending remain plane after bending; strains vary with
the distance from the neutral axis.
7.1.3.2 All tensile stresses are taken up by reinforcement and none by concrete, except otherwise
specifically permitted. ·
7.1.3.3 The stress-strain relation for concrete is a straight line under working loads within the allowable
working stresses. Stresses vary linearly with the distance from the neutral axis except for deep beams.
7.1.3.4 The tension reinforcement area is replaced in design computations with a concrete tension area
equal ton times that of the reinforcement steel, where n is the modular ratio EsfEc.
7.1.3.5 In doubl}' reinforced beams the compression reinforcement shall be transformed to an equivalent
concrete area which is 2n times that of the reiniorcement steel. ·
7.1.3.6 The modular ration = EsfEc may be taken as the nearest whole number, but not less than 6.
7.1.3.7 The compressive stress developed in compression reinforcement of doubly reinforced beams shall
not exceed the permissible tensile stress for such steel.
7.1.4 Loading
7.1.4.1 Design provisions of this chapter are based on the assumption that structures shall be designed to
resist all applicaole loads.
7.1.4.2 Service loads shall be in accordance with Chapter 2, Loads, with such live load reductions as are
permitted therein.
7.1.4.3 In the design for wind and earthquake loads, integral structural parts shall be designed to resist
the total lateral loads.
7.1.4.4 Consideration shall be given to effects of forces due to crane loads, vibration, impact, shrinkage,
temperature changes, creep and unequal settlement of supports.
7.1.4.5 When dead load reduces effects of other loads, members shall be designed for 85 per cent of the
dead load in combination with the other loads.
7.1.5 Stiffness
7.1.5.1 Use of any consistent set of assumptions is permitted for computing relative flexural and torsional ·
stiffness of col umn s, walls, floors, and roof systems.
7.1.5.2 In computin � the value of I for relative flexural stiffness of slabs, beams, girders, and columns,
contribution of the remforcement may be neglected. In T-shaped sections allowance shall be made for the
effect of flange. .
7.1.5.3 If the total torsional stiffness in the plane of a continuous system at a joint does not exceed 20 per
·
cent of the flexural stiffness at the joint, the torsional stiffness need not be taken into consideration in the
analysis.
7.1.5.4 Effect of haunches shall be considered both in deter�ining the moments and in the design of
members.
7.1.6 Span Length ·
7.1.6.1 Span length of members not built integrally with supports shall be considered as the clear span
plus depth: of member but need not to exceed distance between centres of supports.
7.1.6.2 In determining moments in frames or continuous construction, span lengths shall be taken as the
centre-to-centre distance of supports.
7.1.6.3 For design of beams built integrally with supports, the use of moments at faces of support is
permitted.
7.1.6.4 Solid or ribbed slabs built integrally with supports, with clear span not more than 3.0 metres, are
permitted to be analysed as continuous slabs on knife edge supports, with spans equal to the clear spans of
the slab, the width of beams being otherwise neglected.
7.1.6.5 Effective span of cantilevered beams or slabs shall be taken as its span to the face of support lus f
half its effective depth, except where it is an overhang of a continuous beam, the length to the centre o the
support shall be used.
6-200
Chapter 7
Working Stress Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures
7.1.7, Arrangement of Live Loads

For continuous beams and frames the arrangement of live load may be limited to the combination of:
a) Service dead load on all spans with full service live load on two adjacent spans, and
b) Service dead load on all spans with full service live load on alternate spans.
7.1.8 Floor Finish

7.1.8.1 A floor finish shall not be included as part of a structural member unless placed monolithically
with the floor slab or designed in accordance with requirements of composite concrete flexural members.
7.1.8.2 It is allowed to consider all concrete floor finishes as part of required cover or total thickness for
non-structural considerations.
7.1.9 Allowable Stresses in Concrete

Allowable stresses in concrete shall not exceed the following :
a) Flexure:
Extreme fibre stress in compression 0.451�
b) Shear:
Beams, one-way slabs and footings :
Shear stress carried by concrete, vc· 0.091-.f]';
Maximum shear stress carried by concrete

plus shear reinforcement 0.457 Vrc;-
��
Ribs:
Shear stress carried by concrete, Vc 0.10�
Two-way slabs and footings :
Shear stress carried by concrete, Vc (o.oB3+0.17jJJc).K �0.17�
c) Bearing stress on loaded area :
When the loaded area (area of column, pier
or base plate) and the supporting area (area rc;-
of the top of footing) are equal
0.3 -yl� .
When the supporting area is larger than the
loaded area on all sides
0.3 �( �� }� � 0.61�
where,
A1 = area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge contained
wholly within the footing and having for its upper base, the area actually loaded, and having
1 2
side slopes of vertical to horizontal, and
A = loaded area of the column base.

2
7.1.10 Allowable Stresses in Reinforcement
Allowable tensile stresses in reinforcement Is, shall be those as specified below :
a) Except as specified in (b) below,ls shall be determined as follows:
2
i) for 250N/mm2 ��Y <275N/mm2 Is=125N mm /
ii) for 275N/mm2 ��Y <410N/mm2 Is= 138N/mm2
iii) Is= 165N/mm2

b) For flexural reinforcement, 100 mm or less in Is= O.Siy but not greater than 200 N/mm2
diameter in one-way slabs of not more than
3.5 m span

Part6
Structural Design
7.1.11 Allowable Stresses for Wind and Earthquake Forces

Members subject to stresses produced by wind or earthquake forces combined with other loads may be
prol'ortioned for stresses 33 per cent greater than those specified in Sec 7.1.9 and 7.1.10, provided that the
section thus required is not less than that required for the combination of dead and live loaa.
7.1.12 Development and Splices of Reinforcement

7.1.12.1 Development and splices of reinforcement shall be in accordance with Chapter 8, Detailing of RC
Structures.
7.1.12.2 In satisfying requirements of Sec 8.2.8.3, M shall be taken as computed moment capacity assuming
n
all positive moment tension reinforcement at the section to be stressed to the permissible tensile stress fs and
Vu shall be taken as unfactored shear force at the section.
7.2 BEAMS AND ONE-WAY SLABS
7.2.1 Notation
As = area of tension reinforcement
A's area of compression reinforcement
b width of rectangular beam, or effective width of compression flange forT-beam
web width, or diameter of circular section
·
bw =

d' = distance of extreme compression fibre t� centroid of compression reinforcement
de = thickness of concrete cover measured from the extreme tension fibre to centre of bar or wire
located closest thereto
fc = allowable stress in concrete
Is = allowable stress in reinforcement
j, k = beam constants defined in Sec 7.2.6.1
M moment at section
Mn = flexural moment capacity
Mr resisting moment capacity based on f�

N = axial load normal to cross section occurring simultaneously with V, to be taken as positive for
compression, negative for tension and to include effects of tension due to creep and shrinkage
n =
modular ratio, E"/Ec
p ratio of tension reinforcement, Asfbd
=
R = constant, ffcki
r = stress ratio,f//c
T = torsional moment at section
Tc = torsional moment strength provided by concrete
Ts torsional moment strength provided by torsion reinforcement
t = thickness of compression flange ofT-beams
v shear at section
Vc = shear strength provided by concrete
For all other symbols reference shall be made to Sec 6.2.1.
• 7.2.2 Span Length

Determination of span length shall be in accordance with Sec 7.1.6.

Design assumptions shall be in accordance with Sec 7.1.3.

7.2.4.1 Design of cross section subject to flexural or combined flexure and axial loads shall be based on
design assumptions of Sec 7.1.3.
7.2.4.2 Compression reinforcement in conjunction with additional tension reinforcement may be used to
increase flexural strength of the members.
7.2.4.3 The effective depth, d, of a beam or slab shall be taken as the distance from the centroid of its tensile
reinforcement to its compression face.
7.2.4.4 The effects of lateral eccentricity of load shall be taken into account in determining the spacing of
lateral supports for a beam. The spacing shall never exceed 50 times the least width b of compression flange
or face.
6-202
Chapter 7
7.2.4.5 Requirements ofT-beams

a) In T-beam construction the slab and beam shall be built integrally or otherwise effectively bonded
together.
b) The effective flange width to be used in the design of symmetrical T-beams shall not exceed one-fourth
of the span length of the beam, and its overhanging width on either side of the web shall not exceed
eight times the thickness of the slab nor one-half tne clear distance to the next beam.
c) Isolated beams in which the T-form is used only for the purpose of providing additional compression
area, shall have a flange thickness not less than one-half the width oi the web and a total flange width
not more than four times the width of the web.
d) For beams having a flange on one side only, the effective overhanging flange width shall not exceed
-fl- th of the span length of the beam, nor six times the thickness of the slab, nor one-half the clear
distance to the next web.
'
e) The overhanging portion of the flange of the beam shall not be considered effective in ·computing the
shear and diagona1 tension resistance ofT-beams.
f) Provision shall be made for the compressive stress at the support in continuous T-beam construction.
7.2.5 Continuous Beams

Continuous beams shall be analysed in accordance with Sec 7.2.5.2 and designed and detailed according to
Sec 7.2.6 and 7.2.7 to resist moments and shear forces.
7.2.5.1 Arrangement of Live Loads: Arrangement of live loads shall be in accordance with Sec 7.1.7.
7.2.5.2 Methods of Analysis
a) All members of frames or continuous construction shall be designed for the maximum effects of
working loads as determined by the theory of elastic analysis.
b) In lieu of exact analysis, the approximate moments and shea rs given in Sec 6.2.5.2(b) may be used for
design of continuous beams and one way slabs (slab reinforced to resist flexural stresses in only one
direction}, provided that the quantity Wu in the expressions in Table 6.6.2 is replaced by the working
load w.
c) No redistribution of negative moment shall be permitted for working stress design.
7.2.6 Design for Flexure

7.2.6.1 The following equations are applicable to singly and doubly reinforced rectangular beams :
k= -;itr when the stress ratio, r is known (7.2.1)
�
k= 2np+(npl-np when steel ratio, pis known (7.2.2)
j=l-k/3 (7.2.3)
(7.2.4)
(7.2.5)
7.2.6.2 Formulae for Singly Reinforced Rectangular Beams : If external bending moment M is less than
resisting moment M , the area of tensile reinforcement shall be calculated using the following formula :
r
M
As (7.2.6)
= fsjd
7.2.6.3 Formulae for Doubly Reinforced Beams : If M > M the beam shall be designed for tensile and
r
compressive reinforcements using the following formulae :
M-Mr
A5' = (7.2.7)
J;(d-d')
where,
!,
5
(
2n-l k-d'/dj 1
=-n- t:"k y s (7.2.8)

Part6
Structural Design
(7.2.9)
7.2.6.4 Design ofT-beams: AT-beam, where the flange is on the compression side, shall be treated as a
rectangular beam if M � ff,bt(d-t/3). Otherwise, the beam shall be considered as aT-beam, in which case
the following formulae shall be applicable :
np+!(t/d)2 (7.2.10)
k =....n...;. p_ _.,++( tfd-:-:-; ):-
where, P =A5/ bd
1 =
[
. 1·- 3 k-2(tfd) (t d)
2k-(tfd) f
] (7.2.11)
and
M
As = (7.2.6)
f sl"d
Actual stress in concrete, f ca
can be obtained from the relation :
M
!Cil =(1 tj2kd)btjd (7.2.12)
-
While using Eq (7.2.10), if p is not known, it may be initially estimated as p =M/I { d- t/2)bdf5]
7.2.7 Shear and Torsion
7.2.7.1 The design shear force Vshall not exceed the sum of the shear strength provided by concrete, V,
and that provided by shear reinforcement, V 5•
(7.2.13 )
7.2.7.2 When the reaction, in the direction of applied shear, introduces compression into the end regions of
a member, sections located less than a distance t! from face of support may be designed for the same shear
force Vas that computed at a distance d.
7.2.7.3 Shear Strength Provided by Concrete
a) For members subject to shear and flexure, shear strength provided by concrete, V, shall not exceed
0.091../Kbwd unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance with (d) below.
b) For members subject to shear and axial compression, shear strength provided by concrete V,shall not
exceed 0.091../Kbwd unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance with (e) below.
c) For members subject to significant axial tension, shear reinforcement shall be designed to carry total
shear, unless a more detailed calculation is made using
(7.2.14)
where N is design axial load normal to cross-section occurring simultaneously with V and is negative
for tension.
d) For members subject to shear and flexure only, V, may be computed by :
(7.2.15)
6-204
Chapter 7
Quantity Vd/M shall not be taken greater than 1.0, where M is design moment occurring simultaneously
with Vat section considered, and Pw Asfbwd.
=
e) For members subject to axial compression, V, may be computed by:
(7.2.16)
f) For members subjected to torsional moment T exceeding 0.023 { g ) I, x2y, V, may be computed by
(7.2.17)
For calculation of 2, x2y, reference shall made to Sec 6.2.7.5(b).

g) In determining shear strength provided by concrete V" whenever applicable, effects of axial tension due
to creep and shrinkage in restrained members shall be considered and effects of inclined flexural
compression in variable-depth members may be included.
7.2.7.4 Shear Strength Provided by Shear Reinforcement

a) Types of shear reinforcement
Shear reinforcement may consist of :
i) stirrups perpendicular to axis of member,
ii) bent up longitudinal reinforcement with bent portion making an angle of 30 degree or more with
longitudinal tension reinforcement,
iii) combination of stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement,
iv) spirals.
b) Design yield strength of shear reinforcement shall not exceed 410 N/mrn2•
c) Stirrups shall extend to a distance d from extreme compression fibre and shall be anchored at both ends
in accordance with Sec 8.2.
d) Spacing limits for shear reinforcement
i) Spacing of shear reinforcement perpendicular to member axis shall not exceed d/2, nor 600 mm.
ii) Bent longitudinal bars shall have a maximum spacing of 0.375d (1 +cot a), but not greater than
600 mrn, where a is the acute angle between the bent bar and the horizontal.
iii) When (V-V,) exceeds 0.17 gbwd maximum spacing given in (i) and (ii) above shall be reduced
by one-half.
e) Minimum shear reinforcement
i) A minimum area of shear reinforcement shall be provided in all reinforced concrete flexural
members where design shear force Vis greater than one-half the permissible shear strength V,
provide by concrete, except slabs, footings, ribbed construction and beams with total depth not
exceeding the largest of 2.5 times thickness of flange, one-half the width of web, and 250 mm.
ii) Where shear reinforcement is required by (i) above or by analysis, minimum area of shear
reinforcement shall be computed by
bws
A -0.35 (7.2.18)
v- !y

Part 6
Structural Design
iii) Where torsional moment T exceeds (o.023.J"H)'Lx2y and where web reinforcement is required
by (i) above or by analysis, the minimum area of closed stirrups shall be computed by
b s
Av +2A1 = 0.35 w (7.2.19)
/y
where A1 is the area of one leg of closed stirrup.
f) Design of Shear Reinforcement
i) Where design shear force V exceeds shear strength provided by concrete V,, shear reinforcement
shall be provided in accordance with (ii ) through (viii) below.
ii) When shear reinforcement perpendicular to axis of member is used,
A
( V - V, )s
v =
-'---.,./ _d.:....:_ (7.2.20)
s
iii) When inclined stirrups are used as shear reinforcement,
f5d ( sina +cosa)

(7.2.21)
iv) When shear reinforcement consists of a single bar or a single group of parallel bars, all bent up at
the same distance from the support,
:. )s ._
�( V_-_V....:c.:...
A
=
v
f5d sina
(7.2.22)
where (V -V,) shall not exceed 0.133..JKbwd

v) When shear reinforcement consists of a series of parallel bent-up bars or groups of parallel bent
up bars at different distances from the support, required area shall be computed by Eq (7.2.21).
vi) Only the centre three-quarters of the inclined portion of any longitudinal bent bar shall be
considered effective for shear reinforcement.
vii) When more than one type of shear reinforcement is used to reinforce the same portion of
member, required area snail be computed as the sum of the various types separately. In such
computations, V, shall be included oruy once.
viii) Value of (V-V,) shall not exceed 0 . 365.J"Hbw d

7.2.7.5 Combined Shear and Torsion
a) Torsion effects shall be included with shear and flexure where torsional moment T exceeds
(0.023.J"H)'Lx2y. Otherwise, torsion may be neglected. For calculation of 'Lx2y, reference shall be
made to Sec 6.2.7.5(b).
b) If torsional moment T in a member is required to maintain e q�ilibrium, the member shall be designed
to carry that torsional moment in accordance with (c) through 0) below.
c) In a statically indeterminate structure where reduction of torsional moment in a member can occur due
to redistribution of internal forces, maximum torsional moment may be reduced to (0.06.J"H)'Lx2y

i) In such case the corresponding adjusted moments and shears in adjoining members shall be used
in design.
ii) In lieu of exact analysis, torsional loading from a slab shall be taken uniformly distributed along
the member.
d) Sections located less than a distance d from face of support may be designed for the same torsional
moment T as that computed at a distance d.
6-206
Chapter 7
e) Torsional Moment Strength
Design of cross-section subject to torsion shall be based on
(7.2.23)
where
T is torsional moment at section,
Tc is torsional moment strength provided by concrete in accordance with (f) below,
T5 is torsional moment strength provided by torsion reinforcement in accordance with G) below.
f) Torsional moment strength provided by concrete
i) Torsional moment strength Tc shall be computed by
(7.2.24)
ii) . For members subject to significant axial tension, torsion reinforcement shall be designed to carry
the total torsional moment, unless a more detailed calculation is made, in which Tc given by
Eq (7.2.24) and Vc given by Eq (7.2.17) shall be multiplied by (1 +0.3NjA8 ) , where N is negative
for tension.
g) Torsion Reinforcement Requirements
i) Torsion reinforcement, where required, shall be provided in addition to reinforcement required

to resist shear, flexure and axial forces.
ii) Reinforcement required for torsion shall be combined with that required for other forces,
provided the area furnished is the sum of individually required areas and the most restrictive
requirements for spacing and placement are met.
iii) Torsion reinforcement shall consist of closed stirrups, closed ties or spirals, combined with
longitudinal bars.
·
iv) Design yield strength for torsion reinforcement shall not exceed 410 N/mm2•
v) Stirrups used as torsion reinforcement shall extend to a distance d from extreme compression
fibre and shall be anchored in accordance with Sec 8.2.
vi) Torsion reinforcement shall be provided at least a distance (b1+d) beyond the point theoretically
required.
h) Design of Torsion Reinforcement
i) Where torsional moment T exceeds torsional moment strength Tc, torsion reinforcement shall be
provided to satisfy Eq (7.2.23), where torsional moment strength T5 shall be computed by
(7.2.25)
where A1 is the area of one leg of closed stirrup resisting torsion within a distance s and
at (2 + y1jx1 )/3, but not more than 1.5. Longitudinal bars distributed around the perimeter of
=
the closed stirrup At shall be provided in accordance with (iii) below.
ii) A minimum area of closed stirrup shall be provided in accordance with Sec 7.2.7.4(e).
iii) Required area of longitudinal bar At distributed around the perimeter of the closed stirrup At
shall be computed by :
(7.2.26)

Part6
Structural Design
or,
t
A = [ [ ] j(
2.8xs
ly
T
T+� C
3 1
- At
2
xl +Y1
s
) (7.2.27)
or,
At =
[ [ ] j(
2.8xs
ly
T
T+-
v
C
3 1
-btvs
3ly
x1+Y1
s
) (7.2.28)
whichever is the greatest
iv) Torsional moment strength T5 shall not exceed 4T,

j) Spacing Limits forTorsion Reinforcement
i) Spacing of closed stirrups shall not exceed the smaller of ( x1+ y1)J4, or 300 mm.
ii) Spacing of longitudinal bars, not less than 10 mm dia, distributed around the perimeter of the
closed stirrup shall not exceed 300 mm. At least one longitudinal bar shall be placed in each
comer of the closed stirrups.
7.2.8 Reinforcement
7.2.8.1 At any section of a beam or one-way slab, except as provided in Sec 7.2.8.2 and 7.2.8.3 below, where
positive reinforcement is required by analysis, the ratio p provided shall not be less than that given by
1.38
= (7.2.29)
Pmin
ly
In flanged beams where the web is in tension, the ratio p shall be computed for this purpose using the
width of web.
7.2.8.2 Alternatively, area of reinforcement provided at every section, positive or negative, shall be at least
one-third greater than that required by analysis.
7.2.8.3 For structural slabs of uniform thickness, minimum area and maximum spacing of reinforcement in
the direction of the span shall be as required for shrinkage and temperature accoraing to Sec 8.1.12.
7.2.8.4 Where the principal reinforcement in a slab which is considered as the flange of aT-beam (not
ribbed floor) is parallel to the beam, transverse reinforcement shall be provided in the top of the slab.This
reinforcement shall be designed to carry the load on the portion of the slab assumed to act as the flange of
theT-beam. For isolated beams, the full width of overhanging flange shall be considered.The flange shall be
assumed to act as a cantilever.The spacing of the bars shall not exceed five times the thickness of fhe flange,
nor 450 mm This reinforcement neea not be additive to any other reinforcements required.
.
7.2.9 Crack Control

7.2.9.1 This section prescribes rules for distribution of flexural reinforcement to control flexural cracking
in beams and in one-way slabs (slabs reinforced to resist flexural stresses in only one direction).
7.2.9.2 Flexural tension reinforcement shall be well distributed within the maximum flexural tension zone
of a member cross-section as required by Sec 7.2.9.3 below.
7.2.9.3 When design yield strength ly for tension reinforcement exceeds 275 N/mm2, cross-section of
maximum positive and negative moment shall be so proportioned that the quantity z given by
z= Is d,A ( )1/3 (7.2.30)
does not exceed 30 kN/mm for interior exposure and 25 kN/mm for exterior exposure. Calculated stress in
reinforcement at working load, Is, shall be computed as the moment divided oy the product of steel area
and internal moment arm. In lieu of such computations, it is permitted to take Is as 60% of specified yield
strength of ly·
7.2.9.4 Provisions of Sec 7.2.8.3 are not sufficient for structures subject to very aggressive exposure or
designed to be watertight. For such structures, special investigation and precautions are required.
6-208
Chapter 7
7.2.9.5 When flanges ofT-beam construction are in tension, part of the flexural tension reinforcement shall
be distributed over an effective flange width as defined in Sec 7.2.4.5 or a width equal to To the span,
whichever is smaller. If the effective flange width exceeds To the span, some longitudinal reinforcement
shall be provided in the outer portion of the flange.
7.2.9.6 If the depth of the web exceeds 900 mm, longitudinal skin reinforcement shall be uniformly
distributed along both side faces of the member for a distance d/2 from the nearest flexural tension
reinforcement. The area of skin reinforcement Ask on each side face shall be at least (d-750) mm2 per metre
height. The maximum spacing of the skin reinforcement shall not exceed the lesser of d/6 and 300 mm.
Such reinforcement may be included in strength computation if a strain compatibility analysis is made to
determine stresses in the individual bars. The total area of longitudinal skin reinforcement in both faces
need not exceed one-half of the required flexural tensile reinforcement.
7.2.10 Deflection
7.2.10.1 Beams and one-way slabs shall be designed to have adequate stiffness to limit deflections or any
deformations that affect strength or serviceability of a structure adversely at working load.
7.2.10.2 Minimum thickness stipulated inTable 6.6.3 of Chapter 6 shall apply for beams and one-way slabs
not supporting or attached to partitions or other construction likely to be damaged by large deflections,
unless computation of deflection indicates a lesser thickness can be used without adverse effects.
7.2.10.3 Deflections, when computed, shall be those which occur immediately on application of the load
evaluated by the usual methods or formulae for elastic deflections, considering the effects of cracking and
reinforcement on member stiffness.
7.2.10.4 Unless stiffness values are obtained by a more comprehensive analysis, immediate deflection shall
be computed with the modulus of elasticity E, for concrete as specified in Sec 5.12.3, and with the effective
moment of inertia Ie computed by Eq (6.2.36) of Chapter 6, but not greater than 18.
7.2.10.5 For continuous members, effective moment of inertia may be taken as the average of values
obtained from Eq (6.2.36) for the critical positive and negative moment sections. For prismatic members,
effective moment of inertia may be taken as the value obtained from Eq (6.2.36) at mid-span for simple and
continuous spans, and at support for cantilevers.
7.2.10.6 Unless values are obtained by a more comprehensive analysis, additional long-term deflection
resulting from creep and shrinkage of flexural members shall be determined by multiplying the immediate
deflection caused by the sustained load considered, by the factor it as determined from Eq (6.2.39) of
Chapter 6.
7.2.10.7 Deflections computed in accordance with Sec 7.2.10.3 through 7.2.10.6 shall not exceed the limits
stipulated inTable 6.6.4 of Chapter 6.
7.3 COLUMNS
Sec 7.3.1 through 7.3.5 as detailed hereunder along with Sec 6.3, except Sec 6.3.3.1, 6.3.4 and 6.3.5, shall form
part of this section.
In using the provisions of Sec 6.3, the word factored shall be read as working or working load whichever is
applicable.
7.3.1 Definitions and Notation

7.3.1.1 Notation
P working axial load at the section
M moment at the section acting simultaneously with P
H total lateral force acting in any storey
L\ = elastically computed first order lateral deflection due to Hat the top of the storey relative to the
bottom of the storey.
For other symbols used in this section the notation given in Sec 6.3.1 shall be applicable.
7.3.1.2 Definitions : The definitions given in Sec 6.3.2 shall apply to this section. In applying the provision
of Sec 6.3.2.2, the terms P11, L\11 and H11 shall be replaced by their working load counterparts P, L\ and H
respectively.

7.3.2.1 The design assumptions specified in Sec 7.1.3 are valid for this section.
7.3.2.2 The provisions of Sec 6.3.3.2. and 6.3.3.3 shall apply to this section.

Part6
Structural Design

7.3.3.1 Design of cross-section subject to flexure, or to axial loads, or to combined flexure and axial loads
shall be basecfon design assumptions of Sec 7.1.3.
7.3.3.2 All compression members, with or without flexure, shall be proportioned using the ultimate
strength design method.
7.3.3.3 Combined flexure and axial load capacity of compression members shall be taken as 40 per cent of
that computed in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 6 of this part.
7.3.3.4 Design axial load P of compression members shall not be taken greater than the following:
a) For members with spiral reinforcement conforming to Sec 8.1.10.3 or composite compression member
conforming to Sec 6.3.10 :
(7.3.1)
b) For members with tie reinforcement conforming to Sec 8.1.10.4
Pmax =0.272/�Ag +(0.32/y -0.272/� )Ast (7.3.2)
7.3.3.5 Members subject to compressive axial load shall be designed for maximum moment that can
accompany the axial load. The axial load P at �iven eccentricity shall not exceed that given in Sec 7.3.3.4
above. The maximum moment M shall be magnified for slenderness effects in accordance with Sec 7.3.4.
7.3.4 Slenderness Effects

7.3.4.1 Slenderness effects shall be included in accordance with the requirements of Sec 6.3.7 and 6.3.8.
7.3.4.2 In applying the provisions of Sec 6.3.7 and 6.3.8, the following convention and modification shall be
used:
a) the term fac_tored shall be replaced by working or working load as the context implies,
b) the value of strength reduction factor ip shall be taken as unity, and
c) the term Pu shall be replaced by 2.5 times the design axial working load P when gravity loads govern
the design, and by 1.875 times P when gravity loads combined with wind or earthquake forces govern
the design.
7.3.5 Reinforcement
Column reinforcements shall comply with the requirements of Sec 6.3.6.
7.4 FLAT PLATES, FLAT SLABS AND EDGE-SUPPORTED SLABS
7.4.1 General
General requirements for the design of slabs by working stress design method shall be the same as those
specified in Sec 6.4 of Chapter 6.
The provisions of Sec 6.4 except Sec 6.4.7.1 and 6.4.7.2 shall also be applicable along with the provisions of
this section.
In using Sec 6.4, the word factored shall be read as working or working load whichever is applicable and the
factor ip shall be taken as unity.
7.4.2 The shear strength of slabs in the vicinity of columns, concentrated loads or reactions is governed by the
more severe of the following two conditions :
a) Beam action for slab, with critical section extending in a plane across the entire width and located at a
distanced from the face of columns, concentrated loads or reaction. For this condition, the slab shall be
designed in accordance with Sec 7.2.7.1 through 7.2.7.4.
b) Two way action for slab, with a critical section perpendicular to plane of slab and located so that its
perimeter is a minimum, but need not approach closer than d/2 to :
i) edges or corners of columns, concentrated loads or reaction areas or

ii) change in slab thickness such as edges of capitals or drop panels.
For two way action, the slab shall be designed in accordance with Sec 7.4.3 and 7.4.4.
6-210
Chapter 7
Workin g Stress Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures
7.4.3 Design shear stress shall be computed by
v
v=- (7.4.1)
b0d
where Vand b0 shall be taken at the critical section defined in Sec 7.4.2{b) above.
7.4.4 Design shear stress vshall not exceed v, given by Eq (7.4.2) unless shea.r reinforcement is provided.
(7.4.2)
where f3c is the ratio of long side to short side of concentrated load or reaction area.
7.4.5 If shear reinforcement consisting of bars or wires is used in accordance with Sec 6.4.7.3, v, shall not exceed
0. 083 ..JJ{ , and vshall not exceed 0. 25.J7{ .
7.4.6 If shear reinforcement in the form of shearheads is used in accordance with Sec 6.4.7.4, von the critical
.
section, as defined in Sec 7.4.2.(b) above, shall not exceed 0.29 ..JJ{ and v on the critical section, as defined
in Sec 6.4.7.4 (g), shall not exceed 0.17 .J1{. In using Eq (6.4.11) and (6.4.12), the quantity V u shall be
replaced by 2 times the design working shear force V.
7.5 ALTERNATIVE DESIGN OF TWO-WAY EDGE-SUPPORTED SLABS
7.5.1 The provisions of this section may be used as alternative to those of Sec 7.4 for two-way slabs supported on
all four edges by walls, steel beams or monolithic concrete beams having a total depth not less tnan 3 times
the slab thickness.
7.5.2 The provisions of Sec 6.5 (except as may be superseded by the provisions of Chapter 7), shall also form a
part of this section. In using the provisions of sec 6.5, the word factored shall be read as working or working
load as the context implies, and the factor � shall be taken as unity.
7.5.3 Analysis by the Coefficient Method

The slab may be analysed for the determination of negative· moments and dead and live load positive
moments in accordance with the provisions of Sec. 6.5.3.
7.5.4 Flexural Design of Slabs

The flexural design of slabs shall be performed in accordance with the provisions of Sec 7.2.6.1.
7.5.5 Shear Strength of Slabs

The shear strength of slabs shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Sec 7.4.2 through 7.4.6.
7.6 RIBBED AND HOLLOW SLABS
General requirements for the design of ribbed and hollow slabs by the working stress design method shall
be in accordance with Sec 6.6.
The provisions of Sec 6.6 except Sec 6.6.3 shall also form a part of this section.
7.6.1 In applying the provisions of Sec 6.6, the word factored shall be read as working or working load as the
context implies, and the factor � shall be taken as unity.
7.6.2 Ribbed and hollow slabs shall be designed for flexure in accordance with Sec 7.2.6.
7.6.3. The shear strength of ribbed and hollow slabs shall be provided to satisfy the requirements of Sec 7.4.2
through 7.4.6, except as specified in Sec 7.6.4 below. .
7.6.4 For one-way ribbed and hollow slab construction, contribution of concrete to shear strength V, is permitted
to be 10 per cent more than that specified in Sec 7.2.7. It is allowed to increase shear strength using shear
reinforcement or by widening the ends of ribs.
·

Part6
Structural Design
7.7 FRAMED STRUCTURES
General requirements and method of analysis for the design of framed structures under working stress
design metli.od shall be in accordance with Sec 6.7 except the Iollowing :
a) In using the provisions of Sec 6.7, the word factored shall be read as working or working load
whichever is applicable, and the factor ¢/shall be taken as unity.
b) All members of frames shall be designed for the maximum effects of working loads using allowable
working load stresses.
c) No redistribution of negative moments in continuous fl!'!xural members shall be permissible and

Sec 6.7.5.3 shall not be applicable.
7.8 DEEP BEAMS
7.8.1 Notation
a = shear span, distance between concentrated load and face of support, rnm
Av area of shear reinforcement perpendicular to flexural tension reinforcement within a distance s,
mm2
Avh = area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural tension reinforcement within a distance s1, mm2
bw web width, mm
d = distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of longitudinal tension reinforcement
!� = specified compressive strength of concrete, N I mm2

h = overall thickness of members, mm.
ln clear span measured face-to-face of supports, mm
l = effective span, mm
M moment at section
v, = shear strength provided by concrete
Vn shear strength
v shear force at section
5 = spacing of shear or torsion reinforcement in direction parallel to longitudinal reinforcement, rnm
51 = spacing of shear or torsion reinforcement in direction perpendicular to longitudinal
reinforcementmm
Pw =
A5/bwd
z lever arm used in Sec 7.8.3 and 6.8.3
7.8.2 General
7.8.2.1 Flexural members with overall depth to clear span ratio greater than 0.4 for continuous spans, or
0.5 for simple spans, shall be designed as deep beams taking into account nonlinear distribution of strain
and lateral buckling (See also Sec 8.2.7.6).
7.8.2.2 Shear strength of deep beams shall be provided in accordance with Sec 7.8.4 below.
7.8.2.3 Minimum flexural tension reinforcement shall conform to Sec 7.2.8.
7.8.2.4 Minimum horizontal and vertical reinforcement in the side faces of deep beams shall satisfy the
requirements of Sec 7.8.4.8, 7.8.4.9 and 7.8.4.10 below, but the reinforcement snall not be less than that
required for walls in Sec 6.9.7.2 and 6.9.7.3.
7.8.3 Flexure
Deep flexural members shall be designed as beams, except that the lever arm, z, shall be computed in
accordance with Sec 6.8.3. ·
7.8.4 Shear
7.8.4.1 The provisions of this section shall apply to members with l nld less than 5 that are loaded on one
face and supported on the opposite face so that compression stress can develop between the loads and the
supports.
7.8.4.2 The design of simply supported deep beams for shear shall be based on Sec 7.2.7.1. The shear
strength provided by concrete, V ,, shall be computed in accordance with Sec 7.8.4.6 or 7.8.4.7 and that
provided by steel, V5, in accordance with Sec 7.8.4.8.
7.8.4.3 The design of continuous deep beams for shear shall be based on Sec 7.2.7.1 through 7.2.7.5 or on
any method satisfying equilibrium, compatibility and strength requirements. In either case the design shall
also satisfy Sec 7.8.4.4, 7.8.4.9 and 7.8.4.10 below.
6-212
Chapter 7
7.8.4.4 Shear strength Vn for deep beams shall not be taken greater than 0.37 .J"Kbwd when f. nld is Jess
than 2. When f. n Id lies between 2 and 5,
(7.8.1)
7.8.4.5 Critical section for shear shall be taken at a distance of 0.15 f. n for uniformly loaded beams and
O.SOa for beams with concentrated loads, measured from the face of support, but in either case not greater
than d.
7.8.4.6 Unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance with Sec 7.8.4.7, Vc shall be taken as
Vc = 0.091 {f[bwd (7.8.2)
7.8.4.7 Shear strength Vc may be computed more accurately by
(7.8.3)
except that the term (1.93-1.38 M) shall not exceed 1.38 and V c shall not to be taken greater than
0.275 {f[bwd
7.8.4.8 Where shear force V exceeds shear strength Vc, shear reinforcement shall be provided to satisfy the
requirement of Sec 7.2.7.1. The shear strength, V5, contributed by shear reinforcement shall be computed by
V5 =
r [ l [ ]}
Av
s
1+
12
d
f.n
+
Avh
s1
11-
12
f.n
d
5d
(7.8.4)
where Avis the area of shear reinforcement perpendicular to flexural tension reinforcement within a
distance s, and Avh is the area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural reinforcement within a distance s1.
7.8.4.9 Area of shear reinforcement Avshall not be less than 0.0015 b.,gS, and s shall not exceed d/5, nor 450
mm.
7.8.4.10 The area of horizontal shear reinforcement Avh shall not be less than 0.0025 bw s1 and s1 shall not
exceed d/3, nor 450 mm.
7.8.4.11 Shear reinforcement required at the critical section defined in Sec 7.8.4.5 shall be used throughout
the span.
7.9 REINFORCED CONCRETE WALLS
7.9.1 General requirements for and analysis of reinforced concrete walls for design by the working stress design
method shall be the same as those specified in Sec 6.9.
In applying the provision of Sec 6.9, the word factored shall be read as working or working load as the
context implies.
7.9.2 Walls shall be designed in accordance with Sec 6.9 with flexural and axial load capacities taken as 40 per
cent of that computed using Sec 6.9. Strength reduction factor q, shall be taken equal to 1.0.
7.9.3 In computing the effect of slenderness, the quantity Pu shall be taken as 2.5Pwhen gravity loads govern the
design and as 1.875P when lateral loads combined with gravity loads govern the design, where Pis the
design working axial load in the wall.
7.9.4 Design of walls for shear shall be in accordance with the provisions of Sec 6.9.6 except the following :
7.9.4.1 Shear strengths provided by concrete and the limiting maximum strengths for shear shall be taken
as 55 per cent of the values given in Sec 6.9.6.

Part 6
Structural Design
7.9.4.2 In Sec Nu shall be replaced by

6.9.6.6, 2 times the design axial load for tension and 1.2 times the
design axial load for compression.
7.9.4.3 The terms Vu and Mu shall be replaced by their working load values Vand M respectively.
7.10 FOOTINGS
7.10.1 General requirements for the design of footings by the working stress design method shall be the same as
those specified in Sec 6.10.
7.10.2 In using the provisions of Sec 6.10, the word factored shall be read as working or working load as the
context implies, and the value of strength reduction factor ¢ shall be taken as 1.0.
7.10.3 Footings (combined or isolated), mats or pile cars shall be designed to resist the service loads and induced
reactions in accordance with the appropriate des1gn requirements of this chapter.
7.10.4 For flexural design of footings, the provisions of Sec 6.10.3 shall be applicable.
7.10.5 Development of reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with Sec 6.10.5.
7.10.6 The requirements of Sec 6.10.6 for transfer of force at base shall be applicable except the following:
7.10.6.1 The limiting bearing stress in Sec 6.10.6.1 shall be 0.3f� instead of 0.85¢f�.
7.10.6.2 The limiting bearing stress in Sec 6.10.6.2 shall be 0.3f��(AtfA2)instead of 0.85¢f��(AtfA2).
7.10.7 The provisions of Sec 6.10.7 for sloped or stepped footings and Sec 6.10.8 for combined footings and mats
shall be applicable.
7.10.8 Shear in Footings

7.10.8.1 Shear capacity of footin�s in the vicinity of concentrated loads or reactions is governed by the more
severe of the following two cond1tions:
a) Beam action for footing, with a critical section exte�ding in a plane across the entire width and located
at a distance d from face of con�entrated load or reaction area. For this condition, the footing shall be
designed in accordance with Sec through
7.2.7.1 7.2.7.4.
b) Two-way action for footing, with a critical section perpendicular to plane of footing and located so that
its perimeter is a minimum, but the critical section need not approach closer than d/2 to perimeter of
concentrated load or reaction area. For this condition, the footing shall be designed in accordance with
Sec and
7.10.2.2 7.10.2.3.
7.10.8.2 Design shear stress v shall be computed by
(7.10.1)
where Vand b0shall be taken at the critical section defined in 7.10.2.1(b) above.
7.10.8.3 Design shear stress v shall not exceed v, given by Eq (7.10.2) unless shear reinforcement is provided
(7. 10.2)
where f3c is the ratio of long side to short side for concentrated load or reaction area.
7.10.8.4 If shear reinforcement consisting of bars or wires is provided in the footings, v, shall not exceed
0.083{1[, and v shall not exceed 0.25{1[. The required area of shear reinforcement Av shall be calculated
in accordance with Sec 7.2.7.4 and anchored in accordance with Sec 8.2.
7.10.9 Pile Caps
Pile caps shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of Sec 6.10.9 with the following modifications:
7.10.9.1 In applying the provision of Sec 6.10.9.3 for beam shear, the shear force Von the critical section
shall not exceea V" where
6-214
Chapter 7
(7.10.3)
with the symbols having their meanings and values as specified in Sec 6.10.9.3.
7.10.9.2 In applying the provisions of Sec 6.10.9.4 for punching shear, the shear stress at the perimeter of the
column shall not exceed 0.4 �, nor 2.5 N/mm2• The other provisions of Sec 6.10.9.4 shall remain
unchanged.
7.11 STAIRS
Requirements for the design of stairs by the working stress design method shall be in accordance with
Sec 6.11 except the following:
a) Staircases shall be designed to support design working loads in accordance with the provisions of
Sec 7.1.4.
b) The provisions for beams and one-way slabs given in Sec 7.2 shall apply for the design of stairs.
7.12 SHELLS AND FOLDED PLATES
Requirements for the design of shells and folded plates by the working stress design method shall be in
accordance with Sec 6.12 except the following:
a) All provisions of section 7.1 and 7.2 shall apply to thin-shell struchues.
b) A portion of the shell equal to the flange width specified in Sec 7.2.4.5 may be assumed to act with the
auxiliary member. In such portions of the sheil, the reinforcement perpendicular to the auxiliary
member shall be at least equal to that required for the flange of a T-beam by Sec 7.2.8.4.
c) Reinforcement required to resist shell membrane forces shall be provided so that the design strength in
every direction shall be at least equal to the component of the pnncipal membrane forces in the shell in
the same direction due to working loads.
d) Where the principal membrane tensile stress on the gross concrete area due to working loads exceeds
0.17 � reinforcement shall not be spaced farther apart than three times the shell thickness.
e) Design for flexure shall be in accordance with Sec 7.2.6.
7.13 PRECAST AND COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION
Requirements for the design of precast and composite construction by the working stress design method
shall be in accordance with Sec 6.13 except the following:
7.13.1 For design of composite concrete flexural members, allowable horizontal shear strength Vh shall not exceed
55 per cent of the horizontal shear strengths Vnh given in Sec 6.13.3.11.
7.13.2 When an entire composite member is assumed to resist vertical shear, design shall be in accordance with
requirements of Sec 7.2.7 as for a monolithically cast member of the same cross-sectional shape.
7.13.3 Design for flexure shall be in accordance with Sec 7.2.6.
7.13.4 Shear-friction provision of Sec 6.13.3.15 shall be app lied with limiting maximum stress for shear taken as
55 per cent of that given. Allowable stress in shear fnction reinforcement shall be that given in Sec 7.1.10.
Related Appendix

Part6
Structural Design
6-216
CHAPTER®
Detailing of Reinforced
Concrete Structures
8.1 DETAILS OF REINFORCEMENT
8.1.1 Notation
d distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of tension reinforcement, rnm
db nominal diameter of bar, mm
specified yield strength of reinforcement, N I mm2

/y
h = overall thickness of member, mm
ld development length, mm
8.1.2 Standard Hooks

The term "standard hook" as used in this Code shall mean one of the following :
a) 1800 bend plus an extension of at least 4 bar diameters, but not less than 60 rnm at the free end of the bar.
b) goo bend plus an extension of at least 12 bar diameters at the free end of the bar.
c) For stirrup and tie anchorage
i) For 16 mm cp bar and smaller, a goo bend plus an extension of at least 6 bar diameters at the free
end of the bar,
ii) For 20 rnm and 25 mm cp bar, a goo bend plus an extension of at least 12 bar diameters at the free
end of the bar,
Part 6 6-217
Structural Design
Part 6
Structural Design
iii) For 25 mm «1> bar and smaller, a 135°bend plus an extension of at least 6 bar diameters at the free
end of the bar,
iv) For closed ties and continuously wound ties, a 135° bend plus an extension of at least 6 bar
diameters, but not less than 75 mm.
. ..
8.1.3 Minimum Bend Diameters

8.1.3.1 The minimum diameter of bend measured on the inside of the bar, for standard hooks other than for
stirrups and ties in sizes 10 mm «!> through 16 mm «!>,shall not be less than the values shown in Table 6.8.1.
8.1.3.2 For stirrups and tie hooks, inside diameter of bend shall not be less than 4 bar diameters for
16 mm «1> bar and smaller. For bars larger than 16 mm «!>, diameter of bend shall be in accordance with
Table 6.8.1.
Table 6. 8.1
Minimum Diameters of Bend
Bar Size Minimum Diameter of Bend

lOmm � db � 25mm 6db
25mm< db� 40mm 8db
40mm< db� 55mm 10db
8.1.4 Bending
8.1.4.1 1Jnless otherwise permitted by the engineer,all reinforcement shall be bent cold.
8.1.4.2 Errors in alignment of reinforcement partially embedded in hardened concrete shall not be corrected
by bending in place,except as permitted by the engineer.
8.1.5 Surface Conditions of Reinforcement

8.1.5.1 When concrete is placed, metal reinforcement shall be free from mud, oil, or other nonmetallic
coatings that decrease bond.
8.1.5.2 Metal reinforcement with rust, mill scale, or a combination of both, shall be considered satisfactory,
provided the minimum dimensions (including height of deformations) and weight of a hand-wire-brushed test
specimen are not less than applicable ASTM specification requirements.
8.1.6 Placing of Reinforcement

8.1.6.1 Reinforcement shall be accurately placed and adequately supported before concrete is placed, and
shall be secured against displacement within tolerances permitted m sec 8.1.6.2 below.
8.1.6.2 Reinforcement shall be placed within the following tolerances unless otherwise specified by the
engineer:
a) Tolerances for depth d, and minimum concrete cover in flexural members, walls and compression members
shall be as set forth in Table 6.8.2.
Table 6.8.2
Tolerances for Placing Reinforcement
Tolerance for Tolerance for

d Minimum
Concrete Cover
d �200mm ±lOmm -10mm
d >200mm ±12mm -12mm
b) Notwithstanding the provision of (a) above, tolerance for the clear distance to formed soffits shall be
minus 6 mm and tolerance for cover shall not exceed minus t the minimum concrete cover required in the
design dra�ings or specifications.
c) Tolerance for longitudinal location of bends and ends of reinforcement shall be ± 50 mm, except at
discontinuous ends of members where tolerance shall be± 12 mm .
d) Welding of crossing bars shall not be permitted for assembly of reinforcement unless authorized by the
engineer.
6-218
Chapter 8
Detailing of Reinforced Concrete Structures
8.1.7 Spacing of Reinforcement .

8.1.7.1 The minimum clear spacing between parallel bars in a layer shall be equal to one bar diameter, but
not less than 25 mm (also see Se� 5.2.2.2).
8.1.7.2 Where l'arallel reinforcement is placed in two or more layers, bars in the upper layers shall be
placed directly above those in the bottom layer with clear distance between layers not less than 25 mm .
8.1.7.3 For compression members, the clear distance between longitudinal bars shall be not less than 1.5 bar
diameters nor 35 mm (also see Sec 5.2.2.2).
8.1.7.4 Clear distance limitation between bars shall apply also to the clear distance between a contact lap
splice and adjacent splices or bars.
8.1.7.5 In walls and one-way slabs the maximum bar spacing shall be three times the wall or slab thickness
(h) but not more than 450 mm .
8.1.7.6 For two-way slabs, maximum spacing of bars shall be 2h but not more than 450 mm .
8.1.7.7 For temperature steel only, maximum spacing shall be 5h but not more than 450 mm .
8.1.7.8 Bundled Bars

a) Groups of parallel reinforcing bars bundled in contact to act as a unit shall be limited to four in any one
bundle.
b) Bundled bars shall be enclosed within stirrups or ties.
c) Bars larger than 35 mm cp shall not be bundled in beams.
d) Individual bars within a bundle terminated within the span of flexural members shall terminate at
different points with at least 40db stagger.
e) Where spacing limitations and minimum concrete cover are based on bar diameter db, a unit of bundled
bars shall be treated as a single bar of a diameter derived from the equivalent total area.
8.1.8 Exposure Condition and Cover to Reinforcement

8.1.8.1 The nominal concrete cover to all reinforcement (including links), maximum free water-cement ratio
and minimum cement content required for various minimum concrete strengths used in different exposure
conditions shall be as specified in Table 6.8.3. However, for mild environment, the minimum concrete cover
specified in Sec 8.1.8.2 and 8.1.8.3 for various structural elements may be used.
8.1.8.2 Cast-in-place Concrete: The following minimum concrete cover may be provided for reinforcement
for concrete surfaces not exposed to weather or in contact with ground:
Slabs, Wails : Minimum cover, mm

45 mm cp and 55 mm cp 30
35 mm cp bar and smaller 20
Beams, Columns :
Primary reinforcement 40
Ties, stirrups, spirals 30
Shells, folded plate members :

20 mm cp bar and larger
15 mm cp bar and smaller
8.1.8.3 Precast Concrete (manufactured under plant control conditions) :The following minimum concrete
cover may be provided for reinforcement for concrete surfaces not exposed to weather or in contact with
ground:
Slabs, Walls : Minimum cover, mm

45 mm cp and 55 mm cp 25
Beams, col umns :

Primary reinforcement
Ties, stirrups, spiral
Shells, folded plate members :

20 mm cp bar and larger 15

Part 6
Structural Design
Table 6.8.3*
Concrete Cover and other Requirements for Various -.:=:xposure Conditions
Environ Exposure Conditions Minimum f� N/mm2

-ment
20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Mild Concrete surfaces protected against 30 25 20 20 20** 20** 20**
weather or aggressive conditions
N'onr Mode- Concrete surface away from severe 40 35 30 25 20 20 20

ina! rate rain
cover Concrete subject to condensation
(rmi) Concrete surfaces continuously
under water
Concrete in contact with nonaggre-
ssive soil
Severe Concrete surfaces exposed to severe 45 40 30 25 25 20

rain, alternate wetting and drying or
severe condensation
Very Concrete surfaces exposed to sea 50 40 30 30 25

severe water spray, corrosive fumes
Extreme Concrete surfaces exposed to 60 50 40 30

abrasive action, e ; sea water
lf
carryin solid s or
fi owing water
with p $ 4.5 or machinery or
vehicles
Maximum water/cement ratio 0.65 0.65 0.60 0.55 0.50 0.45 0.42
Minimum cement content, !kg!m3) 31 5 325 350 37 5 400 41 0 420
. This table relates to aggregate of 20 mm nominal maximum size .
.. May be reduced to 15 mm provided the nominal maximum aggregate size does not exceed 15 mm .
8.1.8.4 For concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth, minimum cover shall be 75 nun .
8.1.8.5 Bundled Bars: Minimum concrete cover shall be equal to the equivalent diameter of the bundle, but
need not be greater than 50 nun .
8.1.8.6 Future Extension : Exposed reinforcement, inserts, and plates intended for bonding with future
extensions shall be protected from corrosion. .
8.1.9 Reinforcement Details for Columns

8.1.9.1 Offset Bars: Offset bent longitudinal bars shall conform to the following:
a) The maximum slope of inclined portion of an offset bar with axis of column shall not exceed 1 in 6.
b) Portions of bar above and below an offset shall be parallel to the axis of coiurnn.
c) Horizontal support at offset bends shall be provided by lateral ties, spirals, or parts of the floor
construction. Horizontal support provided shall be designed to resist 1 .5 times the horiZontal component
of the compressive force in the offset bent bars. Lateral ties or spirals, if used, shall be placed not more
than 150 nun away from points of bend.
d) Offset bars shall be bent before placement in the forms (see Sec 8.1.4).
e) Where the face of the column above is offset 75 mm or more from the face of the column below, offset bars
shall not be permitted. The splice shall be made by separate d owels. Lap splices shall conform to
Sec 8.2.14.
8.1.9.2 Steel Cores : Load transfer in structural steel cores of composite compression members shall be
provided by the following:
a) Ends of structural steel cores shall be accurately finished to bear at end bearing splices, with positive
provision for alignment of one core above the other in concentric contact.
b) At end bearing splices, bearing shall be considered effective to transfer not more than 50 per cent of the
total compressive stress in the steel core.
6-220
Chapter 8
c) Transfer of stress between column base and footing shall be designed in accordance with Sec 6.10.6.
d) Base of structural steel section shall be designed to transfer the total load from the entire composite
member to the footing; or, the base shall be designed to transfer the load from the steel core only, provided
ample concrete section is available for transfer of the portion of the total load carried by the reinforced
concrete section to the footing by compression in the concrete and by reinforcement.
8.1.10 Lateral Reinforcement for Columns

8.1.10.1 Lateral reinforcement for compression members shall conform to the provisions of Sec 8.1.10.3 and
8.1.10.4 below and where shear or torsion reinforcement is required, shall also conform to provisions of
Sec 6.2.7.
8.1.10.2 Lateral reinforcement requirements for composite columns shall conform to Sec 6.3.10.8 and 6.3.10.9.
8.1.10.3 Spirals : Spiral reinforcement for columns shall conform to Sec 6.3.6.4 and to the following:
a) Spirals shall consist of evenly spaced continuous bar or wire of such size and so assembled as to permit
handling and placing without distortion from designed dimensions.
b) Size of spirals shall not be less than 10 mm diameter for cast-in-place construction.
c) The minimum and maximum clear spacing between spirals shall be 25 mm and 75 mm respectively.
d) Anchorage of spiral reinforcement shall be provided by 1.5 extra turns of spiral bar or wire at each end
of a spiral unit.
e) Splices in spiral reinforcement shall be lap splices of 48 spiral diameter, but not less than 300 mm .
f) Spirals shall extend from the top of footing or slab in any storey to the level of the lowest horizontal
reinforcement in members supported above.
g) Spirals shall extend above termination of spiral to bottom of slab or drop panel, where beams or
brackets do not frame into all sides of a column.
h) Spirals shall extend to a level at which the diameter or width of capital is 2 times that of the column, in
case of columns with capitals.
j) Spirals shall be held firmly in place and true to line.
8.1.10.4 Ties: Tie reinforcement for compression members shall conform to the following:
a) All bars shall be enclosed by lateral ties, at least 10 mm cp in size for longitudinal bars 30 mm cp or
smaller, and at least 12 mm cp in size for 35 mm cp to 55 mm cp and bundled longitudinal bars.
b) Vertical spacing of ties shall not exceed 16 longitudinal bar diameters or 48 tie diameters, or the least
dimension of the compression members.
c) Ties shall be arranged such that every comer and alternate longitudinal bar shall have lateral support
provided by the comer of a tie with an included angle not more than 135 deg. No vertical bar shall be
farther than 150 mm clear on each side along the tie from such a lateralfy supported bar. Where
longitudinal bars are located around the perimeter of a circle, a complete circular tie is allowed.
d) The lowest tie in any storey shall be placed within one-half the required tie spacing from the top most
horizontal reinforcement in the slab or footing below. The u permost tie in any storey shall be within
f
one-half the required tie spacing from the lowest horizonta reinforcement in the slab or drop panel
above.
e) Where beams or brackets provide concrete confinement at the top of the column on all (four) sides, the top
tie shall be within 75 mm of the lowest horizontal reinforcement in the shallowest of such beams or
brackets.
8.1.11 Lateral Reinforcement for Beams

8.1.11.1 Compression reinforcement in beams shall be enclosed by ties or stirrups satisfying the size and
spacing limitations in Sec 8.1.10.4 above. Such ties or stirrups s hall be provided throughout the distance
where compression reinforcement is required.
8.1.11.2 Lateral reinforcement for flexural framing members subject to stress reversals or to torsion at
supports shall consist of closed ties, closed stirrups, or spirals extending around the flexural reinforcement.

Part 6
Structural Design
8.1.11.3 Closed ties or stirrups shall be formed in one piece by overlapping standard stirrup or tie end hooks
around a longitudinal bar, or formed in one or two pieces lap spliced with a Class B splice (lap of 1.3ld) or
anchored in accordance with Sec 8.2.10.
8.1.12 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement

8.1.12.1 Where the flexural reinforcement extends· in one direction only, reinforcement for shrinka�e and
temperature stresses shall be provided perpendicular to flexural reinforcement in structural slabs. Shrmkage
and temperature reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with Sec 8.1.12.2 below.
8.1.12.2 Deformed reinforcement conforming to Sec 5.3.2 shall be provided in accordance with the following:
a) Area of shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall provide at least the following ratios of
reinforcement area to gross concrete area:
0.0020 for slabs where reinforcement with /y = 275 N/mm2 or 350 N/mm2 are used,
0.0018 for slabs where reinforcement with /y = 410 N/mm2 are used,
0.0018 [% )
0
for slabs where reinforcement with fy exceeding 410 N/mm2 are used.
In any case, the reinforcement ratio shall not be less than 0.0014.
b) Area of shrinkage and temperature reinforcement for brick aggregate concrete shall be at least 1.5 times
that provided in (a) above.
c) Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be spaced not farther apart than 5 times the slab
thickness, nor 450 mm.
d) At all sections where required, reinforcement for shrinkage and temperature stresses shall develop the
specified yield strengthf in tension in accordance with Sec 8.2.
y
8.1.13 Requirements for Structural Integrity

8.1.13.1 In the detailing of reinforcement and connections, members of a structure shall be effectively tied
together to improve integrity of the overall structure.
8.1.13.2 The minimum requirements for cast-in-place construction shall be:
a) In one-way slab construction, at least one bottom bar shall be continuous or shall be spliced over the
support with a Class A tension splice. At noncontinuous supports, the bars may be terminated with a
standard hook.
b) Beams at the perimeter of the structure shall have at least one-sixth of the tension reinforcement required
for negative moment at the support and one-quarter of the positive moment reinforcement required at
midspan made continuous around the perimeter and tied witfi closed stirrups. Closed stirrups need not be
extended through any joints. The required continuity may be provided with top reinforcement spliced at
midspan and bottom reinforcement spliced at or near the support with Class A tension splices.
c) When dosed stirrups are not provided, in other than perimeter beams, at least one-quarter of the positive
moment reinforcement required at midspan shall be continuous or shall be spliced over the support with
a Class A tension splice. At noncontinuous supports the bars may be terminated with a standard hook.
8.1.13.3 To effectively tie elements together, tension ties shall be provided in the transverse, longitudinal, and
vertical directions and around the perimeter of the structure for precast concrete construction.
8.2 DEVELOPMENT AND SPLICES OF REINFORCEMENT
8.2.1 Notation
a = depth of equivalent rectangular stress block as defined in Sec 6.2.3.7
Ab = area of an individual bar, mm2
As = area of tension reinforcement, mm2
Atr total cross-sectional area of transverse reinforcement (stirrup or tie) within a spacing s a n d
perpendicular t o plane o f bars being spliced o r developed, mm2
Av = area of shear reinforcement within a distances, mm2
bw = web width, or diameter of circular section, mm
d distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of tension reinforcement, mm
6-222
Chapter 8
db = nominal diameter of bar, mm
J; = specified compressive strength of concrete, N I mm2
!y specified yield strength of reinforcement, N I mm2

h overall thickness of member, mm
la additional embedment length at support or at point of inflection, mm
ld development length, mm
ldb = basic development length , mm
ldh development length of standard hook in tension, measured from the critical section to the farthest
point on the bar, parallel to the straight part of the bar, mm
l hb x applicable modification factors
lhb basic development length of standard hook in tension, mm
Mn = nominal moment strength at section, Nmm
N number of bars, in a layer, being spliced or developed at a critical section
s = spacing of stirrups or ties, mm
Vu factored shear force at section, N
fib ratio of area of reinforcement cut off to total area of tension reinforcement at section.
8.2.2 Development of Reinforcement - General

Calculated tension or compression stress in reinforcement at each section of reinforced concrete members shall
be developed on each side of that section by embedment length, hook or mechanical device, or a combination
thereof. Hooks may be used in developing bars in tension only.
8.2.3 Development of Deformed Bars in Tension

8.2.3.1 Development length ld for deformed bars in tension shall be computed as the product of the basic
development length ldb of Sec 8.2.3.2 below and the applicable modification factors given in Sec 8.2.3.3
through 8.2.3.5 below, but ld shall not be less than 300 mm.
8.2.3.2 Basic development length, ldb shall be
0.02Abfy
for 35 mm cp bar and smaller
.JJ[
25/
y
for 45 mm cp bar
.JJ[
35/y
for 55 mm cp bar
.JJ[
8.2.3.3 To account for bar spacing, concrete cover, splitting strength, actual design stress in the bar and
enclosing transverse reinforcement, the basic development length shalibe multiplied by a factor from (a), (b) or
(c) below which may be modified by (d) or (e) but snail not be less than that specified in (f).
a) . For all bars satisfying any one of the following conditions 1.0
i) Bars i n beams o r columns with minimum cover not less than that specified in
Sec 8.1.8.1, transverse reinforcement satisfying tie requirements of sec 8.1.10.4,
minimum stirrup requirements of Sec 6.2.7.4(d) and 6.2.7.4e(ii) along the
development length, and with clear spacing of not less than 3db.
ii) Bars in beams or columns with minimum cover not less than that specified in Sec
8.1.8.1 and enclosed within transverse reinforcement A1ralong the development
length satisfying the following :
> dbsN
A tr- (8.2.1)
40
iii) Bars in the inner layer of slab or wall reinforcement and with clear spacing
of not less than 3db.
iv) Any bars with cover of not less than 2db and with clear spacing of not less
than 3db
b) For bars with a cover of db or less or with a clear spacing of 2db or less 2.0

Part 6
Structural Design
c) For other bars not included in (a) or (b) above 1.4
d) The factors in (a) through (c) above shall be multiplied by 0.8 for 35 mm cp bars and smaller, with clear
spacing not less than 5db, and with at least 2.5 db clear from face of member to edge of bar.
e) The factors in (a) through (c) above shall be multiplied by 0.75 for reinforcement enclosed within spiral
reinforcement not less than 6 mm diameter and not more than 100 mm pitch.
f) The basic development length multiplied by the applicable factor of (a) through (c) above with modifiers
0.375dbf
of (d) and/or (e) above shall not be taken less than {fl Y
!�
8.2.3.4 Basic development length f. db as modified by Sec 8.2.3.3 above shall also be multiplied by the
applicable factor or factors for :
a) Top Reinforcement
Horizontal reinforcement so placed that more than 300 mm of concrete is
cast in the member below the bar. 1.3
b) Epoxy Coated Reinforcement

i) Bars with cover less than 3db or clear spacing less than 6db 1.5
ii) For all other conditions 1.2
The product of factor for top reinforcement of (a) and the factor for epoxy-coated reinforcement of (b) need not
be tal<en greater than 1.7.
. A��
s
8.2.3.5 Excess Remforcement : Development length may be reduced by the factor . where
As provided
reinforcement in a flexural member is in excess of that required by analysis except where anchorage or
development for /y is specifically required or the reinforcement is designed under the provisions of
Sec 8.3.3.1(d).
8.2.4 Development of Deformed Bars in Compression

8.2.4.1 Development lengths f. d for deformed bars in compression shall be computed as the product of the
basic development length f. db of Sec 8.2.4.2 below and applicable modification factors of Sec 8.2.4.3 but f. d
shall be not less than 200 mm .
0.24dbfy
8.2.4.2 Basic development length f. db shall be {fl but not less than 0.04dtfy·
8.2.4.3 Basic development length f. db shall be multiplied by applicable factors from the following:
As required
a) Where reinforcement is provided in excess of that required by analysis
As provided
b) Where reinforcement is enclosed within spiral reinforcement not less

than 6 mm cp and not more than 100 mm pitch or ties not less than 12 mm
cp in conformity with Sec 8.1.10.4 spaced at not more than 100 mm on
centres. 0 .7 5
8.2.5 Development of Bundled Bars
8.2.5.1 Development length of individual bars within a bundle, in tension or compression, shall be that for
the individual bar, increased 20 per cent for 3 bar bundles and 33 per cent for 4 bar bundles.
8.2.5.2 A unit of bundled bars shall be treated as a single bar of a diameter derived from the equivalent total
area for determining the appropriate factors in Sec 8.2.3.3 and 8.2.3.4 (b).
8.2.6 Development of Standard Hooks in Tension

8.2.6.1. Development length f. dh for deformed bars in tension terminating in a standard hook shall be
computed as the product of the basic development length, f.hb of Sec 8.2.6.2 below and the applicable
modification factor or factors of Sec 8.2.6.3, but f.dh shall be not less than 8db nor less than 150 mm.
6-224
Chapter 8
8.2.6.2 Basic development length

.
ehb for a hooked bar withfy = 410 N/mm2shall be
l
� b
vfc
8.2.6.3 Basic development length ehb shall be multiplied by applicable factor or factors for:
a) Bars withfyother than410N/nun2 /y/410
b) For 35 mm cp bars and smaller, side cover not less than 60 nun, and for 90
deg hook, cover on bar extension beyond hook not less than 50 nun 0.7
c) For 35 mm cp bar and smaller, hook enclosed vertically or horizontally

within ties or stirrups with spacing along the full development length
e dh not greater than 3db , where db is diameter of hooked bar. 0.8
d) Where anchorage or development for fy is not specifically required,

As required
reinforcement is provided in excess of that required by analysis
A5provided
8.2.6.4 For bars being developed by a standard hook at discontinuous ends of members with both side cover
and top or bottom cover less than 60 nun, hooked bar shall be enclosed within closed stirrups or ties spaced
along the full development length e dh not greater than 3 times the diameter of hooked bar. For this case, factor
0.8 of Sec 8.2.6.3 (c) shall not apply.
8.2.6.5 Hooks shall not be considered effective in developing bars in compression.
8.2.7 Development of Flexural Reinforcement - General

8.2.7.1 Tension reinforcement may be developed by bending across the web to be anchored or made
continuous with reinforcement on the opposite face of member.
8.2.7.2 Critical sections for development of reinforcement in flexural members are at points of maximum
moment and at points within the span where adjacent reinforcement terminates, or is bent. In addition, the
provisions of Sec 8.2.8.3 shall also be satisfied.
8.2.7.3 Reinforcement shall extend beyond the point at which it is no longer required to resist flexure for a
distance not less than d nor less than 12db, except at supports of simple spans and at free end of cantilevers.
8.2.7.4 Continuing reinforcement shall have an embedment length not less than the development length ed
beyond the point where the bent or terminated tension reinforcement is no longer needed to resist bending.
8.2.7.5 No flexural bar shall be terminated in a tension zone unless one of the following conditions is
satisfied:
a) The shear at the location of termination is not over two-thirds that normally permitted, including the
shear strength of shear reinforcement provided.
b) Stirrups in excess of those normally required for shear and torsion are provided over a distance along
each terminated bar equal to 0.75d from the point of cutoff. Excess stirrup area Av shall be not less than
0.4bws
. Spacingsshall not exceed /3d , where f3b is the ratio of area of reinforcement cut off to total
� 8b
area of tension reinforcement at the section.
c) For 35 mm cp bar and smaller, the continuing bars provide twice the area required for flexure at the cutoff
point and the shear does not exceed three-quarter of that permitted.
8.2.7.6 Where the reinforcement stress is not directly proportional to moment, such as in sloped, stepped, or
tapered footings, brackets, deep flexural members, or members in which tension reinforcement is not parallel
to the compression face, adequate anchorage shall be provided for the tension reinforcement.
8.2.8 Development of Positive Moment Reinforcement

8.2.8.1 At least one-third of the positive moment reinforcement in simple members and one-fourth of the
positive moment reinforcement in continuous members shall extend along the same face of member into the
support. In beams, such reinforcement shall extend into the support at least 150 mm.
8.2.8.2 When the flexural member is a part of the primary lateral load resisting system, positive moment
reinforcement extended into the support by Sec 82
. .8.1 above shall be anchored to develop the specified yield
strengthfy in tension at the face of support.

--- -- ------- -
Part 6
Structural Design
8.2.8.3 At simple supports and at points of inflection, positive moment tension reinforcement shall be limited
to a diameter such that f. d computed for fy by Sec 8.2.3 satisfies Eq (8.2.2), except that Eq (8.2.2) need not be
satisfied for reinforcement terminating beyond the centreline of simple supports by a standard hook or a
mechanical anchorage at least equivalent to a standard hook.
(8.2.2)
Mn nominal moment strength assuming all reinforcement at section to be stressed to /y·

fa embedded length of bar beyond centre of support or past point of zero moment. In the latter
case, it shall not be taken more than the greater of d or 12 d b.
The value of Mn!Vu may be increased 30 per cent when the ends of reinforcement are confined by a
compressive reaction.
8.2.9 Development of Negative Moment Reinforcement

8.2.9.1 Negative moment reinforcement in a continuous, restrained, or cantilever member, or in any member
of a rigid frame, shall be anchored in or through the supporting member by embedment length, hooks or
mechanical anchorage.
·
·
8.2.9.2 Negative moment reinforcement shall have an embedment length into the span as required by
Sec 8.2.2. and 8.2.7.3.
8.2.9.3 At least one-third of the total tension reinforcement provided for negative moment at the support
shall be extended beyond the extreme position of the point of iruiection a distance not less than one-sixteenth
the clear span, or 12db, whichever is greater.
8.2.10 Development of Shear Reinforcement

8.2.10.1 Shear reinforcement shall be carried as close to compression and tension surfaces of member as cover
requirements and proximity of other reinforcement will pernut.
8.2.10.2 The ends of single leg, simple U-, or multiple U-stirrups shall be anchored by one of the following
means:
a) By a standard hook around longitudinal reinforcement for 16 mm <P stirrups and smaller and for 20 mm <P
and 25 mm <P stirrups with /y � 275 N/111Ili.
b) For 20 mm <P and 25 mm <P stirrups with /y greater than 275 N /mm2, a standard stirrup hook around a
longitudinal bar plus an embedment between mid-height of the member and the outside end of the hook
0.175dhf
equal to or greater than {f; Y
8.2.10.3 E ach bend in the continuous portion of a simple U-stirrup or multiple U-stirrup shall enclose a
longitudinal bar between anchored ends.
8.2.10.4 If extended into the region of tension, longitudinal bars bent to act as shear reinforcement shall be
continuous with longitudinal remforcement and, if extended into a region of compression, shall be anchored
beyond mid-depth d/2 as specified for development length in Sec 8.2.3 for the stress required to develop in the
bent bar to satisfy Eq (6.2.26).
8.2.10.5 Pairs of U-stirrups or ties so placed as to form a closed unit shall be considered properly spliced
when length of laps are 1.3fd. In members at least 450 mm deep, such splices with Abfy not more than 40 kN
per leg shall be considered adequate if stirrup legs extend the full available depth of member.
8.2.11 Development of Plain Bars

For plain bars, the minimum development length shall be twice that of deformed bars specified in Sec 8.2.2
through Sec 8.2.10 above.
8.2.12 Splices of Reinforcement - General

8.2.12.1 Splices of reinforcement shall be made only as required or permitted on design drawings, or in
specifications, or as authorized by the engineer.
8.2.12.2 Lap Splices

a) Lap splices shall not be used for 35 mm <P bars and larger, except as provided in Sec 8.2.14.2.
6-226
Chapter 8
b) Lap splices of bundled bars shall be based on the lap splice length required for individual bars within
the bundle, increased in accordance with Sec 8.2.5. Individuaf bar splices within a bundle shall not
overlap. Entire bundles shall not be lap spliced. ·
c) Bars spliced by noncontact lap splices in flexural members shall not be spaced transversely farther apart
than one-fifth the required lap splice length, nor 150 mm.
8.2.12.3 Welded Splices and Mechanical Connections

a ) Welded splices and other mechanical connections are allowed.
b) Excer,t as provided in the Code, all welding shall conform to "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing
Steel' (AWS Dl.4}.
c) Welded splices shall be butted and welded to develop in tension at least 125 per cent of specified yield
strength J y of the bar.
d) A full mechanical connection shall develop in tension or compression, as required, at least 125 per cent of
specified yield strength f y of·the bar.
e) Welded splices and mechanical connections not meeting the requirements of (c) or (d) above are allowed
8.2.13 Splices of Deformed Bars in Tension

8.2.13.1 The minimum length of lap for tension splices shall be as required for Class A or B splice, but not
less than 300 mm, where the classification shall be as follows:
Class A splice
Class B splice
8.2.13.2 Lap splices of deformed bars in tension shall be class B splices except that Class A splices are
allowed when the area of reinforcement provided is at least twice that required by analysis over the entire
length of the splice, and one-half or less of the total reinforcement is spliced within the required lap length.
8.2.13.3 Where area of reinforcement provided is less than twice that required by analysis, welded splices or
mechanical connections used shall meet the requirements of Sec 8.2.12.3{c) or 8.2.12.3(d) above.
8.2.13.4 Welded SJ>lices or mechanical connections used where area of reinforcement provided is at least
twice that required by analysis shall meet the following :
a) Splices shall be staggered at least 600 mm and in such manner as to develop at every section at least
twice the calculated tensile force at the section but not less than 140 N/mm2 for total area of
reinforcement provided.
b) Spliced reinforcement may be rated at the specified splice strength, in computing tensile force developed
at each section. Unspliced reinforcement snail be rated at t hat fraction of/y defined by the ratio ofthe
shorter actual development length to ld required to develop the specified yield strength/y·
8.2.13.5 Splices in tension tie members shall be made with a full welded splice or full mechanical connection
in accordance with Sec 8.2.12.3(c) or 8.2.12.3(d). Splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered at least 750 mm .
8.2.14 Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression

8.2.14.1 The minimum length of lap for compression splice shall be 0.07J ydb for fy equal to 410 NI mm2 or
less or (0.13/y- 24)db for /y greater than 410N/mm2, but not less than300 mm For . f� less than 20N/mm2,
length of lap shall be increased by one-third.
8.2.14.2 When bars of different diameters are lap spliced in compression, the splice length shall be the larger
of the development length of the larger bar, or the sp1ice length of the smaller bar.
8.2.14.3 Welded splices or mechanical connections used in compression shall satisfy the requirements of Sec
8.2.12.3(c) or 8.2.12.3(d).
8.2.14.4 End Bearing Splices

a ) Compression splices for bars required t o transmit compressive stress only may consist o f end bearing of
square cut ends held in concentnc contact by a suitable device.
b) Bar ends shall terminate in flat surfaces within 1.5 deg of a right angle to the axis of the bars, and shall
be fitted within 3 deg of full bearing after assembly.
c) End bearing splices shall be used only in members containing closed ties, closed stirrups or spirals.

Part 6
Structural Design
8.2.15 Special Splice Requirements for Columns

8.2.15.1 Lap splices, butt welded splices, mechanical connections, or end-bearing splices shall be used with
the limitations of Sec 8.2.15.2 through 8.2.15.4 below. A splice shall satisfy the requirements for all load
combinations for the column.
8.2.15.2 Lap Splices in Columns

a) Lap splices shall conform to Sec 8.2.14.1, 8.2.14.2, and where applicable to 8.2.15.2(d) or 8.2.15.2(e)
befow, where the bar stress due to factored loads is compressive.
b) Where the bar stress due to factored loads is tensile and does not exceed 0.5Iy in tension, lap splices
shall be Class B tension lap splices if more than one-half of the bars are spliced at any section, or Class A
tension lap splices if half or fewer of the bars are spliced at any section and alternate lap splices are
staggered by f d·
c) Where the bar stress due to factored loads is greater than 0.5Iy in tension, lap splices shall be Class B
tension lap splices.
d) In compression members, if lateral ties are used having an area of at least 0.0015 hs, lap splice length may
be multiplied by 0.83, but lap length shall not be less than 300 mm. Tie legs perpendicUlar to dimension h
shall be used in determining effective area.
e) If spiral reinforcement confines the splice, .the lengths required may be multiplied by 0.75, but lap length
sha11 not be less than 300 mrn.
8.2.15.3 Welded Splices or Mechanical Connectors in Columns : Welded splices or mechanical

connectors in columns shall meet the requirements of Sec 8.2.12.3(c) or 8.2.12.3(d).
8.2.15.4 End Bearing Splices in Columns: End bearing splices complying with Sec 8.2.14.4 may be used
for column bars stressed in compression provided the splices are staggered or additional bars are provided at
splice locations. The continuing bars in each face of the column shall have a tensile strength at 1east 0.251y
times the area of the vertical reinforcement in that face.
8.2.16 Splices of Plain Bars

For plain bars, the minimum length of lap shall be twice that of deformed bars specified in Sec 8.2.12 through
Sec 8.2.15 above.
8.2.17 Mechanical Anchorage

8.2.17.1 Any mechanical device capable of developing the strength of reinforcement without damage to
concrete is allowed as anchorage.
8.2.17.2 Mechanical device may be used only when its adequacy can be proven by test results to the
satisfaction of the engineer.
8.2.17.3 Development of reinforcement may consist of a combination of mechanical anchorage plus additional
embedment length of reinforcement between the point of maximum bar stress and the mechanical anchorage.
8.3 SPECIAL PROVISION FOR SEISMIC DESIGN
8.3.1 Notation
cross-sectional area of a structural member measured out to out of transverse reinforcement, mm2
area of concrete section resisting shear of an individual pier or horizontal wall segment, mrn2
net area of concrete section bounded by web thickness and length of section in the direction of
shear force considered, mrn2
gross area of section, mrn2
effective cross-sectional area within a joint, see Sec 8.3.7.3, in a plane parallel to plane of
reinforcement generating shear in the joint. The joint depth shall be the overall depth of the column.
Where a beam frames into a support of larger widtn, the effective width of tne joint shall not
exceed the smaller of :
a) Beam width plus the joint depth

b) twice the smaller perpendicular distance from the longitudinal axis of the beam to the column
side (Sec 8.3.7.3)
Ash total cross-sectional area of transverse reinforcement (including cross ties) within spacings and
perpendicular to dimension he
b effective compressive flange width of a struchtral member, mrn
bw web width or diameter of circular section, mrn
db bar diameter, mm
E load effects of earthquake or related internal moments and forces
6-228
Chapter 8
�� specified compressive strength of concrete

/y
=
/yh specified yield strength of transverse reinforcement

lie . cross-sectional dimension of column core measured centre to centre of confining reinforcement
hw = height of entire wall (diaphragm) or of the segment of wall (diaphragm) considered
ld development length for a straight bar

ldh = development length for a bar with a standard hook
la = minimum length, measured from joint face along axis of structural member, over which transverse
reinforcement must be provided, mm
·
lw length of entire wall (diaphragm) or of segment of wall (diaphragm) considered in the direction of
shear force
Mpr = probable flexural moment strength of members, with or without axial load, determined using the
properties of the member at the joint faces assuming a tensile strength in the longitudinal bars of at
least 1.25/ y and a strength reduction factor� of 1.0
M5 portion of slab moment balanced by support moment

s = spacing of transverse reinforcement measured along the longitudinal axis of the structural
rrenber, mm . .
s0 = maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement, mm

Vc nominal shear strength provided by concrete
Ve design shear force
Vn = nominal shear strength
V11 factored shear force at section
a, coefficient defining the relative contribution of concrete strength to wall strength
p ratio of tension reinforcement = A5 I bd

pg ratio of total reinforcement area to cross-sectional area of column
Pn ratio of distributed shear reinforcement on a plane perpendicular to plane of Acv
p5
ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to the core volume confined by the spiral reinforcement
·
(measured out to out)

pv
= A5vl Acv; where A5v is the projection on Acv of area of distributed shear reinforcement crossing
the plane of Acv
tP = strength reduction factor.
8.3.2 Definitions
BASE OF STRUCTURE: The level at which earthquake motions are assumed to be imparted to a structure.
This level does not necessarily coincide with the ground level.
BOUNDARY MEMBERS : Members along wall and diaphragm edges strengthened by longitudinal and
transverse reinforcement. These members cfo not necessarily require an increase in the thickness of the wall or
diaphragm. If required, edges of openings within walls and diaphragms shall be provided with boundary
me.mbers.
COLLECTOR ELEMENTS: Elements that are used to transmit the inertial forces within the diaphragms to
members of the lateral force resisting systems.
CROSS TIE: A continuous bar having a hook not less than 135 de� with at least a six diameter extension at
one end but not less than 75 mm, and a hook not less than 90 deg w1th at least a six diameter extension at the
other end. The hooks shall engage peripheral longitudinal bars. The 90 deg hooks of two successive cross ties
engaging the same longitudinal bars shall be alternated end for end.
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH FOR A BAR WITH A STANDARD HOOK :The shortest distance between the
critical section and a tangent to the outer edge of the 90 deg hook.
HOOP: A hoop is a closed tie or continuously round tie. A closed tie can be made up ofseveral reinforcing
elements with 135 hooks having a six diameter extension at each end (but not less than 75 mm). A
continuously round tie shall have at each end a 135 hook with a six diameter extension that engages the
longitudinal reinforcement but not less than 75 mm.
LATERAL FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM: That portion of the structure composed of members designed to
resist forces related to earthq':'ake effects.
SHELL CONCRETE: Concrete outside the transverse reinforcement confining the concrete
STRUCTURAL DIAPHRAGMS: Structural members, such as floor and roof slabs, which transmit inertial
forces to lateral force resisting members.

Part 6
Structural Design
STRUCTURAL WALLS:Walls designed to resist combinations of shears, moments, and axial forces induced
by earthquake motions. A shear wall is a structural wall.
STRUT : An element of a structural diaphragm used to provide continuity around an opening in the
diaphragm.
TIE ELEMENTS: Elements used to transmit inertial forces and prevent separation of building components.

8.3.3.1 Scope
a) This section contains special requirements for design and construction of reinforced concrete members of
a structure for which the design forces, related to earthquake motions, have been determined on the basis
of energy dissipation in the nonlinear range of response.
b) The provisions of Chapter 6, shall apply excel? t as modified by the provisions of this section.
,
c) In regions of moderate seismic risk, Zone 2 (see Chapter 2), reinforced concrete frames resisting forces
induced by earthquake motions shall be built to satisfy the requirements of Sec 8.3.10 in addition to the
requirements of Chapter 6.
d) In regions of high seismic risk, Zone 3 (see Chapter 2), all reinforced concrete structures shall satisfy the
requirements of Sec 8.3.3 through 8.3.9 in addition to the requirements of Chapter 6.
8.3.3.2 Analysis and Proportioning of Structural Members

a) The interaction of all structural and nonstructural members shall be considered in the analysis.
b) Rigid members which are not a part of the lateral force resisting system are allowed provided their effect
on the response of the system is considered and accommodated in the structural design. Consequences of
failure of structural and nonstructural members which are not a part of the lateral force resisting system
shall also be considered.
c) Structural members below base of structure required to transmit forces resulting from earthquake effects
to the foundation shall also comply with the requirements of this section.
d) All structural members which are not a part of the lateral force resisting system shall conform to
Sec 8.3.9.
8.3.3.3 Strength Reduction Factors : Strength reduction factors shall be in accordance with
Sec 6.1.4.
8.3.3.4 Concrete in Members Resisting Earthquake Induced Forces : Compressive strength J; of the
concrete shall be not less than 20 N/mm2•
8.3.3.5 Reinforcement in Members Resisting Earthquake Induced Forces :Reinforcement resisting

earthquake induced flexural and axial forces in frames and wall boundary members shall comply with
ASTM A706, ASTM A615 and BDS 1313. Reinforcement with /y = 275 N/mm2 and fy = 410 N/mm2 are
allowed in these members if (a) the actual yield strength based on mill tests does not exceed the specified yield
stren_g th by more than 125 N/mm2 (retests shall not exceed this value by more than an additional 20 N/mm2),
and (b) the ratio of the actual ultimate tensile strength to the actual tensile yield strength is not less than 1.25.
8.3.3.6 Reinforcement required by factored load combinations which include earthquake effect shall not be
welded except as specified in Sec 8.3.4.2(d) and 8.3.5.3(b). In addition, welding shall not be permitted on
stirrups, ties, inserts, or other similar elements to longitudinal reinforcement reqmred by design.
8.3.4 Flexural Members of Frames

8.3.4.1 Scope: Requirements of this section shall apply to frame members, (i) resisting earthquake induced
forces, and (ii) proportioned primarily to resist flexure. These frame members shall also satisfy the following
conditions:
a) Factored axial compressive force on frame member shall not exceed 0.1A J;.
8
b) Clear span for the member shall not be less than four times its effective depth.
c) The width to depth ratio shall be at least 0.3.
d) The width shall not be (i) less than 250 mm and (ii) more than the width of the supporting member
(measured on a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the flexural member) plus distances on
each side of the supportmg member not exceeding three-fourths of the depth of the flexural member.
6-230
Chapter 8
8.3.4.2 Longitudinal Reinforcement

a) At any section of a flexural member and for the top as well as for the bottom reinforcement, the amount of
reinforcement shall be not less than 1.38bwd/fy and the reinforcement ratio, p shall not exceed 0.025.
At least two bars shall be provided continuously both top and bottom.
b) The positive moment strength at the face of the joint shall be not less than one-half of the negative moment
strength provided at that face. Neither the negative nor the positive moment strength at an)' section along
the member length shall be less than one-fourth the maximum moment strength provided at the face of
either joint.
c) Lap splices of flexural reinforcement shall be permitted only if hoop or spiral reinforcement is provided
over tne lap length. Maximum spacing of the transverse reinforcement enclosing the lapped bars shall not
exceed d/4 nor 100 mm. Lap splices shall not be used (i) within the joints, (ii) within a distance of twice
the member depth from Hie face of the joint, and (iii) at locations where analysis indicates flexural
yielding caused by inelastic lateral displacements of the frame.
d) Welded splices and mechanical connections conforming to Sec 8.2.12.3(a) through 8.2.12.3(d) are
allowed for splicing provided not more than alternate bars in each layer of longitudinal reinforcement
are spliced at a section and the centre to centre distance between splices of adjacent bars is 600 mm or
more measured along the longitudinal axis of the frame member.
8.3.4.3 Transverse Reinforcement

a) Hoops shall be provided in the following regions of frame members:
i) At both ends of the flexural member, over a length equal to twice the member depth measured from
the face of the supporting member toward midspan.
ii) Over lengths equal to twice the member depth, on both sides of a section where flexural yielding
is likely to occur in connection with inelastic lateral displacements of the frame.
b) The first hoop shall be located not more than 50 mm from the face of the supporting member. Maximum
spacing of the hoops shall not exceed (i) d/4, (ii) ei ght times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal
bars, (iii) 24 times toe diameter of the hoop bars, and (iv) 300 mm .
c) Where hoops are required, longitudinal bars on the perimeter shall have lateral support conforming to
Sec 8.1.10.4(c}, and wnere hoops are not required, stirrups shall be spaced not more tli.an d/2 throughout
the length of the member.
d) Hoops in flexural members are allowed to be made up of two pieces of reinforcement consisting of a U
stirrup having hooks not less than 135 deg with 6 diameter but not less than 75 mm extension anchored in
the confined core and a cross tie to make a closed hoop. Consecutive cross ties engaging the same
longitudinal bar shall have their 90 deg hooks at opposite sides of the flexural member. If the
longitudinal reinforcing bars secured by tne cross ties are confined by a slab only on one side of the
flexural frame member, the 90 deg hooks of the cross ties shall all be placed on that side.
8.3.5 Frame Members Subjected to Bending and Axial Load

8.3.5.1 Scope : The requirements of this section shall apply to columns and other frame members serving to
resist earthquake forces and having a factored axial force exceeding 0. 1A gf� . These frame members shall also
satisfy the following conditions:
a) The shortest cross-sectional dimension shall not be less than 300 mm.
b) The ratio of the shortest cross-sectional dimension to the perpendicular dimension shall not be less
than 0.4.
8.3.5.2 Minimum Flexural Strength of Columns

a) Flexural strength of any column designed to resist a factored axial compressive force exceeding 0.1Agf�
shall satisfy (b) or (c) below. Lateral strength and stiffness of columns not satisfying (b) below shall be
ignored in calculating the strength and stiffness of the structure but shall conform to Sec 8.3.9.
b) The flexural strength of the columns shall satisfy the following relation:
(8.3.1)
where
I, Me =
sum of moments, at the centre of the joint, corresponding to the design flexural strength of the
columns framing into that joint. The lowest flexural strength of the columns, calculated for

Part 6
Structural Design
the factored axial force, consistent with the direction of the lateral forces considered, shall
be used.
L Mg = sum of moments, at the centre of the joint, corresponding to the design flexural strengths of the
girders framing into that joint.
Flexural strengths shall be summed such that the column moments oppose the beam moments.
Eq (8.3.1) shalloe satisfied for beam moments acting in both directions in tl:\e vertical plane of the frame
considered.
c) If the requirements of (b) above is not satisfied at a joint, columns supporting reactions from that joint
shall be provided with transverse reinforcement as specified in Sec 8.3:5.4 over their entire height.
8.3.5.3 Longitudinal Reinforcement

a) The reinforcement ratio, Pg' shall not be less than 0.01 and shall not exceed 0.06.
b) Lap splices are l'ermitted only within the centre half of the member length and shall be designed as
tension splices. Welded splices and mechanical connections conforming to Sec 8.2.12.3(a) through
8.2.12.3{d) are allowed for splicing the reinforcement at any section proviaed not more than alternate
longitudinal bars are spliced at a section and the distance between splices is 600 mm or more along the
longitudinal axis of the reinforcement.

a) Transverse reinforcement shall be provided as specified below unless a larger amount is required by
Sec 8.3.8.
i) The volumetric ratio of spiral or circular hoop reinforcement, p5 shall not be less than that
indicated by the following equation :
0.12/�
Ps= (8.3.2)
/yh
--
and shall not be less than that required by Eq (6.3.3).
ii) The total cross-sectional area of rectangular hoop reinforcement shall not be less than that given
by the following equations : ·
(8.3.3)
Ash- 0.09shcf�
_
f (8.3.4)
yh
iii) Transverse reinforcement shall be provided by either single or overlapping hoops or cross ties of
the same bar size and spacing. Each end of the cross ties shall engage a peripheral longitudinal
reinforcing bar. Consecutive cross ties shall be alternated end for end along the longitudinal
reinforcement.
iv) If the design strength of member core satisfies the requirements of the specified loading
combinations including earthquake effect, Eq (8.3.3) and (6.3.3) need not be satisfted.
b) Transverse reinforcement shall not be spaced more than one-quarter of the minimum member dimension
nor 100mm.
c) Spacing of cross ties or legs of overlapping hoops shall not be more than 350 mm on centre in the
dtrection perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of th� member.
d) The volume of transverse reinforcement in amount specified in (a) through (c) above shall be provided
over a length l0 from each joint face and on both sides of any section where flexural yielding is likely to
occur in connection with inelastic lateral displacements of the frame. The length l0 shall not be less than
(i) the depth of the member at the joint face or at the section where flexural yielding is likely to occur, (ii)
one-sixth of the clear span of the member, and (iii) 450 mm.
e) If the factored axial force in columns supporting reactions from discontinued stiff members, such as walls,
exceeds 0.1Agf� they shall be provided with transverse reinforcement as specified in (a) through (c)
above over their full height beneath the level at which the discontinuity occurs. Transverse reinforcement
shall extend into the discontinued member for at least the development length of the largest longitudinal
6-232
Chapter 8
reinforcement in the column in accordance with Sec 8.3.7.4. If the lower end of the column terminates on a
wall, transverse reinforcement as specified above shall extend into the wall for at least the development
length of the largest longitudinal reinforcement in the column at the point of termination. If the column
terminates on a footing or mat, transverse reinforcement as specified in above shall extend at least 300
nun into the footing or mat.
f) Where transverse reinforcement as specified in (a) through (c) above, is not provided throughout the full
length of the column, the remainder of the column length shall contain spiral or hooi:' reinforcement with
centre to centre spacing not exceeding the smaller of 6 times the diameter of the longitudinal column bars
or150mm.
8.3.6 Structural Walls and Diaphragms

8.3.6.1 Scope : The requirements of this section apply to structural walls serving as parts of the
earthquake force resisting systems as well as to diaphragms, struts, ties, chords and collector members which
transmit forces induced by earthquake.
8.3.6.2 Reinforcement
a) The reinforcement ratio, Pv for structural walls shall not be less than 0. 0025 along the longitudinal and
transverse directions. Reinforcement spacing each way shall not exceed 450 mm Reinforcement provided
.
for shear strength shall be continuous and shall be distributed across the shear plane. If the design shear
force does not exceed 0.083Acv
K , the shear reinforcement may conform to Sec 6.9.7.
b) At least two layers of reinforcement shall be used in a wall if the in-plane factored shear force assigned
to the wall exceeds 0.17 Acv

K.
c) Structural truss members, struts, ties, and collector members with compressive stresses exceeding 0.2f�
shall have special transverse reinforcement, as specified in Sec 8.3.5.4 over the total length of the member:
The special transverse reinforcement is allowed to be discontinued at a section where the calculated
compressive stress is less than 0.15/�. Stresses shall be calculated for the factored forces using a linear
elastic model and gross section properties of the members considered.
d) All continuous reinforcement in structural walls, diaphragms, trusses, struts, ties, chords, and collector
members shall be anchored or spliced in accordance with the provisions for reinforcement in tension as
specified in Sec 8.3.7.4.
8.3.6.3 Boundary Members for Structural Walls and Diaphragms

a) Boundary members shall be provided at boundaries and edges around openings of structural walls and
diaphragms for which the maximum extreme fibre stress exceeds 0.2f� unless the entire wall or
diaphragm member is reinforced to satisfy Sec 8.3.5.4(a) through 8.35
. .4(c). The boundary members may be
discontinued where the calculated compressive stress is less than 0.15f� . Stresses shall be calculated for
the factored forces using a linearly elastic model and gross section properties.
b) Where required, boundary members shall have transverse reinforcement as specified in

Sec 8.3.5.4(a) through 8.3.5.4(c).
c) Boundary members of structural walls shall be designed to carry all factored gravity loads on the wall,
including tributary loads and self weight, as well as the vertical force required to resist overturning
moment calculated from factored forces related to earthquake effect.
d) Boundary members of structural diaphragms shall be proportioned to resist the sum of the factored axial
force acting in the plane of the diaphragm and the force obtained from dividing the factored moment at the
section by the distance between the edges of the diaphragm at that section.
e) Transverse reinforcement in walls with boundary members shall be anchored within the confined core of
the boundary member to develop the tensile yield stress.
f) Transverse reinforcement terminating at the edges of structural walls without boundary elements shall
have a standard hook engaging the edge reinforcement or the edge reinforcement shall be enclosed in the
U-stirrups having the same size and spacing as, and spliced to, the transverse reinforcement, except when
Vu in the plane of the wall is less than 0.083Acv {H .

8.3.6.4 Construction Joints : All construction joints in walls and diaphragms shall conform to
Sec 5.16.4 and contact surfaces shall be roughened as specified in Sec 6.13.3.150).
8.3.6.5 Discontinuous Walls: Columns supporting discontinuous walls shall be reinforced in accordance
with Sec 8.3.5.4(e).

Part 6
Structural Design
8.3.7 Joints of Frames .
8.3.7.1 General Requirements

a) Forces in longitudinal beam reinforcement at the faces of joints of reinforced concrete frames shall be
determined for a stress of 1.25 fy in the reinforcement.
b) Joint strength shall be calculated by the appropriate strength reduction factors specified in Sec 6.1.4.
c) Beam longitudinal reinforcement terminated in a column shall be extended to the far face of the confined
column core and anchored in tension according to Sec 8.3.7.4 below and in compression according to Sec
8.2.

a) As specified in Sec 8.3.5.4, transverse hoop reinforcement shall be provided within the joint, unless the
joint is confined by structural members as specified in (b) below.
b) Within the depth of the shallowest framing member, transverse reinforcement equal to at least one-half
the amount required by Sec 8.3.5.4(a) shalf be provided where members frame into all four sides of the
joint and where each member width is at least three-fourths the column width. At these locations, the
spacing specified in Sec 8.3.5.4(b) may be increased to mm. 150
c) As required by Sec 8.3.5.4, transverse reinforcement shall be provided through the joint to provide
confinement for longitudinal beam reinforcement outside the column core if such confinement is not
provided by a beam framing into the joint.
8.3.7.3 Shear Strength: The nominal shear strength for the joint shall be taken not greater than the forces
specified below :
1.66.../KAj for joints confined on all four faces
1.24.../KAj for joints confined on three faces or on two opposite faces
l.O...jKAj for others
A member that frames into a face is considered to provide confinement to the joint if at least three-quarters of
the face of the joint is covered by the framing member. A joint is considered to be confined if such confining
members frame into all faces of the joint.
8.3.7.4 Development Length of Bars in Tension

a) The development length, l d h' for a bar with a standard 90° hook shall be not less than (i) Bdb,
(ii) mm, and (iii) the length required by Eq (8.3.5).
150
0 185/y db
.
ldh = ..Jj{ (8.3.5)
for bar sizes 10 mm q, through 35 mm q,.
b) For bar sizes mm q, through 35 mm q,, the development length, l d' for a straight bar shall be not less
10
than (i) times the length required by (a) above, if the depth of the concrete castJI.n one lift beneath the
2.5
bar does not exceed mm, and (ii) 3.5 times the length required by (a) above, if the depth of the
300
concrete cast in one lift beneath the bar exceeds mm. 300
c) Straight bars terminated at a joint shall pass through the confined core of a column or of a boundary
member. Any portion of the straight embeament length not within the confined core shall be increased by a
factor of 1.6.
8.3.8 Shear Stren�th Requirements
8.3.8.1 Design Forces
a) Frame Members Subjected Primarily to Bending : The design shear force Ve shall be determined from
consideration of the statical forces on the portion of the member between faces of the joints. It shall be
assumed that moments of opposite sign corresponding to probable strength Mpr act at the joint faces, and
that the member is loaded with the factored tributary gravity load along its span.
b) Frame Members Subjected to Combined Bending and Axial Load: The design shear force Ve shall be
determined from consideration of the maximum forces that can be generated at the faces of the joints at
each end of the member. These joint forces shall be determined using the maximum probable moment
strengths Mpr of the member associated with the range of factored axialloads on the member. The member
shears need not exceed those determined from joint strengths based on the probable moment strength Mpr
6-234
Chapter 8
of the transverse members framing into the joint. In no case, Ve shall be less than the factored shear
determined by the analysis of the structure.
c) Structural Walls and Diaphragms: The design shear force Ve shall be obtained from the lateral load
analysis in accordance with the factored loads and combinations specified in Chapter 2, loads.
8.3.8.2 Transverse Reinforcement in Frame Members

a) For determining the required transverse reinforcement in frame members, the quantity V, shall be
assumed to be zero if the factored axial compressive force including earthquake effects is less than
0.05Agf� when the earthquake-induced shear forces, calculated in accordance with Sec 8.3.8.1(a),
represents one-half or more of total design shear.
b) Stirrups or ties required to resist shear shall be closed hoops over lengths of members as specified in
Sec 8.3.4.3, 8.3.5.4 and 8.3.7.2.
8.3.8.3 Shear Strength of Structural Walls and Diaphragms

a ) Nominal shear strength o f structural walls and diaphragms shall b e determined using either (b) o r (c)
below.
b) Nominal shear strength, V n of structural walls and diaphragms shall be assumed not to exceed the shear
force calculated from
(8.3.6)
c) For walls and wall segments having a ratio of (hwflw) less than 2.0, nominal shear strength of wall
and diaphragm shall be determined from
Vn =A v a, ( ..Jl[ +Pn/y) (8.3.7)

c
where the coefficient a varies linearly from 0.25 for

c
(hwflw) = 1. 5 to 0.1 7 for (hw/f111) = 2.0.
d) Value of ratio (hwflw) used in (c) above for determining Vn for segments of a wall or diaphragm shall be
the larger of the ratios for the entire wall (diaphragm) and the segment of wall (diaphragm) considered.
e) Walls and diaphragms shall have distributed shear reinforcement providing resistance in two
orthogonal directions in the plane of the wall. If the ratio (h111/fw) does not exceed 2.0, reinforcement
ratio, p v shall not be less than reinforcement ratio p n •
f) Nominal shear strength of all wall piers sharing a common lateral force shall not be assumed to exceed
0.67 Acv..Jl[ , where Acv is the total cross-sectional area, and the nominal shear strength of any one of the
individual wall piers shall not be assumed to exceed 0.83Acp .Jj; where Acp represents the cross
sectionai area of the pier considered.
g) Nominal shear strength of horizontal wall segments shall be assumed not to exceed 0.83Acp ..Jl[ , where
Acp represents the cross-sectional area of a horizontal wall segment.
8.3.9 Frame Members not Proportioned to Resist Forces Induced by Earthquake Motion
8.3.9.1 Frame members assumed not to contribute to lateral resistance shall be detailed according to (a) or
{b) below depending on the magnitude of moments induced in those members when subjected to twice the
lateral displacement under the fact9red lateral forces.
a) Members with factored gravity axial forces not exceeding 0.1A [; shall satisfy Sec 8.3.4.2(a) and
g
8.3.8.l{a) and members with factored gravity axial forces exceeding 0.1A f� shall satisfy Sec 8.3.5.4,
g
8.3.72(a) and 8.3.8.1(b) when the induced moment exceeds the design moment strength of the frame member.
b) The member shall satisfy Sec 8.3.4.2{a) when the induced moment does not exceed the design moment
strength of the frame members.
8.3.9.2 All frame members with factored axial compressive forces ex:ceeding 0.1Agf� shall satisfy the
following special requirements unless they comply with Sec 8.3.5.4.

Part 6
Structural Design
a) Ties shall have hooks not less than 135° with extensions not less than 6 tie bar diameter or 60 mm.
Cross ties as defined in Sec 8.3.2 are allowed.
b) The maximum tie spacing shall be s0 over a length l0 measured from the joint face. The spacing s0 shall be
not more than (i) eight diameters of the smallest longitudinal bar enclosed, (ii)
24 tie bar diameters, and
(iii) one-half the least cross-sectional dimension of the column. The length l0 shall not be less than
(i) one-sixth of the clear height of the column, (ii) the maximum cross-sectional dimension of the column,
and (iii) 450 mm .
c) The first tie shall be within a distance equal to 0.5s0 from the face of the joint.
d) The tie spacing shall not exceed 2s0 in any part of the column.
8.3.10 Requirements for Frames in Regions of Moderate Seismic Risk, Zone 2

8.3.10.1 In regions of moderate seismic risk, structural frames proportioned to resist forces induced by
earthquake motions shall satisfy the requirements of Sec 8.3.10 in audition to those of Chapter 6.
8.3.10.2 Reinforcement details in a frame member shall satisfy Sec 8.3.10.4 below if the factored compressive
axial load for the member does not exceed 0.1Agf�. If the factored compressive axial load is larger, frame
reinforcement details shall satisfy Sec 8.3.10.5 below unless the member has spiral reinforcement according to
Eq (6.3.3). If a two-way slab system without beams is treated as part of a frame resisting earthquake effect,
remforcement details in any span resisting moments caused by lateral force shall satisfy Sec 8.3.10.6 below.
8.3.10.3 Design shear strength of beams, columns, and two-way slabs resisting earthquake effect shall not be
less than either (a) the sum of the shear associated with development of nominal moment strengths of the
member at each restrained end of the clear span and the shear calculated for factored gravity loads, or (b) the
maximum shear obtained from design load combinations which include earthquake effect.
8.3.10.4 Beams
a) The positive moment strength at the face of the joint shall not be less than one-third the negative moment
strength provided at that face. Neither the negative nor positive moment strength at any section along the
lengtn ofthe member shall be less than one-fifth of the maximum moment strength provided at the face of
either joint.
b) At both ends of the member, stirrups shall be provided over lengths equal to twice the member depth
measured from the face of the supporting member toward midspan. The first stirrup shall be located not
more than 50 mm from the face of the supporting member. Max1mum stirrup spacing shall not exceed (a)
d/4, (b) 8 times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar enclosed, (c) 24 times the diameter of the
stirrup bar, and (d) 300 mm.
c) Stirrups shall be placed at not more than d/2 throughout the length of the member.
8.3.10.5 Columns
a) Maximum tie spacipg shall not exceed s0 over a length l0 measured from the joint face. The spacing s0
shall not exceed (i) 8 times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar enclosed, (ii) 24 times the diameter
of the tie bar, (iii) one-half of the smallest cross-sectional dimension of the frame member, and (iv) 300
mm. The length l0 shall not be less than (i) one-sixth of the clear span of the member, (ii) maximum cross
sectional dimension of the member, and (iii) 450 mm.
b) The first tie shall be located not more than s0/2 from the joint face.
c) Joint reinforcement shall conform to Sec 6.3.8.
d) Tie spacing shall not exceed 2s0 throughout the length of the member.
8.3.10.6 Two-way Slabs without Beams

a ) The factored slab moment a t the supports relating to earthquake effect shall be determined for load
combinations specified in Chapter 2, Loads. All reinforcement provided to resist the portion of slab
moment balanced by support moment shall be placed within the column strip defined in Sec 6.4.2.2.
b) The fractional part of the column strip moment shall be resisted by reinforcement placed within the
effective width specified in Sec 6.4.4.5(5). .
c) Not less than one-half of the total reinforcement in the column strip at the support shall be placed within
the effective slab width specified in Sec 6.4.4.5(b).
d) Not less than one-quarter of the top steel at the support in the column strip shall be continuous
throughout the span.
.
6-236
Chapter 8
e) Continuous bottom reinforcement in the column strip shall be not less than one-third of the top
reinforcement at the support in the column strip.
f) Not less than one-half of all bottom reinforcement at midspan shall be continuous and shall develop its
yield strength at the face of support. .
g) At discontinuous edges of the slab all top and bottom reinforcement at the support shall be developed at
the face of the support.
Related Appendix

Part 6
Structural Design
6-238
CHAPTER®
9.1 NOTATION
a = depth of equivalent rectangular stress block,mm

A =
area of the art of cross-section between flexural tension face and centre of gravity of gross
r
section,mm
Aps = area of prestressed reinforcement in tension zone,mm2
As = area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement,mm2
A's = area of compression reinforcement,mm2
b = width of compression face of member,mm
d = distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of nonprestressed tension reinforcement,
mm
d' = distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of compression reinforcement,mm
db = nominal diameter of bar,wire,or prestressing strand,mm
dp = distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of prestressed reinforcement, mm
D = dead loads, or related internal moments and forces
e base of Napierian logarithm
!� = specified compressive strength of concrete,N I mm2
!d = compressive strength of concrete at transfer of prestress,N lmm2
/d stress due to unfactored dead load, at extreme fibre of section where tensile stress is caused by
externally applied loads,Nlmm2
/pe = compressive stress in concrete due to effective prestress forces only (after allowance for all
prestress losses) at extreme fibre of section where tensile stress is caused by externally applied
loads,Nlmm2
/pc =
average compressive stress in concrete due to effective prestress force only (after allowance for
all prestress losses),Nlmm2
/ps = stress in prestressed reinforcement at nominal strength, Nlrnrn2
/pu = specified tensile strength of prestressing tendons,N I mm2
Part6 6-239
Structural Design
Part 6
Structural Design
/py specified yield strength of prestressing tendons, N I rnm2

fr modulus of rupture of concrete, N/mm2
fse effective stress in prestressed reinforcement (after allowance for all prestress losses), N/mm2
specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement, N/rnm2
1 = overall thickness of member, mm
= overall thickness of flange of flanged section, rnm
hf
I moment of inertia of cross-section resisting externally applied factored loads, rnm4
k wobble friction coefficient per metre of prestressing tenaon
f. length of span of two-way flat plates in direction parallel to that of the reinforcement being
determined, rnm
f.x length of prestressing tendon element from jacking end to any point x, metre
L live loads, or related internal moments and forces
Mer moment causing flexural cracking at section due to externally applied loads
Mmax maximum factored moment at section due to externally applied loads
N, tensile force in concrete due to unfactored dead load plus live load (D + L)
s spacing of shear or torsion reinforcement in direction parallel to longitudinal reinforcement, rnm
v, nominal shear strength provided by concrete
vci nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking results from combined
shear and moment
Vcw nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking results from excessive
principal tensile stress in web
vd shear Force at section due to unfactored dead load
V; factored shear force at section due to externally applied loads occurring simultaneously with
Mmax
vertical component of effective prestress force at section
i!:
5 nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement
Ps = prestressing tendon force at jacking end
Px prestressing tendon force at any point x
X shorter overall dimension of rectangular part of cross-section
a total angular change of prestressing tenaon profile in radians from tendon jacking end to any
point x
y longer overall dimension of rectangular part of cross-sectipn
Yt distance from centroidal axis of gross section, neglecting reinforcement, to extreme fibre in
tension
f3t factor defined in Sec 9.5.S(c)
Yp factor for type of prestressing tendon
0.55 forf PY 1 fpu not less than 0.80
0.40 for py 1 fpu

f not less than 0.85
0.28 for /pylfpu not less than 0.90
}1 curvature friction coefficient
p ratio of nonprestressed tension reinforcement = A5 fbd

p' ratio of compression reinforcement = A; fbd
Pp ratio of prestressed reinforcement= Apslbdp
¢ strength reduction factor
w Pf ylf�
'
w P1yl!�
Wp Pp/pslf�
'
reinforcement indices for flanged sections computed for w, mp, and w except that b
shall be the web width, and reinforcement area shall be that required to develop
compressive strength of web only. .
For other symbols and units of quantities, reference shall be made to Chapter 6.
9.2 SCOPE
Provisions of this chapter shall api?lY to members prestressed with wire, strands, or bars conforming to
provisions for prestressing tendons m Sec 2.4.6(d) of Part 5.
6-240
Chapter9
9.3 DEFINITIONS
For the purpose of this chapter, the following definitions shall apply.
ANCHORAGE :In post-tensioning, a device used to anchor tendon to concrete member; in pretensioning, a
device used to anchor tendon during hardening of concrete.
BONDED MEMBER : A prestressed concrete member in which tendons are bonded to the concrete either
directly or through groutmg.
BONDED POST-TENSIONING: Post-tensioned construction in which the annular space around the
tendons is grouted after stressing, thereby bonding the tendon to the concrete section.
BONDED TENDON:Prestressing tendon that is bonded to concrete either directly or through grouting.
CREEP COEFFICIENT: The ratio of creep strain to elastic strain in concrete.
CREEP IN CONCRETE:Increase in strain with time in concrete subjected to sustained stress.
CURVATURE FRICTION : Friction resulting from bends or curves in the specified prestressing tendon
profile.
EFFECTIVE PRESTRESS: Stress remaining in prestressing tendons after all losses have occurred, excluding
·
effects of dead load and superimposed loaa.
FINAL PRESTRESS:Stress which exists after substantially all losses have occurred.
FINAL TENSION:The tension in the steel corresponding to the state ofthe final prestress.
INITIAL PRESTRESS:The prestress in the concrete at transfer.
INITIAL TENSION : The maximum stress induced in the prestressing tendon at the time of stressing
·
operation.
JACKING FORCE:Temporary force exerted by device that introduces tension into prestressing tendons.
POST-TENSIONING:Method of prestressing in which tendons are tensioned after concrete has hardened.
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE: Reinforced concrete in which internal stresses have been introduced to reduce
potential tensile stresses in concret� resulting from loads.
PRETENSIONING:Method of prestressing in which tendons are tensioned before concrete is placed.
SHRINKAGE LOSS : The loss of stress in the prestressing steel resulting from the shrinkage of concrete.
STRESS AT TRANSFER: The stress in both the prestressing tendon and the concrete at the stage when the
prestressing tendon is released from the prestressing mechanism.
TENDON : Steel element such as wire, cable, bar, rod, or strand, or a bundle of such elements, used to
impart prestress to concrete.
TRANSFER : Act of transferring stress in prestressing tendons from jacks or pretensioning bed to concrete
member.
TRANSMISSION LENGTH: The distance required at the end of a pretensioned tendon for developing the
maximum tendon stress by bond.
WOBBLE FRICTION : Friction caused by unintended deviation of prestressing sheath or duct from its
specified profile.
9.4.1 Prestressed members shall be designed for adequate strength in accordance with the provisions of this Code.
9.4.2 Unless specifically excluded or superseded by the provisions of this chapter, all other relevant provisions of
this Code shall apply to prestressed concrete.
9.4.3 Design of prestressed members shall be based on strength and on the behaviour at service conditions at 11ll
critical loaa stages.
9.4.4 In the design of prestressed concrete members consideration shall be given to the following:
a) Stress concentrations due to prestressing,

Part6
Structural Design
b) Effects of temperature and shrinkage,
c) Effects of elastic and plastic deformations, changes in length, deflections and rotations due to
prestressing,
d) Possibility of buckling in a member between points where concrete and prestressing tendons are in
contact and of buckling in thin webs and flanges,
e) Thermal gradient and differential shrinkage shall be considered in composite construction using
prestressed concrete members. Adequate provision for shear connectors in such composite members
shall be kept.
9.4.5 Loss of area due to open ducts shall be taken into consideration in computing section properties prior to
bonding of prestressing tendons.
9.4.6 In assessing loads and forces the effects of prestress shall be taken into account.
9.4.7 In evaluating the slenderness effects during lifting of slender beams, consideration shall be given to beam
geometry, location of lifting points, method of lifting and tolerances in construction.
All beams which are lifted on vertical or inclined slings, shall be checked for lateral stability and lateral
moment on account of tilting of beam.
For calculating the factor of safety against lateral instability reference may be made to specialist literature.
This factor shall not be less than two.
For determining the lateral moment due to tilting, realistic values shall be assumed for the eccentricity of
lifting points and the lateral bow. The maximum tensile stress due to lateral moment arising from tilting
shall not exceed 0.75 N/mm2·
95
. DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS
9.5.1 Strength design of prestressed members for flexure and axial loads shall be based on assumptions given in
Sec 9.5.2 through 9.5.6, and shall satisfy the applicable conditions of equilibrium and compatibility of strains.
9.5.2 Strains in steel and concrete shall be assumed to be directly proportional to the distance from the neutral
axis.
9.5.3 Maximum usable strain at extreme concrete compression fibre shall be assumed to be 0.003.
9.5.4 Relationship between concrete compressive stress distribution and concrete strain may be assumed to be of
any shape that can be justified by comprehensive tests.
9.5.5 Requirements of Sec 9.5.4 may be considered satisfied by an equivalent rectangular concrete stress
distribution defined by the following :
a) Concrete stress of 0.85 f� shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an equivalent compression zone
bounded by edges of the cross-section and a straight line located parallel to the neutral axis at a distance
a= f3tc from the fibre of maximum compressive strain.
b) Distance c from the fibre of maximum strain to the neutral axis shall be measured in a direction
perpendicular to the neutral axis.
c) Factor {31 shall be calculated from

{31 =0.85-0.008(/�-30), and 0.65�/31 �0.85
9.5 6 . Stresses at transfer of prestress, at service loads, and at cracking loads, shall be investigated by the straight
line theory with the following assumptions :
a) Strains vary linearly with depth through the entire load range.
b) At cracked sections, concrete resists no tension.
9.6 CONTROL OF DEFLECTIONS
9.6.1 For prestressed concrete flexural members, immediate deflection shall be computed by usual methods or
formulas for elastic deflections, and the moment of inertia of gross concrete section may be used for
uncracked sections.
6-242
Chapter9
9.6.2 Additional long-term deflection of prestressed concrete members shall be computed taking into account
stresses in concrete and steel under sustained load and including effects of creep and shrinkage of concrete
and relaxation of steel.
9.6.3 For Class 3 members (See Sec 9.7 below), deflection calculations shall be made considering cracked sections.
9.6.4 Deflection computed in accordance with Sec 9.6.1, 9.6.2 and 9.6.3 shall not exceed the limits stipulated in
Table 6.6.4 of Chapter 6.
9.7 CLASSIFICATION OF PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBERS
Prestressed concrete members, depending on the amount of tensile stresses permitted under service load,
shall be classified as follows :
Class 1 No flexural tensile stresses.
Class 2 Flexural tensile stress but no visible cracking.
Class 3 Flexural tensile stresses but surface width of cracks not exceeding 0.1 mm for members having
exposure condition as detailed in note 1 and not exceeding 0.2 mm for all other members.
Note 1 Concrete surfaces exposed to sea water spray, de-icing salts (directly or indirectly), corrosive fumes,
sewage or other toxic materials e.g. sulphate, abrasive action e.g. sea water carr-ying solid or flowing water
with pH :s; 4.5 or machinery or vehicles.
9.8 ALLOWABLE TENSILE STRESSES IN CONCRETE FOR FLEXURAL MEMBERS
9.8.1 Design tensile stresses in flexure at service loads (after allowance for all prestress losses) shall not exceed the
following values for different classes of members :
1. Class 1 members: No tensile stress.
2. Class 2 members : Design tensile stresses shall not exceed the following:
i) For pretensioned tendons !t {1[

=0.50 (9.8.1 )
ii) For post-tensioned tendons !t =0.40 {1[ (9.8.2)
3. Class 3 members : Design tensile stresses shall not exceed the following :
a) Pretensioned or grouted post-tensioned tendons :
i) For limiting crack width of 0.1 mm: ft {J{

=0.70F (9.8.3)
ii) For limiting crack width of 0.2 mm : ft =0.85F{1{ (9.8.4)
b) Pretensioned tendons distributed in the tensile zone and positioned close to

the tension face of the concrete.
i) For limiting crack width of 0.1 mm : ft = {1{

0. 90F (9.8.5)
ii) For limiting crack width of 0.2 mm : ft =1.OOF {1{ (9.8.6)
Factor Fused in Eq (9.8.3), (9.8.4), (9.8.5) and (9.8.6) is the depth factor and shall be calculated as :
d
F=1.2- --
2000
The value of Fshall not be taken greater than 1.1 nor less than 0.70.
Note:
Reliable literature should be followed for calculation of crack width.
9.8.2 Desi� tensile stresses in flexure immediately after transfer of prestress shall not exceed the following values
for different classes of members :
a) Class 1 members: l.OON/mm2

Part6
Structural Design
b) Class 2 members : i) For pretensioned member o.5o .JK

ii) For post-tensioned member o.4o .JK
Members with pretensioned tendons should have some tendons or additional reinforcement well
distributed throu&hout the tensile zone of the section. Members with post-tensioned tendons should
have additional remforcement, if required, located near the tension face of the member.
c) Class 3 members : The design tensile stress should not, in general, exceed the appropriate value for a
Class 2 member. Where this stress is exceeded, the section shall, in design, be consiaered as cracked.
9.9 ALLOWABLE COMPRESSIVE STRESSES IN CONCRETE FOR FLEXURAL MEMBERS
9.9.1 Stresses at extreme fibre of concrete shall not exceed 0.45 f� at service loads (after allowance for all prestress
losses).
9.9.2 Stresses at extreme fibre of concrete shall not exceed 0.60 f�i immediately after transfer of prestress.
9.9.3 Allowable compressive stresses in concrete as provided in Sec 9.9.1 and 9.9.2 above may be allowed to be
exceeded if shown by test or analysis that performance will not be impaired. .
9.10 STEEL
9.10.1 The prestressing steel shall conform to the following standards and the requirements of Part 5 of this Code :
a) Steel wire conforming to BDS 240,
b) Steel wire conforming to ASTM A421,
c) Low-relaxation wire conforming to ASTM A421,
d) High-strength steel bar conforming to ASTM A722,
e) Strand conforming to ASTM A416,
f) Low-relaxation strand conforming to ASTM A416.
9.10.2 All prestressing steel shall be clean and free from oil, dirt, scales, splits, harmful scratches, surface flaws,
rough, jagged and imperfect edges and other defects likely to impair its use in prestressed concrete. Slight
rust may be permitted provided there is no surface pitting visible to the naked eye.
9.10.3 Coupling units and other similar fixtures used in conjunction with the wires or bars shall have an ultimate
tensile strength of not less than individual strengths of the wires or bars being joined.
9.10.4 Where it is not possible to ascertain the modulus of elasticity by test or from the manufacturer of steel, the
following values may be adopted :
Modulus of Elasticity
Type of Steel E5 (kN/mm2)
Plain cold-drawn wire 210

High tensile steel bars rolled or heat-treated 200
Strands 195
9.10.5 Reinforcement used as untensioned steel shall be any one of those permitted in reinforced concrete (see
Sec 5.3).
9.11 ALLOWABLE STRESSES IN PRESTRESSING STEEL
Tensile stress in prestressing tendons shall not exceed the following :
a) Due to tendon jacking force 0.94 /py

but not greater than the lesser of 0.80 /pu and
the maximum value recommended by the
manufacturer of prestressing tendons or
anchorages.
b) Immediately after prestress transfer 0.82/py

but not greater than 0.74 /pu
c) Post-tensioning tendons, at am:horages and couplers, 0.70/pu

immediately after tendon anchorage
6-244
Chapter 9
9.12 LOSSES OF PRESTRESS
9.12.1 While assessing the stresses in concrete and steel during tensioning operations and later in service, due
regard shall be paid to all losses and variations in stress resulting from creep of concrete, shrinkage of
concrete, relaxation of steel, elastic shortening of concrete at transfer, friction due to curvature of post
tensioning tendons, and slip of anchorage. Unless otherwise determined by actual tests, allowance for these
losses sha11 be made in accordance with the provisions of Sec 9.12.2 through 9.12.7 below.
In computing losses in prestress when untensioned reinforcement is present, the effect of the tensile stresses
developed by the untensioned reinforcement due to shrinkage and creep shall be considered.
9.12.2 Loss of Prestress Due to Creep of Concrete

9.12.2.1 Creep of concrete may be assumed to be proportional to the stress provided the stress in concrete
does not exceed 40 per cent of its compressive strength.
9.12.2.2 In the absence of test data, the ultimate creep strain may be estimated from the following values of
creep coefficient, which is the ratio of the ultimate creep strain to the elastic strain at the age of loading :
Age at Loading Creep Coefficient

7 days 2.2
28 days 1.6
1 year 1.1
The ultimate creep strain estimated as above does not include the elastic strain.
For the calculation of deformation at some stage before the total creep is reached, it may be assumed that 50
per cent of the total creep takes place in the first month after loading and about 75 per cent of the total creep
takes place in the first six months after loading.
9.12.2.3 The loss of prestress due to creep of concrete shall be determined for all the permanently applied
loads including the prestress. Loss due to stresses of short duration including live load and erection
stresses may be ignored.
9.12.2.4 The loss of prestress due to creep of concrete shall be obtained as the product of the modulus of
elasticity of the prestressing steel and the ultimate creep strain of the concrete fibre integrated along the
centreline of the prestressing steel over its entire length.
9.12.2.5 The total creep strain during any specific period shall be assumed to be the creep strain due to
sustained stress equal to the average of the stresses at the beginning and end of the period.
9.12.3 Loss of Prestress Due to Shrinkage of Concrete

9.12.3.1 In the absence of test data, the approximate value of shrinkage strain in concrete for design
purposes shall be assumed as follows :
For pretensioning 0.0003
0. 0002
For post-tensioning
log10 ( t+2 )
where, t = age of concrete at transfer in days.
9.12.3.2 For the calculation of deformation of concrete at some stage before the maximum shrinkage occurs
it may be assumed that 50 per cent of the shrinkage takes place during the first month and about 75 per cent
of the shrinkage takes place in the first six months after drying of concrete starts.
9.12.3.3 The loss of prestress due to shrinkage of concrete shall be obtained as the product of the modulus
of elasticity of steel and the shrinkage strain of concrete.
9.12.4 Loss of Prestress Due to Relaxation of Steel

The relaxation losses in prestressing steel shall be determined from experiments. When experimental values
are not available, the relaxation losses may be assumed as given in Tab1e 6.9.1.
Table 6.9.1
Relaxation Losses for Prestressing Steel at 1000 Hours at 27°C
Initial Stress Relaxation Loss

N/mm2
0.5 0
0.6 %fv"u 35
70
00.87 90
. !v"u

Part6
Structural Design
For tendons at higher temperature or subject to large lateral loads, greater relaxation losses as specified by
the engineer shall be allowed for. No reduction in the value of the relaxation losses should be made for a
tendon with a load equal to or greater than the relevant jacking force that has been applied for a short
duration prior to the anchoring of the tendon.
9.12.5 Loss of Prestress Due to Elastic Shortening of Concrete

The loss of prestress due to immediate elastic shortening of adjacent concrete upon transfer of initial
prestress shall be calculated as specified in Sec 9.12.5.1 and 9.12.5.2 below.
9.12.5.1 For pretensioning, the loss of prestress in the tendons at transfer shall be calculated on a modular
ratio basis usmg the stress in the adjacent concrete.
9.12.5.2 For members with post-tensioned tendons which are not stressed simultaneously, there is a
progressive loss of prestress during transfer due to the gradual application of the prestressing forces. This
loss of prestress shall be calculated on the basis of half the product of the stress in the concrete adjacent to
the tendons averaged along their lengths and the modular ratio. Alternatively, the loss of prestress may be
exactly computed based on the sequence of tensioning.
9.12.6 Loss of Prestress Due to Friction

9.12.6.1 The design shall take into consideration all losses in prestress that may occur during tensioning
due to friction between the post-tensioning tendons and the surrounding concrete or any fixture attached to
the steel or concrete.
9.12.6.2 The value of prestressing force Px at a distance f. x metres from the jacking end and acting in the
direction of the tangent to the curve of the cable, shall be calculated from the relation:
(9.12.1)
When kf. x +
( J.La) is not greater than 0.3, P
x may be computed from
(9.12.2)
For use in Eq (9.12.1) and (9.12.2), the values of wobble friction coefficient k and curvature friction coefficient
J1. shall be experimentally determined or obtained from the tendon manufacturer, and verified during
tendon stressing operations.
9.12.6.3 In the absence of test results or manufacturer's recommendation, the following values of J1. and k
may be taken as a guide :
a) For straight or moderately curved structures with curved or straight cables, J1. may be taken as follows :
0.55 for steel moving on concrete,

0.30 for steel moving on steel,
0.25 for steel moving on lead
and the value of k may be taken as varying from 15x104 to 50x104 per metre.
b) In circular or similar constructions, where circumferential tendons are tensioned by jacks, values of J1.
for calculating friction may be taken as :
0.45 for steel moving in smooth concrete,

0.25 for steel moving on steel bearers,
0.10 for steel moving on steel rollers.
9.12.6.4 The effect of reverse friction shall be taken into consideration in such cases where the initial tension
applied to a l'restressing tendon is partially released and action of friction in the reverse direction causes an
alteration in the distribution of stress along the length of the tendon.
9.12.6.5 Values of wobble and curvature friction coefficients used in design shall be shown on design
drawings.
9.12.6.6 Where loss of prestress in a member occurs due to connection of member to adjoining construction,
such loss of prestress snail be allowed for in design.
6-246
Chapter9
9.12.7 Loss of Prestress Due to Anchorage Slip

Any loss of prestress which may occur due to slip of wire during anchoring or due to straining of the
anchorage shall be allowed for in the design. Necessary additional elongation may be provided for at the
time of tensioning to compensate for this loss.
9.13 FLEXURAL STRENGTH
9.13.1 Design moment strength of flexural members shall be computed by the design methods provided in this
Code. For prestressing steel, /ps shall be substituted for/yin the strength computations.
Equations for the computation of design moment strength shall be as follows :
a) Sections with Tension Reinforcement only
i) For rectangular or flanged sections when the compression flange thickness ht is equal to or
greater than the depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block, a, the design moment strength
lf!Mn may be computed by :
(9.13.1)
where
or
(9.13.2)
When compression flange thickness hf is less than a, the design moment strength lf!Mn may be
computed by :
(9.13.3)
where Apw/ps = Aps/ps +Asfy -

o ssn <b
.
-
w
b )hf
Apw/ps
and a =-'-o-'---
0.85/�bw
Apw /ps is the tension reinforcement force required to develop in the web.
b) Rectangular Sections with Compression Reinforcement : For rectangular sections with compression
reinforcement, the design moment strength 1/JMn shall be computed as follows :
When
(9.13.4)
When the value of (Aps/ps +Asfy- A'sfy )jbd is less than the value given above, the stress in the
compression reinforcement is less than the yield strength /y· In such a case, the effects of compression
reinforcement may be neglected and the moment strength may be computed by the equation given for a
rectangular section with tension reinforcement only. Alternatively, the stress in the compression

Part6
Structural Design
reinforcement may be determined by a general analysis based on stress and strain compatibility, using
the assumptions given in Sec 9.5.
c) Other Cross-sections : For other cross-sections, the design moment strength IPMn shall be computed by
a general analysis based on stress and strain compatibility, using the stress-strain properties of the
prestressing steel and the assumptions given in Sec 9.5. ·
9.13.2 In lieu of a more accurate determination of/ps based on strain compatibility, the following approximate
values of/ps may be used if/se is not less than 0.5 /pu·
a) For members with bonded prestressing tendons :
(9.13.5)
If any compression reinforcement is taken into account when calculating /ps by Eq (9.13.5), the term
shall be taken not less than 0.17 and d' shall not be greater than 0.15dp.
b) For members with unbonded prestressing steel and with a span-to-depth ratio of 35 or less:
/ ps =
f se
+69+ !�
-- (9.13.6)
100pp
but / ps shall not be taken greater than fpy, nor (f se

)
+414 .
c) For members with unbonded prestressing steel and with a span-to-depth ratio greater than 35 :
(9.13.7)
but / ps shall not be taken greater than fpy, nor (! se +207 ) .

9.13.3 Nonprestressed reinforcement conforming to the specifications of deformed reinforcement, if used with
prestressing tendons, may be considered to contribute to the tensile force and may be included in moment
strength computations at a stress equal to the specified yield strength / · Other nonprestressed reinforcement
y
may be included in strength computations only if a strain compatibility analysis is made to determine
stresses in such reinforcement.
9.14 LIMITS FOR REINFORCEMENT OF FLEXURAL MEMBERS
9.14.1 Ratio of prestressed and nonprestressed reinforcement used for computation of flexural strength of a
prestressed concrete member, except as provided in Sec 9.14.2, shall be such that mp , [ m p +(djdp ) ( m- m') ],
or [ mpw +( djdp ) ( m10 - m:U)] is not greater than 0.36/31.
9.14.2 When a reinforcement ratio in excess of that specified in Sec 9.14.1 is provided, design moment strength
shall not exceed the moment strength based on fue compression portion of the moment couple.
The following equations may be used to calculate design moment strength IPMn of overreinforced members.
1) For rectangular sections, or flanged sections in which the neutral axis lies within the flange, the design
moment strength IPMn may be computed by :
(9.14.1)
6-248
Chapter9
2) For flanged sections in which the neutral axis is located outside the flange, the design moment strength
�Mn may be computed by :
(9.14.2)
9.14.3 Total amount of prestressed and nonprestressed reinforcement shall be adequate to develop a factored load
at least 1.2 times the cracking load computed on the basis of the modulus of rupture fr= 0.62{7[ except for
flexural members with shear and flexural strength at least twice that required by the combination of loads
specified in Sec 2.7.
9.15 MINIMUM BONDED REINFORCEMENT
9.15.1 A minimum area of bonded reinforcement shall be provided in all flexural members, as required by
Sec 9.15.2 and 9.15.3.
9.15.2 Except as provided in Sec 9.15.3, minimum area of bonded reinforcement shall be calculated by
As= 0.004A (9.15.1)
This bonded reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed over precompressed tensile zone as close as
practicable to extreme tension fibre. ·
9.15.3 For two-way flat plates, defined as solid slabs of uniform thickness, minimum area and distribution of
bonded reinforcement shall be as specified in Sec 9.15.3.1 through 9.15.3.3 below.
9.15.3.1 Bonded reinforcement shall not be required in positive moment areas where computed tensile
stress in concrete at service load (after allowance for all prestress losses) does not exceed 0.17 {![.
9.15.3.2 In positive moment areas where calculated stress in concrete at service load exceeds 0.17 {![.
minimum area of bonded reinforcement shall be computed by
(9.15.2)
in which the design yield strength[yshall not exceed 410 N/mm2• Bonded reinforcement shall be uniformly
distributed over precompressed tensile zone as close as practicable to extreme tension fibre.
9.15.3.3 In negative moment areas at column supports, minimum area of bonded reinforcement in each
direction shall be computed by
As = 0.00075 hl (9.15.3)
where l is the length of span in direction arallel to that of the reinforcement being determined. Bonded
r
reinforcement required by Eq (9.15.3) shal be distributed within a slab width between lines that are 1.5h
outside opposite faces of the column support. At least four bars or wires shall be provided in each direction.
Spacing ofbonded reinforcement shall not exceed 300 mm.
9.15.4 Minimum Length of Bonded Reinforcement

Minimum length of bonded reinforcement required by Sec 9.15.2 and 9.15.3 shall be as specified in
Sec 9.15.4.1 through 9.15.4.3 below.
9.15.4.1 In positive moment areas, minimum length of bonded reinforcement shall be one-third the clear
span length and centred in positive moment area.
9.15.4.2 In negative moment areas, bonded reinforcement shall extend one-sixth the clear span on each side
of the support.
9.15.4.3 Where bonded reinforcement is provided for design moment strength in accordance with Sec 9.13.3
or for tensile stress conditions in accordance with Sec 9.15.3.2, minimum length shall also conform to Sec 8.2.
9.16 TRANSMISSION LENGTHS IN PRETENSIONED MEMBERS
Transmission length, l 1, of bonded prestressing steel in pretensioned members shall be calculated by using
the following equation :

Part6
Structural Design
(9.16.1)
where K1 is a coefficient for the type of prestressing steel and is selected from the following:
a) Plain or indented wire Kt = 650

b) Crimped wire with total wave height not less than 0.15 db Kt = 440
c) 7-wire drawn strand Kt = 390
d) 7-wire standard or super strand Kt = 260
9.17 SPACING LIMITS OF PRESTRESSING STEEL AND DUCTS
9.17.1 Clear distance between pretensioning steel at each end of a member shall not be less than 4db for wire, nor
3db for strands. Closer vertical spacing and bundling of steel may be allowed in the middle portion of the
span.
9.17.2 Post-tensioning ducts may be bundled if concrete can be satisfactorily placed and if adequate measure is
taken to prevent the steel, when tensioned, from breaking through the duct.
9.17.3 The minimum clear spacing between individual tendons or post-tensioning ducts shall not be less than 1.33
times the maximum nominal size of aggregates.
9.18 CONCRETE PROTECTION FOR REINFORCEMENT
9.18.1 Concrete cover for nonprestressed reinforcement shall be in accordance with Sec 8.1.8.
9.18.2 Concrete cover for prestressed tendon shall not be less than that for nonprestressed reinforcement.
9.19 SHEAR STRENGTH
9.19.1 Design of cross-sections subjected to shear shall be based on
(9.19.1)
where Vu is the factored shear force at section considered and Vn is the nominal shear strength calculated
by
(9.19.2)
In the above, Vc is nominal shear strength provided by concrete in accordance with Sec 9.19.2 and V5 is
nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement in accordance with Sec 9.19.3.
9.19.1.1 In determining shear strength Vn, effect of any openings in members shall be taken into
consideration.
9.19.1.2 In determining shear strength V" effects of axial tension due to creep and shrinkage in restrained
members shall be considered and effects of inclined flexural compression in members with variable depth
may be included.
9.19.1.3 The values of f� shall not exceed 65 N/mm2 except as permitted below :
Values off� greater than 65 N/mm2 shall be permitted in computing Vc, Vci and V cw for prestressed
concrete beams having minimum web reinforcement equal to f�/35 times, but not more than 3 times the
amounts required by Sec 9.19.3.5 (c), (d) or (e).
9.19.1.4 Sections located less than a distance h/2 from face of support may be designed for the same shear
Vu as that computed at a distance h/2 when both of the following conditions are satisfied:
a) Support reaction, in the direction of applied shear, introduces compression into end regions of member,
and ·
b) No concentrated load occurs between face of support and location of the section.
6-250
Chapter9
9.19.2 Shear Strength Provided by Concrete

9.19.2.1 Unless more detailed calculation is made in accordance with Sec 9.19.2.2, shear strength V,,
provided by concrete of a member having effective prestress force not less than 40 per cent of the tensile
strength of flexural reinforcement, may be calculated by using Eq (9.19.3).
(9.19.3)
but V, need not be taken less than 0.17..fj[

bwd nor greater than 0.42..fl[ bwd, nor the value given in
Sec 9.19.2.3 or 9.19.2.4. The quantity VudfMu shall not be taken greater than 1.0, where Mu is factored
moment occurring simultaneously with Vu at the section considered. When applying Eq (9.19.3), d in the
term V ud/Mu shall be the distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of prestressed reinforcement.
9.19.2.2 Shear strength V, may be calculated in accordance with (a) and (b) below where V, shall be the
lesser of Vci or V av .
a) Shear strength Vci shall be computed by
(9.19.4)
but vci need not be taken less than 0.14 ..Jl[ bwd, where
Mer= ( Ifyt )( O.S..JR" + /pe- fd) (9.19.5)
and values of Mmax

and V;
shall be computed from the load combination causing the maximum
moment to occur at the section. For Class 3 members moment of inertia shall be calculated for cracked
section.
b) Shear strength V av shall be computed by
(9.19.6)
Alternatively, Vav may be computed as the shear force corresponding to dead load plus live load that
results in a principal tensile stress of 0.33 ..fj[ at centroidal axis of member, or at the intersection of
flange and web when centroidal axis is in the flange. In composite members, principal tensile stress
shaH be computed using the cross-section that resists live load.
c) In Eq (9.19.4) and (9.19.6), d shall be the distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of
prestressed reinforcement or 0.8h, whichever is greater.
9.19.2.3 In a pretensioned member in which the section at a distance h/2 from face of support is closer to
end of memoer than the transmission length of the prestressing steel, the reduced prestress shall be
considered when computing Vav . This value of V av shall also be taken as the maximum limit for
Eq (9.19.3). Prestress force may be assumed to vary linearly from zero at end of tendon to maximum at a
distance from end of tendon equal to the transmission length.
9.19.2.4 In a pretensioned member where bonding of some prestressing steel tendons does not extend to
end of member, a reduced prestress shall be considered when computing V, in accordance with Sec 9.19.2.1
or9.19.2.2. Value of Vav calculated using the reduced prestress shall a]so be taken as the maximum limit for
Eq (9.19.3). The prestress force due to prestressing steel tendons for which bonding does not extend to the
end of member, shall be assumed to vary linearly from zero at the point at which bonding commences to a
maxin:tum at a distance from this point equal to the transmission length.
9.19.3 Shear Strength Provided by Shear Reinforcement

9.19.3.1 Types of Shear Reinforcement: Shear reinforcement may consist of
a) stirrups perpendicular to axis of member,

b) welded wire fabric with wires located perpendicular to axis of member.

Part6
Structural Design
9.19.3.2 Design yield strength of shear reinforcement shall not exceed 410 N/mm2•
9.19.3.3 Stirrups and other bars or wires used as shear reinforcement shall extend to a distance d from
extreme compression fibre and shall be anchored at both ends according to development of web
reinforcement, as specified in Sec 8.2, to develop the design yield strength of reinforcement.
9.19.3.4 Spacing Limits of Shear Reinforcement

a) Spacing of shear reinforcement placed perpendicular to axis of member shall not exceed 0.75h nor
600mm. .
b) When V5 exceeds 0.33 ...Jl{b10d, maximum spacing given above shall be reduced by one-half.
9.19.3.5 Minimum Shear Reinforcement
a) A minimum area of shear reinforcement shall be provided in all prestressed concrete flexural members
where factored shear force Vu exceeds one-half the shear strength provided by concrete 4JV,, except
slab and beams with total depth not greater than 250 mm .
b) Minimum shear reinforcement requirements of (a) above may be waived if shown by tests that the
required nominal flexural and shear strengths can be developed when shear reinforcement is omitted.
c) Where shear reinforcement is required by (a) above or by analysis, and where factored torsional
moment Tudoes not exceed 4J 0.04 ( ..jl[ )
I, x2y , minimum area of shear reinforcement for prestressed
members, except as provided in (d) below, shall be computed by
bws
Av 0. 35
=
(9.19.7)
/y
d) For members with an effective prestress force not less than 40 per cent of the tensile strength of the
flexural reinforcement, the area of shear reinforcement shall not oe less than the smaller Av as obtained
by Eq (9.19.7) and the following:
=
Aps/puS {I (9.19.8)
Av
80fyd Vhu:
e) Where factored torsional moment Tu exceeds4J 0.04 ( ..fl{ I, x2y ) and where web reinforcement is
required by (a) above or by analysis, minimum area of closed stirrups shall be computed by
(9.19.9)
9.19.3.6 Design of Shear Reinforcement

a) Where factored shear force Vuexceeds shear strength 4JV,, shear reinforcement shall be provided to
satisfy Eq (9.19.1) and (9.19.2), where shear strength V5 shall be computed in accordance with (b) and (c)
below.
b) When shear reinforcement perpendicular to axis of member is used,
(9.19.10)
where Avis the area of shear reinforcement within a distances.
c) Shear strength V5 shall not be taken greater than 0.67 ...Jl{ bwd.
9.20 COMPRESSION MEMBERS- COMBINED FLEXURE AND AXIAL LOADS ·
9.20.1 Prestressed concrete members subjected to combined flexure and axial load, with or without nonprestressed
reinforcement, shall be proportioned by the strength design methods of this Code for members without
prestressing. Effects of prestress, creep, shrinkage, and temperature change shall be included.
9.20.2 Limits for Reinforcement of Prestressed Compression Members .

9.20.2.1 Members with average prestress less than 1.55 N I mm2 shall have minimum reinforcement in
fPc
accordance with Sec 6.3.6 for columns and Sec 6.9.7 for walls.
6-252
Chapter9
9.20.2.2 Except for walls, members with average prestress fpc equal to or greater than 1.55 N/rnrn2 shall
have all prestressing steel enclosed by spirals or lateral ties in accordance with the following:
a) Spirals shall conform to spirals for columns in Sec 6.3.6.4 and 6.3.6.5.
b) Lateral ties shall be at least 10 mm dia in size or welded wire fabric of equivalent area, and spaced
vertically not to exceed 48 tie bar or wire diameters, or least dimension of compression member.
c) Ties shall be located vertically not more than half a tie spacing above top of footing or slab in any
storey, and shall be spaced as provided herein to not more than half a tie spacing below lowest
horizontal reinforcement in members supported above.
d) Where beams or brackets frame into all sides of a column, ties may be terminated not more than 75 mm
below lowest reinforcement in such beams or brackets.
9.20.2.3 For walls with average prestress fpc equal to or greater than 1.55 N/mm2, minimum reinforcement
required by Sec 6.9.7 shall not apply where structural analysis shows adequate strength and stability.
9.21 FRAMES AND CONTINUOUS STRUCTURES
9.21.1 Performance at service load conditions of frames and continuous structures of prestressed concrete shall be
determined by elastic analysis, considering reactions, moments, shears, ana axial forces produced by
prestressing, creep, shrinkage, temperature change, axial deformation, restraint of attached structural
elements, and foundation settlement. All the elements shall be designed for satisfactory performance at
service load conditions and for adequate strength.
9.21.2 Moments to be used to calculate required strength shall be the sum of the moments due to reaction induced
by prestressing (with a load factor of 1.0) and tne moments due to factored loads including redistribution as
permitted in Sec 9.21.3 below.
9.21.3 Redistribution of negative moments due to gravity loads in continuous prestressed flexural members shall
be according to the following :
a) Where bonded reinforcement is provided at supports in accordance with Sec 9.15.2, negative moments
calculated by elastic theory for any assumed loading arrangement may be increased or decreased by not
more than
b) The modified negative moments shall be used to calculate moments at sections within spans for the
same loading arrangement.
c) Redistribution of negative moments shall be made only when the section at which moment is reduced is
so designed that mp, (mp +(djdp )(m-m')], or (mpw +(dfdp )(mw -(Ll;,)], whichever is applicable, is not
greater than 0.24/31.
9.22 SLAB SYSTEM
9.22.1 Factored moments and shears in prestressed slab systems reinforced for flexure in more than one direction
shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Sec 6.4.6 or by more detailed design procedures.
9.22.2 Moment strength of prestressed slabs at every section. shall be at least equal to that required for a reinforced
concrete structure and that required considering Sec 9.21.2 and 9.21.3.
Shear strength of two-way prestressed slabs at columns shall be at least equal to that required in Sec 6.4.7,
except the following :
For slabs without shear reinforcement, Vcmay be computed by Eq (9.22.1) provided the conditions (a), (b)
and (c) below are satisfied, otherwise the provisions of Sec 6.4.7.2 shall apply.
a) No portion of the column cross-section shall be closer to a discontinuous edge than 4 times the slab
thickness,
b) f� in Eq (9.22.1) shall not be taken greater than 35 N/mm2,

c) fpc in each direction shall not be less than 0.86 N/mm2, nor greater than 3.45 N/mm2•

Part 6
Structural Design
(9.22.1)
where f3p is the smaller of 3.5 and (2a5dfb0 + 1.5),
shall have the values given in Sec 6.4.7.2,
shall be taken in accordance with Sec 6.4.7.1(b),
is the average value of /pc for the two directions,
is the vertical component of all effective prestress forces crossing the critical section.
9.22.3 At service load conditions, all serviceability limitations, including specified limits on deflections, shall be
met, with appropriate consideration of the factors listed in Sec 9.21.1.
9.22.4 For normal live loads and loads uniformly distributed, spacing of prestressing tendons or groups of tendons
in one direction shall not exceed 8 times the slab thickness, nor m. Spacing of tendons shalf also provide
1.5
a minimum average prestress (after allowance for all prestress losses) of 0.85 N /mm2 on the slab section
tributary to the tendon or tendon group. A minimum of two tendons shall be provided in each direction
through the critical shear section over columns. Special consideration of tendon spacing shall be provided
for slabs with concentrated loads.
9.22.5 In slabs with unbonded prestressing steel, bonded reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with
Sec 9.15.3and 9.15.4.
9.23 TENDON ANCHORAGE ZONES
9.23.1 End blocks shall be provided in post-tensioned members for support bearing or for distribution of
prestressing forces. These shall be at least as wide as the narrow flange of the beam and shall have a length
at least equal to three-fourths of the de th of the beam and in any case not less than
f mm. Transition
600
between end block and normal section o the beam shall have a slope not steeper than 2.5:1.
9.23.2 Reinforcement shall be provided in tendon anchorage zones to resist bursting, splitting, and spalling forces
induced by tendon anchorage. Regions of abrupt change in section shall be adequately reinforced. In post
tensioned members a closely spaced grid of both vertical and horizontal bars shall be placed near the face of
the end block to resist bursting or other forces. Amount of steel in the end grid should follow
recommendations of the supplier of the anchorage or specialist literature. Where such recommendations are
not available the grid shall consist of at least mm dia bars on 100 mm centres in each direction placed not
12
more than 40mm from the inside face of anchor bearing plate. Closely spaced reinforcement shall also be
placed both vertically and horizontally throughout the length of end bfock in accordance with accepted
methods of end block stress analysis.
9.23.3 Post-tensioning anchorages and supporting concrete shall be designed to resist the maximum jacking force
for the strengtn of concrete at time of prestressing.
9.23.4 Post-tensioning anchorage zones shall be designed to develop the guaranteed ultimate tensile strength of
prestressing steel using a strength reduction factor <I> of 0.90 for concrete.
9.23.5 In end zones of pretensioned beams, vertical stirrups acting at a unit stress of 138 N I mm2 to resist at least 4
per cent of the total prestressing force shall be placed within the distance d/4 at the end of the beam; the
end stirrups shall be as close to the end of the beam as practicable. For at least the distanced from the end of
the beam, nominal reinforcement shall be placed to enclose the prestressing steel in the bottom flange.
9.24 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR UNBONDED PRESTRESSING TENDONS
9.24.1 Unbonded prestressing tendons shall be completely coated with suitable material to ensure corrosion
protection.
9.24.2 Tendon covering shall be continuous over the entire unbonded length and shall prevent intrusion of cement
paste or loss of coating materials during concrete placement.
9.25 POST-TENSIONING DUCTS
9.25.1 Ducts for grouted or unbonded tendons shall be mortar-tight and nonreactive with concrete, tendons, or
filler material.
9.25.2 Ducts for grouted single wire, strand, or bar tendons shall have an inside diameter at least 6 mm larger than
tendon diameter.
9.25.3 Ducts for grouted multiple wire, strand, or bar tendons shall have an inside cross-sectional area at least two
times the area of tendons.
6-254
Chapter9
9.Z6 GROUT FOR BONDED PRESTRESSING TENDONS
9.Z6.1 Grout shall consist of ordinary Portland cement and water for diameter of duct less than 150 mm or
Portland cement, sand, and water for diameter of duct larger than 150 mm.
9.Z6.Z Materials for grout shall conform to Sec 9.Z6.Z.1 through 9.Z6.Z.3 below.
9.26.2.1 Portfand cement and water shall conform to Sec Z.4.3 and Z.4.4 of Part 5.
9.26.2.2 Sand shall conform to standard specification for aggregates as provided in Sec Z.4.Z of Part 5.
Gradation of sand shall be as required to obtain satisfactory workability.
9.26.2.3 Admixtures conforming to the specification provided in Sec 2.4.5 of Part 5 and known to have no
injurious effects on grout, steel, or concrete shall be permitted. Calcium chloride, nitrates and sulphates shall
not be used.
9.Z6.3 Selection of Grout Proportions

9.26.3.1 Proportions of materials for grout shall be based on either of the following :
a) Results of tests on fresh and hardened grout prior to beginning of grouting operations, or
b) Prior documented experience with similar materials and equipment and under comparable field
conditions.
9.26.3.2 Cement used in the work shall correspond to that on which selection of grout proportions was
based.
9.26.3.3 Water content shall be the minimum necessary for proper pumping of grout; however, water
cement ratio shall not exceed 0.45 by weight.
9.26.3.4 Water shall not be added to increase grout flowability that has been decreased by delayed use of
grout.
9.26.3.5 The grout shall not bleed in excess of Z per cent after 3 hours.
9.26.3.6 The minimum compressive strength of grout shall be : f� = ZS N I mm2•
9.Z6.4 Mixing and Pumping of Grout

9.26.4.1 Grout shall be mixed in equipment capable of continuous mechanical mixing and agitation that
will produce uniform distribution of materials, passed through screens of 1.0 mrn nominal aperture size and
pumped in a manner that will completely fill tendon ducts. The grout injector shall be capable of continuous
operation with a constant pressure of 0.7 N/mm2 •
9.26.4.2 Temperature of members at time of grouting shall be above zoe and shall be maintained above zoe
until field cured 50 mrn cubes of grout reach a minimum compressive strength of 5.5 N/rnrn2• Grout
temperatures shall not be above 3Z°C during mixing and pumping.
.
9.26.4.3 The pressure gauge shall be recently calibrated prior to use in grouting.
9.Z6.5 Grouting Procedure

Specialist literature e.g. Guide for Freyssinet Methods or equivalent shall be used for grouting procedure of
ducts.
9.Z7 PROTECTION OF PRESTRESSING TENDONS
Burning or welding operations in the vicinity of prestressing tendons shall be carefully performed, so that
tendons are not suojected to excessive temperatures, welding sparks, or ground currents.
9.Z8 APPLICATION AND MEASUREMENT OF PRESTRESSING FORCE
9.28.1 Prestressing force shall be determined by both of the following methods:

a) Measurement of tendon elongation. Required elongation shall be determined from average load
elongation curves for the prestressing tendons used.
b) Observation of jacking force on a calibrated gauge or load cell or by use of a calibrated dynamometer.
Causes of any difference in force determination between (a) and (b) above, that exceeds 5 per cent for
pretensioned members or 7 per cent for post-tensioned construction, shall be ascertained and corrected.
9.Z8.Z Where transfer of force from bulkhead of pretensioning bed to concrete is accomplished by flame cutting,
prestressing tendons, cutting points and cutting sequence shall be predetermmed to avoid undesired
temporary stresses.

Part6
Structural Design
9.28.3 Long lengths of exposed pretensioned strand shall be cut near the member to minimize shock to concrete.
9.28.4 Total loss of prestress due to unreplaced broken tendons shall not exce�d 2 per cent of total prestress.
9.29 POST-TENSIONING ANCHORAGE AND COUPLERS
9.29.1 Anchorages and couplers for bonded and unbonded prestressing tendons shall develop at least 95 per cent
of the specified breal<ing strength of the tendons, when tested in an unbonded condition, without exceeding
anticipated set. For bonded tendons, anchorages and couplers shall be located so that 100 per cent of the
specified breaking strength of the tendons shall be developed at critical sections after tendons are bonded in
the member.
9.29.2 Couplers shall be placed in areas approved by the engineer and enclosed in housing long enough to permit
necessary movements.
9.29.3 In unbonded construction subject to repetitive loads, special attention shall be given to the possibility of
fatigue in anchorages and couplers.
9.29.4 Anchorages, couplers, and end fittings shall be permanently protected against corrosion.
9.30 DEMOUNT ABLE PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONSTRUCTION
In building structures which are likely to be shifted to other locations durin� their life time, provisions of
demountability may be introduced. The connections must be moment res1sting against stresses due to
environmental effects besides other stresses.
9.31 COLD DRAWN LOW CARBON WIRE PRESTRESSED CONCRETE (CWPC)
Cold drawn low carbon wire conforming to ASTM A61 5 or equivalent may be permitted for prestressing
provided the mechanical requirements shown in Table 6.9.2 are satisfied.
Table 6.9.2
Tensile Strength and Elongation of Cold Drawn Wire
Dia of Wire Minimum Tensile Strength Minimum

(mm) (N/mm2) Elongation, per cent
3 650 2.0
4 600 2.5
5 550 3.0
Related Appendix
6-256
CHAPTER ll®
Steel Structures
10.1 SCOPE
This chapter provides the requirements for the use of structural steel in general building construction
including the use of hot rolled steel sections and steel tubes. The provisions are generally applicable to
riveted, bolted and welded constructions.
Two types of design procedures are covered: Working Stress Design (WSD) method and Load Factor Design
(LFD) method.
10.2 DEFINITIONS AND NOTATION
10.2.1 Definitions
For the purpose of this chapter the following definitions shall apply.
BUCKLING LOAD: The load at which a member or a structure as a whole collapses or buckles in a load test.
EFFECTIVE LATERAL RESTRAINT : Restraint which provides sufficient resistance against buckling of the
compression flange of a loaded strut, beam or girder to either side at the point of its appfication.
ELASTIC CRITICAL MOMENT: The elastic moment which will initiate yielding or cause buckling.
FACTOR OF SAFETY: The factor by which the yield stress of the material of a member is divided to get the
permissible stress of that material.
GAUGE: The transverse spacing between parallel adjacent lines of fasteners.
MAIN MEMBER: A structural member which is primarily responsible for carrying and distributing the
applied load.
PITCH: The centre to centre distance between individual fasteners in a line.
Part 6 6-257
Structural Design
Part 6
Structural Design
SECONDARY MEMBER : A member provided for stability and for restraining the main member from
buckling.
10.2.2 Notation
Symbols used in this chapter shall have the following meaning unless otherwise defined elsewhere in this
chapter. .
A cross-sectional area, mm2

AB loaded area of concrete, mm2
Ab nominal body area of a fastener, mm2
= area of an upset rod based upon the major diameter of its threads, mm2
A, area of effective concrete flange in composite design, mm2
area of concrete, mm2
At area of compression flange, mm2
= area of flange, mm2
Ate effective tension flange area, mm2
Atg gross area of beam flange, mm2
Atn = net flange area of beam, mm2
Ag gross area, mm2
Ans net area subject to shear, mm2
Apb projected bearing area, mm2
Ar area of reinforcing bars, mm2
As = area of steel beam in composite design, mm2
A5' area of compressive reinforcing steel, mm2
Asc cross-sectional area of stud shear connector, mm2

Asr area of reinforcing steel providing composite action at point of negative moment, mm2
Ast cross-sectional area of a stiffener or pair of stiffeners, mm2
area of link stiffener, mm2
Ast = shear area on the failure path, mm2
At net tension area, mm2
Av net shear area, mm2
Atu web area, mm2 ·
= effecti�e area of weld, mm2

link web area, mm2
At area of steel bearing concentrically on a concrete support, mm2
Az total cross-sectional area of a concrete support, mm2
B factor for bending stress in web-tapered members
Bt,Bz factors used in determining Mu for combined bending and axial forces when first order analysis is
employed
Ca numerical coefficient
cb bending coefficient dependent upon moment gradient
c, = column slenderness ratio separating elastic and inelastic buckling
C'c = slenderness ratio of compression elements

Cm = coefficient applied to bending term in interaction equation for prismatic members and dependent
upon column curvature caused by applied moments
C'm coefficient applied to bending term in interaction equation for tapered members and dependent
upon axial stress at the small end of the member
Cpc plate girder coefficient
Cp stiffness factor for primary member in a flat roof
Cs stiffness factor for secondary member in a flat roof
Cv ratio of "critical" web stress, according to the linear buckling theory, to the shear yield stress of ·
web material
Cw warping constant, mm6
Ct increment used in computing minimum spacing of oversized and slotted holes
Cz increment used in computing minimum edge distance for oversized and slotted holes
D outside diameter of tubular member, mm
factor depending upon type of transverse stiffeners used
dead load due to self weight and permanent elements on the structure
E modulus of elasticity of steel (200,000 N/mm2)
= earthquake load (see Sec 2.7)
E' amplified earthquake load (see Sec 2.7)
E, = modulus of elasticity of concrete, N/mm2
Em modified modulus of elasticity, N/mm2
6-258
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
Fa axial compressive stress permitted in a prismatic member in the absence of moment, N lmm2
Fay axial compressive stress permitted in a tapered member in the absence of moment, Nlmm2
Fb bending stress permitted in a prismatic member in the absence of axial force, Nlmm2
Fby bending stress permitted in a tapered member in the absence of axial force, Nlmm 2
FBM nominal strength of base material to be welded, N I mm2

FExx classification strength of weld metal, N I mm2
F[, allowable bending stress in co:mpression flange of plate girders as reduced for hybrid girders or
because of large web depth to thickness ratio, Nlmm2
bending stress permitted in a prismatic member in the absence of axial force about x and y axes
respectively, Nlmm2
Fer critical stress, Nlmm2
Fe elastic buckling stress, N I mm2
F; euler stress for a prismatic member divided by factor of safety, N lmm2
Fer elastic flexural buckling stress about the major axis, Nlmm2
Fey elastic flexural buckling stress about the minor axis, Nlmm2
Fez elastic torsional buckling stress, Nlmm2
Fmy modified yield stress for composite column, Nlmm2
Fn nominal shear rupture strength, Nlmm2
Fr compressive residual stress in flange, Nlmm2
Fp allowable bearing stress, N I mm2
Fsy St. Venant torsion resistance bending stress in a tapered member, Nlmm2
Ft allowable axial tensile stress, N I mm 2
Fu specified minimum tensile strength of the type of steel or fastener being used, N I mm2
Fv allowable shear stress, Nlmm2
Fw nominal strength of weld electrode material, N I mm2
Fwy flange warping torsion resistance bending stress in a tapered member, N I mm2
Fy specified minimum yield stress of the type of steel being used, N I mm2
Fyb specified minimum yield stress of beam, Nlmm2
Fyc specified minimum column yield stress, NI mm2
Fyf specified minimum yield stress of flange, Nlmm2
Fym yield stress obtained from mill test reports or from physical tests, N I mm2
Fyr specified minimum yield stress of the longitudinal reinforcing bars, N I mm2
Fys static yield stress, Nlmm2
Fyst specified minimum yield stress of stiffener, Nlmm2
Fyw specified minimum yield stress of the web, Nlmm2
G shear modulus of elasticity of steel (77220 Nlmm2)
H average storey height above and below a beam to column connection, mm
Hs length of a stud shear connector after welding, mm
I moment of inertia, mm4
Id moment of inertia of steel deck supported on secondary members, mm4 per m
Ieff effective moment of inertia of composite sections for deflection computations, mm4
Ip moment of inertia of primary members, mm4
Is moment of inertia of secondary members, mm4
moment of inertia of steel beam in composite construction, mm4
Ist moment of inertia of a transverse stiffener, mm4
Itr moment of inertia of transformed composite section, mm4
Ix, Iy moment of inertia about the principal axes, mm4
J torsional constant for a section, mm4
K effective length factor for prismatic member
Ks slip coefficient
Kz effective length factor for torsional buckling
Ky effective length factor for a tapered member
L unbraced length of tensile members, mm
unbraced len� of member measured between centre of gravity of the bracing members, mm
length of braang member, mm
distance in line of force from centre of a standard or oversized hole or from the centre of the end of
a slotted hole to an edge of a connected part, mm
live load due to occupancy and moveable equipment
laterally unsupported length, mm

Part 6
Structural Design
= maximum unbraced length of the compression flange at which the allowable bending stress may be
taken at 0.66 Fy, mm
length of channel shear connector, mm
= distance from free edge to centre of the bolt, mm
= length of primary member in flat roof framing, m
= limiting laterally unbraced length for full plastic bending capacity, uniform moment case
(Cb=l.O), mm
column spacing in the direction of girder,mm
= limiting faterally unbraced length for plastic analysis, mm
limiting laterally unbraced length for inelastic lateral-torsional buckling, mm
length of secondary member in flat roof framing, m
column spacing perpendicular to direction of girder, mm
= morrent, kNm
nominal flexural strength of a member or joint,kNm
plastic bending moment, kNm
plastic bending moment modified by axial load ratio, kNm
= required flexural strength of member or joint,kNm
required flexural strength about the y-axis, kNm
smaller moment at end of unbraced length of beam - column
larger moment at one end of three-segment proportion of a tapered member
larger moment at end of unbraced length of beam - column
maximum moment in three adjacent segments of a tapered member
Mer = elastic buckling moment,kNm
M11 required flexural strength in member due to lateral frame translation, kNm
Mn nominal flexural strength, kNm
M'nx• Mn =flexural strength for use in alternate interaction equations for combined bending and axial force,
y
kNm .
Mnt = required flexural strength in member assuming there is no lateral translation of the frame, kNm
M = plastic bending moment,kNm
p
MJ, = moment for use in alternate interaction equations for combined bending and axial force, kNm
Mr limiting buckling moment,Ma,when A. =A.r,Cb =1.0, kNm

Mu required flexural strength, kNm
M initial yield bending moment,kNm
y
N length of bearing, mm
Nr = number of stud�shear connectors on a beam in one transverse rib of a metal deck
N1 number of shear connectors required between point of maximum moment and point of zero moment
N2 = number of shear connectors required between concentrated load and point of zero moment
P axial load, kN
= force transmitted by a fastener to the critical part, kN
factored axial load, kN
= normal force,kN
ratio of required axial force P u to nominal shear strength V of a link
y
= factored beam flange or connection plate force in a restrained connection, kN
= maximum strength of an axially loaded compression member or beam,kN
= required axial strength of a column resulting from application of dead load, kN
euler buckling load, kN
elastic buckling load, kN
required axial strength of a column resulting from application of the amplified earthquake load E'
= required axial strength of a column resulting from application of live load L, kN
= nominal axial strength (tension or compression), kN
bearing load on concrete, kN
required axial strength of a column or a link, kN
required axial strength of a column based on load combination with seismic loads, kN
nominal yield axial strength of a member, Py=lo-3 FyAg, kN
= full reduction factor for slender compression elements
ratio of effective profile area of an axially loaded member to its total profile area
= reduction factor for slender stiffened compression elements
= nominal strength of one stud shear connector, kN
axial stress reduction factor where width-thickness ratio of unstiffened elements exceeds
noncompact section limits
R reaction or concentrated load applied to beam or girder, kN
earthquake response modification coefficient for structural system given in Table 6.2.24 of
Chapter 2, Loads
= nominal strength of a member
plate girder bending strength reduction factor
6-260
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
hybrid girder factor

nominal resistance, kN
web shear strength, kN
spacing of secondary members in a flat roof, m
= elastic section modulus, mm3
= governing slenderness ratio of tapered member
Seff effective section modulus corresponding to partial composite action, mm3
(Sx) eff = effective section modulus about major axis, mm3
Sxt,Sxc = elastic section modulus referred to tension and compression flanges respectively, mm3
s� = elastic section modulus about major axis
Ss section modulus of steel beam used in composite design referred to the bottom flange, mm3
Str section modulus of transformed composite section referred to the bottom flange, based upon
maximum permitted effective width of concrete flange, mm3
factored applied tension force per bolt, kN
specified pretension load in a liigh-strength bolt, kN
ponding stress index for primary and secondary members
shear force, kN
·
friction force, kN
vh total horizontal shear to be resisted by connectors under full composite action, kN
v;. = total horizontal shear provided by the connectors providing partial composite action, kN
Vn nominal shear strength, kN
Vu required shear strength, kN
Vy nominal shear strength of an active link, kN
Vya = nominal shear strength of a member modified by the axial load magnitude, kN
Xl,X2 = beam buckling factors
y = ratio of yield stress of web steel to yield stress of stiffener steel
z plastic section modulus, mm3
zb plastic section modulus of beam, mm3
Zc = plastic section modulus of column, mm3
a clear distance between transverse stiffeners, mm
distance between connectors in a built-up member, mm
dimension parallel to the direction of stress, mm
shortest distance from edge of pin hole to edge of member measured parallel to direction of
force,mm
a' = distance beyond theoretical cut-off point required at ends of welded partial length cover plate to
develop stress, mm
ar ratio of web area to compression flange area
b actual width of stiffened and unstiffened compression elements, mm
dimension normal to the direction of stress, mm
bcf = column flange width, mm
be = effective width of stiffened compression element, mm
= reduced effective width for slender compression elements, mm
beff effective edge distance, mm
flange width, mm
·
bt =
c1,c2,c3 = numerical coefficients

d depth of beam or girder, mm
diameter of a roller or rocker bearing, mm
= pin or roller diameter, mm
nominal diameter of a fastener, mm
db overall beam depth, mm
de web depth clear of fillets, mm
overall column section depth, mm
dL depth at the larger end of a tapered member, mm
do = depth at the smaller end of a tapered member or unbraced segment thereof, mm
dz overall panel zone depth between continuity plates, mm
e EBF link length, mm
I = axial compression stress on member based on effective area, N I mm2
computed compressive stress in the stiffened element, N Imm2
fa = computed axial stress, N/mm2
faa computed axial stress at the smaller end of a tapered member or unbraced segment thereof, Nlmm2
fb computed bending stress, Nlmm2
fbl smallest computed bending stress at one end of a tapered segment, N I mm2
fb2 largest computed bending stress at one end of a tapered segment, Nlmm2

Part 6
Structural Design
fbi computed bending stress at the large end of a tapered member or unbraced segment thereof, Nlrom2
fbx,fby = computed bending stress in axes x and y respectively, NI mm2
f� specified compressive strength of concrete, Nlmm2

It computed tensile stress, NI rom2
fun required normal stress, Nlmm2

fuv required shear stress, NI rom2
fv = computed shear stress, Nlmm2
fvs shear between girder web and transverse stiffeners per linear mm of single stiffener or pair of
stiffeners, N
transverse centre to centre spacing (gauge) of any two consecutive holes, mm
clear distance between flanges of a beam or girder, mm
assumed web depth for stability, rom
nominal rib height for steel deck, mm
factors for web tapered members
= factor for minimum moment of inertia for a transverse stiffener
distance from outer face of flange to web toe of fillet of rolled shape, mm
web plate buckling coefficient
compression element restraint coefficient
= shear buckling coefficient for girder webs .
actual unbraced length of a member, rom
unsupported length of lacing bar, rom
largest laterally unbraced length along either flange at the point of load, mm
length of bearing, rom
lb actual unbraced length in plane of bending, mm
lcr critical unbraced length in plane of bending, rom
m ratio of web to flange yield stress or critical stress in hybrid beams
n modular ratio (E5I E,)
q allowable horizontal shear to be resisted by a shear connector, kN
r = radius of gyration, mm
rb radius of gyration about axis of concurrent bending, mm
rbo radius of gyration about axis of concurrent bending at the smaller end of a tapered member or
unbraced segment thereof, rom
ri minimum radius of gyration of individual component in a built-up member, mm
Tm radius of gyration of the steel shape, pipe or tubing in composite columns
To radius of gyration at the smaller end of a tapered member, mm
ro polar radius of gyration about the shear centre, mm

Tax' roy= radius of gyration about x and y axes at the smaller end of a tapered member respectively, mm
rT radius of gyration of a section comprising the compression flange plus t of the compression web
area, taken about an axis in the plane of the web, mm
rTo radius of gyration at the smaller end of a tapered member or unbraced segment thereof, considering
only the compression flange plus � of the compression web area, taken about an axis in the plane
of the web, mm
radius of gyration about the x and y axes respectively, mm
longitudinal centre to centre spacing (pitch) of any two consecutive holes, mm
compression element thickness, mm
thicl<ness of an element part, mm
wall thickness of a tubular member, rom
thickness of connected part, rom
thickness of the criticaf part, mm
filler thickness, rom
tb thickness of beam flange or moment connection plate at rigid beam to column connection, mm
tbf thickness of beam flange, rom
tcf thickness of column flange, mm
tf flange thickness, rom
tp thickness of panel zone including doubler plates, mm
lw = web thickness, rom
lwc column web thickness, rom
lz = thickness of panel zone (doubler plate not necessarily included), mm
w length of channel shear connectors, rom
unit weight of concrete, kNI m3
Wr average width of rib or haunch of concrete slab on formed steel deck, mm
Wz width of panel zone between column flanges, rom
Xo, Yo coordinates of shear centre with respect to the centroid, mm
z distance from the smaller end of a tapered member, rom
6-262
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
Lioh translation deflection of the storey under consideration, mm

r = depth tapering ratio
TJ,t; exponents for alternate beam-column interaction equation
A. slenderness parameter
Ac column slenderness parameter
Ae equivalent slenderness parameter
Aeff effective slenderness ratio
A.P limiting slenderness parameter for compact element
Ar limiting slenderness parameter for noncompact element
¢ resistance factor
¢b resistance factor for flexure
¢c resistance factor for compression

= resistance factor for axially loaded composite columns
¢sj resistance factor for shear on the failure path
¢t resistance factor for tension
¢v resistance factor for shear
¢w resistance factor for welds

f1. coefficient of friction
10.3 MATERIAL
10.3.1 Structural Steel

Material conforming to one of the following standard specifications is approved for use under the
provisions of this Code:
BDS 878 Specification for Weldable Structural Steels.

ASTM A36l A36M Standard Specification for Structural Steel.
ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-dipped,
Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless.
ASTM A2421 A242M Specification for Hi gh-strength Low-alloy Structural Steel.
ASTM A441 Standard Specification for Righ-strength Low-alloy Structural Manganese
Vanadium Steel.
ASTM ASOO Standard Specification for Cold-formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
ASTM A501 Standard Specification for Hot-formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing.
ASTM A5141 AS14M Standard Specification for High-yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered
Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding.
ASTM A529 I AS 29M Standard Specification for StructurafSteel with 42 ksi (290 MPa) Minimum
Yield Point ( ! in (13 mm) Maximum Thickness).
ASTM A570 I A570M Standard �ecification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-rolled,
Structural Quality.
ASTM A5721A572M Standard Specification for High-strength Low-alloy Columbium-Vanadium
Steels of Structural Quality.
ASTM A5881 A588M Standard Specification for High-strength Low-alloy Structural Steel with
50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point to 4 in (100 mm) Thi ck.
ASTM A606 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-strength, Low-alloy,
Hot-rolled and Cold-rolled, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion
Resistance.
ASTM A607 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-strength, Low-alloy,
Columbium or Vanadium, or Both, Hot-rolled and Cold-rolled.
ASTM A618 Standard Specification for Hot-formed Welded and Seamless High-strength
Low-alloy Structural Tubing.
ASTM A852 Quenched and Tempered Low-alloy Structural Steel Plate with 70 ksi
Minimum Yield Strength to 4 in (100 mm) Thick.
Certified mill test reports or certified reports of tests made by the fabricator or a testing laboratory in
accordance with ASTM A6 or A568, as applicable, shall constitute sufficient evidence of conformity with
one of the above standards. If requested, the fabricator shall provide an affidavit stating that the structural
steel furnished meets the requirements of the grade specified.

Part 6
Structural Design
Unidentified steel may be used for unimportant members or details where the precise physical properties and
weldability of the steel would not affect the strength of the structure, proviaed the surface conditions are
acceptable according to the criteria specified in ASTM A6.
10.3.2 Rivets, Bolts, Washers and Nuts

Steel rivets shall conform to ASTM A502 : Standard Specification for Steel Structural Rivets.
Steel bolts shall conform to one of the following standards:
ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile
Strength.
ASTM A325 Stanaard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength.
ASTM A449 Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs.
ASTM A490 Standard Specification for Heat-treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength. ·
ASTM A563 Standard Specification 1or Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
ASTM F436 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.
A449 bolts are permitted only in connections requiring bolt diameters greater than 38 mm and shall not be
used in slip-crihcal connections.
Manufacturer's certification may be accepted as sufficient evidence of conformity with the standards.
10.3.3 Anchor Bolts and Threaded Rods

Anchor bolt and threaded rod shall conform to one of the following standards:
ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Structural Steel.

ASTM A194/A194M Standard SJ>ecification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High
pressure ana High-temperature Service.
ASTM A354 Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs
and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners.
ASTM A449 Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs.
ASTM A588/A588M Standard Specification for High Strength Low alloy Structural Steel with 50
ksi (345 MP"a) Minimum Yield Point to 4 in (100 mm} Thick.
ASTM A687 Standard Specification for High-strength Non-headed Steel Bolts and Studs.
Threads on bolts and rods shall conform to Unified Standard Series of latest edition of ANSI B18.1 and shall
have Class 2A tolerances.
A449 material is acceptable for high-strength anchor bolts and threaded rods of any diameter.
10.3.4 Welds
Welding electrodes and fluxes shall conform to one of the following specifications of the American Welding
Society:
AWSA5.1 Specification for Covered Carbon Steel Arc Welding Electrodes.

AWSAS.S Specification for Low-alloy Steel Covered Arc Wel<iing Electrodes.
AWSA5.17 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged-arc Welding.
AWSA5.18 Specification for Carbon Steel Filler Metals for Gas-shielded Arc Welding.
AWSA5.20 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux-cored Arc Welding.
AWSA5.23 Specification for Low-alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged-arc Welding.
AWS A5.28 Specification for Low-alloy Steel Filler Metals for Gas-shielded Arc Welding.
AWS A5.29 Specification for Low-alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux-cored Arc Welding.
10.3.5 Stud Shear Connectors

Steel stud shear connectors shall conform to the requirements of AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code-Steel.
Manufacturer's certification may be accepted as sufficient evidence of conformity with the above standard.
10.4 TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION
Two basic types of construction and associated design assumptions are permissible both for Working Stress
Design method and Load Factor Design method under the conditions stated herein. Each type of construction
will govern in a specific manner the size of members and the types and strength of their connections. Both
types of construction must comply with the stability requirements of Sec 10.5.2.
6-264
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
a) Type FR, fully restrained construction, commonly designated as "rigid-frame" (continuous frame),
assumes that beam to column connections have sufficient rigidity to hold the original angles between
intersecting members virtually unchanged.
b) Type PR, partially restrained construction, assumes that the connections of beams and girders do not
have enough rigidity to hold the original angles between intersecting members virtually unChanged.
The design of all connections shall be consistent with the assumptions as to the type of construction
assumed in the analysis.
The use ofPR construction depends on the evidence of predictable proportion of full end restraint. Where
the connection restraint is ignored, i.e for "simple framing," it is assumed that under !?ravity loads the
ends of the beams and girders are connected for shear orily and are free to rotate. For simple framing"
the following requirements shall apply:
a) The connections and connected members shall be adequate to carry the gravity loads as simply
supported beams.
b) The connections and connected members shall be adequate to resist the lateral loads.
c) The connections shall have sufficient inelastic rotation capacity to avoid overload of fasteners or
welds under combined gravity and lateral loading.
When the rotational restraint of the connections is used in the design of the connected members or for
the stability of the structure as a whole, the capacity of the connection for such restraint must be
established by analytical or empirical means.
10.5 FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES
10.5.1 General
In addition to meeting the requirements of member strength and stiffness, frames and other continuous
structures shall be designed to provide the needed deformation capacity and overall frame stability.
10.5.2 Frame Stability

Stability shall be provided for the whole structure and for each compression element.
Considerations shall be given toP-Delta effects resulting from deflected shape of the structure or of individual
elements of the lateral load resisting system.
10.5.2.1 Braced Frames : In frames where lateral stability is provided by diagonal bracing, shear walls or
equivalent means, the effective length factor K for compress10n members shall be taken as unity, unless
structural analysis shows that a smaller value may be usea.
The vertical bracing system for a braced multi-storey frame shall be adequate to prevent buckling and
maintain the lateral stability of the structure, including the overturning effects of drift, under the design loads
specified in Sec 10.7.2.4 or 10.8.2.4 as the case may be.
The vertical bracing system for a multi-storey frame may be considered to function together with shear walls,
floor and roof slabs, which are properly secured to the structural frames. The columns, girders, beams and
diagonal members, when used as the vertical bracing system, may be considered to comprise a simply
connected vertical cantilever truss in the analyses for 'frame bucklin� and lateral instability. Axial
deformation of all members in the vertical bracing system shall be included m the lateral stability analysis.
Girders and beams included in the vertical bracing system of a braced multi-storey frame shall be
proportioned for axial force and moment caused by concurrent horizontal and gravity loads.
10.5.2.2 Unbraced Frames : In frames where lateral stability depends upon the bending stiffness of rigidly
connected beams and columns, the effective length factor K of compression members shall be determined by
structural analysis and shall not be less than unity.
Analysis of unbraced multi-story frames shall include the effects of frame instability and column axial
deformation under the design loaas specified in Sec 10.7.2.4 or 10.8.2.4 as the case may be.
In plastic design the axial force in the columns caused by the combination of gravity and lateral loads
specified in Sec 10.8.2.4 shall not exceed 0.75A f ·
g y
10.6 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
10.6.1 Gross Area

The gross area A of a member at any point is the sum of the products of the thickness and the gross width of
g
each element as measured normal to the axis of the member.

Part 6
Structural Design
10.6.2 Net Area

The net area An of a member is the sum of the products of the thickness and the net width of each element
computed as follows:
For a chain of holes extending across a part in any diagonar or zigzag line, the net width of the part shall be
obtained by deducting from the gross width the sum of the diameters or slot dimensions as provided in
Sec 10.9.3.2 of all holes in the chain, and adding, for each gauge space in the chain, the quantity s2!4g.
The width of a bolt or rivet hole shall be taken as 1.50 mm greater than the nominal dimension of the hole.
For angles, the gauge for holes in opposite adjacent legs shall be taken as the sum of the gauges from the back of
the angles less the thickness.
The net area of the part is obtained from that chain which gives the least net width.
In determining the net area across plug or slot welds, the weld metal shall be ignored.
10.6.3 Effective Net Area

When the load is transmitted directly to each of the cross-sectional elements by connectors, the effective net
area Ae is equal to the net area An.
When the load is transmitted by bolts or rivets through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the
member, the effective net area Ae shall be computed as:
(10.6.1)
When the load is transmitted by welds through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member,
the effective net area Ae shall be computed as:
(10.6.2)
where
U = reduction coefficient.
Unless a larger coefficient can be justified by tests or other rational means the following values of U shall be
used:
W, M or S shapes with flange widths not less than � the depth, and structural tees
cut from these shapes, with connection to the flanges. Bolted or riveted connections
shall have at least three fasteners per line in the direction of stress. U = 0.90
W, M or S shapes not meeting the above conditions, structural tees cut from all
shapes including built-up cross-sections. Bolted or riveted connections shall have at
least three fasteners per Tine in the direction of stress. U = 0.85
All members with bolted or riveted connections having only two fasteners per line in
the direction of stress. U = 0.75
When load is transmitted by transverse welds to some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of W, M or
S shapes and structural tees cut from these shapes, Ae shall be taken as the area of the directly connected
elements.
When the load is transmitted to a plate by longitudinal welds along both edges at the end of the plate, the
length of the welds shall not be less than the width of the plate. The effective net area Ae shall be computed by
Eq (10.6.2).
Unless a larger coefficient can be justified by tests or other rational means the following values of U shall be
used:
i) When1>2w u 1.00
ii) When 2w >1>1.5w u = 0.87
iii) When 1.5w >1>w u 0.75
where
1 weld length, mm
w plate wiath (distance between welds), mm
6-266
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
Bolted and riveted splice and gusset plates and other connection fittings subject to tensile force shall be
designed in accordance with the provisions of Sec 10.7.4.1, where the effective net area shall be taken as the
actual net area, except that, for the purpose of design calculations, it shall not be taken more than 85% of the
gross area.
Note:
The hot rolled shapes described as W, M or S are specified in ASTM A6/ A6M : Standard Specification for General
Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use.
10.6.4 Rotational Resistance at Points of Support

At the points of support, beams, girders and trusses shall be restrained against rotation about their
longitudinal axis.
10.6.5 Limiting Slenderness Ratios

For compression members, the slenderness ratio Kl/r shall not exceed 200. If this limit is exceeded, the
allowable stress shall not be more than the value obtained from Eq (10.7.2).
For tension members the slenderness ratio L/r should preferably not exceed 300. The above limitation shall
not be ap licable to rods in tension. Members which have been designed to perform as tension members in a
f
structura system, but experience some compression loading, need not satisfy the compression slenderness
limit.
10.6.6 Simple Spans

Beams, girders and trusses designed as simply supported spans shall have an effective length equal to the
distancebetween centres of gravity of the members to which they deliver their end reactions.
10.6.7 End Restraint

When full or partial end restraint due to continuous, semi-continuous or cantilever action is considered in the
design of beams, girders and trusses as well as the sections of the members to which they connect, these shall
be designed to carry the shears and moments introduced due to the restraint, in addition to all other forces.
The stresses developed shall not exceed at any point the unit stresses prescribed in Sec 10.7.4 through 10.7.6,
except that some nonelastic but self-limiting deformations of a part of tfte connections is permitted wnen this is
essential to avoid overstressing of fasteners.
10.7 WORKING STRESS DESIGN METHOD
10.7.1 General
This section provides the specifications for the design and construction of steel buildings using Working
Stress Design method.
10.7.2 Basis of Design

10.7.2.1 Allowable Stress :All structural members, connections and connectors shall be designed so that the
stresses due to the service loads and their combinations stipulated in Sec 10.7.2.4 do not exceed the allowable
stresses specified in Sec 10.7.4 through 10.7.11 and Sec 10.9. The allowable stresses specified in these
sections do not apply to peak stresses in regions of connections (see Sec 10.6.7) for which requirements of Sec
10.7.11 are to be sahsfied.
10.7.2.2 Stress Increase : The maximum permissible increase in the allowable stress shall be 33% when
produced by wind or seismic loading, acting alone or in combination with the service dead and live loads as
given in Sec 10.7.2.4 provided the required section shall not be less than that required for the service dead and
five loads computed without the 33% stress increase.
10.7.2.3 Structural Analysis: The stresses in members, connections and connectors shall be determined by
elastic analysis for the service loads and their combinations specified in Chapter 2, Loads.
10.7.2.4 Loads and Load Combinations :The design loads shall be the minimum service loads and their
combinations as stipulated in Chapter 2, Loads.
10.7.2.5 Design for Serviceability : The whole structure and the individual members, connections and
connectors shall be checked for serviceability according to the requirements of Sec 10.10.
10.7.3 Local Buckling

10.7.3.1 Classification of Steel Sections: Steel sections are classified as compact, noncompact and slender
sections. For a section to be compact, its flanges shall be continuously connected to the web or webs and the
width-thickness ratio of its compression elements shall not exceed the applicable limiting width-thickness
ratios given in Table 6.10.1. Steel section that do not qualify as compact are classified as noncompact when
the width-thickness ratios of one or more compression element do not exceed the values shown for
noncompact in Table 6.10.1. If the width-thickness ratio of any compression element exceeds the value, the
section is classified as a slender section.
a) For unstiffened elements which are supported along only one edge, parallel to the direction of the
compression force, the width shall be taken in accordance with (i) through (iv) below.

Part 6
Structural Design
Table 6.10.1
Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios for Compression Elements
Width-Thickness Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios

Description of Element Ratio
Compact NoncompactPJ
Flanges of I-sha ed rolled beams and
channels in flexure I)
� b/t 170/ ..JF; 250/{f;
Flanges of !-shaped welded beams in flexure
b/t
170/.,ff; 250/�Fyf jk, (S)
Outstanding legs of pairs of angles in
continuous contact; angles or plates b/t NA
250/{f;
s
pro ecting from rolled beams or columns,
�
stif eners on plate girders
An les or plates projecting trom gird e r ,
y
bui t-up columns or other compression b/t NA
members; compression flanges of plate
250/�Fyjk,
girders
Stems of tees d/t NA 333/{f;
Unstiffened elements sim y supported along
t
one edge, such as legs o smgle angle struts, b/t NA
2ooj{F;
legs of double-an e struts with separators
�
and cross or star-s aped cross-sections
Flanges of square and rectangular box and
hollow structural sections of uniform
t h i ckness subject to bending or b/t soo j..JF; 625/{f;
com h;
ession<4l; flange cover plates and
diap agm plates between lines of fasteners
or welds
Unsupported w idth of cover plates
perforated with a succession of access b/t NA
holes<2l
832/{f;
All other uniformly compressed stiffened b(t
-
elements, i.e. supported along two edges h/tru NA
665/{f;
-
d/t 1680/{f;
Webs in flexural compression<1> h/tru 1995/jf;
for
fajFy <0.16
(
J
Webs in combined flexural and axial d/tru
1680 1_3.74/a
compression
{f; Fy
for -
fa/Fy >0.16
-
675/{f;
Circular hollow sections . h!tw
22752jFy
1995/jf;
--
In axial compression D/t
22752jfy
In flexure
Notes: (1) For hybrid beams, use the yield strength of the flange, Fyf instead of Fy
(2) Assumes net area of plate at widest hole
(3) For design of slender sections that exceed the noncom pact limits see Sec 10.7.5.7.
(4) See also Sec 10.7.6.5(a)
(5) k, = � if h/t > 70, otherwise kc = 1.0

(hit) .
6-268
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
i) Half the full nominal width for flanges of !-shaped members and tees.
ii) Full nominal dimensions for legs ofangles and flanges of channels and zees.
iii) Distance from the free edge to the first row of fasteners or line of welds for plates.
iv) Full nominal depth for stems of tees.
b) For stiffened elements, i.e. supported along two edges parallel to the direction of the compression force,
the width shall be taken as folfows:
·
i) Clear distance h between flanges for web of rolled, built-up or formed sections.
ii) Full nominal depth d for webs of rolled, built-up or formed sections.
iii) Distance between adjacent lines of fasteners or lines of welds (b) for flange or diaphragm plates in
built-up sections.
iv) Clear distance between webs less the inside comer radius on each side for flanges of rectangular
hollow structural sections. If the comer radius is not known, the flat width may be taken as the
total section width minus three times the thickness.
c) For tapered flanges of rolled sections, the thickness is the nominal value half-way between the free edge
and the corresponding face of the web.
10.7.4 . Design of Tension Members

This section specifies the requirements for design of prismatic members subjected to axial tension due to static
forces acting through the centroidal axis.
10.7.4.1 Allowable Stress: The allowable tensile stress of a member, except eyebars, shall not be greater
than
F1 0.6F on the gross area
�
=
F1 = 0.5 on the effective net area
10.7.4.2 Built-up Members : The longitudinal spacing of connectors between elements in continuous
contact consisting of a plate and a shape or two plates shall not exceed the following :
a) 24 times the thickness of the thinner plate, nor 300 mm for painted members or unpainted members not
subject to corrosion.
b) 14 times the thickness of the thinner plate, nor 175 mm for unpainted members of weathering steel subject
to atmospheric corrosion. .
In a tension member the longitudinal spacing of fasteners and intermittent welds connecting two or more
shapes in contact shall not exceed 600 mm Tension members composed of two or more shapes or plates
.
separated by intermittent fillers shall be connected to one another at these fillers at intervals such that the
slenderness ratio of either component between the fasteners does not exceed 300.
Either perforated cover plates or tie plates without lacing are permitted on the open sides of built-up tension
'f the distance between the lines of welds or fasteners
members. The length of tie plates shall not be less than
connecting them to the components of the member. The thickness of such tie plates shall not be less than fo o f
the distance between these lines. The longitudinal spacing of intermittent welds o r fasteners a t tie plates shall
not exceed 150 mm.
The spacing of tie plates shall be such that the slenderness ratio of any component in the· length between tie
plates shalfnot be greater than 300.
10.7.4.3 Pin Connected Members

a) Allowable Stress : The allowable stress on the net area of pin hole shall be 0.45 & . The allowable
bearing stress on the projected area of the pin shall not exceed the stresses specified in Sec 10.9.8.1.
The allowable stress on eyebars satisfying the requirements of (c) below is 0.60F on the body area.
y
b) Pin-connected Plates : The minimum net area beyond the pin hole, parallel to the axis of the member, shall
be at least 'f of the net area across the pin hole.
The distance used in calculations, transverse to the axis of pin-connected plates or any individual
element of a built-up member, from the edge of the pin hole to the edge of the member or element shall not
exceed 4 times the thickness at the pin hole. For calculation purposes, the distance from the edge of the
pin hole to the edge of the plate or to the edge of a separated element of a built-up member at the pin hole
shall not be assumed to be more than 125 times the d1ameter of the pin hole.

Part 6
Structural Design
c) Eyebars : Eyebars shall be of uniform thickness, without reinforcement at the pin holes, and have
circular heads whose periphery is connected with the pin hole. The radius of the transition between the
circular head and the eyebar body shall be at least equal to the diameter of the head.
For calculation purposes, the width of the body of an eyebar shall not be greater than 8 times its
thickness.
The thickness may be less than 12

mm provided external nuts are used to tighten pin plates and filler
plates into snug contact. For calculation purposes, the distance from the hole edge to plate edge
perpendicular to the direction of the applied load shall not be less than i nor greater than i times the
width of the eyebar body.
The pin diameter shall be at least t times the eyebar width.

The pin hole diameter shall not be more than 0.08 mm greater than the diameter of the pin.
/ 2
For steel having a yield stress greater than 480 N mm the hole diameter shall not be greater than 5 times
the plate thickriess and the width of the eyebar shall be reduced accordingly.
10.7.5 Design of Columns and Other Compression Members

These provisions cover the design of compact and noncompact sections subjected to axial compression
through the centroidal axis. The provisions also cover the design of members with slender elements, tapered
members and members subjected to combined axial compression and flexure.
10.7.5.1 Effective Length and Slenderness Ratio : The effective length factor K shall be determined in
y
In determining the slenderness ratio of an axially loaded com ression member, the length shall be taken as its
effective length Kl
and r
as the corresponding radius o gyration. For limiting slenderness ratio see
Sec 10.6.5.
10.7.5.2 Allowable Stress : On the gross section of axially loaded compression members whose cross
sections satisfy the requirements of Table 6.10.1,
when Kl/r,
the largest effective slenderness ratio of any
unbraced segment is less than C0
the allowable stress is:
[1- (Klfr2C2)2 lfy

c
Fa= 3 (10.7.1)
5 3( Klfr) - ( Klfr)
-+ --- ---
3 8C, 8Cg
where
On the gross section of axially loaded compression members, when Kl/r exceeds C,, the allowable stress is :
(10.7.2)
10.7.5.3 Flexural-torsional Buckling: Singly symmetric and unsymmetric columns, such as angles or tee
shaped columns, and doubly symmetric columns such as cruciform or built-up columns with very thin walls,
may require consideration of flexural-torsional and torsional buckling.
10.7.5.4 Built-up Members: All parts of built-up compression members and the transverse spacing of their
lines of fasteners shall satisfy the requirements of Sec 10.6.5.
Spacing and edge distance requirements for weathering steel members shall satisfy the requirements of
Sec 10.9.3.10.
At the ends of built-up compression members bearing on base plates or milled surfaces, all components in
contact with one another shall be connected by rivets or bolts spaced longitudinally not more than 4
6-270
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
diameters apart for a distance equal to 1 times the maximum width of the member, or by contifluous welds
!
having a length not less than the maximum width of the member.
The maximum longitudinal spacing of bolts, rivets or intermittent welds connecting two rolled shapes in
contact shall not be greater than 600 mm. In addition, for painted members and unpainted members not subject
to corrosion where the outside component consists of a plate, the maximum longitudinal spacing shall not
exceed:
a) 333/{F; times the thickness of the outside plate nor 300 mm when fasteners are not staggered along
adjacent gauge lines.
b) 500/..[i; times the thickness of the outside plate nor 450 mm when fasteners are staggered along adjacent
gauge lines.
Compression members composed of two or more rolled shapes separated by intermittent fillers shall be
connected at these fillers at intervals such that the slenderness ratio Kl/r of either shape, between the
fasteners, does not exceed t times the governing slenderness ratio of the built-up member. The least radius of
gyration r shall be used in computing the slenderness ratio of each component part. At least two intermediate
connectors shall be used along the length of the built-up member. All connections, including those at the ends,
shall be welded or shall utilize high strength bolts tightened to the requirements of Table 6.10.12.
Open sides of compression members built up from plates or shapes shall be provided with lacing having tie
pfates at each end and at intermediate points if the lacing is interrupted. Tie plates shall be as near the encfs as
practicable. In main members carrying calculated stress, the end tie plates snail have a length of not less than
the distance between the lines of fasteners or welds connectins tnem to the components of the member.
Intermediate tie plates shall have a length not less than half of this distance. The thickness of tie plates shall
not be less than fo- of the distance between the lines of fasteners or welds connecting them to the components
of the member. In bolted and riveted construction, the spacing in the direction of stress in tie plates shall not be
more than 6 diameters and the tie plates shall be connected to each component by at least 3 fasteners. In
welded construction, the welding on each line connecting a tie plate shall aggregate not less than f of the
length of the plate.
Lacing, including flat bars, angles, channels or other shapes employed as lacing, shall be so spaced that the
ratio 1/r of the flange included between their connections shall not exceed t times the governing ratio for the
member as a whole. Lacing shall be proportioned to resist a shearing stress normal to the axis of the member
equal to 2% of the total compressive stress in the member. The ratio l/r for lacing bars arranged in single
systems shall not exceed 140. For double lacing this ratio shall not exceed 200. Double lacing bars shall be
joined at their intersections. For lacing bars in compression the unsupported length of the lacing bar shall be
taken as the distance between fasteners or welds connecting it to the components of the built-up member for
single lacing, and 70% of that distance for double lacing. The inclination of lacing bars to tne axis of the
member shall preferably be not less than 60° for single lacing and 45° for double lacing. When the distance
between the lines of fasteners or welds in the flanges is more than 375 mm, the lacing shall preferably be
double or be made of angles.
The function of the tie plates and lacing may be performed by continuous cover plates perforated with access
holes. The unsupportei:i width of such plates at access holes, as defined in Sec 10.7.3, is assumed available to
resist axial stresses, provided that:
a) The width to thickness ratio conforms to the limitations of Sec 10.7.3;
b) The ratio of length (in direction of stress) to width of holes shall not exceed 2;
c) ·The clear distance between holes in the direction of stress shall be not less than the transverse distance
between nearest lines of connecting fasteners or welds; and
d) The periphery of the holes at all points shall have a minimum radius of 40 mm.
10.7.5.5 Pin Connected Compression Member: Pin connections of pin connected compression members
shall conform to the requirements of Sec 10.7.4.3.
10.7.5.6 Column Web Shear: Column connections shall be investigated for concentrated force introduction
10.7.5.7 Slender Compression Elements

a) Unstiffened Compression Elements : The allowable stress of unstiffened compression elements whose
width-thickness ratio exceeds the applicable noncompact value as specified in Sec 10.7.3.1 shall be

Part 6
Structural Design
subject to a reduction factor Q5•

The value of Q5
shall be determined by Eq (10.7.3)
through (10.7.8),
as
b
applicable, where is the width of the unstiffened element as defined in Sec 10.7.3.1.
When such elements
comprise the compression flange of a flexural member, the maximum allowable bending stress shall not
exceed 0.60 fyQ5nor the applicable value as provided in Sec 10.7.6.3(c).
The allowable stress of axially
loaded compression members shall be modified by the appropriate reduction factor Q, as provided in (c)
below.
For Single Angles :
When 200/{F; <b/t<407/{F;
Q5 =1.340-0.0017(bft)jf; (10.7.3)
When bft;:: 407j{F;
(10.7.4)
For angles or plates projecting from columns or other compression members, and for projecting elements of
compression flanges of beams and girders :
When 250j�Fyjkc<b/t<512j�Fyjkc
Q5 =1.293-0.0012(b/t)�Fy jkc (10.7.5)
When b/t> 512/�Fyjkc
(10.7,6)
where
4 05
kc-
- · t > 70, otherwise kc= 1.0
if h/
(h!t)0.46
For stems of tees :
When 333/{F; < bft< 462/ {F;
Q5 =1.908-0.0027(bft)jf; (10.7.7)
When bft;:: 462/{F;
(10.7.8)
Unstiffened elements of tees whose proportions exceed the limits of Sec 10.7.3.1 shall conform to the limits
given in Table 6.10.2.
Table 6.10.2
Limiting Proportions for Channels and Tees
Ratio of Full Flange Width to Ratio of Flange Thickness to

Shape Profile Depth Web or Stem Thickness
Built-up or rolled <0.25 <3.0
Channels <0.50 <2.0
Built-uo tees >0.50 >1.25
Rolled tees >0.50 >1.10
6-272
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
b) Stiffened Compression Elements : When the width-thickness ratio of uniformly compressed stiffened
elements (except perforated cover plates) exceeds the noncompact limit stipulated in' Sec 10.7.3.1 reduced
effective width be shall be used in computing the design properties of the section containing the element,
except that the ratio belt need not be taken as less than the applicable value permitted in Sec 10.7.3.1.
i) For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness:
(10.7.9)
ii) For other uniformly compressed elements:
(10.7.10)
Where
be reduced width, mm
f computed compressive stress (axial plus bending stresses) in the stiffened elements, based
on the design properties as specified herein, N/rnm2.1f unstiffened elements are included
in the total cross section, f for the stiffened element must be such that the maximum
compressive stress in the unstiffened element does not exceed F Q5 or FbQ51 as applicable.
a
When the allowable stresses are increased due to wind or seismic loading in accordance with the
provisions of Sec 10.7.2.2 the effective width be shall be determined on the basis of 0.75 times the
stress caused by wind or seismic loading acting alone or in combination with the design dead and
live loading.
iii) For axially loaded circular sections:
Members with diameter to thickness ratios D/t greater than 22752jfy' but having a diameter to
thickness ratio of less than 89630JFy, shall not exceed the smaller value determined by
Sec 10.7.5.2 nor
5
F 4 64 +0. 0FY (10.7.11)
a 4
=
Djt
c) Design Properties : Properties of sections shall be determined using the full cross-section, except as
follows:
In computing the moment of inertia and section modulus of flexural members, the effective width of
uniforrrily compressed stiffened elements, as determined in (b) above, shall be used in determining effective
cross-sectionaf properties.
_
For stiffened elements of the cross-section
effective area
Q (10.7.12)
a - actual area
For unstiffened elements of the cross-section, Q5 is to be determined according to (a) above.
For axially loaded compression members the gross cross-sectional area and the radius of gyration r
shall be computed on the basis of the actual cross-section.
The allowable stress for axially loaded compression members containing unstiffened or stiffened
elements shall not exceed
Q 1_[(Klfrf
2Cc'2
Fy ]
F ---�------� (10.7.13)
a 3(Klfr) (Klfr)3
�
-5 + ------
3 BC� 8C�3
-----

Part 6
Structural Design
when Kl/r is less than

.
C�, where
(10.7.14)
and Q is to be determined as follows :
i) Cross-sections composed entirely of unstiffened elements, Q = Q5

ii) Cross-sections composed entirely of stiffened elements, Q = Qa
iii) Cross-sections composed of both stiffened and unstiffened elements, Q = Q5Qa
When Kl/r exceeds C� :
Fa-
_ 12n2E (10.7.15)
23(Klfrl
d) Combined Axial and Flexural Stress : In applying the .erovisions of Sec 10.7.8 to members subject to
combined axial and flexural stress and containing stiffened elements whose width-thickness ratio
exceeds the applicable noncompact limit given in Sec 10.7.3.1, the stresses Fa, fbx and !by shall be
calculated on the basis of the section properties as provided in (c) above, as aJ? plicable. The allowable
bending stress Fb for members containing unstiffened elements whose width-thic1cness ratio exceeds the
noncompact limit given in Sec 10.7.3.1 shall be the smaller of 0.60F yQ5 or the value provided in Sec
10.7.6.3(c). The termfaf0.60fyin Eq (10.7.59) and (10.7.48) shall be replaced byfaf0.60FyQ·
10.7.6 Design of Beams and Other Flexural Members

This section covers the design of singly or doubly symmetric beams including hybrid beams and girders loaded
f
in the lane of symmetry. It also applies to channels loaded in a plane passing through the shear centre
paralle to the web or restrained agamst twisting at load points and points of support.
10.7.6.1 Proportioning of Beams and Girders :Rolled or welded shapes, plate girders and cover plated
beams shall be proportioned by the moment of inertia of the gross section. No deduction shall be made for shop
or field bolt or rivet holes in either flange provided that
(10.7.16)
where Afg and Afn are calculated in accordance with the provisions of Sec 10.6.1 and 10.6.2.
When
(10.7.17)
the member flexural properties shall be based on an effective tension flange area Afe' where
(10.7.18)
Hybrid girders may be proportioned by the moment of inertia of their gross section, subject to the applicable
provisions in Sec 10.7.7.1, provided they are not required to resist an axial force greater than 0.15f y times
the area of the gross section, where F is the yield stress of the flange material. For hybrid girders, the flanges
y
at any given section shall have the same cross-sectional area and be of the same grade of steel.
Flanges of welded beams or girders may be varied in thickness or width by splicing a series of plates or by the
use of cover plates.
The total cross-sectional area of cover plates of bolted or riveted girders shall not exceed 70% of the total
flange area.
High strength bolts, rivets or welds connecting flange to web, or cover plate to flange shall be designed to
resist the total horizontal shear resulting from the bending forces on the girder. The longitudinal distribution
of these bolts, rivets or intermittent welds shall be in proportion to the mtensity of the shear. However, the
6-274
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
longitudinal spacing of the connector shall not exceed the maximum spacing permitted for tension or
compression members in Sec 10.7.4.2 or 10.7.5.4 respectively. Bolts, rivets or welds connecting flange to web
shaH also be designed to transmit to the web any loaos applied directly to the flange, unless provision is made
.
to transmit such roads by direct bearing.
Partial length cover plates shall be extended beyond the theoretical cut·off point and the extended portion
shall be attached to tile beam or girder by high strength bolts in a slili' critical connection or by rivets or fillet
welds. The connection shall be adequate to develop the cover plate s portion of the flexural stresses in the
beam or girder at the theoretical cut-off point within the applicable allowable stresses specified in Sec
10.9.2.4 and 10.9.3.4 to develop the cover plates portion of the flexural stresses in the beam or girder at the
theoretical cutoff point.
In addition, for welded cover plates, the welds connecting the cover plate termination to the beam or girder in
'
the length a defined below, sli.all be adequate at the allowable stresses, to develop the cover plate's portion of
'
the flexural stresses in the beam or girder at the distance a from the end of the cover plate. The length a',
measured from the end of the cover plate, shall be:
a) A distance equal to the width of the cover plate when there is a continuous weld equal to or larger than
f of the plate thickness across the end of the plate and continuous welds along both edges of the cover
'
plate in the length a.
b) A distance equal to 1 f times the width of the cover plate when there is a continuous weld smaller than
f of the plate thickness across the end of the plate in the length '
a .
c) A distance equal to 2 times the width of the cover plate when there is no weld across the end of the plate,
but continuous welds along both edges of the cover plate in the length a'.
10.7.6.2 Proportioning of Crane Girders : In addition to satisfying the Rrovisions of Sec 10.7.6.1 the
flanges of beams or girders supJ:lorting cranes or other moving loads shall be proportioned to resist the
horizontal forces produced by such loads, as specified in Sec 2.3$ of Chapter 2, Loads.
f
10.7.6.3 Allowable Stresses : Strong Axis Bending of' 1-sha ed Members and Channels
a) Members with Compact Sections: For compact symmetrica sections loaded in the plane of their minor
axis, the allowable stress is
(10.7.19)
provided the flanges are connected continuously to the web or webs and the laterally unsupported length
of the compression flanges Lb shall not exceed ilie value of Lc as given by the smaller of the fo1lowing :
(10.7.20)
:R
Members (including com osite members and excluding hybrid members and members with yield points
greater than 445 N/mm ) which meet the requirements for compad sections and are continuous over
supports or rigidly framed to columns may be proportioned for -fcr ofthe negative moments produced by
gravity loading when such moments are maximum at points of support, provided that, for such members,
the maximum positive moment is increased by ro of the average negative moments. This reduction shall
not apply to moments produced by loading on cantilevers. If the negative moment is resisted by a column
rigidly framed to the beam or girder, the ro reduction is permitted in proportioning the column for the
combined axial and bending loading, provided that the stress fa due to any concurrent axial load on the
member does not exceed 0.15Fa
b) Members with Noncompact Sections : For members satisfying the requirement of (a) above except that
their flanges are noncompact (excluding built-up members and members with yield points greater tli.an 445
N/mm2), the allowable stress is
(10.7.21)

Part 6
Structural Design
For built-up members satisfying the requirements of (a) above except that their flanges are noncompact
r,
and their webs are com act or noncompact, (excluding hybrid girders and members with yield points
greater than 445 N/mm ) the allowable stress is
Fb =F
y
[ 0.79-0.00038
bf
""i/ (F;l
V
"kc (10.7.22)
where
4 05
. k, = • )0.46 if h!tw > 70, otherwise k, = 1.0
(hfttu
For members with a noncompact section but not included above, and loaded through the shear centre and
200b
braced laterally in the region of compression stress at intervals not exceeding � the allowable
'JFY
stress is
(10.7.23)
c) Members with Compact or Noncompact Sections with Unbraced Length Greater Than L, :
For flexural members with compact or noncompact sections and with unbraced lengths greater than L, as
defined in (a) above the allowable bending stress in tension is determined from Eq (10.7.23).
For such members with an axis of symmetry in, and loaded in the plane of their web, the allowable
bending stress in compression is determined as the larger value from Eq (10.7.24) or (10.7.25) and
(10.7.26) except that Eq (10.7.26) is applicable only to sections with a compression flange that is solid
and approximately rectangular in cross-section and that has an area not fess than the tension flange.
Higher values of the allowable compressive stress are permitted if justified by a more precise analysis.
Stresses shall not exceed those penrutted by Sec 10.7.7 if applicable.
For channels bent about their major axis, the allowable compressive stress is determined from
Eq (10.7.26).
When
703x103 cb � J... � 3516x103 cb

f F
y Tr
y
(10.7.24)
When
J..."2: 3516x103Cb
F
Tr y
(10.7.25)
For any value of 1/rT:
(10.7.26)
6-276
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
where
= distance between cross-sections braced against twist or lateral displacement of the

compression flange, nun. For cantilevers braced against twist only at tfte support, l may
conservatively be taken as the actual length.
2
1.75+1.05(M1/M2}+0.3(MtfM2} , but not more than 2.3, where M1 is the smaller
and M2 the larger bending moment at the ends of the unbraced length, taken about the
strong axis of the member, and where M1/M21 the ratio of end moments, is positive
when M1 and M2 have the same sign (reverse curvature bending) and negative when
they are of opposite signs (single curvature bending). When the bending moment at any
point withiri an unbraced length is larger than that at both ends ofthis length, the
value of Cb shall be taken as unity. When computing Fbx to be used in Eq (10.7.58}, Cb
may be computed by the equation given above f<>r frames subject to joint translation,
and it shall oe taken as unity for frames braced against joint translation. cb m a y
conservatively b e taken a s uni ty for cantilever beams.
For hybrid plate girders, fy in Eq (10.7.24) and (10.7.25) is the yield stress of the compression
flange. Eq (10.7.26) shall not apply to hybrid girders.
The provisions of this section do not apply toT-sections if the stem is in compression anywhere
along the unbraced length.
10.7.6.4 Allowable Stress : Weak Axis Bending of 1-Shaped Members, Solid Bars and Rectangular
Plates : Lateral bracing is not required for members loaded through the shear centre about their weak axis
nor for members of equal strength about both axes.
a) Members with Compact Sections : For doubly symmetrical 1- and H-shaped members with compact flanges
continuously connected to the web and bent about their weak axes (except members with yield points
greater than 445 N/mm2}, solid round and square bars, and solid rectangular sections bent about their
weaker axes, the allowable stress is
(10.7.27)
b) Members with Noncompact Sections : For members not meeting the requirements for compact sections and
not covered in Sec 10.7.6.5, bent about their minor axis, the alfowable stress is
(10.7.28)
Doubly symmetrical 1- and H-shape members bent about their weak axes (except members with yield
points greater than 445 N/mm2) with noncompact flanges continuously connected to the web may be
Clesigned on the basis of an allowable stress of
(10.7.29)
10.7.6.5 Allowable Stress: Bending of Box Members, Circular and Rectangular Tubes
a) Members with Compact Sections : For members bent about their strong or weak axes, members with
compact sections and flanges continuously connected to the webs, the allowable stress is
(10.7.30)
To be classified as a compact section, a box-shaped member shall have, in addition to the requirements of
Sec 10.7.3, a depth not greater than 6 times the width, a flange thickness not greater than 2 hmes the web
thickness and a laterally unsupported length Lb less than or equal t o L, given by Eq (10.7.31).
(
L, = 13445+8274
M1 )..!..
M2 f y
(10.7.31)
However, Lb need not be less than 8274 (b/Fy), where M1 is the smaller and M2 the larger bending
moment at the ends of the unbraced length, taken about the strong axis of the member, and where M 1/M 2
the ratio of end moments is positive when M1 and M2 have the same sign (reverse curvature bending)
,
and negative when they are of opposite signs (single curvature bending).
·
b) Members with Noncompact Sections: For box-type and tubular flexural members that meet the
noncompact section requirements, the allowable stress is

Part 6
Structural Design
(10.7.32)
Lateral bracing is not required for a box section whose depth is less than 6 times its width. Lateral
suppo �t requirements for box sections of large depth to Width ratios shall be determined by special
analysis.
10.7.6.6 Allowable Shear Stresses : For hftw :s; 1000/..JF;: on the overall depth times the web thickness, the
allowable shear stress is:
(10.7.33)
For hftw > 1000 /�Fy, the allowable shear stress on an area obtained by multiplying the clear distance
between the flanges by the web thickness is
(10.7.34)
where
_ 310260kv
Cv- when CviS less than O .8
2
.
Fy(hftw)
= --
500 �
hftw __.!!_
Fy
.
when Cv IS more than 0.8
5 34
kv 4.00+ · when a/his less than 1.0
(afh) 2
=
4 00
5.34 + · when a/his more than 1.0
2
=
(afh) .
For shear rupture on coped beam end connections see Sec 10.9.4.1.
Maximum h!tw limits are given in Sec 10.7.7.

An alternative design method for plate girders utilizing tension field action is given in Sec 10.7.7.
10.7.6.7 Transverse Stiffeners: Intermediate stiffeners are required when the ratio h!tw is greater than 260
and the maximum web shear stress f is greater than that permitted by Eq (10.7.34).
v
The S})acing of intermediate stiffeners, when required, shall be such that the web shear stress will not exceed
the value for F given by Eq (10.7.34) or (10.7.53), as applicable, and
v
(10.7.35)
The spacing of intermediate stiffeners shall, however, not be more than 3h.
10.7.6.8 Built-up Members : Where two or more rolled beams or channels are used side by side to form a
flexural member, they shall be connected together at intervals of not more than 1500 mm Through-bolts and
.
separators are permitted, provided that, in beams having a depth of 300 mm or more, not less than 2 bolts shall
be used at eacb separator location. When concentrated loads are carried from one beam to the other, or
distributed between the beams, diaphragms having sufficient stiffness to distribute the load shall be riveted,
bolted or welded between the beams.
10.7.6.9 Web-tapered Members

a) General Requirements: The design of tapered members shall meet the following special requirements
along with the requirements of Sec 10.7.6.3 through 10.7.6.8. .
i) It shall possess at least one axis of symmetry which shall be perpendicular to the plane of bending
if moments are present.
6-278
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
ii) The flanges shall be of equal and constant area.
iii) The depth shall vary linearly as
(10.7.36 )
where
r =
(dL -d0 )jd0 !:>the smaller of 0.268 ( L/d0 ) or 6.0
b) Allowable Tensile Stress: The allowable tensile stress of tapered tension members shall be determined
c) Allowable Compressive Stress : On the oss section of axially loaded tapered compression members, the
f
allowable compressive stress in N I mm shall not exceed the following:
When the effective slenderness ratio S is less than Cc :
( �; )Fy
1.0-
2
_,_-- - ....-'-
..;;... -:;-
Far =
3 (10.7.37)
5 3S s
-+-----
3 8Cc 8C �
When the effective slenderness ratio S exceeds Cc :
2
= 12tr E
Far 2352
(10.7.38)
where
s Kl I roy for weak axis bending and Kyl I rox for strong axis bending
Ky effective length factor for a tapered member as determined by an analysis following reliable
references
d) Allowable Flexural Stress: Tension and compression stresses on extreme fibres of tapered flexural
members, in Nlmm2, shall not exceed the following values:
(10.7.39)
unless by !:>
F Fy f3 in which case
(10.7.40)
In the above equations,
(10.7.41)
(10.7.42 )
where
h5 factor equal to 1.0+0.023y � Ld0fAf

Part 6
Structural Design
h10 = factor equal to 1.0+0.00385y � L/rT•
and B is determined as follows :
i) When the maximum moment M2 in thr ee adjacent segments of approximately equal unbraced length
is located within the central segment and M1 is the larger moment at one end of the three-segment
portion of a member:
B = 1.0+0.37 l.O+( �� ) ( ��)

+o.5or l.O+ � 1.0 (10.7.43)
ii) When the largest computed bending stress fb2 occurs at the larger of two adjacent segments of
approximately equal unbraced lengths and /bl is the computed bending stress at the smaller end of
the two-segment portion of a member:
( )
B=1.0+0.58 1+/b1 -o.7or 1+fh1
lb2 lb2
( ) �1 (10.7.44)
iii) When the largest computed bending stressfb2 occurs at the smaller end of two adjacent segments of
approximately equal unbraced length and /bl is the computed bending stress at the larger end of
( )
B=1.0+0.55 1.0+fbl +2.20y 1.0+/bl
!b2 !b2
( ) �1.0 (10.7.45 )
In the foregoing, y = ( dL- d0)fd0 is calculated for the unbraced length containing the maximum
computed bending stress.
iv) When the computed bending stress at the smaller end of a tapered member or segment thereof is
equal to zero:
1.75
B= (10.7.46)
1.0+0.25 {i
where r = ( dL- d0) I d0, calculated for the unbraced length adjacent to the point of zero bending
stress.
e) Allowable Shear : The allowable shear stress of tapered flexural members shall be in accordance with
Sec 10.7.6.6.
f) Combined Flexure and Axial Force : Tapered members and unbraced segments thereof subject to both
axial compression and bending stresses shall be proportioned to satisfy the following requirement:
(10.7.47)
and
(10.7.48 )
When lao :s; 0.15, Eq (10.7.49) is permitted in lieu of Eq (10.7.47) and (10.7.48).
Far
(10.7.49)
6-280
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
where
F'er Euler stress divided by factor of safety, N/mm2, equal to
in which lb is the actual unbraced length in the plane of bending and rbo is the corresponding radius of
gyration at its smaller end.
C'm =coefficient applied to bending term in interaction equation, given by
C'm =1.0+0.1(/ao ]+0.3(fao ]2

F' F'
er er
when the member is subject to end moments which cause single curvature bending and
approximately equal computed bending stresses at the ends, and
'
Cm
= l.0-0.9(fao J+o.6(fao J2
Fey F;r
when the computed bending stress at the smaller end of the unbraced length is equal to zero.
When Kl/r:? C, and combined stresses are checked incrementally along the length, fao may be replaced
by
fa,
and !bt may be replaced by fb, in Eq (10.7.47) and (10.7.49).
10.7.7 Design of Plate Girders

h/tur When this value
/
Plate girders shall be distinguished from beams

. on the basis of the web slenderness ratio
is greater than 1995/{F;, the provisions of this section shall apply for allowable bending stress, otherwise
Sec 10.7.6 shall be applicable.
For allowable shear stress and transverse stiffener design, the provisions of Sec 10.7.6.6 and 10.7.6.7 shall
apply, unless tension field action is utilized, in which case Sec 10.7.7.3 and 10.7.7.4 shall be applicable.
10.7.7.1 Web Slenderness Limitations : When no transverse stiffeners are provided or when transverse
stiffeners are spaced more than 1f times the distance between flanges
96550
tw-
_!!.._< (10.7.50)
�F (F /+114)
yf y
When transverse stiffeners are provided, spaced not more than 1 f times the distance between flanges
(10.7.51)
10.7.7.2 Allowable Bending Stress : When the web depth to thickness ratio exceeds 1995/{F;, the
maximum bending stress in the compression flange shall not exceed
(10.7.52)
where
Fb = applicable bending stress given in Sec 10.7.6, N/mm2

Part 6
Structural Design
R
PG
=1-0.0005
A
w
AI
(!:- ..[f; ]
t
1995
� 1.0
.
For nonhybrid girders, Re shall be taken as 1.0.
10.7.7.3 Allowable Shear Stress with Tension Field Action : Except as herein provided, the largest
average web shear, fv, N I mm2 computed for any condition of complete or partial loading, shall not exceed the
value given by Eq (10.7.34).
Alternatively, for girders other than hybrid girders, if intermediate stiffeners are provided and spaced to
satisfy the provisions of Sec 10.7.7.4 and if Cv � 1, the allowable shear including tension field action given by
Eq (10.7.53) is permitted in lieu of the value given by Eq (10.7.34).
Fv =0.346Fy Cv+
[ �
1-C v
(
1.15 1+ afh 2 )
l �0.40Fy (10.7.53)
10.7.7.4 Transverse Stiffeners : Transverse stiffeners shall meet the requirements of Sec 10.7.6.7.
In girders designed on the basis of tension field action, the spacing betWeen stiffeners at end panels, at panels
containing large holes, and at panels adjacent to panels containing large holes shall be such that fv does not
exceed the value given by Eq (10.7.34).
Bolts and rivets connecting stiffeners to the girder web shall be spaced not more than 300 mm on centres. If
intermittent filler welds are used, the clear distance between welds shall not be more than 16 times the web
thickness nor more than 250 mm .
The moment of inertia, 151 of a pair of intermediate stiffeners, or a single intermediate stiffener, with reference
to an axis in the plane of the web shall be limited as follows
(10.7.54)
The gross area (total area, when stiffeners are furnished in pairs), in mm2, of intermediate stiffeners spaced as
required for Eq (10.7.53) shall be not less than
(10.7.55)
where
D 1.0 for stiffeners furnished in pairs

1.8 for single angle stiffeners
2.4 for single plate stiffeners
When the greatest shear stress fv in a panel is less than that permitted by Eq (10.7.53) the reduction of this
gross area requirement is permitted in like proportion.
Intermediate stiffeners required by Eq (10.7.53) shall be connected for a total shear transfer, N per linear mm
of single stiffener or pair of stiffeners, not less than
6-282
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
(10.7.56)
where Fy =yield stress of web steel.
This shear transfer may be reduced in the same proportion that the largest computed shear stress fv in the
adjacent panels is less than that permitted by Eq (10.7.53). However, rivets and welds in intermediate
stiffeners which are required to transmit to the web an applied concentrated load or reaction shall be
proportioned for not less than the applied load or reaction.
Intermediate stiffeners may be stopped short of the tension flange, provided bearing is not needed to transmit a
concentrated load or reaction. The weld by which intermediate stiffeners are attached to the web shall be
terminated not closer than 4 times nor more than 6 times the web thickness from the nearer toe of the web to
flange weld. When sin&le stiffeners are used, they shall be attached to compression flange, if it consists of a
rectangular plate to resist any uplift tendency due to torsion in the plate. When lateral bracing is attached to
a stiffener, or a pair of stiffeners, in turn, these shall be connected to the compression flange to transmit 1% of
the total flange stress, unless the flange is composed only of angles.
10.7.7.5 Combined Shear and Tension Stress: Plate girder webs which depend upon tension field action,
as provided in Eq (10.7.53) shall be so proportioned that bending tensile stress, due to moment in the plane of
the girder web, shall not exceed 0.60Fy nor
( 0.825-0.375 �: ) F
Y
(10.7.57)
The allowable shear stress in the webs of girders having flanges and webs with yield point greater than 445
N/mm2 shall not exceed the values given by Eq (10.7.34) if the flexural stress in the flangefb exceeds 0.75Fb·
10.7.8 Combined Stresses

The design of members subject to combined stresses shall be in accordance with this section.
This section deals with doubly and singly symmetrical members only. For determination of Fa see Sec 10.7.5
and for determination of Fbx and F see Sec 10.7.6.
by
10.7.8.1 Axial Compression and Bending : Members subjected to both axial compression and bending
stresses shall be proportioned to satisfy the following requirements:
(10.7.58)
(10.7.59)
When fa/Fa .$'0.15, Eq (10.7.60) is permitted in lieu of Eq (10.7.58) and (10.7.59).
fa
+ fhx +/by � 1.0 (10.7.60)
Fa Fbx Fby
In Eq (10.7.58), (10.7.59) and (10.7.60) the subscripts x andy, combined with subscripts b, m and e, indicate
the axis of bending about which a particular stress or design property applies, and
Euler stress divided by a factor of safety, N/mm2• (In the expression for F;, lb is the actual unbraced
length in the plane of bending and r0 is the corresponding radius of gyration. K is the effective length
factor in the plane of bending.) As in the case of Fa, Fb and 0.60Fy, F;, may be increased fin accordance
with Sec 10.7.2.2.

Part 6
Structural Design
a) For compression members in frames subject to joint translation (sidesway), Cm = 0.85.
b) For rotationally restrained compression members in frames braced a�ainst joint translation and not
subject to transverse loading between their supports in the plane of bendmg,
where M1/M2 is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the ends of that portion of the member
unbraced in the plane of bending under consideration. M1/M2 is positive when the member is bent in
reverse curvature, negative when bent in single curvature.
c) For compression members in frames braced against joint translation in the plane of loading and subjected
to transverse loading between their supports, the value of Cm may be determined by an analysis.
However, in lieu of such analysis, the following values are permitted:
i) For members whose ends are restrained against rotation in the plane of bending Cm = 0.85
ii) For members whose ends are unrestrained against rotation in the plane of bending Cm = 1.0.
10.7.8.2 Axial Tension and Bending: Members subject to both axial tension and bending stresses shall be
proportioned at all points along their length to satisfy the following equation:
(10.7.61)
where /b is the computed bending tensile stress, fa is the computed axial tensile stress, Fb is the allowable
bending stress and F1 is the governing allowable tensile stress defined in Sec 10.7.4.1.
However, the computed bending compressive stress arising from an indep endent load source relative to the
axial tension, taken above, shall not exceed the applicable value required m Sec 10.7.6.
10.7.9 Design of Trusses

10.7.9.1 General: Trusses are composed of individual members connected by welds, rivets or bolts.
10.7.9.2 Purlins: The spacing of purlins shall be determined on the basis of the maximum safe span of the
roof covering. If roof covering is supported through battens and common rafters, the J'Urlins shall preferably
be located at the panel points of the truss, by varying the spacing and size of battens ana common rafters.
10.7.9.3 Design of Members

a) Compression Members : All members under compressive forces shall be designed to satisfy the
requirements of Sec 10.7.5.
b) Tension Members: All members under tensile forces shall be designed to satisfy the requirements of
Sec 10.7.4.
10.7.9.4 Joints and Connections : Joints and connections in trusses shall satisfy the requirements of
Sec 10.9. .
10.7.9.5 Deflection and Camber

a ) Deflection: Deflection due to service live load plus impact load, i f any, shall b e limited so a s not to
impair serviceability.
b) Camber: Trusses shall be provided with camber in accordance with Sec 10.10.1.
10.7.9.6 Bracing: Trusses shall be adequately braced against instability.
10.7.10 Composite Construction

This section covers the design and construction of steel beams sup porting a reinforced concrete slab so
interconnected that the beams and the slab act together to resist bendmg. Simple and continuous composite
beams with shear connectors and concrete-encased beams, constructed with or without temporary shores, are
included.
10.7.10.1 General Requirements: Composite members may either be totally encased members which depend
upon natural bond for interaction with the concrete or those with shear connectors (mechanical anchorage to
tne slab) with the steel member not necessarily encased.
A beam totally encased in concrete cast integrally with the slab may be assumed to be connected to the
concrete by natural bond, without additional anchorage, provided that:
6-284
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
a) Concrete cover over beam sides and soffit is at least 50 mm .
b) The top of the beam is at least 40 mm below the top and 50 mm above bottom of the slab.
c) Concrete encasement contains adequate mesh or other reinforcing steel throughout the whole depth and
across the soffit of the beam to prevent spalling of the concrete.
Shear connectors must be provided for composite action if the steel member is not totally encased in concrete.
The portion of the effective width of the concrete slab on each side of the beam centre line shall not exceed :
a) One-eighth of the beam span, centre to centre of supports;

b) One-ha1f the distance to the centre line of the adjacent beam; or
c) The distance from the beam centre line to the edge of the slab.
10.7.10.2 Design Assumptions

a) Encased beams shall be proportioned to support, unassisted, all dead loads applied prior to the
hard�ning of the concrete (unless these loads are supported temporarily on shoring) and, acting in
conjunction with the slab, to support all dead and live loads apphed after hardening of the concrete,
without exceeding a computed bending stress of 0.66fy , where fy is the yield stress of tlie steel beam. The
bending stress produced by loads after the concrete has hardened shall be computed on the basis of the
sectional properties of the composite section. Concrete tension stresses shall be neglected. Alternatively,
the steel oeam alone may be proportioned to resist, unassisted, the positive moment produced by all loads,
live and dead, using a bending stress equal to 0.76 Fy, in which case temporary shonng is not required.
b) When shear connectors are used in accordance with Sec 10.7.10.4, the composite section shall be
proportioned to support all of the loads without exceeding the allowable stress prescribed in
Sec 10.7.6.3(a), even when the steel section is not shored during construction. In positive moment areas,
the steel section is exempt from compact flange criteria (Sec 10.7.3) and tnere is no limit on the
unsupported length of the compression ffange. ,
Reinforcement J?arallel to the beam within the effective width of the slab, when anchored in accordance
with the provisiOns of Chapter 8, may be included in computing the properties of composite sections,
providecf shear connectors are furnished in accordance with the requirements of Sec 10.7.10.4. The
section properties of the composite section shall be computed in accordance with the elastic theory.
Concrete tension stresses shall be neglected. For stress and deflection computations, the compression area
of concrete shall be treated as an equivalent area of steel by dividing it by the modular ratio when
determining the section properties.
In cases where it is not feasible or necessary to provide adequate connectors to satisfy the horizontal
shear requirements for full composite action, the effective section modulus shall be determined as
(10.7.62)
where
vh and vh are as defined in Sec 10.7.10.4.
For composite beams constructed without temporary shoring, stresses in the steel section shall not exceed
0.90Fy. Stresses shall be computed assuming tliat the steel section alone resists all loads applied before the
concrete has reached 75% of its required strength and the effective composite section resists all loads applied
after that time.
The actual section modulus of the transformed composite section shall be used in calculating the concrete
flexural coml'ression stress and for construction without temporary shores; this stress shall oe based upon
loading apphed after the concrete has reached 75% of its required strength. The stress in the concrete shall
not exceed 0.45 f�
10.7.10.3 End Shear : The web and the end connections of the steel beam shall be designed to carry the total
reaction.
10.7.10.4 Shear Connectors : Except in the case of encased beams, as defined in Sec 10.7.10.2(a), the entire
horizontal shear at the junction of the steel beam and the concrete slab shall be assumed to be transferred by
shear connectors welded to the top flange of the beam and embedded in the concrete. For full composite action
with concrete subject to flexural compression, the total horizontal shear to be resisted between the J?Oint of
maximum positive moment and points of zero moment shall be taken as the smaller value using Eq (10.7.63)
and (10.7.64).

Part 6
Structural Design
(10.7.63)
and
(10.7.64)
In continuous composite beams where longitudinal reinforcing steel is considered to act compositely with the
steel beam in the negative moment regions, the total horizontal shear to be resisted by sbear connectors
between an interior support and each adjacent point of contraflexure shall be taken as
(10.7.65)
For full composite action, the number of connectors resisting the horizontal shear, Vh' on each side of the
point of maximum moment, shall not be less than that determined by the relationship Vhfq , where q, the
allowable shear load for one connector, is given in Table 6 .1 0.3 for flat soffit concret� slabs made with
ASTM C33 aggregates.
For partial composite action with concrete subjected to flexural compression, the horizontal shear Vh to be
used in computing Seffshall be taken as the product of q and the number of connectors furnished between the
point of maximum moment and the nearest point of zero moment.
.
The value of Vh shall not be less than, f the smaller value of Eq (10.7.63), using the maximum permitted
effective width of the concrete flange, and Eq (10.7.64). The effective moment of inertia for deflection
computations shall be determined by: ·
(10.7.66 )
The connectors required on each side of the point of maximum moment in an area of positive bending may be
uniformly distributed between that point and adjacent points of zero moment, except that N21 the number of
shear connectors required between any concentrated load in that area and the nearest point of zero moment,
shall be not less than that determined by Eq (10.7.67).
·
Table 6.10.3
Allowable Horizontal Shear Load for One Connector (q), kN<1>
Connector\.tJ Specified Compressive Strength of

Concrete (/�), N/mm2
20 25 � 27.5
12 dia x 50 hoo!<ed or hea<!e<! stud 22 24 26
16 dia x 65 hooked or headed stud 35 38 40
Notes: (1) Applicable only to concrete made with ASlM C33 aggregates.
(2) The allowable horizontal loads tabulated are also permitted for studs longer than shown.
N1 [� ] -l
max
N 2-
_ (10.7.67)
/3-1
where
Str Se
n ff
or - as app1"1cable
-
p -
Ss Ss
For a continuous beam, connectors required in the region of negative bending may be uniformly distributed
between the point of maximum moment and each point of zero moment.
Shear connectors shall have at least 25 mm of lateral concrete cover, except for connectors installed in the
ribs of formed steel decks. Unless located directly over the web, the diameter of studs shall not be greater than
6-286
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
2 ! times the thickness of the flange to which they are welded. The minimum centre to centre spacing of stud
connectors shall be 6 diameters along the longitudinal axis of the supporting composite beam and 4 diameters
transverse to the longitudinal axis of the supporting composite beam. The maximum centre to centre spacing of
stud connectors shall not exceed 8 times the total slab thickness.
10.7.10.5 Composite Beams or Girders with Formed Steel Deck: Composite construction of concrete
slabs on formed steel deck with nominal rib height not greater than 75 rnm connected to steel beams or girders
shall be designed by the applicable portions of Sec 10.7.10.1 through 10.7.10.4 with the following
modifications.
·
a) General:
i) The average width of concrete rib or haunch W r shall be not less than 50 mm, but shall not be
taken in calculations as more than the minimum clear width near the top of the steel deck. For
additional provisions see c(ii) and c(iii) below.
ii) The concrete slab shall be connected to the steel beam or girder with welded stud shear connectors
20 mm or less in diameter. Studs may be welded through tfie deck or directly to the steel member.
iii) Stud shear connectors shall extend not less than 40 mm above the top of the steel deck after
installation.
iv) The slab thickness above the steel deck shall not be less than 50 mm .
b) Deck Ribs Oriented Perpendicular to Steel Beam or Girder

i) Concrete below the top of the steel deck shall be neglected when determining section properties
and in calculating A, for Eq (10.7.63).
·
ii) The spacing of stud shear connectors along the length of a supporting beam or girder shall not
exceea 900 mm.
iii) The allowable horizontal shear load per stud connector q shall be the value stipulated in
Sec 10.7.10.4 (Table 6.10.3) multiplied by the following reduction factor:
(10.7.68)
where
Nr shall not exceed 3 in computations, although more than 3 studs may be installed,
H5 shall not exceed the value (h,. + 75) in computations, although the actual length may be greater.
iv) To resist uplift, the steel deck shall be anchored to all compositely designed steel b!?ams or girders
at a spacing not exceeding 400 mm. Such anchorage may be provided by stud connectors, a
combination of stud connectors and spot welds, or other devices specified by the engineer.
c) Deck Ribs Oriented Parallel to Beam or Girder

i) Concrete below the top of the steel deck shall be included when determining section properties and
in calculating A, for Eq (10.7.63).
·
ii) Steel deck ribs over supporting beams or girders may be split longitudinally and separated to form
a concrete haunch.
iii) When the nominal depth of steel deck is 40 mm or greater, the average width Wr of the supported
haunch or rib shall be not less than 50 mm for the first stud in transverse row plus 4 stud
diameters for each additional stud.
iv) The allowable horizontal shear load per stud connector q shall be the value stipulated in
Sec 10.7.10.4 (Table 6.10.3) except when the ratio, Wr!hr is less than 1.5, the allowable load shall
be multiplied by the following reduction factor:
(10.7.69)

Part 6
Structural Design
10.7.11 Special Design Considerations

This section provides the design considerations related to special situations such as concentrated loads,
ponding and torsion.
10.7.11.1 Webs and Flanges Under Concentrated Loads

a) Design Basis: Members with concentrated loads applied normal to one flange and symmetric to the web
shall have a flange and web proportioned to satisfY the local flange bending, web yielding strength, web
crippling and siaesway web buckling criteria o( (b) through (e) below. Members with concentrated
loads applied to both flanges shall have a web proportioned to satisfy the web yielding, web crippling
and colwnn web buckling criteria of (c), (d) and (f) oelow.
Where pairs of stiffeners are provided on opposite sides of the web, at concentrated loads, and extend at
least half the depth of the member, provision of (b) and (c) below need not apply.
For column webs subjected to high shears, see (g) below, and for bearing stiffeners, see (h) below.
b) Local Flange Bending: A pair of stiffeners shall be provided opposite the tension flange or flange plate of
the beam or girder framing into the member when
(10.7.70)
where
Pbf the computed force delivered by the flange or moment connection plate multiplied by ! , when
the computed force is due to live and dead load only, or by f, when the computed force is due
to live and dead load in conjunction with wind or earthquake forces, kN.
When the length of loading measured across the member flange is less than 0.15b, Eq (10.7.70) need not be
checked.
c) Local Web Yielding : Bearing stiffeners shall be provided in beams and welded plate girders if the
compressive stress at the web toe of the fillets resultmg from concentrated loads exceeds 0.66F ·
y
i) When the force to be resisted is a concentrated load producing tension or compression applied at
a distance from the member end that is greater than the depth orthe member,
1000R
<0.66FY (10.7.71)
tw(N +Sk)
ii) When the force to be resisted is a concentrated load at or near the end of the member,
1000R
<0.66FY (10.7.72)
tw(N +2.5k)
d) Web Crippling: Bearing stiffeners shall be provided in the webs of members under concentrated loads,
when the compressive force exceeds the following limits:
i) When the concentrated load is applied at a distance not less then d/2 from the end of the member:
� r ( � x :; r k
R 0. 177tl, 1+3 ... ·If·· (10.7.73)
ii) When the concentrated load is applied less than a distance d/2 from the end of the member:
(10.7.74)
If stiffeners are provided and extend at least one-half the web depth, Eq (10.7.73) and (10.7.74) need not
be checked.
6-288
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
e) SideswayWeb Buckling: Bearing stiffeners shall be provided in the webs of members with flanges not
restrained against relative movement by stiffeners or lateral bracin� and subjected to concentrated
compressive load, when the compressive force exceeds the following limits :
i) If the loaded flange is restrained against rotation and ( d,/tw)j(lfbt ) is less than 2.3.
R=
46.88t�[1+0.4[d,/twl3]
h
(10.7.75)
lfbt
ii) If the loaded flange is not restrained against rotation and (de ft )j(yb }
w f s less than 1.7.
R=
46.88t�[o.4[d,/tb w l3]
h
1 6
( 0 .7.7 )
lf t
Eq (10.7.75) and (10.7.76) need not be checked provided (dcftw )/(Ybf) exceeds 2.3 or 1.7, respectively,
or for webs subjected to uniformlydistributed load.
f)
compression flange when the web depth clear of fillets is greater thand,
Compression Buckling of Web : A stiffener or a pair of stiffeners shall be provided opposite the
10.76t�, ..JF; (10.7.77)

pbf
g)
in the web shall be checked for conformance with Sec 10.7. . . 66
Compression Members with Web Panels Subjected to High Shear: Members subjected to high shear stress
·
h) Stiffener Requirements for Concentrated Load: Stiffeners shall be placed in pairs at unframed ends or at
points of concentrated loads on the interior of beams, girders or columns if required by (b) through (f)
above as applicable.
If required by(b) and (c) above or Eq (10.7.78) stiffeners need not extend more than one-half the depth of
the web, except as follows:
If stiffeners are required by (d) or (f) above, the stiffeners shall be designed as axially compressed
members (columns) in accordance with the requirements of Sec 10.7.5.2 with an effective length equal to
0.75h, a cross-section composed of t wo stiffeners and a strip of the web having a width of 25 at
interior stiffeners and 12tw
at the ends of members.
tw
When the load normal to the flange is tensile, the stiffeners shall be welded to the loaded flange. When the
load normal to the flange is compressive, the stiffeners shall either bear on or be welded to the loaded
flange.
When flanges or moment connection plates for end connections of beams and girders are welded to the
flange of an 1-or.H-shape column, a pair of column web stiffeners having a combined cross-sectional area
A51 not less than that computed from Eq (10.7.78) shall be provided whenever the calculated value of A51
is positive.
(10.7.78)
Stiffeners required by the provisions of Eq
following criteria :
(10.7.78) and (b) and (f) above shall comply with the
i) The width of each stiffener plus half the thickness of the column web shall be not less than one
third the width of the flange or moment connection plate delivering the concentrated force.

Part 6
Structural Design
ii) The thickness of stiffeners shall be not less than one-half the thickness of the flange or plate
delivering the concentrated load.
iii) The weld joining stiffeners to the column web shall be sized to carry the force in the stiffener
caused by unbalanced moments on opposite sides of the column.
10.7.11.2 Ponding : The roof system shall be investigated by structural analysis to assure adequate strength
and stability under ponding conditions, unless the roof surface is provided with sufficient slope toward
points of free drainage or adequate individual drains to prevent the accumulation of rainwater.
The roof system shall be considered stable and not requiring further investigation if:
( 10.7.79)
and ( 10.7.80)
where
For trusses and steel joists, the moment of inertia 15 shall be decreased 15% when used in the above equation.
A steel deck shall be considered a secondary member when it is directly supported by the primary members.
Total bending stress due to dead loads, gravity live loads (if any) and ponding shall not exceed 0.80fy for
primary and secondary members. Stresses due to wind or seismic forces need not be included in a ponding
analysts.
10.7'.11.3 Torsion : The effects of torsion shall be considered in the design of members and the normal and
shearing stresses due to torsion shall be added to those from all other loads, with the resultants not exceeding
the allowable values.
10.8 LOAD FACTOR DESIGN METHOD
10.8.1 General
This section provides the specifications for design and construction of steel buildings using Load Factor
Design method.
10.8.2 Basis of Desi�n

10.8.2.1 Requued Strength for Factored Loads : The required strength of structural members and
connections shall be determined by structural analysis for the combinations of appropriate factored loads
stipulated in Sec 10.8.2.4.
Design by either elastic or plastic analysis is permitted except that plastic analysis is permitted only for steels
with yield stress not exceeding 450 N /mm2 and shall comply with provision of Sec 10.8.3.2, 10.5.2,
10.8.5.1(b), 10.8.6.1(a), 10.8.8.1 and 10.8.10.1.
Except for hybrid girders and members of A514 steel, beams and girders which are continuous over support
or are rigidly framed to columns by means of rivets, high strength bolts or welds may be proportioned for fo
of the maximum negative moments at the support provided that the maximum positive moment at mid-span shall
be increased byTo- of the average negative moments. This reduction is not allowed for cantilever moments. If
the negative moment is resisted by a column rigidly framed to the beam or girder, the -fo reduction may be used
in proportioning the column for the combined axial and bending loading, provided that the stress, fa due to any
concurrent axial l�ad on the member, does not exceed 0.15 Fa·
10.8.2.2 Limit States : The members shall be of such size and strength that no applicable limit state is
exceeded when the structure is designed for appropriate factored loads and their coml:iinations stipulated in
Sec 10.8.2.4.
·
Strength limit states are related to safety and maximum load carrying capacity whereas serviceability limit
states are related to performance under normal service conditions. The term "resistance" includes both
strength limit states and serviceability limit states.
6-290
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
10.8.2.3 Design for Strength : The design strength of each structural component or assemblage must equal
or exceed the required strength based on the factored design loads. The design strength ¢ Rn is calculated for
each applicable limit state as the nominal strength Rn multiplied by a resistance factor ¢. The required
strength is determined for each applicable load combination according to Sec 10.8.2.4.
Nominal strength Rn and resistance factor ¢ are given in the appropriate sections of this chapter. Additional
strength considerations are given in Sec 10.8.11.
10.8.2.4 Loads and Load Combinations : The design loads shall be the minimum factored loads and their
combinations as stipulated in Chapter 2, Loads.
10.8.2.5 Design for Serviceability : The overall structure and individual members, connections and
connectors shall be checked for serviceability according to the requirements of Sec 10.10.
10.8.3 Local Buckling .

10.8.3.1 Classification of Steel Sections : Steel sections are classified as compact, noncompact and slender
element sections. For a section to qualify as compact, its flanges must be continuously connected to the web or
webs and the width-thickness ratio of its compression elements shall not exceed the applicable limiting width
thickness ratios given in Table 6.10.4. If the width-thickness ratio of one or more compression elements
exceeds the values for compact section given in Table 6.10.4, the section shall be treated as noncompact
provided the width-thickness ratios do not exceed the value for noncompact section given in the same table. If
the width-thickness ratio of one or more coml?ression elements exceeas the values for compact but not the
values for noncompact in Table 6.10.4, the sechon is to be treated as noncompact. If the widtn-thickness ratio
of any compression element exceeds the noncompact values given in Table 6.10.4, the section is classified as a
slender section.
a) For unstiffened elements which are supported along only one edge, parallel to the direction of the
compression force, the width shall be taken as follows :
i) For flanges of !-shaped members and tees, the width b is half the full nominal width.
ii) For legs of angles and flanges of channels and zees, the width b is the full nominal dimension.
iii) For plates, the width b is the distance from the free edge to the first row of fasteners or line of
welds.
iv) For sterns of tees, dis taken as the full nominal depth.
b) For stiffened elements, i.e., supported along two edges parallel to the direction of the compression force,
the width shall be taken as follows:
i) For webs of rolled or formed sections, h is the clear distance between flanges less the fillet or
comer radius at each flange; he is twice the distance from the neutral axis to the inside face of the
compression flange less the fillet or comer radius.
ii) For webs of built-up sections, h is the distance between adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear
distance between flanges when welds are used, and he is twice the distance from the neutral axis
to the nearest line of fasteners at the compression flange or the inside face of the compression
flange when welds are used.
iii) For flange or diaphragm plates in built-up sections, the width b is the distance between adjacent
lines of fasteners or lines of welds.
iv) For flanges of rectangular hollow structural sections, the width b is the clear distance between
webs less the inside corner radius on each side. If the corner radius is not known, the flat width
may be taken as the total section width minus three times the thickness.
c) For tapered flanges of rolled sections, the thickness is the nominal value halfway between the free edge
and ilie corresponding face of the web.
10.8.3.2 Section for Plastic Analysis : Plastic analysis is permitted when flanges subjected to compression
involving hinge rotation and all webs have a width-thickness ratio less than or equal to the limiting value for
compact section from Table 6.10.4. For circular hollow sections refer to note (4) of Table 6.10.4. Plastic
analysis is subject to the limitations as outlined in Sec 10.8.2.1.
10.8.4 Design of Tension Members

This section specifies the requirements for design of prismatic members subjected to axial tension due to static
forces acting through the centroidal axis.

Part 6
Structural Design
Table 6.10.4
Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios for. Compression Elements
Width-
Description of Elements Thickness Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios
Ratio
Compact Noncomp_act
Flanges of 1-sh
and channels in
fft ed rolled beams
exure b/t 170/� (3 ) 369 j�Fy-69
170/.,p;;
Flanges of !-shaped hybrid or (3) 278
welded beams in flexure b/t
�Fyru -114
Flanges of !-shaped sections in ure
compression, plates projecting om
g
compression elements; outstanding
legs of p airs of angles i n b/t NA
25oj..[f;
continuous contact; flanges of
channels in pure compression
Flanges of square and rectangular
box and hollow structural sections
of uniform thickness subject to
bendin or com ression; flange b/t
� £
cover p ates and iaphragm plates
5oo j..[f; /�Fy-Fr (5)
625
between lines of fasteners or welds
Unsupported width ot cover
plates perforated with a succession b/t NA /� Fy -F, (5)
832
of access holes(ll
Legs of angle struts; legs of double
angle struts with separators;
unstiffened elements, i.e. supported b/t NA
200/..[f;
along one edge
Sterns of tees d/t NA 333/..[F;
All other uniformly compressed b/t
665/..[f;
stiffened elements, i.e. supported NA
along two edges
hc/tw
Webs in flexural compression\LJ
hr/tm 1680/..[F; (3) 2547 /..[f;
for
Pu!¢b Py � 0.125
(3)
[
1680
�
1-
2.75P"
¢JbP
l
y
Webs in combined flexural and for
hc/tw 2547 /..[f;
axial compression
Pu/¢JbPy >0.125
502 [ 2. 33-�
¢JbPy
)� 3
665 ( )
..[F; �
Circular hollow sections
In axial compression D!t 14272 Fy <4>

/ 22752 jfy
In flexure 14272/Fy <4> 61845jfy
Assumes net area of plate at widest hole.

(1)
Notes:
(2) For hybrid beams, use the yield strength of the flange Fyf instead of Fy.
Assumes an inelastic rotation capacity of 3.
(3) For plastic design use 8965/f .
(4) y
Fr = compressive residual stress in flange
(5)
= 70N/ mm2 for rolled shapes
= 115N/mm2 for welded sha�es.
6-292
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
10.8.4.1 Design Tensile Strength: The design tensile strength of a member l/11Pn shall be the lesser of the
value obtained using the limit states of yielding in the gross section and fracture in the net section.
a) For yielding in the gross section:

lfit=0.90
Pn =0.001FyAg (10.8.1)
b) For fracture in the net section:

lfit =0.75
Pn =0.001FuAe (10.8.2)
When members without holes are fully connected by welds, the effective net section used in Eq (10.8.2) shall
be computed using the smaller of the gross area of the member or the effective area of the welds as defined in
Sec 10.9.2. When holes are present in a welded member between end connections or at the welded connection
in the case of plug or slot welds, the net section through the holes shall be used in Eq (10.8.2).
10.8.4.2 Built-up Members : The longitudinal spacing of connectors between elements in continuous
contact consisting of a plate and a shape or two plates shall not exceed:
a) 24 times the thickness of the thinner plate or 300 mm for painted members or unpainted members not
subject to corrosion.
b) 14 times the thickness of the thinner plate or 175 mm for unpainted members of weathering steel subject to
atmospheric corrosion.
The longitudinal spacing of connectors between components should preferably limit the slenderness ratio in
any component between the connectors to 300 or less.
Either perforated cover plates or tie plates without lacing may be used on the open sides of built-up tension
members. Tie plates shall have a length not less than ! the distance between the lines of welds or fasteners
connecting them to the components of the member. The thickness of such tie plates shall not be less than str of
the distance between these lines. The longitudinal spacing of intermittent welds or fasteners at tie plates shall
not exceed 150 mm The spacing of tie plates shall oe such that the slenderness ratio of any component in the
.
length between tie plates shall not exceed 300 mm . .
10.8.4.3 Eyebars and Pin-connected Members : The design strength of eyebars shall be determined as in
Sec 10.8.4.1(a) with Ag taken as the cross-sectional area of the body.
Eyebars shall be of uniform thickness, without reinforcement at the pin holes, and have circular heads whose
periphery is concentric with the pin hole.
The radius of transition between the circular head and the eyebar body shall be not less than the head
diameter.
The width of the body of the eyebars shall not exceed eight times its thickness. The thickness can be less than
12 mm only if external nuts are provided to tighten pin plates and filler plates into snug contact. The width b
from the hole edge to the plate edge perpendicular to the direction of applied load shall be greater than ! and,
for the purpose of calculation, not more t times the eyebar body width.
The pin diameter shall not be less than i times the eyebar body width.
The pin hole diameter shall not be more than 1 mm greater than the pin diameter.
For steels having a yield stress greater than 480 N I mm2, the hole diameter shall not exceed five times the plate
thickness and the width of the eyebar body shall be reduced accordingly.
In pin-connected members the pin hole shall be located midway between the edses of the member in the
direction normal to the applied force. For pin-connected members in which the pin IS expected to provide for
relative movement between connected parts while under full load, the diameter of pin hole shall not be more
than 1 mm greater than the diameter of the pin. The width of the plate beyond the pin hole shall be not less
than the effective width on either side of the pin hole.
In pin-connected plates others than eyebars, the design strength shall be determined according to Eq (10.8.2)
and the bearing strength of the projected area of the pin sha11 be determined according to Sec 10.9.8.2. The

Part 6
Structural Design
minimum net area beyond the bearing end of the pin hole, parallel to the axis of the member, shall not be less
than 3- of the net area required for strength across the pin hole.
The design strength of a pin-connected member, ¢tPn shall be the lowest value of the following limit states.
a) Tension on the net effective area:

¢t =0.75
Pn =0.002tbef!Fu (10.8.3)
b) Shear on the effective area:

¢5/ =0.75
P =0.0006 A51Fu (10.8.4)
n
c) Bearing on the projected area of the pin :
¢ =1.0
P =0.001A bF (10.8.5)
n p y
where
2t(a+d/2),�
16, but not more than the actual distance from the edge of the hole to the edge of the part
2t+
measured in the direction normal to the applied force, rnrn
a shortest distance from edge of the pin hole to the edge of the member measured parallel to the
direction of the force, rnrn.
The comers beyond the pin hole may be cut at 45° to the axis of the member, provided the net area beyond the
pin hole, on a I' lane perpendicular to the cut, is not less than that required beyond the pin hole parallel to the
axis of the member. .
Thickness limitations on both eyebars and pin-connected plates may be waived whenever external nuts are
provided so as to tighten pin plates and filler plates into snug contact. When the plates are thus contained, the
bearing strength shall be determined according to Sec 10.9.8.2.
10.8.5 Design of Columns and Other Compression Members

This section covers the design of prismatic members subjected to axial compression through the centroidal
axis.
10.8.5.1 Effective Length and Slenderness Limitations

a) Effective Length : The effective length factor K shall be determined in accordance with
Sec 10.5.2.
b) Plastic Analysis: Plastic analysis, as limited in Sec 10.8.2.1 is permitted if the column slenderness
parameter lc defined by Eq (10.8.9) does not exceed 1.5K.
·
10.8.5.2 Design Compressive Strength

The design strength of compression members whose elements have a width-thickness ratio less than the
noncompact values of Table 6.10.4 is ¢cP , where
n
¢c =0.85
P =0.001A Fcr (10.8.6)
n g
For Ac � 1.5
(
Fer = 0.658A.� Fy ) (10.8.7)
[ ]
For lc > 1.5
0.877
Fcr = f (10.8.8)
A.c2 y
6-294
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
where
(10.8.9)
For slender sections, as classified in Sec 10.8.3.1, the design shall conform to the requirements of Sec 10.8.5.6.
10.8.5.3 Flexural Torsional Buckling : Singly symmetric and unsymmetric columns, such as angle or tee
shaped column s, and doubly symmetric columns such as cruciform or built-up columns with very thin walls,
may require consideration of the limit states of flexural-torsional and torsiona1 buckling.
The strength of compression members determined by the limit states of torsional and flexural-torsional
buckling is ¢J cpn , where
l/Jc 0.85
(10.8.10)
Q 1.0 for elements meeting the width-thickness ratios, for noncompact values from Table 6.10.4.
= Q5Q0 for elements not meeting the width-thickness ratios for noncompact values from Table 6.10.4
and determined in accordance with the provisions of Sec 10.8.5.6.
The nominal critical stress Fer is determined as follows:
a) For A.e.,jQ �as:

Fer =Q (0 . 658Q A. : )Fy (10.8.11)
b) For A.e.,jQ > 1.5 :
F er = [ e]y
0 877
. 2
;.
F (10.8.12)
where
A.e=�FyfFe (10.8.13)
The critical torsional or flexural-torsional elastic buckling stress Fe is determined as follows:

a) For doubly symmetric shapes the critical torsional elastic buckling stress is
(10.8.14)
b) For singly symmetric shapes, where y is the axis of symmetry, the critical flexural-torsional elastic
buckling stress is
.
Fe=
Fey +Fez
2H
[ 4FeyFezH l
1
-
1
-
(Fey +Fez )
2 (10.8.15)
c) For unsymmetric shapes, the critical flexural-torsional elastic buckling stress Fe is the smallest root of the
cubic equation
(Fe-Fex)(Fe-Fey )(Fe-Fez)-F;(Fe-Fey )(xofro/-F;(Fe-Fex)(Yofro/=0 (10.8.16)
In Eq (10.8.14), (10.8.15), (10.8.16) above,
(10.8.1 7)

Part 6
Structural Design
. 1- ( x��y�)
H
=
(10.8.18)
(10.8.19)
(10.8.20)
(10.8.21)
10.8.5.4 Built-up Members :-At the ends of built-up compression members bearing on base plates or milled
surfaces, all components in contact with one another shall be connected by a welcf having a length not less
1f
than the maximum width of the member or by bolts spaced longitudinally not more than four diameters apart
for a distance equal to times the maximum width of the member.
Along the length of built-up compression members between the end connections required above, longitudinal
spacing for intermittent welds, bolts or rivets shall be adequate to provide for the transfer of calculated
stress. However, where a component of a built-up compression member consists of an outside plate, except as
/{F; nor 300

provided in the next sentence, the maximum spacing shall not exceed the thickness of the thinner outside plate
times 333 mm, when intermittent welds are provided along the edges of the components or when
soof..[F;' nor 450

fasteners are provided on all gauge lines at each section. When fasteners are staggered, the maximum spacing
on each gauge line shall not exceed the thickness of the thinner outside plate times mm .
For unpainted built-up members made of weathering steel which will be exposed to atmospheric corrosion, the
14 125 175
fasteners connecting a plate and a shape or two-plate components in contact with one another shall not
exceed times the thickness of the thinnest part nor mm and the maximum edge distance shall not exceed
eight times the thickness of the thinnest part, nor mm.
Compression members composed of two or more shapes shall be connected to one another at intervals such
that the slenderness ratio L/r of either shape, between the fasteners, does not exceed the governing slenderness
ratio of the built-up members. The least radius of gyration r shall be used in computing the slenderness ratio of
each component part.
with Sec 10.8.5.2' 10.8.5.3

The design strength of built-up members composed of two or more shapes shall be determined in accordance
or subject to the following modification. If the bulking mode involves relative
deformation that produces shear forces in the connectors between individual shapes, Kl/r is replaced by
(Kl/r)m determined as follows:
a) For Snug-tight Bolted Connectors :
(10.8.22)
b) For Welded Connectors and for Fully Tightened Bolted Connectors as required for Slip-critical Joints:
with �>50:
Tj (�lt (��):+(�-50r
=
(10.8.23)
with �S50:
Tj (�lt (� )
=
1 0
(10.8.24)
6-296
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
where
= column slenderness of built-up members acting as a unit
a
larger column slenderness of individual components
modified column slenderness of built-up members
a = distance between connectors, mm
minimum radius of gyration of individual component
Open sides of compression members built up from plates or shapes shall be provided with continuous cover
J'fates perforated with a succession of access holes. The unsupported width of such plates at access holes, as
aefined in Sec 10.8.3.1 is assumed to contribute to the design strength provided that:
i) The width-thickness ratio conforms to the limitations of Sec 10.8.3.1.
ii) The ratio of length (in direction of stress) to width of hole shall not exceed 2.
iii) The clear distance between holes in the direction of stress shall not be less than the transverse distance
between nearest line of connecting fasteners or welds.
iv) The periphery of the holes at all points shall have a minimum radius of 40 mm.
The function of perforated cover plates may be performed by lacing with tie plates at each end and at
intermediate points if the lacing is interrupted. Tie plates shall be as near the ends as practicable. In main
members providing design strength, the end tie plates shall have a length of not less than tne distance between
the lines of fasteners or welds connecting them to the components of the member. Intermediate tie plates shall
have a length of not less than ! of this distance. The thickness of tie plates shall be not less than fo ot the
distance between lines of welds or fasteners connecting them to the segments of the members. In welded
construction, the welding on each line connecting a tie plate shall in aggregate be not less than ! the length of
the plate. In bolted and riveted construction, the spacing in the direction of stress in tie J'lates shall be not
more than 6 diameters and the tie plates shall be connected to each segment by at least three fasteners.
Lacing, including flat bars, angles, channels or other shapes employed as lacing, shall be so spaced that the L/r
ratio of the flange included between their connections snail not exceed the governing slenderness ratio for the
member as a whole. Lacing shall be proportioned to provide a shearing strength normal to the axis of the
member equal to 2% of the compressive design strength of the member. The L/r ratio for lacing bars arranged in
sin�le systems shall not exceed 140. For double lacing this ratio shall not exceed 200. Double lacing bars shall
be JOined at their intersections. For lacing bars in compression, L may be taken as the unsupported length of
the lacing bar between welds or fasteners connecting It to the components of the built-up member for single
lacing, and 70% of that distance for double lacing. The inclination of lacing bars to the axis of the memoer
shall preferably be not less than 60° for single lacing and 45° for double lacing. When the distance between
the lines of welds or fasteners in the flanges is more than 375 mm, the lacing shall preferably be double or be
made of angles.
10.8.5.5 Pin-Connected Compression Members : Pin-connections of !'in-connected compression members

shall conform to the requirements of Sec 10.8.4.3 except Eq (10.8.3) and (10.8.4) do not apply.
10.8.5.6 Slender Compression Elements : Axially loaded members containing elements subjected to
compression which have a width-thickness ratio in excess of the noncompact values as stipulated in
Sec 10.8.3.1 shall be designed in accordance with this section. Flexural members with slender compression
elements shall be designed in accordance with Sec 10.8.6.1(f). Rolled flexural members with proportions not
covered by Sec 10.8.6.1(f) shall be designed in accordance with this section.
a) Unstiffened Compression Elements :The design strength of unstiffened compression elements whose
width-thickness ratio exceeds the applicable value for noncomJ>act sections as stipulated in Sec 10.8.3.1
shall be subject to a reduction factor Q5• The value of Q5 shall be determined by Eq (10.8.25) through
(10.8.30) as applicable. When such elements comprise the compression flange of a flexural member, the
maximum required bending stress shall not exceed ¢bFyQ5 , where ¢b 0. 90 . The design strength of
=
axially loaded compression members shall be modified by the appropriate reduction factor Q5, as
provided in (c) below.

Part 6
Structural Design
For single angles:

When 200/..jF; bft 407/..jF;
< <
Q5 =1.340-0.0017(bft)..jf; (10.8.25)
When bft � 407/..jF;
(10.8.26)
For angles of plates projecting from col umns or other compression members, and for projecting elements of
compression flanges of girders:
When 250/..jF; bft 462/..jF;

< <
Q5 =1.415-0.00166(bft)..jf; (10.8.27)
(10.8.28)
For stems of tees:
When 333/..jF; bft 462/..jF;
< <
Q5 = 1.908-0.0027(bft)..jf; (10.8.29)
Q5 =13789oj[ Fy(bft)2 ] (10.8.30)

Unstiffened elements of tees whose proportions exceed the limits of Sec 10.8.3.1 shall conform to the limits
given in Table 6.10.2.
b) Stiffened Compression Elements :When the width-thickness ratio of uniformly compressed stiffened
elements (except perforated cover plates) exceeds the noncompact limit stipulated in Sec a 10.8.3.1
reduced effective width be
shall be used in computing the design properties of the section containing the
element.
i) For flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness:
(10.8.31)
ii) For other uniformly compressed elements :
(10.8.32)
where
be reduced width, mm
f = computed elastic compressive stress in the stiffened elements, based on the design
N/mm2•
properties as specified in (c) below, If unstiffened elements are included in the
total cross-section, f for the stiffened element must be such that the maximum
6-298
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
compressive stress in the unstiffened element does not exceed tf>cFcras defined in (c)
below, with Q Q5 and tf>c 0.85, or tf>bFyQs
= = with tf>b = 0. 90, as applicable.
iii) For axially loaded circular sections:
Members with diameter to thickness ratios D/t greater than '22752jfy, but having a diameter to
thickness ratio of less than 89630/Fy;
Q= 7584 2 (10.8.33)
Fy(Dft) +3
c) Design Properties : Properties of sections shall be determined using the full cross-section, except as
follows:
In computing the moment of inertia and elastic section modulus of flexural members, the effective width of
uniforrilly compressed stiffened elements, as detennined in (b) above, shall be used in determining effective
cross-sectionaf properties.
For unstiffened elements of the cross-section, Q5 is determined from (a) above. For stiffened elements of the
cross-section
Qa _ effective
-
area
actual area
(10.8.34)
where the effective area is equal to the s ummation of the effective areas of cross-section.
For axially loaded compression members the gross cross-sectional area and the radius of gyration r shall
be computed on the basis of the actual cross-section. However, when A.c...JQ S 1.5, the critical stress Fer
shall be detennined by
(10.8.35)
where Q is given by the following :
i) Cross-sections composed entirely of unstiffened elements, Q Q5 =
ii) Cross-sections composed entirely of stiffened elements, Q= Q4

iii) Cross-sections composed of both stiffened and unstiffened elements, Q= Q5Qa
When A.c...jQ 1.5, the critical stress Fer shall be determined by
>
(10.8.36)
10.8.6 Design of Beams and Other Flexural Members

This section specifies the requirements for the design of singly or doubly symmetric beams including hybrid
beams and girders loaded in the lane of symmetry. It also applies to channels loaded in a plane passing
f
through the shear centre paralle to the web or restrained against twisting at load points and points of
support.
10.8.6.1 Design for Flexure

a) Unbraced Length for Plastic Analysis: Plastic analysis, as limited in Sec 10.8.2,
is permitted when the
laterally unbraced length Lb of the compression flange at plastic hinge locations associated with the
failure mechanism, for a compa�:t section bent about the major axis, does not exceed Lpd' determined as
·
follows :
i) For doubly s�etric and singly symmetric !-shaped members with the compression flange larger
than the tens1on flange (including hybrid members) loaded in the plane of the web
(10.8.37)

Part 6
Structural Design
where
( M1j MP ) is positive when moments cau:-e reverse curvature.

ii) For solid rectangular bars and symmetric box beams
(10.8.38)
There is no limit on Lb for members with circular or square cross-sections nor for any beam bent
about its minor axis.
In the region of the last hinge to form, and in regions not adjacent to a plastic hinge, the flexural
design strength shall be determined as in (b) below.
b) Flexural Design Strength: The flexural design strength, determined by the limit state of lateral-torsional
buckling, is 1/J �n, where the nominal strength Mn shall be determined in accordance with the following
sections, and 1/J b = 0.90.
c) Compact Section Members with Lb S Lr

For laterally unsupported compact section members bent about the major axis:
(10.8.39)
where
2
Cb =
l.75+l.OS(M1/M2)+0.3(M1/M2J S 2.3 where M1 is the smaller and M2 the larger end moment in
the unbraced segment of the beam; M1/M2 is positive when the moments cause reverse curvature
and negative when bent in single curvature.
Cb 1.0 for unbraced cantilevers and for members where the moment within a significant portion of the
unbraced segment is greater than or equal to the larger of the segment end moments.
Lb = distance between points braced against lateral displacement of the compression flange, or between
points braced to prevent twist of the cross-section.
For 1-shaped members including hybrid sections and channels bent about their major axis:
(10.8.40)
For solid rectangular bars and box beams :
(10.8.41)
The limiting laterally unbraced length Lr and the corresponding buckling moment Mr shall be determined
as follows:
i) For 1-shaped members, doubly symmetric and singly symmetric with the compression flange larger
than or equal to the tension flange, and channels loaded in the plane of the web:
(10.8.42)
(10.8.43)
6-300
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
where
(10.8.44)
Cw � 2
( )
Xz =4 (10.8.45)
ly GJ
F, = compressive residual stress in flange; 70 N/mm2 for rolled shapes, 114 N/mm2 for
welded shapes.
ii) For singly symmetric, !-shaped members with the compression flange larger than the tension flange,
use Sxc in place of Sx in Eq (10.8.43) through (10.8.45).
iii) For symmetric box sections bent about the major axis and loaded in the plane of symmetry, M, and
L, shall be
determined from Eq (10.8.43) and (10.8.46) respectively.
iv) For solid rectangular bars bent about major axis:
0 .393ry {JA
L' =---"--- (10.8.46)
M,
(10.8.47)
d) Compact Section Members With Lb > L,

For laterally unsupported members with compact section members bent about the major axis:
(10.8.48)
Where Mer is the critical elastic moment, determined as follows:
i) For !-shaped members, doubly symmetric and singly symmetric with compression flange larger than
the tension flange (including hybrid members) and Channels loaded in the plane of the web:
(10.8.49)
ii) For solid rectangular bars and symmetric box sections:
0. 393Cb {JA
M cr = (10.8.50)
Lbjry
e) Tees and Double-angle Beams :The nominal strength of tees and double-angle beams loaded in the plane
of symmetry and bent about the major axis, w1th flange and web slenderness ratios less than the
corresponding noncompact values given in Table 6.10.4.
Cb 1r�EI GJ [ , fu82J
-M cr
M n- =10-{j y B+ l+B2 <M y (10.8.51)
Lb -
where
B =± 2.3(d/Lb ) � I fJ (10.8.52)
y

Part 6
Structural Design
The plus sign forB applies when the stem is in tension and the minus sign applies when the stem is in
compression.
f) Nominal Flexural Strength of Other Sections : There is no lateral-torsional buckling limit state for
circular or square shapes nor for any shape bent about its minor axis.
The nominal strength Mnof other types of cross-sections including noncompact sections or sections with
slender elements, shall be determined as follows for each limit state:
(10.8.53)
For A. <A. s; A.,:

P
For the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling:
(10.8.54)
For the limit states of flange and web local buckling:
(10.8.55)
For A> A.r:

For the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling and for flange local buckling:
-6
Mn = Mer = 10 SFcr (10.8.56)
10.8.6.2 Design for Shear : This section applies to the web (or webs in the case of multiple web members)
of singly or doubly symmetric beams, including hybrid beams, subjected to shear in the plane of symmetry, and
channels subjected to shear in the web. Where failure might occur by shear along a plane through fasteners,
refer to Sec 10 9.4. 2. For members subjected to high shear from concentrated loads, refer to Sec 10.8.1l.l(g).
.
a) Web Area Determination : The web area A shall be taken as the overall depth d times the web
w
thickness t
w
·
b) Design Shear Strength : The design shear strength of webs is tPv Vn, where ¢v = 0.90 and the nominal
shear s trength Vnis determined as follows :
For .!!_s;490�kjFytu
tw
(10.8.57)
(10.8.58)
(10.8.59)
6-302
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
The web plate buckling coefficient k is given by
5
k=5+-- (10.8.60)
(a/h)2
Except that k shall taken as 5 if a/h exceeds 3.0 or [ 260/(hftw)t. When stiffeners are not required, k = 5.
Maximum hftw limits are given below:

a
For
h�1.5
5250
(10.8.61)
.JF;
For �> 1.5
h
96525
(10.8.62)
In unstiffened girders hftw must be less than 260.
10.8.6.3 Transverse Stiffeners : Transverse stiffeners are not required when hftw �1100/� Fyw , or when
the required shear V"' as determined by structural analysis for the factored loads, is less than or equal to
tPv Vn for k=5 given in Sec 10.8.6.2. Transverse stiffeners used to develop the web design shear strength as
provided in Sec 10.8.6.2 shall have a moment of inertia about an axis in the web centre for stiffener pairs or
about the face in contact with the web plate for single stiffeners, which shall not be less than (at�j).
where
·=__3:2_-2�0.5 (10.8.63)
1 (afh)2
Intermediate stiffeners may be stopped short of the tension flange, provided bearing is not needed to transmit a
concentrated load or reaction. The weld by which intermediate stiffeners are attached to the web shall be
6
terminated not less than 4 times nor more than times the web thickness from the nears toe of the web to flange
weld. When single stiffeners are used, they shall be attached to the compression flange, if it consists of a
rectangular plate, to resist any uplift tendency due to torsion in the plate. When lateral bracing is attached to
a stiffener, or a pair of stiffeners, these, in turn, shall be connected to the compression flange to transmit one
per cent of the total flange stress, unless the flange is composed only of angles.
Bolts connecting stiffeners to the girder web shall be spaced not more than 300 mm on centres. If intermittent
fillet welds are used, the clear distance between welds shall not be more than 16 times the web thickness nor
more than 250 mm.
10.8.6.4 Web-Tapered Member : Design of tapered members shall satisfy the following modified
requirements along with the requirements stipulated in Sec through 10.8.6.1 10.8.6.3.
a) General Requirements
i) It shall possess at least one axis of symmetry which shall be perpendicular to the plane of bending
if moments are present.
ii) The flanges shall be of equal and constant area.
iii) The depth shall vary linearly as

Part 6
Structural Design
(10.8.64 )
where
r = (dL-d0)jd0 S the smaller of0.268 (Lfd0 ) or 6.0.

b) Design Tensile Strength : The design tensile strength of tapered members shall be determined in
accordance with the requirements of Sec 10.8.4.1.
c) Design Compressive Strength : The design compressive strength of tapered members shall be determined
in accordance with the requirements of Sec 10.8.5.2 using an effective slenderness parameter ).eff
·
computed as follows:
(10.8.65)
where
s = KL/roy for weak axis bending and KyLjr ox for strong axis bending
Q = reduction factor
= 1.0, if all elements meet the limiting noncompact width-thickness ratios of Sec 10.8.3.1
= Q5Qa, determined in accordance with Sec 10.8.5.6., if any stiffened and/or unstiffened
elements execeed the noncompact limits given in Sec 10.8.3.1.
The smallest area of the tapered member shall be used for Ag in Eq (10.8.6).
d) Design Flexural Strength: The design flexural strength of tapered flexural members for the limit state of
lateral torsional buckling is �bMn, where �b = 0.90 and the nominal strength is
(10.8.66)
(10.8.67)
unless Fby S Fy j3, in which case
Fby =B�F'ir+F�r (10.8.68)
In the above equations,
82735
F s r-
_
(10.8.69)
(hsLdafAt)
(10.8.70)
where
h5 = factor equal to 1.0+0.023y Ld0 At� /

hw factor equal to 1.0+0.00385y LfrTo �
rT o radius of gyration of a section at the smaller end, considering only the compression flange
plus ! of the compression web area, taken about an axis in the plane of the web, mm .
6-304
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
B is determined as follows:
i) When the maximum moment M2 in three adjacent segments of approximately equal unbraced length
is located within the central segment and M1 is the larger moment at one end of the three-segment
portion of a member:
(10.8.71)
ii) When the largest computed bending stressfb2 occurs at the larger end of two adjacent segments of
approximately equal unbraced length andfbl is the computed bending stress at the smaller end of
two-segment portion of a member:
B = 1.0+0.58 ( 1.0+ !bt

!b2
) (
-o.7or 1+ !
bt
!b2
) � 1.0 (10.8.72)
iii) When the largest computed bending stressfb2 occurs at the smaller end of two adjacent segments of
approximately equal unbraced length andfbl is the computed bending stress at the larger end of
B = 1.0+0.55 ( �:� )
1.0+ ( �:�)
+2.20y 1+ � 1.0 (10.8.7 3)
In the foregoing, r= (dL- d0)/d0 is calculated for the unbraced length that contains the maximum ·
computed bending stress.
iv) When the computed bending stress at the smaller end of a tapered member or segment thereof is
equal to zero:
1.75
B _
- (10.8.74)
1.0+0.25 -fY
where y = (dL -d0)jd0, calculated for the unbraced length adjacent to the point of zero bending
stress.
e) Design Shear Strength: The design shear strength of tapered flexural members shall be determined in
f) Combined Flexure and Axial Force: For tapered members with a single web taper subjected to
compression and bending about the major axis, Eq (10.8.103) through 10.8.106) apply, with the following
modifications: Pn and Pex shall be determined for the properties of the smaller end, using appropriate
effective length factors. Mnx, Mu and Mpx shall be determined for the larger end; Mnx 1.67x10-3 S�Fby
=
where S� is the elastic section modulus of the larger end, and Fby is the design flexural stress of tapered
members. Cmx is replaced by c;,, determined as follows:
i) When the member is subjected to end moments which cause single curvature bending and
approximately equal computed moments at the ends:
(10.8.75)
i i) When the computed bending moment at the smaller end of the unbraced length is equal to zero:
(10.8.76)
When the effective slenderness parameter AeJJ ;;:: 1.0 and combined stress is checked incrementally along
the length, the actual area and the actual section modulus at the section under investigation may be
used.

Part 6
Structural Design
10.8.7 Design of Plate Girders

Plate girders shall be distinguished from beams on the basis of the web slenderness ratio hcftw· When this
value is greater than 2550 /{F;j, the provisions of this section shall apply for design flexural strength,
otherwise the requirements of Sec 10.8.6.1(£) shall be applicable.
10.8.7.1 Limitations : Doubly and singly symmetrical single web nonhybrid and hybrid plate girders loaded
in the plane of the web shall be designed according to the provisions of this section provided that the
following limitations are satisfied.
a
a) For �1.5
h
( th ) =
5250
(10.8.77 )
w max {F;j
a
b) For >l.5
h
96525
(10.8.78)
In unstiffened girders h!tw must be less than 260.

For �irders covered by this section, the shear strength may be determined by the provisions of Sec 10.8.6.1 if
tens1on field action is not utilized, otherwise the requirements stipulated in Sec 10.8.7.3 shall be applicable:
10.8.7.2 Design Flexural Strength : The design flexural strength of plate girders with slender webs
(h,jtru >2550 j� ) F
yf shall be q>,Mn, where q,b = 0.90 and Mn is the lower value obtained according to the
limit states of tension flange yield and compression flange buckling.
For tension flange yield
--{;
Mn =10 SxtRPGReFyt (10.8.79)
For compression flange buckling
Mn =10--{i SxcRpqReFcr (10.8.80)
[-- )
where
he 5250
R pG =1-0.0005ar rr �1.0 (10.8.81)
wt v Fcr
Re ( )
= l.0-0.1 1.3+ar (0.81-m)�1.0 (for nonhybrid girder, Re= 1).
The critical stress Fcr to be used is dependent upon the slenderness parameters A., A. , A.r and CpG as follows :
P
(10.8.82)
(10.8.83)
6-306
. Chapter 10
Steel Structures
(10.8.84)
In the foregoing , the slenderness parameter shall be determined for both the limit state of later � ! torsional
buckling and tne limit state of flange local buckling; the slenderness parameter which results in the lowest
value ofFcr governs. .
. . .
For the limit state of lateral torsional buckling.
Lb
A. (10.8.85)
rT
790
A, =
(10.8.86)
� FYI
1985
A.,. =
(10.8.87)
�
CPG = 1.97x106 cb (10.8.88)
where
rT Radius of gyration of compression flange plus one-sixth the web, mm.
For the limit state of flange local bucking
A. = !L (10.8.89)
2tf
170
A, =
(10.8.90)
�
395
A.,. =
(10.8.91)
�
CPG = 77200 (10.8.92)
cb = 1
The limit state of flexural web local buckling is not applicable.
10.8.7.3 Design Shear Strength with Tension Field Action: The design shear strength shall be tPvVn,
where tPv = 0. 90 and Vn is determined as follows :
a) For hftw � 492�kjFyw
(10.8.93)

Part 6
Structural Design
b) For hftw>492�kjFyw
(10.8.94)
where
Cv ratio of critical web stress, according to linear bucking theory, to the shear yield stress of web
material.
Except for end panels in nonhybrid plate girders, for all panels in hybrid and web tapered plate girders and
when a/h exceeds 3.0 or [ 260/(hftw)t. In these cases, tension field action is not permitted and i
(10.8.95)
The web plate buckling coefficient k is given as
k=5+-- 5
(10.8.96)
(afh )2
except that k shall be taken as 5.0 if a/h exceeds 3.0 or [ 260/(hftw )]2. The shear coefficient Cv is determined as
follows:
For
(10.8.97)
I
�>615� k (10.8.98)
tw Fyru
For
303365k
v=
c
(hftw)2 Fyw
10.8.7.4 Transverse Stiffeners : Transverse stiffeners are not required in plate girders when
hftw � 1100/�Fyw or when the required shear Vu, as determined by structural analysis for the factored
loads, is less than or equal to 0.00061/>AwfywCv, where Cv is determined for k= 5 and rp = 0.90. Stiffeners
may be required in certain portions of a plate girder to develop the required shear or to satisfy the limitations
given Sec 10.8.7.1.
The moment of inertia /51 of a transverse stiffener about an axis in the web centre for stiffener pairs or about
the face in contact with the web plate for single stiffeners shall not be less than at�j, where
(10.8.99)
and the stiffener area A51 when designing for tension field action shall not be less than
F
yw [o.15Dhtw(1-Cv)�-18t;J�o (10.8.100)
F st
y r!>vVn
6-308
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
where
D 1.0 for stiffeners in pairs

1.8 for single angle stiffeners
2.4 for single plate stiffeners
Cv and Vn are defined in Sec 10.8.7.3, and Vu is the required shear at the location of the stiffener.
10.8.7.5 Flexure Shear Interaction : Plate girders with webs that depend on tension field action shall
satisfy flexure shear interaction criteria. When stiffeners are required and
(10.8.10 1)
the following interaction equation small be satisfied:
Mu V
+0.625 u :51.375¢ (10.8.102)
Mn Vn
where Mn is the nominal flexural strength of plate girders from Sec 10.8.7.2, ¢= 0. 90 and V n is the nominal
shear strength from Sec 10.8.7.3, except that Mu may not exceed ¢Mn (¢= 0. 90) and V u may not exceed
¢ V n (¢=0. 90) .
10.8.8 Members Under Torsion and Combined Forces
This section covers the design of prismatic members subjected to axial force and flexure about one or both
axes of symmetry, with or without torsion, and torsion only.
10.8.8.1 Symmetric Members Subjected to Bending and Axial Force

a) Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members in Flexure and Tension : The interaction of flexure and tension in
symmetric shapes shall be limited by Eq (10.8.103) and (10.8.104).
For
(10.8.103)
For
(10.8.104)
where
resistance factor for tension, 0.90

resistance factor for flexure, 0.90.
Second order effects may be considered in the determination of Mu for use in Eq (10.8.103) and (10.8.104).
b) Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members in Flexure and Compression: The interaction of flexure and
compression in symmetric shapes shall be limited by Eq (10.8.103) and (10.8.104), by substituting ¢ with
¢,, where ¢,=resistance factor for compression= 0.85.
i) Determination of Mu
In elastic design, Mu shall be determined from a second order elastic analysis using factored
loads. In plastic design, Mu shall be determined from a plastic analysis. In structures designed on
the basis of elastic first order analysis the following procedure for the determination of Mu shall
be used.

Part 6
Structural Design
(10.8.105)
where
(10.8.106)
3
P e = 10- A Fy
g IA� , where Ac is given by Eq (10.8.9) with K .$'1.0 in the plane of bending.
Cm = a coefficient whose value shall be taken as follows :
A. For restrained compression members in frames braced against joint translation and not
subjected to transverse loading between their supports in the plane of bending :
(10.8.107)
where M1/M2 is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the ends of that portion of the
member unbraced in the plane of bending under consideration. M1/M2 is positive when the
member is bent in reverse curvature, negative when bent in single curvature.
B. For compression members in frames braced against joint translation in the plane of loading
and subjected to transverse loading between their supports, the value of Cm can be determined
by rational analysis. In lieu of such analysis, the following values shall be used :
for members whose ends are restrained Cm= 0.85
for members whose ends are unrestrained em= 1.0
1
B2 = --- (10.8.108)
-� h ) -..,.-
Li_o--
....(_.,. }:HL
1 Pu
�
or
(10.8.109)
in which
}:H = sum of all storey horizontal forces producing Li0h, kN.
Pe =
3
w- A Fy
g
IA�,
where Ac
is the slenderness parameter given by Eq (10.8.9), in which
the effective length factor Kin the plane of bending shall be determined in accordance
with Sec 10.5.2.2 but shall not be less than unity.
L= storey height, mrn.
ii) Determination of Mn: In the use of Eq (10.8.103) and (10.8.104), Mnx shall be determined in
accordance with Sec 10.8.6.1. The actual value of Cb from Sec 10.8.6.1(c) shall be used, provided
that the maximum moment Mux occurs at the end of the member or at the end of an unbraced segment
of a member. When the maximum moment occurs between the ends, Mnx shall be determined with
Cb = 1.0. When Eq (10.8.105) is used for determining Mu, the maximum moment for a braced
member bent about the strong axis and laterally braced only at its ends will occur at an end
whenever the calculated value of B1 is equal to or less than unity.
10.8.8.2 Unsymmetric Members and Members Under Torsion and Combined Torsion, Flexure
and/or Axial Force : The design strength ¢fy of the member shall equal or exceed the required strength
expressed in terms of the normal stress fun or the shear stress f uv, determined by elastic analysis for the
factored loads.
6-310
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
a) For the limit state o f yielding under normal stress :

fun� 1/JFy (10.8.110)
¢=0.90
b) For the limit state of yielding under shear stress:

fuv�0.61/JFy (10.8.111)
1/>=0.90
c) For the limit state of buckling:
fun or fuv � 1/J,Fcr' as applicable (10.8.112)
where
1/Jc = 0.85 and Fer shall be determined from Eq (10.8.11) or (10.8.12) as applicable. ·
Some constrained local yielding is permitted in areas adjacent to areas which remain elastic.
10.8.8.3 Alternative. Interaction Equations for Members under Combined Stress : For biaxially
loaded 1-shaped members used in braced frames only, the following interaction equations may be used in lieu
of Eq (10.8.103) and (10.8.104).
(10.8.113)
(10.8.114)
For 0.5� b1jd�1.0:
(10.8.115)
For b1jd"?:.0.3:
p bt
1] =0.4+_!!_+- "?:. 1.0 (10.8.116)
Py d
For btld < 0.3: 1J =1.0
In the above,
[ (
Mpx =1.2Mpx 1- PufPy � Mpx )] (10.8.117)
Mpy =1.2MPY 1- PufPy [ ( )2 ]�Mpy (10.8.118)
(10.8.119)
M'ny =Mny 1-�

.., p(
'l'c n
)( 1- �
· p
ey
J (10.8.120)

Part 6
Structural Design
10.8.9 Design of Trusses

10.8.9.1 General:Trusses are composed of individual members connected by welds, rivets or bolts.
10.8.9.2 Purlin: Requirements of this section shall be in accordance with the requirements of Sec 10.7.9.2.
10.8.9.3 Design of Members

a) Compression Members : All members under compressive forces shall be designed to satisfy the
requirements of Sec 10.8.5.
b) Tension Members: All members under tensile forces shall be designed to satisfy the requirements of
Sec 10.8.4.
10.8.9.4 Joints and Connections: Design of joints and connections in trusses shall satisfy the requirements
of Sec 10.9.
10.8.9.5 Deflection and Camber

a) Deflection: Deflection due to service live load plus impact, if any, shall be limited so as not to impair
serviceability.
b) Camber: Trusses shall be provided with camber in accordance with Sec 10.10.1.
10.8.9.6 Bracing : Trusses shall be adequately braced against instability.
10.8.10 Design of Composite Members

This section specifies the requirements for composite columns made of rolled or built-up structural steel
shapes, pipe or tubing and structural concrete acting together and for steel beams supporting a reinforced
concrete s1ab so interconnected that the beams and the slab act together to resist bending. Simple and
continuous composite beams with shear connectors and concrete encased beams, constructed with or without
temporary shores, are included.
10.8.10.1 Design Assumptions

a) Force Determination: In determining forces in members and connections of a structure that includes
composite beams, consideration must be given to the effective sections at the time each increment of load is
applied.
b) Elastic Analysis : For an elastic analysis of continuous composite beams without haunched ends, it is
acceptable to assume that the stiffness of a beam is uniform throughout the beam length and may be
computed using the moment of inertia of the composite transformed section in the positive moment region.
c) Plastic Analysis : When plastic analysis is used, the strength of flexural composite members shall be
determined from plastic stress distributions as specified in Sec 10.8.10.3.
d) Plastic Stress Distribution for Positive Moment: If the slab in the positive moment region is connected to
the steel beam with shear connectors, a concrete stress of 0.85f� may be assumed uniformly distributed
throughout the effective compression zone. Concrete tensile strength shall be neglected. A uniformly
distributed steel stress of F y shall be assumed throughout the tension zone and throughout the
compression zone in the structural steel section. The net tensile force in the steel section shall be equal to
the compressive force in the concrete slab.
e) Plastic Stress Distribution for Negative Moment: If the slab in the negative moment region is connected
to the steel beam with shear connectors, a tensile stress of f rshall be assumed in all adequately
y
developed longitudinal reinforcing bars within the effective width of the concrete slab. Concrete tensile
strength shall be neglected. A uniformly distributed steel stress ofF shall be assumed throughout the
f
tension zone and throughout the compression zone in the structura steel section. The net compressive
force in the steel section shall be equal to the total tensile force in the reinforcing steel.
f) Elastic Stress Distribution: When a determination of elastic stress distribution is required, strains in
steel and concrete shall be assumed to be directly proportional to the distance from the neutral axis. The
stress shall equal strain times E or Ec· Concrete tensile strength shall be neglected. Maximum stress in the
steel shall not exceed Fy· Maximum compressive stress in the concrete shall not exceed 0 85f� . I n .
composite hybrid beams, the maximum stress in the steel flange shall not exceedFyf but the strain in the
web may exceed the yield strain and the stress shall be taken as Fyw at such locations.
g) Fully Composite Beam: Shear connectors are to be provided in sufficient numbers to develop the
maximum flexural strength of the composite beam. For elastic stress distribution it may be assumed tnat no
slip occurs ..
h) Partially Composite Beam: The shear strength of shear connectors governs the flexural sttength of the
partially composite beam. Elastic computations such as those for deflections and vibrations should
mclude the effect of slip.
6-312
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
j) Concrete Encased Beam :A beam totally encased in concrete cast integrally with the slab may be assumed
to be interconnected to the concrete by natural bond, without additional anchorage, provided that: (1)
concrete cover over beam sides and soffit is at least 50 mm; (2) the top of the beam is at least 40 mm below
the top and 50 mm above the bottom of the slab; and (3) concrete encasement contains adequate mesh or
other reinforcing steel to prevent spalling of concrete.
k) Composite Column : A steel column fabricated from rolled or built-up steel shapes and encased in
structural concrete or fabricated from steel pipe or tubing filled with structural concrete.
10.8.10.2 Compression Members

a) Limitations: To qualify as a composite column, the following limitations shall be met.
i) The cross-sectional area of the steel shape, pipe or tubing shall comprise at least 4% of the total
composite cross-section.
ii) Concrete encasement of a steel core shall be reinforced with longitudinal load carrying bars,
longitudinal bars to restrain concrete and lateral ties. Longitudinal load carrying bars shall be
continuous at framed levels; longitudinal restraining bars may be interrupted at framed levels. The
spacing of ties shall be not grater than f of the least dimension of the composite cross-section.
The cross-sectional area of the transverse and longitudinal reinforcement shall be at least 0.178
mm2 per mm of bar spacing. The encasement shall provide at least 40 mm of clear cover outside of
both transverse and longitudinal reinforcement.
iii) Concrete shall have a specified compressive strength f� of not less than 20 N I mm2 nor more than
55N/mm2•
iv) The specified minimum yield stress of structural steel and reinforcing bars used in calculating the
strength of a composite column shall not exceed 380 N/mm2• .
v) The minimum wall thickness of structural steel pipe or tubing filled with concrete shall be equal
to b �Fy j3E for each face of width b in rectangular sections and D �Fy j8E for circular sections
of outside diameter D.
b) Design Strength: The design strength of axially loaded composite columns is 1/JcPn, where 1/>, = 0 85 and
.
the nominal axial compressive strength Pn shall be determined from Eq (10.8.6) through (10.8.9) with the
following modifications :
i) gross area of steel shape, pipe or tubing, mm2 (replaces Ag)
rm = radius of gyration of the steel shape, pipe or tubing except that for steel shapes it shall
not be less than 0.3 times the overall thickness of composite cross-section in the plane of
buckling, mm (replaces r)
ii) Replace Fy with modified yield stress Fmy from Eq (10.8.121) and replace E with modified modulus
of elasticity Em from Eq (10.8.122).
F my= Fy +c1Fyr(A,jA5)+c2f�(A,jA5) (10.8.121)
Em =E+c3E,(A,jA5) (10.8.122)
where
numerical coefficients. For concrete-filled pipe and tubing c1=1.00, c2 = 0. 85 , and

c3 =0.40 . For concrete encased shapes c1= 0.70, c2 = 0.60 and c3 = 0.20.
c) Columns with Multiple Steel Shapes: If the composite cross-section includes two or more steel shapes, the
shapes must be interconnected with lacing, tie plates or batten plates to prevent buckling of individual
shapes before hardening of concrete.
d) Load Transfer : The portion of the design strength of axially loaded composite columns resisted by
concrete shall be developed by direct bearing at connections. When the supporting concrete area is
wider than the loaded area on one or more sides and otherwise restrained against lateral expansion on
the remaining sides, the maximum design strength of concrete shall be 1.7Q>cf�A8, where 1/>, = 0.60 is the
resistance factor in bearing on concrete and A8 is the loaded area.

Part 6
Structural Design
10.8.10.3 Flexural Members

a) Effective Width : The portion of the effective width of the concrete slab on each side of the beam centre
line shall not exceed:
i) One-eighth of beam span, centre to centre of supp orts;

ii) One-half the distance to the centre line of the aapcent beam; or
iii) The distance from the beam centre line to the edge of the slab.
b) Strength of Beams with Shear Connectors: The positive design flexural strength ¢bMn shall be
determined as follows:
i) For h,/lw :5:1680/{F;J

1/>iJ = 0.85; Mn shall be determined from plastic stress distribution on the composite section.
ii) For h, ftw > /{F;J

1680
¢b = 0.90; Mn shall be determined from the superposition of elastic stresses, considering the effects
of shoring.
The negative design flexural strength ¢bMn shall be determined for the steel section alone, in accordance
with the requirements of Sec 10.8.6.
Alternatively, the negative design flexural strength ¢bMn may be computed with ¢b = 0.85 and M n
determined from the plastic stress distribution o n the composite section, provided that:
i) Steel beam is an adequately braced compact section, as defined in Sec 10.8.3.1.
ii) Shear connectors connect the slab to the steel beam in the negative moment region.
iii) Slab reinforcement parallel to the steel beam, within the effective width of the slab, is properly
developed.
c) Strength of Concrete Encased Beams : The design flexural strength ¢bMnshall be computed with
¢b = 0.90 and Mn determined from the superposition of elastic stresses, considering the effects of shoring.
Alternatively, the design flexural strength ¢bMnmay be computed with ¢b = 0. 90 and Mn determined
from the plastic stress distribution on the steel section alone.
d) Strength During Construction : When temporary shores are not used during construction, the steel
section alone shall have adequate strength to support all loads applied prior to the concrete attaining
75% of its specified strength f�. The design flexural strength of the steel section shall be determined in
accordance with the requirements of Sec 10.8.6.1.
e) Formed Steel Deck

i) The design flexural strength ¢bMnof composite construction consisting of concrete slabs on
formed steel deck connected to steel beams shall be determined by the applicable portions of (b)
above with the following modifications.
This section is applicable to decks with nominal rib height not greater than 75 mm. The avera�e
width of concrete rib or haunch Wr shall be not less than 50 mm, but shall not be taken m
calculations as more than the minimum clear width near the top of the steel deck. See (iii) below
for additional restrictions.
The concrete slab shall be connected to the steel beam with welded stud shear connectors,
conforming to AWS Dl.1, 20 mm or less in diameter. Studs shall be welded either through the deck
or directly to the steel beam. Stud shear connectors, after installation, shall extend not less than 40
mrn above the top of the steel deck.
The slab thickness above the steel deck shall be not less than 50 mrn.
ii) Deck Ribs Oriented Perpendicular to Steel Beam : Concrete below the top of the steel deck shall be
neglected in determining section properties and in calculating A, for deck ribs oriented
perpendicular to the steel beams.
The spacing of stud shear connectors along the length of a supporting beam shall not exceed
800mrn.
6-314
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
The nominal strength of a stud shear connector shall be the value stipulated in Sec 10.8.10.5
multip�ied by the following reduction factor:
(10.8.123)
To resist uplift, steel deck shall be anchored to all supporting members at a spacing not to exceed
400 mm. Such anchorage may be provided by stud connectors, a combination of stud connectors
and arc spot welds or other devices specified by the designer.
iii) Deck Ribs Oriented Parallel to Steel Beam : Concrete below the top of steel deck may be included
in determining section properties and shall be included in calcu1ating Ac for Sec 10.8.10.5. Steel
deck ribs over supporting beams may be split longitudinally and separated to form a concrete
haunch.
When the nominal depth of steel deck is 40 rnm or greater, the average width Wr of the supported
haunch or rib shall be not less than 50 mm for the first stud in the transverse row plus 4 stud
diameters for each additional stud.
The nominal strength of a stud shear connector shall be the value stipulated in Sec 10.8.10.5
except that when wrfhr is less than 1.5, the value from Sec 10.8.10.5 shall be multiplied by the
following reduction factor;
(10.8.124)
f) Design Shear Strength : The design shear strength of composite beam shall be determined by the shear
strength of the steel web, in accordance with the requirements of Sec 10.8.6.2.
10.8.10.4 Combined Compression and Flexure : The interaction of axial compression and flexure in the
plane of symmetry on composite members shall be limited by Eq (10.8.103) through (10.8.109) with the
following modifications:
Mn nominal flexural strength determined from plastic stress distribution on the composite cross
section except as provided below, kNm
Pe A5Fmy /A.�, elastic buckling load, kN.

¢b resistance factor for flexure from Sec 10.8.10.3.
fPc 0.85.
Ac column slenderness parameter defined by Eq (10.8.9) as modified in Sec 10.8.10.2(b).
When the axial term in Eq (10.8.103) and (10.8.104) is less than 0.3, the nominal flexural strength Mn shall be
determined by straight line transition between the nominal flexural strength determined from the plastic
distribution on the composite cross-sections at (Pu!¢cPn )=0.3 and the flexural strength at Pu = 0 as
determined from Sec 10.8.10.3. If shear connectors are required at Pu =0, they shall be provided whenever
(Pu!¢cPn ) is less than 0.3.
10.8.10.5 Shear Connectors: This section covers the design of stud and channel shear connectors.
a) Material: Shear connectors shall be headed steel studs not less than four stud diameters in length after
installation, or hot rolled steel channels. The stud connectors shall conform to the requirements of
Sec 10.3.5. The channel connectors shall conform to the requirements of Sec 10.3.1. Shear connectors shall
be embedded in concrete slabs made with ASTM C33 aggregate.
b) Horizontal Shear Force : Except for concrete encased beams as defined in Sec 10.8.10.1, the entire
horizontal shear at the interface between the steel beam and the concrete slab shall be assumed to be
transferred by shear connectors. For composite action with concrete subject to flexural compression, the
total horizontal shear force, kN, between the point of maximum positive moment and the point of zero
moment shall be taken as the smallest of :
i) 0.85 X 10-3 f�Ac

ii) 10-3 A5 Fy
iii) I,Qn

Part 6
Structural Design
where
I, Qn =
sum of nominal strengths of shear connectors between the point of maximum positive moment
and the point of zero moment, kN.
In continuous composite beams where longitudinal reinforcing steel in the negative moment regions is
considered to act compositely with the steel beam, the total horizontal shear force between the point of
maximum negative moment and the point of zero moment shall be taken as the smaller of 10·3A,Fyr and
L,Qn;
where
A, area of adequately developed longitudinal reinforcing steel within the effective width of
the concrete slab, mm2.
minimum specified yield stress of the reinforcing steel, N I mm2.
c) Strength of Stud Shear Connectors : The nominal strength of one stud shear connector embedded in a
solid concrete slab is
(10.8.125)
For a stud shear connector embedded in a slab on a formed steel deck, see Sec 10.8.10.3 for reduction
factors given by Eq (10.8.123) and (10.8.124) as applicable. The reduction factors should be applied
only to 0.5x10-3 A5c�f�Ec term in Eq (10.8.125).
d) Strength of Channel Shear Connectors : The nominal strength of one channel shear connector embedded
in a solid concrete slab is
(10.8.126)
e) Required Number of Shear Connectors : The number of shear connectors required between the section of
maximum bending moment, positive or negative, and the adjacent section of zero moment shall be equal to
the horizontal shear force as determined from (b) above divided by the nominal strength of one shear
connector as determined from (c) or (d) above.
f) Shear Connector Placement and Spacing : Shear connectors required on each side of the point of maximum
bending moment, positive or negative, shall be distributed uniformly between that point and the adjacent
points of zero moment. However, the number of shear connectors placed between any concentrated load
and the nearest point of zero moment shall be sufficient to develop the maximum moment required at the
concentrated load point.
Except for connectors installed in the ribs of formed steel deck, shear connectors shall have at least
25 mrn of lateral concrete cover. Unless located over the web, the diameter of studs shall not be greater
than 2.5 times the thickness of the flange to which they are welded. The minimum centre to centre spacing
of stud connectors shall be 6 diameters along the longitudinal axis of the supporting composite beam and
4 diameters transverse to the longitudinal axis of the supporting composite beam, except that within the
ribs of formed steel decks the centre to centre spacing may be as small as 4 diameters in any direction. The
maximum centre to centre spacing of shear connectors shall not exceed 8 times the total slab thickness.
10.8.11 Special Design Considerations

This section provides the design consideration related to special situations such as concentrated loads,
ponding and torsion.
10.8.11.1 Webs and Flanges with Concentrated Forces

a) Design Basis: Members with concentrated loads applied normal t o one flange and symmetric t o the web
shall have a flange and web design strength sufficient to satisfy the local flange bending, web yielding,
web crippling and sidesway web buckling criteria of (b) through (e) below. Members with concentrated
loads applied to both flanges shall have a web design strength sufficient to satisfy the web yielding, web
crippling and column web buckling criteria of (c), (d) and (f) below.
Where pairs of stiffeners are provided on opposite sides of the web at concentrated loads and extend at
least half the depth of the member, (b) and (c) 5elow need not be checked.
For column webs subjected to high shears, the provisions of (g) below shall apply.
For bearing stiffeners, the provisions of (h) below shall apply.
6-316
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
b) Local Flange Bending: The flange design strength in bending due to a tensile load shall be 1/J R11, kN.
where
1/> = 0.90
(10.8.127)
If the length of loading measured across the member flange is less than 0.15b, where b is the member
flange width, Eq (10.8.127)
need not be checked.
c) Local Web Yielding: The design stre11gth of the web at the toe of the fillet under concentrated loads
shall be if> R11 , where 1/J =1 . 0 and R71 is determined as follows:
i) When the force to be resisted is a concentrated load producing tension or compression, applied at
a distance from the member end that is greater than the depth of the member,
Rn = ( 1000
Sk+N ) F yw
tw (10.8.128)
ii) When the force to be resisted is a concentrated load applied at or near the end of member,
R71 = k+N ) F
( 2.51000 yw tw (10.8.129)
In the above,
k =distance from outer face of flange to web toe of fillet, rnm.
d) Web Crippling: For unstiffened portions of webs of members under concentrated loads, the design
compressive strength shall be 1/J R11, where 1/J =0.75 and nominal strength R11 is determined as follows:
i) When the concentrated load is applied at a distance not less than d/2 from the end of the
member:
(10.8.130)
ii) When the concentrated load is applied less than a distance d/2 from the end of the member:
(10.8.131)
If stiffeners are provided and extend at least one-half the web depth, Eq (10.8.130) and (10.8.131) need
not be checked.
e) Sidesway Web Buckling: For webs of members with flanges not restrained against relative movement
by stiffeners or lateral bracing and subject to concentrated compressive loads, the design compressive
.. strength shall be 1/J R11, where if> =0.85 and the nominal strength R11 is determined as follows:
i) If the loaded flange is restrained against rotation and (de ftw )j( ljbI) is less then 2.3 :
R
.
=
83t3w[ [
d jt
1+ 0.4 __f__1£_
]3] (10.8.132)
¥b!
71 h
__
"

--- · · --- ------------- -- ----------. ----- - .
Part 6
Structural Design
ii) If the loaded flange is not restrained against rotation and (d, ftw )j(¥bt) is less than 1.7 :
Rn =
83t!
h
[ [ lfbf )3]
0·4
d, ftw
(10.8�133)
where
d, = d- 2k = web depth clear of fillets, mm.
Eq (10.8.132) and (10.8.133) need not be checked provided (dcftw )j(lfbf) exceeds 2.3 or 1.7 respectively,
or for webs subject to distributed load.
If a concentrated load is located at a point where the web flexural stress due to factored loads is below
yielding, 165 shall be used in lieu of 83 in Eq (10.8.132) and (10.8.133).
f) Compression Buckling of the Web: For unstiffened portions of webs of members under concentrated
loads to both flanges, the design compressive strength shall be f/J Rn, where
f/J =0.90
10.76t! � Fyw
R" = ---:--'---"-- (10.8.134)
d,
Rn may be exceeded provided that a transverse stiffener or pair of stiffeners is attached to the web to
satisfy Sec 10.8.6.3.
g) Compression Members with Web Panels Subjected to High Shears : For compression members
subjected to high shear stress in the web, the design web shear strength shall be f/J Rv, where f/J =0.90
and Rv is determined as follows:
(10.8.135)
ii) For Pu >0.75Pn:
(10.8.136)
h) Stiffener Requirements for Concentrated Loads: When required, stiffeners shall be placed in J'airs at
unframed ends of beams and girders. They shall be placed in pairs at points of concentrated loa on the
interior of beams, girders or column if the load exceeds the nominal strength f/J Rn as determined from
(b) through (f) above as applicable.
If the concentrated load, tension or compression exceeds the criteria for f/J Rn of (b) or (c) above
respectively, stiffeners need not be extended more than one-half the depth of the web, except as
folfows: ·
If concentrated compressive loads are applied to the members and if the load exceeds the compressive
strength of the web f/J Rn given in (d) or (f) above, the stiffener shall be designed as axially compressed
members (columns) in accordance with the requirements of Sec 10.8.5.2 with an effective length equal to
0.75h, a cross-section composed of two stiffeners and a strip of the web having a widtn of 2"5trv at
interior stiffeners and 12tw at the ends of members.
When the load normal to the flange is tensile, the stiffeners shall be welded to the loaded flange. When
the load normal to the flange is compressive, the stiffeners shall either bear on or be welded to the
loaded flange.
10.8.11.2 Ponding : The roof system shall be investigated for ponding in accordance with the provisions of
Sec 10.7.11.2.
6-318
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
10.8.11.3 Torsion : For limiting values of normal and shear stresses, due to torsion and other loading, the
provisions of Sec 10.8.8.2 shall apply. Some constrained local yielding may be permitted.
10.8.12 Seismic Design Provisions

10.8.12.1 Scope : This section specifies special seismic design provisions for the design and construction of
structural steel members and connections in buildings for which the design forces resulting from earthquake
motions have been determined on the basis of energy dissipation in the nonlinear range of response. These
special seismic requirements are to be applied in conjunction with the Load Factor Design method. The
special seismic design provisions apply only to buildings in Zone 3 and to buildings in Zone 2 having an
importance factor I greater than 1.0.
10.8.12.2 Seismic Zoning : Seismic zoning provisions shall be as stipulated in Chapter 2, Loads.
10.8.12.3 Loads and Load Combinations : The design loads shall be the minimum factored loads and their
combinations specified in Chapter 2, Loads. .
10.8.12.4 Storey Drift and Building Separations : Storey drift shall be calculated using the appropriate
effects consistent with the structural system and the method of analysis. Limits on storey drift shall be in
accordance with Sec 1.5.6, Chapter 1, General Design Requirements.
10.8.12.5 Materials : Steel used in seismic force resistin� systems shall be as listed in Sec 10.3.1. For
buildings over one storey in height, the steel used in seisrruc resisting systems described in Sec 10.8.14.7,
10.8.14.8 and 10.8.14.9 shall be limited to the following ASTM Specifications: A36, A441, ASOO (Grades B
and C), A501, A572 (Grades 42 and 50), and A588. For base plates, ASTM A283 Grade D can be used in lieu
of the other plate materials listed above.
10.8.12.6 Column Requirements

a) Columns in earthquake resisting frames shall comply with the requirements of Sec 10.8.5 and 10.8.8.
When Pu! 1/JPn > 0.5 column axial design strength shall be limited by the following requirements.
i) Axial compression loads :
(10.8.137)
Exception:
The load factor on L used to determine PL in Eq (10.8.137) shall be equal to 1.0 for garages, areas occupied as
2
places of public assembly and all areas where the live load is greater than 5.0 kN/m .
ii) Axial tension loads :
(10.�.138)
iii) The required axial strengths in Eq (10.8.137) and (10.8.138) need not exceed either of the
following: •
A. The maximum loads that can be transferred to the column, considering 1.25 times the design
strengths of the connecting beam or brace elements of the structure.
B. The limit as determined by the foundation capacity to resist overturning uplift.
b) Column Splices : Column splices shall have sufficient strength to develop the column axial loads given
in (i), (ii) and (iii) above as well as the load combinations specified in Sec 2.7.5.2 of Chapter 2, Loads.
i) In column splices using either complete or partial penetration welded joints, changes in thickness
and width of flanges and webs are permitted without providing bevelled transitions.
ii) Splices using partial penetration welded j oints shall not be within 900 mm of the beam to column
connection. Column splices that are subjected to net tension forces shall comply with the more
critical of the following:
A. The lesser design strength of 1/JwFwArv or 1/JrvFBMArv(see Sec 10.9.2.4) for partial penetration
welded joints shall be at least 150 per cent of the required strength.
B. The design strength of welds shall not be less than O.SFycAfwhere Fyc is the yield strength
of the column material and At is the flange area of the smaller column connected.

Part6
Structural Design
10.8.12.7 Requirements for Ordinary Moment Frames (OMF)

a) Design Strength : Ordinary moment frames (OMF}, where rermitted according to the provisions of this
Code, shall have the design strength to resist the load combmations specified in Sec 2.7.5.2 of Chapter 2,
Loads. The design strength of such members shall be determined using the LFD method.
b) Joint Requirements: All beam to column connections in OMF which resist earthquake forces shall meet
one of the following requirements:
i) FR (fully restrained) connections conforming with Sec 10.8.12.8(b).
ii) FR connections with design strengths of the connections meeting the reguirements of (a) above
using the load combinations 7 and 8 specified in Sec 2.7.5.2 of Chapter 2, I.:oads.
iii) Either FR or PR (partially restrained) connections are permitted provided:
A. The design strengths of the members and connections meet the requirements of (a) above.
B. The connections have been demonstrated by cyclic tests to have adequate rotation capacity
at a storey drift calculated at a horizontal load of E'.
C. The additional drift due to PR connections shall be considered in design.
FR and PR connections are described in detail in Sec 10.4.
10.8.12.8 Requirements for Special Moment Frames (SMF)

a) Scope : Special moment frames (SMF}, shall be used when required by the provisions of this Code. For
buildings in Seismic Zone 2 having an importance factor I greater than 1.0, only the requirements of (b),
(c), (g), and (h) below shall be appficable.
b) Beam to Column Joints

i) The required flexural strength Mu of each beam to column joint shall be the lesser of the
following quantities:
A. The plastic bending moment Mp of the beam.
B. The moment resulting from the panel zone nominal shear strength V n as determined using
Eq (10.8.139).
The joint need not develOJ? either of the strengths defined above if it can be shown that under an
amplified frame deformation of E' IE times that produced by load combinations 5 and 6 specified
in Sec 2.7.5.2 of Chapter 2, Loads, the design stren�th of the members at the connection are
adequate to support the vertical loads, and the requued lateral force resistance is provided by
other means.
ii) The required shear strength Vu of a beam to column joint shall be determined using the load
combination 1.2D+0.5L plus the shear resulting from Mu, as defined in (i) above, on at least one
end of the beam. The required shear strength need not exceed the shear resulting from the load
combination 7 specified in Sec 2.7.5.2 of Chapter 2, Loads.
iii) The design strength � Rn of a beam to column joint can be considered adequate to develop the
required flexural strength Mu of the beam if it conforms to the following:
A. · The beam flanges are welded to the column using complete penetration welded joints.
B. The beam web joint shall have a design shear strength � Vn greater than the required shear
Vu and conform to either:
1. Where the nominal flexural strength of the beam Mn considering only the flanges is
greater than 70 per cent of the nominal flexural strength of the entire beam section i.e.,
-6
[10 b1t d- t1 yf � 0.7 MP the web joint may be made by means of welding or slip
t( )F ],
critical high strength bolting.
2. Where a sli -critical high strength bolted joint in a beam does not meet the flexural
r
criteria in (i above the required strength of added web welding shall be at least 20 per
cent of the nominal flexural strength of the beam web. The required beam shear
strength shall be developed by further welding or by slip-critical high strength bolting.
6-320
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
iv) Alternate joint configurations:Joint configurations utilizing welds or high strength bolts, but not
conforming to (iii) above, may be used if shown by test or calculations to meet the criteria of (i)
above. Where conformance is shown by calculation, the design strength of the joint shall be 125
per cent of the design strengths of the connecting elements.
c) Panel Zone of Beam to Column Connections (Beam Web Parallel to Column Web)
i) Shear strength : The required shear strength Vu of the panel zone shall be based on the beam
bending moments determined from the load combi nations 5 and 6 specified in Sec 2.7.5.2. of
Chapter 2, Loads. Vu need not exceed that determined from 0.9'f¢bMp of the beams framing
into the column flanges at the connection. The design shear strength tf>v Vn of the panel zone
shall be determined by the following formula:
(10.8.139)
ii) Panel zone thickness:The panel zone thickness t2shall conform to the following:
(10.8.140)
For this purpose t2 shall not include any doubler plate thickness unless the doubler plate is
connected to the web with plug welds adequate to prevent local buckling of the plate.
iii) Panel zone doubler plates : Doubler plates provided to increase the design strength of the panel
zone or to reduce tne web depth-thickness ratio shall be placed close to the column web and
welded across the plate width top and bottom with a minimum fillet weld as specified in
Table (6.10.9). The doubler plates shall be fastened to the column flanges using either butt or fillet
welded joints to develop the design shear strength of the doubler plate.
d) Beam Limitations
i) Beam Flange Area : Abrupt changes in beam flange areas are not permitted within possible
plastic hinge regions.
ii) Width-thickness Ratios: Beams shall comply with the limiting width thickness ratio stipulated in
Table 6.10.5 in lieu of those in Table 6.10.4.
e) Continuity Plates : Continuity plates shall be provided if the nominal column local flange bending
strength as given by Eq (10.8.127) is less than 1.8x10-3 fybbftbf· Continuity plates shall be fastened by
welds to both the flanges and webs or doubler plates of columns.
f) Column-Beam Moment Ratio: At any beam to column connection, one of the following relationships
shall be satisfied :
Table 6.10.5
Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios for Compressivn Elements
Description of Element Width-Thickness Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios

Ratio
Flanges of !-shaped nonhybrid
sections and channels in flexure
b/t
136 /�
Flanges of !-shaped hybrid beams
in flexure
PufrPb Py �0.125
[ ]
For
Webs in combined flexural and 1365 1.54Pu

h,ftw 1_
axial compression � ¢bPy
PufrPb Py >0.125
[ ];::
For
500 665
2.33-�
.{f; ¢bPy �

Part 6
Structural Design
(10.8.141)
(10.8.142)
In Eq (10.8.142), Vn is the nominal strength of the panel zone as determined from Eq (10.8.139), db is the
average overall depth of the beams framing into the connection, and H is the average of the storey
heights above and below the connection.
These requirements need not apply in the following cases, provided that the columns conform to the
requirements of (d) above:
i) For columns with Puc < 0 .3 x 10-3 FyAg.
ii) For columns in any storey that has a total design lateral shear strength 50 per cent greater than
that of the storey above.
iii) For any column not included in the design to resist the required seismic shears, although the
column is included in the design to resist axial overturning forces.
g) Beam to Column Connection Restraint

i) Restrained Connections:
A. Column flanges at a beam to column connection require lateral support only at the level of
the top flanges of the beams when a column can be shown to remain outside of the panel
zone. This can be satisfied by one of the following conditions:
1. The ratios given by Eq (10.8.141) or (10.8.142) are greater than 1.25.
2. The column remains elastic for load combination 7 specified in Sec 2.7.5.2 of Chapter 2,
Loads.
B. When a column cannot be shown to remain elastic outside of the panel zone, the following
provisions apply:
1. The column flanges shall be laterally supported at the levels of both top and bottom
beam flanges.
2. Each column flange lateral support shall be designed for a required strength equal to 1.5
per cent of the nominal beam flange strength
( F i/t ).
3. Column flanges shall be laterally supported either directly or indirectly by means of the
column web or beam flanges.
ii) Unrestrained Connections : A column containing a beam to column connection with no lateral
support transverse to the seismic frame at the connection shall be designed using the distance
between adjacent lateral supports as the column height and conform to Sec 10.8.8.1, except that:·
A. The required column strength shall be determined from the load combination 5 specified in
Sec 2.7.5.2 of Chapter 2, where E is the least of:
1. The amplified earthquake force E'. .

2. 125 per cent of the frame design strength based on either beam or panel zone design
strengths.
B. The nominal column axial strength P11. shall be based on a pin ended column.
C. The L/r for these columns shall not exceed 60.
D. The required column moment Mu shall include that caused by the beam flange force
specified in i(B-2) above plus the ad ded P-Delta moment due to the resulting column flange
displacement.
6-322
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
h) Lateral Support of Beams : Both flanges of beams shall be laterally supported directly or indirectly.
The unbraced length between lateral supports shall not exceed 17237ryjfy .
In addition, lateral
supports shall be placed at concentrated loads where a hinge may form.
10.8.12.9 Requirements for Concentrically Braced Frames (CBF)

a) Scope : The provisions of this section apply to all braced frames except Eccentric Braced Frames (EBF)
designed in accordance with Sec 10.8.12.10.
Those members which resist seismic forces totally or
partially by shear·and flexure shall be designed in accordance with Sec 10.8.12.8.
b) Bracing Members
i) Slenderness : Bracing members shall have an Lfr � 1890/{¥; in Seismic Zone 3 except as
permitted in (e) below.
ii) Compressive Design Strength : The design strength of a bracing member in axial compression
shall be determined by 0.81{1,P n.
iii) Lateral Force Distribution: In Seismic Zone 3, the summation of the horizontal components of
lateral seismic force in tension or alternatively in compression along any line of bracing shall not
exceed 70%of the total force on that line, unless the nominal strength P n of the member in
compression is larger than the required strength P u resulting from the application of the load
combinations and7 8
specified in Sec of Chapter 2, Loads. A line of bracing, for the
2.7.5.2
purpose of this provision, is defined as a single line or parallel lines whose offset is within per 10
cent of the building dimension perpendicular to the line of bracing.
iv) Width-thickness Ratios : Width-thickness ratios of stiffened and unstiffened compression

elements in braces shall comply with Sec 10.8.3.
Braces shall be compact or noncoml?act, but not
slender members. Circular ho!Iow sections shall have an outside diameter to wall thickness ratio
not exceeding 8965/Fy. Rectangular tubes shall have the flat width to wall thickness not
exceeding 290/.,Jf;: unless the tube walls are stiffened.
v) Built-up Member Stitches: For all built-up braces, the first bolted or welded stitch on each side of
the mid-length of a built-up member shall be designed to transmit a force equal to of the 50%
nominal strength of one element to the adjacent e1ement. Not less than two stitches shall be
equally spaced about the member centre line.
c) Bracing Connections
i) Forces : The required strength of bracing joints (including beam to column joints if part of the
bracing system) shall be the least of the following:
A. The design axial tension strength of the bracing member.
B. The force in the brace resulting from the load combinations 7 and 8 specified in Sec 2.7.5.2 of
Chapter 2,Loads.
C. The maximum force that can be transferred to the brace by the system.
ii) Net Area : In bolted brace joints, the minimum ratio of effective net section area to gross section
area shall be limited by:
A fA
= 12
. P:
a
e g <f>tPn
where
a Fraction of the member force from (i) above, .that is transferred across a particular net
section.
r: Required axial strength of the brace as determined in (i) above.
tfJ1 Resistance factor for tension = 0.75.

iii) Gusset Plates
A. For braces that can buckle in the plane of the gusset plate, the gusset and other parts of the
connection shall have a design strength equal to or greater than the nominal in-plane
bending strength of the brace.
B. For braces which can buckle out-of-plane of the gusset plate, the brace shall terminate on the
gusset a minimum of two times the gusset thickri.ess from a line about which the gusset plate
can bend unrestrained by the column or beam joints. The gusset plate shall be designed to
carry the compressive design strength of the brace member without local buckling of the

Part 6
Structural Design
gusset plate. For braces designed for axial load only, the bolts or welds shall be designed to
transrrut the brace forces along the centroids of the brace elements.
d) Special Bracing Configuration Requirements

i) V Bracing .
A. The design strength of V brace members shall be at least 1.5 times the required strength
using load combinations 5 and 6 specified in Sec 2.7.5.2 of Ch�pter 2, Loads.
B. A beam intersected by V braces shall be continuous between columns.
C. A beam intersected by V braces shall be capable of supporting all tributary dead and live
loads assuming the bracing is not present.
D. The top and bottom flanges of the beam at the point of intersection of V braces shall be
designed to support a lateral force equal to 1.5 per cent of the nominal beam flange strength
( Fybftf ) .
ii) K Bracing
A. In Seismic Zone 3, K bracing shall be prohibited except for those framing systems meeting
the requirements of (e) below.
B. In Seismic Zone 2, with importance factor I greater than 1.0, K bracing shall meet the
requirements for V bracing.
e) Low Buildings: Braced frames not meeting the requirements of (b) through (d) above may be used in
buildings not over two storeys and in roof structures if load combinations 7 and 8 specified in
Sec 2.7.5.2 of Chapter 2, Loads, are used for determining the required strength of the members and
connections.
10.8.12.10 Requirements for Eccentrically Braced Frames (EBF)

a) Scope : Eccentrically braced frames shall be designed so that under earthquake loading, yielding will
occur primarily in the links. The diagonal braces, the columns, and the beam segments outside of the
links shall be designed to remain essentially elastic under the maximum forces that can be generated by
the fully yielded and strain hardened links. In EBF, plastic hinges shall not develop in columns at floor ,
beam levels up to an amplified frame displacement of E' /E times that produced by E.
b) Links
i) Links shall comply with the width-thickness ratios in Table 6.10.5.
ii) The specified minimum yield stress of steel used for links shall not exceed Fy =345 N I mm2•
iii) The web of a link shall be single thickness without doubler plate reinforcement and without
openings.
iv) The required shear strength of the link Vu shall not exceed the design shear strength of the link
�vVn defined as the lesser of �vVy or �
2000�bMpje, where V =0.6xl0-3 F ydt1u,
�b =�v =0. 9 and e = link length, except as limited by (vi) below.
v) If the required axial strength Pu in a link is less than or equal to 0.15P y, where
Py =10-3 AgFy, the effect of axial force o n the link design shear strength need not be considered.
vi) If the required axial strength Pu in a link exceeds 0.15Py , the following additional limitations
shall apply: .
A. The link design shear strength shall be the lesser of �v V ya or 2000�bMpa je ,
where
6-324
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
B. The length of the link in nun, shall not exceed:
[1.15-0.5(PujVy)(AwjAg )}600MP jVy for ( PujVy)( AwfAg):?: 0.3 and

1600MP jVy for ( PujVy)(AwfAg) < 0.3
vii) The link rotation angle is the plastic angle between the link and the beam outside of the link
when the total storey drift is E'lE times the drift determined using the specified base shear V.
Except as noted in d(iii) below, the link rotation angle shall not exceed the following values:
A. 0.09 radian for links of length 1600MP jVy or Jess, provided the fundamental period of the
EBF is equal to or greater than 1.0 second; otherwise the link rotation angle shall not exceed
0.08 radian.
B. 0.02 radian for links of length 2600MP jVy or greater.
C. Linear interpolation shall be used for links of length between 1600MP jVy and
2600MpjVy.
c) Link Stiffeners
i) Full depth web stiffeners shall be provided on both sides of the link web at the diagonal brace
ends of the link. These stiffeners shall have a combined width not less than ( bf- 2tw) and a
thickness not Jess than 0.75 lw nor 10 mm, whichever is larger, where bland lw are the link flange
width and link web thickness, respectively.
ii) Links shall be provided with intermediate web stiffeners as follows:
A. Links of lengths 1600MpjVy or Jess shall be provided with intermediate web stiffeners
spaced at intervals not exceeding (30tw-d/5) for a link rotation angle of 0.09 radian or
(52tw-d/5) for link rotation angles of 0.03 radian or less. Linear interpolation shall be used
for values between 0.03 and 0.09 radians.
B. Links of length greater than 2600MP jVy and Jess than SOOOMP jVy shall be provided with
intermediate web stiffeners placed at a distance of 1.5btfrom each end of the link.
C. Links of length between 1600MP jVy and 2600Mp jVy shall. be provided with intermediate
.
web stiffeners meeting the requirements of (A) and (B) above.
D. No intermediate web stiffeners are required in links of lengths greater than 5000MP jVy.
E. Intermediate link web stiffeners shall be full depth. For links less than 625 mm in depth,
stiffeners are required on only one side of the lin!< web. The thickness of one sided stiffeners
shall not be Jess than lw nor 10 mm, and the width shall be not less than [(bfj2)- lw ]· For
links 625 mm in depth or greater, similar intermediate stiffeners are required on both sides
of the web.
iii) Fillet welds connecting link stiffener to the link web shall have a design strength adequate to
A5
resist a force of 1Fy, where A51 equals the area of the stiffener. The design strength of fillet welds
fastening the stiffener to the flanges shall be adequate to resist a force ofA51 F yj4.

Part 6
Structural Design
d) Link to Column Connections : Where a link is connected to a column, the following additional
requirements shall apply :
i) Links connected to columns shall not exceed the length of 1600M jVy unless it can be
P
demonstrated that the link to column connection is adequate to develop the required inelastic
rotation of the link.
ii) The link flanges shall have complete penetration welded joints to the column. The connection of
the link web to the column shall be welded to develop the design axial, shear and flexural
strength of the link web.
iii) Where the link is connected to the column web, the link flanges shall have complete penetration
welded joints to connection plates and the web connection shall be welded to develop the design
axial, shear and flexural strength of the link web. The link rotation angle shall not exceed 0.015
radian for any link length.
e) Lateral Support of Link : Lateral supports shall be provided at both the top and bottom flanges of link
at the ends of the link. End lateral supports of links shall have a design strength of 4% of the link flange
nominal strength computed as Fybftf.
f) Diagonal Brace and Beam Outside of Link

i) The required axial and moment strengths of each diagonal brace and the beam outside of the link
shall be the axial forces and moments generated by L5 times the design shear strength of the link
as defined in (b) above. The nominal strengths of the diagonal brace and of the beam outside of
the link, as determined by Sec 10.8.8.1 shall exceed the required strengths as defined above.
ii) Diagonal brace to link connections shall develop the nominal strength of the brace and transfer
this force to the beam. No part of the brace to beam connection shalf extend over the link length.
If the brace resists a porbon of the link end moment as described above, the brace to beam
connection shall be designed as fully restrained (Type FR).
iii) The beam outside of the link shall be provided with sufficient lateral support to maintain the
stability of the beam under the forces generated by at least 1.5 times the design shear strength of
the link. Lateral supports shall be provided at both top and bottom flanges of the beam and shall
have a strength to resist at least 1.5 per cent of the beam flange nominal strength computed as
Fybftf.
iv) The width-thickness ratio of brace shall satisfy Sec 10.8.12.9b(iv).
g) Beam to Column Connections : Beam to column connections away from links are permitted to be
designed as a pin in the plane of the web. The connection shall have a strength to resist rotation about
the longitudinal axis of tile beam based on two equal and opposite rotation forces of at least 1.5 per cent
of the beam flange nominal strength computed as Fybftf acting laterally on the beam flanges.
h) Required Column Strength : The required strength of columns shall be determined by load
combinations 5 and 6 specified in Sec 2:7.5.2 of Chapter 2, Loads, except that the moments and axial
loads introduced into the column at the connection of a link or brace shall not be less than those
generated by 1.25 times the design strength of the link.
10.9 CONNECTIONS, JOINTS AND FASTENERS
This section provides the requirements for the design of connectors i.e. bolts, welds, rivets, etc. and
connecting elements such as plates, stiffeners, gussets, angles, brackets, etc.
10.9.1 Design Provisions

10.9.1.1Design Basis
a) In Workin� Stress Design connections shall be designed such that the calculated stress in the connectors
or connectmg elements for service loads shall not exceed the allowable stress stipulated in Sec 10.7 and
10.9.
b) In Load Factor Design the connections shall be designed such that the required strength in the
connectors and connecting elements for factored loads shall not exceed the design strength.
10.9.1.2 Simple Connections : Simple Connections may be designed for the reaction shears only. It shall
accommodate end rotations of unrestrained (simple) beams and to accomplish this, inelastic deformation in
the connection is permitted.
6-326
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
10.9.1.3 Moment Connections : End connections of restrained beams, girders and trusses shall be designed
for the combined effect of forces resulting from moment and shear induced by the rigidity of the
connections.
10.9.1.4 Compression Members with Bearing Joints :When columns bear on bearing plates or are
finished to bear at splices, there shall be sufficient connectors to hold all parts securely in place.
When other compression members are finished to bear, the splice material and its connectors shall be
arranged to hold all parts in line and shall be designed for 50% of the strength of the member in Working
Stress Design and for 50% of the factored strength oi the member in Load Factor Design.
r
In Working Stress Design compression j oints shall be roportioned to resist any tension developed by the
specified lateral loads acting in conjunction with 75% o the calculated dead load stress and no live loads.
In Load Factor Design compression joints shall be I'roportioned to resist any tension developed by the
factored load combination 6 specified in Sec 2.7.5.2 of Chapter 2, Loads.
10.9.1.5 Minimum Connections: Except for lacing, sagbars and girts, all connections shall be proportioned
to support a service load not less than 27 kN in Worl<ing Stress Design while in Load Factor Design the
connection shall be proportioned to support a factored load not less than 45 kN. .
10.9.1.6 Splices in Heavy Sections : The following requirement applies to ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 rolled
shapes, or shapes built up by welding plates more than 50 mm thicl< together to form the cross-section, and
where the cross-section is to be spliced and subjected to primary tensHe stresses due to tension or flexure.
When the individual elements of the cross section are spliced prior to being joined to form cross-section in
accordance with Sec 3.4.6 of AWS Dl.1, the applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 shall apply in lieu of the
requirements of this section.
When tensile forces in these sections are to be transmitted through splices by full penetration groove welds,
weld access hole details as given in Sec 10.9.1.7, welding preheat requirements as given in Sec 10.9.2.6 and
thermal cut surface preparation and inspection requirements as given in Sec 10.11.2.2 shall be applicable.
At tension splices in these sections, weld tabs and backing shall be removed and the surfaces ground
smooth.
When splicing these sections, and where the section is to be used as a l'rimary compression member, all
weld access holes required to facilitate groove welding operations shall satisfy the requirements of
Sec 10.9.1.7.
Alternatively, splicing of such members subjected to compression, including members which are subjected
to tension due to wind or seismic loads, may be accomplished using splice details which do not induce large
weld shrinkage strains such as partial-penetration flange groove welds with fillet-welded surface lap plate
splices on the web, or with bolted or combination of bolted and fillet welded lap plate splices.
10.9.1.7 Beam Copes and Weld Access Holes : All weld access holes required to facilitate welding
f
operations shall have a length from the toe of the weld preparation not less than1 times the thickness of
the material in which the hole is made. The height of the access hole shall be adequate for deposition of
sound weld metal in the adjacent plates and provide clearance for weld tabs. In hot rolled shapes and built
up shapes, all beam copes and weld access holes shall be shaped free of notches or sharp reentrant corners
exce,pt that, when fillet web to flange welds are used in built-up shapes, access holes are permitted to
termmate perpendicular to the flange.
For Group 4 and 5 shapes and built-up shapes of material more than 50 rnm thick, the thermally cut surfaces
of beam copes and weld access holes shall be ground to bright metal and inspected by either magnetic
particle or dye penetrant methods. If the curved transition portion of weld access holes and beam copes are
formed by predrilled or sawed holes, that portion of the access hole or cope need not be grouncf. Weld
access holes and beam copes in other shapes need not be ground nor inspected by dye penetrant or
magnetic particle.
10.9.1.8 Placement of Welds, Bolts and Rivets: Groups of welds, bolts or rivets at the ends of any member
which transmit axial stress into that member shall oe sized so that the centre of gravity of the group
coincides with the centre of gravity of the member, unless provision is made for the eccentricity. The
foregoing provision is not applicable to end connections of statically loaded single-angle, double-angle and
similar members. Eccentricity between the gravity axes of such members and the gauge lines for their
riveted or bolted end connections may be negfected in statically loaded members.
10.9.1.9 Bolts in Combination with Welds: In new work, A307 bolts or high strength bolts used in bearing
type connections shall not be considered as sharing the stress in combination with welds. Welds, if usecf,
shall be provided to carry the entire stress in the connection. High strength bolts designed for slip-critical
connections may be considered as sharing the stress with the welds.

Part 6
Structural Design
In making welded alterations to structures, existing rivets and high strength bolts tightened to the
requirements for slip-critical connections are permittecf for carrying stresses resulting from roads present at
the time of alteration, and the welding need only be adequate to carry the additional road.
10.9.1.10 High strength Bolts in Slip-critical Connections in Combination with Rivets : In both new work
and alterations, high strength bolts in slip-critical connections may be considered as sharing the load with
rivets.
10.9.1.11 Limitations of Bolted and Welded Connections : Fully tensioned high strength bolts (see
Table 6.10.12) or welds shall be used for the following connections :
Column splices in all tier structures 60 m or more in height,
Column splices in tier structures 30 m to 60 m in height, if the least horizontal dimension is less than
40% of the height,
Column splices in tier structures less than 30 m in height, if the least horizontal dimension is less than
25% of the height,
Connections of all beams and girders to columns and of any other beams and girders on which the
bracing of columns is dependent, in structures over 40 m in height,
In all structures carrying cranes of over 50 kN capacity : roof truss splices and connections of trusses to
columns, column splices, column bracing, knee braces and crane supports,
Connections for supports of running machinery or of other live loads which produce impact or reversal
of stress, and
Any other connections stipulated on the design plans.
In all other cases, connections may be made with high strength bolts tightened to the snug-tight condition or
with A307 bolts.
For the purpose of this section, the height of a tier structure shall be taken as the vertical distance from the
curb level to the highest point of the roof beams in the case of flat roofs, or to the mean height of the gable in
the case of roofs having a rise of more than 1 in 4 ! . Where the curb lev!?l has not been established, or where
the structure does not adjoin a street, the mean level of the adjoining land shall be used instead of curb level.
Penthouses may be excluded in computing the height of the structure.
10.9.2 Welds
All provisions of the AWS Dl.l :Structural Welding Code- Steel, except its Sec 2.3.2.4, 2.5, 8.13.1, 9 and 10
shall apply to work executed under this specification.
10.9.2.1 Groove Welds

a) Effective Area : The effective area of groove welds shall be considered as the effective length of the
weld times the effective throat thickness.
The effective length of a groove weld shall be the width of the part joined.
The effective throat thickness of a complete penetration groove weld shall be the thickness of the
thinner part joined.
The effective throat thickness of a partial-penetration groove weld shall be as shown in Table 6.10.6.
Table 6.10.6
Effective Throat Thickness of Partial Penetration Groove Welds
Welding Process Welding Included Angle at Effective Throat

Position Root of Groove Thickness
J or U joint
Shielded metal arc
Submerged arc All Bevel or V joint Depth of chamfer
�60°
Gas metal arc
Flux-cored arc Bevel or V joint Depth of chamfer
< 60° but �45° minus 3 mm
The effective throat thickness of a flare groove weld when flush to the surface of a bar or 90° bend in a
formed section shall be as shown in Table 6.10.7. Random sections of production welds for each
6-328
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
welding procedure, or such test sections as may be required by design documents, shall be used to
verify that the effective throat is consistently obtained.
b) Limitations: The minimum effective throat thickness of a partial penetration groove weld shall be as
shown in Table 6.10.8. Minimum effective throat thickness is determined by the thicker of the two parts
joined, except that the weld size need not exceed the thickness of the thinnest part joined though a large
size is reqUired by calculation. For this exception, particular care shall be taken to provide sufficient
preheat for soundness of the weld.
Table 6.10.7
Effective Throat Thickness of Flare Groove Welds
Type of Weld Radius (R) of Bar or Bend Effective Throat Thickness

Flare bevel groove All 5
16 R
Flare V -groove All !R•
2
*Use �R for Gas Metal Arc Welding (except short circuiting transfer process) when R 2:12 mm
Table 6.10.8
Minimum Effective Throat Thickness of Partial Penetration Groove Welds
Material Thickness of Thicker Part Joined, mm Minimum Effective Throat Thickness, mm

To 6 inclusive 3
Over 6 to 12 5
Over 12 to 20 6
Over 20 to 40 8
Over 40 to 60 10
Over 60 to 150 12
Over 150 16
10.9.2.2 Fillet Welds

a) Effective Area: The effective area of fillet welds shall be taken as the effective length times the effective
throat thickness.
The effective length of fillet welds, except fillet welds in holes and slots, shall be the overall length of
full size fillets, including returns.
The effective throat thickness of a fillet weld shall be the shortest distance from the root of the joint to
the face of the dia�rammatic weld, except that for fillet welds made by the submerged arc process, the
effective throat th1�kness shall be taken equal to the leg size for 10 mm and smaller fillet welds, an
_
�
equal to the theoretical throat plus 3 mm, for fillet welds 1arger than 10 mm. ·--.,.
For fillet welds in holes and slots, the effective length shall be the length of the centre line of the weld
along the centre of the plane through the throat. In tne case of overlapping fillets, the effective area shall
not exceed the nominaf cross-sectional area of the hole or slot in the plane of the faying surface.
b) Limitations: The minimum size of fillet welds shall be as shown in Table 6.10.9. Minimum weld size is
dependent upon the thicker of the two parts joined, except that the weld size need not exceed the
thickness of the thinner art. For this exception particular care shall be taken to provide sufficient
r
preheat for soundness o the weld. Weld sizes larger than the thinner part joined are permitted if
required by calculated strength. In the as-welded condition the distance between the edge of the base
metal and the toe of the weld may be less than 1.5 mm provided the weld size is clearly verifiable.
Table 6.10.9
Minimum Size of Fillet Welds
Material Thickness of Thicker Part Joined (mm) Minimum Size of Fillet Weld· (mm)
To 6 inclusive 3
Over 6 to 12 5
Over 12 to 20 6
Over 20 8
• Leg dimension of fillet welds. Single-pass welds must be used.
The maximum size of fillet welds that is permitted along edges of connected parts shall be:
Not greater than the thickness of the material for less than 6 mm thick material.

Part 6
Structural Design
Not greater than the thickness of the material minus 1.5 mm for material 6 mm or more in
thickness, unless the weld is especially designated on the drawings to be built out to obtain full
throat thickness.
The minimum effective length of fillet welds designed on the basis of strength shall be not less than 4
times the nominal size, or else the size of the weld shall be considered not to exceed t of its effective
length. If longitudinal fillet welds are used alone in end connections of flat bar tension members, the
length of eadi fillet weld shall be not less than the perpendicular distance between them. The transverse
spacing of longitudinal fillet welds used in end connections of tension members shall not exceed 200
mm, unless the member is designed on the basis of effective net area in accordance with Sec10. 6.3.
Intermittent fillet welds are permitted to transfer calculated stress across a joint or faying surfaces when
the strength required is less than that developed by a continuous fillet weld of the smallest permitted
size, and to join components of built-up members. The effective length of any segment of intermittent
fillet welding shall be not less than 4 times the weld size, with a minimum of 40 mm.
In lap joints, the minimum lap shall be 5 times the thickness of the thinner part joined, but not less than
25 mrn. Lap joints joining plates or bars subject to axial stress shall be fillet welded along the end of both
lapped parts, except where the deflection of the lapped parts is sufficiently restrained to prevent
opening of the joint under maximum loading.
Fillet welds in holes or slots may be permitted to transmit shear in lap joints or to preveAt the buckling
or separation of lapped parts and to join components of built-up members. Such fillet welds may
overlap, subject to llie provisions of this section. Fillet welds in holes or slots are not to be considered
plug or slot welds.
Side or end fillet welds terminating at ends or sides, respectively, of parts or members shall, wherever
practicable, be returned continuously around the corners for a distance not less than 2 times the
nominal size of the weld. This provision shall apply to side and top fillet welds connecting brackets,
beam seats and similar connections, on the plane about which bending moments are computed. For
framing ansles and simple end-plate connections which depend upon flexibility of the outstanding legs
for connectiOn flexibility, end returns shall not exceed 4 times the nominal size of the weld. Fillet welds
which occur on opposite sides of a common plane shall be interrupted at the corner common to both
welds. End returns shall be indicated on the design and detail drawmgs.
10.9.2.3 Plug and Slot Welds

a) Effective Area : The effective shearing area of plug and slot welds shall be considered as the nominal
cross-sectional area of the hole or slot in the plane oi the faying surface.
b) Limitations : Plug or slot welds are permitted to transmit shear in lap joints or to prevent buckling of
r
lapped parts and to join component arts of built-up members. The diameter of the hole for a plug weld
sha11 not be less than the thickness o the part contaming it plus 8 mm, rounded to the next higher value
nor greater than the minimum diameter plus3 mm or 2 f times the thickness of the weld.
The minimum centre to centre spacing of plug welds shall be 4 times the diameter of the hole.
The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a direction transverse to their length shall be 4 times the
width of the slot. The minimum centre to centre spacing in a longitudinal direction on any line shall be
2 times the length of the slot.
The length of slot for a slot weld shall not exceed 10 times the thickness of the weld. The width of the
slot shaH be not less than the thickness of the part containing it plus 8 mm, rounded to the next higher
value, nor shall it be larger than 2 1 times the thickness of the weld. The ends of the slot shall be
semicircular or shall have the corners rounded to a radius not less than the thickness of the part
containing it, except those ends which extend to the edge of the part.
The thickness of plug or slot welds in material16 mm or less in thickness shall be equal to the thickness
of the material. In material over16 mm thick, the thickness of the weld shall be at least � the thickness
of the material but not less than16 mm.
10.9.2.4 Allowable Stresses or Design Strength : For Working Stress Design the welds shall be
proportioned to meet the stress requirements given in Table 6.10.10.
For Load Factor Design the design strength of welds shall be the lower value of 1/JFBM and 1/JFrv, when
applicable. The values of 1/J, F8M, Fro and the limitations thereon are given in Table 6.10.11.
6-330
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
Table 6.10.10
Allowable Stress on Welds(ll
Type of Weld and Stress Allowable Stress Required Weld Strength

Level<2•3>
Complete-penetration Groove Welds
Tension normal to effective Same as base metal "Matching" weld metal shall be
area used
C o mpression normal t o Same as base metal
effective area
Tension or com res sion Same as base metal Weld m etal with a strength
parallel to axis of we dE level equal to or less tnan
"matching" weld metal is
permitted
Shear on effective area 0.30 x nominal tensile strength
of weld metal, N I mm2
Partial-penetration Groove Welds I,IJ
Compression normal to Same as base metal
effective area
Tension or compres sion Same as base metal
parallel to axis of weld (5)
Shear parallel to axis of weld 0.30 x nominal tensile strength Weld metal with a strength
of weld metal, N I mm2 level equal to or less than
"match ing" weld metal is
permitted
Tension normal to eftective 0.30 x nominal tensile strength
area of weld metal (Nimm2), except
tensile stress on base metal
shall not exceed 0.60 x yield
stress of base metal
Fillet Welds
Shear on effective area 0.30 x nominal tensile strength
of weld metal, Nlmm2 Weld metal with a strength
level equal to or less tnan
"matching" weld metal is
Tension or compression Same as base metal permitted.
parallel to axis of weld<5>
Plug and Slot Welds
Shear parallel to fa ng r 0.30 x nominal tensile strength Weld metal with a strength
surfaces (on effective area of weld metal, Nlmm2 level equal to or less tnan
"matching" weld metals is
permitted
Notes: (1) The design of connected material is governed by Sec 10.7.4 through 10.7.7.
(2) For "Matching" weld metal, see Table 4.1.1 of AWS 01.1.
(3) Weld metal one strength level stronger than "matching" weld metal may be permitted.
(4) See Sec 10.9.2.1(b) for a limitation on use of partial penetration groove welded joints.
(5) Fillet welds and partial penetration groove welds joining the component elements of built-up
members, such as flange to web connections, may be designed without regard to the tensile or
compressive stress in these elements parallel to the axis of the welds.
10.9.2.5 Combination of Welds : If two or more of the general types of weld (groove, fillet, plug, slot) are
combined in a single joint, the effective capacity of each shall be separately computed with reference to the
axis of the group in order to determine the allowable capacity of the combination.
10.9.2.6 Preheat for Heavy Shapes : For ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 shapes and welded built-up members
made of plates more than 50 mm thick, a preheat equal to or greater than 175°C shall be used when making
groove weld splices.
10.9.2.7 Matching Steel : The choice of electrode for use with complete-penetration grove welds subjected
to tension normal to the effective area shall be according to the requirements for matching steel stipulated in
AWS Dl.l : Structural Welding Code-Steel.
10.9.3 Bolts, Rivets and Threaded Parts

10.9.3.1 High strength Bolts : Except as otherwise provided in this Code, use of high strength bolts shall
conform to the provisions of the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts of
AISC.

Part 6
Structural Design
Table 6.10.11
Design Strength of Welds
Types of Weld Resistance Normal Strength Required Weld Strength

and Stress<1> Material Factor¢ FBMorFw Level<2•3>
Complete Penetration Groove Weld
Tension normal to Base 0.90 F "Matching" weld must
effective area y be used
Compression normal to F Weld metal with a
effective area Base 0.90 y strength level equal to
Tension or compression or less than "matching"
I parallel to axis of weld may be used.
Shear on effective area Base 0.90 0.60 F
weld electrode 0.80 y
0.60FExx
Partial Penetration Groove Welds
Compression normal to Weld metal with a
effective area Base 0.90 F strength level equal to
y or less than "matching"
Tension or compression maybe used.
parallel to axis of weld(4)
Shear parallel to axis of Base<5>
weld weld electrode 0.75 0.60FExx
Tension normal to Base 0.90 F
effective area weld electrode 0.80 y
0.60FExx
Fillet Welds '
Shear on effective area Base<:>J Weld metal with a

weld electrode 0.75 0.60FEXX strength level equal to or
Tension or compression less than "matching"
parallel to axis of weld<4> Base 0.90 F weld metal may be
y used.
Plug or Slot Welds
Shear parallel to faying Base<5J Weld metal with a
surfaces (on effective weld electrode 0.75 0.60FExx �
stren th level equal to or
area) less t an "matching"
weld metal may be used.
Notes: (1) For definition of effective area, see Sec 10.9.2.
(2) For "matching" weld metal, see Table 4.1.1 of AWS 01.1.
(3) Weld metal one strength level stronger than "m�tching" weld metal may be permitted.
(4) Fillet welds and partial penetration groove welds joining component elements of built-up members, such as
flange-to-web connections, may be designed without regard to the tensile or compressive stress in these
elements parallel to the axis of the welds.
(5) The design_of connected material is governed by Sec 10.9.4.2.
If required to be tightened to more than 50% of their minimum specified tensile strength, ASTM A449 bolts
in tension and bearing type shear connections shall have an ASTM F436 hardened washer installed under
the bolt head, and the nuts shall meet the requirements of ASTM A563. When assembled, all joint surfaces,
including those adjacent to the washers, shall be free of scale, except tight mill scale. Except as noted below,
all A325 and A490 bolts shall be tightened to a bolt tension not less than that given in Table 6.10.12.
Tightening shall be done by the turn-of-nut method, a direct tension indicator or by calibrated wrench.
Bolts in connections not subjected to tension loads, where slip can be permitted and where loosening or
fatigue due to vibration or load fluctuation are not design considerations, need only to be tightened to the
snug-tight condition. The snug-tight condition is defined as the tightness attained by a few impacts of an
impact wrench or the full effort oi a worker with an ordinary spud wrench and must bring the connected
plies into firm contact.
For Load Factor Design, the nominal strength value given in Table 6.10.13 for bearing type connections shall
be used for bolts tightened to the snug-tight condition. Bolts to be tightened only to the snug-:tight
conditions shall be clearly indicated on the design and drawings.
10.9.3.2 Size and Use of Holes

a) The maximum sizes of holes for bolts are given in Table 6.10.14 except that larger holes, required for
tolerance on location of anchor bolts in concrete foundations, are perrrutted in column base details.
6-332
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
Table 6.10.12
Minimum Bolt Tension, kN(l, 2)
Bolt Size
Diameter, mm Nominal Size, inASTM A325 Bolts A490 Bolts
A325orA490
12 � 53 67
2
16 ..2 85 107
8
20 .l 125 156
4
22 z. 173 2 18
8
25 1 227 285
28 249 356
1 f
32 1� 316 454
4
35 1.l 378 538
8
38 1 458 658
f
Notes: (1) Equal to 0.70 of minimum tensile strength of bolts, rounded off to nearest kN, as specified in
ASlM specifications for A325 and A490 bolts with UNC threads.
(2) The pretension values are based on nominal sizes in inch of ASTM bolts with UNC thread.
Table 6.10.13
Design Strength of Fasteners
Tensile Strength Shear Strength in Bearing type

Connections
Resistance Nominal Resistance Nominal
Description of Fasteners Factor Strength, Factor Strength,
� N/mm2 � N/mm2
A307bolts 310 \11 0.60 186(:l,4)
A325 bolts, when threads are not
excluded from shear planes 620 372 <4>
A325 bolts, when threads are excluded
from shear planes 620 495 (4)
A490 bolts, when threads are not
excluded from shear planes 775 465 <4>
A490 bolts, when threads are excluded
from the shear planes 775 620 <4>
Th r e a d e d part meeting th e
requirements of Sec 10.3, when threads 0.75 0.75Fu(l,J) 0.65 0.45Fu
are not excluded from the shear planes
Thr e a d e d parts m e eting the

requirements of Sec 10.3, when threads 0.75Fu(l,J) 0.60Fu
are excluded from the shear planes
A502 Gr. 1. hot-driven rivets 310 \11 250 \41
A502 Gr. 2 & 3 hot-driven rivets 410 (l) 330 \4)
Notes: (1) Static loading only.
(2) Threads permitted in shear planes.
(3) The nominal tensile strength of the threaded portion of an upset rod, based upon the cross-
sectional area at its major thread diameter, Ab shall be larger than the nominal body area of the rod
before upsetting times fy· ·
(4) When bearing type connections used to splice tension members have a fastener pattern whose
length, measured parallel to the line of force, exceeds 1250 mm, tabulated values shall be reduced
by20%.
b) Standard holes shall be provided in member to member connections, unless oversized, short-slotted or
long-slotted holes in bolted connections are approved by the engineer. Finger shims up to 6 mm may be
introduced into slip-critical connections designed on the basis of standard holes without reducing the
allowable shear of the fastener.

Part 6
Structural Design
c) Oversized holes are permitted in any or all plies of slip-critical connections, but they shall not be used in
bearing type connections. Hardened washers shall be installed over oversized holes in an outer ply.
d) Short-slotted holes are permitted in any or all plies of slip-critical or bearing type connections. The slots
are permitted without regard to direction of loading in slip-critical connections, but the length shall be
normal to the direction of the load in bearing-type connections. Washers shall be installed over short
slotted holes in an outer ply; when high strength bolts are used, such washers shall be hardened.
e) Long-slotted holes are permitted in only one of the connected parts of either a slip-critical or bearing
type connection at an mdividual faying surface. Long-slotted holes may be used without regard to
direction of loading in slip-critical connections, but shall be normal to the direction of load in bearing
type connections. Where fong-slotted holes are used in an outer ply, plate washers or a continuous bar
wtth standard holes, having a size sufficient to completely cover the slot after installation, shall be
provided. In high strength bolted connections, such p1ate washers or continuous bars shall be not less
than 8 mm thick and shall be of structural grade material, but need not be hardened. If hardened
washers are required for use of high strength oolts, the hardened washers shall be placed over the outer
surface of the p1ate washer or bar.
f) When A 490 bolts over 25 mm diameter are used in slotted or oversize holes in external plies, a single
hardened washer conforming to ASTM F436, except with 8 mm minimum thickness, shall be used in
lieu of the standard washer.
Table 6.10.14
Nominal Hole Dimensions
Hole Dimensions
Bolt Dia Standard (Dia) Oversize(Dia) Short-slot Long-slot
mm mm mm (Width x length) (Width x length)
12 14 16 14 X 18 14 X 32
16 18 21 18 X 22 18 X 40
20 21 24 21 X 25 21 X 48
22 24 27 24 X 28 24 X 56
25 27 32 27 X 33 27 X 64
c-:28 d + 1.5 d+8 (d+1.5) X (d+10) (d+1.5)x (2.5xd)
10.9.3.3 Effective Bearing Area : The effective bearing area of bolts, threaded parts and rivets shall be the
diameter multiplied by the length in bearing, except that for countersunk bolts and rivets f the depth of the
countersink shall be deducted.
10.9.3.4 Tension and Shear: In Working Stress Design the allowable tension and shear stresses on bolts,
threaded parts and rivets shall be as given in Table 6.10.15 of the nominal body area of rivets (before
driving) or the unthreaded nominal body area of bolts and threaded parts other than upset rods (see foot
note h, Table 6.10.15). In Load Factor Design the design strength of bolts, threaded parts snail be taken as the
product of the resistance factor if> and the nominal strength given in Table 6.10.13 of the unthreaded
nominal body area of bolts and threaded parts other than upset (see footnote (3) of Table 6.10.13). Hi�h
strength bolts supporting applied load by direct tension shall be so proportioned that their average tenstle
stress, computed on the basis of nominal bolt area and independent of any initial tightening force, will not
exceed the appropriate stress given in Table 6.10.15 and tne design strength given in Table 6.10.13 for
Working Stress Design and Load Factor Design respectively. The applied load shall be the sum of any
tension resulting from prying action produced by deformation of the connected parts and external service
load in case of Working Stress Design or factored 1oad in case of Load Factor Design.
10.9.3.5 Combined Tension and Shear in Bearing Type Connections

a) In Working Stress Design, bolts and rivets subjected to combined shear and tension shall be so
proportioned that the tension stress F1, in N/mm2 on the nominal body area Ab produced by forces
applied to the connected parts, shall not exceed the values computed from the expressions in Table
6.10.16 wherefv , the shear stress produced by the same forces, shall not exceed the value for shear
given in Table 6.10.15. When allowable stresses are increased for wind or seismic loads in accordance
with Sec 10.7.2.2, the constants in the expressions listed in Table 6.10.16 shall.be increased by 33% but
the coefficient applied tofv shall not be increased.
b) In Load Factor Design, bolts and rivets subjected to combined tension and shear shall be so
proportioned that the tension stress ft produced by factored loads on the nominal body area Ab does not
exceed the values computed from the expressions in Table 6.10.17. The value offv, the shear produced
by the same factored loads, shall not exceed the values of shear for Load Factor Design given in
Sec 10.9.3.4.
6-334
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
10.9.3.6 Combined Tension and Shear in Slip-critical Joints

a) In Working Stress Design for A325 and A490 bolts used in slip-critical connections, the maximum shear
stress allowed by Table 6.10.15 shall be multiplied by the reduction factor (1-f1AiJTb) where J1 is the
average tensile stress due to a direct load applied to all of the bolts in a connection and Tb is the
pretension load of the bolt specified in Table 6.10.12. When allowable stresses are increased for wind
or seismic load in accordance with the provision of Sec 10.7.2.2, the reduced allowable shear stress shall
be increased by 33%.
Table 6.10.15
Allowable Shear Stress on Fasteners, N/mm2
Allowable Shea[\IY (fv)

Allowable Slip-critical Connectionsl2, 3) Bearing
Description of Fasteners Tension(l) Stan- Oversize Long-slotted type
(Ft) dard and Holes Connec-
size Short- Transve- Pa rallell4> tions<3>
Holes slotted rse<4>toad Load
Holes
A502, Gr. 1, hot-driven 159(!:>) 120\b)
rivets
A502, Gr. 2 and 3, hot- 200(!:>) 152\b)
driven rivets
A307bolts 138(5) 69(6, "/)
Threaded parts meeting the
�
re uirements of Sec 10.3.1
an 10.3.2, and A449 bolts
meeting the requirements of 0.33fu(S,S) 0,17Fu
Sec 10.3 .2, and when
threads are not excluded
from shear planes
Threaded parts meeting the
�
re uirements of Sec 10.3.1
an 10.3.2, and A449 bolts
g,
meetin the requirements of 0.33 fu(S) 0.22Fu
Sec 10. .2 when threads are
excluded from shear planes
A325 bolts, when threads
are not excluded from shear 303 117 103 83 69 145 <6>
planes
are excluded from shear 303 117 103 83 69 207<6>
planes
are not excluded from shear 372 145 124 103 90 193(6)
I planes
are excluded from shear 372 145 124 103 90 2 76 < 6 >
I planes
Notes: ( 1) See Sec 10.7.2.2.
(2) Class A ( slip coefficient 0.33). Clean mill scale and blast-cleaned surfaces with Class A coatings.
When specified by the Engineer, the allowable shear stress, Fv, for slip-critical connections having
special faying surface conditions may be increased to the applicable value given in the RCSC
Specification.
(3) For limitations on use of oversized and slotted holes, see Sec 10.9.3.2.
(4) Direction of load application relative to long axis of slot.
(5) Static loading only.
(6) When bearing-type connections used to splice tension members have a fastener pattern whose
length, measured parallel to the line of force, exceeds 1250 mm, tabulated values shall be reduced
by20%.
(7) Threads permitted in shear planes.
(8) The tensile capacity of the threaded portion of an upset rod, based upon the cross-sectional area at
its major thread diameter Ab shall be larger than the nominal body area of the rod before upsetting
times 0.60F11•
b) In Load Factor Design the design shear resistance of slip-critical joints shall be determined by using the
values from Table 6.10.18 multiplied by � =1.0, except � =0.85 for the long-slotted holes when the load
is in the direction of the slot. The shear on the bolt due to service loads shall be less than the tabulated

Part 6
Structural Design
values. When the loading combination includes wind or seismic loads in addition to dead and live
loads,the total of the combined load effects,at service loads, maybe multiplied by 0.75.
When a bolt in a slip-critical connection is subjected to a service tensile force T, the nominal resistance in
Table 6.10.18 shall be multiplied by the reduction factor (1-T/Tb} where Tb is the minimum pretension
load from Table 6.10.12.
Table 6.10.16
Allowable Tension Stress (Ft) for Fasteners in Bearing-type Connections
Description of Threads Included in Threads Excluded from

Fasteners Shear Plane Shear Plane
A307bolts 180-1.8/v � 140
A325bolts �(30 3} 2 -4.39/; �(30 3) 2 -2.15/;
A490 bolts �(372 ) 2 -3.75/; �(372 ) 2 -1.82/;
Threaded parts,
A449bolts 0 .43Fu -1.8fv � 0 .33Fu 0.43Fu -1.4/v � 0 .33Fu
over 40 mm dia
A502 Gr. 1 rivets 207-1.3/v �16 0
A502 Gr. 2 rivets 262-1.3/v �200
, Table 6.10.17
Tension Design Stress Limit ( ¢ Ft), N/mm2, for Fasteners in Bearing Type Connections
Description of Fasteners Threads included in the Shear Threads Excluded from the
Plane Shear Plane
A307bolts 270 -1.8fv �207
A325bolts 585-1.8/v �470 585-1.4/v � 470
A490 bolts 730 -1.8/v � 580 730 -1.4/v � 580
Threaded parts
A449bolts over 40 mm 0.73Fu -1.8fv �0 .56Fu 0.73Fu -1.4/v �0 .56Fu
diameter
A502 Gr. 1 rivets 30 4-1.3fv �234
A502 Gr. 2 rivets 407 -1.3fv � 310
When a bolt in a slip-critical connection is subjected to a service tensile force T,the nominal resistance in
Table 6.10.18shall be multiplied bythe reduction factor (1-TfTb} where Tbis the minimum pretension
loads from Table 6.10.12.
Table 6.10.18
Nominal Slip-critical Shear Strength, N/mm2, of High Strength Bolts(l)
Type of Bolt Nominal Shear Strength

Standard Size Holes Oversize and Short Long slotted Holes\�J
Slotted Holes
A325 117 1 03 83
A490 145 124 10 3
Notes: (1) Class A (slip coefficient 0.33). Clean mill scale and blast cleaned surfaces with class A coatings.
(2) Tabulated values are for the case of load application transverse to the slot. When the load is
parallel to the slot multiolv tabulated values bv 0.85.
10.9.3.7 Bearing at Bolt Holes

a) For shear connections in Working Stress Designthe allowable bearingon the projected area of bolts and
rivets at the bolt holes for two or more bolts in the line of force shall be as follows, provided the end
distance in the line of force is more than 1 fd and the centre to centre distance of bolts is more than 3d.
i) In standard or short-slotted holes
(10.9.1)
6-336
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
ii) In long-slotted holes perpendicular to the direction of load
(10.9.2)
On the projected area of the bolt or rivet closest to the edge in standard or short-slotted holes with the
edge distance less than 1 f d and in all connections with a single bolt in the line of force:
(10.9.3)
If deformation around the hole is not a design consideration and adequate spacing and edge distance
are provided as required by Sec 10.9.3.8 and 10.9.3.9, the following equation is permitted in lieu of
Eq (10.9.1).
(10.7.4)
and the limit in Eq 10.9.3 shall be increased to 1.5Fu.
b) For shear connections in Load Factor Design the design bearing strength on two or more bolts in the
line of force is ¢ Rn ( ¢ = 0.75) provided the end distance in the line of force is more than 1 f d and the
centre to centre distance of bolts is more than 3d.
i) In standard or short-slotted holes
(10.9.5)
ii) In long-slotted holes perpendicular to the direction of load
(10.9.6)
For the bolts closest to the edge, in all connections not covered by Eq (10.9.5) and (10.9.6), the design
bearing of a single bolt or two or more bolts in line of force, each with an end distance less than 1 f d,
shall be determined by ¢ Rn, where ¢ = 0.75.
= Lt Fu
Rn (10.9.7)
1000
If deformation around the bolt hole is not a design consideration and adequate spacing and edge
distance as required by Sec 10.9.3.8 and 10.9.3.9 is provided, the following expression may be used m
lieu of Eq 10.9.5 and 10.9.6, where ¢ =0.75.
Rn =3.0x10-3dt Fu (10.9.8)
10.9.3.8 Minimum Spacing: The distance between centres of standard, oversized or slotted fastener holes
shall not be less than 2 ! times the nominal diameter of the fastener (a distance of 3d is preferred) nor less
than that required by the following, if applicable.
a) In Working Stress Design the centre to centre distance of holes, s, along a line of transmitted forces shall
not be less than 3d when F is determined by Eq (10.9.1) and (10.9.2). Otherwise, the distance between
P
centres of holes shall not be less than the following:
i) For standard holes:
(10.9.9)
ii) For oversized and slotted holes: the distance required for standard holes in (i) above, plus the
applicable increment C1 from Table 6.10.19, but tne clear distance between holes shall not be less
than one bolt diameter.
b) In Load Factor Design the centre to centre distance of holes, s, along a line of transmitted forces shall not
be less than 3d when Rn is determined by Eq (10.9.5) and (10.9.6). Otherwise the distance between
centres of holes shall not be less than the following :

Part 6
Structural Design
i) For standard holes:
(10.9.10)
where 1/J = 0.75
ii) For oversized and slotted holes: the distance required for standard holes in (i) above, plus the
applicable increment C1 from Table 6.10.19, but tne clear distance between holes shall not be less
than one bolt diameter.
10.9.3.9 Minimum Edge Distance

a) In Working Stress Design the distance from the centre of a standard hole to an edge of a connected part
shall be not less than the applicable value from Table 6.10.20 nor the value from Eq (10.9.11), as
applicable. Along a line of transmitted force, the distance from the centre of a standard hole to the edge
of the connected part Le shall be not less than 1-!d when FP is determined by Eq (10.9.1) or (10.9.2).
Otherwise, the edge distam:e shall be not less than
(10.9.11)
Table 6.10.19
Values of Spacing Increment C1, mm
Slotted Holes
Normal Dia Oversize Perpendicular Parallel to Line
of Fastener Holes to Lme of Force of Force
Short Slots Long Slots\1J
�22 3 0 5 1-!d-1.5
25 5 0 6 36
�28 6 0 16 1-!d-1.5
Note: (1) When length of slot is less than the maximum allowed in Table 6.10.14, C1 may be reduced by the
difference between the maximum and actual slot lengths.
b) In Load Factor Design the distance from the centre of a standard hole to the edge of the connected part
shall be not less than the applicable value from Table 6.10.20 nor the value from Eq 10.9.12, as
applicable. Along a line of transmitted force, the distance from the centre of a standard hole to the edge
of the connected part Le shall be not less than 1-!d when Rn is determined by Eq (10.9.5) or (10.9.6).
Otherwise, the edge distance shall be not less than
(10.9.12)
where 1/J = 0.75
Table 6.10.20
Minimum Edge Distance, mm
(Centre of Standard Hole< I) to Edge of Connected Part)
Nominal Bolt or At Sheared At Rolled Edges of Plates, Shapes or

Rivet Dia (mm) Edges Bars, Gas-cut or Saw-cut Edges<2l
12 22 20
16 28 22
20 32 25
22 38(3) 28
25 45(3) 32
28 50 38
32 57 41
Over32 45 x dia 32 xdia
Notes: (1) For oversized or slotted holes, see Table 6.10.21
(2) All edge distances in this column may be reduced 3 mm when the hole is at a point where stress
does not exceed 25% of the maximum design strength in the element.
(3) These may be 32 mm at the ends of beam connection angles.
6-338
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
For both the Working Stress and the Load Factor Design methods, the distance from the centre of an
oversized or slotted hole to an edge of a connected part shall be not less than that required for a
standard hole plus the applicable increment C2 from Taole 6.10.21.
Table 6.10.21
Values of Edge Distance Increment C:z, mm
Nominal Dia Slotted Holes

of Fastener Oversized Perpendicular to Ed�e Parallel to
(mm) Holes Short Slots Long Slots(lJ Edge
$22 1.5 3
25 3 3 .J.d
4
0
$28 3 5
Note: (1) When length of slot is less than maximum allowable (See Table 6.10.14), C2 may be reduced by
one-half the difference between the maximum and actual slot lengths.
10.9.3.10 Maximum Edge Distance and Spacing: The maximum distance from the centre of any rivet or
bolt to the nearest edge of parts in contact shall be 12 times the thickness of the connected part under
consideration, but shall not exceed 150 mm. Bolted joints in unpainted steel exposed to atmospheric
corrosion require special limitations on pitch and edge distance.
For unpainted, built-up members made of weathering steel which will be exposed to atmospheric corrosion,
the spacing of fasteners connecting a plate and a shape or two-plate components in contact shall not exceed
14 times the thickness of the thinnest part nor 175 rnm, and the maximum edge distance shall not exceed
eight times the thickness of the thinnest part or 125 rnm.
10.9.4 Shear Rupture

10.9.4.1 Working Stress Design : At beam end connections where the top flange is coped, and in similar
situations where failure might occur by shear along a plane through the fasteners, or by a combination of
shear along a plane through the fasteners plus tension along a perpendicular plane :
(10.9.13)
acting on the net shear area Av and,
(10.9.14)
acting on the net tension area A1•
The minimum net failure path on the periphery of welded connections shall be checked.
10.9.4.2 Load Factor Design: The design strength for the limit state of rupture along a shear failure path in
main members shall be taken as 1/JFn Ans
where 1/J = 0.75

Fn = 0.6Fu (10.9.15)
10.9.5 Connecting Elements

This section covers the design of connecting elements, such as stiffeners, gussets, angles and brackets and
the panel zones of beam to column connections.
10.9.5.1 Eccentric Connections : Axially stressed intersecting members shall have their gravity axes
intersect at one point, if practicable; if not, provision shall be made for bending and shearing stresses due to
the eccentricity.
10.9.5.2 Design
a) In Working Stress Design for situations where failure might occur by shear along a plane through the
fasteners, or by a combination of shear along a plane through the fasteners plus tension along a
perpendicular plane, see Sec 10.9.4.1.
b) In Load Factor Design the design strength 1/J Rn of welded, bolted and riveted connecting elements
statically loaded in tension (i.e. splice and gusset plates) shall be the lower value obtained according to
the limit states of yielding, fracture of the connecting element and block shear rupture.

Part 6
Structural Design
i) For yielding of the connecting element
� = 0.90
Rn = -
AgFy
1000
(10.9.16)
ii) For fracture of the connecting element where An :s; 0.85Ag
� = 0.75
AnFu
Rn = (10.9.17)
1000
iii) For Block Shear Rupture : Block shear is a failure mode in which the resistance is determined by
the sum of the shear strength on a failure path and the tensile strength on a perpendicular
segment. When ultimate strength on the net section is used to determine the resistance on one
segment, yielding on the gross section shall be used on the perpendicular segment; � =0.75.
Design strength shall be the larger of the two failure mode.
At beam end connections where the top flange is coped, and in similar situations, failure can
occur by shear along a plane through tne fasteners, acting in combination with tension along a
perpendicular plane. In such case, tne ultimate strength on the net section (shear or tension) shall
be used to determine the resistance of one segment and yielding on the gross section (shear or
tension) shall be used for the perpendicular segment, with � =0.75 for both. By alternating the
choice of which segment resistance is based on ultimate strength two possible values of design
strength are obtained. The larger val�e shall be taken as the design strength.
For all other connecting elements, the design strength � Rn shall be determined for the applicable
limit state to insure that the design strength is equal to or greater than the required strength
where R n is the nominal strength appropriate to the geometry and type of loading on the
connecting element. The shear limit state is governed by :
� = 0.80
(10.9.18}
10.9.6 Fillers
In welded construction, any filler 6 mm or more in thickness shall extend beyond the edges of the splice
plate and shall be welded to the part on which it is fitted with sufficient weld to transmit the splice plate
stress, applied at the surface of the filler. The welds joining the splice plate to the filler shall be sufficient to
transmit the splice plate stress and shall be long enough to avoid overstressing the filler. Any filler less than
6 mm thick snail have its edges flush with the edges of the splice plate and the weld size shall be the sum of
the size necessary to carry the splice plus the thickness of the filler plate.
When bolts or rivets carrying loads pass through fillers thicker than 6 mm, except in slip-critical connections,
the fillers shall be extendedoeyond the splice material and the filler extension shall lie secured by enough
bolts or rivets to distribute tne total stress in the member uniformly over the combined section of the
member and the filler, or an equivalent number of fasteners shall be included in the connection.
10.9.7 Splices
Groove welded splices in plate girders and beams shall develop the full strength of the smaller spliced
section. Other types of splices in cross-sections of plate girders and beams snail develop the strength
required by the stresses at the point of splice.
10.9.8 Bearings
10.9.8.1 In Working Stress Design the allowable bearing stress Fp on contact area of milled surfaces and
ends of fitted bearing stiffeners; on projected area of pins in reamed, drilled or bored holes shall be
(10.9.19}
On expansion rollers and rockers, N I mm2
Fp=
(�)
F -90
0.66d (10.9.20)
6-340
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
10.9.8.2 In Load Factor Design the strength of surfaces in bearing is ¢ Rn, where ¢ =0.75 and Rn is defined
below for various types of bearing.
a) Milled or Finished Surfaces: For milled surfaces, pins in reamed, drilled or bored holes, and ends of
fitted bearing stiffeners,
(10.9.21)
b) Expansion Roller and Rockers: For expansion rollers and rockers,
(10.9.22)
10.9.9 Column Bases and Bearing on Supports

Proper provision shall be made to transfer the column loads and moments to the foundations :
10.9.9.1 In Working Stress Design, the stresses due to service loads shall not exceed the following:
On brick in cement mortar Fp = 1.72 N/mm2
On the full area of a concrete support FP = 0. 35f�
On less than the full area of a concrete support FP = 0.35f� �A2/A1 �0.70f�
10.9.9.2 In Load Factor Design, the design bearing reactions due to factored loads on concrete shall not
exceed ¢cPp.
On the full area of concrete support Pp = 0.85 f�A1
On less than the full area of concrete support PP = 0.85f�A1 �A2/A1
where ¢c = 0.60, and

�A2/A1 �2:
10.9.10 Anchor Bolts

Anchor bolts shall be designed to provide resistance to all conditions of tension and shear at the bases of
columns, including the net tensile components of any bending moment which may result from column, base
restraint.
10.10 SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS
This section provides the serviceability requirements under normal usage.
Allowable limits for selected parameters affecting serviceability are specified below.
10.10.1 Camber
If any special camber is necessary it shall be indicated in the design documents.
Trusses of 25 m or greater in span senerally shall be cambered for approximately the dead load deflection.
Crane girders of 23 m or greater m span generally shall be cambered for approximately the dead load
deflection plus ! the live load deflection.
Beams and trusses detailed without specified camber shall be fabricated so that after erection any camber
due to rolling or shop assembly shall be upward. If camber involves the erection of any member under a
preload, this shall be noted in the design documents.
10.10.2 Expansion and Contraction

Provision shall be made for expansion and contraction appropriate to the service conditions of the structure.
10.10.3 Deflection and Vibration

10.10.3.1 Deflection : Beams and girders supporting floors and roofs shall be proportioned with due regard
to the deflection produced by the design loads. Beams and girders supporting plastered ceilings shall be so
designed that the maximum live load deflection does not exceed 3�0 •

Part 6
Structural Design
10.10.3.2 Vibration : Beams and girders supporting large open floor areas free of partitions or other sources
of damping shall be designed with due regard for vibration.
10.10.4 Corrosion
When appropriate, structural components shall be designed to tolerate corrosion or shall be protected
against corrosion that impairs the strength or serviceability of the structure.
Exposed beams shall be sealed against corrosion of interior surfaces and spaced sufficiently apart to permit
cleaning and painting.
.
10.11 FABRICATION, ERECTION AND QUALITY CONTROL
10.11.1 Shop Drawings

Shop drawings shall incorporate complete information necessary for the fabrication of the components of
the structure, including the location, type and size of all welds, bolts and rivets. It shall be prepared in
advance of the actual fabrication. These drawings shall be clearly distinguished between shop and field
welds and bolts and shall clearly indicate type of high strength bolted connection such as snu� tight or fully
tightened bearing, or slip-critical.
Shop drawings shall be made in conformity with the best practice and with due regard to speed and
economy in fabrication and erection.
10.11.2 Fabrication
10.11.2.1 Cambering, Curving and Strengthening : Local application of heat or mechanical means to
introduce or correct camber, curvature and straightness are permitted. The temperature of heated areas, as
measured by approved methods, shall not exceed 565°C for A852 steel, 590°C for A514 steel nor 650° C for
other steels.
10.11.2.2 Thermal Cutting : Thermally cut free edges subject to substantial tensile stress shall be free of
gouges �reater than 5 mm. Gouges greater than 5 mm deep and sharp notches shall be removed by grinding
or repa1red by welding. Thermally cut edges which are to have weld deposited upon them, shall be
reasonably free of notches or gouges.
All reentrant comers shall be shaped to a smooth transition.
Beam copes and weld access holes shall meet the geometrical requirements of Sec 10.9.1.7. Beam copes and
weld access holes in ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 shapes and welded built-up shapes with material tnickness
greater than 50 mm, shall be preheated to a temperature of not less than 65°C prior to thermal cutting.
10.11.2.3 Smoothing of Edges : Smoothing or finishing of sheared or thermally cut edges of plates or
shapes will not be required unless specially called for in tbe design documents or included in a stipulated
edge preparation for welding.
10.11.2.4 Welded Construction: The technique of welding, the workmanship, apJ'earance and quality of
welds and the methods used in correcting nonconforming work shall be in accoraance with AWS D1.1 :
Structural Welding Code-Steel.
10.11.2.5 High-strength Bolted Construction : All parts of bolted members shall be pinned or bolted and
held together rigidly while assembling. Use of a drift pin in bolt holes during assembling shall not distort
the metal or enlarge the holes. Poor matching of holes shall not be acceptable. .
If the thickness of the material is not greater than the nominal diameter of the bolt plus 3 mm, the holes may
be punched; otherwise the holes shall be either drilled or sub-punched and reamed. The die for all sub
punched holes and the drill for all sub-drilled holes, shall be at least 1.5 mm smaller than the nominal
aiameter of the bolt. Holes in A514 steel plates over 12 mm thick shall be drilled.
Surfaces of high strength bolted parts in contact with the bolt head and nut shall not have a slope of more
than 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis. Where the surface of a high strength bolted part has
a slope of more tftan 1:20, a beveled washer shall be used to compensate for the lack ofp�rallelism. High
strength bolted parts shall fit solidly together when assembled and shall not be separated by gaskets or any
other interposed compressible materials.
When assembled, all joint surfaces, including surface adjacent to the bolt head and nut, shall be free of scale,
except tight mill scale and shall be free of direct or other foreign material. Burrs that would prevent solid
seating of the connected parts in the snug-tight condition shall be removed. Contact surfaces within slip
critical connections shall oe free of oil, paint, or other coatings.
10.11.2.6 Compression Joints : Compression joints which depend on contact bearing as part of the splice
caracity shall have the bearing surfaces of individual fabricated pieces prepared by rrulling, sawing or other
smtable means.
6-342
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
10.11.2.7 Dimensional Tolerances : Dimensional tolerances shall be as specified in the Code of Standard
Practice of the American Institute of Steel Construction. .
10.11.2.8 Finishing of Column Base: Columns base and base plates shall be finished in accordance with the
following requirements :
a) Rolled steel bearing plates 50 mm or less in thickness are permitted without milling, provided a
satisfactory contact bearing is obtained; rolled steel bearing plates over 50 mm but not over 100 mm in
thickness may be straightened by pressing, or if presses are not available, by milling for all bearing
surfaces except as noted in (iii) and (iv) below, to obtain a satisfactory contact bearing; rolled steel
bearing plates over 100 mm thick shall be milled for all bearing surfaces (except as noted in (iii) and (iv)
below).
b) Column bases other than rolled steel bearing plates shall be milled for all bearing surfaces (except as
noted in (iii) and (iv) below).
c) The bottom surfaces of bearin � plates and column bases which are grouted to insure full bearing contact
on foundations need not be rrulfed. .
d) The top surfaces of base plates with columns full-penetration welded need not be pressed or milled.
10.11.3 Erection
10.11.3.1 Alignment of Column Bases : Column bases shall be set level and to correct elevation with full
bearing on concrete or masonry.
10.11.3.2 Bracing : The frame of steel skeleton buildings shall be carried up true and plumb within the
limits defined in the Code of Standard Practice of the American Institute of Steel Construction. Temporary
bracing shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of the Code of Standard Practice wherever
necessary to take care of all loads to which the structure may be subject, including equipment and the
operation of the same. Such bearing shall be left in place as long as may be required for safety.
Wherever erection equipment or other loads are supported during erection, proper provision shall be made to
take care of stresses resulting from such loads.
10.11.3.3 Alignment : No permanent bolting or welding shall be performed until the elements have been
properly aligned.
10.11.3.4 Fit of Column Compression Joints : Lack of contact bearing not exceeding a gap of 1.5 mm,
regardless of the type of splice used (partial penetration grove welded or bolted), shall be acceptable. If the
gap exceeds 1.5 mm, and is less than 6 mm, and if an engmeering investigation shows that sufficient contact
area does not exist, the gap shall be packed with non tapered steel snims. Shims may be of mild steel,
regardless of the grade of the main material.
10.11.3.5 Field Welding: Shop paint on surfaces adjacent to welds shall be wire-brushed to reduce paint
film to a minimum.
10.11.3.6 Field Connection : As erection progresses, the work shall be securely bolted or welded to take care
of all dead, wind and erection loads.
10.11.4 Quality Control

The fabricator shall provide quality control procedures to the extent that all work is performed in
accordance with this specification. In addition to the fabricator's quality control procedures, material and
workmanship at all times may be subject to inspection by the Engineer.
10.11.4.1 Cooperation : As far as possible, all inspection shall be made at the fabricator's plant. The
fabricator shall cooperate with the Engineer permitting access for inspection to all places where work is
being done. The Engineer shall schedule his work for minimum interruption to the work of the fabricator
10.11.4.2 Rejection : Material or workmanship not in reasonable conformance with the provisions of this
specification may be rejected at any time during the progress of the work.
10.11.4.3 Inspection of Welding : The inspection of welding shall be performed in accordance with the
provisions of Sec 6 of AWS 01.1- Standard Welding Code Steel.
>
When nondestructive testing is required, the process, extent and standards of acceptance shall be defined
clearly in the design documents.
10.11.4.4 Inspection of Slip-critical High strength Bolted Connections : The inspection of slip-critical,
high strength bolted connections shall be in accordance with the provisions of the Specification for Standard
Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts of Research Council on Structural Connections.

Part 6
Structural Design
10.12 SURFACE TREATMENT
10.12.1 General
Surface treatment of steel structures shall include the preparation of surfaces and the application and drying
of the paint or galvanization including the protection of the applied treatment against damage.
10.12.2 Weather Condition

10.12.2.1 Paints shall be applied only on thoroughly dry surfaces and during period of favourable weather.
Painting shall not be permitted when the atmospheric temperature is at or below soc when using vinyl,
alkyd, and organic materials, and 10°C when using inorganic zinc, or when the humidity exceeds 85 percent
at the site of tne work, or when freshly painted surfaces may be damaged by rain, fog, or dust, or when it
can be anticipated that the atmospheric temperature will drop below 5°C during the drying period.
10.12.2.2 During inclement weather , painting may be done inside an enclosure with artificially controlled
atmospheric conditions within limits suitable for painting.
10.12.2.3 All blast cleaning, except that performed within closed buildings, and all painting shall be
preferably performed during daylight hours.
10.12.3 Cleaning of Surfaces

10.12.3.1 All exposed surfaces of structural steel, except galvanized surfaces, shall be cleaned and painted.
10.12.3.2 All surfaces of new structural steel or surfaces which are to be painted with inorganic zinc shall be
blast cleaned.
10.12.3.3 In repainting existing steel structures where partial cleaning is required, the method of cleaning
shall be specified. Any damage to sound paints, on areas not designated for treatment, shall be repaired.
10.12.3.4 Cleaning methods shall conform to the following.
a) Blast Cleaning
i) Abrasives used for blast cleaning shall be either clean dry sand, mineral grit, steel shot, or steel
grit, and shall be suitable to proauce satisfactory results.
ii) Unwashed beach sand containing salt or excessive amounts of silt shall not be allowed.
iii) All dirt, mill scale, rust, old paint, and other foreign materials shall be removed from steel
surfaces by an approved blast cleaning apparatus.
iv) Blast cleaned surfaces shall be primed or treated the same day blast cleaning is done. If cleaned
surfaces rust or are contaminated with foreign materials before painting, they shall be re
cleaned.
b) Steam Cleaning
i) All dirt, grease, chalky paint or other foreign materials which may have accumulated on the
previously painted or galvanized surfaces shall be removed with a steam cleaning apparatus
which shall precede all other phases of cleaning. It is not intended that sound paint be removed
by this process. Any paint which becomes loose, curled, lifted, or loses its bond with the
preceding coat or coats after steam cleaning, shall be removed to expose sound paint or metal
surface.
ii) A detergent shall be added to the feed water of the steam generator. The detergent shall be of
such composition and shall be added in such quantity that tfie cleaning as provided in the above
is accomplished.
iii) Any residue, detergent, or other foreign material which may accumulate on cleaned surfaces
shall be removed by flushing with fresn water.
iv) Steam cleaning shall not be performed more than two weeks prior to painting.
v) Subsequent painting shall not be performed until the cleaned surfaces are thoroughly dry and in
no case in less than 24 hours after cleaning.
c) Hand Cleaning
i) Wire brushes, either hand or powered scraping tools, power grinders, or sandpaper shall be used
to remove all dirt, loose rust and mill scale, or paint which is not firmly bonded to the metal
surfaces.
ii) Pneumatic chipping hammers shall not be used.
6-344
Chapter 10
Steel Structures
10.12.4 Application
10.12.4.1 Painting shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. Unless otherwise specified, paint shall
be applied by brush, spray, roller or any combination thereof peculiar to the paint being applied.
10.12.4.2 Each application of l'aint shall be thoroughly cured and any skip, thin areas, or other deficiencies
corrected before the succeedmg application. The surface of the paint oeing covered shall be free from
moisture, dust, grease, or any other deleterious materials that would prevent the bond of the succeeding
applications. In spot painting, old paint which lifts after the first application shall be removed by scraping
ana the area repamtea before the next application.
10.12.4.3 Brushes, when used, shall have sufficient body and length of bristle to spread the paint in a
uniform film. Paint shall be evenly spread and thoroughly brushed out.
10.12.4.4 Rollers, when used, shall be of a type that does not leave a stippled texture in the paint film.
10.12.4.5 Mechanical mixers shall be used to mix paint. Prior to applying, the paint shall be mixed for a
sufficient length of time to thoroughly mix the pigment and vehicle together, ana shall be kept thoroughly
mixed during its application.
10.12.4.6 Paints shall be formulated readY. for application and no thinning will be allowed unless otherwise
provided in the applicable materials speCification for the paint being used.
10.12.4.7 The dry film thickness of the paint will be measured in place with a calibrated magnetic film
thickness gauge.
10.12.4.8 The thickness of each application shall be limited to that which will result in uniform drying
throughout the paint film.
10.12.4.9 Succeeding applications of paint shall be of such shade as to contrast with the paint being covered.
10.12.4.10 Zinc-rich primers shall be applied by spray methods. On areas inaccessible to spray application,
the paint may be applied by brush or daubers. .
10.12.4.11 Structures shall be blast cleaned and painted with the total thickness of undercoats before
erection. After erection and before applying subsequent paint, all areas where paint has been damaged or
has deteriorated and·all exposed unpamtea surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and spot painted with
undercoats to the specified thickness.
10.12.4.12 Surfaces exposed to the atmosphere and which would be inaccessible for painting after erection
shall be painted the full number of applications prior to erection.
10.12.4.13 Unless otherwise specified, steelworks in contact with concrete need not be painted.
10.12.4.14 Surfaces inaccessible after shop assembly shall be cleaned and painted prior to assembly except
for contact surfaces.
10.12.4.15 Paint is permitted unconditionally in bearing type connections. For slip-critical connections
where the design is oased on special faying surface conditions, the surfaces in contact shall not be painted.
10.12.4.16 Unless otherwise specified in the design documents, surfaces within 50 mm of any field weld
location shall be free of materials that would prevent proper welding or produce toxic fumes during
welding.
10.12.5 Protection against Damage

10.12.5.1 Adequate protective measure shall be taken to prevent damage to the work.
10.12.5.2 Paint or paint stains that result in an unsightly appearance on surfaces not designated to be
painted shall be removed or obliterated.
10.12.5.3 All painted surfaces that are marred or damaged shall be repaired with materials and to a
condition equal to that of the coating specified.
10.12.6 Painting Galvanized Surfaces

10.12.6.1 All galvanized surfaces that are to be painted shall first be cleaned by washing with mineral spirit
solvent sufficient to remove any oil, grease, or other materials foreign to the galvanized coating.
10.12.6.2 After washing, all areas shall be roughened by abrasive blasting. Galvanizing shall not be removed
by this operation.
10.12.6.3 After preparation, all galvanized surfaces that are to be painted shall be covered with one
application of zinc aust-zinc oxide primer. The zinc dust-zinc oxide paint shall be applied by spraying to
produce a complete covering of the galvanized surfaces.

Part 6
Structural Design
10.12.6.4 After the application of zinc dust-zinc oxide paint one application of pretreatment, vinyl wash
primer shall be appliea to such surfaces. The vinyl wash primer sftall be applied by spraying to produce
uniform wet film on the surface.
10.13 DESIGN DOCUMENTS
10.13.1 General
This section covers the requirements for presentation of design documents including drawings for
construction of steel structures. These requirements shall be met in addition to those specified in Chapter 1,
General Design Requirements.
10.13.2 Drawings
The design plans shall show a complete design with sizes, sections and relative locations of the various
members. The stiffeners and bracings shall also be shown. Floor levels, column centres and offset shall be
dimensioned. Drawings shall be drawn to a scale large enough to show the information clearly.
Design documents shall indicate the type or types of construction as defined in Sec 10.4 including the loads
and design requirements necessary for preparation of shop drawings, shears, moments and axial forces to be
resisted by all members and their connections.
Where joints are to be assembled with high strength bolts, the design documents shall indicate the
connection type (slip-critical, tension or bearing).
Camber of trusses, beams and girders, if required, shall be shown in the design documents.
10.13.3 Standard Symbols and Nomenclature

Welding and inspection symbols used on plans and shop drawings shall preferably be the American
Welding Society symbols. Other welding symbols may be used, proviaed a complete explanation thereof is
shown in the design documents.
10.13.4 Notation for Welding

Notes shall be made in the design documents and on the shop drawings of those joints or groups of joints in
which the welding sequence and technique of welding shall be carefully controlled to minimize distortion.
Weld lengths called for in the design documents and on the shop drawings shall be the net effective lengths.
Related Appendix
6-346
CHAPTER
Timber Structures
11.1 SCOPE
This section of the Code provides minimum requirements for the design and construction of timber structures.
11.2 NOTATION
Unless otherwise explicitly stated, the following units shall be implicit for the corresponding quantities in the
design and other expressions provided in this chapter.
Length mm
Area n:un2
Moment of inertia mm4
Force N
Moment, torsion Nmm
Stress, strength N/mm2
width of beam
restraint factor for spaced column
depth of beam
depth of beam at notch
least dimension of column
least overall width of box column
least overall dimension of core in box column
modulus of elasticity in bending
calculated bending stress in extreme fibre
calculated average axial compressive stress
calculated axial tensile stress
permissible bending stress on the extreme fibre
permissible stress in axial compression
permissible stress in axial compression normal to grain
Part 6 6-347
Structural Design
Part 6
Structural Design
permissible stress in compression parallel to grain

lp permissible compressive stress along the line of action of the load
�:
I
permissible stress in tension parallel to grain
horizontal shear stress
moment of inertia of a section
Ke design buckling factor
Kl modification factor for change in slope of grain
K2 modification factor for change in duration of loading
�:)
Ks
K6
K7 =
form factors
�:
modification factor for bearing stress
K8 = constant equal to 0.671

f
K9 = constant equal to .!!..

2
� UE
Sf
pp
KlO constant equal to 0.671 �

f. span of a beam or truss
cp shank diameter of the nail or bolt

ratio of the thickness of the compression flange to the depth of the beam
P1
Q = moment of area above or below the neutral axis about neutral axis, mm3
ql ratio of the total thickness of web or webs to the overall width of the beam
s = effective length of solid and box columns; distance between points of lateral support of spaced
columns
t = nominal thickness of planks
u constant for a particular thickness of the plank, See K9 and Sec 11.7.3(e)
v = vertical reaction or shear at a section
y a factor determining the value of form factor K4, See Sec 11.6.3.1(c)(ii)
(J angle of load to grain direction.
11.3 TERMINOLOGY
This section provides an alphabetical list of the terms used in this chapter of the Code. In case of any conflict
or contradiction between a definition given in this section and that in Part 1, the meaning provided in this
section shall govern for interpretation of the provisions of this chapter.
11.3.1 Structural Purpose Definitions

BASIC OR ULTIMATE STRESS: The stress which is determined on small clear specimen of timber, and does
not take into account the effect of naturally occurring phenomenon and other factors.
LOCATION: Location is generally referred to as exact position where a timber is used.
INSIDE LOCATION: Locations in structures where timber remain continuously dry and protected from
weather, such as inside a building.
OUTSIDE LOCATION: Locations in structures where timber is occasionally subject to wetting and drying
such as open sheds and outdoor structures.
·
WET LOCATION: Locations in structures where timber is almost continuously damp or wet due to contact
with the earth or water, such as pile and timber foundation.
PERMISSIBLE STRESS : The basic stress as modified by modification factors according to defects, locations
and particulars of design.
SPACED COLUMN: Two or more individual members with their longitudinal axis parallel, separated at the
ends and middle points by blocking and joined at the ends by timoer connectors capable of developing
required shear resistance.
11.3.2 Definitions of Defects in Timber

CHECK: A separation of fibres extending along the grain which is confined to one face of a piece of timber.
6-348
Chapter 11
Timber Structures
COMPRESSION WOOD : Abnormal wood formed on the lower sides of branches and inclined stems of
coniferous trees. It is darker and harder than norma.! wood but relatively low in strength for its weight. It can
be usually identified by wide ecce?tric growth rings with abnormally high proportion of growth latewood.
DEAD KNOT : A knot in which the layers of annual growth are not completely intergrown with those of the
adjacent wood. It is surrounded by pitch or bark. The encasement may be partial or complete.
DECAY OR ROT: Disintegration of wood tissues caused by wood destroying fungi or other micro-organisms.
DECAYED KNOT: A knot softer than the surrounding wood and containing decay.
DIAMETER OF KNOT : The maximum distance between the two points farthest apart on the periphery of a
round knot, on the face on which it becomes visible. In the case of a spike or a splay knot, the maximum width
of the knot visible on the face on which it appears shall be taken as its diameter.
DISCOLORATION: A change from the normal colour of the wood which does not impair the strength of the
wood.
KNOT: A branch base or limb embedded in the tree by natural growth.
KNOT HOLE: A hole left in the timber due to the removal of a knot.
LIVE KNOT : A knot free from decay and other defects, in which the fibres are firmly intergrown with those
of the surrounding wood.
LOG: An unhewn piece of felled tree or similar mass of wood.
LOOSE GRAIN : A defect on a flat swan surface caused by the separation or raising of wood fibres along the
growth rings.
LOOSE KNOT: A knot that is not held firmly in place by growth and that cannot be relied upon to remain in
place.
MOULD : A soft vegetative growth that forms on wood in damp and stagnant atmosphere. It is the least
harmful type of fungus, usually confined to the surface of the wood.
PITCH POCKET : Accumulation of resin between growth rings of coniferous wood as seen on the cross
section.
SAP STAIN : Discoloration of the sapwood mainly due to fungi.
SAPWOOD : The outer layer of log, which contains living cells and food material in the growing trees. The
sapwood is usually lighter in colour and is readily attacked by insects and fungi.
SHAKE : A partial or complete separation between adjoining layers of tissues as seen in end surfaces.
SLOPE OF GRAIN: The inclination of the fibres to the longitudinal axis of the member.
SOUND KNOT : A tight knot solid across its face, free from decay and at least as hard as the surrounding
wood.
SPLIT : A crack extending from one face to another that runs along the grain of a piece of wood.
TIGHT KNOT: A knot so held by growth or position as to remain firm in position in the piece of wood.
WANE: The original rounded surface of a tree remaining on a piece of converted timber.
WARP: A deviation in sawn timber from a true plane surface or distortion due to stresses causing departure
from a true plane.
WORM HOLES : Cavities caused by worms.
11.4 MATERIALS
11.4.1 The species of timber recommended for structural purpose with their engineering characteristics are given in
Table 6.11.1.
11.4.2 The general characteristics like durability and treatability of the species of timber are also given in
Table 6.11.1. Species other than those recommended in Table 6.11.1 may be allowed, provided basic stress
characteristics are determined.
Note:
For obtaining basic stress figures of the unlisted species, reference may be made to Forest Research Institute, Chittagong.

Part 6
Structural Design
Table 6.11.1
Species for Constructional Purposes
Standard Average Weight and *Dura- **Treata- #Refractori- *#Permissible Lateral

Trade Local Name Botanical Name Range of Weights at bility bility ness to Air Group Strength of Nail in
Name 12% Moisture Content Seasoning Double Shear (kN)
(leN/cubic metre)
Babla Babla, Babul Acacia nilotica 7.80 HD T MR A 1.50 (1.10)

(7.50-8.50) 2.75 (1.35)
Banderhol Banderhola, Kacha, Duabanga 4.75 MD ET MR B -
Lampati, Ramdalu, sonneratioides (4.45-5.10)

Kandula Jarul
Bhadi Sil Bhadi, Kapila Garuga plannata 7.30 D VHT - -

-
(6.80-7.80)
Bhadi Kainjal Bhadi Bischofia javanica 6.70 D VHT - - -
(5.50-7.10)
Boilam Boilam Anisoptera glabra 5.60 D T - - -
(4.80-6.20)
Chapa! ish Chaplish, Cham Artocarpus 5.25 HD T MR B -
Chambal, Chram chaplasha (4.00-6.80)
Champa Champa-ful Champas- Michelia champaca 6.30 - -

MR A -
sundi, Champa Teak (4.80-7.00)

Chambal
Chickrassi Chickrassi, Chabarassi, Chickrassia 6.40 HD VHT MR A -
Chittagong Wood tabularis (4.80-8.15)
Civit Civit, Amchundul Swintonia floribunda 6.50 NO ET LR A -
(4.80-7.70)
Dakroom Dakroom, Rangkat Mitragyna- 6.70 - - HR A -
Bhuti Awal pervifolia (5.50-7.20)
Gamar Gamari, Gamar, Gmelina arborea 4.70 HD VHT MR B -
Joginichakra, Gamber (4.00-5.90)
Gaijan Gaijan, Dhullya Dipterocarpusalatus 7.05 D ET MR A 1.90 (0.90)

gaijan, Dholi gaijan (6.00-8.00) 1.95 (0.95)
Goran Goran Geriops roxbarghiana 8.50 - - - - -

(6.90-9.40)
Jarul Jarul, Sidha jarul Lagerstroemia Spp. 6.40 . MD VHT MR A -
(5.00-8.10)
Jam Dhakijam, Nalijam Syzygium Spp. 8.05 MD VHT HR B -
(7.00-9.90)
Kanthal Kanthal Artocarpus 5.25 D MT MR B -
integrifolia (4.00-7.50)
Kankra Kankra, Natinga Bruguiera conjugata 8.60 - -

HR A -
(7.70-9.50)
Lali Lali Amoora wallichii 5.70 - - - - -
(4.80-6.50)
Lohakat Lohakat, Pyinkado Xylia dolabriformis 9.85 - - - - -

(8.20-1.000)
Minjiri Minjiri Cassia siamea 6.80 - - - - -
(5.00-7.10)
(Continued to next page)
6-350
Chapter 11
Timber Structures
Table 6.11.1 (Contd.) -
Species for Constructional Purposes
Standard Average Weight and *Dura- **Treata- #Refractori- *#Permissible Lateral

Trade Local Name Botanical Name Range of Weights at bility bility ness to Air Group Strength of Nail in
Name 12% Moisture Content Seasoning Double Shear (kN)
(kN/cubic metre)
Neem Neem Azadiracnta indica 6.60 MD VHT MR A -

-
(6.20-7.00)
Passur Passur, Ail Xylocarpus 7.40 MR A -

rolloensis - (6.50-8.00)
Pitraj Pitraj, Rata, Rohini, Aphenamixis 5.70 MD VHT MR B -
Raina, Awpata, polystachya (4.65-6.40)

Okeyeng
Sal Sal, gajari Sisrea robusta 8.70 HD VHT HR A 2.30(1.15)

(6.75-10.50) 3.05 (2.00)
Sissoo Sissoo Dalbergia sissoo 7.90 MR A 1.7(1.5)

(7 .45-8.55)
Sonalu Sonalu, Banderiathi Cassia fistula 5.60 - - - - -

(4.80-6.10)
Sundri Sundri Seritiera fomes 10.50 D T MR A -

(9.20-11.00)
Tali Tali, Lali, Kurta, Palaquium 6.90 HD VHT MR A -
Dudha Polyanthum (610-880)
Teak Teak,Shegun,Sakkan Tectena grandis 6.60 HD HT MR A 1.45(0.00)

(5.30-8.15) 2.80 (1.30)
Telsur Telsur, Tersol Hopea odorata 6.95 D ET MR A -

(5.95-7.15)
Toon Toon, Suruj,Surujbed, Cedrela toona 4.80 1.00 (0.80)

Serbet, Kuma Poma (3.70-5.95) HD VHT LR B 0.90 (0.40)
Note:
• Durability
HD Highly durabile: Life more than 36 months
D Durable : Life 25-36 months
MD Moderately durable: Life 10-25 months
ND Nondurable: Life upto 10 months
•• Treatability
3
ET - Easily treatable, penetration more than 40 mm, absorption above 120 kg/m
3
T Treatable, penetration range 20-40 mm, absorption range 80 128 kg/m-
3
MT Moderately treatable, penetration range 10- 20 mm, absorption range 48-80 kg/m
3
VHT - Very hard to treat, absorption below 48 kg/ m .
# Refractoriness to Air Seasoning

HR Highly refractory
MR Moderately refractory
LR - - Less refractory
•# Permissible lateral strength (in double shear) of 3.55 mm � nails 80 mm long and 5 mm � nails 150 mm long at lengthening
joints and node joints (values in braket are for node joints). The values shown in italics refer to 5 mm � nails. The space marked " - "
indicates that information is lacking.

Part 6
Structural Design
11. 4.3 The moisture content of timber for various positions in buildings shall be as given in Table 6.11.2.
11.4.4 Sawn Timber

11.4.4.1 Sizes : Preferred cut sizes of timber for use in structural components shall be as given in Tables
6. 11.3, 6.11.4 and 6.11.5.
Table 6.11.2
Recommended Percentage of Moisture Content Values
Structural Elements 20
Doors and Windows 16
Table 6.11.3
Preferred Cut Sizes of Structural Timber for Roof Trusses
(From 3 to 20 Metres)
Thickness Width
(mm) (mm)
20 40 50 60 80 - - - -
25 40 50 60 80 100 120 140 160

30 40 50 60 80 100 120 140 160
40 - - 60 80 100 120 140 160
so· - - 60 80 100 120 140 160
60 - - - 80 100 120 140 160
80 - - - - 100 120 140 160
Note: Preferred lengths of timber: 1m, 1.5 m, 2m, 2.5 m and 3m.
Table 6.11.4
Preferred Cut Sizes of Structural Timber for Roof Purlins, Rafters, Floor Beams, etc.
Thickness Width
(mm) (mm)
60 80 100 120 140 160 - -
80 100 120 140 160 -
I
- -
100 - - - 140 160 180 200

Note: Preferred lengths of timber: 2m, 2.5 m, 3m and 3.5 m.
Table 6.11.5
Preferred Cut Sizes of Structural Timber for Partition Framing and Covering
Thickness Width
(mm) (mm)
10 - 50 - 80 100 - - - -
15 - 50 - 80 100 120 160 - -
20 - - - 80 100 120 160 - -
25 - - - 80 100 120 160 200 240

30 - - - 80 100 120 160 200 240
40 40 50 60 80 100 120 160 200 240
50 - 50 60 80 100 120 160 200 240
60 - - - - - 120 160 200 240
80 - - - - 100 120 160 200 240
Note :Preferred lengths of tm
i ber : 0.5 m, 1m, 1.5 m, and 2m.
11.4.4.2 Tolerances : Permissible tolerance in measurements of cut sizes of structural timber shall be as
follows:
a) For width and thickness:
1) Up to and including 100mm +3 mm

-0 mm
2) Above 100mm +6 mm
-3 mm
b) For length + 10 mm
-0 mm
6-352
Chapter 11
Timber Structures
11.4.5 Grading of Structural Timber

11.4.5.1 Based on the permissible defects given in Table 6.11.6, cut sizes of structural timber shall be graded
as i) Grade 1, ii) Grade 2 and iii) Grade 3 after seasoning.
11.4.5.2 The following defects shall apply to structural timber.
a) Prohibited Defects: Loose grains, splits, compressive wood in coniferous timber, heartwood rot, sap rot,
warp, worm holes made by powder post beetles and pitch pockets shall not be permitted.
b) Permissible Defects: Defects specified in Table 6.11.6 shall be permissible.
c) Location of Defects : The influence of defects in timber is different for different location in the structural
element. During construction these should be so placed that they do not have any adverse effect on the
members.
Table 6.11.6
Permissible Defects for Cut Sizes of Timber for Structural Use
(All dimensions are in mm)
Defects Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3

i) Wane Shall be permissible at Shall be permissible at its Shall be permissible at its
its deepest portion up to deepest portion up to a limit deepest portion up to a limit of
a limit of ! of the width of t of the width of the t of the width of the surface
of the surface on which it surface on which it occurs on which it occurs
occurs
ii) Worm holes Other than those due to Other then those due to post Other than those due to
�
powder ost beetles are beetles are permissible powder post beetles are
permissi le permissible
iii) Slope of Shall not be more than 1 Shall not be more than 1 in 15 Shall not be more than 1 in 12
gram in 20
iv) Live knots:
Widths ot wide Permissible Maximum Size ot
faces of cut sizes Live Knot on
of timber
Narrow The Narrow faces The remaining Narrow faces The remaining
faces and remaining central half of central half of
central half
and t of the the wide faces
and t of the the wide faces
t of the of the wide faces close to faces close to
faces close faces edges edges
to edges
75 10 10 19 19 29 30
100 13 13 25 25 38 39
150 19 19 38 38 57 57
200 22 25 44 50 66 75
250 25 29 50 57 75 87
300 27 38 54 75 81 1 14
350 29 41 57 81 87 123
400 32 44 63 87 96 132
450 33 47 66 93 99 141
500 35 50 69 100 105 150
550 36 52 72 103 108 156
600 38 53 75 106 114 159
v) Checks and shakes:
Face width of Permissible Depth
the timber (Max.)
75 12 25 36
100 18 35 54
150 25 50 75
200 33 65 99
250 40 81 120
300 50 100 150
350 57 115 171
400 66 131 198
450 76 150 225
500 83 165 270
550 90 181 300
600 100 200 -

Part 6
Structural Design
11.4.6 Suitability
There are two choices as given below:
a) First Choice :The species shall be any one of the following :
i) Untreated heartwood of highest durability as listed in Table 6.11.1.

ii) Treated heartwood of moderate durability and easily treatable as listed in Table 6.11.1.
iii) Heartwood of moderate durability and partially treatable after pressure impregnation.
iv) Sapwood of all classes of durability after thorough treatment with preservative.
b) Second Choice :The species shall be heartwood of moderate durability and very hard to treat (VHT).
11.5 PERMISSIBLE STRESSES
11.5.1 Basic Permissible Stress

a) The permissible stresses for Grade 2 structural timber for different locations shall be as given in
Table 6.11.7, provided that the following conditions are satisfied:
i) The timber shall be of hi!?h or moderate durability and be given suitable treatment where
necessary. If the location is mside and not in contact with the ground, low durability timber may
be used after proper seasoning and preservative treatment given in accordance with BDS 819.
ii) The loads shall be continuous and permanent.
iii) Whenever earthquake or wind forces are considered along with other normal design forces, the
permissible stresses in material may be increased by 33%.
Table 6.11.7
Permissible Stress for Grade 2 Timber
Permissible Stress*
Stress Location N/mm2
Group A Group B
(E=10.0-12.5) (E=5.5-10.0)_
Bending and tension along grain Inside location 12.3 8.4
Outside locations 10.2 7.0
Wet locations 8.1 6.0
Shear Horizontal, all locations** 0.9 0.6
Along grain, all locations 1.3 0.9
Compression parallel to grain Inside locations 7.0 6.4
Outside locations 6 .3 5.6
Compression perpendicular to grain Inside locations 2.2 2.2
Outside locations 1.8 1 .7
.
Whenever earthquake or wind forces are considered along with other normal design forces, the permissible
stresses in material may be increased by 33%.
..
The values of horizontal shears to be used only for beams. In all other cases shear along grain to be used.
b) For other grades of timber, the permissible stresses given in Table 6.11.7 shall be multiplied by the
following factors to obtain the. permissible stresses assuming that the conditions stipulated in
Sec 1 1 . 5 . 1 (a) are satisfied.
i) Grade 1 1.16
ii) Grade3 0.84
c) For low durability timber to be used on outside locations, the permissible stresses obtained from Sec
11.5.1 and 11.5.2 shall be multiplied by 0.8.
11.5.2 Modification Factors for Permissible Stresses

11.5.2.1 Change in Slope of Grain: When the timber has not been graded due to change in slope of grain
and has major defects like slope of grain, knots and checks or shakes but the slopes and defects are within
permissible value, the permissible stress given in Table 6.11.7 shall be multiplied by modification factor K1 for
different slopes of grain as given in Table 6.11.8.
11.5.2.2 Change in Duration of Load: For different duration of design load the permissible stresses given
in Table 6.11.7 shall be multiplied by the modification factor K2 given in Table 6.11.9.
6-354
Chapter 11
Timber Structures
Table 6.11.8
Modification Factor K1 to Allow for Change in Slope of Grain
Slope Modification Factor K1

Beams, Joists and Ties Posts or Col umns
1 in 10 0.80 0.74
1 in 12 0.90 0.82
1 in 14 0.98 0.87
< 1 in 15 1.00 1.00
Table 6.11.9
Modification Factor K2 for Change in Duration of Loading
Duration of Loading Modification Factor K2

Continuous 1.00
Two months 1.15
Seven days 1.25
Wind and earthquake 1.33
Instantaneous or impact 2.00
11.6 BEAMS
11.6.1 Design Consideration ·
All structural members in a building shall be car.able of sustaining the worst combination of all loadings (see
Sec 11.6.2) without exceeding the limits of spectfied allowable stress.
11.6.2 Loads
The loads and their combination shall conform to those given in Chapter 2, Loads.
11.6.3 Solid Beams

11.6.3.1 Definitions
a) Net Section
i) The net section is obtained by deducting from the gross section the projected area of all material
removed by boring, grooving or other means.
ii) The net section used in calculating load carrying capacity of a member shall be the least net section
determined as above by passing a plane or series of connected planes transversely through the
members.
iii) Notches shall in no case remove more than one quarter of the section.
b) Effective Span : The effective span of beams shall be taken as the distance from face of supports plus
one-half ofthe required length of bearing at each end. For continuous beams the span may be measured
from centre of bearing at the supports over which the beam is continuous.
c) Form Factors : The following form factors shall be applied to the bending stress:
i) Rectangular Section : For rectangular sections of different depth, the form factor K3 shall be taken
as:
K 3 =0.81
{ D2 +89400 } (11.6.1)
D2 +55000
For beams having depth less than or equal to 300 mm, form factor K3 shall not be applicable.
ii) Box Beam and 1-Beams: For box beams and 1-beams form factor K4 shall be obtained by using the
following formula
K 4 =0.8+0.8Y { D2 +89400
1
} (11.6.2)
D2 +55000
where,

Part 6
Structural Design
iii) Solid Circular Cross-Sections : The form factor K5 shall be taken as 1.18 for solid circular cross
sections.
iv) Square Cross-Sections: The form factor K6 shall be taken as 1.41 for square cross-sections where
the load is in the direction of diagonal.
v) Width : The minimum width of flexural member shall be 50 mm or one-fiftieth of the span
whichever is greater.
vi) Depth: The depth of flexural member shall not be taken more than three times its width without
lateral stiffening.
vii) Stiffening: Flexural members having a depth exceeding three times its width or a span exceeding
50 times its width or both shall be latera1ly restrained at a distance not exceeding 50 times its
width to control twisting or buckling.
viii) Deflection: The deflection for flexural members (except nail laminated beams) supporting brittle
materials like gypsum ceilings, slates, tiles and asbestos sheets shall not exceed f /360. The
deflection in the case of other flexural members shall not exceed f /240 and in the case of
cantilevers f /180.
11.6.3.2 Shear
a) The following formula shall apply:
i) Gimeral formula: H= VQ (11.6.3)

Ib
3V
ii) Rectangular beams: H= (11.6.4)
2bD
3V D
iii) Notched beams with tension notches and supports H= (11.6.5)
2bDf
(See Sec 11.6.3.2(c))
b) In determining the vertical reaction V, the following deduction in loads may be made:
i) The critical section shall be at a distanced from the face of the support.
ii) All concentrated loads in the vicinity of the supports may be reduced by the reduction factor
applicable according to Table 6.11.10.
Table 6.11.10
Reduction Factor for Concentrated Loads in the Vicinity of Supports
Di sta nce of load l.SD 2D 2.5D 3D

from the nearest
or less or more
support
Reduction factor 0.6 0.4 0.2 No reduction
Note: For intermediate distances, percentage reduction may be obtained by linear interpolation.
c) Unless the local stress is calculated and found to be within the permissible stress, flexural member shall
not be cut, notched or bored except as follows:
i) Notches may be cut in the top or bottom of the beam neither deeper than D /5 nor farther than f/6
from the edge of the support.
ii) Hole not larger in diameter than D I 4 may be bored in the middle third of the depth and length, and
iii) If holes or notches are positioned at a distance greater than 3D from the face of the nearest
support, the net remaining depth shall be used in determining the bending strength.
11.6.3.3 Bearing : The ends of flexural members shall be supported in recesses which provide adequate
ventilation to prevent dry rot and shall not be enclosed. Flexural members except roof timbers which are
supported directly on masonry or concrete shall have a length of bearing not less than 75 mm. Members
supported on corbels, offsets and roof timbers on a wall shall bear immediately on and be fixed to wall plate
not less than 75 mm x 40 mm in size.
6-356
Chapter 11
Timber Structures
Timber joists or floor planks shall not be supported on the top flange of steel beams unless the bearing stress,
calculated on the net bearing as shaped to fit the beam, is less than the permissible compressive stress
perpendicular to the grain /pn specified in Table 6.11.7.
i) Length and position of bearings : At any bearing on the side of the grain of timber, the permissible
stress in compression perpendicular to grain, /pn is dependent on the length and position of oearing,
i) The permissible stresses given in Table 6.11.7 for compression perpendicular to the grain are also the
permissible stresses for bearing of any length at the end of a member and for bearing 150 mm or more in
length at any other position.
iii) For bearing less than 150 mm in length located 75 mm or more from the end of a member as shown in
Fig 6.11.1 the permissible stress may be multiplied by the modification factor K7 given in Table 6.11.11.
iv) No allowance need be made for the difference in intensity of the bearing stress due to bending of a
beam.
'
� Smm
(min)
'/
J1
150 mm (max)
Bearing
/1
v.
------7
Fig. 6.11. 1 Position of End Bearings
Table 6.11.11
Modification Factor K7 f or Bearing Stresses
Length of bearing, mm 15 25 40 50 75 100 150 or more
Modification factor, K7 1.67 1.40 1.25 1.2 1.13 1.1 1.0
v) The bearing area should be calculated as the net area after allowance for the amount of wane as
permitted in Table 6.11.6.
vi) For bearing stress under a washer or a small plate, the same coefficient specified in Table 6.11.11 may
be taken for a bearing with a length equal to tne diameter of the washer or the width of the small plate.
vii) When the direction of the stress is at an angle to the direction of the grain in any structural member, the
permissible bearing stress in that member shall be calculated by the following formula.
(11.6.6)
11.6.4 Nail Laminated Beams

11.6.4.1 Method of Arrangement: The beam is made up of 20 to 30 mm thick planks placed vertically with
joints staggered in the adjoining planks with a minimum distance of 300 mm. The planks are laminated with
the help of wire nails at regular intervals to take up horizontal shear developed in the beam besides keeping
the planks in position (see Fig 6.11.2).
11.6.4.2 Sizes o f Planks and Beams

a) The recommended thickness of planks for fabrication of nail laminated beams are 20 mm, 25 mm and
30mm.
b) In case of nail laminated timber beams, the maximum depth and length of planks shall be limited to 250 mm
and 2000 mm respectively.

Part 6
Structural Design
)!• •I• •I• •I• •IE 4 6 75,300
25 Camber
Elevation
4000
1600 '
1600 800
1200 1600 1200
800 1600 1600
f-- 400 1600 1600 400 ____,
4 6 25 ' 100
Plan
(All dimensions in mml
Fig. 6.11.2 Typical Nail Laminated Timber Beam
c) In order to obtain the overall width of vertical nail laminated beams, the number and thickness of planks
and size of wire nail shall be as specified in Table 6.11.12. The protruding portion of the nail shalloe cut
off or clenched across the grains.
11.6.4.3 Design Considerations

a) The provisions of Sec 11.6.1 through 11.6.3 shall also be applicable to the design of nail laminated beams.
b) Permissible lateral strength of mild steel wire nails shall be as given in Table 6.11.1 which shall apply to
nails that have their points cut flush with the faces. For nails clenched across the grains, the strength
may be increased by 2.0 per cent.
Table 6.11.12
Number and Size of Planks and Nails for Nail Laminated Beams
Overall Width ot No. ot Planks Thickness ot each Size ot Nails

Beam (mm) Plank (mm) Length Dia
(m m) (mm)
50 2 25 80 3.55
60 3 20 80 3.55
70 3 2 x25 and 1 x20 80 3.55
80 4 20 100 4
90 3 30 100 4
100 4 25 125 5
1 10 4 3 x 30 and 1 x20 125 5
120 4 30 150 5
150 5 30 150 5
Note: A number of combinations of different thickness of planks may be adopted as long
as the minimum and maximum thickness of planks are adhered to.
11.6.4.4 Deflection : The deflection in the case of nail laminated timber beams, joists, purlins, battens and
other flexural members supporting brittle materials like gypsum, tiles and asbestos sheets shall not exceed
6-358
Chapter 11
Timber Structures
faa . The deflection in case of other flexural members shall not exceed � of the span in the case of beams and
joists, and $ in case of cantilevers.
11.6.4.5 Arrangement of Nails

75 mm shall be used
a) A minimum number of four nails in a vertical row at regular interval not exceeding
may, however be
to take UJ> horizontal shear as well a§i to .k�ep the plaiiks in positi.on. This interval
limited to 50 mm instead of 75 mm near the JOmts of the planks .
b) Shear shall be calculated at various points of the beam and the number of nails required shall be
accommodated within the distance equal to the depth of the beam, with a minimum of 4 nails in a row at
a standard spacing as shown in Fig 6.11.3.
� : : :
• + •
I 125 25 + • +
r; �50+: -75----1·:�-<1· -75----1:

.._____________--�
1 �� 0 : -7 !+
________________
5+ 5 75----1
: �
Ia) I b)
For 3.55 mm and 4 mm Diameter Nails For 5 mm Diameter Nails
(All Dimensions in mml
Fig. 6.11.3 Standard Lengthwise Spacing in Nail Laminated Beam
c) If the depth of the beam is more, then the vertical intermediate spacing of nails may be increased
proportionately.
d) If the nails required at a point are more than that can be accommodated in a row, then these shall be
provide� lengt� wise of the beam within the distance equal to the depth of the beam at standard
lengthwiSe spacmg.
e) For nailed laminated beam minimum depth of 80 mm for 355 mm and 4 mm diameter nails, and 125 mm for 5
mm diameter nails shall be provided.
11.7 COLUMNS
11.7.1 Design Consideration

a ) The formulae given for columns are for pin-ended condition and they should be modified according to the
value of the I<; as given in Table 6.11.13.
Table 6.11.13
Values of Design Buckling Factor, Ke for Different End Conditions
(S= fKe)
Support Condition
One End Other End Ke
Rotation Translation Rotation Translation
Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed 0.65
Fixed Fixed Free Fixed 0.8
Free Fixed Free Fixed 1.0
Fixed Fixed Fixed Free 1.2
Fixed Fixed Free Free 2.1
Free Fixed Fixed Free 2.4

Part 6
Structural Design
b) In the design of an intermediate or long column, gross section shall be used in calculating load carrying
capacity of the column.
11.7.2 Solid Columns

Solid columns shall be classified into short, intermediate and long columns depending upon their slenderness
ratio (S/d)
as follows :
i) Short columns are those where Sfd < 11

ii) Intermediate columns are those where 11 � Sfd � K8
iii) Long columns are those where Sfd > K8
a) For short columns, the permissible compressive stress fpc shall be
(11.7.1)
b) For intermediate columns the permissible compressive stress fpc shall be:
(11.7.2)
c) For long columns, the permissible compressive stress /pc shall be:
0.30E
/ pc = (11.7.3)
(�Y
d) In case of solid columns Sid ratio shall not exceed 50.
e) The permissible load on a column of circular cross-section shall not exceed that permitted for a square
column of an equivalent cross-sectional area.
11.7.3 Built-up Columns- Box Columns

a) Box columns shall be classified into short, intermediate and long columns as follows:
i) Short columns are those where
5
ii) Intermediate columns are those where 8 � � K9
(dr +di)
and
iii)
b) For short columns, the permissible compressive stress /pc shall be:
/ pc = / pp (11.7.4)
c) For intermediate columns, the permissible compressive stress /pc shall be:
(11.7.5)
6-360
Chapter 11
Timber Structures
_
d) For long columns, the permissible compressive stress fpc shall be :
0.30 UE
f (11.7.6)
"'- [ (d/+d! J
e) The following values of U which depend upon plank thickness t shall be used in (d) above
t(mm) u
25 0.80
50 0.6 0
11.7.4 Built-up Columns - Spaced Columns

The following formula shall be applicable to spaced columns.
a) For short columns, the permissible compressive stressfpc shall be:
f pc=fpp (11.7.7)
b) For intermediate columns the permissible compressive stress shall be
(11.7.8)
c) For long columns the permissible compressive stressfpc shall be:
(11.7.9)
Where the restraint factor Cr, shall be determined according to case (i) or case (ii) as explained below
and shown in Fig 6.11.4.
i) Cr 2.5 when the centroid of connectors or connector group in the end block is within S/20 from
=
the column end.
ii) Cr = 3.0 when the centroid of connectors or connector group in the end block is between S/20 and
S/10 from the column end.
d) For individual members of spaced columns, Sid ratio shall not exceed 80.
11.7.5 Structural Members Subjected to Bending and Axial Stress

11.7.5.1 Structural members subjected to both bending and axial compression shall be designed to comply
with the following formula :
fcc +feb �1 (11.7.10)

fpc f pb
11.7.5.2 Structural members subject to both bending and axial tension shall be designed to comply with the
following formula
(11.7.11)

Part 6
Structural Design
End Block
Condition Iii with the connectors within

1 120 from the column end.
t, and � Distances from centre to centre of

lateral supports of continuous spaced
columns, and from end to end of simple
spaced columns.
/3 Distances from centre of connectors, in

end blocks, to centre of spacer block.
Dimension of least side of i�dividual

member.
Dimension of wide face of individual

member.
Condition liil with the connector placed from

1120 to I 110 from the column end.
Fig. 6.11.4 Spaced Column, Connector Joined
11.8 JOINTS
11.8.1 Common Steel Wire Nail Joints

11.8.1.1 Design Consideration
a) Where a number o f nails are used i n a j oint, the allowable load i n lateral resistance shall b e the sum of
the allowable load for the individual na1ls, provided that the centroid of the group of these nails lie on
the axis of the member and the spacing conforms to Sec 11.8.1.5. Where a large number of nails are to be
provided at a joint, they shall be so arranged that there are more rows than ilie number of nails in a row.
b) Nails shall as far as practicable, be arranged so that the line of force in a member passes through the
centroid of the group of nails. Where this is not practicable, allowance shall be made for any eccentricity
in computing the maximwn load on the fixing nailS as well as the loads and bending moment in the member.
c) Adjacent nails shall preferably be driven from opposite faces, that is, the nails are driven alternately
from either face.
d) For a rigid joint, a minimum of 2 nails for nodal joints and 4 nails for lengthening joint shall be driven.
e) Two nails in a horizontal row are better than using the same number of nails in a vertical row.
11.8.1.2 Dimension of Members

a) The minimum thickness of the main members in mon<rehord construction shall be 30 mm .
b) The minimum thickness of an individual piece of member in split chord construction shall be 20 mm for
web members and 25 mm for chord members.
c) The space between two adjacent pieces of timber shall be restricted to a maximum of 3 times the thickness
of the individual piece of the chord member. In case of web members, it may be greater for joining facilities.
11.8.1.3 Joint Location :No lengthening joint shall preferably be located at a panel point. Generally not more
than two, but preferably one, lengthening JOint shall oe permitted between two panel JOints of the members.
6-362
Chapter 11
Timber Structures
'
11.8.1.4 Specification and Diameter of Nails
a) The diameter of nails shall be within the limit of one-eleventh to one-sixth of least thickness of members
being connected.
b) The nails shall be galvanized when exposed to saline conditions.
11.8.1.5 Arrangement of Nails : The end distances, edge distances and spacing of nail shall not be less
than those given in (a) and (b) below so as to avoid undue splitting of timber.
a) Lengthening Joints :The requirement of spacing of nails in a lengthening joint shall be as shown in Table
6.11.14 (see rig 6.11.5).
b) Node Joints :The requirement for spacing of nails in node joints shall be as specified in Fig 6.11.6 where
the members are at right angles and as in Fig 6.11.7 where the members are inclined to one another at
angles other than 90° and subject to either pure compression or pure tension.
11.8.1.6 Penetration of Nails

a) For a lap joint when the nails are driven from the side of the thinner member, the length of penetration of
nails in the thicker member shall be one and a half times the thickness of the thinner member subject to a
maximum of the thickness of the thicker member.
b) For butt joints the nails shall be driven through the entire thickness of the joint.
11.8.1.7 Nail Jointed Truss Construction

a) The initial upward camber provided at the centre of the lower chord of nail jointed timber trusses shall
not be less tnan 1/200 for timber structures using seasoned wood and 1 I 100 for unseasoned or partially
seasoned wood.
b) The total combined thickness of the gusset or splice plates on either side of the joint in a mono-chord type
construction shall not be less than one and a half hmes the thickness of the main members subject to a
minimum thickness of 25 mm of individual gusset plate.
Note 1:
The allowable load or lateral strength values of nails shall be as given in Table 6.11.1
Note 2:
The strength data for joints given in this section apply to gusset or splice or fish plates of solid wood. However,
materials other than solid wood may be used for gusset when field tests are made and their strength requirements
have been established.
Table 6.11.14
Spacing of Nails in a Lengthening Joint
Spacing of Nails Type of Stress in the Joint Requirement (Minimum)

End distance Tension 1 2cp
Compression lOcp
In direction of grain Tension lOcp
Compression Scp
Edge distance - Scp
Between rows of nails perpendi- - Scp
cular to the grain
Note: The Sq, distance between rows perpendicular to grain may be increased subject to the availability of
width of the member keeping edge distance constant.
11.8.1.8 The total combined thickness of all spacer blocks or plates or both including outer splice plates, at
any joint in a split chord type construction shall not be less than one and a half times the total truckness of all
main members at that joint.
11.8.2 Bolted Joints

11.8.2.1 Design Consideration
a) Beams shall be designed in accordance with Sec 11. 6.
b) Where a number of bolts are used in a joint, the allowable load in withdrawal or lateral resistance shall
be the sum of the allowable loads for the individual bolts.

Part 6
Structural Design
l
5cjlmin
• + • + • + • + -+-
5cjlmin
+ • + • + • + • -t---
5 cjlmin
• + • + • + • + -+-
5 cjlmin
t : ll l l Ill l :
(a) Monochord Type Butt Joint Subjected to Compression
f �··; 4\··; -11 fif

.,
,----- Effective
End Distance 10cjl min
. ;.
5cjlmin
• + • • + • -+-
5cjlmin
+ • + + • + --+-
5 cjlmin
• + • • + •
Effective End
Distance 5cp min
: I l I
(b) Monochord Type Butt Joint Subjected to Tension
cp = shank diameter of nail
Fig. 6.11.5 Spacing of Nails in a Lengthening Joint (Continued}
6-364
Chapter 11
Timber Structures.
w m;� Distance 10¢ min

50 "" " ' " Eod
1 "�W� 10¢ t 10¢ t

+ + +
t
+
.
• • • •
+ + + 5!11min.
• • • + • -+-
•
+ •
+ •
+ •
+ 5111 min.
-+-
.__
+ + + 5111 min.
• • • + • -+-
Elective Edge
Distance 5¢ min.
(c) Split-Chord Type Butt Joint Subjected to Compression
l12¢min
+
"�
.t
+
t 12¢ min.t 12 ¢min.
+
t �'" t .
5111 min.
• • • + • -+-
+ + + 5+.
• • • + •
+ + + 5111 min.
• • • + • -+-
+ + +5+.
• • • + •
(d) Split-Chord Type Butt Joint Subjected to Tension
. ¢ = Shank Diameter of Nail
Fig. 6.11.5 Spacing of Nails in a Lengthening Joint

Part 6
Structural Design
: : : :
t
5 �Min 5 �Min
Loaded Loaded
Edge Edge
5�
• + • + 10 �
5� + • + •
+ • + •
5111 5111
• + • +
• + • + 5111
10 Ill + • + •
5111*
5111
(a) (b)
10 �
• + •
5111
+ • +
5111
• + •
5111
+ • +
10 �
(c)
* 5 Ill be increased to 10!11 if the designed width of chord member permits.

Otherwise the end of the loaded web member may be extended by 5!11.
� = shank diameter of nail
Fig. 6. 11.6 Spacing of Nails Where Members are at Right Angles to One Another
6-366
Chapter 11
Timber Structures
(a)
Timber Fish
f�" L Bottom Chord

Web Members
1• 10!11 •1• 10!11 .1. 10!11 •1• 10!11 .1

(c)
*Sill may be increased to 10 Ill if the designed width of chord

member permits. Otherwise the end of the loaded web
member may be extended by Sill.
((l= shank diameter of nail
Fig. 6.11.7 Spacing of Nails of Node Joints Where Members are

Inclined to One Another

Part 6
Structural Design
11.8.2.2 Arrangement of Bolts

a) The following spacing of bolts shall be followed in bolted joints (see Fig6.11.8)
i) Spacing of Bolts in a Row- For parallel and perpendicular to grain loading the spacing shall be 4cp
ii) Spacing between Rows of Bolts:

1) For perpendicular to grain loading: 2.5cp to Scp (2.5cp for t/cp ratio of 2 and Scp for t/cp ratio
of6)
Note:
t is the thickness of main member
2) For parallel to grain loading: At least (N-4)cp with a minimum of 2.5cp, where N is the total
number of bolts. Also governed by net area at critical section which shall be 80 per cent of the
total area in bearing under all bolts.
iii) End Distance:

7cp for soft woods in tension, Scp for hardwoods in tension and 4cp for all species in compression.
iv) Edge Distance:

1) For parallel to grain loading l.Scp or half the distance between rows of bolts, whichever is
greater.
2) For perpendicular to grain loading, the loaded edge distance shall be at least 4cp.
b) For inclined members, the spacing given above for perpendicular and parallel to grain of wood may be
used as a guide and bolts arranged at the joint with respect to loading direction.
c) The bolts shall be arranged in such a manner as to pass the centre of resistance of bolts through the
intersection of the gravity axis of the members.
.
d) Staggering of bolts shall be avoided as far as I?ossible in case of members loaded parallel to grain. For
loads acting perpendicular to grain staggering IS preferable to avoid splitting due to weather effects.
e) The bolt holes shall be bored or drilled perpendicular to the surface involved. Forcible driving of the
bolts shall be prohibited to avoid cracking or splitting of members. A bolt hole of 1 mm oversize may be
used as a guide for preboring.
Related Appendix
6-368
Chapter 11
Timber Structures
- -
TLength of
Washer Bolt
Nut
l
• • • • • •
I'
• • • • • •
� 4�
ttl{2.5 5
' Loaded Edge
1.5@ min. � for t/ � ratio

�tor II� ratio 6
2
i
Loaded Edge
• •
• •
I I
l'f1 Unloaded Edge
L{2.5 5 � tor II� ratio

�tor II� ratio 6
2
(a) (b)
Spacing of Bolts in Lengthening Joints Spacing of Bolts at Node Joints

(Joints loaded parallel to grain) (Joints loaded perpendicular to grain)
A IN-4) tJ or 2.5 tJ whichever is greater. Also B = 1.5 tJ or half the distance between rows
governed by net area at critical section !area should be of bolts. whichever is greater
80 per cent of the total area in bearing under all bolts)
tJ Diameter of the bolt
N Total number of bolts in the joint.
Thickness of the main member
Fig. 6.11.8 Typical Spacing of Bolts in Structural Joints

Part6
Structural Design
6-370
CHAPTER l] �
Ferrocement Structures
12.1 SCOPE
This chapter covers selection, standards and testing of ferrocement materials, design criteria and
approaches, construction methods, and maintenance and repair procedures of ferrocement structures. The
provisions of this chapter are consistent with those of Chapter 6, except for the special requirements of
ferrocement, such as reinforcement cover and limits on deflection.
12.2 TERMINOLOGY
12.2.1 Reinforcement Parameters

For the purpose of this chapter, the following parameters characterizing the reinforcement in ferrocement
shall have the definitions given :
VOLUME FRACTION OF REINFORCEMENT (lj-)

:Volume fraction of reinforcement is the total volume of
reinforcement divided by the volume of composite (reinforcement and matrix). For a composite reinforced
with meshes with square openings, v, shalf be equally divided into vfl and v for the fongitudinal and
fl
transverse directions, respectively. For other types of reinforcement, such as expanded metal, Vfl and Vfl
may be unequal. Procedures for computation of V1are shown in Appendix D.
SPECIFIC SURFACE OF REINFORCEMENT (Sr): Sr is the total bonded area of reinforcement (interface area
or area of the steel that comes in contact with the mortar) divided by the volume of the composite.
For a ferrocement plate of width b and depth h, the specific surface of reinforcement can be computed from
(12.2.1)
in which Io is the total surface area of bonded reinforcement per unit length.
Part6 6-371
Structural Design
Part6
Structural Design
The relation between Sr and Vtwhen square grid wire meshes are used is
(12.2.2)
where db is the diameter of the wire. For other types of reinforcement, such as expanded metal, Sri and Srt
may be unequal.
EFFECTIVE MODULUS OF THE REINFORCEMENT : For welded steel meshes, effective modulus of the
reinforcing system, Er shall be taken equal to the elastic modulus of the steel wires. For other meshes, Er
shall be determined from tensile tests on the ferrocement composite as specified in Sec 12.8.
12.2.2 Notation
A, = cross-sectional area of ferrocement composite
As total effective cross-sectional area of reinforcement in the direction considered
= effective cross-sectional area of reinforcement of mesh layer i in the direction considered

width of ferrocement section .
distance from extreme compression fibre to neutral axis
resultant of the compressive stress block in ferrocement
= compressive force in ferrocement layer i
= clear cover of mortar over first layer of mesh \
= diameter or equivalent diameter of reinforcement used
= distance from extreme compression fibre to centroid of reinforcing layer i
elastic modulus of mortar matrix
effective modulus of the reinforcing system
specified compressive strength of ferrocement mortar
yield strength of mesh reinforcement or reinforcing bars
thickness of ferrocement section
nominal moment strength
= nominal tensile strength
= number of layers of mesh; nominal resistance
modular ratio of reinforcement
= mesh opening or size
specific surface of reinforcement
specific surface of reinforcement in the longitudinal direction
= specific surface of reinforcement in the transverse direction
tensile force in the ferrocement layer i
= volume fraction of reinforcement
= minimum required design strength
volume fraction of reinforcement for mesh layer i
volume fraction of reinforcement in the longitudinal direction
volume fraction of reinforcement in the transverse direction
= factor defining depth of rectangular stress block
= global efficiency factor of embedded reinforcement in resisting tension or tensile bending loads
= value of TJ when the load or stress is applied along the longitudinal direction of the mesh
system or rod reinforcement
1'/t value of TJ when the load or stress is applied along the transverse direction of the mesh
reinforcement system or rod reinforcement
1'/9 = value of TJ when the load or stress is applied along a direction forming an angle with the
longitudinal direction
Es; strain of mesh reinforcement at layer i
Ey nominal yield strain of mesh reinforcement = fY

Er
l:o = total surface area of bonded reinforcement per unit length
� = strength reduction factor.
6-372
Chapter12
12.2.3 Definitions
ARMATURE : The total reinforcement system or skeletal reinforcement and mesh for a ferrocement element.
LONGITUDINAL DIRECTION : The roll d�rection (longer direction) of the mesh as produced in plant (see
Fig 6.12.1).
SKELETAL REINFORCEMENT : A planar framework or widely spaced tied steel bars that provides shape
and support for layers of mesh or fabric attached to either side.
SPRITZING : Spraying or squirting a mortar onto a surface.
TRANSVERSE DIRECTION : Direction of mesh normal to its longitudinal direction; also width direction of
mesh as produced in plant (see Fig 6.12.1) .
·
«;
.5: c:
"0 0
� ·-
�o
OlQ)
c: ....
0 ·
...JO
Bar Square Mesh Expanded Mesh Hexagonal Mesh
Transverse Direction
Fig. 6.12.1 Assumed Longitudinal and Transverse Directions of. Reinforcement
12.3 MATERIALS
The material used in ferrocement consists primarily of mortar made with Portland cement, water and
aggregate and the reinforcing mesh.
12.3.1 Cement
The cement shall comply with ASTM C150-85a, ASTM C595-85, or an equivalent standard. The cement shall
be fresh, of uniform consistency, and free of lumps and foreign matter. It shall be stored under dry
conditions for as short a duration as possible.
The choice of a particular cement shall depend on the service conditions. Service conditions can be classified
as electrochemically passive or active. Land based structures such as ferrocement silos, bins, and water tanks
can be considered as passive structures, except when in contact with sulphate bearing soils, in which case
the use of sulphate resistant cement, such as A:STM Type II or Type V, may be necessary.
Blended hydraulic cement conforming to ASTM C595-85 Type 1 (PM), IS, 1 (SM), IS-A, IP, or IP-A can also
be used.
Mineral admixtures, such as fly ash, silica fumes, or blast furnace slag, may be used to maintain a high
volume fraction of fine filler material. When used, mineral admixtures shall comply with ASTM C618-B5
and C989-85a. In addition to the possible improvement of flow ability, these materials also benefit long term
strength gain, lower mortar permeability, and in some cases improved resistance to sulphates and chlorides.
12.3.2 Aggregates
Aggregate used in ferrocement shall be normal weight fine aggregate (sand). It shall comply with ASTM
C33-86 requirements (for fine aggregate) or an equivalent standard. It shall be clean, inert, free of organic
matter and deleterious substances, and relatively free of silt and clay.
The grading of fine aggregate shall be in accordance with the guidelines of Table 6.12.1. However, the
maximum particle size shall be controlled by construction constraints such as mesh size and distance
between layers. A maximum particle size passmg sieve No. 16 (1.18 mm) may be considered appropriate in

Part6
Structural Design
most applications. The sand shall be uniformly graded unless trial testing of mortar workability permits the
use of a gap graded sand.
Table 6.12.1
Guidelines for Grading of Sand
Sieve Size Per cent Passing by Weight

U.S. Standard Square Mesh
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 80-100
No. 16 (1.18 mm) 50-85
No. 30 (0.60 mm) 25-60
No. 50 (0.30 mm) 10-30
No. 100 (0.15 mm) 2-10
Aggregates that react with the alkalis in cement shall be avoided. When aggregates may be reactive, they
shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C227-8l.lf proven reactive, the use of a pozzolan to suppress the
reactivity shall be considered and evaluated in accordance with ASTM C441-81.
12.3.3 Water
The mixing water shall be fresh, clean, and potable. The water shall be relatively free from organic matter,
silt, oil, sugar, chloride, and acidic material. It shall have a J?H � 7 to minimize the reduction in pH of the
mortar slurry. Salt water is not acceptable, but chlorinated drinking water can be used.
12.3.4 Admixtures
Conventional and high range water reducing admixtures (superplasticizers) shall conform to ASTM
C494-86. Water reducmg admixtures may be used to achieve an increase in sand content for the same design
strength or a decrease in water content for the same workability. Decreases in water content result in lower
shrinkage and less surface crazing. Retarders may be used in large time consuming plastering projects,
especially in hot weather conditions.
If watertightness is important, such as in water or liquid retaining structures, special precautions shall be
taken. To achieve waterti�htness, the water cement ratio shall preferably be kept below 0.4, crack widths
limited (see Sec 12.4) and, 1f necessary, waterproofing coatings applied (see Sec 12.6.3).
Mineral admixtures such as fly ash (ASTM C618-85) can be added to the cement to increase workability and
durability. Normally, 15 per cent of the cement can be replaced with mineral admixtures without
appreciably reducing the strength. Pozzolanic admixtures may be added to replace part of the fine
aggregates to improve plasticity. The tendency for some natural pozzolans to absorb w�ter and thus
adversely affect hydration of the cement phase shall be checked by measuring the water of absorption.
A quality matrix can be obtained without using any admixtures if experience has shown its applicability.
-
Admixtures not covered in ASTM standards shall not be used.
12.3.5 Mix Proportioning

The ranges of mix proportions for common ferrocement applications shall be sand cement ratio by weight,
· 1.5 to 2.5, and water cement ratio by weight, 0.35 to 0.5. The nigher the sand content, the higher the required
water content to maintain the same workability. Fineness modulus of the sand, water cement ratio, and sand
cement ratio shall be determined from trial batches to ensure a mix that can infiltrate (encapsulate) the mesh
and develop a strong and dense matrix.
The moisture content of the aggregate shall be considered in the calculation of required water. Quantities of
materials shall preferably be determined by weight.
•
The mix shall be as stiff as possible, provided it does not prevent full penetration of the mesh. Normally the
slump of fresh mortar shalf not exceed 50 mm. For most applications, fhe 28 day compressive strength of 75
by 150 mm moist cured cylinders shall not be less than 35 N I mm2•
12.3.6 Reinforcement
The reinforcement shall be clean and free from deleterious materials such as dust, loose rust, coating of
paint, oil, or similar substances.
Wire mesh with closely spaced wires is the most commonly used reinforcement in ferrocement. Expanded
metal, welded wire fabric, wires or rods, prestressing tendons, and discontinuous fibres may also be used in
special applications or for reasons of performance or economy.
12.3.6.1 Wire Mesh : Reinforcing meshes for use in ferrocement shall be evaluated for their susceptibility to
take and hold shape as well as for their strength performance in the composite system. Common types and
sizes of steel meshes that may be used in ferrocement are provided in Appendix E.
6-374
Chapter12
12.3.6.2 Welded Wire Fabric: Welded wire fabric may be used in combination with wire mesh to minimize
the cost of reinforcement. The fabric shall conform to ASTM A496-85 and A497-86. The minimum yield
stren�th of the wire measured at a strain of 0.035 shall be 410 N/mm2• Welded wire fabric normally
contams larger diameter wires (2 mm or more) spaced at 25 mm or more.
12.3.6.3 Expanded Metal Mesh Reinforcement : Expanded mesh reinforcement (metal lath), formed by
slitting thin gauge steel sheets and expanding them in a direction perpendicular to the slits, may be used in
ferrocement. Punched or otherwise perforated sheet products may also be used. Expanded mesh is suitable
for tanks if proper construction procedures are adopted.
12.3.6.4 Bars, Wires and Prestressing Strands : Reinforcing bars and prestressing wires or strands may be
used in combination with wire meshes in relatively thick ferrocement e1ements or in the ribs of ribbed or T
shaped elements.
Reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A615-86, A616-86 or A617-84. Reinforcing bars shall be steel with a
minimum yield strength of 410 N/mm2and a tensile strength of about615 N/mm2• Prestressing wires and
strands, whether prestressed or not shall conform to ASTM A421-80 and A416-86, respectively.
12.3.6.5 Discontinuous Fibres and Nonmetallic Reinforcement : Fibre reinforcement consisting of

irregularly arranged continuous filaments of synthetic or natural organic fibres such as jute and bamboo
may be used in ferrocement. If organic materials are used, care snail be taken to conduct appropriate
investigations to ensure the strength and durability of the finished ferrocement product.
12.4 DESIGN

12.4.1.1 The analysis of a ferrocement cross-section subject to either bending, or to bending and axial load,
whether based on strength or working stresses, is similar to the analysis of a reinforced concrete beam or
column having several layers of steel (Fig 6.12.2).
12.4.1.2 In the design of ferrocement structures, members shall be proportioned for adequate strength in
accordance with the provisions of this chapter using load factors ancf strength reduction factors specified in
Chapter 6.
12.4.1.3 Ferrocement members may alternatively be designed using service loads and permissible service
load stresses in accordance with the provisions of Sec 12.4.3.
.
12.4.1.4 All members shall also be designed to satisfy serviceability criteria in accordance with the
provisions of Sec 12.4.4 .
I
J
As1
_1_ I e:c
l
As2
_j �
_
=:J
E:C'f
c
h I
I
....\3 ...... E:c3
I
7
I
I
• • •
A�4 • • •
I
j £C4t
------- __ !_ ___
Fig. 6.12.2 Strain and Force Distribution at Ultimate in a Ferrocement

Section Under Bending
12.4.2 Strength Requirements

Ferrocement structures and structural members shall have a design strength at all sections at least equal to
the required strengths for the factored load and load combinations stipulated in Chapter 1, General Design
Bangladesh National Building Code. 6-375

Part6
Structural Design
R �quirements. Required strength U to resist dead load D and live load L shall be determined in accordance
w1th Chapter 2, Sec 2.7.5.1. ·
Design strength provided by a member or cross-section in terms of axial load, bending moment, shear force,
or stress shall be taken as the nominal strength calculated in accordance with requirements and assumptions
of Chapter 6, Sec 6.1.4 multiplied by the strength reduction factor 1/J to satisfy the general relationship.
(12.4.1)
where U is the factored load (equal to the minimum required design strength), N is the nominal resistance,
and 1/J is a strength reduction factor defined in Sec 6.1.4.2.
Design strength for the mesh reinforcement shall be based on the yield strengthf of the reinforcement but
y
shall not exceed 690 N/mm2• Design yield strengths of various mesh reinforcement shall be in accordance
with Table 6.12.2. These shall be used for design only when test data are not available. When tests for
determination of yield strength are needed, they shall be conducted in accordance with Sec 12.8.2.3 and
12.8.2.4.
Table 6.12.2
Minimum Values of Yield Strength and Effective Modulus for Steel Meshes and
Bars Recom·mended for Design
Woven Welded Hexa- Expanded Longitu-

Square Square gonal Metal dinal
Mesh Mesh Mesh Mesh Bars
Yield
Strength � � /mrn2 450 450 310 310 410
(Er)Iong.
Effective (N/mm2l 138000 200000 104000 138000 200000
Modulus (Erhran.
165000 200000 69000 69000 -
(N/mrn2l
12.4.2.1 Flexure : The strain distribution at nominal moment resistance shall be assumed to be linear, and a
rectangular stress block shall be used in computing the resultant compressive force acting on the concrete.
a) Assumptions - Strength design of ferrocement members for flexure and axial loads shall be based on the
following assumptions and on satisfaction of equilibrium and compatibility of strains.
i) Strain in reinforcement and mortar (concrete) shall be assumed directly proportional to the
distance from the neutral axis.
ii) Maximum strain at extreme mortar (concrete) compression fibre shall be assumed equal to 0.003.
iii) Stress in reinforcement below specified yield strength / shall be taken as E,. times steel strain.
y
For strains greater than that corresponding to f , stress in reinforcement shall be considered
y
independent of strain and equal to /y.
iv) Tensile strength of mortar (concrete) shall be neglected in flexural strength calculations.
v) Relationship between mortar (concrete) compressive stress distribution and mortar (concrete)
strain may be considered satisfied by the use of the equivalent rectangular concrete stress
distribution.
b) Effective area of reinforcement - The area of reinforcement per layer of mesh considered effective to
resist tensile stresses in a cracked ferrocement section shall be determined as follows :
(12.4.2)
effective area of reinforcement for mesh layer i

global efficiency factor of mesh reinforcement in the loading direction considered
volume fraction of reinforcement for mesh layer i
gross cross-sectional area of mortar (concrete) section.
6-376
Chapter12
The global efficiency factor TJ when multiplied by the volume fraction of reinforcement, gives the
equivalent volume fraction (or equivalent reinforcement ratio) in the loading direction considered. In
effect, it leads to an equivalent (effective) area of reinforcement per layer of mesh in that loading
direction. For square meshes, TJ 0.5 when loading is applied in one of the principal directions. For a
=
reinforcing bar loaded along its axis, TJ =1.0.

In the absence of values derived from tests for a particular mesh system, the values of TJ given in
Table 6.12.3 for·common tyP.es of mesh and loadin� direction may be used. The global efficiency factor
shall apply whether the renuorcement is in the tenston zone or in the compression zone.
The value of TJ = 0.2 for expanded metal mesh (Table 6.12.3) may not always be conservative,
particularly in thicker sections in flexure with the mesh oriented in the short way diamond. The values
m Table 6.12.3 shall be used for sections 50 mm or less in thickness, and tests conducted for global
efficiency values for sections more than 50 mm in thickness.
Table 6.12.3
Recommended Design Values of the Global Efficiency Factor TJ of Reinforcement for a
Member in Uniaxial Tension or Bending
Woven Welded Hexa- Expanded Longi-

Square Square gonal Metal tudinal
Mesh Mesh Mesh Mesh Bars
Longitudinal, T/1 0.50 0.50 0.45 0.65 1
Global efficiency Transverse, Tit 0.50 0.50 0.30 0.20 0
factor
At45°, T/8=45 0.35 0.35 0.30 0.30 0.70
12.4.2.2 Tension: The nominal resistance of cracked ferrocement elements subject to pure tensile loading
shall be approximated by the load carrying capacity of the mesh reinforcement alone in the direction of
loading by the following equation:
(12.4.3)
where
Nn nominal tensile load resistance in direction considered

As = effective cross-sectional area of reinforcement in direction considered
/y = yield stress of mesh reinforcement
The value of As is given by
N
As= L,Asi (12.4.4)
i=l
where
number of mesh layers

effective area of reinforcement for mesh layer i (Eq 12.4.2)
12.4.2.3 Compression: As a first approximation, the nominal resistance of ferrocement sections subject to
uniaxial compression shall be derived from the load carrying capacity of the unreinforced mortar (concrete)
matrix assuming a uniform stress distribution of 0.85/� where f� is the design compressive strength of the
mortar matrix. However, the transverse component of the reinforcement can contribute additional strength
when square or rectangular wire meshes are used. Expanded mesh contributes virtually no strengthening
beyond that achieved l::>y the mortar alone. Slenderness effects of thin sections, which can reduce the load
carrying capacity below that based on the design compressive strength shall be considered.
12.4.3 Service Load Design

12.4.3.1 Flexure : For investigation of stresses at service loads, straight line theory (for flexure) shall be
used with the following assumptions.
a) Strains vary linearly with distance from the neutral axis.
b) Stress strain relationships of mortar (concrete) and reinforcement are linear for stresses less than or
equal to permissible service load stresses.

Part6
Structural Design
c) Mortar (�oncrete) resists no tension.
d) Perfect bond exists between steel and mortar (concrete).
To compute stresses and strains for a given loading, the cracked transformed section shall be used. The
effective area of each layer of mesh reinforcement shall be determined from Eq (12.4.2). The same value of
modular ratio nr E,IE,, may be used for both tensile and compressive reinforcement. Recommended design
=
values of Er are given in Table 6.12.2. Once the neutral axis is determined, the analysis shall proceed as for
reinforced concrete beams or columns having several layers of steel and subject to pure bending.
12.4.3.2 Allowable Tensile Stress : The allowable tensile stress in the mesh reinforcement under service
conditions shall be taken as 0.60 /y where /y is the yield strength. For liquid retaining and sanitary structures,
the allowable tensile stress shall be limited to 200 N/mm2. Consideration shall be given to increase the
allowable tensile stresses if crack width measurements on a model test indicate that a higher stress will not
impair performance.
12.4.3.3 Allowable Compressive Stress: The allowable compressive stress in either the mortar (concrete)
or the ferrocement composite shall be taken as 0.45/� where f� is the specified compressive strength of the
mortar. Measurements of the mortar compressiYE! strength shall be obtained from tests on 75 mm x 150 mm
cylinders.
12.4.4 Serviceabili tY Requirements

Ferrocement structures shall generally satisfy the intent of the serviceability requirements of Chapter 6
except for the concrete cover.
12.4.4.1 Crack Width Limitations : The maximum value of crack width under service load conditions shall
be less than 0.10 mm for noncorrosive environments and 0.05 mm for corrosive environments and/or water
retaining structures.
12.4.4.2 Fatigue Stress Range : For ferrocement structures to sustain a minimum fatigue life of two million
cycles, the stress range in the reinforcement shall be limited to 200 N/mm2• A stress range of 350 N/mm2
shall be used for one million cycles. Higher values may be considered if justified by tests.
12.4.4.3 Corrosion Durability: Particular care shall be taken to ensure a durable mortar matrix and
optimize the parameters that reduce the risk of corrosion.
12.4.4.4 Deflection Limitation :Since ferrocement in thin sections is very flexible and its design is very
likely to be controlled by criteria other than deflection, no particular deflection limitation is recommended.
12.4.5 Particular Design Parameters

12.4.5.1 The cover of the reinforcement shall be about twice the diameter of the mesh wire or thickness of
other reinforcement used. A smaller cover is acceptable provided "the reinforcement is not susceptible to
rapid corrosion, the surface is protected by an appropriate coating, and the crack width is limited to 0.05
mm. For ferrocement elements of thickness less than 25 mm, a cover of the order of 2 mm shall be provided.
12.4.5.2 For a given ferrocement cross-section of total thickness h, the mesh opening shall not be larger
than h.
12.4.5.3 For nonprestressed water retaining structures the total volume fraction of reinforcement shall not
be less than· 3.5 per cent and the total specific surface of reinforcement shall not be less than 0.16 mm2 I mm3·
12.4.5.4 In computing the specific surface of the reinforcement, the contribution of fibres added to the
matrix shall be considered, while the fibre contribution may be ignored in computing the volume fraction of
reinforcement.
12.4.5.5 If skeletal reinforcement is used, the skeletal reinforcement shall not occupy more than 50 per cent
of the thickness of the ferrocement composite.
12.4.5.6 For a given volume fraction of reinforcement, better performance in terms of crack widths, water
tightness, and ductility may be achieved by uniform distribution of the reinforcement throughout the
thickness and by increasing its specific surface. A minimum of two layers of mesh shall be acceptable, but
more than two layers of reinforcement are preferable.
12.4.6 Design Aids

The following nondimensional equation can be used to predict the nominal moment strength of ferrocement
beams subjected to pure bending :
(12.4.5)
6-378
Chapter12
A design graph representing Eq (12.4.5) is given in Fig 6.12.3.

12.5 FABRICATION

This section specifies the requirements for the mixing, placing, and handling of matl!r�als used in
ferrocement construction. . -..; ': · · · · · ·
12.5.1.1 Planning : Plastering for fabrication with ferrocement shall be continuous through the completion
of the job. This requires a large number of workers involved in plastering and in maintaining a constant
sup p ly of materials during work, most often in confined work spaces. Adequate bond at cold joints may be
ach1eved through surface rou�hness or treatment with bonding agents. Retarders may be useful in large
time consuming plastering prOJects, especially in hot weather conditions. Planning for the job shall take into
account all these requirements.
0.3
' 0.2
-:i.e
0.005+0.422X·0.077X2
II
Y =
>-
0.1
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
Fig. 6. 12.3 Chart for Strength Design of Ferrocement in Bending
12.5.1.2 Mixing : Any method, including hand mixin�, which assures a homo�eneous mixture of
ingredients shall be satisfactory. Mixing may be accomphshed in a mortar mixer w1th a spiral blade or
paddles inside a stationary drum or in a pan type mixer.The use of rotating drum mixers with fins affixed
to the sides shall not be permitted. Mix ingreaients shall be carefully hatched by weight, including the
water, and added or charged in the mixer so that there is no caking. M1x water shall be accurately weighed
so that the water cement ratio is controlled. The water cement ratio shall be as low as possible but the sand
cement ratio shall be adjusted to provide a fluid mix for initial :penetration of the armature followed by a
stiffer more heavily sanded mix at the finish. Mortar shall be rruxed in batches so that mortar is plastered
within an hour after mixing. Retempering of the mortar shall be prohibited.
12.5.1.3 Mortar Placement : Mortar shall generally be placed by hand plastering. In this process, the mortar
is forced through the mesh. Alternatively, the mortar may be shot through a spray gun device.
12.5.1.4 Finishing : Surfaces shall be finished to assure proper cover to the last mesh layer. The surface
finish shall be slightly roughened if a surface coating is to oe bonded later.
Surfaces that are too smooth shall be mechanically abraded by sandblasting or other means of mechanical
abrasion. Alternatively, such surfaces may be etched with phosphoric acid, provided the residue left by it
will not interfere with specified finishes. Mild solutions of muriatic acid may be applied with proper
attention to corrosion potential. Additional care shall be taken when plastering around openings.
12.5.1.5 Curing : Moist or wet curing is essential for ferrocernent concrete construction. The low water
cement ratio and high cement factors create a demand for large quantities of free water in the hydration
process, and the amount permitted to evaporate into the air shall be kept to an absolute minimum. The use
of fogging devices under a moisture retaining enclosure is desirable. A double layer of soaked burlap
coverea with polyethylene or a soaker hose may also be used. Continuous wetting of the surface or of wet

Part6
Structural Design
burlap or the like shall be maintained to avoid dry spots. Curing 'shall start within a reasonable time after
application of the finishing layer.
.
12.5.2 Construction Methods

All methods shall have high level guality control criteria to achieve the complete encapsulation of several
layers of reinforcing mesh by a well compacted mortar or concrete matrix with a minimum of entrapped air.
The most appropriate fabrication techruque shall be decided on the basis of the nature of the particular
ferrocement application, the availability of mixing, handling, and placing machinery, and the skill and cost
of available labour. Several recommended construction metnods are outlined in the following subsections.
12.5.2.1 Armature System : The armature system is a framework of tied reinforcing bars (skeletal steel) to
which layers of reinforcing mesh are attached on each side. Mortar is then applied from one side and forced
through the mesh layers towards the other side, as shown in Fig 6.12.4.
The skeletal steel can assume any shape. Diameter of the steel bars depends on the size of the structure.
Skeletal steel shall be cut to specified lengths, bent to the proper profile, and tied in proper sequence.
Sufficient embedment lengths shall be provtded to ensure continuity. J:or bar sizes 6 mm or less, lap lengths
from 230 to 300 mm may be sufficient. The required number of layers of mesh shall be tied to each side of
the skeletal steel frame.
12.5.2.2 Closed-mould System : The mortar is applied from one side through several layers of mesh or
mesh and rod combinations that have been stapled or otherwise held in position against the surface of a
closed mould, i.e. a male mould or a female mould. The mould may remain as a permanent part of the
finished ferrocement structure. If removed, treatment with release agents may be needed. The use of the
closed mould system represented in Fig 6.12.5 tends to eliminate the use of rods or bars, thus permitting an
essentially all mesh reinforcement. It requires that plastering be done from one side only.
12.5.2.3 Integral-mould System : An integral mould is first constructed by application of mortar from one
or two sides onto a semi-rigid framework made with a minimum number of mesh layers. This forms, after
mortar setting, a rigid but low quality ferrocement mould onto which further layer of reinforcing mesh and
mortar shall be applied on both sides. Alternatively, the integral mould may be formed using rigid
insulation materials, such as polystyrene or polyurethane, as the core. A schematic description of this system
is given in Fig 6.12.6.
12.5.2.4 Open-mould System : In the open-mould system, mortar is applied from one side through layers
of mesh or mesh and rods attached to an open mould made of a lattice of wood strips. The form, shown in
Fig 6.12.7, is coated with a release agent or entirely covered with polyethylene sheeting (thereby forming a
closed but nonrigid and transparent mould) to facilitate mould removal and to permit observation and/or
repair during the mortar application process.
This system is similar to the closed-mould system in which the mortar is applied from one side, at least until
the mould can be removed. It enables at least part of the underside of the mould to be viewed and repaired,
_where necessary, to ensure complete and thorough impregnation of the mesh.
12.6 MAINTENANCE
12.6.1 General .
Terrestrial structures are susceptible to deterioration from pollutants in ground water and those that
precipitate from the air (acid rain). Environmental temperature and humidity variations also affect
ferrocement durability and maintenance procedures.
Maintenance shall involve detecting and filling voids, replacing spalled cover, providing protective coatings,
and cosmetic treatment of surface blemisnes. Due to the fhin cover in ferrocement, muriatic acid
(hydrochloric acid) shall be used with extreme caution. Phosphoric acid and other nonchloride cleaners
shall be the specified alternative (see Sec 12.5.1.4).
Repairs not involving large quantities of materials shall be accomplished by hand. Emphasis shall be placed
on the ability of the repair material to penetrate the mesh cage, to fully coat the reinforcing to mhibit
corrosion, and to bond to the substrate. Rapid set and strength gain shall be the overriding considerations
for emergency repairs. Protective coatings shall bond well and be alkali tolerant, thermally compatible, and
resistant to environmental pollutants and ultraviolet radiation, if exposed.
12.6.2 Blemish and Stain Removal

12.6.2.1 General : Since ferrocement is usually less porous than conventional concrete, stains do not
penetrate very deep in the mortar matrix. Care shall be taken when preparing the surface not to diminish
the thin cover of mortar over ferrocement reinforcement.
12.6.2.2 Construction Blemishes: Construction blemishes are often caused by improper selection or use of
materials, faulty workmanship, uneven evaporation, and uneven curing. Care shall be exercised to minimize
these and the following causes of blemishes in ferrocement.
6-380
Chapter 12
Force plaster to fully

impregnate armature
Plaster from
both sides
c=J Skeletal Steel

Skeletal steel
EZ1J Mesh Layers

together at
intersections
c=J
Layers of mesh each side of
Mortar and tied to skeletal steel
Fig. 6.12.4 Armature System
Plaster from this side
Multiple layers of mesh

Impermeable mould
Bond breaker at interface

(Optional)
� Mould (F�ro:m�)��§� �.,.,_,,--...
I':J:>;-:..<!"1 Mesh Layers
c=J Mortar
Method I Plaster from one side over mesh

Method II Lay mesh layer into mortar bed
(Plastered or pneumatically applied)
Fig. 6.12.5 Closed-mould System

Part 6
Structural Design
side or layup
Mould to remain
(Ferrocement or otherwise)
Layers of mesh ��---\':§�'¢i��

(each side)
� Integral mould
EJ Mesh layers
D Mortar
Fig. 6.12.6 Integral-mould System
Polyethylene sheet
(optional)
� Mould
Layers of
mesh
r :1
.
.
. ·.,· _-'._.:
Mesh layers
D Mortar
Fig. 6.12. 7 Open-mould System
6-382
Chapter12
a) Cement from different mills will cause colour variation, although most of the colour in mortar is due to
the sand component. Where appearance is critical, car� shalf be taken to obtain sand from a single
source and have it thoroughly washed. ·
b) Mottling results from the use of calcium chloride or high alkali cement combined with uneven curing.
c) The use of polyethylene sheet material to cover surfaces promotes uneven curing.
d) The water cement ratio affects tone and surface appearance. Low water cement ratio will result in a
darker appearance.
e) Hard steel trowelling densifies the surface, causing more rapid drying and also leaving a darkened
surface.
12.6.2.3 Stain Removal : Treatment of stains shall be done promptly after discoloration arpears. Thorough
flushing and brushing with a stiff bristle brush and detergent is the first approach. If th1s is ineffective, a
dilute (about three per cent) solution of phosphoric or acetic acid shall be applied. Another chemical
treatment that may be considered safe ancf effective is a 20 to 30 per cent solution of diammonium citrate, a
mild acid that attacks calcium carbonates and calcium hydroxides. This treatment makes the surface more
porous and promotes hydration.
When a stain has penetrated too deef>ly to be removed by surface chemical application and scrubbing, a
poultice or a bandage may be needea. A poultice is intended to dissolve the stain and absorb it into the
poultice. The poultice is made by mixing one or more chemicals such as a solution of phosphoric acid with a
fine inert power such as talc, whiting, hydrated lime, or diatomaceous earth to form a paste. The paste is
spread in a thick layer over the stain and allowed to dry. A bandage may consist of a few layers of cloth or
paper towelling soaked in a chemical solution. More than one application of a poultice or bandage may be
needed for stubborn stains.
Caution:
Most of the chemicals used to remove stains are toxic and require safeguards against skin contact and inhalation.
Whenever acids are used, surfaces shall first be saturated with water or the dissolved stain material may migrate deeper
into the concrete and reappear at a later date as efflorescence.
12.6.2.4 Efflorescence: Efflorescence is caused by deposition of salts on the surface due to the evaporation
of migrating water bearing salts from within ferrocement; it is typically associated with a porous
ferrocement. Water cement ratio shall be limited to within 0.4 and the mortar well compacted to mmimize
efflorescence. Voids, if present, may be treated by breaking into with a hammer and replastering.
Alternatively, voids may be drilled into with a masonry bit and repaired by injecting a non shrinking
cement grout.
12.6.3 Protective Surface Treatments

12.6.3.1 General : Good quality mortar has excellent resistance to weathering. The application of
protective surface treatments can improve the performance of ferrocement and extend its usefuf service life.
Surface treatments shall be used to im}'rove appearance, harden the surface, and reduce permeability, thus
guarding against the corrosive action of acids, alkaline salts, and organic substances.
12.6.3.2 Hardeners : Hardeners may be used to protect the ferrocement surface or to seal and prepare it for
application of paints. When a sodium silicate hardener is used, it shall be diluted with water. The actual
proportion of water to be used shall depend on the manufacturer's recommendation. The hardener shall be
applied in multiple coats with the first coat being more dilute than the subsequent ones. Each coat must be
completely dry before the next coat is applied.
Other hardeners that seal and prepare the surface for application of oil base paints are magnesium
fluorosilicate and zinc fluorosilicate. The treatment shall consist of two or more applications. A solution
containing about 1 kg of fluorosilicate crystals per 10 litres of water shall be used for the first application;
and a solution containing 2.4 kg per 10 htres of water shall be used for subsequent applications. After the
last application has dried, the surface shall be brushed and washed with water to remove any crystals that
may have formed.
12.6.3.3 Coatings : When resistance to abrasion is desired, ferrocement surfaces may be coated with
polyurethanes, especially those furnished in two part mixtures. Coatings formulated from acrylics may be
used to provide resistance to sunlight and weathering. Water based acrylic latex house paints may be used
for apphcation to damp surfaces. For any surface opposite a surface sealed with an impermeable coating, an
acryiic coating formulated to allow the escape of water vapour shall be specified.
12.7 DAMAGE REPAIR
12.7.1 Common Types of Damage .

Ferrocement structures shall be inspected, as part of a regular maintenance programme, to detect any of the
following types of damage. Appropriate repair measures shall then be taken.

Part 6
Structural Design
12.7.1.1 � elaminations : _Delamination� o�cur when ferrocement splits between layers in

. laminated
constructions due to spnngmg back or � ndgmg of the mesh during construction. Delamination sometimes
_
occurs at or �ear the neutral axis under Impact or � exure when there are many voids in the interior layers.
Such areas give off a hollow sound when tapped With a hammer or stroked with a steel bar.
12.7.1.2 Spalls : A spall is defined as a depression resulting when a fragment is detached from a larger
mas� by a blow, by tfte ac!IO_
� of weather, oy p�essure, or by expansion within the mass. Spalls shall be
considered large when their Size exceeds approximately 20 mm in depth or 150 mm in any dimension and
'
shall be repaired by replastering.
Spalls are 1:1sually caused by corro�ion of steel, which causes an exl?ansive pressure within the ferrocement.
_
Chlondes m the concrete greatly mcrease the potential _ for corrosiOn
of tfte steel. Under such conditions,
continued spalling is likely and the repair of local spall areas may even promote the deterioration of the
concrete because of the presence of dissimilar materials.
An area of steel corrosion and chloride contaminated concrete may be considerably larger than the area of
spalled concrete, and the full area of contamination rather than the spall itself shall be broken and
replastered.
12.7.1.3 Fire Damage : Ferrocement may be more susceptible to fire damage than conventional concrete
because of the thin cover.
If the fire were intense enough to release the amount of chemically bound water in the cement, destroy the
bond between the cement and the aggregate, or oxidize the reinforcement, the surface would be charred and
spalled so that the damage could be easily identified. Full scale removal and repair shall then be required.
12.7.1.4 Cracks and Local Fractures :Hairline cracks and crazing due to temperature changes or drying
shrinkage in the cover coat do not require repair. Continuous wet curing will cause autogenous healing, and
a flexible coating will conceal the cracl< from view. If cracks are caused by continuing overloads or are due to
structural settlement and the cause cannot be removed, replacement or a structural overlay shall be
required. Cracks due to occasional impact or overload may be repaired. Local fractures are cracks in which
displacement of the section has occurred as a result of impact.
12.7.2 Evaluation of Damage

12.7.2.1 �valuation of damage shall take into co;tsideration its extent, cause, and likeliho<?d of �he cause s�ill
being active. The method of repair_ shall be dictated by the type of damage, the availability _ of special
equipment and r�J?air materials, and the lev�l of skill of the �orkers employed. Eco�ol'!'ic f�ctors m�y
influence the deCisiOn as to whether the repair shall be extensive and permanent, or limited m scope m
response to an immediate problem.
12.7.2.2 Repair materials shall bond to the original structure, resist pollutants in the surrounding soil,
_
water or air, and respond the same way to changes m temperature, mmsture, and loads. Removal of
deteriorated or chloride contaminated mortar trapped within Hi.e reinforcing mesh requires a large amount
of hand labour, so it may be economical (and better for long term ? urability) to reconstruct or replace �n
entire area using the original structure as a form that can be left m place or removed after the overlaid
structure has cured. Complete reconstruction shall be undertaken when chloride contamination, mesh
corrosion, and deterioration of the mortar are extensive.
12.7.2.3 Testing for damage in ferr�:>cement may be done by tapping wit� a �ammer to brea � into �ny
_
voids under the surface, or by drawmg a metal bar over the surface and hstenmg for sounds mdicatmg
voids or the presence of deteriorated concrete. A high quality ferrocement should produce a bell like sound
and resist moderately severe hammer blows without damage.
12.7.3 Surface Preparation for Repair of Damage .

12.7.3.1 General: The primary objective is to remove any deteriorated mortar or mortar contaminated with
corrosive agents and to provide a surface to which the repair materials can be bonded properly. The rougher
the surface, the greater fhe area available for bonding.
12.7.3.2 Removal of Deteriorated Concrete : As a first step in any repair all disintegrated, unsound, and
contaminated mortar shall be removed. Saws and chipping hammers used for conventional concrete shall
not be used for ferrocement unless large sections are to oe completely removed.
Small areas shall be prepared by ha�d ham�ering j ust hard enough to pulverize deteriorated or cracked
mortar, but not to the point of damagmg the reinforcmg mesh.
A pneumatic needle gun may be used for cleaning out broken ferrocement, opening out cracks, and
roughening the surface.
Particles of sound mortar embedded in the mesh need not be removed provided they are small enough not
to interfere with the penetration of new mortar and they will not project from the finished surface.
6-384
Chapter12
12.7.3.3 Reinforcement : Any loose, scaly corrosion revealed on cleaning out the mortar shall be removed
by sandblasting, water jet, airblasting, or vacuum methods.
An alternative method for removing rust is to brush naval jelly or spray dilute phosphoric acid over the
repair area and flush thoroughly.
Where the mesh cage has been displaced but is still intact, it may be pushed or jacked back in place and
supported securely to withstand the pressure of applying the repair material. Where the reinforcement has
been torn, the old mesh shall be lacea back to close the opening.
When rods supporting the mesh cage are torn they shall be spliced by a 15 diameter overlap of the partner
rod or anchored by hooks.
12.7.3.4 Cleaning : Loose particles and dust residue from hammering or sandblastin� shall be air jetted or
vacuum cleaned if epoxy or methymethacrylate (MMA) is the repair material. Water Jetting may be used if
the repair is to be made with hydraulic cement or latex modified mortar.
If an air jet is used, the compressor shall be equipped with an oil trap to prevent contamination of the
surface. Surface oil or dirt shall be removed by trisodium phosphate or other strong detergents.
12.7.3.5 Cracks : Cracks may be cleaned by hammering out the mortar on each side of the crack and
replastered with latex mortar.
If opening the crack is not feasible, epoxy or MMA injection systems shall be attempted in accordance with
the product directions. The crack sha11 be cleaned first with oil free compressed air, and small (about 2 to 3
mm) drill holes shall be made at the highest and lowest points in the crack. The surface between the holes
shall be sealed with strong coatings or a pressure pad. Catalyzed epoxy or MMA shall be injected at the
lower hole until it comes out at the upper nole.
Where a latex cement gout is to be used, the interior of the crack shall be thoroughly saturated with water
and allowed to drain.
12.7.4 Repair Materials

12.7.4.1 Portland Cement and Sand : Portland cement used for repair shall conform to the requirements of
Sec 12.3.1.
Sand which matches that used in the original construction may be used unless the need for the repair arose
because of reactive or contaminated sand. Neat portland or blended cement paste shall be used to fill small
cracks, and a mortar with fine sand shall be used to fill larger cracks or voids. Both shall be used in
combination with latex for thin patches and overlays. Larger cracks shall be coated with a neat cement
slurry, then dry packed with a very low water cement ratio mortar.
The addition of latex to portland cement mortar markedly improves bond to the substrate and the tensile
strength of the patch. Ofthe synthetic latexes, polyvinyl acetate and polyvinylidene are unsuitable for wet
environments. Acrylics rna}' be used as admixtures to Improve bonding and as curing compounds. Acrylic
latex in concentrated form shall be diluted to 10 to 20 per cent solids and then used as the mixing water for
the mortar. Latex mortars may be applied to a damp surface, but the patch shall be allowed to dry
thoroughly before being immersed in water.
12.7.4.2 Polymer Mortars : Nonlatex polymer mortars shall require the use of surface dried and,
preferably, oven dried sand. The monomers have very low viscosity and so shall be mixed with thickening
agents to be placed in any area that cannot be sealed·hghtly. Epoxy resins that are moisture tolerant may be
used on damp surfaces.
Care shall be exercised in applying polymers or the promoters and hardeners used with them which are
toxic.
12.7.4.3 Admixture : Accelerators may be employed where cement a lone is the repair material. Since
chloride compounds may promote corrosion, nonchloride a ccelerators shall be preferred for all
ferrocement. Emergency repairs of small areas below the waterline with hot plug, which is neat cement
moistened to a putty consistency with a concentrated solution of calcium chloride may be permitted. The
hot plug may be carried in the hand or in a plastic bag to the site of the leak, pressed into the hole, and held
a few minutes until set. Permanent repair shall be accomplished as soon as possible using materials without
chlorides.
12.7.5 Repair Procedure

12.7.5.1 Mixing : Small quantities of materials required for ferrocement repairs may be hand mixed on flat
surface or in a tray usin� premixed dry ingredients. For large quantities, a plaster or pan mixer rather than
a rotating drum type mixer shall be used. For machine mixing water shall be put in first; then the cement,
to form a slurry; then the pozzolan, if used; and finally, enough sand to bring the mortar to the desired
degree of workability.

Part 6
Structural Design
The consistency of the mortar shall be selected according to the nature of the repair. A slurry of cream
consistency shall be used first to paint the moistened edges of the repair area, fill cracks or small voids, and
thoroughly coat all the interior mesh and rods. After this, more sand shall be added until the mortar is stiff
enough to hold its shape when brought out flush with the finished surface.
To avoid excessive amounts of entrained air, mortars containing acrylics or epoxies shall not be mixed
longer than two minutes. They shall be applied within thirty minutes of mixing.
12.7.5.2 Full Depth Repair: When both faces are accessible, a fluid mortar shall be pushed through the
mesh cage from one side until an excess appears on the opposite face. This excess shall then be pushed
back and finished flush. A vibrating float or trowel may be used to place and finish a very stiff mortar.
Pencil type vibrators shall not be used.
12.7.5.3 Partial Depth Patches: The area to be patched shall first be saturated with water, then air blown
or blotted free of standing water until only surface-moist. A cement slurry of not more than 0.4 water
cement ratio and of paint like consistency shall be brushed over the whole area and into any openings in the
mesh. This shall be immediately followed by a heavily sanded mortar of the same water cement ratio,
which shall be vibrated or tamped into the patch and finished flush.
12.7.5.4 Overlays: The substrate shall be prepared in the manner prescribed in Sec 12.7.5.3 for patches. The
old surface shall be thoroughly cleaned or scarified by mechanical means and the repair materials shall
match the thermal characteristics of the substrate.
Chemical etching shall be followed by mechanical abrasion, unless the surface is flushed with high pressure
water jet equipment.
For thin overlays, velocity placement such as spritzing or casting by hand, and shotcreting, shall be used.
12.7.5.5 Shotcrete: Shotcrete may be used in ferrocement repair when a large area is involved. Small, low
cost portable plaster pumps operating on the Moyno progressive cavity principle with a rotor inside a stator
tube shall be adequate for both original ferrocement construction and repair.
Shotcrete or plastering equipment may be used for large overlays incorporating additional layers of
reinforcing mesh by [aminating techniques. Existing surfaces shall be scarified or sandblasted, then
saturated with water and allowed to damp dry just before the shotcrete or mortar spray is applied. An initial
application of cement slurry is not needed with shotcrete but a latex or wet to dry epoxy bonding compound
may be used to advantage with repairs made with plastering equipment.
.12.7.5.6 Curing :All portland cement patches and overlays shall be thoroughly cured unless latex
compounds are used to seal the surface and furnish water for hydration. Curing shall be instituted
immediately for thin patches and overlays. Several layers of paper or cloth soaked in water and covered
with a plastic sheet tl:iat is well secured at the edges may be used on patches. A full plastic film covering
overlays may be used but it may produce discoloration where it touches the surface.
12.8 TESTING
12.8.1 Test Requirement

Tests and observations that are commonly made during the design, construction, and subsequent service life
of concrete structures shall also be applicable to ferrocement structures. The test programme shall include
a) tests on physical, chemical and mechanical properties of the ferrocement ingredients, such as water
purity, sieve analysis, mesh strength etc.,
b) control tests for fresh mortar mix, such as slump, air content etc.,
c) tests on the mechanical properties of the hardened ferrocement, such as bending, cracking and fatigue
strengths, permeability etc., and ·
d) in-service condition tests, such as potential for corrosion, cracking, durability etc.
For redicting the mechanical properties of ferrocement, the tests specified in Sec 12.8.2.1 through 12.8.2.4
r
shal be conducted.
12.8.2 Test Methods

12.8.2.1 Compressive Strength and Static Modulus of Elasticity of Mortar: The compressive strength and
static modulus of elasticity of the mortar used for the fabrication of ferrocement shall be determined from 75
mm x 150 mm cylinders tested in accordance with ASTM C39-86 and C469-83, respectively.
12.8.2.2 Flexural Strength of Ferrocement: Ferrocement specimens shall be tested as a simply supported
beam with third point loading. The span to depth ratio of the beam specimen shall not be less than 20 and its
width shall not be less than six times the mesh opening or wire spacing measured at right angles to the span
direction.
6-386
Part7
Construction Practices and Safety
Paint materials in quantities other than required for d<tll be ir

manner of storage shall facilitate removal and use of lo0f the 1
Temporary electrical wiring and fittings shall not bming e

switches or electrical equipment are necessary to be ;tance
designed in a way to reduce explosion risk. re case:
Sources of ignition, such as open flame and exposed h

nor shall smoking be allowed there. or cas•
arne, s
Buckets containing sand shall be kept ready for use. ets of a
accepted standards shall be kept at an easily accessible
shall 1::
Drums or containers containing bitumen, road tar, aSJers or 1
in up to 3 tiers. Leaky drums shall be either totally re1
pyramidal stacks neatly in rows.
nd.. Pai
Bituminous roofing felts shall be stored away from oth; shalll
handled gently to prevent cracking and damages.
2.2.17 Flammable Materials sbesto�

Outdoor storage of drums containing flammable ma ndling
gasoline and lubricants shall be such that contamina�s few
shall be free of spilled products, debris and other hazar
When
Compressed gases and petroleum products shall not l:ent sh<
Proper identification by markings, tags etc. shall be Uols sha
ancf stored there in drums.
·shall<
Highly flammable liquids shall be stored in fire resisths"t sha:
the main working site. For uses of up to 50 litres, liq1
cupboards or bins. Stores of liquids snail be clearly ma1
returned to the store. ·r shall
1all be
The workmen shall dispose off any clothing or apparr blow
immediately. They shall not be allowed to continue wo:
lied p1
The above requirements shall be considered additiona4hall bt
2.2.18 Explosives 1 in an
2.2.18.1 Transportation of Explosive : Loading, unlocall rna:
by competent personnel. Also see Sec 4.3.
Where the magazine is located near the construction.ts. The

requirements of explosives shall be issued from the n
shall be returned to the magazine after every use. llected
iiner. J
For carrying upto 5 kg of explosives, insulated contai
wood or 6 mm thick plastic or 10 mm thick pressed fil:
parts, be waterproof and provided with a lid and noncqerials
ed by
Vehicles transportins explosives shall have a wooden C sha!I 1::
In open-bodied vehicles, the explosives shall be cove
Electric wiring in vehicle shall be fully insulated. Th
indicated on its body. from 1
hall eit
Metal, flammable, or corrosive substances shall no
detonators or blasting caps shall not be transported in t
containers or in securely locked separate nonmetalic COicoatin!
exhaus
Smoking shall be prohibited in the vehicle carrying expl
:he con
2.2.18.2 Storage of Explosives : Explosives shall on sha11 1
substantially constructed, and bullet and fire-resistant n
with explosives. None of these shall be stored near oil,
or other sources of heat. >e imp•
Smoking, matches, fire or flame shall not be allowed ne;

be allowed to accumulate within 8 m of an explosive m<en eng
a magazine. Persons shall put off shoes with metal nails e fittec
1 area i
7-12
Part6
Structural Design
6-388
Appendices
.
·
APPENDIX A Conversion of Expressions from SI to FPS Units
APPENDIX B Methods of Soil Exploration and Sampling
APPENDIX C Guidelines for Computing the Column Interaction Diagrams
APPENDIX D Calculation of Volume Fraction of Reinforcement
APPENDIX E Common Types and Sizes of Steel Meshes Used in Ferrocement
Part 6 6-389
Str�ctural Design
Part 6
Structural Design
Appendix A
Conversion of Expressions from SI to FPS Units
This apl?endix provides the FPS equivalents of selected empirical expressions and equations presented in SI units in
6
Part of the Code. It may be noted that the computed values obtained from an SI expression and its FPS equivalent
given in this Appendix may show some differences, which may be due to rounding off of the constants within these
expressions. However, these differences, if any, may be only minor, and the FPS equivalent expressions are intended to
serve as references only.
Chapter 2
The following units are applicable to the corresponding variables in the expressions provided below.
SI Unit FPSUnit
Length, height, other dimensions m ft

Area.· rrf. ft2
Weight, loads, force (axial, shear) kN lb
Pressure, stress kN/m2 psf
Speed, velocity km/h iniles/h
Section/
Table '· SI FPS Equivalent
Table 6.2.7 R=0.6+�8fA1 R=0.6+�86/A1

R =0.25+�14/A1 R=0.25 + �151/ A1
2.4.6 Cc =47.2x10� Cc =62.5x10-4
7= 55.44fh 7= 10.5fh
sVb sVb
2.35� 2.35�
=--.!....:
Tc ..- :.... Tc=---l"---=:-...
(h/13.72)a (hf45)a
k=0.0065 k=0.002
k=0.00328 k=0.(XJ1
Table 6.2.12 1.0/h 3.28/h
0.07 /h 0.23/h
0.0061/h 0.02/h
Tables 6.2.16 D {ci; >0.167 D {ci; >2.5
& 6.2.19
2.5.6 c, =0.083 c, =0.035
= 0.073 = 0.030
= 0.049 = 0.020
c, =0.031/.[A; c, =0.1/..[i\;
Chapter 4
SI Unit FPSUnit
Length, other dimensions nun in

Area mrrf. in2
Moment of inertia nun4 in4
Force (axial, shear) N lb
Moment, torsion Nnun lb-in
Stress, strength N/mrrf. psi
Modulus of elasticity, shear modulus of elasticity N/mrrf. psi
Section/
Table SI FPS Equivalent
4.3.5 Fv =0.083...m;; S0.25 Fv =1.o...g;;; s 36
6-390
Appendices
Section/
Fv =0.25F:: :5:0.75 Fv =3.oF:: :5:110

Fv =0.025F:: :5:0.40 Fv =0.3F:: :5:60
Table 6.4.4
3
�(4- �)F:: �(4- �)F::
(o.4-0.2 �) (60-30 �)
0.083F:: l.OF::
2�(4- �)F:: t(4- �)F::

( o.6-0.2 �) (90-30 �)
o.125F:: 1.5F::
4.3.9 1
Bv =107o(f:nAb ) 14 Bv =35o(f:nAb )114
B1 =0.04APF:: B1 =0.5APF::
4.6.6 ld =0.29dbf5 ld =0.002dbf5

ld =0.22dbf5 ld =0. 0015dbfs
Table 6.4.13 0.17F:: :5:0.65 2F:: :5:95
0.33F:: :5:1.2 4F:: :5:175
0.21F:: :5:0.65 2.5F:: :5:95
Vm =0.083 CdAmv �(f:n) Vm =CdAmv�(f:n)
Chapter 5
SI Unit FPS Unit
Length, other dimensions mm in

Area � in2
Unit weight kN/m3 lb /ft3
Stress, strength N/� psi
Modulus of elasticity N/� psi
Section/
Table 51 FPS Equivalent
5.6.2 f�r =f� +2.33s-3.5 f�r =f� +2.33s- 500

!� +7.0 !� +1000
!� +8.5 !� +1200
!� +10.0 !� +1400
44w,t.5 {K 33w,t.5 {K
4700{lf 57000{f;
3750{lf 45000{f;

Part 6
Structural Design
Chapter 6
The following 1;1nits are applicable to the corresponding variables in the expressions provided below.
51 Unit FPS Unit

Area rnm2 in2
Moment of inertia mm4 in4
Moment, torsion Nmm lb-in
Stress, strength N/rnrn2 psi
Modulus of elasticity, shear modulus of elasticity N/rnrn2 psi
Section/
6.2.3 f3t=0.85-0.008(/�-30) {31=0.85-5x1o-5(!�-4000)

6.2.5 p, = 0.85{3tf�
/y
600
600+ /y p,= 0.85{3tf� 87000
[y 87000+/y
Vc =0.17..Jl[bwd Vc =2.Jflbwd
6.2.7 Vc {
=0.1 1+0.073 �; ..Jl[bwd ) Vc (Nu g f"P"bwd
=2 1+ 2000A ) Vlc '
Vc (
= 0.16..[1[ +17.2pw �� wd } Vc (
= 1.9..[1{ +2500pw �� wd }
0.3.Jflbwd 3.5..fl[bwd
Vc �
=0.3..fl[bwd 1+0.3NAgu Vc=3.5..fl{bwd 1+� 500Ag
Vc (
=0.17 +0.3 �; ..fl[bwd
1 ) Vc =2 1+� ( )
500Ag ..JHbwd
0.33..fl[b10d 4..Jl[bwd
q;[(o.04�)tx2y J q;[(o. s�)tx2yJ
A17=0.35bws/y Ao=50bwys
!
Av 2At=0.35 �s
+ A17 +2At 50b/yws=
0.25..Jl[bwd 3-.JHbwd
0.67 ..[1[bwd 8-.JHbwd
0.04..[1[ o.s..JH
Vc = 2-.JHbwd
(
1+ 2.5Ct �: r
q;((1.33.Jl{}I,x2y]
Tc
(o.8..JH)I.x2y
6-392
Appendices
Section/
(1+0.3NufAg ) (1+0.002NufAg)
A,� [ ;."[ :k) l :Yt)

2
T
, -2A, x
, A,� [ 4��[ :{t,) l :Yt)
T
, -ZA, x,
(o.35bwsffy) (50bwsffy)
1.38 200
6.2.8 Pmin = =-
�; Pmin
/y
(0.4+/yf685) (0.4+fy j100000)
6.2.10 fr =0.62..j]f fr =7.5{1[
6.3.8 (15+0.03h) (0.6+0.03h)
ln(0.8+/yf1400) l n(0.8+/y j200000)
6.4.3 h=----�� h = ---""- --'-- ---'�
-
36+5,8[
...-
0.12(1 +1/,B)]
-
am- 36+ 5,8[am- 0.12(1+1/,B)]
ln(0.8+/y /1400) ln(0.8+fy /200000)
h= --'--�---'- h= ___,___;;.--:-
.. --'-
36+9,8 36+9,8
ln(0.8+/y /1400) - ln(0.8+fy 1200000)
h= --'--�---'- h=----'-- --'-36
-- ....!..
36
6.4.7 Vc=0.17(1+2/,Bc)..Jlfb0d Vc =2(1+2/,Bc)..Jlfb0d
Vc=0.17 1+ ( �:d )..Jlfb0d ( �:d )v'JTb0d
Vc =2 1 +
0.33..j]fb0d 4v']Tb0d
0.5..j]fb0d 6..Jlfb0d
0.17..j]fb0d 2..j]fb0d
0.58..j]fb0d 7..j]fb0d
0.33¢l..J]f 4¢l..J]f
6.8.4 Vn �0.67..Jlfbwd Vn �8ftbwd
Vn =0.056 10+ l; ..fifbwd
( ) Vn= 10+ l; ..fifbwd
�( )
Vc =0.17..Jlfbwd Vc =2{i[bwd
Vc = 3.5-2.5 Mu o.t6..J]f+17.2pw Vud bwd V, = 3.5-2.5 Mu x t.9..J]f+2500pw Vud bwd
( )( ) ( )( )
�d � � �
0.5..fifbwd 6..Jlfbwd
6.9.6 0.83..j]fhd 10..j]fhd
0.17..J]fhd 2v']Thd
c
Vc =0.27..j]fhd+ Nud
4fw

Part 6
Structural Design
Section/
6.10.4 v, =0.17-JKbd v, =2ffibd

V, ( -JK+17.2pw �� }d
= 0.16 ( ..[1{+25 0p �� }d
Vc = 1.9 0 w
0.17.JKb0d 2ff{b0d
0.5 b0d .JK 6.J"Kb0d
6.10.9 V, =0.8.JKbd(2dfav) V, =9.6..{Hbd(2dfav)
0.8¢..[1{ 9.6¢ ffi

6.12.6 0.33¢..[1{ 4¢ ffi
Chapter 7
51 Unit FPSUnit
Length, other dimensions in

Area in2
Moment of inertia in4
Force (axial, shear) lb
Moment, torsion lb-in
Stress, strength psi
Modulus of elasticity, shear modulus of elasticity psi
Section/
7 .1 . 9 0. 091..[1{ 1.1ffi
0.457ffi 5.5 ffi
0.10..[1{ 1.2 ffi
(o.083+0.17Jf3c )ffi�0.17 -JK (
1+2/Pc �2)ffi -JK
0.3 -JK 3.6 ffi
7.2.7 0.091ffibll)d 1.1ffibwd
V, (
� )ffibw
=0.091 1+0.58 d V, (
=1.1 1+_!i_ ffibwd
250Ag
)
V, = (0.083 Jf; +9Pw �}wd�0.16 ff{bwd (
Vc = ..{H +1300pw � }wd�1.9ffibwd
Vc =0.09 {1+0.09 � ).JKbwd [
Vc =1.1 1+ 1667NAg ffibwd )
0.023 ff{ I,x2y ffi
0.275 2:,x2y
.o91ffib d
o w 1.1-JKbwd
v, v, -r== ==
�1+(2.5C1 )2
...,=======
Tf V �
=======
1+(2.5C1 Tf V) 2
0.17 ffibwd 2-JKbwd
6-394
Appendices
Section/
1.38 200
7.2.8 Pmm =1; Pmm = /y
7.4.4 v
,
( :J� $0.17�
=0.083 1+ v, ( :J� $2�
= 1+
7.4.5 0.083� �
0.25� 3�
7.4.6 0.29� 3.5�
0.17� 2�
7.8.4 0.37�bwd 4.5jKbwd
Vn { )
=0.03 10+ f; �bwd Vn ( )
=0.37 10+ l; �bwd
V, =0.091�bwd V, =l.l�bwd
V, (
= 1.93-1.38 �)( 0.16�+17.2Pw � }wd V, (
= 1.93-1.38 � )(1.9�+2500pw � }wd
0.275�bwd 3.3jKbwd
7.10.8 v
,
(
= 0.083+ 0[3:7 )� $0.17� v
,
( :J� $2�
= 1+
0.083� �
0.25� 3jK
V, =0.4�bd(2dfav) V, =4.8�bd(2dfav)
0.4� 4.8�
7.12 0.17jK 2jK

Part 6
. Structural Design
Chapter 8
51 Unit FPSUnit

Area mrn2 in2
Section/
8.2.3 0.02Ahfyl{f; 0.04 Abfy I{f;

25/yl{f; o.o85!y 1..ff;
35Jyl{f; 0.125/yl{f;
o.375db!y 1..ff; o.o3dh fy 1..ff;
8.2.4 0.24dbfyl{f; 0.02dbfyl{f;
0.04db/y o.ooo3db/y
.
8.2.6 100 db/{f; 1200 dbf{j{
/y/410 /yf60000
8.2.7 0.4bwsjfy 60bwsj fy
8.2.10 0.175dbfyl{f; o.o14dhfy 1..ff;
8.2.14 0.07 /ydb 0.0005/ydb
(0.13/y -24)db (o.ooo9fy -24)db
8.3.4... 1.38bwdjfy 200bwd/fy
8.3.6 0.083Acv{f; ACIJ{f;
0.17Acv{f; 2ACIJ{f;
8.3.7 1.66{f;Ai 20{f;Ai
1.24{f;Ai 15{f;Ai
1.0{f;Ai 12{f;Ai
ldh = 0.185/y db l..ff; ldh = 0.01 54/ydbl..ff;
8.3.8 Vn =ACIJ(0.17{f;
+Pn/y) Vn =ACIJ(2.Jf[ +Pn/y)
a varies linearly from 0.25 to 0.17
,
a
,
varies linearly from 3.0 to 2.0
0.67Acv{f; 8ACIJ{f;
0.83Acp{f; 10Acp.Jl[
Chapter 9
51 Unit FPSUnit

Area mrn2 in2
Moment of inertia nun4 in4
Moment, torsion Nnun • !b-in
6-396
Appendices
Section/
9.5.5 /31 =o.85-o.oo8U� -30) Pt = 0.85-5x1o-5(!� -4000)

9.8.1 !t=0.5o..fl{ It=6$
!t=0.40..[1{ It=4.8..[1{
It=0.70F..fl{ It=8.4F..fj[
ft =0.85F..fl{ It=10.2F..fj[
It=0.90F..[J{ It=10.8F..fj[
It=l.OOF..[J{ It=12.0F..[l{
F=1.2--d- F=1.2- d
2000 80
o.5o.jfl; 6.jfl;
0.40.jfl; 4.8.ff{;
[
Aps/ps+As/y-A�/y";?.0.85f3Ji'd' 600 [
Aps/ps + Asfy - A�fy 0.85f3t 'd' 87000
9.13.1
bd c d 600-
fy ) . bd � f d 87000-/
c y )
9.13.2 fps =! +69+_L
se
100pp /ps =fse +10,000+_L
100pp
Use +414) Use +60,000)
Ips =!se+69+_L
300pp /ps=1se +10,000+__lS_
300pp
.
Use +207 ) Use +30,000)
9.14.3 fr=0.62..[J{ fr=7.5..[J{
9.15.3 0.17..[1{ 2..[1{
-Kt db 12Ktd
t = ...JK b
l l
9.16 t-
( �� }wd ( �� }wd
..m;
9.19.2 Vc= 0.05..[1{ +4.8 . Vc= 0.6..[1{ +700
0.17..[J{bwd 2..[J{bwd
0.42..[J{bwd 5..[1{bwd
Vci=0.05..fl{bwd+Vd+ ViMcr Vci=0.6..[J{bwd+Vd+ ViMcr
Mmax Mmax
0.14..[J{bwd 1.7..JKbwd
Mer= {1/yt)(0.5..[1{ + fpe-fd) Mer ={l/yt)(6.JH+lpe-!d)
v =(0.29..[1{ +0.3 /pc)bwd+vp
cw v =(3.5..[1{ +0.3lpc)bwd+ vp
cw
9.19.3 0.33..[J{bwd 4..[J{bwd

tf>{0.04..fl{I,x2y) t�>(o.5..jfl"',x2y)
bws bws
Av =0.35 ! Av =50 /y
y
Av +2 At=0.35 i:s
0.67..[J{bwd

Part 6
Structural Design
Chapter 10
The following units are applicable to the corresponding variables in the expressi<;>ns provided below.
SI Unit FPS Unit

Area � in2
Section modulus l'l1lrf in3
Moment of inertia, torsional constant mm4 in4
Force, load; strength kN kips
Moment, torsion k Nm kip-in
Stress N/� ksi
Modulus of elasticity, shear modulus of elasticity N/� ksi
Warping constant mm6 in6
Section/
Table 6.10.1 170/{F; 65/{f;

250/{f; 95 /{f;
250/�Fyf jkc 95/�Fyf jkc
250/�Fyjkc 95/�Fyjkc
333/{f; 127/{f;
2ooj{F; 76/{f;
5ooj..[F; 190/{f;
625/{f; 238/{f;
832/{f; 317/{f;
665/{f; 253/{f;
1680/{f; 640/{f;
1995/{f; 760/{f;
[
1680 1-3.74ft
Fy l [
640 1-3.74 fa
Fy l
{f; {f;
675/{f; 257/{f;
1995/{f; 760/{f;
22752jFy 3300jfy
10.7.5 200/{F;<b/t< 407/ {F; 76/{F; <b/t<155/ {F;
Q5 =1.340-0.0017(bft)jf; Q5 =1.340-0.00447(bft)jf;
Q5 =106867/[Fy(b/t)2] Q5 =155ooj[Fy(bft)2]
250/�Fyjkc<bft<512j�Fyjkc 95/�Fyjkc <b/t<195j�Fyjkc

Q5 =1.293-0.0012(b/t)�Fy jkc Q5 =1.293-0.003 09(b/t)�Fyjkc
Q5 =180640kc/[Fy(bft)2] Q5 =26200 kc/[Fy(bft)2]
333/{F;<bft< 462 / {F; 127/{f;<bft<176/{f;

Q5 =1.908-0.0027(bft)jf; Q5 =1.908-0.00715 (bft)jf;
6-398
Appendices
Section/
Q5=13789oj[Fy(b/t)2 ] Q5= 200ooj[ Fy(b/t)2 ] .
6
� [ (b:t�JJ ]
be= t 1- �
b be=
253t
J
'Vl
[
!. 1 ]
50.3 <
(b/t).Jf
-b
be= �t [1- (b:t�ft ]

6 5 1 44 .3 <
b be= 2 3t!.[ ].
b
� /l
'V (b/t ).Jf -
·
Fa = 4564 +0.40Fy
Djt
200bf 138000
10.7.6 -- or ..,---.,---
-Jf; (dfAJ) Fy
[
Fb = fy 0.79-0.00038 �� -Jf;l
bf
[
Fb = fy 0.79-0.00038
t1
{f;l
V k;
200bf
T.
703x103 cb z 3516x103 cb
-- Fy ---"- �-�
rT Fy
� Fy(lfrT)2
Fb = [ 3
-
10550x103Cb Y � ]
F 0.60F
Y
1172x103Cb <
Fb = 0.60F
{l/rT)2 Y
83x103Cb <
Fb = 0.60Fy
(ldfAJ)
[
Fb Fy 1.075-0.00095
� ( :: )F-]
L, = ( 13445+8274 M1 ).!:_
M2 Fy
1000/-Jf;
310260kv
Cv =
Fy(h/tw)2
= 500
&
hftw V F Y
2.1x106
F sr
=
h5Ld0fA J
7 x106
F wr = 56 2
(hwL/rTo )
10.7 7 1995/{f;

Part 6
Structural Design
Section/
96550 14000
t..!!.w...<- FAY FIY +114) t..!!.w...<-�FAY FYI+16.5)
..!!....<- 5250 ..!!....< 2000
tw tw-�FYI
{F;
=1-0.0005 AwI (!!_t- 1V�]Sl.O RPG =1-0.0005 AAIw (!!_t- V7?;]
Fb S1.0
A Fb
R
PG
fw� h
l{J fm=hlliJ
10.7.11 tl<12.65� tl<0.4�
1000R R
tw(N+5k)S0.66Fy tw(N+5k )S0.66fy
1000R )<0.66FY ( R )<0.66Fy
tw N+2.5k
( tw +5k N
t�[ +3(� x :; J'}yw'J/'•
R� O l77 . t M7.5t�[1+3(�l(:; J'}ywtJ!tw
R= 0.0891�[1+3(�l(:; r ]1Fywl /'• f R=34t�[1+3(�l(:; r}ywfJ/fw
R=
46.88t� [1+0.4(d,/tw)3]
h lfbl R= 6800t� [1+0.4(dl,fb/tlw )3]
h
R=
46.88t� [o.4(d,ftw )3]
h lfbl R = 6800t� [o.4(d,lfbftlw )3]
h
10.76t�,{f; 4100t�,.Jf;
pbl pbl
1000Pbl- Fyctwc(tb+5k) Pbl-Fytc wc(tb+5k)
Fyts Fyst
Id � 395554 Id �25x10-6S4
506LsL� 32LsL�
Cp=--
Cp=
Ip IP
C
s 506SL
=
Is
! C
s- 32SL
_
Is
!
Table 6.10.4 17oj{F; 65/.{f;
369/�Fy-69 141/�Fy-10
170/{f;; 65/{f;;
6-400
Appendices
Section/
278 106
�Fyw-114 �Fy z0-16.5
25oj.jf; 95/.Jf;
5ooj.jf; 190/.Jf;
625/�Fy -Fr 238/�Fy -Fr
832/�Fy -Fr 317��Fy -Fr
2001.Jf; 761.Jf;
3331.Jf; 1271 .jF;
6651.Jf; 2531.Jf;
16801.Jf; 6401.Jf;
l
25471.Jf; 97oi.Jf;
[
1680 1- 2.75P" [
640 1- 2.7sP.
� ¢bPy l � ¢bPy
502 2.33-� 665
[ l;?: 191 2. 33-� 253
[ l;?:
¢bPy .jF;
.jF; � ¢bPy
�
14272jFy 2070jFy
22752jFy 3300jFy
61845jFy 8970jFy
10.8.4 Pn=0.001FyAg Pn=FyAg
Pn=0.001FuAe Pn=FuA e
Pn=0.002tbef!Fu Pn =2tbef!Fu
Pn=0.0006A5fFu pn=0.6AsfF u
Pn 0.001ApbFy
=
pn=ApbFy
beff=2t+16 beff =2t+ 0.63
10.8.5 Pn=0.001A8F cr Pn=AgFcr
3331� 1271�
5ooi.Jf; 1901.Jf;
2oo;.JF; bft 4071 .JF;
< < 761 .jF; bft 1551 .jF;
< <
Q5 =1.340-0.0017(bft).jf; Q5 =1.340-0.00447(bft)..jf;
Q5 =106867j[Fy(bft)2] Q5 =155ooj[Fy(b/t)2]
250/.jF; bft 4621 .,JF;
< < 951 {F; bft 1761 {F;
< <
Q5 =1.415-0.00166(bft).jf; Q5 =1.415-0.00437(bft)..jf;
Q5 =137890/[Fy (bft }2] Q5 =20oooj[Fy(b/t)2]
333/.jF; bft 4621 .,JF;
< < 1271 .,JF; bft 1761 .JF;
< <
Q5 =1.908-0.0027(bft)..jf; Q5 1.908-0.00715(bft)..jf;
=

Part 6
Structural Design
Section/
3 t 1
be= 8�f[ 1-
(bJ�{J ] sb be= j7 [ �:)� ]
-
(b
sb
t 1 (bJt�JI ] b 3 t 1
be= �[
8
- s be= jl [ �� fJ ]
-
(b )
· Sb
7584 + 2 1100 + 2
Q= Fy(Dit) 3 Q= Fy(Dft) 3
25000+15000( MtfMp) 3600+2200(M1jMp)
10.8.6 L�= Lpd = ry
fy � Fy
34500+20700( M1j MP) 5000+3000(M1jMp)
Lpd = ry ?.20700ryjfy Lpd = ry ?.3000ryjFy
Fy Fy
790ry 300ry
LP = LP=
3750ry r.:;
LP =
.JF;/ 0-3ry vr.:;
25.86x1
Mp
JA Lp= --
.jF;;
MP
v JA
Mr=10-6(Fyw -Fr )sx Mr= {Fyrv -Fr )sx

0.393ryW
L =---:-:-
r
Mr
: - Lr=
Mr
-- -"--
57000ry ..[iA
Mr=10-6 FySx Mr=FySx

2 E 2IyC
Mer= 10-6
M
Cb-
Lb
ElyGJ+ n
-£
Lb
IyCw ( ) Mer=Cb
M
Lb
ELyGJ+ n
Lb
( ) w
-6 cbsxx1.fi cbsxxt-fi 1+--��

x?x2
=10 1+ x?x2 = 2
Lbjry 2 Lbjry 2(Lbjry)
2(Lbjry)
0.393CbW 57000Cb ..fiA
Mer= Mer=
Lbjry Lbjry
Cbn�El yGJ [ c-:::; ]
Mn=Mer=10-6
Cbn
fP [ B+�1+B2 sM Mn=Mer=
J Lb
B+V1+B2 SM
Mn =Mer=10-6SF cr Mn=Mer=SFer
..!!_ s 490�kjfyw ..!!_ s 187 �kjFyw
tw tw
Vn =0.0006fywAw Vn=0.6FywAw
490�kjFyrv < ..!!_ S615�kjfyw 187 �kjFyrv <..!!_S234�kjFyrv

tw tw
490,fk!F; 187,fk!F;
vn =0.0006FywAw Vn=0.6FywAw
hItw hItw
6-402
Appendices
Section/
14000
�FyJ(Fy/+16.5)
hftw �418/�Fyw
10.8.7
V =0.6AwFyw C
� Fyw �..!:..5,234� Fyw
n v
187 k k
lw
187FJF;
Cv =
hftw

Part 6
Structural Design
Section/
Table SI FPS E'J�ivalent
c
v = 303365k
c
v- 44000k
(h/tw)2 Fyw (h/tw)2 Fyw
h/lw � 1100/�Fyw h/tw � 418/�Fyw
0.00061/lAwFywCv 0.61/lAwFywCv
10.8.10 h,/lw �1680/�Fyf h,/lw �640/�Fyf
0.85x10-3 f�Ac 0.85/�Ac
10-3A5Fy A5Fy
10-3ArFyr ArFyr
Qn =0.5x10-3A5c�f�Ec � 10-3A5cF u Qn =0.5Asc�f�Ec �AscFu
Qn =0.3x1o-3(tt +O.Stw )Lc�f�Ec Qn =0.3(t f +O.Stw )Lc�f�Ec
10.8.11 Rn =0.00625t}Fyt Rn =6.25t}Fyt
Rn = 5k+N ywtw
( y Rn =(5k+N)Fywlw
1000
Rn = ·5k+N Fywtw
e ) Rn =(2.5k+N)Fywtw
1000
R,. [ r�X :; J'}..

�0.3541! 1+3 �t f�. R,. r r� x:;r}...
�1351� 1+3 �, jt.
R, �0.1791� 1+3[ r�t J'} ywlt/10 R,. [ (�X:;)'}..

�.. �� 1+3 �t f�.
8313 [ ( n
d /1
Rn =-w- 1+0.4 ....£....!!
h Ybt
Rn =
h
[ ( n
120001� d /1
1+0.4 __£___j£_
Ybf
h .
[[ n
Rn � 831! o.• d,flw
lfbf h
[{ n
Rn � 120001� o. d<flw
lfbf
10.76t� �Fyw 4100t��Fyrv
Rn = Rn =
de d,
R11 =0.0007Fydctw R11 =0.7Fydctw
R11 =0.0007Fydctw[1.9-1.2(Pu/Pn)] R11 =0.7Fydctw[1.9-1.2(Pu/Pn)]
10.8.12 10-6b1t1(d'-tt )Fyf ;e:0.7MP bitt(d-t f )Fyf ;e:0.7MP
[ 3bql}
t/lvVn =0.55x10-3t/111Fydctp 1+--
dbdctp
l [
t/lvVn =0.55t/111Fydctp 1+--
3bql}l
dbdctp
. .,
1.8 10-3 Fybbftbf

X 1.8Fybbtfbf
Table 6.10.5 136/.Jf; 52/.Jf;
[ [ ]
·
1365 1_1.54Pu
.Jf; tJibPy
] 520 1 _1.54Pu
.JF; tJibPy
6-404
Appendices
Section/
[
500 2.33-� 665 ]�
�bPy {f;
[ ]�
191 2.33-� 253 .
{f; �bPy ..jF; .
{f;
L,zc( Fyc-Puc/Ag) >1.0 L,zc( Fyc -Puc/Ag) 1.0
>
1000Vndb ( Hj[H-db]) Vndb (Hj[H -db]) -
Puc <0.3x10-3 FyAg Puc <0.3FyAg
17237ryjfy 2500ryfFy
10.8.12 Ljr�1890/.jf; Lfr�noj{F;
8965/.jf; 1300/...{F;
290/.jf'; noj.jf;
2000�b Mp f e 2�b Mp fe
Vy =0.6x10-3Fydt w Vy =0.6Fydt w
Py =10-3 Agfy Py =AgFy
2000�bMpaje 2�b Mpa je
[1.15-0.5(PujVy ) (AwfAg )]t600Mp fVy [1.15-0 .5(Pu/Vy)(AwfAg )Jt.6MPfVy
1600 Mp jVy 1.6 Mp f Vy
2600 Mp jVy 2.6Mp f Vy
5000 Mp jVy 5MpfVy
10.9 �(303)2 -4.39/; �(44)2 -4.39/;
�(303)2 -2.15/; �(44)2 -2.15/;
�(372)2 -3.75/; �(54)2 -3.75/;
�(372)2 -1.82/; �(54)2 -1.82/;
207-1.3/v �160 30-1.3/v S23
262-1.3/v �200 38-1.3/v �29
Table 6.10.17 270-1.8/v �207 38-1.8/v �30
585-1.8/v �470 85-1.8/v �68
585-1.4/v �470 85-1.4/v �68
730-1.8/v �580 106-1.8/v �84
730-1.4/v �580 106-1.4/v �84
304-1.3/v �234 44-1.3/v �34
407 -1.3/v �310 59-1.3/v �45
10.9.3 Rn=2.4x10-3dt Fu Rn =2.4dt Fu
Rn =2.0x10-3dt Fu Rn =2.0dt Fu
Rn = Lt100Fu Rn =Lt Fu
Rn =3.0x10-3dt Fu Rn =3.0dt Fu
+
ss 2000P/ Fut + d/2 s�2P/ Fut df2
5� lOOOP
�Fut 2
+ !!_ s�-+-p
�Fut 2
d

Part 6
Structural Design
Section/
L �2000P fFut L �2PfFut

e e
1000P __!!__
L < L <
e- e-
¢Fut . ¢Fut
AgFy
10.9.5 Rn =
1000
AnFu
Rn =
1000
Rn =0.7x10-3AgFy Rn =0.7AgFy
10.9.8 FP = ( fy
�
2
90
) o.66d Fp = ( Fy-13
20
) 0.66d
Rn =2.0x10-3Fy Apb Rn =2.0Fy Apb
Rn =1.5(Fy-90)ldf20 Rn =1.5(Fy-13)1d/20
Chapter 11
In the following equations unit of D is nun in 51 unit and inch (in) in FPS nnit.
Section/
11.6.3 K =0.81
3 { D2 +89400
D2 +55000
} K3 =0.81
D2 +85
{
o2 +139
}
K4 =0.8+0.8Y { D2 +89400
D2 +55000
}
1 K4 =0.8+0.8Y { D2 139
/
D +85
1 }
6-406
Appendices
AppendixB
Methods of Soil Exploration and Sampling
B1 METHODS OF SOIL EXPLORATION
The detailed methods of soil investigation usually includes collecting undisturbed samples and or
performing field tests. Listed below are some of the common methods of subsoil exploration.
a) Open trial pits: In this method trial pits are excavated exposing the subsoil thoroughly. Undisturbed
samples are taken from intact sides and bottom of the trial pits. This is suitable for all types of formation
but for cuts which cannot stand below water table, proper bracing shall be provided. This method is
normally used for shallow depths (up to 3 m).
b) Auger boring : Augers, hand or power operated, are rotated and forced into soil. Augers are
withdrawn and emptied when full. Soil cuttings obtained are used to interpret stratification and soil
type. The method is unsatisfactory for cohesionless soils above or below ground water.
c) Shell and auger boring: Manual or mechanized rigs are used for vertical boring. The tools consist of
auger for soff to stiff days, shells for very stiff to hard clays, shells or sand pumps attached to sectional
boring rods for sandy strata.
d) Wash borin�: In this method, soil is loosened by chopping and cutting by impact and twisting action
of a lightweight bit. Soil is removed fi;om the borehole oy a stream of water or drilling mud from lower
end of the wash pi e which is worked up and down or rotated into the borehole. The water or mud
f
flow carries the soi through the annular space between the wash pipe and casing and is overflown at
ground level. The soil in suspension is allowed to settle in a pond or tank and the fluid is recirculated as
required. The soil brought to surface by the wash water can be used for identification purposes but is
not representative of tl\e character and consistency of the material penetrated and the flushing water
may disturb the surrounding ground. Subsoil can be identified throughly if field tests (viz. Standard
Penetration Test) are performed and or undisturbed samples are collected frequently.
e) Sounding/probing : A number of sounding methods are available. The most common is the Standard
Penetration Test (SPT)1. The SPT test is specified both in reference 1 and in ASTM D1586. Other
methods include procedures like Cone Penetration Test (CPT)2 and Dynamic Probing (DP)3•
Sounding/probing may be done in conjunction with inhole tests such as "Field Vane Shear Test in
Cohesive Soil", (ASTM D2573), bore-hole shear (Iowa Bore-hole Shear) Test, Flat Dilatometer Test
(DMT)4 or "Pressuremeter Tests in Soils", (ASTM D4719).
Note:
Numerals in the superscript in this paragraph refer to the corresponding reference materials cited in the list of
references in Sec B 4 in this appendix.
f) Geophysical methods: Geophysical survey techniques are based on determining variations in physical
properties, such as electrical conductivity (resistivity), variation in density (gravimetric), rnagnetic
susceptibilit y (magnetic) or velocity of sonic waves (seismic). Anomahes such as near su rface
disturbance (often known as noise) are common in urban environment and may limit the usefulness . of
geophysics in these areas. Moreover, a geophysical anomaly does not always match an engineering or
geological boundary, and often there is a transition zone at a boundary. These may lead to a rnargin of
uncertainty.
g) Percussion boring and rotary drilling: In percussion drilling method borehole is advanced by chopping
action of a heavy bit driven by power. Water is added at the bottom of the borehole during chor.ping
action, if ground water is not already struck. Slurry formed at the bottom of hole is removed by bailer or
sand pump. Casing may be needed. In rotary drilling, borehole is advanced by power rotation of
drilling bit and removal of cutting by circulatmg fluids which may be water, bentonite slurry or mud
slurry. Casing may or may not be needed during drilling.
B2 CHOICE OF METHOD
The choice of a method of soil exploration depends upon:
a) the topography, type of ground to be investigated and ground water conditions;

b) the type of building envisaged and technical requirements;
c) amount of existing information;
d) expected variability of soil;
e) external constraints such as availability of plant, access, cost and time.
The technical requirements of the investigation rather than cost should be the overriding factor in the
selection of exploration method. In clayey soils, borings are suitable for deep exploration and pit for shallow
exploration. In sandy soils special equipments are needed for taking representative samples below the

Part 6
Structural Design
water table. Ground investigation is normally done by boreholes, but where only shallow depths are to be
investigated, and where ground water problems are not e�visaged, t�i�l J?its ma:r prove more versat � le a�d
economical. Boreholes may be necessary on waterlogged sites wnere It IS Impracticable to excavate tnal pits
without dewatering.
Safety aspects must be considered when selecting and carrying out exploration. Precautions relating to
safety, health and welfare of workmen, hazards from undersround services, contaminated ground and
inspection pits or shafts shall be undertaken. Overhead power lmes are a hazard if ground investigation rigs
are to operate in the vicinity.
B3 SAMPLING METHODS
Sample quality is dependent on type of soil being samJ?led, type and condition of equipment and the skill
with which it IS used. The weaker material is the most significant in an investigation, and is usually difficult
to secure in an undisturbed condition. It is rarely possible to sample granular (non-cohesive) materials in
undisturbed condition, unless special techniques are used. Granular soil conditions are usually assessed by
in-situ tests and confirmed by disturbed samples which permit classification and grading analysis and
visual inspection. Cohesive soils may be testecf both in-situ and in laboratory on undisturbed or relatively
undisturbed samples.
Based on assessment of the quality, samples can be classed into five categories as specified in Table B 1.
Table 81
Categories of Soil Samples Based on Quality
I
Quality Recommended use ot Sample

Class 1 Index test, moisture content, density, strength and deformation
characteristics
Class 2 Index test, moisture content, grading, density and remoulded strength in
some clays
Class3 Index test and moisture content
Class 4 Index test
Class 5 Strata identification only
The sample and/ or test locations must be such that all changes of stratum are recorded. A number of extra
samples and test results are usually required to assess variation of the properties of a stratum with depth.
The record of all borings shall include the following information :
a) Size of casing (if used), .

b) Number of blows per 300 mm required to drive the samJ?ling spoon,
c) The elevation of tne ground surface referred to an established datum,
d) Location and depth of boring and its relation to the proposed construction,
e) Elevation at which samples were taken,
f) Elevation of the boundaries of soil strata,
g) Description of the soil strata encountered and any particular unusual or special condition such as loss of
water m the earth and rock strata, presence of boulders, cavities and obstructions, use of special type of
samplers, traps, etc., and,
h) The level of ground water together with a description of how and when it was observed.
All abandoned and unsuccessful attempts of borings or drillings shall also be reported. In complex
formations, details of sampling are necessary and, therefore, separate holes may be employed purely for
sampling or testing, termed as double hole sampling.
Care shall be taken in protecting, handling, labelling and subsequently transporting the samples, so that
samples can be received in a fit state for examination and testing, and can be correctly recognized as coming
from a specific trial pit or boring.
Class 1 and Class 2 samples listed in Table B 1 are generally referred to as 'undisturbed' while Classes 3, 4,
and 5 as 'disturbed' samples.
a) Disturbed samples : These are taken by methods which modify or destroy the natural structure of the
material though with suitable precaution the natural moisture content can be preserved. The amount of
sample generally required for testing purposes is given in Table B 2.
b) Undisturbed samples: These are taken by methods which preserve the structure and properties of the
material. Truely undisturbed samples can not be taken from boreholes, and in practice there are only
6-408
Appendices
differing levels of disturbed samples. Material may be secured in open tube samplers for clays except
of firm or of stiff consistency. For softer clays stationary piston samplers of low area ratio*, shall oe
used and careful boring and sample preservation technique shall be employed. The minimum diameter
of undisturbed sample shall be 40 mm with minimum length/ diameter ratio of 3.
* The area ratio A, is defined as the ratio of the volume of soil displacement to the volume of the collected
sample, expressed as a percentage;
where D0 =outside diameter of tube .

Di = inside diameter of cutting edge.
Well designed sample tubes should have an area ratio of less than about 10 per cent.
c) Representative samples : These samples have all their constituent parts preserved, but may or may not
be structurally disturbed.
Table B 2
Weight of Soil Sample Required for Laboratory Tests
Purpose of Sample Type of Soil Weight of Sample

Required, kg.
Soil identification, natural moisture content test, Cohesive soil 1
mechanical analysis and index properties Sand and gravel 3
Chemical test Cohesive soil 2

Sand and gravel 3
Compaction test Cohesive soil and sand 12.5

Gravelly soil 25
Comprehensive examination of construction Cohesive soil and sand 25 to SO

materials including stabilization Gravelly soil 50 to 100
B4 LIST OF REFERENCES
1. ISSMFE, TC-16, Report of the Technical Committee on Penetration Testing of Soils, International
Reference Test Procedures for Standard Penetration Test; Swedish Geotechnical Society; Swedish
Geotechnical Institute, Appendix B: ISSN 0281-7578 (1989) .
Reference Test procedures for Cone Penetration Test (CPT): Swedish Geotechnical Society; Swedish
Geotechnical Institute, Appendix A: ISSN 0281-7578 (1989)
Reterence Test Procedures for Dynamic Probing (DP): Swedish Geotecnnical Society; Swedish
Geotechnical Institute, Appendix C: ISSN 0281-7578 (1989)
4. Merchetti, S. "In Situ Tests by Flat Dilatometer", Journal, GTE Divn., ASCE, Vol106, GT 3, March, pp.
299-321 (1980).

Part6
Structural Design
AppendixC
Guidelines for Computing the Column Interaction Diagrams
C1 GENERAL
The interaction diagram of a given column section is drawn by assuming a series of strain distributions, each
corresponding to a particular point on the interaction diagram, and computing the corresponding values of
axial load P and moment M. Once enough such points have been computed, the results are summarized on
an interaction diagram.
In this appendix, the method and relationships needed to com.l'ute the various points on an interaction
diagram are given based on strain compatibility and mechanics. The calculations mvolve the assumptions
stated in Sec 6.2.3.1 through 6.2.3.7 and Sec 6.3.3.2 of Part 6.
C2 COMPUTATION OF INTERACTION DIAGRAM
The various controlling points of an interaction diagram are shown in Fig C 1.
A' (O,flPo)
A (O,flPm)
E (fl'-\, ,0) fl Mn
Fig. C 1 Controlling Points on the Interaction Diagram
C 2.1 Computation of Point A

The maximum usable axial load is represented by point A on the interaction diagram. The maximum axial
load �p m shall be alculated as
�Pm �Pn(max;
(C 1)
=
where �pn (max) is given by Eq (6.3.1) for spiral columns and by Eq (6.3.2) for tied columns.
Once �pm is evaluated, a horizontal straight line shall be drawn through A. This line shall mark the upper
boundary of the interaction diagram.
C 2.2 General Case

Point A' in Fig C 1 represents the theoretical maximum (but not usable) axial load for a column under truly
concentric loading. This theoretical maximum axial load is calculated as
(C 2)
6-410
Appendices
For a symmetrical section, the corresponding moment will be zero. For unsymmetrical columns, provided
the moments are taken about the geometric centroid of the section, Eq (C 10) may be used to compute the
moment corresponding to ipP0• '
PointE on the interaction diagram can be obtained by evaluating the moment capacity, ipM0, for pure
flexure with no axial load.
While point A' is outside the interaction diagram and the portion of curve between A' and B is not usable,
the solution of the general case applies for the entire curve A' BCDE.
For the purpose of this general solution, the longitudinal column bars will be considered in layers
perpendicular to the plane of bending.
Layer 1 is closest to the "least compressed" surface and is at a distance dt from the "most compressed"
surface. Layers 2, 3, 4 etc. are successively away from the least compressed surface and at distances d2, d3, d4
etc. respectively from the most compressed surface.
Each strain distribution to be considered is linear with the maximum compressive strain in concrete
Ecu =0.003. Layer 1 will have a strain Est and area Ast' layer 2 strai:nE s2 and area As2 and so on. The
strain distribution will be defined by setting Est= ZEy and Ecu =0.003, where Ey is the strain in steel at
the onset of yield.Each strain distribution considered will correspond to a different arbitrarily chosen strain
ratio Z, where positive values of Z correspond to positive (compressive) strains. For example, Z= -1
corresponds to Est =-E ' the yield strain in tension.
Y
If Esi and d; are the strain in the ith layer of steel and the depth to that layer from the most compressed
surface respectively,
c-d
Esi =0.003 --1
( ·) (C 3)
c
where c is the depth of the compression zone given by
0.003
c= dt (C 4)
0.003-Zey
Once the values of c and Est, es2 and so on, are known, the stress in each layer of steel is computed as
(C 5)
The concrete stress is uniform over the equivalent rectangular stress block having a depth a= f3tc where f3t
is given in Sec 6.2.3.7(c).
The compressive force in concrete is given by
F, =0.85f�A (C 6)
where A is the area of the compression zone.
For a rectangular section, A= ab, in which b is the width of the section.
For a nonrectangular section, A is the area of the compression zone having a depth a, measured
perpendicular to the neutral axis.
If a is less than d; for a particular layer of steel, the force in that layer of steel is given by
Fsi = /siAsi (C 7)
If a is greater than d; for a particular layer of steel , the force in that layer of steel is
Fsi =(lsi -0.85/�)As i (C 8)

Part6
Structural Design
The axial load capacity, Pn for the assumed strain distribution is obtained as
n
Pn =F, + I.fsi (C 9)
i=l
The corresponding moment capacity, Mn for an assumed strain distribution, taken about the centroid is
given by
n
Mn =F,y+ 'I,F5;(h/d-d;) (C10)
i=l
where his the overall dimension of the concrete cross-section parallel to the plane of bending, andy is the
distance of the centroid of compression zone from the centroid of the section.
C 2.3 Computation of Point C

Point Con the interaction diagram of Fig C1 corresponds to the balanced condition (/51 = /y in tension) and
is obtained from Eq (C 3) through (C 10) using Z =- 1. Once P nand Mn are evaluated from Eq (C 9) and
(C10), point Ccan be located as
in which the ¢ values shall be taken as follows :
¢ = 0.7 for tied columns, and

¢ = 0.75 for spiral columns.
C 2.4 Determination of Portion BC

Portion BC of the interaction diagram can be constructed by repeated application of Eq (C 3) through (C 10)
for various values of the strain ratio Z. The recommended sequence of strain ratios are Z = + 0.5, + 0.375,
+ 0.25, + 0.125,-0.25,-0.5, - 0.75 and-1.0. Of these, points corresponding to Z = 0 (zero tension in steel),
Z =-0.25 (maximum steel tension 25% of /y ), Z =-0.5 (maximum steel tension 50% of / y ) and Z =-1.0
(maximum steel tension /y) should always be determined. The points on the curve are ( ¢Mn, ¢Pn) for each
value of Z, where ¢ is to be taken as 0.7 for tied columns, and 0.75 for spiral columns.
Once adequate points are plotted, portion A'C can be drawn. The intersection of this curve with the
horizontal line through A locates point B.
C 2.5 Determination of Portion CD

Portion CD of the interaction diagram of Fig C 1 can be obtained bJ: taking negative values of Z beyond
-1.0, such as Z = -1.5, -2.0, - 2.5, -3.0 and so on, and using Eq (C3) through (C10) .
Each time the value of ¢ is to be taken as ¢ 0.7 for tied columns, and ¢ = 0.75 for spiral columns. Once
=
adequate points ( ¢M;., ¢Pn) are plotted, the portion of curve CD (or its extension) should be drawn. The
intersection of this curve with the horizontal straight line corresponding to ¢Pn = ¢P1 locates the transition
point D. Here, P1 is the axial load capacity at the transition point D as given in Sec 6.3.5.
C2.6 Determination of Portion DE

Once the transition point D is located, portion DE can be drawn by using Eq (C 3) through (C 10) for
negative values of Z beyond -1.0. For this portion,. however, an increased value of ¢ is to be used, as
given in Sec 6.3.5, for the evaluation of ¢Pn and ¢Mn. Once the portion of curve DE (or its extension) is
drawn, its intersection with the abscissa ( ¢Pn = 0 ) locates point E.
C3 INTERACTI ON D IAGRAM F OR CIRCULAR COLUMNS
Equations (C 3) through (C 10) can also be used to determine the interaction diagram of a circular column.
However, this time the compression zone is a segment of a circle, of depth a, as shown in Fig C 2.
To compute the compressive force in concrete and its moment about the centroid of the section using
Eq (C6) and (C10), the following parameters may be helpful.
6-412
Appendices
Area of the compression zone segment
(C 11)
Distance of centroid of the compression zone segment form the centroid of the circular section
3
_ hsin 8
= (C 12)
y 3( 8 -sin8 cos8 )
0.851(:
I< )I
--r
____ _Q ______
_l_ '
f----7 fsa
Section Strains Stresses
Fig. C 2 Circular Column Section
In Eq (C 11) and (C 12), 8 is half the angle subtended at the centre by the segment representing compression
zone, expressed in radians.
For aS h/2, 8 S rr/2
8 =cos-
(
t h/2-a
--
)
h/2
For a> hj2, 8 > rr/2
8 = rr-cos-
I a-h/2( )
h/2
The shape of the interaction diagram of circular columns is affected by the number of bars and their
orientation relative to the neutral axis. For any number of bars, the interaction diagram should be
determined using the least favourable bar orientation.
C4 UNSYMMETRICAL SECTION
For unsymmetrical sections, with different amount of steel on opposite sides of the neutral axis, the same
procedure using Eq (C 3) through (C 10) can be emJ>loyed for determining the interaction diagram.
However, the balanced load for positive moment will be different from that for negative moment. In a
similar manner, the maximum ax1al load capacity, corresponding to a uniform compressive strain of 0.003
across the section, will be accompanied by a moment.

Part 6
Structural Design
C5 NONDIMENSIONAL INTERACTION DIAGRAMS
It may be useful to express interaction diagrams independently of column dimensions. This can be done by
dividing t/JPn by Ag and t/JMn by Agh and drawing the curves with t/J Mn/(Ag h) as abscissa and t/J PnfAg
as ordinate. A family of such interaction diagrams for various combinations of f� and /y with different
reinforcement amounts and arrangements can be prepared to serve as design aids.
6-414
Appendices
AppendixD
Calculation of Volume Fraction of Reinforcement
The voulme fraction of reinforcement in a ferrocement section can be readily calculated if the density of the mesh
material and the weight of mesh per unit area are known.
For ferrocement section reinforced with expanded metal mesh, the volume fraction of mesh reinforcement may be
calculated from the following relationship. ·
V
f -
_ Volume of mesh
Volume of ferrocement section
= --
W N
m
rmh
x 100 per cent
where,
N number of mesh layers

h thickness of ferrocement section, mm
Wm = weight of mesh per unit area, N/mm2
Ym unit weight of steel, N/mm3
For ferrocement reinforced with square or rectangular mesh, the volume fraction of mesh reinforcement may be
calculated from the following relationship :
Nndb 2
V1=-- -
(-- )
1 1
+- x100 per cent
4h D1 Dt
where,
number of layers of mesh reinforcement

= diameter of mesh wire
thickness of ferrocement
centre to centre spacing of wires aligned transverseley in reinforcing mesh, mm
centre to centre spacing of wires aligned longitudinally in reinforcing mesh, mm

Part6
Struc.tural Design
AppendixE
Common Types and Sizes of Steel Meshes used in Ferrocement
Wire Wire Diameter

Type Shape Fabrication Mesh* Wire"' Spacing or Sheet
Size Gauge Thickness
(mm) (mm)
Woven .lx.l
4
No. 16 19.0 1.60
Square or 4
welded 2 x2 No. 19 13.0 1.00
3 x3 No. 22 8.5 0.72
4x4 No. 23 6.4 0.64
Wire mesh Welded 1 X1 No. 14 25.0 2.00
Rectangular Welded 2 X 1 No. 14 50x25 2.00
1 No. 18 25.0 1.20
Hexagonal Twisted 1 No. 20 25.0 0.88
� No. 22 13.0 0.72
2
Expanded Slit 18 N/mL 0.58
metal Diamond and GaugeNo.18 1.00
mesh drawn GaugeNo. 20 0.76
"' American wire gauge.
6-416
Part 7
CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES AND SAFETY
<Cfn1. .ap:ftel!' . li
Constructional Responsibilities · and Practices
Cihl.ajp1er 2
Storage, Stacking and Handling Practices
<Cfrnatjpft!EI!' 3
Safety During Construction
<Cfrnatpftel!' 4
Demolition Work
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART7 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES AND SAFETY
Chapter 1 Constructional Responsibilities and

Practices
1.1.1 General 7-1
1.1.2 Scope 7-1
1.1.3 Terminology 7-1
1.2 PLANNING 7-2
1.2.1 Responsibilities 7-2
1.2.2 Temporary Construction 7-3
1.2.3 Site Preparation 7-3
1.2.4 First Aid Attendant 7-3
. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION CONTROL 7-3
1.3.1 General 7-3
1.3.2 Permits 7-3
1.3.3 Tests and Inspections 7-3
1.4 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND WORKERS 7-4
1.4.1 General 7-4
1.4.2 Protective Fences and Railings 7-4
1.4.3 Canopies, Overhangs and Platforms 7-4
1.4.4 Protective Devices 7-4
1.4.5 Notices and Signs 7-4
1.4.6 Watchman and Auditory Signal 7-5
1.4.7 Safe Load 7-5
1.5 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY 7-5
1.5.1 General 7-5
1.5.2 Adjoining Property 7-5
1.5.3 Use of Road and Footpath 7-5
1.5.4 Adjoining Structure and Retaining Wall 7-6
1.5.5 Protection of Utilities 7-6
Chapter 2 Storage, Stacking and Handling

Practices
2.1 GENERAL PRACTICES 7-7
2.1.1 General 7-7
2.1.2 Protection against Fire 7-7
2.1.3 Housekeeping 7-7
7-i
2.2 STORAGE, STACKING AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS 7-8
2.2.1 Cement 7-8
2.2.2 Steel Bars and Sections 7-8
2.2.3 Bricks and Masonry Blocks 7-8
2.2.4 Aggregate 7-8
2.2.5 Water 7-9
2.2.6 Timber 7-9
2.2.7 Pipes and Tubing 7-9
2.2.8 Timber Piles and Poles 7-10
2.2.9 Sanitary Appliances 7-10
2.2.10 Doors, Windows, Ventilators and Grilles 7-10
2.2.11 Tiles 7-10
2.2.12 Sheets and Boards 7-10
2.2.13 Plastic and Rubber Sheets 7-11
2.2.14 Glass Sheets 7-11
2.2.15 Lime 7-11
2.2.16 Paints, Varnishes, Thinners, Bitumen and Road Tar 7-11
2.2.17 Flammable Materials 7-12

2.2.18 Explosives 7-12
2.2.19 Asbestos-based Materials 7-13
2.2.20 Miscellaneous 7-14
2.3 LOADING AND UNLOADING OF MATERIALS 7-14
2.3.1 Loading and Unloading Rail Road Wagons 7-14
and Motor Vehicles
2.3.2 Manual Handling 7-14
Chapter3 Safety During Construction
3.1 GENERAL 7-17
3.1.1 Scope 7-17
3.1.2 Safety of Workmen 7-17
3.1.3 Site Precautions 7-17
3.1.4 Site Amenities 7-17
3.2 EXCAVATION AND FOUNDATION WORK 7-18
3.2.1 General 7-18
3.2.2 Excavating Machinery and Tools 7-18
3.2.3 Excavated Materials and Surcharges 7-18
3.2.4 Groundwater 7-18
3.2.5 Ground Condition 7-18
3.2.6 Overhang, Slopes and Cavities 7-19
3.2.7 Blasting and Vibration 7-19
3.2.8 Health Hazards during Excavation 7-19
3.2.9 Piling and Deep Foundation 7-19
3.2.10 Working in Compressed Air 7-19
3.2.11 Fencing, Warning Signs and Watchman 7-20
3.2.12 Adjoining Properties and Service Lines 7-20
7-ii
3.3 PILE RIG 7-20
3.3.1 Erection of Pile Rig 7-20
3.3.2 Operation of Pile Rig 7-20
3.3.3 Piles 7-21
3.3.4 Inspection and Tests 7-21
3.4 CONSTRUCTION OF WALLS 7-21
3.4.1 General 7-21
3.4.2 Ladders 7-21
3.4.3 Opening in Walls 7-22
3.4.4 Projection from Walls 7-22
3.5 CONSTRUCTION OF FLOORS 7-22
3.5.1 General 7-22
3.5.2 Use of Sheets 7-22
3.5.3 Platforms 7-23
3.5.4 Flat Roof 7-23
3.5.5 Openings and Holes 7-23
3.5.6 Skeleton Construction 7-23
3.6 CONCRETE WORK 7-23
3.6.1 General 7-23
3.6.2 Prestressed Concrete 7-23
3.6.3 Concrete Mixers 7-24
3.6.4 Concrete Truck and Buckets 7-24
3.7 FORMWORK AND SCAFFOLD 7-24
3.7.1 Scaffold and Centering Materials 7-24
3.7.2 Formwork for Concrete 7-24
3.7.3 Load' Capacity 7-25
3.7.4 Bamboos 7-25
3.7.5 Timber Posts 7-25
3.7.6 Steel Centering 7-26
3.8 ERECTION OPERATIONS 7-26
3.8.1 Erection and Hoisting 7-26
3.8.2 Small Articles 7-26
3.8.3 Hoist Protection 7-27
3.8.4 Lifting Gear 7-27
3.8.5 Cranes 7-27
3.8.6 Slings 7-27
3.9 ELECTRIFICATION, EQUIPMENT AND OPERATIONS 7-28
3.9.1 Wiring System 7-28
3.9.2 Guarding of Cables 7-28
3.9.3 Lifts 7-28
3.9.4 Construction Machinery 7-28
3.9.5 Heating of Bitumen and Tar 7-29
3.9.6 Flame Cutting and Welding 7-29
3.9.7 Riveting Operation 7-30
7-iii
3.10 CONSTRUCTION HAZARDS 7-30
• 3.10.1 General 7-30
3.10.2 Fire Hazards 7-30
3.10.3 Health Hazards 7-32
3.10.4 Skin Hazard 7-32
3.10.5 Noise Hazard 7-32
3.11 MISCELLANEOUS 7-33
3.11.1 Stair, Ramp and Gangway 7-33
3.11.2 Fragile Fixture 7-33
3.11.3 Hand Tools 7-33
3.11.4 Steel 'Structure 7-33
3.11.5 Finish Works 7-33
Chapter4 Demolition Work
4.1 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURE 7-35

4.1.1 General 7-35
4.1.2 Planning 7-35
4.1.3 Protection of Adjoining Property 7-35
4.1.4 Precautions Prior to Demolition 7-36
4.1.5 Protection of Public 7-36
4.1.6 Sidewalk Shed and Canopies 7-36
4.2 PRECAUTIONS DURING DEMOLITION 7-36
4.2.1 General 7-36
4.2.2 Sequence of Demolition Operation 7-37
4.2.3 Wall 7-37
4.2.4 Floor 7-37
4.2.5 Special Elements 7-38
4.2.6 Mechanical Demolition 7-39
4.2.7 Miscellaneous 7-39
4.3 BLASTING OPERATION AND USE OF EXPLOSIVES 7-39
4.3.1 General 7-39
4.3.2 Code of Signal 7-39
4.3.3 Supervision and Responsibility 7-40
4.3.4 Protection of Site Personnel and Installation 7-40
4.3.5 Safety of Third Parties 7-40
4.3.6 Use of Explosives 7-40
4.3.7 Blasting Accessories 7-41
4.4 LOWERING, REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS 7-41
4.4.1 General 7-41
4.4.2 Use of Chutes 7-42
4.4.3 Removal of Debris 7-42
4.4.4 Disposal of Materials 7-42
4.4.5 Regularization of Plots 7-42
7-iv
CHAPTER l]
Constructional Responsibilities
and Practices
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 General
This part of the Code provides the minimum requirements for safe constructional operations. It describes
precautionary measures to be taken to ensure the safety of property, workmen, pubfic, materials, services,
plant and equipment.
1.1.2 Scope
The regulations stated in this part cover the constructional responsibilities and practices in building sites;
safe storing, stacking and handling of materials; and safety of personnel during construction operations. The
provisions of this part shall apply to all construction operations viz. erection, alteration, repair, removal or
aemolition of buildings and structures.
Nothing herein contained shall be construed to nullify any rules, regulations or statutes governing the
protection of the public or workers from any hazard involved in manufacturing, mining and other processes
and operations which generate toxic gases, dust or other elements dangerous to the respiratory system, eye
sight or health.
1.1.3 Terminology
of any conf11ct or contradiction between a definition given in this section and that in any other part, the
meaning provided in this part shall govern for interpretation of the provisions of this part. References shall
be made to Part 1 and Part 2 for terms not defined in this section.
BLAST AREA : The area in which danger may arise during or prior to demolition including the potential area
affected by preparation, handling and use of explosives.
BLASTING : The operation of disintegrating rock, structure etc. by firing an explosive charge.
Part 7 7-1
Part 7
CARTRIDGE : A wrapped or otherwise protected cylinder of defined size of a homogeneous explosive

material.
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT : All equipment, machineries, tools and temporary retaining structures and
working platforms, such as derricks, staging, scaffolds, runways, ladders and all material handling equipment
including safety devices. .
DETONATOR : An instantaneous or delay initiator for explosive materials and containing a charge of high
explosive fired by means of a flame, spark or electric current.
EXPLOSIVE : Any substance, whether or not contained in a device, used or manufactured with a view to
producing an effect by explosion.
FLOOR HOLE :An opening in any floor, platform, pavement, or yard, measuring less than 300 mm but more·
than 25 mm in its least dimension, through which materials but not persons may fall; e.g. a belt hole, pipe
opening or slot opening.
FLOOR OPENING: An opening in any floor, platform, pavement or yard bigger than a floor hole measuring
300 mm or more in its least dimension, through whicn a person may falf; e.g. hatchway, stair or ladder
opening, hopper mouth pit or large manhole.
GUARD RAILING : A barrier erected along exposed edges of an open floor, floor opening, wall opening,
ramp, platform, catwalk or balcony, etc. to prevent the fall of persons.
HOISTS : A platform, bucket or similar enclosure made of steel frames, struts and timber planks used for the
lifting or lowering of construction material and workmen, the hoists being operated from a point outside the
conveyance.
MAGAZINE : Any building or structure used for the storage of explosives with approval of the Authority.
PILE RIG : The complete P.ile driving equipment comprising piling frame, leader, hammer, extractor, winch and
power unit. Compfete p1le driving rig may be mounted on rafts or pontoon or rails. Pile rig may also be a
mobile unit mounted on trailers or trucks, or a special full revolving ng for raking piles.
PLATFORM: A working space for persons, elevated above the surrounding floor or ground, e.g. balcony or
platform for the operation of machinery and equipment.
PRIMER: A cartridge cord or container of explosive into which a detonator or detonating cord is inserted or
attached and is designed to initiate a larger charge.
SALVAGE : An act of saving and utilization of reusable scrap materials conforming to the requirements of
this Code.
SCAFFOLD : A temporary erection of timber or metal work to support or to allow the hoisting and lowering
of workmen, tools and materials.
SHOTFIRER : The person in immediate control of the use of explosives.
TOE BOARD : A vertical barrier erected along exposed edge of a floor opening, wall opening, canopy,
platform, catwalk or ramp at floor level to prevent fa1l of materials or persons.
WALL HOLE : An opening in any wall or partition having a height of 25 mm to 750 mm and any width.
WALL OPENING : An opening in any wall or partition having a height of at least 750 mm and a width of at
least 450 mm .
1.2 PLANNING
l.Z.1 Responsibilities
In a construction or demolition work, the terms of contract between the owner and the contractor, and
between a consultant and the owner, shall be clearly defined and put in writing. These, however, will not
absolve the owner from any of his responsibilities under the various provisions of this Code, and other
applicable regulations and bye-laws.
The terms of contract between the owner and the contractor will determine the responsibilities and liabilities
of either party in the concerned matters, within the provisions of the relevant acts and codes (e.g. the
Employer's Liability Act 1938, the Factories Act 1965, the Fatal Accident Act 1955 and Workmen's
Compensation Act 1923).
The owner, or the professional appointed by him to supervise the work, shall ensure the quality of materials
used, soundness ofthe work and observance of all precautionary measures.
7-2
Chapter 1
Constructional Responsibilities and Practices
1.2.2 Temporary Construction

Plan, layout, design and specification of all temporary constructions, e.g. workers' shed, toilet, site store, site
office, runway, trestle, foot bridge, guard shed etc., which are likely to mterfere with right-of-way or utility
services provided by various agencies, shall be submitted to the respective authorities for approval before
commencement of any construction operation.
Temporary structures may be constructed from inflammable materials, but they shall be so located as not to
cause any fire hazard to adjoining structures or works and neighbouring properties.
1.2.3 Site Preparation

While preparing the site for construction, bushes, hedges, debris etc. shall be removed and properly disposed
off the site. The site shall be prepared in such a way that the following facilities are provided at all times
during the construction :
a) access roads for fire fighting vehicles;

b) free access from street to fire hydrants and static water tanks, if applicable;
c) access to all permanent, temporary and portable first aid equipment;
d) where apphcable, stand pipe system with fire hydrant connection at accessible locations adjacent to
usable stairs;
e) required number of exits; and
f) adequate sanitary facilities.
All sanitary facilities shall be kept in a hygienic condition. Temporary toilets shall be enclosed, screened and
weather proofed and shall be installed and maintained in accordance with Sec 3.1.4.
1.2.4 First Aid Attendant

Depending on the scope and nature of the work, at least one person trained in first aid for every 100 workers
shall be available at work site to render and direct first aid to casualties. The first aid attendant shall have a
refresher course every five years and certificates renewed.
A telephone, if possible, shall be made available to first aid assistant with emergency telephone numbers
prominently displayed. A record/reports of all accidents and actions taken thereon shall be kept by the first
aid attendant and forwarded to appropriate authorities when asked. See also Sec 3.10.3.4.
1.3 CONSTRUCTION CONTROL
1.3.1 General
All construction including extension, alteration and demolition shall require a permit from the Authority.
Permits shall also be obtained from relevant organizations for service connections and other facilities. The
construction work shall conform to the plan approved by the Authority.
The owner shall make arrangements for obtaining the required approvals.
All new work or alteration shall be planned, designed, superVised and executed by competent professionals
of relevant discipline.
1.3.2 Permits
The owner of a building shall obtain permission from the Authority for the work to be undertaken in
accordance with the provisjons of the Part 2 of this Code.
Special permits shall be obtained from relevant authorities before commencement of a particular construction
work for the following items and for any other item as decided by the Building Official :
a) storing materials o n roads and sidewalks;

b) using water, electricity, gas, sewerage or other public utilities;
c) diggmg roads or interfenng with the drainage system;
d) storing and handling of explosives; and
e) affecting any structure having historical association and antiquity.
1.3.3 Tests and Inspections

The Authority shall notify both the owner and the contractor of any unsafe, unlawful or unethical situation
discovered during inspection and direct them to take necessary remedial measures to remove the hazard or
rectify the violation.
Where the strength or adequacy of any scaffold or other device or construction equipment is in doubt, or
where any complaint is lodged, the Authority shall inspect such equipment and snalf prohibit its use until
tested safe as required by Sec 1.4.7, or until all danger is removed.

Part 7
1.4 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND WORKERS
1.4.1 General
Erection, alteration, renovation, remodelling, repairing, removal or demolition of a building or structure
shall be conducted in a safe manner. Suitable protection for the general public and workers employed thereon
shall be provided according to the various provisions of this Code.
All equipment and safeguard required for the construction work such as temporary stair, ladder, ramp,
scaffold, hoist, runway, barricade, chute, lift etc. shall be substantially constructed and erected so as not to
create any unsafe situation for the workmen using them or the workmen and general public passing under, on
or near them.
1.4.2 Protective Fences and Railings

Pedestrian traffic on the adjacent road or footpath, or the walkway constructed in accordance with
Sec 1.5.3(c), shall be protected by a railing or fence. Protective railing or fence shall also be placed adjacent to
excavations. Railings shall be at least lm in height and when adjacent to excavations, shall be provided with
a mid-rail.
All construction work within 1.5 m from the road shall be enclosed with a fence not less than 2.4 m high from
the grade. If the work is more than 1.5 m away fromthe road, a fence or other barriers shall be erected at least
on the side of the site nearest to the footpath/road. The fence shall extend over the entire length of the side.
Openings in fences may have doors which normally shall be kept closed.
All fences shall be of adequate strength to resist wind pressure and other load as specified in Chapter 2, Part
6. All fences shall be well braced. The side of any fence/handrail adjacent to a road or sidewalk shall be kept
smooth. Fences, barriers, or temporary structures of any kind located on public roads shall not obstruct
vision at the intersection of streets.
1.4.3 Canopies, Overhangs and Platforms .

Protective canopy shall have a clear height of 2.4 mover the walkway. Walkways under the canopy shall be
not less than 1.2 m wide in the clear. However, the Building Official may instruct differently regarding the
clear width in congested areas.
Every canopy shall have a fence built along its entire length on the construction side. If materials are stored
or work is done on the roof of the canopy, edges of the canopy roof shall have a tight curb board not less than
200 mm high and a railing not less than 1 m high. The entire structure shall be designed to carry the loads to
be imposed.
The posts or other supporting members of any temporary structure on the road side shall be designed for the
load due to vibration generated by the street trafftc. The framework supporting the covering shall be well
braced and designed to support at least 7 kPa. However, the top deck shan be designed to carry not less than
10 kPa.
The roof covering shall be of a width sufficient to cover the entire walkway or sidewalk and shall be made
watertight. Also see Sec 4.1.6.
Covered walkways shall be provided with adequate lights at all times. Cantilevered platforms or other
substitute protection in lieu of sidewalk sheds shall not be used unless approved by the engineer and deemed
adequate to insure public safety.
Materials shall not be stored on overhangs unless these are designed for the load. Such storage shall in no
case exceed a day's supply. All materials shall be piled in an orderly manner and height to permit removal
without endangering the stability of the pile and canopy.
1.4.4 Protective Devices

No structure, fire protection or sanitary safeguard or device shall be removed or made inoperative unless
instructed by the engineer. Pedestrian protection required by all relevant regulations shall be maintained in
place and kel?t in good order as long as pedestrians may be endangered. Every protection, fence, canopy and
other protective devices shall be removed within 7 days after such protection is no longer required.
1.4.5 Notices and Signs

Every walkway adjacent to a construction, demolition or excavation site shall be kept well-lighted at night.
The outer edge of the occupied space of the street or footpath shall have red lights placed thereon which shall
flash continuously day and night.
Boards with caution signs, along with safety regulations and emergency instructions painted in bright colour,
preferably red, shall be erected near the entry and in prominent places of the site. It shan describe
appropriate measures for the elimination or control of the cfanger and the conduct and course of action to be
taken. Red caution marks shall also be placed on the building, equipment and utility connections.
7-4
Chapter 1
Constructional Responsibilities and Practices
1.4.6 Watchman and Auditory Signal

A watchman shall be employed to warn the general public when intermittent hazardous operations are
conducted. Audible signa1 shall be used in case of extreme danger. It shall be such that any person in the
rece tion area can recognize and react to the signal as intended. An auditory emergency evacuation signal
f
shal take precedence concerning recognition over all auditory signals.
1.4.7 Safe Load

No structure, temporary support, scaffolding, sidewalk, footpath and drain covers, shed, other devices and
construction equipment shall be loaded in excess of its safe working capacity.
Whenever the structural quality or strength of scaffolding plank or other construction equipment is in doubt,
these shall be replaced or be subject to a strength test to two and half times the superimposed live load; the
member may be used if it sustains the test load without failure.
Requirements of Sec 3.7.3 shall be observed regarding design loads in scaffolds.
1.5 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY
1.5.1 General
All existing and adjoining public and private property shall be protected from any damage due to construction
operations. The use of public properties shall meet the requirements of relevant public agencies. Whenever
requested, site plans, construction details, and specification shall be submitted for review by the concerned
agency.
Public walkway shall not be occupied to carry out work under a building permit unless the pedestrians are
protected as specified in this section. Any material or structure temporarily occupying public property,
mcluding fences and walkways, shall be adequately lighted at night.
1.5.2 Adjoining Property

Necessary permissions to preserve and protect the adjoining plot, building or structure shall be obtained by
the owner of the building to be constructed. Adjoining property shall be completely protected from any damage
due to the building operation when the owner of the adjoining property permits free access to the adjoining
site and building.
If required, the owner of the adjoining plot, building or structure shall be granted necessary permission to
enter the construction site to make his own property safe.
No part of any structure, except signs, shall project beyond the property line of the site. Sidewalk sheds,
underpinning and other temporary protective guards and devices may project beyond the property lines if
approved by the Authority. Where necessary, the permission of the adjoining property owner shalf also be
obtained.
Where a construction or demolition is undertaken at a level higher than the adjacent structure, the roof, roof
outlets, skylights and other roof structures of adjoining buildings shall be protected against damage. This
shall be ensured by the owner of the construction site at his own expense.
If the owner, lessee or tenant of the adjoining building refuses permission to have the roofs and skylights of
the adjoining building protected, the responsibility and expense for the said protection shall transfer to the
person refusing such permission.
1.5.3 Use of Road and Footpath

Road and footpath spaces may be used only temporarily during construction subject to the following
conditions :
a) permissions shall be obtained from relevant authorities for all such uses;
b) the allocated space or any portion thereof shall be more than 1.5 m away from a railway track;
c) a walkway shall be constructed in the outer portion of the road space permitted to be occupied in
conformity with Sec 1.4.2 and 1.4.3;
d) an 1m clear passage shall be maintained along the building site;
e) person(s) who has been issued a permit to use road and footpath spaces shall furnish a bond with the
relevant authority of such type and amount as may be deemed advisable by the authority as protection
from all liabilities;
f) the permittee shall repair any damages done to the adjacent road due to its use for construction work at
his own expense; the bond money shall stand forfeited if the permittee fails to comply with this
requirement; and

Part 7
g) it shall be used in a manner that will not deface it or create a nuisance. The owner, upon the completion
of the building, shall immediately remove all temporary walkways, debris and all other obstruction and
leave such puolic property in as good a condition as it was before such work commenced.
1.5.4 Adjoining Structure and Retaining Wall

The owner of the construction site shall preserve all adjoining structures and walls from damage. He shall
support the adjoining building or structure by proper foundations to comply with Sec 1.5.2.
During any demolition or excavation work; the structure or the wall shall be maintained structurally safe by
adequate temporary props and lateral supports, if necessary.
Where the grade of the adjoining plot is lower than the site level, a retaining wall shall be erected, if
necessary, at the owner's expense and on his site. Design and construction of retaining wall shall conform to
the structural requirements for such walls, and may have a railing or fence at the top to provide a total height
of not less than 1 m above the finished grade of the higher plot.
1.5.5 Protection of Utilities

Protective frame and boarding shall be built around and over every street lamp, utility box, fire and police
alarm box, fire hydrant, catch basin and manhole that may be damaged by any construction worl<. The
protection shall be maintained while such work is being done; and shalf not obstruct the normal functioning
of the device.
Building material, fence, shed etc. shall not obstruct free access to any fire hydrant, lamppost, manhole, fire
alarm box, or catch basin, or interfere with the drainage of the site. Protective covers snail be provided to
such utility fixtures during the progress of the work without obscuring their identity.
Precaution shall be taken during construction to prevent concrete, mortar washing or any other material from
entering and blocking a sewer.
7-6
CHAPTER�
Storage, Stacking and
Handling Practices
2.1 GENERAL PRACTICES
2.1.1 General
Materials required in construction operations shall be stored, stacked and handled in a manner to prevent
deterioration or intrusion of foreign matter, and to ensure the preservation of their quality for the work.
Materials shall be stored and placed so as not to endanger the public, the workers or the adjoining property.
Materials shall be stacked on well-drained, flat and unyielding surface. Material stacks shall not impose any
undue stresses on walls or other structures.
Materials shall be separated according to kind, size and length and placed in neat, orderly piles. High piles
shall be staggered back at suitable intervals in height. Piles of materials shall be arranged so as to allow a
minimum 800 mm wide passageway in between for inspection and removal. All passageways shall be kept
clear of dry vegetation, greasy substance and debris.
2.1.2 Protection against Fire

Timber, coal, paints and similar combustible materials shall be separated from each other. A minimum of
two dry chemical J'OWder (DCP) type fire extinguishers shall oe provided at both open and covered
locations where combustible and flammable materials are stored.
Flammable liquids like petrol, thinner etc., shall be stored in conformity with relevant regulations.
Explosives like detonators, gun powder etc. shall be stored in conformity with Sec 2.2.17, Sec 3.10.2 and
otner fire protection provisions set forth in this Code.__
2.1.3 Housekeeping
Stairways, walkways, scaffolds, gangways and access ways shall be kept free of building material, tools,
accumulated rubbish and obstructions.
Part7 7-7
Part 7
Materials or equipment stored on the street, footpath and other :public places with permission from the
proper Authority, and conforming to Sec 1.5.3, shall not interfere with vehicular traffic or pedestrians on the
highway or street. The piles shall be arranged to leave a safe walkway unobstructed for 1ts full length, and
'
adequately lighted at night and at all other necessary times.
Material and equipment shall not be located within 7.5 m of a street intersection. These shall neither be so
placed as to obstruct normal observation of traffic signals nor to hinder the use of public transit loading
platforms.
2.2 STORAGE, STACKING AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
2.2.1 Cement
Cement shall be stored at the work site in a building or a shed which is dry, leak proof and moisture proof.
The building or shed shall have minimum number of windows and close fitting doors which shall be kept
closed at all times except during loading and unloading.
Cement received in bags shall be prevented from coming into contact with any dampness or moisture.
Cement bags shall be stacked on wooden planks maintaining a minimum clearance of 200 mm from the
floor. A minimum clear space of 450 mm shall be provided between the stacks and any exterior wall. .
Maximum heisht of the stack shall be 15 bags and the width not more than four bags or 3m. In stacks more
than 8 bags h1gh, the bags shall be arranged alternate length and crosswise. The bags shall be stacked
closely as to minimize the surface area exposed to air.
During monsoon, and for storage for more than 2 months, the stack shall be kept completely enclosed by a
waterproofing membrane such as polyethylene sheet. The waterproofing membrane sball not be damaged
during the use. .
Heavy containers of cement shall not be stacked more than two tiers high. Cement shall be used in the order
they are received; storage shall facilitate this requirement.
Hooks shall not be used for handling cement bags unless permitted by the supervisor. Workers handling
cement shall put on protective hand and face coverings and use skin protective. They shall be instructed to
the need of cleanliness from time to time. .
When enterins a silo or bin for any purpose, the workman shall wear a lifeline attended by another
workman outside. The ejection system sba!Ibe shut down and locked out during such operation.
2.2.2 Steel Bars and Sections

Steel reinforcement bars and structural steel shall be stored in a way to prevent distortion, corrosion, scaling
and rusting. Reinforcement bars and structural steel sections shall be coated with cement wash before
stacking, specially in humid areas. In case of long time storage or storage in coastal areas, reinforcement bars
and steel sections shall be stacked at least 200 mm above ground level.
Steel sections shall be stacked upon latforrns, skids or any other suitable supports. Bars of different � es,
f
sizes and lengths and structural stee sections shall be stored separately to facilitate issues in required sizes
and lengths without cutting from standard lengths. Ends of bars and sections of each type shall be painted
with separate designated colours.
Tag lines shall be used to control the load in handling reinforcing bars or structural steel when a crane is
used. Heavy steel sections and bundles of reinforcing bars shall be lifted and carried with the help of slings
and tackles.
2.2.3 Bricks and Masonry Blocks

Bricks shall be stacked on dry firm ground in regular tiers. The stacks shall be 50 bricks long and 10 bricks
high, the bricks being placed on edge. The width of each stack shall be two bricks. Clear distance between
adjacent stacks shall be not less than 800 mm .
Bricks made of clay containing lime shall be thoroughly soaked in water (docked) while in stack. Bricks of
different types shall be stacked separately. Concrete blocks, stone blocks and other masonry blocks shall be
stored in stacks of such height as not to damage the blocks in the lower layers or topple.
Bricks shall be loaded or unloaded with care, and shall not be thrown or dumped. They shall be carried from
the stack to the site of placement in small batches as and when necessary.
2.2.4 Aggregate
Aggregates shall be stored at site on a hard, dry and level ground. If such a surface is not available, a
platform of planks or old iron sheets, or a floor of bricks, or a thin layer of lean concrete shall be used.
Contact with clay, dust, vegetable and other foreign matter shall be avoided.
7-8
Chapter 2
.
Fine and coarse aggregates shall either be stored separately or heaps be separated by dividing walls. Fine
aggregate shall be stored in a place and manner where loss due to the effect of wind is minimum, viz. in the
leeward side behind a wall, or by covering with a polyethylene sheet.
When withdrawals are made from heaps, no overhang in the original heap shall be permitted.
2.2.5 Water
Water to be used in construction shall be stored in tanks, bottom and the sides of which shall be constructed
with brick or concrete. Contact with any organic impurities shall be prevented.
The total capacity of the storage tank shall be determined taking into account the water required for fire
fighting. Also See Part 4, Sec 4.2.
The tank shall be so located as to facilitate easy storage and filling in, and supply both for construction work
and for fire fighting. Passage to the water tank shall not be blocked at any time.
2.2.6 Timber
Timber shall be stored in stacks on well treated and even surfaced beams, sleepers or brick pillars so as to be
at least 200 mm above the ground level. Contact with water shall be avoided under all circumstances.
Members shall be stored separately in layers according to lengths. Crossers or wooden battens of sound
wood, straight and uniform thickness shall separate one layer from another.
A 25 mm space shall be kept between members. The longer pieces shall be placed in the bottom layers and
shorter pieces in the top layers. At least one end of the stack shall be in true vertical alignment. The crossers
themselves shall be in vertical alignment.
The recommended width and height of a stack are 1.5 m and 2.0 rn respectively. Minimum distance between
two stacks shall be 800 mm. In case stacking with battens is not possible, the timber may be close piled in
heaps, and the precautions specified above observed.
The ends of all members to be stored for a year or more shall be coated with coal tar, aluminum leaf paints
(hardened gloss oil), microcrystalline wax or other suitable material.
The stacks of timbers shall be protected from hot dry wind, direct sun and rain. Weights may be placed on
top of the stacks to prevent warping of timber. Nails, metal straps, etc. attached to used timber, particularly
planks and formwork for shuttering, shall be removed before stacking.
2.2.7 Pipes and Tubing

Pipes shall be stored in stacks with stoppers provided at the bottom layer to keep the ipe stack stable. The
f
stack, particularly of smaller diameter pipes, shall be in pyramid shape. Pipes shal not be stacked more
than 1.5 m high.
Each stack shall have pipes of the same type and size only. Removal of pipes shall start from the top layer
and by pulling from one end. A pipe shalf not be stored inside another pipe. The pipes may also be placed
alternately length and crosswise.
Asbestos cement pipes shall be unloaded at location, for example near trenches. Cast iron detachable joints
and fittings shall be stacked under cover and separated from the asbestos cement pipes and fittings. Rubber
rings shall be kept clean and away from grease, oil, heat and light.
Pipe shall be carried one at a time on shoulders by at least two workmen. Pipe fittings and joints shall be
handled individually.
Black polyethylene pipes may be stored either under cover or in the open. However, natural coloured
polyethylene pipes shall be stored under cover only and protected from direct sunlight.
Coils of tubing shall be stored either on edge or stacked flat one on top of the other; in either case they shall
not be allowed to come into contact with hot water or steam pipes and should be kept away from hot
surface.
Straight lengths of unplasticized PVC pipes shall be stored on horizontal racks supported throughout their
lengths on a reasonaoly flat surface free from stones and sharp projections. Pipes shall not be stacked in
large piles, especially under warm conditions. Socket and spigot pipes shall be stacked in layers with sockets
placea at alternate ends of the stack to avoid top sided stack. ·
PVC pipes shall be stored in a shaded area. The ends of pi e, particularly those specially prepared for
f
jointing, shall be protected from abrasion. Damaged portion o a pipe shall be cut out completely.
Pipes of conducting materials shall be stacked on solid level sills and contained in a manner to prevent
spreading or rolling of the pipe. For storage in large quantity, suitable packing shall be placed between the
layers. During transportation, the pipes shall be so secured as to prevent displacement/rolling.

Part 7
In stacking and handling of pipes and other conducting materials, the following minimum vertical safety
distances from overhead power lines shall be provided (also see Table 3.1.3):
11 KV and below 2.5m

Above 11 KV and below 33 KV 3.5m
Above 33 KV and below 132 KV 4.4 m
Above 132 KV and below 230 KV 5.3 m
2.2.8 Timber Piles and Poles

Piles and poles shall be stacked on solid and level sills so as to prevent rolling or spreading of the stack.
The storage area shall be maintained free of vegetation and flammable materials.
Removal of piles and poles shall start from the top layer and by pulling from one end. Tag lines shall be
used to control movement of piles and poles. In stacking and handling of piles and poles, precautions as
laid down in Sec 2.2.7 shall be followed. ·
2.2.9 Sanitary Appliances

All sanitary appliances shall be stored under cover. When receiving and storing appliances, consideration
shall be given to the sequence of removal from the store to the assembly positions. Vitreous fittings shall be
stacked separately from the metal ones.
Bigger sanitary appliances shall be handled one at a time. Traps, water seals and gullies shall be handled
separately. Sanitary fittings shall be protected from any oil spillages; hands of the workers shall be free of
any oily substance. The supporting brackets, pedestals etc. shall be checked before lowering the appliances
in their position.
2.2.10 Doors, Windows, Ventilators and Grilles

Metal doors, windows, ventilators and grilles shall be stacked upright (on their sills) on level ground. They
shall not come in contact with dirt and water. If received in crates, they shall be stacked according to the
manufacturer's instructions and removed from the crates as and when required for the work.
Metal frames of doors, windows and ventilators shall be stacked with the kick plates at the top. They shall
not be kept in this manner for long, ahd should be taken to the fixing position as soon as possibfe.
2.2.11 Tiles
Tiles shall never be dumped at site and shall be stacked in such a way that mould surface of one tile faces
that of another. They sha1l be stacked in layers on a well treated hard surface. The maximum height of each
stack shall be 1 m. Tiles of different types, quality, size and thickness shall be stacked separately.
Tiles supplied in wooden crates shall be stored with the tiles in the crates. The crates shall be opened one at
a time when required for placing. Removal of both the crates and the tiles shall start from top layer. Only
on finishing the top course, tiles for the next course shall be fixed.
Tiles shall be handled in pairs and should not be thrown.
2.2.12 Sheets and Boards

For storing and handling of sheets and boards, such as asbestos sheets, CGI sheets, particle boards, gypsum
boards etc., the following requirements shall be fulfilled :
a) sheets and boards shall be stacked to a height of not more than 1 m on dry, clean, firm and level ground
with timber or other packing beneath them;
b) bottom of the stack shall be raised adequately from the ground level where there is a risk of water
corning on the floor;
c) sheets and boards shall be stacked under cover and protected from damage due to wind, rain and sun;
d) at least one edge of the stack shall be in true vertical alignment;
e) the top sheet in each stack shall be suitably weighed down;
f) damage to the comers and surface of sheets and boards shall be prevented and damaged sheets shall
not be stacked with sound materials;
g) sheets shall no( be pushed forward against the lower sheet for more than one-fourth of the sheet length;
they shall be lifted mto position by two workmen, if necessary;
h) sheets and boards shall be lowered or raised gently and not thrown; and
i) suitable hand protection like gloves, jelly etc. shall be provided to the workmen wherever necessary.
7-10
Chapter 2
CGI sheets shall be stacked in not more than 100 bundles per stack built solidly. Corrugations of sheets in
one stack shall run in the same direction. One end of the stack shall be raised by at least 100 mm to drain
accumulated water, if any. Sheets not for immediate use shall be stacked under roof.
Plywood, fibre board, particle board, block board etc. shall be stacked on a flat dunnage on top of which a
wooden frame shall be constructed with battens of suitable size in such a way that it supports all four
comers and edges of the boards. For boards upto a length of 2 m, a minimum of one intermediate batten and
for boards longer than 2 m, at least two intermediate battens shall be provided.
Decorative plywood and laminated and decorative boards shall be stacked in pairs facing each other. Sheets
shall not be dragged one over another.
Specification laid out in BDS 1159 shall be followed for packaging of plywood, particle board, hard board
and flush doors.
2.2.13 Plastic and Rubber sheets

Plastic and rubber sheets shall be stored according to manufacturer·s instructions. Sheets shall be stored in
the coolest of the store rooms available. The room shall be well ventilated and kept dark; direct sun light
shall not be allowed to fall on the stored sheets.
The sheets shall be stored away from electric generators, electric motors, switchgears and other such
electrical equipment. ·
Contamination of the sheets with vegetable and mineral oil, grease, organic solvents, acid and their fumes,
alkalis, dust and grit shall be prevented. All greasy contamination shall be removed immediately with
kerosene or similar liquid, and the sheets thoroughly wiped dry and dusted with French chalk.
Undue stretch and strain, kinks, sharp bends or folds of the sheets shall be avoided in case of long time
storage. The sheets shall be turned over periodically and treated with fresh chalk.
In addition, safety precautions common for all types of sheets, as laid down in Sec 2.2.12, shall be followed.
2.2.14 Glass Sheets

All glass sheets shall be kept dry and stored in a covered space. Glass sheets shall be lifted and stored
upright on their long edges and put into stacks of not more than 25 sheets. They shall be supported at two
points at about 300 mm from each end by fillets of wood.
The bottom of each stack shall be about 25 mm clear from the base of the wall and other sup ort against
f
which the stack rests. The whole stack shall be as close to upright as possible. Smooth floors shal be covered
with gunny bags.
Workmen handling glass sheets, remnants and waste glass pieces, and fibre glass shall be provided with
gloves, jelly and other suitable hand protections. In removing glass sheets from crates, great care shall be
taken to avoid damages from breakage. Glass edges shall be covered or protected to prevent injuries to
workmen.
2.2.15 Lime
Quicklime shall be slaked as soon as possible. If unavoidable, it may be stored in compact heaps having only
the minimum of exposed area. The heaps shall be stored on a suitable platform under a roof protected from
rain and wind. A minimum space of 300 mm shall be provided all-round the heaps to avoid bulging of
walls.
Unslaked lime shall be stored in a watertight place and shall be separated from combustible materials.
Hydrated lime shall be supplied either in containers or sacks, such as jute bags lined with polyethylene or
high density polyethylene woven bags lined with polyethylene or craft paper bags. It shall be stored in a dry
room to protect the lime from dampness and to mmimise warehouse deterioration.
When dry slaked lime is to be used within a few days, it shall be stored on a covered platform and protected
from rain and wind. It shall be kept in a dry and air-tight godown when immediate use is not required.
However, it shall never be stored for more than two months.
Workmen handling bulk lime shall wear protective clothing, respirators, and goggles, shall be instructed in
the need of cleanliness to prevent dermatitis, and shall be provided with hand cream, petroleum jelly, or
similar protectors.
2.2.16 Paints, Varnishes, Thinners, Bitumen and Road Tar

Paints, varnishes, lacquers and thinners shall be kept in properly sealed or closed containers. The containers
shall be kept in a we!I ventilated location, free from excessive heat, smoke, sparks or flame. The floor of the
paint store shall have 100 mm thick loose sand on it.

Part7
Paint materials in quantities other than required for daily use shall be kept in the regular storage place. The
manner of storage shall facilitate removal and use of lots in the same order in which they are received.
Temporary electrical wiring and fittings shall not be installed in the paint store. When electric lights,
switches or electrical equipment are necessary to be stored or used in the same room, the room shall be
designed in a way to reduce explosion risk.
Sources of ignition, such as open flame and exposed heating elements, shall not be permitted in paint store,
nor shall smoking be allowed there.
Buckets containing sand shall be kept ready for use. A 5 kg dry powder fire extinguisher conforming to
accepted standards shall be kept at an easily accessible position close to the paint store.
Drums or containers containing bitumen, road tar, asphalt, etc. shall be stacked vertically on their bottoms
in up to 3 tiers. Leaky drums shall be either totally removed or separated. Empty drums shall be stored in
pyramidal stacks neatly in rows.
Bituminous roofing felts shall be stored away from other combustible or flammable materials. They shall be
handled gently to prevent cracking and damages.
2.2.17 Flammable Materials

Outdoor storage of drums containing flammable materials like hydraulic brake and transmission fluid,
gasoline and lubricants shall be such. that contamination from moisture and dirt is avoided. The storage
shall be free of spilled products, debris and other hazardous material.
Compressed gases and petroleum products shall not be stored in the same building or close to each other.
Proper identification by markings, tags etc. shall be used for petroleum products delivered to the job site
and stored there in drums. .
Highly flammable liquids shall be stored in fire resisting containers in a special store room secluded from
the main working site. For uses of up to 50 litres, liquids can be stored in the workroom in fire resistant
cupboards or bins. Stores of liquids snail be clearly marked highly flammable. All empty containers shall be
returned to the store.
The workmen shall dis ose off any clothing or apparel spilled over by or soaked in flammable materials
f
immediately. They shal not be allowed to continue work unless affected clothing and apparels are changed.
The above requirements shall be considered additional to those mentioned in Sec 2.1.2 and 3.10.2.
2.2.18 Explosives
2.2.18.1 Transportation of Explosive : Loading, unloading and handling of explosives will be supervised
by competent personnel. Also see Sec 4.3.
Where the magazine is located near the construction site and blasting operations continue daily, actual
requirements of explosives shall be issued from the magazine and transported to the site. Any left-overs
shall be returned to the magazine after every use.
For carrying upto 5 kg of explosives, insulated containers constructed of minimum 50 mm thick finished
wood or 6 mm thick plastic or 10 mm thick pressed fibre shall be used. The containers shall have no metal
parts, be waterproof and provided with a lid and nonconductive carrying device.
Vehicles transportin� explosives shall have a wooden or nonsparking metal floor with high sides and ends.
In open-bodied vehicles, the explosives shall be covered with a waterproof and fire-resistant tarpaulin.
Electric wiring in vehicle shall be fully insulated. The nature of cargo in the vehicle shall be properly
indicated on its body.
Metal, flammable, or corrosive substances shall not be transported with explosives. Explosive and
detonators or blasting caps shall not be transported in the same vehicle; they shall be transported in original
containers or in securely locked separate nonmetalic containers.
Smoking shall be prohibited in the vehicle carrying explosives.
2.2.18.2 Storage of Explosives : Explosives shall only be stored in a clean, dry, well ventilated, cool,
substantially constructed, and bullet and fire-resistant magazine. Blasting caps or primers shall not be stored
with explosives. None of these shall be stored near oil, gasoline, cleaning solutions, radiators, steam pipes,
or other sources of heat.
Smoking, matches, fire or flame shall not be allowed near a magazine. No leaves, grass, bush or debris shall
be allowed to accumulate within 8 m of an explosive magazine. No sparking metal or tools shall be stored in
a magazine. Persons shall put off shoes with metal nails before entering a magazine.
7-12
Chapter 2
If nitroglycerine leaks down on the floor, the floor shall be immediately desensitized by washing thoroughly
with an agent obtained beforehand from the supplier of the explosives.
2.2.18.3 Handling of Explosives : No package containing explosives shall be dragged, dropped or handled
roughly. These shall be opened only at a safe distance and properly shielded from tfie packages of
expfosives in bulk storage. The covers of the explosive cases or packages shall be replaced every time after
taking out part of the contents.
Sparking metal tools shall not be used to open kegs or cases of explosives. Smoking or carrying matches,
fire, flame or devices capable of producing fire or flame, shall not be permitted wnile handling or using
explosives. Explosives shall not be carried in the pockets of any clothing or on any person.
2.2.18.4 Disposal of Explosives : No explosives shall be abandoned. They shall be disposed off in
accordance with the approved methods; manufacturers or the appropriate authority shall be consulted in
this matter.
Explosives caps or packing shall not be left lying around .. Paper of fibre materials used in packing explosives
shall not be put in any suosequent use. Such materials shall be destroyed by burning.
· 2.2.19 Asbestos-based Materials

Whenever possible, materials which do not contain asbestos shall be used. Special precautions as specified
by the following sub-sections shall be taken while handling asbestos containing materials to minimize the
risk of inhaling asbestos. Handling shall be limited to as few workers as possible.
2.2.19.1 Handling of Asbestos-based Materials : When cutting, sawing or machining takes place in
confined place, efficient local dust extraction equipment shall be installed. Alternatively, a wet method of
machining by water type dust suppressed powered tools shall be used.
The best standards of good housekeeping and hygiene sh. all a ply to cutting areas which shall be segregated
f
and used for no other purpose. Waste materials and dust shal not be allowed to accumulate in worl<ing area
or store.
A vacuum cleaning device with a high efficiency filter shall be used to keep floors, walls and fixtures free
from dust accumulation. Alternatively all surfaces shall be cleaned with a wet rag and floors washed by
gently spraying water. Dry sweeping or compressed air blowing shall never be used.
Asbestos insulation boards shall preferably be supplied precut and drilled from the workshop using a
suitable dust control equipment. On-site preparations shall be performed in the open.
Polyethylene sheet shall be used to screen a work area in an enclosed space. Only authorised workers shall
be allowed access to such areas. Appropriate signs shall mark an asbestos working area and warn against
inhaling asbestos dust.
A guillotine or knife die cutter shall be used to cut sheets. The use of hammer and chisel shall be avoided.
At the end of each work shift, dust shall be either collected by a vacuum cleaner or swept up after being
wetted. The dust shall than be put into a sealable container. Any rejected material shall also be placed in an
impermeable bag.
2.2.19.2 Removal and disposal Asbestos-based Materials : Spray method shall be used for removal of
asbestos-based materials which is not covered or coated by other materials. For removing thick asbestos
based materials, soaking method with total saturation shall be used. Dry method shall only be used where
the spray or soaking method cannot be used.
All moveable furniture and fittings shall be removed from the work area and other nonremovable items
covered with plastic sheets. Air conditioning systems shall either be isolated from the asbestos removal area
or closed down.
Before removal or stripping the asbestos, insulation coatings shall be thoroughly soaked with water or
steam. In case of dry demolition of asbestos, a portable exhaust extraction plant shall be used.
Transport and storage containers shall be labelled of the contents. Waste shall be kept in strong enclosed
contamers or in strong sealed im ervious bags. These shall not be overfilled; care shall be taken to avoid
f.
damage or spillage before disposa .
.
The filter bags used in a dust extracting system shall be impermeable and capable of being readily sealed
and disposed off without further treatment.
2.2.19.3 Protective Clothing and Equipment: Workmen engaged in works using asbestos-based material,
shall wear a full body coveralls with pockets, and close fitted cuffs and necks together with a head cover.
Protective clothing shall also be worn by all person in an area into which asbestos dust is liable to escape.

Part7
The clothing shall be made of synthetic fibre. Wet weather overalls which can be hosed down may be used.
The use of suitable working clothing shall not be necessary when minor handling of asbestos-containing
insulation is carried out provided adequate dust control techniques are employed.
Whenever, work methods create asbestos dust, suitable protective respirator shall be used. Respiratory
protective equipment shall be properly maintained and regularly cleaned and servic�d. Every person
required to use protective equipment shall be fully instructed and trained in its use.
Protective clothing and equipment shall be regarded as the means of last resort and used as a back-up of
other techniques, or where effective asbestos dust control cannot be achieved by other means.
2.2.19.4 Personal Hygiene : Changing room and shower facilities shall be provided for the exclusive use of
persons working in an asbestos workmg area. Locker accommodation shall be provided for every person
required to wear respirators and coveralfs.
Lockers for work clothes shall be separated from others. Contaminated clothing shall be placed in a
dustproof container immediately on removal. Contaminated clothing or belongings shall not be shaken or
brushed. These shall be superficially cleaned by vacuum cleaning or hosing down with water.
Food and drinks shall not be handled, stored or consumed in the asbestos work area. Smoking shall be
prohibited.
Workmen shall take shower before changing back into their own clothing; work clothing shall not be taken
home. Parts of the body exposed to asbestos dust shall be thoroughly washed after completion of the job or
before taking any meal.
Asbestos workers shall have a full size chest X-ray before commencement of work and also yearly. The
reports shall be kept properly by the contractor for ready reference.
2.2.20 Miscellaneous
Small articles like screws, bolts, nuts, door and window fittings, polishing stones, protective clothing, spare
parts of machinery, linings, packing, water supply and sanitary fittings, and electrical fittings, insulation
board. etc. shall be kept in su1table and properly protected contamers, boxes or store rooms.
Valuable small materials shall be kept under lock and key.
Materials constantly in use shall be kept nearer to the place of use. Heavy units, like precast concrete
members, shall be stacked near the hoist or the ramp.
Materials which normally deteriorate during storage shall be kept constantly moving by replacing old
materials with fresh stock. Freshly arrived materials shall never be placed over materials which arrived
earlier.
Workmen handling excavated earth from foundations, particularly if the site is a reclaimed or marshy area
or is contaminated, shall be protected against infection affecting the exposed portions of their body.
2.3 LOADING AND UNLOADING OF MATERIALS
2.3.1 Loading and Unloading Rail Road Wagons and Motor Vehicles
Each workman shall be instructed for the proper method of loading and unloading from rail wagons and
motor vehicles, and provided with necessary equipment for safety. Supervisors shall ensure that the
required number of workmen based on the weight and the distance involved in each job is available and
engaged for the particular job.
Warning signals shall be displayed to indicate that the rail wagons must not be coupled or moved while
loading and unloading are carried out. The wheels of wagons and vehicles shall always be spragged or
chained while these are being unloaded; brakes alone shall not be relied upon.
Special lever bars, rather than ordinary crowbars, shall be used for moving rail wagons. Where gangplanks
are used, either cleats at lower end of �angplank or pin through end of gangplanks shall be used to prevent
sliding and slipping. If the gangplank 1s on a slope, c1eats or abrasive surface shall be provided for the entire
length.
When rail road wagons and motor vehicles are being loaded or unloaded near passageways or walkways,
adequate warning signals shall be placed on each end of the way.
2.3.2 Manual Handling

Loading and unloading of heavy items shall be done with cranes or gantries, if available. The workmen
shall stand clear of the path of the material being moved by mechanical equipment. The slings and the ropes
used shall be of adequate load carrying capacity.
7-14
Chapter 2
For loading heavy and long components manually into motor vehicles, rail wagons, trailer etc., either
wooden sleepers or steel raifs of sufficient length and properly secured in position shall be put against the
body of the wagon/vehicle at three or four places. The slope of such makeshift ramp shall be less than 30°
with horizontal.
Long items shall be dragged, one by one, gently and uniformly along the ramps by means of ropes (tag).
Workmen pulling long items shall anchor tfieir feet against a firm surface.
Loaded items may be shifted by crowbars and other suitable leverage mechanism in their right position.
These shall not be pushed or moved by hand. Similar procedures as outlined above shall be Iollowed for
manual unloading of long or heavy items.
For regular and frequent handling, the maximum load a single workman is subject to carry shall be limited
to 20 kg. Workmen to carry heavier loads shall be specially selected, and if necessary, trained.
While lifting a load, the body shall be kept upright; weight shall be distributed evenly and supported on the
bone structure, and held close to the body. Aavantage snail be taken of any device provided for assistance.

Part 7
7-16
CHAPTER�
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope
The provisions of this chapter shall apply to the safety of life and property during construction of various
parts of a building or any other structures. .
Nothing stated herein shall be construed to nullify any rules, regulations, safety standards or statutes of
the local authority, Corporations, or those contained in the various Acts of the Government of Bangladesh.
The specific rules, regulations and Acts pertaining to the protection of the public or workmen from health
and other hazards wherever specified by the local Authority/Corporation etc. or by the Act/Ordinance of
the Government shall take precedence over whatever is herem specified.
3.1.2 Safety of Workmen

Helmets conforming to BDS 1265 and BDS 1266 shall be worn by the workmen and other personnel at all
times during the work.
Safety goggles of accepted standard (BDS 1360) shall be used b y individuals engaged in drilling, cutting,
welding and all such works which cause hazard to the eye. The welders and gas cutters shall be equippea
with proper protective e quipment like gloves, safety boots, aprons and hand shields having filter glass of
accepted standard and su1table to the eyes of the particular worker.
3.1.3 Site Precautions

Construction site shall be delineated, in absence of boundary walls, by fences. During the erection of tall
buildings, nylon net shall be put around the building periphery 3 to 4 metres below the working level.
Warning si�s shall be displayed, where necessary, to indicate hazardous areas like high voltage zone, area
of no smokmg etc. Hand lamps shall be of low voltage, preferably 24V. All electrically operatea hand tools
shall be proviaed with double earthing.
3.1.4 Site Amenities

Toilet facilities shall be provided at all construction sites. If sewer connection is not �vailable, temporary
wells shall be used. The wells shall be provided with proper covers.
Part7 7-17
Part 7
The toilet facilities shall be located at a comer of the site so as to avoid anY. obstruction. Protection from bad
weather and falling object, and proper privacy shall be provided to the tmlet users.
Temporary toilets shall be dismantled, all wells filled up, and the whole area made level, dressed and
restored back to proper grade at the end of the project. All temporary sewer connections shall be removed
and the sewer cappea.
Washing facilities provided at the site shall be connected to the available runni ng water supply. Drinking
water snail be supplied to the site. In absence of any water supply facility at the site, hand tube wells shall be
sunk to meet the requirements of drinking and washing.
Numbers of the sanitary and plumbing facilities required in a construction site shall be regulated by the 1965
Factories Act, and Sec 1.2.5.
·
3.2 EXCAVATION AND FOUNDATION WORK
3.2.1 General
The requirements of this section shall be satisfied in addition to those of Sec 3.12 of Part 6 for all excavation
and foundation works.
Design of foundations shall ensure safety of the workmen, the neighbours and the adjoining structures
during construction. The possibility of movements unconnected with the application of load shall be
considered and steps taken to avoid any damage. Filling around high foundation piers shall be brought up
in a way as not to endanger their stability.
The process of excavation, filling in, pumping etc. shall avoid endangering the strength or stability of the
partially completed structure. !he partially completed structure shall be capabfe of carrying loads
previously taken by temporary works which, as part of the construction procedure, have to be transferred
before the completion of the work.
Excavation with intervals on any site shall be avoided. If such excavation is unavoidable, the excavated site
shall be proi?.erly fenced and warning signals given in accordance with Sec 3.2.11. Excavation of interrupted
or temporanly suspended construction shall be either backfilled or barricaded.
3.2.2 Excavating Machinery and Tools

Heavy equipment, such as excavating machinery, shall be kept away from the trenches by a distance at least
equal to the depth of trench to a maximum of 6 metres. All excavating tools shall be kept far away from the
edge of trench.
3.2.3 Excavated Materials and Surcharges

Excavated materials shall be kept away from the edges of the trench to provide a clear berm of safe width.
Where this is not feasible, the design of protection for the trenches shall include the additional load due to
the materials.
Proximity of buildings, piles of lumber, crushed rocks, sand and other construction materials, large trees,
etc. may impose surcnarges on the side of the trench to cause bulging, sliding, etc. Additional protective
measures snail be taken to su port the sides of the trenches under tnese conCI.itions. The objects creating.
y
such threat shall be removed i possible before excavation starts.
3.2.4 Ground Water

Where deep excavation is required, the location of water-bearing strata shall be determined and the water
pressure observed to take necessary precautions. Direction of natural drainage shall be determined to
facilitate the design of intercepting drams to prevent the influx of ground water.
In areas where the ground water or soil contains constituents in amounts sufficient to cause damage to
cement or buried metals, a chemical analysis of samples of ground water and soil shall be obtainea and
necessary precautions taken.
Basements or pits below ground water level, which rely on the weight the superstructure for their stability
against floatation, shall be pumped day and night. Protective filters shall be used during heavy pumping in
excavations. The water shall be drawn away from the excavation rather than through the ground towards
the excavation.
3.2.5 Ground Condition

Adequate recautions shall be taken during excavation in loose soil deposit and loose boulder. Where
r
portions o the foundation are underlain by soft materials or where the layers of such materials vary in
thickness, the assessment of allowable bearing pressure shall require a settlement analysis.
Site investigations shall be sufficiently extensive to ensure that si�nificant variations in strata thickness are
detected. If required, either the resistance of the inclined or JOinted strata shall be increased or the
foundations shall be carried deep enough to prevent sliding.
7-18
Chapter 3
Precautions, against pockets of poisonous/dangerous gases including protection to the workmen, shall be
taken during deep excavation. Effect of climatic variations and variation in moisture content of the soil shall
be constantly monitored and precautions taken immediately, when necessary.
3.2.6 Overhang, Slopes and Cavities

Overhangs in the trenches shall be supported by props. Use of heavy machinery shall be avoided under or·
over this area.
Where climatic or other conditions may result in deterioration of the sides of excavation, co�sideration shall
be given to their support and protection. During excavation, adequate protections justified by established
method of analysis snail be taken to prevent slope instability.
3.2.7 Blasting and Vibration

Blasting for foundation of buildings is prohibited unless special permission is obtained from the Authority.
Where blasting technique is to be used, an analysis for the stability of slopes shall be carried out and steps be
taken accordingly.
Attention shall be given to the geological strata of the site to ensure that it is not liable to transmission of
ground vibration to areas where it may cause damage to property or the ground. ·
After blasting, overhangs or loose boulders shall be cleared off the site. In all excavation works, precautions
shall be taken to eliminate/reduce vibration generated by adjacent machinery, vehicles, rail roads, blasting,
piling and other sources.
Appropriate authorities shall be notified in advance of any blasting operations when these are to take place
close to public roads and railways. Also see Sec 4.3.
3.2.8 Health Hazards during Excavation

Mechanical ventilation shall be provided where gases or fumes are likely to be present in trenches. All
personnel working there shall be provided with protective respiratory equipment. All trenches/tunnel shall
be provided with emergency exits (see Sec 3.10.2.6 and Sec 3.10.3).
The precautionary measures provided shall meet the requirements of the local health authority. The owner
shalf ensure that all precautionary measures have been taken and been inspected by the Autho��ty prior to
commencement of such work.
·
3.2.9 Piling and Deep Foundation

All piling and deep foundation operations shall be supervised by a competent foreman. He shall also be
responsible for the precautionary measures to be taken.
For work during night, lighting of at least 100 lux intensity shall be provided at the work site. In excavations
deeper than 1.5 m, [adders, ramps or other means of escape, and staging shall be provided.
3.2.10 Working in Compressed Air

Filtered compressed air shall be supplied to a working chamber sufficient to provide 0.3 m3 of fresh air per
minute per person at the pressure m the chamber. Means for the escape of foul air, as well as circulation of
fresh air in the chamber, shall be ensured. .
Hot drinks shall be supplied to workmen employed in compressed air after leaving the chamber. No person
shall carry any flammable materials inside tile air-lock and nobody shall be allowed to smoke inside. Only
- approved type of lamps and torches shall be used. Lighting of at least 4.5 lux intensity shall be provided.
Methanometer shall be used to detect hazardous gases. Samples of air inside the well shall be taken every
eight hours and tested for the presence of hazardous gases and for deficiency of oxygen. In case any
hazardous gas is detected, it sh�ll be immediately reported to the engineer and the work in the compressed
air stopped.
The pressure in the chamber, in the first minute, after starting compression shall be increased to 35 kPa. It
shalf not be further increased until the lock attendant has checked whether or not there are complaints of
discomfort. The pressure shall then be increased at a rate of 65 kPa/min. If any person complains of
discomfort, the proceeding compression shall be immediately stopped and the person evacuated unless he
fells comfortable again in a reduced pressure.
In case of airlocks where blastin� is done, the workmen shall be permitted to start work only after an
inspection by a competent professiOnal found it to be safe. Air required for pneumatic tools shall be cooled
and purified in the same way as air for working chamber.
Every man lock shall have a minimum head room of 1.8 m and at least 0.85 m3 of space per person. It shall
be suitably equipped with an accurate pressure gauge, clocks, and efficient means to convey visible or
nonverbal signals to the lock attendant outside. All electrical installations inside the airlock shall be of
flameproof type.

Part7
All equipment shall be thoroughly inspected after every 45 days of working and every time it is shifted and
reinstalled, and certified to be in a safe working condition by a competent person. A record of all such
inspections shall be kept in a register.
The receiver shall be capable of maintaining the working pressure for at least four hours. Adequate access
through the bulk heads and sufficient ladders shall be provided. Escape routes in tunnels shall be in the
corner. Whilst any person is in a working chamber, the door between such chamber and any man-lock
providing egress towards a lower pressure shall be kept open.
No person shall be in a working chamber under pressure where the wet bulb temperature exceeds 29°C
measured by a thermometer using nontoxic materials.
No person shall be employed on work in compressed air unless under the supervision of a person
experienced in such work. No person shall be employed where the pressure exceeds 120 kPa unless he has,
within the previous four weeks been examined and certified to be fit for employment in compressed air. If a
person is suffering from cold in head, sore throat, earache etc., he shall not be employed in compressed air.
Where the pressure exceeds, a suitably constructed medical-lock shall be provided. It shall have two
chambers, and doors fitted with bulls eyes and air valve. The lock shall have couch, blanket, dry woolen
garments, food etc. The medical lock shall be supplied with air, free of oil and carbon monoxide, and
capable of raising the pressure from 0 to 520 kPa in 5 minutes.
·
3.2.11 Fencing, Warning Signs and Watchman

Excavation and piling sites shall be fenced all around. No trespassing shall be allowed. Sufficient number of
notice boards, danger signs, flashing lights etc. shall be provided in the area. .
When excavation is done on a road, alternative assage/route with adequate signs, notice board and lights
r
shall be provided. If necessary, watchmen shal be employed as an additionaf precautionary measure to
prevent any accident, specially during the night.
3.2.12 Adjoining Properties and Service Lines

Where bored or driven piling works are to be carried out in the vicinity of old structures which are likely to
be damaged, tell-tales shaH be fixed on such structures to monitor their behaviour while piling is in
progress; timely precautions shall be taken against any adverse effect.
Steps shall be taken, if necessary, to increase the general stability of the construction site or the adjoining
site(s), before new structures are erected. In all cases, the possible effect of slopes and excavation of
foundation stability shall be carefully investigated.
Before excavation or pile driving, information on the location of underground utility connections shall be
obtained from the relevant autfiorities. Probable extent of all damages due to pile driving to adjoining
structures or service lines shall be ascertained in advance of operation; pile oriving shall be planned
accordingly.
If excavation involves cutting through existing land drains, they shall be carefully diverted into the ground
drainage system. In addition, all otl1er precautionary measures required by Sec 1.5 and 4.1 shall also be
taken.
3.3 PILE RIG
3.3.1 Erection of Pile Rig

·
The frame of the rigs shall be structurally safe for all anticipated dead, live and wind loads. Whenever the
structural strength is in doubt, suitable test shall be carried out by the engineer and the results recorded. No
pile driving equipment shall be used until it has been inspected and found safe.
When two or more pile drivers are used at the same location, they shall be separated by a distance at least
equal to the longest leg of either rig.
Pile drivers shall be firmly supported on heavy timber sills, concrete beds or other secure foundations. If
necessary, pile drivers shall be adeguately guyed. Rigs not in use shall be supported by at least three guys
to withstand wind, storm, gales and earthquake.
3.3.2 Operation of Pile Rig

Access to working platforms and top of pulley shall be provided by ladders. Working platforms shall be
protected from wino and rain. Ladder in regular use in tall driven piling rigs, or rigs of similar nature, shall
be securely fastened and extended for the full height of the rig.
Exposed gears, flywheels, etc. shall be fully enclosed. Motor gearing, transmission, electrical wiring and
ot1:1er parts of a hoisting machine which are sources of hazard should have proper safeguards. To operate
energized electrical installations, insulating mats and wearing apparel, such as gloves, etc. shall be used.
Sheaves on pile drivers shall be guarded against workers drawn into them accidentally.
7-20
Chapter 3
No steam or air driven equipment shall be repaired while it is in operation or under pressure. Steam and air
lines shall be controlled by easily accessible shut-off valves. These lines shall consist of armoured hose or its
equivalent.
The hose of steam and air hammers shall be securely lashed to the hammer so as to prevent it from
whipping if a connection breaks. Couplings of sections of hose shall be additionally secured by ropes or
chains. When not in use, the hammer shall remain in dropped position held in place by a cleat, timber or
other suitable means.
Hoisting appliances shall be provided with means to reduce the risk of accidental descent of the load.
Adequate precautions shall a1so be taken to reduce the risk of any part of suspended load becoming
accidentally displaced. Care shall be taken to prevent the hammer from missing the pile.
Loads shall be adequately counter-balanced, and the tilting device secured against sli J? ping. Precautions in
the form of securing the legs shall be taken to prevent a pile driver from overturnmg ii a wheel breaks.
Stirrups or other means shall be provided to prevent the rope from coming out of the top pulley or wheel.
Hoistmg ropes on pile drivers shall be made of galvanized steel.
Pile drivers shall not be erected in proximity to electric conductors. When electricity is used as })Ower for
piling rig, only armoured cable conforming to BDS 901 and other relevant standards shall be used. The cable
shall be thoroughly waterproofed. ·
3.3.3 Piles
Piles shall be prepared at a distance at least equal to twice the length of the longest pile, from the pile driver.
Workers employed in the vicinity of pile drivers shall wear helmets conforming to BDS 1265. No steam or
air shall be released until all workers are at a safe distance.
Piles shall be so slung that they do not swing or whip round. A hand rope shall be fastened to a pile
hoisted to control its movement. Long piles and heavy sneet piling should be secured against falling.
While a pile is being guided into position in the leads, workers shall not put their hands or arms between the
pile and the inside guide or on top of the pile. Inclined piles shall rest in a guide while driven.
Maximum length of ballies shall be 9 m. Ballies shall not be less than 50 mm in diameter at any place and
shall spread to 75-200 mm in diameter at the top depending on the class of ballies. Each bailie shall be
legibly and indelibly marked with information on the species of timber, suppliers name, class of bailie etc.
Whenever required, butt ends of ballies shall be preserved with creosote-fuel oil mixture 50:50. The driving
end of a bailie post shall be provided with an iron ring or cap. When creosoted ballies are driven, adequate
precautions, such as the provision of personal protective equipment and barrier creams, shall be taken to
prevent injury from splashes of creosote.
3.3.4 Inspection and Tests

Pile driving equipment shall be inspected by an en�ineer at regular intervals not exceeding four months.
A register Shall be maintained at the site for recordmg the results of such inspection. Pile lines and pulley
blocks shall be inspected by the foreman before the beginning of each shift for any excess wear or other
defects.
Defective parts of pile drivers, such as sheaves, mechanism slings and hose shall be repaired by only
competent technicians and duly inspected by foreman in-charge of the rig. The findings of such inspection
shalf be recorded in the register.
For every hoisting machine, chain, rig, hook, shackle, swivel and pulley block used in hoisting or
suspending, the safe working loads shall be ascertained. Every hoistmg machine and all gears shall be
marked with the safe working loads and the conditions under which it is applicable.
Tests shall be performed in case of doubt and half of the tested load shall be taken as the safe working load.
No part of any machine or any gear shall be loaded beyond the safe working load.
3.4 CONSTRUCTION OF WALLS
3.4.1 General
The height of wall constructed per day shall be restricted to ensure that the newly: constructed wall does not
collapse due to the lack of strength in the lower layers. Adequate number of expansion joints shall be
prov1ded in long walls to prevent crumpling.
3.4.2 Ladders
3.4.2.1 Setting of Ladders : Rails of ladders shall extend at least 1m above the landing and shall be
secured at the upper end. As an alternative, there shall be adequate handhold at landing, or side guys with
anchorage at the bottom.

Part7
To prevent slipping, a ladder shall be secured at the bottom end or held by a person at the time of use. A
lean-to-ladder may have a maximum angle of 75° with the horizontal. Ladders shall be provided with
nonslip bases on slippery or sloping floors. Ladders used in strong wind shall be securely lashed in
position.
A ladder shall neither be placed against window pane, sashes or such other fragile or easy yielding objects,
nor in front of doors operung towards it. If set up m driveways, passageways or public walkways, it shall be
protected by barricades. Ladders shall not be supported on any insecure base, e.g. scaffold, planking over
trenches etc.
3.4.2.2 Use of Ladders : All ladders shall be constructed of sound material, and shall be capable of
carrying the design loads. No ladder with a missing or defective rung, or supported on nails only, shall be
used. A dropped ladder shall be inspected prior to reuse.
Ladders shall not be used as guys, braces or skids, nor in horizontal position as runways and catwalk. They
shall not be generally overcrowded. Ladders shall not be spliced; when unavoidable, splicing shall be done
only under the supervision of a foreman.
An user shall place his feet near the ends of the rungs rather than near the middle, and face the ladder when
using it. Both the hands shall be used in climbing a ladder.
Leaning more than 300 mm from the side in order to reach another area from a single setting of the ladder
shall not be allowed; the ladder shall be shifted to the required position.
All joints in the ladder shall be properly constructed. Where necessary, handrails shall be provided to the
ladders. A brace shall be attached at the middle and supported from a nonyielding fixed object if a ladder
shows tendency to spring. Excessive deflection of ladders shall be prevented by stiffeners.
'
Metal ladder shall not be used close to electrical equipment or circuits. They shall be marked with
'CAUTION DO NOT USE NEAR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT' signs. Overhead protection shall be provided
for workers working under a ladder.
Wooden ladders shall be inspected at least once in 6 weeks for damage and deterioration. Close visual
inspection is recommended in preference to load testing. This condition is particularly applicable to rope
and bamboo ladders where fraying of ropes and damage to bamboo is likely to occur.
3.4.3 Opening in Wails

Before making an opening in an existing wall, adequate supports against the collapse or cracking of the wall
portion above the opening or roof or adjoining walls shall be provided. Staging shall be of full length of the
wall opening.
Wall opening barriers and· screens shall be capable of withstanding the intended load. Every chute wall
opening or any other wall opening from which there is a vertical drop of more than 1200 mm shall be
guarded by barriers.
The guard shall be removable, hinged or otherwise mounted. The guards shall be keJ?t in position regardless
of the use of the openins. In addition, a grab handle shall be provided on each s1de of the opening. The
opening shall have a mimmum 25 mm high sill.
3.4.4 Projection from Walls

Formwork provided for horizontal projections out of the wall shall not be removed till walls, or other
stabilizing construction, over the supporting edge of the projecting slabs providing protection against
overturning are constructed.
3.5 CONSTRUCTION OF FLOORS
3.5.1 General
Platforms, catch ropes, nets etc. shall be provided during the construction of roofs. Precautions shall be
taken to employ the correct technique of hoisting materials, to use hoists of sufficient strength for the
quantity of stores to be hoisted, and to prevent over1oading and overturning of hoists or buckets, etc.
Where, the floor of one storey is to be used for storage of materials for the construction of roof, it shall be
ensured that the total load does not exceed the capacity of the floor. .
3.5.2 Use of Sheets

It shall be ensured that joints in corrugated galvanized iron or asbestos cement sheets are kept secured in
position and sheets do not slip. Walking on asbestos cement sheets shall not be allowed. Tiles shall not be
left loose on the roof.
7-22
Chapter 3
Injury to passers-by due to breakage of glass or plastic sheets shall be prevented. During wet conditions,
work on sloped roof shall not be allowed unless the foreman decides that the roof is not as slippery as to
pose any risk. In slopes of more than 30' to the horizontal, ladders, waist-tie etc. shall be used.
3.5.3 Platforms
Working platform required according to the type of roof shall be provided. Additional precaution shall be
taken to construct the platform with sound material secured and fixed, and checked from time to time
throughout the period of construction.
Sec 1.4.2, Sec 1.4.3, See 4.1.6 and See 4.2.5.1 shall also be followed additionally.
3.5.4 Flat Roof

Formwork provided for flat concrete roof shall be designed and constructed for the anticipated loads.
During the construction of the roof, the formwork shall be frequently inspected for defects. Enough walking
platforms shall be provided in the reinforcement area to facilitate safe walking to the concreting area. Loose
wires and unprotected rod ends shall be avoided.
Formwork supporting cast-in-place reinforced and prestressed concrete floors and roofs shall be
adeq_uately tied or braced together to withstand all loads u ntil the new construction has attained the
reqmred strengths.
3.5.5 Openings and Holes

Every temporary floor opening shall either have railing of at least 900 mm height, or shall be constantly
attended. every floor hole shall be guarded by either a railing with toeboard, or a hinged cover.
Alternatively, the hole may be constantfy attended or protected by a removable railing.
Every stairway floor opening shall be guarded by a railing at least 900 mrn high on the exposed sides except
at entrance to stairway. Every ladderway floor opening or platform shall be guarded by a guard railing with
toeboard except at entrance to opening.
Every open sided floor or platform 1.2 m or more above adjacent floor or ground level, shall be guarded by a
railing on all open sides, except where there is entrance to ramp, stairway or fixed ladder. Such entrances
shall be either guarded with a swinging gate, or so offset that a person is prevented from walking directly
into the opening. The railing shall be accompanied by a toeboard at least 200 mm high.
The above precautions shall also be taken near the open edges of floors and roofs. Requirements of Sec 1.4.2
and 1.4.3 shall also be met.
3.5.6 Skeleton Construction

Temporary flooring of skeleton construction shall be provided with tightly planked timber over timber
supports to withstand all loads. The temporary floormg can also be made of metal sheet supported on
timoer or tubular steel frame. No end of the timber plank or metal sheet shall remain unsupported.
A temporary safety platform or tier shall be maintained within two storeys or 6 m, whichever is less, below
and directly under the portion where erection of steel or precast concrete member is required. Tiers shall
extend 2.5 m beyond the edge of the work area.
3.6 CONCRETE WORK
3.6.1 General
All workmen involved in concrete work shall be provided with helmet and hand gloves, specially when
concrete pumps, concrete trucks or concrete precast elements are used. Precast piles shall be lifted and
driven by skilfed workmen under the supervision of a foreman.
Temporary fencing, either with bamboo or C.l. sheet, shall be erected around heavy equipment delineating
the danger zone. All centering and shuttering materials shall be kept stacked at site before and after use.
3.6.2 Prestressed Concrete

Operating, maintenance and replacement instructions of the supplier of the pre-stressing equipment shall be
strictly adhered to in all relevant operations. During the jacking of any tension element, the anchor shall be
kept turned up cl�se to anchor plate.
Thread on bolts and nuts shall be frequently checked for deterioration; choked units shall be cleaned.
Hydraulic jacks/rams, pulling-headers and other temporary anchoring devices shall be inspected before use.·
The prestressing jacks shall be periodically examined for wear and tear.
·
No person shall stand in line with the tensioning elements and jacking equipment during the tensioning
operation. Also no one shall be directly over the jacking equipment when deflection is done. Workmen shall
be prevented from working behind the jacks when the tensioning operation is in progress by putting signs,
barriers, or protective shields.

Part 7
3.6.3 Concrete Mixers

All gears, chains and rollers of mixer plants shall be guarded. If the mixer has a charging skip, the operator·
shall ensure that the workmen are at safe distance before the skip is lowered. Barriers shall be provided to
prevent walking under the skip while it is being lowered.
All cables, clamps, hooks, wire ropes, gears, clutches, etc. of the mixer shall be checked and serviced once a
week. A trial run of the mixer shall be made and defects rectified before using a mixer.
While cleaning inside of the mixing drums, the power shall be shut and fuses removed.
3.6.4 Concrete Truck and Buckets

A reasonably smooth traffic surface shall be provided for concrete trucks. If possible, a loop road shall be
provided to allow continuous operation. An easy turnout shall be provided if a loop is not possible to
provide. Workmen and moving plants shall not cross the truck lines as far as practicable.
Concrete buckets conveyed by crane or overhead cableway shall be suspended from deep throated hooks,
preferably equipped with swivel and safety latch. Closing and locking of the exit door of the concrete bucket
shall always be checked.
3.7 FORMWORK AND SCAFFOLD
3.7.1 Scaffold and Centering Materials

Scaffolds shall be made from strong bamboo poles, wooden posts, steel pipes or any other suitable materials.
They shall be adequately tied to vertical members resting on firm floor. Strong ropes shall be used to tie up
bamboo poles. In addition, cross-bracing with bamboo or wooden posts shall be provided along with ties or
guys of steel wire or rod not less than 6 mm in diameter.
Wooden J?lanks or steel sheets shall be placed across horizontal poles to provide suitable footrest and carry
construction materials. The whole assembly shall be securely lashed together. Deterioration of tying ropes
and rotting planks shall be checked from time to time during the construction period and changed if
required.
Scaffold shall be dismantled after use piece by piece. Holes in the wall shall be filled up with the same
materials as that of the wall. Filled up holes shall have uniformity in texture and colour with the
surrounding surface. Crash striking shalf not be allowed.
Triangular wooden wedges shall be put under the posts for easy dismantling of the members. Timber
planks or steel sheets covering several posts at a time shall be placed below the vertical or inclined posts.
Horizontal and inclined bracings shall be provided for posts higher than 3 metres. Spans of beam bottoms
shall be supported by posts at most 1m apart if steel is used; instructions from the manufacturer/supplier
shall be strictly followed. Spacing of props under beams shall consider the increased load, and shall be
posted closer than those uncfer the floor slab.
All scaffolding exceeding 20 m or six storeys in height, shall be constructed of noncombustible or fire
retardant materials. Centering layout shall be planned by an engineer; bearing capacity of the soil and the
effect of weather shall be considered in the planning.
All nails and similar projecting objects shall be removed or hammered down into the timber component of
the centering and shuttering materials immediately after stripping off.
3.7.2 Formwork for Concrete

The formwork shall be strong and rigidly braced so as not to bulge or sag when concrete is placed. It shall be
constructed in such a way tnat it can be dismantled without causing damage to the concrete or disturbing
the centering and shuttering of other elements.
Forms shall not be removed until the concrete has developed sufficient strength to support all predicted
loads. Workers removing formwork shall wear helmets, gloves, heavy soled safety shoes and belts if
adequate footing is not available above 2 m. While cutting any tying wires in tension, care shall be taken
against backlash.
Bolts and nuts in vertical concrete walls shall be loosened and withdrawn before initial setting of concrete.
The resulting hole shall be filled with rich mortar. The supports shall be dismantled in the order instructed
by the engineer.
All walls, columns, slabs etc. shall have plastic or mortar spacers (round for vertical structures and flat for
slab) to be placed with the reinforcement to provide clear cover as per design. Top layers of slab
reinforcement shall be held in position by steel chairs.
The formwork shall be water-tight specially for the roof slab. Bamboo matting may be placed on planks or
steel sheets to provide a rough surface after stripping of the formwork. Alternatively, ceilings may be
roughened up by chiseling immediately after stripping off the formwork.
7-24
Chapter 3
Suitable camber shall be provided in the formwork for horizontal members. The camber for beams and slabs
shall be 1 in 2SO, and for cantilevers, 1 in SO of the projected length. _
·-
----
Half-seasoned soft-wood, laminated board or other smooth sheet shall be used for formwork for a fair-faced
finish. The upper surface of the formwork shall be covered with oiled soft building board or veneered
particle board. Oiled paper or polythene sheet shall never be used.
The formwork made of materials liable to absorb water shall always be sprinkled with water before laying
concrete. Water shall not be profusely used; the formwork shall be in a saturated surface dry condition.
All the forms shall be tested both individually and in combination before final use to detect any flaw or
defect. Measures shall be taken immediately to remedy any faults, if detected, before the formwork is ready
for use.
The frame and its joints shall be checked from time to time for the decay in ropes, bamboos, planks etc. The
defective parts shall be replaced before the formwork is used.
3.7.3 Load Capacity

Scaffolds, formwork and components thereof shall be capable of supporting without failure, at least two
times the maximum intended load. The following loads shall be used m designing the formwork:
a) weight of wet concrete : 20 kN I m3;

b) live load due to workmen and impact of ramming or vibrating: 1.5-4.0 kPa
(light duty for carpenter and stone setters, medium duty for bricklayers and plasterers, heavy duty for
stone masons);
c) allowable bending stress (flexural tensile stress) in soft timbers: 8,000 kPa.
The sizes for formwork elements specified in Table 7.3.1 are applicable for spans of upto S m and height of
upto 4 m. In case of longer span and height, formwork and support sizes shall be determined by calculating
tne load and approved by the engineer before use.
All formworks and scaffolds shall be strong, substantial and stable. All centering and props shall be
adequately braced to ensure lateral stability against all construction and incidental loads.
The space under the scaffold or formwork shall not be used as a working or living space . The space shall
not be used as a shelter or refuge during inclement weather or at any other time. ·
Table 7.3.1
Sizes of Timber and other Sections for Formwork
Types of Formwork Members Size in mm

Flat sheetings for slab bottoms, columns 2S to SO
and beam sides
Beam bottoms 7Sx100 to 1SOx1SO
Vertical posts 7S X 100 to 1S0 X 1S0
Bamboo posts Minimum 7S dia
Baflies Not less than 100 dia at mid-length
and 80 dia at thin end
Joist and ledgers supporting sheetings of slab SO X 100 to 7S X 200
Studs for su porting vertical wall sheetings
k SO X 100 tO 1S0 X 1S0
Col umn s yo es-honzontal cross, SO X 100 to 100 X 100
I pieces supporting vertical sheetings
3.7.4 Bamboos
Good, sound and uniform bamboo shall be collected in sufficient quantities for providing scaffolding,
propping , temporary staging, ramp etc. The bamboos shall be free from any defects, firmly tied to each
other and joints made smooth. Joining members only with nails shall be prohibited.
Bamboos for vertical support shall not be less than 7S mm in dia, and shall be straight as far as possible.
Bamboos may be used as vertical support for up to a height of 4 metres if horizontal bracings are provided
at the centre. Splicing shall be avoided.
After stripping the formwork, the bamboo posts shall be cleaned and stacked vertically in shade protected
from rain and sun. Defective or damaged bamboo posts shall be removeQ from the site.
3.7.5 Timber Posts

Timber posts may be used in supporting formwork upto a height of 6 m. The posts shall not be less than 80
mm in diameter at any place and shall spread to at least 150 mm in diameter at the top.

Part7
The timber posts shall be supported on timber planks at the bottom. Either the bottom or the top of the posts
shall be wedged with a piece of triangular wood peg for easy removal. Adequate horizontal and inclined
braces shall be used for all timber centering. .
All timber posts shall be carefully inspected before use and members with cracks and excessive knots and
crookedness shall be discarded. The joints shall normally be made with bolts and nuts. No rusted or spoilt
threaded bolts and nuts shall be used.
3.7.6 Steel Centering

Steel centering may be used for any height. In case of patented material, the instructions of the manufacturer
regarding theload carrying capactties shall be followed.
·
Post to post supports shall be provided with wooden planks. When tubular steel and timber centering is to
be used in combmation, necessary precautions shall be taken to avoid any unequal settlement.
Tubular steel centering shall be thoroughly inspected before erection. Defective members shall be
discarded and coupling pins aligned to frames. Adjustment screws shall be set to their approximate final
adjustment after assemblmg the basic unit, and the unit shall be level and plumb.
,
The centering frames shall be braced to make a rigid and solid unit. Struts and diagonal braces shall be in
proper position and secured. As erection progresses, all connecting devices shall be in place, and fastened
for full stability of joints and units.
3.8 ERECTION OPERATIONS
3.8.1 Erection and Hoisting

The erection and striking off, specially of steel structural frame, shall be done by skilled workers. Built-up,
swinging and suspended scaffolds shall also be erected by competent workers.
Care shall be taken to keep fire alarms, hydrants, cable tunnels etc. unobstructed during the construction of
scaffolding and placement of ladders etc.
·
Anchors for guys or ties shall be checked for proper placement. The weight of concrete in which the anchors
are embedded shall be checked for uplift ancf sliding. In a tall and heavy guy derrick, tension in guys shall
be controlled by hand winches.
Enough number of bolts shall be used in connecting each piece using a minimum of two bolts in a pattern to
ensure that the 'oint will not fail. All splice connections m columns, crane girders etc. shall be completely
J
bolted or rivete or welded before erection as specified in the drawings .
The top flange of a truss, girder or long beam shall be temporarily reinforced with a flat bar on top of the
member. On deep girders and large trusses, a safety bar runnin� their full length shall be provided. The bar
can be a single 16 mm diameter wire rope througb vertical stiffeners of each members about one meter
above the bottom flange and clamped at the ends with wire rope clamps. If holes cannot be provided, short
eye bolts can be welded to the webs of the �irder at intervals. The bolts shall be removed, and the surface
chipped to leave it smooth after the erection IS completed.
The first load lifted by a � y derrick shall be hanged at a low height for 10 minutes and the anchOF
inspected for any signs or mdications of failure. No load shall be allowed to rest on wire ropes. Ropes in
operation shall not be touched. Each truss or deep girder loaded in a vehicle shall be tied back or oraced
together with other trusses or girders already loaded.
The ropes shall be chemically treated to resist dew and rotting. They shall not be tied on sharp edges of steel
structures. They shall not be tied beyond the reach of safety belts complying to BDS 1359.
.
The proper size, number and spacing of wire rope clamps, depending on the diameter of the wire rope, shall
be used. They shall be properly fixed and checked as soon as the rope has been stretched, particularly if
new. The clamps shalll:ie promptly tightened when expansion in rope is detected. Clamps and ropes shall
be inspected frequently to be sure that they are secured at place.
3.8.2 Small Articles

Adequate supply of bolts, washers, rivets, pins etc. of required sizes shall be maintained at all times. Foot
boxes on a guy derrick or climbing crane, shall be moved to the new working floor each time the rig is
changed. On a mobile crane, the boxes shall be moved as soon as the crane is moved.
Bolt baskets or similar containers with handles shall be provided on floats or scaffolds where small material,
such as bolts and drift pins are used. Small tools shall oe gathered up and put away in tool boxes when not
in use. Rivet heaters shall have safe containers or buckets for unused hot rivets.
Materials shall not be dumped overboard when a scaffold is to be moved.
7-26
Chapter 3
3.8.3 Hoist Protection

A material hoist shall not be used to transport workers; temporary elevators shall be installed, if necessary.
Proper protection by way of railing, footboard etc. shall be provided to the hoists. Railing shall have a
minimum height of 1 m while the toeboard shall be at least 200 mm high.
Where erected on the outside of a building over 20 m or six storeys in height, the hoist structure shall be
built of noncombustible or fire retardant materials. Interlocking or any other safety device shall be installed
at all stopping points of the hoists. The hoists shaftway shall be fenced in accordance with Sec 3.5.5.
No part of scaffolding or walls and openings shall be hit by crane, truck or heavy moving equipment.
3.8.4 Lifting Gear

Lifting gears shall be of good construction, sound material and adequate strength. Lifting gears must be
testecf and examined by a competent person. Chains, ropes and lifting tackle shall be thorougllly examined
by a competent person every 6 months.
Special devices like cleats and hooks shall be used in erecting girders and other heavy structural members.
These shall be shop-assembled, bolted, riveted or welded to the piece and left permanently in place after the
work. A balance beam shall be used to lift laterally imbalanced pieces. Alternatively, a pair of bridle slings
may be used at safe lifting points.
·'
Table of safe working loads shall be posted in the tackle store and in prominent positions. No chain, rope or
lifting tackle shall be used for loads exceeding the safe working load. Wrought iron gear shall be effectively .
heat treated.
·
All lifting gear shall be obtained from reliable manufacturers. No home-made or improvised gear shall be
used.
3.8.5 Cranes
All parts of a crane must be of good construction free from defects and properly maintained. Before the
crane is used for the first time, it must be thoroughly examined and tested oy a competent person.
Crane rails, shall be installed and secured on firm ground. In tower cranes, the level difference between the
two rails shall remain within the limits prescribed oy the manufacturer.
The safe working load shall be clearly shown on the crane; no crane shall be loaded beyond this limit.
Nobody shall be allowed to work on the wheeltracks within 6 m of a crane, or under crane where he might
be struck, unless effective steps are taken to warn him.
Electrical wires within the site which can possibly touch the crane or any member being lifted, shall be
removed or made dead. Cranes shall not be operated in proximity to a live overhead power line. If it
becomes necessary to operate the crane crossing the safe clearance from power line, the overhead power
lines shall be shut off.
Cranes shall be thoroughly examined, at least once in 9 months and the results entered in a register. The
crane operator shall not vmlate the safe reach limit of the crane as specified by the manufacturer. Cranes
shall not be operated at a speed which causes the boom to swing.
No person shall be lifted or transported by the crane on its hook or boom. Toeboards and limit stops shall
be provided for wheel barrows on the loading and unloading platforms. Material shall be loaded securely
on the platform with no projection.
Every crane driver or hoisting machine operator shall be competent to the satisfaction of the en�P neer and
no person under the age of 21 years shall be allowed to operate any hoisting machine and scaffoldmg winch,
or give signals to the operator. The crane driver shall have the full knowledge of controls, signals, loading,
misuse, ground and emergency regulations.
When the bucket or other members being lifted are out of sight of the crane operator, a signalman shall be
posted in clear view of the loading and unloading areas, and the crane operator. Standard hand signals
shall be used in controlling the movements of tne crane; both the operator and the signalman shall be
familiar with the signals.
The crane operator shall respond to signals only from the assigned signalman but shall obey stop signal at
any time from any body both inside and outside the site.
If a gantry crane is used, a warning bell which sounds automatically during the movement of the crane
shall be g1ven to avoid accidents to workmen crossing or standing in the path of the moving loads.
3.8.6
�� ;
s shall not be join d by bolting or wiring links together. Shortening the chains by tying knots shall b �
prohibited. The chain shall be made free of twists and .Kinks. Proper eye splices shall be usea to attach the
Chain hooks.

Part 7
Chains with locked or stretched links and which do not move freely shall not be used. Ropes shall move
freely in the sheave grooves. Sharp bends in wire ropes shall be avoided; pulley shall be used for these.
Idle and loaded slings shall not be carried to�ether on the crane hook. In multi-legged slings, each leg shall
be evenly loaded. Tl:ie slings shall be of sufficient length to avoid wide angle between the legs. ·
3.8.7 Inspection
Materials and joints in scaffolding shall be insl'ected from time to time both before and after erection for the
soundness, strength, damage -due to weathermg etc. Inspections shall be made for spillage of material or
liquids, loose material lying on the gangways, and proper access to the platform.
The scaffold shall be secured to the building at enough places; no ties shall be removed. Warning sign
prohibitin� the use of any defective or incomplete scaffold and working in bad weather and high wind shall
be posted m a prominent place. Inspections shall be made for the observance of these requirements. .
3.9 ELECTRIFICATION, EQUIPMENT AND OPERATIONS
3.9.1 Wiring System .

All temporary and permanent wiring systems shall be designed by an engineer. All temporary wiring shall
be done by an electrician holding refevant licence.
No scaffolding, ladder, working platform, gangway, runway, etc. shall be placed within 3 metres of an
uninsulated live electric wire. OVerhead wires/cables shall be so laid that clearances as required by Sec 2.2.7
are maintained.
Protection shall be provided for all electrical wiring laid on floor which may have to be crossed over. All
flexible wiring connecting the electrical appliances shall preferably be enclosed in a flexible metal sheath.
Frayed and bare wires shall not be used for any temporary or permanent electrical connection.
All electrical circuits, other than those required for illuminating the site at night, shall be switched off daily
at the end of the work. The main switch board shall be locatea in an easily accessible and prominent place.
No clothing or stores shall be kept near it. One 3 kg-4.5 kg C02 extinguisher, or one 5-kg dry powder
extinguisher, shall be provided near the switch board.
3.9.2 Guarding of Cables

· ·
All cables and signal cords shall be guarded wherever such cables and cords pass through or cross working
spaces. Location of underground cables, if any, as well as overhead cables, shall be identified and the
scaffolds, hoists etc. should be installed after providing proper guards to such cables.
Respective agencies shall be consulted for the proper method of providing protection to such cables,
distance to be maintained to avoid all hazards etc. Cables, specially underground, and their routes shall be
marked for future reference and use.
3.9.3 Lifts
Lifts shall be installed as per instruction of the manufacturer and under proper guidance. If necessary,
guards shall be stationed at the installation site. Building materials shall preferably not be carried in a lift.
Entry to the empty lift well shall be blocked; the blockade shall be capable of withstanding bumping of an
individual against it. Notices/signs shall be displayed in the lift lobby when the lift is not in operation.
Construction Machinery
Construction machinery shall conform to standards specified in the specification of works, or determined as
required on site and approved by the engineer. They shall be in running condition without any defect.
The machinery shall be operated by competent operators only. The machinery will be checked thoroughly
for any defect periodically, as well as eacn day before.use.
Ever)' moving part of or prime mover, and every part of electric generators, motors and rotary converters
shall be securefy fenced. Fencing shall be of substantial construction, maintained in efficient working order,
and kept in position when the machine is in motion.
If machines need to be examined, oiled or adjusted while in motion, it shall be approached by certified
mechanics only. Approach to unfenced machinery is allowed only when examination, lubrication etc. cannot
be done with madiinery at rest, or when machinery cannot be stopped without serious interference with the
ongoing process.
Exhaust of petrol or diesel powered air compressors, hoists, derricks, pumps and all such machinery shall be
well away from combustible materials. Exhausts opening outside the building shall have a minimum
clearance of 200 mm from combustible materials. All sources of ignition like naked flame shall be banned
near petroleum- fired equipment.
7-28
Chapter 3
3.9.5 Heating of Bitumen and Tar

3.9.5.1 Bitumen and Tar Vessels : Tanks, vats, kettles, pots, drums and other vessels for heating tar,
bitumen and other bituminous materials shall be made resistant to damage due to transportation, excessive
heating etc. All such vessels shall be capable of holding a full load without danger of collapse, bursting or
distortion. They shall be provided with a close-fitting cover suitable for smothering a fire in the vessel
preventing spillage or protecting the bituminous matenal from rain.
Buckets for hot bitumen, bituminous material or tar shall have the bail or handle firmly secured, and a
second handle near the bottom for tipping. Bitumen or tar boilers shall be mounted on wheels for easy
transportation or towing, and provided with hand pumps for spraying purposes.
Heated vessels shall not be left unattended. Only vessels using electricity for heating may be used inside
buildings. Tar boilers shall never be used on a roof constructed of combustible materials.
Bituminous material shall not be thrown into the hot vessels. Vessels shall be kept closed when not in use.
Containers shall not be filled to the brim with hot bitumen or tar. Enough space shall be left in vessels for
expansion of heated binder.
The vessel shall be leak-proof, and provided with controllable outlets. The buckets and cans in which the hot
material is carried shall be checked for any defect before use.
3.9.5.2 Heating of Bitumen and Tar : Gas and oil-fired bitumen and tar kettles or J'Ots shall be equiJ'ped
with burners, regulators and safety devices. Heating appliances for vessels shall distribute the neat
uniformly over the heating surface. If bituminous mixtures have mineral aggregate filler, some means for
stirring shall be provided.
Vessels filled with bituminous materials shall be kept at a distance from combustible materials. When
vessels are used in confined spaces, the gases, fumes and smoke generated shall be removed by exhaust or
forced ventilation.
No naked light shall be used near heated boilers. If a burner stops burning, the fuel supply shall be cut-off
immediately and the heating tube shall be thoroughly blown out by the fan.
Cutbacks shall not be heated over an open flame unless a water jacket is used. While they are being heated,
the vessel shall be kept open. Blow-lamps or similar devices shall be used for warming pipes instead of
burning rags. Bitumen and tar shall not be heated beyond the temperature recommended by the
manufacturer of the product.
3.9.5.3 Other Precautions : Indicator gauges shall be used to ascertain level and temperature of the
material in the boiler; nobody shall be allowea to peep into the boiler to ascertain the level. ln small plants,
dipstick may be used to gauge the levels in the boiling pot. .
Bitumen and tar shall be kept dry. Boiler shall either have a device that prevents foam from reaching the
burners, or anti-foaming agents shall be used to control foaming. The heating shall be at low tem erature
f
till the water entrappecf, if any, is completely evaporated. Any water present in the boiler shal also be
drained out before using it.
Bitumen or tar spilled around boilers shall be promptly cleaned up. When tanks are cleaned by steam,
building-up of pressure shall be prevented. No inspection shall be made while the boiler is under use, or
is pressurized.
While discharging heated binder from the boiler, workers shall not stand opposite to the jet. The container
shall be handled only after closing the valve. Bitumen and tar shall be handfea in a way as not to spill.
Mops and other applicators covered with bituminous materials shall not be stored inside buildings.
3.9.6 Flame Cutting and Welding

For all arc welding work, either a helmet or a hand-held face shield conforming to BDS 1360 shall be used.
See also Sec 3.1.2.
All welding and flame-cutting operations shall be performed in protected areas; closed spaces shall be
properly ventilated. Suitable rrotection against the rays of the efectric arc shall be provided where arc
weloing operations might be viewed within normal range by persons other than the welding operators and
inspectors.
When working on aluminum structures, or close to other welders, protection for the back of the head shall
be arranged. When slag is being removed from weld by clipping, the eyes shall be protected by goggles
conforming to BDS 1360.
Leather gauntlet gloves with canvas or leather cuffs, shall be worn by welders. Any visible foam near the arc
shall be rapidly dispersed. Where argon or carbon dioxide is being used as the shielding gas, particularly in
confined spaces, breathing apparatus of the airline type shall be worn.

Part7
Gas cylinders shall be kept in the upright position, and conveyed in trolleys. While being carried by cranes,
the gas cylinders shall be put in cages. The cylinder shall be marked 'full' or 'empty' as the case may be.
Gas cylinders shall be stored away from open flames and other sources of fire. Oxygen cylinders shall not be
stored near oil, grease, sources of gas and similar combustible materials.
When the cylinders are in use, cylinder valve key or wrench shall be placed in position. Cylinder valve shall
be closed before a cylinder is moved, when the torches are being replaced or welding is stopped for some
reason. The cylinder valve and connection shall not be lubricated.
A 5 Kg C02 or DCP type fire extinguisher must be kept where gas cutting and welding works are done.
Acetylene cylinder which has been subject to heat, must be kept completely submerged in water at least for
12 hours before further use.
Gas cutting and welding torches shall be lighted by special lighters, not with matches. The cables from
welding equipment shall not be run over by traffic. Double earthing shall be provided to the welding
machines. .
If welding is to be done near combustible materials, suitable blanket shall be provided and fire
extinguisners kept nearby. Welding shall not be done in areas where flammable liquids and gases are
stored.
Gas lines and compressed air lines shall be marked differently by suitable colour codes. Facilities shall be
provided in app roved closed containers for housing the necessary vision, respiratory and protective
equipment required in welding operations. ·
3.9.7 Riveting O eration

r
Rivets shal be carefully handled to prevent accidental fall; wooden bottom shall be provided in rivet
catchers. Chains shall not be used in riveting dollies; leather, canvas or rope sling may be used.
Snap and plunger shall be prevented from dropping out of l'lace by securing the pneumatic riveting
hammer. Nozzle of the hammer shall be inspectea from time to time. Tom or worn wire attachment shall be
renewed. Water shall be kept ready for putting out fire during riveting operations.
3.10 CONSTRUCTION HAZARDS
3.10.1 General
Implements used for carrying materials to the top of scaffolding shall be of adequate strength and shall not
be overloaded during the work. Overhead protection against falling materiafs shall be provided under
scaffoldings and ladaers. Care shall be taken in carrying Iong and heavy bars, rods, angles and other such
materials.
Precautions �hall be taken to correctly handle, use and position precast RC columns, piles, steel beams,
joists, angles and other heavy elements. Temporary supports wifh guys and props shall be provided in
handling neavy elements till the member is properly and permanentfy secured in position. Manila or Sisal
�ope sha1l not be used in rainy season for hoisting heavy materials.
People suffering from asthma, chronic bronchitis, pulmonary fibrosis, or pneumoconiosis shall be screened
out from bein& employed in works involving the use of paints, varnisbes, plastic foam, rubber, adhesives,
etc. Those havmg impaired lung function, hay fever, eczema, dermatitis etc. shall also be advised to avoid
such work.
·
All construction site shall have sufficient general and local ventilation unless otherwise required. Adequate
number of Absorptive respirators shall be provided to sites with inhalation hazard. Full breath apparatus
shall be used for works of Iimited period in aangerous situations.
The workers shall be made aware of personal hygiene. Regular health check up shall be arranged for works
requiring high physical fitness for prolonged period.
3.10.2 Fire Hazards

Gans-\Vays and the ground below the scaffoldin� shall be kept free from readily combustible materials
including waste, debris and any vegetation at all times.
Scaffoldings, gangways, etc. shall be constructed with fire resistant materials when blow torch or other
equipment producing flame is extensively used near it. A portable dry powder extinguisher of 3 kg capacity
snalfbe kept near all flame producing equipment. .
Sec 2.1.2, Sec 2.2.17 and Sec 2.2.18 shall also be followed in addition to the following requirements.
7-30
Chapter 3
3.10.2.1 Fire Protection : Fire extinguishers, preferably of water type, shall be placed at strategic points.
Extinguishers shall always be placed in cranes, hoists, compressors and similar places. Where electrical
equipment are used, C0 or dry powder extinguishers shall be provided.
2
In addition to fire extinguishers, other fire extinguishing equipment, e.g. sprinklers and hydrants shall also
be provided and conveniently located both withm the building under construction and at the building site.
All extinguishers shall be maintained in an usable condition at all times in accordance to the instructions of
the manufacturer. _
All workmen and supervisory staff shall be dearly briefed on the use of fire extinguishers provided at the
construction site. Free access shall be provided and maintained at all times to all fire fighting equipment
including fire hose, exting uishers, sprinkler valves and hydrants.
Where the project itself requires the installation of fixed fire fighting equipment, such as hydrants, stand
pipes, sprinKlers and underground water mains or other suitable arrangements for the provision of water, it
shall be installed and made available for permanent use as soon as possible, in no case later than the
scheduled time.
A l?ermanent hydrant system shall be made available before the building has reached the height of 20m.
Th1s shall be extended with every increase in the number of floors, and securely capped at the top. Top hose
outlets shall be at all times not more than one floor below the floor under construction. All construction site
with a fire risk shall have at least two exits.
Temporary stand pipes with required puml?s may be provided in place of permanent systems if they are
designed to furnish 400litres of water per mmute at 450 kPa pressure with a standpipe size of not less than
100mm.
A metal box of substantial size preferably to be kept open,shall be provided and maintained near each hose
outlet. It shall contain adequate length of hose fitted with 12 or 20 mm nozzle to reach all parts of the floor.
Free access from the street to such stand pipe shall be maintained at all times. Materials shall not be stored
within 1.5 m of any fire hydrant or in the roadway between such hydrant and the centreline of the street.
Contact shall be established and maintained with the local fire authority during construction of all
buildings above 20 m in height and buildings of special occupancies like educational, assembly,
institutional, industrial, storage, hazardous and mixed occupancies having areas in excess of 5 00m2on each
floor.
Telephone or other means of inter-communication system within the site shall be provided during the
construction of all buildings over 20m in height or buildings with a plinth area in excess of 1000 m2•
All waste, such as scrap timber, wood shavings, sawdust, paper, packing materials and oily substance,
particularly in or near vertical shaft openings like stairways, hft shaft etc. shall be collected and disposed
off safely at the end of each day's work.
An independent water storage facility shall be provided before the commencement of construction
operations for fire-fighting purposes. The tank shall be kept filled up at all times. Sec 2.2.5 shall also be
followed.
3.10.2.2 Flammable Materials and Explosives :Highly flammable materials, such as gasoline, oil, paints
etc. shall be stored in approved containers. Storage of large quantities shall not be allowed unless stored in
separate compartments or enclosures of noncombustible construction.
Where cellulose or other highly flammable paint is sprayed, flame-proof exhaust ventilation equipment shall
be provided. Smoking shalfbe strictly controlled where highly flammable liquids are used.
Explosives like detonators, gunpowder etc. shall be stored in conformity with relevant regulations for
storage and handling of explosives. Combustible materials shall not be stored on any floor under
construction until all combushble form works are removed from the tier immediately above.
Also see Sec. 2.12, Sec 2.2.16, Sec 2.2.17, Sec 2.2.18 and Sec 4.3.
3.10.2.3 Temporary Heating :When temporary heating is used, all regulations as to the maximum
temperature, distance from combustible materials, spark arrestors, removal of noxious gases and other
similar requirements shall be fully observed. Temporary enclosure shall be provided where the source of
temporary heat includes open-flame devices.
3.10.2.4 Steam Boiler : All temporary or permanent high pressure steam boilers shall be operated only by
licensed operators. Where located within a building or within 3 metres of combustible materials or electric
power lines, all such boilers shall be enclosed with approved noncombustible covers. Safety valves shall be
adjusted to exactly 70 kPa in excess of working pressure. Two dry chemical power (DCP) type fire
extinguishers of 5 kg capacity each shall be kept at easily accessible locations.

Part 7
3.10.2.5 House Keeping : Rubbish, trash, nuts, bolts and small tools shall not be allowed to accumulate on
the site and shall be removed as soon as conditions warrant. Combustible rubbish shall be removed daily.
Rubbish shall not be burnt on the premises or in the immediate vicinity. The entire premises and area
adjoining and around the construction site shall be kept in a safe and sanitary condition (see also Sec 2.1.3).
3.10.2.6 Fire Exits : All construction site with a fire-risk shall have at least two clearly marked fire exits.
Other means of escape as required by various sections of this Code shall be provided in a construction site.
Fire exits shall be easily openable; stores, packing materials or rubbish shall not obstruct the exit.
Fire walls and exit stairways required for a building shall be given priorities in construction schedule.
Where fire doors, with or without automatic closing devices, are to be set in the building, they should be
hung as soon as practicable, and before fire risk is increased by way of greater use of combustible material.
3.10.3 Health Hazards

3.10.3.1 Emission: Precautionary measures shall be taken against the emission of dust, small particles, toxic
gases and other harmful substances in quantities hazardous to health. Such measures may include local
ventilation, use of protective devices, medical check-up etc. Exhaust ventilation shall be employed in
enclosed spaces.
3.10.3.2 Clothing : Clothes worn by the workmen shall not be of such nature and materials as to increase
the chances of inflicting injuries to themselves or others. Wearing of loose garments shall be strictly avoided.
Workmen using naked flames (such as in welding) shall not wear clothing of synthetic fibre or similar
materials which increases the risk of fire hazards.
3.10.3.3 Removal of Dust :Spread of dust, sand blasts and other harmful materials and chemical agents
shall be controlled at or near the source to prevent overspill to adjoining premises or streets. Proper gear
and protection as required by regulations shall be provided to the workmen.
Proper methods of handling and transportation shall be followed. Places prone to generate dust shall be
frequently cleaned. Machinery and plants shall be designed for easy cleaning.
3.10.3.4 First Aid and Ambulance : A copy of all pertinent regulations and notices concerning accidents,
injury and first aid shall be prominently displayed at the work site.
A first aid box or cupboard shall be provided for every 150 workmen and be accessible. The provision shall
also include a stretdi.er and cot with accessories for every 300 workmen.
In case of a site where more than 600 workmen are employed at. any one time, or in which more than 300
workmen are employed at any one time and is 15 km from the nearest health service facility, provision of an
ambulance shall oe made. See also Sec 1.2.4.
3.10.4 Skin Hazard

Workmen engaged in works which may splash li�uid or other materials liable to injure the skin shall have
enough protective clothing to cover the body and limbs.
Whenever epoxy resins are mixed indoor, the place shall be adequately ventilated. Damaged protective
gears shall not be used, and shall be replaced. Containers of hazardous chemicals shall be kept in a clearly
marked-off area of the work space.
Spillage on and contamination of tools, equipment, or the outside of the containers shall be avoided. If
spillage or contamination occurs, the affected area shall be cleaned up immediately.
Contaminated skin/part of the body shall be washed immediately with warm soapy water. Proper barrier
creams shall be used. All contamination on part of the body shall be regularly and efficiently removed
during breaks and after finishing time.
3.10.5 Noise Hazard

Noise shall be controlled, if possible, by soundproof shields, baffles or absorbent lined booths being fitted
near or around the source. Other general methods of control shall include silencing of machine eXhaust,
choice of quite machines etc. .
Protective measures shall be taken if the continuous noise level at the construction site exceeds 90 dB. For
levels up to 110 dB, properly fitted ear plugs of plastic, rubber or glass wool shall be provided. For levels
upto 120 dB, ear muffs shall be used; for 1evels exceeding 120 dB, nmse protection helmets shall be provided.
All noise control equipment shall be regularly inspected and maintained by adequately trained personnel.
Care shall be taken to prevent noise becoming a nuisance to neighbouring property. Other precautions as
specified in Part 8 Chapter 4 shall also be consulted, and followed accordingly.
7-32
Chapter 3
3.11 MISCELLANEOUS
3.11.1 Stair, Ramp and Gangway

Buildings higher than two storeys shall have at least one stair in usable condition at all times. This shall be
extended upward with each completed floor. Till the permanent handrails are provided, temporary
provisions like ropes, bamboo poles etc. shall be provided on stair.
Suitable precautions by way of support, formworks, etc. shall be taken to prevent any collapse of the stair
during its construction. No person shall be allowed to use such stair untif they are tested by the engineer
and found fit for usage.
Where a building has been constructed to a height greater than 14m or four storeys, or where an existing
building higher than 14m is altered, at least one temporary lighted stairway shall be provided unless one or
more of the permanent stairways are erected as the construction progresses.
Ramps and gangways shall be of adequate strength and evenly supported. They shall either have a
sufficiently flat slope (maximum 15° to horizontal), or shall have cleats fixed to the surface. They shall be
kept free from slippmg hazards and obstructions.
Ramps for transporting materials, shall have even surfaces, be of sufficient width and provided with 200
mm high toeboards on open sides.
Requirements as set in Sec 3.10.2.1 and Sec 3.10.2.6 shall also be observed.
3.11.2 Fragile Fixture

It shall be ensured that sufficient number of workmen and equipment are provided to carry the fragile
fixtures in the site like sanitary fittings, glass sheets, etc. Fragile fixtures shall be stored in a safe place away
from the normal circulation path of people, equipment and vehicle.
See Sec 2.2 for additional requirements for safe handling of fragile fixtures and materials.
3.11.3 Hand Tools

Correct tools in good condition shall be used for each type of job. All tools, particularly at heights, shall be
stowed. Wooden handles shall be made of good quality straight-grained materials. Hand tools shall be
issued through a tool room where they are stored safely and inspected periodically by competent people.
Hammer head shall be securely attached to the shaft. The head shall be in good condition, and the face free
from chipped edges and not rounded from wear. The hammer shall not be used if the shaft is split, broken
or loose.
Set spanners with splayed jaws, or box spanners showing signs of splitting shall not be used. A fixed
spanner of correct size shall be preferred over an adjustable spanner. A tube shall not be used to obtain extra
leverage; end of a spanner shall never be hammered. A spanner shall not be used as a hammer, nor as a
wedge.
A chisel with a mushroom head shall never be used. A chisel shall be used to cut in a direction away from
the body. Screwdriver handle shall be properly secured. A screwdriver shall never be used as a chisel.
Use of files with an exposed tang shall be avoided. Files shall not be used as levers or toggle-bar. When a
knife is used to cut greasy matenals, the handle shall be such that it offers a firm grip ancf a shield shall be
fitted between the handle and the blade. The cut shall always be made away from the body.
3.11.4 Steel Structure

Riding on trusses while hauling them to their final position, shall not be allowed. The hauling ropes shall be
load tested before use.
Once in position, the trusses shall be kept secured with adequate temp orary measures till the final fixing is
carried out. Standard safety belts conforming to BDS 1359 shall be used while fixing pur !ins on the trusses.
In steel construction, the entire tier of iron or steel beams shall be planked over, with the exception of
necessary hoistways and permanent openings. Steelwork shall not advance more than six floors ahead of the
permanent floor construction.
The proposed erection scheme of a steel work shall be analysed and checked for safety measures
undertak:en; the scheme shall cover safety aspects at all stages.
3.11.5 Finish Works

3.11.5.1 Painting : The quantity of paint and thinner required only for the day's work shall be issued from
the store. All unused containers of paint and thinner shall be closed with tight-fitting lids, and kept at a safe
place away from the work site.

Part7
Metal receptacles with pedal operated metal lids shall be kept at the work site for depositing used cotton
rags and waste. The contents of such receptacles shall be disposed off daily at a safe place, preferably by
burning under proper supervision.
All containers of paint shall be deposited in the paint store after use. Used paint brushes shall be cleaned
and deposited in the store. A 5 kg dry powder fire extinguisher shall be I<ept near the paint store (see
Sec 2.2.16). .
Adequate ventilation to prevent the accumulation of flammable vapour to hazardous level of concentration
shall be provided in all areas where painting is done. When painting is done in confined spaces where
flammab1e or explosive vapour may aevelop, required heat and power shall only be provioed through
covered ducts remote from the likely source of flame.
Sources of ignition, such as open flame and exposed heating elements, shall not be permitted in areas or
rooms where spray painting is done, nor shall smoking be allowed there.
· 3.11.5.2 Polishing : Extra care shall be taken while handling polish consisting of acid and other chemical
ingredients. Only the quantity of polish required for the day's work shall be kept at the work spot. All
containers of pohsh shall be kept closed with tight fitting lids in a safe place.
Protective clothing, gloves, respiratory equipment, etc. shall be provided to the workmen applying polishes.
Sec 2.2.16 and Sec 2.2.17 shall be observed as additional requirement.
3.11.5.3Pavements : Pavement risers shall not be higher than 225 mm. All undulating surfaces shall be
smoothed. At least a 1 m x 0.5 m area of the pavement adjacent to a vehiCular road crossing shall have a
checkered surface preferably of a texture and colour different from those of the surrounding surface.
3.11.5.4Terracing: Protective clothin&s, gloves and shoes shall be used in terracing work, specially while
handling lime and other in�edients. L1me and mortar stuck on the body shall be thoroughly cleaned. Other
requirements for handling lime shall be as specified in Sec 2.2.15.
7-34
CHAPTER�
Demolition Work
4.1 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURE
4.1.1 General
The safety provisions specified in this chapter shall apply to demolition and dismantling of all types of
buildings and structures in addition to the safety requirements mentioned in Chapter 3.
4.1.2 Planning
Before commencing the demolition work, a detailed survey and study shall be made of the structure to be
demolished and the structures in its surroundings. This sha1l include the manner in which the various parts
of the building to be demolished are supported and how far the demolition will affect the safety of the
surrounding. Planning for demolition and safety of adjoining structures shall be made accordingly.
The sequence of operations shall be planned by an engineer recognized by the Authority as having
experience in demolition work of similar magnitude. No deviation from the approved plan shall be
permitted without the approval of the Engineer. Before the commencement of each stage of demolition, the
foreman shall brief the workmen in detail regarding the safety aspects to be kept in view. · ·
Demolition of buildings and structures shall require a permit from the relevant authority in accordance to
the provisions made in Sec 3.6 of part 3, and Buifding Construction Act 1952 (amended 1987). The Authority
may require the permittee to submit the plans and a schedule of demolition.
Neighbours and public shall be notified of the intended demolition through newspaper or other media. The
extent, duration and time of the demolition shall be clearly specified in the notice.
4.1.3 Protection of Adjoining Property

A written notice shall be delivered to the owner of each potentially affected plot, building or structure at
least a week in advance of the commencement of work. The notice shall request written permission to enter
the plot, building or structure prior to the commencement of work and as and when required during the
worl< to inspect and preserve them from damage. .
Owner of the structure to be demolished or dismantled shall under all circumstances preserve and protect
the adjoining lot, building or structure from damage or injury. This shall be done at his own expense.
Part7 7-35
Part 7
In case damage to the adjoining property is imminent, the demolition operation shall be stopped forthwith
and shall not be restarted until Hie necessary measures to prevent such damage have been taK.en. All waste
materials and debris from the demolition shall be removed immediately.
If the owner of the property to be demolished is denied entry to an adjoining structure, he shall immediately
notify the Authority m writing of such denial. In this situation, the Authority may hold the adjoining
property owner fully responsible for any damage to his property.
4.1.4 Precautions prior to Demolition

Demolition of any building shall not commence until the required pedestrian protection structures in
accordance with Sec 4.1.5 have been built. Building or structure damaged by fire, flood, explosion or
earthquake, shall be protected from collapse by way of bracing, shoring etc. before demolition is
commenced.
Permission shall be secured from the Authority for using explosives. General public and owners of the
adjoining properties shall be notified beforehand of such use. All precautions as required by Sec 2.2.18 and
Sec 4.3 shall have to be ensured before, during and after the use of the explosives.
·
Danger signs shall be posted round the property; this shall conform to the relevant sections of Part 10. All
entrances shall be barncaded or manned. At least two independent exits shall be provided at night; warning
lights shall be placed above all barricades during the night and dark hours. Even when work is not in
progress, watchmen shall be provided to prevent unauthonzed entry of the public in the danger zone.
All utility lines shall be disconnected upon the approval of the concerned Authorities. Temporary service
connection for the demolition work shall be taken separately. See Sec 3.2.11 and 3.2.12 for other
requirements.
Workmen shall be provided with all necessary safety appliances as specified in the following sections and
in Chapter 3 prior to the start of work. Safety precautions for fire shall be provided. The site shall be
thoroughly cleaned of combustible materials and debris before commencement of demolition.
4.1.5 Protection of Public ,

Safe distances shall be clearly marked and prominent signs posted. Every sidewalk and road adjacent to the
site shall be either closed or protected. All public roads shall be kept open and unobstructed at all times
unless unavoidable circumstances arise.
If a covered walk is not necessary in the opinion of the building official he shall issue a permit to block off
part of the sidewalk and have a temporary walk provided. Pedestrians shall be provided with diversion
roads or alternate protection as specified in See 1.4, See 1.5 and Table 7.4.1.
4.1.6 Sidewalk Shed and Canopies

A toe board at least 1 m high above the roof of the shed shall be provided on the outside edge and ends of
the sidewalk shed. Such boards may be vertical or inclined outward at no more than 45° angle with the
vertical. The side of the shed adjacent to the building shall be completely blocked by planking/sheeting.
The roof of sidewalk sheds shall be capable of sustaining a load of 7 kPa. Impact of falling debris shall be
considered in designing and constructing the shed. Maximum load on the roof of the shed shall be
maintained below 12 kPa.
The flooring of the sidewalk shed shall consist of closely laid planks with a minimum thickness of 50 mm
made watertight. Only in exceptional cases, temporary storage on the sidewalk shed may be permitted; in
such situation, the roof of the shed shall be designed for sustaining 14 kPa.
Entrances to the building shall be protected by canopies extending at least 2.5 m from the building facade.
Such overhead protection shall be at least 600 mm wiaer than the entrance, and 2.5 m in height.
4.2 PRECAUTIONS DURING DEMOLITION
4.2.1 General
The owner shall provide protection against all damages or loss of life and property during demolition.
Constant supervision shallbe provided during a demolition work by a competent and experienced engineer.
Prior to commencement of work, all materials of fragile nature like glass, sanitary fixtures etc. shall be
removed from the site. Dust shall be controlled by suitable means. StacK.ing of materials and debris shall be
as specified in Sec 2.2.
The demolition site shall be provided with natural and artificial lighting and ventilation.
All existing features required during demolition operations shall be well protected with substantial covering
to the enhre satisfaction of the rules and regulations of the undertakings or they shall be temporarily
relocated.
7-36
Chapter 4
Demolition Work
Table 7.4.1
Type of Protection Required for Pedestrians Near a Demolition Site
Horizontal Distance from inside of Height to Horizontal Type of Minimum

the Sidewalk to the Structure Distance Ratio Protection Required
Less than 3m 6:1 or more Type A
4:1 to 6:1 TypeB
3:1 to 4:1 TypeC
2:1 to 3:1 TypeD
up to 2:1 TypeE
Over 3 m to less than 4.5 m 10:1 or more Type A

6:1 to 10:1 TypeB
4:1 to 6:1 TypeC
3:1 to 4:1 TypeD
up to 3:1 TypeE
Over 4.5 to less than 7.5 m 15:1 or more Type A

10:1 to 15:1 TypeB
6:1 to 10:1 TypeC
4:1 to 6:1 TypeD
up to 4:1 TypeE
Over 7.5 m to less than 12 m 15:1 or more TypeB

10:1 to 15:1 TypeC
6:1 to 10:1 TypeD
up to 6:1 TypeE
12 m and more 10:1 or more TypeD

up to 10:1 TvpeE
Type A: Total blockade of the road;
TypeB : Temporary diversion over the entire length of the footpath adjacent to the structure;
TypeC: A sidewalk shed for the entire length, in accordance with Sec 4.1.6;
TypeD : A fence of tightly seated 25 mm pfanks, minimum height 2.5m;
TypeE : A railing at least 1.5m high with mid rail and cross bracing.
•Height of the building or portion thereof to be demolished
For a building or structure more than 8 m or two storeys high, all windows and exterior wall openings that
are within 6 m of floor opening used for the passage of debris from floors above, shall be solidly boarded.
Openings in floors below the level of demolition, not used for removal of materials or debris, shall be
barricaded or covered by planks.
4.2.2 Sequence of Demolition Operation

The demolition shall proceed in descending order and storey by storey. All work in the upper floor shall be
completed and approved by the engineer prior to disturbing any supporting member on the lower floor.
Demolition of the structure in sections may be permitted in exceptional cases only if necessary precautions
are ensured.
4.2.3 Wall
Walls shall be removed part by part in reasonably level courses. No wall or any part of the structure shall be
left in a condition that may collapse or be toppled by wind, vibration etc.
Fall of the demolished wall in large chunks, which endangers the adjoining property or exceeds the safe
load capacity of the floor below, shall be avoided. Debris shall be removed at frequent intervals to avoid
piling up and overloading of any structural member.
Platforms shall be provided for demolition of walls less than one and half brick thick. Lateral bracin� shall
be provided for sections of walls having a height more than 22 times its thickness, or otherwise considered
unsound. No workman shall stand on any wail to remove materials; staging or scaffold shall be provided at
a maximum of 3.5 m below the top of the wall.
At the end of each days work, all walls shall be left stable to avoid any danger of getting overturned.
Foundation walls which serve as retaining walls shall not be demolished until the adjoining structure has
been underpinned or braced and the earth removed.
4.2.4 Floor
Support/ centering shall be provided prior to removal of masonry or concrete floor. Planks of sufficient
strength shall be used in shuttering. No person shall be allowed to work in an area underneath a floor being
removed; such areas shall be barricaded.

Part7
The total area of a hole cut in any intermediate floor for dropping debris shall not exceed 25% of that floors'
area. No barricades or rails for guarding the floor hole shall be removed until the storey immediately above
has been demolished down to the floor line and all debris cleared from the floor.
In cutting holes in a floor which spans in one direction, at first, a maximum 300 mm wide slit shall be cut
along the entire length of the slab; the slit shall be increased gradually thereafter.
Planks of sufficient width not less than 50 mm thick, 250 mm wide and 2 m long shall be provided at
spacing not greater than 400 mm for the workmen to work. These shall be so spaced as to firmly support the
workmen against any floor collapse.
4.2.5 Special Elements

4.2.5.1 Catch Platform: Catch platform shall be provided during demolition of exterior walls of structures
more than 20 m in height. These shall be constructed and maintained not more than three storeys below the
storey from which exterior wall is being demolished.
Catch platform shall not be used for storage or dumping of materials. These shall be capable of sustaining a
minimum live load of 7 kPa. The out-riggers shall not be p laced more than 3 m apart. Additional
requirements of Sec 1.4.3 and Sec 4.1.6 shall afso be followed.
4.2.5.2 Stairs, Passageways and Ladders : Make-shift stairs with railings, passageways, and ladders shall
be left in place as long as possible, and maintained in a safe condition. They shall not be removed from their
position unless instructed by the foreman. See also Sec 3.4.2 and Sec 3.11.1 for additional requirements.
4.2.5.3 Roof Trusses and Steel Structures : Structural frame of a pitched roof shall be removed to wall
plate level by hand methods. Sufficient purlins and bracing shall be retained to ensure stability of the
remaining roof truss while each individual truss is removed progressively. The bottom tie of roof trusses
shall not be cut until the principal rafters are secured against making outward movement.
Temporary bracing shall be provided, where necessary, to maintain stability. All trusses except the one
being dismantled shall be independently and securely guyed in both directions before work starts.
Hoisting gear suitable for the loads to be lifted shall be provided. A truss or a part thereof shall not be put
on a floor; it may be allowed to rest only temporarily on the floor below if it can be ensured that the floor is
capable of taking the load.
The steel frame may be left in place during demolition of masonry work. All steel beams/girders shall be -
cleared of all loose materials as the demolition of masonry work progresses downward provided it is still
strong enough to stand as an independent structure.
No members shall be cut until precautions have been taken to prevent it from swinging freely. All structural
steel members shall be lowered from the building and shall not be allowed to drop.
4.2.5.4 Heavy Floor Beam : Heavy timber and steel beams shall be supported before cutting at the
extremities. Beams shall be lowered gently and kept in a distant place without obstructing any passageway.
4.2.5.5 Jack Arch : Arches shall be demolished by standing on scaffolding clear of the arch. Tie rods
between main supporting beams shall not be cut until the arch or series of arches have been removed. The
floor shall be demolished in strips parallel to the span of the arch rings at right angles to the main floor
beam.
4.2.5.6 Brick Arch : Abutments shall not be removed before the dead load of the spandrel fall and the
arch rings are removed. A single span arch can be demolished by cutting narrow segments progressively
from each springing parallel to the span of the arch until its width has been reduced to a minimum. The
remainder of the arcn can be collapsed.
The crown may be demolished by the demolition ball method progressively from edges to the centre.
Explosives may be used for a complete collapse of the structure by inserting charges into bore holes drilled
in both the arch and the abutments.
In multi-span arches, lateral restraint shall be provided at the sprin�ing level before individual arches are
removed. Demolition procedures as for single span may then be applied. Special temporary support shall be
provided in the case of skew bridges.
No partial demolition leaving unstable portion standing shall be allowed. Where debris cannot be allowed
to fall to the ground, centering capabfe of carrying load of the debris shall be designed and provided
accordingly.
4.2.5.7 Cast-in-Situ RC : Before commencin� demolition, the nature and condition and position of
reinforcement, and the possibility of lack of contmuity of reinforcement shall be ascertained. Demolition of
cast-in-situ RC members shall start by removing partitions and external nonload bearing cladding and other
decorative features.
7-38
Chapter 4
Demolition Work
Reinforced concrete beams shall be demolished one at a time after the slabs have been removed. Ties shall
be attached to the beam to support the beam when suspended.
The reinforcement near the supports shall first be exposed by drilling with pneumatic drill and removing
the concrete. The reinforcement shall then be cut at both supports in such a way as to allow the beam to be
lowered to the floor or the ground under control.
RC columns and any other supporting columns of one level shall only be demolished after all other
building elements of that level have been completely removed.
The reinforcement in columns shall be exposed at the base after restraining wire guy ropes have been placed
round the member at the top. The reinforcement shall then be cut in a way to allow it to be pulled down to
the floor or the ground under control.
Reinforced concrete walls shall be cut into strips and demolished in the same way as concrete columns.
4.2.5.8 Precast RC : Supports and joints of precast RC blocks shall be removed and the member lowered
to the ground or floor below before demolition is performed. Precautions in the form of providing
temporary supports or balancing weights shall be taken to avoid toppling over of prefabricated units or any
other part of the structure. .
4.2.5.9 Suspended Floor, Roof and Cantilevered Structure : Suspended floor and roof slabs shall be cut
into strips parallel to the main reinforcement and demolished strip oy strip. For ribbed floors, the principle
of design and method of construction shall be considered and procedures aetermined accordingly.
Ribs and beams shall never be cut at their mid-span and without securing by ties. Cantilevered portions,
canopies, cornices, staircases and balconies shall be demolished after providing support to the portion
before demolition of the main structure.
4.2.6 Mechanical Demolition

Mechanical demolition shall be restricted to a height of 25 m. When mechanical devices, such as weight ball
and power shovels are used in demolition work, the area shall be barricaded up to a minimum distance of
one and a half times the height of the wall in addition to the requirements laid out in Table 7.4.1.
While the mechanical device is in operation, no person shall be allowed to enter the building. Location of the
devices shall be such that it is neither hit by falling debris nor it causes any damage to adjacent structure,
power line, etc.
4.2.7 Miscellaneous
No demolition work shall be carried out at night, or during storm or heavy rain. If demolition has to be done
at night, precautions in the form of red warning signals, sirens, workmg lights and watchmen shall be
provided. Auditory warning devices shall be insta1led at the demolition site. .
Safety devices like industrial safety helmets (BDS 1265, BDS 1266), boots, gloves, goggles made of celluloid
lens (BDS 1360), safety belts (BDS 1359) etc. shall be used by the workmen.
First aid box shall be made available at all demolition sites. In fire-risk area, appropriate portable fire
fighting appliances shall be kept at hand. See also See 3.10.2 and See 3.10.3.4
4.3 BLASTING OPERATION AND USE OF EXPLOSIVES
4.3.1 General
Before any work involving the use of explosives is started, a detailed survey and examination of the site,
buildings or structures ana adjoining areas and property shall be made. Due care shall be taken to avoid
disruptions or damage to underground wells, tunnels, storage tanks etc.
Proximity of underground and overground services shall be carefully considered before blasting operations
are carried out. Relevant authorities responsible for concealed underground works shall be duly consulted.
Special attention shall be paid to the presence of power cables, radio and television transmitting stations
sited within 3 km of the site.
·
·
Experts shall be consulted before proceeding with any work where sources of danger like flammable gases
or 1iquids, sewage and drainage, unexploded missiles or mines, waste, explosive etc. are likely to be found.
Also see Sec 4.1.
4.3.2 Code of Signal

Before any blasting commences on the construction or demolition site, both audible and visual signalling
systems giving warning of blasting operations shall be established. These shall be such that they can be
clearly heard and seen oy site personnel working within the site areas, and also by the general public who
may be affected.

Part 7
Audible warnings shall comprise a series of readily recognizable signals with a distinctive tone. The Code of
signals, once established for a particular site, shall not be altered without good reason and adequate
warning to personnel.
Visual signs shall comprise clearly painted notices posted on all access roads to the site. Sentries shall be
posted at the entries at blasting times with dear instructions; if necessary, they shall warn personnel who
failed to hear warning signals or see signs.
4.3.3 Supervision and Responsibility

Only competent persons shall be employed as shotfirers. When subcontractors are taking part in the work
on same site, the main contractor shall ensure a dose liaison and collaboration with other contractors.
All site personnel present during blasting operations shall come under the control of the shotfirer. All
explosives shall be under the control of the shotfirer.
The handling of explosives on the site shall be restricted to personnel who are required to do so in the
discharge of their duties and who are authorized in writing by the engineer. All Site personnel shall be
warned against maltreatment of explosives and blasting accessones.
4.3.4 Protection of site Personnel and Installations

The contractor shall provide all tools and equipment used in charging and firing blasts. The shotfirer shall
inform the engineer the necessity of replacing any item. Shotfiring cables shall be examined before use for
cuts or abraded insulation.
Circuit testers and exploders shall be handled with care and used and maintained according to the
manufacturer's instructions; any malfunction shall immediately be reported and repair shall be carried out
only by a competent person.
The area where explosives are to be used shall be defined before the charging of blasts. Vehicles and other.
mobile equip�ent shall be prohibited from entering the defined blast area, except as required to deliver or
remove expfosives.
All personnel shall be instructed as to what places of shelter they are to take up during blasting operations.
Mobile plant and equipment shall be moved to a place of shelter and switched off when a blast IS to be fired.
After a blast, no personnel shall be allowed to return to the danger area until the shotfirer has conducted a
general examination and declared the site safe. The shotfirer shall not return to the blasting site until at least
5 min has elapsed after firing.
Electric detonators shall only be carried in boxes made of nonconducting materials, with a lid and catch. The
shotfirer shall maintain a check on the number of detonators used against number issued. The boxes shall be
kept locked until detonators are needed.
Blasting shall not be carried out in confined spaces without adequate ventilation; positive ventilation at the
working face shall be maintained at all times.
4.3.5 Safety of Third Parties

The safet of persons who reside or work in the vicinity of the site shall be considered. Where necessary,
l
they shal be advised to vacate their homes or offices during blasting operations. In addition to notices
givmg warning of blasting on all roads and paths approaching the site, sentries shall be posted to maintain
surveillance around the site when blasting is in progress.
Blasts shall normally be fired during the hours of daylights. The blasting technique and period shall be
chosen so that any annoyance to the general public from noise, ground vibration, dust etc. is reduced to a
minimum.
In heavily built-up areas, small-scale short delay blasting techniques employing light charges in small
diameter holes shall be adopted. In such situations, short holes shall be carefully placed and charge weights
correctly chosen. Sand bags, blasting mats or other screening material of suitable construction shall be
placed over the top of each holes.
4.3.6 Use of Explosives

A sketch plan with sufficient duplicate copies shall be prepared for each blast. Before the explosive is
deposited at the point of use, a check shall first be made ofthe depth of each shot hole. The engineer shall be
informed of any aeparture from the planned arrangement.
Exposure to any compressive action, or severe effect of a similar kind shall be avoided and grinding,
scouring or rubbing actions eliminated. The vigorous use of stemming rods to force explosives into a hole
shall be avoided. There shall be adequate clearance to allow easy insertion of the cartridges into the shot
holes. The wrapping of the explosive cartridge shall not be removed, nor the cartridge be cut.
7-40
. Chapter 4
Demolition Work
Primers shall not be made up in a magazine, or· near excessive quantity of explosives, or in excess of
immediate use. No attempt shall be macfe to use fuses, blasting caps, or explosives which have been water
soaked. No attempt shall be made to soften hard set explosives by heating or rolling.
A bore hole shall not be loaded with explosives after springing unless it is cool and does not contain any hot
metal. Temperature in excess of 65°C is dangerous. A bore hole near another hole loaded with explosives
shall not be sprung. ·
No attempt shall be made to slit, drop, deform or abuse the primer. No metallic device shall be used in
tamping. Wooden tamping tools witfi no exposed metal parts except nonsparking metal connectors for
jointed poles shall be used. .
4.3.7 Blasting Accessories

No person shall attempt to uncoil the wires and open out the short circuited bare leading wires of the
electric blasting cap during approach of dust storm, or near sources of large charge of static electricity, or
near a radio transmitter. Firing circuit shall be kept completely insulated from the ground, other conductors,
paths or stray current.
Except at the time and for the purpose of firing the blast, there shall be no electric live wires or cables near
electric blasting caps or other explosives. All wire ends to be connected shall be bright and clean. The electric
cap wires or leading wires shall be kept short-circuited until ready to fire.
All electric blasting caps shall be tested both singly and when connected to a circuit. Electrical blasting caps
made by more than one manufacturer or electric blasting caps of different design or function, even if made
by the same manufacturer, shall not be used in the same c1rcuit. These shall not be fired by less than the
minimum current specified by the manufacturer.
Where energy for blasting is taken from power circuits, the voltage shall not exceed 220 V. A safety switch,
the same type as the blasting switch, shall be installed between the blasting switch and the firing circuit and
lead lines at a distance not exceeding 1800 mm from the blasting switch.
Both safety switch and blasting switch shall be locked in the open position immediately after firing the shot.
Key to the switches shall remain with the shotfirer at all times. Blasting shall be carried out using suitable
exploder with 25% exce�s capacity.
.
Rubber covered or other adequately insulated copper wires shall be used for firing lines; sufficient firing line
shall be .erovided. Single conductor lead lines sha11 be used. All holes loaded on a shift shall be fired on the
same shift.
In very cold weather, the safety fuse shall be slightly warmed before using. Short fuse shall not be used. The
length of a fuse shall be at least 1200 mm and the maximum burning rate 600 mm/min.
A fuse shall not be cut until the blasting cap is ready. The fuse shall be cut squarely across about 50 mm with
a clean and sharp blade to ensure a dry end.
The fuse shall not be twisted after it has been seated lightly against the cap charge. Blasting caps shall not be
crimped except by a cap crimper designed for the purpose. The cap shall be squarely crimped to the face.
The fuse shall be lighted with a fuse lighter designed for the purpose. It shall not be lighted until sufficient
stemming has been placed over the explosives. The explosives shall not be held in hands when lighting the
fuse.
In case of firing with safety fuse, the number of loud reports shall be counted; in the event of misfire, no
person shall be allowed to the blasting site for at least 30 minutes. An inspection for remaining of
undetonated explosives shall be made; all misfired shot holes shall be marked.
If the misfire is due to faulty wiring or connection, the defect shall be remedied and the shot fired. The
stemming shall be floated out by using hose water until the hole has been opened to within 600 mm of the
charge; the water shall be siphoned out thereafter and a new char�e placed or, a new hole drilled 600 rnm
away from the old bore and parallel to it and about 300 mm less m aepth and the new hole charged and
duly fired.
4.4 LOWERING, REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
4.4.1 General
No material shall be dropped or thrown on the ground or outside the exterior walls. They shall be lowered
either in containers, or oy ropes, tackles, properly designed wood or metal chutes etc. When the removal
of any material causes an excessive amount of dust, it shall be wet before lowering or dropping, if feasible.
Tag lines shall be used on all materials being lowered or hoisted up and a standard signal system shall be
used and the workmen instructed on the signals. No person shall be permitted to ride the load line.
Bangladesh National Buildip.g Code 7-41

Part 7
4.4.2 Use of Chutes

Chutes, if provided, shall be at the centre of the building. It shall have an angle of more than 45° with the
horizontal, and shall be entirely closed on all sides except at the opening for receiving the material. The
chute opening shall be kept locked. The top opening of chute shall be protected with guard rails.
Debris may be dropped through holes in the floor, if absolutely necessary. Precautions shall be taken to
avoid overloading of the floor with debris. The debris dropping area shall be protected by rails.
Chutes shall not extend in an unbroken line for more than two storeys or 6 m, whichever is less. A gate or
stop shall be provided with suitable means for closing at the bottom of each chute to stop the flow of
materials.
A toe board or bumper, not less than 50 mm thick and 200 mm high shall be provided at each chute
opening, if the matenal is dumped from the wheel barrows. Any space between the chute and the edge of
tile opening in the floor through: which it passes shall be solidly plallked over.
4.4.3 Removal of Debris

Temporary stacking of demolished materials at the site shall be done in a manner insuring fire prevention
and orderly removal. Debris shall be removed from the site as soon as possible. Materials like glass, nails,
etc. shall not be strewn about. Standard precautions to prevent fire from debris shall be taken.
4.4.4 Disposal of Materials

Demolished materials shall be disposed off according to their salvage value. Materials, which can be re
used, shall be salvaged and re-used with the approval of the owner.
Rubbish having no salvage value shall be removed from the site and disposed off according to the local
statutory rules and regulations. Rubbish of combustible materials shall be disposed off immediately. All
·
such operations shall have the approval of the owner.
4.4.5 Regularization of Plots

·
If there is no immediate construction planned on the plot vacant after demolition, it shall be filled, graded
and maintained in conformity to the established street grades at curb level. The plot shall be maintained free
from the accumulation of rubbish and water, and all other unsafe and hazardous conditions.
·
Provisions shall be made to prevent damage to any foundation on the premises or on the adjoining
property. All previous service connections shall be capped.
7-42
Part 8
BUILDING SERVICES
Clhlratplteir li
Lighting
Clhl�JPl�eir 2
Electrical Installation
ClhlratJPlteir 3
Air--conditioning, Heating and Ventilation
ClhlaJjpteir 41-
Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control
CltuaJjpllteir 5
Lifts, Escalators and Moving Walks
Clhla!JPlteir 6
Water. Supply
C�fia!JPllteJr 1
Drainage and Sanitation
Clh1aJjplteJr 8
Fuel Gas Supply
,Appendices
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARTS BUILDING SERVICES
Chapter 1 Lighting
1.1 SCOPE 8-1
1.2 TERMINOLOGY 8-1
1.3 ILLUMINATION 8-3
1.3.1 Principle of Lighting 8-3
1.3.2 Planning the Brightness Pattern 8-4
1.3.3 Lighting Calculations 8-4
1.3.4 Recommended Illumination Values 8-4
1.3.5 Artificial Lighting to Supplement Daylight 8-4
1.4 . LIGHT FITTINGS 8-4
1.4.1 Classification of Lamp Fittings 8-4
1.5 ILLUMINATION OF EXIT SIGNS AND MEANS OF EGRESS 8-14
1.5.1 Exit Signs 8-14
1.5.2 Means of Egress Lighting 8-14
Chapter 2 Electrical Installation
2.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 8-15
2.1.1 Purpose 8-15
2.1.2 Scope 8-15
2.1.3 Voltage Ratings 8-15
2.1.4 Exclusion from Scope 8-15
2.1.5 Organization of the Chapter 8-15
2.2.2 List of Symbols 8-17
2.3 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 8-17
2.3.1 Ceiling Roses and Similar Attachments 8-17
2.3.2 Socket Outlets and Plugs 8-17
2.3.3 Lighting Fittings 8-19
2.3.4 Fittings-wire 8-19
2.3.5 Fans 8-19
2.4 LOAD ESTIMATION 8-20
2.4.1 Maximum Demand and Diversity 8-20
2.4.2 Estimation 8-20
2.4.3 Minimum Load Densities 8-20
2.5 CIRCUIT WIRING IN A BUILDING 8-21
2.5.1 General 8-21
2.5.2 Methods of Circuit Wiring 8-21
8-i
2.5.3 Layout and Installation Drawings 8-21
2.5.4 Conductors and Accessories 8-22
2.5.5 Sub-distribution Boards 8-22
2.5.6 Electrical Services Shaft and Bus Ducts 8-23
2.5.7 Types of House Wiring 8-23
2.5.8 Conduits and Conduit Fittings 8-23
2.5.9 Service Entry 8-23
2.6 SUBSTATION IN BUILDING 8-23
2.6.1 General 8-23
2.6.2 Location 8-24
2.6.3 Layout 8-24
2.6.4 Provision for Standby Supply 8-24
2.7 DISTRIBUTION OF SUPPLY AND CABLING 8-25
2.7.1 General 8-25
2.7.2 System of Supply 8-25
2.7.3 Equipment and Accessories 8-25
2.7.4 Cables 8-26
2.7.5 Main Switch and Switch Boards 8-29
2.7.6 Protection of Circuits 8-30
2.8 EARTHING 8-30

2.8.1 General 8-30
2.8.2 Circuit and System Earthing 8-31
2.8.3 Methods of Earthing 8-31
2.9 LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS 8-32
2.9.1 General 8-32
2.9.2 Risk Assessment 8-36
2.9.3 Number of Arresters Required and Installation 8-36

2.9.4 Surge Arrester Selection 8-39
2.10 TELECOMMUNICATION AND MISCELLANEOUS 8-39
SERVICES
2.10.1 General 8-39
2.10.2 Telecommunication Circuits 8-39
2.10.3 Television Antennas 8-40
2.11 INSPECTION AND TESTING 8-40
2.11.1 General 8-40
2.11.2 Insulation Tests 8-40
2.11.3 Earth Resistance Tests 8-40
2.11.4 Operating Tests 8-40
2.11.5 Inspection of the Installation 8-41
Chapter 3 Air-conditioning, Heating and

Ventilation
3.1 GENERAL 8-45
3.1.1 Purpose 8-45
3.1.2 Scope 8-45
8-ii
3.1.5 General Provisions 8-48
3.2 PLANNING 8-48
3.2.1 General 8-48
3.2.2 Building Planning 8-49
3.3 AIR-CONDITIONING 8-49
3.3.1 Building Design Requirements 8-49
3.3.2 Design Conditions 8-49
3.3.3 Noise and Vibration 8-50
3.4 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 8-54

3.4.1 DuctWork 8-54
3.4.2 Air Terminals 8-57
3.4.3 Exhaust Air Systems 8-57
3.5 AIR-CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 8-57
3.5.1 General 8-57
3.5.2 Cooling by Refrigeration 8-59
3.5.3 Evaporative Cooling 8-60

3.5.4 Heating Equipment 8-61
3.5.5 Air Handling Unit 8-62
3.5.6 Packaged Air-conditioners 8-62
3.5.7 Accessory Equipment 8-63
3.5.8 Piping System 8-63
3.6 REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT 8-64
3.6.1 General 8-64
3.6.2 Absorption Refrigerating Equipment 8-64
3.6.3 Mechanical Refrigerating Equipment 8-65
3.6.4 Cooling Tower 8-68
3.7 VENTILATION SYSTEMS 8-68
3.7.1 General 8-68
3.7.2 Natural Ventilation 8-68
3.7.3 Mechanical Ventilation 8-69
3.7.4 Mechanical Exhaust 8-70
3.7.5 Kitchen Exhaust Equipment 8-74
3.8 ENERGY CONSERVATION 8-76
3.8.1 General 8-76
3.8.2 Design Parameters 8-76
3.8.3 System Design 8-76
3.8.4 Equipment and Control 8-76
3.9 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 8-77
3.9.1 Inspection and Testing 8-77
3.9.2 Commissioning 8-77
3.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 8-77
3.10.1 General 8-77
3.10.2 Operation 8-77
8-iii
Chapter 4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation
and Noise Control
4.1 PURPOSE 8-79
4.2 SCOPE 8-79
4.4 GENERAL NOISE LEVELS : OUTDOOR 8-81
4.4.1 Adequacy in Planning and Design 8-81
4.4.2 Sources and Levels of Outdoor Noise 8-81
4.4.3 Planning and Design Considerations 8-81
4.5 GENERAL NOISE LEVELS : INDOOR 8-83
4.5.1 Acceptable Indoor Noise Levels in Buildings 8-83
4.5.2 Planning and Design Considerations 8-83
4.6 OCCUPANCY A: RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS 8-83
4.6.1 Sources of Noise 8-83
4.6.2 Planning and Design Requirements 8-83
4.7 OCCUPANCY B: EDUCATIONAL BUILDINGS 8-85
4.8 OCCUPANCY D: HEALTH CARE BUILDINGS 8-86
4.8.1 Sources of Disturbing Noise 8-86
4.8.2 · Planning and Design Requirements 8-86
4.9 OCCUPANCY E : ASSEMBLY 8-88
4.9.1 General 8-88
4.10 OCCUPANCY F: BUSINESS AND MERCANTILE BUILDINGS 8-90

4.10.1 General 8-90
4.10.2 Sources of Disturbing Noise 8-90
4.11 OCCUPANCY G : INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 8-92
4.11.1 General Noise Levels 8-92
4.11.2 Hearing Damage Risk Criteria 8-92
4.11.3 Interference with Communication 8-92
4.11.4 Requirements for Noise Reduction 8-92
4.12 ACOUSTICAL REQUIREMENTS OF SPECIAL OCCUP ANCIE6 8-94

4.12.1 Susceptible Buildings 8-94
4.12.2 Public Address System 8-96
Chapter 5 Lifts, Escalators and Moving Walks
5.1 GENERAL 8-97
5.1.1 Purpose 8-97
5.1.2 Scope 8-97
8-iv
5.1.4 General Particulars 8-100
5.2 ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIFTS 8-100
5.2.1 General 8-100
5.2.2 Safety Considerations 8-101
5.2.3 Lift Cars 8-102
5.2.4 Lift Well and Lift Well Enclosures 8-103
5.2.5 Landing Doors 8-104
5.2.6 Guide Rails 8-105
5.2.7 Lift Pits 8-105
5.2.8 Buffers 8-106
5.2.9 Machine Room and Overhead Structures 8-106
5.2.10 Hall Buttons, Hall Lanterns and Special Signs 8-107
5.2.11 Electrical Wiring and Apparatus 8-107
5.3 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 8-108
5.3.1 Number of Lifts and Capacity 8-108
5.3.2 Shape and Size of Lifts 8-110
5.3.3 Location and Arrangement of Lifts 8-110
5.3.4 Location of machine Room 8-110
5.3.5 Structural Considerations 8-111
5.3.6 Control System 8-113
5.4 ESCALATORS 8-114
5.4.1 General 8-114
5.4.2 Essential Requirements 8-115
5.5 MOVING WALKS 8-117
5.5.1 Essential Requirements 8-117
5.5.2 Balustrades 8-117
5.5.3 Handrails 8-117
5.5.4 Tread Way 8-117
5.5.5 Landings 8-117
5.5.6 Combplates 8-117
5.6 INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION 8-118
5.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 8-119
Chapter 6 Water Supply
6.1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE 8-121
6.3 PERMIT FOR WATER CONNECTION 8-125
6.4 LICENSING OF PLUMBERS 8-125
6.4.1 Licence Requirement 8-125
6.4.2 Examination and Certification of Plumber 8-125
6.4.3 Annulment of Licence 8-125
6.5 WATER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS 8-125
6.5.1 General 8-125
6.5.2 Water Requirement for Domestic Use 8-125
6.5.3 Water Requirement for Fire Fighting 8-126
8-v
6.5.4 Water Requirement for Special Equipment 8-126
6.6 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM 8-127
6.6.1 Direct Connection to Water Main 8-127
6.6.2 System Incorporating Balancing Roof Tank 8-127
6.6.3 System Incorporating Ground Tank 8-127
6.6.4 Individual Water Sources 8-127
6.7 STORAGE OF WATER 8-127
6.7.1 Capacity of Storage Tank 8-127
6.7.2 Construction of Storage Tank 8-127
6.8 DESIGN OF DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 8-128
6.9 PROTECTION OF POTABLE WATER SUPPLY 8-128
6.10 WATER DISTRIBUTION IN TALL BUILDINGS 8-129
6.11 HOT WATER SUPPLY INSTALLATION 8-130
6.11.1 Hot Water Requirements 8-130
6.11.2 Storage Temperature 8-130
6.11.3 Storage Capacity 8-130
6.11.4 Hot Water Heater 8-130
6.11.5 Cold Water Supply Connection to Water Heaters 8-130
6.11.6 Hot Water Distribution Piping 8-130
6.11.7 Vent Pipe 8-131

'·
6.11.8 Capacity of Cold Water Storage Tank 8-132
6.11.9 Safety Devices 8-132
6.11.10 Wastes from Relief Valve 8-132
6.11.11 Drain Cock 8-132
6.12 MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 8-132
6.12.1 Water Supply Service and Distribution Pipes 8-132
6.12.2 Pipe Fittings 8"132
6.12.3 Concrete, Prestressed or FerrocemEmt Structures 8-132
6.13 HANGERS AND SUPPORT 8-132
·:
: 6.14 WORK ON SITE 8-133
6.14.1 Excavation Of Trenches 8-133
6.14.2 Laying of Pipe 8-133
6.14.3 Laying of Pipe Through Ducts, Chases, 8-134
Notches or Holes
6.14.4 Lagged Piping 8-134
6.14.5 Jointing of Pipes 8-134
6.14.6 Special Care for Rat Proofing 8-134
6.15 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMPLETION CERTIFICATE 8-134
6.15.2 Testing 8-134
6.15.3 Completion Certificate 8-135
6.16 CLEANING AND DISINFECTING THE SYSTEM 8-135
6.16.1 General 8-135
6.16.2 Disinfection Procedure 8-135
6.17 GUIDE TO MAINTENANCE 8-135
8-vi
6.18 HEALTH CARE WATER SUPPLY 8-135
6.18.1 General Requirement 8-135
6.18.2 Hot Water Supply 8-135
6.18.3 Water Supply Protection 8-135
6.19 INDIVIDUAL WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM 8-135
6.19.1 General 8-135
6.19.2 Water Requirements 8-136
6.19.3 Quality of Water 8-136
6.19.4 Chlorination 8-136
6.19.5 Location of Water Source 8-136
6.19.6 Well Construction 8-136
6.19.7 Pumping Equipment 8-136
Chapter 7 Drainage and Sanitation
7.1 PURPOSE 8-137
7.2 SCOPE 8-137
7.4 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION PLANS 8-141
7.5 LICENSING OF PLUMBER 8-141
7.5.1 Licence Requirement 8-141
7.5.2 Examination and Certification 8-141
7.5.3 Annulment of Licence 8-142
7.6 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION REQUIREMENT 8-142
7.6.1 General 8-142
7.6.2 Minimum Number of Fixtures 8-142
7.6.3 Accessibility 8-142
7.7 MATERIALS AND APPLIANCES 8-142
7.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORT AND PIPE JOINTING 8-150
7.8.1 Hangers and Support 8-150
7.8.2 Pipe Joints 8-151
7.9 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 8-151
7.9.1 Objective 8-151
7.9.2 General 8-151
7.9.3 Different Plumbing Systems 8-151
7.9.4 Water Closet Compartment for Physically Handicapped 8-151
7.9.5 Installation of Drainage System 8-152
7.9.6 Installation of Venting System 8-154
7.9.7 Clearance of Blockages 8-155
7.9.8 Protection Against Rodent 8-159
7.9.9 Bedding and Backfilling 8-159
7.9.10 Rainwater Drainage 8-162
7.9.11 Septic Tank 8-163
7.9.12 Disposal Field and Seepage Pit 8-165
7.10 DESIGN OF DRAINAGE AND SANITATION SYSTEM 8-166
7.10.1 Estimation of Maximum Load Weight of Waste Water 8-166
8-vii
7.10.2 Gradient and Size of Pipe 8-166
7.10.3 Size of Rainwater Piping 8-167
7.10.4 Size of Vent Piping 8-167
7.11 CONSTRUCTION RELATING TO CONVEYANCE OF 8-168
RAINWATER AND SANITARY WASTES
7.11.1 Conveyance of Rainwater 8-168
7.11.2 Conveyance of Sanitary Wastes 8-168
7.12 REFUSE CHUTE SYSTEM 8-170
7.13 HEALTH CARE DRAINAGE SYSTEM 8-171
7.13.1 General 8-171
7.13.2 Special Fixtures and Equipment 8-171
7.13.3 Bedpan Washer and Clinical Sink 8-172
7.13.4 Sterilizer Vent Stack 8-173
7.13.5 Vent Extension 8-173
7.13.6 Special Fixture Drainage 8-173
7.13.7 Mental Health Care Centre 8-174
7.14 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMPLETION CERTIFICATE 8-174
7.14.2 Testing 8-174
7.14.3 Completion Certificate 8-174
7.15 GUIDE TO MAINTENANCE 8-174
ChapterS Fuel Gas Supply
8.1 GENERAL 8-177
8.1.1 Scope 8-177
8.1.3 General Precautions 8-179
8.1.4 Notification of Completion 8-179
8.2 GAS PIPING INSTALLATION 8-179
8.2.1 Piping Plan and Approval 8-179
8.2.2 Size of Piping to Gas Appliances 8-180
8.2.3 Acceptable Piping Materials 8-180
8.2.4 Fabrication of Piping for Installation 8-180
8.2.5 Installation of Gas Pipes 8-181

8.2.6 Pressure Regulators 8-182
8.2.7 Service Shutoff Valves 8-182

8.2.8 Existing Work 8-182
8.2.9 Inspection of Services 8-182
8.2.10 Check of Leakage 8-183

8.2.11 Purging 8-183
8.2.12 Rules for Turning Gas On 8-183
8.2.13 Rules for Shutting Off the Gas 8-184
8.2.14 Provision for Meter Location 8-184

8.3 USE OF LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS (LPG) 8-184
8-viii
8.4 INSTALLATION OF SPECIFIC APPLIANCES 8-186
8.4.1 General 8-186
8.4.2 Cookers/Burners 8-186
8.4.3 Illuminating Appliances 8-187
8.4.4 Water Heaters 8-187
Appendices
Appendix A Maximum Demand and Diversity 8-191
AppendixB Useful Tables Relating to Conductor Sizes 8-192
AppendixC Completion Certificate Form (Electrical Works) 8-194
AppendixD Relationship of Weighting Curves for Sound Levels 8-196
AppendixE Recommended Optimum Reverberation Time 8-197
for Assembly Buildings
AppendixF STC Ratings of Walls and Floors 8-198
AppendixG Air Traffic Noise Levels 8-199
AppendixH Frequency Values and Noise Levels of Some 8-200
Common Sources
Appendix I Typical Noise Levels in Free-Flowing Road Traffic 8-201
AppendixJ Average Airborne Sound Insulation of Common 8-202
Constructions
AppendixK Recommended Background Noise Criteria and 8-204
NC Curves
AppendixL Particulars of Lifts, Escalators and Moving Walks 8-206
AppendixM Format for Particulars of Lifts, Escalators and 8-207

Moving Walks
AppendixN Application for Permit to Construct Water 8-209
Supply and Distribution System
AppendixP Sizing of Cold Water Supply and Distribution Piping 8-210

AppendixQ Completion Certificate (Water Supply Works) 8-219
AppendixR Application for Permit to Construct Drainage 8-220

and Sanitation System
AppendixS One-hour Rainfall 8-221
AppendixT Design Guideline of a Septic Tank 8-223
AppendixU Completion Certificate (Drainage and 8-224

Sanitation Works)
ApP.endixV Work on the Gas Supply System 8-225
AppendixW Documentation for the Piping Installation 8-226 ..
8-ix
CHAPTER '1l
Lighting
1.1 SCOPE
The basic requirements for building lighting are that adequate light of the right quality is provided and that
proper attention is given to the appearance and artistic features of the lightmg fixtures and the effects they
proauce. This chaeter, read together with Chapter 2 Electrical Installation covers the illumination level
requirements in buildings and methods for achieving these requirements.
1.2 TERMINOLOGY
This section provides an alphabetical list of the terms used in and applicable to this chapter of the Code. In
case of an:y conflict or contradiction between a definition given in this section and that in Part 1, the meaning
provided m this section shall govern for interpretation of the provisions of this chapter.
BRIGHTNESS : The luminous intensity of any surface in a given direction per unit of projected area of the
surface, as viewed from that direction.
COLOUR : Aspect of visual perception by which an observer may distin�ish between two fields of view of
the same size, shape and structure, as may be caused by differences m the spectral composition of the
radiation concerned.
COLOUR APPEARANCE : One of the two factors characterizing the colour qualities of a lamp. Lamps are
usually divided into three groups according to their colour appearance: warm, intermediate ana cool.
COLOUR RENDERING : The colour rendering property of a lamp is described by its colour rendering
index, R4; the higher the index the better the colour rendering property. The colour rendering index of a
lamp is a measure of the degree to which the psychophysical colours of objects illuminated by the lamp
conform to those of the same objects illuminated by a reference lamp, under specified conditions.
CONTRAST: The contrast of a small object of uniform luminance seen against a background of uniform
luminance is the difference between object luminance and background luminance expressed as a ratio of the
background luminance.
PartS 8-1
Building Services
Part 8
Building Services
GLARE: The sensation produced by luminance within the visual field that is sufficiently greater than the
luminance to which the eyes are adapted to cause annoyance, discomfort, or loss in visuaf performance and
visibility. The magnitude of the sensation of glare depends upon such factors as the Size, position and
luminance of a source, the number of sources and the luminance to which the eyes are adapted.
GLARE, DIRECT : Glare caused by a bright light source appearing in the normal field of view of an
observer.
GLARE, DISABILITY : Glare that impairs the vision, measured in terms of deterioration of visual
performance (contrast sensitivity).
GLARE, DISCOMFORT: Glare that induces a feeling of discomfort; the degree of discomfort can only be
measured subjectively.
GLARE, REFLECTED: Glare caused by the reflection of bright light source on a glossy surface.
ILLUMINANCE: The quantity of light or luminous flux falling on unit area of a surface.
ILLUMINATION : The application of visible radiation to an object.
INCANDESCENCE: Emission of visible radiation by thermal excitation.
LAMP, FLUORESCENT: Discharge lamp in which most of the light is emitted by a layer of fluorescent
material excited by the ultraviolet radiation from the discharge. .
LAMP, INCANDESCENT : Lamp in which light is produced by means of an element heated to

incandescence by the passage of an electric current.
LIGHTING, GENERAL: Lighting designed to illuminate an area in general, without particular provision for
any special local requirements within that area. ·
LIGHTING, LOCALIZED: LightinS designed to increase the illuminance at certain specified positions; for
instance those at which work is earned on.
LUMEN : The luminous flux emitted within unit solid angle (one steradian) by a point source having a
uniform intensity of one Candela.
LUMINAIRE: A complete lighting apparatus consisting of a lamp or lamps together with the parts designed
to distribute, filter or transform the hght, to fix and protect the lamps and to connect them to the supply
circuit.
LUMINANCE (AT A POINT): The ratio of the luminous intensity in a given direction of an infinitesimal
element of the surface containing the point under consideration to the orthogonall)' projected area of the
element on a plane perpendicular to the given direction. It is proportional to tne product of the illuminance
and the surface reflectance, the latter being the ratio of the reflected luminous flux to the incident luminous
flux.
LUMINOUS FLUX : The quantity characteristic of radiant flux which expresses its capacity to produce
visual sensation evaluated according to the values of relative luminous efficiency for the light-adapted eye.
MAINTENANCE FACTOR: The ratio of the average illuminance on the working plane, after a certain
period of use of a lightins installation, to the average illuminance obtained under the same conditions for
the same lighting installation when new.
REFLECTION FACTOR: The ratio of light reflected from a surface to the total light falling on the surface.
The reflection factor varies with the roughness of the surface as well as the darkness of the colour.
UTILIZATION FACTOR: The ratio of the flux received on the working plane to the sum of the fluxes from
all the lamps in the interior.
WORKING PLANE : A horizontal plane at a level at which work will normally be done. Where a visual task
is required to be carried out throughout an interior, general illumination of the value recommended for the
working plane is necessary; where the precise height and location of the task are not known or cannot be
easily specified, the recommended value is that on a horizontal plane 850 mm above the floor level. For an
industnal task, working plane for the purpose of general illumination levels may be taken at 760 mm above
the floor level. For certain purposes, such as viewing the objects of art, the illumination levels recommended
are for the vertical plane at wnich the art pieces are placed.
8-2
1.3 ILLUMINATION
1.3.1 Principle of Lighting

The essential features of an efficient lighting system are :
visual comfort through adequate illumination of the working surface, prevention of glare, and
avoidance of shadows,
ease of maintenance.
The design of a lighting system shall involve :

a) careful planning of the brightness and colour pattern within both the working areas and the
surroundings so that attention is drawn naturally to the important areas, detail is seen quickly and
accurately, and the room is free from any sense of gloom or monotony,
b) use of directional lighting to assist perception of task detail,
c) controlling direct and reflected glare from light sources to eliminate visual discomfort,
d) minimizing flicker from certain types of lamps and paying attention to the colour rendering properties
of the light,
e) the correlation of lighting throughout the building to prevent excessive differences between adjacent
areas, so as to reduce the risk of accidents, and
f) the installation of emergency lighting systems, where necessary.
Table 8.1.1 shows the general impressions associated with different illuminance and colour appearances of
light. Table 8.1.2 gives the various colour rendering groups with examples of use.
Table 8.1.1
General Impressions Associated with Different Illuminance and Colour Appearances
Illuminance Associated Impression

(lux) (Colour Appearance)
Warm Intermediate Cool
�500 pleasant neutral cool
500-1000 pleasant to stimulating neutral to pleasant cool to neutral
1000-2000 stimulating pleasant neutral
2000-3000 stimulating to unnatural pleasant to stimulating neutral to pleasant
� 3000 unnatural stimulating pleasant
Table 8.1.2
Lamp Colour Rendering Groups
Colour Range of Colour

rendering IndexR4 Appearance Examples of Use
Group
( ool Textile industries, paint and printingin9ustries
1 Ra � 85 Intermediate Shops, hospitals
Warm Homes, hotels, restaurants
2 70 � Ra < 85 Intermediate Offices, schools, department store, fine
industrial work
3 40 � Ra < 70 Interiors where colour rendering is of
comparatively minor im_j)_ortance
Note : Certain applications, e.g. colour matching, may be extremely critical with regard to the colour
rendering properties of the lamps used. Here, the minimum colour rendering index used shall be 90.
1.3.2 Planning the Brightness Pattern

The brightness pattern seen within an interior is composed of three arts - brightness of the task itself,
r
brightness of the immediate background of the task and brightness o the general surroundings of walls,
ceifing, floor, equipment, furnishing etc.
1.3.2.1 The illumination of all work areas within a building shall be a minimum of 150 lux.
1.3.2.2 Where work takes place over the whole utilizable area of a room, the general illumination over that
area shall be reasonably umform and the diversity ratio of minimum to maximum illumination shall not be
less than 0.7. This diversity ratio does not however take into account the effects of any local lighting
provided for specific tasks.

PartS
Building Services
1.3.2.3 When the task brightness appropriate to an occupation has been determined, the brightness of the
other parts of the room shall be planned to give proper emphasis to visual comfort and interest. The
recommended brightness ratios is shown in Table 8.1.3.
1.3.3 Lighting Calculations

1.3.3.1 In order to determine the necessary number of lamps and luminaires for a specified illumination
level or the average illuminance obtained from a particular lighting design, the Lumen Method of
calculation shall be employed.
1.3.3.2 Unless the reflection factors are known to the li�hting designer, the triplet 0.7/0.5/0.3 for the
reflectances of ceiling, walls and working plane respectively: shall be used for offices and the triplet
0.7/0.5/0.1 for other premises. Typical reflection factors of smooth coloured surfaces are given in
Table 8.1.4.
Table8.1.3
Brightness Ratios Between Task, Adjacent Sources and Surroundings
y,
For high task bri htness (above 100 cd/m'):
Maximum ratio etween task brightness and 3 to 1
the adjacent sources like table tops
Maximum ratio between task brightness and

illumination of the remote areas of the room 10 to 1
not being used as work areas
For low and medium task brightness (below The task must be brighter than both the back ound �
100cd/m2) and the surroundings; the lower the task brig tness,
the less critical is the relationship.
Table8.1.4
Reflection Factors of Smooth Coloured Surfaces
Colour Reflection Factor Colour Reflection Factor

Flat white 0.75-0.85 Light green 0.40-0.50
Ivoft 0.70-0.75 Grey 0.30-0.50
Buf 0.60-0.70 Blue 0.25-0.35
Yellow 0.55-0.65 Red 0.15-0.20
Light tan 0.45-0.55 Dark brown 0.10-0.15
1.3.4 Recommended Illumination Values

The recommended values of illumination required for buildings of different Occupancies, based on activity,
are given in Tables 8.1.5 through 8.1.11. The initial illuminance should be higher than the recommended
value to allow for the fact that the illuminance will inevitably drop below this value by the end of the
cleaning and relamping period. A gradual transition of brightness from one portion to another within the
field of vision is recommended so as to avoid or minimize glare discomfort.
1.3.5 Artificial Lighting to Supplement Daylight

Supplementary lighting shall be used when illumination by daylight falls below 150 lux on the working
plane.
For providing supplementary artificial lighting when daylight availability becomes insufficient, cool
dayh�ht fluorescent tubes with semi-direct luminaires are recommended. To ensure a good distribution of
illummation, the mounting height should be between 1.5 and 2.0 m above the work plane for a separation of
2.0 to 3.0 m between the luminaires.
1.4 LIGHT FITTINGS
An electric lamp and its fitting, glo?e refl�ct'?r et�., shall . be regarded as �ne �ni�; they shall �e designed to
.
suit each other and to gtve the aestred dtstrtbuhon of hght. Any focussmg ftttmgs used whtch enable �he
light distribution to be varied by adjustment of the lamp position shall also be designed for the type and stze
of lamp to be used.
1.4 .1 Classification of Lamp Fittings .

Lamp fittings shall be classified in!o fiv� c.ategor�e� according to the p�oportion of the total .lig.ht ou!p�t m
the lower hemisphere. These are: dtrect ftttmgs, gtvmg 90-100 per cent hgnt downwards; serm-dtrect fittings,
giving 60-90 per cen� downwards; genera� diffusing fittings, givi.ng 40-?0. per ce�t .light downwards; s�mi
mdirect fittings, givmg 10-40 per cent hght downwards; mdtrect ftttmgs, gtvmg 0-10 per cent hght
downwards.
8-4
Table8.1.5
Recommended Values of Illumination for Residential Buildings
(for Occupancy classification see Chapter 2, Part 3)
Area or Activity Illuminance

(lx)
Dwelling houses
Bedrooms
General 50
Bed-head, Dressing table 150
Kitchens 200
Dining rooms (tables) 100
Bathrooms
General 100
Shaving, make-up 300
Stairs 100
Lounges 100
da
Garages and orches 70
Sewing and arning 600
Reading (casual ) 150
Home work and sustained reading 300
Hotels
Entrance halls 150
Reception and accounts 300
Dining rooms (tables) 100
Lounges 150
Bedrooms
General 100
. Dressing tables, bed heads, etc. 150
Writing rooms (tables) 300
Corridors 70
Stairs 100
Laundries 200
Kitchens
Food stores 100
Working areas 250
Goods and passenger lifts 70
Cloak-rooms and toilets 100
Bathrooms 100
Above mirror in bathrooms 300
Table8.1.6
Recommended Values of Illumination for Educational Buildings
Area or Activity Illuminance (lx)

School and College Assembly halls
General 150
When used for examinations 300
Platforms 300
Class and Lecture Rooms
Desks 300
Black boards 250
Embroidery and sewing rooms 500
Laboratories 300
Art rooms 400
Offices 300
Staff rooms and common rooms 150
Corridors 70
Stairs 100
Gymnasia
General 150
Matches 300
Library see Table 8.1.8
Living quarters see Table 8.1.5

Part 8
Building Services
Table 8.1.7
Recommended Values of Illumination for Health Care Buildings

Hos �tals and Clinics
eception and waiting rooms 150
Out patient department 150
Wards
General 100
Beds 150
Operating theatres
General 300
Tables (with adjustable operation lamp lighting)
Minor 2000
Major 5000
Doctor's examination rooms 150
Radiology departments 100
Casualty 150
Stairs and corridors 100
Dispensaries 250
Table 8.1.8
Recommended Values of Illumination for Assembly Buildings ·

Cinemas
Foyers 150
Auditorium 50
Corridors 70
Stairs 100
Libraries
Shelves (stacks) 100
Reading rooms (newspapers and magazines) 200
Reading tables 300
Book repair and binding 300
Cataloguing, sorting and stock rooms 150
Museums and Art Galleries
Museums
General 150
Displays special lighting
Art galleries
General 100
Paintings 200
Restaurant
�
Dinin rooms 100
Cash esks 300
Self-carrying counters 300
Kitchens 200
Cloak-rooms and toilets 100
Theatres
Foyers 150
Auditorium 70
Corridors 70
Stairs 100
Sports Centre
Halls 150
Swimming pools 150
Lawn or ta15le tennis, badminton, volley ball
Tournament 300
Club 200
Recreational 100
Shooting ranges
On target 300
Firing point 200
Range 50
Football 500
8-6
Table8.1.9
Recommended Values of Illumination for Business and Mercantile Buildings

(lx)
Airport Building
Reception areas (desks) 300
Baggage, customs and immigration halls 300
Circulatio':l areas, lounges 150
Banks
Counter, typing and accounting book areas 300
Public areas, lobby 150
Offices 200
Book binding
Pasting, punchin� and stitching 200
Binding and foldmg and miscellaneous machines 300
Finishing, blocking and inlaying 300
Dental Surgeries
Waiting rooms 150
Surgeries
General 300
Chairs special lighting
Laboratories 300
Doctor's Surgeries
Waiting rooms and consulting rooms 150
Corridors 70
Stairs 100
Eyesight testing (acuity) wall charts 450
and near vision types
Jewellery and watch-making

Fine processes 700
Minute processes 3000
Gem cutting, polishing and setting 1500
Laundries and dry-cleaning works

Receiving, sorting, washing, drying, ironing 200
(calendering) and despatch
Dry-cleaning and bulk macltine work 200
Fine hand ironing, pressing, inspection, 300
mending and spotting
Offices
Entrance lobby and reception areas 150
Conference rooms and executive offices 300
General offices 300
Business machine operation 450
Drawing office
General 300
Boards and tracing 450
Corridors and lift cars 70
Stairs 100
Lift landings 150
Telephone exchanges
Manual exchange rooms (on desk) 200
Main distribution frame room 150
Shops and Stores

General areas 150 to 300
Stock rooms 200
Display windows 500

Part 8
Building Services
Table 8.1.10
Recommended Values of Illumination for Industrial Buildings and Processes

(lx)
Aircraft Factories and Maintenance Hangars
Stock parts productions 450
Drilling, riveting, screw fastening, sheet aluminium layout and template work, 300
wing sections, cowing, welding, sub-assembly, final assembly and inspection
Maintenance and repair (hangars) . 300
Assembly Shops
Rough work, for example frame assembly and assembly of heavy machinery 150
Medium work, for example machined parts, engine assembly 300
Fine work, for example radio and telephone equipment, typewriter 700
and office machinery assembly
Very fine work, for example assembly of very small precision 1500
mechanisms and instruments
Automobile Manufacturing
Frame assembly 200
Chassis assembly line 300
Final assembly and inspection line 600
Body manufacturing
Parts 200
Assembly 300
Finishing and inspection 700
Automobile Service Garages

Repairs 250
Active traffic areas 100
Storage 25
Bakeries
General workin� area 150
Decorating and Icing 250
Breweries and Distilleries

General working areas 150
Brew house, bottling and canning plants 200
Bottle inspection special
lighting
Carpet Factories
Winding and beaming 200
Designing, Jacquard card cutting, setting pattern, tufting, topping, cutting, 300
hemming and fringing
Weaving, mending and inspection 450
Chemical Works
Hand furnaces, boiling tanks, stationary driers, stationary and gravity 150
crystallizers
Mechanical furnaces, evaporators, filtration, mechanical crystallizers, bleaching 200
Tanks for cooking, extractors, percolators . 200
Chocolate and Confectionery Factories

Mixing, blending and boiling 150
Chocolate husking, winnowmg, fat extraction, crushing and refining, 200
feeding, bean cleaning, sorting, milling and cream making
Hand decorating, inspection, wrapping and packing 300
Clay Products and Cements

Grinding, filter presses, kiln rooms moulding, pressing, cleaning and trimming 150
Enameling 150
Colour and glazing - rough work 400
Colour and glazing - fine work 750
(Contmued to next page)
8-8
Table 8.1.10 (Contd.)
(for Occupancy classification see Chapter 2, Part3)

(Ix)
Clothing Factories
Matching-up 450
Cutting, sewing
Light 300
Medium 450
Dark 700
Inspection
Light 450
Medium 1000
Dark 1500
Hand tailoring
Light 450
Medium 1000
Dark 1500
Pressing 300
Dairies
General working areas 200
Filling and bottle inspection 450
Cooling eguipment 150
Laboratones 450
Pasteurizers 150
Separators 150
Electrical Industries
Impregnating 250
Windin an insulating
� 500
Assemb y works
Fine 500
Very fine 750
Testing 500
Electricity Generating Stations (Indoor Locations)

Turbine halls 150
Auxiliary equipment, battery rooms, blowers, auxiliary generators, 100
switchgear and transformer chambers
Boiler house (including operating floors) platforms, coal conveyors, 70to 100
pulverizers, feeders, recipitators, soot and slag
h
Boiler house and turbine ouse 100
Basements 70
Conveyor house, conve or gantries and junction towers
r 70to 100
Emergency lighting - al areas 30
Control rooms
Vertical control panels 200to300
Control desks 300
Rear of control panels 150
Switch houses 150
Electricity Generating Stations (Outdoor Locations)

Switchyard 50
Conveyors 50
Fuel oil delive headers
:irs 50
Oil storage tan 50
Cat-walks 50
Platforms, boiler and turbine decks 50
Transformer and outdoor switchgear 100
Emergency lighting - all areas 30
Flour Mills
Rolling 150
Sifting 150
Packing 150
Purifying 150
Product control 300
Cleaning screens, man lifts, aisleways and walkways, bin checkine: 100
. (Contmued to next page)

Part 8
Building Services


(lx)
Forge Shops and Foundries
Forge shop 150
Annealing (furnaces) 150
Cleanin � 100
Core rna ·ng (fine) 300
Core making (medium) 150
Grinding and chipping . 200
Inspection (fine) 1000
Inspection (medium) 300
Moulding (medium) 300
Moulding (large) 150
Pouring 150
Sorting 200
Cupola 100
Shake out 150
�
Gara es
arking areas (interior) 70
Washing and polishing, greasing, general servicing and pits 150
Gas Works
Retort houses, oil as plants, purifiers, coke screening and coke handling
� 30 to 50
plants (indoor
Governor, meter, compressor, booster and exhauster houses 100
Open type plants
Cat-walks 20
Platforms 50
Glass Works
�
Furnace rooms, bending, annealin lehrs 100
Mixing rooms, forming (blowing, rawing, pressing and rolling) 150
Cutting to size,rn �
nding, polishing and tou hening 200
Finishing (bevel ing, decorating, etching an silvering) 300
Brilliant cutting
General 200
Fine 500
Inspection, etching and decorating 500
Glove Making
Pressing, knitting, sorting and cutting 300
Sewing
Light 300
Medium 450
Dark 700
Inspection
Light 450
Medium 1000
Dark 1500
Hosiery and Knitwear

Circular and flat knitting machines, universal winders, cutting out, folding 300
and pressing
Lock-stitch and overlocking machines
Light 300
Medium 450
Dark 700
Mending 1500
Examining and hand finishing, light, medium and dark 700
Linking or running on 450
8-10

(lx)
Iron and Steel Works
Manufacturin by open hearth
g
Stock yar 20
Charging floor 100
Slag pits 100
Control platforms 100
Mould yard 25
Hot top 100
Hot top stora e � 100
Strippmg ar k 100
Scrap stoc ardJ{ 20
Mixer buil ing 100
Calcining building 50
Rollin mills
fc
B ooming, slabbing, hot strip, hot sheet 100
Cold str :f.'
plate 150
� e, ro , tube, wire drawing 200
erchant and sheared plate 100
Tin plate mills
Tinning and alvanizing
ff 200
Cold strip ro ing 200
Motor room, machine room 150
Sheet metal works
Miscellaneous machines, ordinary bench work 200
Pressing, foldin , stampin shearing, punching and medium bench work
� � 200
Tin plate and ga vanized s eet inspection 500
Structural Steel Fabrication
Fabrication and general work 150
Marking and cutting 300
Plating shops
Vat, baths, buffin and olishing
cf � 200
Final buffing an polis ·ng 500
Leather Manufacturing
Cleaning, tanning and stretching, vats 150
Cutting, fleshing and stuffing 200
Finishing and scarfing 200
Machine shops
Ro h bench and machine work
� 150
Me ium bench and machine work, ordinary automatic machines, rough grinding 300
medium buffin and polishing
�
Fine bench and mac ine work , fine automatic machines, medium grinding, 700
fine buffin and polishing
�
Extra fine bene and machine work, grinding fine work 1000
Paint Works
General, automatic processes 200
� ecial batch mixing 450
olour matching 700
Paper Manufacturing
Beaters, grinding, calendering 150
Finishing, cutting, trimming, paper making machines 200
Hand counting, wet end of paper machine 350
Paper machine reel, paper inspection and laboratories 500
Rewinder 500
Paper box manufacturing 200
(Continued to next pag)

e

PartS
Building Services


(lx)
Pharmaceuticals and Fine Chemical Works
Raw material stora�e 200
Grinding, granulatmg, mixing and drying, tableting, sterilizing, 300
pre aration of solutions, filling, laoelling, capping, wrapping and cartoning
�
Control la oratories and testing 300
Fine chemical rocessing
t 200
Fine chemical inishing 300
Printing Industries
Photo-engraving
Blocl<-making, etchin and staging
� 200
Finishing, routing an proofing 300
Masking and tint laying 300
Colour Printing
Inspection area 700
Type foundries
Matrix making, dressing type 250
Front assembly and sorting 200
Hand casting 300
Machine casting 200
Printing antsJj
Mac ·ne composition and imposing stones 200
Presses 300
Com osition room
r 450
Proo reading 300
Colour inspection and appraisal 1000
Electroty ng t
Bloc -making, electroplating, washing and baking 200
Moulding, finishing and routing 300
Rubber Tyre and Tube Manufacturing

Stocl< reparation
ta
P astlcating, milling 100
Calendering 150
Fabric Preparation
Stock cutting, bead building 250
Tube tubing machines 250
Tread tubing machines 250
Tyre building
Solid tyre 150
Pneumatic tyre 250
Curing department
Tubing curing, casing curing 350
Final Inspection
Tube, casing 1000
Wrapping 200
Shoe Manufacturing (Leather)

Cutting and stitching
Cutting tables 450
Marking, buttonholing skiving, sorting and counting 450
Stitchin �
Lig t materials 300
Dark materials 1000
Making and finishing
Nailers, sole layers, welt beaters and scarfers, trimmers, welters, 600
lasters, edge setters, sluggers, randers, wheelers, treers, cleaning,
spraying, buffing, polisrung, embossing
(Continued to next pa g e)
8-12
(for Occupancy classification see Chapter 2, Part3)

(lx)
Shoe ManUfacturing (Rubber)
Washin�, coating, mill run co ounding
7e 100
Varnishing, vulcanizin , calen erin upper and sole cutting
� §; 300
Sole rolling, lining, ma ing and finis ing process 500
Soap Factories
Kettle houses and ancillaries, glycerine evaporation and distillation and
continuous indoor soap making
General areas 150
Control panels 200to300
Batch or continuous soap cooling, cutting and drying, soap milling and plodding
General areas 150
Control panels and key equipment 200to300
SoaJ' stam ng, wr pin and packing, granules making, granules storage and
t d' �
handling, illing an pac ing granules
General areas 150
Control panels and machines 200to300
Edible products processing and packing 200
Textile Mills (Cotton)

Bale breakin and picking
g 150
Carding an drawing 200
Slubbing, roving, spinning, spooling 200
Beaming and slashing on comb
Grey goods 200
Denims 300
Weaving
Patterned cloth and fine counts, light 300
Patterned cloth and fine counts, dark 500
Plain grey cloth 200
Cloth inspection 700
Textile Mills (Silk and Synthetics)

Manufacturin g ·
Soaking, ugitive tinting, conditioning, setting or twist 200

Windin twisting, rewinding and coining, quilting and slashing
�
Lig t thread 200
Dark thread 300
Warping (silk or cotton system) on creel, on running ends, on reel, on beam, 300
on warp at beaming
Healding (drawing-in) 700
Weaving 300- 500
Ins ction
� 1000
Textile ills (Woollen and Worsted)
Scouring, carbonizing, testing, preparing, raising, brushing, pressing, 150
back-washing, gilling, crabbin and blowing
�
Blending, carding, combing(w ite), tentering, drying and cropping 200
� inning, rovin�, winding, warping, combing (coloured) and twisting 450
ealding (drawmg-in) 700
Weaving
Fine worsteds 700
Medium worsteds and fine woollens 450
Heavy woollens 300
Burling and mending 700
Perching
Grey 700
Final 2000
Wood Working
Rough sawing and bench work 150
Sizing, planing, rough sanding, medium machine and bench work glueing, 200
.
veneerm �
Fine bene and machine work, fine sanding and finishing 300

Part 8
Building Services
Table 8.1.11
Recommended Values of Illumination for Storage Buildings

(lx)
Storage Rooms of Ware House
Inactive 25
Rough bulky 50
Medium 100
Fine 250
1.4.1.1 Direct fittings shall be used in situations where efficiency of illumination is the major criterion,
while contract of the light source with the surroundings, shadows, and direct/reflected glare may be
considered to be of relatively minor importance.
1.4.1.2 Semidirect fittings shall be used in areas where it felt that the reduction of contrast resulting from
the small indirect component of light directed towards the ceiling shall be sufficient for the purpose.
1.4.1.3 General diffusing fittings shall be used where, in addition to a substantial indirect component of
light aiding materially to the diffused character of the general illumination, an upward component
providing a brighter background against which to view the luminance, especially for interiors with light
coloured ceiling and walls, is desirable.
1.4.1.4 Semi-indirect fittings shall be used when a comfortable brightness ratio between the ceiling and the
luminaire is desirable but an efficiency of illumination, higher than that obtainable from indirect fittings is
required.
1.4.1.5 Indirect fittings shall be used in situations where an environment of evenly distributed
illumination is to be achieved, efficiency of illumination not being a dominant factor.
1.5 ILLUMINATION OF EXIT SIGNS AND MEANS OF ESCAPE
1.5.1 Exit Signs

1.5.1.1 All required exit signs shall be illuminated at night, or during dark periods within the area served.
1.5.1.2 Exit signs may be illuminated either by lamps external to the sign or by lamps contained within
the sign. The source of illumination shall provide not less than 50 lux at the illuminated surface with a
contrast of not less than 0.5. Approved self-luminous signs which provide evenly illuminated letters having
a minimum luminance of 0.2 cd/m2 may also be used.
1.5.1.3 Exit signs within an area where the normal lighting may be deliberately dimmed or extinguished,
such as places of entertainment, shall be illuminated either by lamps contained within the sign or by
approved self-luminous signs.
1.5.2 Means of Escape Lighting

1.5.2.1 The means of escape and exit access in buildings requiring more than one exit shall be equipped
with artificial lighting. The lighting facilities so installed sha11 provide the required level of illumination
continuously during the period when the use of the building requires the exits to be available.
1.5.2.2 The intensity of illumination at floor level in the means of escape shall not be less than 10 lux,
except that the minimum required floor level illumination of aisles in assembly halls, theatres and cinema
during projection of motion or still pictures by directed light shall be 2lux.
1.5.2.3 The illumination of exit signs and the lighting of the means of escape and exit access shall be
powered by an alternate or emergency electrical system to ensure continued illumination for a duration of
not less than 30 minutes after the failure of primary power supply.
8-14
CHAPTER�
2.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
2.1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this chapter is the practical safeguarding of persons, and of buildings and their contents
from electrical hazards arising from the use of electricity for light, heat, power and other purposes. The
chapter also constitutes minimum standards for electric wiring and equipment installed withm or on public
ancf private buildings and other premises.
2.1.2 Scope
The chapter covers installation of electrical conductors and equipment within or on public and private
buildings and premises. It also covers installations of conductors tnat connect to the supply of electncity. In
addition, it includes general requirements relating to lightning protection of, and telecommunication
services in, buildings.
2.1.3 Voltage Ranges

The provisions of the Code specified in this chapter covers installations utilizing nominal voltage not
exceeding 415 V a.c. between conductors or 240 V a.c. to earth.
2.1.4 Exclusion from Scope

The provisions of this chapter do not cover :
a) installations in ship, water craft, railway rolling stock, aircraft, or automotive vehicles and recreational
vehicles,
b) electrical installations used exclusively for signalling and communication purposes.
2.1.5 Organization of the Chapter

The chapter is divided into twelve sections. Sec 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5 and 2.7 apply generally to electrical
installations; Sec 2.6 applies to substations in a building. Sec 2.8 applies to eartfung of related installations
while Sec 2.9 covers lightning protection. Sec 2.10 covers communication systems and is independent of the
other sections except where they are specifically referenced. Sec 2.11 sets forth inspection and testing
requirements for electrical installations.
Part 8 8-15
Building Services
Part 8
Building Services
2.2 TERMINOLOGY
2.2.1 Definitions
case of any conflict or contradiction between a definition given in this section and that in Part 1, the meaning
provided in this section shall govern for interpretation ofthe provisions of this chapter.
ACCESSORY : A device associated with current using equipment or with the wiring of an installation; for
example, a switch, a plug, a socket outlet, a lamp holder, or a ceiling rose.
ALIVE: See LIVE.
APPARATUS: Electrical apparatus including all machines, appliances and fittings in which conductors are
used or of which they form a part.
APPLIANCE : An item of electric current using equipment other than a luminaire or an independent motor.
BRANCH CIRCUIT, APPLIANCE : A branch circuit supplying energy to one or more outlets to which
appliances are to be connected; such branch circuits do not have any permanently connected lighting
fixtures except those that are integral parts of the appliances themselves.
BRANCH CIRCUIT, GENERAL PURPOSE: A branch circuit that supplies a number of outlets for lighting
and/or appliance.
BRANCH CIRCUIT, INDIVIDUAL : A branch circuit that supplies only one utilization equipment.
BUNCHED : Cables are said to be bunched when two or more are either contained within a single conduit,
duct, ducting, or trunking or, if not enclosed, are not separated from each other.
CABLE : A length of single insulated conductor (solid or stranded), or two or more such conductors, each
provided with its own insulation, which are laid up together. The insulated conductor or conductors may or
may not be provided with an overall mechanical protective covering.
CIRCUIT : An assembly of electrical equipment supplied from the same origin and protected against
overcurrent by the same protective device .
CIRCUIT BREAKER: A device designed to open and close a circuit by nonautomatic means and to open the
circuit automatically on a predetermined overcurrent, without injury to itself when properly applied within
its rating.
CIRCUIT, FINAL SUB- : An outgoing circuit connected to one way of a distribution fuse board and
intended to supply electrical energy, at one or more points, to current using appliances without the
intervention of a further distribution fuse board other tl1an a one-way board. It includes all branches and
extensions derived from that particular way in the distribution fuse board.
CORD, FLEXIBLE : A flexible cable having conductor of small cross-sectional area. Two flexible cords
twisted together are known as twin flexible cord.
CUTOUT : Any appliance for automatically interrupting the transmission of energy through a conductor
when the current rises above some predetermined value, for example, fusible cutout.
DEMAND FACTOR : The ratio of the maximum demand of a system, or part of a system, to the total
connected load of the system or the part of the system under consideration.
DUCT : A closed passageway formed underground or in a structure and intended to receive one or more
cables which may l:>e drawn in.
EARTH : The conductive mass of the earth, whose electric potential at any point is conventionally taken as
zero.
EARTH CONTINUITY CONDUCTOR: The conductor, including any clamp, connecting to the earthing
lead or to each other, those parts of an installation which are required to be earthed. It may be in whole or in
part the metal conduit or tne metal sheath or armour of the cables, or the special continuity conductor of a
cable or flexible cord incorporating such a conductor. ·
EARTH ELECTRODE: A metal plate, pipe or other conductor electrically connected to the general mass of
the earth.
EARTHING LEAD : The final conductor by which the connection to the earth electrode is made.
ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE: An engineer competent in and responsible for implementation of a work.
8-16
Chapter2
FITTING, LIGHTING : A device for supporting or containing a lamp or lamps (for example, fluorescent or
incandescent) together with any holder, shade, or reflector; for example, a bracket, a pendant with ceiling
rose, or a portable unit.
FUSE: A device that, by the fusion of one or more of its specially designed and proportioned components,
opens the circuit in which it is inserted when the current through it exceeds a given value for a sufficient
time. The fuse comprises all the parts that form the complete device.
FUSE SWITCH : A composite unit, comprising a switch with the fuse contained in, or mounted on, the
moving member of the switch.
INSULATION:Suitable nonconducting material, enclosing, surrounding or supporting a conductor.
LIVE: Electrically charged so as to have a potential different from that of earth. Also known as ALIVE.
OVERCURRENT : A current exceeding the rated current. For conductors, the rated value is the nominal
current carrying capacity.
PANEL BOARD : A single panel or a group of panel units designed for assembly in the form of a single
panel including buses, automatic overcurrent devices, and with or without switches for the control of light,
heat, or power circuits, designed to be placed in a cabinet or cutout box placed in or against a wall or
partition and accessible only from the front.
PLUG : A device carrying metallic contacts in the form of pins, intended for engagement with
corresponding socket contacts and arranged for attachment to a flexible cord or cable.
POINT (in wiring) : A termination of the fixed wiring intended for the connection of current using
equipment.
SERVICE :The conductors and equipment required for delivering energy from the electric supply system to
the wiring system of the premises served.
SWITCH : A manually operated device for closing and opening or for changing the connection of a circuit.
SWITCHBOARD : An assemblage of switchgear with or without instruments; the term, however, does not
apply to a group of local switches on a final sub-circuit where each switch has its own insulating base.
SWITCHGEAR : Main switches, cutouts or fuses, conductors and other apparatus in connection therewith,
used for the purpose of controlling or protecting electrical circuits or machines or other current using
appliances.
2.2.2 List of Symbols

A list of general graphical symbols used for electrical drawings is given in Table 8.2.1.
2.3 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
2.3.1 Ceiling Roses and Similar Attachments

·
2.3.1.1 A ceiling rose or any other similar attachment shall not be used on a circuit the voltage of which
normally exceeds 240 V.
2.3.1.2 Normally, only one flexible cord is to be attached to a ceiling rose. Specially designed ceiling roses,
however, may be used for multiple pendants.
2.3.1.3 A ceiling rose shall not embody fuse terminal as an integral part of it.
2.3.1.4 The ceiling rose shall conform to BDS 116.
2.3.2 Socket Outlets and Plugs

2.3.2.1 General Requirements: Each 15/20A socket outlet provided in a building for the use of domestic
appliances such as air-conditioner, water cooler, etc. shall be provided with its own individual fuse, with
smtable discrimination with backup fuse or miniature circuit breaker (MCB) in the distribution/sub
distribution board. The socket outlet need not necessarily embody the fuse as an integral part of it.
Each socket outlet shall also be controlled by a switch which shall normally be located immediately adjacent
thereto or combined therewith.
Ordinary socket outlets shall be fixed at a height above 200 mm from the floor level. In situations where a
socket outlet is accessible to infants, it is necessary to install an interlocked plug and socket or, alternatively,
a socket outlet which automatically gets screened on withdrawal of the plug.

Part 8
Building Services
Table 8.2.1
Symbols for Electrical Fittings and Appliances
Description Symbol Description Symbol
Main control or main distribution

board(MDB) C8j Wall bracket with incandescent lamp
f------()
Sub-distribution board (SOB) � Water proof wall bracket

H>
Switchboard(SB) ''''''''''''''''! Discharge lamp
0
Telephone cabinet m Single fluorescent lamp on ceiling
1--1
Change over switch
Q Double fluorescent lamp on ceiling
1==1
Energy meter
� Double fluorescent lamp on wall
�
Ampere meter
® Spot light
cp
Recessed continuous row
Voltmeter
@ fluorescent fixture OOIJ
Power factor meter I P.FI Ceiling fan co
Circuit breaker --<Y().... Bracket fan

-8
Overcurrent device � Exhaust fan
§
Incandescent lamp on ceiling
0 Junction Box
CD
Exit light, surface or pendant
8 Radio aerial socket
w
Exit light, wall mounted
� TV socket outlet ...r:::::J...
2 pin socket(single phase) .d:b. Aerial for audio/visual

equipment t
3 pin socket(single phase) ..d:::t:b.. Fire alarm bell c:::J-<>
Switch socket for three phase
connections c::s Fire detector
®
Duplex receptacle
=B Smoke detector
®
Weatherproof conve�ence outlet =@WP Speaker, recessed
®
Triplex receptacle
=® Speaker, wall mounted
�
Special purpose outlet(Described in
specification) @ Microphone, floor mounted
�
.-""
Single pole, one-way switch Microphone, wall mounted
@
Two-pole, one-way switch ...-<' Conduit, concealed in ceiling or wall ---
Three-pole, one-way switch � Conduit, concealed in floor or ground - xxx

- - -
Two-way switch
� Telephone conduit -T--
Push button switch

[!] Television antenna conduit -TV-TV-
Buzzer [],..- Sound system conduit -S--5-
Bell D Wringing conduit for fire alarm --F-F--
Chime [fh] Cable rack II:I:DI
Annunciatior Rising main

-<> D<OOXIXI
Earth point --1...

-
Outside telephone ....., -
Interconnecting telephone
[::>!
8-18
Chapter 2
The copper earth wire for SA socket outlets shall not be smaller in size than 14 SWG and the phase wire to
the socket outlet shall be through the switch.
2.3.2.2 Minimum Number of Socket Outlets: The number of socket outlets in a building depends uron
the specific requirements of occupants and the type of building. Adequate number of 5 A and 15 A switch
socket outlets snail be provided and arranged around the building to cater to the actual requirements of the
occupancy.
For residential occupancy, the minimal guidelines given in Table 8.2.2 shall be used to determine the
required number of 15 A switch socket outlets, when actual requirements cannot be ascertained.
All socket outlets shall conform to BDS 115.
Table 8.2.2
Minimum Number of 15A Socket Outlets
Locahon No. of Switch Socket Outlets

Bed room 1
Livin!$ room 1
Drawmg room 1
Dining room 1
Kitchen 2
Bathroom -
Verandah 1
For refrigerator 1
For air-conditioner one for each
2.3.3 Lighting Fittings

Switches shall be provided for control of every lighting fitting. A switch may control an individual point or
a group of points. Where control at more than one point is necessary for a lighting fittin !$ or a group of
lighting fittings, as many two-way or intermediate switches may be provided as the reqmred number of
control points.
In industrial premises lighting fittings shall be supported by suitable pipe/conduits, brackets fabricated
from structural steel, steel chains or similar materiafs depending upon the type and weight of the fittings.
Where a lighting fitting is to be supported by one or more flexible cords, the maximum weight to which the
twin flexible cords may be subject are shown in Table 8.2.3.
Table 8.2.3
Maximum Permissible Weight to which Twin Flexible Cords may be Subject
Nominal Cross-sectional Number and Diameter Maximum Permissible

Area of Twin Flexible Cord (mm) of Wires Weight
(mm2) (kg)
0.5 16/ 0.2 2
.
0.75 24/0.2 3
1.0 32/0.2 5
1.5 48/0.2 5.3
2.5 80/0.2 8.8
4 128/0.2 14
No flammable shade shall form part of lighting fittings unless such shade is well protected against all risks
of fire. Celluloid shade or lighting fitting shall not be used under any circumstances. .
2.3.4· Fittings Wire

The use of fittings wire shall normally be restricted to the internal wiring of the lighting fittings. Where
fittings wire is used as wiring for the fittings, the sub-circuit loads shall terminate in a ceiling rose or box
with connectors, from which they shall be carried into the fittings.
2.3.5 Fans
Ceiling fans including their suspension shall conform to BDS 818. Fans shall not be placed, relative to the
positions of lighting fittings, in such a way that shadows are thrown on the working planes.
Where ceiling fans are provided in large buildings, the module sizes also play an important P.art. In general
purpose office/commercial building, for every part of a module to be served by the ceiling fans, it is
necessary that the module shall be so designed that the required number of fans could be suitably located in
it, to avoid creation of ill-ventilated pockets. In general, fans in large halls may be spaced at 3 to 3.5 m in
both the directions. If building modules do not lend themselves to proper positioning of the required
number of ceiling fans, other types of fans, such as air circulators or bracket fans would have to be employed

PartS
Building Services
for the areas uncovered by the ceiling fans. In such cases, necessary electrical outlets shall have to be
provided for the purpose.
Exhaust fans are necessary for spaces, such as toilets, kitchens, canteens and godowns to provide the
required air changes. Since the exhaust fans are located generally on the outer walls of a room, appropriate
openings in such walls shall be provided right from the planning stage.
Table 8.2.4 gives the recommended areas to be served by different sizes of ceiling fans where the height of
fan blades is at 2.5 m above the finished floor level.
Table 8.2.4
Recommended Fan Sizes in Rooms
Room Area (mi.) Fan Sweep

Up to6 915 mm
Over6 to9 1220 mm
Over9 to 12 1442 mm
2.4 LOAD ESTIMATION
2.4.1 Maximum Demand and Diversity

In determining the maximum demand of an installation or parts thereof, diversity shall be taken into
account. Appendix A gives some information on the determination of the maximum demand of an
installation and includes the current demand to be assumed for commonly used equipment together with
guidance on the application of allowances for diversity.
2.4.2 Estimation
In estimating the electrical load, the ratings shown in Table 8.2.5 shall be taken unless actual values are
known or specified.
Table8.2.�
Load Estimates for Different Fittings/Fixtures
Type of Fitting/Fixture Ratings in Watts

Incandescent lamps 100
Fluorescent lamp with accessories
- Nominal length600 mm 20
- Nominal length 1200 mm 40
Ceiling fans and table fans 70
Exhaust and pedestal fans 90
SA socket outlets 200
15A socket outlets 1000
2.4.3 Minimum Load Densities

While estimating the electrical load, the minimum load densities to be considered are those shown in
Table 8.2.6 .
Table8.2.6
Minimum Load Densities
Type of Occupancy Unit Load (Watts/m2)

NonA/C A/C
Dwelling: �
sin le family 25 100
mu ti-family (other than hotels) 25 100
Hospitals 40 105
Hotels, including apartment house (excluding any provisions for 30 100
electric cooking)
lc
Office and commercial multi-store ed buildings 35 95
Industrial building (excluding the oads for machines) 20 -
Departmental stores 35 95
Banks 25 95
Restaurants (excluding any provisions for electric cooking) 20 95
Barber shops and beauty parlours 40 100
Schools ana Colleges 15 90
Parking area in commercial buildings 4 -
Warehouses, large storage areas 2 -
8-20
Chapter 2
2.5 CIRCUIT WIRING IN A BUILDING
2.5.1 General
Modem design practices call for separation of loads into known and unknown loads. General illumination is
a known load, whether derived from detailed lighting layout, or developed from a watts per square metre
calculation. Number, rating and layout of outfets for general illumination can easily and accurately be
apportioned among a number of branch circuits. These branch circuits can then be carefully loaded with due
regard to voltage drop, operating voltage and possible increase in lighting levels in future.
Every installation shall be divided into circuits as necessary to avoid danger in case of a fault, and to
facilitate safe operation, inspection, maintenance and testing.
2.5.2 Methods of Circuit Wiring

2.5.2.1 Separate branch circuits shall be provided for parts of the installation which need to be separately
controlled. These branch circuits should not be affected by failure of other branch circuits.
The number of final circuits required and the points supplied by any final circuits shall comply with
a) the requirement of overcurrent l'rotection,

b) the requirement for isolation and switching, and
c) the selection of cables and conductors.
All final circuits shall be wired using looping wiring system; no joint box shall used. All pool in positions
shall be the switchboards.
2.5.2.2 Separate branch circuits shall be provided from miniature circuit breaker (MCB) or fuse
.
distribution boards (FDB) for general lighting, automatic and fixed appliances with a load of 500 watt or
more and plug receptacles. EaCh automatic or fixed appliance shall be served by an individual circuit.
2.5.2.3 Circuits with more than one outlet shall not be loaded in excess of 50% of their current carrying
capacity.
2.5.2.4 Individual branch circuits must have spare capacity to permit at least 20% increase in load before
reaching the level of maximum continuous load current permitted for that circuit
2.5.2.5 At least one spare circuit must be allowed in the distribution board for each five circuits in use.
2.5.2.6 Where an installation comprises more than one final circuit, each final circuit shall be connected to
a separate way in a distribution board. The wiring of each final circuit shall be electrically separate from that
of every other final circuit, so as to prevent unwanted energization of a final circuit.
2.5.2.7 Size of wire to be used in a branch circuit shall be at least one size larger than that computed from
the loading if the distance from the overcurrent protective device to the first outlet is over 15 m.
2.5.2.8 When the distance from the overcurrent protective device to the first socket outlet on a receptacle
circuit is over 30 m the minimum size of wire used for a 15A branch circuit shall be 4 mm2 (7 /0.036).
2.5.2.9 The length of lighting circuits shall be limited to a maximum of 30 m, unless the load on the circuit
is so small that voltage drop between the overcurrent protective device and any outlet is below 1%.
2.5.2.10 The use of common neutral for more than one circuits shall not be permitted.
2.5.3 Layout and Installation Drawings

2.5.3.1 An electrical layout drawing shall be prepared after proper locations of all outlets for lamps, fans,
fixed and transportable appliances, motors etc. have been selected.
2.5.3.2 All runs of wiring and the exact positions of all points of switch boxes and other outlets shall be
first marked on the plan ofthe building and approved by the engineer-in-charge .
2.5.3.3 In designing the wiring layout, power and heating sub-circuits shall be kept separate and distinct
from lighting and fan sub-circuits. All winng shall be done on the distribution system with main and branch
distribution boards placed at convenient positions considering both physical aspects and electrical load
centres. All types of wiring whether concealed or surface, shall be as near the ceiling as possible. In all types
of wiring due consideration shall be given to neatness and good appearance.
2.5.3.4 Balancing of circuits in three-wire or poly phase installations shall be arranged before hand.
Conductors shall oe so enclosed in earthed metal or incombustible insulating materials that it is not possible
to have ready accesses to them unless the points between which a voltage exceeding 240 volts may be
present are 2 m or more apart. In case such points are kept apart, the means of access shall be marked to
mdicate the voltage present. Where terminafs or other fixed live parts between which a voltage exceeding
240 V exists are housed in separate enclosures or items of apparatus which although separated are within

PartS
Building Services
reach of each other, a notice shall be placed in such a position that any one gaining access to live parts is
warned of the magnitude of the voltage that exists between them.
2.5.3.5 Layout drawings for industrial premises shall indicate the relevant civil and mechanical details.
2.5.4 Conductors and Accessories

2.5.4.1 Conductors : Conductors shall be of copper or aluminium. Conductors for power and li�hting
circuits shall be of adequate size to carry the designed circuit load without exceedm� the permissible
thermal limits for the insulation. The conductor for final sub-circuit for fan and light wiring Shall have a
nominal cross-sectional area of not less than 1.5 mm2 for copper conductors or 2.5 mm2 for aluminium
conductors. Some useful tables for conductor sizes are given in Appendix B. Phase and neutral wires shall
be of the same size.
2.5.4.2 Flexible Cables and Flexible Cords: The minimum cross-sectional area of conductors of flexible
cords shall be 0.5 mm2 for copper conductors. Flexible cable or cords shall not be used as fixed wiring unless
contained in an enclosure affording mechanical protection.
Flexible cords may be used for connections to portable eguipment. For the purpose of this regulation an
electric cooker of rated input exceeding 3 kW is not considered to be portable. Tfie flexible cord shall be of
sufficient length so as to avoid undue risk of damage to the outlet, cord or equipment and of being a
hazard to personnel.
2.5.4.3 Cable Ends : All stranded conductors having nominal cross-sectional area 6 mm2 and above shall
be provided with cable sockets. For stranded conductors of cross-sectional area below 6 mm2 and not
provided with cable sockets, all strands at the exposed ends of the cable shall be soldered together or
crimped using suitable sleeve or ferrules.
.
2.5.4.4 Cable Joints : Cable joints are to be realized through porcelain/PVC connectors with PIB tape
wound around before placing the cable in the box. Wherever feasible, heat shrink termination and joints
shall be employed.
2.5.4.5 Special Risk : Special. forms of construction, such as flame proof enclosures, shall be adopted
where there is risk of fire or explosion.
·
2.5.4.6 Expansion Joints : Conduits shall not normally be allowed to cross expansion joints in a building.
Where such crossing is found to be unavoidable, special care must be taken to ensure that the conduit runs
and wiring are not in any way put to strain or are not damaged due to expansion/contraction of the
building structure.
2.5.5 Sub-distribution Boards

2.5.5.1 Enclosures : Enclosures for sub-distribution boards located inside the building shall be dust-proof
and vermin-proof using sheet steel fabrication of a minimum thickness of 20 SWG. The boards shall be safe
in operation and safe against spread of fire due to short circuit.
2.5.5.2 Enclosure Sizes : Table 8.2.7 provides recommended sizes of enclosures for sub-distribution boards
containing miniature circuit breakers or fuses.
Table8.2.7
Recommended Enclosure Sizes for MCB's and Fuses
Dimensions (mm) No. of MCB's or Fuses

Height Width Depth
350 390 120 up to 12
480 390 120 up to 24
610 390 120 up to36
740 390 120 up to 48
2.5.5.3 Location : Sub-distribution boards shall be located as close as possible to the electrical load centres.
2.5.5.4 Wiring of Sub-distribution Boards ·
a) In wiring a sub-distribution board, total load of the consuming devices shall be distributed, as far as
possible, evenly between the number of ways of the board, leaving the spare way(s) for future
extension.
b) All connections between pieces of apparatus or between apparatus and terminals on a board shall be
nea !l Y: arranged in a definit� sequence, following·the arrangements of the apparatus mounted thereon,
avoiding unnecessary crossmgs.
c) Cables shall be connected to terminals only by soldered or welded lugs, unless the terminals are of such
form that it is possible to securely clamp them without cutting away the cable strands.
8-22
Chapter 2
2.5.6 Electrical Services Shaft and Bus Ducts

2.5.6.1 Services Shaft : For buildings over six-storey or 20 m high there shall, in general, be a minimum
of one vertical shaft of 200 mm x 400 mm size for every 1500 m 2 floor area. The electrical shaft shall
exclusively be used for the following purposes and shall have free access for operation and maintenance :
electric supply feeder cables or rising mains,

telephone and intercom, fire alarm and signal cables etc.,
area fuse/mini circuit breakers, sub-distribution boards for individual floors, if necessary.
2.5.6.2 Bus Duct

a) Bus ducts are specially useful to minimize voltage drop on account of high amperage intermittent loads.
The conductors supported by insulators inside the bus duct may be of copper or aluminium of solid,
hollow or rectangular cross-section. The conductors may also be insulated. Bus ducts should be used
for exposed work or where concealin& is not of a permanent nature. The bus duct shall be laid with
minimum number of bends for distribution system. Typical rating of feeder bus ducts for 3-phase,
3-wire or 4-wire system shall range from 200 amperes to 3000 amperes.
b) Concrete horizontal ducts of suitable size shall be provided along the roads for a group of buildings to
be fed by a single substation.
2.5.7 Types of House Wiring

2.5.7.1 Surface/Exposed Wiring : Wiring run over the surface of walls and ceilings, whether contained in
conduits or not, is termed surface or exposed wiring. Twin core flat wires may be run on wooden battens
and round wires through PVC or GI pipes of approved quality.
The battens shall be made with good quality wood having a minimum thickness of 12 mm. They shall be
installed exposed and run straight on the ceiling or wall surfaces. Battens on walls shall be run either
horizontally or vertically, and never at an angle. Battens on ceilings shall be run parallel to the ed�es in
either orthogonal direction, and not at an angfe. They shall be fixed to the wall or ceiling by wood pms or
plastic raw! plugs using countersunk galvanized screws. The wires shall be fixed to the battens by using
galvanized steel clips or brass link clips of required size at a spacing not exceeding 100 mm.
GI or PVC conduits, when used for surface wiring, shall be clamped with saddles at a spacing not exceeding
600 mm, to the wall or ceiling using plastic raw! plugs with countersunk galvanized screws.
2.5.7.2 Concealed Wiring : The wires in this type of wiring shall be encased in metallic (GI) or non
metallic (PVC) conduits that are buried in roof or floor concrete and in brick/concrete wall. The conduits in
the walls shall be run horizontally or vertically, and not at an angle. Conduits in concrete slabs shall be
placed at the centre of thickness and supr.orted during casting by mortar blocks or 'chairs' made of steel bars
or any other approved means. All conduits shall be continuous throughout their lengths.
Underground cables for electrical distribution in the premises/garden/compound of the building shall be
encased in GI or PVC pipes and laid in earth trenches of sufficient depth. Armoured cables need not be
encased in conduits except for crossings under road, footpath, walkway or floors.
2.5.7.3 Wiring for connections to machines shall be carried in steel pipes or cable tray hung from the
ceiling or in concrete or steel cable tray running over the floor.
2.5.8 Conduits and Conduit Fittings

Non-metallic conduits and conduit fittings shall be of heavy wall water grade type. All bends shall be large
radius bends formed by heat or by mechanical bending machine. The cross-section of the conduit shall
remain circular at the bend and the internal diameter shall not be reduced. PVC pipe fittings shall be sealed
with PVC solvent cement or by usirig glue or gum paste of approved quality. Conduits installed in floors
shall have a slope of at least 1:1000 towards floor mounted pool box or cable duct.
2.5.9 Service Entry

2.5.9.1 Overhead service connection to a building shall be achieved with covered conductor or catenary
wire (mainly for single phase consumers). The overhead service connection shall be led into buildings via
roof poles or service masts made of GI pipe at least 38 mm in diameter having a goose neck bend at tne top
and installed on the outer wall.
2.5.9.2 Underground service cables shall be laid in conformity with the requirements of Sec 2.5.7.2.
2.5.9.3 Power and telecommunication or antenna cables shall be led in separately.
2.6 SUBSTATION IN BUILDING
2.6.1 General
Electrical substations shall normally be required in case of office buildings with a total plinth (covered) area
of 5000 m2; even buildings with smaller plinth (covered) areas but with large loading may require a
substation, the load limit being set by regulations in the Electricity Act or by the relevant electrical utilities.

PartS
Building Services
To arrive at the size of the substation required, a load factor of 70% shall be applied to the estimated load of
the building, unless future expansion requirements dictate that a higher figure be considered.
2.6.2 Location
2.6.2.1 In a multi-storeyed building, the substation shall preferably be installed on the lowest floor level,
but direct access from the street for mstallation or removal of the equipment shall be provided. The floor
level of the substation or switch room shall be above the highest flood level of the locality. Suitable
arrangements should exist to prevent the entrance of storm or flood water into the substation area.
2.6.2.2 It is preferable to locate the electrical substation adjacent to the air-conditioning plant room (if any)
in such a way that the distance from the controlling switchboard of the air-conditioning plant rooms and
corresponding switches in the electrical substation are kept minimum.
2.6.2.3 In case of a building complex, or a group of buildings belonging to the same organization, the
substation should l' referably be located in a separate building and should be adjacent to the generator
room, if any. Location of substation in the basement floor shoufd be avoided. In case the electric substation
has to be located within the main building itself for unavoidable reasons, it should be located on ground
floor with easy access from outside.
2.6.2.4 For transformers having large oil content (more than 2000 litres), soak pits are to be provided.
26
. 2
. 5
. The minimum area required for substation and transformer room for different capacities are given
in Table 8.2.8.
2.6.2.6 The minimum height of the substation room shall be 3.6 m.
2.6.3 Layout
2.6.3.1 In allocating the areas within a substation, it is to be noted that the flow of electric power is from
supply company network to HT room, then to transformer and finally to the low voltage switchgear room.
The layout of the rooms shall be in accordance with this flow.
2.6.3.2 The areas given in Table 8.2.8 hold good if they are provided with windows and independent
access doors in accordance with local regulations. ·
2.6.3.3 All the rooms shall be provided with partitions up to the ceiling and shall have proper ventilation.
Special care should be taken to ventilate the transformer rooms and where necessary louvres at lower level
and exhaust fans at higher level shall be provided at suitable locations in such a way that cross ventilation is
maintained.
Table82
. 8
.
Area Required for Transformer Room and Substation for Different Capacities
Capacity of Transformer Room Area Total Substation Area (with HT, LT Panels &
Transformer (m2) Transformer Room but without Generators)
(kVA) (m 2l
1x150 12 42
1x250 13 45
2x250 26 90
1x400 13 45
2x400 26 90
3x400 39 135
2x630 26 90
3x630 39 135
2x1000 26 90
3x1000 39 135
2.6.3.4 Arrangement shall be made to prevent storm water entering the transformer and switch roorris
through the soak pits, if floor level of the substation is low.
2.6.4 Provision for Standby Supply

2.6.4.1 In buildings where interruption of electrical power supply would result in panic, hazard to life and
property or major production loss, provision should be made for standby power supply.
2.6.4.2 The capacity of standby generating set shall be chosen on the basis of essential light load, essential
air-conditioning load, essential equipment load and essential services load, such as one lift out of a bank of
lifts, one or alf water pumps, etc. Table 8.2.9 shows minimum generator room area requirements for
different sizes of generators.
The generating set should be housed in the substation building to enable transfer of electrical load quickly as
well as to avoid transfer of vibration and noise to the main building. The generator house should have
proper ventilation and fire fighting equipment installed.
8-24
Chapter 2
Table 8.2.9 ,
Area Requirements for Standby Generator Room
ca acity
c Area
( W) (m2)
1x25 20
1x48 24
1x100 30
1x150 36
1x300 48
1x500 56
2.7 DISTRIBUTION OF SUPPLY AND CABLING
2.7.1 General
In the planning and design of an electrical wiring installation, due consideration shall be given to prevailing
condihons. It is recommended that advice of a competent electrical engineer be sought at the initial stage
with a view to providing for the installation that will prove adequate for its intended purpose, and safe and
efficient. use.
2.7.2 System of Supply

2.7.2.1 All electrical apparatus shall be suitable for the voltage and frequency of supply.
2.7.2.2 The number and types of live conductors (e.g. single-phase two-wire a.c., three-phase four-wire a.c.
etc. ) shall be assessed, botn lor the source of energy and for the circuits to be used within the installation.
2.7.2.3 The following characteristics of the supply shall be ascertained :
nominal voltage(s),
nature of current and frequency,
prospective short circuit current at the origin of the installation,
type and rating of the overcurrent protechve device acting at the origin of the installation,
suitability for the requirements of the installation, including the maximum demand,
expected maximum value of the earth loop impedance of that part of the system external to the
installation.
2.7.2.4 In case of connected loads of 100 kVA and above, the relative advantage of high voltage three
phase supply should be assessed. Although the use of high voltage su }' ply entails the capital cost of
providi � g suitable transformer substation at the consumer's premises, the following advantages should also
be considered:
possible advantage in tariff,

more effective earth fault protection for heavy current circuits,
reduction of interference with supplies to other consumers permitting the use of large size motors,
welding plant, etc., and
better control of voltage regulation and more constant supply voltage.
2.7.3 Equipment and Accessories ·
2.7.3.1 High Voltage Switchgear: The selection of the type of high voltage switchgear for any installation
should consider the following:
.
voltage of the supply system,
the prospective short circuit current at the point of supply,
the size and layout of electrical installation,
the accommodation available, and
the value of the industry (if applicable).
2.7.3.2 Guidelines on Various Types of Switchgear Installation

a) Banks of switchgears shall be segregated from each other by means of fire resistant barriers in order to
prevent the risk of damage by fire or explosion arising from switch failure. Where a bus-section switch
IS installed, it shall also be segregated from adjoining oanks in the same way.
b) In the case of duplicate or ring main supply, switches with interlocking arrangement shall be provided
to prevent simultaneous switching of two different supply sources.
2.7.3.3 Low Voltage Switchgear

a) Switchgear and fusegear must have adequate breaking capacity in relation to the capacity of the
transformers.

PartS
Building Services
b) Isolation and protection of outgoing circuits forming the main distribution system may be effected by
means of circuit breakers, or fuses or switch fuse units mounted on the main switchboard. The choice
between alternative types of equipment will take the following points into consideration:
In certain installations supplied with electric power from remote transformer substations, it may be
necessary to protect main circuits with circmt breakers operated by earth leakage trips, in order to
ensure effective earth fault protection.
Where large electric motors, furnaces or other heavy electrical equipment are installed, the main
circuits shall be protected by metal clad circuit breakers or conductors fitted with suitable
instantaneous ano time delay overcurrent devices together with earth leakage and backup
protection where necessary.
In installations other than those mentioned above or where overloading of circuits may be
considered unlikely, HRC type fuses will normally afford adequate protection for main circuits
separately as required; the fuses shall be mounted in switch fuse units or with switches forming
part of the main switch boards.
Where it is necessary to provide suitable connection for power factor improvement capacitors at
the substation bus, suitable capacitors shall be selected in consultation with the capacitor and
switchgear manufacturer and necessary switchgearI feeder circuit breaker shall be provided for
controlling the capacitor bank(s).
2.7.3.4 Transformers
a) Where two or more transformers are to be installed in a substation to supply a medium voltage
distribution system, the distribution system shall be divided into separate sections each of which shall
normally be fed from one transformer only unless the medium voltage switchgear has the requisite
short circuit capacity. Provision may, however, be made to interconnect separate sections through bus
couplers to cater for the failure or disconnection of one transformer.
b) The transformers, that at any time operate in parallel, shall be so selected as to share the load in
proportion to their respective ratings.
c) When a step-up transformer is used, a linked switch shall be provided for disconnecting the
transformer from all poles of the supply, including the neutral conductor.
2.7.3.5 Rotating Machines

a) All equipment including cables, of every circuit carrying the starting, accelerating and load currents of
motors, shall be suitable for a current at least equal to the full load current rating of the motor. When
the motor is intended for intermittent duty and frequent stopping and starting, account shall be taken of
any cumulative effects of the starting periods upon the temperature rise of the equipment of the circuit.
b) The rating of circuits supplying the rotors of slip ring or commutator induction motors shall be suitable
for both the starting ana loaded conditions.
c) Every electric motor having a rating exceeding 0.376 kW shall be provided with control equipment
incorporating means of protection against overcurrent.
d) Every motor shall be provided with means to prevent automatic restarting after a stopJ>age due to drop
in voltage or failure. This requirement does not apply to any special cases where the failure of the
motor to start after a brief interruption of the supply would be likely to cause greater danger. It also
does not preclude arrangements for starting a motor at intervals by an automatic control device, where
other adequate precautions are taken against danger from unexpected restarting.
2.7.3.6 Energy Meters :Energy meters shall be installed in residential buildings at such a place which is
readily accessible to the owner of the building and the Authority. These should be installed at a height
where it is convenient to note the meter reading; they should not be installed at a level less than one metre
above the ground. The energy meters should either be provided with a protective covering, enclosing it
completely except the glass window through which the readings are noted, or shall be mounted inside a
completely enclosed panel provided with hinged or sliding doors with arrangement for locking.
2.7.4 Cables
2.7.4.1 The advice of the cable manufacturer with regard to installation, jointing and sealing shall be
followed.
2.7.4.2 The HT cables shall either be laid on cable racks or in built-up concrete trenches/tunnel/basement
or directly buried in the ground.
2.7.4.3 Methods of installation of cables and conductors in common use are specified in Table 8.2.10.
8-26
Chapter 2
Table 8.2.10
Methods of Installation of Cables and Conductors in Common Use
Type Description • Example
A Cables enclosed in conduit
Single-core Multi-core
B Cables enclosed in trunking
c Cables enclosed in underground

conduit, ducts, and cable ducting.
Single-core
(@)
Multi-core
D Two or more single-core cables

contained in separate bores of a
multi-core conduit and intended to
be solidly embedded in concrete or
plaster or generally incorporated in
the building structure.
E Sheathed cables clipped direct to a
I
nonmetallic surface.
Multi-core
Single-core
F Sheathed cables on a cable tray.
Single-core
1
Multi-core
G Sheathed cables embedded direct in

plaster.

PartS
Building Services
. Table 8.2.10 (Contd.)

H Sheathed cables suspended from or

incorporating a catenary wire.
J Sheathed cables in free air.

Venical surface of a wall
or open cable trenc
20mm min.
For ca es in whic t e con uctor cross-sectiona area oes not

exceed 185 mm2, S is egual to twice the overall diameter of the
cable. For cables in wnich the conductor cross-sectional area
exceeds 185 m2, S is about 90 mm. For two cables in horizontal
formation on brackets fixed to a wall, S may have any lesser
value.
.K Single and multi-core cables in Two single-core cables with

endosed trench 450 mm wide by surfaces separated by a
600 mm deep (minimum distance equal to one diameter;
dimensions) including 100 mm three single-core cables in
cover. trefoil and t o u ch i n g nnnnnn
throughout. Multi-core cables
or groups of single-core cables
se parated by a minimum
distance of 50 mm.
8-28
Chapter 2

L Sin le and multi-core cables in

� Single-core cables arranged in
enc osed trench 450 mm wide by flat groups of two or three on 0
600 mm deep (m i n i m u m the vertical trench wall with 0 0
dimensions) including 100 mm surfaces se arated by a
r 0
cover. distance equa to one diameter 0
with a minimum separation of 0
50 rnrn between groups. Multi- 0 0
core cables installed singly 0
separated b l a minimum*
distance of 7 mm. All cables
spaced at least 25 mm from the
trench wall.
M Sin le and multi-core cables in

� Single-core cables arrane;ed in
enc osed trench 600 mm wide by � roups of two or three m flat
760 mm deep (m i n i m u m ormation with the surfaces 6) 6)
dimensions) including 100 mm separated by a distance equal
cover. to one diameter or in trefoil
formation with cables touching. 6) 6)
Groups se p arated by a
minimum* distance of 50 mm c56 c56
either horizontally or vertically.
Multi-core cables installed
s i nsl y se a r a t e d
g b! a
mirumum* istance of 7 mm
either horizontally or
0 oo
vertically. All cables spaced at
least 25 mm from the trench 0 oo
wall.
0 oo
0 00
*Larger spacing to be used where practicable.
2.7.4.4 Ducts cast-in-situ in concrete, by means of a suitable former laid before the concrete is poured, into
which cables are to be drawn (whether or not the former are retained in position after the concrete has set)
shall be so formed that the radial thickness of concrete surrounding the cross-section of the completed duct
is not less than 15 rnrn at any point.
2.7.5 Main Switch and Switchboards

2.7.5.1 All main switches shall be either of metal clad enclosed pattern or of any insulated enclosed pattern
and the switches shall be fixed at close proximity to the point of entry of supply.
2.7.5.2 There shall be circuit breakers or miniature circuit breakers or load break switch fuses on each live
conductor of the supply mains at the point of entry. The wiring throughout the installation shall be such that
there is no break in the neutral wire in the form of a switch or fuse umt or otherwise.
2.7.5.3 Location
a) The location of the main board shall be such that it is easily accessible for firemen and other personnel
to quickly disconnect the supply in case of emergencies.
b) Main switchboards shall be installed in boxes or cupboards so as to safeguard against operation by

unauthorized personnel.
c) Open type switchboards shall be placed only in dry locations and in ventilated rooms and they shall not
be placea in the vicinity of storage batteries or exposed to chemical fumes.
d) In damp situation or where inflammable or explosive dust, vapour or gas is likely to be present, the
switchboard shall be totally enclosed or made flame proof as may be necessitated by the particular
circumstances.

PartS
Building Services
e) Switchboards shall not be erected above gas stoves or sinks, or within 2.5 m of any washing unit in the
washing rooms or laundries.
f) In case of switchboards being unavoidable in places likely to be exposed to weather, to drip, or in

abnormally moist atmosphere, the outer casing shall be weather proof and shall be provided with
glands or bushings or adapted to receive screwed conduit.
g) Adequate illumination shall be provided for all working spaces about the switchboards, when installed
indoors.
2.7.5.4 Metal clad switchgear shall be mounted on hinged type metal boards or fixed type metal boards.
a) Hinged type metal boards shall consist of a box made of sheet metal not less than 2 mm thick and shall
be provided with a hinged cover to enable the board to swing open for examination of the wiring at the
bacl<. The joints shall lie welded. The board shall be securely fixed to the wall by means of rag bolt
plugs, or wooden plugs and shall be provided with locking arrangement and an earthing stud. All
wires passing through the metal board shall be protected by a rubber or wooden bush at the entry hole.
The earth stud shoufd be commensurate with the size of the earth lead(s).
b) Fixed type metal boards shall consist of an angle or channel steel frame fixed on the wall at the top, if
necessary.
c) There shall be a distance of one metre clear in front of the switchboards.
2.7.5.5 Wooden Boards : For small installations connected to a single-phase 240 volts supply, wooden
boards may be used as main boards or sub-boards. These shall be of seasoned teak or other approved
quality timber with all joints dovetailed.
2.7.5.6 Location of Distribution Boards : The distribution fuse boards shall be located as near as possible
to the centre of the load they are intended to control.
a) They shall be fixed on suitable stanchion or wall and shall be accessible for replacement of fuses, and
shall not be more than 2 m from floor level.
b) They shall be either metal clad ty e, or all insulated t}'Pe. But if exposed to weather or damp situations,
f
they shall be of the weather proo type and if installed where exposed to explosive dust, vapour or gas,
they shall be of flame proof 1J1>e. In corrosive atmospheres, they shall be treated with anticorrosive
preservative or covered with suitable plastic compounds.
c) Where two or more distribution fuse boards feeding low voltage circuits are fed from a supply of
medium voltage, these distribution boards shall be :
fixed not less than 2 m apart, or

arranged so that it is not possible to open two at a time, namely, they are interlocked, and the metal
case is marked "Danger 415 Volts" and identified with proper phase marking and danger marks, or
installed in rooms or enclosures accessible to authorized persons only.
d) All distribution boards shall be marked "Lighting" or "Power", as the case may be, and also be marked
with the voltage and number of phases of the supply. Each shall be provided with a circuit list giving
diagram of each circuit which it controls and the current rating for the circuit and size of fuse element.
2.7.6 Protection of Circuits

2.7.6.1 Appropriate protection shall be provided at switchboards and distribution boards for all circuits
and sub-circuits against short circuit and overcurrent and the protective apparatus shall be capable of
interrupting any short circuit current that may occur, without danger. The ratmgs and settings of fuses and
the protective devices shall be coordinated so as to afford selectivity in operation.
2.7.6.2 Where circuit breakers are used for protection of main circuit and the sub-circuits derived
therefrom, discrimination in operation shall be achieved by adjusting the protective devices of the sub-main
circuit breakers to operate at lower current settings and shorter time-lag tnan the main circuit breaker.
2.7.6.3 A fuse carrier shall not be fitted with a fuse element larger than that for which the carrier is
designed.
2.7.6.4 The current rating of fuses shall not exceed the current rating of the smallest cable in the circuit
protected by the fuse.
2.8 EARTHING
2.8.1 General
The object of an earthing system is to provide a system of conductors, as nearly as possible at a uniform and
zero, or earth, potential. The purpose of this IS to ensure that, in general, all parts of equipment and
installation other than live parts shall be at earth potential, thus ensuring that persons commg in contact
with these parts shall also lie at earth potential at all times.
8-30
Chapter 2
2.8.2 Circuit and System Earthing

2.8.2.1 The purpose of circuit and system earthing is to limit excessive voltage from line surges, from
cross-overs with higher voltage lines, or from lightning, and to keep non current carrying enclosures and
equipment at zero potential with respect to earth. Earthing the system helps facilitate the opening of
overcurrent protection devices in case of earth faults.
Earthing associated with current carrying conductors is normally essential for the security of the system and
is generally known as system earthing, while earthing of non-current carrying metal work and conductor is
essential for the safety of human life, animals, and property and it is generally known as equipment
earthing.
2.8.2.2 The earthing arrangements shall be such that :

the value of resistance from the consumer's main earthing terminal to the earthed point of the supply, or
to earth, is in accordance with the protective and functional requirements of the installation, and
expected to be continuously effective,
earth fault currents and earth leakage currents likel to occur are carried without danger, particularly
l
from the point of view of thermal, thermomechanica and electromechanical stresses.
2.8.2.3 Precautions shall be taken against the risk of damage to other metallic parts through electrolysis.
2.8.2.4 Where a number of installations have separate earthing arrangements, protective conductors
running between any two of the separate installations shall either be capabfe of carrymg the maximum fault
current likely to flow through them, or be earthed within one installation only and insulated from the
earthing arrangements of any other installation. In the latter circumstances, if the protective conductor forms
part of a cable, the protective conductor shall be earthed only in the installation containing the associated
protective device.
2.8.3 Methods of Earthing

2.8.3.1 The usual method of earthing is to join the exposed metal work to earth via an earth continuity
conductor connected to an electrode buried in the ground. In conjunction with a fuse, or other similar
device, this then forms a protective system. Thus, if a live conductor accidentally comes into contact with an
exposed metal, the fuse or protective device operates. As long as the overall resistance of the protective
system is low, a large fault current flows which blows the fuse. This cuts off the supply and isolates the
faulty circuit, preventing risk of shock, fire, or damage to equipment/installation.
2.8.3.2 The three main elements required for an earthing system are earth conductors, earthing lead and
earth electrodes. The method of connecting earth wires, earthmg lead and earth electrodes is as important as
the selection of the main elements because poor connection will render the earthing system ineffective.
2.8.3.3 Earth Conductors : This is the part of the earthing system which joins or bonds together all the
metal parts of an installation.
a) In all cases the grounding conductor shall be made of copper or galvanize9. steel or other metals or
combination of metals wnich will not corrode excessively and, if practical, shall be without joints or
splice. If joints are unavoidable, they shall be made and maintained so as not to materially increase the
resistance of the earthing conductor and shall have appropriate mechanical and corrosion resistant
characteristics. Where tne earth conductor is to be buried underground in corrosive soil, use of
insulated cable as earth conductor is to be preferred.
b) Aluminium or copper clad aluminium conductors shall not be used for final connections to earth
electrodes.
c) The earth conductor shall have a short time capacity adequate for the fault current which can flow in
the grounding conductor or conductors for the operating time of the system protective device. In case of
copper wire being used as earth conductors, the size of the wire shall not be less than half the area of the
largest current carrying conductor supplying the circuit.
d) Table 8.2.11 gives the minimum sizes of copper earth conductors corresponding to the sizes of
associated copper circuit conductors. No size smaller than 14 SWG (3.243 mm2) shall be used anywhere
as earth conductor.
2.8.3.4 Earth Lead

a) Earth lead is the link which provides connection between the earth conductor(s) and the earth
electrode(s). The earth conductors shall be brought to one or more connecting points, according to size
of installation; the copper wire earthing leads shall run from there to the electrodes.
b) Earthing lead can either be of copper wire or of copper strip. Other metals can also be used as in case of
earth conductors.
c) Earthing leads shall be run in duplicate down to the earth electrode so as to increase the safety factor of
the installation. Copper wire used as earthing lead must not be smaller than 8 SWG (12 mm2) •

PartS
Building Services
Table 8.2.11
Minimum Cross-sectional Area of Copper Earth Conductors in Relation to
the Area of Associated Phase Conductors
Cross-sectional Area of Phase Minimum Cross-sectional Area of the

Conductor(s) Corresponding Earth Conductor
(mm2> (mm2)
Less than 16 Same as cross-sectional area of phase
conductor but not less than 14 SWG
16 or greater but less than 35 16
35 or greater Half the cross-sectional area of phase

conductor
2.8.3.5 Earth Electrodes

a) The earth electrode shall, as far as practicable, penetrate into permanently moist soil preferably below
ground water table. The resistance of earth electrodes shall not be more than one ohm.
b) The following types of earth electrodes are recognized for the purpose of this Code :
Copper rods,
Copper plates,
Galvanized iron pipes.
c) Details of typical pipe and plate earth electrodes are given in Fig 8.2.1 and 8.2.2. The following is a
guideline for electrode size :
Copper rods shall have a minimum diameter of 12.7 mm,

GI p1pes shall have a minimum diameter of 50 mm,
Copper plates shall not be less than 600 mm x 600 mm in size, with 6 mm thickness.
2.9 LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS
2.9.1 General
Whether a builqing needs protection against lightning is a matter of judgement on the part of the designer;
obviously it depends on the probability of a stroke and acceptable risk fevels. For example, a higher risk is
presumably acceptable for an isolated small bungalow than, say, for a children's hospital. Whilst no exact
rules can be laid down which would eliminate the designer's judgement entirely, certain steps can be taken
for an objective assessment of the risk and of the magnitude of the consequences. As an aid to making a
judgement, a set of indices is given in Table 8.2.12 and elaborated in Sec "2.9.1.1 to 2.9.1.7 below for tne
various factors involved.
2.9.1.1 Usage of Structure :The lightning hazard to human beings within a structure or a building is a
very important factor in deciding now far to go in providing lightning protection. Schools, hospitals,
auditoriums, railway stations, etc., are places where a large number of people congregate and, therefore,
would in general be structures of greater importance than small buildings ana houses.
2.9.1.2 Type of Construction :The type of construction of the structure has a large influence upon the
extent of protection to be provided. A steel framed building to some extent is self-protecting and may not
generally require additional protection, while brick buildings or buildings with thatched roof require greater
aegree of protection.
2.9.1.3 Contents or Consequential Effects :In addition to direct loss due to destruction of buildings by
lightning, fire resulting from lightning , killing of livestock, etc. there may be indirect losses which
sometimes accompany the destruction of buildings and their contents. An interruption to business or to
farming operations, specially at certain times of the year, may involve losses quite distinct from, and in
addition to, the losses arising from the direct destruction of property. There are also cases where whole
community depends for safety and comfort in some respect on the mtegrity of a single structure, as for
instance on the brick chimney of a water pumping plant. A lightning strike to it may have a serious
consequence due to disruption of sanitary facilities, drinking water, water for irrigation, fire protection, etc.
The contents of buildings should also be considered as to whether they are replaceable, explosive,
combustible, flammable vapour or explosive dust. These may present a hazard in a building that is
otherwise immune to lightning. Contents like hay or cotton may make protection measures specially
desirable.
2.9.1.4 Degree of Isolation : The relative exposure of a particular building will be an element in
determining whether the expense of lightning protection is warranted. In closely built-up towns and cities,
the hazard is not as great as m the open country.
8-32
Chapter 2
6.3 mm MS Rod
125
� Cl Cover Hinged to Cl Frame
�� 200 mm
-,
GL
300 mm l Wire Me sh
I Cement concrete
I (1:4:81
600 mm
I
12.7 mm•
Gl Pipe
.; " ..
Copper or
Wire
Bolt. Nut, Check Nut

1.5 m and Washer to be of I
Min
Copper for Copper Plate
,. [I
and Gl for Gl plate
I
) ! (
I
CD : l
I
I I
I
I
19 mm• I I
600 X 600 mm X 8.30 mm
CD
Gl Pipe I
Gl Plate or 600 X 600 mm X 3.15 mm I
Copper Plate I
I
I I
I I
L ·:-'·--{. _j
Detail A
Note Three or four buckets of water to be poured Into sump every few days to keep the soil surrounding the earth plate
or pipe permanently moist
Fig. 8.2.1 Plate Earthing

8-33
Part 8
Building Services
Cement Concrete
r
6.3 mm MS Rod
( 1:4:8 )
Cl Cover Hinged
to Cl Frame
10 mm
GL
·
...
•.
.
.
. ,..:-�-.-..-:.•..'"� •-
·":,.
.
·
·
· : '•
:
·
.�.-:- ....
.
.
. : . ..
. .. .
- ": .
.
:
· · � 250 mm
.• =. . • • . ·
· . �� )· ..
..
� ·. .;.. .
� :�
. . ·.·-.: Wire Mesh
·��--;-
.
· ' ·....
.. . . . ·
. .
Check Nut
· . .. �
.
.
�-
600 mm
�� .
.
Min 125 mm
� .
� ::
1.25 m Min
150 mm
12.7mmlll
�
Gl Pipe
Omm
Pipe
36 X 19 mm Reducing Socket
Charcoal Layer
'
•
.
: .. .
.
...c-1--- Salt Layer
I
.
.
150 mm
� .
*
.
�
· -· ·...
.
75 mm
..t
. .
.
.
.
Alternate Layer of Charcoal
or Coke and Salt
2.5 m
Min· .. .
:l .. · ·
-.v---12 mmlll
l
"150 Hole
.
.
' ..
: . O
..
Section X-X
� . .
.
.
.
. : � .. . •·
.
· ·.
·
· ; _
Note Three or four buckets of water to be poured Into sump every few days to keep the soli
surrounding the earth plate or pipe permanently moist
Fig. 8.2.2 Pipe Earthing
8-34
Chapter2
Table 8.2.12
Index Figures Associated with Lightning Protection Design
Structure �
Houses and similar buildings 2
Houses and similar buildings with outside aerial 4
Small and medium size factories, workshops and laboratories 6
Big industrial plants, telephone exchanges, office blocks, 7

hotels, blocks of flats
Places of assembly, for example, places of workshop, halls, 8

theatres, museums, exhibitions, department stores,
post offices, stations, airports, stadiUms
Schools, hospitals, children's homes and other such structures 10

Index B: Type of Construction
Steel framed encased with nonmetal roof' 1
Reinforced concrete with nonmetal roof 2
Brick, plain concrete, or masonry with nonmetal roof 4
Steel framed encased or reinforced concrete with metal roof 5
Timber formed or clad with any roof other 'than metal or thatch 7
Any building with a thatched roof 10
8A structure of exposed metal which is continuous down to ground

level is excluded from the table as it requires no lightning protection
beyond adequate earthing arrangements.
Index C: Contents or Consequential Effects
Ordinary domestic or office building, factories and 2

workshops not containing valuable materials
Industrial and agricultural buildings with specially susceptibleb 5

contents
Power stations, gas works, telephone exchanges, radio stations 6
Industrial key plants, ancient monuments, historic 8

buildings, museums, art galleries
Schools, hospitals, children's and other homes, places of assembly 10
b This means specially valuable plant or materials vulnerable to fire

or the results of fire.
Index D: Degree of Isolation
Structure located in a large area having structures or trees of similar

or greater height, e.g. a large town or forest 2
Structure located in an area with a few other structures or trees of 5

similar height
Structure completely isolated or exceeding at least twice 10

the hei ht of surroundin structures or trees

PartS
Building Services

Index Figures Associated with Lightning Protection Design
Index E: Type of Terrain
Flat terrain at any level 2
Hilly terrain 6
Mountainous terrain 300 m and above 8
Index F: Height of Structure
Up to 9 m 2
9-15 m 4·
15-18 m 5
18-24 m 8
24-30 m 11
30-38 m 16
38-46 m 22
46-53 me 30
c Structures higher than 53 m require protection in all cases.
Index G: Lightning Prevalence
Number of thunderstorm days per year :
Up to 3 2
4-6 5
7-9 8
10-12 11
13-15 14
16-18 17
19-21 20
Over 21 21
2.9.1.5 Type of Terrain: In hilly or mountainous areas, buildings are more susceptible to dama�e due to
lightning than buildings in the plains or flat terrain. In hilly areas, a building upon high ground 1s usually
subject to greater hazard than one in a valley or otherwise sheltered area.
2.9.1.6 Height of Structure : Height of the structure is an important factor for the purpose of lightning
protection. Taller structures are subject to greater hazards than smaller structures ancf, therefore, lightning
protection is more desirable for tall structures.
2.9.1.7 Lightning Prevalence : The number of thunderstorm days in a year varies in different parts of a
country. However, the severity of lightning storms, as distinguished from their frequency of occurrence, is
usually much greater in some locations than others. Hence, the need for protection varies from place to
place, although not necessarily in direct proportion to the thunderstorm frequency.
2.9.2 Risk Assessment

"Risk Index" is the sum of the indices for all the factors, as given in Table 8.2.12. A few examples of
calculation of Risk Index are given in Table 8.2.13, based on a marginal Risk Index of 40.
2.9.3 Number of Arresters Required and their Installation

2.9.3.1 A complete lightning protection system consists of an air termination network, a down conductor
and an earth termination. The air termination network is that part which is intended to intercept lightning
discharges. It consists of vertical and horizontal conductors arranged to protect the required area.
2.9.3.2 The zone of protection is the space within which a lightning conductor provides protection by
attracting the stroke to itself. It has been found that a single vertical conductor attracts to itself strokes of
average or above average intensity which in the absence of the conductor would have struck the ground
within a circle having its centre at the conductor and a radius equal to twice the height of the conductor. For
weaker than average discharges the protected area becomes smaller. For practical design it is therefore
assumed that statistically satisfactory protection can be given to a zone consisting of a cone with its apex at
the top of the vertical conductor and a base radius equal to the height of the conductor. This is illustrated in
Fig 8.2.3.
2.9.3.3 A horizontal conductor can be re�arded as a series of apexes coalesced into a line, and the zone of
protection thus becomes a tentlike space (F1g 8.2.4).
8-36
Chapter 2
Table 8.2.13
Example of Calculation of Risk Index
Total Recommen-
Example A B c D E F G Index dations
Figure
Small residential building No rotection
in a thickly populated 2 4 2 2 2 2 21 35 K
nee ed, in
locality (height less than general
lOrn)
Office building in a As the figure is

locality (height 2 0m) 7 2 2 2 2 5 21 41 around 40, need
h
of rotection .
�
wi I de end
upon t e
importance of
the building
Hotel building (height Protection

31m) exceeding twice the 7 2 2 10 2 16 21 60 essential
height of surrounding
structures
Building of historical Protection

t
im ortance completely 8 4 8 10 2 30 21 83 essential
iso ated (height exceeding
55m)
Structure of high Protection

historical importance - - - - - - - -
essential as the
(height exceeding 55m) height exceeds
53m
Structure, such as hydro- Protected by

electric power stations, 7 2 6 2 6 4 21 48 surroundings
sufficiently protected by
means of surroundin �
structures, for examp e,
high vertical cliffs, high
metallic structures or
earth wire of transmission
system (height 15m)
2.9.3.4 When there are several parallel horizontal conductors the area between them has been found by
experience to be better protected than one would expect from the above considerations only. The
recommended design criterion is that no part of the roof should be more than 9 m from the nearest
horizontal conductor except that an additional 0.3m may be added for each 0.3m or part thereof by which
the part to be protected is below the nearest conductor.
2.9.3.5 The earth termination is that part which discharges the current into the general mass of the earth.
In other words, it is one or more earth electrodes.Earth electrodes for lightning protection are no different
from earth electrodes for short circuit protection systems.The total resistance of an electrode for a lightning
protection system must not exceed 10ohms.
2.9.3.6 The down conductor is the conductor which runs from the air termination to the earth termination.
A building with a base area not exceeding 100m2 shall be provided with one down conductor. For a larger
building, there shall be one down conductor for the first 100m2 plus a further one for every 300m2 or par
thereof in excess of the first 100 m2• Alternatively, for a larger building one down conductor may be
provided for every 30m of perimeter.The number chosen can be the smaller of the numbers given by these
alternative methods of calculation.
2.9.3.7 The material used for lightning conductors must be aluminium or copper.The criterion for design
is to keep the resistance from air termination to earth to a minimum.
2.9.3.8 Recommended dimensions for various components of lightning arrester are given in Table 8.2.14.
Larger conductors should however be used if the system is unlikely to receive regular inspection and
maintenance.

PartS
Building Services
_L
Elevation
Plan
Fig. 8.2.3 Protected Zone for Vertical Conductors
T
t
_L
Elevation
.,...---- 1 ----,
I t �
I \
\ I
\ I
, _________ .......
Plan Side View
Fig. 8.2.4 Protected Zone for Horizontal Conductors
8-38
Chapter 2
Table 8.2.14
Sizes of the Components of Lightning Protection Systems
Components Minimum Dimensions

Air Terminations
Aluminium and copp er strip 20mm x 3 mm
Aluminium, alumimum alloy, copper an� phosphor bronze
rods 10mmdia
Stranded aluminium conductors 19 strands of 2.5 mm
Standard copper conductors 19 strands of 1.8 mm
Down Conductors
Aluminium and copper strip 20mm x 3 mm
Aluminium, aluminlUm alloy and copper rods 10mmdia
Earth Terminations
Harddrawn copper rods for driving into soft ound
�r 12mmdia
Hard drawn or annealed copper rods for in irect driving
or laying in ground 10mm dia
Phosphor bronze for hard ground 12 mmdia
Copper clad steel for hard ground 10mm dia
2.9.3.9 External metal on a building should be bonded to the lightning conductor with bonds at least as
large as the conductor.
2.9.3.10 When a lightning conductor carries a stroke to earth, it is temporarily raised to a potential
considerably above that of earth. There is, therefore, a risk that the discharge will flash over to nearby metal
and cause damage to the intervening structure. This can be prevented by either providing sufficient
clearance between conductor and other metal or by bonding these together to ensure that there can be no
potential difference between them. The necessary clearance is obtained from:
H
D=0.3R+ - (2.9.1)
15n
where
D clearance in metres
=
R = resistance to earth in ohms

H = height of building in metres
n = number of down electrodes
Since it is often impracticable to provide the necessary clearance, the alternative technique of bonding is
preferred.
2.9.4 Surge Arrester Selection

2.9.4.1 A surge arrester is a protective device for limiting surge voltages by discharging, or bypassing,
surge current through it; it also prevents continued flow of follow-through current while remaining capable
of repeating these functions. It is used to protect overhead lines and other electrical apparatus, viz.
transforming from overhead voltages and lightning.
· ·
2.9.4.2 Horn-gap lightning arresters are commonly used for low and medium voltage overhead lines. The
rating of the surge arrester shall be equal to or greater than the maximum continuous phase to ground
power frequency voltage available at the point of application.
2.10 TELECOMMUNICATION AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES
2.10.1 General
Internal wiring of telephone lines in small buildin�s is normally undertaken during installation of
individual sets. But in large multi-storeyed buildings mtended for commercial, business and office use as
well as for residential purposes, wiring for telephone connections is generally done beforehand through
concealed conduits during construction of the building itself.
In multi-storeyed apartments, houses and hotels where many TV receivers are located, a common master
antenna system is often used to avoid mushrooming of individual antennas. Master antenna is generally
provided at the topmost convenient point in any building and a suitable room on the topmost floor or
terrace for housing the amplifier unit etc., may also be provided in consultation with the architect/engineer.
2.10.2 Telecommunication Circuits

The design of telephone systems is beyond the scope of this Code, but the provision that has to be made for
them within a building must be considered. In many cases all that is needed is a route by which the
telephone service can bring in a telephone cable to an instrument. Telephone cables are quite small and if the
position of the outlet for the telepnone receiver is known it is sufficient to install a 20 mm conduit from

Part 8
Building Services
outside the building to the outlet, with the same number and spacing of draw-in points as are used for any
other conduit system. Some buildings may have an internal telephone system which may consist of
extensions to the public telephones or may be an entirely separate installation. Here again the essential
matter for the electrical services designer is to agree on the outlet positions with his customer and to arrange
for them to be linked to each other by conduit or trunking. Trunking can be a useful alternative to conduit
when the system is a complex one needing many cables with a large number of j unctions. Telephone cables
do not have a protective sheathing and therefore need the mechanical protechon of conduit or trunking.
Where practicable, a separation of at least 1.8 m shall be maintained between open conductors of
communication systems on buildings and the lightning conductors.
2.10.3 Television Antennas

If every tenant in a block of flats had his own TV antenna on the roof of the building, the result would be
very unsightly. It is an advantage to receive television or radio signals at one suitably sited antenna array
and relay them to individual dwellings by cables or transmission lines.
Lead-in cable must be installed with care to prevent damage to the cable. The various connections and
splices must be made carefully. Where practicable, a separation of at least 92 m is to be maintained so as not
to change the spacing of the conductors within the cable. Such changes result in a distorted television
signal. Shielded lead in cables may be run in or near metal objects without affecting television reception.
Unshielded lead-in wires installed close to these items may affect reception.
2.11 INSPECTION AND TESTING
2.11.1 General
2.11.1.1 Every installation shall, on completion and before being energized, be inspected and tested. The
methods of test shall be such that no danger to persons or property or damage to equipment occurs even if
the circuit tested is defective.
2.11.1.2 Periodic inspection and testing shall be carried out in order to maintain the installation in a sound
condition after putting it into service. Where an addition is to be made to the fixed wiring of an existing
installation, the latter snail be examined for compliance with the recommendations of the Code.
2.11.1.3 The individual equipment and materials which form part of the installation shall generally
conform to the relevant Bangladesh Standard (BDS) wherever applicable. If there is no relevant Bangladesh
standard specification for any item, these shall be approved by the appropriate authority.
2.11.2 Insulation Tests

2.11.2.1 Insulation resistance test shall be made on all electrical equipment, using a self-contained
instrument such as the direct indicating ohm-meter of the generator type. d.c. potential shall be used in
these tests and shall be as follows:
Circuits under 230 volts 500 volts

Circuits between 230 volts to 400 volts 1000 volts
2.11.2.2 The minimum acceptable insulation resistance value is 5 mega ohms. Before making connections at
the ends of each cable run, the insulation resistance measurement test of each cable shall be made. Each
conductor of a multi-core cable shall be tested individually to all other conductors of the group and also to
earth. If insulation resistance test readings are found to be less than the specified minimum in any
conductor, the entire cable shall be replaced.
2.11.2.3 All transformers, switchgears etc. shall be subject to an insulation resistance measurement test to
ground after installation but before any wiring is connected. Insulation tests shall be made between open
contacts of circuit breakers, switches etc. and between each phase and earth.
2.11.3 Earth Resistance Test

2.11.3.1 Earth resistance tests shall be made on the system, separating and reconnecting each earth
connection.
2.11.3.2 The electrical resistance of the earth continuity conductor together with the resistance of the
earthing lead measured from the connection with the earth electrode to any other position in the completed
installation shall not exceed 1 ohm.
2.11.3.3 Where more than one earthing sets are installed, the earth resistance between two sets shall be
measured by means of resistance bridge instrument. The earth resistance between two sets shall not exceed 1
ohm.
2.11.4 Operating Tests

Current load measurement shall be made on equipment and on all power and lighting feeders. The current
reading shall be taken in each phase wire and in each neutral wire while the circuit or equipment is
operating under actual load conditions. Clip-on ammeters may be used to take current readings. All light
fittings snail be tested electrically and mechanically to check whether they comply with the standard
8-40
Chapter2
specifications. Fluorescent light fittings shall be tested so that when functioning no flickering or choke
smging is felt.
2.11.5 Inspection of the Installation

On completion of wiring a general inspection shall be carried out by competent personnel in order to verify
that the provisions of tfiis Code and that of the Electricity Act of Bangladesh have been complied with. A
certificate may be issued on satisfactory completion of the work in a format as shown in Appendix C. Items
to be inspected are detailed in the following sections.
2.11.5.1 Substation Installations : In substation installations, it shall be checked whether:

The installation has been carried out in accordance with the approved drawings;
Phase to phase and phase to earth clearances are provided as required;
All equipment are efficiently earthed and properly connected to the required number of earth
electrOdes;
The required ground clearance to live terminals is provided;
Suitable fencing is provided with gate with lockable arrangements;
The required number of caution boards, fire fighting equipment, operating rods, rubber mats, etc., are
kept in the substation;
In case of indoor substation sufficient ventilation and draining arrangements are made;
All cable trenches are provided with noninflammable covers;
Free accessibility is provided for all equipment for normal operation;
All name plates are fixed and the equipment are fully painted;
All construction materials and temporary connections are removed;
Oil level , bus bar tightness, transformer tap position, etc. are in order;
Earth pipe troughs and cover slabs are provided for earth electrodes/earth pits and the neutral and· LA
earth pits are marked for easy identification; .
Earth electrodes are of GI pipes or CI pipes or copper plates. For earth connections, brass bolts and nuts
with lead washers are provided in the p1pes/plates;
Earth pipe troughs and oil sumps/pits are free from rubbish, dirt and stone jelly and the earth
connections are visible and easily accessible;
HT and LT panels and switchgears are all vermin and damp-proof and all unused openings or holes are
blocked properly;
The earth bus bars have tight connections and corrosion free joint surfaces;
Control switch fuses are provided at an accessible height from ground;
Adequate headroom is available in the transformer room for easy topping-up of oil, maintenance, etc.;
Safety devices, horizontal and vertical barriers, bus bar covers/shrouds, automatic safety shutters/door
interlock, handle interlock etc. are safe and in reliable operation in all panels and cubicfes;
Clearances in the front, rear and sides of the main HT and LT and subswitch boards are adequate;
The switches operate freely; the 3 blades make contact at the same time, the arcing horns contact in
advance; and tlie handles are provided with locking arrangements,
Insulators are free from cracks, and are clean;
In transformers, there is no oil leak;
Connections to bushing in transformers are light and maintain good contact;
Bushings are free from cracks and are clean;
Accessories of transformers like breathers, vent pipe, buchholz relay, etc. are in order;

Part 8
Building Services
Connecnons to gas relay in transformers are in order;
In transformers, oil and winding temperature are set for specific requirements to pump out;
In case of cable cellars, adequate arrangements exist to pump off water that has entered due to seepage
or other reasons; and
All incoming and outgoing circuits of HT and LT panels are clearly and indelibly labeled for
identifications.
2.11.5.2 Medium Voltage Installation: In medium voltage installations, it shall be checked whether:
- All blocking materials that are used for safe transportation in switchgears, contactors, relays, etc. are
removed;
All connections to the earthing system are feasible for periodical inspection;
Sharp cable bends are avoided and cables are taken in a smooth manner in the trenches or alongside the
walls and ceilings using suitable support clamps at regular intervals;
Suitable linked switch or circuit breaker or lockable push button is provided near the motors/apparatus
for controlling supply to the motor I apparatus in an easily accessible location;
Two separate and distinct earth connections are provided for the motor apparatus;
Control switch fuse is provided at an accessible height from ground for controlling supply to overhead
travelling crane, hoists, overhead bus bar trunking;
The metal rails on which the crane travels are electrically continuous and earthed and bonding of rails
and earthing at both ends are done;
Four-core cables are used for overhead travelling crane and portable equipment, the fourth core being
used for earthing, and separate supply for lighting circuit is tal<en;
If flexible metallic hose is used for wiring to motors and other equipment, the wiring is enclosed to the
full lengths, and the hose secured properly by approved means;
The cables are not taken through areas where they are likely to be damaged or chemically affected;
The screens and armours of the cables are earthed properly;
The belts of belt driven equipment are properly guarded;
Adequate precautions are taken to ensure that no live parts are so exposed as to cause danger;
Ammeters and voltmeters are tested; and
The relays are inspected visually by moving covers for deposits of dusts or other foreign matter.
2.11.5.3 Overhead Lines : For overhead lines, it shall be checked whether:

All conductors and apparatus including live parts thereof are inaccessible;
The types and size of supports are suitable for the overhead lines/conduc�:tors used and are in
accordance with approved drawing and standards;
Clearances from ground level to the lowest conductor of overhead lines, sag conditions, etc. are in
accordance with tne relevant standard;
Where overhead lines cross the roads or cross each other or are in proximity with one another, suitable
guarding is provided at road crossings and also to protect against possibility of the lines coming in
contact with one another;
Every guard wire is properly earthed;
The type, size and suitability of the guarding arrangement provided is adequate;
Stays are provided suitably on the overhead lines as required and are efficiently earthed or provided
with suitable stay insulators of suitable voltages;
Anticlimbing devices and Danger Board/Caution Board Notices are provided on all HT supports;
Clearances along the route are checked and all obstructions such as trees/branches and shrubs are
cleared on the route to the required distance on either side;
8-42
Chapter 2
Clearance between the live conductor and the earthed metal parts are adequate; and
For the service connections tapped off from the overhead lines, cutouts of adequate capacity are ·
provided.
2.11.5.4 Lighting Circuits : The lighting circuits shall be checked to see whether:
- Wooden boxes and panels are avoided in factories for mounting the lighting boards, switch controls,
etc.;
Neutral links are provided in double pole switch fuses which are used for lighting control, and no fuse
is provided in the neutral;
The plug points in the lighting circuit are all 3-pin type, the third pin being suitably earthed;
Tamper proof interlocked switch socket and plug are used for locations easily accessible;
Lightin� wiring in factory area is enclosed in conduit and the conduit is properly earthed, or
alternatively, armoured cable wiring is used;
A separate earth wire is run in the lighting installation to provide earthing for plug points, fixtures and
equipment;
Proper connectors and junction boxes are used wherever joints are in conductors or cross over of
coni:iuctors takes place;
Cartridge fuse units are fitted with cartridge fuses only;
Clear and permanent identification marks are painted in all distribution boards, switchboards, sub
main boards and switches as necessary;
The polarity has been checked and all fuses and single pole switches are connected on the phase
conductor only and wiring is correctly connected to socket outlets;
Spare knockouts provided in distribution boards and switch fuses are blocked;
The ends of conduits enclosing the wiring leads are provided with ebonite or other suitable bushes;
The fittings and fixtures used for outdoor use are all of weatherproof construction, and similarly,
fixtures, fittings and switchgears used in the hazardous area are of flameproof application;
Proper terminal connectors are used for termination of wires (conductors and earth leads) and all
strands are inserted in the terminals; .
Flat ended screws are used for fixing conductor to the accessories;
Flat washers backed up by spring washers are used for making end connections.
Related Appendices
Appendix A Maximum Demand and Diversity
Appendix B Useful Tables Relating toConductor Sizes
AppendixC CompletionCertificate Form

PartS
Building Services
8-44
CHAPTER�
Air-conditioning, Heating
and Ventilation
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this chapter is to provide minimum standards for regulating and controlling the design,
construction, installation, quality of materials, location, operation, maintenance and use of air-conditioning,
heating and ventilation systems to ensure public health, safety and welfare.
3.1.2 Scope
3.1.2.1 The provisions of this Code shall apJ'ly to erection, installation, alteration, repair, relocation,
replacement, addition to, use and maintenance of any air-conditioning, heating and ventilation systems.
3.1.2.2 Additions, alterations, repairs and replacement of equipment or systems shall comply with the
provisions for new equipment and systems except as otherwise provided in Sec 3.1.3.1.
3.1.2.3 Where, in any specific case, different sections of this Code specify different materials, methods of
construction or other requirements, the most restrictive one shall govern. Where there is a conflict between a
general requirement and a specific requirement, the specific requirement shall be applicable.
3.1.2.4 The regulations of this Code are not intended, and shall not be understood to permit violation of
the provisions of other ordinances, regulations or official requirements in force.
3.1.3 Application
It shall be unlawful to install, extend, alter, repair or maintain air-conditioning, heating and ventilation
systems in or adjacent to buildings except in compliance with this Code.
3.1.3.1 Existing Systems

a) Existing Installations : Air-conditioning, heating and ventilation systems in existence at the time of
adoption of this Code may have their use, maintenance or repair continued if the use, maintenance or
PartS 8-45
Building Services
PartS
Building Services
repair is in accordance with original design and location and no hazard to life, health or property has
been created by such system.
b) Additions, Alterations or Repairs : Additions, alterations or repairs may be made to any air
conditioning, heating or ventilation system without requiring the existing system to comply with all the
requirements of this Code, provided the addition, alteration or repair conforms to the requirements of a
new system. Additions, alterations or repairs shall not make an existing system unsafe, create unhealthy
or overloaded conditions.
c) Changes in Building Occupancy:Air-conditioning, heating and ventilation systems which are a part of
any building or structure undergoing a change in use or occupancy, as defined in the Building Code,
shall comply with all requirements ofthis Cocfe which may be applicable to the new use, or occupancy.
d) Maintenance:All air-conditioning, heating and ventilation systems, materials and appurtenances, both
existing and new, and all parts thereof sha11 be maintained in proper operating condition in accordance
with the original design and in a safe and hazard free condition. All devices or safeguards which are
required by this Code shall be maintained in conformance with this Code. The owner or the owner's
designated agent shall be responsible for maintenance of the systems and equipment.
e) Moved Buildings:Air-conditioning, heating and ventilation systems or equipment which are a part of
buildings or structures moved to another premises shall comply with the provisions of this Code for
new installations.
3.1.3.2 Alternative Materials and Methods of Construction:The provisions of this code are not intended
to prevent the use of any material or method of construction not specifically prescribed by this Code,
provided any such alternative material and/or method of construction has been approved and the use
authorized by the Authority. .
The Authority shall require that sufficient evidence or proof be submitted to substantiate any claims made
regarding the use of alternatives.
3.1.3.3 Modi fication s :Whenever there are practical difficulties involved in carrying out any of the
provisions of this Code, the Authority, within the limitations set forth in Part 2, may allow modifications for
mdividual cases. The modifications shall be in conformity with the intent and purpose of this Code and that
such modification shall not lessen health, life and fire safety requirements.
3.1.4 Terminology
This section provides an alphabetical list of the terms used in and applicable in this chapter of the Code. In
case of any conflict or contradiction between a definition given in this section and that in �art 1, the meaning
provided in this section shall govern for interpretation ofthe provisions of his chapter.
ABSORPTION:A process whereby a material extracts one or more substances present in an atmosphere or
I,IDxture of gases or liquids accompanied by the material's physical and/or chemical changes.
ABSORPTION REFRIGERATING SYSTEM:A refrigerating system in which refri�erant gas evaporated in
the evaporator is absorbed in the absorber by an absorbent solution. This also mcludes a generator for
separation of refrigerant from the absorbent solution, a condenser to liquefy the refrigerant and an
expansion device.
ADSORPTION : The action, associated with the surface adherence, of a material in extracting one or more
substances present in an atmosphere or mixture of gases and liquids, unaccompanied by physical or
chemical change.
AIR CHANGE : Introducing new, cleansed, or recirculated air to conditioned space, measured by the
number of complete changes per unit time.
AIR TERMINALS : A round, square, rectangular, or linear air outlet or inlet device used in the air
distribution system.
AIR, OUTSIDE : External air; atmosphere exterior to refrigerated or conditioned space; ambient
(surrounding) air.
AIR, RECIRCULATED:The part of return air passed through the air-conditioner before being resupplied to
the conditioned space. Also known as AIR, RETURN.
AIR, RETURN:See AIR, RECIRCULATED.
AIR-CONDITIONING : The process of treating air so as to control simultaneously its temperature,

humidity, cleanliness and distribution to meet the requirements of the conditioned space.
AIR-HANDLING UNIT:An equipment comprised of cooling and/or heating coil and a blower or fan with
electric motor used for the purpose of cooling/heating and distributing supp1y air to a room, space or area.
8-46
Chapter3
Air-conditioning, Heating and Ventilation
BLOWER : A fan used to force air under pressure.
BOILER: A closed vessel in which a liquid is vaporized.
BRINE : Any liquid cooled by the refrigerant and used for the heat transmission without a change in its
state. This also includes chilled water.
CHIMNEY : Primarily a vertical shaft enclosing at least one flue for conducting flue gases to the out-doors.
COIL: A cooling or heating element made of pipe or tubing.
CONDENSER (Refrigerant): A heat exchanger in which the refrigerant, compressed to a suitable pressure,
is condensed by rejecting heat to an appropriate external cooling medium.
CONTROL: Any device for regulating a system or component in normal operation, manual or automatic.
COOLING TOWER: An enclosed device for evaporatively cooling water by contact with air.
DAMPER: A device for regulating the flow of air or other fluid.
DEHUMIDIFICATION: Condensation of water vapour from air by cooling below the dew point.
DEW POINT TEMPERATURE : The temperature at which condensation of water vapour in a space begins
for a given state of humidity and pressure as the vapour temperature is reduced; i.e. the temperature
corresponding to saturation (100% relative humidity) for a given absolute humidity at constant pressure.
DUCT SYSTEMS: An assembly of all ducts, duct fittings, dampers, plenums and fans to form a continuous
passageway for the distribution of air.
EVAPORATIVE AIR COOLING: The removal of sensible heat from the air by the adiabatic exchange of
heat between air and a water spray or wetted surface, wherein the evaporating water absorbs the sensible
heat of air.
EVAPORATOR (Refrigerant) : A heat exchanger in which liquid refrigerant, after reducing its pressure
(expansion), is evaporated by absorbing heat from the medium to be coo1ed.
FAN: An air moving device comprising a wheel or blade, and housing or orifice plate.
FAN, TUBEAXIAL : A propeller or disc type wheel within a cylinder and including driving mechanism
supports for either belt a rive or direct connection.
FILTER: A device to remove solid particles from a fluid.
FIRE DAMPER : A closure which consists of a normally held open damper installed in an air distribution
system or in a wall or floor assembly and designed to close automaticalfy in the event of a fire in order to
isolate the conditioned space from the fire zone.
FIRE SEPARATION: A construction assembly that acts as a barrier against spread of fire and may not be
required to have a fire resistance rating or fire protection rating.
GLOBAL WARMING POTENTIAL : Global warming potential of a chemical compound is its relative
contribution to global warming compared to CFC-11.
HUMIDITY: Water vapour within a space.
HUMIDITY, RELATIVE : The ratio of the partial pressure or density of the water vapour in the air to the
saturation pressure or density, respectively, of water vapour at the same temperature.
HYDRONIC : Of, relating to, or being a system of heating or cooling that involves transfer of heat by a
circulating fluid (as water or vapour) in a closed system of pipes.
INSULATION, THERMAL: A material having a relatively high resistance to heat flow and used principally
to retard heat flow.
MECHANICAL REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT : A refrigerating system in which the gas evaporated in

the evaporator is compressed by mechanical means usually by a compressor. This also includes condenser
and expansion device.
OVERALL HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT (U): The time rate of heat flow per unit area (normal to the
flow) from the fluid on the warm side of a barrier to the fluid on the cold side, per unit temperature
difference between the two fluids.

Part 8
Building Services
OZONE DEPLETION POTENTIAL : Ozone depletion potential of a chemical compound is its relative
contribution to the depletion of the ozone layer compared to CFC-11.
PACKAGED AIR-CONDITIONER : An encased assembly as a self-contained unit primarily for floor

mounting, wall mounting or ceiling mounting, designed to provide free delivery of conditioned air to an
enclosed space, room or zone (conditioned space). It includes a prime source of refrigeration for cooling and
dehumidification and means for the circulation and cleaning of air, with or without external air distribution
ducting. It may also include means for heating, humidifying or ventilating air.
These machines are equipped with a water cooled or air cooled condenser. For the purpose of this definition,
a split air-conditioner for which the air cooled condenser or condensing unit is built as a separate package
for remote field installation and interconnection shall also be considered as a packaged air-conditioner.
PLENUM : An air compartment or chamber to which one or more ducts are connected and which forms
part of an air distribution system.
REFRIGERANT : The fluid used for heat transfer in a refrigerating system, which absorbs heat at a low
temperature and a low pressure of the fluid and rejects heat at a higner temperature and a higher pressure
of the fluid, usually involving changes of phase of the fluid.
REHEATING :The process by which air, which has been cooled down in order to condense out part of the
moisture it contains, is heated again in order to raise its temperature to a suitable level.
RETURN AIR GRILLE: These are fittings fixed at the openings through which air is taken out from the air
conditioned enclosure by an air-conditioning plant or unit.
ROOM AIR-CONDITIONER:A factory made, encased assembly designed as a self-contained unit primarily
for mounting in a window or through the wall or as a console. It is designed to provide free delivery of
conditioned air to an enclosed space, room or zone (conditioned space). It includes a prime source of
refrigeration for cooling and dehumidification and means for the circu1ation and cleaning of air. It may also
include means for heating, humidifying, ventilating or exhausting air.
SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSERS/GRILLES : These are fittings fixed at the openings through which air is
delivered into the air-conditioned enclosure by an air-conditioning plant or unit.
TEMPERATURE, DRY BULB :The temperature of air as registered by a thermometer .
TEMPERATURE, WET BULB :The temperature at which water, by evaporating into air, may bring the air to
saturation adiabatically at the same temperature. Wet-bulb temperature (without qualification) is the
temperature indicated by a wet bulb psychrometer constructed and used according to specifications.
VENTILATION: The process of supplying and/or removing air by natural or mechanical means to or from
any space. Such air may or may not nave been conditioned.
3.1.5 General Provisions

3.1.5.1 Air-conditioning, heating and ventilation system shall be designed, constructed and installed in
accordance with good engineering practice such as described in the ASHRAE (American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers) Handbooks, HRA (Heating, Refrigerating and Air
conditioning Institute of Canada) digest, HI (Hydraulic Institute of USA) manuals and IHVE (Institute of
Heating and Ventilating Engineers, UK) Guide.
3.1.5.2 All electrical work in connection with air-conditioning, heating and ventilation system shall be
carried out in accordance with the provisions of latest Bangladesh Electricity Act and the provisions of any
of its regulations and bye-laws, and shall also comply with the requirements of Chapter 2 of Part 8.
3.1.5.3 All plumbing work in connection with air-conditioning, heating and ventilation system shall be
carried out in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 6.
3.1.5.4 All gas and fuel pitJing in connection with air-conditioning, heating and ventilation system shall be
carried out in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 7 of Part 8.
3.1.5.5 Fire Safety : Installations of equipment of air-conditioning, heating and ventilation system shall
conform to the requirements of Part 4.
3.2 PLANNING
3.2.1 General
3.2.1.1 All relevant aspects of air-conditioning, heating and ventilation system installations shall be
analysed and evaluated properly during the planning stage of the building in order to determine the
necessary provisions to be kept in the building for proper and safe installation of the system machinery,
equipment and other facilities.
8-48
Chapter 3
3.2.1.2 Necessary particulars of electrical requirements of air-conditioning, heating or ventilation system

shall be determined early in the planning stage to include it in the electrical provisions of the building.
3.2.1.3 Where necessary, all plans, calculations, specifications and data for air-conditioning, heating and
ventilation system serving all buildings and all occupancies within the scope of the Code shall be supplied
to the Authority, for review purposes. .
3.2.2 Building Planning

3.2.2.1 Orientation of Building : Effect of orientation of building and arrangement of rooms/spaces shall
be analysed in the planning stage of the building to find out the most effective plan of the building in terms
of building use, application of air-conditioning, heating and ventilation system and reduction of energy
consumption.
3.2.2.2 Building Design and Use of Materials : Analysis shall be carried out in the design stage for
selection of appropriate shading devices and other materials as set forth in Sec 3.3.1 so as to take advantage
of reduction in energy consumption related air-conditioning, heating and ventilation system.
3.2.2.3 Equipment Space : Requirements of space for erection and installation of air-conditioning, heating
and ventilation system equipment and machinery (ducting, cooling; heating and air-conditioning
equipment; refrigerating machinery, boiler etc.) shall be determined during the planning stage of the
building so that it can be incorporated in the building planning effectively. Requirements of
equipment/machinery space sh(!ll be determined taking consideration of actual equipment and machinery
space; clearance space for operation; maintenance and fire prevention requirement; access space and other
requirements of this Code. Building plan shall also include adequate provisions for transportation of
equipment and machinery to and from equipment/machinery room, installation of outdoor au inlets and
exbaust air outlets.
·
3.2.2.4 Building Structure : Structural design requirements viz. load on the floor or ceiling; punches in
the roof, floor and walls; vertical shaft for pipe risers and duct risers; concrete ducts etc. shall be determined
in the P. lanning stage to make adequate rovisions in the structural design and to keep such provisions in
r
the building. The structural design shal consider static and dynamic loads of equipment and machinery
including vibration of machinery.
3.2.2.5 Design Drawings : For the purpose of effective installation of air-conditioning, heating and
ventilation system, working drawings showing layout of machinery, equipment, ducts, pipes etc., details of
builders' works, holes and/ or punches in roof, floors, walls, supports for machinery I equipment etc. shall be
prepared prior to finalization of building design drawings. Such drawings/documents shall be properly
stored for future reference.
3.3 AIR-CONDITIONING
3.3.1 Building Design Requirements

3.3.1.1 Glazing .
a) Building design shall consider all the aspects for reduction of heat transfer through the glazing.
·
Building orientation shall be such that, if possible, glazing in walls subject to direct and intensive sun
exposure shall be avoided. In case where it is not possible to do so, necessary protective measures shall
be taken to reduce heat transfer through the glazing. Such protective measures may be in the form of
sun breakers, double glazing, heat resistant glass or application of other shading devices.
b) When sun breakers are used, it shall preferably be 1 m away from the wall face, with free ventilation,
particularly from bottom to top, bemg provided for cooling of sun breakers and window by free
convection. Conduction from sun breal<ers to main building shall be minimum. Sun breakers shall
shade the maximum glazed area possible, especially for the aftitude and azimuth angle of the sun. Sun
breakers shall preferably be light and bright in colour so as to reflect back as much of the sunlight as
possible.
c) Where the above protection is in the form of reflective surfaces, adequate care shall be taken to avoid
any hazard to the traffic surrounding the building and people on the road because of the reflected light
from the surfaces.
d) Application of any protection shall not restrict entry of light to a limit demanding artificial lights.
3.3.1.2 Roof Insulation : Construction of exposed roofs shall be such that the heat transmission through
the roof is not excessive. Where required the overall heat transfer coefficient (U) of the roof exposed to sun
shall be reduced effectively by using appropriate construction materials and/or proper type of insulation
material (s). The insulation shall be properly waterproofed to prevent loss of insulating properties.
3.3.2 Design Conditions

3.3.2.1 Inside Design Conditions
a) For comfort air-conditioning, the inside desi�n conditions shall be selected with an objective to reduce
energy consumption in the operation of the air-conditioning system. Acceptable values of inside design

PartS
Building Services
conditions for summer is provided in Table 8.3.1. Unless otherwise specifically required, the design
calculations shall be based on the normal practice values of Table 8.3.1.
b) To avoid thermal shock, the difference between the dry bulb temperatures of outdoor air and indoor air
shall not exceed 11°C. If it is absolutely necessarx to have a difference more than 11°C, there shall have
adequate provision for ante-room to reduce the effect of thermal shock.
c) For air-conditioning systems other than comfort air-conditioning, design conditions reg_uired by the
specific processes involved or applications may be adopted. When required proper protective measures
shall be taken for persons workmg therein.
d) Velocity of air in an air-conditioned space, in the zone between the floor level and the 1.5 m level, shall
be within 0.12 m/s and 0.25 m/s for comfort applications for commercial buildings, and for other
applications it shall not exceed 0.5 m/s.
Table 8.3.1
Inside Design Conditions for Summer"
Type ot Application Normal Practice Special Practice

Dry Bulb Relative Temp. Relative
oc Humidity Swing
b �?b Humidity
% oc oc
GENERAL COMFORT 23.5
Wa artment, House, Hotel, Office, 24.5-26 55-50 1-2 - so
ospital, School etc. 24.5
RETAIL SHOPS 24.0
�
(Short term occu ancy) 24.5-26 60-50 1-2 - so
Bank, Barber or eauty Shop, 25.5
Department Store,
Supermarket etc.
LOW SENSIBLE HEAT
FACTOR APPLICATIONS 24.5
Auditorium, Places of worship, Bar 25.5-26.5 60 -so 0.5-1 - 60-50
Restaurant, Kitchen etc. 25.5
FACTORY COMFORT 25
Assembly areas, Machining rooms 25.5-26.5 60-50 1-2 - ss -so
etc. 26.5
Note: a The room design dry bulb temperature should be reduced when hot radiant panels are adjacent to
the occupant and increased when cold panels are adjacent, to compensate for the increase or
decrease in radiant heat exchange from the body. A hot or cold panel may be unshaded glass or
glass block windows (hot in summer, cold in winter) and thin partitions with hot or cold spaces
adjacent. Hot tanks, furnaces, or machines are hot panels.
b Temperature swing is above the thermostat setting at peak summer load conditions.
3.3.2.2 Outside Design Conditions

a) The outside design conditions for summer months for different cities are provided in Table 8.3.2.
Selection of outside design conditions from this table shall be based on requirements of the application
and the per cent of time the outside air temperature is allowed to exceed the outside design conditions.
b) In case of stringent design conditions a meteorologist with experience in applied climatology may be
consulted to evaluate conditions such as; the formation of heat sinks in uroan areas; the cfuiation of
extreme temperatures; project sites located remotely from reporting stations.
3.3.2.3 Ventilation Air

a) Every sp ace served by the air-conditioning system shall be provided :with outside fresh air not less than
the min1mum amount mentioned in Table 8.3.3. If adequate temperature regulation along with efficient
filtration of air and absorption of odour and gas are provided, tl\e amount of fresh air requirement may
be reduced. However, in no case the outdoor air quantity shall be lower than 2.5 f./s per person.
b) In hospital operation theaters, all outdoor air supply is recommended to overcome explosion hazard of
anesthetics and to main. tain sterile condition. However, if adequate filtration with effic1ent absorption of
anesthetics and laminar flow of supply air is provided, the outside air requirement may be substantially
reduced. Recirculation of air shall comply with the requirements of Sec 3.7.3.6(b ) .
3.3.3 Noise and Vibration

3.3.3.1 General : Air-conditioning, heating and ventilation system desigrt and installations shall consider
all the aspects of noise and vibration control related to the system and shall conform to the requirements of
Chapter 4. Selection and installation of equipment for air-conditioning, heating and ventilation system shall
8-50
Chapter3
be such that noise and vibration transmitted to the space served by the system shall not exceed the
recommended value for the space served.
Table8.3.2
Outside Design Conditions for Major Citiesa
Column-1 Column-2 Column-3 Column-4

Design Dry Bulb and Mean Coincident Wet Mean Design Wet Bulb
b Daily d
Bulb Temperature (°C) Temperatures (°C)
Name of City Range
(OC)C
1% 2.5% 5% 1% 2.5% 5%
Wet Wet Wet
�?b bulb �?b bulb �?b bulb
temp. temp. temp temp. temp. temp.
Dhaka 36 27.5 35 27.5 34 28 7.':> 2�.5 21:S.5
Chittagong 33.5 27.5 33 27.5 32.5 27.5 7.0 28.5 �� 27.5
Khulna 36.5 29 35.5 29 34.5 29 8.0 30 29.5 29
Rajshahi 39.5 24 38 24.5 36 25 9.5 29.5 29 29
Note: a This table has been prepared by statistical analysis of weather data of ten years, recorded three hourly by
trained observers of Bangladesh Meteorological Department.
b The dry bulb temperatures presented in column-2, represent values which have equalled or exceeded by
1%, 2.5%, and 5% of the total hours during the summer months of April though August. The coincident
wet bulb temperatures listed with each design dry bulb temperature is the mean of all wet bulb
temperatures occurring at the specific dry bulb design temperatures. These values shall be used for cooling
load calculation.
c
Mean daily·range temperatures presented in column-3 are the difference between the average daily
maximum and average daily minimum temperatures during the wannest months at each station.
d Wet bulb temperatures presented in column-4, represent values which have been equalled or exceeded by
1%, 2.5% and 5% of the total hours during the summer months of April through August. These values
shall be used for selection of Cooling Tower and other similar equipment.
Table8.3.3
Outdoor Air Requirements
Outdoor Air Quantity (f./s per Person

Occupancy Classification Unless Otherwise Indicated)
Recommended Minimum
Assembly
Food services
Bars and cocktail lounges 17.5-20 15
Cafeterias, fast food centres 17.5 15
Dining rooms 7.5-10 5
Kitchensa 17.5 15
Museums
Exhibit halls 5-7.5 3.5
Warehouses 3.5-5 2.5
Workrooms 7.5-10 5
Public (meeting) facilities
Assembly rooms 10-12.5 7.5
Ballrooms 10-12.5 7.5
Conference rooms 12.5-15 10
Lobbies 5-7.5 3.5
Sports and amusement facilities
Billiard rooms and game rooms 7.5-10 7.5
Bowling centres (seating areas) 10-12.5 7.5
Playing floors, gymnasiums 12.5-15 10
Ramps, foyers and lobbies 7.5-10 5
Spectator area 12.5-15 10
Swimming pools and deck areasa 10 -12.5 7.5
Tennis, squash and handball courts 12.5-15 10
(indoor)

Part 8
Building Services

Theaters
Auditoriums (no smoking) 2.5-5 2.5
Lobbies, foyers and lounges 12.5-15 10
Projection boothsa -
5
Stages, TV and movie studios 6-7.5 5
Ticket booths 3.5-5 2.5
Transportation(terminals)
Control Towers 15-17.5 12.5
Hangars, platform, concourses 7.5-10 5
Waiting rooms, ticket and baggage areas 10-12.5 7.5
corridors and gate areas
Business
Banks(see Offices)
Vaults 2.5 2.5
Barber, beauty and health services
Barber shops 5-7.5 3.5
Beauty shops (hair dressers) 15-17.5 12.5
Reducing salons (exercise rooms) 15-17.5 12.5
Sauna baths, steam rooms 2.5 2.5
Offices
Computer rooms 3.5-5 2.5
Conference rooms 15-20 12.5
Duplicating and printing rooms 5-7.5 3.5
Office space 7.5-12.5 7.5
Waiting rooms 7.5-10 5
Darkrooms 7.5-1 0 5
Research institutes
Animal rooms 22.5-25 20
Darkrooms, spectroscopy rooms 7.5-10 5
Laboratories 10-12.5 7.5
Laboratories, radioisotope chemically and
biologically toxic" 10-12.5 10
Veterinary hospitals
Kennels, stalls 15-17.5 12.5
Operating rooms 15-17.5 12.5
Reception rooms 7.5-10 5
Educational
Schools
Auditoriums 2.5-3.8 2.5
Classrooms 5-7.5 5
Gymnasiums 12.5-15 10
Laboratories 5-7.5 5
Libraries 5-6 3.5
Lunchrooms, dining halls, common rooms,
lounges 7.5-10 5
Music rooms, rehearsal rooms 7.5-10 5
Training shops 5-7.5 5
Corridors 10-12.5 7.5
Factory and industrial
Working area -
12.5
Institutional
Correctional facilities
Bedrooms 5-7.5 3.5
Day rooms, activity spaces 10-12.5 7.5
Groups homes
Bedrooms 5-7.5 3.5
General living area 10-12.5 7.5
Kitchensa 15-25 10
(Continued to next p age)
8-52
Chapter3

Hospitals, nursing and convalescent homes

Autopsy roomsa 20-25 15
Delivery rooms, trauma rooms -
10
Laboratories 10-12.5 7.5
Operating rooms -
10
Patient rooms 7.5-10 5
Pharmacy, medication rooms 10-12.5 7.5
Physical therapy areas and treatment 10-12.5 7.5
rooms
Recovery and intensive care rooms -
7.5
Soiled utility rooms, janitor closets 3.5-5 2.5
Mercantile
General
Sales floors and showrooms 5-7.5 3.5
Dressing rooms 5-7.5 3.5
Malls and arcades 5-7.5 3.5
Shipping areas 7.5-10 7.5
Storage areas 3.5-5 2.5
Warehouses 5-7.5 3.5
Special shops
Automotive service stationsb 10-15 7.5
b 5
Pet shops -
Florists 3.5 2.5

Supermarkets
Meat processing rooms 2.5 2.5
Residential
Dwelling units
General living area, bedrooms, all other
rooms 3.5-5 2.5
Kitchens, baths, toiletsc 15-25 10
Hotels, motels
Bedrooms(single, double) 5-7.5 3.5
Corridors 3.5-5 2.5
Living rooms (suites) 7.5-10 5
Storage
Repair garages, public garages(enclosed) -
7.5
Warehouses 5-7.5 3.5
Communication
�
Composin rooms, engraving shops,
te ephone rooms 5-7.5 3.5
Press rooms 10-12.5 7.5
TV /Radio broadcasting booths, or studios,
motion picture and TV stages 17.5-20 15
Special areas
Elevators -
5
Exits and corridorsb -
0.1
Lockers and dressing rooms -
15
Nonpublic bathrooms 15-25 10
Public bathrooms 10-12.5 7.5
Survival shelters -
2.5
Utility roomsc -
0.1
a
Note: Return air shall be exhausted
b Outdoor air quantity per m2 of floor area
c Installed capacity for intermittent use.
3.3.3.2 Equipment Room: Equipment room for installation of air handling units, refrigeration machinery,
pumps, boilers, blowers and other equipment, which produce noise and vibration, sha11 not preferably be
located adjacent to any acoustically sensitive area. Location of the equipment room shall be such that direct
transmission of noise and vibration from the equipment room to acoustically sensitive areas do not occur.
Where necessary, appropriately designed sound barriers shall be used to restrict transmission of noise from
equipment room to any acoustically sensitive area. Similarly adequate measures shall be taken to restrict
transmission of vibration from equipment room to other rooms.

PartS
Building Services
3.3.3.3 Selection of Equipment : Where possible, the equipment shall be selected which produce low
sound power level consistent with the required performance and ensuring operation at maximum efficiency.
If necessary noise levels shall be reduced by appropriate shrouding of the equipment. Equipment shall be
so oriented that the noise will be radiated away from the likely areas of complaint.
3.3.3.4 Noise Control

a) Air Ducts : Air ducts shall be so designed and installed to avoid any transmission of noise and
vibration which may be picked up by the duct system from equipment room or adjoining rooms. Duct
system shall not allow cross talk or noise transfer from one occupied space to another.
Duct system shall be appropriately designed, constructed and installed to obtain adequate attenuation
of noise required to maintain recommended noise level in the air-conditioned space.
Duct construction and installation shall be such that drumming effect of duct walls and noise
transmission through the duct walls can be minimized to approved level.
b) Plenum Chamber : If required, properly designed plenum chamber, lined with approved sound
absorbed material, and/or sound attenuators sha11 be used for attenuation of noise.
c) Flow Control Devices : Air dampers and other flow control devices shall be so selected that noise
generation do not exceed approved levels.
d) Air Terminals : Air terminals shall be selected for the approved noise generation characteristics.
e) Piping: Velocity of fluids in piping shall be so selected that noise generation do not exceed approved
levels.
3.3.3.5 Vibration Control : Appropriately designed vibration isolators shall be installed under the
machinery to restrict vibration transmission to structures. Similarly vibration isolators shall also be used
between a machinery and all pipe work and duct work including the supports when applicable.
3.4 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
3.4.1 Duct Work

3.4.1.1 General
a ) Supply air, return air and outside air for air-conditioning, heating and ventilation systems shall be
conducted through duct systems. Ducts and plenums shall be of independent construction or shall be
formed by parts of the building structure.
b) Supply and return air plenums shall be limited to uninhabited crawl spaces, areas above a ceiling or
below the floor, or attic spaces. Plenums shall be limited to one fire area. Fuel-fired equipment shall not
be installed within a plenum. Venting systems and exhaust ducts shall not be extended into or through
ducts or plenums.
c) Prohibited Use : Exits and exit access corridors shall not be used as supply or return air ducts or
plenums.
Exception : The restriction on the use of the space between the corridor ceiling and the floor or roof structure above
as return air plenum shall not apply when the corridor is not required to be of fire resistance rated construction or is
separated from the plenum by fire resistance rated construction or is located within a dwelling unit.
d) Flood Proofing : For building located in a flood hazard zone, plenum spaces shall be either placed
above the base flood elevation or protected so as to prevent water from entering or accumulating within
the plenum space during floods up to the base flood elevation.
3.4.1.2 Material
a) All ducts, duct connectors, associated fittings and plenums used to convey supply air, return air, and
outdoor air for air-conditioning, heating and ventilation system shall be constructed of steel, aluminum
alloy or some other approved metal. Ducts, plenums and fittings may be constructed of concrete, clay or
ceramics when installed in the ground or in a concrete slab, provided the joints are tightly sealed.
b) When gypsum products are exposed in ducts or plenums, the air temperature shall neither be lower
than 10°C nor be higher than 52°C and the moisture content shall be controlled so as not to adversely
affect the material. Gypsum products shall not be exposed in ducts serving evaporative coolers.
3.4.1.3 Combustibles within Ducts or Plenums : Plenums shall be constructed with non-combustible
materials. Materials exposed within ducts or plenums shall have a flame spread index of not more than 25
and smoke developed rating of not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
8-54
Chapter 3
Exceptions:
i) Return air and outside air ducts, plenums and concealed spaces which serve a dwelling unit may be of combustible
construction.
ii) Air filters serving dwelling unit.
iii) Air filters used as water evaporation medium in an evaporative cooler.
iv) Charcoal filters when protected with an approved fire suppression system.
v) Exposed electric cables installed in concealed space used as plenums exhibit a flame propagation of not more than
1.5 m and produce smoke having a peak optical density not greater than 0.5 and average optical density not greater
than 0.15 when tested in accordance with UL910.
vi) Nonmetallic fire sprinkler piping in the plenum exhibit a flame propagation of not more than 1.5 m and shall
produce smoke having a peak optical density not greater than 0.5 a nd average optical density not greater than 0.15
when tested in accordance with UL1820.
3.4.1.4 Duct Construction

a) Ducts shall be of square, rectangular, round or oval cross-section. Construction of required size of duct
shall be as per good practice described in ASHRAE Handbooks and SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air
conditioning Contractors' National Association, USA) duct construction standards.
b) Joints of duct systems shall be made substantially airtight by means of tapes, mastics, gasketing or other
means and shall have no opening other than those required for proper operation and maintenance of
the system. Access openings shall be provided in the duct system for penodic cleaning of the system.
Removable grilles requiring only the foosening of catches or screws for removal may be considered as
access openings. Wall< in access doors shall be so constructed that the door may be readily opened from
the inside without the use of keys.
c) Vibration isolators installed between equipment and metal ducts (or casings) or between two sections of
the ducts where duct crosses building expansion joint, shall be made of an approved flame retardant
fabric or shall consist of sleeve joints with packing of approved material having flame spread rating of
not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating of not more than 50 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84. Vibration isolation connectors constructed of fabric shall not exceed 250 mrn in length.
3.4.1.5 Duct Coverings

a) Supply and return air ducts and plenums of a cooling or heating system shall be insulated with
approved quality insulating material of adequate thickness required as per location of the duct system
ana temperatures of air inside and around the duct system. lnsulation shall be of such quality and
thickness to prevent the formation of condensation on the exterior or interior walls of any duct.
b) Materials used within the ducts and plenums for insulation, sound absorption or other purposes shall
have a mold, humidity and erosion resistant face that meets the requirements of accepted standards.
These materials when exposed to air velocities within the ducts in excess of 10 m/s shall be fastened
with both adhesive and mechanical fasteners, and exposed edges shall have adequate treatment to
withstand the operating velocity.
c) Duct coverings, duct linings, vapour barrier facings, tapes, adhesives used in duct system shall have a
flame spread rating not over 25 and a smoke development rating no higher than 50 when tested as a
composite installation:
Exceptions:
i) Duct coverings shall not be required to meet these requirements where they are located entirely outside of
a building, do not penetrate a wall or roof, and do not create an exposure hazard.
ii) Duct covering having a flame spread index not exceeding 50 and a smoke density not greater than 100 may
be used in dwelling or apartment houses where the duct system serves not more than one dwelling unit.
d) Duct coverings, linings, including associated tapes and adhesives shall be interrupted at least 1 m from
heat source in a duct system such as electric resistance heaters, fuel burning heaters or furnaces and at
the area of a fire damper or fire door, where the duct penetrates a fire separation. Interior insulation and
acoustical linings shall be placed so as not to interfere with positive closing of fire dampers or other
closures.
e) Service openings shall not be concealed.
3.4.1.6 Duct Installation

a) An air distribution system shall be designed and installed as per good practice described in ASHRAE
Handbooks and SMACNA Handbook so as to meet the requirement of proper distribution of air as per
provisions of this code. The installation of an air distribution system shall not affect the fire protection
requirements specified in this Code.
b) Ducts and all parts of the duct system shall be substantially supported and securely fastened to the
structural members of the building with approved devices of noncombustible material designed to
carry the required loads. Duct supports shall not lessen the fire protections of structural members .
Ducts shall be braced and guyed to prevent lateral or horizontal swmg.

PartS
Building Services
c) Hangers shall have sufficient strength and durability to properly and safely support the duct work.
Hangers shall have sufficient resistance to the corrosive effect of the atmosphere to which they will be
exposed. Hangers shall not be used in direct contact with a dissimilar metal that would cause galvanic
action in the hanger, duct, fastenings, or structure.
d) Ducts shall not be hung from or supported by suspended ceilings.
e) Metal ducts shall not usually be installed within 100 mm of the ground. Metal ducts not having an
approved protective coating, when installed in or under concrete slab shall be encased in at least 50 mm
oi concrete. Metallic ducts having an approved protective coating and nonmetallic ducts shall be
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
f) When ducts penetrate any masonry wall, it shall either be lined with felt to isolate it from the masonry,
or an air gap shall be left around it. .
g) All underground ducts located in a flood hazard zone shall be capable of resisting hydrostatic and
hydrodynamic loads and stresses, including the effects of buoyancy, during the occurrence of flooding
to the base flood elevation.
h) Ducts installed in locations where they are subject to mechanical damage by vehicles or from other
causes shall be protected by approved barriers.
3.4.1.7 Fire Damper

a) Fire dampers shall be provided at locations where air distribution systems penetrate assemblies that
are required to be fire resistance rated by this Code.
Exceptions:
Fire dampers are not required in the following cases:
i) Where an exhaust duct penetrates a fire resistance rated shaft wall and the subduct extends not less than 560
mm vertically upward.
ii) At penetrations of tenant separation and corridor walls in buildings equipped throughout with an automatic
sprinkler system installed in accordance with the Building Code.
iii) Where the ducts are constructed of steel and are part of an engineered smoke removal system.
iv) At penetration of corridor walls where the ducts are constructed of steel and do not have openings which
communicate the corridor with adjacent spaces or rooms.
v) At penetrations of a roof assembly where ducts are open to the atmosphere.
vi) In hazardous exhaust systems.
vii) Where ceiling dampers are installed in accordance with the building code.
viii) In garage exhaust or supply shafts which are separated from all other building shafts by not less than 2-hour
fire resistance rated fire separation assembly.
ix) In ducted air-conditioning, heating and ventilation systems penetrating walls with a 1 hour fire resistance
rating or less. Where fire dampers will interfere with the operation of the smoke control system, approved
alternative protective devices shall be utilized.
b) Fire dampers shall comply with ULSSS and bear the label of an approved agency. Fire dampers shall be
installed m accordance w1th the manufacturing installation instructions.
c) Fire dampers shall be accessible. Suitable openings with tightly fitted covers shall be provided to make
fire dampers accessible for inspection and this shall be large enough to permit maintenance and
resetting of the damper.
d) Ductwork shall be connected to fire damper sleeves or assemblies in such a way that collapse of the
ductwork will not dislodge the damper.
3.4.1.8 Automatic Shutoff

a) Each single air distribution system providing air-conditioning, heating or ventilation air in excess of
1000 f./s in Groui' A, Division 5; Group B; Group C; Group D; GroupE, Division 1, 2 and 3; Group F,
Division 1, 2, 3 and 5; Group G, Division 2; Group H, Division 2; Group J occupancies shall be equipped
with an automatic shutoff provision activated by smoke detectors. When the system serves more than
one occupancy, automatic snutoff shall be provided.
Exceptions :
i) Automatic shutoff need not be installed when all rooms have direct exit to the exterior of the building.
ii) Automatic shutoff need not be installed in systems specifically designed for smoke control.
b) Smoke Detection: Smoke detectors required by Sec 3.4.1.8(a) shall be installed in the main return-air
duct ahead of any outside air inlet or they may be installed in each room or space served by the return
air duct. Detectors shall also be installed in the supply duct, downstream of the filters. Activation of any
detector shall cause the air moving equipment to automatically shut down.
8-56
Chapter3
3.4.2 Air Terminals

3.4.2.1 Registers, Grilles and Diffusers : Supply air registers, grilles and diffusers; and return air grills
shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Selection and installation of
registers, grilles and diffusers shall comply with the requirements of air distribution system.
3.4.2.2 Ventilating Ceilings : Perforated ceilings may be used for air supply except in exit corridors
which are required to be of fire resistive construction. Ceiling material shalf be of Class-I flame spread
classification on both sides in accordance with requirements of this Code. All wiring shall be in enclosures
regardless of the voltage carried. Suspended ventilating ceiling supports shall 6e of non combustible
materials.
3.4.2.3 Visual Duct Openings : Duct openings in bathrooms, toilets and changing rooms shall prevent
visual ?bservation from adjoining rooms.
3.4.2.4 Capped Opening: All duct openings shall be capped during construction.
3.4.2.5 Return Air Intake and Outside Air Intake : Return air and outside air intake openings shall be
located in accordance with the requirements of Sec 3.5.2.7 (b).
3.4.2.6 Exhaust Openings :Outside exhaust openings shall be located so as not to create nuisance. Exhaust
air shall not be directed onto walkways.
3.4.2.7 Opening Protection: Outside air intake and exhaust openings shall be protected with corrosion
resistant screens, louvres or grilles. Openings shall be protected against all local weather conditions. Exhaust
openings shall have provision to prevent back draft under wind conditions.
3.4.3 Exhaust Air Systems

3.4.3.1 General
a) Exhaust air systems serving kitchens or toilets and/or bathrooms shall be independent exhaust systems
and shall not be combined with exhaust air ducts serving other areas, except at immediately before the
point of final delivery to the outside, such as at the base of a roof ventilator or when all interconnected
systems are equipped with suitable back pressure devices to prevent passage of odours from one
system to anotner when the fan is not in operation.
b) Exhaust ducts shall have provision for removal of condensates where this may be a problem, such as for
swimming pools and shower exhausts and for these applications duct joints shall be water tight.
c) Construction and installation of exhaust air ducts for toilet, bathrooms and swimming pools shall be in
accordance with the provisions of Sec 3.4.1.
d) Design, construction and installation of exhaust air systems for exhaust of harmful and hazardous
gases and industrial/process exhaust gases shall be in accordance with the provisions of Sec 3.7.4.
e) Desi�, construction and installation of kitchen exhaust system shall be in accordance with the
3.5 AIR-CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
3.5.1 General
3.5.1.1 Scope : Air-conditioning, heating and ventilation equipment shall conform to the requirements of
this Code.
Equipment shall not be installed or altered in violation of this Code. Defective materials or parts shall be
replaced in such a manner as not to invalidate any approval.
3.5.1.2 Approval :When required each appliance shall be app roved by the building official for safe use or
comply with applicable nationally recognized standard. For this purpose installers shall furnish satisfactory
evi<fence that the appliance is constructed in conformity with the requirements of this Code. The
permanently attached label of an approved agency may be accepted as such evidence.
3.5.1.3 Labelling : All mechanical equipment and appliances shall bear permanent and legible factory
applied name plate on which shall appear construction and operation data including safety requirements.
3.5.1.4 Testing : Where required an approved agency shall test a representative sample of the mechanical
equipment or appliance being labelled to the standard or standards pertinent to the equipment or appliance.
Tne approved agency shall maintain a record of all tests performed. The records snall provide sufficient
detail to verify compliance with the test standard.
3.5.1.5 Equipment Installation

a) General : Mechanical equipment and appliances shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's installation mstructions for the labelled equipment. Connections to mechanical

PartS
Building Services
equipment or appliances, such as fuel supply, electrical, hydronic piping, vent and ducts shall conform
to the requirements of this Code.
b) Clearance : Appliances shall be installed with the minimum clearances to combustibles for which the
appliance has been tested as specified by the manufacturer.
c) Anchorage of Appliances : Appliances designed to be fixed in position shall be securely fastened in

position. Supports for appliances shall be designed and constructed to sustain vertical and horizontal
loads within the stress limitations specified in tfie Building Code.
d) Noise and Vibration: Equipment noise and vibration transmitted to the occupied space shall not exceed
the recommended value for the space. Selection and installation of equipment snail be in accordance
with Sec 3.3.3.
e) Identification of Equipment : When more than one air-conditioning, heating, refrigerating or

ventilation systems are installed on the roof of a building or within the building, each equipment shall
be identified as to the area or space served by the equipment.
3.5.1.6 Access : All mechanical equipment and appliances shall be accessible for ins:pection, service, rei'air
and replacement without removing permanent construction. Unless otherwise spec1fied not less than 750
mm of working space and platform snail be provided to service the equipment or appliance.
Appliance controls, gauges, filters, blowers, motors and burners shall be accessible. The operating
instructions shall be clearly displayed near the appliance where they can be read easily.
3.5.1.7 Location
a) Remote Location : Where an appliance is located in a remote location, a walkway having a minimum
width of 600 mm shall be prov1aed, leading from the access opening to the appliance.
b) Hazardous Location : Appliances installed in garages, warehouses, or other areas where they may be
subject to mechanical damage shall be instalfed behind suitable protective barriers or at a suitable
height above the floor or located out of the normal path of vehicles to guard against such damages.
Air-conditionin�,; or heating equipment located in a garage and which generates a glow, spark or flame
capable of ignitmg flammable vapours shall be installed in such a way that the pilots and burners or
heating elements and switches are at least 450 mm above the floor level.
Where such appliances installed within a garage are enclosed in a separate approved compartment
having access only from outside of the garage such appliances may be installed at floor level, provided
the required combustion air is taken from and discharged to the exterior of the garage.
Heating equipment located in rooms where cellulose nitrate plastic or other explosive materials are
stored or processed shall comply with the requirements of Part 4.
c) Outdoor Installation : Mechanical equipment and appliance located outdoors shall be approved for
outdoor installation. Mechanical equipment and appliances installed outdoors shall conform to the
requirements of Sec 3.5.1.5.
Where appliances are located within 3 m of a roof edge or open side of a drop greater than 600 mm,
guards shall be provided. Height of the guard shall be a minimum of 900 mm and a maximum of 1050
mm above the surface.
Equipment that are located outdoors and may be adversely affected by sun and/or water shall be
adequately I'rotected. Access shall be possible under all weather conditions. All outdoor installed
equipment shall be so located that the sound level shall not be more than 65 dB when measured
anywhere on the property boundary line.
3.5.1.8 Electrical Installations

a) Equipment regulated by this code requiring electrical connections of more than 50 volts shall have a
positive means of disconnect adjacent to and in sight from the equipment served. A 230 volt AC
grounding type receptacle shall be located within 8 m of the equipment for service and maintenance
purposes."The receptacle need not be located on the same level as tne equipment. Low voltage wiring of
50 volts or less witnin a structure shall be installed in a manner to prevent physical damage.
b) Permanent lighting shall be provided to illuminate the area in which an appliance is located. For remote
locations, the light switch shall be located near the access opening leading to the appliance.
Exceptions :
Lighting fixtures need not be installed when the fixed lighting for the building will provide sufficient light for safe
servicing of the equipment.
8-58
Chapter3
3.5.1.9 Condensate Wastes: Condensates from air cooling coils, fuel burning condensing appliances and
the overflow from evaporative coolers and similar water supplied equipment shall oe collected and
discharged to an approved lumbing fixture and disposal area. Tne waste pipe shall have a slope of not less
f
than 1 in 100 and snail be o approved corrosion resistant material and approved size. Condensate or waste
water shall not drain over a puolic way.
3.5.1.10 Personnel Protection : A suitable and substantial metal guard shall be provided around exposed
flywheels, fans, pulleys, belts and moving machinery which are portions of air-conditioning, heating and
ventilation system.
3.5.2 Cooling by Refrigeration

3.5.2.1 General
a) Scope : Every air cooling system and equipment using refrigerant coils, chilled water coils and brine
coils shall conform to the requirements of this section and to the applicable requirements of Sec 3.5.1
and 3.6.
b) Use of Group 2 Refrigerants : Direct refrigerant systems containing Group 2 refrigerants shall not serve
an air-cooling or air-conditioning system used for human comfort.
3.5.2.2 Installation
a) Clearance From Ground: When cooling equipment other than ducts and piping is suspended from the
under floor construction, a clearance of at least 150 mm shall be proviaed between the base of the
equipment and the ground.
b) Exterior Wall Installation: All equipment mounted on exterior wall at a height of 6 m or more above the
ground shall be provided on a platform not less than 750 mm in depth, with 1 m high handrails on
operation and control side of the equipment. The platform shall be accessible through catwalk not less
than 450 mm wide and handrail of 1 m high from inside the building or from roof access.
Exceptions:
Equipment located on exterior wall but removable from inside may not require platform and catwalk.
3.5.2.3 Access
a) Cooling Units : Except for piping, ducts and similar equipment that does not require servicin� or
adjusting, an unobstructed access and passageway not less than 600 mm in width and 2m in he1ght
shall be provided to every cooling units instaHed inside buildings.
Exception:
The access opening to a cooling unit located in an attic space may be reduced to 750 mm in length and width,
provided the unit can be replaced from this opening or another opening into this space or area.
b) Attic or Furred Space Installation: Access to and working platforms for cooling units or cooling system
compressors located in an attic or furred space shall be provided with a solid continuous flooring not
less than 600 mm in width from the access opening to the required working space and platform in front
of the equipment when access opening is located more than r m away from working space.
c) Filters, Fuel Valves and Air Handlers: An unobstructed access space not less than 600 mm in width and
750 mm in height shall be provided to filters, fuel control valves and air handling units. Refrigerant,
chilled water and brine piping control valves shall be accessible.
Exception:
An access opening from the unobstructed access space which opens directly to such equipment may be reduced to
375 mm in the least dimension if the equipment can be serviced, repaired and replaced from this opening without
removing permanent construction.
d) Refrigeration Machinery Room Installations: Access to equipment located in a refrigeration machinery

room shall comply with Sec 3.6.
e) Roof or Exterior Wall Installation

i) Equipment installed on the roof or on an exterior wall shall be accessible under all weather
conditions. A portable ladder or other portable temporary means may be used for access to
equipment located on the roof, or on extenor wall of a smgle-storey portion of the building.
ii) Platform: When the roof has a slope greater than 4 in 12 a level working platform at least 750 mm
in depth shall be provided along the control or servicing sides of the unit. Sides of a working
platform facing the roof edge below shall be protected by a substantial railing of minimum 1 m in
height with vertical rails not more than 525 mm apart, except that parapets at least 600 mm in
height may be utilized in lieu of rails or guards.
iii) Catwalk: On roofs having slopes greater than 4 in 12, a catwalk at least 400 mm in width with
substantial cleats spaced not more than 400 mm apart shall be provided from the roof access to the
�orking platform at the appliance.

PartS
Building Services
3.5.2.4 Working Space: Equipment requiring access thereto, as specified in Sec 3.5.2.3, shall be provided
with an unobstructed space on the control or servicing side of the equipment of not less than 750 mm in
depth and 2m in height. Working space for equipment located in a machinery room shall comply with
Sec3.6.
Exception:
The height of the working space may be reduced to 750 mm for an air handling unit, air filter or refrigerant, chilled water
piping and brine piping control valves.
3.5.2.5 Lighting in Concealed Spaces : When access is required to equipment located in an under floor
space, attic or furred space, a. permanent electric light outlet and lighting fixture shall be installed in
accordance with Sec 3.5.1.8(b ).
3.5.2.6 Condensate Control : When a cooling coil or cooling unit is located in the attic or furred space
where damage may result from condensate overflow, an additional water tight pan of corrosion resistant
metal shall be installed beneath the cooling coil or unit to catch the overflow condensate due to clogged
primary condensate drain, or one pan with a standing overflow and a separate secondary drain may be
provided in lieu of the secondary drain pan. The additional pan or the standing overflow shall be prov1ded
with a drain pipe, minimum 19 mm nominal pipe size, discharging at a point which can be readily observed.
This requirement is in addition to the requirements for condensate waste piping set forth in Sec3.5.1.9.
3.5.2.7 Return Air and Outside Air

a) Source: A cooling unit shall be provided with outside air, return air, or both. Cooling systems regulated
by this Code and designed to replace required ventilation shall be arranged to deliver into the
conditioned space not less than the amount of outside air specified in Building Code.
b) Prohibited Sources: The outside air or return air for a cooling system or cooling unit shall not be taken
from the following locations:
i) Closer than 3 m from an appliance vent outlet, a vent opening or a plumbing drainage system or
the discharge outlet of an eXhaust fan, unless the outlet is 1 m above the outsicfe air inlet.
ii) Where it will pick up objectionable odours, fumes or flammable vapours; or where it is less than 3
m above the surface of any abutting public way or driveway; or where it is in a horizontal position
in a sidewalk, street, alley or driveway.
iii) A hazardous or insanitary location or a refrigeration machinery room;
iv) An area the volume of which is less than 25 per cent of the entire volume served by such system,
unless there is a permanent opening to an area the volume of which is equal to 25 per cent of the
entire volume served.
v) A room or sl'ace having any fuel burning appliances therein, except when 75 of the conditioned air
is dischargei:i back into the same room or space and air inlets are not located within 3 m of firebox
or draft diverter of fuel burning appliance and the room has a volume exceeding 1 m3 for each 100
watts fuel input rate of all fuel 6urning appliance therein.
vi) A closet, bathroom, toilet or kitchen.
c) Return Air Limitation: Return air from one dwelling unit shall not be discharged into another dwelling
unit through the cooling system.
3.5.2.8 Air Velocity: Cooling systems shall be designed and constructed so that velocity through filters
does not exceed the filter manUfacturer's recommendation.
3.5.2.9 Screen: Required outside air inlets shall be covered with screen having 6 mm openings.
Exception:
An outside air inlet serving a nonresidential portion of a building may be covered with screen having opening larger than
6 mm but not larger than 25 mm.
3.5.2.10 Duct System : If ducts are required for circulation of air, the duct system shall be constructed and
installed in accordance with Sec 3.4.1. Selection and installation of registers, diffusers and grilles shall
conform to the requirements of Sec 3.4.2.
3.5.3 Evaporative Cooling

3.5.3.1 General
a) Scope : Where possible evaporative cooling system may be installed. Evaporative cooling systems shall
comply with this section.
b) Outside Air: Evaporative cooling system shall be provided with outside air as specified in Sec 3.5.2.7
8-60
Chapter3
c) ·Air Ducts:Air duct systems for evaporative cooling shall comply with Sec 3.4.1.
3.5.3.2 Location:Evaporative cooler shall normally be jnstalled outdoor. It may be installed indoor if duct
is provided between cooler and outside air intake.
Evaporative cooling systems shall be installed in a manner to minimize the probability of damage from an
external source. .
3.5.3.3 Access : Evaporative coolers shall be accessible for inspection, service and replacement without
removing permanent construction.
3.5.3.4 Installation : An evaporative cooler supported by the buildin� structure shall be installed on a
substantial level base and shalf be secured directly or indirectly to the bu1lding structure by suitable means
to prevent displacement of the cooler. ·
An evaporative cooler supported directly by the ground shall rest on a level concrete slab. The upper surface
of the concrete sl�b shall not be less than 75 mm above the adjoining ground level.
An evaporative cooler supported on an above ground platform shall be elevated at least 150 mm above the
adjoining ground level.
Openings in the exterior walls shall be flushed in an approved manner in accordance with this code.
3.5.4 Heating Equipment

3.5.4.1 General
a) Scope: Provisions of this section shall apply to all electric, hot water or steam air heating systems.
b) Outside Air: Heating system shall be provided with outside air as specified in Sec 3.5.2.7.
c) Air Ducts:Air ducts for heating systems shall comply with the applicable provisions of Sec 3.4.t".
3.5.4.2 Location
a) Steam shall not be used in heating coil of air handling unit when it is located inside the building but not
installed in a machinery room.
b) All fuel burning equipment such as boilers shall not be installed inside a building and shall be installed
inside a machinery room.
c) Appliances generating a glow, spark or flame capable of igniting flammable vapours shall not be
located in places where sucn vapours exist.
3.5.4.3 Access :All appliances shall be accessible for inspection, services, repair and replacement without
removing permanent construction. An unobstructed working space of not less than 750 mm in width and
1250 mm in height shall be provided on control and servicing side(s) of the appliance.
3.5.4.4 Installation:All heating appliances shall be installed as per applicable provisions of Sec 3.5.1.5.
3.5.4.5 Controls
a) In case of air-conditioning plants where heatin� or reheating is required, a safety device shall be
incorporated in the installation to cut off automatically the source of heating, such as steam, hot water
or electricity by means of a suitable thermostat or some other device, as soon as the temperature of the
room reaches a predetermined high level not exceeding 44°C, unless a higher temperature is required
for an industria[ process carried out in the air-conditioned enclosure. In no case the outlet temperature
of the heater shall exceed 90°C.
b) In the case of air-conditioning plants where heating or reheating by means of an electrical heater
designed to operate in an air current is done, the system shall be equipped with a safety device to cut
off the electricity to the heating device whenever there is failure of the air flow in which the heater is
required to operate.
The surface temperature of all electrical heaters used in air-conditioning systems shall be limited
preferably to 400°C, and in no case more than 538°C when measured in still air.
3.5.4.6 Boilers and Furnaces

a) Steam and hot water boilers and furnaces used for air-conditioning systems shall be designed,
constructed and installed in conformance with the requirements of acceptable standards in this regard
and the appropriate Boiler Code.
b) Boilers and furnaces shall be installed in a machinerY. room having :

i) A sufficiently large floor area to permit accessibility for inspection and servicing of the appliance
and to provide adequate clearance to satisfy requirements of fire safety. The volume of the room for

PartS
Building Services
housing central heating furnaces shall be at least 12 times the total volume of the. furnace. The
volume of the room fornousing central heating boilers shall be at least 16 times the total volume of
the boiler. If the ceiling height of the room or space is greater than 2.5 m, the volume shall be
calculated on the basis of 2.5 m height.
ii) A permanent opening or opening connecting with the outdoors or with some space that freely
connects with outdoors, ·
iii) A knockout panel to act as explosion relief panel to prevent damage to structure in case of any
explosion in boiler rooms,
iv) Boiler rooms and Jurnace rooms shall be protected with an automatic fire suppression system
installed in accordance with the Code.
"
c) Before commissioning of the boiler a certificate of compliance from the Chief Inspector of Boiler shall be
obtained. .
3.5.5 Air Handling Unit

3.5.5.1 General : Air handling units shall comply with the applicable requirements as set forth in
Sec 3.5.1 and 3.5.2.
3.5.5.2 Location : Air handling unit rooms shall, as far as possible, be centrally located with the
equipment room contiguous to the corridors or other spaces for running of air ducts.
Air handlins. unit rooms shall be located in areas where reasonable sound levels can be tolerated. Air
handling umt rooms shall not preferably be located adjacent to conference rooms, sound recording studios,
broadcasting studios, bed rooms and other acoustically sensitive areas. If it is absolutely necessary to locate
air handling unit room adjacent to the above acoustically sensitive areas, adequate acoustic treatment in the
air handling units, supply and return air ducts, air handling unit rooms shall be provided. In such case, the
access door to the air fiandling unit room shall be of single leaf type properly acoustically treated and shall
have a door sill. The door shalf open outwards.
In case of multi-storied buildings and for large capacity plant, independent air handling unit room(s) shall
be provided for each floor when design calls for the same. The area served by each air handling unit shall
conform to the fire protection measures adopted.
3.5.5.3 Access : Floor area of the air handling unit room shall be sufficient to allow proper layout of
equipment with adequate access space and worl<ing space for proper operation and maintenance.
3.5.5.4 Installation : Air handling units shall be installed on vibration isolators to restrict transmission of
vibration to the building structure. The base of the air handling unit shall be minimum 75 mm above the
adjoining floor level. Air air handling unit rooms shall have properly installed floor drains.
3.5.6 Packaged Air-conditioners

3.5.6.1 General: Packaged air-conditioners shall comply with the applicable requirements set forth in
Sec 3.5.1 and 3.5.2.
3.5.6.2 Prohibited Use : Packaged air-conditioners shall not be used for,

a) Operation theatres where provisions for 100 per cent fresh air and high quality filtration of air are
required.
b) Special applications like sterile rooms for hospitals and clean rooms where high efficiency filtration is
required.
c) Sound recording studios and other areas where criteria for acoustics are stringent.
Exceptions:
Single package units when installed far away from the air-conditioned space and are provided with properly
designed sound attenuators which can maintain the desired sound level inside the conditioned space.
d) Area requiring close and independent control of temperature and relative humidity.
Exception:
Computer room air-conditioning.
e) Internal zones where no exposed wall is available for installation of room air-conditioners or no
external platform is available for installation of outdoor installed unit.
f) The width of the area is such that throw of air from the air-conditioner cannot cover the required area.
8-62
Chapter 3
3.5.6.3 Installation
a) Wall punches for room air-conditioners shall have proper sealing and resilient pad around the body of
the unit to avoid leakage of air and vibration transmission.
b) Outdoor units shall be installed keeping adequate space for condenser air flow. The discharge of
condenser air shall not create any disturbance to the adjacent rooms or buildings.
c) Refrigerant pipes and condensate drain pipes shall be p roperly installed and shall have proper
insulation to avoid condensation on pipes. lnaoor installations shall comply with the requirements of
Sec 3.5.2.6.
3.5.7 Accessory Equipment

3.5.7.1 Air Curtain
a) Where Required: In super markets, departmental stores, commercial buildings and other applications
where the continuous movement of people and/or equip ment through the door requires that the door
be remained open continuously, adequately sized air curtains may be used to restrict entry of
unconditioned air to conditioned space.
b) Installation: Air curtains shall be installed in such a way as to cover the whole width of the door. The
width and velocity of air jet shall. be sufficient to restrict the entry of unconditioned air to the
conditioned space. The unit shall have provisions to control the jet velocity with respect to pressure and
velocity of air in the unconditioned space.
3.5.7.2 Air Filters

a) Air supplied to any space for cooling, heating or ventilation shall be adequately filtered before its point
of discharge into the space. Minimum filtration efficiency shall be in accordance with good engineering
practice for the space served, as recommended in ASHRAE Handbook.
b) Access: Adequate access to facilitate servicing of filters shall be provided. Doors, ladders, electric
lighting etc. shall be provided where necessary. A device for indicating differential pressure across the
fiTter bank shall preferably be fitted to determme the need for filter change.
c) Electrostatic Filters: Electrostatic filters when used, shall be electrically interlocked so that power
supply is disconnected when access door is opened.
3.5.8 Piping System

3.5.8.1 Material : Piping material for air-conditioning, heating and ventilation system shall be metallic
only.
Exception:
Condensate drain and waste water drain piping for cooling units may be nonmetallic.
3.5.8.2 Support and Anchors : Adequately designed piping supports shall be used at approved space
intervals to prevent undue stress on the pipe and building structure. Piping shall also be adequately
anchored. Pipes shall not be supported or hanged from another pipe.
3.5.8.3 Expansion and Contraction : Piping shall be installed with provisions to take care of expansion
and contraction of the piping because of temperature changes of the flmd it conveys.
3.5.8.4 Pipe Covering

a) All pipes likely to achieve a surface temperature during normal operation exceeding 70°C and are
exposed to human contact or surface temperature lower than the dew point temperature of the
surrounding air, shall be insulated with approved material suitable for the operating temperature of the
system. The insulating material and its thickness shall be as recommended in ASHRAE Handbook.
b) Insulation and covering on pipes in which the temperature of the fluid exceeds 120°C:
i) Shall be of noncombustible material.
ii) Shall not produce flame and smoke, glow or smoulder when tested in accordance with the latest
standard m this regard at the maximum temperature to which such insulation or covering is to be
exposed in service.
Combustible insulation and covering shall have a flame spread rating throughout the material, not
exceeding 25 units in buildings of noncombustible construction, when pipes run in a horizontal or
vertical service space. When pipes run in a room or space other than service space, the pipe
covering shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding that required for the interior finish of the
ceiling of the room or space.
Exception:
Pipe coverings may have a flame spread rating more than 25 and smoke developed index more than 100 when
pipes are enclosed within walls, floor slabs or non-combustible raceways or conduits.

PartS
Building Services
3.5.8.5 Steam or hot water bare pipes passing through a storage space shall be protected to prevent direct
contact between the surface of pipe and the material stored.
Bare pipes containing steam or fluid at temperature above 120°C and passing through a combustible floor,
ceiling or wall, shall have a sleeve of metal at least 50 rnm larger in diameter tnan pipe, packed with
noncombustible material.
Minimum clearance between bare pipe and combustible materials shall not be less than 15 mm when
temperature of steam or water in the pipe does not exceed 120°C and shall not be less than 25 mm for
temperatures exceeding 120°C.
3.5.8.6 All piping shall be marked with approved makings for type of fluid carrying with direction of
flow.
3.6 REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT
3.6.1 General
3.6.1.1 Scope : In addition to other provisions of this code, refrigerating systems and equipment shall
conform to the requirements of this section.
3.6.1.2 Approval : Each refrigerating equipment arid its components shall comply with relevant
internationally recognized standards. Tile listing and label of an approved al$ency whicn is attached to the
equipment, may be accepted as evidence that the equipment complies w1th applicable internationally
recognized standards.
3.6.1.3 Installation : A refrigerating equipment shall be installed to conform with the provisions of
Sec 3.5.1 and the manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.6.1.4 Access : Access for refrigerating units shall be provided as for cooling units and cooling systems set
forth in Sec 3.5.1.6 and 3.5.2.3.
3.6.1.5 Working Space and Working Platform: Working space and working platform shall be provided
as for cooling units and cooling systems set forth in Sec 3.5.2.4.
3.6.1.6 Prohibited Location : Refrigerating systems and portion thereof shall not be located in an elevator
shaft, dumb waiter shaft or a shaft having moving objects therein, or in a location where it will be subject to
mechanical damage.
3.6.1.7 Condensate Control: Piping and fittings which convey refrigerant, brine, chilled water or coolant,
which generally reach a surface temperature below the dew point of the surrounding air and which are
located in spaces or areas where condensation could cause a hazard to the building occupants, structure,
electrical or other equipment shall be insulated to prevent such damage.
3.6.2 Absorption Refrigerating Equipment

3.6.2.1 Location : Fuel burning absorption systems shall not be installed in the following locations :
a) In any room or space less than 300 mm wider than the units installed therein, with a minimum clear
workmg space of not less than 75 mm along the sides, back and top of the unit.
b) In a hazardous location.
c) In a surgical operating room or medical treatment room.
d) In any occupancy group unless separated from the rest of the building by not less than a one hour fire
resistive occupancy separation.
Exceptions :
A separation shall not be required for equipment serving only one dwelling unit.
e) In a room used or designed to be used as a bedroom, bathroom, closet or in any enclosed space with
access only through such room or space.
f) In a room from where noise and vibration may be transmitted to acoustically sensitive areas.
Absorption systems containing Group 2 refrigerants shall not be located in any building unless installed
within a refrigeration machinery room provided as per Sec 3.6.3.3.
Absorption systems containing more than 9 kg of a Group 2 refrigerant shall be located not less than 6 m
from any door, window or ventilating air inlet to a building.
3.6.2.2 Installation : Fuel burning absorption systems located outside of a building shall be completely
enclosed in a weather proof housing of approved materials, unless approved for outdoor installation. The
8-64
Chapter3
housing shall not be larger than necessary to properly cover and provide a minimum 150 mm clearance
around the unit or units enclosed therein, including all controls and araft diverters.
An absorption system supported from the ground shall rest on a concrete slab. The upper surface of the
concrete slab shall be at least 75 mm above tne adjoining ground level.
3.6.2.3 Pressure Relief Devices : An absorption system shall be equipped with a factory installed pressure
.
relief device, either a fusible plug, a rupture member or a pressure relief valve.
3.6.2.4 Combustion Air : A fuel burning absorption system shall be provided with adequate combustion
air including venting appliances.
3.6.2.5 Steam or Hot Water Absorption System: All absorption systems using steam or hot water as
energy source shall be installed in a machinery room unless the manufacturer has certified it suitable for
outdoor installation. The machinery room shall comply with the provisions of Sec 3.6.3.3.
3.6.3 Mechanical Refrigerating Equipment

3.6.3.1 General
a) Scope: Mechanical refrigerating equipment shall comply with the provisions of Sec 3.6.1.
Refrigerating systems and equipment, including the replacement of parts and alteration, shall comply
with the provisions of this section.
b) Supports : Supports for compressors, condensing units and chillers shall be designed to safely carry the
equipment. Supports from buildings or parts of buildings that are of noncombustible construction shall
be noncombustible.
A compressor or portion of condensing unit supported from the ground shall rest on a concrete or other
approved base. The upper surface of the concrete base shall be at least 75 mm above the adjoining
ground level.
c) Ventilation of Rooms Containing Condensing Units : Rooms or spaces other than a refrigeration
machinery room complying with the requirements of this section, in which any refrigerant containing
portion of a condensing unit is located, shall be provided with one of the following means of
ventilation:
i) Permanent gravity ventilation openings of not less than 0.2 m2 net free area opening directly to the
outside of the building or extending to the outside of the building by continuous ducts,
ii) A mechanical exhaust system arranged to provide at least 3 complete air change per hour and to
discharge to the outside of the building.
Exception:
Mechanical exhaust system shall not be required if the room or space has a volume exceeding 40 m3 per kW of
the unit or where such room or space has permanent gravity ventilation openings of 02
. m2 minimum total area
to the other rooms or spaces exceeding 40m3 per kW.
d) Compressor Near Exits: Refrigerant compressors of more than 4 kW rating shall be located at least 3m
from an exit unless separated by a one hour fire resistive occupancy separation.
3.6.3.2 Refrigerants
a) Classification : Refrigerants listed in Table 8.3.4 and Table 8.3.5 or other refrigerants equivalent in
safety to life, limb, health or property shall only be used in refrigerating equipment.
Note:
Bangladesh is a signatory to the Montreal Protocol which proclaims phasing out of the use of some refrigerants
viewed as responsible for depletion of the ozone layer and/or causing global warming. If at the time of using this
Code, any of the refrigerants mentioned in Table 8.3.4 and 8.3.5 is prohibited from use by the Government, the
relevant row or rows of these two tables shall be deemed to be deleted. Likewise, if any safer substitutes to these
refrigerants are available and permitted by the Government, these shall be included in the list of refrigerants
permitted by this Code. In general, preference shall be given to equipment using refrigerants having relatively lower
Ozone Depletion Potential and Global Warming Potential.
b) Group 1 Refrigerants
i) Direct Systems : The maximum amount of Group 1 refrigerants in direct systems shall not exceed
that set forth in Table 8.3.4.
ii) Indirect Systems:The amount of Group 1 refrigerants used in indirect systems shall be unlimited.
iii) General : Condensing units or combinations of refrigerant interconnected condensing units

totalling 75 kW or more rating which contain a Group 1 refrigerant shall be enclosed in a
refrigeration machinery room.

PartS
Building Services
Table8.3.4
Group 1 Refrigerants
Refrigerant Maximum Quantity in kg per 100m3 of

Designation Name Space Intended for Human Occupancy
R-11 Trichlorofluoromethane 56
R-12 Dichlorodifluoromethane 49.6
R-13 Chlorotrifluoromethane 43.2
R-1381 Bromotrifluoromethane 60.8
R-14 Tetrafluoromethane 36.8
R-21 Dichlorofluoromethane 20.8
R-22 Chlorodifluoromethane 35.2
R-30 Dichloromethane 9.6
(Methylene chloride)
R-113 Trichlorotrifluoroethane 38.4
R-114 Dichlorotetrafluoroethane 70.4
R-115 Chloropentafluoroethane 64
R-C318 �
Octafluoro clobutane 80
R-500 Dichlorodi uoromethane(73.8%) 41.6
�
and Et lidene Fluoride(26.2%)
R-502 Chloro ifluoromethane(48.8%) 48
and chloropentafluoroethane(S1.2%)
R-744 Carbon dioxide 17.6
Table8.3.5
Group 2 Refrigerants
Refrigerant Designation Name

R-40 Methyl chloride
R-611 Methyl formate
R-717 Ammonia
R-764 Sulphur dioxide
Exception:
The requirement shall not apply when the condensing unit is located outside of a building or on the roof of a
building and not less than 6 m from a door, window or ventilating air opening in a building or when the
condensing unit located in the building is exclusively used for ice making or cold storage together with the
usual accessory rooms in connection therewith.
c) Group 2 Refrigerants : A mechanical refrigerating system or unit refrigerating system containing a

Group 2 refrigerant shall not be located within a building unless all refrigerant containing portions of
the system are enclosed in a refrigeration machinery room. Such system when installed outside of a
building shall be located at least 6 m from an exit door, window or ventilating air inlet in a building.
Exception:
This shall not apply to a building used exclusively for ice making, cold storage or for the manufacturing or
2
processing of food or drink, provided the occupant load does not exceed one person per 10 m of floor area served
by such system. Portions of refrigerating systems containing Group 2 refrigerants shall not be located in an exit.
Direct refrigeration systems containing Group 2 refrigerants shall not serve an air cooling or air
conditioning system used for human comfort.
3.6.3.3 Refrigeration Machinery Room

a) General : Required refrigeration machinery rooms shall be of at least one hour fire resistive
construction. All doors shall be tight fitting. Every door shall be clearly labelled "Machinery Room". The
room shall have no openings that will permit the passage of escaping refrigerant to the other parts of
the building. There sball be no direct opening between a refrigeration machinery room containing
Group 2 refrigerant and a room or space in wfuch there is an open flame, spark producing device or
heating surface hotter than 426°C. A refrigeration machinery room containing Group 2 refrigerants shall
have at least two means of escape located at least one-fifth the perimeter of the room apart.
Refrigeration machinery rooms containing G r oup 1 refrigerant shall have at least one exit door. Size of
the exit door shall be at least 1 m by 2 m.
A refrigeration machinery room door shall open in the direction of escape.
An unobstructed working space of at least 750 mm in width and at least 2100 mm in height shall be
provided around two adjacent sides of all moving machinery in a refrigeration machinery room.
8-66
Chapter 3
b) Refrigeration Machinery Room Ventilation : Refrigeration machinery room shall be provided with
either mechanical or gravity ventilation.
i) Mechanical exhaust system shall be a separate and individual system of ventilation serving no
other area and shall exhaust air to outdoors at the rate of 12 air changes per hour. Exhaust air
outlet shall not be located within 6m from any exterior door, window or ventilation air inlet in any
building. Provisions shall be made for makeup air to replace that being exhausted. Control switch
for exhaust system shall be located within the machine room and shall be readily accessible.
ii) Area of gravity ventilation openings to outside of the building shall not be less than one twentieth
of the floor area of the machinery room but shall be more than 0.65 m2• Approximately one-half of
the openings shall be located within 300 mm of the floor and one half witnin 300 mm of the ceiling
of the macninery room.
c) Equipment in a Refrigeration Machinery Room: Combustion air shall not be taken from a refrigeration
machinery room. Electrical equiP.ment, switch or control panel other than those used exclusively for air
conditioning, heating and ventilation system shall not be located in a refrigeration machinery room.
This provision shall not apply to electrical lighting fixtures for machinery room and switches thereof.
A readily accessible single emergency refrigeration control switch shall be provided to shut off all
electrically operated machineries in a refrigeration machinery room, except the exhaust ventilation
system com lying with See 3.6.3.3 (b). Such switch shall be located outside the machinery room, within
f
a distance o 3 m from the machinery room exit.
d) First Aid Facility : Each refrigeration machinery room shall be provided with first aid boxes.
Refrigeration machinery room containing Group 2 refrigerants shall be provided with two gas masks.
3.6.3.4 Refrigerant Piping and Equipment

a) Materials : Materials used in the construction and installation of refrigerating systems shall be suitable
for the refrigerant in the system, and no material or equipment shall be installed which will deteriorate
due to the chemical action of the refrigerant or the compressor oil, or combination of both.
b) Erection of Refrigerant Piping: Refrigerant piping and tubing shall be installed in such a way so as to
prevent excessive vibration and strains at joints and connections. Adequate type of supports shall be
used at points as required but not exceeding 4.5 m apart.
Refrigerant piping and tubing shall be installed in such a way so that it is not subject to damage from an
external source. .
Copper tubing containing other than Group 1 refrigerant shall not be located in a public hallway, lobby
or stairway or a building unless enclosed in iron or steel piping and fittings or in ngid metal conduit.
Iron or steel refrigerant piping placed underground shall be coated with sufficient asphalt paint or
equivalent material to inhibit corrosion.
c) Refrigerant Containers : A refrigerant receiver or evaporator or condenser shall be constructed in

accordance with approved standards.
d) Valves and fittings : All valves and fittings shall be of approved type rated for the maximum operating
pressure of the system.
e) Pressure Limiting Device : A pressure limiting device shall be installed on a positive displacement
refrigerant compressor which is a portion of :
i) A refrigerating system containing Group 2 refrigerant.
ii) An air cooled refrigerating system containing Group 1 refrigerant of 7.5 kW or more rating.
iii) A water cooled refrigerating system containing Group 1 refrigerant of 2.25 kW or more rating.
A stop or shutoff valve shall not be placed between a pressure limiting device required by this
section and the compressor it serves.
f) Pressure Relief Valves: The following compressors of the positive displacement type shall be equipped
with a pressure relief valve:
i) A compressor of 15 kW or more rating which is a portion of a refrigeration system containing

Group 1 refrigerant and operating at a pressure exceeding 103 kPa in the high pressure side of the
system.
ii) A compressor which is a portion of a refrigerating system containing a Group 2 refrigerant.

Part 8
Building Services
A pressure relief valve shall be connected to the refrigerant discharge side of the compressor it serves,
between such compressor and a stop valve. A stop or shutoff valve shall not be located between a
pressure relief valve required by this section and the compressor it serves.
A pressure relief valve, required by this section, that terminate outside, shall discharge at a location at
least 4.5 m above the adjoining ground level and at least 6 m from a window, ventilating opening or exit
from a building.
g) Pressure Relief Devices for Pressure Vessels: A pressure vessel over 150 nun diameter which may be
shutoff by valves from other earts of the system shall be equipped with a pressure relief device(s) or
rupture member complying w1th the requirements of this code.
h) Manual Discharge of Group 2 Refrigerant: A refrigerating system located in a building and containing
carbon dioxide or Group 2 refrigerant shall be equipped witft approved means for manual discharge of
the refrigerant to the atmosphere. The discharge pipe shall terminate outside of the building not less
than 2 m above the highest structure on the building and at least 6 m from any window, ventilating
opening or exit from a building.
3.6.3.5 Storage of Refrigerants: Refrigerants not contained in refrigeration system regulated by the Code
shall be stored in original containers kept in machinery room. The total amount shall not exceed 135 kg.
A portable refrigerant container shall not be connected to the refrigerating system for a period longer than is
necessary to charge or discharge the refrigerating system.
3.6.4 Cooling Tower

3.6.4.1 Location: Cooling Tower shall not be located where warm and humid air discharge from cooling
tower is likely to cause damage to building structure.
3.6.4.2 Installation : Cooling tower located at roof shall meet the requirements of structures as specified in
this code. Clearances for air suction and discharge shall be maintained in accordance with the
recommendation of the manufacturer of the cooling tower.
3.6.4.3 Access: An easy access to cooling tower located at roof shall be provided.
3.6.4.4 Waste Water Disposal : Cooling towers or evaporative condensers which are equipped with a
positive water discharge to prevent excessive build-up of alkalinity and are used for water cooled
condensing units or absorption units shall discharge the water into an approved disposal system.
3.6.4.5 Piping Connections : Water supply, waste water piping and other piping connections shall
comply with the provisions of applicable codes.
3.7 VENTILATION SYSTEMS
3.7.1 General
3.7.1.1 Scope : The provisions of this section shall govern the ventilation of spaces within a building
intended for human occupancy.
3.7.1.2 Where Required: Every SJ?ace intended for human occupancy shall be provided with ventilation
by natural or mechanical means durmg the periods when the room or space is occupied.
3.7.2 Natural Ventilation

3.7.2.1 Sources : Natural ventilation of an occupied space shall be through windows, doors, louvers,
skylights or other openings to the outdoor. Such ventilating openings shall open to the sky or a public street,
space, alley, park, highway, yard, court, plaza or other approved space which comply with the requirements
of the building code.
3.7.2.2 Area of Ventilating Openings :The minimum ventilating opening to the outdoors shall be four
per cent of the floor area being ventilated.
a) Adjoining Spaces: Where rooms and spaces without openings to the outdoors are ventilated through
an adjoining room, the unobstructed opening to the adJOining rooms shall be at least eight per cent of
the floor area of the interior room or space, but not less than 2.33 m2• The ventilation openings to the
outdoors shall be based on the total floor area being ventilated.
b) Opening Below Grade: Openings below grade shall be acceptable for natural ventilation provided the
outside norizontal clear space measured perpendicular to fhe opening is one and one-half times the
depth below the average adjoining grade.
3.7.2.3 Contaminants Exhausted : Naturally ventilated spaces having contaminants present shall comply
with the requirements of Sec 3.7.4.
8-68
Chapter 3
3.7.2.4 LP-gas Distribution Facilities : LP-gas distribution facilities shall be :provided with air inlets and
outlets arranged so that air movement across the floor of the facility will be umform. The total area of both
inlet and outlet openings shall be at least 0.70 per cent of the floor area. The bottom of such openings shall
not be more than 1 50 mm above the floor.
3.7.3 Mechanical Ventilation

3.7.3.1 Where Required : Mechanical ventilation shall be provided in all occupiable rooms or spaces
where the requirements for natural ventilation are not met; in all rooms or spaces, which because of the
nature of their use or occupancy, involve the presence of dust, fumes, gases, vapours, or other noxious or
injurious impurities, or substances which create a fire hazard; where space temperature is more than 40°C;
where relative humidity of inside air is more than 70 per cent; where job conditions require ventilation; or
where required as per provisions of this Code.
3.7.3.2 Ventilation System: Mechanical ventilation shall be provided by a method of supply air and
return or exhaust air. The amount of supply air shall be approximately equal to the amount of return and
exhaust air; however, the system shall not be prohibited from producing a negative or positive pressure. The
ventilation system ducts and equipment shall be designed and installed in accordance with Sec 3.4.
3.7.3.3 Ventilation Air Quantity: The minimum ventilation air required shall be determined based on the
occupant load and use of the building in accordance with Table 8.3.6. The ventilation rate specified in the
Table 8.3.6 shall equal the combined total of outside air and recirculated air. The occupant load shall be
determined in accordance with the building Code.
3.7.3.4 Minimum Outdoor Air : The minimum amount of the outdoor air shall be in accordance with
Table 8.3.3. However in no case it shall be lower than 2.5f./s per person.
3.7.3.5 Air temperature: The temperature differential between ventilation air and air in the conditioned
space shall not exceed S.SOC.
Exception:
Ventilation air that is part of the air-conditioning system.
3.7.3.6 Recirculation
a) Amount of Recirculation : Not more than 67 per cent of the required ventilation air specified in Table
8.3.6 shall be permitted for recirculation, when the concentration of particulates is less than specified in
Table 8.3.7. Air in excess of the required ventilation air shall be permitted to be completely recirculated.
Air shall not be recirculated to another dwelling unit or occupancy of dissimilar use.
Not more than 85 per cent of the required ventilation air shall be permitted for recirculation when the
system is equipped with effective adsorption or filtering equipment so that the condition of the air supplied
to the room or space is within the quality limitations of Table 8 .3.7.
b) Prohibited Use of Recirculated Air: Air drawn from mortuary rooms, bathrooms or toilets or any
space where an objectionable quantity of flammable vapours, dust, odours, or noxious gases is present
shall not be recirculated. Air drawn from rooms that must be isolated to prevent the spread of infection
shall not be recirculated.
Exception:
Air drawn from hospital operating rooms may be recirculated, if the followillg requirements are met :
i) A minimum of twenty five total air changes per hour shall be provided, of which five air changes per hour shall
be outdoor air.
ii) All fans serving exhaust systems are located at the discharge end of the system.
iii) Outdoor air intakes shall be located at least 7.5 m from exhaust outlets of ventilation systems, combustion
equipment stacks, medical surgical vacuum systems, plumbing vent stacks or from areas which may collect
vehicular exhaust and other noxious fumes. The bottom of outdoor air- intakes serving central systems shall be
located at least 2m above ground level, or if installed above roof, at lea:st 1m above roof level.
iv) Positive air pressure shall be maintained at all times in relation to adjacent areas.
v) All ventilation or air-conditioning systems serving such rooms shall be equipped with a filter bed of twenty five
per cent efficiency upstream of air-conditioning equipment and a filter bed of ninety per cent efficiency
downstream of the supply fan, any recirculating spray water systems and water reservoir type humidifiers. All
filter efficiencies shall be average atmospheric dust spot efficiencies tested in accordance with the latest
ASHRAE standard.
vi) Duct linings shall not be used in air-conditioning and ventilation systems serving such rooms unless terminal
filters of at least ninety per cent efficiency are installed downstream of linings.
vii) Air supplied shall be delivered at or near the ceilings and all exhaust air shall be removed near floor level, with
at least two exhaust outlets not less than 75 mm above the floor.
c) Swimming Pool Area Recirculation : Return air from a swimming pool and deck area shall be
permitted to be recirculated in accordance with Sec 3.7.3.6(a) when such a1r is dehumidified to maintain
the relative humidity of the area at 70 per cent or less. The return air shall only be recirculated to the
area from which it was removed.
·

Part 8
Building Services
3.7.3.7 Ventilation in Uninhabited Spaces :Uninhabited spaces, such as crawl spaces or attics, shall be
provided with natural ventilation openings as required by Building Code or such spaces shall be
mechanically ventilated. The mechanical ventilation system shall be a mechanical exhaust and supply air
system. The exhaust rate shall be 0.1 f./s per square metre of horizontal area. The ventilation system shall
operate when the relative humidity exceeds 70 per cent in the space. .
,.
3.7.4 Mechanical Exhaust

3.7.4.1 Where Required :All rooms and areas having air with dust particles sufficiently light enough to
float in the air, odours,. fumes, spray, gases, vapours, smoke, or other noxious or impurities in such
quantities as to be irritating or injurious to health or safety or which is harmful to building and materials or
nas substances which create a fire hazard, and rooms or areas as indicated in footnote b in Table 8.3.6 shall
have air exhausted to the outdoors in accordance with this section.
3.7.4.2 Design of Exhaust System

a) General : The design of the system shall be such that the emissions or contaminants are confined to the
area in which they are generated by currents, hoods or enclosures and shall be exhausted by a duct
system to a safe location or treated to remove contaminants. Ducts conveying explosives or flammable
vapours, fumes or dusts shall extend directly to the exterior of the building without entering other
spaces. Exhaust ducts shall not extend into or through ducts or plenums.
Exception:
Ducts conveying vapour or fumes having flammable constituents less than 25 per cent of their lower flammability
limit (LFL) may pass through other spaces.
Table 8.3.6
Required Mechanical Ventilation Air
Required Ventilation Air (e/s

Occupancy Classification per Person Unless Otherwise
Indicated)
Assembly
Food services
Bars and cocktail lounges 25
Cafeterias, fast food centres 17.5
Dining rooms 17.5
Kitchens 15a
Museums
Exhibit halls 17.5
Warehouses 5
Workrooms 10
Public (meeting) facilities
Assembly rooms 17.5
Ballrooms 17.5
Conference rooms 17.5
Lobbies 7.5
Sports and amusement facilities
Billiard rooms and game rooms 17.5
Bowling centres (seating areas) 17.5
Playing floors, gymnasiums 17.5
Ramps, foyers and lobbies 10
Spectator area 17.5
Swimming pools and deck areas 2.7 f./ s per m2 of floor area a
Tennis, squash and handball courts (indoor) 15
Theaters
Auditoriums (no smoking) 17.5
Lobbies, foyers and lounges 17.5
Projection booths wa
Stages, TV and movie studios 7.5
Ticket booths 10
Transportation(terminals)
Control Towers 15
Hangars, platform, concourses 17.5
Waiting rooms, ticket and baggage areas 17.5
corridors and gate areas
8-70
Chapter3

Business
Banks(see offices)
Vaults 2.5
Barber, beauty and health services
Barber shops 17.5
Beauty shops (hair dressers) 17.5
Reducing salons (exercise rooms) 17.5
Sauna baths, steam rooms 2.5
Offices
Computer rooms 5
Conference rooms 17.5
Duplicating and printing rooms 2.7 f. Is per m2 of floor area
Office space 12.5
Waiting rooms 17.5
Photo studios
Camera rooms, stages 7.5
Darkrooms 10
Research institutes
Animal rooms 20
Darkrooms, spectroscopy rooms 10
Laboratories 17.5
Laboratories, radioisotope chemically and
biologically toxic 17.5a
Veterinary hospitals
Kennels, stalls 17.5b
Operating rooms 17.5b
Reception rooms 17.5
Educational
Schools
Auditoriums 17.5
Corridors 12.5
Classrooms 12.5
Gymnasiums 17.5
Laboratories 7.5
Libraries 5
Lunchrooms, dining halls, common rooms, lounges 17.5
Music rooms, rehearsal rooms 17.5
Training shops 17.5
Factory and industrial
Working area 17.5
Institutional
Correctional facilities
Bedrooms 15 f./s per room
Day rooms, activity spaces 1 air change per hour
Groups homes
Bedrooms 15 f./s per room
General living area 25 f./s per room
Kitchens 15a
Hospitals, nursing and convalescent homes
Autopsy rooms 12 air changes per houra
Delivery rooms, trauma rooms 15 air changes per hour
Laboratories 6 air changes per hour
Operating rooms 20 air changes per hour
Patient rooms 2 air changes per hour
Pharmacy, medication rooms 4 air changes per hour
Physical therapy areas and treatment rooms 6 air changes per hour

PartS
Building Services
Table8.3.6 (Contd.)
Recovery and intensive care rooms 6 air changes per hour

Soiled utility rooms, janitor closets 10 air changes per hour
Mercantile
General
Sales floors and showrooms 12.5
Dressing rooms 12.5
Malls and arcades 5
Shipping areas 7.5
Storage areas 12.5
Warehouses 5
Special shops
Automotive service stations 8 f. Isper m2 of floor area
Pet shops 5.5 f./sperm2offloor area .
Florists 12.5
Supermarkets
Meat processing rooms
Residential
Dwelling units
General living areas, bedrooms, all other rooms 5 f./s per room
Kitchens, bath rooms, toilets 50 f./s per roomb
Hotels, motels
Bedrooms(single, double) 15 f./s per room
Living rooms(suites) 25 f./sper room
Corridors 5 f./sper m2
Storage
Repair garages, public garages 8 f. Isper m2of floor area
Warehouses 5
Communication
TV /Radio broadcasting booths, or studios, motion
picture and TV stages 20
Press rooms 17.5
Composing rooms, engraving shops, telephone rooms 10
Special areas
Elevators 7.5
Exits and corridors 0.1 f./sper m2of floor area
Lockers and dressing rooms 17.Sb
Public bathrooms 37.5 f./sper water closet or
urinalb
Nonpublic bathrooms 25 f./sper water closet or
urinalb
Utility rooms 0.1 f./s m2 of floor area
Survival shelters 2.5
Note: a �eturn air shal! b� \!�austed in accorc!�nce witl;l �ec 3.7.4.1.
b Re<;i �culation shall be in accordance with Sec 3.7.3.6 except that nonP.ublic bathrooms with a bathtub
and tor shower shall not be recirculated and shall be mechanically exhausted.
Table8.3.7
Maximum Allowable Contaminant Concentrations
Contaminant Annual Average Short Term Level Averaging

(arithmetic mean) (not to be exceeded more than Period
Jlg/m3 once a year) Jlg/m3 (hours)
Particulates 60 150 24
Sulfur oxides 80 400 24
Carbon monoxide 20,000 30,000 8
Photochemical oxidant 100 500 1
Hydrocarbons (not
including methane) 1,800 4,000 3
Nitrogen oxides 200 500 24
Odour Essentially unobjectionable a
Note : a Judged unobjectionable bv 60 per cent of a panel of 10 untrained subjects.
8-72
Chapter3
Separate and distinct systems shall be provided for incompatible exhaust materials.
Contaminated air shall not be recirculated to occupied areas unless contaminants have been removed.
Air contaminated with explosive or flammable vapours, fumes or dusts; flammable or toxic gases; or
radioactive material shall not be recirculated.
b) Exhaust Air Inlet : The inlet to the exhaust system shall be located in the area of heaviest concentration
of contaminants.
c) Velocity and Circulation : The velocity and circulation of air in work areas shall be such that
contaminants are captured by an air stream at the area where the emissions are generated and conveyed
into a product- conveying duct system. Mixtures within work areas where contaminants are generated
shall oe diluted below 2S per cent of their lower explosive limit or lower flammability limit with air
which does not contain other contaminants.
3.7.4.3 Make Up Air: Make up air shall be provided to replenish air exhausted by the ventilating system.
Make up air intakes shall be located so as to avoid recirculation of contaminated air within enclosures.
3.7.4.4 Hoods and Enclosures : Hoods and enclosures shall be used when contaminants originate in a
concentrated area. The design of the hood or enclosure shall be such that air currents created by the exhaust
systems will capture the contaminants and transport them directly to the exhaust duct. The volume of air
shall be sufficient to dilute explosive or flammable vapours, fumes or dusts as set forth in Sec 3.7.4.2(c).
3.7.4.5 Exhaust Outlets : The termination point for exhaust ducts discharging to the atmosphere shall not
be less than the following :
i) Ducts conveying exelosive or flammable vapours, fumes or dusts: 9 m from property line; 3 m from
opening into the building; 2 m from exterior walls or roofs; 9 m from combustible walls or openings
into the building which are in the direction of the exhaust discharge; 3m above adjoining grade.
'
ii) Other product conveying duct outlets : 3m from property line; 1m from exterior wall or roof; 3m from
openings into the buildings; 1 m above adjoining grade.
iii) Domestic kitchen, bathroom, domestic clothes dryer exhaust duct outlets : 1 m from property line; 1 m
from opening into the building.
iv) Outlets for exhausts that exceed 800C shall be in accordance with the relevant code.
3.7.4.6 Motors and Fans

a) General : Motors and fans shall be sized to provide the required air movement. Motors in areas which
contain flammable vapours and dusts shall be of a type approved for such environments. A manually
operated remote control device shall be installed to shutoff fans or blowers in flammable vapour or dust
system. Such control device shall be installed at an approved location.
Electrical equipment used in operations that generate explosive or flammable vapours, fumes or dusts
shall be interlocked with the ventilation system so that the equipment cannot oe operated unless the
ventilation fans are in operation. Motors for fans used to convey flammable vapours or dusts shall be
located outside the duct and shall be protected with approved shields and dustproofing. Motors and
fans shall be accessible for servicing and maintenance.
b) Fans : Parts of fans in contact with explosive or flammable vapours, fumes or dusts shall be of
nonferrous or nonsparking materials or their casing shall be lined or constructed of such material.
When the size and hardness of materials passing through a fan could produce a spark, both the fan and
the casing shall be of nonsparking materials. When fans are required to be spark resistant, their
bearings shall not be within the air stream, and all parts of the fan shall be grounded. Fans in systems
handling materials that are likely to clog the blades, and fans in buffing or woodworking exhaust
systems, shall be of the radial blade or tube axial type.
Equipment used to exhaust explosive or flammable vapours, fumes or dusts shall bear an identification
plate stating the ventilation rate for which the system was designed.
Fans located in systems conveying corrosives shall be of materials that are resistant to the corrosion or
shall be coated with corrosion resistant materials.
3.7.4.7 Exhaust Systems of Special Areas

a) Motor Vehicle Operation: In areas where motor vehicles operate for a period of time exceeding 10
seconds, the ventifation return air shall be exhausted. In fuel dispensing areas, the bottom of the air inlet
or exhaust opening shall be located a maximum of 450 mm above the floor.
b) Spray Painting and Dipping Rooms: Rooms booth for spray painting or dipping shall have a
mechanical exhaust systems which create a cross-sectional air velocity of 0.5 m/s. The system shall

PartS
Building Services
provide a uniform exhaust of air across the width and height of the room or booth. The exhaust system
shall operate while spray painting or dipping is being done.
c) Motion Picture Projectors : Projectors equipped with an exhaust discharge shall be directly connected
to a mechanical exhaust system. The exhaust system shall operate at an exhaust rate as indicated by the
Projectors without an exhaust shall have contaminants exhausted through a mechanical exhaust system.
The exhaust rate for electric arc projectors shall be a minimum of 100 f./s per lamp. The exhaust rate for
xenon projectors shall be a minimum of 150 f./s per lamp. The lamp and projection room exhaust
systems, if combined or independent, shall not be interconnected with any other exhaust or return
system within the building.
d) Dry Cleaning Equipment : Dry cleaning equipment shall be provided with an exhaust system capable
of maintaining a minimum air velocity of 0.5 m/s across the face of the loading door.
e) LP gas Distribution Facilities : LP gas distribution facilities that are not provided with natural
ventilation shall have a continuously operating exhaust system at the rate of 5 f./s per square metre of
floor area. The bottom of air inlet and outlet openings shall not be more than 150 mm above the floor.
3.7.4.8 Exhaust System Ducts

a) Construction: Ducts for exhaust systems shall be constructed of materials approved for the type of
particulates conveyed and as per latest standard in this regard. Ducts shall be of substantial airtight
construction and shall not have openings other than those required for operation and maintenance of
the system.
b) Supports : Spacin� of supports for ducts shall not exceed 3.7 m for 200 mm ducts and 6 m for larger
ducts unless justified by tl:ie design. The design of supports shall assume that 50 per cent of the duct is
full of the particulate being conveyed.
c) Explosion VentinS: Ducts conveying explosive dusts shall have explosion vents, openings protected by
antiflashback swmg valves or rupture diaphragms. Openings to relieve explosive forces shall be
located outside the 6uilding.
d) Fire Protection : Fire suppression system shall be installed within ducts having a cross-sectional
dimension exceeding 250 mm when the duct conv.eys flammable vapours or fumes.
e) Clearances: Ducts conveying flammable or explosive vapours, fumes or dusts shall have a clearance
from combustibles of not less than 450 mm.
3.7.5 Kitchen Exhaust Equipment

3.7.5.1 Kitchen Exhaust Ducts
a) Materials: Kitchen exhaust ducts and plenums shall be constructed of at least 16 SWG steel or 18 SWG
stainless steel sheet. .
Joints and seams shall be made with a continuous liquid tight weld or braze made on the external
surface of the duct system. A vibration isolator connector may be used, provided it consists of
noncombustible packing in a metal sleeve joint of approved design. Duct bracing and supports shall be
of noncombustible material securely attached to the structure ana designed to carry gravity and lateral
loads within the stress limitations of the Building Code. Bolts, screws, rivets and other mechanical
fasteners shall not penetrate duct walls. Exhaust fan housings shall be constructed of steel.
Exception:
Kitchen exhaust ducts which are exclusively used for collecting and removing steam, vapour, heat or odour may be
constructed as per provisions of Sec 3.4.1.
b) Corrosion Protection : Ducts exposed to the outside atmosphere or subject to a corrosive environment
shall be protected against corrosion. Galvanization of metal parts, protection with noncorrosive paints
and waterproof insulation are considered acceptable methods of protection.
c) Prevention of Grease Accumulation : Duct systems shall be so constructed and installed that grease
cannot become pocketed in any portion thereof, and the system shall have a slope not less than 1 in 48
towards the hood or an approved grease reservoir. Where the horizontal ducts exceed 23 m in length
the slope shall not be less tl1an 1 in 12.
d) Air Velocity : The air velocity in the duct shall be a minimum of 7.62 m/s and a maximum of
12.7 m/s.
e) Cleanouts and Other Openings : Duct systems shall not have O J? enings other than those required for
proper operation and maintenance of the system. Any portion of such system having sections
maccessiole from the duct entry or discharge shall be provided with adequate cleanout openings of
8-74
Chapter3
approved construction spaced not more than 6 m apart. The cleanout shall be located on the side of the
cfuct having a minimum opening dimension of 300 mm or the width of the duct when less than 300 mm.
f) Duct Enclosure: The duct which penetrates a ceiling, wall or floor shall be enclosed in a fire-resistant
rated enclosure from the point of penetration in accordance with the Building Code. The duct enclosure
shall be sealed around the duct at the point of penetration and vented to the exterior through weather
protected openings. The clearance between the duct enclosure and the duct shall be at least 75 mm and
not more tlian 300 mm. Each duct enclosure shall contain only one exhaust duct. Approved fire rated
access openings shall be provided at cleanout points.
3.7.5.2 Kitchen Exhaust Hoods

a) A commercial exhaust hood shall be provided for each commercial cooking appliance.
Exceptions :
i) An appliance located within a dwelling unit and not used for commercial purposes.
ii) Completely enclosed ovens.
iii) Steam tables .
iv)· Auxiliary cooking equipment that does not produce grease laden vapours, including toasters, coffee makers
and egg cookers.
b) Domestic cooking appliances used for commercial purposes shall be provided with a commercial
exhaust hood. Domestic cooking appliances used for noncommercial purposes shall be provided with
ventilation in accordance with Sec 3.7.
c) Hood Construction: The hood and other parts of the primary collection system shall be constructed of
�alvanized steel, stainless steel, copper or other material approved by the Building Official for the use
mtended. The minimum nominal thickness of the galvanized steel shall be 1.2 mm (No. 18 SWG). The
minimum nominal thickness of stainless steel shall be 0.93 mm (No. 20 SWG). Hoods constructed of
copper shall be of copper sheets weighing at least 7.33 kg/m2• All external joints shall be welded liquid
tignt. Hoods shall be secured in place in noncombustible supports.
d) Interior Surface:The interior surfaces of the hood shall not have any areas that can accumulate grease.
Exception:
·
Grease collection systems under fitters and troughs on the perimeter of canopy hoods.
e) Canopy Hoods: Canopy hoods shall be designed to completely cover the cooking equipment. The edge
of the hood shall extend a minimum horizontal distance of 150 rnm beyond the ei.:lge of the cooking
surface on all open sides and the vertical distance between the lip of the hood and the cooking surface
shall not exceed 1.22 m.
f) Noncanopy Type Hoods: Hoods of the non canopy-type shall be located a maximum of 900 mm above
the cooking surface. The edge of the hood shall be set oack a maximum of 300 mm from the edge of the
cooking surface.
g) Hood Exhaust : The hood exhaust shall create a draft from the cooking surface into the hood. Canopy
hoods attached to wall shall exhaust a minimum of 500 l/s Eer m2 of the hood area. Canopy hoods
exposed on all sides shall exhaust a minimum of 750 l/s per m2 of hood area. Hoods of the non canopy
type shall exhaust a minimum of 460 f. Is per lineal metre of cooking surface.
h) Exhaust Outlet : An exhaust outlet within the hood shall be so located as to optimize the capture of
particulate matter. Each outlet shall serve not more than a 3.7 m section of the hood.
3.7.5.3 Make Up Air: Make u air shall be supplied during the operation of the kitchen exhaust system.
r
The amount of make up air shal be approximately equal to tne amount of the exhaust air. The make up air
shall be sup}'lied in such a way as to avoid short circuiting and reducing the effectiveness of the exliaust
system. Wini.:lows and doors shall not be used for the purpose of providing make up air.
3.7.5.4 Grease Removal : The air exhausted in every commercial exhaust hood shall pass through
approved grease filters or grease removal device designed for the specific purpose. Grease removal devices
snail bear the label of an approved agency, and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions for the labelled equipment. All grease filters shall be accessible. Grease filters shall be installed
at a minimum angle of 45 degrees to the horizontal. The filters shall be arranged so as to capture and drain
grease to a point of collection. .
3.7.5.5 Motors, Fans and Safety Devices

a) Motors and fans shall be of sufficient capacity to provide required air movement. Electrical equipment
shall be approved for the class of use as provided in the Electrical Code. Motors and fans shall be
accessible for servicing and maintenance. Motors of the exhaust fan shall not be installed within the
ducts or under hoods.

Part 8
Building Services
b) Commercial exhaust system hoods and ducts shall have a minimum clearance to combustibles of
450mm.
c) Fire Suppression System Required: All commercial cooking surfaces, kitchen exhaust systems, grease
removal devices and hoods shall be protected with an approved automatic fire suppression system in
accordance with the Building Code.
3.8 ENERGY CONSERVATION
3.8.1 General
Air-conditioning, heating and ventilation systems of all buildings shall be designed and installed for
efficient use of energy as herein provided. Calculations of cooling and heating loads shall be based on data
which lead to a system with optimum energy use.
General standards of comfort or particular environmental requirements within the building shall not be
sacrificed in an endeavor to achieve low consumption of energy. For special applications, sud1 as hospitals,
laboratories, thermally sensitive equipment, computer rooms and manufacturin� processes, the design
concepts and parameters shall conform to the requirements of the application at mimmum energy levels.
3.8.2 Design Parameters

3.8.2.1 Outdoor Design Conditions : Unless specifically required, the outdoor design temperature shall be
selected from columns of 2.5per cent value of Table 8.3.2 for cooling.
3.8.2.2 Indoor Design Conditions : Indoor design temperature shall not be less than 25°C for cooling
unless otherwise required for specific application.
3.8.2.3 Humidity : The actual design relative humidity shall be selected from the range shown in Table
8.3.1 for the minimum total air-conditioning, heating and ventilation system energy use.
3.8.3 System Design

3.8.3.1 Load Variation: Consideration shall be given to changes in building load and the system designed,
so that maximum operational efficiency is maintained under part load conditions. The totai system shall be
separated into smaller zones having similar load requirements, so that each zone can be separately
controlled to maintain optimum operating conditions by reducing wastage of energy.
3.8.3.2 Temperature of Cooling Media: The temperature of refrigerant, chilled water or brine circulated
within the system shall be maintained at the level necessary to achieve the required output to match the
prevailing load conditions with the minimum expenditure of energy.
3.8.3.3 Energy Recovery : Where possible energy recovery system shall be adopted.
3.8.4 Equipment and Control

·
3.8.4.1 General : Air-conditioning, heating and ventilation system shall be equipped with devices and
controls to automatically control the capacity of the system when the building requirement reduces. The
control system shall have devices to reduce energy use considering the effect of l:milcfing energy storage.
3.8.4.2 Cooling with Outdoor Air : Each air handling system shall have facility to use up to and including
100per cent of the air handling system capacity for cooling with outdoor air automatically whenever the use
of outdoor air will result in lower usage of energy than would be required under normal operation of the air
handling system.
Exception:
Cooling with outdoor air is not required under any one or more of the following conditions :
a) Where the air handling system capacity is less than 2500 f/s or 40 kW total cooling capacity.
b) Where the quality of outdoor air is so poor as to require extensive treatment of the air.
c) Where the need for humidification or dehumidification requires the use of more energy than is conserved by
outdoor air cooling on an annual basis.
d) Where the use of outdoor air cooling would affect the operation of other systems so as to increase the overall energy
consumption of the building.
3.8.4.3 Mechanical Ventilation : Each mechanical ventilation system shall be equi p ped with a readily
accessible means for either shutoff or volume reduction, and shutoff when ventilation is not required.
Automatic or gravity dampers that close when the system is not operating shall be provided for outdoor air
intakes and exhausts.
3.8.4.4 Maintenance : Heat exchange tubes shall be periodically cleaned to maintain its heat transfer
characteristics. Maintenance of all equipment shall be periodically done to maintain its efficiency at
satisfactory level.
8-76
Chapter3
3.9 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
3.9.1 Inspection and Testing

3.9.1.1 General : All air-conditioning, heating and ventilation system shall be inspected and tested by the
Authority before the system is commissioned for normal operation. It should be ensured that these are
carried out thoroughly and that all data and results are properly documented. It is recommended that whole
inspection, testing and commissioning be done under tile guidance and control of a single Authority.
3.9.1.2 Inspection: All machinery, equipment and other accessories of the air-conditioning, heating and
ventilation system shall be inspected by the Authority to determine whether the system components and the
system as a whole has been installed as per desi�n and provisions of this Code; proper safety requirements
have been maintained; and adequate fire protection measures have been taken.
Inspection shall also be carried out on structural supports, hangers, fastening devices, vibration isolators etc.
3.9.1.3 Testing
a) General : All machinery, equipment and other accessories shall be tested as per approved procedures.
Tests shall be conducted to determine the strength capacity of any item and performance of any
machine and equipment. All test data shall be properly documented.
b) Pressure Testing of Piping: All field installed refrigerant and hydronic piping system along with their
valves and pipe fittings sfiall be tested at their approved test pressures to cfeterrrune whether the piping
system can withstand the test pressures.
c) Air Distribution System Testing: All ducting system shall be tested to determine whether the duct
system has any leakage at test pressures. All air terminals and air dampers shall be tested for their flow
characteristics.
d) Machinery and Equipment : Tests shall be conducted on machinery and equipment to determine
whether these operate and function properly . All machinery and equipment shall also be tested for
their electrical power consumption d\aractenstics and overall performance. Before performance testing
of the system all air distribution system and hydronic system shall be properly balanced by approved
procedure.
e) Safety Devices and Controls: Tests shall be carried out to determine whether the safety devices and
controls function properly. .
f) All air filters shall be tested in accordance with the latest standard.
3.9.2 Commissioning
If the Authority becomes satisfied regarding satisfactory installation and performance of the air
conditioning, heating and ventilation system after testing, the system shall be commissioned following
approved procedure. Before complete commissioning, all air distribution systems and hydronic systems
shall be properly balanced and all the controls and their sensors shall be properly adjusted.
3.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
3.10.1 General
The owner of the building where the air-conditioning, heating and ventilation system is installed, shall
folio� a properly designed operation procedure and maintenance schedule.
3.10.2 Operation
A well sequenced operation r,rocedure shall be followed to ensure effective operation of the air
conditioning, heating and ventilation system, safety from hazard to personnel and property. Operation
procedure shall take account for saving in energy use.
All operational data of all the machinery and equipment shall be properly recorded for determination of
performance of the machinery, equipment and the system. These data shall be properly preserved for future
reference for maintenance purposes.
3.10.3 Maintenance
A well designed maintenance program for the air-conditioning, heating and ventilation system shall be
implemented in order to achieve the following :
a) Optimum reliability and continuity of service.
b) Extended longevity and economic life.
c) Functional effectiveness, whereby the intended performance of mechanical equipment and system can
be fully attained.

Part 8
Building Services
d) Minimum operating cost, attendant requirements, servicing and repairs.
e) Safety from hazard to personnel and property.
Maintenance program and procedure shall comply with the instructions of machinery J equipment
manufacturers in this regard.
8-78
CHAPTER�
Acoustics, Sound Insulation
and Noise Control
4.1 PURPOSE
The purpose of this chapter of the Code is to provide acoustical, sound insulation and noise control
requirements in buildings. .
4.2 SCOPE
In this chapter, each of the different occupancies is covered basically in two parts. The first part identifies
different areas and aspects of outdoor and indoor noise sources. The second part specifies the planning and
design recommendations covering the spatial, architectural and technical aspects of noise reduction
measures within or outside the builaing.
4.3 TERMINOLOGY
case of any conflict or contradiction between a definition given in this section and that in Part 1 or any other
section, the meaning specified in this section shall govern Ior interpretation of the provisions of this section.
BEL : See SOUND INTENSITY LEVEL.
CYCLE :See FREQUENCY.
dBA : Result of a sound pressure level measurement when the signal has been weighted with a frequency
response of the A curve. The dBA curve approximates the human ear and is therefore used most in noise
control regulations. The relationship of vanous internationally standardized weighting curves for sound
levels is given in Appendix D.
PartS 8-79
Building Services
PartS
Building Services
DECIBEL (dB) : See SOUND INTENSITY LEVEL.
DIRECT AND REVERBERANT SOUND : When a noise source is operating in a room, the noise level at any
position may be regarded as consisting of, first the direct sound, that is the sound travelling directly from
the source to the position under consideration, and second the reverberant sound, that is the sound reaching
the position after multiple reflections from the room surfaces. As a working rate, the direct sound is
considered to predominate for a metre or so from the source.
ECHO : Echoes are long delayed discrete sound reflections of sufficient intensity to be clearly heard above
the general reverberation in a room.
FLUTTER ECHO : A quick succession of echoes; it may be present in small rooms as a disturbing
phenomenon.
FREQUENCY : The frequency of sound is the number of vibrations per second of the molecules of air,
generated by the vibrating body. One comJ'lete movement to and fro of the vibrating body is referred to as
a 'cycle'. Frequency is expressed as the number of cycles per second (cps); it is also referred to as Hertz (Hz).
INTENSITY : Intensity at a point is the average rate at which sound energy is transmitted through a unit
area around the point and perpendicular to the direction of propagation of sound.
L10 : L10 is the average of all hourly values of sound level (in dB) of traffic noise which is exceeded 10 per
cent in a given period of time.
LOUDNESS : Loudness is the sensation produced in the human ear and depends on the intensity and
frequency of sound.
NOISE : Noise is defined as unwanted sound. Noise condition vary from time to time and a noise which
may not be objectionable during the day may be increased in annoying proportions in the silence of the
night, when quiet conditions are essential.
NOISE EXPOSURE FORECAST (NEF) : Noise exposure forecast at any location is the summation of the
noise levels in perceived noise level (PNdB) from all aircraft types, on all runways, suitably weighted for the
number of operations during day time and night time.
NOISE REDUCTION (NR): Noise reduction (NR) is a general term for specifying sound insulation between
rooms. It is more general than SOUND TRANSMfSSION LOSS (TL). If all boundary surfaces in the
receiving room are completely absorbent, the NR will exceed the TL by about 5 dB, i.e. NR TL + 5dB.
=
PERCEIVED NOISE LEVEL : Perceived noise level expressed in decibels (abbreviated PNdB) is a quantity
developed to evaluate aircraft noise to account for greater human sensitivity to high frequency sound. PNdB
calculated from measured noise levels are more high frequency weighted than dBA and correlate very well
. with an average listener's response to aircraft noises of widely varying character.
REVERBERATION : The prolongation of sound, as a result of successive reflections in an enclosed space,

when the source of the sound has stopped is called reverberation.
REVERBERATION TIME (RT) : The reverberation time of a room is defined as the time required for the
sound pressure level in a room to decrease 60 dB after the sound is stopped, and is calculated by the formula
0.16v
RT =
A+xv
where,
RT reverberation time
v = room volume, m3
A total room absorption, m2
X air absorption coefficient
Recommended optimum reverberation time of various uses of Assembly buildings are indicated in
Appendix E.
SOUND TRANSMISSION CLASS (STC) : To avoid the misleading nature of an average transmission loss
(TL) value and to provide a reliable single figure rating for comparing partitions, a different procedure for
single figure ratmg, called sound transmission class (STC) rating, of a partition is determined, by
comparing the 16 frequency TL curve with a standard reference contour, the sound transmission class
contour. STC ratings of some common walls and floors are given in Appendix F.
SOUND TRANSMISSION CLASS CONTOUR : The sound transmission class contour is a standard
reference contour with which the 16 frequency TL curve is compared to determine the sound transmission
class of a partition.
8-80
Chapter4
SOUND TRANSMISSION LOSS (TL) : The sound transmission loss, or simply transmission loss (TL), of a
partition, is a measure of its sound insulation. It is equal to the number of decibels by which sound energy is
reduced in passing through the structure.
SOUND INTENSITY LEVEL : Sound Intensity Level is measured in terms of the unit Bel, which is defined
as the logarithm of the ratio of the sound intensity to the minimum sound intensity audible to the average
human ear. The unit DECIBEL (db) is one-tenth o(a bel. Thus,
1
Sound Intensity Level =log -1 bels = 10log
0
f decibels
0
where, I Sound intensity in watt cm2, and

lo = Sound intensity audible to the average human ear taken as w-16 watt/ cm2.
SONIC BOOM : Noise phenomenon due to the shock waves projected outwards and backwards through the
atmosphere from leadmg and trailing edges of an aircraft travelling at supersonic speed. The waves are
discontinuities of atmospheric pressure and are heard as a characteristic double report which may be of
sufficient intensity to cause damage to buildings, etc.
WAVELENGTH : The wavelength of sound is the distance between the centres of compression of the sound
waves. It is dependent upon the frequency of the sound.
4.4 GENERAL NOISE LEVELS : OUTDOOR
4.4.1 Adequacy in Plan ning and Design

Planning and design of buildings shall take into consideration all sources of noise mentioned in
Sec 4.4.2 and keep provisions for control thereof within buildings.
4.4.2 Sources and Levels of Outdoor Noise

The following sources of outdoor noise shall be taken into consideration for planning and design of
buildings:
a) Traffic noise
(Road, rail, aircraft etc.)
Considerations for air traffic noise levels are given in Appendix G.
b) Noise from built-up areas

(Industries, commercial buildings, offices, public buildings etc.)
For acoustic design of buildings, a noise survey shall be undertaken. (See Appendix H for frequency
values and noise levels of some common sources of noise).
4.4.3 Planning and Design Considerations

The following requirements shall be fulfilled in the planning and design process :
a) The planning shall be undertaken in such a manner that the noise can be kept at a distance. A drop of 5
dB may be considered every time the distance between the source and the recipient is doubled,
provided that there are no sound reflective surfaces near the noise source.
b) Sound barriers shall be provided by placing buildings and occupancies less susceptible to noise
between the source and the more susceptible ones.
c) For overall planning considerations, a noise survey shall be accomplished to examine all the possible
causes of noise.
4.4.3.1 Site Planning

a) Buildings of Occupancy A shall be located at a distance of at least 30m from the roads with heavy
traffic for example ltighways, where the external noise is 90dBA or higher.
b) A distance of about 45 m or more shall be maintained between the building and the source of noise,
where a greater relief from noise is desired.
c) Through traffic roads shall be excluded from residential areas.
4.4.3.2 Orientation of Buildings

a) The orientation of buildings shall be planned in such a way as to reduce the noise disturbance from
neighbourhood areas. Adequate setback of the building from the road shall be maintained in
accordance with the provisions of Part 3.
If adequate distance between the building and the source of noise cannot be provided, rooms which do
not need windows (or, windowless walls of habitable room) shall face t�e source of noise.

PartS
Building Services
b) Buildings which are not susceptible to noise may be used as noise baffles. These shall be placed
between the noise source and tne quiet areas to be designed. Linear blocks of buildings shall be built
with the end facing noisy roads.
4.4.3.3 Air Traffic : Requirements for acoustic design against aircraft noise are specified below :
a) No building for human occupancy shall be constructed where NEF value exceeds 40.
b) In case of development in areas near airports, adequate sound insulation shall be provided for
buildings.
c) Educational institutions, hospitals, auditoriums etc. shall be located at places where the value of NEF is
less than 25.
d) In areas exposed to less than 90 PNdB, all of the windows shall be closed and properly sealed, having
double glazing, in order to provide an acceptable residential interior noise environment.
e) Industrial and commercial activities generating high interior noise environments may be located in
areas exposed to noise levels greater tll.an 90 P�dB.
f) In airport areas of highest noise levels, relatively sparsely manned sewage disposal plants, utility
substations and similar other facilities may be located.
g) AtJproach and take off corridors shall be acquired so as not to impose unduly steep glide paths upon
ancrafts.
4.4.3.4 Road Traffic

a) The provision of adequate distance between the noise source and the recipient shall have to be
maintained for efficient noise control measures.
b) Residential districts and special areas like hospital zones shall be segregated from expressways,
highways, main streets, railways, playgrounds, inoustrial and commercial areas and airport.
c) i) The external value of L10 shall be limited to a maximum of 70 dBA for zoning and planning new
buildings in urban areas (when dwellings are proposed to have sealed windows).
ii) The maximum permissible upper limit of L10 shall be reduced to 60 dBA when the dwellings are
proposed to have open windows.
iii) Major new residential developments shall preferably be located in areas with L10 levels
substantially lower than those specified above.
iv) Where L10 is greater than 60-70 dBA, design solutions such as barrier blocks or noise buffers
shall be utilized in order to reduce noise levels to at least that level.
v) Some form of dwelling insulation will have to be provided when the orientation of site or the
density of development does not permit sound barriers.
vi) In the neighbourhood of residential, educational, institutional and health care buildin�s,
legislative control shall be exercised in a bid to reduce or eliminate disturbing traffic nmse
particularly from buses, trucks and motor cycles, and the sounding of horns by all types of
vehicles. Typical noise levels in free-flowing road traffic are given in Appendix I.
d) Greenbelts and plantations or artificial mounds may be used to reduce noise levels. Stron� leafy trees
shall be planted to act as noise baffles and shrubs or creepers to provide additional protection between
tree trunl<s.
e) A comprehensive layout of traffic arteries shall have to be established by providing routes around (not
through) the quiet surroundings like residential districts, schools, hospitals etc.
4.4.3.5 Rail Traffic

a) No residential or public building (except for the railway station and its ancillary structures) shall be
connected to the railway lines.
b) No mercantile or commercial buildings shall abut the railway lines or the marshalling yards. Only
planned industrial zones may be located beside the railway tracks.
c) In order to reduce the high noise levels, produced at the arrival and departure of trains, platforms in
railway stations shall be treated with sound absorbing materials particularly on the ceiling.
d) The main platform floor shall be separated from the station building with a minimum gap of 50 mm so
that the ground or structure borne vibrations are not transmitted to the building. .
8-82
Chapter4
e) Less windows and other openings (as far as possible) shall be provided in the facade along the railway
tracks.
f) Greenbelts and landscaping shall be developed along the railway lines. Thick belts of plantation, not
less than 20m in width may be provided.
g) A minimum distance of 50 m to 70 m between the buildings and the tracks shall be maintained where
green belts and landscaping are developed.
h) Strong leafy trees shall be planted to act as noise baffles.
j) When a railway line passes close to habitable structures, residential buildings, highrise structures or
apartments, emphasis shall be given to the problem of ground vibration transmitted to the buildings
and proper isolation shall be installed for the critical areas.
4.5 GENERAL NOISE LEVELS: INDOOR
4.5.1 Acceptable Indoor Noise Levels in Buildings

The generally acceptable noise levels inside buildings shall be below 20 dBA for auditoria and concert
halls and 50 dBA for restaurants. The acceptable noise levels in other types of buildings shall be as shown in
Table 8.4.1.
4.5.2 Planning and Design Considerations

4.5.2.1 Buildings (or parts of buildings) which are considered to be especially susceptible to noise
including hospitals, research laboratories, recording studios or the like should not be sited near sources of
noise.
Table8.4.1
Acceptable Intrusive Noise Levels
dBA NR dBA NR
Banks 50 40 Libraries, loan 45 35
Churches 35 25 Libraries, reference 40 30
Cinemas 35 25 Music rooms 30 20
Classrooms 35 25 Offices, private 40 30
Concert halls 30 20 Offices, public 50 40
Conference rooms 30 20 Open air theatres 40 30
Courtrooms 35 25 Radio studios 30 20
Council chambers 35 25 Restaurants 50 40
Department stores 55 50 Recording studios 30 20
Flats, living 45 35 Shops 55 50
Flats, sleeping 35 25 Telephoning, ood
g 50 40
Hospitals, wards 35 25 Telephoning, air 55 45
Hotels, bedrooms 35 25 Television studios 35 25
Houses, living 45 35 Theatres 30 20
Houses, sleeping 35 25 � ing pools 55 50
Lecture rooms 35 25 orks canteens 60 55
4.5.2.2 Buildings in which there are some sources of noise shall have buffers separating the noise
producing area from the other areas. The less vulnerable areas of the building may be planned to act as noise
buffers.
4.5.2.3 In the assessment of indoor noise levels, direct sound Shall be separated from reverberant sound.
As a general rule, the distance from the source to the recipient area shall be doubled to reduce the intensity
of direct sound by 5 dB. The reverberant sound transmitted from one room to another shall be cut down by
employing suitable sound absorption materials and by structural separation.
4.6 OCCUPANCY A : RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
4.6.1 Sources of Noise

Controlling measures shall have to be taken against noise coming from outdoor and indoor sources as
specified in Sec 4.4 and 4.5.
4.6.2 Planning and Design Requirements
4.6.2.1 Space Layout

a) Quiet and noisy quarters shall be grouped and separated horizontally and vertically from each other by
rooms (or spaces) not particularly sensitive to noise such as entry, corridor, staircase, wall closets or
other built-in building components.

Part 8
Building Services
b) A living room in one apartment shall not be located adjacent to a bedroom in another apartment.
c) Bedrooms shall be located in a relatively quiet part of the building and shall not be adjacent to elevator
shafts or mechanical rooms.
Bedrooms shall not be planned alongside access balconies. Where the approach is by an internal
corridor, a sound baffle snail be provided by arranging bathrooms, dressing rooms or stores between
the corridor and the bedrooms.
d) Bathrooms must be separated acoustically from living rooms and shall not be planned over living
rooms or bedrooms of the same dwelling or another.
Bathroom fixtures shall not be installed along walls which separate living room and bathroom.
Water closet shall not be planned over living rooms and bedrooms, whethe� within the same dwelling
or over other dwellings. Water closet cisterns shall not be fixed on partition next to bedrooms or living
rooms.
e) Common walls between vertically staggered dwelling units transmitting footstep noises more easily
into an adjacent unit shall be avoided.
4.6.2.2 Sound Insulation Factors

a) Separation for Sound Insulation : The sound insulation criteria in residential units are to be based on
three grades:
i) Grade I criteria apply mainly to fully residential, quiet rural and suburban areas and in certain
cases to luxury apartment buildings or to dwelling units above the eighth floor of a high-rise
building.
ii) Grade II criteria apply to residential buildings built-in relatively noisy environments typical of
urban or suburban areas.
iii) Grade III criteria express minimal requirements ap plicable to very noisy locations, such as
commercial or business areas (like shop houses w1th dwelling units on the upper floors) or
downtown areas.
Among the above three categories, Grade II covers the majority of residential constructions and shall
therefore be regarded as a basic guide.
In all grades wall constructions and floor-ceiling assemblies between dwelling units shall have STC
ratings at least equal to the values given in Table 8.4.2.
An STC rating of not less than 45 dB is to be provided in walls and floors of residential buildings,
between dwelling units of the same building and between a dwelling unit and any space common to
two or more dwelling units.
Table 8.4.2
Airborne and Impact Sound Insulation Between Dwelling Units
Construction Required Minimum Sound Insulation

Grade I Grade II Grade III
Walls STC55 STC 52 STC48
Floor ceiling assemblies STC55 STC 52 STC48
Service roof, storage areas, workshop, building maintenance room or garage serving more than one
dwelling unit, shall be separated from the dwelling unit by a construction providing an STC rating of
not less than 45 dB.
b) Reduction of Airborne Noise: In case of air borne noise (between the frequency range 100-31500 Hz), a
sound insulation of 50 dB shall be provided in between the living room in one house or flat and
rooms/bed rooms in another. The va1ue shall be 35 dB in between different rooms of the same house.
(See Appendix J for airborne sound insulation properties of walls, doors and windows).
c) Reduction of Airborne Noise Transmitted Through the Structure : Exterior walls shall be rigid and
massive and have good sound insulation characteristics with as few openings as possible.
Ventilation ducts or air transfer openings (ventilators) where provided, shall be designed to minimize
transmission of noise, if necessary, by installing some attenuating devices.
8-84
Chapter4
d) Construction of sound insulation doors shall be of solid core and heavy construction with all edges
sealed up properly. Hollow core wooden doors and light weight construction shall be avoided because
these are dimensionally unstable and can warp, destroying the seal along the perimeter of the door.
Rubber, foam rubber or foamed plastic strips, adjustable or self-aligning stops and gaskets shall be used
for sealing the edges of the doors. They shall be so installed that they are slightly compressed between
door and stop wnen the door is in a closed position. In simple cases the oottom ecfges shall have a
replaceable strip of felt or foam rubber attached to minimize the gap between door and floor.
Separation between the two faces of the door shall be carried through uninterru tedly from edge to
f
edge in both directions. Damping treatments shall be inserted between individua layers of the doors.
Ordinary doors with surface leatner padding shall not be used.
Automatic damped door closers are to be used whenever applicable and economically feasible in order
to avoid the annoying sound of doors slamming.
The difference between the TL of the wall and that of the door shall not exceed 10 dB.
The floor of a room immediately above the bedroom or a living room shall satisfy the Grade I impact
sound insulation.
4.7 OCCUPANCY B : EDUCATIONAL BUILDINGS

4.7.1.1 Outdoor Noise : Measures shall be taken in planning and design to control noise from external
sources mentioned in Sec 4.4.
4.7.1.2 Indoor Noise: The following sources of indoor noise shall be taken into consideration:
a) Wood and metal workshops, machine shops, technical as well as engineering testing laboratories, other
machine rooms, typing areas etc. which produce continuous or intermittent noises oi disturbing nature,
b) Music rooms,
c) Assembly halls, particularly those which are attached to the main building,
d) Practical work spaces, gymnasiums and swimming pools,
e) School kitchen and dining spaces,
f) Entry lobbies, foyer, lounge, corridors and other circulation spaces.
4. 7. 2 Planning and Design Requirements

4.7.2.1 Site Planning : The school building shall be located as far away as possible from the sources of
outdoor noise such as busy roads, railways, neighbouring market places or adjacent shopping areas as well
as local industrial and small scale manufacturing concerns.
Where the site permits, the building shall be placed back from the street, in order to make use of the noise
reducing effect of the increased distance between street line and building line.
If adequate distance between the school/institution building and the noisy traffic route cannot be provided,
rooms which do not need windows or windowless walls of classrooms shall face the noisy road.
Car parking areas shall preferably be located in remote parts of the site.
4.7.2.2 Activities and Space Layout : The minimum requirement for sound insulation in educational
buildings shall be as specified in Table 8.4.3.
4.7.2.3 Halls and Circulation Areas : The lobby, lounge areas etc. or other circulation spaces and linking
corridors shall be separated from teaching areas, lecture galleries or laboratories. No direct window
openings shall be placed along the walls of the corridors or circulation areas.
Doors, ventilators and other necessary openings shall be designed with sufficient foam or rubber seals, so
that they are noise proof when closed.
4.7.2.4 Noise Reduction within Rooms: Lecture halls of educational institutions (with a seating capacity
of more than 100 persons) shall be designed in accordance with the relevant acoustical principles.
Lecture halls with volumes of up to about 550 m3 or for an audience of up to about 150 to 200, shall not
require a sound amplification system, if their acoustical design is based on appropriate principles and
specifications.

Part 8
Building Services
A diagonal seating layout shall preferably be used for rectangular lecture rooms of the capacity mentioned
above as it automatically eliminates undesirable parallelism between walls at the podium and effectively
utilizes the diverging front walls as sound reflectors.
.
Table 8.4.3
Minimum Requirements of Sound Insulation for Different use
in Educational Buildings
Noise Producing Type of Use Minimum Sound

Characteristics Reduction (dB)
Noise producing Workshops 25

Kitchens
Dining rooms
Gymnasiums
Indoor swimming pools
Noise producing but Assembly halls 45

requinng silence at times Lecture halls
Music rooms
Average noise producing General classrooms 35

Practical rooms
Laboratories
Offices
Rooms requiring silence Libraries 35

Studies
Rooms requiring privacy Medical rooms 45

Staff rooms
4.8 OCCUPANCY D: HEALTH CARE BUILDINGS
4.8.1 Sources of Disturbin� Noise

4.8.1.1 Outdoor Noise: Sources of outdoor noise specified in Sec 4.4 shall be taken into consideration for
planning and desi�. Additionally, health care service facilities like ambulance, medicine and equipment
vans, store delivenes, laundry and refuse collection trolleys are also frequent sources of noise. HeaHh care
buildings shall be sited away from such sources as far as practicable.
4.8.1.2 Indoor Noise : Indoor noise sources include mechanical and mobile equipment like X-ray and
suction machines, drilling equipment etc.
Planning and design shall take into account the following sources of noise:
a) The handling of sterilizing, as well as metal or glass equipment,
b) Wheeled trolleys used for the purpose of carrying foods and medical supplies,
c) Mechanical equipment like mechanical and electrical motors, machineries, boilers, pumps, fans,
ventilators, transformers, elevators, air-conditioning equipment etc.
d) Operational facilities like refrigerators, sterilizers, autoclaves etc.,
e) Patient service facilities including oxygen cylinders or tanks, saline stands, carrier carts and instrument
cases, etc.,
f) Maintenance work of engineering services like plumbing and sanitary fixtures or fittings, hot and cold
water and central heating pipes, air-conditioning ducts, ventilation shafts etc., and
g) Audible calling systems, radio and television sets.
4.8.2 Planning and Design Requirements

4.8.2.1 Site Planning : Site shall be selected to keep adequate distance from traffic noise from highways,
main roads, railroads, airports and noise originating from parking areas. In addition to the requirements of
Sec 4.4.3, the following requirements shall be fulfilled :
a) In the selection of a site and site planning, consideration shall be given to:
i) Distance from exterior noise,
8-86
Chapter 4
ii) Effect of high buildings adjacent to the site which can act as noise reflectors, and
iii) Traffic conditions surrounding the site.
b) Parking areas shall be carefully located at the farthest possible corners of the premises. If enough space
is not available to provide facilities for the desired number of vehicles, parking spaces shall be provided
in more than one area. Loading platforms and service entries are to be planned in such a manner as to
minimize noise in areas requiring silence.
c) Closed courts shall preferably be avoided.
4.8.2.2 Activities and Space Layout : The following points shall be given due consideration in the
planning and design of health care buildings.
a) Rooms to be used for board meetings, conference, counselling and instructional purposes shall be
grouped near public zones of the building in such a way that spread of noise can be avoided.
b) Long corridors shall be avoided.
c) The main kitchen shall be housed in a separate building and connected to the wards only by service
lifts or a service stair. If this is impracticaole, it shall be planned beneath the wards, rather than above
them.
d) Mechanical plants shall preferably be placed in separate buildings.
e) Rooms housing equipment, operational facilities and patient service facilities shall be designed for
adequate sound insulation.
·
f) Closed courts shall be avoided, unless rooms facing the court are air-conditioned with completely
sealed and air tight windows.
g) The units which are themselves potential sources of noise for example, children's wards and outpatient
departments, shall be treated with special care regarding the protection against noise.
4.8.2.3 Noise Reduction in the Sensitive Area : In health care buildings, many sensitive areas such as
operation theatres, doctor's consultation rooms, intensive care units and post-operative areas shall be
provided with special noise control arrangements.
These rooms shall preferably be isolated in locations (or corners) surrounded by other intermediate zones
which ensure protection of the core area from outdoor noise.
A sound reduction of about 45 dBA between the consulting and the waiting rooms shall be provided in
order to weaken the transmission of sound.
A lobby like space in between the interconnecting and communicating doors shall be provided.
4.8.2.4 Sound Insulation Factors : The rooms and indoor spaces of a health care building, shall be treated
with sound absorptive materials.
Different STC ratings of walls specified for separate components of buildings shall have to be considered as
follows:
a) For airborne noise, the average STC rating of wall and floors shall be 50 dB.
b) An STC rating of 55 dB shall be required between rooms whose occupants are susceptible to noise.
c) In general an average STC of 45 dB is to be provided for corridor walls and for walls between patient
rooms.
d) All doors shall be fitted with silent closers. Doors to opposite rooms, shall be positioned in a staggered
manner.
e) For ward doors, a corresponding STC of 35 dB shall be provided.
f) PVC mats, rubber mats or other resilient materials and rubber shod equipment shall be used in utility
rooms, ward kitchens and circulation areas as floor coverings.
Other finish materials like rubber tile, cork tile, vinyl tile or linoleum which can also help reduce the
impact noise substantially shall be used alternatively.
g) Mobile equipment, such as trolleys and bed, oxygen cylinder carriers and stretchers shall be made
relatively silent by means of nonfriction rubber tyred wheels .

PartS
Building Services
h) Special treatments such as thin nonporous coverings or films over some soft absorbent materials shall
be used for good sound absorption when a washable acoustical treatment is desired.
i) Door and window curtains or screens, as well as bed sheets etc. shall be used wherever the indoor
openings are located to help reduce reverberation in the hard surfaced surroundings. Curtain rails,
rings and runners of silent type shall be used so that they generate as little frictional noise as possible.
j) Ventilation ducts and conduits shall be laid out in such a way that they do not open an easy by-pass
for spreading out any noise from other sources. These conduits and ducts shall oe completely sealed
around the pipes where they pass through walls and floors.
k) Special care shall be taken to reduce noise of plumbing equipment and fixtures. Specially made
silencing pipes and flushing fixtures shall be used to reduce the noise of water closet and cisterns in
lavatories and toilets.
Ducts carrying waste or water pipes shall be properly lined with sound insulation material to prevent
noise from the J?ipes passing through duct walls into the patients' wards or cabins or the spaces
susceptible to nmse.
I) Wherever available, cisterns shall be used to replace the pressure operated flushing system so that the
disturbance becomes less irritating.
4.9 OCCUPANCY E: ASSEMBLY
4.9.1 General
Buildings of Occupancy Eshall be designed both for transmission of noise throu�h the walls and openings
and also for internal acoustics. Public address systems installed in such buildmgs shall conform to the
specifications of Sec 4.12.2.

4.9.2.1 Outdoor Noise : The following sources of noise shall be taken into account in planning and
design:
a) Traffic noise (air, road and rail) and noise from other outdoor sources entering through walls, roofs,
doors, windows or ventilation openings,
b) Noise from any other gathering spaces, public meetings, outdoor activities and crowds, particularly
during the time of breaking of shows and performances,
c) Noise produced from parking areas.
4.9.2.2 Indoor Noise : The following indoor noise sources shall be taken into account in planning and
design :
a) Noise from other adjacent halls located within the same building used for similar performance, or for
seminar, symposium or general meetings,
b) Noise produced from ticket counters, lobby or lounge areas, rehearsal rooms, waiting areas and
corridors,
c) Noise generated from other ancillary services located within the building, like cafeteria or snack bar, tea
shop, post office, bank or the like,
d) Noise generated from the mechanical or electrical equipment, air-conditioning plants, ventilation
channels and ducts, plumbing and water lines etc.
4.9.3 Planning and Desi&n Requirements

4.9.3.1 Site Planmng and Acoustical Requirements :The noise control of auditoria or assembly halls shall
begin with sensible site planning following the measures and precautions stated below :
a) The auditorium shall be effectively separated from all exterior and interior noise and vibration sources
as far as practicable;
b) The assembly halls shall be protected from vehicular or air traffic, parking or loading areas, mechanical
equipment, electrical rooms or workshops.
The following are the acoustical requirements for good hearing conditions in an auditorium which shall be
ensured in planning and design :
a) Adequate loudness shall have to be ensured in every part of the auditorium;
b) The sound energy shall be uniformly distributed in the hall;
8-88
. Chapter4
c) Optimum reverberation characteristics shall have to be provided;
d) The hall shall be free of such acoustical defects as echoes, long delayed reflections, flutter echoes, sound
concentrations, distortions, sound shadow and room resonance etc.;
e) Noise and vibration shall be excluded or reasonably reduced in every part or the hall room.
4.9.3.2 Activities and Space La out in Divisible and Multi-purpose Auditoria

r
a) A protective buffer zone o rooms between exterior noise source and auditorium proper shall be
designed.
b) Rooms in the buffer zone (lobbies, vestibules, circulation areas, restaurants, ticket counters, offices etc.)
shall be shut off from the auditorium proper by sound insulation doors.
c) The purposes of the subdivided spaces shall be clarified, in order to establish the predictable intensity
of the various sound programmes.
4.9.3.3 Noise Reduction within Rooms

a) There shall not be any use of continuous, unrecognizable and loud background noise.
b) The ventilating and air-conditioning system shall be so designed that the noise level created b}' the
system is at least 10 dB below the perrrussible background noise level specified in noise criteria level.
c) In order to protect the hall from external noise the minimum sound reduction value required in an
auditorium IS 65 dB for a concert hall and 60 dB for a theatre. This reduction shall be provided on all
sides.
4.9.3.4 Sound Insulation Factors

a) Rooms in the buffer zone (lobbies, vestibules, circulation areas, restaurants, counter and issue desk
corners, office etc.) shall have sound absorbing ceilings and carpeted floor. If the rooms are to be used
for the purposes of verbal instructions only, a moderate degree of sound insulation (STC 40 to 45 dB)
shall be accomplished by the movable partitions.
b) If audio equipment or loudspeakers are to be used, an acoustically more effective, efficient partition
system shall be used, with sound insulation of STC 45 to 50 dB.
c) An insulation of STC 50 to 60 dB shall be provided if any section of the space is selected for the
performance of live music.
d) All windows shall have to be eliminated from the main auditorium walls in order to exclude excessive
outdoor noises.
e) Suspended ceilings shall accommodate the ventilating, air-conditioning and electrical services above the
room.
f) In order to increase the effectiveness of the suspended ceilings the following measures shall be taken :
i) The ceiling membrane shall weigh not less than 25 kg/ m2;
ii) The ceiling membrane shall not be too rigid;
iii) Noise transmission through the ceiling shall have to be avoided by the use of a solid, airtight
membrane;
iv) Gaps between ceiling and surrounding structure shall be sealed;
v) The air space between ceiling membrane and structural floor shall be increased to a reasonable
maximum;
vi) An absorbent blanket is to be used in the air space above the ceiling;
vii) The number of points of suspension from the structural floor above shall be reduced to a
minimum;
viii) Hangers made of resilient substance shall be preferable to the rigid ones.
g) In order to improve the airborne or impact sound insulation of a ceiling the following specifications
shall be followed :
i) The ceiling membrane shall have a minimum of 25 mm solid cement plaster layer with
completely closed, airtight and sealed joints all around;

Part 8
Building Services
ii) If further reduction of undesirable noise is desired within a sound insulated room, sound ·
absorptive treatment shall be provided along the underside of the solid ceiling.
4.9.3.5 Masking Noise: The artificial noise produced by electronically created background noise for the
purpose of drowning out or masking unwanted noise, shall be provided. The process shall effectively
suppress minor intrusions which might interrupt the recipient's privacy.
The maximum permissible background noise levels in various occupancies is specified in terms of noise
criteria (NC) curves. Each of the NC curves is expressed by the sound pressure level values in the important
1200-2400 Hz frequency band. The NC levels shall be used to specify the desirable lowest limit under which
the background noise must not fall. (See Appendix K for details).
Note : The general configuration of the NC curves is quite similar to the noise rating (NR) curves established by the
International Organization for Standardization, used mostly in the European practice
4.10 OCCUPANCY F: BUSINESS AND MERCANTILE BUILDINGS
4.10.1 General
Buildings of Occupancy F shall be planned and designed to minimize noise from external and internal
sources.
4.10.2 Sources of Disturbing Noise

4.10.2.1 Outdoor Noise: The following sources of outdoor noise and those specified in Sec 4.4 shall be
taken into account in the planning and design of business and mercantile buildings :
Traffic,
Playgrounds,
Market places and shopping areas,
Crowds grouped arouna the buildings for business purpose or other.
4.10.2.2 Indoor Noise : The following sources of indoor noise shall be identified for noise attenuation
within buildings :
a) Mechanical noise, caused by heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems, elevators, escalators and
pneumatic tubes etc. ;
b) Noise produced by office equipment or machines such as typewriters, printers, teleprinters,

reproduc !ion, tabulating and puncning machines etc.;
c) Noise produced by mechanical amplifiers, for example in seminar halls, conference rooms or staff
training rooms or the like where pubfic address system is used;
d) Machine noise generated from slide rooms, projection rooms and from electrical and mechanical
machines like generators, transformers, switch rooms and electric substations etc. ;
e) Typical office noise created by speech, voices in circulation areas, opening and closing of doors etc. ;
f) Plumbing systems, ventilation plants, lift machineries, air-conditioning and cooling systems.
4.10.3 Planning and Desi�n Requirements

4.10.3.1 Site Plannmg :Rooms susceptible to noise shall be located away from the sources of noise.
4.10.3.2 Activities and. Space Layout : Spaces producing noise and those susceptible to noise shall be
separated as far as practicable. The effective length of long corridors shall be mininuzed. Swing doors are to
be provided at intervals.
4.10.3.3 Noise Reduction in the Sensitive Areas

a) Open plan Offices
i) The floor area may be carpeted in order to absorb airborne noise and footstep noise. The carpet
shall preferably be thick and placed on top of resilient floors.
ii) The entire portion of the ceiling shall be treated with sound absorption materials. Such treatment
shall be applied to the screens and nearby walls also.
A highly sound absorptive ceiling with a sound absorption coefficient of 0.70 shall preferably be
used to absorb 70 per cent of the sound energy reflecting 30 per cent of it.
iii) Moderately noisy office equipment (like typewriters, telephones, computers etc.) shall be
distributed as uniformly as possible all over the office space.
8-90
Chapter 4
iv) Noisy office equipment shall be concentrated into specific areas of the office space. The space
shall be treated with maximum amount of sound aosorptive material and visually separated
from the rest of the office.
b) General Offices : Sound absorbent ceiling shall be provided in corridors. Hard floor finishes and batten
floors in corridors shall be avoided. Floor ducts shall be planned on one side of corridors.
4.10.3.4 Reduction of Noise at Source : The following measures shall be undertaken to reduce noise at
source depending on the degree of noise reduction desired.
a) The noise from slamming of doors shall be reduced by fitting automatic quiet action type door closers.
Continuous soft, resilient strip set into the door frames as well as quiet achon door latches shall be used.
b) Machines like typewriters, calculators, printers etc. shall be fitted or installed with resilient pads to
prevent the floors or tables (on which they stand) from acting as large radiating panels.
c) Noises from ventilating systems, from a uniform flow of traffic or from general office activities, shall be
considered to generate an artificial masking noise. In open plan offices the provision of a relatively high
but acceptable degree of background noise (from the ventilating or air-conditioning system) shall be
provided, in order to mask undesirable office noises created by typewriters, telephones, office machines
or loud conversation and to provide a reasonable amount of privacy.
The background noise masking system shall be introduced gradually without disturbing the feeling of
the occupants.
The air-conditioning system may be used to generate background masking noise if the noise level from
the ceiling fans, ducts etc. can be suitably reduced to generate the desired frequency spectrum.
4.10.3.5 Sound Insulation Factors : The acoustical performance of the partitions dividing rentable office
spaces shall not exceed an STC rating of 25 to 30 dB, unless the background noise is so high that it masks the
sound coming through the lightweigbt partition.
If lightweight partitions are employed for subdivision of large spaces into executive cabins and secretarial
areas, the following measures sfiall be taken to increase the insulation factors:
a) Sound barriers shall be provided up to above the false ceiling with a noise reduction characteristic that
will not be affected by ducts, conduits or other cable lines including electricity and water pipings
installed in the ceiling space.
b) Where construction of light weight partitions is considered essential, a double skin panel shall be
preferred.
The panels shall be installed apart from each other either by use of separate framing or by use of elastic
discontinuities in the construction. Sound absorbing materials shall be provided in the air cavity
between the panels so that more insulation can be assured.
c) All apertures, gaps and joints at side walls, floors and ceiling junctions shall be properly sealed.
d) A double panel hollow floor construction shall be employed with heavy sound damping materials
introduced between the panels for effective reduction of the structure borne noise transmitted from
upper floors to the floors below, particularly when lightweight floors are provided in multi-use spaces.
Lightweight materials having high natural frequencies may resonate or vibrate due to an af'plied
vibratory force which may oe caused by mechanical equipment, road or rail traffic etc. These
materials, if used for speciftc reasons, shall be isolated from tfie source of noise in order to reduce the
amount of vibration transmitted to the building.
e) The floor surfaces surrounding the office space may be lined with a carpet of high sound absorption.
f) For sound adsorption with floor carpeting, the following characteristics shall be maintained:
.
i) Fibre type carpet shall not be used, as it has practically no effect on sound absorption;
ii) Hair, hair jute and foam rubber pads shall be used for higher sound absorption than the less
permeable rubber coated hair jute, sponge rubber etc.;
iii) To improve sound absorption the loop-pile fabrics with increased pile height (with the density
held constant) shall be applied;
iv) The backing shall be more permeable for higher sound absorption.

PartS
Building Services
4.11 OCCUPANCY G: INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
4.11.1 General Noise Levels

In the noise control of industrial buildings the following requirements are to be fulfilled:
a) An acceptable acoustical environment for individual workers and machine operators ;
b) Speech communication among operators to the required degree ;
c) Protection of other workers or office employees (either close to the noise source or at some other
location within the same building) ;
d) Prevention of noise transmission into adjacent buildings or into the surrounding community.
4.11.1.1 Intermittent Noises : Intermittent noise in the form of isolated explosions, and periodic noise
related to pressure relief valves, hammering, grinding and sawing operations etc. shall be identified for
enforcing controlling measures.
4.11.1.2 Sources of Noise :The following sources of noise in industrial buildings and manufacturing plants
shall be identified and investigated to find whether the machines are in smooth operation and producing
minimal mechanical noise.
a) Fabrication and assembly machines;
b) Machines used for material transport and general plant services;
c) Noise caused by impact and coupled with resonant response of the structural members, connected to
the impacting surfaces;
d) High frequency sounds generated from grinders;
e) Frictional noise occurring at the time of sawing, grinding or sanding, as well as during the cutting on
lathe machines and in brakes or from bearings;
f) Noise generated from piping systems and valves;
g) High velocity flow of air, steam or other fluids that undergo an abrupt change in pipe diameter which
give rise to turbulence and resultant noise, and noise generated by rapid vanation in air pressure
caused by turbulence from high velocity air, steam or gases;
h) Unpleasant noise identified with rotating or reciprocating machines, which is generated due to pressure
fluctuation in the fluids inside the machines.
4.11.2 Hearing Damage Risk Criteria

When the sound level at a particular section in a factory or industrial building exceeds the SJ'ecified level in
terms of magnitude and time (as shown in Table 8.4.4 below), feasible engineerin� control shall be applied
and implemented in order to reduce the sound to the limits shown. Personal hearmg protection equipment
shall be provided and used if such control fails to reduce sound levels.
4.11.3 Interference with Communication

In industries where the operator has to follow verbal instructions during operation of the machine the
background noise shall be reduced to an acceptable level.
Precautionary measures shall be taken so that the noise generated inside may not be the cause of accidents
by hindering communication or by masking warning signals.
4.11.4 Requirements for Noise Reduction

4.11.4.1 Noise Reduction by Layout and Location :Considerable noise reduction may be achieved by a
sensible architectural layout in noisy industrial buildings following the steps mentioned below :
a) Noisy areas shall be separated from spaces requiring silence.
b) The office block is to be located in a separate building. If this is not possible, the office space in a factory
shall be segregated from the production area as far as practicable.
c) The office building shall not have a common wall with the production areas. Where a common wall is
unavoidable it should be of heavy construction (not less than 375 mm thick).
d) Electrically operated vehicles shall be used as far as practicable, since they eliminate most of the noise
normally associated with combustion engines.
8-92
Chapter4
Table 8.4.4
Permissible Exposure Limits For Steady-State Noise
Sound Level Time Permitted

dB A hour- minute
85 16-00
86 13-56
87 12-08
88 10-34
89 9-11
90 8-00
91 6-58
92 6-04
93 5-17
94 4-36
95 4-00
96 3-29
97 3-02
98 2-50
99 2-15
100 2-00
101 1-44
102 1-31
103 1-19
104 1-09
105 1-00
106 0-52
107 0-46
108 0-40
109 0-34
110 0-30
4.11.4.2 Noise Reduction at Source : In order to suppress the noise at the source relatively silent machines
and equipment shall be installed. Additionally the following provisions shall be adhered to :
a) Appropriate type of manufacturing process or working method shall be selected which does not cause
disturbing noise. Machine tools and equipment are to be selected carefully in order to attain lower noise
levels in the machine shop.
b) Maintenance of vibrating and frictional machineries shall be ensured.
c) Impact noises in general shall be reduced; soft and resilient materials shall be applied on hard surfaces
where impact noise can originate.
d) Rubber tyres or similar other materials shall be fixed on the areas or surfaces used for the handling and
dropping of materials.
e) The area of the radiating surface from which a noise is radiated shall be reduced to a minimum.
f) Resilient flooring (carpeting, rubber tile, cork tile, etc.) shall be used adequately to reduce impact
transmission onto the floor .
g) Flexible mountings, anti-vibration pads, floating floors etc. shall be used to prevent the transmission of
vibration and shock from various machines into the building or structure.
h) Mechanically rigid connecting paths must be interrupted by resilient materials so that the transmission
of vibration and noise is reduced.
4.11.4.3 Isolator Specifications

a) Isolators shall be made of resilient materials like steel (in the form of springs), soft rubber and corks.
b) Direct contact between the spring and the supporting structure shall be eliminated, in order to reduce
transmission of high frequencies by metal sprmgs.

PartS
Building Services
c) Rubber or felt pads shall be inserted between the ends of the springs and the surfaces to which they are
fixed.
d) Felt or cork shall be used under machine bases, as resilient mats or pads.
e) If the equipment is massive like drop hammers causing serious impact vibration (in larger
manufacturmg plants), it shall be mounted on massive blocks of concrete, on its own separate
foundation.
f) The foundation shall have a weight 3 to 5 times that of the supported machines.
g) A sound reduction of 5 to 10 dBA shall have to be realized from the vibration isolation measures.
4.11.4.4 Noise Reduction by Enclosures and Barriers : When the plant is large in which the overall noise
level results from many machines, an enclosure shall be provided.
a) When only one or two machines are the dominant source of disturbing noise, the noisy equipment shall
be isolated in a small area of enclosure.
b) The enclosure shall be in the form of close fitting acousti5= box around the machines. The box shall be of
such character that the operator can continue w1th his normal work outside the box.
c) An enclosure around the offending unit shall be impermeable to air and lined with sound absorbing
materials such that the noise generated by machines 1s reduced substantially.
d) i) When the industrial plant is a large one in which the resultant noise level is produced from a
number of machines, enclosures snail be used either for supervisory personnel or operators who
are engaged in monitoring the automatic machines. Such barriers may have inspection openings.
ii) Enclosures of this type shall ensure noise reduction of at least 30 dBA, and shall be made of
sheet metal lined insiae with an appropriate insulation material.
iii) Where curtains are used to isolate the noisy equipment in a small area, they shall be of full
length i.e. from ceiling to floor and shall be made of fibreglass cloth and lead or leaded vinyl.
e) If the size of the machine is large and asks for more working spaces, thus not permitting close fitting
enclosures, the machine shall be housed in a separate room or enclosure.
The inside of the enclosure shall be lined with sound absorbing materials in order to reduce the
contained noise.
f) If after all these measures are taken the noise level still remains above a tolerable degree, the workers
shall be provided with earplugs for protection.
4.12 ACOUSTICAL REQUIREMENTS OF SPECIAL OCCUPANCIES
4.12.1 Susceptible Buildings

4.12.1.1 Recording and Radio Studios : A recording studio shall present optimum acoustic conditions. A
differentiation shaH be made among the numerous various purposes of studio use.
a) Particular attention shall be given to the following requirements :

i) An optimum size and shape of the studio Shall be established following the design criteria;
ii) A high degree of diffusion shall be secured;
iii) Ideal reverberation characteristics shall be provided;
iv) Noises and vibration shall be completely eliminated and acoustical defects shall be totally
prevented. ·
b) The acoustical treatments shall be uniformly and proportionately distributed over the three pairs of
opposite surfaces enclosing the studio.
c) Portable acoustic screen and a reverberation chamber shall be provided so that the desired
reverberation condition can be achieved.
d) Variable absorbers such as hinged or sliding panels, rotatable cylinders, adjustable drapery etc. shall be
fixed on wall surfaces and ceiling areas.
e) All surfaces shall be carefully checked for echoes, flutter echoes etc.
8-94
Chapter4 ·
f) Parallel surfaces shall be eliminated or treated with highly absorptive acoustical materials (throughout
the frequency range between 63 and 8000 Hz).
4.12.1.2 Research Laboratories

a) In the selection of site, care shall be taken to ensure that no noise generating installations exist in the
vicinity.
b) Location of laboratories shall be secluded from the noisy zones within the building.
c) A sound insulation of at least 35 dB shall be achieved by means of acoustical partitions where offices
are attached to the laboratory.
d) Sound absorbing screens shall be used where scientists and researchers are engaged in laboratory
activities and desk work simultaneously.
e) Transmission of noise through service ducts, pipes, lifts and staircases shall be guarded.
f) Double glazed windows shall be provided in the noise sensitive areas. There shall be a minimum gap
of 100 mm between the two glasses.
4.12.1.3 Music Rooms :The following provisions shall apply to music rooms, including rehearsal rooms,
instructional space, practice booth etc.
a) Acoustical conditions in practice booths and listening booths shall have a reverberation time of 0.4 to
0.5 second.
b) Adequate floor area, room height, room shape and volume must be established to achieve proper
reverberation. .
c) Sound absorbing materials shall be applied sufficiently so that the excessive sound generated by bands
or individual instruments can be soaked up.
d) Parallelism between opposite surfaces shall be avoided.
e) Entire surfaces of at least two adjacent walls, and all the ceiling area shall be treated with sound
absorbing materials.
f) Use of suspended ceiling shall be avoided.
g) The underside of the floor construction above shall be exposed and treated acoustically to provide
adequate sound insulation.
h) Ventilating and air-conditioning ducts shall not transmit undesirable sounds of music from one space to
another, horizontally and vertically.
4.12.1.4 Libraries : A quite and peaceful interior shall be maintained inside libraries. The following
provisions are to be adhered to in planning and design:
a) Most of the cubicles area shall be located around the central portion of the library building. Baffle
lobbies shall be planned between the library and corridors.
b) Screening and sound insulation measures shall be undertaken in and around the reception/issue desk
and photocopying facility areas.
c) Stack rooms, store rooms and administrative offices shall be planned in such a way that the audiovisual
areas are properly isolated from external noises.
d) Walls enclosing the library shall have a sound reduction value of not less than 50 dB.
e) Fanlights shall be double glazed and nonopenable.
f) Walls facing the corridors or other noisy areas shall not have fanlights or borrowed lights unless they
are double glazed.
4.12.1.5 Law Courts and Council Chambers

a) Entrance into court rooms and council chambers (especially from circulation areas and gathering
spaces) shall be through baffle lobbies, with two sets of doors fitted with silencers.
b) Offices shall be planned around the court rooms or chambers for further protection against outdoor
noise and the central rooms shall have a sound insulation value of not less tnan 50 dB (provided by 225
mm thick brick wall) to insulate against airborne noise in the corridors.
c) The court and chamber rooms shall have floors finished with resilient materials.

Part 8
Building Services
d) Ceiling and upper parts of the walls of lobbies and circulation areas shall have sound absorbing
treatments.
4.12.2 Public Address System

4.12.2.1 Design of public address systems shall be performed by an engineer according to standard
engineering practices. The design shall take care of equipment choice, positioning of the individual elements
ana other precautions to obtain optimum performance of the system.
4.12.2.2 Passenger terminals and other public places equipped with public address systems shall as far as
practicable avoia the use of sound reflecting surfaces like hard walls and floors. Reverberation time shall be
reduced as far as possible by using sound absorbing materials on walls and ceilings.
4.12.2.3 Reverberator built-up sound level shall not be relied upon. Direct sound shall preferably be audible
in all areas to be covered by tne public address system.
4.12.2.4 Sound levels of the public address system in the areas covered shall be adequately high to
overcome background noise.
Related Appendices
Appendix D Relationship of Weighting Curves for Sound Levels
Appendix E Recommended Optimum Reverberation Time for Assembly Buildings
Appendix F STC Ratings of Walls and Floors
AppendixG Air Traffic Noise Levels
Appendix H Frequency Values and Noise Levels of Some Common Sources
Appendix I Typical Noise Levels in Free-Flowing Road Traffic
Appendix] Average Airborne Sound Insulation of Common Constructions
Appendix K Recommended Background Noise Criteria and NC Curves
8-96
CHAPTER�
Lifts, Escalators and
Moving Walks
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this chapter is to provide minimum standards for re�lating and controlling the design,
construction, installation, quality of materials, location, operation, mamtenance and use of lifts, escalators
and moving walks to ensure public safety and welfare.
5.1.2 Scope
5.1.2.1 The provisions of this chapter shall apply to the erection, installation, alteration, repair, relocation,
replacement, addition to, operation and maintenance of lifts, escalators and moving walks.
5.1.2.2 Additions, alterations, repairs and replacement of equipment or systems shall comply with the
provisions for new equipment and systems.
5.1.2.3 Where, in any specific case, different sections of the code sl'ecify different materials or other
requirements, the most restrictive one shall �ovem. Where there is a conflict between a general requirement
ana a specific requirement, the specific requirement shall be applicable.
5.1.2.4 It shall be unlawful to install, extend, alter, rer.air or maintain lift, escalator or moving walk
systems in or adjacent to buildings except in compliance with this Code.
5.1.3 Terminology
This section provides an alphabetical list of the terms used in and applicable in this chapter of the Code. In
case of any conflict or contradiction between a definition given in this section and that in Part 1, the meaning
Part 8 8-97
Building Services
PartS
Building Services
BALUSTER:One of the upright supports of a hand rail.
BALUSTRADE:A row of balusters meant for supporting moving hand rails.
BASEMENT STOREY :The lower storey of a building below or partly below the ground level.
BUFFER: A device designed to absorb the impact of the falling car or counter weight.
CALL INDICATOR: A visual and audible device in the car to indicate to the attendant the lift landings
from which the calls have been made.
CAR BODY WORK:The enclosing body work of the lift car which comprises the sides and roof, and is built
upon the car platform.
CAR FRAME:The supporting frame to which the platform of the lift car, its safety gear, guide shoes and
suspension ropes are attached.
CAR PLATFORM :The part of the lift car which forms the floor and directly supports the load.
CAR SPEED: See RATED SPEED (LIFT).
COMBPLATE: A pronged plate that forms part of an escalator (or moving walk) landing and engages with
the Cleats of the steps (or treadway) at the limits of travel.
CONTROL SYSTEM: The system of equipment by means of which starting, stopping, direction of motion,
speed ,acceleration, and retardation of tne moving member are controlled.
COUNTER WEIGHT : A weight or combination of weights to counterbalance the weight of the car and part
of the rated load.
DETERMINING ENTRANCE LEVEL: The inside floor level at the entrance to the building.
DOOR, CENTRE OPENING SLIDING :A door which slides horizontally and consists of two panels which
open from the centre and are so interconnected that they move simultaneously.
DOOR, HINGED : The hinged portion of the lift well enclosure which closes the opening giving access to
the landing.
DOOR, MIDBAR COLLAPSIBLE : A collapsible door with vertical bars mounted between the normal
vertical members.
DOOR, SINGLE SLIDE: A single panel door which slides horizontally.
DOOR, TWO SPEED : A two panel door which slides horizontally in the same direction wherein each
panel has different operating speed and reaches the ends simultaneously.
DOOR, VERTICAL BIPARTING :A door or shutter which slides vertically and consists of two panels or
sets of panels that move away from each other to open and are so interconnected that they move
simultaneously.
DRIVING MACHINERY: The motorized power unit for driving the lift, escalator or moving walk.
DUMBWAITER:A small lift with a car which moves in guides in a substantially vertical direction, has net
floor area, total inside height and capacity not exceeding 0.9 m2, 1.25 m and 225 kg respectively and is
exclusively used for carrymg materials and no person. It may or may not be provided with fixed or
removable shelves.
ENCLOSED WELL : The lift well having enclosure walls of continuous construction without openings
except for doors at landings.
ESCALATOR: A power driven, inclined, continuously moving stairway used for carrying passengers from
one level to another.
FLOOR: The lower surface in a storey on which one normally walks in a building. The general term 'floor',
unless otherwise specifically mentioned shall not refer to a 'mezzanine floor'.
GOVERNOR : A device which automatically actuates safety devices in the event of over speed of the
equipment.
GUIDES (LIFT) : The members used to guide the movement of a lift car or counterweight in a vertical
direction.
8-98
Chapter 5
•
HANDLING CAPACITY : The capacity of the lift system to carry passengers during a five minute peak
period, expressed as the percentage of the estimated total population handled.
HOSPITAL LIFT : A lift normally installed in a hospital, nursing home or clinic and designed to
accommodate one number bed/stretcher along its depth, with sufficient space all around to carry a
minimum of three attendants in addition to the lift operator.
INTERVAL: Average time gap(s) between consecutive lifts leaving the ground floor or passing any specific
floor.
LANDING : That portion of a building or structure used for the reception and discharge of passengers or
goods or both into and from a lift car, escalator or moving walk.
LANDING CALL PUSH BUTTON (LIFT): A push button fitted at a lift landing, either for calling the lift car
or for actuating the call indicator.
LANDING DOOR (LIFT) : The hinged or sliding portion of a lift well enclosure, controlling access to a lift
car at a lift landing.
LANDING PLATE : The portion of the landing immediately above the mechanism at either end of escalator
or moving walk and constructed so as to give access to this mechanism in these areas.
LIFT : A machine designed to transport persons or materials between two or more levels in a vertical or
substantially vertical direction by means of a guided car or platform.
LIFT CAR : The load carrying unit with its floor or platform, car frame and enclosing bodywork.
LIFT MACHINE: The part of the lift equipment comprising motor(s) and control gear therewith, reduction
gear (if any), brake(s) and winding drum or sheave, by which the lift car is raised or lowered.
LIFT PIT:The space in the lift well below the level of the lowest lift landing served.
LIFT SYSTEM :One or more lift cars serving the same building.
LIFT WELL : The unobstructed space within an enclosure provided for the vertical movement of the lift
car(s) and any counter weight(s), including the lift pit and the space for top clearance.
LIFT WELL ENCLOSURE: Any structure which separates the lift well from its surroundings.
LIFTING BEAM : A beam, mounted immediately below the machine room ceiling to which lifting tackle
can be fixed for raising parts of the lift machine.
MACHINE ROOM: The compartment allocated to house the lift machine and associated items.
MACHINERY SPACE : The space occupied by the driving machine and control gear of the lift, escalator or
moving walk.
MEZZANINE: An intermediate floor between two floors above ground level.
MOVING WALK: A power driven, horizontal or inclined, continuously moving conveyor used for carrying
passengers, horizontally or at an incline up to a maximum of 15 degree.
NEWEL : An upright support of the handrail at the landing of escalator /moving walk where the han"drail
reverses its direction.
OPEN TYPE WELL : A lift well having enclosure walls of wire grille or similar construction.
OPERATION:The method of actuating the control and/or functioning any machine/equipment.
OVERHEAD BEAMS (LIFT) : The members, usually of steel or reinforced concrete, which immediately
support the lift equipment at the top of the lift well. .
OVERHEAD PULLEY: An idler pulley used to change the direction of rope.
PASSENGER LIFT: A lift designed for the transport of passengers.
POWER OPERATED DOOR : A door operated automatically by a device initiated by a momentary

pressure on the push button or by operation of the control system.
RATED LOAD:The maximum load which the lift car, escalator or moving walk is designed and installed to
carry safely at its rated speed.

PartS
Building Services
RATED SPEED (LIFT) :The speed attained by the lift in the up direction with rated load in the lift car. Also
known as CAR SPEED.
RATED SPEED (ESCALATOR) : The speed at which the escalator is designed to operate in the up
direction. It is the rate of travel of the steps, measured along the angle of inclination with rated load on the
steps or carriage.
RATED SPEED (MOVING WALK): The speed at which the moving walk is designed to operate in the up
direction. It is the rate of travel of the tread way, measured along the angle of inclination with rated load on
the tread way.
SAFETY GEAR : A mechanical device attached to the car frame or the counter weight to stop and hold the
car or counter weight to the guides in the event of a free fall. Governor operated safety gears are used to
stop the car or counterweight when it travels at a speed exceeding a predetermined speed.
SERVICE LIFT : A lift designed primarily for the transport of goods, but which may carry a lift attendant or
other persons necessary for the loading and unloading of goocfs.
STOREY : The space between the surface of one floor and the surface of the adjacent floor vertically above or
below it. The term 'Floor' shall include 'Roof' but will exclude mezzanine floors.
STOREYS FOR SPECIFIC USE : Storeys which are named according to their functions and the specific uses
they are put to. For example, a duct storey is one through which service pipes and electrical conduits may be
taken.
SUBSIDIARY STOREY : A storey which occurs below the determining entrance level but above the
basement storeys.
SUSPENSION ROPES (LIFT) :The ropes by which the car and counter-weight are suspended.
TOTAL HEADROOM :The vertical distance from the level of the top lift landing to the floor of the machine
room.
TRAVEL (LIFT) :The vertical distance between the bottom and top lift landings served by the equipment.
VENT : An opening provided in the roof or the external wall of a space for the purpose of ventilation.
5.1.4 General Particulars

5.1.4.1 All relevant aspects of lift, escalator or moving walk installations shall be properly evaluated
during the planning stage of the building in order to design the most effective conveying system.
5.1.4.2 Appropriate steps shall be taken during the planning stage of the building to determine particulars
of lift, escalator or moving walk and the necessary provisions to oe kept in the building structure so as to
meet the requirements of this Code. Appendix L provides a brief list of particulars and provisions which are
to be determined during the planning stage.
5.1.4.3 The building plan submitted with the application for seeking permission of installation of lift,
escalator or moving walk from the Authority shall include layout of lift, escalator or moving walk properly
identified in the drawing along with the detailed particulars as per Appendix M.
5.1.4.4 Specifications for lifts, escalators and moving walks shall include detailed particulars as per
AppendixN.
5.1.4.5 For the purpose of effective installation of lifts, escalators or moving walks, working drawings
showing the layout of lifts, escalators or moving walks properly identified in the drawing, details of builders
works, for example, holes and/or punches in floors or, walls and supports for lifts, escalators or moving
walks shall be prepared prior to the finalization of building design drawings.
5.1.4.6 N ecessary particulars of electrical requirements of lifts, escalators or moving walks shall be
determined early in the planning stage to include it in the electrical provisions of the building.
5.2 ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIFTS
5.2.1 General
5.2.1.1 Lifts shall be provided in buildings more than six storeys or 20 m in height.
5.2.1.2 Stretcher Facility in Lifts

a) When passenger lifts are installed in any building having more than ten storeys or a height of more than
32 m, each floor served by these lifts must have access to at least one lift with a stretcher facility in
accordance with Sec 5.2.1.2(b).
8-100
Chapter 5
b) A lift required to have a stretcher facility by Sec 5.2.1.2(a) shall accommodate a raised stretcher with a
patient lying on it horizontally by providing a minimum inside platform area 1275 mm wide x 2000
mm long with a minimum clear opening width of 1050 mm, unless otherwise designed to provide an
equivalent facility, to allow the entrance and exit of an ambulance stretcher (minimum size 600 mm
Wide x 2000 mm long) in its horizontal position. These lifts shall be identified by the internationally
recognized symbol for emergency medical services.
c) In any multi-storied hospital and health care building ther� shall be at least one hospital lift having
stretcher facility in accordance with Sec 5.2.1.2(b).
5.2.1.3 Standby Power

a) One or more lifts shall be provided with standby power in
i) A building which has more than ten storeys or a height of more than 32 m,
ii) Hospital and health care buildings. .
b) Standby power shall be provided by an approved self contained generator set to operate automatically
whenever there is a disruption of electrical power supply to the building.
c) The operation of the standby power system shall be as follows :
i) Where only one lift is installed, the lift shall transfer to standby power within 60 seconds after
failure of normal power.
ii) Where two or more lifts are controlled by a common operating system, all lifts may be transferred
to standby power within 60 seconds after failure of normal power, or if the standby power source is
of insufficient capacity to operate all lifts at the same time, all lifts shall be transferred to standby
power in sequence, shall return to the designated landing and discharge their load. After all lifts
have been returned to the designated landing, at least one lift shall remain operable from the
standby power.
5.2.1.4 Responsibility of the Owner

a) It is the responsibility of the owner of the premises where the lift will be installed, to obtain necessary
permission from the Authority before the erection of lifts(s) and for the subsequent commissioning and
operation of lift (s).
b) The owner shall conduct periodic inspection and maintain the installation in safe working condition at
all times.
c) Conformity with the provisions of this Code does not relieve the owner of his responsibility to satisfy
the requirements of any other Act, Regulations or Ordinances that may be in force from time to time.
5.2.1.5 Conformity with Bangladesh Electricity Act

All electrical work in connection with electrical lifts shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of
the latest Bangladesh Electricity Act and the rovisions of any of its bye-laws and regulations, and shall also
y
comply with the requirements of Chapter 2 o Part 8 of this Code.
5.2.1.6 For detailed specifications of lifts, escalators and moving walks reference shall be made to the
latest edition of the ANSI/ ASME A 17.1 code or the European EN81 code.
5.2.2 Safety Considerations

5.2.2.1 Fire Protection
a) Necessary provisions shall be kept to r.revent spread of fire through the lift well. Adequate measures
shall also be taken to reduce the possibility of spread of fire from the machine room into fhe lift well.
b) Lift well enclosures and machine room shall be constructed with fire resistant materials. In case of fire,
the lift well enclosure shall not give off harmfUl gas or fumes.
c) Where lift enclosures are fire rated, manually closing doors at the enclosure well shall have a fire rating
equal to that of the enclosure well and automatically closing doors shall have a fire rating equal to one
half of that of the enclosure well.
5.2.2.2 Fire Switch : When required fire switch shall be provided, the function of which is to enable the
fire authority to take over complete control of one or more lifts in an installation by operating with a
fireman's key.
5.2.2.3 Warning signs against use of the lifts during a fire shall be displayed near every call button for a
passenger lift in accordance with Sec 5.2.10.3 (c).
5.2.2.4 Efficient automatic devices shall be provided and maintained in each lift to stop the car by suitable
braking devices and to cutoff power from the motor whenever excessive descending speed is attained.

PartS
Building Services
52
. 2
. 5
. Efficient automatic devices shall be provided and maintained in each lift to cut off power from the
motor if the car over travels either the top or bottomterminal landing .
52
. 2
. 6
. There shall have standard cranking system operable from the lift machine room t o move the car
manually, during a power failure, to the nearest higher or lower landing for evacuation of passengers .
52
. 2
. 7
. There shall have arrangement for emergency unlocking of the landing and lift door with a special
key from any landing for evacuation as well as for maintenance .
52
. 2
. 8
. Necessary protection shall be taken against breaking of steel rope.
5.2.3 Lift Cars

5.2.3.1 Lift cars shall have net inside area for different loading capacities not more than that shown in
Table 8. 5.1.
5.2.3.2 Lift car frame shall be of steel construction having sufficient strength to support safely the rated
load, the lift car and all requisite accessories .
5.2.3.3 There shall be provisions for elastic isolators between metal parts to ensure low vibration and low
noise during car travel.
Table85. 1
.
Maximum Inside Net Platform Areas for Various Rated Loads
Rated Load Maximum Maximum Rated Load Maximum Maximum

(mass) Available Car Number of (mass) Available Car Number of
(kg) Area (see note) Passengers (kg) Area (see note) Passengers
(m2) (m2)
100 0.40 1 975 2.35 14

180 0.50 2 1000 2.40 14
225 0.70 3 1050 2.50 15
300 0.90 4 1125 2.65 16
375 1.10 5 1200 2.80 17
400 1.17 5 1250 2.90 18
450 1.30 6 1275 2.95 18
525 1.45 7 1350 3.10 19
600 1.60 8 1425 3.25 20
630 1.66 9 1500 3.40 22
675 1.75 10 1600 3.56 23
750 1.90 11 1800 3.88 26
800 2.00 11 2100 4.36 30
825 2.05 12 2500 5.00 36
900 2.20 13
Beyond 2500 kg, add 0.16 mL for each 100 kg extra
Note: Maximum available car area (W x D)+ Available area near the car door(s) inside the car.
-
Where, W = Car inside width, m

D = Car inside depth, m
52
. 3. 4
. The car bodywork shall be of sufficient mechanical strength to resist accidental impact by users or
goods. The roof, solid or perforated, shall be capable of supporting two persons or a minimum load of 150
kg . Perforations shall be sufficiently close in mesh not exceeding 40 mm to provide reasonable protection
against falling articles to any person travelling in the car .
52
. 3
. 5
. The floor shall be a smooth nonslip surface. If carpeting is used, it shall be securely attached, heavy
duty, with a tight weave and low profile, installed without padding.
5.2.3.6 A handrail shall be provided on at least one wall of the car, preferably the rear. The rails shall be
smooth and the inside surface at least 38 mm clear of the walls at a nominal height of 800 mm from the floor.
52
. 3
. 7
. Height of the entrance to the lift car shall not be less than 2 m.
52. 3
. 8
. The lift car doors, shall be power operated horizontally sliding type (noncolla{'sible), opened and
closed by automatic means. However, if space is limited, collapsible doors may be mstalled in case of
buildings not exceeding 8 storeys or 26 m in height, but they shall not be power operated. Sliding doors shall
be guicfed at top and oottom. Means shall be provided to prevent all sliding doors from jumping off the
tracl<s and suitable stops shall be provided to prevent the hanger carriage from leaving the end of the track .
52. 3
. 9
. Car and landing doors shall open and close in full synchronization being mechanically connected
to each other.
8-102
Chapter 5
5.2.3.10 Doors closed by automatic means shall be provided with door reopening device(s) which will
function to stop and reopen a car door and adjacent Tanding door in case the car door is obstructed while
closing. The reopening_ device shall also be capable of sensing an object or person in the path of a closing
door without requiring contact for activation. Door reopening devices shall remain effective for a period of
not less than 20 seconds. The operating mechanism for the car door shall not exert a force more than 125 N.
5.2.3.11 Lift car doors, when closed, shall cover the opening fully except in the case of vertical biparting car
doors of goods lifts. Car doors shall be equipped with efficient interlocking or other devices so that the aoor
cannot be opened except when the lift car is at the landing, and that the lift car cannot be moved away from
the landing until the leading edge of the single slide or aouble speed door is within 50 mm of the nearest
face of the door jamb or the leading edges of the centre opening doors are within 50 mm of contact of each
other.
5.2.3.12 Where the lift car has solid enclosure and doors, provision shall be made for a fan for adequate
ventilation. To permit switching off the power supply to tne lift without switching off the fan and lignt, a
separate switch shall be providea for fan and light.
5.2.3.13 Any vision panel in a car door shall be fire resisting and shall be of safety wired glass or similar
material. The area between division bars or other supports shall not exceed 0.1 m2• The bottom rail of a
framed and glazed door shall be not less than 300 mm aeep . Any projections on or recesses (including vision
panels) in shding car doors shall be kept to a minimum m order to avoid finger trapping between sliding
parts of the door and any fixed part of the structure.
5.2.3.14 The lift car shall be provided with a self levelling feature that will automatically bring the car to the
floor landing within a tolerance of ± 13 mm under normal loading and unloading conditions. This self
levelling shall, within its zone, be entirely automatic and independent of the operating device and shall
correct the overtravel or undertravel. The car shall also be maintained approximately level with the landing,
irrespective of load. Where no self-levelling device is provided, the levelfing difference between the car ana
the landing shall be within± 40 mm.
5.2.3.15 Car operating panels shall be conveniently located on the side near the door so that passengers can
register calls as quickly as possible. The centreline of the alarm button and emergency stop switch shall be at
a nominal heignt of 890 mm, and the highest floor button no higher than 1.37 m from the floor. Floor
registration buttons, exclusive of border, shall be a minimum of 18 mm in size, raised, flush or recessed.
Visual indication shall be provided to show each call registered and extinguished when the call is answered.
Depth of flush or recessed buttons when operated shall not exceed 10 mm Markings shall be adjacent to the
.
controls on a contrasting colour background to the left of the controls; letters or numbers shall be a
minimum of 15 mm high and raised or recessed 0.75 mm. Sign plates permanently attached shall be
acceptable. Emergency controls shall be grouped together at the bottom of the panel.
5.2.3.16 A suitable battery operated alarm system shall be installed inside the lift car so as to raise an alarm
at a convenient place for gettmg assistance for passengers trapped inside the lift car.
5.2.3.17 A car position indicator shall be provided above the car operating panel or over the O(Jening of
each car to show the position of the car in the lift well by illuminated visual indicator correspondmg to the
landing at which the car is stopped or through which it is passing.
In addition, an audible signal shall preferably be installed which shall sound to tell a passenger that the car
is stopping at a floor served by the lift. A special button located with emergency controls may be provided,
operation of which shall activate an audible signal only for the desired trip.
5.2.3.18 Each lift car shall be fitted with a light and the car shall be kept illuminated during the whole
period the lift is available for use.
5.2.3.19 In installations with more than two lifts in a bank, a tele phone or other device for two-way
communication between each lift car and a convenient point outs1de the lift well shall preferably be
provided. Markings or the international symbol for telephones shall be placed adjacent to the control on a
contrasting colour background.
5.2.4 Lift Well and Lift Well Enclosures

5.2.4.1 The Lift well shall only be used for housing equipment forming part of the lift installation or for its
operation and maintenance. No other equipment or services shall oe accommodated therein. For this
purpose, the main electric su ply line for Tift machine shall be deemed to be part of the lift and the electric
r
cabfe, if laid along the lift wei shaft, shall be properly clamped to the wall.
5.2.4.2 The lift well shall not form part of the ventilation system of the building.
5.2.4.3 In multi-story residential buildings, hotels and hospitals; lift well shall be isolated from sleeping
rooms (bed rooms) by lobbies or other spaces. .

PartS
Building Services
5.2.4.4 Lift well shall not be located above any room, passage or thoroughfare. However, when absolutely
necessary, this can only be permissible with the prior approval of the competent authority and in such case
the following provisions shall be made :
a) The pit shall be sufficiently strong to withstand the impact of the lift car with the rated load or the
impact of the counterweight when either of these is descending at the rated speed or at governor
tripping speed;
b) Spring or oil buffers shall be provided for lift car and counterweight;· and
c) The car and counterweight shall be provided with a governor operated safety gear.
5.2.4.5 When there are three or fewer lift cars in a building, they may be located within the same lift well
enclosure. When there are four lift cars, they shall be divided in such a manner that at least two separate lift
well enclosures are provided. When there are more than four lifts, not more than four lift cars may be
located within a single lift well enclosure.
5.2.4.6 The lift car and its counterweight shall travel in juxtaposition to each other.
5.2.4.7 Totally Enclosed Wells: The enclosure of the totally enclosed wells shall be continuous and shall
extend on all sides from floor to floor or stair to stair. No openings except for doors at landings and
necessary access panels shall be provided. The enclosure snail be of sufficient mechanical strength to
support the lift guides at appropnate intervals and to support in true alignment the landing doors with
operating mechanisms and locking devices.
5.2.4.8 Open Type Wells

a) When Lift well enclosures are constructed of wire grille or similar material, the mesh opening shall not
be �reater than 30 mm (except for door at landings). Such enclosures shall be of sufficient strength to
resist accidental impact by users of adjoining areas or by materials or vehicles being moved in the
vicinity.
b) Where the clearance between the inside of an open type lift well enclosure and any moving or movable
part of the lift equipment or apparatus is less than s-o· mm, the openings in the enclosure material shall
not be more than 10 mm. Larger openings up to 30 mm shall be permissible rovided it is further
J'
frotected by square mesh netting with aperture of not greater than 10 mm an wire not smaller than
mm in diameter.
5.2.4.9 There shall be no opening in the lift well enclosure for access to the lift well through the space
under the counterweight.
5.2.4.10 The inside surfaces of the lift well enclosures facing any car entrance shall form a smooth
continuous flush surface devoid of projections or recesses. Where projections or recesses cannot be avoided,
the underside of these projections/recesses shall be bevelled to an angle of 60 degrees from the horizontal by
means of metal plates or other fire resistive materials as shown in Fig 8.5.1.
5.2.4.11 Sufficient clearance space shall be provided between the guides for the car and the side walls of the
lift well enclosure to allow safe and easy access to the parts of the safety gears for their maintenance and
repairs.
5.2.4.12 Maximum clearance between the inner surface of well enclosure on the landing door side and any
part of car facing the surface shall be 150 mm except that 230 mm and 200 mm clearance will be
l'ermissible when power operated vertically biparting landing doors or two speed horizontally sliding
ooors are installed respectively.
5.2.4.13 Each lift well serving more than two floors shall have vent(s) prol'erly located at the top of the
exterior wall. The vents shall be louvered with birds screens. If the well is located in such a way that no
exterior wall is available for louvers, vents with connecting noncombustible ducts to an outside wall shall be
provided. The area of vent shall not be less than 3.5% of the area of the lift well, provided that a minimum
of 0.3 m2 per lift is provided. Of the total required vent area not less than one-third shall be permanently
open or automatically opened by a damper.
5.2.5 Landing Doors

5.2.5.1 Every landing, where there is access from the landing to the lift car, shall be fitted with a landing
door. Such door shall be fitted with efficient interlocking or other devices so as to ensure that the door
cannot be opened except when the lift car is at the landing and that the lift car cannot be moved away from
the landing until the door is closed and locked. Where mid bar collapsible doors are used for landing
entrance, tfiey shall not be power operated.
5.2.5.2 Where Iandin� doors are manually operated and no indicators are provided, vision panels of
similar construction as m Sec 5.2.3.13 shall be provided.
8-104
Chapter 5
Machine Room
Lift Well
� Landing
�� See Detail
Bevelled
of so· or Mor
Pit Detail A
Fig. 8.5.1 Bevelled Projections/Recesses
5.2.5.3 No automatic fire door or shutter which operates by means of a fusible link or otherwise due to the
action of heat shall be allowed in any landing openmg or liftway enclosure of any lift, if such opening gives
access to any exit from the building.
5.2.5.4 In case of passenger lifts, solid sliding doors shall preferably be provided for buildings above six
storeys or 20m in height. SOlid swing doors may also be usea where sliding space is not available parallel to
the entrance door. Collapsible doors shall not be provided in case of buildings above eight storeys or 26 m
in height.
· ·
5.2.6 Guide Rails

5.2.6.1 Guide rails shall be made of high quality steel, straight and of proper thickness. Where the nature
of processes carried on in the building gives rise to acid fumes or corrosive substances the steel rails shall be
treated for corrosion resistance.
5.2.6.2 Car and counterweight guide rails shall be continuous throughout the entire len�th right from the
bottom of the pit floor to the top most floor served plus additional length as may be required for operation
of safety against over run. They shall be provided with adequate braCkets or equivalent fixing devices of
such design and spacing that the rails shall not deflect more tl1an 4 mm under normal operations
5.2.6.3 For passenger and goods lifts having a rated speed of 0.5 m/s or more, the car guide rails shall
have working surfaces machined and smooth.
5.2.7 Lift Pits

5.2.7.1 A lift pit shall be provided at the bottom of every lift well. The minimum depth of lift pit shall be
as shown in Table 8.5.2.
5.2.7.2 Lift pits shall be of sound construction and shall be maintained in dry and clean condition. Where
necessary, provision shall be made for permanent drainage.
5.2.7.3 Lift pits having depth more than 1.6 m shall be provided with a suitable descending arrangement
to reach the lift pit.
·

PartS
Building Services
5.2.7.4 Light points shall be provided in all lift pits for facility of repair and maintenance works.
5.2.7.5 In case of a group of two or more lift wells, arrangements shall be provided to allow inspection of a
lift pit through the adjoinmg one. ·
Table 8.5.2
Minimum Pit Depths for Traction Lifts - Overhead Machines
Speed (m/s) 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4

Depth (m)
i) With restrained rope
compensation - - -
1.6 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2
ii) With chain, free rope or

travelling cable compensation 1.5 1.5 1.6 2.4 2.5 - - -
iii) With reduced stroke buffer

and either restrained rope - -
1.5 1.6 2.4 2.6 2.6 2.8
chain travelling cable or free
rope compensation
5.2.8 Buffers
5.2.8.1 Buffers of spring or oil shall be used for safety. Buffers shall be fitted under the lift car and
counterweight directly or on the pit floor with suitable concrete or steel foundation. Oil resistant rubber
buffers may be used with lifts having a rated speed not exceeding 0.25 m/s. Lifts having rated speed in
excess of 0.25 m/s and up to and including 1.0 m/s, spring or oil buffers shall be used. For lifts having rated
speed more than 1.0 m/s, only oil buffers shall be used. Wooden blocks suitably treated may also oe .used
for service lifts for speeds up to 0.5 m/s. Buffers shall be located symmetrically with reference to the vertical
centreline of the car Icounterweight with a tolerance of 50 mm.
5.2.8.2 The minimum stroke of oil buffers shall be such that the car or the counterweight on striking the
buffers at 115 per cent of rated speed shall be brought to rest with an average retardation of not more than
10 m/s2•
5.2.8.3 When buffers are struck with an initial speed of less than 115 per cent of the rated speed, the peak
retardation shall not exceed 25 m/s2 for a duration more than 0.04 second, with any load in the car ranging
from 75 kg to the rated load.
5.2.9 Machine Room and Overhead Structures

5.2.9.1 The lift machine room shall only be used for housing lift machinery, controller and other associated
apparatus and equipment. No other services or equipment shall be accommodated therein. If motor
generators and other associated equipment are installed in an adjoining room, this room shall also be
reserved for exclusive use of lift equipment.
5.2.9.2 Lift machine room and other associated equipment rooms shall be fire proof, weather proof and
adequately lighted. Means to prevent spread of fire or smoke from machi�e room into lift well shall be
provided. Machine room shall have permanent ventilatim'l opening direct to the open air having a free area
not less than 0.1 m2 per lift.
5.2.9.3 The height of the machine room shall not be less than 2.30 m throughout under the lifting beam
(trolley beam) to allow any portion of equipment to be accessible and removable for repair and replacement.
An overhead trolley beam of steel construction of adequate strength shall be provided in the machine room,
for movement of equipment during installation.
5.2.9.4 The machine room shall be adequately sized and shall have sufficient floor area required for easy
access to all parts of the machines and equipment located therein for purposes of inspection, maintenance or
repair. Clearance space of 1 m shall be provided on those sides of control panels where maintenance is
required to be carried out while the panel is energized, otherwise 0.5 m clearance space may be provided.
5.2.9.5 The room shall be kept closed, except to ·those who are· concerned with the operation and
maintenance of the equipment. When the electrical voltage exceeds 220/230V de, a danger nohce plate shall
be displayed permanently on the outside of the door and on or near the machinery.
5.2.9.6 Machine room floor shall not have holes/punches in it except for necessary small openings for
passage of ropes cables etc. If any machine room floor or platform does not extend to the enclosing walls the
open sides shall be provided with hand rails or otherwise suitably guarded.
5.2.9.7 All machines, pulleys, overspeed governors and similar units shall be securely fixed on the
machine room floor.
8-106
Chapter 5
Lifts, Es<;alators and Moving Walks
5.2.9.8 Adequate artificial light shall be provided in the machine room. A 15 amps 3 pin power outlet for
hand operated tools and a 5 amps 2 pin electrical outlet for portable hand lamp set shall be provided in the
machine room.
5.2.9.9 Access to Machine Room

a) The machine room shall be provided with a direct, independent and convenient access. Access to a
machine room above a lift well may be either from the roof or by an internal staircase.
b) Machine room floor may be provided with a trap door. When access to the machine room is provided
through the trap door, the size of the trap door shall not be less than 1.0 m x 1.0 m otherwise 1t may be
0.5 m x 0.5 m. !rap doors shall be hinged, opening into the machine room, of sound construction,
balanced and tightfy secured to minimize noise travel. Hand rails shall be provided around trap door
opening .
c) Where a machine room entrance is less than 1.5 m above or below the adjacent floor or roof surface, a
substantial permanently attached ladder may be used.
d) Where the machine room entrance is 1.5 m or more above or below the adjacent floor or roof surface,
access shall be provided by means of standard stairs.
e) Access to a machine room in a basement may be provided from a corridor.
f) Access to a machine room via the lift well shall be prohibited.
5.2.9.10 The space at secondary level in which the overhead pulleys, overspeed governors and similar
machinery are housed shall have a clear height of at least 1.2 m. Where practicable, it shall have a substantial
platform or floor and be provided with permanent and adequate artificial illumination. Safe and convenient
access to secondary lever shall be proviaed. Means of access between a secondary floor and machine room
may be a ladder. Hand rails shall be provided at platform and access to floor.
5.2.10 Hall Buttons, Hall Lanterns and Special Signs

5.2.10.1 Hall Buttons
a) r
Each landing shall have hall call buttons to register call for lift service for u ward or downward
. movements. The centre line of the hall call buttons shall be at a nominal height of m above the floor.
b) Direction buttons, exclusive of borders, shall be a minimum of 18 mm in size, raised, flush or recessed.
Visual indication shall be provided to show each call registered and extinguished when the call is
answered. Depth of flush or recessed button when operated shall not exceed 10 mm .
5.2.10.2 Hall Lantern

a) Where lifts are installed in totally enclosed wells, a visual signal shall be provided at each lift well
entrance indicating to the l'rospective passenger the car answering the call and its direction of travel.
An audible signal may also be included.
b) The visual signal may be in the form of digital lift position indicator or directional indicator. The visual
signal for each direction/lift position sliall be a minimum of 62 mm in size and visible from the
proximity of the hall call buttons.
c) The centreline of the fixture shall be located at a minimum of 1.8 m from the floor.
5.2.10.3 Special Signs

a) Door jamb Marking: The floor designation shall be provided at each lift well entrance on both sides of
jamb visible from within the car and the lift lobby at a height of 1.5 m above the floor. Designations
shall be on a contrasting background 50 mm high and raised 0.75 nun.
b) y
Apl'lied plates permanently attached shall be acce table. In case of a completely enclosed lift well a
notice with the word 'Lift' shall be placed outside o each landing door. Electric light shall be provided
such that this sign remains visible even if the surroundings are dark
c) A permanent warning sign shall be installed immediately above each hall push button station on each
floor reading : IN FIRE EMERGENCY, DO NOT USE LIFT. USE EXIT STAIRS. This sign shall be in
letters not less than 12 mm high.
The warning sign may consist of incised, inlaid or embossed letters on a metal, wood, plastic or similar plate
securely ana permanently attached to the wall, or letters incised or inlaid directly into the surface of the
material formmg the wall.
5.2.11 Electrical Wiring and Apparatus

5.2.11.1 Construction, installation and maintenance of all electrical supply lines and apparatus in
connection with lift installation shall be done with roper protection so that there may be no danger to
J
persons therefrom. No bare conductor shall be use in any lift car. Installation of electrical wiring shall
conform to the provisions of Chapter 2.

PartS
Building Services
5.2.11.2 Electrical circuits for lights and ventilation fans, and supply to 3 pin and 2 pin socket outlets shall
be controlled by a separate main switch or circuit breaker, and shall be independent of machinery power
supply such that lighting circuits remain alive when power to machinery is interrupted.
5.2.11.3 Suitable cautionary notice shall be affixed near every motor or other apparatus in which energy
used is at a voltage exceeding 220 volts.
5.2.11.4 Travelling Cable

a) Circuits which supply current to the motor shall not be included in any twin or multi-core travelling
cable used in connechon with the control and safety devices.
b) A travelling cable which incorporates conductors for the control circuits shall be separate and distinct
from that which incorporates fi5hting and signalling circuits in case of buildings ten storeys (32 m) or
less in height. In case of buildings more than ten storeys or 32 metres in heigfit or where high speed
(1.50 m/s or more) lifts are empfoyed, use of a sinsle travelling cable for lighting and contro1 circuits
shall be permitted, provided that all conductors are msulated for the maximum voltage in the cables.
5.2.11.5 Supply Cables and Switches

a) Each lift shall be provided with a main switch or circuit breaker of a capacity determined by the lift
manufacturer and the incoming supply cable shall terminate in this switch. For a single lift, this switch
shall be fixed adjacent to the machine room entrance. In a machine room common to more than one lift,
each main switch shall be conveniently situated with respect to the lift it controls. Switches and fuses
(which may form part of a distribution switch board) shall be provided for isolating the supply power
to the machine room.
b) Where a supply cable serves more than one lift, a diversity factor may be used for the determination of
conductor size. The actual diversity factor to be adopted sli.all be decided by the lift manufacturer.
5.2.11.6 Earthing
All electrical machinery/equipment viz. electric motor, winding machine, control panel etc. which normally
carry mains current shall be properly connected to the earthing system. Similarly a11 metallic cases, covers of
door interlocks, door contacts, call and control buttons, stop buttons, car switches, limit switches, junction
boxes and similar electrical fittings which normally carry only the control current shall also be properly
connected to the earthing system. All earthing terminal and earthing conductors in this regard shall
conform to the requirements of Chapter 2.
5.3 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
5.3.1 Number of Lifts and Capacity ·
5.3.1.1 The number of lifts, car capacity and speed of the lift shall be selected to have the most effective lift
system. The lift system shall be able to handle adequate number of passengers during peak hours and at the
same time Interval and Travel Time shall be within reasonable limits.
5.3.1.2 The average Interval shall not be more than shown in Table 8.5.3. The Travel Time shall not exceed
150 seconds.
5.3.1.3 The passenger handling capacity (H) of a lift system for different occupancies in terms of the
number of passengers to be hand1ed m the building in a five minute peak period shall not be less than that
indicated in Table 8.5.3.
Table 8.5.3
Maximum Interval and Minimum 5-minute Handling Capacity for Different Occupancy
Type of Occupancy Maximum Interval Minimum 5-min. Passen�er

(Sec) Handling Capacity (H) Yo
Office
Diversified offices 45 10
Diversified Single-purpose 45 11
Single- rpose 40 12
Hotels and M otels 60 10
Apartments 90 5
Dormitories, Halls of Residence 70 15
Hospitals 50 12
Long term Nursing Facilities 70 8
Educational Institutions 50 25
Assembly 50 15
Shops and stores 50 5
8-108
Chapter 5
5.3.1.4 For the purpose of population estimation, the density of people shall be based on the actual
number of occupants, but in no case less than those specified in Table 8.5.4 . The occupant load of a
mezzanine floor shall be taken into account for working out the population for a particular floor to which
the mezzanine floor discharges its loads.
Table8.5.4
Occupant Load for Estimation of Population
Type of Occupancy Population Factor

Office
Diversified offices 15 m2 net usable area per persona
Diversified Single-purpose 13.5 m2 net usable area per person
�
Single- rpose 12 m2 net usable area per person
Hotels and otels 1.7 people per room
Apartments 1.7 people per bedroom
Dormitories, Residence Halls
20 m2 net usable area per person
Hospitals
Long term Nursing Facilities
� �
4 eople er bed
1. 5 peop e per bed
Educational Institutions
4 rn2 per student
Assembly
With fixed or movable seats and dance floor
Without seating facilities including dining rooms 0.60 m2 per personb
Shops and stores . 1.5 m2per personb
2 rn2 of net selling areac
Notes: a Net usable area = gross area less lift shaft and lobby space, mechanical space, columns, toilets,
corridor around core, air-conditioning machinery space.
b Population estimation shall be based on gross area (plinth area or covered area). The gross area
shall include, in addition to the main assembly room or space, any occupied connecting room or
space in the same storeys or in the storey above and below, where entrance is common to such
rooms and spaces and they are available for use by the occupants of the assembly place. No
deductions shall be made in the gross area for corridors, closets or other subdivisions, the area
shall include all space serving the particular assembly occupancy.
c Net selling area is area open to the public.
5.3.1.5 The car speed for the different types of lifts in different occupancies shall normally be as given in
Table 8.5.5. A higher or lower speed lift may be used in special cases when conditions warrant use of such
lifts.
Table8.5.5
Car Speed for Lift in Different Kinds of Usage
Type of Number Recommended Car Speed tor Different Kinds of Us�e !!!!!_s)
Lift of Floors Office Building Hotels Apartments, Hospitals Assembly Stores
(including and Dormitories and
Professional Motels &Residence Nursing
Offices) Hall Homes a
Passenger 2 to6 0.75 to 2 0.75 0.75 lto 2 2 0.75 to 1.5
Lift 7 to 12 2 to 2.5 1.5 1 2 to 2.5 2.5 2 to 2.5
13 to 20 2.5 to 3 2 2 3.5 3.5 2.5
21 to 25b 3 to 3.5 2.5 2.5 4 4 -
26 to 30b 3.5 to4 3.5 2.5 to 3.5 5 5 -
4 toS 3.5 to 5 - -
3 1 to40b
- -
5 to6 5 to6 -
41 to sob
- - -
6 to 7 - - - - -
51 to 60b - -
9 - - -
over60b
Service 2 to 5 1.0
LiftC 6 to 10 1.5
11 to 15 2
16 to 25 2.5
26 to 35 2.5
36 to45 3.5
46 to60 4
over 60 4
Notes: a r;
For Nursing Homes slower speed lifts ma be used
b For buildings of this height, local express ifts shall be used
c Slower speed lifts mav be used for heavier loads.

Part 8
Building Services
5. 3.1.6 Handling Capacity and Interval

a) The handling capacity shall be calculated by the following formula:
= 300xQxNxlOO
H
PxT
where
H passenger handling capacity of the lift system during five minute peak period, expressed as
the percentage of the estimated total poJ?ulation handled.
Q average number of passengers carried m each car per trip,
N number of lifts in the system, .
p total population to be handled during peak period (it is related to the area for which a
particular bank of lift serves)
T = average round trip time in seconds, that is, the average time required by each lift in taking
one full load of passengers from ground floor discharging them m various upper floors and
coming back to ground floor for taking fresh passengers for the next trip;
Note:
i) The value of Q depends on the dimension of the car. It may be noted that the car is not loaded always to its
maximum capacity during each trip and therefore, for calculating T and H the value of Q shall be taken as 80
per cent of the maximum capacity of the car.
ii) T is the sum of the time required in the following process:
a) Time for entry of passengers on the ground floor;
b) Time for exit of the passengers on each floor of discharge;
c) Door operation time (opening and closing) and car start time on each floor the lift stops, including
ground floor;
d) Acceleration and deceleration periods;
e) Stopping and levelling periods;
f) Periods of full rated speeds between stops going up and
g) Periods of full rated speeds between stops going down.
b) The average Interval shall be calculated by the following formula:
T
Interval, I =
5.3.2 Shape and Size of Lifts

5.3.2.1 Careful analysis shall be performed during selection of shape and size of lifts so as to get full
advantage of its shape for the most effective use of lifts and building space.
5.3.2.2 The dimensions of the car platform shall be such that the car will not exceed its rated load when
packed full. Net inside area of the lift car shall be as per Sec 5.2.3.1.
Note:
i) For the same platform area, a lift having higher width to depth ratio can accommodate more passengers and takes
less time for passenger transfer.
ii) The width of the car is determined by the width of the entrance and the depth of the car is regulated by the loading.
5.3.3 Location and Arrangement of Lifts

5.3.3.1 A thorough investigation shall be carried out for assessing the most suitable location for lift(s)
while planning the building. It shall take into account future expansions, if any.
5.3.3.2 The lifts shall be easily accessible from all entrances to the building. For maximum efficiency, they
shall be grouped near the centre of the building. Walking distance from the lift to the farthest office or suite
shall not exceed 60 m.
5.3.3.3 Arrangement of Lifts

a) When more than one lifts are installed in a group, they shall be arranged side by side or in two rows
facing each other. Separation of lifts in the group shall be avoided.
b) The lobby in front of lifts shall be wide enough to allow sufficient space for waiting passengers and
proper vision of hall button and hall lanterns. Fig 8.5.2 to 8.5.6 give acceptable arrangements oflifts in a
group with acceptable space for waiting passengers. More space shall be allowed in front of the lifts in
the main floor than in the upper floors.
5.3.4 Location of Machine Room

5.3.4.1 The machine room shall, as far as practicable, be placed immediately above the lift well.
8-110
Chapter 5
r
Lift Well
Fig. 8.5.2 Two Car Arrangement
Passenger Waiting Space
Fig. 8.5.3 Three Car Arrangement
5.3.4.2 If a machine room on the lift well is impracticable for architectural or other reasons, the machine
room may be placed below the lift well or in the basement, keeping adequate safety provisions. If the lift
machine room is located in the basement, it shall be separated from the lift well by a separation wall.
5.3.4.3 High speed lifts with gearless machine shall, in all cases, have machine room above the lift well.
5.3.4.4 Machine room shall not be located adjacent to or above sleeping rooms (bed rooms) in residential
and hotel buildings; and patients' rooms, intensive care rooms and operation theatres of hospital/health
care buildings.
5.3.5 Structural Considerations

5.3.5.1 Lift well enclosures, lift pits, machine rooms and machine supports, besides conforming to the
essential requirements in Sec 5.2, shall form part of the building construction and comply with the lift
manufacturer's drawings.
5.3.5.2 Machine Room: Machine room floor shall be strong enough to support the heaviest component of
lift machinery and shall be designed to carry a load of not less than 500 kg/m2 over the whole area and also

Part 8
Building Services
1.5 A (min 2.4 ml
wJ&&W//W/4/7�/W/WW/:////&W/:/AW/J
Lift Car Lift Well
"'"""'-"-"...."'---,
..
I
I Open
1.5 A to 2.0 A
I or
Closed
�"""'�vr"" !
-� Passenger
Waiting Space
Fig. 8.5.4 Four Car Arrangement
any load which may be imposed thereon by the equipment used in the machine room or by any reaction
from any such equipment during periods of both normal operation and repair .
5.3.5.3 The total load on overhead beams and their supporting structural members shall be assumed to be
equal to the dead load of slabs including load of all equipment resting on the beams plus twice the
mmimum load suspended from the beams.
5.3.5.4 The deflection of the overhead beams under the minimum static load calculated in accordance with
Sec 5.3.5.3 shall not exceed -rroo of the span.
5.3.5.5 Beams at all other floor slabs which correspond to the beam at machine room floor shall also be
made stronger to take the reaction from the guides when the lift is made to stop consequent to the breaking
of the wire ropes or the application of the safety device.
5.3.5.6 Suitable lifting beams may be provided immediately below the machine room ceiling for carrying
the tackle to facilitate lifting of any heavy part of a heavy lift. For lower capacity lifts, suitable suspension
hooks may be provided.
5.3.5.7 The roof of the machine room shall be strong enough to take up the pulley which could be used
for lifting up parts of the lift machinery for inspection and repair.
8-112
Chapter 5
Lift Car
�"""""��-------,
I Open or Closed
1.75 A to 2.0 A Call Button I
---,.1- Passenger Waiting
<=�� _1
__ Space
Lift Car Lift Well
Fig. 8.5.5 Six Car Arrangement
5.3.5.8 The equivalent dead loads imposed upon the building by the lift installations shall be shown on the
lift manufacturer's drawing so that the architect/engineer may make provisions accordingly.
5.3.6 Control System

5.3.6.1 The control of operation of the lift system, levelling, door opening and closing, response to hall
calls etc. shall be fully automatic. All control equipment shall be efficient and fail-safe.
5.3.6.2 The control system shall be capable of accelerating the car smoothly to full running speed and
stopping the lift with smooth retardation.
5.3.6.3 Variation in speed of the lift between no load and full load conditions shall not be more than plus
or minus five per cent. The control system shall be capable of correcting any tendency to overspeea or
underspeed. Tfie control system shall have safety device(s) to stop the lift car if 1ts runn ing speed exceeds its
rated speed by ten per cent.

PartS
Building Services
Lift Car
Lift Well
Space must
be open at both
Call Butto 2 A Ends
Fig. 8.5.6 Eight Car Arrangement
5.3.6.4 It shall have facility to level or, relevel the lift car within plus or minus 13 mm. The levelling
system shall be fully automatic and shall correct for over travel or under travel and rope stretch. The car
stopping and levelling system shall be unaffected by external influences like variation in 1oad, temperature,
rope elongation etc.
5.3.6.5 Closing and opening of car doors and landing doors shall be fully automatic and shall operate in
full synchronization with one another. Door opening and dosing operations shall be so controlled as to
ensure proper safety of passengers.
5.3.6.6 Door opening and closing time and door hold open time shall be automatically controlled to get
minimum transfer time in any landing. For larger installations, transfer times shall be independently
adjustable to suit the requirements of the building as well as the characteristics of the traffic.
5.3.6.7 Independent door closing push button shall be provided in the lift car to allow instant door dosing.
Similarly door opening push button shall be provided in the lift car to reverse the closing motion of tne
doors or hold them open.
5.3.6.8 When there are conditions that particularly affect the safety of passengers, the closing of doors shall
only be effected by the continuous pressure of push buttons in the lift car or landings.
5.3.6.9 Each lift shall have key operated switch to transfer from normal passenger control to a car
preference control. During car preference control the operation of the lift shall oe from the car only and the
aoors shall remain open until a car call is registered for a floor designation. All landing calls shall be
bypassed and car position indicators on the landings for this lift shall not be illuminated.
5.3.6.10 Provisions shall be made in the control system to take any car out of service still maintaining the
controlled o:peration of the remaining cars of a group of cars required for passenger traffic. It is essentiaf that
such provision shall not stop the fireman's control from bemg operative in the event of the lift being
designated as a fireman's lift.
5.3.6.11 When required, fire switch shall be provided in the control system as per Sec 5.2.2.2.
5.4 ESCALATORS
5.4.1 General
5.4.1.1 E scalators shall be located in the main line of circulation and in such a way that most persons
entering the building can see it. Care shall be taken to eliminate interference to the traffic movement.
8-114
Chapter.s
5.4.1.2 Escalators shall discharge into an open area with no turns or choice of direction necessary. Ample
space for people must be provided at the entry and exit landings of an escalator, space between the newel
and the nearest obstruction in front of the escalator shall be a minimum of 3m.
5.4.1.3 If an unloading area is restricted, such restrictions as doors or gates shall be interlocked with the
escalator to insure that the restriction is removed before the escalator can be run.
5.4.1.4 The escalator shall have provision to run in both upward and downward directions. However it
shall not run in one direction for one trip and reversed for the next. Starting, stopping or reversal shall be
controlled only by an attendant and with the assurance that no passenger is nding at that time.
5.4.1.5 Minimum head room above the escalator (minimum vertical clearance between the line of step
nosing and lowest edge of ceiling opening) shall not be less than 2.3 m.
5.4.1.6 Near the place of escalator installation, one lift with wheel chair facility shall be installed to
facilitate vertical movement of disabled persons.
5.4.2 Essential Requirements

5.4.2.1 Angle of incline of the escalator shall not be more than 30° from the horizontal. In particular cases,
an angle of incline up to 35° may be permitted for escalators having a vertical rise not more than 6 m.
5.4.2.2 The speed of the escalator, measured along the incline shall not be more than 0.63 m/s for 30°
angle of incline and 0.50 m/s for 35° angle of incline..
5.4.2.3 Balustrades
a) Escalators shall be provided on each side with solid balustrades. On the step side, the balustrades shall
be smooth and substantially flush except for protective molding parallel to fhe run of the steps. Vertical
moldings that cover joints of panels shall be properly bevelled and shall not project more than 6.5 mm .
b) The width between balustrades, measured on the incline up to a point 680 mm vertically above the nose
line of the steps, shall not be less than the width of the step. It snail not exceed the width of the step by
more than 330 mm with a maximum of 165 mm on either s1de of the escalator.
c) There shall be no abrupt changes in the width between the balustrades on the two sides of the escalator.
Where a change in width is unavoidable, such change shall not exceed 8per cent of the greater width.
In changing tne direction of the balustrades resulting from a reductwn in width the maximum
allowabfe angle of change in balustrades shall not exceed 15 degrees from the line of the escalator
travel.
5.4.2.4 The clearance on either side of the steps between the steps and the adjacent skirt guard shall not
be more than 5 mm and the sum of the clearances on both sides shall not be more than 6 mm .
5.4.2.5 Where the intersection of the outside balustrade (deck board) and the ceiling or soffit is less than
600 mm from the centreline of the handrail, a solid guard shall be provided in the intersecting angle of the
outside balustrade (deck board) and the ceiling or soffit. The vertical face of the guard shall project at least
360 mm horizontally from the apex of the angle.
5.4.2.6 Handrails
a) Each balustrade shall be provided with a handrail moving in the same direction and at the same speed
as the steps.
b) Each moving handrail shall extend at normal handrail height not less than 300 mm beyond the line of
points of combplate teeth at the upper and lower landings.
c) Hand or finger guards shall be provided at points where the handrails enter the balustrade.
d) The horizontal distance between the centrelines of two handrails, measured on the incline, shall not
exceed the width between the balustrades by more than 150 mm, with a maximum of 75 mm on either
side of the escalator.
5.4.2.7 Step Treads

a) The depth of any step tread in the direction of travel shall not be less than 400 mm and the rise between
treads shall not be more than 220 mrn.
b) The maximum clearance between step treads on the horizontal run shall be 4 mm .
c) The tread surface of each step shall·be slotted in a direction parallel to the travel of the steps. Each slot
shall not be more than 6.5 mrn wide and not be less than 9.5 mm deep; and the distance from centre to
centre of adjoining slots shall not be more than 9.5 mm.

PartS
Building Services
d) Safety provision shall be installed in the system to stop the escalator when anything is stuck in the
clearance between the step tread and the skirting.
5.4.2.8 Landings
Landings shall be made of anti-slip material.
5.4.2.9 Combplates
There shall be combplates at the upper and lower landings of every escalator. The combplate teeth shall be
meshed with and set into the slots of the tread surface. Combplates shall be adjustable vertically. Safety
provision shall be installed in the combplate assembly so that the safety contact stops the escalator when
anything is caught between the combplate and the step.
5.4.2.10 Trusses
The truss shall be desi�ed to sustain the dead and live loads of the steps and running gear in operation
safely. In the event of failure of the track system it shall retain the running gear in its guides.
5.4.2.11 Step Wheel Tracks

These shall be designed to prevent displacement of steps and running gear if a step chain breaks.
5.4.2.12 Rated Load

The escalator shall be selected in such a way that it does not exceed its rated load during operation.
The rated load in kilogram on an escalator shall be computed by the following formula :
Rated load =0.27 W A

where, W =width between the balustrades, mm; and
A = horizontal distance between the upper and lower combplate teeth , (m).
5.4.2.13 Design Factor of Safety

The factor of safety based on static load shall be at least the following :
i) for trusses and all structural members including tracks 5

ii) for driving machine parts :
a) where made of steel or bronze 8
b) where made of cast iron and other materials 10
iii) for power-transmission members 10
Step chain composed of cast-steel links which, if thoroughly annealed, shall be permitted with a factor of
safety of at least 20. .
5.4.2.14 Driving Machine, Motor and Brake

a) The driving machine shall be connected to the main drive shaft by toothed gearing, a coupling, or a
chain.
b) An electric motor shall not drive more than one escalator.
c) Each escalator shall be provided with an electrically released, mechanically applied brake capable of
stopping the up or down travelling escalator with any load up to the rated load. The brake shall be
located either on the driving machine or on the main drive shaft.
Where a chain is used to connect the driving machine to the main drive shaft, a brake shall be provided
on this shaft. It is not required that this brake be of the electrically released type if an electrically
released brake is provided on the driving machine.
d) The braking system shall have provision to bring the escalator automatically to a smooth stop in the
event of fai[ure of electrical power or mechanical parts.
e) Speed Governor : A speed governor shall be provided, the operation of which shall automatically shut
down th� escalator in case of overspeed or underspeed, and prevent reversal of direction (up or down).
f) Adequate illumination shall be provided at all landings, at the combplates and completely down all
stair ways.
g) An emergency stop switch shall be located near the combplate or in some obtrusive location.
h) All machinery spaces shall have access doors or panels for inspection and maintenance. These panels
shall remain Iocl<ed to prevent unauthorized access.
i) Reasonable ventilation shall be provided in machinery spaces.
8-116
Chapter 5
5.5 MOVING WALKS
5.51
. Essential Requirements
5.5.1.1 Angle of incline of moving walks shall be no more than 15°. A moving walk may have sloping
entrance and exit or level entrance and exit.
5.5.1.2 The o erating speeds of moving walk at different inclinations and different entrance and exit
r
conditions shal not be more than those given in Table 8.5.6
Table 8.5.6
Operating Speeds of Moving Walk (Based on 1000 mm Nominal Tread Width)"
Incline of Ramp on Slope Maximum Speed with Level Maximum Speed with Sloping
Entrance and Exit Entrance and Exit
(rnls) (m/s)
0 to3° 0.9 0.9

Over3 to5° 0.9 0.8
OverS to8° 0.9 0.7
Over8 to12° 0.7 0.65
Over12 to15° 0.7 0.63
* Higher tread width may be allowable on horizontal runs.
5.5.2 Balustrades
a) Moving walks shall be provided on each side with solid balustrades. On the tread way side the
balustrades shall be smooth and substantially flush.
b) The width between balustrades, measured up to a point 680 mm vertically above the tread way, shall
not be less than the width of the tread way. It shall not exceed the width of the tread way by more than
330 nun with a maximum of165 mrn on either side of the moving walk.
c) There shall be no abrupt changes in width between the balustrades on the two sides of the moving
walk. Where a change m width: is unavoidable, such change shall not exceed 8 per cent of the greater
width. In changing tne direction of the balustrades resulting from a reduction in width the maximum
allowable angle of change in balustrades shall not exceed 15 degrees from the line of the moving walk
travel.
5.5.3 Handrails
5.5.3.1 Each balustrade shall be provided with a handrail moving in the same direction and at the same
speed as the tread way. Only one handrail may be allowed in a moving walk when the slope of the
walkway does not exceed3°, operating speed is less than 0.35 m/s or the width is no more than530 mm.
5.5.3.2 Each moving handrail shall extend at normal handrail height not less than300 mm beyond the line
of points of combplate teeth at the upper and lower landings.
5.5.3.3 Hand or finger guards shall be provided at the point where the handrails enter the balustrade.
5.5.3.4 The horizontal distance between the centrelines of two handrails shall not exceed the width between
the balustrades by more than150 nun with a maximum of75 mm on either side of the moving walk.
5.5.4 Tread Way

5.5.4.1 The tread surface of the tread way shall be slotted in a direction parallel to the direction of travel.
5.5.4.2 The clearance on either side of the tread way between the tread way and the adjacent skirt guard
shall not be more than 5 mm and the sum of the clearances on both sides shall not be more than 6 mm.
Safety provisions shall be kept in the system to stop the moving walk when anything is stuck in the
clearance between the tread way and the adjacent skirt guard.
5.5.5 Landings
Landings shall be made of anti-slip material.
5.5.6 Combplates
5.5.6.1 There shall be combplates at the entrance and exit of each moving walk. The combplate teeth shall
be meshed with and set into the slots in the tread surface. Safety provision shall be mstalled in the
combplate assembly so that the safety contact stops the moving walk when anything is caught between the
combplate and the tread.
5.5.6.2 An emergency stop switch shall be located near the combplate or at some obtrusive location.

Part 8
Building Services
5.5.6.3 Adequate illumination shall be provided at combplates.
5.6 INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION
5.6.1 All new lifts, escalators and moving walks, after installation, shall be inspected and tested by the Authority
before these are put into normal services.
These shall not be brought into use unless the Authority is satisfied that the installations have been carried
out as per provisions of this Code and tests indicate that all the safety devices operate satisfactorily. It shall
be unlawful to operate any lift, escalator or moving walk without a current certificate of inspection issued
by the Authority. Certificates shall not be issued when the conveyance is posted as unsafe pursuant to
Sec 5.6.7.
5.6.2 All electrical lines, control lines and earthings of lift, escalator and moving walk s stems shall be tested to
r
determine whether these have been installed properly to meet the requirements o the machine and as per
provisions of Chapter 2.
5.6.3 Testing
Tests shall be carried out to determine the operational and safety conditions of lifts, escalators and moving
walks in accordance with the provisions of section :
5.6.3.1 Lift: Tests shall be conducted to ascertain that

a) the motor, brake control equipment and car levelling mechanism function properly,
b) the door operation is proper and door locking devices function properly,
c) the car raises and lowers rated load,
d) the car achieves at least the rated speed,
e) the lift motor can be overloaded up to a minimum of 10% above the rated capacity,
f) the safety gear stops the car with the rated load in case of over speed and/ or over travel etc.,
g) the buffers function properly, and
h) the safety gear operate and keeps operation of the lift suspended in case of the lift car is loaded above
its maximum capacity.
5.6.3.2 Escalator and Moving Walk: Tests on escalators and moving walks shall be conducted to ascertain
that
a) the automatic control device functions properly and brings the escalator to a smooth stop in case of
failure of any mechanical parts or electrical power,
b) the automatic safety protection for over speed, under speed and direction reversal functions properly,
and
c) Safety devices function properly and stops the escalator or moving walk when anything is caught
between the combplate and the treads or tne skirting and the treads.
d) the handrail and steps or tread way travel at exactly the same speed.
5.6.4 A lift, escalator or moving walk, in which repair and/ or maintenance work has been carried out shall also be
put to the relevant tests as provided for in Sec 5.6.3.
5.6.5 After proper testing, the Authority shall issue certificate regarding suitability of the lift, escalator or moving
walk for normal or regular service. A lift, escalator or moving walk shall be allowed to work only on
issuance of this certificate.
5.6.6 The lift, escalator or moving walk shall be inspected periodically to ensure safety.
5.6.7 When an inspection reveals an unsafe condition and the Authority finds that the unsafe condition
endangers human life, the Authority shall cause to be placed on such lift, escalator or moving walk, in a
conspicuous place, a notice stating that such conveyance is unsafe. The owner shall see to it that such notice
of unsafe condition is legibly mamtained where placed by the Authority. The Authority shall also issue an
order in writing to the owner requiring the repairs or alterations to be made to such conveyance which are
necessary to render it safe and may order the operation thereof discontinued until the repairs or alterations
are made or the unsafe conditions are removed. A posted notice of unsafe conditions shall be removed only
by the Authority and when satisfied that the unsafe conditions have been corrected.
8-118
Chapter 5
lifts, Escalators and Moving Walks
·
5.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
5.7.1 The owner shall be responsible for the safe operation and maintenance of each lift, escalator or moving walk
installation and shall cause periodic inspections, tests and maintenance to be made on such conveyances as
required in this section.
5.7.2 The lift, escalator or moving walk shall receive regular cleaning and lubrication of relevant parts, and
adjustment and adequate servicing by authorized competent persons at such intervals as tne type of
equipment and frequency of service demand. In order that the lift, escalator or moving walk installation is
maintained at all times in a safe condition., a pro er maintenance schedule shall be drawn up in
f
consultation with the machine manufacturer which shal be strictly followed.
5.7.3 In case of lift, periodic examination of wire ropes, components of landing and car doors, door interlocking
mechanism, brakes, gears, components of safety gears, guides, rollers, channels etc. shall be carried out as
recommended by tne manufacturer. In no case shall the interval between such inspections exceed six
months.
5.7.4 Grooves of drums, sheaves and pulleys of lifts shall also be examined when rope replacement is made. If
necessary, the drums, sheaves or pulleys shall be properly remachined.
5.7.5 In case of escalators and moving walks, periodic examination of balustrades, handrail, tread way, tread way
interconnection, combplates, speed governor, drives, chains, nonreversal device, brakes, �ears etc. shall be
carried out as recommended by the manufacturer, but in no case the inteiVal shall exceed SlX months.
5.7.6 Sundry Precautions .

5.7.6.1 Adequate precaution shall be taken to guard against any possibility of a lift being operated by
unauthorized persons. Precautions shall also be taken to prevent a hft from being operated by any person
when it is not mtended for use.
5.7.6.2 No person shall remain in the pit while the lift is working. Adequate precautions shall be taken to
protect persons working in the pit from accidental contact with the counter weight.
5.7.6.3 While the lift is under examination or repairs, suitable steps shall be taken to ensure that the lift is
not operated inadvertently by any person in such a manner as may endanger the safety of persons working
in the lift.
5.7.6.4 No such explosive or other inflammable material shall be carried in the lift car as may endanger the
safety of persons and property.
Related Appendices
Appendix L Particulars of Lifts, Escalators and Moving Walks
Appendix M Format for Particulars of Lifts, Escalators and Moving Walks

Part 8
Building Services
8-120
CHAPTER®
Water Supply
6.1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE
6.1.1 The purpose of this chapter of the Code is to provide minimum standards for the design, installation and
maintenance of water supply and distribution system within a building and its premises.
6.1.2 The regulations of this chapter also provide guidelines for water requirements for different classes of
buildings according to their occupancy classification.
6.1.3 The provisions stated herein do not cover the requirements of water supply for industrial plants and
process, municipal uses, viz. street washing, street hydrant, etc.
6.2 TERMINOLOGY
case of any conflict or contradiction between a definition given in thi:; section and that in Fart 1, the meaning
ACCESSIBLE : When applied to a fixture, appliance or equipment shall mean having access thereto, but
which may require the removal of an access panel or sinular obstruction; "readily accessible" shall mean
direct access without the necessity of removing any panel, door or similar obstruction.
AIR GAP : The unobstructed vertical distance through the free atmosphere between the lowest opening
from any pipe or faucet supplying water to tank, plumbing fixture or other device and the flood lever rim of
the receptacle.
AVAILABLE HEAD : The head of water available at the point of consideration due to mains' pressure or
storage tank or any other source of pressure.
BACK SIPHONAGE : The flowing back of used, contaminated, or polluted water from a plumbing fixture
or vessel into a water supply pipe due to a reduced pressure in such a pipe (see BACKFLOW).
Part 8 8-121
Building Services
PartS
Building Services
BACKFLOW : The flow of water or other liquids, mixtures or substances into the distribution pipes of a
potable water supply from any source other than its intended source.
BACKFLOW CONNECTION OR CONDITION: Any arrangement whereby backflow can occur.
BACKFLOW PREVENTOR : A device or means to prevent backflow.
BALL COCK : A water supply valve, opened or closed by means of a float or similar device, used to supply
water to a tank forming an approved air gap or vacuum breaker and acting as an antisiphon device. .Also
known as FLOAT OPERATEDVALVE.
BEDPAN WASHER AND STERILIZER: A fixture designed to wash bedpans and to flush the contents into
the sanitary drainage system and located adjacent to a water closet or clinical sink. Such fixtures can also be
provided for disinfecting utensils by scalding with steam or hot water.
BRANCH: Any part of the piping system other than a riser or main.
· BRANCH CONNECTOR : A connector between water main and branch pipes by T, Y, T-Y, double Y, and V
branches according to their respective shapes.
BUILDING SUPPLY : The water supply pipe carryin� potable water from the water meter or other source
of water supply to a building or other point of use or distribution on the lot.
CONTAMINATION: A general term meaning the introduction into the potable water supply of chemicals,
wastes or sewage which will render the water unfit for its intended purpose.
CRITICAL LEVEL : The level at which the vacuum breaker may be submerged before backflow occurs.
When the critical level is not indicated on the vacuum breaker, the bottom of the device shall be considered
as the critical level.
CROSS-CONNECTION : Any physical connection or arrangement between two otherwise separate piping
systems, one of which contains potable water and the other either water of unknown or questionable safety
or steam, gas, or chemical whereby there may be a flow from one system to the other, the direction of flow
depending on the pressure differential between the two systems (See BACKFLOW).
CYLINDER : A cylindrical closed vessel capable of containing water under pressure greater than the
atmospheric pressure.
DEVELOPED LENGTH : Length of a pipe along the centreline of the pipe and fittings
DISTRIBUTION PIPE : Any l i pe conveying water from a storage tank/cistern or from a hot water
apparatus supplied from a fee cistern under pressure from that cistern.
EFFECTIVE OPENING : The minimum cross-sectional area at the point of water supply discharge
measured or expressed in teqns of (1) diameter of a circle, (2) if the opening is not circular, the diameter of
-
a circle of equivalent cross-settional area. (This is also applicable to AIR GAP.)
FAUCET :A valve end of a water pipe by means of which water can be drawn from or held within the pipe.
FEED CISTERN: A storage tank/cistern used for supplying cold water to a hot water apparatus.
FITTING : Anything fitted or fixed in connection with the supply, measurement, control, distribution,
utilization or disposal of water. "Water fitting" includes pipes (other than mains), taps, cocks, valves,
ferrules, meters, cisterns, baths, water closets, soil pans and otner similar apparatus used in connection with
the supply and use of water.
FIXTURE : See PLUMBING FIXTURE.
FIXTURE BRANCH: A water supply pipe between the fixture supply pipe and the water distribution pipe.
FIXTURE SUPPLY : A water supply pipe connecting the fixture with the fixture branch.
FIXTURE UNIT : A quantity in terms of which the load eroducing effects on the plumbing system of
different kinds of plumbing fixtures are expressed on some arbitrary cfiosen scale.
FLOAT OPERATED VALVE :See BALL COCK.
FLOOD LEVEL RIM: The top edge of a receptacle from which water overflows.
FLUSH TANK : A tank located above water closets, urinals or similar fixtures for the purpose of flushing
the usable portion of the fixture. Also known as FLUSHING CISTERN and FLUSHOMETER TANK.
8-122
Chapter 6
Water Supply
FLUSH VALVE:See FLUSHOMETER VALVE.
FLUSHING CISTERN: See FLUSH TANK.
FLUSHOMETER TANK:See FLUSH TANK.
FLUSHOMETER VALVE : A device located at the bottom of the tank, and which discharges a
predetermined quantity of water to fixtures for flushing purposes and is closed by direct water pressure or
other mechanical means. Also known as FLUSH VALVE.
FULL FACILITIES: The modem plumbing facilities allowed to the occupants of modern dwellings or, of
VIP hotels and accommodations.
FULL OPEN VALVE: A shutoff valve that in the full position has a straight through flow passageway with
a diameter not less than one nominal pipe size smaller than nominal pipe size of the connecting pipe.
GEYSER : An apparatus for heating water with supply control on the inlet side and delivering it from an
outlet.
GRADE: The slope or fall of a line of pipe with reference to a horizontal plane.
HANGERS :See SUPPORTS.
HORIZONTAL PIPE: Any pipe or fitting which is installed in a horizontal position or which makes an
angle less than 45 degrees with the horizontal .
HOT WATER TANK :A vessel for storing hot water under pressure greater than the atmospheric pressure.
INDIVIDUAL WATER SUPPLY :A supply other than an approved public water supply which serves one
or more families.
LAGGING :The material used for thermal or acoustic insulation.
LIQUID WASTE : The discharge from any fixture, appliance or appurtenance in connection with a
plumbing system which does not receive faecal matter.
MAIN : The principal artery of the system, to which branches may be connected, for the purpose of water
supply from a supply to individual consumers. Also known as WATER MAIN.
MECHANICAL JOINT :A connection between pipes, fittings or pipes and fittings which is neither screwed,
caulked, threaded, soldered, solvent cemented, orazed nor weldea.
OFFSET : A combination of approved bends in a line of piping used to connect two pipes whose axes are
parallel but not in line.
PLUMBING :The business, trade or work having to do with the installation, removal, alteration or repair of
plumbing and drainage systems or part thereof.
PLUMBING APPLIANCES:The plumbing fixtures whose operation or control can be dependent upon one
or more energized components, such as motors, controls, heating elements, or pressure or temperature
sensing elements.
PLUMBING APPURTENANCE : A manufactured device or prefabricated assembly of component parts,

which is an adjunct to the basic piping system and plumbing fixtures, performing some useful function in
the operation, maintenance, servicing, economy or safety of the plumbing system.
PLUMBING FIXTURE : A receptacle or device which is either permanently or temporarily connected to the
water distribution system of the premises, and demands a supply of water therefrom, or discharges used
water, waste materials or sewage either directly or indirectly to the drainage system of the premises, or
requires both a water supply connection and a discharge to the drainage system of the premises. Also
known as FIXTURE.
PLUMBING SYSTEM : A system of potable water supply and distribution pipes, plumbing fixtures and
traps, soil waste and vent pipes, and sanitary and storm sewers and building arains including their
respective connections, devices and a appurtenances within a building or premises.
POTABLE WATER: Water free from impurities which may cause diseases or harmful physiological effects
and water which is satisfactory for drinkmg, culinary and domestic purposes.
PRIVATE/PRIVATE USE : Plumbing fixtures intended for the use of a family in residences, or for the
restricted use of an individual in commercial establishments.

Part 8
Building Services
QUICK CLOSING VALVE : A valve or faucet that closes automatically when released manually or
controlled by mechanical means for fast action closing.
RECEPTOR :An approved plumbing fixture or device of such material, shape and capacity as to adequately
receive the discharge from indirect waste pipes, so constructed and located as to be readily cleaned.
RESIDUAL HEAD : The head available at any particular point in the distribution system.
RESTRICTED FACILITIES : The minimum plumbing facilities acceptable for the occupants of low income
group.
RIM :An unobstructed open edge of a fixture.

RISER : A water supply pipe which extends vertically one full storey or more to convey water to branches
or fixtures.
ROUGHING-IN : The installation of all parts of the plumbing system which can be completed prior to the
installation of fixtures. This includes water supply, drainage, vent piping and necessary supports.
SERVICE PIPE : The pipe that runs between the distribution main in the street and the riser in case of a
multi-storied building or the water meter in the case of an individual house and is subject to water pressure
from such main.
SLIP JOINT : An adjustable tubing connection, consisting of a compression nut, a friction ring, and a
compression washer, designed to fit a threaded adapter fitting, or a standard taper pipe thread.
SOLDERED JOINT : A joint obtained by the joining of metal parts with metallic mixtures of alloys which
melt at a temperature below 427°C and above 149°C.
STOP VALVE :Any device (including a stopcock or stop tap) other than a draw off tap, for stopping at will
the flow of water in a pipe.
STORAGE CISTERN : A container, other than a flashing cistern, having a free water surface under
atmospheric pressure and used for storage of water, and is connected to the water main or tube-well by
means of supply pipe. Also known as STORAGE TANK.
STORAGE TANK:See STORAGE CISTERN.
SUPPORTS : Hangers and anchors or devices for supporting and securing pipe, fixture and equipment to
walls, ceilings, floors or other structural members. Also known as HANGERS:
TEMPERED WATER:The water ranging in temperature from 29°C up to 43°C.
VACUUM BREAKER: A type of backflow preventor installed on openings subject to normal atmospheric
·
pressure.
VERTICAL PIPE : Any pipe which is installed in a vertical position or which makes an angle of not more
than 45 degrees with the vertical.
WARMING PIPE : An overflow p ipe so fixed that its outlet whether inside or outside a building, is in a
conspicuous position where the discharge of any water therefrom can be readily seen.
WASHOUT VALVE : A device located at the bottom of the tank for the purpose of draining a tank for
cleaning, maintenance, etc.
WATER CONDITIONING OR TREATING DEVICE :A device which conditions or treats a water supply so
as to change its chemical content or remove suspended solids by filtration.
WATER HAMMER ARRESTER :A device used to absorb the pressure surge (water hammer) which occurs
when water flow is suddenly stopped in a water supply system.
WATER HEATER : Any heating device that heats potable water and supplies it to the potable hot water
distribution system.
WATER LINE : A line marked inside a cistern to indicate the highest water level at which the ball valve
should be adjusted to shut off. .
WATER MAIN:See MAIN.
WATER OUTLET :A discharge opening through which water is supplied to a fixture, into the atmosphere
(except into an open tank which is part of the water supply system), to a boiler or heating system, or to any
devices or equipment requiring water to operate but wfuch are not part of the plumbing system.
8-124
Chapter 6
Water Supply
WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM: A system consisting of building supply pipe, water distributing pipes, and
necessary connecting pipes, fittings, control valves, and all appurtenances carrying or supplying potable
water in or adjacent to tne building or premises.
WELDED JOINTS OR SEAM : Any joint or seam obtained by the joining of metal parts in the plastic
molten state.
6.3 PERMIT FOR WATER CONNECTION
6.3.1 Requirement of Pennit

No water supply system shall be installed in a new building until a permit for such work has been issued
by the Authority. The addition or alteration of the existing water supply facilities in a building shall also
require a permit for their installation.
6.3.2 Application for Pennit

Application for a permit for water supply system shall be made in writing by the licensed plumber and the
owner or his appointed person(s) or agent on a prescribed form (Appendix N).
The application shall accompany building drawings showing the water supply system with the following
details:
a) Site plans showing the location of water main.
b) Ty�ical floor plan(s) and elevations of the building with the position of different plumbing fixtures and
p1pmgs.
c) Materials, sizes and gradients (if any) of the proposed piping system.
d) Pipes (if any) conveying nonpotable water (for flushing water closets and urinals) shall be marked by
distinctive (durable) yellow colour.
6.3.3 The design calculations for water supply system of high rise and public buildings shall be submitted along
with the arawings mentioned in Sec 6.3.2 above.
6.3.4 Pennits and Approvals

The Buildin!$ Official shall examine or cause to be examined the application for a permit and amendments
thereto within 45 days from the day of receipt of such application. If the application does not conform to the
provisions of this Code, it shall be rejected in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If the proposed work
satisfies the provisions of this Code (Sec 6.3.2 and 6.3.3), the Authority shall issue a nontransferable permit.
6.4 LICENSING OF PLUMBERS
6.4.1 Licence Requirement

No individual, partnership, corporation or firm shall engage in the business of installation, repair or
alteration of water supply system without obtaining a licence from the Authority.
6.4.2 Examination and Certification of Plumber

The Authority shall establish a plumbers examination board. The board will determine the requirements for
the qualification and procedures for examination of the applicants for licence. The Authority will issue
licence to such applicants who meet the qualification therefor and successfully pass the examination
conducted by the board.
6.4.3 Annulment of Licence

The licence of a plumber may be annulled by the Authority, if it is proved that a plumbing work has been
completed and certified by the licensed plumber violating the provisions of this Code and deliberately
setting aside the approvals given in the permit or without receiving the permit from the Authority.
6.5 WATER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
6.5.1 General
6.5.1.1 Buildings equipped with plumbing fixtures and used for human occupancy or habitation shall be
p
provided with tne suppfy of cold otable water in the amounts s ecified in Sec 6.5.2 to 6.5.4 and at the
J
pressures specified in Sec 6.8.2 an 6.8.3. Only potable water shal be accessible to the plumbing fixtures
supplying water for drinking, bathing, culinary use and for the processing of food.
6.5.1.2 Nonpotable water may be used for flushing water closets and urinals provided such water shall not
be accessible for drinking or such other purposes.
6.5.2 Water Requirement for Domestic Use

Water requirements for daily domestic use of a building shall be assessed on the basis of the one or a
combination of the following two methods:

PartS
Building Services
a) Number of occupants according to their occupancy classification and their water requirements as
b) Peak demand or maximum probable flow specified in Sec P 3 and P 4 in the Appendix P.
6.5.3 Water Requirement for Fire Fighting

The water requirement for fire fighting shall be in accordance with Sec 4.2 of Part 4.
6.5.4 Water Requirement for Special Equipment

The water requirement for special equipment like air-conditioning or such others shall be based on the
specification of the manufacturer.
Table 8. 6.1
Guideline for Water Requirements for Various Occupancies and Facility
Groups in Litres Per Capit�t Per Day (LPCD)
Class of For Full a For Restricted

Occupancy Occupancy Groups Facilities Facilities
(LPCD) (LPCD)
Occ ancy A:
de A1: Single Family Dwelling 400 135
Resi ential A2: Flats or Apartments 225 135
A3: Mess, Hostels, or Board in� House 135 70
A4: Minimum Standard Housmg -
70
AS: Hotels or Lodging House (Per bed) 300 135
Occupancy B: B1: Educational Facilities 70 45

Educational B2: Preschool Facilities 50 35
Occupancy C: C1: Institution for Children's Care 180 100

Institutional C2: Custodian Institution for Capable 180 100
C3: Custodian Institution for Incapable 120 70
C4: Penal and Mental Institution 120 70
Occu ancy D:
h 01: Normal Medical Facilities 450 225
Healt Care 02: Emergency Medical Facilities 300 135
Occupancy E: E1: Large Assembly with Fixed Seats (per seat) 90 45

Assembly E2: Small Assembly with Fixed Seats (per seat) 90 45
E3: Large Assembly without Fixed Seats b
E4: Small Assembly without Fixed Seats 8 5
ES: Sports Facilities 8 5
8 5
Occupancy F: F1: Offices 45 30

Business and F2: Small Shops and Markets 45 30
Mercantile F3: Large Shops and Markets 45 30
F4: Garage and Petrol Stations 70 45
FS: Essential Services 70 45
Occupancy G: G1: Low Hazard Industries 40 25

Industrial G2: Moderate Hazards Industries 40 25
Occupancy H: H1: Low Fire Risk Stora e g 10 6

Storage H2: Moderate Fire Risk torage 10 6
Occupancy J: J1: Explosive Hazard Building 8 5

Hazardous J2: Chemical Hazard Building 8 5
Occupancy Kc K1: Private Garage & S ecial Structure

t 8 5
Miscellaneous K2: Fences, Tanks and owers -
3
a For full facility in occupancy classifications A, B, C and D, the water requirement value includes 25% hot
water.
b In the case of mosques, the water requirements given above shall be adequate for ablution and other uses of
one devotee per prayer. The appropriate LPCD value may be calculated on this basis.
c Water requirement for occupancy K is shown as a provision for unknown visitors only.
8-126
Chapter 6
Water Supply
6.6 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Each floor or unit within the water supply system shall be provided with a control valve in addition to the
main control valve at the entrance of the system. One of the following public water supply systems shall be
adopted for distributing water to the plumbing fixtures within the bwlding. .
6.6.1 Direct Connection to Water Main

For continuous water supply system with sufficient pressure to feed all plumbing fixtures during peak
demand period, the direct connection of water distribution system to the water mains may be adopted.
6.6.2 System Incorporating Balancing Roof Tank

For continuous water supply system with inadequate pressure only during peak demand hour or for
intermittent water supply w1th sufficient pressure to feed balancing tank, a balancing roof tank shall be
required to feed plumbmg fixtures within the building. The connection to the balancing roof tank from the
water main or from ground tank or from individual water sources shall be through a nonreturn valve.
6.6.3 System Incorporating Ground Tank

For water supply system with inadequate pressure to feed plumbing fixtures or balancing roof tank, the
building rem1ses shall have a grouna (or underground) tank to store water. The water from the ground
f
tank shal be boosted up to the roof tank to feed plumbing fixtures. The connection of water main to the
ground tank shall be through a ball valve system. Installation of booster pump directly into the water main
shall not be allowed.
6.6.4 Individual Water Sources

In the absence of a water supply system, the building premises shall have individual water sources as
specified in Sec 6.19.1. The water from the sources shall be boosted up to the roof storage tank to feed
plumbing fixtures. The system shall be protected as specified in Sec 6.19.3 to 6.19.7.
6.7 STORAGE OF WATER
6.7.1 Capacity of Storage Tank

The capacity of a storage tank shall be calculated considering the following factors :
a) The rate and regufarity of supply;
b) The frequency of replenishment of the storage tank during 24 hours;
c) Building occupancy classification;
d) Hours of supply of water at sufficiently high pressure to fill up the roof storage tank in absence of a
ground (or underground) storage tank;
e) The amount of water required for fire fighting (Sec 4.2, Part 4)
f) The amount of water required by special equipment (Sec 6.5.4).
6.7.2 Construction of Storage Tank

6.7.2.1 General : Storage tank shall be easily accessible for inspection and cleaning. The tank shall be
provided with adequate size of valved drains at its lowest point in accordance with Table 8.6.2. The water
supply inlet into the storage tank shall be at an elevation that is required for an air gap in an open tank with
overflow (Sec 6.9.6) or 100 mm above the overflow whichever is greater. The diameter of overflow pipe
shall not be less than the size shown in Table 8.6.3 for the specific discharge into storage tank. The storage
tank shall be equipped with water tight and vermin and rodent proof cover. The tank shall be provided
with return bena vent pipe with an open area not less than half the area of the riser (up feed or down feed).
All openings (overflow pipe and vent pipe) shall be provided with corrosion resistant screens against the
entrance ofinsects and vermin.
6.7.2.2 Roof Storage Tank : The roof storage tank shall be constructed with prestressed or reinforced
concrete or ferrocement or galvanized steel or of the material that will resist any action by the plain or
chlorinated water. The tank shall be made water tight without the use of putty. Tanks made of
nongalvanized metal sheets shall be coated internally with a nontoxic material which does not impart a taste
or odour. The metal storage tank shall be coated externally with a good quality anticorrosive weather
resistant paint. The outlet of storage tank to the distribution system shall be at least 50 mm above the tank
bottom.
6.7.2.3 Ground or Underground Storage Tank : The ground or underground storage tank shall be
constructed of either prestressed or reinforced concrete or ferrocement. The tank shall be absolutely
waterproof and have a water tight cast iron manhole cover suitable for inspection. The inside and outside of
the tank may be coated with nontoxic and waterproof materials. The ground tank shall be placed at a
location so as to avoid contamination by flood water or any other sources.

Part 8
Building Services
6.8 DESIGN OF DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
6.8.1 The water supply system shall be designed to supply minimum but requisite quantity of water to all
fixtures, devices and appurtenances in every section of the building with adequate pressure. The design
requirements of a water supply system are presented in Table 8.6.4.
Table 8.6.2
Sizes of Storage Tank Drainage Pipes
Tank Capacity (V) Diameter of Drainage Pipe

in Litres (l) I (mm)
v :5:2800 25
2800 < v :5:5500 38
5500 < v :5:11000 50
11000 < v :5:19000 63
19000 < v s; 28000 75
28000 <V 100
Table 8.6.3
Sizes of Overflow Pipes for Storage Tank
Maximum Discharge (Q) of Water Diameter of Overflow Pipe

Supply Pipe into Storage Tank (mm)
(l/min)
Q :5: 190 50
190 <Q :5: 570 63
570 <Q :5: 760 75
760 <Q :5: 1500 100
1500 <Q :5: 2650 125
2650 < Q :5: 3800 150
3800 <Q 200
6.8.2 Water distribution pipe in a building shall be maintained at a pressure so that none of their fittings shall are
subject to a water head greater than 35 m.
6.8.3 The distribution system shall be maintained at a pressure not less than those specified in Table 8.6.4 during
peak demand period.
6.8.4 The minimum size of supply pipe for different fixtures shall be in accordance with Table 8.6.4.
6.8.5 The water flow velocity in the distribution system shall be controlled to minimize the possibility of water
hammer.
6.8.6 . The design of water distribution system shall conform to approved engineering practices. A guide to the
design ofa building water distribution system is presented in Appendix P.
Note : The sizing of water distribution piping within the building may be made either by considering the velocity of
flow or by velocity of flow and pressure Joss as governing parameters. The first method have limited
application for one or two storey buildings provided the minimum available pressure is sufficient to operate the
highest or most remote fixtures during peak demand period. The second method provides better estimate of
pipe sizes for a water distribution system.
6.9 PROTECTION OF POTABLE WATER SUPPLY
6.9.1 Potable water supply system shall be protected against nonpotable water sources or wastes (solid, liquid or
gases). There shalf be no cross connection between potable water distribution system and nonpotable water
distribution or waste disposal system.
6.9.2 Submerged outlet from potable water supply system shall be avoided. Connection of potable water to boiler
feed water system, or heating or cooling system shall be made through proper air gap.
6.9.3 Water used for cooling or for other purposes shall not be returned to the potable water supply system.
6.9.4 Potable water supply system shall be protected against backflow either by air gap or by back flow preventor.
Reflex nonretum valve shall not be used for this purpose.
8-128
Chapter 6
Water Supply
Table8.6.4
Water Supply System Design Requirements
Minimum Size Required Flow

Fixture Supply Control fn
of Su ply Pipe Pressure
mm) (kPa)
Bathroom group Flush tank -

55
Bathroom group Flushometer valve -
55
Bathtub Faucet 13 55
Clothes washer 13 55
Combination fixture Faucet 13 55
Dishwashing machine 13 55
Drinking fountain Faucet 19 55
Kitchen sink Faucet 13 55
Laundry tray Faucet 13 55
Wash basin Faucet 19 55
Pedestal urinal Flush tank 13 55
Pedestal urinal Flushometer valve 19 100
Restaurant sink Faucet 19 55
Service sink Faucet 13 55
Shower head Mixing valve 13 55
Water closet Flush tank 19 55
Water closet F1 ushometer tank 19 55
Water closet Flushometer valve 25 100
For fixture not listed here but maximum 13 55
supply size requirement 19 55
25 100
6.9.5 The connection of potable water for health care plumbing fixtures shall be protected against backflow in
accordance with Taole 8.6.5.
6.9.6 The minimum air gaps for different water supply openings or outlet shall be at least 3 times the effective
opening when they will be placed close to a wall. The minimum air gaps shall be at least 2 times the effective
opening when they will be located away from a wall.
Table 8.6.5
Water Supply Protection for Hospital Fixtures
Fixtures I Protections Required
Aspirators Vacuum breaker

Bedpan washer Vacuum breaker
Boihng type sterilizer Air gap
Exhaust condenser Vacuum breaker
Flush floor drain Vacuum breaker
House connection Vacuum breaker
Pressure sterilizer Vacuum breaker
Vacuum system Air gap or vacuum breaker
I (cleaning and fluid section)
6.9.7 Potable water supply connection to any cistern or apparatus containing chemical(s) shall be done only with
the special approval for such connection by the Authority and shall be marked by a tag.
6.9.8 All piping and fitting shall be installed and maintained properly to avoid the risk of contamination.
6.9.9 Nonpotable water supply system shall have to be painted and marked by a tag.
6.10 WATER DISTRIBUTION IN TALL BUILDINGS
6.10.1 In tall buildings some of the fixtures at the lower level may be subject to excessive pressure. The sanitary
appliances and fittings in tall buildings shall not be subject to a pressure of greater tnan 350 kPa. This shall
be achieved by one or a combination of the following two methods :
a) Zoning Floors by Intermediate Tank : An intermediate tank in accordance with Sec 6.6.2 shall be
provided on different floors so that plumbing fixtures are not subject to excessive pressure.
b) Using Pressure Reducing Valves : The excessive pressures suffered by different fixtures shall be
minimized by pressure reduction valves.

PartS
Building Services
6.10.2 Recirculation of Waste Water

Recirculation of cooling water and/or waste water from wash basin to the cistern of water closets and
urinals in the lower floor may be provisioned only through a separate tank. No connection between the
potable water supply line and the recirculated waste water line shall be allowed with or without any
nonreflex or nonreturn valves.
6.11 HOT WATER SUPPLY INSTALLATION
6.11.1 Hot Water Requirements

For a residential building, hot water may be supplied to all plumbing fixtures and equipment used for
bathing, washing, cleansing, laundry and culinary purposes. For a nonresidential building, hot water may
be supplied for bathing and washing purposes. Water requirement for hot water supply shall be in
accordance with Sec 6.5.
6.11.2 f
Storage Tem erature
The design o hot water supply system may be based upon the following temperature requirement :
Scalding 68°C
Hotbath 41°C
Warm bath 37°C
Tepid bath 30°C
Sink 60°C
6.11.3 Storage Capacity

The capacity of hot water vessel shall be based on the maximum short time demand of the premises.
6.11.4 Hot Water Heater

The hot water heater shall conform to the following standards: BS 758, BS 779, BS 843, BS 855, BS 1250, BS
2883 and those specified in Part 5 of this Code. .
6.11.5 Cold Water Supply Connection to Water Heaters

The connection of cold water supply iping into water heater shall be made near its bottom. The minimum
F
size of cold water supply piping shal be based on the probable hot water demand of different fixtures but
not less than 25 mm The supply pipe shall deliver cold water into hot water cylinder as follows:
.
a) The water heater (electric or gas) of less than 15 litres storage capacity may be directly connected to the
water main through a nonreturn valve.
b) The storage heater of 20 to 70 litres capacity may be connected directly to the water main through a
nonretum valve and with an additional device that will prevent the siphonage of hot water back to the
water main.
c) The enclosed water heater with storage ca p acity greater than 70 litres shall be fed from the storage tank.
This water heater shall not be connected d1rectfy to the water main.
d) The water supply connection to an open vessel type water heater may be made with an air gap of at
least 15 mm above the top edge of the water heater. Ball valve connection shall not be used to control
the flow of water into this water heater.
6.11.6 Hot Water Distribution Piping

The connection of hot water distribution pipe to the hot water cylinder shall be at the top of the cylinder.
The installation of piping shall be such as to avoid airlock. In case of hot water horizontal piping the
gradient shall not be less than 1 in 250.
6.11.6.1 The procedure for sizing may be the same as that for cold water distribution system in Sec 6.8 but
in no case shall the size be less than that specified in Table 8.6.6.
Table 8.6.6
Minimum Pipe Size for Hot Water Piping
Different Pipes I Minimum Diameter(mm)

The size of main distributing pipe that supplies hot water to the 25
fixtures in the same storey ofl:ne hot water cylinder
The size of main distributing pipe that supplies hot water to the 19
fixtures not in the same storey ofhot water cylinder
Branch pipe supplying hot water to the bath tub or shower 19
Branch pipe supplying hot water to the sink 19
BranchJJioe suoolvinl! hot water to the wash basin 19
8-130
Chapter 6
Water Supply
6.11.6.2 The design consideration of hot water piping shall be such that hot water will appear quickly at the
outlet of different fixtures. To improve the situation, a secondary circulation system witb flow and return
pipe from and to the hot water cylinder (Fig 8.6.1) may be adopted. The length of hot water distribution pipe
measured along the pipe from the top of draw off tap to the hot water cylinder or the secondary circulation
pif!e shall not exceea the length prescribed in Table 8.6.7. The draw-off tap shall not be connected to the
pnmary flow or return pipe.
�
Wash Basin
<E-- Flow
t
I
Flow
Fl01. --71
t� 1
5
Bath Tub
( )
Return --7 <E-- Return
Cirulation Pump C �
� Hot Water Flow
- ..... I
Cold Water Inflow
This outlet shall be near the top of the

hot water storage tank
This connection shall be at a point not below

114th .of the tank height from the top
r- Water Heater
·
Fig. 8.6.1 Hot Water Secondary Circulation System
Table8.6.7
Maximum Permissible Length of Hot Water Draw Off Pipe
Largest Internal Diameter (D) of Pipe 1 Length of Pipe (m)
D<19mm 12
20 mm <D <25mm 7.5
25mm<D 3
6.11.7 Vent Pipe

The pressure type hot water heater shall be provided with a vent pipe of not less than 19 mm diameter. The
vent pipe shalfrise vertically above the water line of cold water tank by at least 150 mm plus 1 mm for every
30 mm beight of waterline above the bottom of the water heater.
The vent pipe shall be connected to the top of the hot water cylinder. The vent pipe may be used to supf>ly
hot water to the point in between the cold water tank and the hot water cylinder. The vent pipe shall not be
provided with any valve or check valves.
The termination of vent pipe shall be such as not to cause any accidental discharge to hurt or scald any
passerby or person in the vicinity.

PartS
Building Services
6.11.8 Capacity of Cold Water Storage Tank

The storage capacity of cold water cistern shall be at least equal to the size of hot water storage cylinder if
the cold water cistern supplies water only to the hot water neater cylinder. This capacity shall be at least
twice the capacity of hot water heater cylinder if the cold water storage tank also supplies water to the cold
water draw off taps.
6.11.9 Safety Devices

The temperature relief valve or pressure relief valve or a combination of temperature and pressure relief
valves sfiall be installed for the equipment for heating or storage of hot water. The temperature relief valve
J'
shall be set at a maximum temperature of 99°C. The maximum ressure rating of water heater shall not be
more than 1000 kPa. The temperature relief valve shall be place directly above the cylinder it serves but in
no case more than 75 mm away from the cylinder. The location of pressure relief valve shall be close to the
equipment it serves. There shall be no valve connection in between a relief valve and the hot water cylinder
it serves.
6.11.10 Wastes from Relief Valve

The outlet of pressure, temperature or such other valve shall not be directly connected to the drainage
system.
6.11.11 Drain Cock

Adequate size of drain cock shall be provided with all storage tanks for their proper cleaning.
6.12 MATERIALS AND FITTINGS
The materials and fittings for water supply and distribution pipe and for storage tank shall be in accordance
with Sec 6.12.1 to 6.12.3. The materials shall comply with tne standards listecf in Part 5 and those specified
in this section.
6.12.1 Water Supply Service and Distribution Pipes

Water supply service and distribution pipes shall conform to the standards listed in Tables 8.6.8 and 8.6.9.
The water supply pipes and tubing used outside the building or underground shall have a minimum
working pressure of 1.1 MPa at 23°C. In case of water supply exceeding 1.1 MPa pressure, the piping
material snail have at least a rated working pressure equal to the highest available pressure. The hot water
distribution piping shall have a minimum pressure of 550 kPa at 80°C. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic
pipes shall not be used exposed and unprotected as riser or water distribution pipe. Polythene or
unplasticized PVC shall not oe installed near the heaters or hot water piping. Lead pipes may be used only
for flushing and overflow purposes in a water supply system.
6.12.2 Pipe Fittings

The pipe fittings shall be in accordance with the standards listed in Table 8.6.10 and those specified in
Part 5.
6.12.3 Concrete, Prestressed or Ferrocement Structures

The properties of the materials used for storage tank or such other structures shall conform to the material
standards specified in Part 5 of the Code.
Table 8.6.8
Water Supply Service Pipe
Materials J Standards
Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS) plastic ASTM D1527, ASTM D2282

pipe
Asbestos cement pipe ASTM C296, BDS 428, BDS 429
Brass pipe ASTMB43
Cast iron water pipe ASTM D377
Copper or Copper-alloy pipe ASTM 842, ASTM 8302
Copper or Copper-alloy tubing ASTM 875, ASTM 888, ASTM 8251, ASTM 8447
Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) pipe ASTMD2846, ASTM F441, ASTM F442
Galvanized steel pipe . ASTMA53
Polybutyline (PB) plastic pipe and tubing ASTM D2662, ASTM D2666, ASTM D3309
Polyethyline (PE) plastic pipe and tubing ASTMD2239, ASTM D2737
PVC plastic pipe ASTM D1785, ASTM D2241, ASTM D2672
6.13 HANGERS AND SUPPORT
The piping system shall be installed with proper hangers and support to minimize undue strains and
stresses. All fixtures and fittings shall be provided with hangers and support to secure them properly.
8-132
Chapter 6
Water Supply
6.13.1 Hangers, anchors and strapping materials shall be strong and ductile and shall not promote galvanic action.
Table8.6.9
Water Distribution Pipe
Material I Standard
Brass pipe ASTMB43

Copper or Copper-alloy pipe ASTMB42, ASTM B302
Copper or Copl?er-alloy tubing ASTMB75, ASTM B88, ASTM B251, ASTM B477
CPVC plastic p1 e and tubing
f ASTM 02846, ASTM F441, ASTM F442
Galvanized stee pipe ASTMA53
PB plastic pipe and tubing ASTM 03309
Table8.6.10
Pipe Fittings
Material I Standard
Asbestos cement ISO 160, ISO 881, ISO 392
Cast iron ASMEB164, ASME B16.12
Copper or copper alloy ASMEB16.15, ASME B16.18, ASMEB1622

ASMEB16.23, ASME B16.26, ASMEB16.29
ASMEB16.32
Grey iron and ductile iron AWWA CllO, ISO 2531
Malleable iron ASMEB16.3
Plastic ASTM 02464, ASTM D2466, ASTM 02467

ASTM 02609, ASTM F409, ASTM F437,
ASTM F438, ASTM F439
Steel ASME B16.9, ASMEB16.11, ASMEB16.28
6.13.2 Vertical and horizontal piping shall be supported in accordance with Table 8.6.11.
6.14 WORK ON SITE
6.14.1 Excavation of Trenches

The width of excavation trench shall be at least 0.4 m more than the outside diameter of the pipe. The depth
of ground cover shall be at least 0.9 m under roadway or 0.75 m under garden from the top surface of the
pipe to the ground surface. The bottom of the trench shall be carefully prepared so that the pipe will be
bedded well for its entire length on firm surface.
6.14.2 Laying of Pipe

In sloping ground, the pipe laying shall proceed in upward direction. The pipe shall be provided with
anchor blocks to withstand hydraufic pressure.
Table8.6.11
Hanger Spacing
Max. Horizontal Max. Vertical

I I
Piping Material
Spacing (m) Spacing (m)
Galvanized steel pipe 3.5 4.5

Copper pipe or copper-alloy tubing > 38 mm diameter 3.5 3.0
Copper pipe or copper-alloy tubing < 38 mm diameter 2.0 3.0
PVC pipe and tubmg 1.0 1.0
Aluminium tubing 3.0 4.5
Brass pipe 3.0 3.0

Part 8
Building Services
6.14.3 Laying of Pipe Through Ducts, Chases, Notches or Holes

Provisions for laying pipes in ducts or chase shall be made during the time of construction. When these will
be cut into existing walls, they shall be large enough with smooth finishing for fixing the pipe and to
accommodate thermal expansion. Piping subject to external pressure shall not be laid in notches or holes.
6.14.4 Lagged Piping

Lagged piping shall be entirely covered with waterproof and fire insulating materials before their
attachment to the walls outside the building and shall be anchored with the wall keeping a gap in between
the wall and the piping.
6.14.5 Jointing of Pipes

All joints and connections shall be gas tight and water tight for the pressure required by the test in
accordance with Sec 6.15.2. The joints between different pipings and fittings for water supply shall conform
to the standards cited against them in Table 8.6.12. The requirements for the joints not specified in the table
shall be subject to the approval of the Authority.
6.14.6 Special Care for Rat Proofing

The location and installation of water meter box shall be such as not to permit the entrance of rats into the
building. The openings through walls, floors or ceilings for the installation of pipings shall be closed by
using proper collars to prevent the entrance of rats.
Table 8.6.12
Joints Between Different Pipings and Fittings
Material I Standard
ABS plastic pipe and fittings ASTM D2235, ASTM D2661,

ASTM03139, ASTM F628 ASME
81.20.1
Asbestos, cement pipe and fittings ASTM D1869
Brass pipe and fittings ASME 81.20.1
Cast iron pipe and fittings ASTM C564
Copper and copper alloy pipe and fittings ASTM 832, ASME 81.20.1
PVC plastic pipe and fittings ASTM02846, ASTM D3139,

ASTM F493, ASME 81.20.1
Galvanized steel pipe and fittings ASME 81.20.1
PB plastic pipe, tubing and fittings ASTM02657, ASTM03140,

ASTM03309
PE plastic pipe, tubing and fittings ASTM02657
PVC plastic pipe and fittings ASTM02564, ASTM D2855,

ASTM03139, ASTM03212,
ASTM F402, ASTM F656, ASME
81.20.1
6.15 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
6.15.1 Inspection
Pipings and joints shall not be enclosed, concealed or covered until they have been inspected and approved
by the Authority. All piping and fixtures shall be inspected for satisfactory supports and protection from
damage and corrosion.
6.15.2 Testing
After installation of the entire water supply system or part thereof, it shall be tested and approved by the
Authority before its use.
a) Testing of Water Mains: The section of the main to be tested shall be charged with water carefully by
providing a 25 mm inlet with a stop cock to expel all air from the main. The main shall be allowed to
stand full of water for a few days. After that the mains shall be tested to a pressure of 500 kPa or
double the maximum working pressure, whichever is greater for at least 5 minutes. The system shall be
able to maintain the above test pressure.
8-134
Chapter 6
Water Supply
b) Testing of Distribution Pipes and Fixtures : The distribution system to be tested shall be slowly and
carefully charged with water to expel all air from the system and to avoid all shocks and water hammer.
The piping and fittings shall be absolutely water tight when all draw off taps are closed. The system
shall oe aole to maintain the pressures and flow required under working conditions.
c) Testing of Hot Water System : The entire hot water system shall be tested for the maximum rated
temperature and pressure of hot water storage system. The system shall be able to maintain the
required test pressure. All safety devices shall oe tested for their proper operation.
6.15.3 Completion Certificate

The licensed plumber shall issue completion certificate in a rescribed form (Appendix Q) to the Authority
f
on completion of the water supply system or part thereo for inspection ana testing. After testing, the
Authonty will allow the water connection from the water main (if any) and give the final approval
(Appendix Q) to use the system.
6.16 CLEANING AND DISINFECTING THE SYSTEM
6.16.1 General
The new and repaired potable water supply system including storage tank shall be disinfected before their
use. The existing water supply system shall be cleaned and disinfected depending upon the quality of water.
The storage tank shall be c1eaned and disinfected at least once a year.
6.16.2 Disinfection Procedure

The following procedure may be adopted to disinfect the plumbing system:
a) The water supply system or storage tank shall be flushed with potable water until clean water appears
at the outlets.
b) The system or part thereof which requires disinfection shall be filled up with chlorinated water
contaming 50 mg/1 of chlorine for 24 hours or for 3 hours with a chlorinated water of chlorine
concentration of 200 mg/1.
c) After the period of disinfection, the system shall be flushed with potable water until the chlorine is
completely removed from the water in the system..
d) The above procedure shall be repeated until the bacteriological examination shows presence of no
water contamination within the system.
6.17 GUIDE TO MAINTENANCE
The owner or his/her designated agent shall maintain the water supply system in a safe operating condition
as specified by the Code.
6.17.1 The storage tank shall be inspected regularly and shall be cleaned and disinfected periodically. Metal tanks
showing the sign of corrosion shall be coated as specified in Sec 6.7.2.2.
6.17.2 The overflow pipes of storage tank shall be inspected regularly to keep the flow free from obstruction.
6.17.3 A periodical examination of water quality may be made.
6.18 • HEALTH CARE WATER SUPPLY
6.18.1 General Requirement

All hospitals shall have at least two service pipes from the individual water supply source or from the water
main for supplying water without any interruption. For roof storage system, the hospital shall have at least
two storage tanks such that each of them is capable of serving the water distribution system in absence of
the other. All special fixtures shall be installed without interference to the transportation and to the safety of
patient and staff.
6.18.2 Hot Water Supply

All hospitals shall be equipped to supply hot water as required by different fixtures and equipment.
6.18.3 Water Supply Protection

The water supply connection to all special equipment or fixtures shall be protected against backflow,
flooding, fouling and contamination of water supply system in accordance with Sec 6.9.
6.19 INDIVIDUAL WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
6.19.1 General
In the absence of a public water supply, the individual potable water source shall be used to supply water in
a distribution system. The followmg water sources may be used for individual water supply purposes :
drilled well, dug well, driven well, spring, infiltration gallery.

Part 8
Building Services
6.19.2 Water Requirements

The capacity of source shall be sufficient to supply water as specified in Sec 6.5.
6.19.3 QualityofWater
Water from developed well or cistern shall meet the potable water quality standard requirements specified
by the Department of Environment, Bangladesh.
6.19.4 Chlorination
The well or cistern shall be chlorinated after their construction or repair.
6.19.5 Location of Water Source

The minimum distance of water source and pump suction line from potential sources of contamination shall
be in accordance with Table 8.6.13.
6.19.6 Well Construction

6.19.6.1 Location of Water Table : The individual water supply shall not be developed from a water
bearing stratum with water table at a depth less than 3 m below the ground surface.
6.19.6.2 Outside Casing : The outside watertight casing shall have to be installed for each well up to a
depth of at least 3 m below the ground surface and shall project at least 150 mm above the ground surface.
The lower end of the casing shall be sealed in an impermeable stratum or extend into the water bearing
stratum. The size of the casing shall be large enough to permit the installation of an independent drop pipe.
The casing may be of concrete, tile, or galvanized or corrugated metal pipe. The annular space between the
casing and the earth shall be filled with grout to a minimum depth of 3 m. For flood prone regions, top of
the casing or pipe sleeve shall be at least 300 mm above the flood level.
Table 8.6.13
Distance from Potential Sources of Contamination
Potential Source of Contamination I Distance (m)
Pump floor drain of cast iron, draining to ground surface 1

Sewer 3
Farm silo 8
Septic tank 8
Subsurface pit/Seepage pit 15
Subsurface aisposal field 15
Barnyard 30
Pasture 30
6.19.6.3 Well Cover: All potable wells shall be equipped with a watertight cover overlapping the top of
the casing or pipe sleeve. For dug or bored well, the overlap and downward extension of the cover shall be
at least 50 mm outside the well casing or well. The annular space between the casing or pipe sleeve and the
drop pipe shall have a watertight seafing.
6.19.6.4 Drainage from Well Platform or Pump House: The construction of well platform or pump house
shall be such that this will. drain away from the well by gravity.
6.19.7 Pumping Equipment .

The design, installation and construction of pumps shall be such that they will not permit the entrance of
any contaminating material into the well or water supply system. The pump shall be accessible for
inspection, maintenance and repair.
Related Appendices
AppendixN Application for Permit to Construct Water Supply and Distribution System
AppendixP Sizing of Cold Water Supply and Distribution Piping
AppendixQ Completion Certificate (Water Supply Works)
8-136
CHAPTER�
7.1 PURPOSE
The purpose of this chapter is to set forth provisions for planning, design and installation of waste disposal
systems in buildings.
7.2 SCOPE
7.2.1 This chapter specifies the general requirements for environmental sanitation for different categories of
buildings according to their occupancy classification. .
7.2.2 This chapter also covers the design, installation and maintenance of drainage systems together with all
ancillary works such as manholes and inspection chambers used within the building and from the building
to pubhc sewers or to private waste disposal system (i.e. into septic tanks and seepage pits or subsurface
drainage system).
7.2.3 The disposal of wastes from industries, nuclear plants, slaughter houses, etc. are not covered by this Code.
These wastes shall be I'roperly treated as specified by environmental quality standards of Bangladesh before
their disposal into public sewers or into natural bodies of water.
1.3 TERMINOLOGY
This section p rovides an alphabetical list of all terms used and ap p licable to this chapter of the Code. In case
of any conflict or contradiction between a definition given in this section and that in any other chapter or
I'art of the Code, the meaning specified in this chapter shall govern for interpretation of the provisions of
this chapter.
BEDDING FACTOR: The ratio of the product of design load and factor of safety to the minimum crushing
strength.
BRANCH: Any part of the piping system other than a main, riser, or stack.
Part 8 8-137
Building Services
PartS
Building Services
BRANCH INTERVAL : The length of soil or waste stack corresponding in general to a storey hei�ht, but in
no case less than 2.5 m within which the horizontal branches from one floor or storey of building are
connected to the stack.
BRANCH VENT :The vent connecting one or more individual vents with a vent stack or stack vent.
BUILDING DRAIN : The building (house) drain is that part of the lowest piping or open channel of a
drainage system which receives the discharges from soil, waste, and other dramage systems inside the walls
of the ouilding and conveys the same to the building (house) sewer, beginning at 0.9 m outside the building
wall.
BUILDING SEWER: The building (house) sewer is that part of the horizontal piping of a drainage system
which extends from the end of the building drain and which receives the discharge of the building drain
and conveys it to a public sewer, private sewer, individual sewage disposal system, or other point of
disposal. Also known as SEWER.
BUILDING STORM DRAIN : A building (house) storm drain is a building drain used for conveying rain
water, surface water, ground water, subsurface water, condensate, cooling water, or other similar discharge
to a building storm sewer or a combined sewer, extending to a part not less than 0.9 m outside the building
wall. Also known as STORM DRAIN.
DRAIN: A drain is any pipe or open channel which carries waste water or waterborne wastes in a building
drainage system.
DRAINAGE SYSTEM: A drainage system (drainage piping) includes all the piping within public or private
premises, which conveys sewage, rain water, or otl:\er liquid wastes to a legal point of disposal, but does not
mclude the mains of a public sewer system or a private or public sewage treatment or disposal plant.
DRINKING FOUNTAIN:A fountain or a tap raised from the floor with potable water supply connection.
EXISTING WORK : The existing work is a plumbing system or any part thereof which was installed prior
to the date of enforcement of this Code.
FIXTURE UNIT: A fixture unit is a quantity in terms of which the load producing effects on the plumbing
system of different kinds of plumbing fixtures are expressed on some arbitrarily chosen scale. .
FLUSH VALVES: A flush valve is a device located at the bottom of the tank for the purpose of flushing
water closets and similar fixtures.
FRENCH DRAIN: A shallow trench filled with coarse rubble, clinker or similar material with or without
field drain pipes.
GRADE : The grade is the slope or fall of a line of pipe in reference to a horizontal plane. In drainage it is
usually expressed as the fall in mm per m length of pipe.
HORIZONTAL BRANCH: A horizontal branch is a drain pipe extending laterally from a soil or waste
stack or building drain, with or without vertical sections or branches, which receives the discharge from one
or more fixture drains and conducts it to the soil or waste stack or to the building (house) drain.
HORIZONTAL PIPE: A horizontal pipe is any pipe or fitting which is installed in a horizontal position or
which makes an angle of less than 45 degrees with the horizontal.
INDIVIDUAL VENT: An individual vent is a pipe installed to vent a fixture trap and which connects with
the vent system above the fixture served or terminates in the open air.
INTERCEPTOR : An interceptor is a device designed and installed so as to separate and retain deleterious,
hazardous, or undesirable matter from normal wastes and permit normal or liquid wastes to discharge into
the disposal terminal by gravity.
INVERT : The lowest point of the internal surface of a pipe or channel at any cross-section.
K ITCHEN SINK: Sink or washing facilities raised above or at the level of the floor fitted with a tap.
LEADER : A vertical drainage pipe that carries rainwater from roof or gutter drain to building storm drain
or building drain or private disposal system. .
LIQUID WASTE : The liquid waste is the discharge from any fixture, appliance, or appurtenance in
connection with a plumbing system which does not receive faecal matter.
LOAD FACTOR: The load factor is the percentage of the total connected fixture unit flow rate which is
likely to occur at any point in the drainage system. It varies with the type of occupancy, the total flow unit
above the point being considered, and with the probability factor of simultaneous use.
8-138
Chapter7
LOCAL VENT STACK: A vertical piping to which connections are made from the discharge side of traps
and through which vapour or foul air is removed from the fixture or device used on bedpan washer.
MAIN : The main of any system of continuous piping is the principal artery of the system, to which
branches may be connected.
MAIN SEWER :See PUBLIC SEWER.
MAIN VENT : The main vent is the principal artery of the venting system, to which vent branches may be
connected.
MANHOLE : An opening by which a man may enter or leave a drain, a sewer or other closed structure for
inspection, cleaning and other maintenance operations, fitted with a suitable cover.
MANHOLE CHAMBER : A chamber constructed on a drain or sewer so as to provide access thereto for
inspection, testing or the clearance of obstruction.
NONSERVICE LATRINE: A latrine other than service latrine.
OFFSET: An offset in a line of piping is a combination of elbows or bends which brings one section of the
pipe out of line but into a line parallel with the other section.
PIPE SYSTEM: The system to be adopted will depend on the type and planning of the building in which it
is to be installed and will be one of the following: ·
a) Single Stack System (see Fig 8.7.1):The one pipe system without trap ventilation pipe work.
b) One Pipe System (see Fig 8.7.2):The plumbing system in which the waste from sinks, bath rooms and
wash oasins, and soil pipe branches are all collected into one main pipe connected directly to the
drainage system. Gully traps and waste pipes are completely dispensecf with but all the traps of water
closets, basins, etc. are completely ventilated to preserve the water seal.
c) Two Pipe System (see Fig 8.7.3):A discharge pipe system comprising two independent discharge pipes,
one conveying soil directly to the drain, tile other conveymg waste water to the drain througn a
trapped gUlly. The system may also require ventilating pipes.
PLUMBING : The plumbing includes the practice, materials, and fixtures used in the installation,
maintenance, extension, and alteration of all p1ping, fixtures, appliances, and appurtenances in connection
with any of the following: sanitary drainage or storm drainage facilities, the venting system and the public
or private water supply systems, within or adjacent to any building, structure, or conveyance; also the
pra�tice and materiafs used in the installation, maintenance, extension, �r alterati?n of �h� storm ":'ater,
r. .
liqwd waste, or sewerage, and water SUJ?pl systems of any prerruses to theu connection w1thin any pomt of
public disposal or other acceptable terrruna . .
PLUMBING FIXTURES: The plumbing fixtures are installed recel'tacles, devices, or appliances which are
supplied with water or which receive or discharge liquids or liquid borne wastes, with or without discharge
into the drainage system with which they may be directly or indirectly connected.
PLUMBING SYSTEM : The plumbing system includes the water supply and distribution pipes, plumbing
fixtures and traps, soil, waste and vent pipes, building drains and building sewers, including their
respective connections, devices, and appurtenances within the property lines of the premises, ancf water
treating or water using equipment.
PUBLIC SEWER : A public sewer is a common sewer directly controlled by public authority. Also known as
MAIN SEWER.
RELIEF VENT: A relief vent is a vent the primary function of which is to provide circulation of air between
drainage and vent systems (Fig 8.7.6).
RISER : A water supply pipe that extends vertically one full storey or more to convey water to branches or
fixtures.
SANITARY SEWER : A sanitary sewer is a pipe which carries sewage and excludes storm, surface, and
ground water. Also known as SEWER. .
SEEPAGE PIT:See SOAK PIT.
SEPTIC TANK: A septic tank is a watertight receptacle which receives the discharge of a drainage system
or part thereof and is designed and constructed so as to separate solids from the liquid, digest organic
matter through a l'eriod of detention, and allow the liquids to discharge into the soil outside the tank
through a system of open joint or perforated piping or disposal pit (Fig 8.7.15).

Part 8
Building Services
SERVICE LATRINE : A latrine from which the excreta are removed by manual agency and not by water
carriage.
SEWAGE : The sewage is any liquid waste containing animal or vegetable matter in suspension or solution
and may include liqmds containing chemicals in solution.
SEWER: See BUILDING SEWER or PUBLIC SEWER or SANITARY SEWER or STORM SEWER.
SLUDGE: A settled portion of the sewage or waste water effluent from a sedimentation tank in semi-solid
condition.
SOAK WELL: See SOAK PIT.
SOAK PIT: A pit, dug into permeable soil lined to form a covered perforated chamber or filled with sand
at the bottom and gravel or broken bricks at the top into which effluent from a septic tank or storm water is
led and from whidl. these may soak away into the ground. Also known as SEEPAGE PIT or SOAK WELL.
SOIL PIPE : A soil pipe is any pipe which conveys the discharge of water closets, urinals, or fixtures having
similar functions, with or without the discharge from other fixtures, to the building drain or building sewer.
SOIL VENT: See STACK VENT.
STACK: A stack is the vertical main of a system of soil, waste, or vent piping.
STACK VENT: A stack vent (sometimes called a waste vent or soil vent) is the extension of soil or waste
stack above the highest horizontal drain connected to the stack. Also known as SOIL VENT.
STACK VENTING : Stack venting is a method of venting a fixture or fixtures through the soil or waste
stack.
STERILIZER VENT : A separate pipe or stack, indirectly connected to the building drainage system at the
lower terminal, which receives the vapour from nonpressure sterilizers or the exhaust from pressure
sterilizers and conduct the vapour directly to the outer air.
STORM DRAIN: See BUILDING STORM DRAIN.
STORM SEWER : A storm sewer is a sewer used for conveying rain water, surface water, condensate,
cooling water, or similar liquid wastes, exclusive of sewage and inaustrial waste. Also known as SEWER.
SUBSOIL DRAIN : A subsoil drain is a drain which receives only subsurface or seepage water and conveys
it to a place of disposal.
SULLAGE : The discharge from wash basins, sinks and similar appliances, which does not contain human
or animal excreta.
SUMP : A sump is a tank or pit which receives sewage or liquid waste, located below the normal grade of
the gravity system, and which must be emptied by mechanical means.
SUPPORTS: The supports, hangers, and anchors are devices for supporting and securing pipe and fixtures
to walls, ceilings, floors, or structural members.
·
TRAP : A trap is a fitting or device so designed and constructed as to provide, when properly vented, a
liquid seal which will prevent the back passage of air without materially affecting the flow of sewage or
waste water through it.
TRAP SEAL : The trap seal is the maximum vertical depth of liquid that a trap will retain, measured
between the crown weir and the top of the dip of the trap.
VENT PIPE: See VENT SYSTEM.
VENT STACK : A vent stack is a vertical vent pipe installed primarily for the purpose of providing
circulation of air to and from any part of the drainage system.
VENT SYSTEM : A vent system is a pipe or pipes installed to provide a flow of air to or from a drainage
system or to provide a circulation of air within such system to protect trap seals from siphonage and back
pressure. Also known as VENT PIPE.
VERTICAL PIPE : A vertical pipe is any pipe or fitting which is installed in a vertical position or which
makes an angle of not more than 45 degrees with the vertical.
WASTE PIPE: A waste pipe is a pipe which conveys only liquid waste free of faecal matter.
8-140
Chapter 7
7.4 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION PLANS
7.4.1 Requirement of Permit

Drainage and sanitation system shall not be installed until a permit for such work has been issued by the
Authonty for existing (only for addition or for alteration) or new building or for any other premises.
7.4.2 Application for Permit

An application for a permit for drainage and sanitation work shall be made on a prescribed form (see
Appendix R) by the licensed plumber and the owner, or by his appointed person or agent to install all or a
self-contained or workable part of such work. The application shalf accompany building drainage plans and
adequate description of the proposed drainage and sanitation installation in a drawing (drawn to a scale not
less than 1:100) with the following details:
a) plan(s) of the building with typical arrangement of plumbing fixtures;
b) sanitary waste disposal system;
c) rainwater drainage system;
d) venting system in a building having more than 5 branch intervals;
e) relief vent system in a building having more than 10 branch intervals;
f) materials, sizes and gradients of all proposed piping;
g) the position of manhole, traps, waste pipe, rainwater pipe, vent pipe, water closet, urinal, lavatory, sink
or other appliances in the premises and their connection wHh sewerage/ drainage system or with
private waste disposal system; the following colours may be used to indicate sewers, waste water pipes,
rainwater pipes and existing works:
proposed sanitary sewers and sanitary waste disposal pipes red
proposed storm sewers, waste water and rainwater pipes blue
existing network black
h) the position of refuse chute, inlet hopper and collection chamber for buildings more than five storeys
hign.
7.4.3 In addition to drainage plan a separate site plan of the building shall be submitted with the following
particulars :
a) adjoining plots and streets with their identification;

b) the position and invert level of the public sewers (if any) and the direction of flow in it;
c) the level of the proposed drains connecting to the sewers (if any);
d) the position and layout of private waste disposal system (in absence of public sewers); and
e) the alignment, size and gradients of all drains.
7.4.4 For high rise and public buildings, design calculations and specifications for various items of the work
involved shall be submitted along with the drawings.
7.4.5 Permits and Approvals

The building official shall examine or cause to be examined all applications for permits and, amendments
thereto within 45 days. If the application does not conform to the requirements of all pertinent laws, such
application shall be rejected in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If the proposed work satisfies all the
Code requirements, the Authority shall issue a nontransferable permit.
7.5 LICENSING OF PLUMBER
7.5.1 Licence Requirement

No individual, partnership, corporation or firm shall engage in the business of installation, repair or
alteration of drainage and sanitation work without obtaining a licence from the Authority.
7.5.2 Examination and Certification

The Authority shall establish a plumbers examination board. The board will determine the requirements for
the qualification and procedures for examination of applicants for licence. The Authority will issue licence to
such applicants who meet the qualifications therefor and successfully pass the examination conducted by
the board.

PartS
Building Services
7.5.3 Annulment of Licence

The licence of a licensed plumber may be nullified by the Authority, if it is proved that a plumbing work has
been completed and certified by the licensed plumber violating the provisions of this Code deliberately
setting asiae the approvals given in the permit or without receiving the permit from the Authority.
7.6 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION REQUIREMENT
7.6.1 General
7.6.1.1 Each family dwelling unit on premises abutting a public sewer or with a private waste disposal
system shall have at least one water closet and one kitchen smk or washing facilities. It is recommended to
have at least one bathroom with a bath tub or shower to meet the basic requirements of sanitation and
personal hygiene and in that case bath and water closet shall be separately accommodated.
7.6.1.2 All other structures for human occupancy or use on premises abutting a sewer or with a private
waste disposal system shall have adequate sanitary facilities out in no case less than one water closet and
one other fixture for cleaning purposes.
7.6.1.3 There shall be one water tap and arrangement for drainage in the vicinity of each water closet in all
buildings.
7.6.1.4 There shall be at least one water tap and arrangement for drainage in the vicinity of each urinal or
group of urinals in all buildings.
7.6.1.5 There shall be separate facilities for each sex for public toilets and for public bathing places based
on the percentage of each anticipated sex.
7.6.1.6 Where drinking water fountain is provided, it shall not be installed in toilet room.
7.6.1.7 Rooms containing water closets or urinals shall be separated by partition wall from places where
food will be prepared and served.
7.6.2 Minimum Number of Fixtures

Table 8.7.1 and Sec 7.6.2.1 and 7.6.2.2 provide the minimum number of fixtures required for different
categories of buildings according to tl:ieir occupancy classifications. The fixture requirement for the
occupancy not provided in these sections shall be subject to the approval of the Authority.
7.6.2.1 Physically Handicapped Plumbing Facilities: All buildings other than residential, educational,
storage and hazardous according to building occupancy classification, having public toilet facilities with
required number of fixtures shall have at least one water closet for each sex (or one unisex water closet
facility) and one drinking fountain accessible to and usable by physically handicapped persons. The water
closet compartment for pl:iysically handicapped persons shall be in accordance witl:i Sec 7.9.4.
7.6.2.2 Drainage and Sanitation Requirements for Traffic Terminal Stations

a) The minimum sanitary conveniences provided at any traffic terminal station like railway station, bus
station etc. shall consist of nonservice type latrines one for each sex, and one nonservice type urinal for
males for a daily passenger volume up to 300 persons. For large stations and airports, sanitary
arrangements shall be in accordance with Table 8.7.1.
b) There shall be adequate arrangements for satisfactory drainage of all sewage, sullage and waste water.
The drainage shall be so designed as to cause no stagnation at the maximum discnarge rate for which
the different units are designea.
c) Adequate scavenging arrangements shall be provided to keep the stations or terminals dear of all
refuse. Refuse containers shall be placed at convenient points.
7.6.3 Accessibility
The fixtures specified in Sec 7.6.2 for public building shall be located not more than one floor above nor
more than one floor below the floor occupied by the people for whose use the fixtures are intended, unless
elevator service is available, except that in buildings wl:iich are accessible to the physically handicapped,
there shall be minimum facilities as specified by the Code. It is desirable that fhe path of travel to the
facilities shall not exceed a travel distance of 150 m.
7.7 MATERIALS AND APPLIANCES
Different sanitary appliances, materials and fittings listed in Tables 8.7.2 to 8.7.5 and 8.6.9 (Chapter 6) shall
conform to the standard or one of the standards cited against them. For other appliances, materials and
fittings not provided in Tables 8.7.2 to 8.7.5 and 8.6.9 (Chapter 6) shall be subject to the approval of the
Authority. Applicable standards for different materials and appliances have also been listed in Part 5.
8-142
=
Ill
=
(JQ
-
Ill
I:).
ID
fll
Table8.7.1
= Plumbing Fixtures Requirement
z
�
... 'fnl_e of Building Occupancy Water Closets* Urinals** Wash Basins*** Bathtubs or Shower Drinking Fountains Other Fixtures
0
A Residential Buildings
;-
AI Detached Single Family
=
c Dwelling
...
A2 Flats or Apartments I per dwelling or apartment -- I per dwelling or I per dwelling or -- I kitchen sink per dwellin�
6:
A4 Minimum Standard apartment apartment or apartment
�· Housing
(")
0
I:). A3 Mess, Boarding Houses
ID
and Hostels
For Residence and Males: 1 for 8 persons Males: 1 for 25 persons Males: 1 for 8 persons Males: 1 for 8 persons 1 for 75 persons I kitchen sink in each
Residential Staff Females: 1 for 6 persons upto 150 persons. Females: 1 for 6 persons Females: 1 for 6 persons kitchen
Add 1 fixture for each
additional 50 persons.
For Nonresidential Staff Males: Males: Males:
1 for 1-15 persons Nil upto 6 persons 1 for 1-15 persons
2 for 16-35 persons 1 for 7-20 persons 2 for 16-35 persons
Females: 4 for 71-100 persons Females:
1 for 1-12 persons 1 for 1-12 persons -- 1 for 100 persons --
2 for 13-25 persons 2 for 13-25 persons
Rooms whrein Outsiders Males: Males: Males:
are Received 1 for 100 persons upto 400 1 for 50 persons 1 per water closet and 1
persons and add I fixture for per urinal or group of
additional 250 persons uripals -- -- -- 0
Females: Females:
AI
3'
2 fo� 100 persons upto 200 1 per water closet II>
persons and add 1 fixture �

II>
for additional 100 persons. =
Q.
(ll(")
D>::r'
= Ill
00 ::;.·"'a
I 11>
� :r.f't)
"'" 0 "i
tiJ = "'
00 t=�
I a: �
1-l .. ....
""' .......
""' 2:oo
::s
Jq
Cll
111
�
;::;·
Table 8.7.1 (Contd.) 111
en
Plumbing Fixtures Requirement
-
Type of Building Occupancy Water Closets* Urinals** Wash Basins*** Bathtubs or Shower Drinking Fountains Other Fixtures
Houses
For Residential Public 1 for8 persons omitting the 1 for10 persons 1 for10 persons omitting 1 for 100 persons 1 kitchen sink in each
and Staff occupant of the room with omitting the wash basins the occupants of the room kitchen
attached water closet; --
installed in the room or with bath in suite.
minimum of2 if both sex suite.
are lodged.
For Public Rooms Males: Males: Males:

1 for100 persons upto400 1 for50 persons 1 per water closet and
persons and add1 for 1 per urinal or group of
additional250 persons or urinals --
1 for100 persons --
part thereof. Females:

Females: 1 per water closet
2 for100 persons upto200
- ...... persons and add1 for

additional100 persons or
lP� thereof. _I
I
For Nonresidential Staff Males: Males: Males:

1 for1-15 persons Nil upto6 persons I for1-15 persons
2 for16-35 persons 1 for7-20 persons 2 for16-35 persons
3 for36-65 persons 2 for21-45 persons 3 for36-65 persons
4 for66-100 persons 3 for46-70 persons 4 for66-100 persons --
1 for100 persons --
Females: 4 for71-1 00 persons Females:

1 for1-12 persons I for1-12 persons
2 for 13-25 persons 2 for13-25 persons
3 for26-40 persons 3 for26-40 persons
- --
l:l:l
�
Ill
s:l-
ll
::r
z
a Plumbing Fixtures Requirement
...
0
=
Ill
- Type of Buildin2 Occupancy Water Closets • Urinals •• Wash Basins *** Bathtubs or Shower Drinking Fountains Other Fixtures
l:l:l B Educational Buildin2
c
...
Bl Education Facilities Males: Males: Males: I for 50 persons Service sink: 1 per floor.
6: I
1 for 40 persons 1 for20 persons 1 for 60 persons but
�· Females: minimum2 -
(') 1 for25 persons Females:
0
s:l 1 for 40 persons but
I'D
minimum2
- -
B2 Preschool Facilities 1 for 15 children 1 for 15 children I for 50 children Service sink: I per floor.
c Institutional Buildings
Cl Institution for Care of Boys: I for 8 boys Urinals may be provided Boys: I for 8 boys 1 for 8 persons I for 50 persons Service sink: I per floor
Children Girls: 1 for 6 girls in boys toilet rooms in Girls: I for 6 girls (boys or girls) (boys or girls)
lieu of water closets but
for not more than 1/2 of
the required number of
water closets
C2 Custodial Institutions for I unisex facility or I for 1 for200 persons 1 for 10 persons but not 1 for 100 persons Service sink: 1 per floor
Physically Capable each sex for 1-100 persons -- less than 1 for use by
bo!h sexes.
C3 Custodial Institution for 2 unisex facilities or 1
the Incapable unisex facility and 1 for each
sex for 100-200 persons. Over
200 persons one additional
unisex facility or 1 for each -- 0
sex for each additional
iii
s·
100 persons. "'
�
"'
C4 Penal and Mental 1 per cell -- 1 per cell 1 for 15 persons 1 for 100 persons Service sink :s
Q.
Institutions ------ ----------- Vlr1
"'::r'
(Continued to next page) :s Ill
co :::: "'
"' -
�
U1
g.�
:::S -..::1
00
I
t:="''
= Ill
""" ... '"I
"" --
a- e:oo
::1
rq
'JJ
Table 8.7.1 (Contd.) 11)
Plumbing Fixtures Requirement :;!

;::;·
11)
"'
Type of Building Occupancy Water Closets* Urinals** Wash Basins*** Bathtubs or Shower Drinkinl! Fountains Other Fixtures
D Health Care Building
Dl Normal Medical 1 for 8 patient 2 upto 30 patients and 1 for 8 patients 1 for 75 patients Service sink: 1 for each
Facilities (Indoor Patient
Ward)
(male or female) -- add 1 fixture for
additional 30 patients
word.
Bed pan washing sink: 1
!
for each ward.
Kitchen sink: 1 for each
kitchen
02 Emergency Medical Males: 1 for 100 persons Males: 1 for 50 persons 1 for 100 persons - 1 for 500 persons Service sink:
Facilities and Outdoor Females: 2 for 100 persons 1 for each ward
Patient Ward
E Assembly Building
E1 Large Assembly with

Fixed Seats
E2 Small Assembly with
Fixed Seats
F3 Large Assembly
without Fixed Seats
E4 Small Assembly
without Fixed Seats
Mosque 1 for 30 persons -- -- I for 100 persons 1 for 1000 persons Water taps with drainage
arrangement: 1 for 10
persons
Junction Stations, Males: Min 2, 4 for I 000 Males: Min 2, 4 for Males: Min 2, 4 for I 000 1 for 300 persons Service sink : I per floor
Intermediate Stations, persons and add 1 for 1000 persons and then persons and add 1 for --
Terminal Stations and additional I 000 persons. add I for additional 1000 additional 1000 persons.
Bus Terminals Females: Min 2, 5 for 1000 persons
· persons and then add I for Female: Min 2, 6 for I
additional 1000 persons 1000 persons and then I
I
add 1 for additional 1000
persons I
0:1
§
CJQ
-
Ill
p.
II)
rn
� Table 8.7.1 (Contd.)
z Plumbing Fixtures Requirement
Ill
...
....
0
= Type of Building Occupancy. Water Closets* Urinals** Wash Basins*** Bathtubs or Shower Drinkin2 Fountains Other Fixtures
Ill
-
Domestic Airport
0:1 Minimum Males: 2 Females: 2 Males: 1 2 1 per 300 persons Service sink: 1 per floor
E.
- for 200 persons Males: 4 Females: 5 Males: 2 4
p.
....
for 400 persons Males: 6 Females: 8 Males: 4 6
=
--
CJQ for 600 persons Males: 8 Females: IO Males: 5 8

n for 800 persons Males: 9 Females: 13 Males: 6 9
0
p. for I 000 persons Males: 10 Females: 13 Males: 7 10
II)
International Airport 4 shower stalls in the 1 for 300 persons Service sink: 1 per floor
for 200 persons Males: 6 Females: 10 Males: 8 10 females or males toilet in
for 600 persons Males: 12 Females: 20 Males: 22 20 the transit and departure
for 1000 persons Males: 18 Females: 29 Males: 22 25 lounge and also in the
main concourse
Cinemas, Concert halls, Males: 1 for 100 persons Males: 1 for 25 persons I for 200 persons -- I for 500 persons Service sink : I
Theatres (for public use) upto 400 persons.
Add I for each additional
250 persons.
Females: 3 for I 00 persons
upto 200 persons.
Add 2 for each additional 100
Ipersons.
Cinemas, Concert halls, Males: Males: Nil up to 6 persons Males: -
Theatres (for permanent I for 1-15 persons I for 7-20 persons I for 1-15 persons 1 for 500 persons --
employee use) 2 for 16-35 persons 2 for 21-45 persons 2 for 16-35 persons
Females: Females:
I for 1-12 persons I for 1-12 persons
Art Galleries, Libraries, Males: 1 for 200 persons Males: I for 50 persons I for 200 persons up to -- I for 500 persons Service sink: I
Museums (for public upto 400 persons. 200 persons and then add 0
use) Add I for each additional 250 I for additional 250
Dl
:r
persons persons AI
JQ
Females: I for 100 persons �
AI
upto 200 persons. :::1
Q.
oon
AI�
:::1 Ill
00 ��
t AI ...
�
""'
'I
g.�
:::1 'I
00 o:I""C
� s:: �
�· '"I
"'" - ...
00
e:oo
=
IQ
en
Table 8.7.1 (Contd.) 11)
�
Plumbing Fixtures Requirement ;:;·
11)
(J) ·
'
Type of Building Occupancy Water Closets • Urinals •• Wash Basins ••• Bathtubs or Shower Drinking Fountains Other Fixtures I
Add 1 for each additional 150

persons
- -
Art Galleries, Libraries, Males: Males: Males: 1 for 100 persons

Museums (for permanent 1 for 1-15 persons Nil upto 6 persons 1 for 1-15 persons
employee use) 2 for 16-35 persons 1 for 7-20 persons 2 for 16-35 persons
Females: 2 for 21-45 persons Females:
E5 Sports Facilities Males: 1 for 75 persons Males: 1 for 75 �rsons 1 for 60 persons 1 for 50 persops 1 for 300 persons Service sink: 1
Females: 1 for 50 persons
F Business and
Mercantile Building
F1 Offices Males: 1 for 25 persons Males: Nil upto 6 persons 1 for 25 persons -- 1 for 100 persons Service sink: 1 per floor.
F4 Garages and Petrol Female: 1 for 15 persons 1 for 7-20 persons
Stations 2 for 21-45 persons
F5 Essential Services 3 for 46-70 persons
4 for 71-100 persons
Add@ 3% for 101-200
persons and@ 2.5% for
over 200 persons.
F2 Small Shops and I for 500 persons Urinals may be provided in 1 for 750 persons -- 1 for 1000 persons Service sink: 1
Markets toilet room in lieu of water
F3 Large Shops and Markets closets for men but for not
more than 112 of the
required number of water
closets. -- -

=
I»
=
CIQ
-
I»
Q.
�
(IJ
::::'
z
I»
....
......
0
=
I»
-
=
c
Q.
=
CIQ Plumbing Fixtures Requirement
n
0
Q.
� Type of Buildin2 Occupancy Water Closets* Urinals** Wash Basins*** Bathtubs or Shower Drinking Fountains Other Fixtures
G Industrial Buildings
Factories Males: Males: Nil upto 6 persons I for 25 persons As required by particular I for I 00 persons Service sink: I per floor
I for 1-15 persons 1 for 7-20 persons trades or occupations
4 for 66-1000 persons 4 for 71-100 persons.
Females: Add @ 3% upto 200
2 for 13-25 persons persons and for over 200
3 for 26-40 persons persons add @ 2.5%
4 for 41-57 persons
5 for 58-77 persons
6 for 7 8-100 persons
H Storage Buildings 1 for 100 persons - 1 for 100 persons Provisions for emergency 1 for 1000 persons Service sink: 1
shower
J Hazardous Buildings 1 for 1 00 persons - 1 for 100 persons Provisions for emergency
shower 1 for I 000 persons Service sink : 1
* Some of the water closets may be of European style. The water closet(s) shall not be oriented in the east-west direction.
.. The unnal(s) shall not be onented m the east-west dtrectton. 0
*** Toilet(s) of public use shall have atleast one water tap with adequate drainage arrangement for ablution purpose when the number of devotees exceed twenty.
j;l
:;-
...
JQ
t1)
...
::s
Q..
Vln
��>::r
::s I»
::::�
00
I ... .....
......
,;:. §"·�
\0 ::s 'I
Paq8
Building Services
Table 8.7.2
Sanitary Appliances
Appliances Standard
Ceramic wash basin and pedestals BOS 1162-87

Ceramic wash down water closet pans BS 1213
Foot rest vitreous china BOS 1163-87 parts 1&4
Integrated squatting pans vitreous china BOS 1163-87 parts 1&5
Metal hand rinse basm BS 1329
·Metal sink for domestic purpose BS 1244
Urinals ( bowl type) vitreous china BOS 1163-87 parts 1&3
Washdown water closet pans, vitreous china BOS 1163-87 parts 1&2
Water closet seat plastic BS 1254
Water closet flusl:iing cisterns and pipes BS 1125
Table 8.7.3
Building Drainage and Vent Pipe
Material I Standards
Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS plastic pipe) ASTM 02661, ASTMF 628
Aluminum tubing ASTM B429, ASTM B745M
Brass pipe ASTM B43
Cast iron pipe ASTMA74
Copper or Copper-alloy tubing ASTM B75M, ASTM B88M,
ASTM B251M, ASTM B306
Galvanized steel pipe ASTMA53
Lead l'ipe IS 404
Polyvmyl chloride plastic pipe ASTM 02665, ASTM02949,
ASTMF891
Table 8.7.4
Building Sewer or Building Storm Sewer Pipe
Material I Standards
Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS plastic pipe) ASTM02261, ASTM 02751, ASTMF628,
ASTM02321
Asbestos BOS 428, BOS 429
Bihuminized fibre pipe ASTM01861, ASTM01862
Concrete pipe ASTM C14M,ASTM C76M
Copper or Copper-alloy tubing ASTM B75,ASTM B88M,ASTM B251M
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe ASTM 02665,ASTM 02949,
ASTM 03034,ASTM02321, ASTMF891
Vitrified clay pipe ASTM C4, ASTMC700
Table 8.7.5
Subsoil Drainage Pipe
Material l Standard
Asbestos cement pipe ASTMC508
Bituminous fibre pipe ASTM02311
Concrete pipe ASTM C654 M
Polyethylme (PE) plastic pipe ASTMF405
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe ASTM02729, ASTMF891
Vitrified clay pipe ASTM C4, ASTM C700
7.8 HANGERSAND SUPPORTANDPIPE JOINTI NG
7.8.1 Hangers and Support .

The piping, fixtures and equipment used for drainage system shall be provided with hangers and support in
accorcfance with Sec 6.13 in Chapter 6.
8-150
Chapter 7
7.8.2 Pipe Joints

The joints between different pipings and fittings shall conform to the standards cited against them in
Table 8.7.6. The requirements for the joints not specified in the table shall be subject to the approval of the
Authority.
7.9 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
7.9.1 Objective
For the design of drainage and sanitation system of different buildings according to building classification,
the objective shall be to safeguard against fouling, deposit of solids and clogging and with adequate
cleanouts and inspection chambers so arranged that the drains may be readily cleaned without the risk of
health hazard.
7.9.2 General
a) The plumbing system shall be designed and adjusted to use the minimum quantity of water consistent
with proper performance and cleamng.
b) Plumbing fixtures, devices and appurtenances shall be supplied with req1;1ired volume of water at
pressures adequate to enable these to function properly and without undue noise under normal
conditions of use.
7.9.3 Different Plumbing Systems

For the design and installation for drainage piping, one of the following plumbing systems shall be used :
i) single stack system,

ii) one-pipe system, and
iii) two-pipe system.
Table 8.7.6
Joints Between Different Pipes and Fittings
Material I Standard
ABS plastic pipe and fittings ASTM 02235, ASTM 02661, ASTM 03212,
ASTM F628 ASME B1.20.1
Aluminium tubing ASTMC564
Asbestos cement pipe and fittings ASTMD1869
Brass pipe and fittings ASME Bl.20.1
Cast iron pipe and fittings . ASTMC564
Concrete pipe and fittings ASTMC443
Copper orCopper-alloy pipe and fittings ASTMB32, ASME 81.20.1
Copper-alloy tubing and fittings ASTMB32
CPVC plastic pi e and fittings
f ASTM F493, ASME 81.20.1
Galvanized stee pipe and fittings ASME 81.20.1
PE plastic pipe and fittings ASTM02657
PVC plastic pipe and fittings ASTM 02657, ASTM 02855, ASTM 03139,
ASTM 03212, ASTM F402, ASTM F656, ASME
81.20.1
Vitrified clay pipe and fitting ASTMC425
a) Single stack system may be used with 100 mm diameter stack for buildings up to 5-storey height. The
fixtures in each floor shall be connected to a single stack for increasing the rate of discharge in the
downward direction. There shall be at least 200 mm vertical distance between the waste branch and the
soil branch connection, while the soil pipe will be connected to stack above the waste pipe. The size of
soil branch shall not be less than 100 mm. The horizontal branch distance for fixtures from stack and
bend(s) at the foot of stack to avoid back pressure as well as the vertical distance between the lowest
connection and the invert of drain shall be as shown in Fig 8.7.1. The recommended depth of water seal
trap for different fixtures shall be in accordance with Tabfe 8.7.7.
b) Where all types of waste from the building are desired to be discharged into a common sewer or into
same waste disposal system, one pipe system may be used (Fig 8.7.2).
c) Where the sullage from kitchen and bath will be dealt with separately, the two pipe system shall be
used (Fig 8.7.3).
7.9.4 Water Closet Compartment for Physically Handicapped

7.9.4.1 Provision for Wheelchair Users : The water closet compartment for wheelchair users shall have at
least the dimensions and fittings as shown in Fig 8.7.4.
7.9.4.2 Provision for Ambulant Disabled People : The minimum dimension for water closet compartment
and the fittings for ambulant disabled people shall be as shown in Fig 8.7.5.
Banglddesh National Building Code 8-151

Part 8
�@
Building Services
"' mm S<oo•
Sink <E------ Wash Basin
2.3 m
Max. length
c
Water Closet IWC) Branch
Bath � max. length 1.5 m
'I I
) I
;/
I
50 mm fl parallel branch to be introduced
if bath waste would otherwise enter soil
stack below we and within 200 mm
Swept Entry min. radius 50 mm
Min. vertical distance 450 mm

between lowest connection
and invert of a drain
1
Large radius bends
Fig. 8.7.1 Single Stack System
Table 8.7.7
Recommended Depth of Water Seal Trap for Different Fixtures
Fixture I Water Seal (mm)

Water Closets 50
Floor Traps 50
For Waste Branch of 75 mm diameter or More 40
For Waste Branch of Less Than 75 mmdiameter 75
7.9.5 Installation of Drainage System

7.9.5.1 All plumbing fixtures shall be made of smooth and nonabsorbent materials, free from concealed
fouling surfaces and may be located in ventilated enclosures.
7.9.5.2 Whenever possible, all drainage system shall be drained to the public sewer or private waste
disposal system by gravity.
7.9.5.3 Horizontal drainage piping of 75 mmdiameter and less shall be installed with a fall of not less than
20mmper m.
Horizontal drainage piping larger than 75 mm diameter shall be installed with a fall of not less than 10mm
per m.
It is a good policy to design the system for the highest possible velocity. However, consideration should be
given to the fact that the high velocities in pipes with slopes greater than 20 mm per m may cause self-
siphonage of trap seal. ·
8-152
Chapter 7
Vent Stack Soil Slack
Branch Vent Pipe
t Wash Basin
Floor Level
Floor Level
r----,-----,
I I I
I I I
l Urinal l l
I I I
I I I
I I I
I I I
Floor Level
_ ____,_ --
Fig. 8.7.2 Diagram of One-Pipe System
7.9.5.4 Where conditions do not permit building drains and sewers to be laid with a fall as great as that
specified, a lesser slope may be permitted providea the computed velocity in the drains will not be less than
0.6 m per second. The maximum recommended velocity wilfbe 2.5 m per second.
7.9.5.5 The soil pipe conveying any solid or liquid filth to a drain shall be circular with a minimum
diameter of 100 mm.
7.9.5.6 The waste branch from bath room, wash basin or sink shall be of 32 mm to 50 mm diameter and
shall be trapped immediately beneath such wash basins or sink by an efficient siphon trap with adequate
means of inspection and cleaning. The minimum recommended size of waste stack is 75 mm.
7.9.5.7 The soil and waste stack shall be continued upward undiminished in size 0.6 m above the roof
r
surface when the roof will be used onl for weather protection. Where the roof will be used for any purpose
other than weather protection, the soi and vent stack shall run at least 2 m above the roof surface so that
there shall be the least possible nuisance.
7.9.5.8 The soil and waste stack shall be firmly attached to the wall with a minimum clearance of 50 mm
from the wall.

Part 8
Building Services
Vent Stack nU Vent

Stack
Soil Stack
Floor Level
Floor Level
r-------,..------�
I I I
I I I
I I I
I I I
I I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
! Urinal! !
I I I
Floor Level I I I
t_____ L______J
----
Fig. 8.7.3 Diagram ·of Two-Pipe System
7.9.5.9 All (soil, waste, vent or antisiphonage) stacks shall be covered on top with a copper or heavily
galvanized iron wire dome or cast iron terminal guards.
7.9.6 Installation of Venting System

7.9.6.1 The vent stack or main vent shall be installed in conjunction with a soil or waste stack in a building
containing five or more branch intervals. One vent stack may serve not more than two soil or waste stacks.
7.9.6.2 The building with building drain shall have at least one 100 mm vent stack or stack vent carried full
size to outdoor air above the roof in accordance with Sec 7.9.5.7 above.
7.9.6.3 The diameter of a vent stack shall not be less than 50 mm .
7.9.6.4 The diameter of a branch vent pipe on a waste pipe shall not be less than 25 mm or two-thirds of
the diameter of the branch waste pipe ventilated.
7.9.6.5 The branch vent pipe on a soil pipe shall not be less than 32 mm in diameter.
7.9.6.6 All main vents or vent stacks shall connect full size at their base to the building drain or to the soil
or waste stack at or below the level of the lowest drainage connection to them. All vent stacks shall extend
undiminished in size above the roof or shall be reconnected to a vent header or to the stack vent portion of
the soil or waste stack, at least 150 mm above the flood level of the highest fixture connection discharging
into the soil or waste stack. Where the roof is to be used for any purpose other than weather protection, the
vent extension shall be in accordance with the Sec 7.9.5.7.
8-154
Chapter7
r 32 Dla. Support rail
i Water tap
Section
400 600 500
Plan
(All dimensions in mm)
Fig. 8.7.4 Water Closet Compartment for Wheelchair User

.
7.9.6.7 Offset in the stack vent portion of soil or waste stack, offset in vent stack and connection of vent
stack at the bottom to soil or waste pipe or to the building drain shall be at an angle of at least 45 degrees to
the horizontal.
7.9.6.8 All vent and branch vent pipe shall be so graded and connected that sufficient slope is provided for
condensation to drain back to soil or waste pipe by gravity.
7.9.6.9 Where fixtures other than water closets discharge into the stack downstream of a water closet, each
fixture connecting downstream shall be individually vented.
7.9.6.10 Soil and waste stacks in a building having more than 10 branch intervals shall be provided with a
relief vent (Fig 8.7.6) at each tenth interval counting from the top floor.
7.9.7 Clear�nce of Blockages

7.9.7.1 There shall be sufficient and suitable access points at every change of alignment, gradient or
diameter or at bends and junctions for clearing blockages from drains which cannot be reached by any other

Part 8
Building Services
r 32 Dia Support rail
0
"' fWater ta
"'
p
--c
(
0
"'
...
Section ·
32 Clearance
lwater ta
p
0
0
<0
400
Plan
{All dimensions In mm)
Fig. 8.7.5 Water Closet Stall for Ambulant Disabled People
means. Tables 8.7.8 and 8.7.9 show the maximum spacing and the recommended minimum dimensions for
access fittings and chambers for the specified depth.
Table 8.7.8
Maximum Spacing of Access Points
To
From Access Fitting Junction Inspection Manhole
I I I
-
Chamber
(m) (m) (m) (m)
Start of external drain

Roddin eye fl
Access ittmg t
Inspection chamber
12
22
22
- 22
12
22 -
22
45
22
45
45
45
22
45
Manhole 22 - 45 90
t higher spacing may be used for larger size access fitting.
7.9.7.2 Access should be one of the following four types :

i) rodding eyes- capped extensions of the pipes,
ii) ?ccess �ittmgs- small chambers (or. an exte�sion of the pipes) but not with an open channel,
mspechon chambers- chambers With working space at ground level, and
·
iii)
iv) manholes- large chambers with working space at drain level.
8-156
Chapter 7
.
D ratn '!Ke and S an1•ta fJon
I
Roof
I
I-
I
3m I
Vent Stack
I
15th Floor
I
3m
'
I �
I
I
I
14th Floor
'--
3m
I
I
v--
I Soil Stack
I
13th Floor
I
3m
I-
I
I
v--
I
I
12th Floor
I
v--�
'
3m I
I Branch
I
I
11th Floor
'--
I
I f""'"
3m I
I
10th Floor
I
I-
-J-
3m I
I
I Branch Interval
I
9th Floor
I
'
I v--
3m I
I
I
8th Floor
'--
3m
I
I �
I
I
7th Floor I
3m
I-
I
I
v--
r---
I
6th Floor -�
I " 10th Branch Interval
\. v
'
I
3m I --
I
I Relief Vent on 10th Interval
5th Floor
'--
Below the Top Branch
3m
I
I
v-
I
I
4th Floor
I
3m
I-
I
I
v--
I
I
3rd Floor
I
3m
'
I v-
I
I
I
2nd Floor
r v--
.......
4m _____ '
-... ... .
Vent Stack Connection at the
1st Floor Base of Soil Stack
J Lowest floor horizontal branch

should be connected to the soil
stack atleast 0.6 m below the offset
Fig. 8.7.6 Relief Vents for Stack of More Than Ten Branch Intervals
7.9.7.3 Inspection chambers and milnholes shall hilve removable nonventilating covers of durable material
and be of suitable strength. Inspection chambers and manholes in buildings shall have mechanically fixed
airtight covers unless tl:ie drain itself has watertight access covers. Manholes deeper than 1 m shall have
metal step iron or fixed ladders. Fig 8.7.7 and 8.7.8 show the details of typical manholes at smaller depth (<1
m) and at higher depth (>1 m) respectively. Fig 8.7.9 shows the details of a drop manhole. The drop
manhole is a manhole that serves as a junction and receives sewer lines at two different elevations.

'
Part 8
Building Services
Table 8.7.9
Minimum Dimensions for Access Points
Depth Internal Sizes Cover Sizes

Access Points (m)
I
Length x width Diameter Length x width Circular
Roddingeye
(mm x mm)
min. 100 mm
(mm)
orsize of drains
(mm x mm) I (mm)
Access fitting 0.6.orless 150 X 100 150 150 X 100 150

Inspection 1.0 orless 450 X 450 450" 450 X 450 450*
chamber
Manhole 1.5 orless 1200 X 750 1050 600 X 600 600

over 1.5 1200 X 750 1200 600 X 600 600
over2.7 12000 X 840 1200 600 X 600 600
" 190 mm dia may be used for depth 50.6m
L ' 6 Brick Length
L/6 L.L L/6
I I I I
( )(
3 )·( )
Rendering with Cement mortar

!Slope 1 In 6)
Detail of Benching
Sectional Plan (Section A-A)
T
Depth of
manhole
1
Section B-B Section C-C
Fig. 8.7.7 Details of Manhole (Depth 1 m and Below}
8-158
Chapter 7
Rendering with Cement Mortar

8
(Slope 1 In 61
Detail of Benching
Cast Iron Frame and Cover
iE----71
Depth of 150 mm
Manhole
380 m :=T'
/< ::.:__>/[ .
===- <E--- Steps
Concrete Base
Fig. 8.7.8 Details of Manhole (depth more thant m}
7.9.8 Protection Against Rodent

Holes through walls shall be such that they will not provide passage of rodent or other insects from room to
room or from floor to floor. Materials used for embedding pipes shall be rodent proof.
7.9.9 Bedding and Backfilling

The choice of bedding and backfilling depends on the depth of the bed, and size and strength of the
materials. Fig 8.7.10 and Table 8.7.10 show the two types of bedding and backfilling and minimum and
maximum depth of cover for each type of bedding for rigid pipings. The bedding and backfilling for flexible

PartS
Building Services
----- l
I
I
I
I
I 8
I
f

Cast Iron Frame and Cover
IE----?>!
Depth of 150 mm
Manhole
380 mm �
I<
I
->1
T300
__L mm
Concrete Base
Fig. 8.7.9 Drop Manhole
pipings is shown in Fig 8.7.11. The minimum depth of bedding for flexible pipings shall be 0.9 m under any
road and 0.6 m in fields and gardens.
The depth shall not be more than 10 m. The flexible P. ipe may be laid with less cover in fields and gardens.
The bedding and backfilling shall be in accordance wttfi Fig 8.7.12.
8-160
Chapter 7
Table 8.7.10
Limits of Cover (m) for Standard Strength Rigid Pipes in any Width of Trench
Pipe Bore I Bedding I Fields and Gardens I Light Traffic Roads I Heavy Traffic Road
(nun) Class I Min I Max I Min I Max I Min I Max
100 Type1 0.3 7.4 0.4 7.4 0.4 7.2

Type2 0.3 5.8 0.5 5.8 0.5 5.5
150 Type1 0.6 5.0 0.6 5.0 0.6 4.6

Type2 0.6 3.9 0.7 3.8 0.7 3.3
Type 1 Bedding factor 1.9 Type 2 Bedding factor 1.5
�
_r��100mm =c-:. 1009� mm
__L 8 �
Notes:
1 - Compacted granular material

2 - Carefully compacted backlit
3 - Lightly compacted backfil

00 - Outer diameter
Fig. B. 7.10 Bedding for Rigid Pipes
Concrete Slab
�
' .. ... .
. ... '
n 75mm
Fig. 8.7.11 Bedding for Flexible Pipes Fig. 8.7.12 Flexible Pipe Bedding
Under Concrete Slab
1 - Angular granular material. 6 mm to 40 mm size

(similar to ASTM 02321 Class I material)
2 - Selected fills or granular fills free from stones larger than 40 mm
(similar to ASTM 02321 Class II material)
3 - Selected finely divided material free from debris. vegetable matter and
stones larger than 40 mm
(similar to ASTM 02321 Class Ill material)

PartS
Building Services
7.9.10 Rainwater Drainage

7.9.10.1 Rainwater data for the locality of the building shall be studied to arrive at the design parameters
for rainwater drainage in accordance with Appendix S.
7.9.10.2 In case of inclined roof, the horizontal projection shall be considered as the roof drainage area.
7.9.10.3 Rainwater from roof or from building premises shall not be discharged into septic tank. This will be
drained into storm sewer or combined sewer system where available or into private disposal methods
(water course or dry well, Fig 8.7.13 and 8.7.14), or storage tank, where rainwater will be used for domestic
purpose.
Minimum distance required

by the Code
-Earth
Fig. 8.7.13 Typical Location of a Dry Well
Rainwater
Ground level
from Building
t'h:>-�--- Pre-cast
Concrete Section
Clamp
or Porous Brick Wall
Crushed Stone/Bricks
Fig. 8.7.14 Installation Details of a Dry Well
8-162
Chapter 7
7.9.10.4 Large dry well shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements for seepage pit
(Sec 7.9.12). However, for small dry wells handling limited quantities of rainwater, the pit may consist of an
one metre length of 0.45 m diameter pipe filled with crushed stone.
7.9.10.5 Where rainwater will be used for domestic purpose, rainwater from roof or terrace may be led
straight from conductor (or leader) to one or more storage tanks. Storage tanks shall be provided with
ventilating covers. An arrangement shall be made in the rainwater leader to divert the first washings from
the roof or terrace catchment as they will contain more undesirable materials. The open end of all pipes
shall be covered with mosquito (insect) proof wire net.
7.9.10.6 Individual rain water traps shall be installed on the rainwater drain branch serving each leader or a
single trap shall be installed in the main rainwater drain (building storm drain) just before its connection
with the combined building sewer, main drain or public sewer.
7.9.10.7 No traps sli.all be required for rainwater drains which will be connected to a sewer draining
rainwater exclusively.
7.9.10.8 Subsurface drainage pipings for rainwater drainage shall not be less than 100 mm in diameter. The
subsoil drainage system shall be protected by an accessibly located backwater valve in case the building is
subject to backwater or flooding. Subsoil drains shall discharge to a trapped area drain, sump, dry well or an
approved location above grade.
7.9.10.9 Rainwater pipes shall not be used as soil, waste or vent pipes.
7.9.10.10 All roof areas, except those draining to hanging gutters, shall be equipped with roof drains with
strainers extendins not less than 100 mm above the surface of the roof and shall have an available inlet area
not less than two hmes the area of the leade� to which the drain will be connected.
7.9.10.11 It is recommended to have more than one rainwater drainage pipe for primary roof drainage
system to minimize blockage.
7.9.10.12 It is recommended to provide secondary rainwater drainage system at a suitable elevation from
the roof that has been considerea in the calculation of rainwater load to design the building structure. The
secondary drainage system shall be a separate drainage piping up to storm sewer or private waste
(rainwater) disposal system. The size of secondary rainwater drainage piping shall not be less than the size
required for primary rainwater drainage piping.
7.9.10.13 French drains may. be employed as surface water drains for drainage of unpaved surfaces.
7.9.11 Septic Tank

7.9.11.1 Septic tank(s) (Fig 8.7.15 and 8.7.16) discharging_into either
a subsurface disposal field or one or
more seepage pits shall be required for the approval of drainage and sanitation plans for the places where
public sewers are not available.
·
At Least 100 mm
At Least 100 mm
Inlet Pipe
Outlet Pipe
D , Liquid Depth
Brick Wall in Cement Mortar

Cement
Mortar Finish
Plan Sectioin A-A
Fig. 8.7. 15 Typical One Chamber Brick Septic Tank

PartS
Building Services
-----y----, Opening at least 2( 50 mm 50 mm)
.· "
x
Manhole Cover equally spaced
J
At least 100 mm 1
.. . ----
::=so
---- -r-;;;y--- ��==:::J
I< At least 100 mm
· -==::1 1--- ·· t
Inlet �
y--+ ·:.·:
• r mm � --� 17
� ------;. Outlet
·•
'·�---l
..
•
-�
350mm---_-_-_-_-_-
-__; ....--
.. - · -------
.: ...,J
- --40"0 iiim --
----_.�-
-
�
..,<
.
..
·
.;
.. . . . ..... .
;,
-- ...
Opening 100 mm x 400 mm
. . . ·. ·:· . ----� · ·
.
Sanitary Tees
�
L,-.,...'-
.,..--,,... or 150 mm Dia Holes at 0.5m
.
Open.. Top & Bottom--!:-'--+-----'
- --..,.,----.l.....tl - Centre to Centre
c.� .J.... ...,.....
.._ "'
--:- ...
. · •
._.·
r--- ---1
!'
;,
+
..
,.,2/3 L . ,.,113 L
·•
:
•
Section A-A •
r-----------T-,-------,
A
A
I I I I
L c::::� =+-. 1
1
1 �: t==:::J _ ____t_,
.
r Inlet
1 .___, Outlet
I I I I
L----------- ..L ..L----- _j
Plan
Fig. 8.7.16 Typical Two Chamber Concrete Septic Tank
7.9.11.2 Such disposal method shall be designed by a licensed professional in accordance with the
requirement of the provisions of this Code.
7.9.11.3 The design of such system shall be on the basis of location with respect to wells or other sources of
water, soil permeability, ground water elevation, area available and maximum occupancy of the building.
7.9.11.4 Rainwater or ground water shall not be discharged into the septic tank.
7.9.11.5 Septic tank(s) shall not discharge into open water courses.
7.9.11.6 The minimum distance for various components of the disposal system shall be in accordance with
Table 8.7.11.
7.9.11.7 The flow into a septic tank may be calculated on the basis of water consumption rate or on the basis
of plumbing fixtures discharging simultaneously into it.
7.9.11.8 The septic tank shall have a minimum liquid capacity of 2000 litres, minimum width 1 m and
minimum liquid depth 1 m. The length of a septic tank shall be at least twice its width. It is recommended
that the length of a septic tank be not more than 4 times its width.
7.9.11.9 The maximum size of a septic tank shall be limited to the number of users not exceeding 300
persons for residential buildings (occupancy groups A, C, and D) and 1000 persons for all other occupancy
groups . It is recommended to use independent parallel chamber septic tank for a population more then
8-164
Chapter 7
100 persons for residential buildings (for occupancy groups A, C and D) and 350 persons for all otl:ler
occupancy groups.
7.9.11.10 The diameter of a circular septic tank shall not be less than 1.4 rn and shall have a operating liquid
depth not less than 1 m.
7.9.11.11 The volume required for digested sludge and scum may be computed on the basis of
0.04 m3 I capita/year.
7.9.11.12 The liquid retention time of a septic tank shall be at least 1 day.
7.9.11.13 The desludging frequency of a septic tank shall be at least once a year.
7.9.11.14 It is recommended to use two chamber sel'tic tank when the capacity of a septic tank exceeds 3000
litres. The inlet compartment of a two chamber septic tank shall have a capacity not less than two-third of its
total capacity (Fig 8:7.16).
Table 8.7.11
Location of Components of Sewage Disposal System
System Component Distance (rn)

Building Well Stream
I I I
Seepage
I
DryWell
Foundation Pit
Septic tank 1.5 8 - 1.5 -
Disposal field 3 15 7.5 6 6

Seepage pit 4.5 15 15 6 6
Dr¥ well 3 15 - 6 -
7.9.11.15 The septic tank shall be constructed of corrosion resistant material and be of permanent water tight
construction. Tne manhole cover and the roof of the tank shall be designed for at least 7 kPa live load. The
inlet compartment shall be provided with a manhole. Outlet compartment may also be provided with a
manhole. The design guideline of a septic tank is presented in Appendix T.
7.9.12 Disposal.Field and Seepage Pit

7.9.12.1 A distribution box shall be provided to receive the effluent from the septic tank to assure equal
distribution to each individual line of disposal field. The distribution box shall be connected to the septic
tank by a watertight sewer line and shall be located at the upper end of disposal field. Fig 8.7.17 shows the
plans and sections of typical distribution boxes.
Outlet
Inlet 1111et Outlet
Section Plan
Inlet
Inle t
Outlets
Outlets
Plan Plan
Fig. 8.7. 17 Distribution Boxes

PartS
Building Services
7.9.12.2 Soil percolation tests (at least for three holes) shall be performed at the site of a proposed individual
sewage disposal system installation to determine the suitability of soil and site.
7.9.12.3 The liquid capacity (volume below inlet line) of seepage units (disposal field or seepage pit) shall
be at least twice that of a septic tank. Effective absorption area of seepage unit may be computed in
accordance with Table 8.7.12.
7.9.12.4 No seepage unit shall be extended into water table directly
7.9.12.5 Each disposal field shall have at least two outlet distribution lines from the distribution box. No
portion of disposal field shall be installed under any pavement or any area where there will be vehicular
traffic or parkmg
7.9.12.6 Minimum standards for disposal field construction shall be as shown in Table 8.7.13.
Table 8.7.12
Absorptive Capacity of Disposal Field and Seepage Pit
Percolation Test Rate in Effluent Allowance Rate ot Seepage Unit

Minutes for Water to Fall in litre per m2 per day
25mm
Disposal Field Trenches Seepage Pit
(bottom of trench) I (wall area)
2 or less 128 172

5 96 128
10 68 92
30 32 44
60(not recornrnended) 16 24
over 60 (not suitable)
Table 8.7.13
Design Features of Disposal Field
Number of lateral branches 2

Maximum length of branch 20 m
Minimum diameter of field distribution pipe 100 rnrn
Maximum slope of field distribution pipe 3.3 mm per m
Depth of trencn 0.45 m to 9 m
Trench bottom, minimum above ground water 0.61 m
Trench bottom width 0.45m to 0.75m
Depth of coarse material
under pipe 150 rnrn
over pipe 50 rnrn
Size of coarse material 12 rnrn to 63 rnrn
7.9.12.7 Seepage pit (soak pit) shall be lined with stone, brick or concrete blocks laid up dry with 'open
joints that are bacl<ed up with at least 75 mm coarse aggregate. The joints above the inlet shall be sealed with
2
cement mortar. A reinforced concrete cover shall be provided. For cover area more than 0.75 m the pit shall
have an access manhole. The bottom of the pit shall be filled with coarse gravel, or crushed stone/brick to a
depth of 0.3 m. Figure 8.7.18 provides the details of a seepage pit.
7.10 DESIGN OF DRAINAGE AND SANITATION SYSTEM
7.10.1 Estimation of Maximum Load Weight of Waste Water

The design of drainage piping depends on the load weight of all connected fixtures that might operate at
any one time. The total load weigfit in soil or waste pipes is related to the robability of usage of connected
f
fixtures to those pipes. To estimate the total load weight carried by a soi or waste pipe, tfie relative load
weight for different kinds of fixtures are provided in Table 8.7.14. Table 8.7.15 proviaes an approximate
rating of those fixtures not listed in Table 8.7.14. Therefore, the maximum load weight on any J?iping in
terms of fixture units may be estimated knowing the number and type of connected fixtures to a pipe using
Tables 8.7.14 and 8.7.15.
7.10.2 Gradient and Size of Pipe

7.10.2.1 The building drains and sewer shall be designed to discharge the peak simultaneous load weight
flowing half-full with a minimum self-cleansing velocity of 0.75 m per second. However, flatter gradient
may be used if required but the minimum velocity shall not be less than 0.6 m per second. Again, it is
undesirable to employ gradients giving a velocity of flow greater than 2.5 m per second.
8-166
Chapter 7
Gravel or Crushed Stone/Br� {Inverted Filter)

Sand _j
Hight used Gravel or Crushed

to compute Stone/Brick (75 mml
absarption area
Pit Wall !Brick)

(Porous)
Section A-A
A A
Plan
Fig. 8.7.18 Typical Seepage Pit
7.10.2.2 The maximum number of fixture units that may be connected to a given size of building sewer,
building drain, horizontal branch or vertical soil or waste stack shall be as provided in Tables 8.7.16 and
8.7.17.
7.10.3 Size of Rainwater Piping

7.10.3.1 The size of vertical leaders shall be based on the maximum projected roof area according to
Table 8.7.18.
7.9.3.2 The size of building storm drain, storm sewer or any of their horizontal branches shall be based on
the maximum projected roof or paved area to be drained in accordance with Table 8.7.19.
7.10.3.3 The size of semi-circular gutter shall be based on maximum projected roof area according to
Table 8.7.20.
7.10.4 Size of Vent Piping

7.10.4.1 The size of vent piping shall be determined from its length and the total of the fixture units
connected thereto in accorcfance with Table 8.7.21.
·
7.10.4.2 The branch vent shall be sized in accordance with Table 8.7.22.

PartS
Building Services
7.11 CONSTRUCTION RELATING TO CONVEYANCE OF RAINWATER AND SANITARY WASTES
7.11.1 Conveyance of Rainwater

7.11.1.1 All junctions and joints of rainwater piping shall be watertight.
7.11.1.2 Roof gutters shall be of suitable material of required thickness. All joints shall be watertight.
7.11.1.3 Construction of french drains (if used) shall be in accordance with established engineering
practices.
7.11.2 Conveyance of Sanitary Wastes

7.11.2.1 The layout of drainage systems shall be simple. Change of direction and gradient shall be
minimized and shall be as easy as practicable.
7.11.2.2 The excavation, where necessary, shall be made in accordance with Table 8.7.23.
Table 8.7.14
Fixture Units for Different Sanitary Appliances or Groups
Fixture
Type of Fixture Unit Value
as Load Factors
One bathroom group consisting of water closet, wash basin and bath
tub or shower stall :
a) Flush Tank water closet 6

b) Flush-valve water closet 8
Bathtub• 3
Bidet 3
Combination sink and tray (drain board) 3
Drinking fountain 0.5
Floor traps+ 1
Kitchen sink, domestic 2
Wash basin, ordinaryt 1
Wash basin, surgeon's 2
Shower stall, domestic 2
Shower (group) per head 3
Urinal, wall lip 4
Urinal, stall 4
Water closet, tank operated 4
Water closet, valve operated 8
• A shower head over a bath tub does not increase the fixture unit value.
t Size of floor trap shall be determined by the area of surface water to be drained.
:j: Wash basin with 32 mm and 40 mm trap have the same load value.
. Table 8.7.15
Fixture Unit Values for Fixtures Based on Fixture Drain or Trap Size
Fixture Drain on Trap Size Fixture Unit

Value
30mm and smaller 1
40mm 2
SOmm 3
65mm 4
75mm 5
100mm 6
8-168
Chapter 7
Table 8.7.16
Maximum Number of Fixture Units that can be Connected to Branches and Stacks
Diameter Maximum Number of Fixture Units that can be Connected

of Pipe
(mm) Any One Stack of
Horizontal 3 Storeys in More than3 Storeys in Height
Fixture Height or3
Brancha Intervals
Total for Stack Total at One
30 1 2 2
I Storey or Branch
Interval
1
40 3 4 8 2
50 6 10 24 6
65 12 20 42 9
75 20 30 60 16
100 160 240 500 90
125 360 540 1100 200
150 620 960 1900 350
200 1400 2200 3600 600
250 2500 3800 5600 1000
300 3900 6000 8400 1500
375 7000 b b b
a Does not include branches of the building sewer.
b Sizing load based on design criteria
Table 8.7.17
Maximum Number of Fixture Units that can be Connected to
Building Drains and Sewers
Diameter Maximum Number of Fixture Units that can be Connected to an �

of Pipe Portion• of the Building Drain or the Building Sewer for Various S opes
(mm) 1/200 I 1/100 I 1/50 I 1/25
100 -
180 216 250
150 -
700 840 1000
200 1400 1600 1920 2300
250 2500 2900 3500 4200
300 2900 4600 5600 6700
375 7000 8300 10000 12000
• Includes branches of building sewer
Table 8. 7.18
Size of Vertical Leaders•
Size of Leader •• I Maximum Projected Roof Area and Flow

2
(mm)
I (m ) I (t/min)
50 202 87
65 367 155
75 598 253
100 1287 544
125 2336 986
150 3790 1602
200 8180 3450
•
Table 8.7.18 is based upon a maximum rainfall of 25 mm per hour for a 1-hour duration. The figure for
drainage area shall be adjusted to local conditions (Appendix T).
•• The equivalent diameter of square leader will be the diameter of that circle which can be inscribed within
the cross-sectional area. The equivalent diameter of the rectangular leader will be the short dimension of the
rectangular leader. However, the ratio of width to depth of rectangular leader shall not exceed 3:1.

PartS
Building Services
Table 8.7.19
Size of Horizontal Building Storm Drains and Building Storm Sewer *
Diameter
of Drain Maximum Projected Area and Flow for Various Slopes
(mm)
10mmper m I 20mmper m I 40mmper m
mL I f/min I mL I f/min I mz f/min
I
75 299 125 422 177 599 252
100 668 288 965 406 1370 57 7
125 1215 515 1715 725 2430 1030
150 1950 823 2745 1157 3900 1645
200 4185 1765 5940 2500 8380 3540
250 7 550 3185 "10650 4500 15100 6370
300 12140 5100 17140 7236 24280 10250
375 21700 9120 30600 12900 43400 18300
.
Table 8.7.19 is based upon a maximum rainfall of 25 rnm per hour for 1-hour duration. The figure for drainage area
shall be adjusted to local conditions in accordance with Appendix T.
Table 8.7.20
Size of Semicircular Roof Gutters*
Dia of
Gutter Maximum Projected Roof Area for Gutter of Various Slopes
(mm)
5mmper m I 10mm per m I 20mm per m I 40mmper m
m I f/min I mZ I t'/min I m2 I t'/min m2 t'/min
I I
75 61 25 87 36 123 51 174 73
100 130 55 185 77 260 110 370 155
125 227 96 320 136 455 192 645 27 3
150 350 148 495 210 700 296 1010 425
175 503 210 710 300 1000 425 1420 600
200 725 307 1020 430 1300 610 2040 862
250 1300 555 1850 785 2610 1110 3650 1540
•
Table 8.7.20 is based upon a maximum rainfall of 25 rnm per hour for 1-hour duration. The figure for drainage area
shall be subject to local conditions in accordance with Appendix T.
7.11.2.3 The depth of cover shall be in accordance with Sec 7.9.8.
7.11.2.4 The pipe shall be laid to even gradients and change of gradient shall be combined with an access
point (Sec 7.9.6). However, access points shall be provided only if blockages could not be cleared without
them.
7.11.2.5 The joints and conne �tion in drainage and venting system shall be gastight and w�tert lght for the
pressures required by the test, with the exception of those portions of perforated or open joint piping which
will be installed for the purpose of collecting and conveying ground or seepage water to the underground
storm drains.
7.11.2.6 Piping in a drainage and venting system shall be installed without undue strains and stresses and
provision shaH be made for expansion, contraction and structural settlement. Vertical piping sh<Jl be
secured at sufficiently close intervals to keep the pipe in alignment and carry the weight of tfte piping and
its content. The horizontal piping shall be supported at sufficiently close intervals (Sec 7.8) to keep it in
aligRment and to prevent sagging.
7.12 REFUSE CHUTE SYSTEM
7.12.1 All buildings higher than 6-storeys shall be provided with refuse chute system for transporting and
collecting refuse from different floors in a sanitary way. The refuse shall be received from the respective
floor through an inlet hopper in to the chute which conveys refuse and discharges into the collection
chamber. The refuse from tl1e collection chamber shall be cleared at suitable intervals.
7.12.2 The refuse chute, inlet hopper and collection chamber shall be constructed with smooth and nonflammable
materials.
7.12.3 The hopper shall be self -cleaning and shall be fitted with self-closing shutter to prevent the passage of foul
gases inside the building.
7.12.4 The diameter of the chute shall not be less than 300 mm. It shall be adequately ventilated at the top. The
chute shall be provided with suitable arrangements for flushing with water for the full length.
8-170
Chapter 7
Table 8.7. 21
Size and Length of Vent Stacks and Stack Vents
Diameter Total
of Soil Fixture
or Waste Unit (FU) Maximum Development Length of Vent (m)*
Stack Connected for Diameter (mm) of Vent Pipes
(mm) to fixture
30 140 ISO I 65 I 75 1100 1125 1150 I 200 I 250 I 300
30 2 9
40 8 15 45.5
40 10 9 30.5
50 12 9 22.5 61
50 20 8 15 45.5
65 42 9 30.5 91.5
75 10 12.5 45.5 109.5 317
75 21 9.5 33.5 82 247
75 53 8 28.5 70 207
75 102 7.5 26 64 189
100 43 10.5 26 76 298.5
100 140 8 19.5 61 228.5
100 320 7 16.5 52 195
100 540 6.5 15 45.5 176.5
125 190 8.5 25 97.5 301.5
125 490 6.5 19 76 231.5
125 940 5.5 16 64 204
125 1400 4.5 15 58 180
150 500 10 39.5 122 305
150 1100 6.5 30.5 94.5 237.5
150 2000 6 25.5 79 201
150 2900 23.5 73 183
200 1800 9.5 29 73 286.5
200 3400 7 22 58 219.5
200 5600 6 19 48.5 186
200 7600 5.5 17 42.5 170.5
250 4000 9.5 23.5 94.5 292.5
250 7200 7 18 73 225.5
250 11000 6 15.5 61 192
250 15000 5.5 14 55 173.5
300 7300 9.5 36.5 116 286.5
300 13000 7 28.5 91.5 219.5
300 20000 6 24 76 186
300 26000 5.5 22 70 152.5
375 15000 12 39.5 94.5
375 25000 9.5 29 73
375 38000 8 24.5 61
375 50000 7 22.5 55
•
The development length shall be measured from the vent connection to the open air
7.12.5 The collection chamber shall be of suitable size and located at ground level.
7.12.6 The design and arrangement of the system shall be in accordance with established engineering practices.
7.13 HEALTH CARE DRAINAGE SYSTEM
7.13.1 General
The health care drainage system shall comply with applicable drainage and venting requirements specified
in this chapter and witn th1s section.
7.13.2 Special Fixtures and Equipment

The hospital shall be provided with clinical sink, bedpan washer and such other fixtures and equipment for
disposal of bedpan contents and for the cleansing ana disinfection of such fixtures. A clinical sin!< shall not
be considered as a substitute for service sink.

PartS
Building Services
Table 8.7.22
Minimum Diameter and Maximum Length of Individual, Branch,
and Circuit Vents for Horizontal Drainage Branches
Diameter of Slope of
Horizontal Horizontal Maximum Development
Drainage Drainage Length of Vent (m) for Diameter (mm) of Vent Pipe
Branch (mm) Branch (minim)
30 1 40 ISO 165 175 r 1oo 112s 11so 12oo 1 2so
30 20 NL*
40 NL
40 20 NL NL
40 NL NL
50 10 NL NL NL
20 88 NL NL
40 45 115 NL
65 10 54 137 NL
20 29 73 NL NL
40 15 39 NL NL
75 10 -
58 NL NL NL
20 29.5 128 NL NL
40 15 67 NL NL
100 10 -
58 NL NL NL
20 30 94 NL NL
40 14.5 48.5 125 NL
125 10 58 149 NL NL
20 29.5 76 NL NL
40 14 39.5 NL NL
150 10 58 NL NL NL
20 29.5 76 NL NL
40 14 39.5 NL NL
200 10 58 NL NL NL
20 27.5 94.5 NL NL
40 11.5 45.5 125 NL NL
250 10 58 152 NL NL
20 26 73 NL NL
40 9.5 33.5 NL NL
300 10 54.5 NL NL
20 24 128 NL
40 8 61 NL
•
NL means no limit; Actual value in excess of ISO m .
Table 8.7.23
Minimum Width at Bottom of Trench
Depth of Trench (m) Width of Trench (m)

ub to 1.2 Diameter of pipe plus 0.4
A ove 1.2 Diameter of i::>ii::>e i::>lus 0.45
Note: Trench top width shall not be less than 0.75 m for deoths exceeding 0.9 m
7.13.3 Bedpan Washer and Clinical Sink

Bedpan washer and clinical sink shall be connected to soil stacks through a water seal trap. The bedpan
washer with vapour vent connection shall be provided with additional local vent stack. The minimum vent
stack size for bedpan washer shall be in accordance with Table 8.7.24.
Table 8.7.24
Minimum Vent Stack Size
No of Bedpan Washer Diameter (mm)
Up to 3 bedpan washers at different floors 50

4 to 6 bedpan washers 75
7 to 12 beapan washers 100
The bottom of the bedpan local vent stack (except for one bedpan washer) shall be drained indirectly into
sanitary drainage system through traps. The size of the trap and connecting pipe shall be at least the size of
8-172
Chapter 7
the vent stack. At least 6 mm diameter water supply piping shall be taken from each flush supply of each
bedpan washer on the discharge side of vacuum break:er, trapped to form 75 mm or more trap seal and
connected to the local vent stack on each floor.
7.13.4 Sterilizer Vent Stack

The pressure or nonpressure sterilizer shall have vent connection to the sterilizer vent stack. This vent
connection shall be accessible for inspection and cleaning. The size of sterilizer vent stack shall be as follows:
7.13.4.1 Pressure Sterilizers : The minimum diameter for pressure sterilizer vent stack shall be 63 mm . The
stack size for combinations of pressure sterilizer exhaust shall be in accordance with Table 8.7.25.
7.13.4.2 Pressure Instrument Washer Sterilizers: The minimum size of sterilizer vent stack for instrument
washer sterilizer shall be 50 mm for up to two sterilizers. The 75 mm stack will serve up to four sterilizers.
7.13.4.3 Nonpressure Sterilizers : The minimum diameter of nonpressure sterilizer vent stack shall be
50 mm for utensil sterilizer and 38 mm for instrument sterilizer. Multiple installation shall be sized in
accordance with Table 8.7.26.
7.13.4.4 Bedpan Steamers : The diameter for one bedpan steamer shall be 38 mm. The stack size for
combinations shall be in accordance with Table 8.7.26.
Table 8.7.25
Pressure Sterilizer Vent Stack Size
Stack Size Number of Connections Permitted for Different Combination Sizes

( mm) (mm)
19 L 25 I 31 I 38
38 3 - - -
38 - 2 - -
38 - -
1 -
38 2 1 - -
50 6 - - -
50 - 3 - -
50 - - 2 -
50 - - - 1
50 3 2 - -
50 2 1 1 -
50 1 1 - 1
75 15 - - -
75 - 7 - -
75 - - 5 -
75 - - - 3
75 1 5 - 1
75 - 1 2 2
7.13.5 Vent Extension

The termination of vent stack shall be in accordance with Sec 7.9.5.7 and 7.9.6.6.
7.13.6 Special Fixture Drainage

The device, appurtenance and appliance required for special purposes such as refrigerators, ice boxes,
cooling or refrigerating coils etc. shall be protected against bacl<flow with adequate air gap between the
equipment outlet and drainage inlet.
Table 8.7.26
Nonpressure Sterilizer Vent Stack or Bedpan Steamer Sizes
Stack Sizes No of Connections Permitted for Different Connection

(mm) Sizes(mm)
38 I 50
38 1 -
50 2 -
50 - 1
50 1 1
75 4 -
75 - 2
75 2 2
100 8 -
100 - 4
100 4 4

Part 8
Building Services
7.13.7 Mental Health Care Centre

The pipes and traps used in mental health care buildings shall not be exposed and all fixtures shall be
securefy bolted through walls.
7.14 INSPECTION,TESTINGAND COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
7.14.1 Inspection
The new drainage and sanitation system or part of existing system shall not be covered or enclosed or put
into operation until it has been inspected, tested and approved by the Authority. The Authority may
examine the appliances and fittings before their instalfation or during the progress of the work. An
installation of plumbing work,whether new or existing, which is found to be defective or unsafe shall not be
allowed to continue in use unless corrections have been made to comply with the Code requirements.
7.14.2 Testing
7.14.2.1 Drainage and Venting System :The piping of drainage and venting system shall be tested first
with water. The final test of completed drainage and venting system may be done by smoke test. The water
and smoke tests shall be performed as described below:
a) Water Test : The water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either for the whole
systemor part (section) thereof . For tl"ie entire system, allopenings in the piping except the highest
opening shall be closed,and the system filled with water to the point of overflow. For the system to be
tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly plugged except the highest opening of the section
under test and each section shallbe filled with water but no section shall be tested with less than a 3m
head of water. In testing successive sections, at least the upper 3m of the next preceding section shall
j int or pipe in the building (except the top most 3m of the system) s nail have been
be tested so that no o
submitted to a test of less than a 3m head of water. The water shall be kept in the system or in the
portion under test for at least 15 minutes before the inspection starts. The system or the part of the
system under test shall be watertight at all points.
b) Smoke Test : The final test for gas and watertightness of the completed drainage and venting system·
may be performed by smoke test. The test is performed by filling all traps with water and then
introducmg smoke into the system produced by one or more smoke machines. When the smoke
appears at the stack openings on the roof,they shall be closed and a pressure equivalent to 25 mmhead
ofwater shall be built and maintained for 15 minutes before inspection starts.
7.14.2.2 Building Sewer:The Connection between building sewer and public sewer or individual sewage
disposal system shall be closed byinserting a test plu �. The building sewer shall be filled with water under a
pressure of not less than 30 kPa for at least 15 mmutes. The system shall be able to maintain the test
pressure.
7.14.3 Completion Certificate

After the installation of drainage and sanitation system, the licensed plumber shall give a completion
certificate to the authority in a prescribed form (Appendix U) for inspection and testing. After testing,the
Authority will give the final approval (as presented in completion certificate form,in the Appendix U) to use
the system.
7.15 GUIDE TO MAINTENANCE
7.15.1 The drainage and sanitation system shall be maintained in a sanitary and safe operating condition by the
owner or his designated agent. All device or safeguards required by the Code shall be maintained in
working order. .
7.15.2 The following operations shall be carried out during periodical cleaning of a drainage and sanitation system:
a) The covers of inspection chambers and manholes shall be removed and the side benching and channels
shall be scrubbed.
b) All lengths of main and branch drains shall be rodded by means of drain rods and a suitable rubber or
leather plunger.After rodding,the drains shall be thoroughly flushed with clean water.
c) The ladders/rings in deep manholes and the manhole covers shall be painted.
d) All surface water drains shall be cleaned.
e) All subsoil drains shall be examined for obstruction at the open o

j ints.
f) Refuse chute system shall be cleaned.
g) The rain water drainage system with primary drainage piping alone shall be properly maintained to
avoid stagnation of water due to blockages.
8-174
Chapter 7
Related Appendices
Appendix R Application for Permit to Construct Drainage and Sanitation System
Appendix S One-hour Rainfall
Appendix T Design Guideline of a Septic Tank
Appendix U Completion Certificate (Drainage and Sanitation Works)

Part 8
Building Services
8-176
CHAPTER®
Fuel Gas Supply
8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 Scope
8.1.1.1 This chapter provides the requirements for safe use of fuel gas for fuel and lighting purposes in
buildings.
A number of safety requirements regarding the installation and operation of gas piping systems on
consumers' premises are laid down.
8.1.1.2 The requirements of this chapter are aimed at safeguarding life and property in nonindustrial gas
piping systems for use with fuel gases such as natural gas (NG) and liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) in the
vapour phase used for fuel or lighting purposes.
8.1.1.3 This chapter does not cover the safety requirements and rules for gas burning appliances. The
requirements of National Fuel Gas Code of ANSI (1974. edition) and NFPA 58-1989 of the USA shall apply
for such appliances.
8.1.1.4 The requirements of this chapter do not apply to gas piping systems for industrial installation and
applications.
8.1.1.5 This chapter covers the aspects of design, fabrication, installation, test, operation, inspection and
maintenance of gas piping systems from the point of delivery to the connections with each utilization
device. The point of aelivery is defined in this chapter as the outlet of the service regulator or the service
shutoff valve where there is no meter.
8.1.1.6 Piping systems covered here are limited to a maximum operating pressure of 3.45 kPa (14 inches of
water column or f psig).
8.1.1.7 While applying the provisions of this chapter, reference should also be made to the manufacturers'
instructions, gas supply company's regulations and other applicable codes and standards listed in this
chapter or required by the authority having jurisdiction.
Part 8 8-177
Building Services
PartS
Building Services
8.1.2 Terminology
This section p rovides an alphabetical list of all terms used and ap p licable to this chapter of the Code. In case
of any confhct or contradiction between a definition given in this section and that in any other chapter or
part of the Code, the meaning specified in this chapter shall govern for interpretation of the provisions of
this chapter.
APPLIANCE:Any device which utilizes gas to produce heat, light, power, refrigeration or air-conditioning.
BRANCH LINE: Gas piping which carries gas from a supply line to the appliance.
BURNER :A device for the final conveyance of the gas or a mixture of gas and air, to the combustion zone.
CONCEALED GAS PIPING : Gas piping, which, when in place in a finished building would require
removal of permanent construction to gain access to the piping.
CONSUMER'S CONNECTION:Piping tapped on riser to supply each individual consumer.
CYLINDER: A portable container constructed in accordance with a recognized standard/ code such as the
ASME code, used for transporting or storing LPG. The maximum size permitted is 454 kg water capacity.
DIVERSITY FACTOR:Ratio of the maximum probable demand to the maximum possible demand.
DRIP : The container placed at a low point in a piping system to collect condensate from which it may be
removed.
EXPOSED PIPING: Gas piping which will be in view in the finished structure.
GAS FITTER :An employee of the gas supply company authorized to work on gas piping
system/installation.
GAS PIPING SYSTEM : Piping from the meter, or service regulator when there is no meter, to an appliance
or appliances.
LABELED : Equipment or materials to which a label, symbol or other certifying mark of a nationally
r.ecognized testmg laboratory has been attached that maintains periodic inspection of production of labeled
equipment or materials and by whose labeling the manufacturer indicates compliance with nationally
recognized standards or the conduct of tests to determine suitable usage in a specific manner.
LISTED: Equipment or materials included in a list published by a nationally recognized testing laboratory,
that maintains periodic inspection of production of listed equipment or materials and whose listing states
either that the equipment or material meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested and found
suitable for use in a specific manner.
METER: An instrument installed to measure the volume of gas delivered through it.
METER SET ASSEMBLY : The piping and fitting installed by the gas supply company to connect the inlet
side of the meter to the gas service and to connect the outlet side of the meter to the customer's house or
yard piping.
PILOT:A small flame which is utilized to ignite the gas at the main burner or burners.
PIPING : It refers to either pipe or tubing or both. Pipe refers to a rigid conduit of iron, steel, copper, brass,
aluminium or plastic. Tubing refers to a semi-rigid conduit of copper, steel, aluminium or plastic.
PRESSURE REGULATOR: A device designed to reduce and limit the gas pressure coming from the supply
main and to maintain it essentially constant downstream. The regulated Rressure shall correspond to that
of the gas appliances used. The device may be either adjustable or convertiole.
PURGE:To free a gas conduit of air, or gas or a mixture of gas and air.
QUALIFIED INSTALLING AGENCY : Any individual, firm, corporation, or company which either in
person or through a representative is engaged in and is responsible for the installation or replacement of gas
piping on the outlet side of the meter or of the service regulator when there is no meter, or the connection,
mstallation or repair of gas appliances, who is experienced in such work, familiar with all precautions
required and has complied wHh all the requirements such as qualification, registration, licensing etc. of the
Authority.
RISER : Piping, usually vertical on most of its length which supplies gas from the service pipe to the
different floors of the building.
SERVICE PIPE : The pipe which brin�s the gas from the gas main to the riser in the case of multi-storied
building or the meter in the case of an mdividual house.
8-178
ChapterS
Fuel Gas Supply
SERVICE SHUTOFF VALVE: A device that will shut off the gas supply to the controlled, source of
burner(s) in the event ignition fails. This device may stop the flow of gas to main burner(s) only or to the
pilot(s) and main burner(s) under its supervision.
VALVE : A device used in piping to control the gas supply to any section of a system of piping or to an
appliance.
VENT PIPE : A safety device to which certain regulators are connected to release to the atmosphere gas that
may escape from the normal circuit when some part of the system is damaged or malfunctions or a safety
valve opens.
WATER HEATER: An appliance for supplying hot water for domestic purposes other than for space
heating.
8.1.3 General Precautions

8.1.3.1 Tum Gas Off: All gas piping work or gas appliance installation shall be performed with the gas
turned off to eliminate hazards from leakage of gas.
8.1.3.2 Notification of Interrupted Service: It shall be the responsibility of the installing agency, when
the gas supply is to be turned off, to notify all affected consumers.
8.1.3.3 Before Turning Gas Off: Before turning off the gas to premises for the purpose of installation,
repair, test, inspection, replacement or maintenance of gas piping or appliances, all burners shall be turned
off. When two or more consumers are served from the same supply system, precautions shall be taken to
ensure that only supply to the concerned consumer is turned off.
8.1.3.4 Checking for Gas Leaks: Soap and water solution or other material approved for the purpose,
shall be used in locating gas leakage. Use of matches, candles, flames or other sources of ignition shall be
prohibited for this purpose.
8.1.3.5 Use of Lights: Artificial illumination used in connection with a search for gas leakage shall be
restricted to battery operated flashlights (preferably of the safety tYJ>e) or approved safety lamps. In
searching for leaks, electric switches should not be operated. If electric lights are already turned on, they
should not be turned off.
8.1.3.6 Working Alone : An individual shall not work alone in any situation where working practice
desires that two or more persons are necessary to carry out the work safely.
8.1.3.7 Handling Liquid from Drips : Liquid which is removed from a drip in an existing gas piping shall
be handled with proper precautions, and shall not be left on the consumers' premises.
8.1.3.8 No Smoking : When working on piping which contains or has contained gas, smoking shall be
prohibited.
8.1.3.9 Handling of Flammable Liquids : Flammable liquids used by the installer shall be handled with
pro p er precautions and shall not be left within the premises from the end of one working day to the
beginning of the next.
8.1.3.10 Work Interruption :When interruptions in work occur, the system shall be left in a safe and
satisfactory condition.
8.1.3.11 Certain requirements related to work on the gas supply system are listed in Appendix V.
8.1.4 Notification of Completion

8.1.4.1 When regulations so require, the completion of installation shall be notified to the gas supply
company or the Authority.
8.2 GAS PIPING INSTALLATION
8.2.1 Piping Plan and Approval

8.2.1.1 Plans for installation of gas piping system and gas appliances shall be ·prepared in accordance with
requirements of the gas supply company and the Authority. Necessary approvals shall be obtained from the
gas supply company and the Authority before installation of the gas pipmg system and the appliances. (See
Appendix W).
8.2.1.2 The plan shall include proposed location of the piping, layout and sketch of the piping system,
sizes of different branches, and present and future gas demands.
8.2.1.3 Approved plans shall bear the authorized seal and signatures of the gas supply company and the
Authority.

Part 8
Building Services
8.2.2 Size of Piping to Gas Appliances

8.2.2.1 Gas piping shall be sized to ensure adequate supply of gas to meet the maximum demand without
und':le pressure drop between the meter, or service regu1ator when there is no meter, and the appliance or
appliances.
8.2.2.2 In order to select the gas pipe sizes the following factors shall be considered:
a) Allowable pressure drop from meter, or service regulator when there is no meter, to appliance
b) Maximum gas consumption to be provided
c) Length of piping and number of fittings
d) Specific gravity of the gas
e) Diversity factor
8.2.2.3 The size of each gas piping system shall be determined by standard engineering methods
acceptable to the gas supply company and the Authority.
8.2.2.4 Gas pipes smaller than 12 mm in diameter shall not be used.
8.2.2.5 Straight lengths of piping shall be used as far as practicable. Where there are bends in the pipeline,
these should nave a radius of at least five times the diameter of the pipe or as approved by the gas supply
company.
8.2.3 Acceptable Piping Materials

8.2.3.1 Piping material shall be one of the materials listed in Table 8.8.1 conforming to the corresponding
standards, or other materials as may be approved by the gas supply company or the Authority.
Table 8.8.1
Fuel Gas Pipe Materials
Material Standards
Steel pi e
b ASTM A53; ASTM A106
Steel tu ing ASTM A539; ASTM A254
Wrought steel and wrought iron pipe ANSI B36.10
Ductile Iron Pipe ANSI A21.52; ASTM A377
Copper or copper-alloy pi e
b ASTM B42; ASTM B302
Copper or copper-alloy tu ing (Type K or L) ASTM B75; ASTM B88; ASTM B280
Brass pipe ASTM B43
Al mrum um-alloy pe and tubing
� ASTM B210; ASTM B 241
Plastic pipe and tu mg ASTM D2513; ASTM D2517
8.2.3.2 Fittings shall be of an approved type and material for gas piping systems accepted to the gas
supply company. Bushings shall not be employed.
8.2.3.3 All joints and connections shall be of an approved type and material for gas piping sy stems
acceptable to the gas supply company. Joints and connections shall be gas tight at the test pressure. (see Sec
8.2.9.3 and 8.2.9.4)
8.2.3.4 Flexible metal pipes or heavy rubber pressure tubing may be used only for direct connections to
burners.
8.2.4 Fabrication of Piping for Installation

8.2.4.1 Gas pipe or tubing and fittings shall be clear and free from cutting burrs and defects in structure or
threading, and shall be thoroughly brushed with chips and scale blown. Defects in pipe or tubing or fittings
shall not be repaired when defective pipe, tubing or fittings have been identified. The defective material
shall be replaced.
8.2.4.2 Pipe, tubing, fittings and valves removed from any existing installation shall not be used again
until they nave been thoroughly cleaned, inspected and ascertained to be equivalent to new material.
8.2.4.3 Metallic pipes with threads which are damaged or defective shall not be used.
8.2.4.4 Metallic pipes shall be threaded in accordance with approved standard acceptable to the gas
supply company.
8.2.4.5 When used in a corrosive environment, metallic pipes and fittings shall be protected with a
corrosion resistant coating.
8.2.4.6 Joints and joining compounds if used in LPG installation shall be resistant to the action of liquefied
petroleum gas.
8-180
Chapter 8
Fuel Gas Supply
8.2.5 Installation of Gas Pipes

8.2.5.1 Installation, repair and replacement of gas piping or appliances shall be performed only by a
qualified installing agency or gas fitter.
8.2.5.2 Protection of Piping: Pif'ing shall be buried to a sufficient depth or covered in a manner so as to
protect the piping from physical aamage. Measures should be taken to protect the piping from physical
oamage when it passes tnrough flower beds, shrub beds and other such cultivated areas.
8.2.5.3 Protection Against Corrosion : Gas piping in contact with earth or other materials which will
corrode the piping shall be protected against corrosion in an approved manner. When dissimilar metals are
joined underground, an insulated coupling shall be used. Metallic piping shall not be laid in contact with
cinder or ash.
8.2.5.4 Piping Through Foundation Wall: Underground gas piping, when installed below grade through
the outer foundation or basement wall of a building, shall oe either encased in a sleeve or otherwise
protected against corrosion. The piping or sleeve shall be sealed at the foundation or basement wall to
prevent entry of gas or water.
8.2.5.5 Piping Underground beneath Buildings : If the laying of gas piping underground beneath
buildings cannot be avoided, the piping shall be encased in a conduit. The conauit shall extend into a
normally usable and accessible portion of the building and, at the oint where the conduit terminates in the
r
building, the space between tne conduit and the gas piping shal be sealed to prevent the entrance of gas
from any possible leakage. The conduit shall extend at feast 100 mm outside the building, be vented above
grade to tne outside and be installed in such a way as to prevent the entrance of water or moisture.
8.2.5.6 Building Structure : The building shall not be weakened by the installation of any gas piping.
Existing beams or joists shall not be cut or notched.
8.2.5.7 Piping su ports: Gas piping in buildings, shall be supported with pipe hooks, metal pipe straps,
y
bands or hangers o an approvea type and matenal suitable for the size of p1pmg, and located at specif1ed
intervals so tnat the piping cannot be moved accidentally from the installed position. Gas piping shall not be
supported by other piping.
8.2.5.8 Piping Entrance to Buildings : When gas ipe enters a building through a wall or floor of masonry
f
or concrete, it shall be sealed against the entrance o water, moisture or gas.
8.2.5.9 Piping in Floors : Piping in solid floors, such as concrete, shall be laid in channels in the floor
suitably coverea to provide access to the piping with a minimum damage to the building.
8.2.5.10 Changes in direction of gas pipe shall be made by the use of approved fittings, factory bends or
field bends. Field bends shall be made by employing approved procedures and equipment.
8.2.5.11 Gas piping inside any building shall not be run in or through an air duct, chimney or gas vent,
ventilating duct or elevator shaft. Gas iping shall not be taken through inaccessible or conceafed areas
j
where its condition cannot be inspecte and accumulation of gas due to undetected leakage may create a
dangerous condition.
8.2.5.12 Provide Drips where Necessary :A drip shall be provided at any point in the line of pipe where
condensate may collect. When condensation is excessive, a drip should be provided at the outlet of the
meter. This drip should be so installed as to constitute a trap wherein an accumulation of condensate will
shutoff the flow of gas before it will run back into the meter. All drips installed shall be readily accessible to
permit cleaning, inspection or emptying.
8.2.5.13 Cap All Outlets: Each outlet, including a valve or cock outlet, shall be firmly closed gas tight with
a threaded plug or cap immediately after installation and shall be left closed until an appliance is connected
thereto. Similarly, wnen an appliance is disconnected from an outlet and the outlet is not to be used again
immediately, it shall be firmly closed gas-tight. The outlet shall not be closed with tin caps, wooden plugs,
corks or by other improvised means or objects. Use of a listed quick disconnect device is acceptable.
8.2.5.14 Prohibited Devices : Any device that will reduce the flow cross-sectional area or otherwise
obstruct the free flow of gas shall not be inserted or placed inside the gas pipe or fittings.
8.2.5.15 Branch Pipe Connection : All branch pipe connections and outlets shall be taken from the top or
sides of horizontal lines and not from the bottom.
8.2.5.16 Electrical Bonding and Grounding : The gas piping shall be electrically continuous throughout its
length and earthed except in sections where catnod1c protection system is used for protection against
corrosion. The piping shall not be used to ground any electrical equipment.
8.2.5.17 Distance from Electrical Wiring :The distance between the gas piping and electrical wiring system
shall be at least 60 mm. They shall be fixed to prevent contact due to movement. The gas piping sl:iould be
installed below the electrical wiring.

Part 8
Building Services
8.2.5.18 Distance from Steam Piping :The gas piping and steam piping, if installed parallel, shall be at
least 150 mm apart. The gas piping should preferably be installed below the steam piping.
8.2.5.19 Gas Piping to be Graded : All gas piping shall be graded not less than 1 in 750 to prevent
accumulation of condensate or liquids in the line. All horizontal lines shall grade to risers, and from the
risers, to the meter, or service regulator when there is no meter, or to the appliance.
8.2.5.20 The gas piping shall be painted red in order to differentiate it from other piping. Where the piping
is exposed to sun rays, it shall be painted silver gray.
8.2.5.21 Documentation shall be maintained for all gas supply installations. (See Appendix W).
8.2.6 Pressure Regulators

8.2.6.1 Where the pressure of gas supplied to domestic installation or other low pressure gas piping
systems in buildings is in excess of 3.45 kPa, a gas pressure regulator of approved type and size shaH be
installed in the service pipe of each such system to prevent pressure in excess of 3.45 kPa from being
introduced into such a building piping. If the buildmg pipe is of welded construction the pressure
regulator may be located upstream of the gas meter in each consumer's premises. In these cases, the gas
pressure in the piping downstream of the gas pressure regulator shall not exceed 3.45 kPa.
8.2.6.2 If installed inside a building, the regulator shall comply with the following :
a) If any of the diarhragms of the regulator ruptures, the gas shall be directed to an outlet vent pipe made
of brass or plastic in order to vent the gas out of the building. The vent pipe shall be installed about 1
m above the topmost story of the building in open air. Measures shall be taken to maintain the vent
pipe free from any kind of obstruction to ensure spontaneous discharge of the escaping gas to the
atmosphere. .
b) If the gas pressure at the outlet of the regulator falls below 50 per cent of the operating gas pressure or
rises above twice the operating pressure, the gas supply to the pressure regulator shall shut off.
c) In the case of malfunctioning of this safety device, a supplementary device shall connect the low
pressure circuit to the vent pipe as soon as the exit pressure reaches 3.45 kPa.
8.2.6.3 The gas supply company shall ensure that the heating value and supply pressure of gas shall not
exceed the stated va1ues for the type of gas being supplied.
8.2.7 Service Shutoff Valves

8.2.7.1 Service shutoff valves shall be provided on all new services including replacements and shall be
installed in a readily accessible location.
8.2.7.2 Service shutoff valves shall be located upstream of the meter if there is no regulator or upstream of
the regulator if there is one.
8.2.7.3 All gas piping installation operating at pressure greater than 3.45 kPa shall be provided with
shutoff valve of approved type installed on the service pipe outside the building.
8.2.7.4 Underground shutoff valves shall be located in a covered durable kerb box, manhole, vault, or
stand pi� e which is designed to permit ready operation of the valve. The covers so provided shall be clearly
marked 'GAS".
8.2.7.5 Every gas outlet shall have an individual shutoff valve. The shutoff valve shall be accessible and
adjacent to the appliance.
·
8.2.8 Existing Work

8.2.8.1 Nothing herein shall prohibit the continued use of an existing gas piping system without further
inspection or test unless the Authority has reason to believe that defects which make the system dangerous
to fife or property exist.
8.2.9 Inspection of Services

8.2.9.1 No person shall use or permit the use of a new system or an extension of an old system of gas
piping in a building or structure before the same has been inspected and tested to ensure that the system is
safe and a certificate has been issued by the Authority. (See Appendix W).
8.2.9.2 Test of Piping for Tightness : Before any system of gas piping is finally put in service, it shall be
carefully tested to assure that it is gas tight and safe . Where any part of the system is to be enclosed or
concealed, this test should precede the work of closing in. To test for tightness, the piping may be filled in
with fuel gas, air or inert gas, but not with any other gas or liquid. Oxygen shall never be used.
8.2.9.3 Before appliances are connected, the piping systems shall be tested at a pressure of at least 155
mm mercury for a period not less than 10 minutes without showing any pressure drop. The source of
pressure shall be isolated before the pressure tests are performed.
8-182
Chapter 8
Fuel Gas Supply
8.2.9.4 Systems for undiluted LPG shall withstand the pressure test in accordance with the Sec 8.2.9.3
above or, when appliances are connected to the piping system, shall be tested at a pressure of not less than
255 mm nor more than 360 mm water column for a period of not less than 10 minutes without showing any
pressure drop. The source of pressure shall be isolated before the pressure tests are performed.
8.2.9.5 The Authority shall, within a reasonable time after being requested to do so, inspect and test the
gas piping system that is ready for such inspection and test. If the system is found to comply with the
requirements of inspection and test as laid down, it shall issue the certificate.
8.2.9.6 It shall be unlawful to supply gas in a building before the required certificate has been issued (see
Sec 8.2.9.5 above), excel?t that the Authority may give temporary permission for a limited time to supply and
use gas before such an mstallation has been fully completed and the certificate issued.
8.2.10 Check of Leakage

8.2.10.1 Close All Gas Outlets : Before supplying gas under pressure into any piping, all openings and
outlets from which gas can escape shall be closed.
8.2.10.2 Check for Leakage : No matches, flames or other sources of ignition shall be used to check for gas
leakage from meters, piping or appliance. Checking for gas leakage with soap and water solution shall be
recommended (see Sec 8.1.3.4 and 8.1.3.5 also). . .
8.2.10.3 Checking for Leakage with Meter : Immediately after supplying gas into the piping, the system
shall be checked to ascertain that no gas is escaping. This may be checked by carefully watching the test dial
of the meter to determine whether the gas is Bowing through the meter. Under no circumstances shall a
leakage test be performed using a gas meter without ascertaining the operability of the meter immediately
prior to such test.
8.2.10.4 Checking of Leakage not using a Meter : This can be performed by attaching to an appliance
orifice, a manometer or equivalent device (gauge) so that it can be read in increments of 2.5 mm water
column and momentarily turning on the gas supply and observing the gauging device for pressure drop
with gas supply shutoff. No drop in pressure shall occur during a period of 3 minutes thereafter.
8.2.10.5 When Leakage is Indicated : If the meter test hand moves or a pressure drop on the gauge occurs ,
all appliances or outlets supplied through the systems shall be checked to ensure that they are shut off and
do not leak. If they are shut off firmly there is a leak in the piping system. The gas supply shall be shut off
until the necessary repairs have been made, after which the test specified in Sec 8.2.10.3 or 8.2.10.4 above
shall be repeated.
8.2.11 Purging
8.2.11.1 Purging All Gas Piping : After piping has been checked, all gas piping shall be fully purged.
Piping shall not be purged into the combustion chamber of an appliance. A suggested method for purging
the gas piping to an appliance is to disconnect the pilot piping at the outlet of the pilot valve.
8.2.11.2 Lighting Pilots : After the gas piping has been fully purged, all appliances shall be purged and
the pilots lighted. The installing agency shall satisfy itself that all pipmg and appliances are fully purged and
safe for useoefore leaving the premises.
8.2.12 Rules for Turning Gas On

8.2.12.1 A person, who is an employee of the gas supply company and authorized by the gas supply
company, shall turn on the gas at a service shutoff valve or at any valve that controls the suppfy of gas to
more than one consumer.
8.2.12.2 Gas shall not be turned on at any meter valve without specific permission from the gas supply
company or the Authority if any of the following conditions are found:
a) If the gas piping, appliances or meter supply through the meter valve are known to leak or otherwise be
defechve;
b) If required inspection of the piping or appliance has not been performed;
c) If the gas supply company or the Authority has requested that the gas be left turned off;
d) If the meter valve is found shutoff for some reason not known to the gas fitter.
8.2.12.3 Gas shall not be turned on at any branch line valve if any of tfi.e conditions listed in Sec 8.2.12.2
above are found. Where a branch line valve is found closed, a gas fitter shall again turn the gas on at such
valve only if measures to prevent leakage are taken and no other unsafe conditions are created thereby.
8.2.12.4 Gas shall not be turned on at either the meter valve or the service line unless all gas keys/ cocks or
valves installed on all outlets in the piping system are closed or all outlets in the piping system are capped
or plugged.

PartS
Building Services
8.2.13 Rules for Shutting Off the Gas

8.2.13.1 The gas fitter shall put the gas off to any appliance, pipe or piping system and shall leave the gas
turned off, until the cause for interruption has been removed m any one of cases mentioned below:
a) If ordered to do so by the Authority;
b) If leakage of gas is found, which appears to be sufficient to cause fire, explosion or asphyxiation;
c) If an installation is found to be such as to seriously endanger life and property;
d) If any condition exists which threatens interruption of gas supply that may cause burner failure or
otherwise lead to dangerous conditions.
8.2.13.2 Before turning off the gas at the meter, for the purpose of installation, repair, replacement, test,
inspection or maintenance of piping or appliances, all burners and pilot valves on the premises supplied
with gas through the meter snail be turned off and the meter test hand observed for a sufficient length of
time to ascertain that there is no flow of gas through the meter. Where there is more than one meter on the
premises, the desired meter is to be turnea off by tal<ing proper precautions.
8.2.14 Provision for Meter Location

8.2.14.1 The meter location shall be such that the meter can be easily read and the connections are readily
accessible for servicing. Location, space requirements, dimensions and type of installation shall be
acceptable to the gas supply company and be approved by the same.
8.2.14.2 Gas piping at multiple meter installations shall be clearly marked by a metal tag or other
permanent means provided by the installing agency, designating the building or the part of tne building
being supplied.
8.3 USE OF LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS (LPG)
8.3.1 The cylinders used for the storage and transportation of liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) shall conform to the
standards approved by the Autnority.
8.3.2 The handling, use, storage and transportation of liquefied petroleum gas in cylinders exceeding 500 ml of
water capacity shall be done in accordance with the standaras approvea by the Authority and the guidelines
of the gas supply company.
8.3.3 LPG Cylinder Installation

8.3.3.1 Personnel engaged and responsible for the installation of cylinders, equipment and piping should
understand the characteristics of LPG and be trained in good practice of handling, installing, inspection, test
and maintenance of installation.
8.3.3.2 The joining compounds used in the piping system shall be resistant to the action of liquefied
petroleum gas. Hemp and similar materials shall not be used at the joint. In any joint in which the thread
provides a gas tight seal, joining compound shall be used on the male thread.
8.3.3.3 Fire extinguishers of dry power or carbon dioxide type and water and sand filled buckets are
recommended to be kept near the LPG cylinder installations including premises where they are stored. The
guidelines of the LPG supply company and the Authority shall be followed in this respect.
8.3.3.4 Liquefied petroleum gas shall not be transferred from the cylinders in which it is supplied to any
other container.
8.3.4 Cylinder Location

8.3.4.1 Stationary Installations
a) Stationary installation not exceeding 40 kg of LPG may be installed indoors on any floor.
Recommended minimum floor area per installation is 5 m2•
b) Stationary installations each not exceeding 40 kg of LPG may be installed indoors on any floor within
the same workspace provided the minimum distance between two such installations is 3 m.
Recommended minimum floor area per installation is 5 m2 and the total quantity of all such
installations should not exceed 200 kg.
c) Stationary installation not exceeding 80 kg of LPG may be installed indoors on any floor provided the
floor area per installation is not less than 12m2•
d) Stationary installations each not exceeding 80 kg of LPG may be installed indoors on any floor and
within tne same workspace provided the minimum distance between two such installations is 3 m.
Recommended floor area per installation is 12m2 and the total quantity of all such installations should
not exceed 200 kg.
8-184
ChapterS
Fuel Gas Supply
e) Stationary installation not exceeding 320 kg of LPG may be installed indoors in an enclosed section of a
building or a room reserved exclusively for this purpose and ventilated at low level directly to the
outside air.
f) Stationary installation above 320 kg (200 kg in case provision as in (e) above is not possible) but not
exceeding 1000 kg shall be installed outdoors on the ground level only. A minimum distance of 3 m
shall be maintained between such an installation and any building, public place, roadways and other
surroundings. The installation shall be protected against weathering by sun, rain, etc. and from
tampering by unauthorized persons. A suitable shade of approved type and material may be provided
for the purpose. Adequate ventilation at ground level to the outside a1r shall be provided. The distance
between any two such installations shall be 3 m unless separated by a solid wall of fire resistant
material up to at least 1 m above the height of the manifold valve.
g) Cylinders shall be placed upright with the valve uppermost.
h) Cylinders shall not be installed below ground level and shall be at least 1 m away from drains, culverts
or entrances and openings leading to cellars and other depressions in which gas might accumulate.
i) Cylinders shall be placed on a firm and dry base such as concrete or brick floor. For outdoor
installations the base shall be elevated.
·
j) Cylinders shall not be placed close to steam pipes or any other source of heat and shall be protected
from the weather and direct sun. Cylinders sha!I be placed at a distance of 3 m from any other source of
heat which is likely to raise the temperature of cylinders above the room temperature unless separated
by metal sheet or masonry partition.
k) When cylinders are being connected or disconnected, there shall be no open flame or any source of
ignition near by and smoking shall be prohibited.
8.3.4.2 Portable Installations : When portability of cylinders is desired, the following requirements shall
bernet:
a) The sum total capacity of the cylinders connected to each manifold shall not exceed 80 kg of LPG. The
total quantity of gas thus installed in a workspace shall not exceed 200 kg.
b) The regulator shall be connected directly to the cylinder valve or to a manifold which shall be connected
to the cylinder valve by means of rigid connections to have the regulator firmly secured.
c) At any time the total quantity of gas at portable installations shall not exceed the limits in proportion to
the floor area specified in Sec 8.3.4.1 (a) to (d).
8.3.5 Manifolds and Pressure Regulators

8.3.5.1 If pressure regulators, manifold headers, automatic change over devices, etc. are connected to
cylinders by flexible or semi-flexible connectors, they shall be rigidly secured. Copper tube pigtails and
reinforced high pressure hoses are considered to be flexible or semi-flexible connectors for such application.
8.3.5.2 Pressure regulator fitted with a safety valve shall be either :

a) installed in the open air, or
b) vented to the open air by means of a metal vent pipe connected to the safety valve discharge line.
8.3.5.3 Precautions shall be taken that safety valve outlets do not get blocked with dust or other
substances.
8.3.5.4 Suitable line shutoff valves shall be provided with each appliance or burner when more than one
appliance are connected to the gas supply. Bofh ends of the connection to portable appliances shall be firmly
attached with clips. These sha!I be resistant to the action of LPG.
8.3.5.5 The manifold headers which do not have to be taken off in normal use should be braced or welded
using material conforming to approved standards and having a melting point not less than 540° C.
8.3.5.6 Instructions to Consumers : Necessary instructions dealing with the following aspects shall be
supplied by the LPG supply company to each consumer in the form of a manual:
a) operation of the whole system;

b) how to recognize and detect gas leakage;
c) action to be taken in case of leakage;
d) action to be taken in case of fire; and
e) action to be taken in case of damage to, or failure of any part of the installation.
8.3.6 For detailed information regarding installation of LPG cylinders in commercial, educational and
institutional premises, the LPG supply company shall be consulted.

Part 8
Building Services
8.4 INSTALLATION OF SPECIFIC APPLIANCES
8.4.1 General
8.4.1.1 Gas appliances, accessories, and equipment shall be "Approved". Listed and labeled appliances are
acceptable.
8.4.1.2 It shall be ascertained whether the appliance has been designed for use with the gas to which it
will be connected. No attempt shall be made to convert the appliance from the gas specified on the rating
plate for use with a different gas without consulting the gas supply company or the appliance manufacturer
for complete instructions.
8.4.1.3 Safety shutoff devices of the complete shutoff type shall be installed on manually controlled water
heaters and automatically controlled appliances, except domestic ranges.
8.4.1.4 Gas appliances shall not be installed in any location where flammable vapours are likely to be
present or accumulate, unless the design, operation and installation are such as to eliminate the possibility
of ignition of the flammable vapours.
8.4.1.5 Appliances shall be vented in accordance with the instructions of their manufacturers or the
procedures of the gas supply company.
8.4.1.6 Gas appliances shall be firmly supported. They shall not exert undue strain on the connected
piping and connections.
8.4.1.7 The installing agency shall conform with the appliance manufacturer's specific recommendations in
completing an instalfation that will provide satisfactory performance and serviceability. The installing
agency shall also leave the manufacturer's installation, operating and maintenance instructions in a readily
accessible location on the premises for reference and guidance of the Authority, servicemen, and the
consumer or operator.
8.4.1.8 Every gas appliance shall be located with respect to building construction and other equipment so
as to permit ready access to the appliance. Sufficient clearance shaH be maintained to permit cleaning of
heating surfaces, replacement of parts, adjustment and maintenance.
8.4.1.9 Gas appliances snail be connected by one of the following:

a) Rigid pipe
b) Semi-rigid tubing extensions of a tubing/piping system
c) Listed appliance connectors
d) Semi-rigid tubing in lengths up to 2m that are in the same room as the appliance
e) Listed gas hose connectors as approved.
The connector or tubing shall be protected against physical damages.
Aluminum-alloy tubing and connectors shall be factory coated to protect against external corrosion where
they are in contact with masonry, plaster or insulation or are subject to frequent wettings by such liquids as
water (except rain water), detergents or sewage.
8.4.1.10 Any appliance connected to a pipine; system shall have an accessible manual shutoff valve installed
upstream of the union or connector and within 2m of the appliance it serves.
8.4.1.11 Appliance connectors may be connected to the building piping by means of a listed quick
disconnect device, and when installed indoors, a manual shutoff valve shall be installed upstream of the
quick disconnect device.
8.4.1.12 Electrical connection between gas appliances and the building wiring shall conform to the accepted
electrical code .
8.4.1.13 No devices using or dependent upon electricity shall be used to control or ignite a gas supply if of
such type that failure of the electricity would result in the escape of unburned gas, or in failure to reduce
the supply of gas under conditions which would normally result in its reduction, unless other means are
provided to prevent the creation of dangerous temperatures, pressures or the release of gas.
8.4.2 Cookers/Burners
8.4.2.1 A listed (labeled) cooking appliance or accessory may be installed in accordance with its listing
and the manufacturer's instruction.
8.4.2.2 Listed cookers/burners when installed on combustible floors shall be set on their own bases or legs
firmly and. shall be installed in accordance with their listing and the manufacturer's instructions. In absence
of clearance information, the appliances shall be installea in consultation with the gas supply company.
The clearances shall not interfere with the flow of combustion air, accessibility for operation and servicing.
8-186
Chapter 8
Fuel Gas Supply
.
8.4.2.3 f.
Unlisted ap liances shall be installed with at least a 150 mm clear �nce at the back and sides to
combustible matena . Combustible floors under unlisted appliances shall be protected in an approved
manner.
8.4.2.4 Appliances shall have a vertical clearance above the cooking top of not less than 750 mm to
combustibfe material or metal cabinets.
8.4.2.5 Appliances shall be installed so that the top or oven racks are level.
8.4.3 Illuminating Appliances

8.4.3.1 Listed (labeled) illuminating appliances shall be installed in accordance with their listing and
8.4.3.2 Unlisted illuminating appliances may be used when acceptable to the Authority and they shall be
installed in accordance with the guidelines of the Authority.
8.4.3.3 Illuminating appliances designed for wall or ceiling mounting shall be firmly attached to
substantial structures in such a manner that they are not dependent on the gas piping for support.
8.4.3.4 Illuminating a p pliance designed for post mounting shall be firmly attached to a post which has
proper strength and rigidity. Posts shall be rigialy erected.
8.4.4 Water Heaters

8.4.4.1 Water heaters, with the exception of those having direct vent system shall not be installed in
bathrooms, bedrooms or any occupied rooms normally kept closed.
8.4.4.2 Water heaters shall be located as close as practicable to the chimney or gas vent. They should be
located so as to provide short runs of piping to fixtures. "
8.4.4.3 Listed (labeled) water heaters shall be installed in accordance with their listing and manufacturer's
instructions for clearance. Unlisted water heaters shall be installed with a clearance of 300 mrn on all sides
and rear and they shall be installed with the approval of the Authority following its guidelines.
8.4.4.4 Water heaters shall be connected in a manner to permit observation, inspection, maintenance and
servicing.
8.4.4.5 Water heaters shall be fitted with limiting switches for pressure and temperature and also with
temperature, pressure and vacuum relief devices in accordance with nationally recognized standards for
sucfi devices.
Related Appendices
Appendix V Work on the Gas Supply System
AppendixW Documentation for the Piping Installation

PartS
Building Services
8-188
Appendices
APPENDIXA Maximum Demand and Diversity
APPENDIXB Useful Tables Relating to Conductor Sizes
APPENDIXC Completion Certificate Form (Electrical Works)
APPENDIXD Relationship of Weighting Curves for Sound Levels
APPENDIXE Recommended Optimum Reverberation Time for Assembly Buildings
APPENDIXF STC Ratings of Walls and Floors
APPENDIXG Air Traffic Noise Levels
APPENDIXH Frequency Values and Noise Levels of Some Common Sources
APPENDIX I Typical Noise Levels in Free-Flowing Road Traffic
APPENDIXJ Average Air-home Sound Insulation of Common Constructions
APPENDIXK Recommended Background Noise Criteria and NC Curves
APPENDIXL Particulars of Lifts, Escalators and Moving Walks
APPENDIXM Format for Particulars of Lifts, Escalators and Moving Walks
APPENDIXN Application for Permit to Construct Water Supply and Distribution System
APPENDIXP Sizing of Cold Water Supply and Distribution Piping
APPENDIXQ Completion Certificate (Water Supply Works)
Part 8 8-189
Building Services
PartS
Building Services
APPENDIXR Application for Permit to Construct Drainage and Sanitation System
APPENDIXS One-hour Rainfall
APPENDIXT Design Guideline of a Septic Tank
APPENDIXU Completion Certificate (Drainage and Sanitation Works)
APPENDIXV Work on the Gas Supply System
APPENDIXW Documentation for the Piping Installation
8-190
Appendices
Appendix A
Maximum Demand and Diversity
Some information on the determination of the maximum demand for an electrical installation are provided in this
appendix. It also includes some notes on the application of allowances for diversity. It is impossible however, to
specify the appropriate allowances for diversity Ior every type of installation since determination of such allowances
calls for special knowledge and experience. The figures shown in Table Al are therefore, intended to act as guideline.
The current demand of a final circuit is determined by summing the current demands of all points of utilization and
equipment in the circuit. Typical values to be used for this summation are given in Table A2. ror blocks of residential
dwellings, large hotels, and industrial and large commercial premises, allowances are to be assigned by a competent
engineer.
The current demand of a circuit suppl ing a number of final circuits may be assessed by applying the allowances for
r
diversity given in Table Al to the tota current demand of all the equipment supplied by that circuit. In the table, the
allowances are appraised either as percentages of the current demand or, where followed by the letters f.l., as
percentages of the rated full load current of the current using equipment. After the design currents for all the circuits
have been determined, enabling the conductor sizes to be chosen, it is necessary to check that the limitation on
voltage drop is met.
Table A 1
Allowances for Diversity
Purpose of final circuit Type of Premises

fed from conductors or Ind i v i d u a l household Small sho s, stores,
a Small hotels, boarding
switchgear to w h ic h installations, including offices an business houses, guest houses,
diversity applies dwellings of a block premises etc.
1. Lighting 66% of total current 90% of total current 75% of total current
demand demand demand
2. Cooking appliances 10 amperes + 30% f.l. of 100% f.l. of !ar est r 100% f.l . of lar estf.
connected cooking a pli-r appliance + 80% f. . of appliance + 80% f . . of
ances in excess o 10 2nd lar est appliance +
f 2na lar est appliance +
f
am eres + 5 amperes if
� 60% f. . of remaining 60% f. . of remaining
soc et outlet is incor- appliances appliances
porated in unit.
3. Motors (other than 100% f.l. of largest motor 100% f.l. of largest motor
lift motors which are ---
+ 80% f.l. of 2nd largest + 50% f.l. of remaining
subject to special motor + 60% f.l. of motors.
consideration) remaining motors
4. Water heater (ther-

mostatically contra- No diversity allowable
lied)
Table A 2
Current Demand to be Assumed for Points of Utilization and Current using Equipment
Point of Utilization or Current-using Current Demand to be Assumed

Equipment
Socket outlets other than SA socket outlets Rated current
SA socket outlets At least O.SA
Lighting outlet Current equivalent to the connected load, with a

minimum of 100W per lamp holder
House hold cooking appliance The first lOA of the rated current plus 30% of the
remainder of the rated current plus SA if a socket
outlet is incorporated in the control unit
All other stationary_equipment Standard rated current or nominal current.

PartS
Building Services
AppendixB
Useful Tables Relatmg to Conductor Sizes
Table B 1
Number of Single-core Wire of Different Sizes for Various Sizes of Metal Conduits
Conductor Cross-sectional Conduit Diameter (mm)

Area (mm2)
19 I 25.4 I 31.8 I 38 I 51 I 63.5
Number ot wires tl:'\_at can be drawn
1.5 5 10 14 - - -
2.5 5 8 12 - - -
4.0 3 6 10 - - -
6.0 2 5 8 - - -
10.0 -
3 5 6 - -
16.0 - -
3 6 - -
25.0 - -
2 4 6 7
35.0 - - -
3 5 6
50.0 - - - -
4 5
Table B 2
Number of Single-core Wires of Different Sizes for Various Sizes of PVC Conduits
Conductor Cross-sectional Conduit Diameter (mm)

Area (mm2)
19 25 I 32 I 38 I 51
Number of wires that can be drawn
1.5 6 10 14 - -
2.5 5 10 14 - -
4.0 3 6 10 14 -
6.0 2 5 8 11 -
10.0 -
4 7 9 -
16.0 -
2 4 5 12
25.0 - -
2 2 6
35.0 - -
2 2 5
50.0 - - -
2 3
Table B 3
Wire Gauges
Gauge System Diameter Cross-sectional Weight of Weight of

Area Copper Aluminium
AWG SWG (mm) (mm2) (}sg/km) (kg/km)
6/0 -
14.73 170.46 1515.4 460.4
5/0 -
13.11 134.92 1199.4 365.0
-
7/0 12.70 126.68 1126.2 342.1
-
6/0 11.79 109.09 969.8 294.6
4/0 -
11.68 107.22 953.2 289.4
-
5/0 10.97 94.56 840.7 255.4
3/0 -
10.41 85.16 757.2 229.6
-
4/0 10.16 81.70 720.7 219.6
-
3/0 9.449 70.12 623.4 189.4
2/0 -
9.271 67.51 600.1 182.1
-
2/0 8.839 61.36 545.5 165.7
0 -
8.255 53.52 475.8 144.4
-
0 8.230 53.19 472.9 143.6
-
1 7.620 45.60 405.4 123.1
1 -
7.341 42.22 376.2 114.5
-
2 7.010 38.60 343.1 104.2
2 -
6.553 33.94 299.8 90.80
-
3 6.401 32.18 286.1 86.89
-
4 5.893 27.27 242.5 73.63
3 -
5.817 26.57 236.2 72.01
-
5 5.385 22.77 202.5 61.51
8-192
Appendices
Table B 3 (Contd.)
Wire Gauges
Gauge System Diameter Cross-sectional Weight of Weight of

Area Copper Aluminium
AWG SWG (mm) (mm2) (kglkm) (kg/km)
4 -
5.182 21.09 187.5 57.11
-
6 4.877 18.68 166.1 50.44
5 -
4.623 16.78 149.2 45.25
-
7 4.470 15.70 139.5 42.39
6 -
4.115 13.30 118.2 35.91
-
8 4.065 12.97 115.3 35.02
7 9 3.658 10.507 93.41 28.49
8 10 3.251 8.302 73.80 22.59
-
11 2.948 6.818 60.61 18.41
9 -
2.896 6.585 58.54 17.91
-
12 2.642 5.480 48.72 14.80
10 -
2.591 5.272 46.87 14.21
-
13 2.337 4.284 38.08 11.58
11 -
2.311 4.196 37.30 11.26
12 -
2.057 3.325 29.55 8.934
-
14 2.032 3.243 28.83 8.756
13 15 1.828 2.627 23.35 7.093
14 16 1.626 2.075 18.45 5.621
15 -
1.448 1.646 14.64 4.460
-
17 1.422 1.589 14.13 4.290
16 -
1.295 1.318 11.72 3.532
-
18 1.291 1.168 10.38 3.154
17 -
1.143 1.026 9.122 2.808
18 19 1.016 0.8107 7.207 2.223
19 20 0.9144 0.6567 5.838 1.773
20 21 0.8128 0.5189 4.613 1.401
21 -
0.7239 0.4156 3.695 1.111
-
22 0.7112 0.3973 3.532 1.073
22 -
0.6428 0.3243 2.883 0.8756
-
23 0.6096 0.2919 2.595 0.7881
23 -
0.5733 0.2588 2.301 0.6990
-
24 0.5588 0.2453 2.181 0.6620
24 -
0.5105 0.2047 1.820 0.5527
-
25 0.5086 0.2021 1.797 0.5473

PartS
Building Services
AppendixC
Completion Certificate Form (Electrical Works)
1/we certify that the installation detailed below has been installed by me/us and tested and that to the best of
my/our knowledge and belief, it complies with the requirements of Bangladesh National Building Code and the
Electricity Act of lfangladesh (as modified up to 1987)
Electrical Installation at . ....

. """7"'
. --------------- --------
Voltage and system of supply ----
Particulars of Works :
a) . Internal Electrical Installation
No. Total load Type or system of wiring

i) Light point
ii) Fan point
iii) Plug point
3-pinSA
3-pin 15A
b) Others Description hp/kW Type of starting
1) Motors
i)
ii)
iii)
2) Other plants
c) If the work involves installations of over head line and/or underground cable
1) i) Type and description of over head line

ii) Total length and number of spans
iii) Number of street lights and its description
2) i) Total length and size of underground cable

ii) Number of joints
End joint
Tee joint
Stra1ght through joint
d) Earthing
i) Description of earthing electrode
ii) Number of earth electrodes
iii) Size of main earth lead
Test Results :
a) Insulation Resistance
i) Insulation resistance of the whole system of conductors to earth _______ mega

ohms
ii) Insulation resistance between the phase conductor and neutral

Between phase R and neutral mega ohms
Between phase Y and neutral mega ohms
Between phase B and neutral mega ohms
8-194
Appendices
iii) Insulation resistance between the phase conductors in case of polyphase supply.
Between phase R and phase Y mega ohms
Between phase Y and phase B mega ohms
Between phase B and phase R mega ohms
b) Polarity test
Polarity of nonlinked single pole branch switches
c) Earth continuity test
Maximum resistance between any point in the earth continuity conductor including metal conduits and
main earthing lead ohms
d) Earth electrode resistance
Resistance of each earth electrode
i) ohms
'
ii) ohms
iii) ohms
iv) ohms
e) Lightning protective system
Resistance of the whole of lightning protective system to earth before any bonding is effected with earth
electrode and metal in/ on the structure ohms.
Signature of Supervisor Signature of Contractor
Name and Address ------ Name and Address ------

PartS
Building Services
Appendix D
Relationship of Weighting Curves for Sound Levels
The standardized weighting curves for sound level meters together with the more recent E and 51 curves are shown
in the figure below.
•20
-
+10
0 -
c � A
.....
�'-o
,-
IIl
"0
-10
-- l..---- §....:::� � """ �t::::::...:
IB•C
v
�� / v '\
Gl
Cll
g -20
�7/ v y \
c.
Cll
Gl
a: -30
Gl
>
-40
r �/ I \ Sl
�
u
a:
-50 /
-60
7
-70 I
10 2 5 2 5 2 5 104 2
Frequency, Hz
Fig. D 1 Relationship of Weighting Curve for Sound Levels
8-196
Appendices
AppendixE
Recommended Optimum Reverberation Time for Assembly Buildings
The recommended optimum reverberation times for various uses of Assembly buildings are given in the figure
below.
4.5 3.0
v
4.2 L_ 2.8
v
3.9 �� 2.6
v
3.0
v 2.4
v
(J) (J)
"0
2.7 / 2.2
"0 -;;;
c c
0 :r:
0
0 ( (Q,'I>''
0
Q) -;;; Q) 0
'
(/) :r: 'l\e� 0

('I>
l() 2.4 o<c 2.0 (/) 0
Q). � v .;
N
0
E
i=
..
l:-::::: E
i= 0
>- 2.1 1.8 l()
c 0 c
�!--"
0 c
2 >-
� 1--
Q)
:; C 0
�us'
:J
cr 2.4 1.6 �
Q;
.0 Q) :oe< Q)
.0 Q)c
!;);
:J
Q;
> �)..--' ...... 1-- 1-
+-f- C�f-
1110se
Q; crQ)
Q) 2.1 tf'lllti-ll\) 1.4 Q)> !;);
1-- I-
e< a -1-- 1--1-+-�
a: a:
1.8 �oll 1-- 1--

1<\u SI C +- f.--"""
f- oo
erf\ 3 1.2
r-
� --1-- 1- 1- 1-
1.5 'l>\<
rJ--:::t::::= 1-- !--+-
1---
Slleecll 1.0
1'1\e 1-
...-- r-- !-
1.2
� 0.8
-1--- f-
r-
0.9 0.6
105
Volume of Room, m3
Fig. E 1 Recommended Optimum Reverberation Time for Various Uses

PartS
Building Services
AppendixF
STC Ratings of Walls and Floors
STC ratings of some commonly used walls, floors and structural elements are given in the following Table.
Walls I STC
100 mm brick with 13 mm plaster both side
40
42
52
305 mm brick 54
305 mm brick wall, both side plaster with 50 mm cavity
54
460 mm brick wall, both side 13 mm plaster, 25 mm wood wall slab
62
and 152 mm cavit}'
610 mm stone wall, both side 13 mm plaster
56
150 mm concrete wall with 13 mm plaster both side
52
Floors STC
100 mm concrete slab 44
125 mm concrete slab with 32 mm cork and plywood subfloor 48
150 mm concrete slab with 19 mm plaster on both side
47
150 mm concrete slab with cork pad, wood floor and sleeper 53
(total235 mm thick)
8-198
Appendices
AppendixG
Air Traffic Noise Levels
For traffic noise levels produced from the aircrafts, control measures shall be initiated from the investigation of the
following characteristic features of aircraft noise :
a) i) Noise characteristics of different aircraft vary with different power conditions.
ii) Noise created by jet aircraft are different from those generated by propeller aircraft with piston engines.
iii) Jet noise originates from different parts of the engine, such as the jet, the compressor and the turbine.
iv) The typical roar of a flying jet is generated by the violent mixing of the hot exhaust gases with the
surrounding air, particularly noticeable during take off and climb.
b) After take off the noise level on the ground shall not exceed certain maximum values, for each direction of each
runway. These noise levels are higher during the day than at night.
c) An angle of 3° or less with the horizontal should be adopted for landing.
d) Very long corridor shall be left free of buildin�s for descending the aircraft before they reach the runway
threshold. Airports with runways which contmue over water (lake or sea) can follow the noise control
requirements much more easily and with added safety.
Approximate noise levels due to various types of aircrafts, measured on ground (when the aircraft fly overhead
at a height of 450 m) shows that boeing 707-records a maximum noise level of 111 PNdB, followed by Boeing 737
(107 PNdB}, Boeing 747 (103 PNdB) ana Airbus A 300 (101 PNdB).
The flyover noise level for Concorde SST at 450 m with take off thrust is recorded at 114 PNdB, the highest noise
level among the commercial aircrafts.

PartS
Building Services
AppendixH
Frequency Values and Noise Levels of Some Common Sources
High frequency values have short wavelengths, and are heard as notes of high pitch. Conversely, low frequency
sounds have a long wavelength, and are heard as notes of low pitch.
A healthy young person is capable of hearing sound from about 20 to 20,000 Hz. Prolonged exposure to intense
sound can also cause permanent hearing damage. Short term exposure can cause temporarily losses.
Some typical frequencies are mentioned below (in round numbers):
Male voice, vowel sounds 100Hz

Male voice, sibilants 3,000Hz
Bass singer, bottom note 100Hz
Piano, bottom note 25Hz
Piano, middle C . 260Hz
Piano, top note 4,200Hz
Piccolo, top note 4,600Hz
Orchestrafrange 45-4,500Hz
Audible range 20-20,000Hz
The following are examples of familiar sounds expressed in dB :
Description j,
Sub ective Decibels
Eva uation (dB)
�
Near t engine 140
Thres old of aint Deafening 130
Threshold of eeling hard rock band 120
Accelerating motorcycle at a few metre away (Note: 15 m trom 110
motorcycle equals noise at about 600 m from a 4-engine aircraft) Very loud
Full orchestra, loud passage 95
Noisy urban street, noisy tactory Loud· 90
School cafeteria 80
Loud speech, 1 m distant; stenographic room Moderate 70
Near freeway auto traffic 60
Conversational speech, 1 m distant; average office 50
Attentive theatre audience, total sound. SOft radio music in Faint 40
apartment.
Faint whis r, 1 m distant; average residence without stereo playing
� 30
Average w ·sper 20
Rustle of one program, 8 m distant Very faint 15
Rustle of leaves in wind; human breathing 10
Threshold of audibility 0
8-200
Appendices
AJ?pendixl
Typical Noise Levels m Free-Flowing Road Traffic
Typical noise levels in free-flowing road traffic are given in the following table.
No. ot Vehicles Speed L101 30 m from Road Edge

(per 18 hour day) dB A
5000 50km / h 65
(10 per cent heavy vehicles)
10,000 60km/h 70
10,000 80km/h 75
20,000 80km/h 77
Note : The values are applicable to free-flowing traffic without honking.

Part 8
Building Services
AppendixJ
Average Airborne Sound Insulation of Common Constructions
Table J 1 below indicates the airborne sound insulation, averaged over the frequency range 100 to 3150 Hz, of a
number of common types of constructions. These single figure values must be taken only as a guide because
insulation effectiveness depends on how the insulation varies with frequency and because differences in building
construction affect the values actually obtained. It must also be remembered that the insulation achieved in practice
depends not only on the insulation of the particular dividing element but also on its area in relation to the sound
absorption in the rooms, and on indirect transmission. No specific allowance can be made for indirect transmission.
However for elements having an insulation of 40 dB or below it will have little effect. In Table J 1 the figures above 40
dB allow for the amount of indirect transmission likely to be present when the structures are used in a more or less
traditional manner.
As to the effects of area and absorption, the values given have been chosen to represent as nearly as possible the
achieved insulation between two normally furnished rooms of average proportions when the whole area of the wall
or floor is of the specified construction. As a result of these considerations, and owing to variations in detailing and
quality of workmanship, it is important to bear in mind that the figures in Table J 1 are subject to wide tolerance and
must be treated as estimates.
TableJ 1
Average Airborne Sound Insulation of Windows, Walls, Floors etc.
Windows
Open window 5-10 dB

3 or 4 mm glass, not well sealed 15-20
3 or 4 mm glass, well sealed 23
6 mm glass, well sealed 27
4 mm glass --200 mm gap --4 mm glass, but each leaf partially opened
(up to 100 mm opening), with openings staggered 1.5 m apart 27
6 mm glass --12 mm gap --6 mm glass well sealed 28
12 mm glass, well sealed 31
6 mm grass --150 mm gap --4 mm glass well sealed, lined reveals 35
12 mm glass laminated, well sealed 36
4 mm grass --200 mm gap --4 mm glass, but not well sealed 36
10 mm glass --80 mm gap --6 mm glass well sealed, lined reveals 37
4 mm grass --200 mm gap --4 mm glass well sealed, lined reveals 39
10 mm glass ---200 mm gap --6 mm glass well sealed, line reveals 44
Masonry walls
Lightweight block work, not sealed <35 dB

63 mm hollow clay block plastered on each side to 12 mm 35
57 mm lightweight (100 kg/m2) block work, plastered both sides to 12 mm 39
50 mm precast concrete units, well grouted joints 40
200 mm lightweight concrete precast slabs (122 kg/m2) with well grouted joints 40
100 mm solid brickwork, unplastered 42
100 mm solid brickwork, plastered 45
110 mm dense concrete, well sealed 45
150 mm dense concrete, well sealed 47
230 mm solid brick, unplastered 48
250 mm no fines concrete (1:10) plastered both sides to 12 mm 49
Block work (110 kg/m2) 75 mm airspace -block work (110/kg/m2) 49
200 mm dense concrete blocks with cement-lime mortar . 50
plastered both sides to 12 mm
230 mm solid brick work pestered or with dry lining of
12 mm plaster board on plaster dabs so
250 mm cavity construction, i.e. 110 mm brick-cavity- 5 mm block + 12 mm
plaster, butterfly wire ties 50
280 mm cavity brick work, butterfly wire ties, plastered one side to 12 mm 52
340 mm brick work, plastered both sides o 12 mm 53
450 mm brick or stone well pointed or plastered 55
Note : These estimates refer to insulation of walls between rooms. For insulation
between a room and a noise in the open air the overall insulation should be
reduced by 5 dB.
8-202
Appendices
Table J 1 (Contd.)
Average Airborne Sound Insulation of Windows, Walls, Floors etc.
Floors
21 mm t-and g-boards c:r 19 mm chipboard on floor joists, 9 mm plaster

board+skim coat below 35 dB
110 mm concrete+screed (s; 220 kg/m2) 42
21 mm t-and g-boards or 19 mm chipboard on floor joists, lath and
plaster (20 mm) below with 50 mm layer of sand pugging 45-46
125 mrn reinforced concrete +50 mm screed 45-46
200 mrn reinforced concrete +50 mm screed 47-48
125 mrn reinforced concrete +timber raft (i.e. 21 mm t-and-g boards or
19 mm chipboard) on glass- or mineral-fibre quilt 47-48
Precast concrete units (50 mm) +30 mm finishing screed on deep truss
with well sealed 9 mm insulation board below 47-48
125 mm reinforced concrete +40-50 mm concrete screed on glass or
mineral-fibre quilt 49-50
300 mm reinforced concrete +50 mm screed 49-50
Floated timber raft (21 mm t-and g-boards or 19 mm chipboard) on glass 49-50
or mineral-fibre quilt on joists +
50 mrn sand directly on ceiling of plaster on metal lath (20 mm) 49-50
150 mm reinforced concrete+100 mm floated raft on specialist mounts,
free from 'bridging' 55
As above, with walls built near the edge of the floor to limit flanking transmission 60+
Dry partitions
21 mm t-and g-boarding, tightly clamped 20 dB

9 mm insulation board eacfi side of 75 x 50 mm studs 23
12 mm plaster board+skim coat on timber frame 25
12 mm plaster board both sides of honeycomb core --63 mm total thickness 28
6 mm p1y/hard board on 50 mm timber studs, mineral-fibre quilt in cavity 30
12 mm plaster board each side of 50 mm timber studs 30
1 mm steel panels spaced a12art by 50 mm with mineral-fibre quilt fill 30
12 mm plaster boara each side of 50 mm metal studs 33
50 mm wood-wool plastered both sides to 12 mm 35
12 mm plaster boara each side of 50 mm timber studs with absorbent
quilt in cavity 37
As above, but with metal studs 39
2 x 12 mm plaster board each side of 50 mm timber studs with absorbent
quilt in cavity 41
1 mm steell'anels backed with 9 mm plasterboard, with absorbent guilt in cavity 41
2 x 12 mm plaster board each side of 75 mm metal studs with absoroent
quilt in cavity 45
3 layers 12 mm plaster board on timber frame each side of
225 mm air gap, frames separated and area of supported panels s; 15% glass
or mineral-fibre quilt hung in cavity 49
Doors
Panel/hollow core door well fitted, no seals 15 dB

As above with good seals and close cut threshold 20
Solid core door well fitted, no seals 15
As above with good seals and threshold strip seal or close cut to carpet 25
60 mm +solid core door with carefully detailed seals, including threshold seal 30
Note: Above 30 dB, specialist doors are needed.
Room to room insulation via suspended ceiling void
(Assuming 600 mm deep void, below concrete soffit, no undue obstructions

such as large ducts, downstand beams)
> 10% perforated metal pan ceiling with absorbent lay-in backing 15-20 dB
19 mm mineral-fibre ceiling tile (6 kg/m2) in lay-in or concealed fix grid 25-30
Solid metal pan ceiling (0-6 mm) about 30
+absorbent quilt overlay about 35
Perforated metal pan + 9 mm plasterboard backing 35-40

Part 8
Building Services
Appendix K
Recommended BackgroundNoise Criteria andNC Curves
The NC levels to specify the desirable lowest limits are given in Table K 1 and Fig K 1.
Table K 1
Recommended BackgroundNoise Criteria for Rooms
Type of Room NCNumber
Concert hall 15-20

Radio or recording studio 15-20
Opera house 20
Tneatre 20-25
Music room 20-25
Television studio 20-25
Executive office 20-30
Classroom or lecture hall 25
Cinema studio 25
Conference room 25-30
Church 25-30
Courtroom 25-30
Assembly hall or school auditorium 25-35
Home (sleeping areas) 25-35
Hotel or motel 25-35
Motion icture/Cinema hall
f 30
Hosrita 30
Semiprivate office 30-35
Library 30-35
Business office 35-45
Restaurant 35-50
Drafting room 40-45
Gymnasium 45-50
Typing or accounting office 45-60
Coliseum so
8-204
Appendices
Frequency Band (Hz)

20 75 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800
75 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600
60
(])
:3
Q5
>
II)
50
....J
II)
::;
f/)
f/)
II)
0:: 40
u
c:
:::>
0
en
30
2o r---�----��,�1�r-��--r-��r---�r---�
'j
Threshold '
of Audibility
63 125 250 500 1K 4K
Frequency (Hz)
Fig. K 1 Noise-Criterion Curves (NCJ

PartS
Building Services
AppendixL
Particulars of Lifts, Escalators and Moving Walks
LIFf
a) Number of lifts and capacity of each lift;
b) Layout of lift well with sizes;
c) Particulars of lift well enclosures;
d) Size, position, number and type of landing doors;
e) Number of floors served by the lift;
f) Height between floor levels;
g) Provision of ventilation of lift well;
h) Total headroom clearance;
i) Location of machine room (above or below lift well), height of machine room;
j) Provision of access to machine room;
k) Provision of ventilation and, if possible, natural lighting of machine room;
l) Depth of lift pit;
m) Size and position of supporting steel work at roof levels;
n) Size and position of any footings or grillage foundations, if these are adjacent to lift pit; and
o) In the case of passenger lifts, whether the lift cage is required to carry heavy household luggage, such
as refrigerator, steel almirah, etc.
ESCALATOR
a) Number of escalators and capacity of each escalator;
b) Layout of escalators with dimensions of floor punches; and
c) Height between floors.
MOVING WALK
a) Number of moving walks and capacity of each moving walk;
b) Layout of moving walks with dimensions; and
c) Length and width of each unit.
8-206
Appendices
Appendix M
Format for Particulars of Lifts, Escalators and Moving Walks
LIFTS
a) Use: Passenger /Goods/Services/Hospital
b) Number of lifts required: ____________________

_
c) Capacity per lift: Number of passengers ------- kg ------
d) Rated Speed: ______ m/s
e) Travel height: ______ m
f) Size and type of car doors:
g) Size and type of landing doors: ------
h) Size(s) and location(s) of lift well(s) :
i) Number of doors :
j) Method of control(s) : -----
k) Location of machine room:
1) Position of counter weight:
m) Size of car platform :
n) Construction, design and finish of car bodywork:
o) Construction, design and finish of car platform: -------
p) Particulars of ventilation of the car: _____________

___
_
q) Particulars of control buttons in car : -------
r) Particulars of position indicators in car : -------
s) Particulars of call buttons in landing: ------
t) Particulars of car position indicators in landings: ------
u) Electric supply :
Power: ____ volts, ac/dc, ___ phase, __ Hz/wire system ___
Lighting: ____ Volts, ac/dc, ___ Hz/sec,
v) Additional requirements, if any :
ESCALATOR
a) Number of escalators required= -----
b) Capacity of each escalator (No. of people /hr): -------
c) Rated speed ------ m/s
d) Travel height m, Travel length _____ m
e) Width of escalator ______ m
f) Construction, design and finish of balustrade: _____________
g) Details of steps: ------
h) Materials of landing plate: ------

PartS
Building Services
i) Electric supply :
Power: ------- volts, ac/dc, ------- phase
----- Hz/wire system ------
j) Additional requirements, if any :
MOVING WALK
a) Number of moving walks required= -------
b) Capacity of each moving walk (No. of people/hr) :------
c) Rated speed ------ m/s
d) Inclination ------- degrees
e) Width of moving walk _____ m
f) Construction, design and finish of balustrade: -------
g) Material of landing plate= ------
h) Electric supply :
Power: ------ volts, ac/dc, ------- phase
_______ Hz/wire system -------
i) Additional requirements, if any: ------
8-208
Appendices
Appendix N
Application for Permit to Construct Water Supply and Distribution System
1. Building Location:
2. Occupancy Classification:
3. Number of Storeys:
4. Height of the Building:
5. This application is accompanied by all required plans, drawing and design calculations (if required) in
accordance with Sec 6.3.2 and 6.3.3 of Bangladesh National Building Code.
Signature of the licensed plumber Signature of the Owner or his/her

designated person/agent
Name and Address: ------- Name and Address: _____

Part 8
Building Services
Appendix P
Sizing of Cold Water Supply and Distribution Piping
The water distribution within the building may be an upfeed or downfeed system. The design principles are the same
for both the systems. The principal difference in the cafculation procedure is that in the upfeed system the difference
in elevation between the fixtures and the water supply main exerts the pressure that supplies water into the fixtures,
but in the downfeed system the difference in elevation between the fixtures and the roof storage tank provides the
pressure to overcome the pipe friction. The following are the recommended pipe sizing procedures:
P1 The sketch of the main lines, risers and branches serving different fixtures will have to be drawn.
P2 Determine the number and types of fixture that will be required on the basis of the Table 8.7.1 in Chapter 7.
P3 The demand weight of different fixture units may be computed in terms of water supply fixture unit (wsfu) in
accordance with Table P 1.
P 4 The peak demand load (or maximum probable flow) in litre per minute may be estimated with the data
obtamed in P 3 using Fig P 1 or on tfte basis of the number of occupants according to their occupancy
classification specified in Table 8.6.1.
PS The equivalent length of the main lines, risers and branches will be determined. The equivalent length of
different fittings may be estimated on the basis of the data presented in the Table P 2 and Fig P 2 or from
manufacturer's specification. The total equivalent length is the sum of the equivalent lengths of all pipes and
fittings.
P 6 The pressure loss through water meter may be determined on the basis of their operating characteristics as
shown in Fig P 3 (Disk type water meter). The data for other types of water meter may be obtained from the
manufacturer.
P7 The minimum pressure reguired at different fixtures to produce adequate flow may be estimated on the basis
of the type of fixtures or mmimum size of supply pipe in accordance with Table 8.6.4.
P8 The average pressure drop in kPa per metre of equivalent pipe length may be computed as follows:
where Fp Average available pressure loss (kPa) per metre of equivalent length of pipe
p Pressure (kPa) in the water main or zero for over head gravity storage tank.
H Height (m) of the highest fixture above the water main or difference (m) in elevation
between storage tank and the fixture under consideration.
f Pressure loss (kPa) through water meter or such other fittin�s plus pressure (kPa) required
to produce adequate flow through the most remote fixture m upfeed system or the fixture
under consideration in downfeed system.
L Equivalent pipe length (m)
• + sign is for downfeed system and - sign is for upfeed system
P9 The pipe size may be estimated from Fig P 4 to P 7 for different types of piping materials on the basis of the
expected rate of flow determined in P 4 and the average pressure available for friction loss (Fp) in P 7.
8-210
Appendices
Table Pl
Water �upply Fixture Unit (wsfu) Values for Various Plumbing Fixtures
Fixture or group Supply Control I wsfu

I I Cold I Hot I Total
Bath group Flush tank 4.5 3 6

Bath group Flush valve 6 3 8
Bathtub Faucet 1.5 1.5 2
Bidet Faucet 1.5 1.5 2
Combination Faucet 2 2 3
Kitchen sink Faucet 1.5 1.5 2
Laundry tray Faucet 2 2 3
Laund � Faucet 1.5 1.5 2
Pedesta urinal Flush valve 10 -
10
Restaurant sink Faucet 3 3 4
Service sink Faucet 1.5 1.5 2
Shower head Mixing Valve 3 3 4
Stall or wall urinal Flush tank 3 -
3
Stall or wall urinal Flush valve 5 -
5
Water closet Flush tank 5 -
5
Water closet Flush valve 10 -
10
•
Fixture with both cold and hot water supplies, the weight for maximum separate demands may be
considered 75% of total wsfu.
Table P2
Equivalent Length of Pipe for Friction Loss in Valves and Fittings
Valves or Equivalent Length (m) of Pipes Against Diameter (mm) of Fittings

Fittings
10 I 13 I 19 I 2s I 32 I 38 I 50 I 63 I 75 I 88 I 100 I 12s I 150
Angle Valve 1.22 2.44 3.66 4.57 5.49 6.71 8.53 10.36 12.19 15.24 16.76 21.34 24.38
Gate Valve 0.06 0.12 0.15 0.18 0.24 0.30 0.40 0.49 0.61 0.73 0.82 1.01 1.22
Globe Valve 2.44 4.57 6.10 7.62 10.67 13.72 16.76 19.81 24.38 30.48 38.10 42.67 50.29
goo
Standard 0.30 0.61 0.76 0.91 1.22 1.52 2.13 2.44 3.05 3.66 4.26 5.18 6.10
Elbow
45°
Standard 0.18 0.37 0.46 0.55 0.73 0.91 1.22 1.52 1.83 2.13 2.44 3.05 3.66
Elbow
90°SideTee 0.46 0.91 1.22 1.52 1.83 2.13 3.05 3.66 4.57 5.49 6.40 7.62 9.14
Coupling
Straight Run
ofTee 0.09 0.18 0.24 0.27 0.37 0.46 0.61 0.76 0.91 1.10 1.22 1.52 1.83

o:l�
'F .
= I»
.. ..,
- ....
N
....... e:oo
N =
Jq
!Jl
I'll
3.
,.,
I'll
1"11
1800.0
k-'
1600.0 -
__...
..----
---v
1400.0 -- v
Q) i --
:::J
c
_... v
1200.0
I
·e V"
v
vv
[1
�
Q)
c.
1000.0 .......
v
·��=�
Q)
-
�
800.0
.!;; �v
""'"
�
"0
c
__..
<'0
600.0
0
E
Q.)
v�
t::: : v
L: Flush Tank System
400.0
7 7
/v /
200.0
v
//
0.0
1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
0 500
wsfu
Fig. P 1 Water Supply Demand for Various Loads in Water Supply Fixture Units (wsfu}
Appendices
1000
,g.
� �
I
I
P> ( v
I
100 �
I I / �
/ / /
/ /
� / / / /
"
"'" / / /
� / I /
"' "-.@
V I /__ I L /
-"
Cl..
a-
/
I I I
/;
�
ca-(' v
.s
.Q
"'
10
I I v
c:
.Q /
0 / /
� I / / I /
v / /
v I I I I
I v v
I
1/ I I /__
/ / . I
0.1
10 100 1000 10000
Flow in litre per minute
Fig. P 2 Friction Loss Through Taps and Tees

Part 8
Building Services
1000
::?/ Vo/ r%' �v

I
�v o/ �
"'
100
,
L I /_ I
., I I I I I I
a.
-"
l II II I II I 1 / L
'<:
If
.s
is -' I I J
i/ / I I
"'
"'
.Q I v J
�
G>
3
"'
"'
rl/_ /
v
v I v v v I
I
II I
I 1/
v
Vj v
G)
0:
v I
10 _L , ,
I I I /
10 100 1000 10000

Flow in litre per minute
Fig. P 3 Loss of Pressure Through Disc- Type Meter in kPa
8-214
Appendices
100000
O
'?>oo ?..f)
10000 ?..00
II'��' �0
e
\&��'
,.,.... 1/ ...... _\'1.�
...... v � I
1.--'�--' v ,oo
v "" .......
fo""
�
1-' v �-""""
0
'5 1000
..... ��--" � ...,...� !.---'I' ,f)6
.s
E ..,
...
CD
a. ,.,.... ,.,....
.......
"?>'to
I-""' v
� ..,..!--' L
I'
I,...-" I--' � �-"""" �'?>'1. f)
.s v v v 'l.
;!:
0
ii
100
!--'� v �"" k......- �""""!-' v
......
fo"" V" I-"' 1.--'
1--' I-"'
./ /
"""' v fo""
10
v
�--""" � ""
I'
/
1
0.01 0.1 10 100
Friction loss in kPa per metre length
Fig. P 4 Friction Loss in· Fairly Rough Pipe

PartS
Building Services
100000
0 t<:>O oo
10000
\I"
6�
e\ ..... .... !)
;t �..-""" .i.
... I ...... .... ....... ... '\?.':>
...... .{ .....
...... v ..... ...... ,o
...... ...... .... ...... ......
...... ...... 1':>
G)
::; 1000
.... ... ....v / (/)'!I
c:
·e <;,0
lD v- v-
0.
....... � ....... .... ,'!I�
� v
!-""
.......v '!It
,.....
I-' ....... vI-' �
............ �':>
.5
v�-"' �
3:
0 100
...... .... � .......v ....
u:
'1,9
...... .....
,..... ......._ ,..... ...... ....
.... ......
......
...... .....
...... y
...
..... .... � ......
10
.....
1
0.01 0.1 10 100
Friction loss in kPa per metre length
Fig. P 5 Friction Loss in Rough Pipe
8-216
Appendices
100000
<;0
'!,-;§:,
10000
�---�-- 'l.oo
��
'I.'JO
,e
Q\�l'i' ....... - ..,... -
..,... ...... '\?.'J
/ ,.... ,...,... ,...,...
/
,..... I'
/
v ...oo
� v
�/
/
v
v rc;,
/
� 1000 ��
0
c:
-E
- -
/ - - /
.._
Q) ..,...
CL
- ,...,... / I-- ��
- v
v
!--"'
/" v,..... ,...,... ..,...!-- ...
I' - ?.'J
� v
..,..I-" /vv� � /
:.;I-- '1.9
(1_ 100
..,... ..,... - ..,...

..,... .L_ / ..,...
/ ,...,... ..,...,....
..,... ..... -
/ v
/ ..,...
/
...... / ..,...
/
..,... :...
10
..,...
..,...
......
..,...
1
0.01 0.1 10 100
Friction loss in kPa per metre
Fig. P 6 Friction Loss in Fairly Smooth Pipe

PartS
Building Se�ices
10000
,<:J�
......� �f:J
� o
.... � ,o
/ !..- .......
\�� v
e' v '\':l
\J"�e /
/
�,...-1-"
....
......
/
1000 t.�
....... ....... ....... 1,.,o

...... ....... v v
� v /
I-' ..... / �,...-�..- / �':s
CD � l
:; v / /v ......
c: / L I--'
·e
v vv
v:::
...... ,.?.f:l
...
v�-"' v .......: ��;;.
v
CD
a.
/
v ...... ,�
100 _,
� v
.E ....... /......::
v �L ..,...t;;.-
ll:
0 ....... ./ v ....... � �I'
u::: I-' v
/ ��;;. ��
......
..... � / a � ....... �
v
� ��!..- ....
.,
/ ..... �
I-"'
10
...... v -� h :::::
�· � :;...' ......
f-"\y � v
"\'!�� .....
"\�.e1
v
1
O.o1
�� 0.1 10 100
Friction loss in kPa per metre
Fig. P 7 Friction Loss in Copper Pipe
8-218
Appendices
Appendix Q
Completion Certificate (Water Supply Works)
Ref. No. of the Authority's permit: ------- Date: ------
This is to certify that I/We have completed the water supply and distribution system of the building and the
premisesat: --
--
Detail description of the work : --------
This may be inspected, tested and approved.
Signature of the licensed plumber
Name and Address: ------
The Authority's Certificate
Certified that the above water sup ly and distribution system has been completed in accordance with Chapter 6 of
f
Part 8 of the Bangladesh Nationa Building Code. The water supply connection from water main (if any) to the
service pipe will be made on .
Signature of the Building Official or his authorized deputy
Seal

PartS
Building Services
AppendixR
Application for Permit to Construct Drainage and Sanitation System
1. Occupancy classification :
2. Number of storeys :
3. Location:
4. This application is accom]:Janied by all required plans, drawings (showing details of materials, sizes, gradient
and location of pipes and location of fixtures) and other detaifs as specified in Sec 7.4.2, 7.4.3, 7.4.4 and 7.9.10
of Part 8 of Bangladesh National Building Code.
Signature of the licensed plumber Signature of the owner or his/her

appointed person
Name and Address: ------ Name and Address:
8-220
Appendices ·
Appendix S
One-hour Rainfall
One hour rainfall values for a 25-year return period for various locations in Bangladesh may be taken from Fig S 1.
The figure shows different regions of equal rainfall intensity as well as isohyets at 5 mm intervals.
Rainfall for a particular location shall be obtained as follows:
a) When the location lies within any region (shown shaded in the map), the value marked for that region shall be
taken.
b) For a location lying on any isohyet in this map, the value of that isohyet shall be taken.
c) For a location lying outside the positions (a) and (b) above, linear interpolation shall be made between the
adjacent isohyets to obtain the required rainfall value.

PartS
Building Services
'
89 90' 91
"
92'
FIG. 51 ONE-HOUR RAINFALL (mm)

(Return period 25 Years)
LEGEND
26' .
Loartian of City or T0111 ........
26'
International Boundary ... . .. ...
River & Lake ... ... ... ... ... �
25 Year lsohyet ... ......... �
.,. . � E]
..'
�G
Rainfall Regions ... ... ... ... .
. -·
� r.:+J r.:::::::J
� �:!:!! �
IN D I A
25 ' 25'
IND I A
24' 2 4'
23 ' 23'
INDIA
22'
0 F
NOTE: a) lsohyet at a region boundary has the same value· as that of the region
b) Rainfall far a particular location shall be obtained as follows :
I) When the location lies within ony region (shown coloured in the map), the wlue marked
for that region shall be taken.
21 ' il) For a location lying on any lsohyet in this map, the wlue of that lsohyet shal! be taken.
iii) For a location lying outside the positions {i) and (ii) above, linear interpolation shall
be made between the adjacent isohyets to obtain the required roinfall wlue.
' 92'
89' 90 ' 91
8-222
Appendices
Appendix T
Design Guideline of a Septic Tank
The volume of a septic tank may be computed using the following equation :
V=PQt+PSy
where
V Volume of the septic tank (litre)
P Number of persons served
Q =
Flow, litre/capita/day (lpcd)
(The flow may be computed considerin� waste water flow 60% to 70% of the water consumption or on the
basis of the plumbing fixtures dischargmg simultaneously into the septic tank, Sec 7.9.11.7. In absence of
these data the waste water flow for the Occupancy groups A, C and D may be considered 120 lpcd for
cities, 50 lpcd for district town and 20 lpcd for thanas and rural areas. For other Occupancy groups a waste
water flow of 10 lpcd may be considerea.)
Liquid retention time, day

(mmimum 1 day Sec 7.9.11.12)
s = Volume required for sludge and scum (0.04 m3/capita/year, Sec 7.9.11.11)
y = Desludging frequency, year

(Minimum 1 year, Sec 7.9.11.13).
If computed volume is less than 2000 litres then minimum volume of the septic tank shall be 2000 litre (Sec 7.9.11.8).

PartS
Building Services
AppendixU
Completion Certificate (Drainage and Sanitation Works)
Ref. No. of the Authority's permit: _______ ____ Date: -------
This is to certify that l/We have completed the drainage and sanitation system for the building and the premises at:
Detailed description of the work: ------------------------------
This may be inspected, tested and approved.
Signature of the plumber
Name and Address: _

___
_
The Authority's Certificate
,.This is to certify that the above drainage and sanitation system has been completed in accordance with Chapter 7 of
Part 8 of the Bangladesh National Buifding Code. The drainage connection to the main sewer (if any) will be made
on
_________
Signature of the Building Official or his

authorized deputy
Seal
8-224
Appendices
AppendixV
Work on the Gas Supply System
This appendix applies only to work on gas supply systems ahead of the outlet of the meter set assembly, or of the
·
service regulator when there is no meter.

·
Serving Gas Supplier's Main
No person, unless in the employ of or authorized by the gas supply company shall open br make connections with
gas main.
Serving Gas Piping
No person, unless in the employ of or authorized by the gas supply company, shall repair, alter, open or make
connections to the services gas piping or do any other work on the parts of t:ne gas supply system up to the meter set
assembly or the service regulator when there is no meter.
Meter or Service Regulator When a Meter is Not Provided
No person, unless in the employ of or authorized by the gas supply company, shall disconnect the inlet of the gas
meter or service regulator when there is no meter, nor move such meter or regulator. A gas fitter may disconnect the
outlet of such a meter or regulator from the house piping only when necessary. He shall make the joint at the meter
or service regulator outlet when there is no meter, carefully replacing all insulating fittings or insulating parts of
such fittings, and shall leave the gas turned off at the meter or regulator unless the gas supply company's rules
require or allow deviation from this procedure.
·
Notify Gas Supply Company of any Repairs Needed
In case any work done by a gas fitter reveals the need for repairs or alterations on any part of the gas supply system,
the gas supply company sha11 be notified promptly of this fact.
Notify Gas Supply Company of any Leakage
If gas is leaking from any part of the gas supply system, a gas fitter or plumber not in the employ of the gas supply
company may make necessary repairs and shall promptly notify the gas supply company.

PartS
Building Services
AppendixW
Documentation for the Piping Installation
The gas supply company requires the following to be fulfilled by the consumer(s) for having gas supply from its
distribution piping system: ·
a) Application for gas connection in prescribed from along with the approved plan of the building where the gas is
to oe used. If the building is not approved by the Authority its plan is to be prepared by an approved contractor
of the gas supply company.
b) An approved contractor of the gas supply company shall prepare the plan of the gas piping system for the
building. The plan is to include p1an ana elevation of the proposed piping system. The plan so prepared shall be
submitted to the gas supply company. .
c) Installation of the piping system as approved by the gas supply company shall be carried out by an approved
contractor of the gas supply company.
d) Completion report of the installation of the piping system (using the approved drawing) along with the pressure
and fead tests by the approved contractor shall be submitted to the gas supply company. The pressure test is to
be witnessed by the approved official of the gas supply company.
e) Completion report mentioned in (d) above is to include the papers related to the permission from the Authoritr.
for digging/cutting the road for taking the connection from the main supply line lying under the road, 1f
needea.
f) The legal owner of the building shall sign an agreement with the gas supply comf'any using the prescribed
agreement document of the gas supply company prior to having the gas supplied to his premises.
8-226
Part 9
. ALTERATION. ADDITION TO AND
CHANGE OF USE OF
EXISTING BUILDINGS
ClhlaJP>1er n
Applicability and Implementation
C!hatjpter .2
evaluation and Compliance

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART9 ALTERATION, ADDITION TO AND

CHANGE OF USE OF EXISTING BUILDINGS
Chapter 1 Applicability and Implementation
1.1 GENERAL 9-1 °
1.2 APPLICABILITY 9-1

1.2.1 General 9-1
1.2.2 Change in Use 9-1
1.2.3 Part Change in Use 9-1
1.2.4 Additions 9-2
1.2.5 Alterations 9-2
1.3 IMPLEMENTATION 9-2

1.3.1 Investigation and Evaluation 9-2
1.3.2 Structural Analysis 9-2
1.3.3 Submittal 9-2
1.3.4 Determination of Compliance 9-2
Chapter 2 Evaluation and Compliance
2.1 EVALUATION 9-3

2.1.1 Planning Requirements 9-3
2.1.2 Safety Requirements 9-4
2.1.3 Egress Requirements 9-4
2.1.4 Structural Requirements 9-4
2.2 COMPLIANCE 9-4
9-i
CHAPTER l]
Applicability and Implementation
1.1 GENERAL
The provisions of this part are intended to maintain or increase the current degree of public safety as well as
health and general welfare in existing buildings while permitting alteration, aadition to or change of use.
1.2 APPLICABILITY
1.2.1 General
The provisions of this part shall al'ply to existing buildings that will continue to be or are prol'osed to be in
occupancy groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H. The provisions shall not apply to buildings of historical or
architectural value identified and classified by designated authorities. For such buildings, the provisions of
Sec 1.5 of Part 1 and Sec 1.16 of Part 3 shall be applicable.
1.2.2 Change in Use

No change in use of an existing building shall be allowed if the proposed use is not in conformity with the
land use pattern and within the permitted occupancy classes as may be determined by the city or area
development authorities having jurisdiction.
Where an existing building is changed to a new use group classification, the provisions for new use group
in this Code shalloe used to determine compliance.
1.2.3 Part Change in Use

Where a portion of the buildin� is chan�ed to a new use group classification, and that portion is separated
from the remainder of the building with fire separation assemblies having a fire resistance rating as
required by Table 3.2.1 of Part 3 for the separate uses, the portion changed shall be made to conform to the
provisions of this Code. ·
Where a portion of the building is changed to a new use group classification, and that portion is not
separated from the remainder of the building with fire separation assemblies having a fire resistance rating
as required by Table 3.2.1 for the separate uses, the provisions of this Code which apply to each use shall
apply to the entire building. Where there are conflicting provisions, those requirements which secure the
greater public safety shall apply to the entire building or structure.
Part9 9-1
Alteration, Addition to and Change of Use of Existing Buildings
Part9
1.2.4 Additions •
Additions to existing buildings shall comply with all of the requirements of this Code for new constructions.
The combined height and area of the existing building and the new addition shall not exceed the height
and open space requirements for new building specified in Part 3 of this Code. Where a fire wall that
complies with Table 3.3.1 of Part 3 is provided between the addition and the existing building, the addition
shaH be considered as a separate building.
1.2.5 Alterations
An existing building or portion thereof which does not comply with the requirements of this Code for new
construction shall not be altered in such a manner that results m the building being less safe or sanitary than
such building is at present. If, in the alteration the resent level of safety or sanitation is to be reduced, the
r
portion altered shall conform to the requirements o this Code.
1.3 IMPLEMENTATION
1.3.1 Investigation and Evaluation

For the proposed works relating to alteration, addition to and change of use, the owner of the building shall
cause tl\e existing building to be investigated and evaluated by competent professionals in accordance with
the provisions ofthis Code.
Structural Analysis
·
1.3.2 .
The owner shaH have a structural analysis of the existing building carried out to determine the adequacy of
all structural systems for the proposed alteration, addition or change of use. The existing building together
with the addition or alteration shall be capable of supporting the minimum load requirements specified in
Part 6 of this Code.
· ·
1.3.3 Submittal
The results of the investigation and evaluation as required in Sec 1.3.1 and 1.3.2 above along with all
proposed compliance alternatives, shall be submitted to the Building Official.
1.3.4 Determination of Compliance

The Building Official shall examine all relevant documents and determine whether the existing buildin�,
with the proposed additions, alterations or change of use, complies with the provisions specified in this
Code for the occupancy classification and type of construction.
9-2
CHAPTER�
Evaluation and Compliance
2.1 EVALUATION
The evaluation of the existing building with the proposed additions, alterations or change of use, shall take
into consideration the planning requirements as well as those relating to public safety.
2.1.1 Planning Requirements

·
The Buifding Official shall determine if any of the provisions of this Code are violated by the proposed
works.
The general requirements for buildings in various occupancy classes and types of construction are specified
in Part 3 and Part 8 of this Code. These include:
a) Land use classification and permitted uses (Sec 1.4; Part 3);
b) Requirement of plots (Sec 1.5 Part 3);
c) Means of access (Sec 1.6, Part 3); and staircase (Sec 1.12, Part 3);
d) Open spaces·within a plot; minimum separation of buildings in the same plot; road front, side and rear
open spaces (Sec 1.7, Part 3);
e) General height and area limitations (Sec 1.8, Part 3);
f) Off street parking spaces (Sec 1.9, Part 3);
g) Street encroachment (Sec 1.10, Part 3);
h) Community open space and amenities for various types of buildings (Sec 1.11, Part 3);
i) Ventilation requirements (natural: Sec 1.17, Part 3; artificial: Chapter 3, Part 8);
j) Lighting and illumination requirements (Chapter 1, Part 8);
Part9 9-3
Part9
k) Sanit�tion requirements (Chapters 6 and 7, Part 8);

_
1) Minimum dimension of habitable and non-habitable parts of buildings (Sec 1.12, Part 3).
The existing building with the proposed alteration or addition shall conform to the requirements of new
buildings in the proposed occupancy classification. The proposed alteration or addition shall not make the
building less sarutary than is at present.
·
2.1.2 Safety Requirements

Additions or alterations to an existing building or structure is not to be made if such additions or
alterations cause the building or structure to be unsafe or more hazardous based on fire safety and life
safety. · .·
.·
The fire safety requirements shall take into consideration the structural fire resistance, smoke and fire
detection, fire protective signalling and fire suppression system features of the facility and satisfy the
requirements of buildings in the relevant occupancy classification as set forth in this Code.
The fire resistance ratings of building elements for various types of construction shall satisfy the
requirements specified in Chapter 3 of Part 3 of this Code. The construction requirements of various
elements for Types 1, 2 and 3 fire resistive buildings shall be satisfied.
The fire resistance of the wall used for compartmentation of a building shall not be less than that specified in
Sec 2.4 , Part 3 of this Code. Duct penetrations of this wall shall not be permitted. Ferrous or copper piping
and conduit shall be allowed to penetrate or pass through the wall if the openings around such piping and
conduit are sealed with impervious noncombustible materials sufficiently tight to prevent transfer of smoke
or combustible gases from one side of the wall to the other side and are so maintained. The fire door
between compartments serving as horizontal exit shall be so installed, fitted and provided with gaskets
that such fire door will provide a substantial barrier to the passage of smoke. The ffoor I ceiling shall be of
such construction that tne fire resistive �tegrity between storeys is maintained.
The smoke detection capability within the facility based on the location and operation of automatic fire
detectors shall be evaluated with respect to the requirements of Chapter 3 and 4 of Part 4 for the various
occupancies in this Code. Where a fire protective alarm and signalling system is provided, the capability of
the system shall also be evaluated (Sec 3.3 and 4.1, Part 4). The ability of the natural or mechanical venting,
exhaust or pressurization system to control the movement of smoke from a fire shall be evaluated.
The shaft and exit enclosures shall satisfy the requirements specified in Chapter 3, Part 4 of this Code.
The configuration, characteristics and support features for means of egress in the facility including the
capacity of and the number of exit routes available to the building occupants shall be evaluated and the
adequacy of the means of egress routes leading to a safe area shall be examined. The length of the exit
access travel path in which building occupants are confined to a single path of travel shalT be evaluated.
Similarly the length of exit access traver to an approved exit shall be evaluated with respect to exit
requirements for various occupancies as detailed in Part 4 of this Code.
The efficiency and effectiveness of the elevator equipment and controls that are available to the fire
department to rescue building occupants from upper floors during a fire when such an equipment is
installed, shall be evaluated.
The presence of and reliability of means of egress emergency lighting system shall also be evaluated.
The ability to suppress fire based on the installation of automatic sprinkler and stand pipe systems shall be
evaluated (Chapters 4 and 5, Part 4).
The lightning protection of the building shall satisfy the requirements specified in Chapter 2 of Part 8.
2.1.3 Egress Requirements

Addition to or alteration or change of use of a building shall not be permitted if such addition or alteration
or change of use causes violation of the egress requirements specifiea in Chapter 3, Part 4. Permission shall
not be granted for any such work that will obstruct or block or hamper the existing means of egress of the
building or any other building unless an equivalent and adequate means of egress is provided.
2.1.4 Structural Requirements . ·
Addition to, alteration or change of use of an existing building or structure shall not be permitted if they
cause an overloading of the structural elements includmg the foundation.
2.2 COMPLIANCE
When an evaluation is carried out as described above and the existing building with the proposed alteration,
addition and/or change of use satisfy the requirements specified for the relevant occupancy classification,
the results of the evaluation shall be accepted by the Buildmg Official.
9-4
Part 10
SIGNS liND OUTDOOR DISPLAY
CChajp:�eT n
Scope and General
'Crn:-21pte:r 2
General Requirements
rc:m.aj!)tt'.:Jr 3
Specific Requirements for Various Types of Sign
Appendices
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARTlO SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY
Chapter 1 Scope and General
1.1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE 10-1
1.3 CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNS 10-2
1.4 APPLICATION AND PERMIT 10-2

1.4.1 Requirement of Permit 10-2
1.4.2 Exemptions 10-2
1.4.3 Application for Permit 10-4
1.4.4 Condition for Grant of Permit 10-4
1.4.5 Sanction or Refusal of Permit 10-6
1.4.6 Application for Alteration of Sign 10-6
1.4.7 Existing Signs 10-6
1.5 UNSAFE AND UNLAWFUL SIGNS 10-6
1.5.1 Responsibility of the Owner 10-6

1.5.2 Notice of the Authority 10-6
1.5.3 Prohibited Signs 10-6
1.6 RESTRICTIONS 10-7

1.6.1 Restricted Sign Zone 10-7
1.6.2 Prohibition of Advertisement 10-7
1.6.3 Signs on Highways and Roads 10-7

1.6.4 Illuminated Displays 10-7
1.7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS 10-7

1.8 LOCATION RESTRICTIONS 10-8
1.9 PROJECTION OVER PUBLIC PROPERTY 10-8

1.10 CLEARANCE FROM POWER LINES 10-8
Chapter 2 General Requirements
2.1 DESIGN 10-9

2.1.1 Loads 10-9

2.2 CONSTRUCTION 10-9
2.2.1 Use of Materials 10-9
2.2.2 Use of Combustible Materials 10-9

2.2.3 Anchorage 10-10
2.2.4 Display Surfaces 10-10
10-i
2.2.5 Approved Plastics 10-10
2.2.6 Draining Arrangements 10-10
2.3 USE OF GLASS IN SIGNS 10-10
2.4 SERVICING DEVICES 10-10
2.5 INTERFERENCE BY SIGNS 10-10
Chapter3 Specific Requirements for Various

Types of Sign
3.1 ELECTRIC SIGN 10-11

3.1.2 Location 10-11
3.1.3 Installation 10-11
3.1.4 Illumination 10-11
3.2 GROUND SIGN 10-11
3.2.1 Material 10�11
3.2.2 Height 10-11
3.2.3 Design 10-12
3.2.4 Clearance 10-12
3.3 ROOF SIGN 10-12
3.3.1 Material 10-12
3.3.2 Design 10-12
3.3.4 Projection 10-12
3.4 PROJECTING SIGN 10-12
3.4.2 Design 10-12
3.4.3 Height and Clearance 10-12
3.4.5 Attachment 10-12
3.5 FIN SIGN 10-12
3.5.2 Design 10-12
3.6 BALCONY SIGN 10-13
3.6.3 Size 10-13
3.7 MARQUEE SIGN 10-13
3.7.2 Size 10-13
3.8 COMBINATION SIGN 10-13
10-ii
3.9 TEMPORARY SIGN 10-13
3.9.1 Size 10-13
3.9.2 Duration 10-13
3.9.3 Support 10-13
Appendices
Appendix A Application for Permit to Erect or 10-16

Alter Outdoor Signs
10-iii
CHAPTER 'll
Scope and General
1.1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE
1.1.1 The purpose of this part of the Code is to provide minimum standards to safeguard life, health, property
and public welfare by regulating and controlling the design, location, construction and maintenance of signs
and outdoor display structures. The requirements of the Code cover the spatial, structural and fire safety
aspects of signs located on, within or outside the building. Official traffic signs erected on roads and
highways are not covered by this Code.
1.1.2 The regulations of this Code are not intended, and shall not be understood to permit violation of the
provisions of other ordinances, regulations or official requirements in force at or near railway stations,
roads, railways, terminals or other places controlled by public agencies having jurisdiction to formulate such
regulations.
1.1.3 No sign shall be erected in a manner that would confuse or obstruct the view or interfere with official signs,
signals or devices installed for the purpose of guiding or controlling road, rail, marine or air traffic.
1.2 TERMINOLOGY
specified in this part shall govern for interpretation of the provisions of this part.
ALLEY:Public way having a width between 2.5 m and 4 m that has been dedicated to public use.
APPROVED PLASTIC:Plastic materials that conform to the requirement of Sec 2.2.5.
DISPLAY SURFACE:The area used to display the advertising message in a sign structure.
ILLUMINATED DISPLAY: The display of signs with continuous or intermittent illumination of various
intensity.
Part 10 10-1
Signs and Outdoor Display
Part 10
MARQUEE : A roofed structure attached to and supported by a building and projecting beyond building
line or property line.
NONCOMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL :A material no part of which ignites or burns when subject to fire. Any
material conforming to ASTM E136 shall be considered noncombustible.
PUBLIC PASSAGE:A public way having a width less than 2.5 m.
PUBLIC PROPERTY: The land property which has been dedicated or deeded to the public for use.
1.3 CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNS
For the purpose of this Code, and the regulations and provisions thereof, outdoor displays shall be classified
into one of the following types of sign.
BALCONY SIGN : An advertising sign attached to, hung from or posted on a balcony or verandah of a
building. •
COMBINATION SIGN:An outdoor sign incorporating any combination of features of other signs.
ELECTRIC SIGN : An outdoor advertising display sign, usually animated, wired for lights or luminous
tubing and containing other electric fittings, excluding those illuminated by external light source. They shall
meet the requirements of the provisions of this Code governing �ound, roof, wall, projecting, marquee or
other sign as set forth below, depending upon where tfie electric signs are built.
FIN SIGN : An outdoor sign affixed to the wall or exterior surface of a building with the plane of the sign
perpendicular to or at an angle with the building surface projecting more than 300 mm from the surface, the
property line or the building line.
GROUND SIGN : An outdoor advertising display sign painted or otherwise displayed on the ground,
supported by a pole or a structure erected independently on the ground, or mounted on a vehicle or mobile
structure.
MARQUEE SIGN : A projecting sign attached to or hung from a marquee canopy or covered structure
projecting from and supported by a building and extending beyond the building line or property line.
PROJECTING SIGN : An outdoor sign other than a wall sign affixed to the wall or exterior surface of a
building, with the exposed face of sign in a plane parallel to the wall surface projecting more than 300
mm from the building surface, building line or property line.
ROOF SIGN: An outdoor sign painted on the roof surface or erected upon or above a roof or parapet of a
building. .
TEMPORARY SIGN : Any sign, banner, pendant or other display constructed of cloth, canvas, fabric,
cardboard, bamboo or other light material, with or without a structural frame, intended to be displayed for a
limited period only. They shall include signs on gas filled balloons afloat in the air, free or anchored to the
ground or a structure, signs or words traced by smoke emitted by flying aircraft or a stationary source and
signs tied to a flying aircraft.
WALL SIGN : An outdoor sign directly painted on or pasted or attached to or erected against the wall or
exterior surface of a building, projecting not more than 300 mm from the wall.
1.4 APPLICATION AND PERMIT
1.4.1 Requirement of Permit .

No sign shall be erected, re-erected, constructed, altered or maintained except as provided by this Code. A
written permit shall be obtained from the Authority for all signs except those exempted from such permit in
Sec 1.4.2.
1.4.2 Exemptions
Signs or alterations of signs described in this section and its subsections shall be exempted from the
requirement of a permit. These exemptions shall not be construed as relieving the owner of the sign from the
responsibility of ensuring compliance with the provisions of this Code or other regulations or laws
pertaining to signs.
The following works may be undertaken on existing signs without a permit:
i) Changing of the advertisement copy or message on a l'ainted or printed sign only. Except for cinema or
theatre marquee signs or similar signs specifically designed for replaceable copy, electric signs shall not
be included m this exemption.
ii) Cleaning, painting ?r repainting of a sign or sign structure not involving any structural alteration.
10-2
Chapterl
Scope and General
The following signs may be erected without a written permit:
i) Signs, the top of which is less than 2 m above grade .
ii) Signs exhibited within the window of a building provided they do not affect the light and ventilation of
the building.
iii) Signs relating to the trade or business carried on within the premises on which such signs are displayed
or notices of meeting or sale etc. to be held within the premises.
iv) Signs painted or pasted on buses or other public transport vehicles provided that no part of such signs
projects beyond the body of the vehicles.
In addition, no permission shall be required for signs covered by the provisions of Sec 1.4.2.1, 1.4.2.2,
1.4.2.3 and 1.4.2.4.
1.4.2.1 Wall Signs: Wall signs listed below shall not require a permit:
a) Shop Signs: Signs erected over a display window or entrance of a shop or business establishment which
announce the name of the shop and the business carried on provided such signs are less than 1 m in
height.
b) Building Names : Wall signs erected on public or private buildings which announce the name of the
establishment and the nature of occupancy .
c) Name Plates: Any wall sign less than 0.5 m2 in area announcing the name and identity of the occupier.
d) Boundary Signs : Any wall sign less than 0.5 m2 in area erected on boundary walls or fences
surrounding the premises, or on other ornamental fences, announcing the identity of the premises.
1.4.2.2 Ground Signs Erected on or Visible from Highways : Ground signs erected on or visible from the
highways bearing warning, cautionary, informative, identitying and temporary advertising messages of the
foflowing description shall not require a permit. When placed on highways these ground signs shall
conform to the requirements of Sec 1.6.3.
a) Official warning signs, traffic directions and notices displayed on the highway by public authorities or
by the requirement of a judicial order.
Examples:
�� I I FERRY AHEAD I
b) Direction indicators to places of public service.
I PETROL PUMP I
c) Signs bearing names of places
Examples:
� ��BPfr-s l I SHERPUR TOWN I

d) Defence warning signs.
Example :
I SHOOTING RANGE l
e) Private warning signs not more than 0.2 m2 in area.
Examples:
��I I PRIVATE ROAD I
f) Signs not more than 0.2 m2 in area placed sufficiently clear of the carriageway showing direction to a
private property.

Part 10
g) Signs bearing identification, direction or warning messages with respect to the premises on which they
are displayed, not exceeding 0.2 m2 in area.
Examples:
I•� I I MIND THE STEP I

h) Advertising signs relating to businesses, trades or professions carried out in the buildings on which
they are displayed, limited to one sign not exceeding 0.3 m2 in area for each business, trade or
profession.
i) Identification signs relating to educational, medical, social, religious, cultural, recreational or similar
institutions, hotels, blocks of flats, hostels, rest houses etc. situatea on the premises on which such signs
are displayed, limited to one sign not exceeding 1.2 m2 in area for each such institution.
j) Temporary advertisements relating to the sale or rent of the premises on which they are displayed,
limited to one sign not exceeding 2 m2 in area for each sale or rent.
·
k) Advertisements announcing sale of goods or livestock, limited to one sign not exceeding 1.2 m2 in area,
displayed on the land or premises wnere such sale is held or goods or livestock are situated.
I) Advertisements relating to construction works in progress on the land on which the sign is displayed
not exceeding 2 m2 in area.
m) Signs announcing noncommercial local events of a religious, cultural, recreational or educational

character, limited to a total of 0.6 m2 of display on any premises on which such events are to take place.
1.4.2.3 Temporary Signs: Temporary signs of the followin� character shall not require a permit:
a) Construction site signs displaying the owner or builder s identity or the project description.
b) y
s ecial and decorative displays used for festivities, fairs, circuses, public demonstrations or promotion
o civic welfare and charitaole activities, provided such displays do not involve the use of electricity.
1.4.2.4 Other Displays : Signs displayed on the concerned premises meeting the general requirements of
Table 10.1.1 and conforming with the other requirements of this Code shall not require a permit.
1.4.3 Application for Permit

Application for a sign permit shall be made in writing by the erector of the sign and the owner /lessee of the
premises or site where the sign is to be erected on prescribed from (Appendix A). The application shall be
accompanied by the following information:
a) Full specification of the sign in a sketch showing the length, height and weight of the sign, and, where
applicable, number and disposition of electric ligbts and fittings and wiring diagram.
b) A location plan showing the position of the sign on the site, an elevation showing the sign in relation to
the facade and detail drawing of the sign.
c) Detail drawings of the sign structure indicating the size of all members and the foundation and, if
required by the Authority, design calculations of the structure.
d) Any other information as may be required by the Authority.
e) Required fee as may be decided by the Authority from time to time.
1.4.4 Condition for Grant of Permit

The grant of permit or licence to erect signs shall be subject to the following conditions:
a) An application for the grant of permit shall be made to the Authority in the manner prescribed in this
Code.
b) The applicants must possess right over the property, building or premises upon which the sign is
proposed to be erected either by way of ownership or by lease.
c) The permission shall be granted at any one time for a _period not exceeding three years, on expiry of
which the Authority shall have the right to have the s1gn removed at the erector's expense unless a
renewal of the permit has been obtainea.
d) A permit shall be renewed only upon continued satisfaction of all the conditions under which the
original permit was issued. .
10-4
Chapterl
Scope and General
Table 10.1.1
Signs Displayed on Concerned Premises which shall not Require a Permit (Sec 1.4.2.4)
Number Dimen- Maximum Maximum Electrifi- Other Special

Description Example sional Size of Height cation Requirements
- Permi·
Limits Letters, Above Restric-
tted
Symbols etc. Grade to lion
TopofSism
Identification
-
signs of public
undertakini!:S
I FIRE BRIGADE I As
required
As required As required As required As
reauired
Warnings,
direction or
I PATHOLOGY I No limit Maximum
2
800mm
(400mm in
6m
(Sm in
Only for
medical
area 4m
identification I NO PARKING I restricted restricted services .
of utilities sign zone•) sign zone) and to
indicate
dan11:er
Identification One at Maximum 800mm 6m Only for
2
of company,
trade, busi-
I KADER & co. I each
entrance
area 0.3 m (400mm in
restricted
(Sm in
restricted
medical
services
each
ness, profess- sign zone) sign zone) and to -
ion or person indicate
danger
Name of One on Maximum 800mm 6m (Smin Only for
building or
CENTRAL each 2 (400mm in restricted medical
area 1.2m
premises
LAW frontage restricted sign zone) services -
each
ACADEMY sign zone) and to
indicate
1�1
danger
Temporary
signs relating
I FORSALE I No
restriction
Width to
depth ratio
800mm
(400mm in
6m (Sm in
restricted
No electri- Shall not be
fication displayed
to sale or but total 2:1, total restricted sign zone) permi- earlier than 1
letting of I TO LET ! area not area of all sign zone) tted month prior to
property on to exceed signs not date the sale or
which 2 to exceed 2.4 letting is due
2.4m
displayed 2 and shall be
m
removed
within 2 weeks
after conclu-
sion of sale or
letting.
Construction SHOPPING One for Maximum 800mm 6m No electri- Permitted only
site signs CENTRE each 2 (400mm in (Sm in fication while the
area 4m
Consultant frontage restricted restricted permi- construction is
.. .. .
.. . . . .. . for each sign zone) sign zone) tted in progress
Contractor ........ contractor
Temporary No rest- Maximum 800mm 6m (Smin Electrifi- Shall not be
displayed earlier
1� "C11'itl
signs riction but aggregate (400mm in restricted cation
announcing total area 2 restricted sign zone) shall than 1 month
area 4m
events not to sign zone) require prior to the
��I
displayed on exceed permi- start of event
the premises 2 ssion and shall be
4m
where these removed
take place within 2 weeks
of end of event
Identifying and No Maximum Electrifi-
advertising restriction aggregate cation
signs on
business
l coBANKLTD I but total
area not
area not to
exceed 10%
400mm Sm shall
require
premises in to exceed of area of permiss- -
restricted sign I ABC TRAVEL I 10"/oof face ion except
zone· area of for
face medical
services
and to
indicate
danger
• Sec 1.6.1

Part 10
e) The permission or the renewal of permission granted by the Authority shall become void, if
i) any addition is made to the sign structure except as may be directed by the Authority to make it
secure;
ii) any change is made in the sign or part thereof, involving a change in the type of sign;
iii) any addition or alteration is made to the building which supports the sign involving disturbance of
the sign or any part thereof;
iv) the sign or any part thereof falls due to accident or other causes; or
v) the building or structure supporting the sign is demolished or destroyed.
f) The Authority may, in the interest of the public, suspend the licence before expiry of the period in
which case the licensee shall remove the sign forthwith:.
g) The licensee shall maintain the sign and the building or structure supporting or occupied by the sign in
safe, neat and sanitary condition.
h) The sign shall not, in the opinion of the Authority, mar the aesthetic beauty of the locality.
i) No sign other than that pertaining to the building concerned shall be allowed to obstruct or obscure
buildings such as hospitals, public offices, educational institutions, places of worship, museums and
buildings of national and historic importance. ·
j) No sign or hoarding shall be allowed to obstruct light and ventilation of buildings situated near it.
k) No sign shall bear any objectionable, unlawful or obscene display.
l) Any hoarding or sign erected on the highways shall also require the express permission of the authority
or agency in charge of the highway.
m) In addition, all signs shall at all times conform to the requirements given in this Code.
1.4.5 Sanction or Refusal of Permit

Upon receipt of an application for permit the Authority may sanction, sanction with modification or refus�
such a permit. The decision of the Authority shall be communicated within 30 days of the date of receipt of
all information desired by them, failing which the {'ermit shall be deemed to have been sanctioned. The
Authority may withdraw a permit at any time in the mterest of public safety and welfare.
1.4.6 Application for Alteration of Sign

A fresh application for permit shall be made each time the ownership of the sign changes or any change in
type or structure of the sign is proposed.
.
g
. . . .
1.4.7 Existing Si ns
· · · ·
Signs in existence on the date of promul17ation of this Code, that would otherwise require a permit, shall be
exempted from the requirement of perrrut for a period of two years after the promulgation of the Code. On
expiry of this period these signs sha1l require a permit as for a new sign.
1.5 UNSAFE AND UNLAWFUL SIGNS
1.5.1 Responsibility of the Owner

It shall be the responsibility of the owner to ensure the safety and legality of the sign irrespective of any
reference from the Authority.
1.5.2 Notice of the Authority

If any sign is unlawfully installed or maintained violating any of the provisions of the Code, or if any sign
becomes insecure or unsafe, the owner of the sign shall, upon writ ten notice of the Authority, make the sign
conform to the provisions of the Code or remove it, within a time period specified by the Authority which
shall in no case exceed three days. If the owner fails to comply within the specified time, the Authority shall
remove the sign and charge the expenses to the owner.
1.5.3 Prohibited Signs

Any sign, which in the opinion of the Authority, fits any of the following descriptions, shall not be permitted
under any circumstance:
a) Signs of obscene, repulsive, vulgar, revolting or otherwise objectionable character,

b) Signs displaying messages prejudicial or suoversive to state discipline,
c) Signs producing pernicious or injurious effect on a class of persons or the public,
d) Signs that disfigure any neighbourhood or destroy its sanctity, or
e) Signs that are li1<ely to affect the sentiment of public.
10-6
Chapter 1
Scope and General
1.6 RESTRICTIONS
1.6.1 Restricted Sign Zone

1.6.1.1 The Authority may, in the interest of aesthetics, moral values or public welfare, designate an area
as a restricted sign zone. Parks, playgrounds, places of historical interest, animal and bird sanctuaries,
nature reserves etc. may also be designated as restricted sign zones.
1.6.1.2 The erection or display of signs within the restricted sign zone shall be prohibited or restricted in
any manner deemed necessary by the Authority.
1.6.1.3 The wording on any sign in the restricted sign zone shall be limited to messages for identification
of, direction to and information about the owner of the premises, the nature of business carried on within
the premises and location of utilities and services.
1.6.1.4 The restriction on signs in a restricted sign zone shall apply within a distance of 30 m outside the
zone.
1.6.2 Prohibition of Advertisement

The erection of any advertising sign shall be prohibited on a site, when in the opinion of the Authority:
a) the site is unsuitable for display of advertising signs by virtue of the historic, cultural, architectural or
similar characteristics of the locality, or
b) the display of an advertising sign is likely to pose a hazard for any form of transport.
1.6.3 Signs on Highways and Roads

Any advertising sign at or near highways or roads shall conform to the following requirements in addition
to the requirements of the respective authority.
a) No sign shall obscure or otherwise hinder interpretation of official traffic signs.
b) Signs on the sides of overbridges or flyovers across the carriageway shall not project beyond any edge
of the parapet of the overbridge or flyover.
d) No sign shall be erected within the right of way of the road nor within 10 m of the edge of the
carriageway. The size of the sign erected at 10 m away from the edge of the carriageway shall not be
more than 3 m2• This limit on size shall be increased by 0.3 m2 for each extra metre of setback from the
edge of the carriageway.
e) No sign shall be erected in such manner or at such places as to obstruct or interfere with the visibility of
approaching, intersecting or merging traffic.
.
f) No sign shall be erected within 100 m of a bridge, railway level crossing or road junction. For urban
roads this distance may be reduced to 50 m.
g) No sign shall be erected in such a way as to hinder visibility at pedestrian crossings.
1.6.4 Illuminated Displays

The following illuminated advertisements that threaten traffic safety shall not be permitted:
a) Illuminated or electric advertisements of such brilliance or intensity as to produce glare and impair
vision of the driver and the pedestrians;
b) Advertisements containing flashing or intermittent lights of intense brightness;
c) Advertisements containing lights of such colour, disposition, brightness, movement or flashes as to

obscure or reduce effectiveness of official traffic lights, signals, signs or devices.
1.7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS
1.7.1 Maintenance
Signs and their supporting structures, together with the supports, braces, guys and anchors shall be
maintained in souna condition and any deterioration shall be repaired immediately. All ungalvanized and
corrosion susceptible metal components shall be painted at least once in every two years. The Authority
may order removal of signs wh1ch are not maintained in proper order and such removal shall be at the
owner's expense.
1.7.2 Inspection
Every sign shall be subject to inspection by the Authority from time to time as required by the Authority.
The owner of the sign shall ensure access of the inspector and facilitate the inspection.

Part 10
1.8 LOCATION RESTRICTIONS
An outdoor display sign shall not be erected, constructed or maintained so as to obstruct any fire escape or
any window or door or opening used as a means of egress or so as to prevent free passage from one part of a
roof to the other.
A sign shall not be attached in any form, shape or manner to a fire escape, nor be placed in such manner as
to interfere with openings required for lighting and ventilation.
1.9 PROJECTION OVER PUBLIC PROPERTY
1.9.1 No part of a sign or sign structure shall project into a private property not owned or leased by the
owner I erector of the sign, unless explicit agreement has been entered into with the owner of that property.
1.9.2 Signs and sign structures shall not project into public property nor into roads wider than 4 m, below a
height of 2.5 m above grade, nor project more than 0.3 m when the sign is erected 2.5 m above finished
grade. The signs may project 0.3 m plus 0.12 m for each 0.25 m of clearance above 2.5 m when the height is
oetween 2.5 m and 5 m above grade. Signs may not project more than 1.5 minto a public property under
any circumstance.
1.9.3 No sign or part thereof shall project into public passages. Projection of signs and sign structures over public
alleys shall be limited to the values provided in Table 10.1.2.
Table 10.1.2
Projection of Signs Over Public Alleys
Height Above Finished Grade Maximum Projection

(m) (m)
Less than4 No projection permitted
4 toS 0.3
overS 0.6
1.10 CLEARANCE FROM POWER LINES
All signs and sign structures shall maintain the clearances from overhead electrical conductors as specified
in Taole 10.1.3.
Table 10.1.3
Clearance from Power Lines
Voltage of the Line Vertical Distance (m) Horizontal Distance (m)

Low and Medium 2.5 1.25
Volt
33KV 3.5 1.75
Over 33 KV 3.5 Plus 0.3 m for each 1.75 Plus 0.3 m for each
additional 33 KV or part additional 33 KV or Part
thereof thereof
Related Appendix
Appendix A Application for Permit to Erect or Alter Outdoor Signs
10-8
CHAPTER�
General Requirements
2.1 DESIGN
2.1.1 Loads
All outdoor signs and sign structures shall be designed to resist wind, seismic and other forces as specified
in Chapter 2, Part 6 of thrs Code. Combination of wind and seismic loads shall not be required. Loading that
produces higher stresses shall be used.
2.1.2 Design Consideration

All outdoor signs and sign structures shall be designed fulfilling the design requirements as set out in
Chapter 1, Part 6 of this Code.
2.2 CONSTRUCTION
All outdoor signs and sign structures shall be constructed and erected in accordance with the requirements
of Chapter 1, Part 7 of this Code.
2.2.1 Use of Materials

All materials for outdoor signs and sign structures shall conform to the specification as set out in Part 5 of
this Code.
2.2.2 Use of Combustible Materials

Ground signs not higher than 6 m may be constructed of any material that meets the requirements of this
Code. No combustible material other than approved plastic as defined in Sec 2.2.5, shall be used in the
construction of electric signs. Roof, wall, projecting, fin, balcony, marquee and combination signs shall be
constructed of noncombustible materials except as provided below :
a) On roofs of combustible construction, the roof sign may be constructed of combustible materials.
b) On roofs of any type of construction, roof signs not higher than 1.5 m and not exceeding 5m2 in area
may be constructed of combustible materials.
Part 10 10-9
Part 10
c) On walls of combustible construction, wall signs not involving the use of electricity may be constructed
of combustible materials.
2.2.3 Anchorage
Foundation for all unbraced signs shall be designed to resist horizontal, vertical and overturning forces. All
braced ground signs shall be anchored to resist the specified wind and seismic forces in any direction.
Anchors shall be designed for safe soil bearing capacity and for an effective uplift force which is 25% more
than the force required to resist overturning. Anchorage of signs shall not be connected to an unbraced
parapet wall unless the wall is designed for seismic load.
2.2.4 Display Surfaces

Display surfaces of outdoor signs may be made of metal, glass or approved plastic. If the surface of the sign is
made of glass, the thickness and area shall be as set forth in Table 10.2.1.
Table 10.2.1
Type, Size and Thickness of Glass Panels Used in Signs
Minimum Thickness
Maximum Size of Glass Panel (mm) Type of Glass
Any dimension Area
(m) (m2)
0.75 0.30 3 Plain, Plate or Wire'!
1.15 0.4 5 5 Plain, Plate or Wired
3.65 2.30 6 Plain, Plate or Wired
above3.65 above 2.30 6 Wired Glass
Plastic of approved type may be used for wall signs in sections not exceeding 20 m2 in area. Plastics sections
on wall signs shall be separated 1 m laterally and 2 m vertically. Approved plastics of unlimited area may be
used on any sign other than wall sign, if approved by the Authority
2.2.5 Approved Plastics

Plastic materials which burn at a rate no faster than 65 mm per minute when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 635 shall be deemed approved plastic. Only approved plastic shall be used for plastic display
surfaces provided for in Sec 2.2.4 above. Approved plashes may also be used for ornamental purposes,
decorations, lettering, facings etc. on signs and outdoor display structures.
2.2.6 Draining Arrangements

Signs constructed on ground or at places where possibility of accumulation of water exists shall have
adequate provision for proper drainage.
2.3 USE OF GLASS IN SIGNS
Glass when used in outdoor signs shall be at least 3 mm thick and shall conform to the requirements of Sec
2.16.14 of Part 5 of this Code. The area of each glass panel shall not exceed 6 m2 and shall be securely fixed
with the frame independently. Appropriate protection against damage by falling objects shall be provided to
all glass panels by metal canopies or other approved means.
2.4 SERVICING DEVICES
All servicing devices (ladders, platforms, hooks, rings etc.), used for cleaning, painting, repainting of sign
shall have adequate safety devices and shall be of approved type and quality.
2.5 INTERFERENCE BY SIGNS
Signs shall not be placed at such locations that would obstruct the use of fire hydrants or other fire fishting
appliances. Signs m bends and curves shall be placed in such a location so as not to obstruct the v1ew of
traffic at intersecting streets.
10-10
CHAPTER�
Specific Requirements fo r
Various Types of Sign
3.1 ELECTRIC SIGN
3.1.1 Materials
Materials for the construction of electric signs shall be noncombustible except as provided in Sec 2.2.2.
3.1.2 Location
Electric signs in colour erected at a height lower than two storeys or 6 m above the pavement shall be
provided with suitable screen to avoid confusion with traffic signals. No sign in red, amber or green colours
shall be erected within a horizontal distance of 10m from any traffic signal.
3.1.3 Installation
All electric signs including the electrical equipment in connection with the sign shall be installed in
accordance with the provisions of Part 8 Chapter 2 of this Code.
3.1.4 Illumination
Electric signs shall not be of such intense illumination as to cause inconvenience or disturbance to residents
of adjacent buildings.
3.2 GROUND SIGN
3.2.1 Material
All ground signs over 6 m in total height shall be constructed of noncombustible materials meeting the
requirements of this Code, or of approved plastics as defined in Sec 2.2.5. Materials used for the construction
of ground sign supporting structures may be treated timber, masonry, concrete or corrosion resistant metal.
3.2.2 Height
The height of ground signs excluding the lighting reflectors shall be limited to 9 m.
Part 10 10-11
Part 10
3.2.3 . Design
The design and construction of ground signs shall conform to the requirements of Parts 6 and 7 of this
Code. Ali ground signs shall have a firm support and shall be anchored to the ground.
3.2.4 Clearance
All ground signs shall be provided with a clearance height of 0.6 m from the ground. The intervening space
may be filled with open fattice work. Under no circumstance shall any ground sign obstruct or interfere
with entrance or exit of a building.
3.3 ROOF SIGN
3.3.1 Material
All roof signs including the frames shall be constructed of noncombustible materials except as provided in
Sec 2.2.2.
3.3.2 Design
Design and construction of roof signs shall conform to the requirements of Parts 6 and 7 of this Code. Roof
signs shall be properly secured and anchored to the building and the building shall be designed to avoid
overstress due to the sign.
3.3.3 Clearance
Roof signs shall not prevent free passage from one part of the roof to the other. Such passages shall be not
less than 1 m wide and 1.25 m high.
3.3.4 Projection
No roof sign shall project beyond the roof in any directions.
3.4 PROJECTING SIGN
3.4.1 Material
All projecting signs and their supporting frames shall be of noncombustible material except as provided in
Sec2.2.2.
3.4.2 Design
The supporting frame of projecting signs and the building element to which it is anchored shall be designed
to witnstand, m addition to dead, live and wind loads calculated in accordance with Part 6 of this Code,
appropriate loads due to servicing personnel and equipment.
3.4.3 Height and Clearance

A minimum of 2.5 m clearance from the road surface shall be provided for any projecting sign. The
maximum height of a projecting sign shall be 15 m when erected against buildings having a height of more
than 8 storey or 36 m. For buildings 5 to 8 storeys high but not exceeding 36 m, the height of the r.rojecting
signs shall be limited to 12 m. Theneight of the sign shall be limited to 9 m when attached to a building less
than 4 storey or 18 m high.
3.4.4 Proj ection

ProJecting sign or any part of its supporting structures shall not project more than 2 m beyond the building.
When such sign faces the street, it shall not project beyond the property line. Projecting sign shall not extend
above the eaves of the roof of the building to which it is attached. Projection over public property or alley of
projecting signs shall be limited to the values as specified in Sec 1.9.
3.4.5 Attachment
All projecting signs shall be so constructed or attached to the building that movement in any direction is
prevented by rods, anchors, brackets, chains etc.
3.5 FIN SIGN
3.5.1 Material
Materials for fin sign shall conform to the requirements of Sec 2.2.2.
3.5.2 Design
Design and construction of fin signs shall conform to the requirements of Parts 6 and 7 of the Code.
3.5.3 Clearance
Fin signs shall not obstruct windows and reduce light and ventilation to such a point as the Code or other
regulations prohibit. Such signs and their frames shall not obstruct fire escape, exit and entrance of the
building to which they are attached. Projection of fin signs over public property shall conform to the
requirements of Sec 1.9.
10-12
Chapter3
Specific Requirements for Various Types of Sign
3.6 BALCONY SIGN
3.6.1 Materials
Materials for balcony signs shall conform to the requirements of Sec 2.2.2.
3.6.2 Location
Balcony signs shall be placed above the eaves of the balcony and shall not project beyond the rear of the roof
gutter.
3.6.3 Size
The height of a balcony signs shall be limited to 1 m. Hanging balcony sign shall not exceed 2.5 m in length
and 50 mm in thickness. For hanging box type signs the maximum allowable depth shall be 200 mm.
3.6.4 Projection
Balcony signs shall not extend beyond the balcony line. Hanging balcony signs shall maintain a clearance
height of 2.5 m from the finished ground level. Projection of balcony sign over public property or alley shall
be limited to values as specified in Sec 1.9.
3.7 MARQUEE SIGN
3.7.1 Materials
Materials for the construction and erection of marquee signs shall conform to the requirements of Sec 2.2.2.
3.7.2 Size
The height of a marquee sign shall be limited to 2 m. The length of such sign may be equal to the length of
the marquee and no projection beyond the full length shall be allowed.
3.7.3 Clearance
A clearance height of at least 2.5 m shall be provided for marquee signs.
3.8 COMBINATION SIGN
All combination signs shall meet the general and specific requirements of all the component classes of sign.
3.9 TEMPORARY SIGN
3.9.1 Size
The area of a temporary sign shall not ordinarily exceed 10 m2• Temporary signs of a larger area may be
erected upon explicit approval of the Authority which shall only be granted, for signs of a duration not
exceeding 7 days. Temporary signs made of rigid material shall not exceed 3 m2 in area, nor shall they have
a height more than 2 m. Such rigid signs shall oe anchored to the ground or a building by a rigid structure.
3.9.2 Duration
Temporary signs shall be removed from the location within 60 days of first erection, unless explicit
permission of the Authority for extending this period has been obtained. In no case a temporary sign shall
be permitted to be maintained for more than 90 days.
3.9.3 Suppo rt
Temporary signs shall be adequately supported and secured in place. No part of the sign shall be permitted
to dangle, sway or otherwise oecome loose or detached. In order to reduce wind resistance on signs made of
fabric, adequate perforations shall be provided.
3.9.4 Location
All temporary signs shall be subject to the approval of the Authority and shall be erected in such a place so
as not to obstruct any public way, foot path or entrance and exit of any building.
3.9.5 Projection
Temporary cloth sign may extend over public property. A clearance of 6 m shall be maintained when such
signs are placed over a public street. Other temporary signs when laced 2.5 m above the ground may
f
project not more than 30G mm over public property or beyond the lega set back line.

Part 10
10-14
Appendices
APPENDIX A Application for Permit to Erect or A lter Outdoor Signs
Part 10 10-15
Part10
Appendix A
Application for Permit to Erect or Alter Outdoor Signs
1. Type of Sign :
2. 'Location of Sign :
3. Details of Sign
a) Dimension i) Length m
ii) Widlh - ___________ m
iii) Thickness mm
b) Clearance and Projection i) Clearance m

ii) Projection m
4. Type of Materials Used i) Noncombustible

ii) Approved plastic
iii) Combination
5. Details of Electrical Installations (if any)
6. Structural details of signs and supporting structures including foundations : ------
7. This application is accompanied by all required plans, drawings and other details as required by Sec 1.4.3 of
this code.
Yes _____ _ No _____
Signature of owner of Signature of Applicant

the Building/Premise
Date _______
Date ________
Name in Full Name in Full ____ _______
Address ------ Address -----
10-16
LIST OF PARTICIPANTS OF THE WORKSHOP ON
BANGLADESH NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
Subsequent to the preparation of the Preliminary Draft Code, a three day workshop was held from May 17
through 19, 1993 at the Institution of Engineers, Bangladesh. The workshop was participated by
professionals from various public and private organizations who are involved in the design, construction
and maintenance of and in providing services to buildings. Extensive technical discussions were held for
over 57 hours and the Preliminary Draft was reviewed and critically examined by the participants of the
workshop. The proceedings were recorded and the recommendations were taken into consideration
during preparation of the subsequent drafts of the Code. The following two pages present a list of the
participants of the workshop. This list does not include the members of the Steering Committee, different
Editorial Sub-committees and the Consultants' team.
Name Organization/Profession
Md. Mahbub Hossain Bakhrabad Gas Systems Limited

L.N.W. Rahman Bangladesh Agricultural Research Council
Dr. Md. Monayem Dad Bangladesh Agricultural University
Md. Golam Mohiuddin Bangladesh Association for the Advancement of Science
Dr. Abdul Hye Mondo! Bangladesh Institute of Development Studies
Abdul Monayem Akand Bangladesh Institute of Technology, Chittagong
Md. Nuruzzaman Bangladesh Institute of Technology, Dhaka
Md. Abdus Selim Bangladesh Institute of Technology, Khulna
Syed Abdul Mofij Bangladesh Institute of Technology, Rajshahi
Md. D. Jashim Uddin Bangladesh Rural Advancement Committee
Md. Mesbahur Rahman Khan Bangladesh Shilpa Bank
Mehdi Akhter Rana Bangladesh Standards and Testing Institution
Md. Rezaul Karim Bangladesh Standards and Testing Institution
Syed Nadeem Ahmed Bangladesh Standards and Testing Institution
Mahfuzur Rahman Bangladesh Steel and Engineering Corporation
Md. Hasan Imam Bangladesh Steel Re-Rolling Mills Limited
Syed Shahidul Islam Bangladesh Telegraph & Telephone Board (formerly of)
Abu H lmamuddin ·Bangladesh University of Engineering and Technology
Dr. Salek M Seraj Bangladesh University of Engineering and Technology
Dr. A.M. Aziz Ul Huq Bangladesh University of Engineering and Technology
Dr. lshtiaque Ahmed Bangladesh University of Engineering and Technology
. Dr.Taifur Ahmed Chowdhury Bangladesh University of Engineering and Technology
Dr. S Shahnawaz Ahmed Bangladesh University of Engineering and Technology
Shaheda Rahman Imam Bangladesh University of Engineering and Technology
Jebun Nasreen Ahmed Bangladesh University of Engineering and Technology
Shamim Ara Hassan Bangladesh University of Engineering and Technology
Dr. Md. Nurul lslam Bangladesh University of Engineering and Technology
Shahidul Islam Bangladesh Water Development Board
Md. Anwar Hossain Bhuiyan Bangladesh Water Development Board
ANM Wahedul Haq Bangladesh Water Development Board
Md. Iqbal Centre for Urban Studies, University of Dhaka
AHM Abdul Hadi Century International Limited
Md. Nazrul Islam Chatak Cement Factory Limited
S.A.K. Masud Ahmad Department of Architecture, Ministry of Works
Md. Shahidullah Department of Architecture, Ministry of Works
Hasan Zaman Zasir Department of Architecture, Ministry of Works
Anwarul Azam Khan Department of Architecture, Ministry of Works
Abdus Salam Department of Architecture, Ministry of Works
Abu Sayeed Department of Architecture, Ministry of Works
Md. Abdus Samad Department of Inspection of Factories and Industries
Abul Faraz Khan Development Design Consultants Limited
AKM Rafiquddin Development Design Consultants Limited
AKM Nasiruddin Development Design Consultants Limited
Novera Yesmin Development Design Consultants Limited
Umme Kulsum Navera Development Design Consultants Limited
Naeem Nabi Development Design Consultants Limited
Syeda Roshni Jahan Development Design Consultants Limited
Faria! Haque Development Design Consultants Limited
Mustafa Hassan Development Design Consultants Limited
Mirza Shafiq Ibrahim Development Design Consultants Limited
Md. Abdus Salam Dhaka City Corporation
A.B. Saha Dhaka Electric Supply Authority
S.T.S Mahmood Dhaka Electric Supply Authority
Mahmud Husain Eastern Housing Limited
A.K. Rafique Uddin Ahmed Engineering & Planning Consultants Limited
Lopa Khan Environmentalist
Ratneswar Das Fire Service and Civil Defence Directorate
Mir Fazlul Karim Geological Survey of Bangladesh
M.A. Zaher Geological Survey of Bangladesh (formerly of)
M. Abu Bakr Geological Survey of Bangladesh (formerly of)
Md. Ashraful Hassan Grameen Bank
Name Organization/Profession
Md. Abdur Rashid House Building Finance Corporation

Mostaq Ahmad House Building Finance Corporation
Syed lsar Hossain Housing & Building Research Institute
Dr. Aktar Uddin Ahmad Housing & Building Research Institute
Majumder AKMA Hannan Housing & Building Research Institute
Md. Rafiul Karim Housing & Building Research Institute
Md. •Reaz Uddin Sarker Housing & Building Research Institute
Syed Ali Akbar Housing & Building Research Institute
Md. Abdul Wahed Housing & Building Research Institute
Md. Akhter Hossain Sarker Housing & Building Research Institute
Md. Fazlur Rahman Housing & Building Research Institute
Piar Uddin Majumdar Housing & Building Research Institute (formerly of)
Abul Kalam Housing & Settlement Directorate
Musharraf Hossain Housing & Settlement Directorate
Jalal Ahmed Institute of Architects, Bangladesh
S M Salekin Institute of Diploma Engineers
Md. Kazi Shariful Haque Institution of Engineers, Bangladesh
Moshiuzzaman Khan Khulna City Corporation
Md. Abdul Jalil Hawlader Khulna Development Authority
A.B.M. Nazrul Islam Local Government Engineering Department
Saroj Kumar Sarker Local Government Engineering Department
S.M. Salim Local Government Engineering Department
Md. Ali Akbar Patwary Master Engineers Limited
M.A. Hashem Military Engineering Services
M.R. Khan Military Engineering Services
AKM Iqbal Military Engineering Services
Md. Ahad Aii Ministry of Education
Md. Abdul Matin Shikder Ministry of LGRD & C
Md. Mofazzal Hossain Ministry of Planning
Nurul Hossain Ministry of Works
ATM Ghyas Uddin Ministry of Works
Md. Nurun Nabi Nirman International Limited
Md. Abdullah Office of the Chief Inspector of Boiler
Md. Rezaul Karim Office of Electrical Advisor & Chief Electrical Inspector
Md. Ashrafuddin Petro Bangia
Abul Kalam Khan Public Works Department
Md. Ahsan Habib Public Works Department
Md. Mohibur Rahman Public Works Department
Md. Siddique Ullah Public Works Department
Md. Shawkat Ali Siddique Public Works Department
Md. Matiar Rahman Public Works Department
Zakir Hossain Rajdhani Unnayan Kartripakkha
Kazi Golam Hafiz Rajdhani Unnayan Kartripakkha
M. Amirul Islam . Rajdhani Unnayan Kartripakkha
Md. Abdullahel Kafee Rajshahi Development Authority
Md. Ashraful Haque Rajshahi Municipal Corporation
Tapan Misra Real Estate Developer
Moiz Uddin Ahmed Jaigirdar Roads & Highways Department
Md. Bayazid Roads & Highways Department
Salma A. Shafi Sheltech Consultants (PVT) Limited
Dr. Toufiq M. Seraj Sheltech Consultants (PVT) Limited
Md. Fazlul Haque Sylhet Pourasava
Md. Abdul Jalil Mridha Techno Index Limited
Md. Khademul Islam The Engineers Limited
Shah Noor Mostafa Titas Gas Transmission & Distribution Co Limited
Alauddin Ahmed Urban Development Directorate
M. Khorshed Alam Urban Development Directorate
NOTES

BNBC 1993

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BNBC 1993

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BNBC 1993

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BANG � DE§H

First Edition Published 1993

Typeseriri 9 pt Palatino by Development Design Consultants Limited

·Printed jn.Bangladesh by City Art Press Ltd, Dhaka

Wri:tten suggestions for update/revisions may please be addressed to :

.LJr.H:ri Housing and Building Research Institute

£ Bangladesh Standards and· ·Testing Institution

materials, non-government organizations matters of interest to government planners,

· S�andards· and ._;.Testing ·Institution. bi .. -Z;,;............

Shah Alam Zahiruddin

Representing Name & Address

Institution of Engineers (Bangladesh) Dr Musharrif Hossain Khan

Kazi Aminur Rahman

Institute of Architects, Bangladesh Sharnsul Wares (from February 1993)

Yeafesh Osman (from March 1992 to January 1993)

Rabiul Hossain (till February 1992)

Personal Capacity Dr Jamilur Reza Choudhury

Rajdhani Unnayan Kartripakkha Mohammad Shahjahan

Fire Service and Civil Defence Directorate M Anowar Hossain

Personal Capacity AHM Matiur Rahman

Mahedi Akhtar Rana (till December 1992)

Ministry of Works AKM Abu! Basher (from April 1992)

Md Nure Alam (till March 1992)

Geological Survey of Bangladesh Anisur Rahman

Military Engineering Services Muhammad Lutfar Rahman

AKM Khorshed Alam

Department of Architecture, Ministry of Works ASM Ismail

Housing & Building Research Institute Mainuddin Ahmed

Ranjit Kumar Roy

Md Abdul Matin Shikder (till December 1992)

Kazi Nurul Alam (till January 1993)

Part 1 and 2: Scope and Definitions, Administration and Enforcement

AHNA Chowdhury Ex-Joint Secretary (Dev), Ministry of Works

Anwarul Alam Ex-Chairman, RajdhaniUnnayan Kartripakkha

Md Abdul Matin Chowdhury Additional Chief Architect

Meer Mobashsher Ali Professor

Md Shamsul Haque Law Officer, Ministry of Works

Khadem Ali Architectural Consultant

Bashirul Hoque 35 B/2, Indira Road

Zakir Hossain Town Planner

HaroonUr Rashid Architect Planner

Part 4 : Fire Protection

SM Karim Baksh Ex-Director, Fire Service and Civil Defence

Dr NizamUddin Ahmed Associate Professor

MMohsinAli Chief Engineer

Md Mohiul Islam Choudhury Assistant Director

MamunAhmed Executive Engineer, SO-II (Technical)

Part 5: (a) Building Materials (Masonry, Steel, Cement, Concrete)

Dr Sharnim Z Bosunia Professor

AQM Shahidullah Senior Research Officer

AMazid Shikder Sub-divisional Engineer

KM Akram Hossain Senior Examiner (Engg)

Part 5: (b) Building Materials (Timber, Wood Products, Flooring, Aluminium)

Dr Omar Ali Ex-Director, Forest Research Institute

MHKhan Chief Engineer

RafiqMujtaba Director, Engineering

Dr K Harunar Rashid Director

Md Aminur Rahman Consulting Engineer

Morshed Uddin Superintending Engineer, PPC